0% found this document useful (0 votes)

6 views

4 5 6 Series MSO Programmer - 077130522

Uploaded by

swapnil.shinde

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

6 views

4 5 6 Series MSO Programmer - 077130522

Uploaded by

swapnil.shinde

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 2066

xx

4 Series MSO (MSO44, MSO46, MSO44B, MSO46B)

5 Series MSO (MSO54, MSO56, MSO58, MSO54B, MSO56B,
MSO58B, MSO58LP)
6 Series MSO (MSO64, MSO64B, MSO66B, MSO68B)
6 Series Low Profile Digitizer (LPD64)
ZZZ

Programmer Manual

*P077130522*
077-1305-22
xx 4 Series MSO (MSO44, MSO46, MSO44B, MSO46B)
5 Series MSO (MSO54, MSO56, MSO58, MSO54B, MSO56B,
MSO58B, MSO58LP)
6 Series MSO (MSO64, MSO64B, MSO66B, MSO68B)
6 Series Low Profile Digitizer (LPD64)
ZZZ

Programmer Manual

Supports FW version 2.8.x and above

www.tek.com
077-1305-22
Copyright © Tektronix. All rights reserved. Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its subsidiaries
or suppliers, and are protected by national copyright laws and international treaty provisions.
Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. Information in this publication
supersedes that in all previously published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved.
TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc.
FlexChannel, FastFrame, OpenChoice, iView, Pinpoint, RT-Eye, TekVPI, FastAcq, and e*Scope are registered
trademarks of Tektronix, Inc.
TekSecure is a trademark of Tektronix, Inc.
4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual. Released January 2024.

Contacting Tektronix
Tektronix, Inc.
14150 SW Karl Braun Drive
P.O. Box 500
Beaverton, OR 97077
USA

For product information, sales, service, and technical support:

In North America, call 1-800-833-9200.
Worldwide, visit www.tek.com to find contacts in your area.
Table of Contents
Preface ............................................................................................................... v
Getting Started .................................................................................................... 1-1
Setting Up Remote Communications Hardware ......................................................... 1-1
Ethernet .................................................................................................. 1-1
USB....................................................................................................... 1-2
Setting Up Remote Communications Software .......................................................... 1-3
Using VISA.............................................................................................. 1-3
Using the LXI Web Page and e*Scope ............................................................... 1-4
Using a Socket Server .................................................................................. 1-5
Documentation .......................................................................................... 1-7
Dynamic programmatic interface .......................................................................... 1-7
Implicit activation ........................................................................................... 1-7
Creating, deleting, and listing dynamic instances ........................................................ 1-8
Backwards Compatibility ................................................................................... 1-8
Command Syntax................................................................................................. 2-1
Command and Query Structure ............................................................................ 2-1
Clearing the instrument output queue ..................................................................... 2-3
Command Entry.............................................................................................. 2-3
Constructed Mnemonics .................................................................................... 2-5
Argument Types.............................................................................................. 2-7
Command groups ............................................................................................... 2-11
Acquisition command group ............................................................................. 2-11
Act On Event command group ........................................................................... 2-12
AFG Command Group .................................................................................... 2-13
Alias command group ..................................................................................... 2-15
Bus command group....................................................................................... 2-16
Calibration command group .............................................................................. 2-27
Callouts command group ................................................................................. 2-28
Cursor command group ................................................................................... 2-29
Digital command group .................................................................................. 2-36
Digital Power Management (DPM) Group ............................................................. 2-37
Display control command group ......................................................................... 2-39
DVM Command Group ................................................................................... 2-42
Ethernet Command Group ................................................................................ 2-43
File system command group.............................................................................. 2-44
Histogram Group .......................................................................................... 2-45
History Group .............................................................................................. 2-46
Horizontal command group............................................................................... 2-47
Inverter Motors and Drive Analysis (IMDA) Group .................................................. 2-49

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual i

Table of Contents

Mask command group..................................................................................... 2-52

Math command group ..................................................................................... 2-54
Measurement command group ........................................................................... 2-58
Miscellaneous command group .......................................................................... 2-77
Plot command group ...................................................................................... 2-80
Power command group.................................................................................... 2-81
Save and Recall command group ........................................................................ 2-95
Save On command Group ................................................................................ 2-96
Search and Mark command group ....................................................................... 2-97
Self Test command group ................................................................................ 2-131
Spectrum View command group ........................................................................ 2-132
Status and Error command group ....................................................................... 2-135
Trigger command group ................................................................................. 2-136
Vertical command group ................................................................................. 2-148
Waveform Transfer command group ................................................................... 2-151
Wide Band Gap Analysis command group ............................................................ 2-154
Zoom command group ................................................................................... 2-156
Commands listed in alphabetical order...................................................................... 2-157
Status and Events ................................................................................................. 3-1
Registers ...................................................................................................... 3-1
Queues ........................................................................................................ 3-4
Event Handling Sequence................................................................................... 3-5
Synchronization Methods ................................................................................... 3-7
Appendix A: Character Set ..................................................................................... A-1
Appendix B: Reserved Words .................................................................................. B-1
Appendix C: Factory Defaults ................................................................................. C-1
Default Setup ................................................................................................ C-1
Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples ......................... D-1
Example 1: Analog Waveform (Channels 1–4) ......................................................... D-1
Example 2: Digital Waveform ............................................................................ D-3
Example 3: Digital with 4 Bytes Per Point and Zoom Off ............................................. D-5
Example 4: Digital with 8 Bytes Per Point and Zoom Off ............................................. D-7
Example 5: Digital with 4 Bytes Per Point and Zoom On ........................................... D-10
Example 6: RF Frequency Domain Waveform........................................................ D-12
Example 7: Baseband IQ Waveform ................................................................... D-14
Appendix E: Search and Trigger Command Sequence Examples.......................................... E-1
Example 1: Single Threshold Edge Search .............................................................. E-1
Example 2: Single Threshold Edge Trigger ............................................................. E-1
Example 3: Dual Threshold Runt Search ................................................................ E-2
Example 4: Single Threshold Logic Search on Three Waveforms.................................... E-3

ii 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Table of Contents

Glossary
Index

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual iii

Table of Contents

iv 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Preface
This programmer guide provides you with the information required to use
Programmable Interface commands to remotely control your instrument.
The programmer manual is divided into the following major topics:
Getting started. This topic introduces you to the programming information
and provides basic information about setting up your instrument for remote
control.
Command syntax. This topic provides an overview of the command syntax
that you use to communicate with the instrument and other general information
about commands, such as how commands and queries are constructed, how to
enter commands, constructed mnemonics, and argument types.
Command groups. This topic contains all the commands listed in functional
groups. Each group consists of an overview of the commands in that group and
a table that lists all the commands and queries for that group. You can click a
command in the listing to display a detailed description of the command.
Commands listed in alphabetical order. This topic contains all commands
listed in alphabetical order. Command details, syntax, and examples are
provided.
Status and events. This topic discusses the status and event reporting system
for the programming interfaces. This system informs you of certain significant
events that occur within the instrument. Topics that are discussed include
registers, queues, event handling sequences, synchronization methods, and
messages that the instrument might return, including error messages.
Appendices. These topics contain miscellaneous information, such as a list
of reserved words, a table of the factory initialization (default) settings, and
interface specifications that can be helpful when using commands to remotely
control the instrument.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual v

Preface

vi 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Getting Started
This manual explains the use of commands to remotely control your instrument.
With this information, you can write computer programs to perform functions,
such as setting the front-panel controls, taking measurements, performing
statistical calculations, and exporting data for use in other programs.
Familiarity with the User Manual for your instrument is assumed. You can
download the User Manual from the Tektronix website at www.tek.com.

NOTE. Most examples in this document assume that both HEADer and VERBose
are set to ON.

Setting Up Remote Communications Hardware

You can remotely control communications between your instrument and a PC
via Ethernet or USB cables.

Ethernet If you are using Ethernet, start by connecting an appropriate Ethernet cable to
the Ethernet port (RJ-45 connector) on the rear panel of your instrument. This
connects the instrument to a 10BASE-T/100BASE-T/1000BASE-T local area
network.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 1-1

Getting Started

To change the Ethernet settings on your instrument, do the following:

1. Select the Utility drop-down menu.
2. Select the I/O menu.
3. Select the LAN panel.
4. In the menu, if you are on a DHCP Ethernet network that supplies the IP
address automatically by a DHCP, tap Auto.
5. In the menu, if you want to supply your own network settings, tap Manual
to set a hard coded TCP/IP address.

USB If you are using USB, start by connecting the appropriate USB cable to the USB
3.0 super-speed (SS) Device port on the rear panel of your instrument. This
port requires that the cable connected from the port to the host computer meets
the USB 3.0 specification for super speed connections. Typically, such cables
should be 3 feet or shorter in length, but this is determined by the quality of the
cable and, with higher quality cables, this length can be extended. (It is also
dependent upon the drive capability of the host USB port to which the instrument
is connected.) The use of high quality short cables is recommended to avoid USB
connection problems.

With USB, the system automatically configures itself. To verify that the USB is
enabled:
1. Select the Utility drop-down menu.
2. Select the I/O menu.
3. Touch USB Device Port to open the USB Device Port configuration menu.
4. If USB is disabled, tap USB Device Port to enable the USB Device port.

1-2 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Getting Started

After connection, the host, with appropriate software, can list the instrument as a
USB device with the following parameters: (See Table 1-1.)

Table 1-1: USB Device Parameters

Parameter Value
Manufacturer ID 0x0699 (decimal 1689)
Product ID 0x0522
(You can send the
USBTMC:PRODUCTID:HEXadecimal?
query to read the value)
Serial number Serial number
Manufacturer description “Tektronix”
Interface description “USBTMC-USB488”

Setting Up Remote Communications Software

Connect your instrument directly to a computer to let the PC analyze your data,
collect screen images, or to control the instrument using a program of your own
creation. Three ways to connect your instrument to a computer are through the
VISA drivers, the e*Scope Web-enabled tools, or via a socket server.

Using VISA VISA lets you use your MS-Windows computer to acquire data from your
instrument for use in an analysis package that runs on your PC, such as Microsoft
Excel, National Instruments LabVIEW, Tektronix OpenChoice Desktop software,
or your own custom software. You can use a common communications
connection, such as USB or Ethernet, to connect the computer to the instrument.
To set up VISA communications between your instrument and a computer:

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 1-3

Getting Started

1. Load the VISA drivers on your computer. Also, load your application, such
as OpenChoice Desktop. You will find the drivers and OpenChoice Desktop
software on the appropriate CD that comes with your instrument or at the
Tektronix software finder Web page (www.tektronix.com\downloads).
2. Connect the instrument to your computer with the appropriate USB or
Ethernet cable. Cycle the power on the instrument.
3. Select the Utility drop-down menu
4. Select I/O menu.
5. If you are using USB, the system sets itself up automatically for you, if
USB is enabled. Check USB DEVICE PORT panel to be sure that USB is
enabled. If it is not enabled, toggle the On/Off button to On.
6. To use Ethernet, select the LAN panel. Use the controls to adjust your
network settings, as needed. For more information, see the e*Scope setup
information below.
7. If you want to change socket server parameters, select the Socket Server
panel and enter new values through the resulting panel controls.
8. Run your application software on your computer.

Quick Tips The USB 3.0 super-speed (SS) device port is the correct USB port for
computer connectivity. Use the rear- and front-panel USB 2.0 or 3.0 host
ports to connect your instrument to USB flash drives, hard drives, keyboards
or mice. Use the USB Device port to connect your instrument to a PC.
There are both USB 2.0 and 3.0 host ports on the instrument. The device
port is USB 3.0. Printers are not supported on host ports. PictBridge printers
are not supported on the device port.

Using the LXI Web Page With e*Scope, you can access your Internet-connected instrument from a web
and e*Scope browser.

NOTE. This procedure presumes that you have connected the instrument to
a network and configures the instrument to work on your network. See the
instrument Installation and Safety instructions, or the embedded Help on the
instrument, for instructions on how to configure the instrument for network use.

To set up e*Scope communications between your instrument and a web browser

running on a remote computer:

1-4 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Getting Started

1. Connect the instrument to your computer network with an appropriate

Ethernet cable.
2. Select the Utility drop-down menu.
3. Select the I/O menu.
4. Select the LAN panel.
5. At the top left of the panel, there is an indicator light which turns red if the
device detects a fault.
6. Tap Test Connection to check if your instrument can find an attached network.
7. Record the IP address shown on your instrument.
8. Start a Web browser on a PC that has access to the same network to which the
instrument is attached.
9. Enter the IP address of the instrument in the browser address line. You should
then see the LXI Welcome page on your Web browser on your computer
screen.
10. For e*Scope, click the Instrument Control (e*Scope) link on the left side of
the LXI Welcome page. You should then see a new tab (or window) open in
your browser, showing the instrument screen. You can use the PC mouse to
interact with the e*Scope screen and controls.

Using a Socket Server A socket server provides two-way communication over an Internet Protocol-based
computer network. You can use your instrument’s socket server feature to let your
instrument talk to a remote-terminal device or computer.
To set up and use a socket server between your instrument and a remote terminal
or computer:
1. Connect the instrument to your computer network with an appropriate
Ethernet cable.
2. Select the Utility drop-down menu.
3. Select the I/O menu.
4. Tap Socket Server.
5. On the resulting Socket Server panel, tap the top entry to toggle the Socket
Server On.
6. Choose whether the protocol should be None or Terminal. A communication
session run by a human at a keyboard typically uses a terminal protocol.
An automated session might handle its own communications without using
such a protocol.
7. If required, change the port number by rotating multipurpose knob a.
8. If required, press OK to set the new port number.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 1-5

Getting Started

9. After setting up the socket server parameters, you can now have the computer
“talk” to the instrument. If you are running an MS Windows PC, you could
run its default client with its command-like interface. One way to do this is
by typing “ Telnet ” in the Run window. The Telnet window will open on
the PC.

NOTE. On MS Windows 7, you must first enable Telnet in order for it to work.

10. Start a terminal session between your computer and your instrument by typing
in an open command with the instrument LAN address and port #. You can
obtain the LAN address by pushing the LAN panel to view the resulting LAN
setting panel. You can obtain the port # by tapping the Socket Server panel
and viewing the Port item.
For example, if the instrument IP address was 123.45.67.89 and the port
# was the default of 4000, you could open a session by writing into the MS
Windows Telnet screen:
open 123.45.67.89 4000

The instrument will send a help screen to the computer when it is done
connecting.
11. You can now type in a standard query, as found in the programmer manual,
such as *idn?
The Telnet session window will respond by displaying a character string
describing your instrument. You can type in more queries and view more
results on this Telnet session window. You can find the syntax for relevant
queries and related status codes in other sections of this manual.

NOTE. Do not use the computer’s backspace key during an MS Windows' Telnet
session with the instrument.

Socket Server Terminal Protocol Mode Commands. Following are Tektronix

Instrument Control Terminal Session Control commands:
!t <timeout> : set the response timeout in milliseconds.
!d : send device clear to the instrument.
!r : read response from instrument.
!h : print this usage info.

NOTE. Commands containing a ? are treated as queries, and the responses are
read automatically.

1-6 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Getting Started

Documentation Documentation for your instrument is available for download at www.tek.com.

Dynamic programmatic interface

This programmatic interface is dynamic. This means the instrument will not
recognize certain commands until the objects referenced by those commands
actually exist. For example, commands related to measurements are not
recognized until measurements are added. Therefore, the response to a *LRN?
query will not normally include the instrument's complete command set.
The following command groups are not available when the instrument is in its
default state:
Measurement
Math
Bus
Search and Mark
Plot
Adding an instance of one of those components will cause all commands
related to that component to be recognized. For example, sending the
MEASUrement:ADDNew command adds a measurement at which point the
measurement commands will be recognized. Conversely, once all instances of a
component have been deleted, the commands related to that component will no
longer be recognized.

Implicit activation
When you send a command or query related to a dynamic object (such as
Math1, Bus3, or Meas2) to the instrument and that instance does not yet exist,
the instrument:
creates a default instance with the name you specified
adds all relevant commands and queries to the set of recognized commands
responds to the command or query

Example 1 *RST followed by a *LRN? will not return any MATH<x> commands because in
the default state, the instrument does not have any math waveforms. However
querying :MATH:MATH1:DEFinition? will add MATH1 with the default math
expression Ch1 - Ch2. Then the query will return the expected result. Note that if
Ch1 or Ch2 is not active, they will be activated as part of this action. A *LRN
issued after this will return MATH commands in addition to other available
commands.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 1-7

Getting Started

Example 2 *RST followed by :MEASUrement:MEAS3:TYPE? creates a measurement

named MEAS3 and returns its type. Since the default type is Period, you
will get Period as the response. A *LRN issued after this will return all
MEASUrement:MEAS3 commands in addition to other available commands.
Not all commands in these groups start implicit activation. ADDNew, DELete,
and LIST commands do not result in implicit activation.

Creating, deleting, and listing dynamic instances

You can create a new default instance of a dynamic feature by using the ADDNew
command. For example, :MEASUrement:ADDNew "Meas1" will create a new
measurement named Meas1. Meas1 will be a Period measurement since the
default type for measurements is Period. Note that you can change Meas1 type
to any other supported type using :MEASUrement:MEAS1:TYPE command.
The DELete command deletes the named dynamic instance. For example
:BUS:DELete “B2” will delete a bus named B2 if it exists. You can delete only
one instance at a time. The LIST command returns a list of all dynamic instances
currently in existence. For example, if you have added three measurements named
Meas1, Meas2 and Meas3, :MEASUrement:LIST? returns MEAS1, MEAS2,
MEAS3.

Backwards Compatibility
4, 5, and 6/6B Series MSO instruments have implicit backwards compatibility
built into the command set. Many commands from previous scope
generations can be successfully processed by modern scopes. In particular, the
MSO/DPO5000/7000/70000 command set has been partially migrated to the new
generation. Use the following table to check if a legacy command is supported
and how it will be interpreted by a 4/5/6 Series MSO.
The left column indicates the legacy command and the right column indicates
the command that will be executed on a 4/5/6 Series MSO. Some functions on
the scope have been simplified, so multiple legacy commands are mapped to a
single modern command.
In addition to these implicit aliases, the 4/5/6 Series MSO also contain a PI
Translator feature. This allows users to define custom command processing
to improve compatibility with legacy automation code. Please refer to the
Programming Interface Translator Technical Brief on tek.com for more
information.

Legacy oscilloscope command 4/5/6 Series MSO command alias

:SV:SV<n>:UNIts :SV:CH<n>:UNIts
:BUS:B<n>:AUDio:FRAMESync:SOUrce :BUS:B<n>:AUDio:WORDSel:SOUrce

1-8 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Getting Started

:BUS:B<n>:AUDio:FRAMESync:POLarity :BUS:B<n>:AUDio:WORDSel:POLarity
:BUS:B<n>:AUTOETHERnet:SOUrce:DIFFerential :BUS:B<n>:AUTOETHERnet:SOUrce
:BUS:B<n>:AUTOETHERnet:LOWerthreshold :BUS:B<n>:AUTOETHERnet:LOWTHRESHold
:BUS:B<n>:CAN:BITRate:VALue :BUS:B<n>:CAN:BITRate:CUSTom
:BUS:B<n>:CAN:FD:BITRate:VALue :BUS:B<n>:CAN:FD:BITRate:CUSTom
:MEASUrement:MEAS<n>:EDGEQUALifier :MEASUrement:MEAS<n>:SOUrce<n>
:MEASUrement:MEAS<n>:ACQTime :MEASUrement:MEAS<n>:WAITTime
:BUS:B<n>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DIFFerential :BUS:B<n>:ETHERnet:SOUrce
:BUS:B<n>:ETHERnet:LOWerthreshold :BUS:B<n>:ETHERnet:LOWTHRESHold
:BUS:B<n>:THReshold :BUS:B<n>:FLEXray:THRESHold
:BUS:B<n>:LOWerthreshold :BUS:B<n>:FLEXray:LOWTHRESHold
:DPOJET:GATing :MEASUrement:MEAS<n>:GATing
:BUS:B<n>:I2C:SCLk:SOUrce :BUS:B<n>:I2C:CLOCk:SOUrce
:BUS:B<n>:I2C:ADDRess:RWINClude :BUS:B<n>:I2C:DATa:SOUrce
:BUS:B<n>:I3C:SCLk:SOUrce :BUS:B<n>:I3C:CLOCk:SOUrce
:BUS:B<n>:I3C:SDAta:SOUrce :BUS:B<n>:I3C:DATa:SOUrce
:MEASUrement:MEAS<n>:FUNDAMENTALFreq :MEASUrement:MEAS<n>:FREQ
:BUS:B<n>:LIN:VALue :BUS:B<n>:LIN:BITRate:CUSTom
:MATH:MATH<n>:SPECTral:UNWRap :MATH:MATH<n>:SPECTral:WRAP:STATE
:MATH:MATH<n>:SPECTral:UNWRap:DEGrees :MATH:MATH<n>:SPECTral:WRAP:DEGrees
:BUS:B<n>:MDIO:SCLOCk:SOUrce :BUS:B<n>:MDIO:CLOCk:SOUrce
:BUS:B<n>:MDIO:SDATA:SOUrce :BUS:B<n>:MDIO:DATA:SOUrce
:DPOJET:DIRacmodel :MEASUrement:DIRacmodel
:DPOJET:JITTermodel :MEASUrement:JITTermodel
:DPOJET:MINBUJUI :MEASUrement:MINUI
:DPOJET:INTERp :MEASUrement:INTERp
:BUS:B<n>:MIL1553B:LOWerthreshold :BUS:B<n>:MIL1553B:LOWTHRESHold
:DPOJET:PLOT<n>:SPECtrum:HORizontal:SCALE :PLOT:PLOT<n>:SPECtrum:HORizontal:SCALE
:DPOJET:PLOT<n>:SPECtrum:BASE :PLOT:PLOT<n>:SPECtrum:BASE
:DPOJET:PLOT<n>:BATHtub:BER :PLOT:PLOT<n>:BATHtub:BER
:BUS:B<n>:RS232C:TX:SOUrce :BUS:B<n>:RS232C:SOUrce
:BUS:B<n>:RS232C:TX:SOUrce:THReshold :BUS:B<n>:RS232C:SOUrce:THReshold
:SEARCH:SEARCH<n>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:POLarity :SEARCH:SEARCH<n>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:CROSSIng
:BUS:B<n>:SPACEWIRe:SDAta:SOUrce :BUS:B<n>:SPACEWIRe:DATa:SOUrce

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 1-9

Getting Started

:BUS:B<n>:SPACEWIRe:SSTRobe:SOUrce :BUS:B<n>:SPACEWIRe:STRobe:SOUrce
:BUS:B<n>:SPI:SCLk:SOUrce :BUS:B<n>:SPI:CLOCk:SOUrce
:BUS:B<n>:SPI:MOSi:INPut :BUS:B<n>:SPI:DATa:SOUrce
:BUS:B<n>:SPI:SS:SOUrce :BUS:B<n>:SPI:SELect:SOUrce
:BUS:B<n>:SPI:MOSi:THReshold :BUS:B<n>:SPI:DATa:THReshold
:BUS:B<n>:SPI:SCLk:POLarity :BUS:B<n>:SPI:CLOCk:POLarity
:BUS:B<n>:SPI:MOSi:DATa:POLarity :BUS:B<n>:SPI:DATa:POLarity
:BUS:B<n>:SPI:SS:POLarity :BUS:B<n>:SPI:SELect:POLarity
:TRIGger:A|B:BUS:B<n>:SPI:DATa:IN:VALue :TRIGger:A|B:BUS:B<n>:SPI:DATa:VALue
:TRIGger:A|B:BUS:B<n>:SPI:DATa:MISO:VALue
:TRIGger:A|B:BUS:B<n>:SPI:DATa:OUT:VALue
:TRIGger:A|B:BUS:B<n>:SPI:DATa:MOSI:VALue"
:BUS:B<n>:SPMI:SCLk:SOUrce :BUS:B<n>:SPMI:SCLk:SOUrce
:BUS:B<n>:SPMI:SDAta:SOUrce :BUS:B<n>:SPMI:SDATa:SOUrce
:BUS:B<n>:SVID:SCLOCk:SOUrce :BUS:B<n>:SVID:CLOCk:SOUrce
:BUS:B<n>:SVID:SDATA:SOUrce :BUS:B<n>:SVID:DATA:SOUrce
:MEASUrement:MEAS<n>:DELay:DIREction :MEASUrement:MEAS<n>:TOEDGESEARCHDIRec
:BUS:B<n>:USB:SOUrce:DIFFerential :BUS:B<n>:USB:SOUrce
:BUS:B<n>:USB:LOWerthreshold :BUS:B<n>:USB:LOWTHRESHold
:TRIGger:A|B:BUS:B<n>:USB:QUAlifier :TRIGger:A|B:BUS:B<n>:USB:DATa:QUAlifier
:MATH:MATH<n>:POSITION :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:MATH:MATH<n>:VERTical:POSition
:MATH:MATH<n>:SCAle :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:MATH:MATH<n>:VERTical:SCAle
:REF:REF<n>:POSITION :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:REF:REF<n>:VERTical:POSition
:REF:REF<n>:SCAle :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:REF:REF<n>:VERTical:SCAle
:HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:REF<n> :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:REF:REF<n>:FRAMe
:CURSor:VBArs:POSITIONA :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:APOSition
:CURSor:VBArs:POSA"
:CURSor:VBArs:POSITIONB :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:BPOSition
:CURSor:VBArs:POSB"
:CURSor:HBArs:POSITIONA :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:APOSition
:CURSor:HBArs:POSITIONB :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:BPOSition
:CURSor:SCREEN:XPOSITIONA :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:SCREEN:AXPOSition
:CURSor:SCREEN:XPOSITIONB :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:SCREEN:BXPOSition
:CURSor:SCREEN:YPOSITIONA :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:SCREEN:AYPOSition

1-10 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Getting Started

:CURSor:SCREEN:YPOSITIONB :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:SCREEN:BYPOSition
:CURSor:WAVEform:POSITIONA :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:APOSition
:CURSor:WAVEform:POSITIONB :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:BPOSition
:CURSor:SOURCEA :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:ASOUrce
:CURSor:SOURCEB :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:BSOUrce
:CURSor:VBArs:UNIts :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:UNIts
:CURSor:HBArs:UNITA :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:AUNIts
:CURSor:HBArs:UNITA :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:AUNIts
:CURSor:HBArs:UNIts
:CURSor:HBArs:UNITB :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:BUNIts
:CURSor:VBArs:ALTERNATEA :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:ALTERNATEA
:CURSor:VBArs:ALTERNATEB :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:ALTERNATEB
:CURSor:VBArs:DELTa :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:DELTa
:CURSor:WAVEform:HDELTa" :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:DELTa
:CURSor:HBArs:DELTa
:CURSor:WAVEform:VDELTa" :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:DELTa
:CURSor:VBArs:DELTa
:CURSor:DDT :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:DDT
:CURSor:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE
:CURSor:FUNCtion :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:FUNCtion
:CURSor:STATE :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:STATE
:CURSor:CURSOR:STATE"
:CURSor:MODe :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:MODe
:BUS:B<n>:POSition :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:BUS:B<n>:VERTical:POSition
:ZOOm:HORizontal:POSition :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:ZOOM:ZOOM<n>:HORizontal:POSition
:ZOOm:ZOOM<n>:HORizontal:POSition"
:ZOOm:HORizontal:SCALe :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:ZOOM:ZOOM<n>:HORizontal:SCALe
:ZOOm:ZOOM<n>:HORizontal:SCALe"
:ZOOm:VERTical:POSition :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:ZOOM:ZOOM<n>:VERTical:POSition
:ZOOm:ZOOM<n>:VERTical:POSition"
:ZOOm:VERTical:SCALe :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:ZOOM:ZOOM<n>:VERTical:SCALe
:ZOOm:ZOOM<n>:VERTical:SCALe"
:ZOOm:STATe :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:ZOOM:ZOOM<n>:STATe
:ZOOm:ZOOM<n>:STATe"

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 1-11

Getting Started

:FASTAcq:PALEtte :ACQuire:FASTAcq:PALEtte
:BUS:B<n>:STATE :DISplay:GLObal:B<n>:STATE
CH1:STATE DISplay:GLObal:CH1:STATE
:MATH:MATH<n>:STATE :DISplay:GLObal:MATH<n>:STATE
:REF:REF<n>:STATE :DISplay:GLObal:REF<n>:STATE
:REM:REM<n>:STATE :DISplay:GLObal:REM<n>:STATE
:PLOT:PLOT<n>:STATE :DISplay:GLObal:PLOT<n>:STATE
:DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform(:ANALYsis|:FASTAcq) :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:INTENSITy:WAVEform
:DISplay:INTENSITy:GRATicule :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:INTENSITy:GRATicule
:DISplay:STYle :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:STYle
:DISplay:GRAticule :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:GRAticule
:DISplay:FILTer :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:FILTer
:DISplay:VIEWStyle :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:VIEWStyle
:HORizontal:DELay:POSition :HORizontal:POSition
:HORizontal:MAIn:POSition"
:HORizontal:DELay:POSition
:HORizontal:MODe:SCAle :HORizontal:SCAle
:HORizontal:SECdiv
:HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle
:HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv
:HORizontal:DELay:SCAle
:HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv"
:HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing :HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts
:HORizontal:DELay:STATE :HORizontal:DELay:MODe
:HORizontal:MAIn:DELay:MODe"
:HORizontal:DELay:TIMe(:RUNSAfter|:TRIGAfter) :HORizontal:DELay:TIMe
:HORizontal:MAIn:DELay:TIMe"
:CH1:VOLTS CH1:SCAle
:HORizontal:MODe:SAMPLERate :HORizontal:SAMPLERate
:HORizontal:MAIn:SAMPLERate
:HORizontal:DIGital:SAMPLERate
:HORizontal:DIGital:SAMPLERate:MAIn"

1-12 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Getting Started

:HORizontal:MODe:RECOrdlength :HORizontal:RECOrdlengt
:HORizontal:RESOlution
:HORizontal:DIGital:RECOrdlength
:HORizontal:DIGital:RECOrdlength:MAIn
:HORizontal:ACQLENGTH"
:FASTAcq:STATE :ACQuire:FASTAcq:STATE
:SAVEON:WAVEform:FILEFormat :SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
:SAVEON:WAVEform:SOURce :SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce
:SAVEON:IMAGe:FILEFormat :SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat
:SAVEON:FILE:NAME :SAVEONEVent:FILEName
:SAVEON:FILE:NAME :SAVEONEVent:FILEName
:TRIGger:A|B:PULse:WIDth:WHEn :TRIGger:A|B:PULSEWidth:WHEn
:TRIGger:A|B:PULse:WIDth:POLarity :TRIGger:A|B:PULSEWidth:POLarity
:TRIGger:A|B:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit :TRIGger:A|B:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit
:TRIGger:A|B:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit :TRIGger:A|B:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit
:TRIGger:A|B:PULSEWidth:WIDth"
:TRIGger:A|B:VIDeo:SYNC :TRIGger:A|B:VIDeo:FIELD
:TRIGger:A|B:PULse:RUNT:WHEn :TRIGger:A|B:RUNT:WHEn
:TRIGger:A|B:PULse:RUNT:POLarity :TRIGger:A|B:RUNT:POLarity
:TRIGger:A|B:PULse:RUNT:WIDth :TRIGger:A|B:RUNT:WIDth
:TRIGger:A|B:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity :TRIGger:A|B:TIMEOut:POLarity
:TRIGger:A|B:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe :TRIGger:A|B:TIMEOut:TIMe
:TRIGger:A|B:RISEFall:SOUrce :TRIGger:A|B:TRANsition:SOUrce
:TRIGger:A|B:RISEFall:WHEn :TRIGger:A|B:TRANsition:WHEn
:TRIGger:A|B:PULse:TRANsition:WHEn"
:TRIGger:A|B:RISEFall:WHEn :TRIGger:A|B:TRANsition:WHEn
:TRIGger:A|B:PULse:TRANsition:WHEn"
:TRIGger:A|B:RISEFall:POLarity :TRIGger:A|B:TRANsition:POLarity
:TRIGger:A|B:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity"
:TRIGger:A|B:RISEFall:POLarity :TRIGger:A|B:TRANsition:POLarity
:TRIGger:A|B:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity"
:TRIGger:A|B:RISEFall:DELTatime :TRIGger:A|B:TRANsition:DELTatime
:TRIGger:A|B:PULse:TRANsition:DELTatime"

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 1-13

Getting Started

1-14 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command Syntax
You can control the operations and functions of the instrument through the
Ethernet port or the USB 3.0 super speed (SS) device port using commands and
queries. The related topics listed below describe the syntax of these commands
and queries. The topics also describe the conventions that the instrument uses
to process them. See the Command Groups topic in the table of contents for a
listing of the commands by command group, or use the index to locate a specific
command.

Backus-Naur Form This documentation describes the commands and queries using Backus-Naur
Notation Form (BNF) notation. Refer to the following table for the symbols that are used.

Table 2-1: Symbols for Backus-Naur Form

Symbol Meaning
<> Defined element
= Is defined as
| Exclusive OR
{} Group; one element is required
[] Optional; can be omitted
.. . Previous element(s) may be repeated

Command and Query Structure

Commands consist of set commands and query commands (usually called
commands and queries). Commands modify instrument settings or tell the
instrument to perform a specific action. Queries cause the instrument to return
data and status information.
Most commands have both a set form and a query form. The query form of the
command differs from the set form by its question mark at the end. For example,
the set command ACQuire:MODe has a query form ACQuire:MODe?. Not all
commands have both a set and a query form. Some commands have set only and
some have query only.

Messages A command message is a command or query name followed by any information

the instrument needs to execute the command or query. Command messages may
contain five element types, defined in the following table.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1

Command Syntax

Table 2-2: Command Message Elements

Symbol Meaning
<Header> This is the basic command name. If the header ends with a question
mark, the command is a query. The header may begin with a colon
(:) character. If the command is concatenated with other commands,
the beginning colon is required. Never use the beginning colon with
command headers beginning with a star (*).
<Mnemonic> This is a header subfunction. Some command headers have only one
mnemonic. If a command header has multiple mnemonics, a colon (:)
character always separates them from each other.
<Argument> This is a quantity, quality, restriction, or limit associated with the header.
Some commands have no arguments while others have multiple
arguments. A <space> separates arguments from the header. A
<comma> separates arguments from each other.
<Comma> A single comma is used between arguments of multiple-argument
commands. Optionally, there may be white space characters before
and after the comma.
<Space> A white space character is used between a command header and the
related argument. Optionally, a white space may consist of multiple
white space characters.

Commands Commands cause the instrument to perform a specific function or change one of
the settings. Commands have the structure:
[:]<Header>[<Space><Argument>[<Comma> <Argument>]...]

A command header consists of one or more mnemonics arranged in a hierarchical

or tree structure. The first mnemonic is the base or root of the tree and each
subsequent mnemonic is a level or branch off the previous one. Commands at a
higher level in the tree may affect those at a lower level. The leading colon (:)
always returns you to the base of the command tree.

2-2 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command Syntax

Queries Queries cause the instrument to return status or setting information. Queries
have the structure:
[:]<Header>

[:]<Header>[<Space><Argument> [<Comma><Argument>]...]

You can specify a query command at any level within the command tree unless
otherwise noted. These branch queries return information about all the mnemonics
below the specified branch or level.

Headers Use the HEADer command to control whether the instrument returns headers as
part of the query response. If header is on, the query response returns command
headers, then formats itself as a valid set command. When header is off, the
response includes only the values. This may make it easier to parse and extract the
information from the response. The table below shows the difference in responses.

Table 2-3: Comparison of Header Off and Header On Responses

Query Header Off Header On
TIME? "14:30:00" :TIME “14:30:00”
ACQuire:NUMAVg? 100 :ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 100

Clearing the instrument output queue

You can clear the Output Queue and reset the instrument a new command or query
by using the selected Device Clear (DCL) function.

Command Entry
The following rules apply when entering commands:
You can enter commands in upper or lower case.
You can precede any command with white space characters. White space
characters include any combination of the ASCII control characters 00 through
09 and 0B through 20 hexadecimal (0 through 9 and 11 through 32 decimal).
The instrument ignores commands consisting of any combination of white
space characters and line feeds.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-3

Command Syntax

Abbreviating You can abbreviate many instrument commands. Each command in this
documentation shows the minimum acceptable abbreviations in capitals. For
example, you can enter the command ACQuire:NUMAvg simply as ACQ:NUMA
or acq:numa.
Abbreviation rules may change over time as new instrument models are
introduced. Thus, for the most robust code, use the full spelling.
If you use the HEADer command to have command headers included as part
of query responses, you can further control whether the returned headers are
abbreviated or are full-length with the VERBose command.

Concatenating You can concatenate any combination of set commands and queries using a
semicolon (;). The instrument executes concatenated commands in the order
received.
When concatenating commands and queries, you must follow these rules:
1. Separate completely different headers by a semicolon and by the beginning
colon on all commands except the first one. For example, the commands
TRIGger:A:MODe NORMal and ACQuire:NUMAVg 8, can be concatenated
into the following single command:
TRIGger:A:MODe NORMal;:ACQuire:NUMAVg 8

2. If concatenated commands have headers that differ by only the last mnemonic,
you can abbreviate the second command and eliminate the beginning colon.
For example, you can concatenate the commands ACQuire:MODe ENVelope
and ACQuire:NUMAVg 8 into a single command:
ACQuire:MODe ENVelope; NUMAVg 8

The longer version works equally well:

ACQuire:MODe ENVelope;:ACQuire:NUMAVg 8

3. Never precede a star (*) command with a colon:

ACQuire:STATE 1;*OPC

Any commands that follow will be processed as if the star command was
not there so the commands, ACQuire:MODe ENVelope;*OPC;NUMAVg 8
will set the acquisition mode to envelope and set the number of acquisitions
for averaging to 8.
4. When you concatenate queries, the responses to all the queries are
concatenated into a single response message. For example, if the display
graticule is set to Full and the display style is set to dotsonly, the concatenated
query DISplay:GRAticule?;STYle? will return the following.
If the header is on:
DISPLAY:GRATICULE FULL;:DISPLAY:STYLE DOTSONLY

2-4 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command Syntax

If the header is off:

FULL;DOTSONLY

1. Set commands and queries may be concatenated in the same message. For
example,
ACQuire:MODe SAMple;NUMAVg?;STATE?

is a valid message that sets the acquisition mode to sample. The message then
queries the number of acquisitions for averaging and the acquisition state.
Concatenated commands and queries are executed in the order received.
Here are some invalid concatenations:
DISPlay:STYle DOTsonly OFF;ACQuire:NUMAVg 8 (no colon before
ACQuire)

DISPlay:GRAticule FULL;:STYle DOTSONLY OFF (extra colon before

STYle.

DISPlay:GRAticule FULL;:TRG (colon before a star () command)

ACQUIRE:FASTACQ:PALETTE TEMPerature;FASTAcq:STATE ON (levels

of the mnemonics are different; either remove the second use of FASTACQ:
or place :ACQUIRE in front of FASTAcq:STATE)

Terminating This documentation uses <EOM> (End of Message) to represent a message

terminator.

Table 2-4: End of Message Terminator

Symbol Meaning
<EOM> Message terminator

The end-of-message terminator must be the END message (EOI asserted

concurrently with the last data byte). The last data byte may be an ASCII line
feed (LF) character.
This instrument does not support ASCII LF only message termination. The
instrument always terminates outgoing messages with LF and EOI.

Constructed Mnemonics
Some header mnemonics specify one of a range of mnemonics. For example,
a channel mnemonic can be CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5, CH6, CH7, or CH8
depending on the number of FlexChannels in your instrument. You use these
mnemonics in the command just as you do any other mnemonic. For example,
there is a CH1:POSition command, and there is also a CH2:POSition
command. In the command descriptions, this list of choices is abbreviated as
CH<x>.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-5

Command Syntax

Bus Mnemonics Commands specify the bus to use as a mnemonic in the header.

Table 2-5: Bus Mnemonics

Symbol Meaning
B<x> A bus specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Channel Mnemonics Commands specify the channel to use as a mnemonic in the header.

Table 2-6: Channel Mnemonics

Symbol Meaning
CH<x> A channel specifier; <x> is 1 through 8 and is limited by the number of
FlexChannels in your instrument.
CH<x>_D<x> A digital channel specifier; <x> in CH<x> is 1 through 8 and is limited
by the number of FlexChannels in your instrument. <x> in D<x> is 0
through 7. Together they define a FlexChannel digital input.

Cursor Position When cursors are displayed, commands may specify which cursor of the pair to
Mnemonics use.

Table 2-7: Cursor Mnemonics

Symbol Meaning
CURSOR<x> A cursor selector; <x> is must be 1 or 2.

Math Specifier Mnemonics Commands can specify the mathematical waveform to use as a mnemonic in
the header.

Table 2-8: Math Specifier Mnemonics

Symbol Meaning
MATH<x> A math waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Measurement Specifier Commands can specify which measurement to set or query as a mnemonic in
Mnemonics the header.

Table 2-9: Measurement Specifier Mnemonics

Symbol Meaning
MEAS<x> A measurement specifier; <x> is ≥1.

2-6 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command Syntax

Reference Waveform Commands can specify the reference waveform to use as a mnemonic in the
Mnemonics header.

Table 2-10: Reference Waveform Mnemonics

Symbol Meaning
REF<x> A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.
REF<x>_D<x> A digital reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

View Mnemonics Commands can specify the view to use as a mnemonic in the header.

Table 2-11: Waveview Mnemonics

Symbol Meaning
WAVEView<x> A waveview specifier; <x> must be equal to 1.
PLOTView<x> A plotview specifier; <x> must be equal to 1.
MATHFFTView<x> A mathfftview specifier; <x> must be equal to 1.

Search Mnemonics Commands can specify a search to use as a mnemonic in the header.

Table 2-12: Search Mnemonics

Symbol Meaning
SEARCH<x> A Search specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Zoom Mnemonics Commands can specify a zoom to use as a mnemonic in the header.

Table 2-13: Zoom Mnemonics

Symbol Meaning
ZOOM<x> A zoom specifier; <x> must be equal to 1.

Argument Types
Commands use arguments such as enumeration, numeric, quoted string and block.
Each of these arguments are listed in detail below.

Enumeration Enter these arguments as unquoted text words. Like key words, enumeration
arguments follow the same convention where the portion indicated in uppercase is
required and that in lowercase is optional.
For example: ACQuire:MODe SAMple

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-7

Command Syntax

Numeric Many instrument commands require numeric arguments. The syntax shows the
format that the instrument returns in response to a query. This is also the preferred
format when sending the command to the instrument, though any of the formats
will be accepted. This documentation represents these arguments as described
below.

Table 2-14: Numeric Arguments

Symbol Meaning
<NR1> Signed integer value
<NR2> Floating point value without an exponent
<NR3> Floating point value with an exponent
<bin> Signed or unsigned integer in binary format

Most numeric arguments will be automatically forced to a valid setting, by either

rounding or truncating, when an invalid number is input, unless otherwise noted
in the command description.

Quoted String Some commands accept or return data in the form of a quoted string, which is
simply a group of ASCII characters enclosed by a single quote (') or double quote
("). The following is an example of a quoted string: "This is a quoted
string". This documentation represents these arguments as follows:

Table 2-15: Quoted String Argument

Symbol Meaning
<QString> Quoted string of ASCII text

A quoted string can include any character defined in the 7-bit ASCII character
set. Follow these rules when you use quoted strings:
1. Use the same type of quote character to open and close the string. For
example: "this is a valid string".
2. You can mix quotation marks within a string as long as you follow the
previous rule. For example: "this is an 'acceptable' string".
3. You can include a quote character within a string by repeating the quote. For
example: "here is a "" mark".
4. Strings can have upper or lower case characters.
5. A carriage return or line feed embedded in a quoted string does not terminate
the string. The return is treated as another character in the string.
6. The maximum length of a quoted string returned from a query is 1000
characters.

2-8 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command Syntax

Here are some invalid strings:

"Invalid string argument' (quotes are not of the same type)

"test<EOI>" (termination character is embedded in the string)

Block Some commands use a block argument form to define a range or type of value,
as defined in the table below.

Table 2-16: Block Argument

Symbol Meaning
<NZDig> A nonzero digit character in the range of 1–9
<Dig> A digit character, in the range of 0–9
<DChar> A character with the hexadecimal equivalent of 00 through FF (0
through 255 decimal)
<Block> A block of data bytes defined as: <Block> ::=
{#<NZDig><Dig>[<Dig>...][<DChar>...]|#0[<DChar>...]<terminator>}

<NZDig> specifies the number of <Dig> elements that follow. Taken together,
the <NZDig> and <Dig> elements form a decimal integer that specifies how
many <DChar> elements follow.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-9

Command Syntax

2-10 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups
The programmable interface conforms to Tektronix standard codes and formats
except where noted. The interface also conforms to IEEE Std 488.2-1987 except
where noted.

Acquisition command group

Acquisition commands set up the modes and functions that control how the
instrument acquires signals and processes them into waveforms. Using these
commands for acquiring waveforms, you can do the following:
Start and stop acquisitions.
Control whether each waveform is simply acquired, averaged, or enveloped
over successive acquisitions of that waveform.
Set the controls or conditions that start and stop acquisitions.
Control acquisition of acquired channel waveforms.
Set acquisition parameters.

Table 2-17: Acquisition commands

Command Description
ACQuire? Queries the current acquisition state.
ACQuire:FASTAcq:PALEtte Sets or queries the waveform grading for fast acquisition mode.
ACQuire:FASTAcq:STATE Sets or queries the state of fast acquisition mode.
ACQuire:FASTAVerage:LIMit Limits the number of averages performed in hardware at 16-bit resolution.
ACQuire:FASTAVerage:STATE Sets or queries the state of HW accelerated averaging.
ACQuire:FASTAVerage:STOPafter Limits the total number of averages that will be accumulated.
ACQuire:MAXSamplerate? Returns the maximum real-time sample rate.
ACQuire:MODe Sets or queries the acquisition mode.
ACQuire:NUMACq? Returns the number of waveform acquisitions that have occurred since starting
acquisition with the ACQuire:STATE RUN command.
ACQuire:NUMAVg Sets or queries number of acquisitions for an averaged waveform.
ACQuire:SEQuence:CURrent? In single sequence acquisition mode, this query returns the number of acquisitions
or measurements in the sequence completed so far.
ACQuire:SEQuence:MODe In single sequence acquisition, the single sequence stop after count is based on
number of acquisitions or measurements. Number of acquisitions is the only mode
supported for this product.
ACQuire:SEQuence:NUMSEQuence In single sequence acquisition mode, specify the number of acquisitions or
measurements that comprise the sequence.
ACQuire:STATE Starts, stops, or returns acquisition state.
ACQuire:STOPAfter Sets or queries whether the acquisition is continuous or single sequence.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-11

Command groups

Act On Event command group

Use this group of commands to program the instrument to perform an action on
trigger, search, measurement limit, and mask test events.

Table 2-18: Act On Event commands

Command Description
ACTONEVent:ENable Enables or disables actions on event (AOE).
ACTONEVent:LIMit Sets whether the act on event should limit the number of saves, so as not to fill the hard drive.
ACTONEVent:LIMITCount If the number of act on event saves is limited, this command sets the limit.
ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION: Save a screen capture when a mask test fails.
SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION: Saves the user set source waveform(s) when a mask test fails.
SAVEWAVEform:STATE
ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SRQ: Generates an SRQ event when a mask fails.
STATE
ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:STOPACQ: Stops acquisitions when a mask test fails.
STATE
ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION: Saves a screen capture when a mask hit occurs.
SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION: Saves the user set source waveform(s) when a mask hit occurs.
SAVEWAVEform:STATE
ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SRQ: Generates an SRQ event when a mask hit occurs.
STATE
ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:STOPACQ: Stops acquisitions when a mask hit occurs.
STATE
ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION: Saves a screen capture when a mask test passes.
SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION: Saves the user set source waveform(s) when a mask test passes.
SAVEWAVEform:STATE
ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SRQ: Generates an SRQ event when a mask passes
STATE
ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION: Stops acquisitions when a mask test passes.
STOPACQ:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION: Saves a screen capture when the user-set measurement limit is exceeded.
SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION: Saves the user set source waveform(s) when the user-set measurement limit
SAVEWAVEform:STATE is exceeded.
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ: Generates an SRQ event when any measurement triggers the user-defined
STATE measurement limits.
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION: Stops acquisitions when the user-set measurement limit is exceeded.
STOPACQ:STATE
ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION: Saves a screen capture when a search event is found.
SAVEIMAGe:STATE

2-12 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-18: Act On Event commands (cont.)

Command Description
ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION: Saves the user set source waveform(s) when a search event is found.
SAVEWAVEform:STATE
ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SRQ: Generates an SRQ event when any search event is found.
STATE
ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:STOPACQ: Stops acquisitions when a search event is found.
STATE
ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION: Saves a screen capture on a trigger event from a single sequence or sequence of
SAVEIMAGe:STATE N acquisition.
ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION: Saves the user set source waveform(s) on a trigger event from a single sequence
SAVEWAVEform:STATE or sequence of N acquisition.
ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SRQ:STATE Generates an SRQ event when a trigger event occurs.
ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:STOPACQ: Stops acquisitions on a trigger event from a single sequence or sequence of N
STATE acquisition.
SAVEONEVent:FILEDest Sets or queries the file path.
SAVEONEVent:FILEName Sets or queries the file name without the extension.
SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat Sets or returns the file extension (png, jpg, bmp).
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat Sets or returns the file extension (csv, wfm, mat).
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce Sets or returns the sources for saving waveforms when an event occurs.

AFG Command Group

Use the AFG commands for Arbitrary Function Generator functionality. Requires
option AFG.

Table 2-19: AFG commands

Command Description
AFG:AMPLitude Sets (or queries) the AFG amplitude in volts, peak to peak.
AFG:ARBitrary:SOUrce Sets or queries the source name for the Arbitrary Waveform.
AFG:BURSt:CCOUnt Sets or returns the cycle count for AFG burst mode.
AFG:BURSt:TRIGger Triggers a burst on AFG output.
AFG:FREQuency Sets (or queries) the AFG frequency, in Hz.
AFG:FUNCtion Sets (or queries) which AFG function to execute.
AFG:HIGHLevel Sets (or queries) the high level value of the output waveform, in volts.
AFG:LOWLevel Sets (or queries) the low level value of the output waveform, in volts.
AFG:NOISEAdd:PERCent Sets (or queries) the AFG additive noise level as a percentage.
AFG:NOISEAdd:STATE Sets (or queries) the AFG additive noise state.
AFG:OFFSet Sets (or queries) the AFG offset value, in volts.
AFG:OUTPut:LOAd:IMPEDance Sets (or queries) the AFG output load impedance.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-13

Command groups

Table 2-19: AFG commands (cont.)

Command Description
AFG:OUTPut:MODe Sets or returns the AFG output mode.
AFG:OUTPut:STATE Sets (or queries) the AFG output state.
AFG:PERIod Sets (or queries) the period of the AFG waveform, in seconds.
AFG:PULse:WIDth Sets (or queries) the AFG pulse width, in seconds.
AFG:RAMP:SYMmetry Sets (or queries) the AFG ramp symmetry as a percentage.
AFG:SQUare:DUty Sets (or queries) the AFG duty cycle, as a percentage.

2-14 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Alias command group

Alias commands allow you to define new commands as a sequence of standard
commands. You might find this useful when repeatedly using the same commands
to perform certain tasks like setting up measurements.
Aliases are similar to macros but do not include the capability to substitute
parameters into alias bodies. The alias mechanism obeys the following rules:
The alias name must consist of a valid IEEE 488.2 message unit, which may
not appear in a message preceded by a colon, comma, or a command or query
program header.
The alias name may not appear in a message followed by program date, a
colon, comma, or question mark.
An alias name must be distinct from any keyword or keyword short form.
An alias name cannot be redefined without first being deleted using one of
the alias deletion functions.
Alias names do not appear in response messages.
The Alias commands are defined in Tektronix Standard Codes and Formats.
Deviations between that standard and what is specified here will be considered
errors unless specifically noted in the command description in this document.

Table 2-20: Alias commands

Command Description
ALIas Sets or queries the alias state.
ALIas:CATalog? Returns a list of the currently defined alias labels.
ALIas:DEFine Assigns a sequence of program messages to an alias label.
ALIas:DELEte Removes a specified alias.
ALIas:DELEte:ALL Deletes all existing aliases.
ALIas:DELEte:NAMe Removes a specified alias.
ALIas:STATE Sets or queries the alias state.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-15

Command groups

Bus command group

Use the commands in the Bus Command Group to configure a bus. These
commands let you:
Specify the bus type.
Specify the signals to be used in the bus.
Specify its display style.

NOTE. Bus commands are present once a bus has been added.

Bus Mnemonics Commands specify the bus to use as a mnemonic in the header.

Table 2-21: Bus mnemonics

Symbol Meaning
B<x> A bus specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Table 2-22: Bus commands

Command Description
BUS:ADDNew Adds the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SOUrce Sets or queries the source for the specified ARINC429 bus.
BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:THRESHold Sets or queries the ARINC429 upper threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:POLARITY Sets or queries the source polarity for the specified ARINC429 bus.
BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATAFORmat Sets or queries the format of the DATA field for the specified ARINC429 bus.
BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:BITRate Sets or queries the ARINC429 bit rate for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:BITRate:CUSTom Sets or queries the ARINC429 custom bit rate for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:BITDelay Sets or queries the number of delay bits for the specified AUDIO bus.
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:BITOrder Specifies the bit order for the specified AUDIO bus.
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CLOCk:POLarity Sets or queries the clock polarity for the specified AUDIO bus.
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CLOCk:SOUrce Sets or queries the clock source waveform for the specified AUDIO bus.
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CLOCk:THReshold Sets or queries the Audio Clock source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:POLarity Specifies the data polarity for the specified AUDIO bus.
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:SIZe Specifies the number of bits per word for the specified AUDIO bus.
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:SOUrce Specifies the audio data source waveform for the specified AUDIO bus.
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:THReshold Sets or queries the Audio Data source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:WORDSize Sets or queries the Audio bits per word for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:FRAME: Sets or queries the Audio bits of sync width for the specified bus.
CLOCKBITSPERCHANNEL
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:FRAME:SIZe Specifies the number of channels in each frame for the specified AUDIO bus.
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:TYPe Specifies the audio format (type) for the specified AUDIO bus.

2-16 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-22: Bus commands (cont.)

Command Description
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:WORDSel:POLarity Sets or queries the word select polarity for the specified AUDIO bus.
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:WORDSel:SOUrce Specifies the word select source waveform for the AUDIO bus.
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:WORDSel:THReshold Sets or queries the Audio Word Select source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet: Sets or queries the AutoEthernet D– source threshold level for the specified bus.
DATAMINUSTHRESHOLD
BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet: Sets or queries the AutoEthernet D+ source threshold level for the specified bus.
DATAPLUSTHRESHold
BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:LOWDATAMINus Sets or queries the AutoEthernet D– source low threshold level for the specified
bus.
BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:LOWDATAPLUS Sets or queries the AutoEthernet D+ source low threshold level for the specified
bus.
BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:LOWTHRESHold Sets or queries the AutoEthernet Data source Low threshold level for the
specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SIGNALTYpe Sets or queries the AutoEthernet signal type for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SOUrce Sets or queries the AutoEthernet data (SDATA) source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SOUrce:DMINus Sets or queries the AutoEthernet D– source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SOUrce:DPLUs Sets or queries the AutoEthernet D+ source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:THRESHold Sets or queries the AutoEthernet DATA source High threshold level for the
specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:TYPe Sets or queries the AutoEthernet standard speed.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate Sets or queries the CAN bit rate.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate:VALue Sets or queries CAN bit rate.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate Sets or queries the increased data phase bit rate used by CAN FD packets on
the specified CAN bus.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate:CUSTom Sets or queries the custom bit rate for the increased data phase of CAN FD
packets on the specified CAN bus.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SAMPLEpoint Sets or queries the sample point for the specified CAN bus.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SIGNal Sets or queries the signal type for the specified CAN bus.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SOUrce Sets or queries the CAN source channel.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:STANDard Sets or queries which CAN standard specification to analyze the specified
CAN bus with.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:THReshold Sets or queries the source channel threshold for the specified CAN bus.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:XL:BITRate Sets or queries the bit rate for the CAN XL bus.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:XL:BITRate:CUSTom Sets or queries the custom bit rate for the CAN XL bus.
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:A:DATA:THRESHold Sets or queries the CPHY Single Ended A source threshold for the specified
bus.
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:A:LP:THRESHold Sets or queries the CPHY Single Ended A LP threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:A:SOUrce Sets or queries the CPHY Single Ended A source for the specified bus line.
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:AB:SOUrce Sets or queries the CPHY differential AB source for the specified bus line.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-17

Command groups

Table 2-22: Bus commands (cont.)

Command Description
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:AB:THReshold Sets or queries the CPHY differential AB source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:AGND:SOUrce Sets or queries the CPHY differential AGND source for the specified bus line.
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:AGND:THReshold Sets or queries the CPHY differential AGND source threshold for the specified
bus.
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:B:DATA:THRESHold Sets or queries the CPHY Single Ended B source threshold for the specified
bus.
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:B:SOUrce Sets or queries the CPHY Single Ended B source for the specified bus line.
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:BC:SOUrce Sets or queries the CPHY differential BC source for the specified bus line.
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:BC:THReshold Sets or queries the CPHY differential BC source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:BITRate Sets or queries the bit rate for the specified CPHY bus.
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:C:DATA:THRESHold Sets or queries the CPHY Single Ended C source threshold for the specified
bus.
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:C:LP:THRESHold Sets or queries the CPHY Single Ended C LP threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:C:SOUrce Sets or queries the CPHY Single Ended C source for the specified bus line.
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:CA:SOUrce Sets or queries the CPHY differential CA source for the specified bus line.
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:CA:THReshold Sets or queries the CPHY differential CA source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:CGND:SOUrce Sets or queries the CPHY differential CGND source for the specified bus line.
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:CGND:THReshold Sets or queries the CPHY differential CGND source threshold for the specified
bus.
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:LP:DIRection Sets or queries the CPHY bus direction in low power.
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:SIGNALTYpe Sets or queries the signal type for CPHY bus decode.
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:SUBTYPe Sets or queries the sub type for CPHY bus decode.
BUS:B<x>:CXPI:BITRate Sets or queries the bit rate for the specified CXPI bus.
BUS:B<x>:CXPI:REC:THReshold Sets or queries the source channel recessive threshold for the specified CXPI
bus.
BUS:B<x>:CXPI:SOUrce Sets or queries the source channel for the specified CXPI bus.
BUS:B<x>:DISplay:FORMat Sets or queries how the data is represented in the busform for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:DISplay:LAYout This command sets or queries the format a bus layer should use.
BUS:B<x>:DPHY:CLOCk:SOUrce Sets or queries the DPHY Clock source for the specified bus line.
BUS:B<x>:DPHY:CLOCk:THRESHold Sets or queries the DPHY Clock source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DMINus:DATATHRESHold Sets or queries the DPHY D- source data threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DMINus:LPTHRESHold Sets or queries the DPHY D- source low power threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DMINus:SOUrce Sets or queries the DPHY D- source for the specified bus line.
BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DPlus:DATATHRESHold Sets or queries the D+ source data threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DPlus:LPTHRESHold Sets or queries the DPHY D+ source low power threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DPlus:SOUrce Sets or queries the DPHY D+ source for the specified bus line.
BUS:B<x>:DPHY:LP:DIRection Sets or queries the DPHY bus direction in low power.
BUS:B<x>:DPHY:PROTocol:TYPe Sets or queries the protocol type for DPHY bus decode.

2-18 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-22: Bus commands (cont.)

Command Description
BUS:B<x>:DPHY:SIGNal:ENCoding Sets or queries the 8b9b encoding for DPHY bus decode.
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:ALERt:POLarity Sets or queries the ESPI alert polarity for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:ALERt:SOUrce Sets or queries the alert source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:ALERt:THReshold Sets or queries the alert source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:ALERTVIEW Sets or queries the ESPI alert view for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CHIPSELect:POLarity Sets or queries the ESPI chip select polarity for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CHIPSELect:SOUrce Sets or queries the chip select source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CHIPSELect:THReshold Sets or queries the chip select source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CLOCk:POLarity Sets or queries the ESPI Clock (SCLK) source polarity for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CLOCk:SOUrce Sets or queries the clock source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CLOCk:THReshold Sets or queries the clock source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATAONE:POLarity Sets or queries the ESPI command (single mode)/ IO[0] (dual mode) Data
polarity for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CLOCk:SOUrce Sets or queries the command (single mode)/ IO[0] (dual mode) Clock source
for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATAONE:THReshold Sets or queries the command (single mode)/ IO[0] (dual mode) Data source
threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATATWO:POLarity Sets or queries the ESPI response (single mode)/ IO[1] (dual mode) polarity
for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATATWO:SOUrce Sets or queries the response (single mode)/ IO[1] (dual mode) Data source
for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATATWO:THReshold Sets or queries the response (single mode)/ IO[1] (dual mode) Data source
threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:IOMODe Sets or queries the ESPI Input/Output mode for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:DATAMINUSTHRESHold Sets or queries the DATA Minus source threshold for the specified EtherCAT
bus.
BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:DATAPLUSTHRESHold Sets or queries the DATA Plus source threshold for the specified EtherCAT bus.
BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:SIGNALTYpe Sets or queries the signal type for the specified EtherCAT bus.
BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:SOUrce:DIFF Sets or queries the differential source for the specified EtherCAT bus.
BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:SOUrce:DMINus Sets or queries the DataMinus (SDATAMINUS) source for the specified
EtherCAT bus.
BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:SOUrce:DPLUs Sets or queries the DataPlus (SDATAPLUS) source for the specified EtherCAT
bus.
BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:THRESHold Sets or queries the EtherCAT Differential source threshold for the specified
EtherCAT bus
BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATAMINUSTHRESHold Sets or queries the Ethernet DATA Minus source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATAPLUSTHRESHold Sets or queries the Ethernet DATA Plus source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPVFOUR Sets or queries whether IPV4 packets are available for triggering on Ethernet.
BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:LOWTHRESHold Sets or queries the Ethernet DATA source Low threshold for the specified bus.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-19

Command groups

Table 2-22: Bus commands (cont.)

Command Description
BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:QTAGGING Sets or queries whether Q-Tagging packets are available for triggering on
Ethernet.
BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SIGNALTYpe Sets or queries the Ethernet signal type for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce Specifies the Ethernet data source for differential input.
BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DMINus Sets or queries the Ethernet DMINus source.
BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DPLUs Sets or queries the Ethernet DPLUs source.
BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:THRESHold Sets or queries the Ethernet DATA source High threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TYPe Specifies the Ethernet standard type: 10Base-T or 100Base-T.
BUS:B<x>:EUSB:BITRate Sets or queries the eUSB data rate for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:EUSB:DATAMINUS:DATA: Sets or queries the eUSB D- Input Source Data Threshold for Data line decode
THRESHold for specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:EUSB:DATAMINUSTHRESHold Sets or queries the eUSB DATA Minus source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:EUSB:DATAPLUS:DATA:THRESHold Sets or queries the eUSB D+ Input Source Data Threshold for Data line decode
for specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:EUSB:DATAPLUSTHRESHold Sets or queries the eUSB DATA Plus source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:EUSB:LOWTHRESHold Sets or queries the eUSB source Low threshold for the specified bus when
signal type is Differential.
BUS:B<x>:EUSB:OPERating:MODe Sets or queries the eUSB mode for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:EUSB:SIGNALTYpe Sets or queries the eUSB signal type for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:EUSB:SOUrce:DIFF Sets or queries the eUSB Diff source for the specified bus when signal type is
Diff.
BUS:B<x>:EUSB:SOUrce:DMINus Sets or queries the eUSB DataMinus (SDATAMINUS) source for the specified
bus.
BUS:B<x>:EUSB:SOUrce:DPLUs Sets or queries the eUSB dataPlus (SDATAPLUS) source for the Specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:EUSB:THRESHold Sets or queries the eUSB source High threshold for the specified bus when
signal type is Diff.
BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:BITRate Sets or queries the FlexRay bus bit rate.
BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:BITRate:CUSTom Sets or queries the FlexRay custom bit rate for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CHannel Sets or queries the FlexRay bus channel.
BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:LOWTHRESHold Sets or queries the FlexRay data source low threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:SIGnal Sets or queries the FlexRay probe.
BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:SOUrce Sets or queries the FlexRay bus source.
BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:SOUrce:TXRX Sets or queries the FlexRay TxRx data source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:THRESHold Sets or queries the FlexRay data source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:TXRXTHRESHold Sets or queries the FlexRay data source TxRx threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:I2C:CLOCk:SOUrce Sets or queries the I2C clock (SCLK) source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:I2C:CLOCk:THReshold Sets or queries the I2C Clock (SCLK) source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SOUrce Sets or queries the I2C data (SDA) source for the specified bus.

2-20 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-22: Bus commands (cont.)

Command Description
BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:THReshold Sets or queries the I2C Data (SDA) source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:I2C:RWINADDR Determines whether decoded I2C slave addresses are pure seven-bit values,
or have the R/W* combined with them.
BUS:B<x>:I3C:CLOCk:SOUrce Sets or queries the I3C clock (SCLK) source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:I3C:CLOCk:THReshold Sets or queries the I3C clock (SCLK) source threshold level for the specified
bus.
BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:SOUrce Sets or queries the I3C data clock (SDA) source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:THReshold Sets or queries the I3C clock (SDA) data threshold level for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:I3C:VERSion Sets or queries the version for the specified bus
BUS:B<x>:LABel:COLor Sets or queries the color of the specified bus label.
BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD Sets or queries the bold state of the specified bus label.
BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic Sets or queries the italic state of the specified bus label.
BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE Sets or queries the font size of the specified bus label.
BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE Sets or queries the font type of the specified bus label, such as Arial or Times
New Roman.
BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline Sets or queries the underline state of the specified bus label.
BUS:B<x>:LABel:name Sets or queries the waveform label for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:LABel:XPOS Sets or queries the x-position of the specified bus' label.
BUS:B<x>:LABel:YPOS Sets or queries the y-position of the specified bus' label.
BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate Sets or queries the LIN bus bit rate.
BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDFORmat Sets or queries LIN bus id format.
BUS:B<x>:LIN:POLarity Sets or queries the LIN bus polarity.
BUS:B<x>:LIN:SAMPLEpoint Specifies the point to sample during each bit period, as a percent, for the
specified LIN bus.
BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce Sets or queries sets the LIN bus source.
BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce:THReshold Sets or queries the LIN source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:LIN:STANDard Sets or queries the LIN bus standard.
BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate:CUSTom Sets or queries LIN custom bit rate for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:BITORDer Sets or queries the Manchester bus Bit Order.
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:BITRate Sets or queries the Manchester bus bit rate.
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:DISplaymode Sets or queries the Manchester bus Packet View.
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:HEADer:LENGth Sets or queries the Manchester header length in bits.
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:IDLE:BITS Sets or queries the Manchester idle bit size in bits.
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:parity Sets or queries the Manchester bus Parity.
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:SOUrce Sets or queries the Manchester source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:START:INDex Sets or queries the Manchester start Index in bits.
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:SYNC:SIZe Sets or queries the Manchester sync Bit Size in bits.
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:THReshold Sets or queries the Manchester threshold for the specified bus.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-21

Command groups

Table 2-22: Bus commands (cont.)

Command Description
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:TOLerance Sets or queries the Tolerance bus parameter.
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:TRAiler:LENGth Sets or queries the Manchester trailer length in bits.
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:TRANstion:ZERo Sets or queries the Manchester bus for zero falling or rising.
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:WORD:COUNt Sets or queries the Manchester word count in bits.
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:WORDSIZe Sets or queries the Manchester word size in bits.
BUS:B<x>:MDIO:CLOCk:SOUrce Sets or queries the MDIO Clock source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:MDIO:CLOCk:THReshold Sets or queries the MDIO Clock source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:MDIO:DATA:SOUrce Sets or queries the MDIO Data source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:MDIO:DATA:THReshold Sets or queries the MDIO Data source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:SOUrce Sets or queries the source for the specified MIL-STD-1553 bus.
BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:THRESHold Sets or queries the MIL-STD-1553 upper threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:LOWTHRESHold Sets or queries the MIL-STD-1553 lower threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:POLarity Sets or queries the source polarity for the specified MIL-STD-1553 bus.
BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:RESPonsetime:MINimum Sets or queries the minimum response time to a valid command issued for the
specified MIL-STD-1553 bus.
BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:RESPonsetime:MAXimum Sets or queries the maximum response time to a valid command issued for the
specified MIL-STD-1553 bus.
BUS:B<x>:NFC:APPLYDEMod Sets or queries the demodulation application for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:NFC:BITRate Sets or queries the bit rate for the specified NFC bus on the response lane.
BUS:B<x>:NFC:CMD:STARTINDex Sets or queries the Manchester start index for NFC command signal type for
the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:NFC:CMD:THReshold Sets or queries the command threshold for the specified NFC bus.
BUS:B<x>:NFC:CMD:TRANsition:ZERo Sets or queries the Manchester type for NFC command signal type for the
specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:NFC:COMMand:POLarity Sets or queries the polarity for NFC Type B command signal type for the
specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:NFC:RESPonse:POLarity Sets or queries the polarity for NFC Type B response signal type for the
specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:NFC:RSP:THReshold Sets or queries the response threshold for the specified NFC bus.
BUS:B<x>:NFC:SOUrce Sets or queries the source for the specified NFC bus.
BUS:B<x>:NFC:START:INDex Sets or queries the start index for the specified NFC bus on the response lane.
BUS:B<x>:NFC:STD Sets or queries the standard for the specified NFC bus.
BUS:B<x>:NFC:TOLerance Sets or queries the tolerance for the specified NFC bus.
BUS:B<x>:NFC:TRANsition:ZERo Sets or queries the Manchester standard convention for the specified NFC bus
on the response lane
BUS:B<x>:NRZ:BITOrder Sets or queries the NRZ bit order for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:NRZ:BITRate Sets or queries the NRZ bus bit rate.
BUS:B<x>:NRZ:POLarity Sets or queries the NRZ source polarity for the specified bus.

2-22 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-22: Bus commands (cont.)

Command Description
BUS:B<x>:NRZ:SOUrce Sets or queries the NRZ source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:NRZ:SPMI:VERsion Sets or queries the Version for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:NRZ:THReshold Sets or queries the NRZ threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ONEWIRe:DATA:SOUrce Sets or queries the source for the specified ONEWIRe bus.
BUS:B<x>:ONEWIRe:DATA:THReshold Sets or queries the ONEWIRe data source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:ONEWIRe:MODe Sets or queries the mode for the specified ONEWIRe bus.
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds Sets or queries the threshold for all sources for the parallel bus.
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds:APPly Sets all of the data source thresholds to the value of the allMRefs parameter for
the parallel bus.
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<x>SOUrce Sets or queries the specified bit source for specified parallel bus.
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<x>SOUrce:THReshold Sets or queries the specified bit source threshold for the specified parallel bus.
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:EDGE Determines which edges of its clock signal cause a clocked parallel bus to
sample new states.
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:ISCLOCKED Determines whether the bus operates in a clocked or asynchronous fashion.
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCKSOUrce Sets or queries the Parallel clock source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCKSOUrce:THReshold Sets or queries the bit source threshold for the parallel bus.
BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:BITPERiod Sets or queries the PSI5 Bit period bus parameter.
BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:BITRate Sets or queries the PSI5 bitrate.
BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:COMM:DIRection Sets or queries the PSI5 bus communication direction.
BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:DATAA Sets or queries the PSI5 frame mandatory data region A.
BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:DATAB Sets or queries the PSI5 frame optional bits of data region B.
BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:DATAFORMat Sets or queries the data format in PSI5 Frame2 packet.
BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:ECUSOURce Sets or queries the ECU to sensor source channel for the specified Bus.
BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:FRAMECONTrol Sets or queries the PSI5 frame optional control bits.
BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:MESSaging Sets or queries the PSI5 optional messaging bits.
BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:SOUrce Sets or queries serial channel on or off.
BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:STATus Sets or queries the optional status bits of PSI5.
BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:SYNCMODe Sets or queries the PSI5 Sync Mode.
BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:SYNCTHRESHold Sets or queries the PSI5 threshold for the ECU To Sensor specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:THRESHold Sets or queries the PSI5 threshold for the Sensor To ECU specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITORDer Sets or queries the bit order for the specified RS-232 bus.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate Sets or queries the RS-232 bit rate for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate:CUSTom Sets or queries the RS-232 custom bit rate for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATABits Sets or queries the number of RS-232 data bits for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DELIMiter Sets or queries the RS-232 delimiting value for a packet on the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DISplaymode Sets or queries the display mode for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:PARity Sets or queries the RS-232 parity for the specified bus.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-23

Command groups

Table 2-22: Bus commands (cont.)

Command Description
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:POLarity Sets or queries the RS-232 polarity for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:SOUrce Sets or queries the RS-232 polarity for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:SOUrce:THReshold Sets or queries the RS232 source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:S8B10B:BITRate Sets or queries the 8B10B bit rate for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:S8B10B:SOUrce Sets or queries the 8B10B source for the specified bus. Specifies the source
channel.
BUS:B<x>:S8B10B:THReshold Sets or queries the 8B10B threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SDLC:BITRate Sets or queries the bit rate for the specified SDLC bus.
BUS:B<x>:SDLC:DATA:SOUrce Sets or queries the source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SDLC:DATA:THReshold Sets or queries the SDLC data source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SDLC:ENCoding Sets or queries the SDLC Bus Encoding.
BUS:B<x>:SDLC:MODulo Sets or queries the SDLC Bus Modulo.
BUS:B<x>:SENT:CHANWidth Sets or queries SENT fast channel bit widths for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SENT:NIBBLECount Sets or queries SENT data nibbles for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SENT:NUMCHANnel Sets or queries SENT fast data channels for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SENT:PAUSEPULSe Sets or queries SENT pause pulse for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SENT:POLARITY Sets or queries SENT Idle State signal polarity for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW Sets or queries the SENT slow channel configuration for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SENT:SOUrce Sets or queries the SENT DATA source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SENT:THRESHold Sets or queries the SENT DATA source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SENT:TICKTIME Sets or queries the SENT bus Clock Tick parameter for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SENT:TICKTOLerance Sets or queries the SENT bus Tick Tolerance percent parameter for the
specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:CLOCk:SOUrce Sets or queries the clock source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:CLOCk:THReshold Sets or queries the SMBUS clock source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:DATA:SOUrce Sets or queries the data source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:DATA:THReshold Sets or queries the SMBUS data source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:PEC:VALUe Sets or queries the SMBUS PEC selection for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:BITRate Sets or queries the SpaceWire bit rate.
BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:DATa:SOUrce Sets or queries the source of the SpaceWire Data signal for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:DATa:THReshold Sets or queries the threshold of the SpaceWire Data signal for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:DECode:TYPe Sets or queries the decode type for SpaceWire bus decode.
BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:STRobe:SOUrce Sets or queries the source of the SpaceWire Strobe signal for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:STRobe:THReshold Sets or queries the threshold level of the SpaceWire Strobe signal for the
specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:SYNC Sets or queries sync for SpaceWire decoding.
BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:SYNC:COUnt Sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an
SpaceWire sync bytes.

2-24 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-22: Bus commands (cont.)

Command Description
BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:SYNC:PATTern Sets or queries sync pattern for SpaceWire decoding.
BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:SYNC:VALUe Sets or queries sync value for sync option data.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:BITOrder Sets or queries the shift direction used to de-serialize data for the SPI mode of
the bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:POLarity Sets or queries the SPI clock (SCLK) polarity for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:SOUrce Sets or queries the SPI clock (SCLK) source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:THReshold Sets or queries the SPI Clock (SCLK) source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:POLarity Sets or queries the SPI data (DATA) polarity for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe Sets or queries the number of bits per word for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SOUrce Sets or queries the SPI data (DATA) source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:THReshold Sets or queries the SPI Data (DATA) source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:FRAMING Sets or queries the SPI bus framing.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:IDLETime Sets or queries the SPI bus idle time.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:DATa:POLarity Sets or queries the SPI MISo Data source polarity for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:INPut Sets or queries the SPI MISo source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:THReshold Sets or queries the SPI MISo Data source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:DATa:POLarity Sets or queries the SPI MOSI source polarity for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:INPut Sets or queries the SPI MOSI source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:THReshold Sets or queries the SPI MOSI source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:NUMBer:INputs Sets or queries the number of inputs for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:POLarity Sets or queries the SPI Slave Select (SS) polarity for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:SOUrce Sets or queries the SPI Slave Select (SS) source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:THReshold Sets or queries the SPI Select (SS) source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SCLk:SOUrce This command sets or queries the SPMI Clock (SCLK) source for the specified
bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SCLk:THReshold This command sets or queries the SPMI Clock (SCLK) source threshold for
the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SDATa:SOUrce This command sets or queries the SPMI Data (SDATA) source for the specified
bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SDATa:THReshold This command sets or queries the SPMI Data (SDATA) source threshold for
the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SVID:ALERT:SOUrce Sets or queries alert source channel for the specified SVID bus.
BUS:B<x>:SVID:ALERT:THReshold Sets or queries the alert threshold for the specified SVID bus.
BUS:B<x>:SVID:CLOCk:SOUrce Sets or queries clock source channel for the specified SVID bus.
BUS:B<x>:SVID:CLOCk:THReshold Sets or queries the clock threshold for the specified SVID bus.
BUS:B<x>:SVID:DATA:SOUrce Sets or queries data source channel for the specified SVID bus.
BUS:B<x>:SVID:DATA:THReshold Sets or queries the data threshold for the specified SVID bus.
BUS:B<x>:TYPe Sets or queries the bus type specified.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-25

Command groups

Table 2-22: Bus commands (cont.)

Command Description
BUS:B<x>:USB:BITRate Sets or queries the USB bit rate for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:USB:SOUrce Sets or queries the USB Data Source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:USB:SOUrce:DMINus Sets or queries the USB Data Source for D- input for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:USB:SOUrce:DPLUs Sets or queries the USB Data Source for D+ input for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:USB:DATAMINUSTHRESHold Sets or queries the USB DATA Minus source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:USB:DATAPLUSTHRESHold Sets or queries the USB DATA Plus source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:USB:DISplaymode Sets or queries the USB bus packet view.
BUS:B<x>:USB:LOWTHRESHold Sets or queries the USB DATA source Low threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:USB:SIGNALTYpe Sets or queries the USB signal type for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:USB:THRESHold Sets or queries the USB DATA source High threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:DELete Deletes the specified bus.
BUS:LIST? Lists all currently defined bus.
BUSTABle:ADDNew Adds the specified bus table.
BUSTABle:DELete Deletes the specified bus table.
BUSTABle:LIST? Lists all currently defined bus tables.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:STATE Sets or queries the state of the specified bus in the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:VERTical: Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified bus in the specified
POSition Waveform View.

2-26 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Calibration command group

The Calibration commands provide information about the current state of
instrument calibration and allow you to initiate signal path calibration (SPC).

NOTE. When running SPC through the remote interface, calibration status cannot
be obtained until after the SPC completes, which can take several minutes. Any
remote command that performs an action on the instrument is also disabled until
the SPC is complete.

Table 2-23: Calibration commands

Command Description
*CAL? Instructs the instrument to perform signal path calibration and returns the calibration
status when complete. Takes several minutes to run.
CALibrate? Returns the calibration status.
CALibrate:INTERNal Starts the signal path calibration. Takes several minutes to run.
CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt Starts the signal path calibration.
CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus? Returns the status of the signal path calibration.
CALibrate:PWRUpstatus? Returns the current status of the power-up calibration.
TOUCHSCReen:CALibrate Launches the touchscreen calibration.
TOUCHSCReen:STATe Sets or queries the enabled state of the touch screen.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-27

Command groups

Callouts command group

The Callout commands creates custom callouts to document specific details of
your test results.

Table 2-24: Callout commands

Command Description
CALLOUTS:ADDNew Creates a new note.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:BOOKMark: Sets or queries the source of the Bookmark callout type.
SOURCE
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:BOOKMark:XPOS Sets or queries the X-Position of the Bookmark callout type.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:COLOR Sets or queries the text color of the callout.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>: Sets or queries horizontal display position of the callout text
DISPLAYPOSition:X
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>: Sets or queries vertical display position of the callout text
DISPLAYPOSition:Y
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:BOLD Sets or queries the bold state of the callout text.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:ITALIC Sets or queries the italic state of the callout text.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:SIZE Sets or queries the font size of the callout text.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:TYPE Sets or queries the font type of the callout.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT: Sets or queries the underline state of the callout text.
UNDERLine
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:TEXT Sets or queries the callout text.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:TYPE Sets or queries type of the callout
CALLOUTS:DELete Deletes the specified callout.

2-28 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Cursor command group

Use the commands in the Cursor Command Group to control the cursor display
and readout. You can use these commands to control the setups for each cursor,
such as waveform source, and cursor position.
You can also use the commands to select one of the following cursor functions:
Off. Shuts off the display of all cursors.
Vertical bars. Displays vertical bar cursors, which provide traditional
horizontal unit readouts for Cursor 1 (bar1), Cursor 2 (bar2), the delta
between them, and 1/delta (results in frequency when the horizontal unit is
time). Vertical bars are another name for vertical screen cursors.
Horizontal bars. Displays horizontal bar cursors, which provide traditional
vertical unit readouts for Cursor 1 (bar1), Cursor 2 (bar2), and the delta
between them. Horizontal bars are another name for horizontal screen cursors.
Waveform cursors. Consists of two cursors you can independently assign to a
waveform. Waveform cursors enable you to conveniently measure waveform
amplitude and time at specific points on the waveform. In XY or XYZ format,
waveform cursors indicate the amplitude position of an XY pair (Ch1 vs Ch2
voltage, where Ch1 is the X axis and Ch2 is the Y axis) relative to the trigger.
Screen cursors. Consist of two pairs of horizontal and vertical bar cursors.
You can use these cursors to indicate an arbitrary position within the
waveform display area. Screen cursors are basically just turning on horizontal
bars and vertical bars at the same time. These cursors have no association
with any waveform, except that they inherit the color of the waveform they
are assigned to.

NOTE. Cursor commands are available once a view has been added.

Table 2-25: Cursor commands

Command Description
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor: Queries the cursor source for cursor A in the specified Math-FFT waveform.
ASOUrce?
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor: Queries the cursor source for cursor B in the specified Math-FFT waveform.
BSOUrce?
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:DDT? Queries the delta V over delta T cursor readout value in the specified Math-FFT
waveform.
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the cursor typein the specified Math-FFT waveform.
FUNCtion
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Sets or returns the horizontal cursor A position in the specified Math-FFT waveform.
APOSition

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-29

Command groups

Table 2-25: Cursor commands (cont.)

Command Description
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Queries cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified view.
AUNIts?
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Sets or returns the vertical cursor B position in the specified Math-FFT waveform.
BPOSition
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Queries the cursor B vertical units in the specified Math-FFT waveform.
BUNIts?
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Queries the delta V cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified view.
DELTa?
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:MODe Sets or returns the cursor tracking mode in the specified Math-FFT waveform.
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor: Queries the one over delta T cursor readout value in the specified Math-FFT
ONEOVERDELTATVALUE? waveform.
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the location to display the specified Math FFT plot cursor readouts
ROLOCATION (in the plot graticule or in a badge in the Results Bar).
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or returns the horizontal cursor A position in the specified Math-FFT waveform.
SCREEN:AXPOSition
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or returns the vertical cursor A position in the specified Math-FFT waveform.
SCREEN:AYPOSition
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or returns the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the
SCREEN:BXPOSition specified view.
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or returns the vertical cursor B position in the specified Math-FFT waveform.
SCREEN:BYPOSition
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:STATE Sets or queries the visible state of cursors in the specified Math-FFT waveform.
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position in the specified Math-FFT waveform.
APOSition
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Queries the vertical cursor A measurement units for the specified Math-FFT view.
AUNIts?
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor B positionin the specified Math-FFT waveform.
BPOSition
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Queries the vertical cursor B measurement units for the specified Math-FFT view.
BUNIts?
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Queries the delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified
DELTa? Math-FFT waveform.
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the waveform cursor A position in the specified plot view.
WAVEform:APOSition
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the waveform cursor B position in the specified plot view.
WAVEform:BPOSition
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:ASOUrce? Queries the cursor source for plot cursor A.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:BSOUrce? Queries the cursor source for plot cursor B.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:DDT? Queries the delta V over delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in
the specified view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:FUNCtion Sets or queries the cursor mode of the specified cursor in the specified view.

2-30 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-25: Cursor commands (cont.)

Command Description
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Sets or queries the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
APOSition view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Sets or queries the cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified view.
AUNIts?
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
BPOSition view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Sets or queries the cursor B vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified view.
BUNIts?
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Sets or queries the delta V cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the
DELTa? specified view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:MODe Sets or queries the cursor tracking mode of the specified cursor in the specified view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the one over delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in
ONEOVERDELTATVALUE? the specified view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the location to display the specified Plot cursor readouts (in the plot
ROLOCATION graticule or in a badge in the Results Bar).
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the
AXPOSition specified view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: Sets or queries the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
AYPOSition view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the
BXPOSition specified view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: Sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
BYPOSition view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the cursor source mode in the specified view.
SPLITMODE
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:STATE Sets or queries the visible state of the cursor of the specified cursor in the specified
view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the
APOSition specified view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the
BPOSition specified view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Queries the delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified view.
DELTa?
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Queries the VBArs cursor readout units of the specified cursor in the specified view.
UNIts?
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the
APOSition specified view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the
BPOSition specified view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor: Queries the cursor source for plot cursor A
ASOUrce?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-31

Command groups

Table 2-25: Cursor commands (cont.)

Command Description
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor: Queries the cursor source for plot cursor B.
BSOUrce?
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:DDT? Queries the delta V over delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in
the specified view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:FUNCtion Sets or queries the cursor type of the specified cursor in the specified view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Sets or queries the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
APOSition view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Queries cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified view.
AUNIts?
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
BPOSition view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Queries the cursor B vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified view.
BUNIts?
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Queries the delta V cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified view.
DELTa?
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:MODe Sets or queries the cursor tracking mode of the specified cursor in the specified view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor: Queries the one over delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the
ONEOVERDELTATVALUE? specified view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the location to display the specified Reference FFT plot cursor
ROLOCATION readouts (in the plot graticule or in a badge in the Results Bar).
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the
AXPOSition specified view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: Sets or queries the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
AYPOSition view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the
BXPOSition specified view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: Sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
BYPOSition view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries whether both cursors have same or different source.
SPLITMODE
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:STATE Sets or queries the visible state of the cursor of the specified cursor n the specified
view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the
APOSition specified view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the
BPOSition specified view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Queries the delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified view.
DELTa?
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Queries cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified view.
UNIts?
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor: Queries the value of the cursor A horizontal position.
WAVEform:AHPOSition?

2-32 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-25: Cursor commands (cont.)

Command Description
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or returns the waveform cursor A position in the specified plot view.
WAVEform:APOSition
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor: Queries the value of the cursor A vertical position.
WAVEform:AVPOSition?
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor: Queries the value of the cursor B horizontal position.
WAVEform:BHPOSition?
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or returns the waveform cursor B position in the specified plot view.
WAVEform:BPOSition
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor: Queries the value of the cursor B vertical position.
WAVEform:BVPOSition?
DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: Returns the noise density of the selected RF trace at the Cursor A position
ANOISEDensity?
DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: Sets or queries the Cursor A source in the Spectrum View.
ASOUrce
DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: Returns the noise density of the selected RF trace at the Cursor B position when in
BNOISE? Absolute mode, or the phase noise when in Delta mode.
DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: Sets or queries the Cursor B source in the Spectrum View.
BSOUrce
DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: Queries the horizontal bar Cursor A vertical position (where it crosses the spectrum
HBArs:APOSition signal) in the Spectrum View.
DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: Queries the horizontal bar Cursor A amplitude units in the Spectrum View.
HBArs:AUNIts?
DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: Queries the horizontal bar Cursor B vertical position (where it crosses the spectrum
HBArs:BPOSition signal) in the Spectrum View.
DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: Queries the horizontal bar Cursor B amplitude units in the Spectrum View.
HBArs:BUNIts?
DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: Sets or queries the Cursor B readout type in the Spectrum View.
READout
DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: Sets or queries whether both Spectrum View cursors have the same or different
SPLITMODE sources.
DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: Sets or queries the visibility state of the cursors in the Spectrum View.
STATE
DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: Sets or queries the Cursor A vertical position in the Spectrum View.
VBArs:APOSition
DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: Sets or queries the Cursor B horizontal position in the Spectrum View.
VBArs:BPOSition
DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: Queries the cursor horizontal units in the Spectrum View.
VBArs:UNIts?
DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: Sets or queries the Cursor A vertical position in the Spectrum View.
WAVEform:APOSition
DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: Sets or queries the Cursor B vertical position in the Spectrum View.
WAVEform:BPOSition

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-33

Command groups

Table 2-25: Cursor commands (cont.)

Command Description
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor? Queries the cursor parameters for the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Queries the cursor parameters for the specified cursor in the specified Waveform
CURSOR<x>? View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the cursor A source of the specified cursor in the specified Waveform
CURSOR<x>:ASOUrce View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the cursor B source of the specified cursor in the specified Waveform
CURSOR<x>:BSOUrce View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Returns the delta V over delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in
CURSOR<x>:DDT? the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the cursor mode (SCREEN or DATA) of the specified cursor in
CURSOR<x>:FUNCtion the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
CURSOR<x>:HBArs:APOSition Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Queries the cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified Waveform
CURSOR<x>:HBArs:AUNIts? View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
CURSOR<x>:HBArs:BPOSition Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Queries the cursor B vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified Waveform
CURSOR<x>:HBArs:BUNIts? View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the delta V cursor readout value over the history period.
CURSOR<x>:HBArs:DELTa?
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the cursor tracking mode of the specified cursor in the specified
CURSOR<x>:MODe Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the one over delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in
CURSOR<x>:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE? the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView:CURSor:CURSOR1: Sets or queries the location to display the Waveform View cursor readouts (in the
ROLOCATION Waveform View graticule or in a badge in the Results Bar).
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the
CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:AXPOSition specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:AYPOSition Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the
CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:BXPOSition specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:BYPOSition Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the cursor source mode in the specified view.
CURSOR<x>:SPLITMODE
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the visible state of the cursor of the specified cursor in the specified
CURSOR<x>:STATE Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the
CURSOR<x>:VBArs:APOSition specified Waveform View.

2-34 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-25: Cursor commands (cont.)

Command Description
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the
CURSOR<x>:VBArs:BPOSition specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the
CURSOR<x>:VBArs:DELTa? specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Queries cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified Waveform
CURSOR<x>:VBArs:UNIts? View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: Queries all values (Time, Voltage, Delta) associated with all the active sources
WAVEform:ALL:Values? in the Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the
CURSOR<x>:WAVEform:APOSition specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: Queries the vertical waveform value at the cursor A position in the specified
WAVEform:AVPOSition? Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the
CURSOR<x>:WAVEform:BPOSition specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: Queries the vertical waveform value at the cursor B position in the specified
WAVEform:BVPOSition? Waveform View.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-35

Command groups

Digital command group

Use the commands in the Digital Command Group to acquire up to 64 digital
signals and analyze them. Digital channels are only available when a digital
probe is attached to the super channel.

Table 2-26: Digital commands

Command Description
CH<x>_DALL:LABel:COLor Sets or queries the color of the specified digital group label.
CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:BOLD Sets or queries the bold state of the specified digital group.
CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:ITALic Sets or queries the italic state of the specified digital group.
CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:SIZE Sets or queries the font size of the specified digital group.
CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:TYPE Sets or queries the font type of the specified digital group, such as Arial or Times
New Roman.
CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:UNDERline Sets or queries the underline state of the specified digital group.
CH<x>_DALL:LABel:NAMe Sets or queries the label of the specified digital group.
CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:COLor Sets or queries the color of the label of the specified digital bit.
CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD Sets or queries the bold state of the label of the specified digital bit.
CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic Sets or queries the italic state of the label of the specified digital bit.
CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE Sets or queries the font size of the label of the specified digital bit
CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE Sets or queries the font type of the label of the specified digital bit,
CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline Dets or queries the underline state of the label of the specified digital bit.
CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:NAMe Sets or queries the label of the specified digital bit.
REF<x>_DALL:LABel:COLor Sets or queries the color of the specified digital group.
REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:BOLD Sets or queries the bold state of the specified digital group.
REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:ITALic Sets or queries the italic state of the specified digital group.
REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:SIZE Sets or queries the font size of the specified digital group.
REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:TYPE Sets or queries the font type of the specified digital group.
REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:UNDERline Sets or queries the underline state of the specified digital group.
REF<x>_DALL:LABel:NAMe Sets or queries the label of the specified digital group.
REF<x>_DALL:LABel:XPOS Sets or queries the x-position of the label of the specified digital group.
REF<x>_DALL:LABel:YPOS Sets or queries the y-position of the label of the specified digital group.
REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:COLor Sets or queries the color of the label of the specified digital channel.
REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD Sets or queries the bold state of the label of the specified digital bit.
REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic Sets or queries the italic state of the label of the specified digital bit.
REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE Sets or queries the font size of the label of the specified digital bit.
REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE Sets or queries the font type of the label of the specified digital bit.
REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline Sets or queries the underline state of the label of the specified digital bit.
REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:NAMe Sets or queries the label of the specified digital bit.
REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:XPOS Sets or queries the x-position of the label of the specified digital bit.

2-36 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-26: Digital commands (cont.)

Command Description
REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:YPOS Sets or queries the y-position of the label of the specified digital channel.
DIGGRP<x>:D<x>:THReshold Sets or queries the threshold level in volts for specified digital channel.

Digital Power Management (DPM) Group

Use the commands in the DPM command group for Digital Power Management
functionality. Requires option 5-DPM (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-DPM (6
Series MSO instrument).

Table 2-27: DPM Command Group

Command Description
MEASUrement:AUTOset This command performs a specified autoset.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEQUALifier Sets or queries the edge qualifier source.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:INPUTLEVel Sets or queries the input trigger voltage level.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXVoltage Sets or queries the maximum input voltage.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: Sets or queries the voltage level for the specified output voltage source n.
OUTPUT<x>VOLTage
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PFREquency Sets or returns the PJ max frequency value of PSIJ measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PTHReshold Sets or returns the PJ threshold value of PSIJ measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: Sets or queries the reference voltage per rail of Overshoot and Undershoot
REFVOLTAGE<x>Val measurements.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RFREquency Sets or returns the center frequency value of PSIJ measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: Sets or queries the ripple frequency per specified rail for Ripple measurement.
RIPPLEFREQ<x>Val
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RRANGE Sets or returns the span value of PSIJ measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP: Returns the maximum value of the measurement specified by the string, for all
RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MAXimum? acquisitions.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP: Returns the mean value of the measurement specified by the string, for all
RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MEAN? acquisitions.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP: Returns the minimum value of the measurement specified by the string, for all
RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MINimum? acquisitions.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP: Returns the peak-to-peak value of the measurement specified by the string, for all
RESUlts:ALLAcqs:PK2PK? acquisitions.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP: Returns the population value of the measurement specified by the string, for all
RESUlts:ALLAcqs:POPUlation? acquisitions.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP: Returns the standard deviation value of the measurement specified by the string,
RESUlts:ALLAcqs:STDDev? for all acquisitions.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP: Returns the maximum value of the measurement specified by the string, for the
RESUlts:CURRentacq:MAXimum? current acquisition.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-37

Command groups

Table 2-27: DPM Command Group (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP: Returns the mean value of the measurement specified by the string, for the current
RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN? acquisition.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP: Returns the minimum value of the measurement specified by the string, for the
RESUlts:CURRentacq:MINimum? current acquisition.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP: Returns the peak-to-peak value of the measurement specified by the string, for
RESUlts:CURRentacq:PK2PK? the current acquisition.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP: Returns the population value of the measurement specified by the string, for the
RESUlts:CURRentacq:POPUlation? current acquisition.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP: Returns the standard deviation value of the measurement specified by the string, for
RESUlts:CURRentacq:STDDev? the current acquisition.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WAITTime Sets or queries the wait time.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:RAILNUM Sets the DPM histogram source.

2-38 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Display control command group

Display commands can be found in this section as well as the sections of related
components. These commands control general instrument settings, such as the
intensity of the graticule, stacked or overlay display mode, and the fastacq color
palette. Display commands also control how and where waveforms are shown,
their position on screen, and zoom settings applied to the view. For example,
display commands can turn on or off the display of channels or set the selected
source.
Some actions can create a new view which can have its own settings. For example,
adding a histogram will create a new view where the Histogram plot is displayed.
Each view acts as a separate window within the instrument application and can
be rearranged or annotated as desired.
A WaveView is the primary view used for viewing inputs and time-domain
signals. Buses, non-FFT maths, refs, analog and digital channels, and time-trends
are displayed in the WaveView.
A PlotView is used for viewing measurement results and other plotted data.
Histograms, eye diagrams, XY/XYZ plots, FFTs, and other plots are shown in
individual PlotViews.
Each of these views can have separate settings, zoom, cursors, and annotations.
Display commands which are view specific have a view parameter in
the programmable interface, such as DISPLAY:WAVEView<x>: ... or
DISPLAY:PLOTView<x>: ... Selected source can also be specified on a per-view
basis. The overall selected source is determined by the selected view and the
selected source within that view.
PlotViews and WaveViews have some differences in command syntax due to
differences in view functionality. For example, WaveViews and PlotViews have
a different zoom model. The commands for specifying the zoom reflects these
differences, and different command syntax is available depending on the view.

Table 2-28: Display control commands

Command Description
DISplay? Returns current display settings.
DISplay:{CH<x>|Math<x>|REF<x>}: Sets or queries the Inverted mode color of the specified input source to the specified
INVERTColor color.
DISplay:{CH<x>|Math<x>|REF<x>}: Sets or queries the Inverted mode color of the specified input source to the specified
NORMALColor color.
DISplay:COLors Sets or queries the color mode for the graticule and waveform display.
DISplay:GLObal:B<x>:STATE Sets or queries the display mode (on or off) of the specified bus.
DISplay:GLObal:CH<x>:STATE Sets or queries the display mode (on or off) of the specified channel (both analog
and digital).
DISplay:GLObal:MATH<x>:STATE Sets or queries the display mode (on or off) of the specified math.
DISplay:GLObal:PLOT<x>:STATE Sets or queries the display mode (on or off) of the specified time trend plot.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-39

Command groups

Table 2-28: Display control commands (cont.)

Command Description
DISplay:GLObal:REF<x>:STATE Sets or queries the display mode (on or off) of the specified reference.
DISplay:INTENSITy? Returns the waveform and graticule saturation levels.
DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight Sets or queries the waveform backlight intensity settings.
DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight:AUTODim: Sets or queries the state of the display auto-dim feature.
ENAble
DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight:AUTODim: Sets or queries the amount of time, in minutes, to wait for no user interface activity
TIMe before automatically dimming the display.
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:AUTOScale Sets or returns the enabled state of autoscale for plots.
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:GRIDlines Sets or queries the grid lines setting of the plot.
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>: Sets or queries the state of the specified math waveform in the specified Waveform
STATE View.
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE Sets or queries the x-axis scale setting for FFT Math waveforms.
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:YAXIS:SCALE Sets or queries the vertical scale setting for FFT Maths.
DISplay:PERSistence Sets or queries display persistence setting.
DISplay:PERSistence:RESET Clears the persistence data.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:AUTOScale Sets or queries the enabled state of autoscale for plots.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:GRIDlines Sets or queries the Grid lines setting of the specified plot.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE Sets or queries the horizontal scale setting for applicable plot.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:YAXIS:SCALE Sets or queries the vertical scale setting for applicable plots.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:AUTOScale Sets or queries the enabled state of auto-scale for plots.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:GRIDlines Sets or returns the grid lines setting of the plot.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:REF:REF<x>: Sets or queries the state of the specified reference waveform in the specified
STATE Waveform View.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE Sets or queries the x-axis scale setting for REFFFT.
DISplay:SELect:BUS Sets or queries the overall selected bus.
DISplay:SELect:MATH Sets or queries the overall selected math.
DISplay:SELect:REFerence Sets or queries the overall selected reference waveform.
DISplay:SELect:SOUrce Sets or queries the overall selected source.
DISplay:SELect:SPECView<x>:SOUrce Sets or queries the spectrum trace (source channel) to select in the Spectrum
View window.
DISplay:SPECView<x>:GRAticule Sets or queries the type of graticule that is displayed.
DISplay:SPECView<x>:HORZ Sets or queries the horizontal display scaling of the Spectrum View window.
DISplay:SPECView<x>:INTENSITy: Sets or queries the graticule saturation level
GRATicule
DISplay:SPECView<x>:INTENSITy: Sets or queries the waveform saturation level.
WAVEform
DISplay:SPECView<x>:VIEWStyle Sets or queries the waveform layout style used by the display.
DISplay:SELect:VIEW Sets or queries the selected view.

2-40 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-28: Display control commands (cont.)

Command Description
DISplay:SELect:WAVEView<x>:SOUrce Sets or queries the selected source in the given waveview.
DISplay:VARpersist Sets or queries the persistence decay time.
DISplay:WAVEform Globally enables or disables the waveform display.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:STATE Sets or queries the state of the specified bus in the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:VERTical: Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified bus in the specified Waveform
POSition View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:STATE Sets or queries the state of the specified channel in the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:VERTical: Sets or queries the vertical position f the specified channel in the specified
POSition Waveform View in divisions.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:VERTical: Sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified channel in volts per division within
SCAle the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>_DALL:STATE Sets or queries the display state of the specified digital channels in the specified
Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>_DALL: Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified digital channel in the specified
VERTical:POSition Waveform View in divisions.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>_D<x>:STATE Sets or queries the display state of the specified digital channel in the specified
Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:FILTer Sets or queries the type of interpolation filter for the display.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:GRAticule Selects or queries the type of graticule that is displayed.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:INTENSITy: Sets or queries the graticule saturation level.
GRATicule
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:INTENSITy: Sets or queries the waveform saturation level.
WAVEform
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>: Sets or queries whether the specified math gets auto-scaled when the math
AUTOScale equation changes within the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>: Sets or queries the state of the specified math waveform in the specified Waveform
STATE View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>: Sets or queries the vertical position in divisions of the specified math waveform.
VERTical:POSition
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>: Sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified math waveform.
VERTical:SCAle
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:PLOT:PLOT<x>: Sets or queries whether the specified math gets auto-scaled when the math
AUTOScale equation changes within the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:PLOT:PLOT<x>: Sets or queries the state of the specified trend waveform in the specified Waveform
STATE View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:PLOT:PLOT<x>: Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified time trend in the specified
VERTical:POSition Waveform View in divisions.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:PLOT:PLOT<x>: Sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified time trend in volts per division in
VERTical:SCAle the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<y>:REF<x>_DALL: Sets or returns the selected frame of the specified digital ref.
FRAMe

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-41

Command groups

Table 2-28: Display control commands (cont.)

Command Description
DISplay:WAVEView<y>:REF:REF<x>: sets or returns the selected frame of the specified analog ref.
FRAMe
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:STATE Sets or queries the state of the specified reference waveform in the specified
Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>: Sets or queries the vertical position in divisions of the specified reference waveform.
VERTical:POSition
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>: Sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified reference waveform.
VERTical:SCAle
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_FREQuency<x>: Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified Frequency vs. Time trace in the
VERTical:POSition Waveform View, in divisions.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_FREQuency<x>: Sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified Frequency vs. Time trace in the
VERTical:SCAle Waveform View, in divisions.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_MAGnitude<x>: Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified Magnitude vs. Time trace in the
VERTical:POSition Waveform View, in divisions.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_MAGnitude<x>: Sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified Magnitude vs. Time trace in the
VERTical:SCAle specified Waveform View in Volts, Watts, or dB per division.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_PHASe<x>: Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified Phase vs. Time trace in the
VERTical:POSition Waveform View, in divisions.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_PHASe<x>: Sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified Phase vs. Time trace in the
VERTical:SCAle specified Waveform View in degrees per division.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:STYle Sets or queries the waveforms are displayed for analysis mode.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:VIEWStyle Sets or queries the waveform layout style used by the display.
DISplay:WAVEView:GRIDTYPE Sets or queries the Waveform View Graticule mode (Fixed or Moveable).
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE Sets or queries the horizontal scale setting for applicable plots, either Linear or Log.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:YAXIS:SCALE Sets or queries the vertical scale setting for applicable plots, either Linear or Log.

DVM Command Group

Use the commands in the DVM command group for Digital Voltmeter
functionality. Requires DVM option (free with product registration).

Table 2-29: DVM Command Group

Command Description
DVM Resets the Digital Voltmeter measurements and history.
DVM:AUTORange Sets or queries the autorange state for the Digital Voltmeter.
DVM:MEASUrement:FREQuency? Returns the current frequency value for the Digital Voltmeter.
DVM:MEASUrement:HIStory:AVErage? Returns the average readout value for the Digital Voltmeter function over the history
period.
DVM:MEASUrement:HIStory:MAXimum? Returns the maximum readout value for the DVM function over the history period.

2-42 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-29: DVM Command Group (cont.)

Command Description
DVM:MEASUrement:HIStory:MINImum? Returns the minimum readout value for the DVM function over the history period.
DVM:MEASUrement:INFMAXimum? Returns the maximum DVM readout value over the entire time that the DVM has
been on since the last change using the DVM:MODe or DVM:SOUrce commands
or DVM RESET.
DVM:MEASUrement:INFMINimum? Returns the minimum readout value of the DVM function over the entire time that
the DVM has been on since the last change using the DVM:MODe or DVM:SOUrce
commands or DVM RESET.
DVM:MEASUrement:VALue? Returns the DVM readout value.
DVM:MODe Specifies or queries the mode to use for the Digital Voltmeter.
DVM:SOUrce Sets or queries the source for the Digital Voltmeter.
DVM:TRIGger:FREQuency:COUNTer Sets or queries the state of the trigger frequency counter.

Ethernet Command Group

Use the commands in the Ethernet Command Group to set up the 10BASE-T,
100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-TX or 100BASE-T Ethernet remote interface.

Table 2-30: Ethernet Commands

Command Description
ETHERnet:DHCPbootp Specifies the network initialization search for a DHCP/BOOTP server.
ETHERnet:DNS:IPADDress Specifies the network Domain Name Server (DNS) IP address.
ETHERnet:DOMAINname Specifies the network domain name.
ETHERnet:ENET:ADDress? Returns the Ethernet address (MAC address) value assigned to the instrument.
ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress Specifies the network gateway IP address.
ETHERnet:IPADDress Specifies the IP address assigned to the instrument.
ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:RESET Resets the LXI local area network.
ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:SERVICENAMe Specifies the mDNS service name used for the LXI interface.
ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:STATus? Returns the LXI network status.
ETHERnet:NAME Sets or queries the instrument Ethernet hostname assigned to the instrument.
ETHERnet:NETWORKCONFig Specifies the Ethernet network configuration setting.
ETHERnet:PING Causes the instrument to ping the gateway IP address.
ETHERnet:PING:STATus? Returns the results from sending the ETHERnet:PING command to ping the
gateway IP address.
ETHERnet:SUBNETMask Specifies the network subnet mask value.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-43

Command groups

File system command group

Use the commands in the File System Command Group to help you use the
built-in hard disk drive. You can use the commands to do the following:
List the contents of the current directory
Create and delete directories
Create, copy, read, rename, or delete a file
When using these commands, keep the following points in mind:
File arguments are always enclosed within double quotes:
“C:\MYDIR\TEK00001.SET”
File names follow the MS-DOS format: [DRIVE:][\PATH\]filename
Path separators can be either forward slashes (/) or back slashes (\)

NOTE. Using a back slash as a path separator can produce some unexpected
results, depending on how your controller application treats escaped characters.
Many applications recognize the sequence of a back slash followed by an
alphabetic character as an escaped character, and, as such, interpret that
alphabetic character as a control character. For example, the sequence “\n”
might be interpreted as a newline character; “\t” might be interpreted as a tab
character. To ensure that this interpretation does not occur, you can use double
back slashes. For example, “C:\\testfile.txt”.

Some FILESystem commands can fail because a file has read-only attributes.
You will not be able to delete or replace such files until this attribute is
removed. Refer to the operating system help on file properties for further
information.

Table 2-31: File system commands

Command Description
FILESystem? Returns the file system state.
FILESystem:COPy Copies one or more files to a new file.
FILESystem:CWD Sets or queries the current working directory for FILESystem commands.
FILESystem:DELEte Deletes a named file or directory.
FILESystem:DIR? Returns a list of directory contents.
FILESystem:HOMEDir? Returns the current user's home directory.
FILESystem:LDIR? Returns a list of directory contents.
FILESystem:MKDir Makes a new directory.
FILESystem:MOUNT:DRIVE Mounts a network drive or queries if a network drive is currently mounted.
FILESystem:MOUNT:TEKDrive Mounts the TekDrive specified by the quoted string arguments.

2-44 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-31: File system commands (cont.)

Command Description
FILESystem:READFile Copies the named file to the interface.
FILESystem:REName Assigns a new name to an existing file.
FILESystem:RMDir Deletes the named directory.
FILESystem:TEKDrive:CODE? Returns short code in string format.
FILESystem:TEKDrive:CODE:EXPirytime? Returns expiry time of short code.
FILESystem:TEKDrive:CODE:STATus? Returns status of short code.
FILESystem:UNMOUNT:DRIve Unmount the USB drive.
FILESystem:UNMOUNT:TEKDrive Unmounts the TekDrive specified by the quoted string argument and the drive name
is case insensitive.
FILESystem:WRITEFile Copies the block data to a named file.

Histogram Group
Use the commands in the Histogram command group for Histogram functionality.

Table 2-32: Histogram Command Group

Command Description
HISTogram:ADDNew Adds the specified waveform histogram
HISTogram:DELete Deletes the specified histogram.
HISTogram:DELETEALL Deletes all the active instances of histograms defined in the scope application.
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:BOX Sets or queries the top, left, bottom and right positions of the histogram box in
source waveform coordinates.
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:BSTate Sets or queries whether the histogram badge is displayed.
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:DATa? Returns a comma separated list of numbers representing the histogram bin data.
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:DISPlay Sets or queries the histogram scaling display setting.
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:FUNCtion Sets or queries the histogram mode.
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement: Sets or queries whether the waveform count measurement is enabled on the
COUNt histogram.
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement: Sets or queries whether the Hits in Box measurement is enabled on the histogram.
HITS
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement: Sets or queries whether the Max measurement is enabled on the histogram.
MAX
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement: Sets or queries whether the Mean measurement is enabled on the histogram.
MEAN
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement: Sets or queries whether the Median measurement is enabled on the histogram.
MEDian
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement: Sets or queries whether the Min measurement is enabled on the histogram.
MIN

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-45

Command groups

Table 2-32: Histogram Command Group (cont.)

Command Description
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement: Sets or queries whether the Mode measurement is enabled on the histogram.
MODE
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement: Sets or queries whether the μ±1σ measurement is enabled on the histogram.
ONESigma
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement: Sets or queries whether the Peak Hits measurement is enabled on the histogram.
PHITs
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement: Sets or queries whether the Peak-to-peak measurement is enabled on the
PK2PK histogram.
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement: Returns the measurement results from the specified histogram.
RESUlts?
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement: Sets or queries whether the Standard Deviation measurement is enabled on the
STDDev histogram.
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement: Sets or queries whether the μ±3σ measurement is enabled on the histogram.
THRSigma
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement: Sets or queries whether the μ±2σ measurement is enabled on the histogram.
TWOSigma
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:SAVe Saves the specified histograms data as a comma separated list of values.
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:SIZe Sets or queries the height or width of the specified histogram bins in divisions.
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:SOUrce Sets or queries which source waveform will be compared against the histogram box
when the histogram testing is enabled.
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:STATE Sets or queries whether histogram calculations are enabled for the specified
histogram.
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:TRANsparency Sets or queries the transparency of the histogram bins.
HISTogram:LIST? Returns a comma separated list of all currently defined histograms.

History Group
Use the commands in the History command group for History mode functionality.

Table 2-33: History Command Group

Command Description
TSTamptable:ADDNew Adds a new History time stamp results table to the scope.
TSTamptable:DELETE Deletes the requested History time stamp results table
TSTamptable:LIST? Returns the list of History time stamp results tables has been added.

2-46 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Horizontal command group

Horizontal commands control the time base of the instrument. You can set the
time per division (or time per point) of the main time base. You can use the
Horizontal commands to do the following:
Set the scale, horizontal position and reference, and units of the time base
Get the screen resolution, time of first point and time of last point, or get all
the horizontal settings
Enable or disable the display of the time base

Table 2-34: Horizontal commands

Command Description
ACQuire:NUMFRAMESACQuired? Returns the number of FastFrame frames which have been acquired.
HORizontal? Queries the current horizontal settings.
HORizontal:ACQDURATION? Returns the time base duration.
HORizontal:DELay:MODe Sets or queries the horizontal delay mode.
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe Sets or queries the horizontal delay time (position) that is used when delay is on.
HORizontal:DIVisions? Returns the number of graticule divisions over which the waveform is displayed.
HORizontal:FASTframe? Returns all information under horizontal:fastframe.
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt Sets or returns the number of frames.
HORizontal:FASTframe:MAXFRames? Returns the maximum number of frames.
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes: Sets or returns the overlay display type.
MODe
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAme Sets or returns the reference frame number.
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:INCLUde Sets or returns whether the reference frame delta information is shown in the display.
HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED Sets or returns the selected frame number for acquired frames.
HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE Sets or returns the state of FastFrame.
HORizontal:FASTframe:SUMFrame Sets or returns the summary frame type.
HORizontal:FASTframe:SUMFrame:STATE Sets or returns the state of FastFrame summary frame.
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp: Returns the time-stamp of the FastFrame Reference frame.
REFerence?
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp: Returns the time-stamp of the FastFrame Selected acquired frame.
SELECTED?
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:DELTa? Returns the time difference between the Selected and Reference time-stamps.
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:ALL? Returns the time stamp of all frames.
HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:ALL? Returns the sub-sample time between the trigger sample (designated by PT_OFF)
and the occurrence of the actual trigger for the waveform specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command for all frames.
HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:REF? Returns the sub-sample time between the trigger sample (designated by PT_OFF)
and the occurrence of the actual trigger for the waveform specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command for the reference frame.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-47

Command groups

Table 2-34: Horizontal commands (cont.)

Command Description
HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:SELECTED? Returns the sub-sample time between the trigger sample (designated by PT_OFF)
and the occurrence of the actual trigger for the waveform specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command for the selected frame.
HORizontal:HISTory:CSTAts Sets or queries the history cumulative statistics type.
HORizontal:HISTory:OVERlay Sets or queries whether all acquisitions in history are overlaid in the waveform view.
HORizontal:HISTory:REF:ACQ Sets or queries the reference acquisition in History.
HORizontal:HISTory:REF:INClude Sets or queries whether the history reference acquisition is included in the user
interface history badge or not.
HORizontal:HISTory:SELected Sets or queries the selected acquisition in History.
HORizontal:HISTory:STATe Sets or queries the state of History.
HORizontal:HISTory:TIMEStamp:DELTa? Returns the difference between the timestamps of the history reference acquisition
and the history selected acquisition.
HORizontal:HISTory:TIMEStamp: Returns the timestamp of the history reference acquisition.
REFerence?
HORizontal:HISTory:TIMEStamp: Returns the timestamp of the history selected acquisition.
SELECTED?
HORizontal:MAIn:INTERPRatio? Returns the main horizontal time base interpolation ratio.
HORizontal:MODe Sets or queries the horizontal mode.
HORizontal:MODe:AUTOmatic:FASTAcq: Sets or queries the horizontal FastAcq maximum record length.
RECOrdlength:MAXimum:VALue
HORizontal:MODe:AUTOmatic:FASTAcq: Sets or queries the flag which allows override of the horizontal FastAcq maximum
RECOrdlength:MAXimum:ZOOMOVERride record length.
HORizontal:MODe:MANual:CONFIGure Sets or queries which horizontal control (scale or record length) will also change
when the sample rate is adjusted.
HORizontal:MODe:RECOrdlength Sets or queries the record length.
HORizontal:MODe:SAMPLERate Sets or queries the sample rate.
HORizontal:MODe:SCAle Sets or queries the horizontal scale.
HORizontal:POSition Sets or queries the waveform horizontal position, in percent, that is used when
delay is off.
HORizontal:PREViewstate? Returns the display system preview state.
HORizontal:RECOrdlength Sets or queries the horizontal record length.
HORizontal:ROLL? Queries the horizontal roll mode status.
HORizontal:SAMPLERate Sets or queries the horizontal sample rate.
HORizontal:SAMPLERate:ANALYZemode: Sets or queries the flag which allows override of the horizontal analyze minimum
MINimum:OVERRide sample rate.
HORizontal:SAMPLERate:ANALYZemode: Sets or queries the minimum sample rate used by Analysis Automatic horizontal
MINimum:VALue mode.
HORizontal:SCAle Sets or queries the horizontal scale.

2-48 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Inverter Motors and Drive Analysis (IMDA) Group

Use the commands in the IMDA group for input analysis, output analysis, ripple
analysis measurements.

Table 2-35: IMDA Command Group

Command Description
CUSTOMTABle:ADDNew Adds a new custom results table.
CUSTOMTABle:DELete Deletes the custom result(s) table..
CUSTOMTABle:LIST? Queries the list of custom result tables have been added.
MEASUrement:ADDMEAS Adds a measurement.
MEASUrement:AUTOset Performs a specified autoset.
MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:CONFIGuration Sets or queries the global input and output configuration.
MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:EDGEQUALifier Sets or queries global input edge qualifier source.
MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:INLOWPass: Sets or queries global input low pass filter frequency.
FREQ
MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:INLOWPass: Sets or queries global input low pass filter order.
SPEC
MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:L2LTOL2N Enables the Line-to-Line to Line-to-Neutral Conversion.
MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:LINESelected Sets or queries global input select lines.
MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel: Sets or queries global output edge qualifier source.
OUTEDGEQUALifier
MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTLOWPass: Sets or queries global output low pass filter frequency.
FREQ
MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTLOWPass: Sets or queries global output low pass filter order.
SPEC
MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTL2LTOL2N Sets or queries global output Line-to-Line to Line-to-Neutral Conversion.
MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel: Sets or queries global output select lines.
OUTLINESelected
MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTSOURCE Sets or queries global output source.
MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTWIRing Sets or queries the global output wiring.
MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:SOURCE Sets or queries global input source.
MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:WIRing Sets or queries the wiring configuration for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COVer Sets or queries the Calculate Over for the Power Quality measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: Sets or queries the custom limits file path for custom harmonics standard.
CUSTOMLIMITSFile
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CYCLemode Sets or queries cycle mode.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEQUALifier Sets or queries the Edge Qualifier source.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEQUALONE Sets or queries the measurement 1 input edge qualifier one source for Efficiency
measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEQUALTWO Sets or queries the measurement 1 output edge qualifier two source for Efficiency
measurement.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-49

Command groups

Table 2-35: IMDA Command Group (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: Sets or queries harmonics filter from order.
FILTERRANGEFROM
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTERRANGETO Sets or queries harmonics filter to order.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:LOWPass: Sets or queries local input low pass filter frequency.
FREQ
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:LOWPass: Sets or queries local input low pass filter order.
SPEC
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FREQ Sets or queries switching frequency for Switching Ripple measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FUNDCURRent Sets or queries the fundamental current value for IEC-Class C type harmonics
standard.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: Sets or queries the class type for the harmonics measurement.
HARMONICSCLass
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: Sets or queries harmonics source.
HARMONICSSOURce
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HARMONICSStd Sets or queries harmonics standard.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HARMONICSUNits Sets or queries harmonics units.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel: Sets or queries the local input and output configuration.
CONFIGuration
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel: Sets or queries local input Line-to-Line to Line-to-Neutral Conversion.
L2LTOL2N
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel: Sets or queries local input select lines.
LINESelected
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel: Sets or queries local output Line-to-Line to Line-to-Neutral Conversion.
OUTL2LTOL2N
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel: Sets or queries local output select lines.
OUTLINESelected
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel: Sets or queries the local output wiring.
OUTWIRing
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel: Sets or queries the IMDA source settings as global or local.
USEGLOBAL
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel: Sets or queries the local Input wiring.
WIRing
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HTORque Sets or queries the measurement High Torque value.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HVOLtage Sets or queries the measurement Torque High Voltage value.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:INPUTPOwer Sets or queries the input power value for IEC-Class C and Class D harmonics
standard.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LINESelected Sets or queries selected lines for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LTORque Sets or queries the measurement Low Torque value.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LVOLtage Sets or queries the measurement Torque Low Voltage value.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:EINDexz Sets or queries the specified mechanical Index Z source.

2-50 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-35: IMDA Command Group (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:GRATio Sets or queries the gear ratio for the specific measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:MUNits Sets or queries the specified mechanical measurement results units.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:PPAirs Sets or queries the number of pole pairs for the specific measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:PPRotation Sets or queries the specified pulses per rotation of the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:STYPe Sets or queries the local measurement sensor type.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:ODDEVen Sets or queries harmonics oddeven.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OFILters: Sets or returns the cut-off frequency value for a measurement.
LOWPass:FREQ
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OUTFILTers: Sets or returns low pass filter specification for a measurement.
LOWPass:SPEC
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OSANgle Sets or queries the specified measurement Offset angle.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: Sets or queries local output edge qualifier source.
OUTEDGEQUALifier
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OUTFILTers: Sets or queries the measurement output low pass filter frequency.
LOWPass:FREQ
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OUTFILTers: Sets or queries the measurement output low pass filter specification.
LOWPass:SPEC
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POWERFACtor Sets or queries the power factor value for IEC-Class C type harmonics standard.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SEQuence Sets or queries the sequence of hall edges.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: Sets or queries line frequency for Harmonics and Line Ripple frequency.
SIGNALFREQUEncy
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE Sets or queries local input source.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STYPe Sets or queries the source type.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP: Returns the mean value of the measurement for the current acquisition.
RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUNits Sets or queries the speed units for the specific measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TCONstant Sets or queries the measurement Torque Constant.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TMEThod Sets or queries the measurement Torque Method.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe Sets or queries the measurement type for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MECH:EINDexz Sets or queries the global mechanical Index Z source.
MEASUrement:MECH:GRATio Sets or queries the measurement gear ratio.
MEASUrement:MECH:MUNits Sets or queries the global mechanical measurement results units.
MEASUrement:MECH:PPAirs Sets or queries the measurement number of pole pairs.
MEASUrement:MECH:PPRotation Sets or queries the global pulses per rotation of the measurement.
MEASUrement:MECH:SOUrce<x> Sets or queries the global mechanical source of the specified source number.
MEASUrement:MECH:STYPe Sets or queries the measurement sensor type.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-51

Command groups

Mask command group

Mask commands compare incoming waveforms to standard or user-defined
masks. A mask is a set of polygonal regions on the screen. Unlike limit testing,
the inside of a mask is the region where waveform data would not normally fall.
Standards with eye patterns usually have three masks, but some have four.

Table 2-36: Mask commands

Command Description
EYEMASK:MASK<x>:COUNt:HITS? Returns the total number of hit violations for all segments in the specified eye diagram
mask test.
EYEMASK:MASK<x>:COUNt:SEG<y>:HITS? Returns the number of hit violations for the specified segment (area) in the specified
eye diagram mask test.
EYEMASK:MASK<x>:CREATor? Returns the name of the eye diagram plot that created the mask.
EYEMASK:MASK<x>:ENAbled Enables or disables eye mask testing in the specified plot.
EYEMASK:MASK<x>:MASKfile Sets or queries the current mask definition file name for the specified mask test.
EYEMASK:MASK<x>:MASKOffset:HORizontal: Returns the mask offset value in the specified mask in seconds.
AUTOfit?
EYEMASK:MASK<x>:TESt:SAMple:THReshold Sets or queries the total number of hit violations that will cause a mask test failure.
EYEMASK:MASK<x>:TESt:STATUS? Returns the mask hit test status for the specified mask test.
MASK:DELete Deletes all mask segments of the specified mask test.
MASK:MASK<x>:COUNT? Returns the total number of mask hits in all segments and the number of mask hits in
each individual mask segment for the specified mask test.
MASK:MASK<x>:COUNT:HITS? Returns the total number of mask hits in all mask segments for the specified mask test.
MASK:MASK<x>:DEFinedby Sets or queries whether the specified mask is defined by segments or tolerances.
MASK:MASK<x>:DISplay Sets or queries the display state of the mask used for the specified mask test.
MASK:MASK<x>:LIST? Queries the list of segments in the mask used by the specified mask test.
MASK:MASK<x>:SEG<x>:POINTS Sets or queries the X/Y coordinates of all points in the designated mask segment.
MASK:MASK<x>:SEG<x>COUNT:HITS? Returns the total number of mask hits in the specified mask segment of the specified
mask test.
MASK:MASK<x>:SOUrce Sets or queries analog source for the specified mask test.
MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:CTHReshold Sets or queries the number of consecutive waveform violations needed for the
specified mask test to change from PASS to FAIL.
MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:STATE Sets or queries state of the specified mask test.
MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:STATUS? Queries the status of the specified mask test.
MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:THReshold Sets or queries the number of waveform violations needed for the specified mask test
to change from PASS to FAIL.
MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:HABSolute Sets or queries the mask horizontal tolerance in absolute units of seconds.
MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:HORizontal Sets or queries the mask horizontal tolerance.

2-52 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-36: Mask commands (cont.)

Command Description
MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:UPDatenow Causes the tolerance mask to be recalculated with the current horizontal and vertical
tolerances.
MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:VABSolute Sets or queries the mask vertical tolerance in absolute units of the mask source.
MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:VERTical Sets or queries the mask vertical tolerance.
MASK:MASK<x>:TTYPe Sets or queries the type of tolerance values used when defining a tolerance mask.
MASK:TESt:WAVEforms Sets or queries the number of waveform acquisitions to test during mask testing.
RECAll:MASK Recalls a saved mask definition from a Mask File.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-53

Command groups

Math command group

Use the commands in the Math Command Group to create and define math
waveforms. Use the available math functions to define your math waveform.
The math waveform you create depends on sources listed in the math expression.
If you change these sources, the math waveforms you previously defined will be
affected.
Math expressions can be simple, containing no mathematical computation, such
as CH1, which specifies that a waveform shows the signal source of channel 1.
Math expressions can also be complex, consisting of 100 plus characters and
comprising many sources, functions, and operands.
The acquisition of a live waveform can stop for several reasons: You can turn off
the channel, stop the waveform (via Run/Stop from the Horiz/Acq menu), or stop
the trigger (via Run/Stop from the Trig menu). When you turn off the channel,
math continues and data is acquired but is not displayed. When you stop either the
waveform or the trigger, the math calculation stops, and the last math calculation
performed is displayed.
When a live waveform updates or a reference waveform is altered, math
waveforms containing those waveforms as sources are also updated to reflect the
changes. Also, sources must exist but do not need to be displayed to be used in
and to update math waveforms.

NOTE. Math commands are present once a math has been added.

Table 2-37: Math commands

Command Description
DISplay:GLObal:MATH<x>:STATE Sets or queries the global state of the specified math.
DISplay:SELect:MATH Sets or queries the overall selected math.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>: Sets or queries the state of the specified math waveform in the specified Waveform
STATE View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>: Sets or queries the vertical position in divisions of the specified math waveform.
VERTical:POSition
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>: Sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified math waveform.
VERTical:SCAle
MATH:ADDNew Adds the specified math.
MATHArbflt<x>:FILepath Sets the file path for a file of filter coefficients and reads the file.
MATH:DELete Deletes the specified math.
MATH:LIST? Lists all currently defined math waveforms.
MATH:MATH<x>:ARINC429A: Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for ARINC429A bus.
SUPPortedfields
MATH:MATH<x>:AUDIO:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for Audio bus.

2-54 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-37: Math commands (cont.)

Command Description
MATH:MATH<x>:AUTOETHERnet: Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for AUTOETHERnet
SUPPortedfields bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:AVG:MODE Sets or queries the math average mode flag.
MATH:MATH<x>:AVG:WEIGht Sets or queries the number of acquisitions at which the averaging algorithm will
begin exponential averaging.
MATH:MATH<x>:CAN:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for CAN bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:CXPI:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for CXPI bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:ESPI:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for ESPI bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:ETHERCAT: Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for ETHERCAT bus.
SUPPortedfields
MATH:MATH<x>:ETHERnet:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for ETHERnet bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:EUSB:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for EUSB bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:CFReq Sets or queries the filter cutoff frequency.
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:DELay Sets or queries the delay for all pass filter.
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:DESIgn Performs filter specific Apply, Abort, and Generate operations.
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:HCFReq Sets or queries the high cutoff frequency for bandpass or band stop filter.
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:INFo? Returns filter information output once user created filter.
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:LCFReq Sets or queries the low cutoff frequency for bandpass or band stop filter.
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:LOAD Loads the filter file.
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:LOAD:RESPonse Loads the filter responses and automatically apply filter option.
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:ORDer Sets or queries the filter order.
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:PRIPple Sets or queries the pass band ripple in the filter response.
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:RESPonse Specifies or returns the filter response.
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:ROFactor Sets or queries roll off factor for raised cosine or root raised cosine filter.
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SATTenuation Sets or queries the stop band attenuation in the filter response.
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SAVe Saves the filter file.
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SAVe:RESPonse Sets the filter response images to be saved while saving the filter file.
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SDEViation Sets or queries the standard deviation in Gaussian filter.
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SDURation Sets or queries the symbol duration for raised cosine or root raised cosine filter.
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SOURce Sets or queries color of the specified math filter source.
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SYMBols Sets or queries the symbol for raised cosine or root raised cosine filter.
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:TWIDth Sets or queries the filter transition width for Custom filter response
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:TYPe Specifies or returns the filter type.
MATH:MATH<x>:FLEXray:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for FLEXray bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:FUNCtion Sets or queries the basic math arithmetic function.
MATH:MATH<x>:I2C:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for I2C bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:I3C:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for I3C bus

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-55

Command groups

Table 2-37: Math commands (cont.)

Command Description
MATH:MATH<x>:INTERpolation Sets or queries whether sinc interpolation is enabled for math on bus source.
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:COLor Sets or queries color of the specified math's label.
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD Sets or queries bold state of the specified math label.
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic Sets or queries italic state of the specified math label.
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE Sets or queries font size of the specified math label.
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE Sets or queries font type of the specified math label.
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline Sets or queries the underline state of the specified math label.
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:XPOS Sets or queries the X screen offset where the math waveform label is displayed.
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:YPOS Sets or queries the Y screen offset where the math waveform label is displayed.
MATH:MATH<x>:DEFine Defines new waveforms using mathematical expressions.
MATH:MATH<x>:GATing Specifies or returns the gating setting.
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:NAMe Sets or queries the label string.
MATH:MATH<x>:LIN:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for LIN bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:MDIO:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for MDIO bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:MIL1553B:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for MIL1553B bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:ONEWIRe:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for ONEWIRe bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:PARallel:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for PARallel bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:PSIFIVe:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for PSIFIVe bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:RS232C:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for RS232C bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:SDLC:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for SDLC bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:SENT:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for SENT bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:SIGNeddata Sets or queries value to denote that bus field is decoded as signed/unsigned data
for math on bus source.
MATH:MATH<x>:SMBUS:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for SMBUS bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:SOUrce<x> Sets or queries the specified math source.
MATH:MATH<x>:SPACEWIRe: Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for SPACEWIRe bus.
SUPPortedfields
MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:HORZ Sets or queries the horizontal display scale of the spectral math waveform.
MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:MAG Sets or queries the units of the SpectralMag function in the specified math definition
string.
MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:PHASE Sets or queries the units of a SpectralPhase function in the specified math definition
string.
MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:SOUrce Sets or queries the specified spectral math source.
MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress Sets or queries whether suppression threshold for the specified math waveform is
enabled.
MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress:VALue Sets or queries in volts the value of suppression threshold of the specified math
waveform.
MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:TYPE Sets or queries the FFT type selected for spectral analysis.

2-56 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-37: Math commands (cont.)

Command Description
MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:UNWRap Sets or queries whether phase unwrap of the spectral analyzer output data is
enabled.
MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:UNWRap: Sets or queries in degrees the value of unwrap phase.
DEGrees
MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:WINdow Sets or queries the window function used to multiply the spectral analyzer input
data for the specified math waveform.
MATH:MATH<x>:SPI:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for SPI bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:SPMI:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for SPMI bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:SVID:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for SVID bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:TYPe Sets or queries the math type.
MATH:MATH<x>:USB:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for USB bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:VUNIT Sets or queries the math custom vertical units.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-57

Command groups

Measurement command group

Use the commands in the Measurement Command Group to control the automated
measurement system.
Measurement commands can set and query measurement parameters. You can
assign parameters, such as waveform sources and reference levels, differently
for each measurement.
Clock recovery, edge, filter, gating, population and range measurement commands
can be either global or per-measurement.
Global clock recovery commands are of the form
:MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:XXXX
Global edge commands are of the form :MEASUrement:XXXX
Global filter commands are of the form :MEASUrement:FILTers:XXXX
Global gating commands are of the form :MEASUrement:GATing:XXXX
Global population commands are of the form
:MEASUrement:POPUlation:XXXX
Global range commands are of the form :MEASUrement:MEASRange:XXXX
Reference levels for measurements can be global, per-measurement
or per-source. The default is global. Per-measurement settings are
used when local reference levels are enabled for the measurement with
the command :MEASUrement:MEAS?:GLOBalref 0. Per-source
settings are used when per-source settings are enabled with the
command :MEASUrement:REFLevels:TYPE PerSource and
per-source settings are selected for the measurement with the command
:MEASUrement:MEAS?:GLOBalref 0.

Global reference level commands are of the form

:MEASUrement:REFLevels:XXXX

Per-source reference level commands are of the form

:MEASUrement:CH1:REFLevels:XXXX
:MEASUrement:MATH1:REFLevels:XXXX

When there is a change in source type then the measurements should be re-added
to get valid results.
/* Add a reference slot on which to measure */
:REF:ADDNEW "REF1"
/* Set up the measurement parameters on the reference */
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:TYPE AMPLITUDE
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:SOURCE REF1
/* Load the new waveform file */
:RECALL:WAVEFORM "E:\waveform.wfm”,REF1
*OPC?
/* Wait for read from Output Queue. */
/* Take amplitude measurement */
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN?
/* change analog to digital waveform file */

2-58 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

:RECALL:WAVEFORM "E:\digital8.wfm”,REF1
*OPC?
/* Set up the measurement parameters on the reference
again*/
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:TYPE AMPLITUDE
/* Take amplitude measurement */
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN?

Table 2-38: Measurement commands

Command Description
CUSTOMTABle:ADDNew This command adds new custom results table.
CUSTOMTABle:DELete This command deletes the custom result(s) table that was added.
CUSTOMTABle:LIST? This command queries the list of custom result tables has been added.
MEASTABle:ADDNew Adds a new measurement results view table to the scope application.
MEASTABle:DELETE Removes the requested measurement results view table from the scope application.
MEASUrement? This command returns all measurement parameters.
MEASUrement:ADDMEAS This command adds a measurement.
MEASUrement:ADDNew Adds the specified measurement.
MEASUrement:ANNOTate This command sets or queries the annotation state for measurements.
MEASUrement:AUTOset Performs a specified autoset.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the falling
FALLHigh edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the falling
FALLLow edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the falling
FALLMid edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value of the hysteresis of the reference level when
HYSTeresis the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the rising
RISEHigh edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the rising
RISELow edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the rising
RISEMid edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the reference level type for the source.
TYPE
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:BASETop This command sets or queries the method used to calculate the TOP and BASE, used
to calculate reference levels for the measurement.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:METHod This command sets or queries the method used to calculate reference levels for
the source.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-59

Command groups

Table 2-38: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1% is
FALLHigh equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the falling edge when the
source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1% is
FALLLow equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling edge when the
source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1% is
FALLMid equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling edge when the
source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to MAX and 0%
HYSTeresis is equal to MIN) used to calculate the hysteresis of the reference level when the
source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1% is
RISEHigh equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the rising edge when the
source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1% is
RISELow equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the rising edge when the
source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1% is
RISEMid equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising edge when the
source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command specifies or queries the reference level percent type for the source.
TYPE
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:ADVanced: This command sets or queries the global advanced clock recovery method.
METHod
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries the global clock frequency used for fixed constant
CLOCKFrequency clock recovery.
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries the global clock multiplier used for explicit clock
CLOCKMultiplier recovery.
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries the global constant clock mode used for constant
CONSTCLOCKMODe clock recovery.
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:DAMPing This command sets or queries the global damping value used for PLL clock recovery.
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:DATAPath This command sets or queries the global file containing the data pattern used for
known data pattern clock recovery.
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:DATARate This command sets or queries the global nominal data bit rate used for nominal data
rate clock recovery.
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries the global explicit clock mode used for explicit clock
EXPLICITCLOCKMODe recovery.
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:JTFBandwidth This command sets or queries the global JTF bandwidth used for PLL clock recovery.

2-60 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-38: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries the global loop bandwidth used for PLL clock recovery.
LOOPBandwidth
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries how often the clock is calculated for constant clock
MEANAUTOCalculate recovery.
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:METHod This command sets or queries the global clock recovery method.
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:MODel This command sets or queries the global PLL clock recovery model used for PLL
clock recovery.
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries the global offset value used for explicit clock recovery.
NOMINALOFFset
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries the global offset type used for explicit clock recovery.
NOMINALOFFset:SELECTIONtype
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:STAndard This command sets or queries the global communications standard used for PLL
clock recovery.
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery: Sets the PLL clock recovery loop feedback time-constants such that the actual transfer
TDCOMPensation function matches closely to a mathematical filter polynomial.
MEASUrement:DELete The command deletes the specified measurement.
MEASUrement:DELETEALL Deletes all the active instances of measurements defined in the scope application.
MEASUrement:DIRacmodel This command sets or queries the dirac model used to separate random from
deterministic jitter for jitter measurements.
MEASUrement:DISPLAYUnits This command sets or queries the display units used for jitter summary measurements.
MEASUrement:EDGE<x> Sets or queries the type of the edge for the measurement.
MEASUrement:EYERENDER This command sets or queries the state of high-performance eye rendering for an
eye diagram.
MEASUrement:FILTers:BLANKingtime This command sets or queries the global filter blanking time.
MEASUrement:FILTers:HIGHPass:FREQ This command sets or queries the global high pass filter frequency.
MEASUrement:FILTers:HIGHPass:SPEC This command sets or queries the global high pass filter order.
MEASUrement:FILTers:LOWPass:FREQ This command sets or queries the global low pass filter cutoff frequency.
MEASUrement:FILTers:LOWPass:SPEC This command sets or queries the global low pass filter order.
MEASUrement:FILTers:RAMPtime This command sets or queries the global filter ramp time.
MEASUrement:GATing This command sets or queries the global gating type.
MEASUrement:GATing:ACTive This command sets or queries the global gating active level used for logic gating.
MEASUrement:GATing:ENDtime Sets or queries the end gate time for all measurements that use Global gating.
MEASUrement:GATing:HYSTeresis This command sets or queries the global gating hysteresis value used for logic gating.
MEASUrement:GATing:LOGICSource This command sets or queries the gating data source used for logic gating.
MEASUrement:GATing:MIDRef This command sets or queries the global gating mid ref value used for logic gating.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-61

Command groups

Table 2-38: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:GATing:SEARCHSource This command sets or queries the global gating search source used for logic gating.
MEASUrement:GATing:STARTtime Sets or queries the start gate time for all measurements that use Global gating.
MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:L2LTOL2N Enables the Line-to-Line to Line-to-Neutral Conversion.
MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:WIRing Sets or queries the wiring configuration for the measurement.
MEASUrement:INTERp This command sets or queries the interpolation mode used to locate edge crossings.
MEASUrement:JITTermodel This command sets or queries the model used to separate random from deterministic
jitter for jitter measurements.
MEASUrement:LIST? Lists all currently defined measurements.
MEASUrement:LOCKRJ Sets or queries the state of RJ locking.
MEASUrement:LOCKRJValue Sets or queries the RJ lock value.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the falling
FALLHigh edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the falling
FALLLow edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the falling
FALLMid edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value of the hysteresis of the reference level when
HYSTeresis the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the rising
RISEHigh edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the rising
RISELow edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the rising
RISEMid edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the reference level type for the source.
TYPE
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:BASETop This command sets or queries the method used to calculate the TOP and BASE used
to calculate reference levels for the source.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:METHod This command sets or queries the method used to calculate reference levels for
the source.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1% is
FALLHigh equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the falling edge when the
source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1% is
FALLLow equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling edge when the
source ref level method is set to percent.

2-62 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-38: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1% is
FALLMid equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling edge when the
source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to MAX and 0%
HYSTeresis is equal to MIN) used to calculate the hysteresis of the reference level when the
source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1% is
RISEHigh equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the rising edge when the
source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1% is
RISELow equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the rising edge when the
source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1% is
RISEMid equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising edge when the
source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command specifies or queries the reference level percent type for the source.
TYPE
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:ABANdwidth Sets or queries the analysis bandwidth for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:ACHANnels Sets or queries the number of adjacent channels for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:AMEThod Sets or queries the analysis method used to compute eye width or eye height.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BER This command sets or queries the BER value for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BER:TARGETBER This command sets or queries the target BER value for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BIN This command sets or queries the bin count for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITAbsolute Sets or queries the bit center as an absolute value.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITCfgmode This command sets or queries whether the measurement returns the mean or mode
statistic result when the measurement type is bit amplitude/high/low.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITEnd This command sets or queries the bit end as a percentage of the unit interval.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITPcnt This command sets or queries the bit center as a percentage of the unit interval.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITSTart This command sets or queries the bit start as a percentage of the unit interval.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITType This command sets or queries the bit type for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BURSTEDGTYPe This command sets or queries the burst edge type for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BVOLTage Sets or returns the bias voltage for WBG measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: This query-only command returns the maximum cycle-cycle value for the specified
ALLAcqs:MAXimum? measurement for all acquisitions.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: This query-only command returns the mean cycle-cycle value for the specified
ALLAcqs:MEAN? measurement for all acquisitions.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-63

Command groups

Table 2-38: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: This query-only command returns the minimum cycle-cycle value for the specified
ALLAcqs:MINimum? measurement for all acquisitions.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: This query-only command returns the peak to peak cycle-cycle statistic for the
ALLAcqs:PK2PK? specified measurement for all acquisitions.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: This query-only command returns the population of all cycle-cycle statistics for the
ALLAcqs:POPUlation? specified measurement for all acquisitions accumulated since statistics were last reset.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: This query-only command returns the standard deviation cycle-cycle for the specified
ALLAcqs:STDDev? measurement for all acquisitions.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: This query-only command returns the maximum cycle-cycle value for the specified
CURRentacq:MAXimum? measurement for the current acquisition.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: This query-only command returns the mean cycle-cycle value for the specified
CURRentacq:MEAN? measurement for the current acquisition.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: This query-only command returns the minimum cycle-cycle value for the specified
CURRentacq:MINimum? measurement for the current acquisition.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: This query-only command returns the peak to peak cycle-cycle statistic for the
CURRentacq:PK2PK? specified measurement for the current acquisition.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: This query-only command returns the population of the cycle-cycle statistics for the
CURRentacq:POPUlation? specified measurement for the current acquisition.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: This query-only command returns the standard deviation cycle-cycle for the specified
CURRentacq:STDDev? measurement for the current acquisition.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries the advanced clock recovery method when advanced
ADVanced:METHod clock recovery is used for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries the clock frequency used when fixed constant clock
CLOCKFrequency recovery is used for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries the clock multiplier used when explicit clock recovery
CLOCKMultiplier is used for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries the constant clock mode used when constant clock
CONSTCLOCKMODe recovery is used for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries the damping value used when PLL clock recovery
DAMPing is used for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries the file containing the data pattern used when known
DATAPath data pattern clock recovery is used for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries the nominal data bit rate when nominal data rate clock
DATARate recovery is used for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries the explicit clock mode used when explicit clock
EXPLICITCLOCKMODe recovery is used for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries the clock recovery settings global flag for the
GLOBal measurement.

2-64 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-38: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries the JTF bandwidth used when PLL clock recovery
JTFBandwidth is used for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries the loop bandwidth used when PLL clock recovery
LOOPBandwidth is used for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries how often the clock is calculated when constant clock
MEANAUTOCalculate recovery is used for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries the clock recovery method for the measurement.
METHod
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries the PLL clock recovery model used when PLL clock
MODel recovery is used for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries the offset value used when explicit clock recovery
NOMINALOFFset is used for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries the offset type used when explicit clock recovery is
NOMINALOFFset:SELECTIONtype used for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery: This command sets or queries the communications standard when PLL clock recovery
STAndard is used for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery: sets the PLL clock recovery loop feedback time-constants such that the actual transfer
TDCOMPensation function matches closely to a mathematical filter polynomial.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COMMONMode: This command sets or queries whether a filter is used for the measurement when the
FILTers:STATE measurement type is AC common mode.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COMMONMode: Sets or queries the number of sources for the measurement when the measurement
SOURCEs type is AC common mode.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COVer Sets or queries the Calculate Over for the Power Quality measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CPWIDTh Sets or queries the channel power width for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CSPACing Sets or queries the channel spacing for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CUSTOMLIMITSFile Sets and queries the custom limits file path for custom harmonics standard.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CYCLemode This command sets or queries the cycle mode for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DBDown Sets or queries the dB down value for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x> This command sets or queries the 'to edge' type when EDGE? is EDGE1 and the
'from edge' type when EDGE? is EDG2, for the measurement when the measurement
type is DELAY.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DISPlaystat:ENABle Turns on and off the display of statistics in measurement badges.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGE<x> This command sets or queries the type of the specified edge, rise or fall, for the
measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEIncre This command sets or queries the edge increment value for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEQUALifier Sets and queries the Edge Qualifier source.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-65

Command groups

Table 2-38: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEQUALONE Set and queries the measurement 1 input edge qualifier one source for Efficiency
measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEQUALTWO Sets and queries the measurement 1 output edge qualifier two source for Efficiency
measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:FROMLevel This command sets or queries the 'from level' edge for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:LEVel This sets or queries the level type for the 'time outside level' measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES: This command sets or queries the lower frequency for the measurement when the
LOWERFREQuency measurement type is phase noise. Lower frequencies are ignored.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:N The command sets or queries the number of accumulation cycles for the measurement
when the measurement type is nperiod.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES: This command sets or queries the slew rate method for the measurement.
SLEWRATEMethod
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:TOLevel This command sets or queries the 'to level' edge for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES: This command sets or queries the upper frequency for the measurement when the
UPPERFREQuency measurement type is phase noise. Higher frequencies are ignored.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EEQUal Turns on or off the edge qualifier settings as input waveform to measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EINDuctance Sets or returns the effective inductance for WBG measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EINTerpolation Sets or queries whether dot mode eye diagram is enabled.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EXTENDuis Sets or returns number of UIs considered for analysis of eye width or eye height
measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EYERender Sets or queries the eye rendering method.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FAILCount? Returns the number of measurement failures, if applicable, for the selected measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: This command sets or queries harmonics filter from order.
FILTERRANGEFROM
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTERRANGETO This command sets or queries harmonics filter to order.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers: This command sets or queries the filter blanking time for the measurement.
BLANKingtime
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:GLOBal This command sets or queries the global flag for filter settings for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:HIGHPass: This command sets or queries the high pass filter frequency for the measurement.
FREQ
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:HIGHPass: This command sets or queries the high pass filter order for the measurement.
SPEC
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:LOWPass: This command sets or queries the low pass filter cutoff frequency for the measurement.
FREQ
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:LOWPass: This command sets or queries the low pass filter order for the measurement.
SPEC
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:RAMPtime This command sets or queries the filter ramp time for the measurement.

2-66 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-38: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FORDer Sets or returns the differential filter order for WBG measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FPARAmeter Sets or queries the roll off factor for the RRC filter in the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FREQ Sets or queries switching frequency for Switching Ripple measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMedge This command sets or queries the 'from edge' type for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: This command sets or queries the 'from edge' search direction for the measurement.
FROMEDGESEARCHDIRect
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol: This command sets or queries the DDR digital measurement logic 1 source From
LOGIC2SOUrce symbol.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol: This command sets or queries the DDR digital measurement logic 2 source From
LOGIC3SOUrce symbol.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol: This command sets or queries the DDR digital measurement logic 3 source From
LOGIC4SOUrce symbol.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol: This command sets or queries the DDR digital measurement logic 4 source From
LOGIC5SOUrce symbol.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol: This command sets or queries the DDR digital measurement From Symbol
MEASUREAT MeasureAT value.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FTYPe Sets or returns whether the RRC filter is enabled or not.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FUNDCURRent Sets and queries the fundamental current value for IEC-Class C type harmonics
standard.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing This command sets or queries the gating type for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:ACTive This command sets or queries the gating active level when the gating type is logic.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:ENDtime Sets or queries the end gate time for the measurement when using Local gating.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:GLOBal This command sets or queries the gating settings global flag.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:HYSTeresis This command sets or queries the gating hysteresis value when the gating type is
logic.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing: This command sets or queries the gating data source when the gating type is logic.
LOGICSource
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:MIDRef This command sets or queries the gating mid ref value when the gating type is logic.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing: This command sets or queries the gating search source when the gating type is
SEARCHSource search.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:STARTtime Sets or queries the start gate time for the measurement when using Local gating.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GLOBalref This command sets or queries the reference levels global flag for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HARMONICSCLass Sets and queries the class type for the harmonics measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: Sets or queries harmonics source.
HARMONICSSOURce
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HARMONICSStd Sets or queries harmonics standard.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-67

Command groups

Table 2-38: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HARMONICSUNits Sets or queries harmonics units.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHREFVoltage Sets or queries the high reference voltage value for the 'time outside level'
measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HLEVel:OUTPut: Turns on or off output global settings for measurement
UGLobal
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:IDLETime Sets or queries the idle time for the measurement when the measurement type
is burst width.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:INPUTPOwer Sets and queries the input power value for IEC-Class C and Class D harmonics
standard.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary: This command sets or queries whether DCD is included in the jitter summary for
DCD the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary: This command sets or queries whether DDJ is included in the jitter summary for
DDJ the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary: This command sets or queries whether DJ-dd is included in the jitter summary for
DJDD the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary: This command sets or queries whether EyeWidth@BER is included in the jitter
EYEWIDTHBER summary for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary: This command sets or queries whether NPJ is included in the jitter summary for the
NPJ measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:PJ This command sets or queries whether PJ is included in the jitter summary for the
measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary: This command sets or queries whether RJ-dd is included in the jitter summary for
RJDD the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:TIE This command sets or queries whether TIE is included in the jitter summary for the
measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary: This command sets or queries whether TJ@BER is included in the jitter summary for
TJBER the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LABel This command sets or queries the label for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LINESelected Sets or queries selected lines for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LOWREFVoltage This command sets or queries the low reference voltage value for the 'time outside
level' measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LTYPe Sets or returns the value for the level type as auto or custom.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LUNITs Sets or returns the value for the level units as percentage or absolute.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXCUrrent Sets or returns the maximum current.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXCycle Sets or queries the maximum cycle value for the DDRTERRN and DDRTERRMN
measurements.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXGVoltage Sets or returns the maximum gate voltage.

2-68 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-38: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEASRange: Sets or queries the range settings global flag for the measurement.
GLOBal
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEASRange:MAX Sets or queries the range maximum value for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEASRange:MIN Sets or queries the range minimum value for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEASRange:STATE Sets or queries the range state for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:GRATio Sets or queries the gear ratio for the specific measurement
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:PPAirs Sets or queries the number of pole pairs for the specific measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:STYPe Sets or queries the local measurement sensor type.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINCycle Sets or queries the minimum cycle value for the DDRTERRN and DDRTERRMN
measurements.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OBWMethod Sets or queries the RF measurement Occupied Bandwidth method type.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:ODDEVen Sets or queries harmonics oddeven.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OUTFILTers: Sets and queries the measurement output low pass filter frequency cutoff frequency
LOWPass:FREQ on the scope.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OUTFILTers: Sets and queries the measurement output low pass filter specification filter order
LOWPass:SPEC on the scope.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILENabled Sets or returns the pass/fail test enable status.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILHIGHlimit Sets or returns the high limit for a measurement test.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILLIMit Sets or returns the limit for a measurement test.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILLOWlimit Sets or returns the low limit for a measurement test.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILMARgin Sets or returns the allowed margin for limit comparisons for all pass/fail checks
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILWHEN Sets or returns the condition on which a measurement test fails.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: This command sets or queries the pattern detection type for the measurement.
PATTERNDETECTION
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PATTERNLENgth This command sets or queries the pattern length for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PATTERNTYPe This command sets or queries the pattern type for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PCOUNt Sets or returns number of pulses.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PERFREQ:EDGE This command sets or queries the edge type of a Period/Frequency measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PFREquency Sets or returns the PJ max frequency value of PSIJ measurement
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POLarity This command sets or queries the polarity for the measurement when the
measurement type is burst width.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POPower Sets or queries the Percentage Power to be measured for the Occupied Bandwidth
measurement
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POPUlation:GLOBal This command sets or queries the population settings global flag.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-69

Command groups

Table 2-38: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POPUlation:LIMIT: This command sets or queries the population limit state for the measurement.
STATE
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POPUlation:LIMIT: This command sets or queries the population limit value for the measurement.
VALue
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POWERFACtor Set and queries the power factor value for IEC-Class C type harmonics standard.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PREGion Sets or returns pulse region for measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PRESistance Sets or returns the probe resistance for WBG measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PTHReshold Sets or returns the PJ threshold value of PSIJ measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PWIDth Sets or returns pulse width.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REDGe Turns on or off the Refine edge on qualifier.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels: This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the falling
ABSolute:FALLHigh edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the falling
ABSolute:FALLLow edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the falling
ABSolute:FALLMid edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the value of the hysteresis of the reference level when
ABSolute:HYSTeresis the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the rising
ABSolute:RISEHigh edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the rising
ABSolute:RISELow edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the rising
ABSolute:RISEMid edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the reference level type for the measurement.
ABSolute:TYPE
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the method used to calculate the TOP and BASE used
BASETop to calculate reference levels for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the method used to calculate reference levels for
METHod the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1% is
PERCent:FALLHigh equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the falling edge when
the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1%
PERCent:FALLLow is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the falling edge when
the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

2-70 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-38: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1%
PERCent:FALLMid is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling edge when
the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to MAX and 1%
PERCent:HYSTeresis is equal to MIN) used to calculate the hysteresis of the reference level when the
measurement's ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1%
PERCent:RISEHigh is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the rising edge when
the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1%
PERCent:RISELow is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the rising edge when
the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1%
PERCent:RISEMid is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising edge when
the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command specifies or queries the reference level percent type for the
PERCent:TYPE measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFMode This command sets or queries the reference level mode for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFVoltage This command sets or queries the reference voltage value for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs: This command is identical to that described in the DPOJet programmer manual.
MAXimum?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs: This command is identical to that described in the DPOJet programmer manual.
MEAN?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs: This command is identical to that described in the DPOJet programmer manual.
MINimum?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs: This command is identical to that described in the DPOJet programmer manual.
PK2PK?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs: This command is identical to that described in the DPOJet programmer manual.
POPUlation?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs: This command is identical to that described in the DPOJet programmer manual.
STDDev?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts: This query-only command returns the maximum value found for the specified
CURRentacq:MAXimum? measurement since the last statistical reset.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts: This query-only command returns the mean value for the measurement for the current
CURRentacq:MEAN? acquisition.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts: This query-only command returns the minimum value found for the specified
CURRentacq:MINimum? measurement since the last statistical reset.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts: This query-only command returns the peak-to-peak value for the specified
CURRentacq:PK2PK? measurement for the current acquisition.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-71

Command groups

Table 2-38: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts: This query-only command returns the population for the specified measurement for
CURRentacq:POPUlation? the current acquisition.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts: This query-only command returns the standard deviation for the specified
CURRentacq:STDDev? measurement for all acquisitions accumulated since statistics were last reset.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory: Returns the maximum value for the specified measurement for each acquisition in
MAXimum? the history.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory: Returns the mean value for the specified measurement for each acquisition in the
MEAN? history
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory: Returns the minimum value for the specified measurement for each acquisition
MINimum? in the history.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory: Returns the peak-to-peak value for the specified measurement for each acquisition
PK2PK? in the history.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory: Returns the population value for the specified measurement for each acquisition
POPUlation? in the history.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory: Returns the standard deviation value for the specified measurement for each
STDDev? acquisition in the history.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RFREquency Sets or returns the center frequency value of PSIJ measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RRANGE Sets or returns the span value of PSIJ measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SEQuence Sets or queries the sequence of hall edges
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SIGNALFREQUEncy Sets or queries line frequency for Harmonics and Line Ripple frequency.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SIGNALType Sets or queries the signal type of source 1 for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SLABs Sets or returns the value for the start level in absolute.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SLPCt Sets or returns the value for the start level in percentage.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SLTYpe Sets or returns the start level source type.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SMOOTHINGFILTER Sets and queries the status of smoothing filter.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x> This command sets or queries the measurement source.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SRATe Sets or queries the symbol rate for the RRC filter in the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SSC:NOMinalfreq This command sets or queries the user-defined frequency for the measurement when
the measurement type is SSC.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SSC:NOMinalfreq: This command sets or queries the frequency detection type for the measurement
SELECTIONtype when the measurement type is SSC.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATUS? Returns the pass fail status, if applicable, for the selected measurement
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STLABs Sets or returns the value for the stop level in absolute.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STLPct Sets or returns the value for the stop level in percentage.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STYPe Sets or returns the stop level source type.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUNits Sets or queries the speed units for the specific measurement.

2-72 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-38: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TCKAVG This command sets or queries the average clock period value used in DDR
measurements.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TIMINGMode This command sets or queries the Timing mode for the specified DDR measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TLEVel Sets or queries whether histogram center is percentage relative to unit amplitude or
an absolute value, for eye height measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOEdge This command sets or queries the 'to edge' type for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: This command sets or queries the 'to edge' search direction for the measurement.
TOEDGESEARCHDIRect
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol: This command sets or queries the DDR digital measurement logic 1 source To Symbol.
LOGIC2SOUrce
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol: This command sets or queries the DDR digital measurement logic 2 source To Symbol.
LOGIC3SOUrce
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol: This command sets or queries the DDR digital measurement logic 3 source To Symbol.
LOGIC4SOUrce
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol: This command sets or queries the DDR digital measurement logic 4 source To Symbol.
LOGIC5SOUrce
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol: This command sets or queries the DDR digital measurement ToSymbol MeasureAT
MEASUREAT value.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TRANSition This command sets or queries the transition edges flag for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe Sets or queries the measurement type.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VLEVel Sets or queries whether histogram center is percentage relative to unit interval or an
absolute value for eye width measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:AFGaddress Sets or returns the AFG address of external AFG connected for WBG measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:AFGSetup Executes AFG test connection or once AFG connection succeeded, Run will setup
configuration on connected AFG.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:CSTatus? Returns the AFG test connection status.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:GTYPe Sets or returns the generator type for WBG measurements.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:HIGH Sets or returns the high voltage value of AFG for WBG measurements.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:LOAD Sets or returns the load type of AFG for WBG measurements.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:LOW Sets or returns the low voltage value of AFG for WBG measurements.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:NPULs Sets or returns the number of pulse of AFG for WBG measurements.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:PG<x>Val Sets or returns the pulse gap of AFG for WBG measurements.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:PW<x>Val Sets or returns the pulse width of AFG for WBG measurements.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:TIMer Sets or returns the trigger interval of AFG for WBG measurements
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WIDTh Sets or queries the histogram width in terms of percentage.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WINDOWLENgth This command sets or queries the window length for the measurement.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-73

Command groups

Table 2-38: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:XUNIT? Returns the horizontal scale units of the specified measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:YUNIT? Returns the vertical scale units of the specified measurement.
MEASUrement:MEASRange:MAX This command sets or queries the global range maximum value.
MEASUrement:MEASRange:MIN This command sets or queries the global range minimum value.
MEASUrement:MEASRange:STATE Sets or queries the global range state.
MEASUrement:MECH:GRATio Sets or queries the measurement gear ratio.
MEASUrement:MECH:PPAirs Sets or queries the measurement number of pole pairs.
MEASUrement:MECH:SOUrce<x> Sets or queries the global mechanical source of the specified source number.
MEASUrement:MECH:STYPe Sets or queries the measurement sensor type.
MEASUrement:MINUI This command sets or queries the minimum number of unit intervals required for
BUJ analysis.
MEASUrement:POPUlation:LIMIT:STATE This command sets or queries the global population limit state.
MEASUrement:POPUlation:LIMIT:VALue This command sets or queries the global population limit value.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh Sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the falling edge.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow Sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the falling edge.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid Sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the falling edge.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute: Sets or queries the value of the hysteresis of the reference level.
HYSTeresis
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh Sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the rising edge.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow Sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the rising edge.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid Sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the rising edge.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE Sets or queries the reference level type.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:BASETop Sets or queries the method used to calculate the TOP and BASE, used to calculate
reference levels.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:JITTERMODE Sets or queries how often reference levels are calculated on Jitter measurements.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:METHod Sets or queries the method used to calculate reference levels.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:MODE This command sets or queries how often reference levels are calculated.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the high reference level of the falling
edge.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling
edge.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling
edge.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent: Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the hysteresis of the reference level.
HYSTeresis

2-74 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-38: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the high reference level of the rising
edge.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the low reference level of the rising
edge.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising
edge.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE Sets or queries the reference level percent type.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:TYPE This command sets or queries the shared reference level method used for sources
of measurement calculations.
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: Sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the falling edge.
FALLHigh
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: Sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the falling edge.
FALLLow
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: Sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the falling edge.
FALLMid
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: Sets or queries the value of the hysteresis of the reference level.
HYSTeresis
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: Sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the rising edge.
RISEHigh
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: Sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the rising edge.
RISELow
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: Sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the rising edge.
RISEMid
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: Sets or queries the reference level type.
TYPE
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:BASETop Sets or queries the method used to calculate the TOP and BASE, used to calculate
reference levels.
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:METHod Sets or queries the method used to calculate reference levels.
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the high reference level of the falling
FALLHigh edge.
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the low reference level of the falling
FALLLow edge.
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling
FALLMid edge.
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the hysteresis of the reference level.
HYSTeresis
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the high reference level of the rising
RISEHigh edge.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-75

Command groups

Table 2-38: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the low reference level of the rising
RISELow edge.
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising
RISEMid edge.
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: Sets or queries the reference level percent type.
TYPE
MEASUrement:RESUlts:HISTory:STARt Sets or queries the starting acquisition number for transferring measurement history
results.
MEASUrement:RESUlts:HISTory:STOP Sets or queries the last acquisition number that will be transferred for measurement
history results
MEASUrement:STATIstics:CYCLEMode This command sets or queries whether cycle-cycle statistics are calculated for all
measurements.
MEASUrement:WBG:PDEVice This command sets or returns the type of the Power device.

2-76 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Miscellaneous command group

Miscellaneous commands do not fit into other categories.
Several commands and queries are common to all devices. The
488.2-1987 standard defines these commands. The common commands begin
with an asterisk (*) character.

Table 2-39: Miscellaneous commands

Command Description
APPLication:ACTivate Starts the application specified in the string. For legacy TekExpress applications.
AUTOSAVEPITIMEOUT Sets or queries the idle time from the programmable interface before auto-save
occurs.
AUTOSAVEUITIMEOUT Sets or queries the idle time from the user interface before auto-save occurs.
AUTOSet Sets or queries the vertical, horizontal, and trigger controls of the instrument to
automatically acquire and display the selected waveform.
AUTOSet:ACQuisition:ENAble Sets or queries the Autoset acquisition setting adjustment.
AUTOSet:ENAble Sets or queries the Autoset enable/disable mode.
AUTOSet:HORizontal:ENAble Sets or queries Autoset's adjustment of horizontal settings.
AUTOSet:TRIGger:ENAble Sets or queries Autoset's adjustment of trigger settings.
AUTOSet:VERTical:ENAble sets or queries Autoset's adjustment of vertical settings.
AUTOSet:VERTical:OPTIMize Sets or queries which vertical settings Autoset will optimize when the display mode
is set to Overlay mode.
AUXout:EDGE Sets or queries the direction in which the trigger output signal will transition when a
trigger occurs.
AUXout:SOUrce Sets or queries the trigger source at the BNC connection.
CLEAR Clears acquisitions, measurements, and waveforms.
CONNected:REQUested:STATus Sets the status of the Connected Scope Preference feature.
CONNected:STATus? Returns the status of the Connected Scope Preference feature.
CONNected:USAGe:TRack:REQUested: Sets the tracking usage status of the Connected Scope Preference feature.
STATus
CONNected:USAGe:TRack:STATus? Returns the tracking usage status of the Connected Scope Preference feature.
DATE? Queries the date that the instrument displays.
*DDT Sets or queries the commands that will be executed by the group execute trigger.
FPAnel:PRESS Emulates a button press.
FPAnel:TURN Emulates a knob turn.
HEADer Sets or queries the Response Header Enable State.
ID? Returns identifying information about the instrument and its firmware.
*IDN? Returns the instrument identification code.
LICense? Queries all license parameters.
LICense:APPID? Returns a comma-separated list of the active application IDs.
LICense:COUNt? Returns a count of the number of active licenses installed.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-77

Command groups

Table 2-39: Miscellaneous commands (cont.)

Command Description
LICense:ERRor? This query-only command prompts the instrument to return all events and their
messages (delimited by commas), and removes the returned events from the Event
Queue (alias for ALLEV?).
LICense:GMT? Returns the GMT time in ISO 8601 format, the local date, 24 hour time and
time-zone offset.
LICense:HID? Returns the instrument HostID unique identifier.
LICense:INSTall Accepts a block data license and installs it on the instrument.
LICense:ITEM? Returns the details pertaining to a specific license.
LICense:LIST? Returns the active license nomenclatures as a comma-separated list of strings.
LICense:VALidate? Accepts a license nomenclature as an argument and returns the status of the
license.
LICense:UNINSTALL? Returns the exit license information for the user to return to their TekAMS account.
LOCk Sets or queries the front panel and touchscreen lock state.
*LRN? Returns a listing of instrument settings.
MAINWindow:BADGe:BRINgtoview Makes a specified badge visible.
MAINWindow:FONTSize Sets the font size for UI text elements.
MAINWindow:RRBDisplaystate Sets the display state of the Results readout bar to ON (displayed) or OFF (not
displayed).
NEWpass Changes the password for user protected data.
PASSWord Provides access for changing user protected data.
PAUSe Causes the interface to pause the specified number of seconds before processing
any other commands.
PILOGger:FILEName Sets or queries the location where the programmatic interface command log will
be saved.
PILOGger:STATE Sets or queries the state of the programmatic interface command log.
REM Specifies a comment which is ignored by the instrument.
ROSc:SOUrce Selects or queries the selected source for the time base reference oscillator.
ROSc:STATE? Returns whether the time base reference oscillator is locked.
SCOPEApp REBOOT Reboots the scope.
SET? Returns a listing of instrument settings.
SOCKETServer:ENAble Enables or disables the socket server which supports a telnet or other TCPIP socket
connection to send commands and queries to the instrument.
SOCKETServer:PORT Sets the TCPIP port for the socket server connection.
SOCKETServer:PROTOCol Sets or queries the protocol for the socket server.
TEKSecure Initializes both waveform and setup memories.
TIMe Queries the time displayed by the instrument.
TIMe:ZONe Sets the time zone to the one specified.
TIMe:ZONe:UTCDELTa Sets or queries the time zone using the difference between the desired time zone
and UTC.

2-78 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-39: Miscellaneous commands (cont.)

Command Description
TOTaluptime? Returns the total number of hours the instrument has been turned on since the NV
memory was last programmed.
TOUCHSCReen:STATe Sets or queries the enabled state of the touch screen.
*TRG Performs the group execute trigger (GET).
*TST? Tests the interface and returns status.
UNDO Reverts the scope settings to a state before the previous command or user interface
action.
UNLock Unlocks front panel controls.
USBDevice:CONFigure Used to configure the rear USB port to be off or enabled as a USBTMC device.
VERBose Sets or queries the verbose state.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-79

Command groups

Plot command group

Plot commands let you select the type and control the appearance of your plots.

Table 2-40: Plot commands

Command Description
PLOT:ADDNew Adds the specified plot.
PLOT:DELete Deletes the specified plot.
PLOT:LIST? Lists all currently defined plots.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:BATHtub:BER Sets or queries the bathtub BER value.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:BATHtub:XAXISUnits Sets or queries the X-Axis unit, either unit intervals or seconds.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:BITType Sets or queries the bit type to display for the specified eye diagram plot.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:EINTerpolation Sets or queries whether dot mode eye diagram is enabled.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:EXPORTRaw? Returns a binary stream of double values containing the x,y and hits value.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:EXTENDuis Sets or queries number of UIs surrounding the eye boundary UIs that are used
for fast eye rendering.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:EYERender Sets or queries the eye rendering method for the specified plot.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:IMDA:MEAS Sets or returns the measurement selection of trend plot and acq trend plot.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:IMDAPLOTDisplay Sets or returns the IMDA time trend and acq trend plot display configuration.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:COLor Sets or queries the color of the specified trend label.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD Sets or queries the bold state of the specified trend label.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic Sets or queries the italic state of the specified trend label.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE Sets or queries the font size of the specified trend label.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE Sets or queries the font type of the specified trend label.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline Sets or queries the underline state of the specified trend label.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:NAMe Sets or queries the specified trend's label.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:XPOS Sets or queries the x-position of the specified trend label.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:YPOS Sets or queries the y-position of the specified trend label.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASK? Returns the name of the mask test associated with the specified eye diagram plot.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASKOffset:HORizontal: Enables or disables eye mask autofit in the specified plot.
AUTOfit
PLOT:PLOT<x>:NUMBins Sets or queries the current histogram resolution.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASKOffset:PERCENTui: Sets or queries the allowed range for the mask to move in the left direction.
FROM
PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASKOffset:PERCENTui: Sets or queries the allowed range for the mask to move in the right direction.
TO
PLOT:PLOT<x>:PTYPe Sets or returns the phasor type of the phasor diagram plot.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:SOUrce<x> Sets or queries the measurement source.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:SPECtrum:BASE Sets or queries the spectrum base. Undefined for non-spectrum plots.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:SPECtrum:DYNRange Sets or queries the dynamic range value.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:TYPe Sets or queries the current plot type for the selected plot.

2-80 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Power command group

Table 2-41: Power commands
Command Description
PLOT:PLOT<x>:INTerpolate Turns on or off the interpolation state for SOA plot.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:TRESponse:RTYPe Sets the plot response type.
POWer:ADDNew Adds the specified power measurement badge.
POWer:DELete Deletes the specified power measurement badge.
POWer:POWer<x>:AUTOSet Executes power autoset for the specified power measurement badge.
POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE: Sets or queries the generator amplitude value of the specified configuration step for the Control
AMP<x>Val Loop Response power measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE: Sets or queries the amplitude mode for the Control Loop Response power measurement.
AMPMode
POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE: Sets or queries the Analysis Method for Control Loop Response measurement.
ANALYSISMethod
POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE: Enables Auto RBW computation.
AUTORbw
POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE: Queries connection status to the external generator used with the specified Control Loop
CONNECTSTATus? Response power measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE: Sets or queries the constant amplitude voltage for the Control Loop Response power
CONSTAMPlitude measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE: Sets or queries the generator frequency value of the specified configuration step for the Control
FREQ<x>Val Loop Response power measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE: Sets or queries the generator source used to send stimulus signals to the DUT, for the Control
GENerator Loop Response power measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE: Sets or queries the generator source for the specified Control Loop Response power
GENerator measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE: Sets or queries the IP address of the external generator to be used with the specified Control
GENIPADDress Loop Response measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE: Sets or queries the vertical termination impedance for the Control Loop Response power
IMPEDance measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE: Sets or queries the input source for the Control Loop Response power measurement.
INPUTSOurce
POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE: Sets or returns the measure on for the control loop response, PSRR or impedance measurement.
MON
POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE: Sets or queries the output source for the Control Loop Response power measurement.
OUTPUTSOurce
POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE: Sets or queries the points per decade (PPD) value for the Control Loop Response power
PPD measurement.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-81

Command groups

Table 2-41: Power commands (cont.)

Command Description
POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE: Sets or queries the start frequency value for the Control Loop Response power measurement.
STARTFREQuency
POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE: Sets or queries the stop frequency value for the Control Loop Response power measurement.
STOPFREQuency
POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE: Tests the connection to the external generator used with the specified Control Loop Response
TESTCONNection power measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEAmp: Sets or queries the input source for cycle amplitude measurement of the specified power
INPUTSOurce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEBase: Sets or queries the input source for cycle base measurement of the specified power measurement
INPUTSOurce number.
POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEMAX: Sets or queries the input source for cycle maximum measurement of the specified power
INPUTSOurce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEMin: Sets or queries the input source for cycle minimum measurement of the specified power
INPUTSOurce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEPKPK: Sets or queries the input source for cycle peak-to-peak measurement of the specified power
INPUTSOurce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLETop: Sets or queries the input source for cycle top measurement of the specified power measurement
INPUTSOurce number.
POWer:POWer<x>:DIDT: Sets or queries the input source for di/dt measurement of the specified power measurement
INPUTSOurce number.
POWer:POWer<x>:DIDT: Sets or queries the edge type for di/dt measurement of the specified power measurement number.
SOURCEEDGEType
POWer:POWer<x>:DVDT: Sets or queries the input source for dv/dt measurement of the specified power measurement
INPUTSOurce number.
POWer:POWer<x>:DVDT: Sets or queries the edge type for dv/dt measurement of the specified power measurement
SOURCEEDGEType number.
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: Sets or queries the input type (AC or DC) for efficiency measurement of the specified power
INPUTType measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: Sets or queries the output 1 current source for efficiency measurement of the specified power
IOUT1SOUrce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: Sets or queries the output 2 current source for efficiency measurement of the specified power
IOUT2SOUrce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: Sets or queries the output 3 current source for efficiency measurement of the specified power
IOUT3SOUrce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: Sets or queries the current source for efficiency measurement of the specified power
ISOUrce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: Sets or queries the number of outputs for efficiency measurement of the specified power
NUMOFOutputs measurement number.

2-82 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-41: Power commands (cont.)

Command Description
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: Sets or queries the Output1 type for efficiency measurement of the specified power measurement
OUTPUT1Type number.
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: Sets or queries the Output2 type for efficiency measurement of the specified power measurement
OUTPUT2Type number.
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: Sets or queries the Output3 type for efficiency measurement of the specified power measurement
OUTPUT3Type number.
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: Sets or queries the Output type for efficiency measurement of the specified power measurement
OUTPUTType number.
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: Sets or queries the output 1 voltage source for efficiency measurement of the specified power
VOUT1SOUrce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: Sets or queries the output 2 voltage source for efficiency measurement of the specified power
VOUT2SOUrce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: Sets or queries the output 3 voltage source for efficiency measurement of the specified power
VOUT3SOUrce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: Sets or queries the voltage source for efficiency measurement of the specified power
VSOUrce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:FREQUENCY: Sets or queries the edge type for frequency measurement of the specified power measurement
EDGe number.
POWer:POWer<x>:FREQUENCY: Sets or queries the input source for frequency measurement of the specified power measurement
INPUTSOurce number.
POWer:POWer<x>:GATing Sets or queries the gating type for the specified power measurement badge.
POWer:POWer<x>:GATing:GLOBal Sets or queries the gating settings for the specified power measurement badge.
POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS: Sets or queries the class type for the harmonics measurement of the specified power
CLASs measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS: Sets or queries the custom limits file path for the harmonics measurement.
CLFile
POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS: Sets or queries the fundamental current method for the harmonics measurement of the specified
CMEThod power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS: Sets or queries the fundamental current value for the harmonics measurement of the specified
FUNDCURRent power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS: Sets or queries the order value for the harmonics measurement of the specified power
HORDer measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS: Sets or queries the source type for the harmonics measurement of the specified power
HSOURce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS: Sets or queries the input power value for the harmonics measurement of the specified power
IPOWer measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS: Sets or queries the current source for SOA measurement of the specified power measurement
ISOURce number.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-83

Command groups

Table 2-41: Power commands (cont.)

Command Description
POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS: Sets or queries the value for the line frequency for the power Harmonics measurement.
LINEFREQUEncy
POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS: Sets or queries the harmonics value analysis format of the specified power measurement number.
ODDEVen
POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS: Sets or queries the value of power factor for the harmonics measurement of the specified power
PFACtor measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS: Sets or queries the power level for the harmonics measurement of the specified power
POWERRating measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS: Sets or queries the rated current for the harmonics measurement of the specified power
RCURRent measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS: Sets or queries the test mode for harmonics measurement of the specified power measurement
STANDard number.
POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS: Sets or queries the value for the start frequency for the power Harmonics measurement. in
STARTFREQUEncy the range of 1 Hz to 1 GHz.
POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS: Sets or queries the harmonics results units of the specified power measurement number.
UNITs
POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS: Sets or queries the voltage source for SOA measurement of the specified power measurement
VSOURce number.
POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE: Sets or queries the signal generator amplitude setting of the specified profile step, for the
AMP<x>Val specified Impedance measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE: Sets or queries the power amplitude mode for the Impedance measurement.
AMPMode
POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE: Sets or queries the Analysis Method for Impedance measurements.
ANALYSISMethod
POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE: Enables Auto RBW computation
AUTORbw
POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE: Queries the instrument's connection status to the external generator, for the specified Impedance
CONNECTSTATus? measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE: Sets or queries the constant amplitude value for the specified Impedance measurement.
CONSTAMPlitude
POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE: Sets or queries the signal generator start frequency of the specified profile step, for the specified
FREQ<x>Val Impedance measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE: Sets or queries the generator source for the Impedance power measurement.
GENerator
POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE: Sets or queries the external generator IP Address associated with the specified Impedance
GENIPADDress measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE: Sets or queries the output impedance of the generator for the specified Impedance power
IMPEDANCE measurement.

2-84 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-41: Power commands (cont.)

Command Description
POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE: Sets or queries the source for the Impedance input measurement.
INPUTSOurce
POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE: Sets or queries the source for the Impedance output measurement.
OUTPUTSOurce
POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE: Sets or queries the value for points per decade for the specified Impedance measurement.
PPD
POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE: Sets or queries the value for the start frequency of the specified Impedance measurement.
STARTFREQuency
POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE: Sets or queries the value of the specified Impedance measurement.
STOPFREQuency
POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE: This command tests the connection with the external instrument for the specified Impedance
TESTCONNection measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:INDUCTANCE: Sets or queries the edge source for inductance measurement of the specified power
EDGESource measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:INDUCTANCE: Sets or queries the current source for inductance measurement of the specified power
ISOUrce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:INDUCTANCE: Sets or queries the voltage source for inductance measurement of the specified power
VSOURce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:INPUTCAP: Sets or queries the inrush current input source of the specified Input Capacitance measurement.
ISOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:INPUTCAP: Sets or queries the peak current value of the specified Input Capacitance measurement.
PEAKCURRent
POWer:POWer<x>:INPUTCAP: Sets or queries the peak voltage value of the specified Input Capacitance measurement.
PEAKVOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:INPUTCAP: Sets or queries the input voltage source of the specified Input Capacitance measurement.
VSOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:INRUSHcurrent: Sets or queries the input source of the specified Inrush Current measurement.
INPUTSOurce
POWer:POWer<x>:INRUSHcurrent: Sets or queries the peak current value of the specified Inrush Current measurement.
PEAKCURRent
POWer:POWer<x>:IVSINTEGRALV: Sets or queries the current source for I vs Integral V measurement of the specified power
ISOURce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:IVSINTEGRALV: Sets or queries the voltage source for I vs Integral V measurement of the specified power
VSOURce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:LABel Sets or queries the custom name for the specified power measurement badge.
POWer:POWer<x>:LINERIPPLE: Sets or queries the input source for line ripple measurement of the specified power measurement
INPUTSOurce number.
POWer:POWer<x>:LINERIPPLE: Sets or queries the frequency present for line ripple measurement of the specified power
LFREQuency measurement number.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-85

Command groups

Table 2-41: Power commands (cont.)

Command Description
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the current source for magnetic measurement of the specified power
MAGNETICLOSS:ISOURce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the voltage source for magnetic measurement of the specified power
MAGNETICLOSS:VSOURce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the coil cross section area for magnetic measurement of the specified power
MAGPROPERTY: measurement number.
AREAofcrosssection
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the edge signal source for magnetic measurement of the specified power
MAGPROPERTY:EDGESOURce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the current source for magnetic measurement of the specified power
MAGPROPERTY:ISOURce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the conductor length for magnetic measurement of the specified power
MAGPROPERTY:LENgth measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the number of primary turns for magnetic measurement of the specified power
MAGPROPERTY:PRIMARYTURNs measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the current source for secondary winding 1 for magnetic measurement of the
MAGPROPERTY:SEC1SOURce specified power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the number of turns of secondary winding 1 for magnetic measurement in the
MAGPROPERTY:SEC1TURNs specified power measurement badge
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the current source for secondary winding 2 for magnetic measurement of the
MAGPROPERTY:SEC2SOURce specified power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the number of turns of secondary winding 2 for magnetic measurement of the
MAGPROPERTY:SEC2TURNs specified power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the current source for secondary winding 3 for magnetic measurement of the
MAGPROPERTY:SEC3SOURce specified power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the number of turns of secondary winding 3 for magnetic measurement of the
MAGPROPERTY:SEC3TURNs specified power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the current source for secondary winding 4 for magnetic measurement of the
MAGPROPERTY:SEC4SOURce specified power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the number of turns of secondary winding 4 for magnetic measurement of the
MAGPROPERTY:SEC4TURNs specified power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the current source for secondary winding 5 for magnetic measurement of the
MAGPROPERTY:SEC5SOURce specified power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the number of turns of secondary winding 5 for magnetic measurement of the
MAGPROPERTY:SEC5TURNs specified power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the current source for secondary winding 6 for magnetic measurement of the
MAGPROPERTY:SEC6SOURce specified power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the number of turns of secondary winding 6 for magnetic measurement of the
MAGPROPERTY:SEC6TURNs specified power measurement number.

2-86 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-41: Power commands (cont.)

Command Description
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or returns the value for the phase difference between secondary and primary voltage.
MAGPROPERTY:SECPhase
POWer:POWer<x>: Enables or disables secondary voltage input for measurement.
MAGPROPERTY:SECVolt
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the number of secondary windings for magnetic measurement of the specified
MAGPROPERTY:SECWINDings power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the units for magnetic measurement of the specified power measurement number.
MAGPROPERTY:UNITs
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the voltage source for magnetic measurement of the specified power
MAGPROPERTY:VSOURce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:NDUTYCYCLE: Sets or queries the clock edge type for negative duty cycle measurement of the specified power
EDGEType measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:NDUTYCYCLE: Sets or queries the input source for negative duty cycle measurement of the specified power
INPUTSOurce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:NPULSEWIDTH: Sets or queries the input source for negative pulse width measurement of the specified power
INPUTSOurce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:PDUTYCYCLE: Sets or queries the clock edge type for positive duty cycle measurement of the specified power
EDGEType measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:PDUTYCYCLE: Sets or queries the input source for positive duty cycle measurement of the specified power
INPUTSOurce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:PERIOD:EDGe Sets or queries the edge type for period measurement of the specified power measurement
number.
POWer:POWer<x>:PERIOD: Sets or queries the input source for period measurement of the specified power measurement
INPUTSOurce number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the calculate cycles over full cycles settings for the specified power quality
POWERQUALITY:CCYCles measurement badge.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the frequency reference type for power quality measurement of the specified
POWERQUALITY:FREFerence power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the current source for power quality measurement of the specified power
POWERQUALITY:ISOURce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the source type.
POWERQUALITY:STYPe
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the voltage source for power quality measurement of the specified power
POWERQUALITY:VSOURce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:PPULSEWIDTH: Sets or queries the input source for positive pulse width measurement in the specified power
INPUTSOurce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:PRESET Sets or queries the input source for positive pulse width measurement of the specified power
measurement number.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-87

Command groups

Table 2-41: Power commands (cont.)

Command Description
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR: Sets or queries the generator amplitude value of the specified configuration step for the Power
AMP<x>Val Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR) power measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR: Sets or queries the amplitude mode for the Power Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR) power
AMPMode measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR: Sets or queries the Analysis Method for PSRR measurements.
ANALYSISMethod
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR: Enables Auto RBW computation.
AUTORbw
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR: Queries the external instrument's connection status for the specified Power Supply Rejection
CONNECTSTATus? Ratio (PSRR) measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR: Sets or queries the constant amplitude voltage for the Power Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR)
CONSTAMPlitude power measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR: Sets or queries the generator frequency value of the specified configuration step for the Power
FREQ<x>Val Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR) power measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR: Sets or queries the generator source used to send stimulus signals to the DUT for the Power
GENerator Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR) power measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR: Sets or queries the generator source for the Power Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR) power
GENerator measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR: Sets or queries the instrument's IP Address associated with the specified Power Supply Rejection
GENIPADDress Ratio (PSRR) measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR: Sets or queries the vertical termination impedance for the Power Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR)
IMPEDance power measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR: Sets or queries the input source for the Power Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR) power
INPUTSOurce measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR: Sets or queries the output source for the Power Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR) power
OUTPUTSOurce measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:PPD Sets or queries the points per decade (PPD) value for the Power Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR)
power measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR: Sets or queries the start frequency value for the Power Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR) power
STARTFREQuency measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR: Sets or queries the stop frequency value for the Power Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR) power
STOPFREQuency measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR: This command tests the connection with the external instrument for the specified Power Supply
TESTCONNection Rejection Ratio (PSRR) measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:RDSON: Sets or queries the device type for the power drain source on resistance measurement for RDSon
DEVICEType measurement of the specified power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:RDSON: Sets or queries the current source for RDSon measurement of the specified power measurement
ISOURce number.

2-88 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-41: Power commands (cont.)

Command Description
POWer:POWer<x>:RDSON: Sets or queries the voltage source for RDSon measurement of the specified power measurement
VSOURce number.
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels: Sets or queries the falling edge for high reference level in absolute units for the specified power
ABSolute:FALLHigh measurement badge.
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels: Sets or queries the falling edge for low reference level in absolute units for the specified power
ABSolute:FALLLow measurement badge.
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels: Sets or queries the falling edge for mid reference level in absolute units for the specified power
ABSolute:FALLMid measurement badge.
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels: Sets or queries the absolute hysteresis value for the specified power measurement badge.
ABSolute:HYSTeresis
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels: Sets or queries the rising edge for high reference level in absolute units for the specified power
ABSolute:RISEHigh measurement badge.
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels: Sets or queries the rising edge for low reference level in absolute units for the specified power
ABSolute:RISELow measurement badge.
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels: Sets or queries the rising edge for mid reference level in absolute units for the specified power
ABSolute:RISEMid measurement badge.
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels: Sets or queries the type of measurement levels when reference level is set to absolute for the
ABSolute:TYPE specified power measurement badge.
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels: Sets or queries the reference level base top method for the specified power measurement badge.
BASETop
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels: Sets or queries the method to configure reference level values for the specified power
METHod measurement badge.
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels: Sets or queries the falling edge for high reference level in percentage for the specified power
PERCent:FALLHigh measurement badge.
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels: Sets or queries the falling edge for low reference level in percentage for the specified power
PERCent:FALLLow measurement badge.
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels: Sets or queries the falling edge for mid reference level in percentage for the specified power
PERCent:FALLMid measurement badge.
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels: Sets or queries the hysteresis in percentage for the specified power measurement badge.
PERCent:HYSTeresis
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels: Sets or queries the rising edge for high reference level in percentage for the specified power
PERCent:RISEHigh measurement badge.
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels: Sets or queries the rising edge for low reference level in percentage for the specified power
PERCent:RISELow measurement badge.
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels: Sets or queries the rising edge for mid reference level in percentage for the specified power
PERCent:RISEMid measurement badge.
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels: Sets or queries the reference levels for the specified power measurement badge.
PERCent:TYPE

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-89

Command groups

Table 2-41: Power commands (cont.)

Command Description
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the maximum value of all acquisitions for the measurement parameter of the specified
ALLAcqs:MAXimum? power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the mean value of all acquisitions for the measurement parameter of the specified
ALLAcqs:MEAN? power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the minimum value of all acquisitions for the measurement parameter of the specified
ALLAcqs:MINimum? power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the peak-to-peak value of all acquisitions for the measurement parameter of the specified
ALLAcqs:PK2PK? power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the population (number of complete cycles) of all acquisitions for the measurement
ALLAcqs:POPUlation? parameter of the specified power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the standard deviation value of all acquisitions for the measurement parameter of the
ALLAcqs:STDDev? specified power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the first harmonics magnitude value for the specified power measurement badge.
CURRentacq:F1MAG?
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the third harmonics magnitude value for the specified power measurement badge.
CURRentacq:F3MAG?
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the fundamental frequency for the specified power measurement badge.
CURRentacq:FREQUENCY?
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the RMS current value for the specified power measurement badge.
CURRentacq:IRMS?
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the maximum value of the current acquisition for the measurement parameter of the
CURRentacq:MAXimum? specified power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the mean value of the current acquisition for the measurement parameter of the specified
CURRentacq:MEAN? power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the minimum value of the current acquisition for the measurement parameter of the
CURRentacq:MINimum? specified power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the peak-to-peak value of the current acquisition for the measurement parameter of
CURRentacq:PK2PK? the specified power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the limit of partial odd harmonic current for the specified power measurement badge.
CURRentacq:POHCL?
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the measured value of partial odd harmonic current for the specified power measurement
CURRentacq:POHCM? badge.
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the status of partial odd harmonic current for the specified power measurement badge.
CURRentacq:POHCS?
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the population (number of complete cycles) of the current acquisition for the
CURRentacq:POPUlation? measurement parameter of the specified power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the RMS value of the source selected for the specified power measurement badge.
CURRentacq:RMS?

2-90 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-41: Power commands (cont.)

Command Description
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the status of the measurement for the specified power measurement badge.
CURRentacq:STATUS?
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the standard deviation value of the current acquisition for the measurement parameter of
CURRentacq:STDDev? the specified power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the total harmonic distortion (fundamental) value for the specified power measurement
CURRentacq:THDF? badge.
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the total harmonic distortion (RMS) value for the specified power measurement badge.
CURRentacq:THDR?
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the true power value for the specified power measurement badge.
CURRentacq:TRPWR?
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts: Queries the RMS voltage value for the specified power measurement badge.
CURRentacq:VRMS?
POWer:POWer<x>:SEQSETup Runs the power measurement sequence setup.
POWer:POWer<x>:SEQuence Sets or queries the run state of a single sequence power measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:ISOURce Sets or queries the current source for SOA measurement of the specified power measurement
number.
POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:POINT<x> Sets or queries the X or Y coordinate value for a specified SOA mask point.
POWer:POWer<x>:SOA: Recalls or queries the recall mask file name of the specified power measurement number.
RECAllmask
POWer:POWer<x>:SOA: Sets or queries the file name for saving SOA mask file name of the specified power measurement
RECAllmask:FILEName number.
POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:SAVemask Saves the mask file as per the name configured and at the configured path or queries the mask file
name, path, and file type for the SOA measurement of the specified power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:SAVemask: Sets or queries the state of auto-increment for saved SOA mask file names of the specified
AUTOINCrement power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:SAVemask: Sets or queries the mask file name for SOA measurement of the specified power measurement
FILEName number.
POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:SAVemask: Sets or queries the mask file folder path for SOA measurement of the specified power
FOLDer measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:VSOURce Sets or queries the voltage source for SOA measurement of the specified power measurement
number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the conduction calculation method for switching loss measurement of the
SWITCHINGLOSS:DEVICEType specified power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the gate voltage (Vg) for the switching loss measurement of the specified power
SWITCHINGLOSS:GATESOurce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the current level (Ton-Start & Stop) in absolute units for switching loss
SWITCHINGLOSS:ILEVELAbs measurement of the specified power measurement number.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-91

Command groups

Table 2-41: Power commands (cont.)

Command Description
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the current level (Ton-Start & Stop) in percentage for switching loss measurement
SWITCHINGLOSS:ILEVELPct of the specified power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the current source for the switching loss measurement of the specified power
SWITCHINGLOSS:ISOURce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the level units for switching loss measurement of the specified power
SWITCHINGLOSS:LEVELUNIts measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the RDS(on) value for switching loss measurement of the specified power
SWITCHINGLOSS:RDSOn measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the configuration type for the switching loss measurement of the specified power
SWITCHINGLOSS: measurement number.
SWLCONFIGType
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the value for the VCE(sat) value for switching loss measurement of the specified
SWITCHINGLOSS:VCESat power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the gate voltage value (Vg Level Ton-Start) for the switching loss measurement of
SWITCHINGLOSS:VGLevel the specified power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the voltage level (Ton-Start & Stop) in absolute units for switching loss
SWITCHINGLOSS:VLEVELAbs measurement of the specified power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the voltage level (Ton-Start & Stop) in percentage for switching loss measurement
SWITCHINGLOSS:VLEVELPct of the specified power measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the voltage source for the switching loss measurement of the specified power
SWITCHINGLOSS:VSOURce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the input source for switching ripple measurement of the specified power
SWITCHINGRIPPLE:INPUTSOurce measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>: Sets or queries the switching frequency for switching ripple measurement of the specified power
SWITCHINGRIPPLE:LFREQuency measurement number.
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: Sets or queries the input frequency used by the AC or DC converter of the specified Turn Off
FREQuency Time measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: Sets or returns the input frequency used by the AC or DC converter of the specified Turn Off
INPUTLEVel Time measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: Sets or queries the input source of the specified Turn Off Time measurement.
INPUTSOurce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: Sets or queries the maximum turn off time of the specified Turn Off Time measurement.
MAXTIMe
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: Sets or queries the maximum voltage of the specified Turn OffTime measurement.
MAXVoltage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: Sets or queries the number of outputs of the specified Turn Off Time power measurement.
NUMOUTputs
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: Sets or queries the output 1 source of the specified Turn Off Time measurement.
OUTPUT1SOURce

2-92 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-41: Power commands (cont.)

Command Description
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: Sets or queries the output 1 voltage level of the of the specified Turn Off Time power
OUTPUT1VOLTage measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: Sets or queries the output 2 source of the specified Turn Off Time measurement.
OUTPUT2SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: Sets or queries the output 2 voltage level of the specified Turn Off Time power measurement.
OUTPUT2VOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: Sets or queries the output 3 source of the specified Turn Off Time measurement.
OUTPUT3SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: Sets or queries the output 3 voltage level of the specified Turn Off Time power measurement.
OUTPUT3VOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: Sets or queries the output 4 source of the specified Turn Off Time measurement.
OUTPUT4SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: Sets or queries the output 4 voltage level of the specified Turn Off Time power measurement.
OUTPUT4VOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: Sets or queries the output 5 source of the specified Turn Off Time measurement.
OUTPUT5SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: Sets or queries the output 5 voltage level of the specified Turn Off Time power measurement.
OUTPUT5VOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: Sets or queries the output 6 source of the specified Turn Off Time measurement.
OUTPUT6SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: Sets or queries the output 6 voltage level of the specified Turn Off Time power measurement.
OUTPUT6VOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: Sets or queries the output 7 source of the specified Turn Off Time measurement.
OUTPUT7SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: Sets or queries the output 7 voltage level of the specified Turn Off Time power measurement.
OUTPUT7VOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: Sets or queries the type of AC/DC converter used in the specified Turn Off Time power
TYPE measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime: Sets or queries the input frequency used by the AC or DC converter of the specified Turn On
FREQuency Time measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime: Sets or queries the input voltage level of the specified Turn On Time measurement.
INPUTLEVel
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime: Sets or queries the input source of the specified Turn On Time measurement.
INPUTSOurce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime: Sets or queries the maximum turn on time of the specified Turn On Time measurement.
MAXTIMe
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime: Sets or queries the maximum voltage setting of the specified Turn On Time measurement.
MAXVoltage

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-93

Command groups

Table 2-41: Power commands (cont.)

Command Description
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime: Sets or queries the number of outputs for the specified Turn On Time power measurement.
NUMOUTputs
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime: Sets or queries the output 1 source of the specified Turn On Time measurement.
OUTPUT1SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime: Sets or queries the output 1 voltage level of the specified Turn On Time power measurement.
OUTPUT1VOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime: Sets or queries the output 2 source of the specified Turn On Time measurement.
OUTPUT2SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime: Sets or queries the output 2 voltage level of the specified Turn On Time power measurement.
OUTPUT2VOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime: Sets or queries the output 3 source of the specified Turn On Time measurement.
OUTPUT3SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime: Sets or queries the output 3 voltage level of the specified Turn On Time power measurement.
OUTPUT3VOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime: Sets or queries the output 4 source of the specified Turn On Time measurement.
OUTPUT4SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime: Sets or queries the output 4 voltage level of the specified Turn On Time power measurement.
OUTPUT4VOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime: Sets or queries the output 5 source of the specified Turn On Time measurement.
OUTPUT5SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime: Sets or queries the output 5 voltage level of the specified Turn On Time power measurement.
OUTPUT5VOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime: Sets or queries the output 6 source of the specified Turn On Time measurement.
OUTPUT6SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime: Sets or queries the output 6 voltage level of the specified Turn On Time power measurement.
OUTPUT6VOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime: Sets or queries the output 7 source of the specified Turn On Time measurement.
OUTPUT7SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime: Sets or queries the output 7 voltage level of the specified Turn On Time power measurement.
OUTPUT7VOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime: Sets or queries the type of AC/DC converter used in the specified Turn On Time power
TYPE measurement.
POWer:POWer<x>:TYPe Sets or queries the measurement type for the specified power measurement badge.
POWer:POWer<x>:WRAP:DEGrees Sets or returns the phase wrap value for FRA measurements.
POWer:POWer<x>:WRAP:STATE Sets or returns the phase wrap status for FRA measurements.

2-94 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Save and Recall command group

Use the commands in the Save and Recall Command Group to store and retrieve
internal waveforms and settings. When you save a setup, you save all the settings
of the instrument. When you recall a setup, the instrument restores itself to the
state that it was in when you originally saved that setting.

Table 2-42: Save and Recall commands

Command Description
FACtory Resets the instrument to factory default settings.
RECAll:SESsion Restores the state of the instrument from a saved session file.
RECAll:SETUp Recalls saved instrument settings.
RECAll:WAVEform Recalls a stored waveform to a reference memory location.
SAVe:EVENTtable:BUS Saves bus results table to the specified file.
SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom Saves the results table to the specified file path and name.
SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom:COMMents Sets or queries comments to be included in saved results table files.
SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom:DATAFormat Sets or queries the data format to use for saving results table data.
SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom:INCLUDEREFs Sets or queries whether to include displayed reference waveforms with saved
results table files.
SAVe:EVENTtable:MEASUrement Saves data (measurement) results to the specified file.
SAVe:EVENTtable:PEAKS Saves peak markers results table to the specified file.
SAVe:EVENTtable:SEARCHTable Saves a search results table to the specified file.
SAVe:IMAGe Saves a capture of the screen contents to the specified image file.
SAVe:IMAGe:COMPosition Sets or queries the color mode for saved images (normal or inverted).
SAVe:IMAGe:VIEWTYpe Sets or queries the view type for saved images. Currently only FULLScreen is
supported.
SAVe:MASK Saves the given Waveview Mask to the specified file.
SAVe:PLOTData Saves the plot data of the currently selected plot in a specified file. Supported file
format is CSV.
SAVe:REPOrt Saves a report to the specified file or, if no argument is specified, uses the folder
and file name specified by the related commands.
SAVe:REPOrt:COMMents Sets or queries the comments to be included in saved report files.
SAVe:SESsion Saves the state of the instrument, including reference waveforms, to a saved
session file.
SAVe:SETUp Saves the current instrument state to the specified file.
SAVe:SETUp:INCLUDEREFs Sets or queries whether displayed reference waveforms are to be included in saved
setups.
SAVe:WAVEform Saves the specified waveform(s) to the specified destination file(s).
SAVe:WAVEform:GATing Sets the method to save a specified part of the waveform data.
SAVe:WAVEform:GATing:RESAMPLErate Saves the waveform data at a sample interval.
SAVe:WAVEform:SOURCELIst? Returns a list of the available waveforms that can be specified as the source for
the SAVe:WAVEform command.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-95

Command groups

Save On command Group

Use this group of commands to program the instrument to save images,
measurements, waveforms, or the instrument setup, on triggers that you select.
These commands still function, however the Act On Event commands are
preferred. Please see the Act On Event section for continued development and
enhancements. (See Table 2-18.)

Table 2-43: Save On commands

Command Description
SAVEON:FILE:DEST Sets or queries the location where files are saved.
SAVEON:FILE:NAME Sets or queries the file name to use when SAVEON:TRIGer is ON.
SAVEON:IMAGe:FILEFormat Sets or queries the file format to be used for saved image files.
SAVEON:IMAGe Sets or queries whether to save a screen capture when a trigger occurs.
SAVEON:TRIGger Sets or queries whether to save a file when a trigger occurs.
SAVEON:WAVEform Sets or queries whether to save a waveform when a limit test failure, mask failure,
or trigger occurs.
SAVEON:WAVEform:FILEFormat Sets or queries the file format for saving waveform.
SAVEON:WAVEform:SOURce Sets or queries the sources for saving waveforms.

2-96 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Search and Mark command group

Use search and mark commands to seek out and identify information in waveform
records that warrant further investigation.

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands

Command Description
SEARCH:ADDNew Adds the specified search.
SEARCH:DELete Deletes the specified search.
SEARCH:DELETEALL Deletes all the active instances of measurements defined in the scope application.
SEARCH:LIST? Lists all currently defined searches.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:COPy Copies the search criteria to or from the trigger.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:NAVigate Sets the navigation action for search marks.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TOTAL? Queries the total number of found search marks for this search.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies a field or condition for an ARINC429 bus to search on.
ARINC429A:CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the error type when searching on an ARINC429 bus signal.
ARINC429A:ERRTYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on label data for an ARINC429
ARINC429A:LABel:QUALifier bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the low value when searching on an ARINC429 label field.
ARINC429A:LABel:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the high value when searching on an ARINC429 label field.
ARINC429A:LABel:HIVALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the when searching on an ARINC429 SDI field.
ARINC429A:SDI:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the when searching on an ARINC429 SSM field.
ARINC429A:SSM:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on data in the DATA field for
ARINC429A:DATa:QUALifier an ARINC429 bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the low value when searching on an ARINC429 data field.
ARINC429A:DATa:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the high value when searching on an ARINC429 data field.
ARINC429A:DATa:HIVALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio: Sets or queries the condition (word select / frame sync, or matching data) to be used
CONDition when searching on an audio bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio: Sets or queries the binary data string for the high data word to be used when
DATa:HITDMVALue searching on an TDM audio bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio: Sets or queries the binary data string for the high data word to be used when
DATa:HIVALue searching on an audio bus signal.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-97

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio: Sets or queries the data offset value (TDM channel) to be used when searching on
DATa:OFFSet a TDM type audio bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on an audio bus signal.
DATa:QUALifier
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio: Sets or queries the binary data string for the single or low data word to be used when
DATa:TDMVALue searching on an TDM audio bus signal
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio: Sets or queries the binary data string for the single or low data word to be used when
DATa:VALue searching on an audio bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio: Sets or queries the alignment of the data (left, right or either) to be used when
DATa:WORD searching on a non-TDM type audio bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the field or condition for which to search an AutoEthernet.
AUTOETHERnet:CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary data value to be used when searching on an AutoEthernet
AUTOETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the data offset value, in bytes, to use when searching on the
AUTOETHERnet:DATa:OFFSet AutoEthernet data field.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the length of the data string, in bytes, to use when searching on the
AUTOETHERnet:DATa:SIZe AutoEthernet bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary value to use when searching on the AutoEthernet bus
AUTOETHERnet:DATa:VALue signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary destination address value to use when searching on an
AUTOETHERnet:IPHeader:DESTinationaddr: AutoEthernet bus signal.
VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary protocol value to use when searching on the Ethernet
AUTOETHERnet:IPHeader:PROTOcol:VALue bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary source address value to use when searching on an
AUTOETHERnet:IPHeader:SOUrceaddr:VALue AutoEthernet bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary MAC address destination value to use when searching
AUTOETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:DESTination: on an AutoEthernet bus signal.
VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary MAC address source value to use when searching on an
AUTOETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:SOUrce: AutoEthernet bus signal.
VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary MAC length high value to use when searching on an
AUTOETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:HIVALue AutoEthernet bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the MAC length value to use when searching on an Ethernet bus
AUTOETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:VALue signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary Q-tag information to use when searching on an
AUTOETHERnet:QTAG:VALue AutoEthernet bus signal.

2-98 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on an AutoEthernet bus signal.
AUTOETHERnet:QUALifier
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary ack number value to use when searching on an
AUTOETHERnet:TCPHeader:ACKnum:VALue AutoEthernet bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary destination port value to use when searching on the
AUTOETHERnet:TCPHeader:DESTinationport: AutoEthernet TCP header destination port number.
VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the TCP header sequence number value to use when searching on
AUTOETHERnet:TCPHeader:SEQnum:VALue the AutoEthernet TCP header destination port number.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary source port value to use when searching on an
AUTOETHERnet:TCPHeader:SOUrceport: AutoEthernet bus signal.
VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the trigger condition for a CAN bus on the ADS bits.
ADS:TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the CAN bus trigger condition.
CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the CAN XL trigger type to be valid on PCRC and FCRC.
CRCType
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the trigger condition for a CAN bus on the DAS bits.
DAS:TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets the CAN search type.
DATa:DIRection
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the data offset value, in bytes, to use when searching on the CAN
DATa:OFFSet data field.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the CAN bus trigger data qualifier.
DATa:QUALifier
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the CAN bus trigger data size.
DATa:SIZe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the binary data value to be used when searching on a CAN bus signal.
DATa:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the trigger condition for a CAN bus on the XL Data bits.
DATa:XLBITType
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the type of error condition for a CAN bus to search on.
ERRType
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the value of the bit rate switch bit (BRS bit) for a CAN bus to search on.
FD:BRSBit
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the value of the error state indicator bit (ESI bit) for a CAN bus
FD:ESIBit to search on.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-99

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries CAN bus trigger frame type.
FRAMEtype
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the CAN bus trigger identifier mode.
IDentifier:MODe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries CAN bus trigger identifier value.
IDentifier:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the length of the data string, in bytes, to be used when triggering on
PIDentifier:SIZe a CAN bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the binary data value to be used when triggering on a CAN bus signal
PIDentifier:VALue when standard is XL.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the length of the data string, in bytes, to be used when searching on
XLDATa:SIZe a CAN bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the binary data value to be used when searching on a CAN bus signal.
XLDATa:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: Specifies the blue data string used for CPHY triggering if the trigger condition is on
BLUe:VALue RGB packet.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: Sets or queries the trigger condition for an CPHY bus.
CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: Specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an CPHY trigger if the
DATa:SIZe trigger condition is DATA.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: Specifies the binary data string used for CPHY triggering if the trigger condition
DATa:VALue is DATA.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: Sets or queries the error type for CPHY bus.
ERRor:TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: Sets or queries the escape mode command type for CPHY bus.
ESCAPEMODe:COMMand
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: Specifies the green data string used for CPHY triggering if the trigger condition is on
GREen:VALue RGB packet.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: Sets or queries the mode type for CPHY bus.
MODe:TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: Sets or queries the packet list for CPHY bus.
PACKets:LIST
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: Sets or queries the packet type for an CPHY bus.
PACKets:TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: Specifies the pixel number to be used for CPHY triggering if the trigger condition is
PIXel:NUMBer on pixel number pattern.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: Sets or queries the search pattern type for CPHY bus.
PIXel:SEARCHOPTion

2-100 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: Specifies the red data string used for CPHY triggering if the trigger condition is on
RED:VALue RGB packet.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: Specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an CPHY trigger if the
SYMBol:SIZe trigger condition is SYMBol.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: Specifies the binary data string used for CPHY triggering if the trigger condition is
SYMBol:VALue Symbol.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: Specifies the length of the word string in bytes to be used for an CPHY trigger if
WORD:SIZe the trigger condition is WORD.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: Specifies the binary data string used for CPHY triggering if the trigger condition is
WORD:VALue WORD.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: Specifies the word count data string used for CPHY triggering if the trigger condition
WORDCOUNt:VALue is on any rgb/ycbcr/yuv packet.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: Specifies the Cb data string used for CPHY triggering if the trigger condition is on
YCBCR:CB YCbCr packet.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: Specifies the Cr data string used for CPHY triggering if the trigger condition is on
YCBCR:CR YCbCr packet.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: Specifies the Y data string used for CPHY triggering if the trigger condition is on
YCBCR:Y YCbCr packet.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: Specifies the U data string used for CPHY triggering if the trigger condition is on
YUV:U YUV packet.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: Specifies the V data string used for CPHY triggering if the trigger condition is on
YUV:V YUV packet.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: Specifies the Y data string used for CPHY triggering if the trigger condition is on
YUV:Y YUV packet.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI: Sets or queries the trigger condition for a CXPI bus.
CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI: Specifies the binary counter string used for CXPI triggering if the trigger condition
COUNter:VALue is COUNTER.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI: Specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for CXPI triggering if the
DATa:SIZe trigger condition is DATA.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI: Specifies the binary data string used for CXPI triggering if the trigger condition is
DATa:VALue DATA.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI: Specifies the binary dlc string used for CXPI triggering if the trigger condition is DLC.
DLC:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI: Sets or queries the Error Type in CXPI bus.
ERROR:TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI: Specifies the binary dlc string used for CXPI triggering if the trigger condition is Ext
EXTDLC:VALue DLC.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-101

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI: Sets or queries the frame type in CXPI bus.
FRAMe:TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI: Specifies the binary frameId string used for CXPI triggering if the trigger condition
FRAMEID:VALue is FRAMEID.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI: Sets or queries the Sleep Status in CXPI bus.
NETMN:SLEEPIND
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI: Sets or queries the Wakeup Status in CXPI bus.
NETMN:WAKEUPIND
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: Specifies the blue data string used for DPHY triggering if the trigger condition is on
BLUe:VALue RGB packet.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: Sets or queries the trigger condition for an DPHY bus.
CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: Specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an DPHY trigger if the
DATa:SIZe trigger condition is DATA.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: Specifies the binary data string used for DPHY triggering if the trigger condition
DATa:VALue is DATA.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: Sets or queries the error type for DPHY bus.
ERRor:TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: Sets or queries the escape mode command type for DPHY bus.
ESCAPEMODe:COMMand
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: Specifies the green data string used for DPHY triggering if the trigger condition is on
GREen:VALue RGB packet.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: Sets or queries the mode type for DPHY bus.
MODe:TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: Sets or queries the packet list for DPHY bus.
PACKets:LIST
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: Sets or queries the packet type for DPHY bus.
PACKets:TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: Specifies the pixel number to be used for DPHY triggering if the trigger condition is
PIXel:NUMBer on pixel number pattern.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: Sets or queries the search pattern type for DPHY bus.
PIXel:SEARCHOPTion
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: Specifies the red data string used for DPHY triggering if the trigger condition is on
RED:VALue RGB packet.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: Specifies the word count data string used for DPHY triggering if the trigger condition is
WORDCOUNt:VALue set on any pixel packet.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: Specifies the Cb data string used for DPHY triggering if the trigger condition is on
YCBCR:CB YCbCr packet.

2-102 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: Specifies the Cr data string used for DPHY triggering if the trigger condition is on
YCBCR:CR YCbCr packet.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: Specifies the Y data string used for DPHY triggering if the trigger condition is on
YCBCR:Y YCbCr packet.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: Specifies the U data string used for DPHY triggering if the trigger condition is on
YUV:U YUV packet.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: Specifies the V data string used for DPHY triggering if the trigger condition is on
YUV:V YUV packet.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: Specifies the Y data string used for DPHY triggering if the trigger condition is on
YUV:Y YUV packet.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: Specifies the binary data string used for ESPI triggering if the trigger condition is
ADDRess:VALue Address.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: Sets or queries the command opcode in ESPI bus.
COMMAND:OPCode
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: Sets or queries the trigger condition for a ESPI bus.
CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: Sets or queries the cycle type on command in ESPI bus.
CYCLETYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: Specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for ESPI triggering if the
DATa:SIZe trigger condition is DATA.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: Specifies the binary data string used for ESPI triggering if the trigger condition is Data.
DATa:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: Sets or queries the error type on command or response in ESPI bus.
ERRor:TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: Specifies the binary data string used for ESPI triggering if the trigger condition is
LENGth:VALue Length.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: Sets or queries the phase in ESPI bus.
PHASe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: Sets or queries the response cycle type on command in ESPI bus.
RESPCYCLE:TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: Specifies the binary data string used for ESPI triggering if the trigger condition is
SMBUS:DESTination:ADDRess SMBus Source/Destination Address.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: Specifies the binary data string used for ESPI triggering if the trigger condition is
SMBUS:SLAVe:ADDRess SMBus Slave Address.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: Specifies the binary data string used for ESPI triggering if the trigger condition is Tag.
TAG:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: Specifies the binary data string used for ESPI triggering if the trigger condition is
VIRTUALWIRe:COUNt:VALue Virtual wire count.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-103

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: Specifies the binary data string used for ESPI triggering if the trigger condition is
VIRTUALWIRe:COUNt:VALue Virtual wire Data.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: Specifies the binary data string used for ESPI triggering if the trigger condition is
VIRTUALWIRe:INDex:VALue Virtual wire Index.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: Specifies the binary data string used for ESPI triggering if the trigger condition is
VIRTUALWIRe:RESPonse:VALue Virtual wire Response.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: Specifies the binary data string used for ESPI triggering if the trigger condition is
VIRTUALWIRe:STATus:VALue Virtual wire Status.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the Address Mode in EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:ADDRESSMODe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary Network Variable Count to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:CNTNV:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the Command Type in EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:COMMANDTYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the trigger condition for a EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary Cycle Number to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:CYC:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:DATa:SIZe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the binary data string used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:DATa:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the Datagram fields in EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:DATAGRAM
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the Datagram Header fields in EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:DATAGRAMHEADer
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary Datagram length information to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:DATAGRAMHEADer:LENGth
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary MAC destination address value to be used for EtherCAT
ETHERCAT:DESTINATIONADDRess:VALue bus.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the Device Address in EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:DEVICEADDRess
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the error reply service data fields in EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:ERRor:REPLy:SERVice:DATa
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the Frame Type in EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:FRAMETYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary HASH to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:HASH:VALue

2-104 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary EtherCAT header length to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:HEADer:LENGth
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the IP Identification to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:IDENtification:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary Indexing information to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:IDX:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary Index to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:INDex:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the Destination IP Address to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:IPDESTination:ADDRess:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the Source IP Address to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:IPSOURce:ADDRess:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary interrupt request information to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:IRQ:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary Length to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:LEN:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary logical address information to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:LOGICALADDRess:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the Mailbox fields in EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:MAILbox
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary Mailbox Address to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:MAILbox:ADDRess:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary counter of the mailbox services to be used for EtherCAT
ETHERCAT:MAILbox:CNT:VALue bus.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the Error Reply Service Data Details in EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:MAILbox:DETail
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the Mailbox Header fields in EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:MAILbox:HEADer
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the Mailbox Type in EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:MAILBOXTYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the Network Variable fields in EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:NETWork:VARiable
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the Network Variable Header fields in EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:NETWork:VARiable:HEADer
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the length of the network variable data string in bytes to be used for
ETHERCAT:NETWORKVARiable:DATa:SIZe EtherCAT bus.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the binary network variable data string used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:NETWORKVARiable:DATa:VALue

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-105

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary address offset information to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:OFFSet:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary address position information to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:POSition:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the EtherCAT Protocol Type in EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:PROTOCOLTYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary Publisher ID to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:PUBID:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary quality to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:QUALity:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary service data length to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:SERVice:DATa:LENGth
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the length of the service data string in bytes to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:SERVice:DATa:SIZe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the length of the service data string in bytes to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:SERVice:DATa:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary MAC source address value to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:SOURCEADDRess:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the UDP Source port to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:SRC:PORT:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary Tag control Information to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:TCI:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary Working Counter information to be used for EtherCAT bus.
ETHERCAT:WKC:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies a field or condition within an Ethernet frame to search on.
ETHERnet:CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary data value to be used when searching on an Ethernet
ETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the data offset value, in bytes, to use when searching on the Ethernet data
ETHERnet:DATa:OFFSet field.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets the qualifier to be used when searching on an Ethernet bus signal.
ETHERnet:DATa:QUALifier
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the number of contiguous TCP/IPv4/MAC client bytes to use when searching
ETHERnet:DATa:SIZe on the Ethernet data field.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the binary value to use when searching on the Ethernet data field.
ETHERnet:DATa:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the 32-bit value to use when searching on the Ethernet IPv4 header
ETHERnet:IPHeader:DESTinationaddr:VALue address destination field.

2-106 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the 8-bit value to use when searching on the Ethernet IPv4 header protocol
ETHERnet:IPHeader:PROTOcol:VALue field.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the 32-bit value to use when searching on the Ethernet IPv4 header
ETHERnet:IPHeader:SOUrceaddr:VALue address source field.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the 48-bit value to use when searching on the Ethernet MAC address
ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:DESTination:VALue destination field.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the 48-bit value to use when searching on the Ethernet MAC address
ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:SOUrce:VALue source field.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the 16-bit high value to use when searching on the Ethernet MAC
ETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:HIVALue length/type.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the 16-bit value to use when searching on the Ethernet MAC length/type.
ETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the 32-bit value to use when searching on the Ethernet Q-Tag field.
ETHERnet:QTAG:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the 32-bit value to use when searching on the Ethernet TCP header
ETHERnet:TCPHeader:ACKnum:VALue acknowledgement number.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the 16-bit value to use when searching on the Ethernet TCP header
ETHERnet:TCPHeader:DESTinationport:VALue destination port number.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the 32-bit value to use when searching on the Ethernet TCP header
ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SEQnum:VALue sequence number.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the 16-bit value to use when searching on the Ethernet TCP header source
ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SOUrceport:VALue port number.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Sets the high binary address value to be used when triggering on a eUSB bus signal.
ADDress:HIVALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Sets the binary address value to be used when triggering on a eUSB bus signal.
ADDress:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Sets or queries the search type for the specified search.
CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Sets the high binary data value to be used when triggering on a eUSB bus signal.
DATa:HIVALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Sets the byte offset to look for a data pattern at, in bytes, to be used when triggering
DATa:OFFSet on a eUSB bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Sets the qualifier to be used when triggering on a eUSB bus signal.
DATa:QUAlifier
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Sets the length of the data string, in bytes, to be used when triggering on a eUSB
DATa:SIZe bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Specifies the eUSB trigger type to be valid on any, data0, data1, data2, or mdata
DATa:TYPe condition.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-107

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Sets the binary data value to be used when triggering on a eUSB bus signal.
DATa:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Sets the number of Sync bits, in bytes, to be used when triggering on a eUSB bus
DATABITS:SIZe signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Sets the endpoint binary value to be used when triggering on a eUSB bus signal.
ENDPoint:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Specifies eUSB Search EOP Bits to be On and Off.
ENDSEARch
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Sets the number of EOP bits, in bytes, to be used when triggering on a eUSB bus
EOP:DATABITS:SIZe signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Sets the qualifier to be used when triggering on a eUSB bus signal.
EOP:QUAlifier
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Sets the number of EOP bits, in bits, to be used when triggering on a eUSB bus signal.
EOPBITS:MAX:SIZe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Sets the number of EOP bits, in bits, to be used when triggering on a EUSB bus signal.
EOPBITS:MIN:SIZe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Specifies the eUSB trigger type to be valid on a PID, Token CRC5, Data CRC16,
ERRType or Bit stuffing condition.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Specifies the eUSB trigger type to be valid on any, ack, nak, stall, or nyet condition.
HANDSHAKEType
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Sets the binary Register Access Protocol address value to be used when triggering
RAP:ADDress:VALue on a eUSB bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Specifies the eUSB Register Access Protocol search option
RAP:COMMand
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Sets the binary Register Access Protocol data value to be used when triggering on a
RAP:DATa:VALue eUSB bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Specifies the eUSB Register Access Protocol search option.
RAP:OPTion
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Sets the binary frame number to be used when triggering on a eUSB bus signal.
SOFFRAMENUMber
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Specifies the eUSB trigger type to be valid on any, err, split, ping, or reserved
SPECIALType condition.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Specifies the eUSB trigger type endpoint condition.
SPLit:ET:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Sets the binary hub address value to be used when triggering on a eUSB bus signal.
SPLit:HUB:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Sets the binary port address value to be used when triggering on a eUSB bus signal.
SPLit:PORT:VALue

2-108 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Specifies the eUSB trigger type start/complete condition.
SPLit:SC:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Specifies the eUSB trigger type start/complete condition.
SPLit:SE:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Sets the qualifier to be used when triggering on a eUSB bus signal.
SYNC:QUAlifier
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Sets the number of sync bits, in bits, to be used when triggering on a eUSB bus signal.
SYNCBITS:MAX:SIZe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Sets the number of sync bits, in bits, to be used when triggering on a eUSB bus signal.
SYNCBITS:MIN:SIZe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Specifies eUSB Search Sync Bits to be On and Off.
SYNCSEARch
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: Specifies the eUSB trigger type to be valid on any, sof, out, in, or setup condition.
TOKENType
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries FlexRay bus search trigger condition.
FLEXRAY:CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the FlexRay bus search cycle count value.
FLEXRAY:CYCLEcount:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the FlexRay bus search cycle count value.
FLEXRAY:DATa:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the FlexRay bus search cycle count value.
FLEXRAY:CYCLEcount:HIVALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the FlexRay bus search trigger cycle count qualifier.
FLEXRAY:CYCLEcount:QUALifier
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the FlexRay bus search trigger data value.
FLEXRAY:DATa:HIVALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the FlexRay bus search trigger data offset.
FLEXRAY:DATa:OFFSet
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the FlexRay bus search trigger data qualifier.
FLEXRAY:DATa:QUALifier
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the FlexRay bus search trigger data size.
FLEXRAY:DATa:SIZe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the FlexRay bus search trigger end of file type.
FLEXRAY:EOFTYPE
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the FlexRay bus search trigger error type.
FLEXRAY:ERRTYPE
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the high value when searching on a FlexRay bus frame id field.
FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:HIVALue

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-109

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets the qualifier to be used when searching on a FlexRay bus signal.
FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:QUALifier
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets the low value when searching on a FlexRay bus id field.
FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the FlexRay bus search trigger frame type.
FLEXRAY:FRAMEType
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the FlexRay bus search trigger header CRC.
FLEXRAY:HEADER:CRC
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the FlexRay bus search trigger header cycle count.
FLEXRAY:HEADER:CYCLECount
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the FlexRay bus search trigger header frame id.
FLEXRAY:HEADER:FRAMEID
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the FlexRay bus search header Indicator Bits.
FLEXRAY:HEADER:INDBits
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the FlexRay bus search trigger header payload length.
FLEXRAY:HEADER:PAYLENgth
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C: Sets or queries the address mode for the specified I2C bus trigger search to determine
ADDRess:MODe where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C: Sets or queries the address string when the search condition for the specified search
ADDRess:VALue is Address or AddressData, to determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C: Sets or queries the trigger condition for the specified I2C bus trigger search to
CONDition determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C: Sets or queries the direction of the data for the I2C bus trigger search to determine
DATa:DIRection where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C: Sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes used for the specified I2C bus
DATa:SIZe trigger search to determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C: Sets or queries the data value of the data token for the specified I2C bus trigger
DATa:VALue search to determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the address mode for the specified I3C bus trigger search to determine
ADDRess:MODe where to place a search mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the I3C address value for which to search, to determine where to
ADDRess:VALue place a search mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C search if the trigger condition
BCR:VALue is BCR.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C bus search if the trigger
BCRType:VALue condition is BCRTYPE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the I3C Broadcast Packets search to Broadcast or Response.
BPACKets

2-110 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Ssets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if the trigger condition is
BRGTID:VALue SETBRGTGT packet ID.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if the trigger condition is
CCODe:VALue SETBRGTGT packet ID.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the trigger condition for the specified I3C bus trigger search to
CONDition determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the direction of the data for the I3C bus trigger search to determine
DATa:DIRection where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes used for the specified I3C bus
DATa:SIZe trigger search to determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the data value of the data token for the specified I3C bus trigger
DATa:VALue search to determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C bus search if the trigger
DCR:VALue condition is DCR.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C bus search if the trigger
DCRType:VALue condition is DCRTYPE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if the trigger condition
DWORd:VALue is DATAWORDS.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the error type condition for the specified I3C bus search to determine
ERRORTYPe where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if the trigger condition
EVENTBYTe:VALue is FREQUENCYBYTE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if the trigger condition is
FREQBYTe:VALue GETSTATUSLSB.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if the trigger condition is
GSLSb:VALue GETSTATUSLSB.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if the trigger condition is
GSMSb:VALue GETSTATUSMSB.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:ID: Sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C search if the trigger condition
VALue is ENTDAA packet ID.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C search if the trigger condition
INACCBYTe:VALue is INACCURACYBYTE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if the trigger condition
MAXREAD:VALue is MAXREAD.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if the trigger condition is
MAXRTURN:VALue MAXREADTURN.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if the trigger condition is
MAXWRITe:VALue MAXWRITE.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-111

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the I3C Direct Packets to Direct or Response.
PACKets
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C bus searchif the trigger
SADDress:VALue condition is SLAVEADDRESS.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the SDR broadcast packets for the specified I3C bus trigger search to
SDR:BROADCASTPacket determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the SDR direct packet types for the specified I3C bus trigger search to
SDR:DIRECTPacket determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if the trigger condition is
STATEBYTe:VALue STATEBYTE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C search if the trigger condition is
STATic:ADDRess STATICADDRESS.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if the trigger condition
SUPPORTBYTe:VALue is SUPPORTEDBYTE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: Sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if the trigger condition is
TESTMODe:VALue TESTMODE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN: Specifies the high data value to be used in a LIN search.
DATa:HIVALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN: Sets or queries the LIN bus search trigger data qualifier.
DATa:QUALifier
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN: Sets or queries the LIN bus search trigger data size.
DATa:SIZe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN: Sets or queries the LIN bus search trigger data value.
DATa:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN: Sets or queries the LIN bus search trigger error type.
ERRTYPE
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN: Sets or queries the LIN bus search trigger identifier value.
IDentifier:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies a field or condition for an Manchester bus to search on.
MANChester:CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the number of bits per word for the specified Manchester bus.
MANChester:DATa:SIZe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the binary string used for Manchester triggering if the trigger condition is
MANChester:DATa:VALue data when searching on a Manchester signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the error to be used when searching on a Manchester signal.
MANChester:ERRor:TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the binary string used for Manchester triggering if the trigger condition is
MANChester:HEADER:VALue header when searching on a Manchester signal.

2-112 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the binary string used for Manchester triggering if the trigger condition
MANChester:packetOffData:VALue is DATA.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the binary string used for Manchester triggering if the trigger condition is
MANChester:SYNC:VALue Sync when searching on a Manchester signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the binary string used for Manchester triggering if the trigger condition is
MANChester:TRAILER:VALue Trailer when searching on a Manchester signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO: Specifies the binary address string used for MDIO triggering if the trigger condition is
ADDress:VALue address.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO: Sets or queries the trigger condition for MDIO bus.
CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO: Specifies the binary data string used for MDIO triggering if the trigger condition
DATa:VALue is DATA.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO: Specifies the binary device type string used for MDIO triggering if the trigger condition
DEVicetype:VALue is Device type.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO: Sets or queries the error type to be used when triggering on MDIO data.This applies
ERRType when the MDIo bus trigger condition is set to ERRor.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO: Specifies the binary op-code string used for MDIO triggering if the trigger condition is
OPCode:VALue op-code .
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO: Specifies the binary physical address string used for MDIO triggering if the trigger
PHYSicaladdress:VALue condition is physical address.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO: Specifies the binary register address string used for MDIO triggering if the trigger
REGisteraddress:VALue condition is register address.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the field or condition for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on.
MIL1553B:CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the type of error condition for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on.
MIL1553B:ERRTYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the value of the command word Transmit / Receive bit for a
MIL1553B:COMMAND:TRBit MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the value of the command word parity bit for a MIL-STD-1553 bus
MIL1553B:COMMAND:PARity to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the value of the command word "word count" field for a MIL-STD-1553
MIL1553B:COMMAND:COUNt bus to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the value of the command word subaddress field for a MIL-STD-1553
MIL1553B:COMMAND:SUBADdress bus to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on command word addresses
MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:QUALifier for a MIL-STD-1553 bus.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the low value when searching on command word addresses for a
MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:VALue MIL-STD-1553 bus.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-113

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the high value when searching on command word addresses for a
MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:HIVALue MIL-STD-1553 bus.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the value of the command word parity bit for a MIL-STD-1553 bus
MIL1553B:DATa:PARity to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the value when searching on data words for a MIL-STD-1553 bus.
MIL1553B:DATa:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the value of the status word parity bit for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to
MIL1553B:STATus:PARity search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on status word addresses
MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:QUALifier for a MIL-STD-1553 bus.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the low value when searching on status word addresses for a
MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:VALue MIL-STD-1553 bus.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the high value when searching on status word addresses for a
MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:HIVALue MIL-STD-1553 bus.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the value of the message error bit (ME bit, bit 9) in a status word
MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:ME for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the value of the instrumentation bit (INSTR bit, bit 10) in a status word
MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:INSTR for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the value of the status word service request bit (SRQ bit, bit 11) in a
MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:SRQ status word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the value of the broadcast command received bit (BCR bit, bit 15)
MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BCR in a status word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the value of the busy bit (BUSY bit, bit 16) in a status word for a
MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BUSY MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Ssets or queries the value of the subsystem flag bit (SUBSF bit, bit 17) in a status
MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:SUBSF word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the value of the dynamic bus control acceptance bit (DBCA bit, bit 18)
MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:DBCA in a status word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the value of the terminal flag bit (TF bit, bit 19) in a status word for a
MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:TF MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC: Sets or queries the trigger on command code for a NFC bus.
COMMand:CODe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC: Sets or queries the trigger condition for a NFC bus.
CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC: Specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an NFC trigger if the
DATa:SIZe trigger condition is DATA.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC: Specifies the binary data string used for NFC triggering if the trigger condition is DATA.
DATa:VALue

2-114 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC: Sets or queries the error type for NFC bus.
ERRor:TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC: Sets or queries the number of payload bits for the specified bus.
PAYLOADBITS
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC: Sets or queries the trigger on response code for a NFC bus.
RESPonse:CODe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC: Sets or queries the trigger command/response type for a NFC bus.
TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC: Specifies the binary data string used for NFC triggering if the trigger condition is UID.
UID:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NRZ: Specifies a field or condition for an NRZ bus to search on.
CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NRZ: Specifies the length of the data string, in bytes, to use when searching on the NRZ
DATa:SIZe signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NRZ: Sets or queries the binary data value to be used when searching on a NRZ signal.
DATa:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: This command specifies the binary data string used for ONEWIRe triggering if the
ONEWIRe:COMMand:VALue trigger condition is COMMAND.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: This command sets or queries the trigger condition for a ONEWIRe bus.
ONEWIRe:CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: This command specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for ONEWIRe
ONEWIRe:DATa:SIZe triggering if the trigger condition is DATA.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: This command specifies the binary data string used for ONEWIRe triggering if the
ONEWIRe:DATa:VALue trigger condition is DATA.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: This command sets or queries the family code for Match ROM in ONEWIRE bus.
ONEWIRe:MATCHROM:FAMILYCODe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: This command sets or queries the serial number for Match ROM in ONEWIRE bus.
ONEWIRe:MATCHROM:SERIALNUMBer
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: This command sets or queries the Family Code for Overdrive match ROM in
ONEWIRe:OVERDRIVe:FAMILYCODe ONEWIRE bus.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: This command sets or queries the serial number for Overdrive match ROM in
ONEWIRe:OVERDRIVe:SERIALNUMBer ONEWIRE bus.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: This command sets or queries the family code for Read ROM in ONEWIRE bus.
ONEWIRe:READROM:FAMILYCODe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: This command sets or queries the serial number for Read ROM in ONEWIRE bus.
ONEWIRe:READROM:SERIALNUMBer
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: This command sets or queries the ROM code for Search ROM in ONEWIRE bus.
ONEWIRe:SEARCHROM:ROMCODe

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-115

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the data value for a parallel bus trigger search to determine where to
PARallel:DATa:VALue place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary block data string used for PSI5 triggering if the trigger
PSIFIVe:BLOCKDATa:VALue condition is block ID.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the trigger condition for an PSI5 bus.
PSIFIVe:CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary data string used for PSI5 triggering if the trigger condition is
PSIFIVe:DATa:ECU:SENSor:VALue Data in ECU to Sensor communication mode.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary data string used for PSI5 triggering if the trigger condition is
PSIFIVe:DATa:REGion:A:VALue data region A.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an PSI5 trigger
PSIFIVe:DATa:REGion:B:VALue if the trigger condition is data region B.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary register address string used for PSI5 triggering if the trigger
PSIFIVe:DATABITs condition is data in ECU to Sensor communication mode.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the error type for an PSI5 bus.
PSIFIVe:ERRORTYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary data string used for PSI5 triggering if the trigger condition is
PSIFIVe:FUNCTIONCODETYPe a Function Code.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary register address string used for PSI5 triggering if the trigger
PSIFIVe:REGister:ADDRess:VALue condition is Register Address.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the register address for PSI5 bus.
PSIFIVe:REGISTERADDRess
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary sensor address string used for PSI5 triggering if the trigger
PSIFIVe:SENSor:ADDRess:VALue condition is Sensor Address.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the sensor status for PSI5 bus.
PSIFIVe:SENSORSTATus:TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary status string used for PSI5 triggering if the trigger condition
PSIFIVe:STATus:VALue is status.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the data string value for the specified RS232c bus trigger search to
RS232C:DATa:VALue determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the condition for an RS232C bus search to determine where to
RS232C:CONDition place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an RS232 bus
RS232C:DATa:SIZe search to determine where to place a mark when the search condition is Data.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the type of data search for an 8B10b bus.
S8B10B:CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the disparity to be used when searching on a 8B10b signal.
S8B10B:DISParity

2-116 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the error type to be used when searching on a 8B10b signal.
S8B10B:ERRor
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the control symbol value to be used when searching on 8b10b signal.
S8B10B:SYMbol:CSYMVALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the 8 bit value to be used when searching on an 8b10b signal.
S8B10B:SYMbol:EBITVALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the 10 bit value to be used when searching on an 8b10b signal.
S8B10B:SYMbol:TBITVALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the mode of data search to be used when searching on 8b10b signal.
S8B10B:SYMbol:MODe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the 10 bit RD positive value to be used when searching on an 8b10b signal
S8B10B:SYMbol:TBITRDNeg
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Specifies the 10 bit RD negative value to be used when searching on an 8b10b signal
S8B10B:SYMbol:TBITRDPos
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the type of symbol when searching on 8b10b signal.
S8B10B:SYMbol:TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC: Sets or queries the Address in SDLC bus.
ADDRess:TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC: Sets or queries the trigger condition for a SDLC bus.
CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC: Specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for SDLC triggering if the
DATa:SIZe trigger condition is DATA.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC: Specifies the binary data string used for SDLC triggering if the trigger condition
DATa:VALue is DATA.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC: Sets or queries the Error Type in SDLC bus.
ERROR:TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC: Sets or queries the Frame Type in SDLC bus.
FRAMe:TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC: Specifies the binary Station Address string used for SDLC triggering if the trigger
STADDress:VALue condition is Address.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC: Sets or queries the Supervisory Frame Type in SDLC bus.
SUPervisory:FRAMETYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC: Sets or queries the Unnumbered Frame Type in SDLC bus.
UNNumbered:FRAMETYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the search condition for a SENT bus.
CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the error type to be used when searching on SENT data.
ERRType

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-117

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the CRC error type to be used when searching on SENT data.
ERRType:CRC
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the high binary fast channel 1 value to use when searching on a
FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALue SENT bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on SENT fast packet bus
FAST:CHAN1A:QUALifier data for device channel 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the binary fast channel 1 value to be used when searching on a
FAST:CHAN1A:VALue SENT bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the high binary fast channel 2 value to use when searching on a
FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALue SENT bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on SENT fast packet bus
FAST:CHAN2B:QUALifier data for device channel 2.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the binary fast channel 2 value to be used when searching on a
FAST:CHAN2B:VALue SENT bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the high binary fast message counter value to use when searching
FAST:COUNTer:HIVALue on a SENT bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on SENT fast packet bus data
FAST:COUNTer:QUALifier for the secure format counter.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the binary fast message counter value to be used when searching
FAST:COUNTer:VALue on a SENT bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the binary fast message inverted nibble value to be used when
FAST:INVERTNIBble:VALue searching on a SENT bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the binary status value to be used when searching on a SENT bus
FAST:STATus:VALue signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on SENT pause pulses.
PAUSE:QUALifier
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the maximum number of pause clock ticks to be used when searching
PAUSE:TICKs:HIVALue on a SENT bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the minimum number of pause clock ticks to be used when searching
PAUSE:TICKs:VALue on a SENT bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the high binary Slow channel data value to use when searching on
SLOW:DATA:HIVALue SENT Slow packet bus data.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on SENT Slow packet bus
SLOW:DATA:QUALifier data.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the binary slow channel data value to be used when searching on
SLOW:DATA:VALue SENT Slow packet bus data.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the binary Slow identifier value to be used when searching on SENT
SLOW:IDentifier:VALue Slow packet bus data.

2-118 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary physical address string used for SMBUS triggering if the
SMBUS:ADDRess:VALue trigger condition is address.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary command code string used for SMBUS triggering if the
SMBUS:COMMand:VALue trigger condition is command code.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the trigger condition for a SMBUS bus.
SMBUS:CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an SMBus trigger if
SMBUS:DATa:SIZe the trigger condition is DATA.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary data string used for SMBus triggering if the trigger condition
SMBUS:DATa:VALue is DATA.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary physical address string used for SMBUS triggering if the
SMBUS:DEVICEADDR:VALue trigger condition is Device address.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the Error type for a SMBus.
SMBUS:ERROr:TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the field byte for a SMBUS bus if trigger condition is UDID data.
SMBUS:FIELDBYTe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary data string used for SMBus triggering if the trigger condition
SMBUS:UDIDDATa:VALue is UDID DATA.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the bus source for the specified bus trigger search to determine
SOUrce where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: S
SPACEWIRe:CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the control character type to use when searching on a SpaceWire
SPACEWIRe:CONTROLCHARTYPe bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the control code type to use when searching on a SpaceWire bus
SPACEWIRe:CONTROLCODETYPe signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the length of the data string, in bytes, to use when searching on a
SPACEWIRe:DATa:SIZe SpaceWire bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary data value to be used when searching on an SpaceWire
SPACEWIRe:DATa:VALue bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the error type for which to search on the SpaceWire bus signal.
SPACEWIRe:ERRORTYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the binary data string used for SpaceWire search if the search
SPACEWIRe:TIMECode:VALue condition is Time Code.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI: Sets or queries the trigger condition for the specified SPI bus trigger search to
CONDition determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI: Sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes used for the specified SPI bus
DATa:SIZe trigger search to determine where to place a mark.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-119

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI: Sets or queries the data value of the data token for the specified SPI bus trigger
DATa:VALue search to determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI: Sets or queries trigger Source for SPI bus.
SOURCETYpe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI: This command sets or queries the search condition for an SPMI bus.
CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI: This command specifies the binary data string used for SPMI when the search
DATa:VALue condition is MASTERREAd, MASTERWRIte, REGREAd, REGWRIte, EXTREGREAd,
EXTREGWRIte, LONGEXTREGREAd, LONGEXTREGWRIte, or REG0WRIte.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI: This command sets or queries the binary data string that identifies the master address
MASTERADDRess:VALue used in SPMI search.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI: This command sets or queries whether or not to search for No Response frames.
NORESPonse
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI: This command sets or queries the binary data string that identifies the register
REGISTERADDRess:VALue address used in SPMI triggering.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI: This command sets or queries the binary data string that identifies the slave address
SLAVEADDRess:VALue used in SPMI.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID: Sets or queries the command response of respective command type for SVID bus.
COMMand:RESPonse
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID: Sets or queries the command type for SVID bus.
COMMand:TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID: Sets or queries the trigger condition for SVID bus.
CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID: Sets or queries the error type for SVID bus.
ERRor:TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID: Sets or queries the payload type for SVID bus.
PAYLoad:TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID: Sets or queries the payload value to be used when search is on SVID bus.
PAYLoad:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID: Sets or queries the slave address to be used when search is on SVID bus.
SLAVE:ADDRESS
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the address value for normal token to be used with In Range and Out
ADDress:HIVALue of Range qualifiers for the specified USB bus trigger search to determine where to
place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the address value for normal token for the specified USB bus trigger
ADDress:VALue search to determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the trigger condition for an USB bus on specific control symbol.
CHARacter

2-120 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the trigger condition for an USB bus on compliance pattern sequences.
COMPliance
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the search condition for the specified USB bus trigger search to
CONDition determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the USB3 CRC trigger type to be valid on a CRC5, CRC16 or CRC32.
CRCTYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the control symbol value for an USB bus.
CUSTom:CSYMVALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the negative disparity 10 bit value for an USB bus.
CUSTom:RDNeg
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the positive disparity 10 bit value for an USB bus.
CUSTom:RDPos
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the data value for data token used with In Range and Out of Range
DATa:HIVALue qualifiers for the specified USB bus trigger search to determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries data offset for the specified USB bus trigger search to determine
DATa:OFFSet where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes for the specified USB bus trigger
DATa:SIZe search to determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the data packet type for the specified USB bus trigger search to
DATa:TYPe determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the data value for data token for the specified bus trigger search to
DATa:VALue determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the endpoint value for normal token for the specified USB bus trigger
ENDPoint:VALue search to determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the USB3 8b10b encoding error trigger type to be valid on a character
ERR8B10B:TYPe or disparity.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the error type for the specified USB bus trigger search to determine
ERRTYPE where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the handshake type for the specified USB bus trigger search to
HANDSHAKEType determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the USB trigger type to be valid on ordered set condition.
ORDered:SET
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the trigger condition for an USB bus on specific packet for LMP.
PACKet:TYPEOFLMP
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the trigger condition for an USB bus on specific packet for TP.
PACKet:TYPEOFTP
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the trigger condition for an USB bus on specific packet.
PACKETTYPe

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-121

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the frame number string to use for the Start of Frame for the specified
SOFFRAMENUMber USB bus trigger search to determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the PID value for the USB bus trigger search to determine where to
SPECIALType place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the Endpoint Type value for the specified USB bus trigger split token
SPLIT:ET:VALue field search to determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the hub address of the specified USB bus trigger on split token field
SPLIT:HUB:VALue search to determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the port address for the specified USB bus trigger on split token field
SPLIT:PORT:VALue search to determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the Start/Complete value for the specified USB bus trigger on split
SPLIT:SC:VALue token field search to determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the Start/End value for the specified USB bus trigger on split token
SPLIT:SE:VALue field search to determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the token type when the specified USB bus trigger search to determine
TOKENType where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE: Sets or queries the slope for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a
SLOpe mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: This command sets or queries the DDRRead search burst detection method.
BURSTDETectmethod
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: This command sets or queries the DDR read logic state burst latency value.
BURSTLatency
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: This command sets or queries the DDR read logic state burst length value.
BURSTLENGTH
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: This command sets or queries the DDR Read chip select active state.
CSActive
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: This command sets or queries the DDR Read chip select level value.
CSLevel
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: This command sets or queries the DDR Read chip select mode.
CSMode
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: This command sets or queries the DDR Read search chip select source.
CSSource
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: Sets or queries the DDR read search data rate for DDR3 and LPDRR3 standards
DATARate of the specified search.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: Sets or queries the DDR read data source when the search type is DDR READ.
DATASource
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: Sets or queries the DDR read hysteresis reference level value, when the search
HYSteresis type is DDR READ.

2-122 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: This command sets or queries the DDR read logic source 1 symbol.
LOGIC1SOUrce:SYMBol
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: This command sets or queries the DDR read logic source 2 symbol.
LOGIC2SOUrce:SYMBol
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: This command sets or queries the DDR read logic source 3 symbol.
LOGIC3SOUrce:SYMBol
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: This command sets or queries the DDR read logic source 4 symbol.
LOGIC4SOUrce:SYMBol
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: Sets or queries the DDR read margin reference level value, when the search type is
MARgin DDR READ.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: This command sets or queries the DDR read chip maximum Column Access Strobe
MAXCAS (CAS) value.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: This command sets or queries the DDR read chip minimum Column Access Strobe
MINCas (CAS) value.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: Sets or queries the DDR read postamble length when the search type is DDR READ.
POSTAMBLE:LENGth
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: Sets or queries the DDR read preamble type when the search type is DDR READ.
PREAMBLE:TYPE
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: Sets or queries the DDR read data high reference level value, when the search type is
REFLevel:DATA:HIGH DDR READ.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: Sets or queries the DDR read data low reference level value, when the search type is
REFLevel:DATA:LOW DDR READ.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: Sets or queries the DDR read data mid reference level value, when the search type is
REFLevel:DATA:MID DDR READ.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: Sets or queries the DDR read reference level strobe high value, when the search
REFLevel:STROBE:HIGH type is DDR READ.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: Sets or queries the DDR read reference level strobe low value, when the search
REFLevel:STROBE:LOW type is DDR READ.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: Sets or queries the DDR read reference level strobe mid value, when the search
REFLevel:STROBE:MID type is DDR READ.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: Sets or queries the DDR read reference level mode to auto or manual, when the
REFLEVELMode search type is DDR READ.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: Sets or queries the DDR read search standard as DDR3 or LPDDR3.
STANdard
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: Sets or queries the DDR read strobe source when the search type is DDR READ.
STROBESource
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: This command sets or queries the DDR read logic state tolerance value.
TOLERance

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-123

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: This command sets or queries the DDR Read/Write search burst detection method
DDRREADWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: This command sets or queries the DDR read/write logic state burst latency value.
DDRREADWRITE:BURSTLatency
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: This command sets or queries the DDR read/write logic state burst length value.
DDRREADWRITE:BURSTLENGTH
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: This command sets or queries the DDR Read/Write chip select active state.
DDRREADWRITE:CSActive
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: This command sets or queries the DDR Read/Write chip select level value.
DDRREADWRITE:CSLevel
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: This command sets or queries the DDR read/write chip select mode.
DDRREADWRITE:CSMode
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: This command sets or queries the DDR Read/Write search chip select source.
DDRREADWRITE:CSSource
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets or queries the DDR read/write data rate for DDR3 and LPDRR3 standards of the
DDRREADWRITE:DATARate specified search.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets or queries the DDR read/write data source when the search type is DDR
DDRREADWRITE:DATASource READWRITE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets or queries the DDR read/write hysteresis reference level value, when the search
DDRREADWRITE:HYSteresis type is DDR READWRITE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: This command sets or queries the DDR read/write logic source 1 symbol.
DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC1SOUrce:SYMBol
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: This command sets or queries the DDR read/write logic source 2 symbol.
DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC2SOUrce:SYMBol
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: This command sets or queries the DDR read/write logic source 3 symbol.
DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC3SOUrce:SYMBol
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: This command sets or queries the DDR read/write logic source 4 symbol.
DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC4SOUrce:SYMBol
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets or queries the DDR read/write margin reference level value, when the search
DDRREADWRITE:MARgin type is DDR READWRITE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: This command sets or queries the DDR read/write chip maximum Column Access
DDRREADWRITE:MAXCAS Strobe (CAS) value.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: This command sets or queries the DDR read/write chip minimum Column Access
DDRREADWRITE:MINCas Strobe (CAS) value.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets or queries the DDR read/write postamble length when the search type is DDR
DDRREADWRITE:POSTAMBLE:LENGth READWRITE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets or queries the DDR read/write preamble type when the search type is DDR
DDRREADWRITE:PREAMBLE:TYPE READWRITE.

2-124 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets or queries the DDR read/write data high reference level value, when the search
DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:HIGH type is DDR READWRITE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets or queries the DDR read/write data low reference level value, when the search
DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:LOW type is DDR READWRITE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets or queries the DDR read/write data mid reference level value, when the search
DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:MID type is DDR READWRITE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets or queries the DDR read/write reference level strobe high value, when the
DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:HIGH search type is DDR READWRITE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets or queries the DDR read/write reference level strobe low value, when the search
DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:LOW type is DDR READWRITE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets or queries the DDR read/write reference level strobe mid value, when the search
DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:MID type is DDR READWRITE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets or queries the DDR read/write reference level mode to auto or manual, when
DDRREADWRITE:REFLEVELMode the search type is DDR READWRITE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets or queries the DDR read/write search standard as DDR3 or LPDDR3.
DDRREADWRITE:STANdard
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets or queries the DDR read/write strobe source when the search type is DDR
DDRREADWRITE:STROBESource READWRITE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: This command sets or queries the DDR read/write logic state tolerance value.
DDRREADWRITE:TOLERance
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: This command sets or queries the DDRWRITE search burst detection method.
BURSTDETectmethod
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: This command sets or queries the DDR write logic state burst latency value.
BURSTLatency
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: This command sets or queries the DDR write logic state burst length value.
BURSTLENGTH
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: This command sets or queries the DDR write chip select active state.
CSActive
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: This command sets or queries the DDR Write chip select level value.
CSLevel
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: This command sets or queries the DDR Write chip select mode.
CSMode
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: This command sets or queries the DDR Write search chip select source.
CSSource
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: Sets or queries the DDR write search data rate for DDR3 and LPDRR3 standards
DATARate of the specified search.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: Sets or queries the DDR write data source when the search type is DDR Write.
DATASource

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-125

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: Sets or queries the DDR write hysteresis reference level value when the search
HYSteresis type is DDR WRITE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: This command sets or queries the DDR write logic source 1 symbol.
LOGIC1SOUrce:SYMBol
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: This command sets or queries the DDR write logic source 2 symbol.
LOGIC2SOUrce:SYMBol
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: This command sets or queries the DDR write logic source 3 symbol.
LOGIC3SOUrce:SYMBol
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: This command sets or queries the DDR write logic source 4 symbol.
LOGIC4SOUrce:SYMBol
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: Sets or queries the DDR write margin reference level value, when the search type is
MARgin DDR WRITE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: This command sets or queries the DDR write chip select maximum Column Access
MAXCAS Strobe (CAS) value.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: This command sets or queries the DDR write chip select minimum Column Access
MINCas Strobe (CAS) value.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: Sets or queries the DDR write postamble length when the search type is DDR WRITE.
POSTAMBLE:LENGth
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: Sets or queries the DDR write preamble type when the search type is DDR WRITE.
PREAMBLE:TYPE
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: Sets or queries the DDR write data high reference level value, when the search type
REFLevel:DATA:HIGH is DDR WRITE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: Sets or queries the DDR write data low reference level value, when the search type is
REFLevel:DATA:LOW DDR WRITE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: Sets or queries the DDR write data mid reference level value, when the search type is
REFLevel:DATA:MID DDR WRITE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: Sets or queries the DDR write reference level strobe high value, when the search
REFLevel:STROBE:HIGH type is DDR WRITE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: Sets or queries the DDR write reference level strobe low value, when the search
REFLevel:STROBE:LOW type is DDR WRITE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: Sets or queries the DDR write reference level strobe mid value, when the search
REFLevel:STROBE:MID type is DDR WRITE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: Sets or queries the DDR write reference level mode to auto or manual, when the
REFLEVELMode search type is DDR WRITE.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: Sets or queries the DDR write search standard as DDR3 or LPDDR3.
STANdard
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: Sets or queries the DDR write strobe source when the search type is DDR Write.
STROBESource

2-126 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: This command sets or queries the DDR write logic state tolerance value.
TOLERance
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE: Sets or queries the slope for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a
SLOpe mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE: Sets or queries the source waveform for an edge trigger search to determine where to
SOUrce place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets or queries the logic operator for a pattern or state trigger search to determine
FUNCtion where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets whether or not Logic search uses a clock source.
USEClockedge
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT: Sets or queries the condition setting for a runt trigger search to determine where to
WHEn place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth Sets or queries the width setting for a runt trigger search to determine where to
place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets or queries the clock slope setting for a setup/hold trigger search to determine
CLOCk:EDGE where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets or queries the clock source setting for a setup/hold trigger search to determine
CLOCk:SOUrce where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets or queries the hold time setting for a setup/hold trigger search to determine
HOLDTime where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets or queries the setup time setting for a setup/hold trigger search to determine
SETTime where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut: Sets or queries the time setting for a timeout trigger search to determine where to
TIMe place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition: Sets or queries the transition time setting for a transition trigger search to determine
DELTATime where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition: Sets or queries the condition setting for a transition trigger search to determine
WHEn where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe Sets or queries the trigger type setting for a search to determine where to place a
mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow: Sets or queries the width setting for a window search to determine where to place a
WIDth mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN: Sets or queries the LIN bus search trigger condition.
CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on a USB bus signal.
DATa:QUALifier
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE: Sets or queries the source threshold level for an edge trigger search to determine
THReshold where to place a mark.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-127

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets or queries the logic clock threshold for a logic trigger search to determine where
CLOCk:THReshold to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Specifies the Logic search delta time value.
DELTatime
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets or queries the channel to use as the clock source for logic trigger.
INPUT:CLOCK:SOUrce
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets or queries the voltage level to use for logic trigger search.
LEVel:CH<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets the voltage level to use for logic trigger search.
LEVel:MATH<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets the voltage level to use for logic trigger search.
LEVel:REF<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic pattern.
LOGICPattern:CH<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic pattern.
LOGICPattern:CH<x>_D<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic pattern.
LOGICPattern:MATH<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic pattern.
LOGICPattern:REF<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets or queries the polarity for the clock channel when Use Clock Edge is set to
POLarity Yes for Logic search type.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets or queries the condition for generating an A or B logic search with respect to
WHEn the defined input pattern.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Specifies the upper limit to use, in seconds, when searching for a pulse whose
PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit duration is inside or outside a range of two values.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Specifies whether or not to use logic qualification for a pulse width search.
PULSEWidth:LOGICQUALification
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Specifies the lower limit to use, in seconds, when searching for a pulse whose
PULSEWidth:LOWLimit duration is inside or outside a range of two values.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Specifies the polarity for a pulse width search.
PULSEWidth:POLarity
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets and queries the source for the pulsewidth search input.
PULSEWidth:SOUrce
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets or queries the source threshold level for a pulse width trigger search to determine
PULSEWidth:THReshold where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Specifies to search for a pulse with a specified width.
PULSEWidth:WHEn

2-128 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT: Specifies whether or not to use logic qualification for a runt search.
LOGICQUALification
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT: Specifies the polarity for the runt search.
POLarity
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT: Sets and queries the source for the Runt search input.
SOUrce
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT: Sets or queries the source threshold HIGH level for a runt trigger search to determine
THReshold:HIGH where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT: Sets or queries the source threshold LOW level for a runt trigger search to determine
THReshold:LOW where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets or queries the clock threshold setting for a setup/hold trigger search to determine
CLOCk:THReshold where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets or queries the voltage level to use for setup & hold trigger search.
LEVel:CH<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets or queries the voltage level to use for setup & hold trigger search.
LEVel:MATH<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets or queries the voltage level to use for setup & hold trigger search.
LEVel:REF<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic pattern.
LOGICPattern:CH<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic pattern.
LOGICPattern:CH<x>_D<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic pattern.
LOGICPattern:MATH<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets and returns the conditions used for generating an A logic pattern.
LOGICPattern:REF<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:STATE Sets or queries the enabled state of the search.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:STOPAcq Sets or queries whether acquisitions are stopped when a search hit is found.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut: Sets whether or not to use logic qualification for a timeout search.
LOGICQUALification
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut: Sets or queries the polarity to be used for a Timeout search.
POLarity
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut: Sets and queries the source for timeout search input.
SOUrce
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut: Sets or queries the source threshold level for a timeout trigger search to determine
THReshold where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition: Specifies whether or not to use logic qualification for a transition search.
LOGICQUALification

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-129

Command groups

Table 2-44: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition: Specifies the polarity for the transition search.
POLarity
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition: Sets and queries the source for the transition search input.
SOUrce
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition: Sets or queries the source threshold HIGH level for a transition trigger search to
THReshold:HIGH determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition: Sets or queries the source threshold LOW level for a transition trigger search to
THReshold:LOW determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow: Sets or queries the window trigger threshold crossing of the selected trigger Source.
CROSSIng
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow: Specifies or queries whether or not to use logic qualification for a window search.
LOGICQUALification
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow: Sets or queries the window trigger threshold crossing of the selected trigger Source.
POLarity
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow: Sets and queries the source for the window search input.
SOUrce
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow: Sets or queries the source threshold HIGH level for a transition trigger search to
THReshold:HIGH determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow: Sets or queries the source threshold LOW level for a transition trigger search to
THReshold:LOW determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow: Sets or queries the window search event.
WHEn
SEARCH:SELected Sets or queries the selected search.
SEARCHTABle:ADDNew Adds a new search event table in an Option 5-WIN (Microsoft Windows 10 OS)
TekExpress compliance testing application.
SEARCHTABle:DELete Deletes a search event table in an Option 5-WIN (Microsoft Windows 10 OS)
TekExpress compliance testing application.
SEARCHTABle:list? Returns a list of all the search event table in an Option 5-WIN (Microsoft Windows 10
OS) TekExpress compliance testing application.

2-130 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Self Test command group

The Self Test commands control the selection and execution of diagnostic tests.

Table 2-45: Self Test commands

Command Description
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion Sets or queries the type of looping desired.
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion:NTIMes Sets or queries how many loops to run.
DIAg:LOOP:STOP Stops diagnostics looping.
DIAg:MODe Sets or queries the diagnostics mode.
DIAg:RESUlt? Returns the diagnostics results.
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg? Returns the status of the diagnostics (single area).
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG? Returns the status of the diagnostic area.
DIAg:SELect Selects an available diagnostic area.
DIAg:STATE Sets the instrument operating state.
TOUCHSCReen:CALibrate Starts the touch screen calibration procedure.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-131

Command groups

Spectrum View command group

The Spectrum View commands control the selection and execution of spectrum
commands.

Table 2-46: Spectrum View commands

Command Description
CH<x>:SV:CENTERFrequency Sets or queries the center frequency of the specified spectrum trace channel for
Spectrum View.
CH<x>:SV:POSition Sets or queries the Spectrum Time setting of the specified spectrum trace channel
in the Spectrum View.
CH<x>:SV:SPANABovebw? Queries whether the stop frequency for the specified spectrum trace channel is
above the scope input bandwidth.
CH<x>:SV:SPANBELowdc? Queries whether the start frequency for the specified spectrum trace channel is
below 0 Hz.
CH<x>:SV:STARTFrequency? Queries the start frequency for the specified spectrum trace channel in Spectrum
View
CH<x>:SV:STATE Sets or queries the on/off setting of data acquisition for the specified spectrum
trace channel.
CH<x>:SV:STOPFrequency? Queries the stop frequency of the specified spectrum trace channel for Spectrum
View
PEAKSTABle:ADDNew Adds the specified peak markers table.
PEAKSTABle:DELete Deletes the specified peak markers table.
PEAKSTABle:LIST? Lists all currently defined peak markers tables.
PEAKSTABle:TABle<x>:FRESolution Sets or queries the Frequency Resolution state for peak markers table.
SV:CH<x>:RF_AVErage:NUMAVg Sets or queries the number of acquisitions to be used when creating the Average
trace for the specified spectrum trace channel in the Spectrum View.
SV:CH<x>:RF_MAGnitude:FORMat Sets or queries the format of the Magnitude vs. Time trace for the specified channel.
SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:REFerence:DEGrees Sets or queries the channel Phase Reference value in degrees.
SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:REFerence:POSition Sets or queries whether the channel Phase Reference is located at the Trigger
position or at the Cursor A position.
SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:REFerence:TIMe Sets or queries the channel Phase Reference time in seconds.
SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:WRAP:DEGrees Sets or queries the Phase Wrap limit for the Phase vs. Time trace for the specified
channel.
SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:WRAP:STATE Sets or queries whether Phase Wrap is applied to the Phase vs. Time trace for
the specified channel.
SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_AVErage Sets or queries whether the Average trace is displayed for the specified spectrum
trace channel in the Spectrum View.
SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_FREQuency Sets or queries whether the Frequency vs. Time trace for the specified channel is
displayed in the Waveform View.
SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_MAGnitude Sets or queries whether the Magnitude vs. Time trace for the specified channel is
displayed in the Waveform View.
SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_MAXHold Sets or queries whether the Max Hold trace is displayed for the specified spectrum
trace channel in the Spectrum View.

2-132 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Command Description
SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_MINHold Sets or queries whether the Min Hold trace is displayed for the specified spectrum
trace channel in the Spectrum View.
SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_NORMal Sets or queries whether the Normal trace is displayed for the specified spectrum
trace channel in the Spectrum View.
SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_PHASe Sets or queries whether the Phase vs. Time trace for the specified channel is
displayed in the Waveform View.
SV:CH<x>:SELect:SPECtrogram Sets or queries whether the spectrogram plot for the specified channel is displayed
in the Spectrum View.
SV:CH<x>:SELTrace Sets or queries the spectrum trace type to show for the specified channel in the
Spectrum View.
SV:CH<x>:SQUELCH:STATE Sets or queries whether Squelch is enabled for the RF vs Time traces for the
specified channel.
SV:CH<x>:SQUELCH:THReshold Sets or queries the Squelch threshold value for the RF vs Time traces for the
specified channel.
SV:CH<x>:UNIts Sets or queries the vertical units to be used in the Spectrum View for the specified
channel for absolute logarithmic amplitudes.
SV:LOCKCenter Sets or queries whether the Center Frequency value is locked across all channels
in the Spectrum View.
SV:LOCKSpectrum Sets or queries whether the Spectrum Time value is locked across all spectrum
trace channels in the Spectrum View.
SV:MARKER:PEAK:EXCURsion Sets or queries the minimum peak excursion value, in dB, for the Spectrum View
trace peak markers.
SV:MARKER:PEAK:MAXimum Sets or queries the maximum number of Spectrum View trace peaks that can have
automatic markers placed on them.
SV:MARKER:PEAK:STATE Sets or queries the visibility of peak markers for Spectrum View traces.
SV:MARKER:PEAK:THReshold Sets or queries the threshold value of the peak markers available for frequency
domain traces.
SV:MARKER:PEAKS:AMPLITUDE? Queries the peak amplitudes for the Spectrum View trace peak markers.
SV:MARKER:PEAKS:FREQuency? Queries the peak frequencies for the Spectrum View trace peak markers.
SV:MARKER:REFERence Sets the Center Frequency of the currently selected Spectrum View channel to the
frequency indicated by the Reference Marker
SV:MARKER:REFERence:AMPLITUDE? Queries the actual amplitude (vertical) value of the Reference Marker in user-set
units.
SV:MARKER:REFERence:FREQuency? Queries the frequency of the Reference Marker, in Hz, when the Spectrum View
trace markers are on.
SV:MARKER:TYPe Sets or queries the peak marker type (either DELTa or ABSolute).
SV:RBW Sets or queries the resolution bandwidth (RBW) when the RBW mode has been
set to Manual.
SV:RBWMode Sets or queries the resolution bandwidth (RBW) mode, either Automatic or Manual.
SV:RF_PHASe:REFerence:MASTer Sets or queries the channel used as the Master Phase Reference.
SV:SPAN Sets or queries the span setting for all channels in the Spectrum View.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-133

Command groups

Command Description
SV:SPANRBWRatio This command specifies the ratio of the span to the resolution bandwidth (RBW)
that will be used when the RBW Mode is set to AUTO.
SV:SPECtrogram:CSCale:MAX Sets or queries the maximum color scale value.
SV:SPECtrogram:CSCale:MIN Sets or queries the minimum color scale value.
SV:SPECtrogram:CURSor:A Sets or queries whether the spectrum trace at cursor A position is selected or not.
SV:SPECtrogram:CURSor:B Sets or queries whether the spectrum trace at cursor B position is selected or not.
SV:WINDOW Sets or queries the window type used by the windowing function of the Spectrum
View.

2-134 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Status and Error command group

Use the commands in the Status and Error command Group to determine the
status of the instrument and control events.
Several commands and queries used with the instrument are common to all
devices. The IEEE Std 488.2-1987 defines these commands and queries. The
common commands begin with an asterisk (*) character.

Table 2-47: Status and Error commands

Command Description
ALLEv? Returns all events and their messages.
BUSY? Returns instrument status.
*CLS Clears status.
DESE Sets or queries the bits in the Device Event Status Enable Register.
*ESE Sets or queries the bits in the Event Status Enable Register.
*ESR? Returns the contents of the Standard Event Status Register.
EVENT? Returns event code from the event queue.
EVMsg? Returns event code, message from the event queue.
EVQty? Returns number of events that are enabled in the queue.
*OPC Generates the operation complete message in the standard event status register
when all pending operations are finished
Or returns “1” when all current operations are finished.
*OPT? Returns a comma separated list of installed options as an arbitrary ASCII string
(no quotes).
*PSC Sets or queries the power on status flag.
*PUD Sets or queries a string of protected user data.
*RST Resets the instrument to factory default settings.
*SRE Sets or queries the bits in the Service Request Enable Register.
*STB? Returns the contents of the Status Byte Register.
*WAI Prevents the instrument from executing further commands until all pending
operations finish.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-135

Command groups

Trigger command group

Use the commands in the Trigger Command Group to control all aspects of
triggering for the instrument.
There are two triggers: A and B. Where appropriate, the command set has parallel
constructions for each trigger.
You can set the A or B triggers to edge mode. Edge triggering lets you display
a waveform at or near the point where the signal passes through a voltage level
of your choosing.
You can also set A or B triggers to pulse or logic modes. With pulse triggering,
the instrument triggers whenever it detects a pulse of a certain width or height.
Logic triggering lets you logically combine the signals on one or more channels.
The instrument then triggers when it detects a certain combination of signal levels.
The trigger types of Pulse Width, Timeout, Runt, Window, and Rise/Fall Time can
be further qualified by a logic pattern. This is referred to as logic qualification.

Table 2-48: Trigger commands

Command Description
TRIGger Forces a trigger event to occur or returns current trigger parameters for the
instrument.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A: Specifies a field or condition for an ARINC429 bus to trigger on.
CONDition
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A: Sets or queries the error type when triggering on an ARINC429 bus signal.
ERRTYPe
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on label data for an
LABel:QUALifier ARINC429 bus signal.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A: Sets or queries the low value when triggering on an ARINC429 label field.
LABel:VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A: Sets or queries the high value when triggering on an ARINC429 label field.
LABel:HIVALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SDI: sSets or queries the when triggering on an ARINC429 SDI field.
VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SSM: Sets or queries the when triggering on an ARINC429 SSM field.
VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATa: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on data in the DATA field
QUALifier for an ARINC429 bus signal.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATa: Sets or queries the low value when triggering on an ARINC429 data field.
VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATa: Sets or queries the high value when trigger on an ARINC429 data field.
HIVALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CONDition Sets the condition (word select, start of frame, or matching data) to be used when
triggering on an audio bus signal.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa: Sets the upper word value to be used when triggering on an audio bus signal.
HIVALue

2-136 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-48: Trigger commands (cont.)

Command Description
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa: Sets or queries the binary data string for the high data word to be used when
HITDMVALue triggering on an TDM audio bus signal.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa: Sets the data offset value to be used when triggering on an audio bus signal.
OFFSet
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa: Sets the qualifier (<, >, =, <=, >=, not =, in range, out of range) to be used when
QUALifier triggering on an audio bus signal.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa: Sets or queries the binary data string for the single or low data word to be used when
TDMVALue triggering on an TDM audio bus signal.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa: Sets the lower word value to be used when triggering on an audio bus signal.
VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa: Sets the alignment of the data (left, right or either) to be used to trigger on an
WORD audio bus signal.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition Sets the condition (start of frame, frame type, identifier, matching data, EOF, missing
ACK field, bit-stuffing error) to be used when triggering on a CAN bus signal.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa: Sets the data direction (read, write or “nocare”) to be used to search on a CAN
DIRection bus signal.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa: Sets or queries the data offset value, in bytes, to use when triggering on the CAN
OFFSet data field.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa: Sets the qualifier (<, >, =, not =, <=, >=) to be used when triggering on a CAN bus
QUALifier signal.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe Sets the length of the data string, in bytes, to be used when triggering on a CAN
bus signal.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue Sets the binary data value to be used when triggering on a CAN bus signal.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:ERRType Sets or queries the type of error condition for a CAN bus to triggering on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BRSBit Sets or queries the value of the bit rate switch bit (BRS bit) for a CAN bus to
triggering on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:ESIBit Sets or queries the value of the error state indicator bit (ESI bit) for a CAN bus to
triggering on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype Sets the frame type (data, remote, error or overload) to be used when triggering on
a CAN bus signal.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:IDentifier: Sets the addressing mode (standard or extended format) to be used when triggering
MODe on a CAN bus signal.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:IDentifier: Sets the binary address value to be used when triggering on a CAN bus signal.
VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet: Specifies a field or condition within an Ethernet frame to trigger on.
CONDition
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa: When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to DATa, and the qualifier is set to either
HIVALue INrange orOUTrange, this command specifies the upper data value of the range.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa: When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to DATa, this command specifies where in
OFFSet the data field to look for the data trigger value.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on an Ethernet bus signal.
QUALifier

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-137

Command groups

Table 2-48: Trigger commands (cont.)

Command Description
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa: When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to DATa, this command specifies the
SIZe number of contiguous TCP/IPv4/MAC client data bytes to trigger on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa: When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to DATa, and the qualifier is set
VALue to LESSthan, MOREthan, EQual, UNEQual, LESSEQual or
MOREEQual, this command specifies the value to trigger on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet: When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to IPHeader, this command specifies
IPHeader:DESTinationaddr:VALue the value of the 32–bit destination address that is to be used in the trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet: When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to IPHeader, this command specifies
IPHeader:PROTOcol:VALue the value of the 8–bit protocol field that is to be used in the trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet: When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to IPHeader, this command specifies
IPHeader:SOUrceaddr:VALue the value of the 32-bit source address that is to be used in the trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC: When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to MACADDress, this command specifies
ADDRess:DESTination:VALue the 48–bit MAC destination address that is to be used in the trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC: When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to MACADDress, this command specifies
ADDRess:SOUrce:VALue the 48–bit MAC source address value that is to be used in the trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC: When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to MACLENgth, and the qualifier is set to
LENgth:HIVALue INrange or OUTrange, this command specifies the upper data value of the range.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC: When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to MACLENgth, and the qualifier
LENgth:VALue is set to LESSthan, MOREthan, EQual, UNEQual, LESSEQual or
MOREEQual, this command specifies the 16–bit value to trigger on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:QTAG: When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to QTAG, this command specifies the
VALue 32-bit Q-Tag value to trigger on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet: When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to TCPHeader, this command specifies
TCPHeader:ACKnum:VALue the 32–bit acknowledgement number that is to be used in the trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet: When the Ethernet trigger condition is set TCPHeader, this command specifies the
TCPHeader:DESTinationport:VALue 16–bit destination port address value that is to be used in the trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet: When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to TCPHeader, this command specifies
TCPHeader:SEQnum:VALue the 32–bit sequence number that is to be used in the trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet: When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to TCPHeader, this command specifies
TCPHeader:SOUrceport:VALue the 16–bit source port address that is to be used in the trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray: Specifies the condition to use when triggering on a FlexRay bus signal (start of
CONDition frame, frame type, ID, cycle count, header, data, ID and data, EOF, error).
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray: Specifies the high value when triggering on a FlexRay bus cycle count field.
CYCLEcount:HIVALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray: Specifies the qualifier (<, >, =, <=, >=, ≠, in range, out of range) to use when
CYCLEcount:QUALifier triggering on the FlexRay bus cycle count field.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray: Specifies the low value when triggering on the FlexRay bus cycle count field.
CYCLEcount:VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa: Specifies the high value when triggering on the FlexRay bus data field.
HIVALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa: Specifies the offset of the data string, in bytes, when triggering on the FlexRay
OFFSet bus data field.

2-138 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-48: Trigger commands (cont.)

Command Description
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa: Specifies the qualifier (<, >, =, <=, >=, ≠, in range, out of range) to use when
QUALifier triggering on the FlexRay bus data field.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa: Specifies the length of the data string, in bytes, when triggering on the FlexRay
SIZe bus data field.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa: Specifies the low value when triggering on the FlexRay bus data field.
VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray: Specifies the end of file type (static, dynamic or any) when triggering on the FlexRay
EOFTYPE bus EOF field.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray: Specifies the error type when triggering on the FlexRay bus signal.
ERRTYPE
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray: Specifies the high value when triggering on the FlexRay bus frame ID field.
FRAMEID:HIVALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray: Specifies the qualifier to use when triggering on the FlexRay bus frame ID field.
FRAMEID:QUALifier
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray: Specifies the low value when triggering on the FlexRay bus frame ID field.
FRAMEID:VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray: Specifies the frame type (normal, payload, null, sync or startup) when triggering on
FRAMEType the FlexRay bus signal.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray: Specifies the CRC portion of the binary header string when triggering on the FlexRay
HEADER:CRC bus signal.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray: Specifies the cycle count portion of the binary header string when triggering on
HEADER:CYCLEcount the FlexRay bus header.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray: Specifies the frame ID portion of the binary header string when triggering on the
HEADER:FRAMEID FlexRay bus header.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray: Specifies the indicator bits portion of the binary header string when triggering on
HEADER:INDBits the FlexRay bus header.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray: Specifies the payload length portion of the binary header string when triggering on
HEADER:PAYLength the FlexRay bus header.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess: Specifies the I2C address mode to 7 or 10-bit.
MODe
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess: Specifies the binary address string used for the I2C trigger if the trigger condition is
VALue ADDRESS or ADDRANDDATA.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition Specifies the trigger condition for an I2C trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa: Specifies the I2C trigger type to be valid on a Read, Write, or No Care condition.
DIRection
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe Specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an I2C trigger if the
trigger condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue Specifies the binary data string used for I2C triggering if the trigger condition is
DATA or ADDRANDDATA.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:ADDRess: Specifies the I3C address mode to either 7bit or 10bit when triggering on address
MODe field.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-139

Command groups

Table 2-48: Trigger commands (cont.)

Command Description
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:ADDRess: Specifies the binary address string used for the I3C trigger if the trigger condition
VALue is ADDRESS.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:CONDition Sets or queries the trigger condition for a I3C bus to trigger on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa: Specifies the I3C bus data direction when triggering on data field.
DIRection
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:SIZe Specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an I3C trigger if the
trigger condition is DATA.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:VALue Specifies the binary data string used for I3C triggering if the trigger condition is DATA.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:ERRORTYPe Specifies the error type when triggering on I3C errors.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:SDR: Sets or queries the I3C trigger for SDR broadcast packets
BROADCASTPacket
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:SDR: Sets or queries the I3C trigger for SDR direct packets.
DIRECTPacket
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:TBIT: Specifies the I3C trigger for T-Bit error direction when triggering on error type field.
DIREction
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:CONDition Specifies the trigger condition for LIN.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:HIVALue Specifies the high data value string used for a LIN bus trigger when the trigger
condition is DATA or IDANDDATA and the data qualifier is INRANGE or OUTRANGE.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa: Specifies the LIN data qualifier. This only applies if the trigger condition is
QUALifier IDANDDATA or DATA.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:SIZe Specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for LIN trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:VALue Specifies the binary data string to be used for LIN trigger condition if trigger condition
is ID or IDANDDATA.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:ERRTYPE Specifies the error type be used for LIN trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDentifier: Specifies the binary address string used for LIN trigger if the trigger condition is
VALue ID or IDANDDATA.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: Sets or queries the field or condition for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to trigger on.
CONDition
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: Sets or queries the type of error condition for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to trigger on.
ERRTYPe
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: Sets or queries the value of the command word Transmit / Receive bit for a
COMMAND:TRBit MIL-STD-1553 bus to trigger on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: Sets or queries the value of the command word parity bit for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to
COMMAND:PARity triggering on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: Sets or queries the value of the command word "word count" field for a
COMMAND:COUNt MIL-STD-1553 bus to triggering on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: Sets or queries the value of the command word "subaddress" field for a
COMMAND:SUBADdress MIL-STD-1553 bus to triggering on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on command word addresses
COMMAND:ADDRess:QUALifier for a MIL-STD-1553 bus.

2-140 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-48: Trigger commands (cont.)

Command Description
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: Sets or queries the low value when triggering on command word addresses for
COMMAND:ADDRess:VALue a MIL-STD-1553 bus.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: Sets or queries the high value when triggering on command word addresses for
COMMAND:ADDRess:HIVALue a MIL-STD-1553 bus.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:DATa: Sets or queries the value of the command word parity bit for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to
PARity triggering on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:DATa: Sets or queries the value when triggering on data words for a MIL-STD-1553 bus.
VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: Sets or queries the value of the status word parity bit for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to
STATus:PARity triggering on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on status word addresses for
STATus:ADDRess:QUALifier a MIL-STD-1553 bus.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: Sets or queries the low value when triggering on status word addresses for a
STATus:ADDRess:VALue MIL-STD-1553 bus.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: Sets or queries the high value when triggering on status word addresses for a
STATus:ADDRess:HIVALue MIL-STD-1553 bus.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: Sets or queries the value of the message error bit (ME bit, bit 9) in a status word for
STATus:BIT:ME a MIL-STD-1553 bus to triggering on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: Sets or queries the value of the instrumentation bit (INSTR bit, bit 10) in a status
STATus:BIT:INSTR word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to triggering on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: Sets or queries the value of the status word service request bit (SRQ bit, bit 11) in a
STATus:BIT:SRQ status word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to triggering on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: Sets or queries the value of the broadcast command received bit (BCR bit, bit 15) in
STATus:BIT:BCR a status word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to triggering on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: Sets or queries the value of the busy bit (BUSY bit, bit 16) in a status word for a
STATus:BIT:BUSY MIL-STD-1553 bus to triggering on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: Sets or queries the value of the subsystem flag bit (SUBSF bit, bit 17) in a status
STATus:BIT:SUBSF word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to triggering on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: Sets or queries the value of the dynamic bus control acceptance bit (DBCA bit, bit
STATus:BIT:DBCA 18) in a status word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to triggering on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: Sets or queries the value of the terminal flag bit (TF bit, bit 19) in a status word for
STATus:BIT:TF a MIL-STD-1553 bus to triggering on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on response time / inter
QUALifier message gap time for a MIL-STD-1553 bus.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe: Sets or queries the lower limit to be used when triggering on response time / inter
LESSLimit message gap time for a MIL-STD-1553 bus.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe: Sets or queries the upper limit to be used when triggering on response time / inter
MORELimit message gap time for a MIL-STD-1553 bus.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:PARallel:DATa: Specifies the binary data string used for a Parallel Bus trigger.
VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:RS232C: Specifies the condition for an RS-232C trigger.
CONDition

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-141

Command groups

Table 2-48: Trigger commands (cont.)

Command Description
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATa: Sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an RS232 trigger.
SIZe
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATa: Sets or queries the data value of the data token for an RS232 trigger.
VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition Sets or queries the trigger condition for a SENT bus.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:ERRType Sets or queries the error type to be used when triggering on SENT data.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:ERRType: Sets or queries the CRC error type to be used when triggering on SENT data.
CRC
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST: Sets or queries the high binary Fast channel 1 value to use when triggering on a
CHAN1A:HIVALue SENT bus signal.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on SENT fast packet bus
CHAN1A:QUALifier data for device channel 1.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST: Sets or queries the binary fast channel 1 value to be used when triggering on a
CHAN1A:VALue SENT bus signal.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST: Sets or queries the high binary fast channel 2 value to use when triggering on a
CHAN2B:HIVALue SENT Fast bus signal.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on SENT Fast packet bus
CHAN2B:QUALifier data for device channel 2.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST: Sets or queries the binary Fast channel 2 value to be used when triggering on a
CHAN2B:VALue SENT bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to FAST.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST: Sets or queries the high binary Fast message counter value to be used when
COUNTer:HIVALue triggering on a SENT bus signal.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on SENT Fast packet bus
COUNTer:QUALifier data for the secure format counter.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST: Sets or queries the binary fast message counter value to be used when triggering
COUNTer:VALue on a SENT bus signal.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST: Sets or queries the binary fast message inverted nibble value to be used when
INVERTNIBble:VALue triggering on a SENT bus signal.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST: Sets or queries the binary status value to be used when triggering on a SENT bus
STATus:VALue signal.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:PAUSE: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on SENT pause pulses.
QUALifier
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW: Sets or queries the high binary Slow channel data value to use when triggering on
DATA:HIVALue SENT Slow packet bus data.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW: This command sets or queries the binary identifier value to use when triggering on
DATA:QUALifier Slow packet bus data.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW: This command sets or queries the binary slow channel value to use when triggering
DATA:VALue on Slow packet bus data.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW: This command sets or queries the qualifier to use when triggering on SENT Slow
IDentifier:VALue packet bus data.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition Specifies the trigger condition for a SPI trigger.

2-142 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-48: Trigger commands (cont.)

Command Description
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe Specifies the length of the data string to be used for a SPI trigger if the trigger
condition is DATa.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:VALue Specifies the binary data string used for SPI triggering if the trigger condition is DATA.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:CONDition Sets or queries the trigger condition for the specified SPMI bus.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the length of the data string, in bytes, to be used when triggering
SPMI:DATa:SIZe on an SPMI bus signal.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:DATa:VALue Sets or queries the binary data string used for SPMI triggering.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI: Sets or queries the binary data string that identifies the master address used
MASTERADDRess:VALue in SPMI triggering if the trigger condition is MASTERREAd, MASTERWRIte, or
DEVICEDESCMASTERREAd.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI: Sets or queries whether or not to trigger on No Response frames.
NORESPonse
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI: Sets or queries the binary data string that identifies the register address used
REGISTERADDRess:VALue in SPMI triggering.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI: Sets or queries the binary data string that identifies the slave address used in SPMI
SLAVEADDRess:VALue triggering
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:COMMand: Sets or queries the command response for SVID bus.
RESPonse
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:COMMand: Sets or queries the command type for SVID bus.
TYPe
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:CONDition Sets or queries the trigger condition for a SVID bus to trigger on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:ERRor:TYPe Sets or queries the error type for SVID bus.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:PARity:TYPe Sets or queries the parity type for SVID bus.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:PAYLoad: Sets or queries the payload type for SVID bus.
TYPe
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:PAYLoad: Sets the binary payload value for a SVID bus to trigger on.
VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:SLAVe: Sets the binary address of the slave for a SVID bus to trigger on.
ADDRess
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:ADDRess: Specifies the binary address string for the upper limit for inside-of-range and
HIVALue outside-of-range qualifiers for the USB trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:ADDRess: Specifies the binary address string to be used for USB trigger.
VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition Specifies the trigger condition for the USB trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa: Specifies the binary data string for the upper limit for inside-of-range and
HIVALue outside-of-range qualifiers for the USB trigger when the trigger condition is
DATAPacket.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa: Specifies the data offset in bytes to trigger on.
OFFSet
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa: Sets the qualifier to be used when triggering on a USB bus signal.
QUALifier

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-143

Command groups

Table 2-48: Trigger commands (cont.)

Command Description
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:SIZe Specifies the number of contiguous data bytes to trigger on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:TYPe Specifies the data type for when the trigger condition is set to DATAPacket.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:VALue Specifies the binary data string to be used for the USB trigger when the trigger
condition is DATAPacket.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:ENDPoint: Specifies the binary endpoint string to be used for the USB trigger.
VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:ERRType Specifies the error type to be used when the trigger condition is set to ERRor.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB: Specifies the handshake type for the USB trigger.
HANDSHAKEType
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB: Specifies the binary data string to be used for start of frame number, when the trigger
SOFFRAMENUMber condition is Token Packet and the token type is Start of Frame.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB: Specifies the packet ID (PID) for the special packet.
SPECIALType
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:ET: When triggering on a high-speed USB split transaction, this command specifies the
VALue split transaction endpoint type value to trigger on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:HUB: When triggering on a high-speed USB split transaction, this command specifies the
VALue split transaction hub address value to trigger on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:PORT: When triggering on a high-speed USB split transaction, this command specifies the
VALue split transaction port address value to trigger on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:SC: When triggering on a high-speed USB split transaction, this command specifies
VALue whether to trigger on the start or complete phase of the split transaction, based on
the Start/Complete bit field value.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:SE: When triggering on a high-speed USB split transaction, this command specifies the
VALue split transaction start/end bit value to trigger on.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:TOKENType Sets or queries the token type for the USB trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:SOUrce Sets or queries the source for a bus trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:COUPling Sets or queries the type of coupling for the edge trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:SLOpe Sets or queries the slope for the edge trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:SOUrce Sets or queries the source for the edge trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:LEVel:CH<x> Sets or queries the level for the trigger for the channel.
TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:DELTatime Sets or queries the Logic trigger delta time value.
TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:FUNCtion Sets or queries the logical combination of the input channels for the logic trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce Sets or queries the channel to use as the clock source.
TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:POLarity Sets or queries the polarity for the clock channel when Use Clock Edge is set to
Yes for Logic trigger type.
TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:USECLockedge Sets whether or not Logic trigger type uses clock source.
TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:WHEn Sets or queries the condition for generating a logic trigger with respect to the defined
input pattern.
TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGICPattern: Sets or queries the Logic Pattern that is used along with the Define Logic choice to
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>} determine when the logic trigger occurs.

2-144 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-48: Trigger commands (cont.)

Command Description
TRIGger:{A|B}:LOWerthreshold:CH<x> Sets or queries CH<x> lower trigger level.
TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth: Sets whether or not to use logic qualification for a pulse width trigger.
LOGICQUALification
TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit Sets or queries the upper limit to use, in seconds, when triggering on detection of a
pulse whose duration is inside or outside a range of two values.
TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit Sets or queries the lower limit to use, in seconds, when triggering on detection of a
pulse whose duration is inside or outside a range of two values.
TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:POLarity Sets or queries the polarity for a pulse width trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:SOUrce Sets or queries the source waveform for a pulse width trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:WHEn Sets or queries to trigger when a pulse is detected with a width (duration) that is less
than, greater than, equal to, or unequal to a specified value.
TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:LOGICQUALification Sets or queries whether or not to use logic qualification for a runt trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:POLarity Sets or queries the polarity for the runt trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:SOUrce Sets or queries the source waveform for the runt trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:WHEn Sets or queries the type of pulse width the trigger checks for when it detects a runt.
TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:WIDth Sets or queries the width, in seconds, for a runt trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE Sets or queries the clock edge polarity for setup and hold triggering.
TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce Sets or queries the clock source for the setup and hold triggering.
TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHold:HOLDTime Sets or queries the hold time for setup and hold violation triggering.
TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHold:SETTime Sets or queries the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering.
TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHOLDLogicval: Sets or queries whether the specified channel is included (INCLude) or not included
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>} (DONTInclude) in the Setup & Hold trigger input configuration.
TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut: Sets or queries whether or not to use logic qualification for a timeout trigger.
LOGICQUALification
TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:POLarity When triggering using the TIMEOut trigger type, this commands specifies the
polarity to be used.
TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:SOUrce When triggering using the TIMEOut trigger type, this command specifies the source.
TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:TIMe When triggering using the TIMEOut trigger type, this command specifies the
timeout time, in seconds.
TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition:DELTatime Sets or queries the delta time used in calculating the transition value for the
transition trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition:POLarity Sets or queries the polarity for the transition trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition:SOUrce Sets or queries the source for a transition trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition:WHEn Sets or queries whether to check for a transitioning signal that is faster or slower
than the specified delta time.
TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition: Sets or queries whether or not to use logic qualification for a transition trigger.
LOGICQUALification
TRIGger:{A|B}:TYPe Sets or queries the type of A or B trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:UPPerthreshold:CH<x> Sets or queries the CH<x> upper trigger level.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-145

Command groups

Table 2-48: Trigger commands (cont.)

Command Description
TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:FIELD This command specifies the trigger condition for a video trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:LINE This command specifies the line number value for a video line number trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:POLarity This command specifies the polarity for a video trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:SOUrce This command specifies the source waveform for a video trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:STANdard This command specifies the standard/format for a video trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:CROSSIng Sets or queries the window trigger threshold crossing of the selected trigger Source.
TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:LOGICQUALification Specifies whether or not to use logic qualification for a window trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:SOUrce Sets or queries the source for a window trigger.
TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WHEn Sets or queries the window trigger event.
TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WIDth Sets or queries the minimum width for a window violation.
TRIGger:{A|B|B:RESET} Sets the A, B, or B Reset trigger level automatically to 50% of the range of the
minimum and maximum values of the trigger input signal.
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY Sets or queries the type of holdoff for the A trigger.
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe Sets or queries the A trigger holdoff time.
TRIGger:A:LOGICQUALification Sets or queries the type of logic qualification to perform.
TRIGger:A:MODe Sets or queries the A trigger mode.
TRIGger:AUXLevel Sets or queries the Auxiliary Input voltage level to use for an edge trigger.
TRIGger:B:BY Sets or queries B trigger time or event qualifiers.
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt Sets or queries the number of events that must occur before the B trigger occurs.
TRIGger:B:RESET Sets the B reset trigger level to 50%.
TRIGger:B:RESET:EDGE:COUPling Sets or queries the trigger coupling for a sequential edge trigger reset when the
Source is set to an analog channel.
TRIGger:B:RESET:EDGE:LEVel Sets the voltage level to use for an Edge Reset trigger when triggering on an analog
channel waveform.
TRIGger:B:RESET:EDGE:SLOpe Sets or queries the trigger slope for a sequential edge trigger reset.
TRIGger:B:RESET:EDGE:SOUrce Sets or queries the trigger source for the A→B sequential edge trigger reset feature.
TRIGger:B:RESET:TIMEOut:TIMe Sets or queries the reset timer for a sequential time out trigger reset.
TRIGger:B:RESET:TYPe Sets or queries the type of A→B sequential trigger reset.
TRIGger:B:STATE Queries the current state of the triggering system.
TRIGger:B:TIMe Sets or queries the B trigger delay time.
TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:STATe Enables or disables user-defined trigger hysteresis.
TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:VALue Sets or returns the height of the user-defined trigger hysteresis zone in volts.
TRIGger:STATE? Queries the current state of the triggering system.
TRIGger:STATUs? Queries the current status of the triggering system.
VISual:AREA<x>:ASPEctratio Sets or queries whether the aspect ratio of the specified Visual Trigger area is locked.
VISual:AREA<x>:FLIP:HORizontal Flips the specified Visual Trigger area horizontally around its center point.
VISual:AREA<x>:FLIP:VERTical Flips the specified Visual Trigger area vertically around its center point.

2-146 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-48: Trigger commands (cont.)

Command Description
VISual:AREA<x>:HEIGht Sets or queries the height of the specified Visual Trigger area.
VISual:AREA<x>:HITType Sets or queries the area hit logic true condition for the specified Visual Trigger area.
VISual:AREA<x>:RESET Sets the specified Visual Trigger area shape to a default-sized triangle.
VISual:AREA<x>:ROTAtion Sets or queries the rotation angle of the specified Visual Trigger area.
VISual:AREA<x>:SHAPE Sets or queries the current shape of the area.
VISual:AREA<x>:SOUrce Sets or queries the signal source for the specified Visual Trigger area.
VISual:AREA<x>:VERTICES Sets or queries the X and Y vertex coordinate values for all vertices of the specified
Visual Trigger area.
VISual:AREA<x>:WIDTH Sets or queries the width of the specified Visual Trigger area.
VISual:AREA<x>:XPOSition Sets or queries the horizontal (X-axis) center position of the specified Visual Trigger
area.
VISual:AREA<x>:YPOSition Sets or queries the vertical (Y-axis) center position of the specified Visual Trigger
area.
VISual:DELETEALL Deletes all Visual Trigger areas.
VISual:ENAble Sets or queries the status (on or off) of the Visual Trigger mode.
VISual:EQUation Sets or queries the Visual Trigger area combination logic equation.
VISual:SHOWAReas Shows or hides all Visual Trigger areas.
VISual:SHOWCRiteria Sets or queries display of the area names and hit criteria for all visual trigger areas.
VISual:SHOWEQuation Shows or hides the Visual Trigger area combination logic equation.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-147

Command groups

Vertical command group

Use the commands in the Vertical Command Group to control the vertical setup of
all live (channel) waveforms for acquisition and to control the display of channel,
reference, and math waveforms. Analog channels are available when analog
probes are attached to FlexChannel inputs.
You can replace VOLts with SCAle in the vertical commands. This provides
program compatibility with earlier models of Tektronix instruments.

Table 2-49: Vertical commands

Command Description
CH<x>? Returns vertical parameters for the specified channel.
CH<x>:BANdwidth Sets or queries the bandwidth of the specified channel.
CH<x>:BANdwidth:FILTer:OPTIMIZation Sets or queries the channel filter shape.
CH<x>:CLIPping? Queries whether the specified channel’s input signal is clipping (exceeding) the
channel vertical scale setting.
CH<x>:COUPling Sets or queries the coupling setting for the specified channel.
CH<x>:DESKew Sets or queries the deskew time for the specified channel.
CH<x>:DITHERrange Sets or queries the amount of dithering for the specified analog channel.
CH<x>:INVert Sets or queries invert state of the specified channel.
CH<x>:LABel:COLor Sets or queries the color of the specified channel label.
CH<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD Sets or queries the bold state of the specified channel label.
CH<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic Sets or queries the italic state of the specified channel label.
CH<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE Sets or queries the font size of the specified channel label.
CH<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE Sets or queries the font type of the specified channel label.
CH<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline Sets or queries the underline state of the specified channel label.
CH<x>:LABel:NAMe Defines or queries the label for the channel waveform.
CH<x>:LABel:XPOS Sets or queries the X display coordinate for the channel waveform label.
CH<x>:LABel:YPOS Sets or queries the Y display coordinate for the channel waveform label.
CH<x>:OFFSet Sets or queries the channel offset.
CH<x>:POSition Sets or queries the vertical position for the specified analog channel.
CH<x>:PRObe? Returns all information concerning the probe that is attached to the specified
channel.
CH<x>:PRObe:AUTOZero Autozeros the probe attached to the specified channel.
CH<x>:PRObe:COMPensate Starts the compensation procedure for passive probes (TPP).
CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUSS Starts a degauss cycle of the probe attached to the specified channel.
CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUSS:STATE? Queries whether the probe attached to the specified channel requires a
degauss operation.
CH<x>:PRObe:FORCEDRange Sets the attached probe to its default range, or it queries the default range
of the probe.
CH<x>:PRObe:GAIN? Returns the gain of the probe that is attached to the specified channel.

2-148 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-49: Vertical commands (cont.)

Command Description
CH<x>:PRObe:ID? Returns the type and serial number of the probe that is attached to the specified
channel.
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:SERnumber? Returns the serial number of the probe that is attached to the specified channel.
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:TYPe? Returns the type of probe that is attached to the specified channel.
CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode Sets or queries the input mode of the probe that is attached to the specified
channel.
CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode:AOFFSet Sets or queries the A mode offset value of the probe that is attached to the
specified channel.
CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode:BOFFSet Sets or queries the B mode offset value of the probe that is attached to the
specified channel.
CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode:COFFSet Sets or queries the common mode offset value of the probe that is attached to
the specified channel.
CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode:DOFFSet Sets or queries the differential mode offset value of the probe that is attached to
the specified channel.
CH<x>:PRObe:RESistance? Queries the resistance of the probe that is attached to the specified channel.
CH<x>:PRObe:SELFCal Initiates self-calibration on the probe.
CH<x>:PRObe:SELFCal:State? Queries the self-calibration state.
CH<x>:PRObe:SET Sets or queries aspects of probe accessory user interfaces, for example probe
attenuation factors.
CH<x>:PRObe:STATus? Queries the probe unsigned integer error value.
CH<x>:PRObe:UNIts? Returns the units of the probe that is attached to the specified channel.
CH<x>:PROBECal? Returns the probe calibration status.
CH<x>:PROBECOntrol Sets or queries the probe range.
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten Sets the attenuation value for the specified channel to the specified scale factor.
Or queries the user-specified attenuation.
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten Sets the attenuation value for the specified channel to the specified value in
decibels.
Or queries the user-specified attenuation in decibels.
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits Sets or queries the alternate unit for the external attenuator of the specified
channel.
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits:STATE Sets or queries the custom units enable state for the specified channel.
CH<x>:PROBETYPE? Queries the probe type connected to a specified channel
CH<x>:SCAle Sets or returns the vertical scale for the specified analog channel.
CH<x>:SCALERATio Sets or returns the scale ratio for the specified analog channel.
CH<x>:TERmination Sets channel input termination.
CH<x>:VTERm:BIAS Sets or queries the termination voltage for the specified channel (if control
is available).
CONFIGuration:ANALOg:BANDWidth? Queries the maximum licensed bandwidth of the instrument.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-149

Command groups

Table 2-49: Vertical commands (cont.)

Command Description
REF:ADDNew Adds the specified reference. Argument is of the form "REF<NR1> ", where
NR1 ≥ 1.
REF:DELete Deletes the specified reference.
REF:REF<x>:DESKew Sets or queries the deskew time for the specified reference.
REF:REF<x>:LABel:COLor Sets or queries the color of the specified ref label.
REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD Sets or queries the bold state of the specified reference label.
REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic Sets or queries the italic state of the specified reference label.
REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE Sets or queries the font size of the specified reference label.
REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE Sets or queries the font type of the specified reference label.
REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline Sets or queries the underline state of the specified reference label.
REF:REF<x>:LABel:NAMe Sets or queries the label of the designated waveform.
REF:REF<x>:LABel:XPOS Sets or queries the position of the reference waveform label on the X axis.
REF:REF<x>:LABel:YPOS Sets or queries the position of the reference waveform label on the Y axis.
REF:LIST? Lists all currently defined references.
REF:REF<x>:SOUrce Sets or queries the filename used by the given reference.
SELect:CH<x> Turns on or off the specified waveform or returns whether the specified channel
is on or off
VERTical:DESKew:FROM: Sets or queries a target (FROM) delay that you can specify when the
CUSTOMPROPAgation propagation delay of the target (FROM) probe used for deskew cannot be
detected automatically.
VERTical:DESKew:STATIC Sets or queries the target channel for performing channel-to-channel deskew
adjustment.
VERTical:DESKew:TO:CUSTOMPROPAgation Sets or queries a target (TO) delay that can be specified by the user when
the propagation delay of the target (TO) probe used for deskew cannot be
detected automatically.
VERTical:DESKew:FROM:SOUrce Sets or queries the source channel for performing channel-to-channel deskew
adjustment.
VERTical:DESKew:TO:SOUrce Sets or queries the target channel for performing channel-to-channel deskew
adjustment.

2-150 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Waveform Transfer command group

Use the commands in the Waveform Transfer Command Group to transfer
waveform data points from the instrument. Waveform data points are a collection
of values that define a waveform. One data value usually represents one data point
in the waveform record. When working with envelope waveforms, each data
value is either the minimum or maximum of a min/max pair.
Before you transfer waveform data, you must specify the data format, record
length, and waveform source.

Data formats. Acquired waveform data uses eight or more bits to represent each
data point. The number of bits used depends on the acquisition mode specified
when you acquired the data. Data acquired in SAMple or ENVelope mode uses
eight bits per waveform data point. Data acquired in AVERage mode uses up to
14 bits per point.
The instrument can transfer waveform data in either ASCII or binary format.
You specify the format with the DATa:ENCdg command. The instrument uses
signed, 4 byte integers and floating point values; it does not support unsigned
floating point values.
ASCII data is represented by signed integer or floating point values. An example
ASCII waveform data string can look like this:
CURVE<space>-110,-109,-110,-110,-109,-107,
-109,-107,-106,-105,-103,-100,-97,-90,-84,-80
Use ASCII to obtain more readable and easier to format output than binary.
However, ASCII can require more bytes to send the same values than it does with
binary. This can reduce transmission speeds.
Binary data can be represented by signed integer or floating point values. The
range of the values depends on the byte width specified. When the byte width is
one, signed integer data ranges from -128 to 127, and positive integer values
range from 0 to 255. When the byte width is two, the values range from -32768 to
32767. When a MATH (or REF that came from a MATH) is used, 32-bit floating
point values are used that are four bytes in width.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-151

Command groups

The defined binary formats specify the order in which the bytes are transferred.
The following are the four binary formats:
RIBinary specifies signed integer data-point representation with the most
significant byte transferred first.
SRIBinary is the same as RIBinary except that the byte order is swapped,
meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first. This format is useful
when transferring data to PCs.
RFBinary specifies floating point data-point representation with the most
significant byte transferred first.
SRFBinary is the same as RFBinary except that the byte order is swapped,
meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first. This format is useful
when transferring data to PCs.

Waveform data and record lengths. You can transfer multiple points for each
waveform record. You can transfer a portion of the waveform or you can transfer
the entire record. You can use the DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands to
specify the first and last data points of the waveform record.
When transferring data from the instrument, you must specify the first and last
data points in the waveform record. Setting DATa:STARt to 1 and DATa:STOP to
the record length will always return the entire waveform.

Waveform data locations and memory allocation. The DATa:SOUrce command

specifies the waveform source when transferring a waveform from the instrument.

Waveform preamble. Each waveform that you transfer has an associated

waveform preamble that contains information such as the horizontal scale, the
vertical scale, and other settings in effect when the waveform was created. Refer
to the individual WFMOutpre? commands for more information.

Scaling waveform data. Once you transfer the waveform data to the controller,
you can convert the data points into voltage values for analysis using information
from the waveform preamble.

2-152 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Transferring waveform data from the instrument.

You can transfer waveforms from the instrument to an external controller using
the following sequence:
1. Select the waveform source(s) using DATa:SOUrce.
2. Specify the waveform data format using DATa:ENCdg.
3. Specify the number of bytes per data point using WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr.

NOTE. MATH waveforms (and REF waveforms that came from a MATH) are
always set to four bytes.

4. Specify the portion of the waveform that you want to transfer using
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP.

5. Transfer waveform preamble information using WFMOutpre.

6. Transfer waveform data from the instrument using CURVe?.

Table 2-50: Waveform Transfer commands

Command Description
CURVe? The query format transfers waveform data from instrument specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command.
CURVEStream? Continuously transfers waveform data from the instrument as it is acquired.
DATa Sets the format and location of the waveform data that is transferred with the
CURVe Command.
Or queries the format and location of the waveform data that is transferred with
the CURVe? command.
DATa:ENCdg Sets or queries the format of outgoing waveform data.
DATa:FRAMESTARt Sets or queries the starting acquisition for waveform transfer using the CURVE?
query.
DATa:FRAMESTOP Sets or queries the last acquisition for waveform transfer using the CURVE? query.
DATa:MODe Sets or returns the mode for waveform data.
DATa:RESample Sets or queries the resampling of outgoing waveform data.
DATa:SOUrce Sets or queries the location of waveform data transferred from the instrument.
DATa:SOUrce:AVAILable? Returns a list of enumerations representing the source waveforms that are currently
available for :CURVe? queries.
DATa:STARt Sets or queries the starting point in waveform transfer.
DATa:STOP Sets or queries the ending data point in waveform transfer.
DATa:WIDth Specifies the width, in bytes per point, for waveform data transferred from the
instrument via the CURVe? query.
WAVFrm? Returns WFMOutpre? and CURVe? data for the waveform as specified by the
DATA:SOUrce command.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-153

Command groups

Table 2-50: Waveform Transfer commands (cont.)

Command Description
WFMOutpre? Returns the waveform formatting data for the waveform specified by the
DATA:SOURCE command.
WFMOutpre:ASC_Fmt? Returns the format for ASCII data transferred from the instrument.
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr Sets or queries the number of bits per waveform point that outgoing waveforms
contain.
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt Sets or queries the format of binary data for the waveform.
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr Sets or queries the data width for the waveform.
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or Sets or queries the byte order of waveform points.
WFMOutpre:CENTERFREQuency? Returns the center frequency of the outgoing waveform.
WFMOutpre:DOMain? Returns the domain of the outgoing waveform.
WFMOutpre:ENCdg Sets or queries the type of encoding for outgoing waveforms.
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? Returns the number of points for the waveform transmitted in response to a
CURVe? query.
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt? Returns the point format for the waveform.
WFMOutpre:PT_Off? Returns the trigger point relative to DATA:START for the waveform.
WFMOutpre:PT_ORder? Returns whether the source waveform is Fast Acquisition.
WFMOutpre:RESample Sets or queries the resampling of outgoing waveform data.
WFMOutpre:SPAN? Returns the frequency span of the outgoing waveform.
WFMOutpre:WFId? Returns a string describing the acquisition parameters for the waveform.
WFMOutpre:WFMTYPe? Returns the type of the outgoing waveform.
WFMOutpre:XINcr? Returns the horizontal sampling interval.
WFMOutpre:XUNit? Returns the horizontal units for the waveform.
WFMOutpre:XZEro? Returns the (sub-sample) time between the trigger sample and the occurrence
of the actual waveform trigger.
WFMOutpre:YOFf? Returns the vertical offset in digitizing levels for the waveform.
WFMOutpre:YUNit? Returns the vertical units for the waveform.
WFMOutpre:YZEro? Returns the vertical offset for the waveform.

Wide Band Gap Analysis command group

Table 2-51: WBG-DPT commands
Command Description
DISplay:MEAS<x>:NAVIgate:TYPE Sets or returns the badge navigation type for WBG measurements.
MEASUrement:AUTOset Performs a specified autoset.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BVOLTage Sets or returns the bias voltage for WBG measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EEQUal Turns on or off the edge qualifier settings as input waveform to measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EINDuctance Sets or returns the effective inductance for WBG measurement.

2-154 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups

Table 2-51: WBG-DPT commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FORDer Sets or returns the differential filter order for WBG measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LTYPe Sets or returns the value for the level type as auto or custom.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LUNITs Sets or returns the value for the level units as percentage or absolute.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXCUrrent Sets or returns the maximum current.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXG<x>Voltage Sets or returns the maximum gate voltage 1 or 2 value for Tdt measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXGVoltage Sets or returns the maximum gate voltage.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXVoltage Sets or queries the maximum input voltage.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PCOUNt Sets or returns number of pulses.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PREGion Sets or returns pulse region for a measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PRESistance Sets or returns the probe resistance for WBG measurement .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PWIDth Sets or returns pulse width.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REDGe Turns on or off the Refine edge on qualifier.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SLABs Sets or returns the value for the start level in absolute.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SLPCt Sets or returns the value for the start level in percentage.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SLTYpe Sets or returns the start level source type.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SSDirection Sets or returns the start search direction for measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STLABs Sets or returns the value for the stop level in absolute.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STLPct Sets or returns the value for the stop level in percentage.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STLTYpe Sets or returns the stop level source type.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STSDirection Sets or returns the stop search direction for measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:AFGaddress Sets or returns the AFG address of external AFG connected for WBG measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:AFGSetup Executes AFG test connection or once AFG connection succeeded, Run will setup
configuration on connected AFG
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:CSTatus? Returns the AFG test connection status.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:GTYPe Sets or returns the generator type for WBG measurements.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:HIGH Sets or returns the high voltage value of AFG for WBG measurements.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:LOAD Sets or returns the load type of AFG for WBG measurements.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:LOW Sets or returns the low voltage value of AFG for WBG measurements.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:NPULs Sets or returns the number of pulse of AFG for WBG measurements.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:PG<x>Val Sets or returns the pulse gap of AFG for WBG measurements.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:PW<x>Val Sets or returns the pulse width of AFG for WBG measurements.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:TIMer Sets or returns the trigger interval of AFG for WBG measurements.
MEASUrement:WBG:PDEVice Sets or returns the type of the Power device.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:PREGion Sets or returns the pulse region for recovery plot.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-155

Command groups

Zoom command group

Zoom commands let you expand and position the waveform display horizontally
and vertically, without changing the time base or vertical settings.

NOTE. Zoom commands are available once a view has been added.

Table 2-52: Zoom commands

Command Description
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS: Sets or queries the start of the zoom x axis in the specified plot view.
FROM
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS: Sets or queries the end of the zoom x axis in the specified plot view.
TO
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS: Sets or queries the start of the zoom y axis in the specified plot view.
FROM
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS: Sets or queries the end of the zoom y axis in the specified plot view.
TO
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM Sets or queries the start of the zoom x-axis in the specified plot view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO Sets or queries the end of the zoom x-axis in the specified plot view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM Sets or queries the start of the zoom y-axis in the specified plot view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO Sets or queries the end of the zoom y-axis in the specified plot view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS: Sets or returns the left edge of the zoom x-axis in the specified plot view.
FROM
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO Sets or queries the right edge of the zoom x-axis in the specified plot view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS: Sets or queries the bottom value of the zoom y-axis in the specified plot view.
FROM
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO Sets or queries the top value of the zoom y-axis in the specified plot view.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>: Sets or queries the horizontal zoom position (of the specified zoom in the specified
HORizontal:POSition Waveform View) of the zoomed waveform or zoom waveform in the display, around
which the zoom waveform displays.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>: Sets or queries the zoom horizontal scale factor, of the specified zoom in the
HORizontal:SCALe specified Waveform View, in which the zoom waveform is displayed.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>: Sets or queries the zoom window horizontal scale in the specified Waveform View.
HORizontal:WINSCALe
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>: Sets or queries the specified zoom in the specified Waveform View on or off.
STATe
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>: Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified zoom in the specified Waveform
VERTical:POSition View, in which the zoom waveform is displayed.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>: Sets or queries the zoom vertical scale factor of the specified waveform for the
VERTical:SCALe specified zoom in the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM? Queries the zoom parameters of the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>? Queries the zoom parameters of the specified zoom in the specified Waveform View.

2-156 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order
NOTE. Some of the following commands may not be available on your instrument
model. Also, some of the following commands are only available if your
instrument has the associated option installed.

ACQuire? (Query Only)

Queries the current acquisition state.

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire?

Examples ACQUIRE? might return :ACQUIRE:STATE 1;NUMENV INFINITE;STOPAFTER

RUNSTOP;SEQUENCE:MODE NUMACQS;NUMSEQUENCE 1;:ACQUIRE:NUMAVG
16;FASTACQ:STATE 0;PALETTE TEMPERATURE;:ACQUIRE:MODE
SAMPLE;SAMPLINGMODE IT.

ACQuire:FASTAcq:PALEtte
Sets or queries the waveform grading for fast acquisition mode.

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire:FASTAcq:PALEtte
{NORMal|TEMPerature|SPECtral|INVErted}
ACQuire:FASTAcq:PALEtte?

Arguments NORMal colors traces according to their channel.

TEMPerature colors all traces using a multicolored palette, where “intensity” is

represented by hue; blue for least frequently hit, red for most frequently hit. All
traces share this palette. This is the default color palette.
SPECtral colors all traces using a multicolored palette, where “intensity” is
represented by hue; red for least frequently hit, blue for most frequently hit. All
traces share this palette.
INVErted Inverts the normal display hues and lightness levels based on sample
intensity. The areas of lowest sample density appear the brightest, while the areas
with the highest sample density appear the darkest.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-157

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples ACQUIRE:FASTACQ:PALETTE TEMPerature sets the acquisition fast acquisition

palette to Temperature.
ACQUIRE:FASTACQ:PALETTE? might return :ACQUIRE:FASTACQ:PALETTE
TEMPERATURE.

ACQuire:FASTAcq:STATE
Sets or queries the state of fast acquisition mode.

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire:FASTAcq:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

ACQuire:FASTAcq:STATE?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables FASTAcq; any other value turns this feature on.

OFF disables the FASTAcq feature.

ON enables the FASTAcq feature.

Examples ACQUIRE:FASTACQ:STATE ON turns on fast acquisition mode.

ACQUIRE:FASTACQ:STATE? might return :ACQUIRE:FASTACQ:STATE 0

indicating that fast acquisition mode is off.

ACQuire:FASTAVerage:LIMit
This command limits the number of averages performed in hardware at 16-bit
resolution. The max value is 10240, but due to hardware limitations, it is usually
best to use a value less than 256. This setting must be a divisor of the STOPafter
count.

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire:FASTAVerage:LIMit <NR1>

ACQuire:FASTAVerage:LIMit?

Arguments <NR1> is the batch size to set. Must be between 1 and 10240.

2-158 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples ACQUIRE:FASTAVERAGE:LIMIT 256 sets the batch size to 256 waveforms.

ACQUIRE:FASTAVERAGE:LIMIT? might return

:ACQUIRE:FASTAVERAGE:LIMIT 256, indicating the batch size is currently
256 waveforms.

ACQuire:FASTAVerage:STATE
This command sets or returns the state of HW accelerated averaging. When fast
averaging is enabled, batches of waveforms are accumulated in the hardware with
16-bit integer resolution. The accumulated data is uploaded to software, where
additional averaging occurs in a floating-point math waveform. Each time data is
uploaded from HW to SW, a programmable amount of dithering may be added to
mitigate fine scale non-linearity in the ADC converter.

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire:FASTAVerage:STATE {0|1|OFF|ON}

ACQuire:FASTAVerage:STATE?

Arguments 0 disables fast average mode.

1 enables fast average mode. Any number value other than 0 turns this feature on.

OFF disables fast average mode.

ON enables fast average mode.

Examples ACQUIRE:FASTAVERAGE:STATE 256 sets the batch size to 256 waveforms.

ACQUIRE:FASTAVERAGE:STATE? might return

:ACQUIRE:FASTAVERAGE:STATE 0, indicating fast average mode is off.

ACQuire:FASTAVerage:STOPafter
This command limits the total number of averages that will be accumulated.
When the STOPAFTER count is achieved, acquisitions will stop. This setting
must be a multiple of the LIMit count.

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire:FASTAVerage:STOPafter <NR1>

ACQuire:FASTAVerage:STOPafter?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-159

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR1> is the number of averages to accumulate. Must be between 1 and 1000000.

Examples ACQUIRE:FASTAVERAGE:STOPAFTER 10000 sets the number of averages to

accumulate to 10000.
ACQUIRE:FASTAVERAGE:STOPAFTER? might return
:ACQUIRE:FASTAVERAGE:STOPAFTER 10000, which assuming a batch size
of 250 HW averaged waveforms (LIMit=250) would stop acquisitions after
40 batches have been uploaded and accumulated into the floating point math
waveform.

ACQuire:MAXSamplerate? (Query Only)

This query returns the maximum real-time sample rate.

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire:MAXSamplerate?

Examples ACQUIRE:MAXSAMPLERATE? might return :ACQUIRE:MAXSAMPLERATE

6.25E9.

ACQuire:MODe
This command sets or queries the selected acquisition mode of the instrument.

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire:MODe {SAMple|PEAKdetect|HIRes|AVErage|ENVelope}

ACQuire:MODe?

Related Commands ACQuire:NUMAVg

CURVe?

Arguments SAMple specifies that the displayed data point value is the first sampled value that
is taken during the acquisition interval. The CURVe? query, depending on sample
rate, will result in either 8 bit or 16 bit data. In case of 8 bit data, the precision is
also 8 bit. However, in case of 16 bit data, 12 bit precision data is zero padded in
lower 4 bits. SAMple is the default mode.

2-160 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

PEAKdetect specifies the display of high-low range of the samples taken from a
single waveform acquisition. The high-low range is displayed as a vertical column
that extends from the highest to the lowest value sampled during the acquisition
interval. PEAKdetect mode can reveal the presence of aliasing or narrow spikes.
HIRes specifies Hi Res mode where the displayed data point value is the
average of all the samples taken during the acquisition interval. This is a form
of averaging, where the average comes from a single waveform acquisition. The
number of samples taken during the acquisition interval determines the number of
data values that compose the average.
AVErage specifies averaging mode, in which the resulting waveform shows an
average of SAMple data points from several separate waveform acquisitions. The
instrument processes the number of waveforms you specify into the acquired
waveform, creating a running exponential average of the input signal. The number
of waveform acquisitions that go into making up the average waveform is set or
queried using the ACQuire:NUMAVg command.
ENVelope specifies envelope mode, where the resulting waveform displays the
range of PEAKdetect from continued waveform acquisitions.

Examples ACQUIRE:MODE ENVELOPE sets the acquisition mode to display a waveform that
is an envelope of many individual waveform acquisitions.
ACQUIRE:MODE? might return :ACQuire:MODe AVERAGE, indicating that
the displayed waveform is the average of the specified number of waveform
acquisitions.

ACQuire:NUMACq? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the number of waveform acquisitions that have
occurred since the last time acquisitions were stopped.

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire:NUMACq?

Related Commands ACQuire:STATE

Examples ACQUIRE:NUMACQ? might return :ACQUIRE:NUMACQ 350, indicating that 350

acquisitions have occurred since executing an ACQuire:STATE RUN command.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-161

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ACQuire:NUMAVg
This command sets or queries the number of waveform acquisitions that make
up an averaged waveform. Ranges from 2 to 10240.

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire:NUMAVg <NR1>

ACQuire:NUMAVg?

Related Commands ACQuire:MODe

Arguments <NR1> is the number of waveform acquisitions to average.

Examples ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 10 specifies that 10 waveform averages will be performed

before exponential averaging starts.
ACQUIRE:NUMAVG? might return :ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 75, indicating that there
are 75 acquisitions specified for averaging.

ACQuire:NUMFRAMESACQuired? (Query Only)

This query returns the number of FastFrame frames which have been acquired.

Group Horizontal

Syntax ACQuire:NUMFRAMESACQuired?

Examples ACQUIRE:NUMFRAMESACQUIRED? might return

:ACQUIRE:NUMFRAMESACQUIRED 4 indicating 4 frames have been acquired.

ACQuire:SEQuence:CURrent? (Query Only)

In single sequence acquisition mode, this query returns the number of acquisitions
or measurements in the sequence completed so far.

Group Acquisition

2-162 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax ACQuire:SEQuence:CURrent?

Examples ACQUIRE:SEQUENCE:CURRENT? might return :ACQUIRE:SEQUENCE:CURRENT

ACQuire:SEQuence:MODe
In single sequence acquisition, the single sequence stop after count is based on the
number of acquisitions.

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire:SEQuence:MODe NUMACQs

Arguments NUMACQs is the number of acquisitions.

Examples ACQUIRE:SEQUENCE:MODE? might return :ACQUIRE:SEQUENCE:MODE

NUMACQS indicating the acquisition sequence mode is set to NUMACQS.

ACQuire:SEQuence:NUMSEQuence
In single sequence acquisition mode, specify the number of acquisitions or
measurements that comprise the sequence. The default is 1.

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire:SEQuence:NUMSEQuence <NR1>

ACQuire:SEQuence:NUMSEQuence?

Arguments <NR1> is the number of acquisitions or measurements that comprise the sequence.

Examples ACQUIRE:SEQUENCE:NUMSEQUENCE 2 sets the number of acquisition in a

sequence is set to 2.
ACQUIRE:SEQUENCE:NUMSEQUENCE? might return
ACQUIRE:SEQUENCE:NUMSEQUENCE 1, indicating that the number of acquisition
in a sequence is set to 1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-163

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ACQuire:STATE
This command starts or stops acquisitions. When state is set to ON or RUN, a
new acquisition will be started. If the last acquisition was a single acquisition
sequence, a new single sequence acquisition will be started. If the last acquisition
was continuous, a new continuous acquisition will be started.
If RUN is issued in the middle of completing a single sequence acquisition (for
example, averaging or enveloping), the acquisition sequence is restarted, and
any accumulated data is discarded. Also, the instrument resets the number of
acquisitions. If the RUN argument is issued while in continuous mode, a reset
occurs and acquired data continues to acquire.
If acquire:stopafter is SEQUENCE, this command leaves the instrument in single
sequence, unlike the run/stop button which takes the instrument out of single
sequence.

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON|RUN|STOP}

ACQuire:STATE?

Related Commands ACQuire:STOPAfter

Arguments <NR1> = 0 stops acquisitions; any other value starts acquisitions.

OFF stops acquisitions.

ON starts acquisitions.

RUN starts acquisitions.

STOP stops acquisitions.

Examples ACQUIRE:STATE RUN starts the acquisition of waveform data and resets the count
of the number of acquisitions.
ACQUIRE:STATE? might return :ACQUIRE:STATE 0, indicating that the
acquisition is stopped.

ACQuire:STOPAfter
This command sets or queries whether the instrument continually acquires
acquisitions or acquires a single sequence. Pressing SINGLE on the front
panel button is equivalent to sending these commands: ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER
SEQUENCE and ACQUIRE:STATE 1.

2-164 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire:STOPAfter {RUNSTop|SEQuence}

ACQuire:STOPAfter?

Related Commands ACQuire:STATE

Arguments RUNSTop specifies that the instrument will continually acquire data, if
ACQuire:STATE is turned on.

SEQuence specifies that the next acquisition will be a single-sequence acquisition.

Examples ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP sets the instrument to continually acquire data.

ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER? might return :ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE,

indicating that the next acquisition the instrument makes will be of the
single-sequence type.

ACTONEVent:ENable
This command enables or disables actions on event (AOE). If AOE saves are
limited and the limit has been reached, this parameter will disable AOE.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:ENable <NR1>

ACTONEVent:ENable?

Arguments <NR1> is a number that enables or disables actions on event. The number zero
disables the feature and the number one enables the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:ENable 1 enables actions on event.

ACTONEVent:ENable? might return :ACTONEVent:ENable 0, indicating

the actions on event feature is disabled.

ACTONEVent:LIMit
This command
sets whether the act on event should limit the number of saves. This prevents
the saves from filling the hard drive.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-165

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:LIMit <NR1>

ACTONEVent:LIMit?

Arguments <NR1> is a number that enables or disables

whether the act on event should limit the number of saves. The number zero
disables the feature and the number one enables the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:LIMit 1 enables the limiting of act on event saves.

ACTONEVent:LIMit? might return :ACTONEVent:LIMit 0, indicating the

limiting of act on event saves feature is disabled.

ACTONEVent:LIMITCount
This command sets the limit of act on even saves. The ACTONEVent:LIMit
command must be enabled.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:LIMITCount <NR1>

ACTONEVent:LIMITCount?

Arguments <NR1> sets the number of allowed saves for the act on event feature. The number
must be a positive integer.

Examples ACTONEVent:LIMITCount 2 sets the number of saves to 2.

ACTONEVent:LIMITCount? might return :ACTONEVent:LIMITCount 4,

indicating the limit of act on event saves is 4.

ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
This command saves a screen capture when a mask test fails.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE?

2-166 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat

SAVEONEVent:FILEName
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce

Arguments ON enables the save screen capture when a mask test fails feature.

OFF disables the save screen capture when a mask test fails feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the save screen capture when a mask
test fails feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers enable
the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE ON sets the state of

the save screen capture feature to on.
ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE OFF, indicating the
state of the save screen capture feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
This command saves the user set source waveform(s) when a mask test fails.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE?

Related Commands SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat

SAVEONEVent:FILEName
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce

Arguments ON enables the save source waveform(s) when a mask test fails feature.

OFF disables the save source waveform(s) when a mask test fails feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the save source waveform(s) when a
mask test fails feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers
enable the feature.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-167

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE ON sets the state of

the save source waveform feature to on.
ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE OFF, indicating
the state of the save source waveform feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
This command generates an SRQ event when a mask fails.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SRQ:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SRQ:STATE?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

Arguments ON enables the generate an SRQ event when a mask fails feature.

OFF disables the generate an SRQ event when a mask fails feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the generate an SRQ event when
a mask fails feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers
enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 1 enables the generate an SRQ

event when a mask fails feature to enabled.
ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SRQ:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 0, indicating the state of the
generate an SRQ event when a mask fails feature is disabled.

ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE
This command stops acquisitions when a mask test fails.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE?

2-168 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

Arguments ON enables the stop acquisitions when a mask test fails feature.

OFF disables the stop acquisitions when a mask test fails feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the stop acquisitions when a mask test
fails feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers enable the
feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE ON sets the state of the

stop acquisitions feature to on.
ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE OFF, indicating the state
of the stop acquisitions feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
This command saves a screen capture when a mask hit occurs.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE?

Related Commands SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat

SAVEONEVent:FILEName
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce

Arguments ON enables the save screen capture when a mask hit occurs feature.

OFF disables the save screen capture when a mask hit occurs feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the save screen capture when a mask
hit occurs feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers enable
the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE ON sets the state of the

save screen capture feature to on.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-169

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE? might return

:ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE OFF, indicating the
state of the save screen capture feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
This command saves the user set source waveform(s) when a mask hit occurs.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE?

Related Commands SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat

SAVEONEVent:FILEName
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce

Arguments ON enables the save source waveform(s) when a mask hit occurs feature.

OFF disables the save source waveform(s) when a mask hit occurs feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the save source waveform(s) when a
mask hit occurs feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers
enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE ON sets the state of

the save source waveform feature to on.
ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE OFF, indicating the
state of the save source waveform feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
This command generates an SRQ event when a mask hit occurs.

Group Act On Event

2-170 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SRQ:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SRQ:STATE?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

Arguments ON enables the generate an SRQ event when a mask hit occurs feature.

OFF disables the generate an SRQ event when a mask hit occurs feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the generate an SRQ event when a
mask hit occurs feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers
enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 1 enables the generate an SRQ

event when a mask hit occurs feature.
ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SRQ:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 0, indicating the generate an
SRQ event when a mask hit occurs feature is disabled.

ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE
This command stops acquisitions when a mask hit occurs.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

Arguments ON enables the stop acquisitions when a mask hit occurs feature.

OFF disables the stop acquisitions when a mask hit occurs feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the stop acquisitions when a mask hit
occurs feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers enable the
feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE ON sets the state of the stop

acquisitions feature to on.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-171

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE? might return

:ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE OFF, indicating the state
of the stop acquisitions feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
This command saves a screen capture when a mask test passes.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE?

Related Commands SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat

SAVEONEVent:FILEName
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce

Arguments ON enables the save screen capture when a mask test passes feature.

OFF disables the save screen capture when a mask test passes feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the save screen capture when a mask
test passes feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers
enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE ON sets the state of

the save screen capture feature to on.
ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE OFF, indicating the
state of the save screen capture feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
This command saves the user set source waveform(s) when a mask test passes.

Group Act On Event

2-172 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE?

Related Commands SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat

SAVEONEVent:FILEName
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce

Arguments ON enables the save source waveform(s) when a mask test passes feature.

OFF disables the save source waveform(s) when a mask test passes feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the save source waveform(s) when a
mask test passes feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers
enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE ON sets the state of

the save source waveform feature to on.
ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE OFF, indicating
the state of the save source waveform feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
This command generates an SRQ event when a mask passes.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SRQ:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SRQ:STATE?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

Arguments ON enables the generate an SRQ event when a mask passes feature.

OFF disables the generate an SRQ event when a mask passes feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the generate an SRQ event when a
mask passes feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers
enable the feature.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-173

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 1 enables the generate an SRQ

event when a mask passes feature.
ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SRQ:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 0, indicating the generate an
SRQ event when a mask passes feature is disabled.

ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE
This command stops acquisitions when a mask test passes.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

Arguments ON enables the stop acquisitions when a mask test passes feature.

OFF disables the stop acquisitions when a mask test passes feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the stop acquisitions when a mask test
passes feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers enable the
feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE ON sets the state of the

stop acquisitions feature to on.
ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE OFF, indicating the state
of the stop acquisitions feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
This command saves a screen capture when the user-set measurement limit is
exceeded.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE?

2-174 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat

SAVEONEVent:FILEName
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce

Arguments ON enables the save screen capture when the measurement limit is exceeded
feature.
OFF disables the save screen capture when the measurement limit is exceeded
feature.
<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the save screen capture when the
measurement limit is exceeded feature. The number zero disables the feature,
all other numbers enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE ON sets the state of

the save screen capture feature to on.
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE OFF, indicating
the state of the save screen capture feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
This command saves the user set source waveform(s) when the user-set
measurement limit is exceeded.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
{ON|OFF|<NR1>}
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE?

Related Commands SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat

SAVEONEVent:FILEName
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce

Arguments ON enables the save source waveform(s) when the measurement limit is exceeded
feature.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-175

Commands listed in alphabetical order

OFF disables the save source waveform(s) when the measurement limit is
exceeded feature.
<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the save source waveform(s) when
the measurement limit is exceeded feature. The number zero disables the feature,
all other numbers enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE ON sets the

state of the save source waveform feature to on.
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE? might
return :ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE OFF,
indicating the state of the save source waveform feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
This command generates an SRQ event when any measurement triggers the
user-defined measurement limits.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

Arguments ON enables the generate an SRQ event when any measurement triggers the
user-defined measurement limits feature.
OFF disables the generate an SRQ event when any measurement triggers the
user-defined measurement limits feature.
<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the generate an SRQ event when any
measurement triggers the user-defined measurement limits feature. The number
zero disables the feature, all other numbers enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 1 enables the generate an

SRQ event when any measurement triggers the user-defined measurement limits
feature.
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 0, indicating the generate
an SRQ event when any measurement triggers the user-defined measurement
limits feature is disabled.

2-176 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE
This command stops acquisitions when the user-set measurement limit is
exceeded.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

Arguments ON enables the stop acquisitions when the measurement limit is exceeded feature.

OFF disables the stop acquisitions when the measurement limit is exceeded feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the stop acquisitions when the
measurement limit is exceeded feature. The number zero disables the feature,
all other numbers enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE ON sets the state of the

stop acquisitions feature to on.
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE OFF, indicating the
state of the stop acquisitions feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
This command saves a screen capture when a search event is found.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE?

Related Commands SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat

SAVEONEVent:FILEName
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-177

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments ON enables the save screen capture when a search event is found feature.

OFF disables the save screen capture when a search event is found feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the save screen capture when a search
event is found feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers
enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE ON sets the state of the

save screen capture feature to on.
ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE OFF, indicating the state
of the save screen capture feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
This command saves the user set source waveform(s) when a search event is
found.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE?

Related Commands SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat

SAVEONEVent:FILEName
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce

Arguments ON enables the save source waveform(s) when a search event is found feature.

OFF disables the save source waveform(s) when a search event is found feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the save source waveform(s) when
a search event is found feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other
numbers enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE ON sets the state of the

save source waveform feature to on.

2-178 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE? might return

:ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE OFF, indicating the
state of the save source waveform feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
This command generates an SRQ event when any search event is found.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SRQ:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SRQ:STATE?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

Arguments ON enables the generate an SRQ event when any search event is found feature.

OFF disables the generate an SRQ event when any search event is found feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the generate an SRQ event when any
search event is found feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other
numbers enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 1 enables the generate an SRQ

event when any search event is found feature.
ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SRQ:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 0, indicating the
generate an SRQ event when any search event is found feature is disabled.

ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE
This command stops acquisitions when a search event is found.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-179

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments ON enables the stop acquisitions when a search event is found feature.
OFF disables the stop acquisitions when a search event is found feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the stop acquisitions when a search
event is found feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers
enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE ON sets the state of the stop

acquisitions feature to on.
ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE OFF, indicating the state of
the stop acquisitions feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
This command saves a screen capture on a trigger event from a single sequence or
sequence of N acquisition. Each acquisition in the sequence of N will perform a
save operation. This command replaces SAVe:IMAGe (still valid command, but
only an alias for this new command).

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE?

Arguments ON enables the save screen capture on a trigger event feature.

OFF disables the save screen capture on a trigger event feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the save screen capture on a trigger
event feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers enable the
feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE ON sets the state of the

save screen capture feature to on.
ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE OFF, indicating the
state of the save screen capture feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
This command saves the user set source waveform(s) on a trigger event.

2-180 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE {ON|OFF|1|0}

ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE?

Arguments ON enables the save source waveform(s) on a trigger event feature.

OFF disables the save source waveform(s) on a trigger event feature.

1 enables the save source waveform(s) on a trigger event feature. Any number
value, other than 0, will enable the feature.
0 disables the save source waveform(s) on a trigger event feature, all other number
values enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE ON sets the state of

the save source waveform feature to on.
ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE OFF, indicating the
state of the save source waveform feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
This command generates an SRQ event when a trigger event occurs.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SRQ:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SRQ:STATE?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

Arguments ON enables the generate an SRQ event when a trigger event occurs feature.

OFF disables the generate an SRQ event when a trigger event occurs feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the generate an SRQ event when
a trigger event occurs feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other
numbers enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 1 enables the generate an SRQ

event when a trigger event occurs feature.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-181

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SRQ:STATE? might return

:ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 0, indicating the generate an
SRQ event when a trigger event occurs feature is disabled.

ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE
This command stops acquisitions on a trigger event from a single sequence or
sequence of N acquisition. Each acquisition in the sequence of N will perform
a save operation.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE?

Arguments ON enables the stop acquisitions on a trigger event feature.

OFF disables the stop acquisitions on a trigger event feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the stop acquisitions on a trigger event
feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE ON sets the state of the stop

acquisitions feature to on.
ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE OFF, indicating the state
of the stop acquisitions feature is set to off.

AFG:AMPLitude
Sets (or queries) the AFG amplitude in volts, peak to peak.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:AMPLitude <NR3>

AFG:AMPLitude?

2-182 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR3> is a floating point number that represents the AFG amplitude, peak to
peak, in volts.

Examples AFG:AMPLITUDE 1.0 sets the AFG amplitude to 1.0 volts, peak to peak.

AFG:AMPLITUDE? might return :AFG:AMPLITUDE 3.0000 indicating the

amplitude is set to 3.0 Volts.

AFG:ARBitrary:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the source name for the Arbitrary Waveform.
Currently supported sources are either waveform file (.wfm) or text file (.csv).

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:ARBitrary:SOUrce <QString>

AFG:ARBitrary:SOUrce?

Arguments <QString> is the source name.

Examples AFG:ARBITRARY:SOURCE "E:/Waveforms/Square.wfm" sets the source

waveform to E:/Waveforms/Square.wfm.
AFG:ARBITRARY:SOURCE? might return "E:/Waveforms/Square.wfm" indicating
the source is set to E:/Waveforms/Square.wfm.

AFG:BURSt:CCOUnt
This command sets or returns the cycle count for AFG burst mode.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:BURSt:CCOUnt <NR1>

AFG:BURSt:CCOUnt?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-183

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands AFG:BURSt:TRIGger

Arguments <NR1> is the cycle count.

Examples AFG:BURSt:CCOUnt 1000 sets the cycle count for AFG burst mode to 1000

AFG:BURSt:CCOUnt? might return :AFG:BURSt:CCOUnt 50, indicating that

the cycle count for AFG burst mode is set to 50

AFG:BURSt:TRIGger (No Query Form)

This command triggers a burst on AFG output.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:BURSt:TRIGger

Related Commands AFG:BURSt:CCOUnt

Examples AFG:BURSt:TRIGger triggers a burst on AFG output.

AFG:FREQuency
Sets (or queries) the AFG frequency, in Hz.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:FREQuency <NR3>

AFG:FREQuency?

Arguments <NR3> is the floating point number that represents the AFG frequency, in Hz.

2-184 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples AFG:FREQUENCY 100.0E3 sets the AFG frequency to 100 kHz.

AFG:FREQUENCY? might return :AFG:FREQUENCY 312.5000E+3 indicating the

frequency is set to 312.5 kHz.

AFG:FUNCtion
Sets (or queries) which AFG function to execute.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:FUNCtion
{SINE|SQUare|PULSe|RAMP|NOISe|DC|SINC|GAUSsian|LORENtz
|ERISe|EDECAy|HAVERSINe|CARDIac|ARBitrary}
AFG:FUNCtion?

Arguments SINE

SQUare

PULSe

RAMP

NOISe

DC. The DC level is controlled by AFG:OFFSet.

SINC (Sin(x)/x)

GAUSsian

LORENtz

ERISe

EDECAy

HAVERSINe

CARDIac

ARBitrary

Examples AFG:FUNC LOREN specifies to generate the Lorentz function.

AFG:FUNCTION? might return :AFG:FUNCTION SINE indicating the AFG

function is set to sine.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-185

Commands listed in alphabetical order

AFG:HIGHLevel
This command sets (or queries) the high level value of the output waveform, in
volts, when using the arbitrary function generator feature.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:HIGHLevel <NR3>

AFG:HIGHLevel?

Arguments <NR3> is a floating point number that represents the AFG high level value, in volts.

Examples AFG:HIGHLEVEL 1.0 sets the AFG high level value to 1.0 volts.

AFG:HIGHLEVEL? might return :AFG:HIGHLEVEL 1.5000 indicating the high

level is set to 1.5 Volts.

AFG:LOWLevel
This command sets (or queries) the low level value of the output waveform, in
volts, when using the arbitrary function generator feature.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:LOWLevel <NR3>

AFG:LOWLevel?

Arguments <NR3> is the floating point number that represents the AFG low level value, in
volts.

Examples AFG:LOWLEVEL 1.0 sets the AFG low level value to 1.00 volts.

AFG:LOWLEVEL? might return :AFG:LOWLEVEL -1.5000 indicating the low

level is set to —1.5 Volts.

2-186 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

AFG:NOISEAdd:PERCent
Sets (or queries) the AFG additive noise level as a percentage. Minimum is 0.0%,
maximum is 100.0% and increment is 1.0%.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:NOISEAdd:PERCent <NR3>

AFG:NOISEAdd:PERCent?

Arguments <NR3> is the floating point number that represents the AFG additive noise level,
as a percentage.

Examples AFG:NOISEADD:PERCENT 50 sets the AFG additive noise level to 50 percent.

AFG:NOISEADD:PERCENT? might return :AFG:NOISEADD:PERCENT 0

indicating that no noise is added.

AFG:NOISEAdd:STATE
Sets (or queries) the AFG additive noise state.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:NOISEAdd:STATE {0|1|OFF|ON}

AFG:NOISEAdd:STATE?

Arguments 1 or ON turns on the AFG additive noise state.

0 or OFF turns it off.

Examples AFG:NOISEADD:STATE ON turns on the additive noise state.

AFG:NOISEADD:STATE? might return :AFG:NOISEADD:STATE 0 indicating

the noise additive state is off.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-187

Commands listed in alphabetical order

AFG:OFFSet
Sets (or queries) the AFG offset value, in volts.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:OFFSet <NR3>

AFG:OFFSet?

Arguments <NR3> is a floating point number that represents the AFG offset, in volts.

Examples AFG:OFFSET 1.0 sets the AFG offset to 1.0 volts.

AFG:OFFSET? might return AFG:OFFSET 0.0E+0 indicating there is no offset.

AFG:OUTPut:LOAd:IMPEDance
Sets (or queries) the AFG output load impedance.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:OUTPut:LOAd:IMPEDance {FIFty|HIGHZ}

AFG:OUTPut:LOAd:IMPEDance?

Arguments FIFty sets the output load impedance to 50 Ohms.

HIGHZ sets the output load impedance to the high-impedance state.

Examples AFG:OUTP:LOA:IMPED FIF sets the AFG output load impedance to 50 Ohms.

AFG:OUTPUT:LOAD:IMPEDANCE? might return AFG:OUTPUT:LOAD:IMPEDANCE

HIGHZ indicating the load impedance is set to the high impedance state.

2-188 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

AFG:OUTPut:MODe
This command sets or returns the AFG output mode.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:OUTPut:MODe {OFF|CONTinuous|BURSt}

AFG:OUTPut:MODe?

Related Commands AFG:OUTPut:STATE

Arguments OFF turns off the AFG output mode.

CONTinuous turns the AFG output mode to continuous.

BURSt turns the AFG output mode to burst.

Examples AFG:OUTPut:MODe BURSt sets the AFG output mode to burst.

AFG:OUTPut:MODe? might return AFG:OUTPut:MODe CONTinuous, indicating

that the AFG output mode is set to continuous.

AFG:OUTPut:STATE
Sets (or queries) the AFG output state.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:OUTPut:STATE {0|1|OFF|ON}

AFG:OUTPut:STATE?

Arguments 1 or ON turns on the AFG output state.

0 or OFF turns it off.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-189

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples AFG:OUTPUT:STATE ON turns on the AFG output state.

AFG:OUTPUT:STATE? might return AFG:OUTPUT:STATE 1 indicating the AFG

output is on.

AFG:PERIod
Sets (or queries) the period of the AFG waveform, in seconds.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:PERIod <NR3>

AFG:PERIod?

Arguments NR3 is the floating point number that represents the AFG period value, in seconds.

Returns The query response is returned in high precision NR3 format (up to 12 digits with
more than 4 trailing 0 digits after the decimal point is omitted).

Examples AFG:PERIOD 1 sets the AFG period value to 1 second.

AFG:PERIOD? might return :AFG:PERIOD 3.2000E-6 indicating the AFG period

is set to 3.2 μs.

AFG:PULse:WIDth
Sets (or queries) the AFG pulse width, in seconds.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:PULse:WIDth <NR3>

AFG:PULse:WIDth?

Arguments <NR3> is the floating point number that represents the pulse width, in seconds.

2-190 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples AFG:PULSE:WIDTH 100.0E-6 sets the AFG pulse width to 100 microseconds.

AFG:PULSE:WIDTH? might return :AFG:PULSE:WIDTH 1.0000E-6 indicating

the pulse width is set to 1 μs.

AFG:RAMP:SYMmetry
Sets (or queries) the AFG ramp symmetry in percent. Minimum is 0.0%,
maximum is 100.0% and increment is 0.10%.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:RAMP:SYMmetry <NR3>

AFG:RAMP:SYMmetry?

Arguments <NR3> is the floating point number that represents the AFG ramp symmetry, as
a percentage.

Examples AFG:RAMP:SYMMETRY 50.0 sets the AFG ramp symmetry to 50 percent.

AFG:RAMP:SYMMETRY? might return :AFG:RAMP:SYMMETRY 50.0000

indicating the symmetry is set to 50%.

AFG:SQUare:DUty
Sets (or queries) the AFG duty cycle in percent. The minimum is 10.0%,
maximum is 90.0% and increment is 0.10%.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:SQUare:DUty <NR3>

AFG:SQUare:DUty?

Arguments <NR3> is the floating point number that represents the AFG duty cycle, as a
percentage.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-191

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples AFG:SQUARE:DUTY 50.0 sets the AFG duty cycle to 50 percent.

AFG:SQUARE:DUTY? might return :AFG:SQUARE:DUTY 50.0000 indicating

the duty cycle is set to 50%.

ALIas
This command sets or queries the state of alias functionality, and it is identical to
the ALIAS:STATE command.

Group Alias

Syntax ALIas {OFF|ON|<NR1>}

ALIas?

Related Commands ALIas:STATE

Arguments OFF turns Alias expansion off.

ON turns Alias expansion on. When a defined alias is received, the specified
command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed.
<NR1> = 0 disables Alias mode; any other value enables Alias mode.

Examples ALIAS ON turns the alias feature on. When a defined alias is received, the specified
command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed.
ALIAS? might return :ALIAS:STATE 1, indicating that the alias feature is on.

ALIas:CATalog? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns a list of the currently defined alias labels,
separated by commas. If no aliases are defined, the query returns the string “”.

Group Alias

Syntax ALIas:CATalog?

Examples ALIAS:CATALOG? might return the string :ALIAS:CATALOG

"SETUP1","TESTMENU1","DEFAULT" showing that there are three aliases
named SETUP1, TESTMENU1, and DEFAULT.

2-192 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ALIas:DEFine
This command assigns a sequence of program messages to an alias label. These
messages are then substituted for the alias whenever it is received as a command
or query, provided that ALIas:STATE is turned on. The query form of this
command returns the definitions of a selected alias.

NOTE. Attempting to give two aliases the same name causes an error. To give a
new alias the name of an existing alias, the existing alias must first be deleted.

Group Alias

Syntax ALIas:DEFine <QString><,>{<QString>|<Block>}

ALIas:DEFine?

Related Commands ALIas:STATE

Arguments The first <QString> is the alias label.

This label cannot be a command name. Labels must start with a letter and can
contain only letters, numbers, and underscores; other characters are not allowed.
The label must be less than or equal to 12 characters.
The second <QString> or <Block> is a complete sequence of program messages.
The messages can contain only valid commands that must be separated by
semicolons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands. The sequence
must be less than or equal to 256 characters.

Examples ALIAS:DEFINE "ST1",":RECALL:SETUP 'C:/mySetup.set';:AUTOSET

EXECUTE" defines an alias named “ST1” that recalls a previously saved setup
and performs an autoset.
ALIAS:DEFINE? "ST1" returns :ALIAS:DEFINE "ST1",#247
:RECALL:SETUP 'C:/mySetup.set';:AUTOSET EXECUTE.

ALIas:DELEte (No Query Form)

This command removes a specified alias and is identical to ALIas:DELEte:NAMe.
An error message is generated if the named alias does not exist.

Group Alias

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-193

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax ALIas:DELEte <QString>

Related Commands *ESR?

ALIas:DELEte:ALL

Arguments <QString> is the name of the alias to be removed. Using ALIas:DELEte

without specifying an alias causes an execution error. <QString> must be a
previously defined value.

Examples ALIAS:DELETE "SETUP1" deletes the alias named SETUP1.

ALIas:DELEte:ALL (No Query Form)

This command deletes all existing aliases.

Group Alias

Syntax ALIas:DELEte:ALL

Related Commands ALIas:DELEte

ALIas:DELEte:NAMe

Examples ALIAS:DELETE:ALL deletes all existing aliases.

ALIas:DELEte:NAMe (No Query Form)

This command removes a specified alias. An error message is generated if the
named alias does not exist. This command is identical to ALIas:DELEte.

Group Alias

Syntax ALIas:DELEte:NAMe <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the name of the alias to remove. Using ALIas:DELEte:NAMe

without specifying an alias causes an exception error.<QString> must be a
previously defined alias.

2-194 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples ALIAS:DELETE:NAME "STARTUP" deletes the alias named STARTUP.

ALIas:STATE
This command turns aliases on or off and is identical to the ALIas command. The
query form of this command returns the state of the aliases.

Group Alias

Syntax ALIas:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

ALIas:STATE?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 turns off aliases; any other value turns on aliases.

OFF turns alias expansion off.

ON turns alias expansion on. When a defined alias is received, the specified
command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed.

Examples ALIAS:STATE OFF turns off the alias feature.

ALIAS:STATE? might return :ALIAS:STATE ON, indicating that alias expansion

is currently turned on.

ALLEv? (Query Only)

This query-only command prompts the instrument to return all events and their
messages (delimited by commas), and removes the returned events from the Event
Queue. Use the *ESR? query to enable the events to be returned. This command
is similar to repeatedly sending *EVMsg? queries to the instrument.

Group Status and Error

Syntax ALLEv?

Related Commands *ESR?

EVMsg?

Examples ALLEV? might return :ALLEV 2225,"Measurement error, No waveform

to measure; "420,"Query UNTERMINATED;".

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-195

Commands listed in alphabetical order

APPLication:ACTivate (No Query Form)

For legacy TekExpress applications. Starts the application specified in the string.
The available applications depend on the oscilloscope model and installed options.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax APPLication:ACTivate <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the name of the application that you want to start. Enter the
application name exactly as it appears in the oscilloscope Applications menu.

Examples APPLICATION:ACTIVATE "TekExpress Ethernet" starts the TekExpress

Ethernet application.

AUTOSAVEPITIMEOUT
This command sets or queries the idle time from the programmable interface
before auto-save occurs.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax AUTOSAVEPITIMEOUT <NR1>

AUTOSAVEPITIMEOUT?

Arguments <NR1>

Examples AUTOSAVEPITIMEOUT 100000 sets the timeout to 100 seconds.

AUTOSAVEPITIMEOUT? might return :AUTOSAVEPITIMEOUT 180000

indicating the time out value is 180 seconds.

AUTOSAVEUITIMEOUT
This command sets or queries the idle time from the user interface before
auto-save occurs.

Group Miscellaneous

2-196 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax AUTOSAVEUITIMEOUT <NR1>

AUTOSAVEUITIMEOUT?

Arguments <NR1>

Examples AUTOSAVEUITIMEOUT 4000 sets the timeout to 4 seconds.

AUTOSAVEUITIMEOUT? might return :AUTOSAVEUITIMEOUT 3000 indicating

the time out value is 3 seconds.

AUTOSet (No Query Form)

This command (no query format) sets the vertical, horizontal, and trigger controls
of the instrument to automatically acquire and display the selected waveform.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax AUTOSet EXECute

Arguments EXECute autosets the displayed waveform; this is equivalent to pressing the front
panel Autoset button.

Examples AUTOSET EXECute autosets the displayed waveform.

AUTOSet:ACQuisition:ENAble
This command sets or queries the Autoset acquisition setting adjustment. Settings
affected may include, but not be limited to, acquisition mode, and FastAcq mode.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax AUTOSet:ACQuisition:ENAble {ON|1|OFF|0}

AUTOSet:ACQuisition:ENAble?

Related Commands AUTOSet:HORizontal:ENAble

AUTOSet:TRIGger:ENAble

AUTOSet:VERTical:ENAble

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-197

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments ON or 1 enables Autoset to change acquisition settings.

OFF or 0 disables Autoset from changing acquisition settings.

Examples AUTOSet:ACQuisition:ENAble OFF turns off Autoset's adjustment of the

acquisition settings.
AUTOSet:ACQuisition:ENAble? might return 0, indicating Autoset's
adjustment of the acquisition settings is turned off.

AUTOSet:ENAble
This command sets or queries the Autoset enable/disable feature. This is useful
for classroom purposes where the instructor wants the students to achieve the
desired instrument settings without the benefit of the Autoset feature.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax AUTOSet:ENAble {ON|1|OFF|0}

AUTOSet:ENAble?

Related Commands AUTOSet:ACQuisition:ENAble

AUTOSet:HORizontal:ENAble
AUTOSet:TRIGger:ENAble
AUTOSet:VERTical:ENAble

Arguments ON or 1 enables Autoset.

OFF or 0 disables Autoset.

Examples AUTOSet:ENAble ON turns on the Autoset feature.

AUTOSet:ENAble? might return 1, indicating that Autoset is enabled.

AUTOSet:HORizontal:ENAble
This command sets or queries Autoset's adjustment of horizontal settings. Settings
affected may include, but not be limited to, horizontal scale, horizontal position,
and horizontal delay mode.

2-198 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax AUTOSet:HORizontal:ENAble {ON|1|OFF|0}

AUTOSet:HORizontal:ENAble?

Related Commands AUTOSet:ACQuisition:ENAble

AUTOSet:TRIGger:ENAble
AUTOSet:VERTical:ENAble

Arguments ON or 1 enables Autoset to change horizontal settings.

OFF or 0 disables Autoset from changing horizontal settings.

Examples AUTOSet:HORizontal:ENAble OFF turns off Autoset's adjustment of the

horizontal settings.
AUTOSet:HORizontal:ENAble? might return 0, indicating Autoset's
adjustment of the horizontal settings is turned off.

AUTOSet:TRIGger:ENAble
This command sets or queries Autoset's adjustment of trigger settings. Settings
affected may include, but not be limited to, trigger level, trigger source, and
trigger coupling.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax AUTOSet:TRIGger:ENAble {ON|1|OFF|0}

AUTOSet:TRIGger:ENAble?

Related Commands AUTOSet:ACQuisition:ENAble

AUTOSet:HORizontal:ENAble
AUTOSet:VERTical:ENAble

Arguments ON or 1 enables Autoset to change trigger settings.

OFF or 0 disables Autoset from changing trigger settings.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-199

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples AUTOSet:TRIGger:ENAble OFF turns off Autoset's adjustment of the trigger

settings.
AUTOSet:TRIGger:ENAble? might return 0, indicating Autoset's adjustment of
the trigger settings is turned off.

AUTOSet:VERTical:ENAble
This command sets or queries Autoset's adjustment of vertical settings. Settings
affected may include, but not be limited to, vertical scale, vertical position, and
vertical offset.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax AUTOSet:VERTical:ENAble {ON|1|OFF|0}

AUTOSet:VERTical:ENAble?

Related Commands AUTOSet:ACQuisition:ENAble

AUTOSet:HORizontal:ENAble
AUTOSet:TRIGger:ENAble

Arguments ON or 1 enables Autoset to change vertical settings.

OFF or 0 disables Autoset from changing vertical settings.

Examples AUTOSet:VERTical:ENAble OFF turns off Autoset's adjustment of the vertical

settings.
AUTOSet:VERTical:ENAble? might return 0, indicating Autoset's adjustment
of the vertical settings is turned off.

AUTOSet:VERTical:OPTIMize
This command sets or queries which vertical settings Autoset will optimize when
the display mode is set to Overlay mode (all waveforms are in one common
graticule in the Waveform View).

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax AUTOSet:VERTical:OPTIMize {RESOlution|VISIBility}

AUTOSet:VERTical:OPTIMize?

2-200 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands DISplay:WAVEView<x>:VIEWStyle

Arguments RESOlution uses as much of the ADC's (Analog to Digital Converter) range as
possible to provide the best vertical resolution and measurement accuracy, but
waveforms will overlap each other.
VISIBility vertically scales and positions waveforms so they are visually
separated from each other at the expense of vertical resolution and measurement
accuracy.

Examples AUTOSet:VERTical:OPTIMize VISIBility will vertically scale and position

all active waveforms so that they are visually separated from each other when
autoset is executed.
AUTOSet:VERTical:OPTIMize? might return
AUTOSet:VERTical:OPTIMize RESOLUTION, which indicates that, when
executed, autoset will vertically scale/position the active waveforms to maximize
the ADC range while in Overlay display mode.

AUXout:EDGE
This command sets or queries the direction in which the Auxiliary Output signal
will transition when a trigger occurs.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax AUXout:EDGE {RISing|FALling}

AUXout:EDGE?

Arguments RISing sets the polarity to the rising edge.

FALling sets the polarity to the falling edge.

Examples AUXOUT:EDGE RISING sets the polarity to rising edge.

AUXOUT:EDGE? might return :AUXOUT:EDGE FALLING, indicating that the

polarity is set to falling edge.

AUXout:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the source at the Auxiliary Output BNC connection.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-201

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax AUXout:SOUrce {ATRIGger|REFOUT|AFG}

AUXout:SOUrce?

Arguments ATRIGger sets the source at the BNC connector to the main trigger.

REFOUT sets the source at the BNC connector to the reference output.

AFG sets the source at the BNC connector to the AFG output.

Examples AUXOUT:SOURCE? might return :AUXOUT:SOURCE ATRIGGER, indicating that

the source at the BNC connector is set to the A trigger.

BUS:ADDNew (No Query Form)

This command adds the specified bus. This command creates/adds the bus but
does not display it (turn it on). In order to enable bus decoding and see the bus
display on screen, send the DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:STATE ON
command.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:ADDNew <QString>

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:TYPe

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:STATE

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of the form "B<NR1>" where NR1 is ≥1.

Examples BUS:ADDNEW "B5";:display:waveview1:bus:b5:state on creates bus 3

with the default type of Parallel, and then turns it on.

BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:BITRate
This command sets or queries the ARINC429 bit rate for the specified
bus. The bus number is specified by x. If you select Custom, use
BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:BITRate:CUSTom to set the bit rate.

2-202 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-AERO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:BITRate {LOW|HI|CUSTom}

BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:BITRate?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:BITRate:CUSTom

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

LOW sets the bit rate to handle low speed signals.

HI sets the bit rate to handle high speed signals.

CUSTom uses the custom bit rate set by

BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:BITRate:CUSTom.

Examples BUS:B1:ARINC429A:BITRATE LOW sets the bit rate to handle low speed signals.

BUS:B1:ARINC429A:BITRATE? might return :BUS:B1:ARINC429A:BITRATE

HI, indicating the bit rate is set to handle high speed signals.

BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:BITRate:CUSTom
This command sets or queries the ARINC429 custom bit rate for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AERO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:BITRate:CUSTom <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:BITRate:CUSTom?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:BITRate

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> is the ARINC429 custom bit rate for the specified bus.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-203

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:ARINC429A:BITRATE:CUSTOM 12500 sets the bit rate to 12,500.

BUS:B1:ARINC429A:BITRATE:CUSTOM? might return

:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:BITRATE:CUSTOM 100000, indicating the bit
rate is set to 100,000.

BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATAFORmat
This command sets or queries the format of the DATA field for the specified
ARINC429 bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AERO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATAFORmat {DATA|SDIDATA|SDIDATASSM}

BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATAFORmat?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

DATA specifies a DATA field width of 19 bits (covering bits 11 through 29 of

the 32 bit packet)

SDIDATA specifies a DATA field width of 21 bits (covering bits 9 through 29 of

the 32 bit packet)
SDIDATASSM specifies a DATA field width of 23 bits (covering bits 9 through
31 of the 32 bit packet)

Examples BUS:B1:ARINC429A:DATAFORMAT SDIDATASSM sets Bus 1 ARINC429 DATA

field width to 23 bits.
BUS:B1:ARINC429A:DATAFORMAT? might return
:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:DATAFORMAT DATA, indicating a DATA field width
of 19 bits.

BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:POLARITY
This command sets or queries the source polarity for the specified ARINC429
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AERO.

2-204 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:POLARITY {NORMal|INVERTed}

BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:POLARITY?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

NORMal specifies normal polarity.

INVERTed specifies inverted polarity.

Examples BUS:B3:ARINC429A:POLARITY INVERTED sets Bus 3 ARINC429 polarity to

inverted.
BUS:B2:ARINC429A:POLARITY? might return
:BUS:B2:ARINC429A:POLARITY NORMAL, indicating that the Bus 2 ARINC429
polarity is set to normal.

BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the source for the specified ARINC429 bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AERO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source waveform for the ARINC429 bus.

MATH<x> specifies a math waveform as the source waveform for the ARINC429
bus.
REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source waveform for the
ARINC429 bus.

Examples BUS:B1:ARINC429A:SOUrce CH1 sets channel 1 as the source for the

ARINC429 bus.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-205

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B1:ARINC429A:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:ARINC429A:SOUrce

MATH2 indicating that the source is set to MATH2.

BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:THRESHold
This command sets or queries the ARINC429 upper threshold for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AERO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:THRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:THRESHold?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SOUrce

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the ARINC429 lower threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B3:ARINC429A:THRESHOLD -200e-3 sets the Bus 3 ARINC429 upper

threshold to -200 mV.
BUS:B2:ARINC429A:THRESHOLD? might return
:BUS:B2:ARINC429A:THRESHOLD -500.0000E-3 indicating the Bus
2 ARINC429 upper threshold is set to -500 mV.

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:BITDelay
This command sets or queries the number of delay bits for the specified AUDIO
bus. The bus is specified by x.

NOTE. This command only applies to the TDM Audio type.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUDIO.

Group Bus

2-206 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUDio:BITDelay <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:BITDelay?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> specifies the number of delay bits.

Examples BUS:B1:AUDIO:BITDELAY 2 sets the bit delay to 2.

BUS:B1:AUDIO:BITDELAY? might return :BUS:B1:AUDIO:BITDELAY 1

indicating that the number of delay bits is 1.

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:BITOrder
Specifies the bit order for the specified AUDIO bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUDIO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUDio:BITOrder {MSB|LSB}

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:BITOrder?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

MSB specifies that the most significant bit will be expected first in the order.

LSB specifies that the least significant bit will be expected first in the order.

Examples BUS:B1:AUDIO:BITORDER LSB sets the bit order to LSB.

BUS:B1:AUDIO:BITORDER? might return :BUS:B1:AUDIO:BITORDER MSB

indicating that the MSB is first in the bit order.

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CLOCk:POLarity
This command sets or queries the clock source polarity for the specified AUDIO
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUDIO.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-207

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CLOCk:POLarity {FALL|RISE}

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CLOCk:POLarity?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

FALL sets falling edge as the clock polarity.

RISE sets rising edge as the clock polarity.

Examples BUS:B1:AUDIO:CLOCK:POLARITY FALL sets the clock polarity to Fall.

BUS:B1:AUDIO:CLOCK:POLARITY? might return

:BUS:B1:AUDIO:CLOCK:POLARITY RISE indicating that the clock polarity
is set to Rise.

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CLOCk:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the clock source waveform for the specified
AUDIO bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUDIO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CLOCk:SOUrce
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CLOCk:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the clock source waveform for the audio bus.

CH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel as the clock source waveform for the
specified audio bus.
MATH<x> specifies a math waveform as the clock source waveform for the audio
bus.
REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the clock source waveform for the
audio bus.
REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the clock source
waveform for the specified audio bus.

2-208 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:AUDIO:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1_D1 sets D1 of channel 1 as the clock

source for the audio bus.
BUS:B1:AUDIO:CLOCK:SOURCE? might return
:BUS:B1:AUDIO:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1 indicating that the clock source is
set to channel 1.

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CLOCk:THReshold
This command sets or queries the audio clock source threshold for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUDIO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CLOCk:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CLOCk:THReshold?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CLOCk:SOUrce

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the audio clock source threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B3:AUDIO:CLOCK:THRESHOLD 500.0E-3 sets the Bus 3 audio Cclock

source threshold to 500.0 mV.
BUS:B2:AUDIO:CLOCK:THRESHOLD? might return
:BUS:B2:AUDIO:CLOCK:THRESHOLD 1.0 indicates the Bus 2 audio clock
source threshold is set to 1.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:POLarity
This command sets or queries the audio data source polarity for the specified
audio bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUDIO.

Group Bus

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-209

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:POLarity {HIGH|LOW}

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:POLarity?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

HIGH specifies positive data polarity for the audio bus.

LOW specifies negative data polarity for the audio bus.

Examples BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:POLARITY LOW sets the data polarity to LOW.

BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:POLARITY? might return

:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:POLARITY HIGH indicating that the data polarity
is set to HIGH.

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the number of bits per channel for the specified
audio bus. This command only applies to the TDM Audio type. The bus is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUDIO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

NR1 specifies the number of bits per word.

Examples BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:SIZE 8 sets the number of bits per word to 8.

BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:SIZE? might return :BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:SIZE 24

indicating that the number of bits per word is set to 24.

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the audio data source for the specified audio bus.
The bus is specified by x.

2-210 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-AUDIO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:SOUrce
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the data source waveform for the audio bus.

CH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel as the data source waveform for the
audio bus.
MATH<x> specifies an math waveform as the data source waveform for the audio
bus.
REF<x> specifies an reference waveform as the data source waveform for the
audio bus.
REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the data source waveform
for the specified audio bus.

Examples BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:SOURCE CH1_D1 sets the data source to D1 of

FlexChannel 1.
BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:SOURCE? might return :BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:SOURCE
CH3 indicating that the data source is set to CH3.

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:THReshold
This command sets or queries the audio data source threshold for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUDIO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:THReshold?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:SOUrce

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-211

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the audio data source threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B3:AUDIO:DATA:THRESHOLD 1.5 sets the Bus 3 audio clock source

threshold to 500.0 mV.
BUS:B2:AUDIO:DATA:THRESHOLD? might return
:BUS:B2:AUDIO:DATA:THRESHOLD 500.0000E-3 indicates the Bus 2 audio data
source threshold is set to 500 mV.

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:WORDSize
This command sets or queries the audio bits per word for the specified bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:WORDSize <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:WORDSize?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> is the audio bits per word for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:AUDio:DATa:WORDSize 24 sets the audio bits per word to 24 bits.

BUS:B1:AUDio:DATa:WORDSize? might return

:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:WORDSIZE 24 indicating the bits per word is 24.

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:FRAME:CLOCKBITSPERCHANNEL
This command sets or queries the audio bits of sync width for the specified bus.
The bus is specified by x.

NOTE. This command only applies to the TDM Audio type.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUDIO.

Group Bus

2-212 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUDio:FRAME:CLOCKBITSPERCHANNEL <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:FRAME:CLOCKBITSPERCHANNEL?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> is the audio bits of sync width for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:AUDio:FRAME:CLOCKBITSPERCHANNEL 32 sets the number of bits

to 32.
BUS:B1:AUDio:FRAME:CLOCKBITSPERCHANNEL? might return
:BUS:B1:AUDIO:FRAME:CLOCKBITSPERCHANNEL 24 indicating there are 24
bits of sync width for the bus.

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:FRAME:SIZe
This command sets or queries the number of audio channels in each frame for the
specified AUDIO bus. The bus is specified by x.

NOTE. This command only applies to the TDM Audio type.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUDIO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUDio:FRAME:SIZe <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:FRAME:SIZe?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> specifies the number of channels in each frame.

Examples BUS:B1:AUDIO:FRAME:SIZE 2 sets the frame size to 2.

BUS:B1:AUDIO:FRAME:SIZE? might return :BUS:B1:AUDIO:FRAME:SIZE 8

indicating that the number of channels in each frame is set to 8.

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:TYPe
This command sets or queries the audio format (type) for the specified audio
bus. The bus is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-213

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-AUDIO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUDio:TYPe {I2S|LJ|RJ|TDM}

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:TYPe?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

I2S specifies the I2S audio format.

LJ specifies the left-justified audio format.

RJ specifies the right-justified audio format.

TDM specifies the time-division multiplexing audio format.

Examples BUS:B1:AUDIO:TYPE RJ sets right-justified as the audio format.

BUS:B1:AUDIO:TYPE? might return :BUS:B1:AUDIO:TYPE I2S indicating

that the audio format is set to I2S.

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:WORDSel:POLarity
This command sets or queries the word select source polarity for the specified
audio bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUDIO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUDio:WORDSel:POLarity {NORMal|INVERTed}

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:WORDSel:POLarity?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

NORMal specifies positive polarity.

INVERTed specifies negative polarity.

Examples BUS:B1:AUDIO:WORDSEL:POLARITY NORMal sets normal as the word select

polarity.

2-214 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B1:AUDIO:WORDSEl:POLARITY? might return

:BUS:B1:AUDIO:WORDSEL:POLARITY NORMAL indicating that the word select
polarity is set to normal.

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:WORDSel:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the audio word select source waveform for the
specified audio bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUDIO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUDio:WORDSel:SOUrce
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:WORDSel:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the word select source waveform.

CH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel as the word select source waveform.

MATH<x> specifies an math waveform as the word select source waveform.

REF<x> specifies an reference waveform as the word select source waveform.

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the word select source

waveform for the specified audio bus.

Examples BUS:B1:AUDIO:WORDSEL:SOURCE CH1 sets CH1 as the word select source.

BUS:B1:AUDIO:WORDSEL:SOURCE CH2_D3 sets D3 of FlexChannel 2 as the

word select source.
BUS:B1:AUDIO:WORDSEL:SOURCE? might return
:BUS:B1:AUDIO:WORDSEL:SOURCE CH2 indicating that the word select source
is set to CH2.

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:WORDSel:THReshold
This command sets or queries the audio word select source threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-215

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-AUDIO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUDio:WORDSel:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:AUDio:WORDSel:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the audio word select source threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B4:AUDIO:WORDSEL:THRESHOLD 300.0E-3 sets the Bus 4 audio word

select source threshold to 300 mV.
BUS:B1:AUDIO:WORDSEL:THRESHOLD? might return
:BUS:B1:AUDIO:WORDSEL:THRESHOLD 1.25 indicates the Bus 1 audio word
select source threshold is set to 1.25 V.

BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:DATAMINUSTHRESHOLD
This command sets or queries the AutoEthernet D– source threshold level for the
specified bus. This threshold only applies when the AutoEthernet signal type is
single ended.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

The AutoEthernet signal type is single ended.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:DATAMINUSTHRESHOLD <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:DATAMINUSTHRESHOLD?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

NR3 specifies the AutoEthernet D– source threshold level for the specified bus,
in volts. This threshold only applies when the AutoEthernet signal type is single
ended.

Examples BUS:B3:AUTOETHERnet:DATAMINUSTHRESHOLD 250.0E-3 sets the Bus 3

AutoEthernet D– source threshold level to 250.0000 mV.

2-216 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B2:AUTOETHERnet:DATAMINUSTHRESHOLD? might return

BUS:B2:AUTOETHERnet:DATAMINUSTHRESHOLD 1.0, indicating the Bus 2
AutoEthernet D– source threshold level is set to 1.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:DATAPLUSTHRESHold
This command sets or queries the AutoEthernet D+ source threshold level for the
specified bus. This threshold only applies when the AutoEthernet signal type is
single ended.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

The AutoEthernet signal type is single ended.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:DATAPLUSTHRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:DATAPLUSTHRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

NR3 specifies the AutoEthernet D+ source threshold for the specified bus, in volts.
This threshold only applies when the AutoEthernet signal type is single ended.

Examples BUS:B3:AUTOETHERnet:DATAPLUSTHRESHOLD 250.0E-3 sets the Bus 3

AutoEthernet D+ source threshold level to 250.0000 mV.
BUS:B2:AUTOETHERnet:DATAPLUSTHRESHOLD? might return
BUS:B2:AUTOETHERnet:DATAPLUSTHRESHOLD 1.0, indicating the Bus 2
AutoEthernet D+ source threshold level is set to 1.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:LOWDATAMINus
This command sets or queries the AutoEthernet D– source low threshold level
for the specified bus. This threshold only applies when the AutoEthernet signal
type is single ended.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

The AutoEthernet signal type is single ended.

Group Bus

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-217

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:LOWDATAMINus <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:LOWDATAMINus?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

NR3 specifies the AutoEthernet D– source low threshold level for the specified
bus, in volts. This threshold only applies when the AutoEthernet signal type is
single ended.

Examples BUS:B1:AUTOETHERnet:LOWDATAMINus 250.0E-3 sets the Bus 1

AutoEthernet D– source low threshold level to 250.0000 mV.
BUS:B2:AUTOETHERnet:LOWDATAMINus? might return
BUS:B2:AUTOETHERnet:LOWDATAMINus 1.0, indicating the Bus 2
AutoEthernet D– source threshold level is set to 1.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:LOWDATAPLUS
This command sets or queries the AutoEthernet D+ source low threshold level
for the specified bus. This threshold only applies when the AutoEthernet signal
type is single ended.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

The AutoEthernet signal type is single ended.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:LOWDATAPLUS<NR3>
BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:LOWDATAPLUS?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

NR3 specifies the AutoEthernet D+ source low threshold level for the specified
bus, in volts. This threshold only applies when the AutoEthernet signal type is
single ended.

Examples BUS:B3:AUTOETHERnet:LOWDATAPLUS 250.0E-3 sets the Bus 3 AutoEthernet

D+ source low threshold level to 250.0000 mV.
BUS:B2:AUTOETHERnet:LOWDATAPLUS? might return
BUS:B2:AUTOETHERnet:LOWDATAPLUS 1.0, indicating the Bus 2
AutoEthernet D+ source low threshold level is set to 1.0 V.

2-218 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:LOWTHRESHold
This command sets or queries the AutoEthernet Data source Low threshold level
for the specified bus. This threshold only applies when the AutoEthernet signal
type is differential.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

The AutoEthernet signal type is differential.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:LOWTHRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:LOWTHRESHold?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SIGNALTYpe

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

NR3 specifies the AutoEthernet DATA source Low threshold level for the specified
bus, in volts. This threshold only applies when the AutoEthernet signal type
is differential.

Examples BUS:B1:AUTOETHERnet:LOWTHRESHold -200e-3 sets the bus 1 low threshold

to -200 mV.
BUS:B3:AUTOETHERnet:LOWTHRESHold? might return
BUS:B3:AUTOETHERnet:LOWTHRESHOLD -500.0000E-3, indicating the
threshold is set to -500 mV for bus 3.

BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SIGNALTYpe
This command sets or queries the AutoEthernet signal type for the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

The AutoEthernet signal type is single ended.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SIGNALTYpe {SINGLE|DIFF}

BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SIGNALTYpe?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-219

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

SINGLE specifies single-ended signals.

DIFF specifies differential signals.

Examples BUS:B4:AUTOETHERnet:SIGNALTYpe SINGLE specifies the AutoEthernet

signal type as single-ended for Bus B4.
BUS:B3:AUTOETHERnet:SIGNALTYpe? might return
BUS:B3:AUTOETHERnet:SIGNALTYpe DIFF, indicating that the
AutoEthernet signal type is differential for Bus 3.

BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the AutoEthernet data (SDATA) source for the
specified bus. This command controls the source channel when the signal type
is differential.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SOUrce?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:THRESHold

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the AutoEthernet data source for differential
input, where <x> is the channel number.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the AutoEthernet data source for differential
input, where <x> is the math waveform number.
REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the AutoEthernet data source for
differential input, where <x> is the reference waveform number.

Examples BUS:B5:AUTOETHERnet:SOURCE CH4 specifies to use the channel 4 waveform

as the source for AutoEthernet data on bus 5.

2-220 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B1:AUTOETHERnet:SOURCE? might return

BUS:B1:AUTOETHERnet:SOURCE? CH2, indicating that channel 2 is the
currently specified source for AutoEthernet data on bus 1.

BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SOUrce:DMINus
This command sets or queries the AutoEthernet D– source for the specified
bus. This command specifies the source channel to use when the signal type is
single ended.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SOUrce:DMINus {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SOUrce:DMINus?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source for the D– signal, where <x>
is the channel number.
MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the source for the D– signal, where <x> is
the math waveform number.
REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source for the D– signal, where
<x> is the reference waveform number.

Examples BUS:B2:AUTOETHERnet:SOUrce:DMINus CH5 sets the D– source to channel 5

for bus 2.
BUS:B1:AUTOETHERnet:SOUrce:DMINus? might return
BUS:B1:AUTOETHERnet:SOURCE:DMINus CH6, indicating the D–
source is set to channel 6 for bus 1.

BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SOUrce:DPLUs
This command sets or queries the AutoEthernet D+ source for the specified
bus. This command specifies the source channel to use when the signal type is
single ended.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-221

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SOUrce:DPLUs {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SOUrce:DPLUs?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source for the D+ signal, where <x>
is the channel number.
MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the source for the D+ signal, where <x> is
the math waveform number.
REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source for the D+ signal, where
<x> is the reference waveform number.

Examples BUS:B2:AUTOETHERnet:SOUrce:DPLUs CH5 sets the D+ source to channel 5

for bus 2.
BUS:B1:AUTOETHERnet:SOUrce:DPLUs? might return
BUS:B1:AUTOETHERnet:SOURCE:DPLUS CH8, indicating the D+
source is set to channel 8 for bus 1.

BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:THRESHold
This command sets or queries the AutoEthernet DATA source High threshold
level for the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:THRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:THRESHold?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SOUrce

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

NR3 specifies the AutoEthernet DATA source High threshold level for the
specified bus, in volts.

2-222 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B4:AUTOETHERnet:THRESHOLD 1.0 sets the Bus 4 AutoEthernet Data

source High threshold level to 1.0 V.
BUS:B3:AUTOETHERnet:THRESHOLD? might return
BUS:B3:AUTOETHERnet:THRESHOLD 225.00000E-3, indicating the Bus 3
AutoEthernet Data source High threshold level is set to 225.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:TYPe
This command sets or queries the AutoEthernet standard speed.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

The AutoEthernet signal type is single ended.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:TYPe {HUNDREDBASET1}

BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:TYPe?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

HUNDREDBASET1 specifies the AutoEthernet speed as 100Base-T1.

Examples BUS:B1:AUTOETHERnet:TYPE HUNDREDBASET1 specifies the AutoEthernet

speed as 100Base-T1.
BUS:B3:AUTOETHERnet:TYPE? might return BUS:B3:AUTOETHERnet:TYPE
HUNDREDBASET1, indicating that the AutoEthernet speed is 100Base-T1 for Bus 3.

BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate
This command sets or queries the CAN bit rate. The bus number is specified by x.
If you select Custom, use BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate:VALue to set the bit rate.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate
{RATE10K|RATE100K|RATE1M|RATE125K|RATE153K|

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-223

Commands listed in alphabetical order

RATE20K|RATE25K|RATE250K|RATE31K|RATE33K|RATE400K|RATE50K|
RATE500K|RATE62K| RATE68K|RATE800K|RATE83K|RATE92K|CUSTom}
BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate:VALue

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

Arguments specify the bit rate.

Examples BUS:B1:CAN:BITRate RATE1M sets the CAN bit rate to 1 Mb.

BUS:B1:CAN:BITRate? might return :BUS:B1:CAN:BITRATE RATE500K,

indicating the CAN bit rate is set to 500 k.

BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate:VALue
This command sets or queries CAN bit rate when Custom is selected by
BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate:VALue <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate:VALue?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> specifies the CAN bit rate.

Returns <NR1> is the bit rate.

Examples BUS:B1:CAN:BITRate:VALue 400.0E+3 sets the bit rate to 400 k.

BUS:B1:CAN:BITRate:VALue? might return :BUS:B1:CAN:BITRATE:VALUE

500000, indicating that the bit rate is set to 500,000.

2-224 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate
This command sets or queries the increased data phase bit rate used by CAN
FD packets on the specified CAN bus. The bus is specified by x. If you select
Custom, use BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate:CUSTom to set the bit rate.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate
{RATE1M|RATE2M|RATE3M|RATE4M|RATE5M|RATE6M|
RATE7M|RATE8M|RATE9M|RATE10M|RATE11M|RATE12M|RATE13M|
RATE14M|RATE15M|RATE16M|CUSTom}
BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate:CUSTom

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

Arguments specify the bit rate.

Examples BUS:B1:CAN:BITRATE RATE1M sets the CAN FD bit rate to 1 Mbps.

BUS:B1:CAN:BITRATE? might return :BUS:B1:CAN:BITRATE RATE4M,

indicating that the CAN FD bit rate is 4 Mbps.

BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate:CUSTom
This command sets or queries the custom bit rate for the increased data phase of
CAN FD packets on the specified CAN bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate:CUSTom <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate:CUSTom?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-225

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> is the custom FD bit rate for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:CAN:FD:BITRATE:CUSTOM 1000000 sets the bit rate to 1,000,000.

BUS:B1:CAN:FD:BITRATE:CUSTOM? might return

:BUS:B1:CAN:FD:BITRATE:CUSTOM 4000000, indicating the bit rate is set
to 4,000,000.

BUS:B<x>:CAN:SAMPLEpoint
This command sets or queries the sample point for the specified CAN bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CAN:SAMPLEpoint <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:CAN:SAMPLEpoint?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> is the sample point, in percent, for the specified CAN bus.

Examples BUS:B1:CAN:SAMPLEpoint 40 sets the sample point to 40%.

BUS:B1:CAN:SAMPLEpoint? might return :BUS:B1:CAN:SAMPLEPOINT 50

indicating the sample point is at 50%.

BUS:B<x>:CAN:SIGNal
This command sets or queries the signal type for the specified CAN bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

2-226 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CAN:SIGNal {DIFFerential|CANH|CANL|RX|TX}

BUS:B<x>:CAN:SIGNal?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

Arguments are the CAN bus signal types.

Examples BUS:B1:CAN:SINal CANL sets the signal type to CANL.

BUS:B1:CAN:SINal? might return :BUS:B1:CAN:SIGNAL CANH indicating

the signal type is CANH.

BUS:B<x>:CAN:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the CAN source channel for the specified CAN
bus. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CAN:SOUrce
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

Arguments specify a channel.

Examples BUS:B1:CAN:SOUrce MATH6 sets the source channel to MATH6.

BUS:B1:CAN:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:CAN:SOURCE CH1, indicating

that the CAN source channel is CH1.

BUS:B<x>:CAN:STANDard
This command sets or queries which CAN standard specification to analyze the
specified CAN bus with. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AERO.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-227

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CAN:STANDard {CAN2X| CAN2X_FDISO_XL| CAN_XL| FDISO|

FDNONISO}
BUS:B<x>:CAN:STANDard?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CAN2X sets the CAN bus standard to CAN 2.0.

CAN2X_FDISO_XL sets the CAN bus standard to a combination of BASE CAN,

CAN FD and CAN XL.
CAN_XL sets the CAN bus standard to CAN XL.

FDISO sets the CAN bus standard to ISO CAN FD (11898-1:2015).

FDNONISO sets the CAN bus standard to non-ISO CAN FD (Bosch:2012).

Examples BUS:B1:CAN:STANDARD FDISO sets the CAN standard to ISO CAN FD.

BUS:B1:CAN:STANDARD? might return :BUS:B1:CAN:STANDARD CAN2X,

indicating that the CAN standard is CAN 2.0.

BUS:B<x>:CAN:THReshold
This command sets or queries the source channel threshold for the specified CAN
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CAN:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:CAN:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the source channel threshold for the specified CAN bus.

Examples BUS:B1:CAN:THReshold 5 sets the threshold to 5 V.

BUS:B1:CAN:THReshold? might return :BUS:B1:CAN:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0

indicating the threshold is set to 0.0 V.

2-228 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:CAN:XL:BITRate
This command sets or queries the bit rate for the CAN XL bus. The bus is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CAN:XL:BITRate <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:CAN:XL:BITRate?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> specifies the CAN XL data transfer bit rate. The valid range is from
1000000 to 20000000. The default value is 4000000.

Examples BUS:B1:CAN:XL:BITRate 1000000 sets the bit rate to 1,000,000.

BUS:B1:CAN:XL:BITRate? might return :BUS:B1:CAN:XL:BITRate

1000000, indicating the bit rate is set to 1,000,000.

BUS:B<x>:CAN:XL:BITRate:CUSTom
This command sets or queries the custom bit rate for the CAN XL bus. The bus
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CAN:XL:BITRate:CUSTom <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:CAN:XL:BITRate:CUSTom?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> specifies the CAN XL data transfer custom bit rate. The valid range is
from 500000 to 20000000. The default value is 4000000.

Examples BUS:B1:CAN:XL:BITRate:CUSTom 1000000 sets the custom bit rate to

1,000,000.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-229

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B1:CAN:XL:BITRate:CUSTom? might return

:BUS:B1:CAN:XL:BITRate:CUSTom 1000000, indicating the bit rate is set
to 1,000,000.

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:A:DATA:THRESHold
This command sets or queries the CPHY Single Ended A source threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CPHY:A:DATA:THRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:A:DATA:THRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the CPHY Single Ended A threshold in Volts for the specified bus.
The argument range is -8 V to +8 V.

Examples BUS:B4:CPHY:A:DATA:THRESHold 1.0 sets the Bus 4 CPHY threshold to

1.0 V.
BUS:B3:CPHY:A:DATA:THRESHold? might return
:BUS:B3:CPHY:A:DATA:THRESHold 100.00000E-3 indicating the Bus 3
CPHY threshold is set to 100.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:A:LP:THRESHold
This command sets or queries the CPHY Single Ended A LP threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CPHY:A:LP:THRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:A:LP:THRESHold?

2-230 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the CPHY Single Ended A LP threshold in Volts for the specified bus.
The argument range is -8 V to +8 V.

Examples BUS:B4:CPHY:A:LP:THRESHold 1.0 sets the Bus 4 CPHY threshold to 1.0 V.

BUS:B3:CPHY:A:LP:THRESHold? might return

:BUS:B3:CPHY:A:LP:THRESHold 100.00000E-3 indicating the Bus 3
CPHY threshold is set to 100.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:A:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the CPHY Single Ended A source for the specified
bus line. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CPHY:A:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:A:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the source.

REF<x> specifies an analog reference waveform as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:CPHY:A:SOUrce Ch1 sets the source to channel 1.

BUS:B1:CPHY:A:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:CPHY:A:SOUrce CH1,

indicating the source is set to channel 1.

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:AB:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the CPHY differential AB source for the specified
bus line. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-231

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CPHY:AB:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:AB:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog/digital channel as the source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the source.

REF<x> specifies an analog/digital reference waveform as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:CPHY:AB:SOUrce Ch1 sets the source to channel 1.

BUS:B1:CPHY:AB:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:CPHY:AB:SOUrce CH1,

indicating the source is set to channel 1.

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:AB:THReshold
This command sets or queries the CPHY differential AB source threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CPHY:AB:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:AB:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the CPHY differential AB threshold for the specified bus. The argument
range is -8 V to +8 V.

Examples BUS:B4:CPHY:AB:THReshold 1.0 sets the Bus 4 CPHY threshold to 1.0 V.

BUS:B4:CPHY:AB:THReshold? might return :BUS:B4:CPHY:AB:THReshold

100.00000E-3 indicating the Bus 4 CPHY clock threshold is set to 100.0 mV.

2-232 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:AGND:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the CPHY differential AGND source for the
specified bus line. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CPHY:AGND:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:AGND:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog/digital channel as the source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the source.

REF<x> specifies an analog/digital reference waveform as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:CPHY:AGND:SOUrce Ch1 sets the source to channel 1.

BUS:B1:CPHY:AGND:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:CPHY:AGND:SOUrce

CH1, indicating the source is set to channel 1.

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:AGND:THReshold
This command sets or queries the CPHY differential AGND source threshold for
the specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CPHY:AGND:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:AGND:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the CPHY differential A GND threshold for the specified bus. The
argument range is -8 V to +8 V.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-233

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B4:CPHY:AGND:THReshold 1.0 sets the Bus 4 CPHY threshold to 1.0 V.

BUS:B4:CPHY:AGND:THReshold? might return

:BUS:B4:CPHY:AGND:THReshold 100.00000E-3 indicating the Bus 4
CPHY threshold is set to 100.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:B:DATA:THRESHold
This command sets or queries the CPHY Single Ended B source threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CPHY:B:DATA:THRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:B:DATA:THRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the CPHY Single Ended B threshold for the specified bus. The argument
range is -8 V to +8 V.

Examples BUS:B4:CPHY:B:DATA:THRESHold 1.0 sets the Bus 4 CPHY threshold to

1.0 V.
BUS:B4:CPHY:B:DATA:THRESHold? might return
:BUS:B4:CPHY:B:DATA:THRESHold 100.00000E-3 indicating the Bus 4
CPHY threshold is set to 100.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:B:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the CPHY Single Ended B source for the specified
bus line. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CPHY:B:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:B:SOUrce?

2-234 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the source.

REF<x> specifies an analog reference waveform as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:CPHY:B:SOUrce Ch1 sets the source to channel 1.

BUS:B1:CPHY:B:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:CPHY:B:SOUrce CH1,

indicating the source is set to channel 1.

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:BC:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the CPHY differential BC source for the specified
bus line. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CPHY:BC:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:BC:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog/digital channel as the source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the source.

REF<x> specifies an analog/digital reference waveform as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:CPHY:BC:SOUrce Ch1 sets the source to channel 1.

BUS:B1:CPHY:BC:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:CPHY:BC:SOUrce CH1,

indicating the source is set to channel 1.

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:BC:THReshold
This command sets or queries the CPHY differential BC source threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-235

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CPHY:BC:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:BC:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the CPHY differential BC threshold for the specified bus. The argument
range is -8 V to +8 V.

Examples BUS:B4:CPHY:BC:THReshold 1.0 sets the Bus 4 CPHY threshold to 1.0 V.

BUS:B4:CPHY:BC:THReshold? might return :BUS:B4:CPHY:BC:THReshold

100.00000E-3 indicating the Bus 4 CPHY threshold is set to 100.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:BITRate
This command sets or queries the bit rate for the specified CPHY bus. The bus
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CPHY:BITRate <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:BITRate?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> specifies the bit rate. The default bit rate is 1 Gbps and varies 4 Mbps
~ 10Gps

Examples BUS:B1:CPHY:BITRate 8000000 sets the bit rate as 80 Mbps.

BUS:B1:CPHY:BITRate? might return :BUS:B1:CPHY:BITRate 80000000,

indicating that the bit rate is 80 Mbps.

2-236 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:C:DATA:THRESHold
This command sets or queries the CPHY Single Ended C source threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CPHY:C:DATA:THRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:C:DATA:THRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the CPHY Single Ended C threshold for the specified bus. The argument
range is -8 V to +8 V.

Examples BUS:B4:CPHY:C:DATA:THRESHold 1.0 sets the Bus 4 CPHY threshold to

1.0 V.
BUS:B4:CPHY:C:DATA:THRESHold? might return
:BUS:B4:CPHY:C:DATA:THRESHold 100.00000E-3 indicating the Bus 4
CPHY threshold is set to 100.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:C:LP:THRESHold
This command sets or queries the CPHY Single Ended C LP threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CPHY:C:LP:THRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:C:LP:THRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the CPHY Single Ended C LP threshold for the specified bus. The
argument range is -8 V to +8 V.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-237

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B4:CPHY:C:LP:THRESHold 1.0 sets the Bus 4 CPHY threshold to 1.0 V.

BUS:B4:CPHY:C:LP:THRESHold? might return
:BUS:B4:CPHY:C:LP:THRESHold 100.00000E-3 indicating the Bus 4
CPHY threshold is set to 100.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:C:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the CPHY Single Ended C source for the specified
bus line. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CPHY:C:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:C:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the source.

REF<x> specifies an analog reference waveform as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:CPHY:C:SOUrce Ch1 sets the source to channel 1.

BUS:B1:CPHY:C:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:CPHY:C:SOUrce CH1,
indicating the source is set to channel 1.

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:CA:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the CPHY differential CA source for the specified
bus line. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CPHY:CA:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:CA:SOUrce?

2-238 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog/digital channel as the source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the source.

REF<x> specifies an analog/digital reference waveform as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:CPHY:CA:SOUrce Ch1 sets the source to channel 1.

BUS:B1:CPHY:CA:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:CPHY:CA:SOUrce CH1,

indicating the source is set to channel 1.

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:CA:THReshold
This command sets or queries the CPHY differential CA source threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CPHY:CA:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:CA:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the CPHY differential CA threshold for the specified bus. The argument
range is -8 V to +8 V.

Examples BUS:B4:CPHY:CA:THReshold 1.0 sets the Bus 4 CPHY threshold to 1.0 V.

BUS:B4:CPHY:CA:THReshold? might return :BUS:B4:CPHY:CA:THReshold

100.00000E-3 indicating the Bus 4 CPHY threshold is set to 100.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:CGND:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the CPHY differential CGND source for the
specified bus line. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-239

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CPHY:CGND:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:CGND:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog/digital channel as the source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the source.

REF<x> specifies an analog/digital reference waveform as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:CPHY:CGND:SOUrce Ch1 sets the source to channel 1.

BUS:B1:CPHY:CGND:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:CPHY:CGND:SOUrce

CH1, indicating the source is set to channel 1.

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:CGND:THReshold
This command sets or queries the CPHY differential CGND source threshold for
the specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CPHY:CGND:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:CGND:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the CPHY differential C GND threshold for the specified bus. The
argument range is -8 V to +8 V.

Examples BUS:B4:CPHY:CGND:THReshold 1.0 sets the Bus 4 CPHY threshold to 1.0 V.

BUS:B4:CPHY:CGND:THReshold? might return

:BUS:B4:CPHY:CGND:THReshold 100.00000E-3 indicating the Bus 4 CPHY
clock threshold is set to 100.0 mV.

2-240 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:LP:DIRection
This command sets or queries the CPHY bus direction in low power. The bus
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CPHY:LP:DIRection {forward|reverse}

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:LP:DIRection?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

forward specifies the direction in low power to forward. The default direction is
forward.
reverse specifies the direction in low power to reverse.

Examples BUS:B1:CPHY:LP:DIRection reverse sets the Bus 1 CPHY bus direction in

low power to reverse.
BUS:B2:CPHY:LP:DIRection? might return :BUS:B2:CPHY:LP:DIRection
forward, indicating the Bus 2 CPHY direction in low power is forward.

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:SIGNALTYpe
This command sets or queries the signal type for CPHY bus decode. The bus
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CPHY:SIGNALTYpe {SINGLE|DIFF}

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:SIGNALTYpe?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

SINGLE specifies the signal type to single ended.

DIFF specifies the signal type to differential. The default type is differential.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-241

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:CPHY:SIGNALTYpe DIFF sets the Bus 1 CPHY to differential.

BUS:B2:CPHY:SIGNALTYpe? might return :BUS:B2:CPHY:SIGNALTYpe

DIFF, indicating the Bus 2 CPHY signal type is set to differential.

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:SUBTYPe
This command sets or queries the sub type for CPHY bus decode. The bus is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CPHY:SUBTYPe {CSI|DSI|Word|Symbol}

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:SUBTYPe?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CSI specifies the protocol type to CSI. The default type is CSI.

DSI specifies the protocol type to DSI.

Word specifies the protocol type to word.

Symbol specifies the protocol type to symbol.

Examples BUS:B1:CPHY:SUBTYPe DSI sets the Bus 1 CPHY protocol type to DSI.

BUS:B2:CPHY:SUBTYPe? might return :BUS:B2:CPHY:SUBTYPe CSI,

indicating the Bus 2 CPHY protocol type is set to CSI.

BUS:B<x>:CXPI:BITRate
This command sets or queries the bit rate for the specified CXPI bus. The bus
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CXPI.

Group Bus

2-242 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CXPI:BITRate <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:CXPI:BITRate?

Arguments <NR1> sets the CXPI Source bit rate for the specified bus. The default value is
19.2 kbps and the valid range is 1 bps to 20 kbps.

Examples BUS:B1:CXPI:BITRate 100 sets the Bus 1 CXPI Source bit rate to 100 bps.

BUS:B1:CXPI:BITRate? might return :BUS:B1:CXPI:BITRate 100,

indicating the Bus 1 CXPI Source bit rate is set to 100 bps.

BUS:B<x>:CXPI:REC:THReshold
This command sets or queries the source channel recessive threshold for the
specified CXPI bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CXPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CXPI:REC:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:CXPI:REC:THReshold?

Arguments <NR3> sets the CXPI Source recessive threshold for the specified bus. The default
value is 0 V and the valid range is -12 V to +12 V.

Examples BUS:B1:CXPI:REC:THReshold 1.0 sets the Bus 1 CXPI Source threshold to

1 V.
BUS:B1:CXPI:REC:THReshold? might return
:BUS:B1:CXPI:REC:THReshold 1.0, indicating the Bus 1 CXPI Source
threshold is set to 1 V.

BUS:B<x>:CXPI:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the source channel for the specified CXPI bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CXPI.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-243

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CXPI:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:CXPI:SOUrce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source, where <x> is the channel number.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the source, where <x> is the math waveform
number.
REF<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the source, where <x> is the
reference waveform number.

Examples BUS:B1:CXPI:SOUrce Ch5 sets the source to channel 5.

BUS:B1:CXPI:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:CXPI:SOUrce Ch5, indicating

the source is set to channel 5.

BUS:B<x>:DISplay:FORMat
This command sets or queries how the data is represented in the bus form for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:DISplay:FORMat
{HEX|BINARY|MIXEDASCII|MIXEDHEX|ASCII|DECIMAL|MIXED}
BUS:B<x>:DISplay:FORMat?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

NOTE. Different bus types support only a subset of these arguments.

HEX specifies hexadecimal format.

BINARY specifies binary format.

MIXEDASCII specifies mixed ASCII format.

MIXEDHEX specifies mixed hexadecimal format.

ASCII specifies ASCII format.

DECIMAL specifies decimal format.

2-244 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MIXED specifies mixed format.

Examples BUS:B1:DISplay:FORMat BINARY sets the format to binary.

BUS:B1:DISplay:FORMat? might return :BUS:B1:DISPLAY:FORMAT HEX

indicating the format is set to hexadecimal.

BUS:B<x>:DISplay:LAYout
This command sets or queries what to display for the specified bus. The bus
is specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:DISplay:LAYout {BUS|BUSANDWAVEFORM}

BUS:B<x>:DISplay:LAYout?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

BUS specifies displaying the bus form only.

BUSANDWAVEFORM specifies displaying the bus form and the constituent source
waveform(s). This argument is not available for some bus types and some bus
configurations

Examples BUS:B1:DISplay:LAYout BUS specifies displaying the bus form only.

BUS:B1:DISplay:LAYout? might return :BUS:B1:DISPLAY:LAYOUT BUS

indicating the bus will be displayed without displaying its constituent source
waveform(s).

BUS:B<x>:DPHY:CLOCk:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the DPHY Clock source for the specified bus line.
The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY

Group Bus

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-245

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:DPHY:CLOCk:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:DPHY:CLOCk:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source, where <x> is the channel number.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the source, where <x> is the math waveform
number.
REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source, where <x> is the reference
waveform number.

Examples BUS:B1:DPHY:CLOCk:SOUrce Ch1 sets the source to channel 1 for bus 1.

BUS:B1:DPHY:CLOCk:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:DPHY:CLOCk:SOUrce

Ch1, indicating the source is set to channel 1 for bus 1.

BUS:B<x>:DPHY:CLOCk:THRESHold
This command sets or queries the DPHY Clock source threshold for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:DPHY:CLOCk:THRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:DPHY:CLOCk:THRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the DPHY clock high threshold for the specified bus. The argument
range is -8V to +8V.

Examples BUS:B4:DPHY:CLOCk:THRESHold 1.0 sets the Bus 4 DPHY threshold to 1.0 V.

BUS:B3:DPHY:CLOCk:THRESHold? might return

:BUS:B3:DPHY:CLOCk:THRESHold 100.00000E-3, indicating the Bus 3
DPHY clock threshold is set to 100.0 mV.

2-246 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DMINus:DATATHRESHold
This command sets or queries the DPHY D- source data threshold for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DMINus:DATATHRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DMINus:DATATHRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the DPHY D- source data threshold for the specified bus. The argument
range is -8V to +8V.

Examples BUS:B1:DPHY:DMINus:DATATHRESHold -160.00000E-3 sets the Bus 3

DPHY D- source data threshold to 160.0 mV.
BUS:B3:DPHY:DMINus:DATATHRESHold? might return
:BUS:B3:DPHY:DMINus:DATATHRESHold 150.00000E-3,
indicating the Bus 1 DPHY D- source data threshold is set to 150.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DMINus:LPTHRESHold
This command sets or queries the DPHY D- source low power threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DMINus:LPTHRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DMINus:LPTHRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the DPHY D- source low power threshold for the specified bus. The
argument range is -8V to +8V.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-247

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B3:DPHY:DMINus:LPTHRESHold -2.5 sets the Bus 3 DPHY D- source

low power threshold to -2.5 V.
BUS:B2:DPHY:DMINus:LPTHRESHold? might return
:BUS:B2:DPHY:DMINus:LPTHRESHold -1.2, indicating the Bus 1
DPHY D- source low power threshold is set to -1.2 V.

BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DMINus:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the DPHY D- source for the specified bus line. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DMINus:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DMINus:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source, where <x> is the channel number.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the source, where <x> is the math waveform
number.
REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source, where <x> is the reference
waveform number.

Examples BUS:B1:DPHY:DMINus:SOUrce Ch3 sets the source to channel 3 for bus 1.

BUS:B1:DPHY:DMINus:SOUrce? might return

:BUS:B1:DPHY:DMINus:SOUrce Ch3, indicating the source is set to channel 3
for bus 1.

BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DPlus:DATATHRESHold
This command sets or queries the D+ source data threshold for the specified bus.
The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

2-248 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DPlus:DATATHRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DPlus:DATATHRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the DPHY D+ source data threshold for the specified bus. The argument
range is -8V to +8V.

Examples BUS:B2:DPHY:DPlus:DATATHRESHold 100.00000E-3 sets the Bus 2 DPHY

D+ source data threshold to 100.0 mV.
BUS:B1:DPHY:DPlus:DATATHRESHold? might return
:BUS:B1:DPHY:DPlus:DATATHRESHold 150.00000E-3, indicating the Bus
1 DPHY D+ source data threshold is set to 150.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DPlus:LPTHRESHold
This command sets or queries the DPHY D+ source low power threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DPlus:LPTHRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DPlus:LPTHRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the DPHY D+ source low power threshold for the specified bus. The
argument range is -8V to +8V.

Examples BUS:B3:DPHY:DPlus:LPTHRESHold 1.2 sets the Bus 3 DPHY D+ source

low power threshold to 1.2 V.
BUS:B2:DPHY:DPlus:LPTHRESHold? might return
:BUS:B2:DPHY:DPlus:LPTHRESHold 1.2, indicating the Bus 1 DPHY D+
source low power threshold is set to 1.2 V.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-249

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DPlus:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the DPHY D+ source for the specified bus line. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DPlus:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DPlus:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source, where <x> is the channel number.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the source, where <x> is the math waveform
number.
REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source, where <x> is the reference
waveform number.

Examples BUS:B1:DPHY:DPlus:SOUrce Ch2 sets the source to channel 2 for bus 1.

BUS:B1:DPHY:DPlus:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:DPHY:DPlus:SOUrce

CH2, indicatingthe source is set to channel 2 for bus 1.

BUS:B<x>:DPHY:LP:DIRection
This command sets or queries the DPHY bus direction in low power. By default
lp direction is set to forward. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:DPHY:LP:DIRection {forward|reverse}

BUS:B<x>:DPHY:LP:DIRection?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

forward specifies the direction as forward.

2-250 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

reverse specifies the direction as reverse.

Examples BUS:B1:DPHY:LP:DIRection reverse sets the Bus 1 DPHY bus direction in

low power to reverse.
BUS:B2:DPHY:LP:DIRection? might return :BUS:B2:DPHY:LP:DIRection
forward, indicating the Bus 2 DPHY direction in low power is forward.

BUS:B<x>:DPHY:PROTocol:TYPe
This command sets or queries the protocol type for DPHY bus decode. The
default type is CSI. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:DPHY:PROTocol:TYPe {CSI|DSI}

BUS:B<x>:DPHY:PROTocol:TYPe?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

CSI specifies the protocol type as CSI.

DSI specifies the protocol type as DSI.

Examples BUS:B1:DPHY:PROTocol:TYPe DSI sets the Bus 1 DPHY protocol type to DSI.

BUS:B2:DPHY:PROTocol:TYPe? might return

:BUS:B2:DPHY:PROTocol:TYPe CSI, indicating the Bus 2 DPHY protocol
type is set to CSI.

BUS:B<x>:DPHY:SIGNal:ENCoding
This command sets or queries the 8b9b encoding for DPHY bus decode. By
default 8b9b encoding is set to false. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY

Group Bus

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-251

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:DPHY:SIGNal:ENCoding {false|true}

BUS:B<x>:DPHY:SIGNal:ENCoding?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

false specifies the 8b9b encoding disabled.

true specifies 8b9b encoding disabled.

Examples BUS:B1:DPHY:SIGnal:ENCoding true sets the Bus 1 DPHY 8b9b encoding

to true.
BUS:B2:DPHY:SIGnal:ENCoding? might return
::BUS:B2:DPHY:SIGnal:ENCoding true, indicating the Bus 2 DPHY
8b9b encoding is set to true.

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:ALERt:POLarity
This command sets or queries the ESPI alert polarity for the specified bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ESPI:ALERt:POLarity {HIGH|LOW}

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:ALERt:POLarity?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

HIGH sets the ESPI alert polarity to active high.

LOW sets the ESPI alert polarity to active low.

Examples BUS:B1:ESPI:ALERt:POLarity LOW sets the Bus 1 alert polarity to active low.

BUS:B1:ESPI:ALERt:POLarity? might return

:BUS:B1:ESPI:ALERt:POLarity LOW indicating the Bus 1 alert polarity
is set to active low.

2-252 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:ALERt:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the alert source for the specified bus. The bus
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ESPI:ALERt:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:ALERt:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:ESPI:ALERt:SOUrce Ch5 sets the alert source to channel 5.

BUS:B1:ESPI:ALERt:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:ESPI:ALERt:SOUrce

CH5, indicating the alert source is set to channel 5.

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:ALERt:THReshold
This command sets or queries the alert source threshold for the specified bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ESPI:ALERt:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:ALERt:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

<NR3> sets the alert threshold for the specified bus. The valid range is -8V to +8V.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-253

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:ESPI:ALERt:THReshold 1.0 sets the Bus 1 alert threshold to 1.0 V.

BUS:B1:ESPI:ALERt:THReshold? might return

BUS:B1:ESPI:ALERt:THReshold 225.00000E-3 indicating the Bus 1 alert
threshold is set to 225.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:ALERTVIEW
This command sets or queries the ESPI alert view for the specified bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ESPI:ALERTVIEW {ON|OFF}

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:ALERTVIEW?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

ON turns the alert source on.

OFF turns the alert source on.

Examples BUS:B1:ESPI:ALERTVIEW ON sets the Bus 1 alert view to on.

BUS:B1:ESPI:ALERTVIEW? might return :BUS:B1:ESPI:ALERTVIEW ON

indicating the Bus 1 alert view is on.

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CHIPSELect:POLarity
This command sets or queries the ESPI chip select polarity for the specified bus.
The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CHIPSELect:POLarity {HIGH|LOW}

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CHIPSELect:POLarity?

2-254 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

HIGH sets the ESPI chip select polarity to active high.

LOW sets the ESPI chip select polarity to active low.

Examples BUS:B1:ESPI:CHIPSELect:POLarity LOW sets the Bus 1 chip select polarity

to active low.
BUS:B1:ESPI:CHIPSELect:POLarity? might return
:BUS:B1:ESPI:CHIPSELect:POLarity LOW, indicating the Bus 1
chip select polarity is set to active low.

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CHIPSELect:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the chip select source for the specified bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CHIPSELect:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CHIPSELect:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:ESPI:CHIPSELect:SOUrce Ch5 sets the chip select source to channel

5.
BUS:B1:ESPI:CHIPSELect:SOUrce? might return
:BUS:B1:ESPI:CHIPSELect:SOUrce Ch5, indicating the chip select source
is set to channel 5.

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CHIPSELect:THReshold
This command sets or queries the chip select source threshold for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-255

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CHIPSELect:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CHIPSELect:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

<NR3> sets the chip select threshold for the specified bus. The valid range is
-8V to +8V.

Examples BUS:B1:ESPI:CHIPSELect:THReshold 1.0 sets the Bus 1 chip select

threshold to 1.0 V.
BUS:B1:ESPI:CHIPSELect:THReshold? might return
BUS:B1:ESPI:CHIPSELect:THReshold 225.00000E-3, indicating the Bus
1 chip select threshold is set to 225.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CLOCk:POLarity
This command sets or queries the ESPI Clock (SCLK) source polarity for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CLOCk:POLarity {FALL|RISE}

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CLOCk:POLarity?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

FALL sets the ESPI clock polarity to fall.

RISE sets the ESPI clock polarity to rise.

Examples BUS:B1:ESPI:CLOCk:POLarity FALL sets the Bus 1 clock polarity to fall.

BUS:B1:ESPI:CLOCk:POLarity? might return

:BUS:B1:ESPI:CLOCk:POLarity FALL, indicating the Bus 1 clock polarity is
set to fall.

2-256 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CLOCk:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the Clock source for the specified bus. The bus
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CLOCk:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CLOCk:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:ESPI:CLOCk:SOUrce Ch5 sets the clock source to channel 5.

BUS:B1:ESPI:CLOCk:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:ESPI:CLOCk:SOUrce

Ch5, indicating the clock source is set to channel 5.

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CLOCk:THReshold
This command sets or queries the Clock source threshold for the specified bus.
The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CLOCk:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CLOCk:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

<NR3> sets the clock threshold for the specified bus. The valid range is -8V to +8V.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-257

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:ESPI:CLOCk:THReshold 1.0 sets the Bus 1 clock threshold to 1.0 V.

BUS:B1:ESPI:CLOCk:THReshold? might return

BUS:B1:ESPI:CLOCk:THReshold 225.00000E-3, indicating the Bus 1
clock threshold is set to 225.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATAONE:POLarity
This command sets or queries the ESPI command (single mode)/ IO[0] (dual
mode) polarity for the specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATAONE:POLarity {HIGH|LOW}

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATAONE:POLarity?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

HIGH sets the ESPI data polarity to active high.

LOW sets the ESPI data polarity to active low.

Examples BUS:B1:ESPI:DATAONE:POLarity LOW sets the Bus 1 data polarity to active

low.
BUS:B1:ESPI:DATAONE:POLarity? might return
:BUS:B1:ESPI:DATAONE:POLarity LOW, indicating the Bus 1 data polarity
is set to active low.

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATAONE:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the command (single mode)/ IO[0] (dual mode)
Data source for the specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Bus

2-258 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATAONE:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATAONE:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:ESPI:DATAONE:SOUrce Ch5 sets the data source to channel 5.

BUS:B1:ESPI:DATAONE:SOUrce? might return

:BUS:B1:ESPI:DATAONE:SOUrce Ch5, indicating the data source is set to
channel 5.

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATAONE:THReshold
This command sets or queries the command (single mode)/ IO[0] (dual mode)
Data source threshold for the specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATAONE:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATAONE:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

<NR3> sets the command/data threshold for the specified bus. The valid range is
-8V to +8V.

Examples BUS:B1:ESPI:DATAONE:THReshold 1.0 sets the Bus 1 data threshold to 1.0 V.

BUS:B1:ESPI:DATAONE:THReshold? might return

BUS:B1:ESPI:DATAONE:THReshold 225.00000E-3, indicating the Bus
1 data threshold is set to 225.0 mV.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-259

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATATWO:POLarity
This command sets or queries the ESPI response (single mode)/ IO[1] (dual mode)
polarity for the specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATATWO:POLarity {HIGH|LOW}

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATATWO:POLarity?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

HIGH sets the ESPI data polarity to active high.

LOW sets the ESPI data polarity to active low.

Examples BUS:B1:ESPI:DATATWO:POLarity LOW sets the Bus 1 data polarity to active

low.
BUS:B1:ESPI:DATATWO:POLarity? might return
:BUS:B1:ESPI:DATATWO:POLarity LOW, indicating the Bus 1 data polarity
is set to active low.

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATATWO:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the response (single mode)/ IO[1] (dual mode) Data
source for the specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATATWO:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATATWO:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the source.

2-260 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:ESPI:DATATWO:SOUrce Ch5 sets the data source to channel 5.

BUS:B1:ESPI:DATATWO:SOUrce? might return

:BUS:B1:ESPI:DATATWO:SOUrce Ch5, indicating the data source is set to
channel 5.

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATATWO:THReshold
This command sets or queries the response (single mode)/ IO[1] (dual mode) Data
source threshold for the specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATATWO:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATATWO:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

<NR3> sets the command/data threshold for the specified bus. The valid range is
-8V to +8V.

Examples BUS:B1:ESPI:DATATWO:THReshold 1.0 sets the Bus 1 data threshold to 1.0 V.

BUS:B1:ESPI:DATATWO:THReshold? might return

BUS:B1:ESPI:DATATWO:THReshold 225.00000E-3, indicating the Bus
1 data threshold is set to 225.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:IOMODe
This command sets or queries the ESPI Input/Output mode for the specified bus.
The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Bus

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-261

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ESPI:IOMODe {SINGle|DUAL}

BUS:B<x>:ESPI:IOMODe?

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

SINGle displays the command and response decode in two lanes.

DUAL displays the decode in a single data lane.

Examples BUS:B1:ESPI:IOMODe DUAL sets the Bus 1 mode to dual.

BUS:B1:ESPI:IOMODe? might return :BUS:B1:ESPI:IOMODe DUAL,

indicating the Bus 1 mode is set to dual.

BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:DATAMINUSTHRESHold
This command sets or queries the DATA Minus source threshold for the specified
EtherCAT bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:DATAMINUSTHRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:DATAMINUSTHRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the EtherCAT DataMinus source threshold for the specified bus. The
valid range is -8V to +8V. The default value is 0 V.

Examples BUS:B1:ETHERCAT:DATAMINUSTHRESHold 1.0 sets the EtherCAT DataMinus

source threshold to 1.0 V.
BUS:B1:ETHERCAT:DATAMINUSTHRESHold? might return
:BUS:B1:ETHERCAT:DATAMINUSTHRESHold 1.0, indicates the EtherCAT
DataMinus source threshold is set to 1.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:DATAPLUSTHRESHold
This command sets or queries the DATA Plus source threshold for the specified
EtherCAT bus.

2-262 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:DATAPLUSTHRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:DATAPLUSTHRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the EtherCAT DataPinus source threshold for the specified bus. The
valid range is -8V to +8V. The default value is 0 V.

Examples BUS:B1:ETHERCAT:DATAPLUSTHRESHold 1.0 sets the EtherCAT DataPlus

source threshold to 1.0 V.
BUS:B1:ETHERCAT:DATAPLUSTHRESHold? might return
:BUS:B1:ETHERCAT:DATAPLUSTHRESHold 1.0, indicates the
EtherCAT DataPlus source threshold is set to 1.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:SIGNALTYpe
This command sets or queries the signal type for the specified EtherCAT bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:SIGNALTYpe {SINGLE|DIFF}

BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:SIGNALTYpe?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

SINGLE specifies single-ended signals.

DIFF specifies differential signals.

Examples BUS:B1:ETHERCAT:SIGNALTYpe SINGLE sets the Signal Type to single-ended

signals.
BUS:B1:ETHERCAT:SIGNALTYpe? might return
:BUS:B1:ETHERCAT:SIGNALTYpe SINGLE, indicates the Signal Type is
set to single-ended signals.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-263

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:SOUrce:DIFF
This command sets or queries the differential source for the specified EtherCAT
bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:SOUrce:DIFF {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:SOUrce:DIFF?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies to use one of the analog channels as the differential source.

MATH<x> specifies to use a math waveform as the differential source.

REF<x> specifies to use one of the reference waveforms as the differential source.

Examples BUS:B1:ETHERCAT:SOUrce:DIFF CH4 specifies to use the channel 4 waveform

as the differential source.
BUS:B1:ETHERCAT:SOUrce:DIFF? might return
:BUS:B1:ETHERCAT:SOUrce:DIFF CH4, indicating that channel 4 is the
currently specified differential source.

BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:SOUrce:DMINus
This command sets or queries the DataMinus (SDATAMINUS) source for the
specified EtherCAT bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:SOUrce:DMINus {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:SOUrce:DMINus?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies to use one of the analog channels as the DataMinus source.

2-264 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MATH<x> specifies to use a math waveform as the DataMinus source.

REF<x> specifies to use one of the reference waveforms as the DataMinus source.

Examples BUS:B1:ETHERCAT:SOUrce:DMINus CH4 specifies to use the channel 4

waveform as the DataMinus source.
BUS:B1:ETHERCAT:SOUrce:DMINus? might return
:BUS:B1:ETHERCAT:SOUrce:DMINus CH4, indicating that channel 4 is the
currently specified DataMinus source.

BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:SOUrce:DPLUs
This command sets or queries the DataPlus (SDATAPLUS) source for the
specified EtherCAT bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:SOUrce:DPLUs {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:SOUrce:DPLUs?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies to use one of the analog channels as the DataPlus source.

MATH<x> specifies to use a math waveform as the DataPlus source.

REF<x> specifies to use one of the reference waveforms as the DataPlus source.

Examples BUS:B1:ETHERCAT:SOUrce:DPLUs CH4 specifies to use the channel 4

waveform as the DataPlus source.
BUS:B1:ETHERCAT:SOUrce:DPLUs? might return
:BUS:B1:ETHERCAT:SOUrce:DPLUs CH4, indicating that channel 4 is the
currently specified DataPlus source.

BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:THRESHold
This command sets or queries the differential source threshold for the specified
EtherCAT bus.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-265

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:THRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:THRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> specifies the EtherCAT differential Source threshold for the specified bus.
The default value is 0 V. The valid range is -8 V to +8 V.

Examples BUS:B1:ETHERCAT:THRESHold 1.0 sets the EtherCAT differential source

threshold to 1.0 V.
BUS:B1:ETHERCAT:THRESHold? might return
:BUS:B1:ETHERCAT:THRESHold 1.0, indicating the EtherCAT differential
source threshold is set to 1.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATAMINUSTHRESHold
This command sets or queries the Ethernet D- source threshold for the specified
bus. This threshold only applies when the Ethernet signal type is single ended.
The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ENET.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATAMINUSTHRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATAMINUSTHRESHold?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DMINus

BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DPLUs
BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SIGNALTYpe

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the Ethernet D- source threshold for the specified bus.

2-266 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B3:ETHERNET:DATAMINUSTHRESHOLD 250.0E-3 sets the Bus 3 Ethernet

DATA Minus source threshold to 250.0000 mV.
BUS:B2:ETHERNET:DATAMINUSTHRESHOLD? might return
BUS:B2:ETHERNET:DATAMINUSTHRESHOLD 1.0 indicates the Bus 2
Ethernet D- source threshold is set to 1.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATAPLUSTHRESHold
This command sets or queries the Ethernet D+ source threshold for the specified
bus. This threshold only applies when the Ethernet signal type is single ended.
The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ENET.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATAPLUSTHRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATAPLUSTHRESHold?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DMINus

BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DPLUs
BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SIGNALTYpe

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

<NR3> is the Ethernet D+ source threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B3:ETHERNET:DATAPLUSTHRESHOLD 250.0E-3 sets the Bus 3 Ethernet

D+ source threshold to 250.0000 mV.
BUS:B2:ETHERNET:DATAMINUSTHRESHOLD? might return
:BUS:B2:ETHERNET:DATAPLUSTHRESHOLD 1.0 indicating the Bus
2 Ethernet D+ source threshold is set to 1.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPVFOUR
This command sets or queries whether IPV4 packets are available for triggering
on Ethernet. The bus is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-267

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-ENET.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPVFOUR {YES|NO}

BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPVFOUR?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

YES specifies that IPV4 packets are available.

NO specifies that IPV4 packets are not available.

Examples BUS:B1:ETHERNET:IPVFOUR NO will specify that Bus 1 does not have IPV4
packets available.
BUS:B3:ETHERNET:IPVFOUR? might return :BUS:B3:ETHERNET:IPVFOUR
YES indicating that Bus 3 has IPV4 packets available.

BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:LOWTHRESHold
This command sets or queries the Ethernet source Low threshold for the specified
bus. This threshold only applies when the Ethernet signal type is differential. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ENET.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:LOWTHRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:LOWTHRESHold?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SIGNALTYpe

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the Ethernet source Low threshold for the specified bus.

2-268 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:ETHERnet:LOWTHRESHold -200e-3 sets the threshold to -200 mV.

BUS:B1:ETHERnet:LOWTHRESHold? might return

:BUS:B1:ETHERNET:LOWTHRESHOLD -500.0000E-3 indicating the threshold
is set to -500 mV.

BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:QTAGGING
This command sets or queries whether Q-Tagging packets are available for
triggering on Ethernet. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ENET.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:QTAGGING {YES|NO}

BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:QTAGGING?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

YES specifies that Q-Tagging packets are available.

NO specifies that Q-Tagging packets are not available.

Examples BUS:B1:ETHERnet:QTAGGING YES turns on Q-Tagging.

BUS:B1:ETHERnet:QTAGGING? might return :BUS:B1:ETHERNET:QTAGGING

YES indicating that Q-tagging packets are available.

BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SIGNALTYpe
This command sets or queries the Ethernet signal type for the specified bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ENET.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SIGNALTYpe {SINGLE|DIFF}

BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SIGNALTYpe?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-269

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

SINGLE specifies single-ended signals.

DIFF specifies differential signals.

Examples BUS:B1:ETHERnet:SIGNALTYpe SINGLE specifies single-ended signals.

BUS:B1:ETHERnet:SIGNALTYpe? might return

:BUS:B1:ETHERNET:SIGNALTYPE DIFF indicating differential signals are
specified.

BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the Ethernet data (SDATA) source for the specified
bus. This command controls the source channel when the signal type is
differential. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ENET.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:THRESHold

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies to use one of the analog channels as the Ethernet data source
for differential input.

MATH<x> specifies to use a math waveform as the source for Ethernet data
differential input
REF<x> specifies to use one of the reference waveforms as the Ethernet data
source for differential input.

Examples BUS:B1:ETHERNET:SOURCE CH4 specifies to use the channel 4 waveform as

the source for Ethernet data.
BUS:B1:ETHERNET:SOURCE? might return CH2, indicating that channel 2 is the
currently specified source for Ethernet data.

2-270 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DMINus
This command sets or queries the Ethernet D- source for the specified bus. this
command specifies the source channel to use when the signal type is single ended.
The bus is specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DMINus {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DMINus?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x>, MATH<x> or REF<x> set the D- source to the specified signal source.

Examples BUS:B1:ETHERNET:SOUrce:DMINus CH1 sets the D- source to channel 1.

BUS:B1:ETHERNET:SOUrce:DMINus? might return

:BUS:B1:ETHERNET:SOURCE:DMINUS CH2 indicating the D- source is set to
channel 2.

BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DPLUs
This command sets or queries the Ethernet D+ source for the specified bus. this
command specifies the source channel to use when the signal type is single ended.
The bus is specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DPLUs {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DPLUs?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x>, MATH<x> or REF<x> set the D+ source to the specified signal source.

Examples BUS:B1:ETHERNET:SOUrce:DPLUs Ch5 sets the D+ source to channel 5.

BUS:B1:ETHERNET:SOUrce:DPLUs? might return

:BUS:B1:ETHERNET:SOURCE:DPLUS CH5 indicating the D+ source is set to
channel 5.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-271

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:THRESHold
This command sets or queries the Ethernet DATA source High threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ENET.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:THRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:THRESHold?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the Ethernet DATA source High threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B4:ETHERNET:THRESHOLD 1.0 sets the Bus 4 Ethernet DATA source High
threshold to 1.0 V.
BUS:B3:ETHERNET:THRESHOLD? might return
BUS:B3:ETHERNET:THRESHOLD 225.00000E-3 indicates the Bus 3 Ethernet
DATA source High threshold is set to 225.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TYPe
This command specifies the Ethernet standard speed. The bus number is specified
by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ENET.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TYPe {TENBASET|HUNDREDBASETX}

BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TYPe?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

TENBASET specifies the Ethernet speed as 10Base-T.

2-272 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

HUNDREDBASETX specifies the Ethernet speed as 100Base-T.

Examples BUS:B1:ETHERNET:TYPE HUNDREDBASETX specifies the Ethernet speed as

100Base-T.
BUS:B1:ETHERNET:TYPE? might return TENBASET, indicating that 10Base-T is
the currently specified Ethernet speed.

BUS:B<x>:EUSB:BITRate
This command sets or queries the eUSB data rate for the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:EUSB:BITRate {HIGH|FULL|LOW}

BUS:B<x>:EUSB:BITRate?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

HIGH sets the bit rate to Bit Rate to 480 Mbps.

FULL sets the bit rate to Bit Rate to 12 Mbps.

LOW sets the bit rate to Bit Rate to 1.5 Mbps.

Examples BUS:B1:EUSB:BITRate HIGH sets the bit rate to 480 Mbps.

BUS:B1:EUSB:BITRate? might return :BUS:B1:EUSB:BITRate FULL,

indicating the bit rate is set to 12 Mbps.

BUS:B<x>:EUSB:DATAMINUS:DATA:THRESHold
This command sets or queries the eUSB D- Input Source Data Threshold for Data
line decode for specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2.

Group Bus

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-273

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:EUSB:DATAMINUS:DATA:THRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:EUSB:DATAMINUS:DATA:THRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the EUSB Strobe threshold for the specified bus. The argument range is
-8 V to +8 V.

Examples BUS:B1:EUSB:DATAMINUS:DATA:THRESHold 1.0 sets the bus 1 eUSB

threshold to 1.0 V.
BUS:B1:EUSB:DATAMINUS:DATA:THRESHold? might return
:BUS:B1:EUSB:DATAMINUS:DATA:THRESHold -8.0, indicating the bus 1
eUSB threshold is set to -8.0V.

BUS:B<x>:EUSB:DATAMINUSTHRESHold
This command sets or queries the eUSB D- Input Source Data Threshold for Data
line decode for specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:EUSB:DATAMINUSTHRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:EUSB:DATAMINUSTHRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the eUSB DATA Minus source threshold. The argument range is -8 V
to +8 V.

Examples BUS:B1:EUSB:DATAMINUSTHRESHold 0.0 sets the bus 1 eUSB threshold

to 0.0 V.
BUS:B1:EUSB:DATAMINUSTHRESHold? might return
:BUS:B1:EUSB:DATAMINUSTHRESHold -8.0, indicating the bus 1
eUSB threshold is set to -8.0 V.

2-274 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:EUSB:DATAPLUS:DATA:THRESHold
This command sets or queries the eUSB D+ Input Source Data Threshold for Data
line decode for specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:EUSB:DATAPLUS:DATA:THRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:EUSB:DATAPLUS:DATA:THRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the eUSB Strobe threshold for the specified bus. The argument range is
-8 V to +8 V.

Examples BUS:B1:EUSB:DATAPLUS:DATA:THRESHold 1.0 sets the bus 1 eUSB

threshold to 1.0 V.
BUS:B1:EUSB:DATAPLUS:DATA:THRESHold? might return
:BUS:B1:EUSB:DATAPLUS:DATA:THRESHold -8.0, indicating the bus 1
eUSB threshold is set to -8.0V.

BUS:B<x>:EUSB:DATAPLUSTHRESHold
This command sets or queries the eUSB DATA Plus source threshold for the
specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:EUSB:DATAPLUSTHRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:EUSB:DATAPLUSTHRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the eUSB DATA Plus source threshold. The argument range is -8 V
to +8 V.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-275

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:EUSB:DATAPLUSTHRESHold 0.0 sets the bus 1 eUSB threshold to

0.0 V.
BUS:B1:EUSB:DATAPLUSTHRESHold? might return
:BUS:B1:EUSB:DATAPLUSTHRESHold -8.0V, indicating the bus 1 eUSB
threshold is set to -8.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:EUSB:LOWTHRESHold
This command sets or queries the eUSB source Low threshold for the specified
bus when signal type is Differential.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:EUSB:LOWTHRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:EUSB:LOWTHRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the eUSB Strobe threshold for the specified bus. The argument range is
-8 V to +8 V.

Examples BUS:B1:EUSB:LOWTHRESHold 1.0 sets the bus 1 eUSB threshold to 1.0 V.

BUS:B1:EUSB:LOWTHRESHold? might return :BUS:B1:EUSB:LOWTHRESHold

-8.0V, indicating the bus 1 eUSB threshold is set to -8.0V

BUS:B<x>:EUSB:OPERating:MODe
This command sets or queries the eUSB mode for the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:EUSB:OPERating:MODe
{NATive|REPEATERHOSt|REPEATERPERIPHERAL}
BUS:B<x>:EUSB:OPERating:MODe?

2-276 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

NATive sets the operating mode as native.

REPEATERHOSt sets the operating mode as repeater host.

REPEATERPERIPHERAL sets the operating mode as repeater peripheral.

Examples BUS:B1:EUSB:OPERating:MODe NATive sets the operating mode as native.

BUS:B1:EUSB:OPERating:MODe? might return

:BUS:B1:EUSB:OPERating:MODe NATive, indicating that operating mode
is native.

BUS:B<x>:EUSB:SIGNALTYpe
This command sets or queries the eUSB signal type for the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:EUSB:SIGNALTYpe {SINGLE|DIFF}

BUS:B<x>:EUSB:SIGNALTYpe?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

Arguments are the available eUSB signal types.

Examples BUS:B1:EUSB:SIGNALTYpe SINGLE sets the eUSB signal type to single for
bus 1.
BUS:B1:EUSB:SIGNALTYpe? might return :BUS:B1:EUSB:SIGNALTYpe
SINGLE, indicating the eUSB signal type is single for bus 1.

BUS:B<x>:EUSB:SOUrce:DIFF
This command sets or queries the eUSB Diff source for the specified bus when
signal type is Diff.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-277

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:EUSB:SOUrce:DIFF {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:EUSB:SOUrce:DIFF?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

Arguments are the available eUSB sources.

Examples BUS:B1:EUSB:SOUrce:DIFF Ch1 sets the channel to 1.

BUS:B1:EUSB:SOUrce:DIFF? might return :BUS:B1:EUSB:SOUrce:DIFF

CH1, indicating channel 1 is the source.

BUS:B<x>:EUSB:SOUrce:DMINus
This command sets or queries the eUSB DataMinus (SDATAMINUS) source for
the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:EUSB:SOUrce:DMINus {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:EUSB:SOUrce:DMINus?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

Arguments are the available eUSB sources.

Examples BUS:B1:EUSB:SOUrce:DMINus CH1 sets the channel to 1.

BUS:B1:EUSB:SOUrce:DMINus? might return

:BUS:B1:EUSB:SOUrce:DMINus CH1, indicating channel 1 is the source.

BUS:B<x>:EUSB:SOUrce:DPLUs
This command sets or queries the eUSB dataPlus (SDATAPLUS) source for the
specified bus.

2-278 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:EUSB:SOUrce:DPLUs {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:EUSB:SOUrce:DPLUs?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

Arguments are the available eUSB sources.

Examples BUS:B1:EUSB:SOUrce:DPLUs CH1 sets the channel to 1.

BUS:B1:EUSB:SOUrce:DPLUs? might return :BUS:B1:EUSB:SOUrce:DPLUs

CH1, indicating channel 1 is the source.

BUS:B<x>:EUSB:THRESHold
This command sets or queries the eUSB source High threshold for the specified
bus when signal type is Diff.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:EUSB:THRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:EUSB:THRESHold ?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the eUSB Strobe threshold for the specified bus. The argument range is
-8 V to +8 V.

Examples BUS:B1:EUSB:THRESHold 1.0 sets the bus 1 eUSB threshold to 1.0 V.

BUS:B1:EUSB:THRESHold? might return :BUS:B1:EUSB:THRESHold -8.0V,

indicating the bus 1 eUSB threshold is set to -8.0V

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-279

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:BITRate
This command sets or queries the FlexRay bus bit rate. The bus is specified by
x. If you select Custom, use BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:BITRate:CUSTom to set the
bit rate.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:BITRate {CUSTOM|RATE2M|RATE5M|RATE10M}

BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:BITRate?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

Arguments specify the bit rate.

Examples BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:BITRate RATE2M sets the bit rate to 2 Mb.

BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:BITRate? might return :BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:BITRATE

RATE10M, indicating the bit rate is 10 Mb.

BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:BITRate:CUSTom
This command sets or queries the FlexRay custom bit rate for the specified bus.
The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:BITRate:CUSTom <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:BITRate:CUSTom?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> is the FlexRay custom bit rate for the specified bus.

2-280 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:FLEXray:BITRate:CUSTom 10000000 sets the bit rate to 10,000,000.

BUS:B1:FLEXray:BITRate:CUSTom? might return

:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:BITRATE:CUSTOM 10000000 indicating the bit rate
is set to 10,000,000.

BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CHannel
This command sets or queries the FlexRay channel type for the specified bus. The
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CHannel {A|B}

BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CHannel?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

A specifies the A channel.

B specifies the B channel.

Examples BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CHANNEL B sets the FlexRay channel to B.

BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CHANNEL? might return :BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CHANNEL A,

indicating the channel is set to A.

BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:LOWTHRESHold
This command sets or queries the FlexRay data source low threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:LOWTHRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:LOWTHRESHold?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-281

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR3> is the FlexRay data source low threshold for the specified bus.

B<x> is the number of the bus.

Examples BUS:B1:FLEXray:LOWTHRESHold 50.0e-3 sets the threshold to 50 mV.

BUS:B1:FLEXray:LOWTHRESHold? might
:BUS:B1:FLEXray:LOWTHRESHOLD 0.0E+0 indicating the threshold is
set to 0.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:SIGnal
This command sets or queries the FlexRay signal type for the specified bus. The
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:SIGnal {BDIFFBP|BM|TXRX}

BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:SIGnal?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

BDIFFBP sets the FlexRay signal type to BDIFFBP.

BM sets the FlexRay signal type to BM.

TXRX sets the FlexRay signal type to TXRX.

Examples BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:SIGNAL BM sets the FlexRay channel type to BM.

BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:SIGNAL? might return :BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:SIGNAL

BDIFFBP, indicating the FlexRay channel type is set to BDIFFBP.

BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the Flexray bus data source for the specified bus
when the signal type is BDIFFBP or BM. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

2-282 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

Arguments are the available FlexRay sources.

Examples BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:SOUrce MATH4 sets the FlexRay source to Math 4.

BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:SOURCE CH1,

indicating the source is channel 1.

BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:SOUrce:TXRX
This command sets or queries the FlexRay TxRx data source for the specified bus
when the signal type is TXRX. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:SOUrce:TXRX
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:SOUrce:TXRX?

Arguments Arguments are the available sources.

B<x> is the number of the bus.

Examples BUS:B1:FLEXray:SOUrce:TXRX CH1 sets the TXRX source the channel 1.

BUS:B1:FLEXray:SOUrce:TXRX? might return

:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:SOURCE:TXRX CH1_D0 indicating the TXRX source is
set to CH1_D0.

BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:THRESHold
This command sets or queries the FlexRay data source high threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-283

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:THRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:THRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the FlexRay data source high threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:FLEXray:THRESHold 50.0-3 sets the high threshold to 50 mV.

BUS:B1:FLEXray:THRESHold? might return :BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:THRESHOLD

0.0E+0 indicating the high threshold is set to 0.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:TXRXTHRESHold
This command sets or queries the FlexRay data source TxRx threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:TXRXTHRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:TXRXTHRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the TxRx threshold.

Examples BUS:B1:FLEXray:TXRXTHRESHold 50.0e-3 sets the threshold to 50 mV.

BUS:B1:FLEXray:TXRXTHRESHold? might return

:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:TXRXTHRESHOLD 0.0E+0 indicating the threshold is
set to 0.0 V.

2-284 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:I2C:CLOCk:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the I2C clock (SCLK) source for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:I2C:CLOCk:SOUrce
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:I2C:CLOCk:SOUrce?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SOUrce

BUS:B<x>:I2C:RWINADDR

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel to use as the I2C SCLK source.

CH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel to use as the I2C SCLK source.

MATH<x> specifies a math waveform to use as the I2C SCLK source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform to use as the I2C SCLK source.

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the clock source

waveform for the specified I2C bus.

Examples BUS:B1:I2C:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1 sets the I2C SCLK source to CH1.

BUS:B1:I2C:CLOCK:SOURCE? might return :BUS:B1:I2C:CLOCK:SOURCE

CH4_D5, indicating that the I2C SCLK source is set to D5 of FlexChannel 4.

BUS:B<x>:I2C:CLOCk:THReshold
This command sets or queries the I2C Clock (SCLK) source threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD.

Group Bus

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-285

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:I2C:CLOCk:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:I2C:CLOCk:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the I2C Clock (SCLK) source threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:I2C:CLOCk:THReshold 50.0e-3 sets the threshold to

50 mV.

BUS:B1:I2C:CLOCk:THReshold? might return

:BUS:B1:I2C:CLOCK:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0 indicating the threshold is set
to 0 V.

BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the I2C data (SDA) source for the specified I2C
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SOUrce
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SOUrce?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:I2C:CLOCk:SOUrce

BUS:B<x>:I2C:RWINADDR

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel to use as the I2C SDA source.

CH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel to use as the I2C SDA source.

MATH<x> specifies a math waveform to use as the I2C SDA source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform to use as the I2C SDA source.

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the data source waveform

for the specified I2C bus.

2-286 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:SOURCE CH1_D5 sets the I2C SDA source to CH1_D5.

BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:SOURCE? might return :BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:SOURCE

MATH1, indicating that the I2C SDA source is set to MATH1.

BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:THReshold
This command sets or queries the I2C Data (SDA) source threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the I2C Data (SDA) source threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:I2C:DATa:THReshold 50.0e-3 sets the threshold to 50 mV.

BUS:B1:I2C:DATa:THReshold? might return

:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0 indicating the threshold is set to 0 V.

BUS:B<x>:I2C:RWINADDR
This command sets or queries the manner in which seven-bit I2C addresses are
represented in the busform display of the specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:I2C:RWINADDR {0|1}

BUS:B<x>:I2C:RWINADDR?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-287

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:I2C:CLOCk:SOUrce

BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SOUrce

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

0 displays seven-bit slave addresses as integers in the range of 0 to 127, with

the state of the R/W* bit from the LSB of the slave address byte. For example,
the slave address byte of 0b10100101 is displayed as the value 0x52 R.

1 displays the entire slave address byte as a number, with the R/W* signal as its
LSB (bit 0) and the slave address in bits 7..1. For example, the slave address byte
of 0b10100101 is displayed as the value 0xA5 R.

Examples BUS:B1:I2C:RWINADDR 0 displays seven-bit slave addresses as integers in

the range of 0 to 127.
BUS:B1:I2C:RWINADDR? might return :BUS:B1:I2C:RWINADDR 1, indicating
that the entire slave address byte is displayed as a number, with the R/W* signal
as its LSB (bit 0) and the slave address in bits 7..1.

BUS:B<x>:I3C:CLOCk:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the I3C clock (SCLK) source for the specified bus.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:I3C:CLOCk:SOUrce
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:I3C:CLOCk:SOUrce?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:I3C:CLOCk:THReshold

Arguments B<x> specifies the bus number.

CH<x> specifies the analog channel to use as the I3C SCLK source.

CH<x>_D<x> specifies the digital channel to use as the I3C SCLK source.

MATH<x> specifies the math waveform to use as the I3C SCLK source.

REF<x> specifies the reference waveform to use as the I3C SCLK source.

2-288 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

REF<x>_D<x> specifies the digital reference waveform to use as the I3C SCLK
source.

Examples BUS:B5:I3C:CLOCk:SOURCE CH1 sets the Bus 5 I3C SCLK source to Channel
1.
BUS:B2:I3C:CLOCk:SOURCE? might return BUS:B2:I3C:CLOCK:SOURCE
CH4_D5, indicating that the Bus 2 I3C SCLK source is set to Digital signal 5
of Channel 4.

BUS:B<x>:I3C:CLOCk:THReshold
This command sets or queries the I3C clock (SCLK) source threshold level for
the specified bus.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:I3C:CLOCk:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:I3C:CLOCk:THReshold?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:I3C:CLOCk:SOUrce

Arguments B<x> specifies the bus number.

<NR3> is the threshold value for I3C Clock (SCLK) source of the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B3:I3C:CLOCk:THReshold 50.0e-3 sets the I3C clock threshold to

50 mV for Bus 3.
BUS:B3:I3C:CLOCk:THReshold? might return
BUS:B1:I3C:CLOCK:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0, indicating the threshold is set to 0 V.

BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the I3C data clock (SDA) source for the specified
bus.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Bus

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-289

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:SOUrce
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:SOUrce?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:THReshold

Arguments B<x> specifies the bus number.

CH<x> specifies the analog channel to use as the I3C SDA source.

CH<x>_D<x> specifies the digital channel to use as the I3C SDA source.

MATH<x> specifies the math waveform to use as the I3C SDA source.

REF<x> specifies the reference waveform to use as the I3C SDA source.

REF<x>_D<x> specifies the digital reference waveform to use as the I3C SDA
source.

Examples BUS:B5:I3C:DATA:SOURCE CH1 sets the Bus 5 I3C SDA clock source to
Channel 1.
BUS:B2:I3C:DATA:SOURCE? might return BUS:B2:I3C:DATA:SOURCE
MATH1, indicating that the Bus 2 I3C SDA source is set to Math waveform 1.

BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:THReshold
This command sets or queries the I3C clock (SDA) data threshold level for the
specified bus.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:THReshold?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:SOUrce

Arguments B<x> specifies the bus number.

<NR3> is the threshold value for I3C Data Clock (SDA) source of the specified
bus.

2-290 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B3:I3C:DATA:THReshold 50.0e-2 sets the I3C data threshold to 500

mV for Bus 3.
BUS:B3:I3C:DATA:THReshold? might return
BUS:B1:I3C:DATA:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0, indicating the Bus 1 I3C SDA
threshold is set to 0 V.

BUS:B<x>:I3C:VERSion
This command sets or queries the version for the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SRI3C

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:I3C:VERSion {VR10|VR11}

BUS:B<x>:I3C:VERSion?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

VR10 sets the version to Version 1.0. This is the default version.

VR11 sets the version to Version 1.1.

Examples BUS:B1:I3C:VERSion VR11 sets the version to Version 1.1.

BUS:B1:I3C:VERSion? might return :BUS:B1:I3C:VERSion VR11

indicating that version 1.1 is selected for the decode.

BUS:B<x>:LABel:COLor
This command sets or queries the color of the specified bus label. The bus is
specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LABel:COLor <QString>

BUS:B<x>:LABel:COLor?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-291

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<QString> is the bus label color. To return the color to the default color, send an
empty string as in this example: :BUS:B1:LABEL:COLOR "".

Examples BUS:B1:LABel:COLor "#FF0000" sets the label color to red.

BUS:B1:LABel:COLor? might return :BUS:B1:LABEL:COLOR "#FF0000"

indicating the color is red.

BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD
This command sets or queries the bold state of the specified bus label. The bus
is specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD {ON|OFF|1|0}

BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

ON displays the label in bold font.

OFF does not display the label in bold font.

1 displays the label in bold font.

0 does not display the label in bold font.

Examples BUS:B1:LABel:FONT:BOLD OFF turns off bold font.

BUS:B1:LABel:FONT:BOLD? might return :BUS:B1:LABEL:FONT:BOLD 1

indicating a bold font.

BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic
This command sets or queries the italic state of the specified bus label. The bus
is specified by x.

Group Bus

2-292 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic {ON|OFF|1|0}

BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

ON displays the label in italic font.

OFF does not display the label in italic font.

1 displays the label in italic font.

0 does not display the label in italic font.

Examples BUS:B1LABel:FONT:ITALic OFF turns off italic font.

BUS:B1LABel:FONT:ITALic? might return :BUS:B1:LABEL:FONT:ITALIC

1 indicating the font is italic.

BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE
This command sets or queries the font size of the specified bus label. The bus
is specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> is the font size.

Examples BUS:B1:LABel:FONT:SIZE 10 sets the font size to 10 points.

BUS:B1:LABel:FONT:SIZE? might return :BUS:B1:LABEL:FONT:SIZE 20

indicating the font size is 20 points.

BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE
This command sets or queries the font type of the specified bus label, such as
Arial or Times New Roman. The bus is specified by x.

Group Bus

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-293

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE <QString>

BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<QString> is the specified font type. Available fonts include: DejaVu Sans,
DejaVu Sans Mono, DejaVu Serif, Frutiger LT Std, Monospace, Sans Serif, Serif,
Ubuntu, Ubuntu Condensed, and Ubuntu Mono.

Examples BUS:B1:LABel:FONT:TYPE Monospace selects a monospace font.

BUS:B1:LABel:FONT:TYPE? might return :BUS:B1:LABEL:FONT:TYPE

"Frutiger LT Std 55 Roman" indicating the font type is Frutiger LT Stdn.

BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline
This command sets or queries the underline state of the specified bus label. The
bus is specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline {ON|OFF|1|0}

BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

ON displays the label in underlined font.

OFF does not display the label in underlined font.

1 displays the label in underlined font.

0 does not display the label in underlined font.

Examples BUS:B:LABel:FONT:UNDERline ON turns on underline font.

BUS:B:LABel:FONT:UNDERline? might return

:BUS:B1:LABEL:FONT:UNDERLINE 0 indicating underline is off.

BUS:B<x>:LABel:name
This command sets or queries the label for the specified bus. The bus is specified
by x.

2-294 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LABel:name <QString>

BUS:B<x>:LABel:name?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:TYPe

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<QString> is an alphanumeric string of text enclosed in quotes. The text string is

limited to 30 characters. It contains the text label information for the bus.

Examples BUS:B1:LABEL:NAME “TEST” sets the waveform label for the bus B1 to Test.

BUS:B1:LABEL:NAME? might return :BUS:B1:LABEL:NAME “BUS 1”,

indicating that the waveform label for the bus B1 is set to “Bus 1”.

BUS:B<x>:LABel:XPOS
This command sets or queries the x-position of the specified bus label. The bus
is specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LABel:XPOS <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:LABel:XPOS?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the x-position, in pixels relative to the left edge of the screen of the
specified bus label.

Examples BUS:B1:LABel:XPOS 90 set the x position to 90.

BUS:B1:LABel:XPOS? might return :BUS:B1:LABEL:XPOS 45.0000

indicating the x position is 45.0 pixels to the right of the left edge of the display.

BUS:B<x>:LABel:YPOS
This command sets or queries the y-position of the specified bus label. The bus
is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-295

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LABel:YPOS <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:LABel:YPOS?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the y-position, in pixels relative to the baseline of the waveform, of

the specified bus label.

Examples BUS:B1:LABel:YPOS 1.0e1 set the y position to 10.0.

BUS:B1:LABel:YPOS? might return :BUS:B1:LABEL:YPOS 0.0E+0

indicating the y position is 0.0 pixels from the baseline of the waveform.

BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate
This command sets or queries the LIN bus bit rate. The bus number is specified by
x. If you select Custom, use BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate:CUSTom to set the bit rate.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate
{RATE10K|RATE1K|RATE19K|RATE2K|RATE4K|RATE9K|CUSTom}
BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate:CUSTom

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

Arguments are the available bit rates.

Examples BUS:B1:LIN:BITRate Rate4k sets the bit rate to 4 kb.

BUS:B1:LIN:BITRate? might return :BUS:B1:LIN:BITRATE RATE19K,

indicating that the bit rate is set to 19 kb.

2-296 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate:CUSTom
This command sets or queries LIN custom bit rate for the specified bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate:CUSTom <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate:CUSTom?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> is the LIN custom bit rate for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:LIN:BITRate:CUSTom 9000 sets the bit rate to 9,000.

BUS:B1:LIN:BITRate:CUSTom? might return

:BUS:B1:LIN:BITRate:CUSTom 10000 indicating the bit rate is set to 10,000.

BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDFORmat
This command sets or queries LIN bus identifier format for the specified bus. The
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDFORmat {NOPARity|PARity}

BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDFORmat?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

NOPARity specifies an id format that includes parity.

PARity specifies an id format that separates parity.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-297

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:LIN:IDFORmat PARITY set the id format to parity.

BUS:B1:LIN:IDFORmat? might return :BUS:B1:LIN:IDFORMAT NOPARITY,

indicating the id format is set to no parity.

BUS:B<x>:LIN:POLarity
This command sets or queries the LIN source polarity for the specified bus. The
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LIN:POLarity {INVerted|NORmal}

BUS:B<x>:LIN:POLarity?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

INVerted specifies inverted polarity.

NORmal specifies normal polarity.

Examples BUS:B1:LIN:POLarity Inverted sets the polarity to inverted.

BUS:B1:LIN:POLarity? might return :BUS:B1:LIN:POLARITY NORMAL,

indicating the bus polarity is set to normal.

BUS:B<x>:LIN:SAMPLEpoint
Specifies the LIN sample point, for the specified LIN bus. The bus is specified
by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LIN:SAMPLEpoint <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:LIN:SAMPLEpoint?

2-298 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> is a percentage that represents the point at which to sample during each
bit period.

Examples BUS:B1:LIN:SAMPLEPOINT 10 sets the sample point to 10% of the bit period

BUS:B1:LIN:SAMPLEPOINT? might return BUS:B1:LIN:SAMPLEPOINT 50

indicating that the sample point is set to 50% of the bit period

BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the LIN data source for the specified bus. The
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

Arguments specify the available sources.

Examples BUS:B1:LIN:SOUrce MATH4 sets the source to MATH 4

BUS:B1:LIN:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:LIN:SOURCE CH1, indicating

the source is set to channel 1.

BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce:THReshold
This command sets or queries the LIN source threshold for the specified bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-299

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> the LIN source threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:LIN:SOUrce:THReshold 50.0e-3 sets the threshold to 50 mV.

BUS:B1:LIN:SOUrce:THReshold? might return

:BUS:B1:LIN:SOURCE:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0 indicating the threshold is 0.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:LIN:STANDard
This command sets or queries the LIN bus standard for the specified bus. The
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LIN:STANDard {MIXed|V1X|V2X}

BUS:B<x>:LIN:STANDard?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

MIXed specifies both versions 1.x and 2.x of the LIN standard.

V1X specifies version 1.x of the LIN standard.

V2X specifies version 2.x of the LIN standard.

Examples BUS:B1:LIN:STANDard V1X sets the standard to version 1.x.

BUS:B1:LIN:STANDard? might return :BUS:B1:LIN:STANDARD V2X,

indicating the standard is set to version 2.x for bus B1.

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:BITORDer
This command sets or queries the Manchester bus Bit Order. The bus is specified
by x.

2-300 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-MANCH.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MANChester:BITORDer {LSB|MSB}

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:BITORDer?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:MANChester:DISplaymode

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

LSB arranges the bits in LSB format, least significant bits first.

MSB arranges the bits in MSB format, most significant bits first.

Examples BUS:B1:MANChester:BITORDer LSB arranges the bits in LSB format for bus 1.

BUS:B1:MANChester:BITORDer? might return

:BUS:B1:MANChester:BITORDer MSB, indicating that bus 1 bits are arranged
in MSB format.

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:BITRate
This command sets or queries the Manchester bus bit rate. The bus number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-MANCH.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MANChester:BITRate <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:BITRate?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> sets the bit rate up to 1 Gbps.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-301

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:MANChester:BITRate 125000 sets the bit rate to 125 kb.

BUS:B1:MANChester:BITRate? might return

:BUS:B1:MANChester:BITRATE 19000, indicating that the bit rate is set
to 19 kb.

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:DISplaymode
This command sets or queries the Manchester bus Packet View. The bus number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-MANCH.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MANChester:DISplaymode {BITS|PACKET}

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:DISplaymode?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

BITS sets the PacketView to off and the data to be seen as single bits formats.

PACKET sets the PacketView to on and the data to be seen in the form of fields.

Examples BUS:B1:MANChester:DISplaymode PACKET sets the PacketView to off and

the data to be seen as single bits formats.
BUS:B1:MANChester:DISplaymode? might return
:BUS:B1:MANChester:DISplaymode BITS, indicating the PacketView is
on and the data can be seen in the form of fields.

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:HEADer:LENGth
This command sets or queries the Manchester header length in bits. The bus
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-MANCH.

Group Bus

2-302 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MANChester:HEADer:LENGth <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:HEADer:LENGth?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:MANChester:DISplaymode

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> sets the header length in bits.

Examples BUS:B1:MANChester:HEADer:LENGth 2 sets the header length to 2 bits.

BUS:B1:MANChester:HEADer:LENGth? might return

:BUS:B1:MANChester:HEADer:LENGth 2, indicating the header
length is 2 bits.

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:IDLE:BITS
This command sets or queries the Manchester idle bit size in bits. The bus number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-MANCH.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MANChester:IDLE:BITS <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:IDLE:BITS?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> sets the idle bit size.

Examples BUS:B1:MANChester:IDLE:BITS 2 sets the idle bit size to 2 bits.

BUS:B1:MANChester:IDLE:BITS? might return

:BUS:B1:MANChester:IDLE:BITS 2, indicating the idle bit size is 2 bits.

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:parity
This command sets or queries the Manchester bus Parity. The bus number is
specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-303

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-MANCH.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MANChester:parity {ODD|EVEN|NONE}

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:parity?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:MANChester:DISplaymode

Arguments ODD sets the number of 1's to odd.

EVEN sets the number of 1's to even.

NONE specifies that Parity is not considered.

Examples BUS:B1:MANChester:parity ODD sets the number of 1's to odd.

BUS:B1:MANChester:parity? might return :BUS:B1:MANChester:parity

EVEN, indicating the number of 1's are even.

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the Manchester source for the specified bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-MANCH.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MANChester:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:SOUrce?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:MANChester:THReshold

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source.

MATH<x> specifies a math waveform as the source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source.

2-304 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:MANChester:SOUrce CH1 sets the source to channel 5.

BUS:B1:MANChester:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:MANChester:SOUrce

CH5, indicating the source is set to channel 5.

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:START:INDex
This command sets or queries the Manchester start Index in bits. The bus is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-MANCH.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MANChester:START:INDex <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:START:INDex?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> sets the start Index in bits.

Examples BUS:B1:MANChester:START:INDex 2 sets the start Index to 2 bits.

BUS:B1:MANChester:START:INDex? might return

:BUS:B1:MANChester:START:INDex 2, indicating the start Index is 2 bits.

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:SYNC:SIZe
This command sets or queries the Manchester sync Bit Size in bits. The bus
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-MANCH.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MANChester:SYNC:SIZe <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:SYNC:SIZe?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:MANChester:DISplaymode

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-305

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> sets the Bit Size in bits.

Examples BUS:B1:MANChester:SYNC:SIZe 2 sets the sync Bit Size to 2 bits.

BUS:B1:MANChester:SYNC:SIZe? might return

:BUS:B1:MANChester:SYNC:SIZe 2, indicating the sync Bit Size is 2 bits.

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:THReshold
This command sets or queries the Manchester threshold for the specified bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-MANCH.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MANChester:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:THReshold?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:MANChester:SOUrce

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> sets the Manchester Strobe threshold for the specified bus in Volts. The
argument range is -8V to +8V

Examples BUS:B4:MANChester:THReshold 1.0 sets the Bus 4 Manchester threshold

to 1.0 V.
BUS:B4:MANChester:THReshold? might return
:BUS:B4:MANChester:THReshold 225.00000E-3, indicates the Bus 4
Manchester threshold is set to 225.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:TOLerance
This command sets or queries the Tolerance bus parameter. The bus is specified
by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-MANCH.

2-306 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MANChester:TOLerance <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:TOLerance?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> sets the Tolerance bus parameter.

Examples BUS:B1:MANChester:TOLerance 20 sets the Tolerance bus parameter to 20

for bus 1.
BUS:B1:MANChester:TOLerance? might return
:BUS:B1:MANChester:TOLerance 20, indicates the Tolerance bus parameter
is 20 for bus 1.

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:TRAiler:LENGth
This command sets or queries the Manchester trailer length in bits. The bus is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-MANCH.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MANChester:TRAiler:LENGth <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:TRAiler:LENGth?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:MANChester:DISplaymode

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> sets the trailer length in bits.

Examples BUS:B1:MANChester:TRAiler:LENGth 2 sets the trailer length to 2 bits for

bus 1.
BUS:B1:MANChester:TRAiler:LENGth? might return
:BUS:B1:MANChester:TRAiler:LENGth 2, indicates the trailer
length is 2 bits for bus 1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-307

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:TRANstion:ZERo
This command sets or queries the Manchester bus for zero falling or rising.
Manchester bit are defined by transition in the middle of the bit. Depending on the
transition, conventions are defined. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-MANCH.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MANChester:TRANstion:ZERo {FALLing|RISing}

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:TRANstion:ZERo?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

FALLing sets Falling as 0.

RISing sets Rising as 0.

Examples BUS:B1:MANChester:TRANstion:ZERo FALLing sets Falling as 0 for bus 1.

BUS:B1:MANChester:TRANstion:ZERo? might return

:BUS:B1:MANChester:TRANstion:ZERo RISing, indicates that
transition of 0 is Rising.

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:WORD:COUNt
This command sets or queries the Manchester word count in bits. The bus is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-MANCH.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MANChester:WORD:COUNt <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:WORD:COUNt?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:MANChester:DISplaymode

2-308 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> sets the word count in bits.

Examples BUS:B1:MANChester:WORD:COUNt 2 sets the word count to 2 bits for bus 1.

BUS:B1:MANChester:WORD:COUNt? might return

:BUS:B1:MANChester:WORD:COUNt 2, indicates the word count is 2 bits
for bus 1.

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:WORDSIZe
This command sets or queries the Manchester word size in bits. The bus is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-MANCH.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MANChester:WORDSIZe <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:MANChester:WORDSIZe?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:MANChester:DISplaymode

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> sets the word size in bits.

Examples BUS:B1:MANChester:WORDSIZe 12 sets the word size to 2 bits for bus 1.

BUS:B1:MANChester:WORDSIZe? might return

:BUS:B1:MANChester:WORDSIZe 12, indicates the word size is 2 bits
for bus 1.

BUS:B<x>:MDIO:CLOCk:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the MDIO Clock source for the specified bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-MDIO.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-309

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MDIO:CLOCk:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:MDIO:CLOCk:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the Clock source.

MATH<x> specifies a math waveform as the Clock source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the Clock source.

Examples BUS:B1:MDIO:CLOCk:SOUrce CH1 sets the channel to 1 to clock.

BUS:B1:MDIO:CLOCk:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:MDIO:CLOCk:SOUrce

CH1, indicating that channel 1 is set to clock.

BUS:B<x>:MDIO:CLOCk:THReshold
This command sets or queries the MDIO clock source threshold for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-MDIO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MDIO:CLOCk:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:MDIO:CLOCk:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the clock source threshold for the specified bus. The argument range is
-8V to +8V.

Examples BUS:B1:MDIO:CLOCk:THReshold 0.0 sets the Bus 1 MDIO clock threshold

to 0.0V.
BUS:B1:MDIO:CLOCk:THReshold? might return
:BUS:B2:MDIO:CLOCk:THReshold -8.0, indicating the Bus 1 MDIO clock
threshold is set to -8.0V.

2-310 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:MDIO:DATA:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the data for the specified bus. The bus is specified
by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-MDIO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MDIO:DATA:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:MDIO:DATA:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the data source.

MATH<x> specifies a math waveform as the data source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the data source.

Examples BUS:B1:MDIO:DATA:SOUrce CH2 sets the data source to channel 2.

BUS:B1:MDIO:DATA:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:MDIO:DATA:SOUrce

CH1, indicating the data source is set to channel 1.

BUS:B<x>:MDIO:DATA:THReshold
This command sets or queries the MDIO Data source threshold for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-MDIO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MDIO:DATA:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:MDIO:DATA:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the data source threshold for the specified bus. The argument range is
-8V to +8V.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-311

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:MDIO:DATA:THReshold 0.0 sets the Bus 1 MDIO data threshold

to 0.0V.
BUS:B1:MDIO:DATA:THReshold? might return
:BUS:B2:MDIO:DATA:THReshold -8.0, indicating the Bus 1 MDIO data
threshold is set to -8.0V.

BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:LOWTHRESHold
This command sets or queries the MIL-STD-1553 lower threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AERO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:LOWTHRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:LOWTHRESHold?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:SOUrce

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the MIL-STD-1553 lower threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B3:MIL1553B:LOWTHRESHOLD -200e-3 sets the Bus 3 MIL-STD-1553

lower threshold to -200 mV.
BUS:B2:MIL1553B:LOWTHRESHOLD? might return
:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:LOWTHRESHOLD -500.0000E-3 indicating the Bus 2
MIL-STD-1553 lower threshold is set to -500 mV.

BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:POLarity
This command sets or queries the source polarity for the specified MIL-STD-1553
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AERO.

Group Bus

2-312 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:POLarity {NORMal|INVERTed}

BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:POLarity?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

NORMal specifies normal polarity.

INVERTed specifies inverted polarity.

Examples BUS:B3:MIL1553B:POLARITY INVERTED sets Bus 3 MIL-STD-1553 polarity

to inverted.
BUS:B2:MIL1553B:POLARITY? might return :BUS:B2:MIL1553B:POLARITY
NORMAL, indicating that the Bus 2 MIL-STD-1553 polarity is set to normal.

BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:RESPonsetime:MAXimum
This command sets or queries the maximum response time to a valid command
issued for the specified MIL-STD-1553 bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AERO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:RESPonsetime:MAXimum <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:RESPonsetime:MAXimum?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:RESPonsetime:MINimum

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is a floating point number that specifies the maximum response time, in
seconds.

Examples BUS:B1:MIL1553B:RESPONSETIME:MAXIMUM 15.0E-6 specifies the

maximum response time to a valid command received to be 15.0 microseconds.
BUS:B1:MIL1553B:RESPONSETIME:MAXIMUM? might return
:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:RESPONSETIME:MAXIMUM 12.000E-6, indicating a
maximum response time of 12 microseconds.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-313

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:RESPonsetime:MINimum
This command sets or queries the minimum response time to a valid command
issued for the specified MIL-STD-1553 bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AERO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:RESPonsetime:MINimum <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:RESPonsetime:MINimum?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:RESPonsetime:MAXimum

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

<NR3> is a floating point number that specifies the minimum response time, in
seconds.

Examples BUS:B1:MIL1553B:RESPONSETIME:MINIMUM 5.0E-6 specifies the minimum

response time to a valid command received to be 5.0 microseconds.
BUS:B1:MIL1553B:RESPONSETIME:MINIMUM? might return
:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:RESPONSETIME:MINIMUM 4.000E-6, indicating a
minimum response time of 4 microseconds.

BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the source for the specified MIL-STD-1553 bus.
The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AERO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:SOUrce?

2-314 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source waveform for the MIL-STD-1553
bus.
MATH<x> specifies a math waveform as the source waveform for the
MIL-STD-1553 bus.
REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source waveform for the
MIL-STD-1553 bus.

Examples BUS:B1:MIL1553B:SOURCE CH1 sets channel 1 as the source for the

MIL-STD-1553 bus.
BUS:B1:MIL1553B:SOURCE? might return :BUS:B1:MIL1553B:SOURCE
MATH2 indicating that the source is set to MATH2.

BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:THRESHold
This command sets or queries the MIL-STD-1553 upper threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AERO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:THRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:THRESHold?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:SOUrce

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the MIL-STD-1553 upper threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B3:MIL1553B:THRESHOLD 2.5 sets the Bus 3 MIL-STD-1553 upper

threshold to 2.5 V.
BUS:B2:MIL1553B:THRESHOLD? might return
:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:THRESHOLD 500.0000E-3 indicating the Bus 2
MIL-STD-1553 upper threshold is set to 500 mV.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-315

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:NFC:APPLYDEMod
This command sets or queries if the load modulation is applied on the response
for the specified bus. The bus number is specified by <x>.

Conditions Requires option RFNFC.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:NFC:APPLYDEMod {1|0}

BUS:B<x>:NFC:APPLYDEMod?

Related Commands CH<x>:SV:STATE

Arguments 1 sets the demodulation application as true. This is the default value.

0 sets the demodulation application as false.

Examples BUS:B1:NFC:APPLYDEMod 1 sets the demodulation application as true.

BUS:B1:NFC:APPLYDEMod? might return :BUS:B1:NFC:APPLYDEMod 1,

indicating the demodulation is applied.

BUS:B<x>:NFC:BITRate
This command sets or queries the bit rate for the specified NFC bus on the
response lane. The bus number is specified by <x>.

Conditions Requires option RFNFC.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:NFC:BITRate <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:NFC:BITRate?

Related Commands CH<x>:SV:STATE

2-316 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> sets the bit rate. The default bit rate value is 106000 bps. The minimum
value is 1 and the maximum is 1000000000.

Examples BUS:B1:NFC:BITRate 100 sets the bit rate to 100 bps.

BUS:B1:NFC:BITRate? might return :BUS:B1:NFC:BITRATE 100, indicating

the bit rate is set to 100 bps.

BUS:B<x>:NFC:CMD:STARTINDex
This command sets or queries the Manchester start index for NFC command
signal type for the specified bus

Conditions Requires option RFNFC.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:NFC:CMD:STARTINDex <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:NFC:CMD:STARTINDex?

Related Commands CH<x>:SV:STATE

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> sets the Manchester start index. The default value is 1. The minimum
value is 1 and the maximum is 8.

Examples BUS:B1:NFC:CMD:STARTINDex 2 sets the Manchester start index to 2.

BUS:B1:NFC:CMD:STARTINDex? might return

:BUS:B1:NFC:CMD:STARTINDex 2, indicating the Manchester start index
is set to 2

BUS:B<x>:NFC:CMD:THReshold
This command sets or queries the command threshold for the specified NFC bus.

Conditions Requires option RFNFC.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-317

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:NFC:CMD:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:NFC:CMD:THReshold?

Related Commands CH<x>:SV:STATE

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> sets the threshold. The default bit rate value is 1.0 V. The minimum value
is -8.0 V and the maximum is 8.0 V.

Examples BUS:B1:NFC:CMD:THReshold 0 sets the threshold to 0 V.

BUS:B1:NFC:CMD:THReshold? might return :BUS:B1:NFC:CMD:THReshold

0, indicating the threshold is set to 0 V.

BUS:B<x>:NFC:CMD:TRANsition:ZERo
This command sets or queries the Manchester type for NFC command signal
type for the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option RFNFC.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:NFC:CMD:TRANsition:ZERo {RISing| FALLing}

BUS:B<x>:NFC:CMD:TRANsition:ZERo?

Related Commands CH<x>:SV:STATE

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

RISing sets the Manchester type to G.E thomas. This is the default value.

FALLing sets the Manchester type to IEEE.

Examples BUS:B1:NFC:CMD:TRANsition:ZERo RISing sets the Manchester type to

G.E thomas.

2-318 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B1:NFC:CMD:TRANsition:ZERo? might return

:BUS:B1:NFC:CMD:TRANsition:ZERo RISing, indicating the
Manchester type to G.E thomas.

BUS:B<x>:NFC:COMMand:POLarity
This command sets or queries the polarity for NFC Type B command signal type
for the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option RFNFC.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:NFC:COMMand:POLarity {NORMal|INVerted}

BUS:B<x>:NFC:COMMand:POLarity?

Related Commands CH<x>:SV:STATE

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

NORMal sets the polarity of command to Normal.

INVerted sets the polarity of command to Inverted.

Examples BUS:B1:NFC:COMMand:POLarity NORMal sets the polarity of command to

Normal.
BUS:B1:NFC:COMMand:POLarity? might return
:BUS:B1:NFC:COMMand:POLarity NORMal, indicating the polarity of
command is normal.

BUS:B<x>:NFC:RESPonse:POLarity
This command sets or queries the polarity for NFC Type B response signal type
for the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option RFNFC.

Group Bus

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-319

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:NFC:RESPonse:POLarity {NORMal|INVerted}

BUS:B<x>:NFC:RESPonse:POLarity?

Related Commands CH<x>:SV:STATE

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

NORMal sets the polarity of command to Normal.

INVerted sets the polarity of command to Inverted.

Examples BUS:B1:NFC:RESPonse:POLarity INVerted sets the polarity of response to

Inverted.
BUS:B1:NFC:RESPonse:POLarity? might return
:BUS:B1:NFC:RESPonse:POLarity INVerted, indicating the polarity of
response is inverted.

BUS:B<x>:NFC:RSP:THReshold
This command sets or queries the response threshold for the specified NFC bus.

Conditions Requires option RFNFC.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:NFC:RSP:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:NFC:RSP:THReshold?

Related Commands CH<x>:SV:STATE

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> sets the threshold. The default value is 1.0 V. The minimum value is -8.0
V and the maximum is 8.0 V.

Examples BUS:B1:NFC:RSP:THReshold 0 sets the threshold to 0 V.

BUS:B1:NFC:RSP:THReshold? might return :BUS:B1:NFC:RSP:THReshold

0, indicating the threshold is set to 0 V.

2-320 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:NFC:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the source for the specified NFC bus.

Conditions Requires option RFNFC.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:NFC:SOUrce {CH<x>}

BUS:B<x>:NFC:SOUrce?

Related Commands CH<x>:SV:STATE

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:NFC:SOUrce CH5 sets the source to channel 5.

BUS:B1:NFC:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:NFC:SOUrce CH5, indicating

the source is set to channel 5.

BUS:B<x>:NFC:START:INDex
This command sets or queries the start index for the specified NFC bus on the
response lane.

Conditions Requires option RFNFC.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:NFC:START:INDex <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:NFC:START:INDex?

Related Commands CH<x>:SV:STATE

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> sets the index. The default value is 1. The minimum value is 1 and the
maximum is 8.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-321

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:NFC:START:INDex 1 sets the index to 1.

BUS:B1:NFC:START:INDex? might return :BUS:B1:NFC:START:INDex 1,

indicating the index is set to 1.

BUS:B<x>:NFC:STD
This command sets or queries the standard for the specified NFC bus.

Conditions Requires option RFNFC.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:NFC:STD {NFC15693| NFC14443A| NFC14443B| NFCFELica}

BUS:B<x>:NFC:STD?

Related Commands CH<x>:SV:STATE

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

NFC15693 sets the standard to 15693.

NFC14443A sets the standard to 14443A.

NFC14443B sets the standard to 14443B.

NFCFELica sets the standard to Felica.

Examples BUS:B1:NFC:STD NFC14443A sets the standard to 14443A.

BUS:B1:NFC:STD? might return :BUS:B1:NFC:STD NFC14443A, indicating

the standard is set to 14443A.

BUS:B<x>:NFC:TOLerance
This command sets or queries the tolerance for the specified NFC bus.

Conditions Requires option RFNFC.

Group Bus

2-322 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:NFC:TOLerance <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:NFC:TOLerance?

Related Commands CH<x>:SV:STATE

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> sets the tolerance. The default tolerance value is 10%. The minimum
value is 1% and the maximum is 50%.

Examples BUS:B1:NFC:TOLerance 50 sets the tolerance to 50%.

BUS:B1:NFC:TOLerance? might return :BUS:B1:NFC:TOLerance 50,

indicating the tolerance is set to 50%.

BUS:B<x>:NFC:TRANsition:ZERo
The command sets or queries the Manchester standard convention for the specified
NFC bus on the response lane.

Conditions Requires option RFNFC.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:NFC:TRANsition:ZERo {ge|ieee}

BUS:B<x>:NFC:TRANsition:ZERo?

Related Commands CH<x>:SV:STATE

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

ge sets the transition type to Manchester G.E thomas convention.

ieee sets the transition type to Manchester IEEE convention.

Examples BUS:B1:NFC:TRANsition:ZERo ge sets the transition type to ge.

BUS:B1:NFC:TRANsition:ZERo? might return

:BUS:B1:NFC:TRANsition:ZERo ge, indicating the transition type is set to ge.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-323

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:NRZ:BITOrder
This command sets or queries the NRZ bit order for the specified bus. The bus
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRNRZ.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:NRZ:BITOrder {LSB|MSB}

BUS:B<x>:NRZ:BITOrder?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

LSB specifies that each bit becomes the recovered value's new LSB, after shifting
previously recovered bits one place to the left. The decoding happens right to left.

MSB specifies that each successive bit from the bus's data line becomes the new
MSB of the recovered value, shifting any previously recovered bits one place to
the right. The decoding happens left to right.

Examples BUS:B1:NRZ:BITORDER LSB sets each bit order for the NRZ bus B1 to LSB.

BUS:B1:NRZ:BITORDER? might return :BUS:B1:NRZ:BITORDER MSB,

indicating that the bit order for the NRZ bus B1 is set to MSB.

BUS:B<x>:NRZ:BITRate
This command sets or queries the NRZ bus bit rate. The bus number is specified
by <x>.

Conditions Requires option SRNRZ.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:NRZ:BITRate <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:NRZ:BITRate?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> sets the bit rate up to 1 G.

2-324 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:NRZ:BITRate 4000 sets the bit rate to 4 kb.

BUS:B1:NRZ:BITRate? might return :BUS:B1:NRZ:BITRATE 19000,

indicating that the bit rate is set to 19 kb.

BUS:B<x>:NRZ:POLarity
This command sets or queries the NRZ source polarity for the specified bus. The
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRNRZ.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:NRZ:POLarity {INVerted|NORmal}

BUS:B<x>:NRZ:POLarity?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

INVerted specifies inverted polarity.

NORmal specifies normal polarity.

Examples BUS:B1:NRZ:POLarity Inverted sets the polarity to inverted.

BUS:B1:NRZ:POLarity? might return :BUS:B1:NRZ:POLARITY NORMAL,

indicating the bus polarity is set to normal.

BUS:B<x>:NRZ:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the NRZ source for the specified bus. This
command specifies the source channel. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRNRZ.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:NRZ:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>]

BUS:B<x>:NRZ:SOUrce?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-325

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:NRZ:THReshold

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source.

MATH<x> specifies a math waveform as the source.

REF<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:NRZ:SOUrce Ch5 sets the source to channel 5.

BUS:B1:NRZ:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:NRZ:SOUrce CH5, indicating

the source is set to channel 5.

BUS:B<x>:NRZ:SPMI:VERsion
This command sets or queries the Version for the specified bus. The bus number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRPM.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:NRZ:SPMI:VERsion {v1|v2}

BUS:B<x>:NRZ:SPMI:VERsion?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

v1 specifies version 1.

v2 specifies version 2.

Examples BUS:B1:SPMI:VERsion v2 sets to version 2.

BUS:B1:SPMI:VERsion? might return :BUS:B1:SPMI:VERsion v2,

indicating version 2 is set.

BUS:B<x>:NRZ:THReshold
This command sets or queries the NRZ threshold for the specified bus. The bus
number is specified by x.

2-326 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SRNRZ.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:NRZ:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:NRZ:THReshold?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:NRZ:SOUrce

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the NRZ Strobe threshold for the specified bus in volts. The valid
range is -8 V to +8 V.

Examples BUS:B4:NRZ:THReshold 1.0 sets the Bus 4 NRZ threshold to 1.0 V.

BUS:B3:NRZ:THReshold? might return :BUS:B4:NRZ:THReshold

225.00000E-3, indicating the Bus 3 NRZ threshold is set to 225.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:ONEWIRe:DATA:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the ONEWIRe source for the specified bus. This
command specifies the source channel. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ONEWIRE.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ONEWIRe:DATA:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>]

BUS:B<x>:ONEWIRe:DATA:SOUrce?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:NRZ:THReshold

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source.

MATH<x> specifies a math waveform as the source.

REF<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the source.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-327

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:ONEWIRe:DATA:SOUrce Ch5 sets the source to channel 5.

BUS:B1:ONEWIRe:DATA:SOUrce? might return :ONEWIRe:DATA:SOUrce

CH5, indicating the source is set to channel 5.

BUS:B<x>:ONEWIRe:DATA:THReshold
This command sets or queries the ONEWIRe data source threshold for the
specified bus. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ONEWIRE.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ONEWIRe:DATA:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:ONEWIRe:DATA:THReshold?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:NRZ:SOUrce

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the ONEWIRe Strobe threshold for the specified bus in volts. The valid
range is -8 V to +8 V. The default value is 1.25 V.

Examples BUS:B4:ONEWIRe:DATA:THReshold 1.0 sets the Bus 4 ONEWIRe threshold

to 1.0 V.
BUS:B3:ONEWIRe:DATA:THReshold? might return
:BUS:B4:ONEWIRe:DATA:THReshold 225.00000E-3, indicating the Bus 3
ONEWIRe threshold is set to 225.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:ONEWIRe:MODe
This command sets or queries the mode for the specified ONEWIRe bus. The
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ONEWIRE.

Group Bus

2-328 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:ONEWIRe:MODe {STAndard|OVErdrive}

BUS:B<x>:ONEWIRe:MODe?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

STAndard specifies the mode as standard. Standard is the default mode whose
value is 15.4 kbs.
OVErdrive specifies the mode as overdrive.

Examples BUS:B1:ONEWIRe:MODe OVErdrive sets the mode to 125 kbps.

BUS:B1:ONEWIRe:MODe? might return :BUS:B1:ONEWIRe:MODe OVErdrive,

indicating that the mode is 125 kbps.

BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds
This command sets or queries a threshold value for sources for the parallel
bus. Use the BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds:APPly command to set the
thresholds to this value. The bus is specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds <NR3>

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds:APPly

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the source threshold.

Examples BUS:B4:PARALLEL:ALLTHRESHOLDS 1.0 sets the threshold of all the sources in

parallel Bus 4 to 1.0 V.
BUS:B3:PARALLEL:ALLTHRESHOLDS? might return
BUS:B3:PARALLEL:ALLTHRESHOLDS 500.00000E-3 indicates the threshold for
all sources in parallel Bus 3 is currently set to 500.0 mV.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-329

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds:APPly (No Query Form)

This command sets all of the data source thresholds to the value set by
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds for the parallel bus. The bus is specified
by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds:APPly

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

Examples BUS:B1:PARallel:ALLTHResholds:APPly sets all data source thresholds to

the value set by BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds.

BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<x>SOUrce
This command sets or queries the specified bit source for specified parallel bus.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<x>SOUrce
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>|NONE}

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<x>SOUrce:THReshold

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

BIT<x> is the number of the bit and is an integer in the range of 1 to 64.

CH<x> is the specified bit source.

CH<x>_D<x> is the specified bit source.

MATH<x> is the specified bit source.

REF<x> is the specified bit source.

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the bit<x> source

waveform for the specified parallel bus.

2-330 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

NONE disables the bit source.

Examples BUS:B1:PARallel:BIT1SOUrce CH1 sets the bit 1 source to channel 1.

BUS:B1:PARallel:BIT1SOUrce? might return

:BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT1SOURCE CH1_D0 indicating the bit1 source is
CH1_D0.

BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<x>SOUrce:THReshold
This command sets or queries the specified bit source threshold for the specified
parallel bus.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<x>SOUrce:THReshold <NR3>

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<x>SOUrce

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

BIT<x> is the number of the bit and is an integer in the range of 1 to 64.

<NR3> is the specified bit source threshold for the specified parallel bus.

Examples BUS:B3:PARALLEL:BIT2SOURCE:THRESHOLD 1.0 sets the threshold of bit

source 2 of parallel Bus 3 to 1.0 V.
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT4SOURCE:THRESHOLD? might return
:BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT4SOURCE:THRESHOLD 250.00000E-3 indicates the
threshold of bit source 4 of parallel Bus 1 is currently set to 250.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:EDGE
This command sets or queries the clock edge for the parallel bus. The bus is
specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:EDGE {FALLING|RISING|EITHER}

BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:EDGE?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-331

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCKSOUrce

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

FALLING decodes on the falling edge of the clocked parallel bus signal.

RISING decodes on the rising edge of the clocked parallel bus signal.

EITHER decodes on the rising or falling edge of the clocked parallel bus signal.

Examples BUS:B1:PARALLEL:CLOCK:EDGE FALLING sets the decoding to happen on the

falling edge of its clocked parallel bus B1.
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:CLOCK:EDGE? might return
:BUS:B1:PARALLEL:CLOCK:EDGE RISING, indicating that when bus B1
operates in Clocked Parallel mode, it samples new data values on the rising edge
of its clock source signal.

BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:ISCLOCKED
This command determines whether the bus operates in a clocked or asynchronous
fashion. The bus is specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:ISCLOCKED {OFF|ON|<NR1>}

BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:ISCLOCKED?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

OFF argument specifies an asynchronous bus.

ON argument specifies a clocked bus.

<NR1> = 0 specifies an asynchronous bus; any other value specifies a clocked bus.

Examples BUS:B1:PARallel:CLOCk:ISCLOCKED 0 sets the bus to operate

asynchronously.
BUS:B1:PARallel:CLOCk:ISCLOCKED? might return
:BUS:B1:PARALLEL:CLOCK:ISCLOCKED 1 indicating the bus is
clocked.

2-332 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCKSOUrce
This command sets or queries the Parallel clock bit source for the specified bus.
The bus is specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCKSOUrce
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>|NONE}
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCKSOUrce?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:ISCLOCKED

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog FlexChannel to use as the bus clock source.

CH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel on a specified FlexChannel to use as

the bus clock source.
MATH<x> specifies the math channel to use as the bus clock source.

REF<x> specifies the reference channel to use as the bus clock source.

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the clock source

waveform for the specified parallel bus.
NONE specifies the reference channel to use as the bus clock source.

Examples BUS:B1:PARALLEL:CLOCKSOUrce CH3_D6 sets the Parallel clock source for

the bus B1 to D6 of FlexChannel 3.
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:CLOCKSOUrce? might return
:BUS:B1:PARALLEL:CLOCKSOUrce CH8_D9, indicating that the Parallel clock
source for the bus B1 is set to D9 of FlexChannel 8.

BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCKSOUrce:THReshold
This command sets or queries the clock source threshold for the parallel bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Group Bus

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-333

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCKSOUrce:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCKSOUrce:THReshold?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:ISCLOCKED

Arguments B<x> is the Bus number.

<NR3> is the clock bit source threshold for the parallel bus.

Examples BUS:B4:PARALLEL:CLOCKSOUrce:THRESHOLD 1.5 sets the threshold of the

clock source of parallel Bus 4 to 1.5 V.
BUS:B3:PARALLEL:CLOCKSOUrce:THRESHOLD? might return
:BUS:B3:PARALLEL:CLOCKSOUrce:THRESHOLD 750.00000E-3 indicates the
threshold of the clock source of parallel Bus 3 is currently set to 750.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:BITPERiod
This command sets or queries the PSI5 Bit period bus parameter.

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:BITPERiod <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:BITPERiod?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> specifies the bit period. The default bit period is 60 Micro seconds.

Examples BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:BITPERiod 0.000060 sets the bit period to 60 μs.

BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:BITPERiod? might return :BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:BITPERiod

0.000120, indicating that the bit rate is set to 120 μs.

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:BITRate
This command sets or queries the PSI5 bitrate.

2-334 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:BITRate {RATE125K|RATE189K|RATE83K}

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:BITRate?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

Arguments are the available bit rates.

Examples BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:BITRate RATE125k sets the bit rate to 125 kb.

BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:BITRate? might return :BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:BITRATE

RATE189K, indicating that the bit rate is set to 189 kb.

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:COMM:DIRection
This command sets or queries the PSI5 bus communication direction.
Communication direction by default is set to Sensor to ECU.

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:COMM:DIRection {SENSORECU|ECUSENSor}

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:COMM:DIRection?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

SENSORECU specifies the communication direction to Sensor to ECU. This is

the default value.
ECUSENSor specifies the communication direction to ECU to Sensor.

Examples BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:COMM:DIRection SENSORECU sets the communication

direction to Sensor to ECU.
BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:COMM:DIRection? might return
:BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:COMM:DIRection ECUSENSor, indicating that the
communication direction is ECU to Sensor .

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-335

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:DATAA
This command sets or queries the PSI5 frame mandatory data region A.

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:DATAA <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:DATAA?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> specifies the dataA value in bits. The default dataA value is 10 bits,
otherwise it ranges between 10 to 24 bits.

Examples BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:DATAA 17 sets the dataA as 17 bits.

BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:DATAA? might return :BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:DATAA 10,

indicating that the dataA is 10 bits.

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:DATAB
This command sets or queries the PSI5 frame optional bits of data region B.

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:DATAB <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:DATAB?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> specifies the dataA value in bits. The default dataB value is 0 bits,
otherwise it ranges between 0 to 12 bits.

2-336 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:DATAB 7 sets the dataB as 7 bits.

BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:DATAB? might return :BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:DATAB 0,

indicating that the dataB is 0 bits.

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:DATAFORMat
This command sets or queries the data format in PSI5 Frame2 packet.

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:DATAFORMat {NIBBLe|BYTe}

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:DATAFORMat?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

NIBBLe specifies the data format as Nibble.

BYTe specifies the data format as Byte.

Examples BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:DATAFORMat NIBBLe sets the data format to Nibble.

BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:DATAFORMat? might return

:BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:DATAFORMat BYTe, indicating that the data format is Byte.

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:ECUSOURce
This command sets or queries the ECU to sensor source channel for the specified
Bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:ECUSOURce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:ECUSOURce?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-337

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source.

MATH<x> specifies a math waveform as the source.

REF<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:ECUSOURce CH5 sets the source to channel 5.

BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:ECUSOURce? might return :BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:ECUSOURce

CH5, indicating the source is set to channel 5.

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:FRAMECONTrol
This command sets or queries the PSI5 frame optional control bits.

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:FRAMECONTrol <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:FRAMECONTrol?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> specifies the frame control value in bits. The default frame control value is
0 bits, otherwise it ranges between 0 to 4 bits.

Examples BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:FRAMECONTrol 2 sets the frame control as 2 bits.

BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:FRAMECONTrol? might return

:BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:FRAMECONTrol 3, indicating that the frame control is 3
bits.

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:MESSaging
This command sets or queries the PSI5 optional messaging bits.

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Bus

2-338 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:MESSaging {OFF|ON}

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:MESSaging?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

OFF specifies the messaging bits as the default value of 0.

ON specifies the messaging bits as 2.

Examples BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:MESSaging OFF sets the messaging bits as 0.

BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:MESSaging? might return :BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:MESSaging

ON, indicating that the messaging bits are 2.

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:SOUrce
This command sets or queries serial channel on or off.

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source.

MATH<x> specifies a math waveform as the source.

REF<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:SOUrce CH5 sets the source to channel 5.

BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:SOUrce CH5,

indicating the source is set to channel 5.

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:STATus
This command sets or queries the optional status bits of PSI5.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-339

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:STATus <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:STATus?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> specifies the status value in bits. The default status value is 0 bits,
otherwise it ranges between 0 to 2 bits.

Examples BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:STATus 2 sets the status as 2 bits.

BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:STATus? might return :BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:STATus 0,

indicating that the status is 0 bits.

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:SYNCMODe
This command sets or queries the PSI5 Sync Mode.

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:SYNCMODe {PULSEWIDTh|TOOTHGAP}

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:SYNCMODe?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

PULSEWIDTh specifies the Sync Mode as Pulse Width.

TOOTHGAP specifies the Sync Mode as Tooth Gap.

Examples BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:SYNCMODe PULSEWIDTh sets the Sync Mode to Pulse Width.

BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:SYNCMODe? might return :BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:SYNCMODe

TOOTHGAP, indicating that the Sync Mode is Tooth Gap.

2-340 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:SYNCTHRESHold
This command sets or queries the PSI5 threshold for the ECU To Sensor specified
bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:SYNCTHRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:SYNCTHRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> specifies the PSI5 Strobe threshold for the specified bus. The threshold
range is -8 V to +8 V.

Examples BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:SYNCTHRESHold 1.0 sets the bus 4 PSI5 threshold to 1.0 V.

BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:SYNCTHRESHold? might return

:BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:SYNCTHRESHold 225.00000E-3, indicating the bus 3
PSIFIVe threshold is set to 225.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:THRESHold
This command sets or queries the PSI5 threshold for the Sensor To ECU specified
bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:THRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:THRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> specifies the PSI5 Strobe threshold for the specified bus. The threshold
range is -8 V to +8 V.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-341

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:THRESHold 1.0 sets the bus 4 PSI5 threshold to 1.0 V.

BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:THRESHold? might return :BUS:B1:PSIFIVe:THRESHold

225.00000E-3, indicating the bus 4 PSI5 threshold is set to 225.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITORDer
This command sets or queries the bit order for the specified RS-232 bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-COMP.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITORDer {LSB|MSB}

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITORDer?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

LSB sets the bit order to LSB. This is the default value.

MSB sets the bit order to MSB.

Examples BUS:B1:RS232C:BITORDer LSB sets the bit order to LSB.

BUS:B1:RS232C:BITORDer? might return :BUS:B1:RS232C:BITORDer

LSB, indicating the decode is from LSB to MSB.

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate
This command sets or queries the RS-232C bit rate for bus<x>,
where the bus number is specified by x. If you select Custom, use
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate:CUSTom to set the bit rate.

Conditions Requires option SR-COMP.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate
{CUSTOM|RATE300|RATE1K|RATE2K|RATE9K|
RATE19K|RATE38K|RATE115K|RATE921K}
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate?

2-342 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

Arguments are the available bit rates.

Examples BUS:B1:RS232C:BITRATE RATE9K sets the bit rate for the RS-232C bus B1 to
9000 bits-per-second.
BUS:B1:RS232C:BITRATE? might return :BUS:B1:RS232C:BITRATE 9000,
indicating that the bit rate for the RS-232C bus B1 is set to 9000 bits-per-second.

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate:CUSTom
This command sets or queries the RS-232C custom bit rate for the specified bus.
The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-COMP.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate:CUSTom <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate:CUSTom?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> is the custom bit rate.

Examples BUS:B1:RS232C:BITRATE:CUSTOM 9500 sets the bit rate for the RS-232C bus
B1 to 9500 bits-per-second.
BUS:B1:RS232C:BITRATE:CUSTOM? might return
:BUS:B1:RS232C:BITRATE:CUSTOM 9500, indicating that the bit rate for the
RS-232C bus B1 is set to 9500 bits-per-second.

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATABits
This command sets or queries the RS-232C data width for bus<x>, where the
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-COMP.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-343

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATABits {7|8|9}

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATABits?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

7 specifies the number of bits as 7 in the RS-232C data frame.

8 specifies the number of bits as 8 in the RS-232C data frame.

9 specifies the number of bits as 9 in the RS-232C data frame.

Examples BUS:B1:RS232C:DATABITS 8 sets the data bits to 8 for the RS-232C bus B1.

BUS:B5:RS232C:DATABITS? might return :BUS:B1:RS232C:DATABITS 7,

indicating that the data bits is set to 7 for the RS-232C bus B5.

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DELIMiter
This command sets or queries the RS-232C string delimiter on bus <x>, where
the bus number is specified by x. This command only applies when Packet view
is turned On.

Conditions Requires option SR-COMP.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DELIMiter {NULl|CR|LF|SPace|XFF}

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DELIMiter?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DISplaymode

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

NULl specifies NULL (0x00 ) delimiting value for a packet.

CR specifies CR (0x0D) delimiting value for a packet.

LF specifies LF (0x0A) delimiting value for a packet.

XFF specifies XFF (0xFF) delimiting value for a packet.

SPace specifies SPace delimiting value for a packet.

2-344 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:RS232C:DELIMITER LF sets the delimiter to 0x0A for the RS-232C

bus B1.
BUS:B1:RS232C:DELIMITER? might return :BUS:B1:RS232C:DELIMITER
NULL, indicating that the delimiter to 0x00 for the RS-232C bus B1.

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DISplaymode
This command sets or queries the RS-232C display mode for the specified bus.
The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-COMP.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DISplaymode {FRame|PACKET}

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DISplaymode?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DELIMiter

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

FRame displays each frame as a single entity.

PACKET displays a group of frames terminated with a single frame defined by the
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DELImiter command.

Examples BUS:B1:RS232C:DISPLAYMODE FRAME sets the display mode for the RS-232C
bus B1 to Frame.
BUS:B1:RS232C:DISPLAYMODE? might return
:BUS:B1:RS232C:DISPLAYMODE PACKET, indicating that the display mode for
the RS-232C bus B1 is set to Packet.

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:PARity
This command sets or queries the RS-232C parity for bus <x>, where the bus
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-COMP.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-345

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:RS232C:PARity {NONe|EVEN|ODD}

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:PARity?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

NONe specifies no parity.

EVEN specifies even parity.

ODD specifies odd parity.

Examples BUS:B1:RS232C:PARITY ODD sets the parity for the RS-232C bus B1 to odd.

BUS:B1:RS232C:PARITY? might return :BUS:B1:RS232C:PARITY NONE,

indicating that the display mode for the RS-232C bus B1 is set to none.

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:POLarity
This command sets or queries the RS-232C source polarity for bus <x>, where the
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-COMP.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:RS232C:POLarity {NORmal|INVERTed}

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:POLarity?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

NORmal sets the RS-232C bus polarity to positive.

INVERTed sets the RS-232C bus polarity to negative.

Examples BUS:B1:RS232C:POLARITY INVERTed sets the polarity for the RS-232C bus
B1 to Inverted.
BUS:B1:RS232C:POLARITY? might return :BUS:B1:RS232C:POLARITY
NORMAL, indicating that the polarity for the RS-232C bus B1 is set to Normal.

2-346 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the RS-232C source for bus <x>, where the bus
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-COMP.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:RS232C:SOUrce
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|REF<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel to use as the RS-232C source.

CH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel of a specified FlexChannel to use for the

RS-232C source.
MATH<x> specifies a math channel to use for the RS-232C source.

REF<x> specifies a reference channel to use for the RS-232C source.

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the source waveform

for the specified RS-232C bus.

Examples BUS:B1:RS232C:SOURCE CH1_D0 sets the source for the RS-232C bus B1 to
D0 of FlexChannel 1.
BUS:B1:RS232C:SOURCE? might return :BUS:B1:RS232C:SOURCE CH1,
indicating that the source for the RS-232C bus B1 is CH1.

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:SOUrce:THReshold
This command sets or queries the RS-232C source threshold for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-COMP.

Group Bus

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-347

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:RS232C:SOUrce:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:SOUrce:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the RS-232C source threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:RS232C:SOURCE:THRESHOLD 50.0e-3 sets the threshold to 50 mV.

BUS:B1:RS232C:SOURCE:THRESHOLD? might return

:BUS:B1:RS232C:SOURCE:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0 indicating the threshold
is set to 0.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:S8B10B:BITRate
This command sets or queries the 8B10b bit rate for the specified bus, where the
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR8B10b.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:S8B10B:BITRate
BUS:B<x>:S8B10B:BITRate?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

Arguments are the available bit rates up to 1 Tbps.

Examples BUS:B1:S8B10B:BITRate 4000 sets the bit rate to 4 kb.

BUS:B1:S8B10B:BITRate? might return :BUS:B1:S8B10B:BITRATE 19000,

which indicates that the bit rate is set to 19 kb.

BUS:B<x>:S8B10B:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the 8B10b source for the specified bus, where the
bus is specified by x. This command specifies the source channel.

Conditions Requires option SR8B10b.

2-348 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:S8B10B:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:S8B10B:SOUrce?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:S8B10B:THReshold

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source.

MATH<x> specifies a math waveform as the source.

REF<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:S8B10B:SOUrce Ch5 sets the source to channel 5.

BUS:B1:S8B10B:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:S8B10B:SOUrce CH5,

indicating the source is set to channel 5.

BUS:B<x>:S8B10B:THReshold
This command sets or queries the 8B10b threshold for the specified bus, where
the bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR8B10b.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:S8B10B:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:S8B10B:THReshold?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:S8B10B:SOUrce

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the 8B10b Strobe threshold for the specified bus in volts. The valid
range is -8V to +8V.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-349

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B4:S8B10B:THReshold 1.0 sets Bus 4 8B10b threshold to 1.0 V.

BUS:B3:S8B10B:THReshold? might return :BUS:B3:S8B10B:THReshold

225.00000E-3 indicates the Bus 3 8B10b threshold is set to 225.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:SDLC:BITRate
This command sets or queries the bit rate for the specified SDLC bus. The bus
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SDLC.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SDLC:BITRate <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:SDLC:BITRate?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> specifies the bit rate. The default bit rate is 10 kbs and varies 300 ~
1000000000.

Examples BUS:B1:SDLC:BITRate 80000 sets the bit rate as 80 Kbps.

BUS:B1:SDLC:BITRate? might return :BUS:B1:SDLC:BITRate 80000,

indicating that the bit rate is 80 Kbps.

BUS:B<x>:SDLC:DATA:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the source for the specified bus. The bus is specified
by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SDLC.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SDLC:DATA:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:SDLC:DATA:SOUrce?

2-350 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source.

MATH<x> specifies a math waveform as the source.

REF<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:SDLC:DATA:SOUrce Ch5 sets the source to channel 5.

BUS:B1:SDLC:DATA:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:SDLC:DATA:SOUrce

CH5, indicating the source is set to channel 5.

BUS:B<x>:SDLC:DATA:THReshold
This command sets or queries the SDLC data source threshold for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SDLC.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SDLC:DATA:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SDLC:DATA:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the SDLC Strobe threshold for the specified bus. The valid range is
-8V to +8V.

Examples BUS:B1:SDLC:DATA:THReshold 1.0 sets the bus 1 SDLC threshold to 1.0 V.

BUS:B1:SDLC:DATA:THReshold? might return

:BUS:B1:SDLC:DATA:THReshold 225.00000E-3 indicates the bus 1 SDLC
threshold is set to 225.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:SDLC:ENCoding
This command sets or queries the SDLC Bus Encoding. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SDLC.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-351

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SDLC:ENCoding {DISCrete|INVert}

BUS:B<x>:SDLC:ENCoding?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

DISCrete specifies the encoding mechanism is Discrete Transmission (NRZ).

INVert specifies that encoding mechanism is Invert On Zero i.e. NRZI.

Examples BUS:B1:SDLC:ENCoding DISCrete sets the encoding method to discrete

transmission.
BUS:B1:SDLC:ENCoding? might return :BUS:B1:SDLC:ENCoding
DISCrete, indicating that the encoding type is Discrete Transmission.

BUS:B<x>:SDLC:MODulo
This command sets or queries the SDLC Bus Modulo. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SDLC.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SDLC:MODulo {8|128}

BUS:B<x>:SDLC:MODulo?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

8 specifies the C-Field size is 8 bit in SDLC frame.

128 specifies the C-Field size is 16 bit in SDLC frame.

Examples BUS:B1:SDLC:MODulo 128 sets the modulo to 128.

BUS:B1:SDLC:MODulo? might return :BUS:B1:SDLC:MODulo 128, indicating

that the modulo is 128.

BUS:B<x>:SENT:CHANWidth
This command sets or queries SENT fast channel bit widths for the specified bus.

2-352 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SENT:CHANWidth
{TWELVEtwelve|FOURTEENten|SIXTEENeight}
BUS:B<x>:SENT:CHANWidth?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:SENT:NUMCHANnel

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

TWELVEtwelve sets both Fast Channel 1 and Fast Channel 2 to12 bits wide.

FOURTEENten sets Fast Channel 1 to 14 bits and Fast Channel 2 to 10 bits.

SIXTEENeight sets Fast Channel 1 to 16 bits and Fast Channel 2 to eight bits.

Examples BUS:B1:SENT:CHANWIDTH TWELVETWELVE sets the channel width of both Fast

Channel 1 and Fast Channel 2 to twelve bits.
BUS:B1:SENT:CHANWIDTH? might return :BUS:B1:SENT:CHANWIDTH
SIXTEENEIGHT, which indicates that the Fast Channel 1 width is 16 and the
Fast Channel 2 width is eight.

BUS:B<x>:SENT:NIBBLECount
This command sets or queries SENT data nibbles for the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SENT:NIBBLECount {THREE|FOUR|SIX}

BUS:B<x>:SENT:NIBBLECount?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

THREE specifies regular data with 3 nibbles

FOUR specifies regular data with 4nibbles

SIX specifies regular data with 6nibbles

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-353

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:SENT:NIBBLECOUNT THREE sets the data nibble count to three.

BUS:B1:SENT:NIBBLECOUNT? might return :BUS:B1:SENT:NIBBLECOUNT

SIX, which indicates the nibble count is set to six.

BUS:B<x>:SENT:NUMCHANnel
This command sets or queries SENT fast data channels for the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SENT:NUMCHANnel {ONE|TWO}

BUS:B<x>:SENT:NUMCHANnel?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

ONE specifies a SENT bus with one fast channel.

TWO specifies a SENT bus with two fast channels.

Examples BUS:B1:SENT:NUMCHANnel TWO sets the number of SENT channels to two.

BUS:B1:SENT:NUMCHANNEL? might return :BUS:B1:SENT:NUMCHANNEL ONE

to indicate that the number of channels is set to one.

BUS:B<x>:SENT:PAUSEPULSe
This command sets or queries SENT pause pulse for the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SENT:PAUSEPULSe {NO|YES}

BUS:B<x>:SENT:PAUSEPULSe?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

NO specifies no pause pulse.

2-354 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

YES specifies a pause pulse is used.

Examples BUS:B1:SENT:PAUSEPULSE NO sets the pause pulse value to indicate no pause

pulse.
BUS:B1:SENT:PAUSEPULSE? might return :BUS:B1:SENT:PAUSEPULSE YES,
which indicates the SENT bus is set to use pause pulses.

BUS:B<x>:SENT:POLARITY
This command sets or queries SENT Idle State signal polarity for the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SENT:POLARITY {INVerted|NORmal}

BUS:B<x>:SENT:POLARITY?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

INVerted specifies inverted polarity.

NORmal specifies normal polarity.

Examples BUS:B1:SENT:POLARITY INVERTED sets the idle state of the bus to inverted
polarity.
BUS:B1:SENT:POLARITY? might return :BUS:B1:SENT:POLARITY NORMAL
to indicate the bus idle state polarity is set to normal

BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW
This command sets or queries the SENT slow channel configuration for the
specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

Group Bus

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-355

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW {NOne|ENHANCED4|ENHANCED8|SHOrt}

BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

NOne specifies no slow channel configured.

ENHANCED4 specifies Enhanced 4 slow channel configuration.

ENHANCED8 specifies Enhanced 8 slow channel configuration.

SHOrt specifies short slow channel configuration.

Examples BUS:B1:SENT:SLOW SHORT sets the SENT bus to use the short slow channel
configuration.
BUS:B1:SENT:SLOW? might return :BUS:B1:SENT:SLOW NONE to indicate that
the SENT bus is set to have no slow channel.

BUS:B<x>:SENT:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the SENT DATA source for the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SENT:SOUrce
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:SENT:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the clock source waveform for the audio bus.

CH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel as the clock source waveform for the
specified audio bus.
MATH<x> specifies a math waveform as the clock source waveform for the audio
bus.
REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the clock source waveform for the
audio bus
REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the clock source
waveform for the specified audio bus.

2-356 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:SENT:SOURCE CH1_D1 sets D1 of channel 1 as the source for the

SENT bus.
BUS:B1:SENT:SOURCE? might return :BUS:B1:SENT:SOURCE CH1 indicating
that the source is set to channel 1

BUS:B<x>:SENT:THRESHold
This command sets or queries the SENT DATA source threshold for the specified
bus.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SENT:THRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SENT:THRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> sets the data source threshold value in volts.

Examples BUS:B1:SENT:THRESHOLD 500.0E-3 sets the Bus 1 source threshold to

500.0 mV.
BUS:B1:SENT:THRESHOLD? might return :BUS:B1:SENT:THRESHOLD
2.5000 to indicate the Bus 1 source threshold is 2.5 V.

BUS:B<x>:SENT:TICKTIME
This command sets or queries the SENT bus Clock Tick parameter for the
specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SENT:TICKTIME <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SENT:TICKTIME?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-357

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> is the SENT clock tick time, in seconds.

Examples BUS:B1:SENT:TICKTIME 3.0E-6 sets the SENT bus to clock tick to

3 microseconds.
BUS:B1:SENT:TICKTIME? might return :BUS:B1:SENT:TICKTIME
10.0000E-6 to indicate the clock tick is set to 10 microseconds.

BUS:B<x>:SENT:TICKTOLerance
This command sets or queries the SENT bus Tick Tolerance percent parameter for
the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SENT:TICKTOLerance <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SENT:TICKTOLerance?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> is the tick tolerance percentage.

Examples BUS:B1:SENT:TICKTOLERANCE 20.0 sets the tick tolerance to 20%.

US:B1:SENT:TICKTOLERANCE? might return

:BUS:B1:SENT:TICKTOLERANCE 22.5 to indicate the tolerance is set to 22.5%.

BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:CLOCk:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the clock source for the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-SMBUS

Group Bus

2-358 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:CLOCk:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:CLOCk:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the bus number.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source for the data signal, where <x>
is the channel number.
MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the source for the data signal, where <x> is
the math waveform number.
REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source for the data signal, where
<x> is the reference waveform number.

Examples BUS:B1:SMBUS:CLOCk:SOUrce CH5 sets the Bus 1 clock source to channel 5.

BUS:B1:SMBUS:CLOCk:SOUrce? might return

:BUS:B1:SMBUS:CLOCk:SOUrce CH5, indicating the Bus 1 clock source is
channel 5.

BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:CLOCk:THReshold
This command sets or queries the SMBUS clock source threshold for the specified
bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-SMBUS

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:CLOCk:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:CLOCk:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the bus number.

<NR3> specifies the SMBUS clock threshold for the specified bus. The valid
range is -8V to +8V.

Examples BUS:B1:SMBUS:CLOCk:THReshold 1.0 sets the Bus 1 SMBUS clock

threshold to 1.0 V.
BUS:B1:SMBUS:CLOCk:THReshold? might return
:BUS:B1:SMBUS:CLOCk:THReshold 1.0, indicating the Bus 1 SMBUS
clock threshold is 1.0 V.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-359

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:DATA:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the data source for the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-SMBUS

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:DATA:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:DATA:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the bus number.

Examples BUS:B1:SMBUS:DATA:SOUrce CH5 sets the Bus 1 data source to channel 5.

BUS:B1:SMBUS:DATA:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:SMBUS:DATA:SOUrce

CH5, indicating the Bus 1 data source is channel 5.

BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:DATA:THReshold
This command sets or queries the SMBUS data source threshold for the specified
bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-SMBUS

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:DATA:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:DATA:THReshold?

2-360 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the bus number.

<NR3> specifies the SMBUS data threshold for the specified bus. The valid range
is -8V to +8V.

Examples BUS:B1:SMBUS:DATA:THReshold 1.0 sets the Bus 1 SMBUS data threshold

to 1.0 V.
BUS:B1:SMBUS:DATA:THReshold? might return
:BUS:B1:SMBUS:DATA:THReshold 1.0, indicating the Bus 1 SMBUS data
threshold is 1.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:PEC:VALUe
This command sets or queries the SMBus PEC selection for the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-SMBUS

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:PEC:VALUe {TRUe|FALSe}

BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:PEC:VALUe?

Arguments B<x> is the bus number.

TRUe specifies the SMBus PEC selection as true.

FALSe specifies the SMBus PEC selection as false.

Examples BUS:B1:SMBUS:PEC:VALUe TRUe sets the PEC checkbox selection to true.

BUS:B1:SMBUS:PEC:VALUe? might return :BUS:B1:SMBUS:PEC:VALUe

TRUe, indicating the PEC checkbox selection is true.

BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:BITRate
This command sets or queries the SpaceWire bit rate.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPACEWIRE

Group Bus

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-361

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:BITRate <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:BITRate?

Arguments B<x> is the bus number.

NR3 specifies the SpaceWire bit rate for the specified bus. The valid bit rate range
is 2 Mbps to 200 Mbps. The default value is 10 Mbps.

Examples BUS:B1:SPACEWIRe:BITRate 10000000 sets the bit rate to 10 Mbps.

BUS:B1:SPACEWIRe:BITRate? might return :BUS:B1:SPACEWIRe:BITRate

RATE189K, indicating that the bit rate is set to 10 Mbps.

BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:DATa:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the source of the SpaceWire Data signal for the
specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPACEWIRE

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:DATa:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:DATa:SOUrce?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:DATa:THReshold

Arguments B<x> is the bus number.

Examples BUS:B1:SPACEWIRe:DATa:SOUrce Ch5 sets the Bus 1 DATa source to channel

2-362 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B3:SPACEWIRe:DATa:SOUrce? might return

BUS:B3:SPACEWIRe:DATa:SOUrce MATH2, indicating the DATa source for
Bus 3 is set to Math waveform 2.

BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:DATa:THReshold
This command sets or queries the threshold of the SpaceWire Data signal for
the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPACEWIRE

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:DATa:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:DATa:THReshold?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:DATa:SOUrce

Arguments B<x> is the bus number.

NR3 specifies the SpaceWire Data threshold level for the specified bus, in volts.

Examples BUS:B1:SPACEWIRe:DATa:THReshold 2.0 sets the Bus 1 DATa source

threshold to 2.0 V.
BUS:B3:SPACEWIRe:DATa:THReshold? might return
BUS:B3:SPACEWIRe:DATa:THReshold 978.00000E-3, indicating
the DATa source threshold level for Bus 3 is set to 978.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:DECode:TYPe
This command sets or queries the decode type for SpaceWire bus decode.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPACEWIRE

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:DECode:TYPe {STRObe|DATARate}

BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:DECode:TYPe?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-363

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the bus number.

STRObe specifies the decode type as strobe.

DATARate specifies the decode type as data rate.

Examples BUS:B1:SPACEWIRe:DECode:TYPe STRobe sets the decode type as strobe.

BUS:B1:SPACEWIRe:DECode:TYPe? might return

:BUS:B1:SPACEWIRe:DECode:TYPe Strobe, indicating the decode type
is strobe.

BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:STRobe:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the source of the SpaceWire Strobe signal for the
specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPACEWIRE

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:STRobe:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:STRobe:SOUrce?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:STRobe:THReshold

Arguments B<x> is the bus number.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source for the strobe signal, where <x>
is the channel number.
MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the source for the strobe signal, where <x>
is the math waveform number.
REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source for the strobe signal, where
<x> is the reference waveform number.

Examples BUS:B1:SPACEWIRe:STRobe:SOUrce Ch5 sets the Bus 1 Strobe source to

channel 5.
BUS:B3:SPACEWIRe:STRobe:SOUrce? might return
BUS:B3:SPACEWIRe:STRobe:SOUrce MATH2, indicating the Strobe
source for Bus 3 is set to Math waveform 2.

2-364 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:STRobe:THReshold
This command sets or queries the threshold level of the SpaceWire Strobe signal
for the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPACEWIRE

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:STRobe:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:STRobe:THReshold?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:STRobe:SOUrce

Arguments B<x> is the bus number.

NR3 specifies the SpaceWire Strobe signal threshold level for the specified bus,
in volts.

Examples BUS:B4:SPACEWIRe:STRobe:THReshold 1.2 sets the Bus 4 Strobe source

threshold to 1.2 V.
BUS:B1:SPACEWIRe:STRobe:THReshold? might return
BUS:B1:SPACEWIRe:STRobe:THReshold 950.00000E-3,
indicating the Strobe source threshold level for bus 1 is set to 950.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:SYNC
This command sets or queries sync for SpaceWire decoding.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPACEWIRE

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:SYNC {DATA|NULL|AUTO|CUSTom}

BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:SYNC?

Arguments B<x> is the bus number.

DATA specifies sync as data.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-365

Commands listed in alphabetical order

NULL specifies sync as null.

AUTO specifies sync as auto.

CUSTom specifies sync as custom.

Examples BUS:B1:SPACEWIRe:SYNC NULL sets the sync to null.

BUS:B1:SPACEWIRe:SYNC? might return :BUS:B1:SPACEWIRe:SYNC NULL,

indicating the sync is set to null.

BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:SYNC:COUnt
This command sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes to be used
for a SpaceWire sync bytes.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPACEWIRE

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:SYNC:COUnt <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:SYNC:COUnt?

Arguments B<x> is the bus number.

NR1 specifies the length of the data string in bytes. The mininum is 2 and the
maximum is 10. The default is 2 bytes.

Examples BUS:B1:SPACEWIRe:SYNC:COUnt 3 sets the count to 3.

BUS:B1:SPACEWIRe:SYNC:COUnt? might return

:BUS:B1:SPACEWIRe:SYNC:COUnt 3, indicating the count is 3.

BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:SYNC:PATTern
This command sets or queries sync pattern for SpaceWire decoding.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPACEWIRE

Group Bus

2-366 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:SYNC:PATTern <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:SYNC:PATTern?

Arguments B<x> is the bus number.

NR3 specifies the sync pattern.

Examples BUS:B1:SPACEWIRe:SYNC:PATTern N N sets the sync pattern to N N.

BUS:B1:SPACEWIRe:SYNC:PATTern? might return

:BUS:B1:SPACEWIRe:SYNC:PATTern N N, indicating the Bus 1 SpaceWire
pattern to be N N.

BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:SYNC:VALUe
This command sets or queries sync value for sync option data.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPACEWIRE

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:SYNC:VALUe <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:SYNC:VALUe?

Arguments B<x> is the bus number.

NR3 specifies the sync value for sync option data.

Examples BUS:B1:SPACEWIRe:SYNC:VALUe D-00 D-00 sets the sync value to D-00

D-00.
BUS:B1:SPACEWIRe:SYNC:VALUe? might return
:BUS:B1:SPACEWIRe:SYNC:VALUe D-00 D-00, indicating the Bus 1
SpaceWire sync value is D-00 D-00.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:BITOrder
This command sets or queries the SPI bit order for the specified bus. The bus
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-367

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:BITOrder {LSB|MSB}

BUS:B<x>:SPI:BITOrder?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

LSB specifies that each bit becomes the recovered value's new LSB, after shifting
previously recovered bits one place to the left. The decoding happens right to left.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:BITORDER LSB sets each bit order for the SPI Bus 1 to LSB.

BUS:B1:SPI:BITORDER? might return BUS:B1:SPI:BITORDER MSB,

indicating that the bit order for the SPI Bus 1 is set to MSB.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:POLarity
This command sets or queries the SPI clock (SCLK) source polarity for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:POLarity {FALL|RISE}

BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:POLarity?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:SOUrce

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

FALL sets the clock to the falling edge of the signal.

RISE sets the clock to the rising edge of the signal.

2-368 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:CLOCK:POLARITY FALL sets the SPI clock polarity to the falling
edge for the Bus 1.
BUS:B1:SPI:CLOCK:POLARITY? might return
BUS:B1:SPI:CLOCK:POLARITY RISE, indicating that the SPI clock polarity for
the Bus 1 is set to the rising edge.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the SPI clock (SCLK) source for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:SOUrce
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:SOUrce?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:POLarity

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

CH<x> designates an analog channel as the bus SPI clock source.

CH<x>_D<x> designates an digital channel as the bus SPI clock source.

MATH<x> designates a math waveform as the clock source.

REF<x> designates a reference waveform as the clock source.

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the clock source

waveform for the specified SPI bus.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:CLOCK:SOURCE CH5 sets the SPI clock source for the Bus 1 to
CH5.
BUS:B1:SPI:CLOCK:SOURCE? might return BUS:B1:SPI:CLOCK:SOURCE
MATH1, indicating that the SPI clock source for the Bus 1 is set to MATH1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-369

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:THReshold
This command sets or queries the SPI Clock (SCLK) source threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> is the SPI Clock (SCLK) source threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:CLOCk:THReshold 50.0e-3 sets the threshold to 50.0 mV.

BUS:B1:SPI:CLOCk:THReshold? might return

BUS:B1:SPI:CLOCK:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0, indicating the threshold is set to
0.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:POLarity
This command sets or queries the SPI Data (Data) source polarity for the bus
number specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:POLarity {HIGH|LOW}

BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:POLarity?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

HIGH sets the SPI data polarity to active high.

LOW sets the SPI data polarity to active low.

2-370 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B4:SPI:DATA:POLARITY HIGH sets the SPI data polarity for the Bus
4 to active high.
BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:POLARITY? might return BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:POLARITY
LOW, indicating that the SPI SDA polarity for the Bus 1 is set to active low.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the number of bits per word for the specified SPI
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR1> is the data size for the specified bus. The minimum value is 2 and
maximum is 32.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:SIZE 7 sets the data size for SPI Bus 1 to seven bits per
word.
BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:SIZE? might return BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:SIZE 8,
indicating that the data size for SPI Bus 1 is set to eight bits per word.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the SPI Data (Data) source for the bus number
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SOUrce
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SOUrce?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-371

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

CH<x> designates an analog channel as the data source for the specified SPI bus.

CH<x>_D<x> designates an digital channel as the bus SPI clock source.

MATH<x> designates a math waveform as the data source.

REF<x> designates a reference waveform as the data source.

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the data source waveform

for the specified SPI bus.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:SOURCE CH2 sets the SPI data source for the Bus 1 to CH2.

BUS:B3:SPI:DATA:SOURCE? might return BUS:B3:SPI:DATA:SOURCE CH3,

indicating that the SPI data source for the Bus 3 is set to CH3.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:THReshold
This command sets or queries the SPI Data (Data) source threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> is the SPI Data (SDA) source threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:DATa:THReshold 50.0e-3 sets the threshold to 50.0 mV.

BUS:B1:SPI:DATa:THReshold? might return

BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0 indicating the threshold is set to 0.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:FRAMING
This command sets or queries the SPI framing setting for the specified bus. The
bus number is specified by x.

2-372 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:FRAMING {IDLE|SS}

BUS:B<x>:SPI:FRAMING?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

IDLE specifies IDLE SPI framing.

SS specifies SS SPI framing.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:FRAMING IDLE sets the SPI framing to IDLE.

BUS:B1:SPI:FRAMING? might return BUS:B1:SPI:FRAMING SS, indicating

that the SPI framing is set to SS.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:IDLETime
This command sets or queries the SPI idle time for the specified bus. The bus
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:IDLETime <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SPI:IDLETime?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> specifies the SPI idle time.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:IDLETime 0.000004 sets the idle time to 4 μs.

BUS:B1:SPI:IDLETime? might return BUS:B1:SPI:IDLETIME 5.0000E-6,

indicating that the idle time is set to 5 μs.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-373

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:DATa:POLarity
This command sets or queries the SPI MISo Data source polarity for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:DATa:POLarity {HIGH|LOW}

BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:DATa:POLarity?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

HIGH sets the polarity to high.

LOW sets the polarity to low.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:MISo:DATa:POLarity HIGH sets the SPI MISo data polarity

to high.
BUS:B1:SPI:MISo:DATa:POLarity? might return
BUS:B1:SPI:MISo:DATa:POLarity HIGH, indicating that the SPI MISo
data polarity is high.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:INPut
This command sets or queries the SPI MISo source for the specified bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:INPut {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:INPut?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

CH<x> designates an analog channel as the source.

MATH<x> designates a math waveform as the source.

2-374 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

REF<x> designates a reference waveform as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:MISo:INPut Ch5 sets the source to channel 5.

BUS:B1:SPI:MISo:INPut? might return BUS:B1:SPI:MISo:INPut HIGH,

indicating the source is set to channel 5.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:THReshold
This command sets or queries the SPI MISo Data source threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> is the SPI MISo Data source threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:MISo:THReshold 1.0 sets the Bus 1 SPI MISo threshold to

1.0 V.
BUS:B1:SPI:MISo:THReshold? might return
:BUS:B1:SPI:MISo:THReshold 225.00000E-3, indicates the Bus 1 SPI
MISo threshold is set to 225.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:DATa:POLarity
This command sets or queries the SPI MOSI source polarity for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPI.

Group Bus

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-375

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:DATa:POLarity {HIGH|LOW}

BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:DATa:POLarity?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

HIGH sets the polarity to high.

LOW sets the polarity to low.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:MOSi:DATa:POLarity HIGH sets the SPI MOSI data polarity

to high.
BUS:B1:SPI:MOSi:DATa:POLarity? might return
:BUS:B1:SPI:MOSi:DATa:POLarity HIGH, indicating that the SPI MOSI
data polarity is high.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:INPut
This command sets or queries the SPI MOSI source for the specified bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:INPut {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:INPut?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

CH<x> designates an analog channel as the source.

MATH<x> designates a math waveform as the source.

REF<x> designates a reference waveform as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:MOSi:INPut Ch5 sets the source to channel 5.

BUS:B1:SPI:MOSi:INPut? might return :BUS:B1:SPI:MOSi:INPut HIGH,

indicating the source is set to channel 5.

2-376 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:THReshold
This command sets or queries the SPI MOSI source thresold for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> is the SPI MOSI Data source threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:MOSi:THReshold 1.0 sets the Bus 1 SPI MOSI threshold to

1.0 V.
BUS:B1:SPI:MOSi:THReshold? might return
:BUS:B1:SPI:MOSi:THReshold 225.00000E-3, indicates the Bus 1 SPI
MOSI threshold is set to 225.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:NUMBer:INputs
This command sets or queries the number of inputs for the specified bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:NUMBer:INputs {ONE|TWO}

BUS:B<x>:SPI:NUMBer:INputs?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

ONE sets the Data Inputs as one.

TWO sets the Data Inputs as two.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-377

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:NUMBer:INputs TWO sets the Data Inputs as two.

BUS:B1:SPI:NUMBer:INputs? might return :BUS:B1:SPI:NUMBer:INputs

TWO, indicating that the Data Inputs is two.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:POLarity
This command sets or queries the SPI Slave Select (SS) polarity for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:POLarity {LOW|HIGH}

BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:POLarity?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:SOUrce

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

LOW sets an active low polarity.

HIGH sets an active high polarity.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:SELECT:POLARITY HIGH sets the SPI Slave Select polarity for
the bus B1 to active high.
BUS:B1:SPI:SELECT:POLARITY? might return
BUS:B1:SPI:SELECT:POLARITY HIGH, indicating that the SPI Slave Select
polarity for the bus B1 is set to active high.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the SPI Slave Select (SS) source for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD.

Group Bus

2-378 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:SOUrce
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:SOUrce?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:POLarity

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

CH<x> designates an analog channel as the buses' SPI Slave Select source.

CH<x>_D<x> designates a digital channel as the buses' SPI Slave Select source.

MATH<x> designates a math waveform as the Slave Select source.

REF<x> designates a reference waveform as the Slave Select source.

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the clock source

waveform for the specified SPI bus.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:SELECT:SOURCE MATH3 sets the SPI Slave Select source for
the bus B1 to MATH3.
BUS:B1:SPI:SELECT:SOURCE? might return BUS:B1:SPI:SELECT:SOURCE
CH3, indicating that the SPI Slave Select source for the bus B1 is set to CH3.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:THReshold
This command sets or queries the SPI Select (SS) source threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> is the SPI Select (SS) source threshold for the specified bus.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-379

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:SELect:THReshold 50.0e-3 sets the threshold to 50.0 mV.

BUS:B1:SPI:SELect:THReshold? might return

BUS:B1:SPI:SELECT:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0, indicating the threshold is set to
0.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SCLk:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the SPMI Clock (SCLK) source for the specified
bus.

Conditions Requires option SRPM

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SCLk:SOUrce {CH<x>|CH<x>_Dx>|

MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SCLk:SOUrce?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SDATa:SOUrce

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the clock source waveform for the SPMI bus.

CH<x>_Dx> specifies a digital channel and bit as the clock source waveform for
the specified SPMI bus.
MATH<x> specifies a math waveform as the clock source waveform for the
specified SPMI bus.
REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the clock source waveform for the
specified SPMI bus.
REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform and bit as the clock source
waveform for the specified SPMI bus.

Examples BUS:B1:SPMI:SCLk:SOUrce CH1_D1 sets D1 of channel 1 as the clock source

for the SPMI bus B1.
BUS:B1:SPMI:SCLk:SOUrce? might return BUS:B3:SPMI:SCLk:SOUrce
CH3, indicating that the data source for bus B3 is set to channel 3.

2-380 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SCLk:THReshold
This command sets or queries the SPMI Clock (SCLK) source threshold for the
specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SRPM

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SCLk:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SCLk:THReshold?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:CONDition

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> is the clock (SCLK) source threshold value for the specified SPMI bus.

Examples BUS:B3:SPMI:SCLK:THRESHOLD 500.0E-3 sets the Bus3 clock source

threshold to 500.0 mV.
BUS:B1:SPMI:SCLK:THRESHOLD? might return
BUS:B1:SPMI:SCLK:THRESHOLD 250.0E-3 to indicate Bus1 clock threshold
is set to 250.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SDATa:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the SPMI Data (SDATA) source for the specified
bus.

Conditions Requires option SRPM

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SDATa:SOUrce {CH<x>|CH<x>_Dx>|

MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SDATa:SOUrce?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SCLk:SOUrce

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-381

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the data source waveform for the SPMI bus.

CH<x>_Dx> specifies a digital channel and bit as the data source waveform for
the specified SPMI bus.
MATH<x> specifies a math waveform as the data source waveform for the specified
SPMI bus.
REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the data source waveform for the
specified SPMI bus.
REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform and bit as the data source
waveform for the specified SPMI bus.

Examples BUS:B4:SPMI:SDATa:SOUrce CH1_D2 sets bit D2 of digital channel 1 as the

data source for the SPMI bus B4.
BUS:B1:SPMI:SCLk:SOUrce? might return BUS:B3:SPMI:SCLk:SOUrce
CH5 indicating that the data source is set to channel 5 for bus B3.

BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SDATa:THReshold
This command sets or queries the SPMI Data (SDATA) source threshold for the
specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SRPM

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SDATa:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SDATa:THReshold?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:CONDition

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> is the data (SDATA) source threshold value for the specified SPMI bus.

Examples BUS:B2:SPMI:SDATA:THRESHOLD 400.0E-3 sets Bus2 data source threshold

to 400.0 mV.

2-382 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B1:SPMI:SDATA:THRESHOLD? might return

BUS:B1:SPMI:SDATA:THRESHOLD 220.0E-3 to indicate that Bus1 data
source threshold is set to 220.0 mV

BUS:B<x>:SVID:ALERT:SOUrce
This command sets or queries alert source channel for the specified SVID bus.
The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SVID

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SVID:ALERT:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:SVID:ALERT:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the data source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the data source.

REF<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the data source.

Examples BUS:B1:SVID:ALERT:SOUrce CH5 sets the source to channel 5.

BUS:B1:SVID:ALERT:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:SVID:ALERT:SOUrce

CH5, indicating the source is set to channel 5.

BUS:B<x>:SVID:ALERT:THReshold
This command sets or queries the alert threshold for the specified SVID bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SVID

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SVID:ALERT:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SVID:ALERT:THReshold?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-383

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> is the SVID Strobe threshold for the specified bus. The argument range
is -8V to +8V

Examples BUS:B1:SVID:ALERT:THReshold 0.6 sets the Bus 1 SVID threshold to 600

mV.
BUS:B1:SVID:ALERT:THReshold? might return
:BUS:B1:SVID:ALERT:THReshold 600.00000E-3, indicates the Bus 1 SVID
threshold is set to 600 mV.

BUS:B<x>:SVID:CLOCk:SOUrce
This command sets or queries clock source channel for the specified SVID bus.
The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SVID

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SVID:CLOCk:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:SVID:CLOCk:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the source.

REF<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:SVID:CLOCk:SOUrce CH3 sets the source to channel 3.

BUS:B1:SVID:CLOCk:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:SVID:CLOCk:SOUrce

CH3, indicating the source is set to channel 3.

BUS:B<x>:SVID:CLOCk:THReshold
This command sets or queries the clock threshold for the specified SVID bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SVID

2-384 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SVID:CLOCk:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SVID:CLOCk:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> is the SVID Strobe threshold for the specified bus. The argument range
is -8V to +8V

Examples BUS:B1:SVID:CLOCk:THReshold 1.0 sets the Bus 1 SVID threshold to 1.0 V.

BUS:B1:SVID:CLOCk:THReshold? might return

:BUS:B1:SVID:CLOCk:THReshold 1.0000, indicates the Bus 1 SVID
threshold is set to 1V.

BUS:B<x>:SVID:DATA:SOUrce
This command sets or queries data source channel for the specified SVID bus.
The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SVID

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SVID:DATA:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:SVID:DATA:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the source.

REF<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:SVID:DATA:SOUrce CH4 sets the source to channel 4.

BUS:B1:SVID:DATA:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:SVID:DATA:SOUrce

CH4, indicating the source is set to channel 4.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-385

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:SVID:DATA:THReshold
This command sets or queries the data threshold for the specified SVID bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SVID

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SVID:DATA:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SVID:DATA:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> is the SVID Strobe threshold for the specified bus. The argument range
is -8V to +8V

Examples BUS:B1:SVID:DATA:THReshold 0.25 sets the Bus 1 SVID threshold to 250

mV.
BUS:B1:SVID:DATA:THReshold? might return
:BUS:B1:SVID:DATA:THReshold 250.00000E-3, indicates the Bus 1 SVID
threshold is set to 250 mV.

BUS:B<x>:TYPe
This command sets or queries the bus type or standard for the specified bus.
The bus is specified by x. Arguments for a bus type are only available then the
required serial bus option is installed.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:TYPe {ARINC429| AUDio| CAN| ETHernet| EUSB|

FLEXRAY| I2C| I3C| LIN| MDIO| MIL1553B| PARallel| RS232C|
SENT| SPI| SPMI| SVID| USB}
BUS:B<x>:TYPe?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

ARINC429 specifies the ARINC 429 avionics serial bus.

AUDio specifies an audio bus.

2-386 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

CAN specifies a Controller Area Network bus.

ETHernet specifies the Ethernet bus.

EUSB specifies a eUSB bus. Requires option SR-EUSB2.

FLEXRAY specifies a FlexRay bus.

I2C specifies the Inter-IC bus.

I3C specifies the MIPI Improved Inter Integrated Circuit (I3C) bus.

LIN specifies a Local Interconnect Network bus.

MDIO specifies a MDIO bus.

MIL1553B specifies the MIL-STD-1553 avionics serial bus.

PARallel specifies a parallel bus.

RS232C specifies the RS-232 Serial bus.

SENT specifies the Single Edge Nibble Transmission (SENT) automotive serial
bus.
SPI specifies the Serial Peripheral Interface bus.

SPMI Specifies a System Power Management Interface bus

SVID Specifies a Serial VID bus

USB specifies the Universal Serial bus.

Examples BUS:B1:TYPE I2C sets the bus B1 type to I2C.

BUS:B1:TYPE? might return BUS:B1:TYPE SPI, indicating that the bus B1 type
is set to SPI and that the bus behavior is governed by the BUS:B1:SPI:xxxx
commands.

BUS:B<x>:USB:BITRate
This command sets or queries the USB data rate for bus <x>, where the bus
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-USB2 or SR-USB3.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:USB:BITRate {FULL|HIGH|LOW|USB3O}

BUS:B<x>:USB:BITRate?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-387

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

FULL indicates the bit rate is 12 Mbps.

HIGH indicates the bit rate is 480 Mbps.

LOW indicates the bit rate is 1.5 Mbps.

USB3O indicates the bit rate is USB 3.0 (5 Gbps). Requires option SR-USB3.

Examples BUS:B1:USB:BITRATE FULL sets the bit rate to 12 Mbps.

BUS:B1:USB:BITRATE? might return BUS:B1:USB:BITRATE LOW, indicating

that the bit rate is 1.5 Mbps.

BUS:B<x>:USB:DATAMINUSTHRESHold
This command sets or queries the USB D- source threshold for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-USB2.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:USB:DATAMINUSTHRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:USB:DATAMINUSTHRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> is the Minus threshold.

Examples BUS:B1:USB:DATAMINUSTHRESHold 50.0e-3 sets the threshold to 50.0 mV.

BUS:B1:USB:DATAMINUSTHRESHold? might return

BUS:B1:USB:DATAMINUSTHRESHOLD 0.0E+0 indicating the threshold is
set to 0.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:USB:DATAPLUSTHRESHold
This command sets or queries the USB D+ source threshold for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-USB2.

2-388 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:USB:DATAPLUSTHRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:USB:DATAPLUSTHRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> is the Plus threshold.

Examples BUS:B1:USB:DATAPLUSTHRESHold 50.0e-3 sets the threshold to 50.0 mV.

BUS:B1:USB:DATAPLUSTHRESHold? might return

BUS:B1:USB:DATAPLUSTHRESHOLD 0.0E+0 indicating the threshold is set to
0.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:USB:DISplaymode
This command sets or queries the USB bus packet view. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-USB3.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:USB:DISplaymode {ON|OFF}

BUS:B<x>:USB:DISplaymode?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

ON sets the packet view for the decode to on.

OFF sets the packet view for the decode to off.

Examples BUS:B1:USB:DISplaymode OFF sets the packet view to off.

BUS:B1:USB:DISplaymode? might return BUS:B1:USB:DISplaymode OFF

indicating that packet view is set to off.

BUS:B<x>:USB:LOWTHRESHold
This command sets or queries the USB data source threshold for the specified bus
when the signal type is differential. The bus is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-389

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-USB2.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:USB:LOWTHRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:USB:LOWTHRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> is the Low threshold.

Examples BUS:B1:USB:LOWTHRESHold 50.0e-3 sets the threshold to 50.0 mV.

BUS:B1:USB:LOWTHRESHold? might return BUS:B1:USB:LOWTHRESHOLD

0.0E+0 indicating the threshold is set to 0.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:USB:SIGNALTYpe
This command sets or queries the USB signal type for the specified bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-USB2.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:USB:SIGNALTYpe {SINGLE|DIFF}

BUS:B<x>:USB:SIGNALTYpe?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

SINGLE specifies single-ended signals.

DIFF specifies differential signals.

Examples BUS:B1:USB:SIGNALTYpe SINGLE specifies single-ended signals.

BUS:B1:USB:SIGNALTYpe? might return BUS:B1:USB:SIGNALTYPE DIFF

indicating the signal type is differential.

2-390 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:USB:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the USB data source when the signal type is
differential for bus <x>. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-USB2.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:USB:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

BUS:B<x>:USB:SOUrce?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:USB:SOUrce:DMINus

BUS:B<x>:USB:SOUrce:DPLUs

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the data source for the specified USB bus.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the data source for the specified USB bus.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the data source.

Examples BUS:B1:USB:SOURCE D2 sets the USB data source for bus B1 to D2.

BUS:B1:USB:SOURCE? might return BUS:B1:USB:SOURCE D3, indicating that

the USB data source for bus B1 is D3.

BUS:B<x>:USB:SOUrce:DMINus
This command sets or queries the USB D- (SDATAMINUS) source for bus <x>
when the signal type is single ended. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-USB2.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:USB:SOUrce:DMINus
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:USB:SOUrce:DMINus?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-391

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:USB:SOUrce

BUS:B<x>:USB:SOUrce:DPLUs
BUS:B<x>:USB:SIGNALTYpe

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the D- source for the specified USB bus.

CH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel as the D- source for the specified USB
bus.
MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the D- source for the specified USB bus.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the clock source

waveform for the specified USB bus.

Examples BUS:B1:USB:SOURCE:DMINUS CH2 sets the USB Data Source for D- input
to CH2.
BUS:B1:USB:SOURCE:DMINUS? might return BUS:B1:USB:SOURCE:DMINUS
CH4, indicating that CH4 is set to be the D- input for USB data.

BUS:B<x>:USB:SOUrce:DPLUs
This command sets or queries the USB dataPlus (SDATAPLUS) source for the
specified bus when the signal type is single ended. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-USB2.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:USB:SOUrce:DPLUs
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:USB:SOUrce:DPLUs?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:USB:SOUrce

BUS:B<x>:USB:SOUrce:DMINus
BUS:B<x>:USB:SIGNALTYpe

2-392 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the D+ source for the specified USB bus

CH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel as the D+ source for the specified USB
bus
MATH<x> specifies a math channel as the D+ source for the specified USB bus.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source.

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the clock source

waveform for the specified USB bus.

Examples BUS:B1:USB:SOURCE:DPLUS CH2 sets the USB Data Source for D+ input to
CH2.
BUS:B1:USB:SOURCE:DPLUS? might return BUS:B1:USB:SOURCE:DPLUS
CH3, indicating that CH3 is set to be the D+ input for USB data.

BUS:B<x>:USB:THRESHold
This command sets or queries the USB DATA source High threshold for the
specified bus when the signal source is differential. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-USB2.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:USB:THRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:USB:THRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> is the USB DATA source High threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:USB:THRESHold 50.0e-3 sets the threshold to 50.0 mV.

BUS:B1:USB:THRESHold? might return BUS:B1:USB:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0

indicating the threshold is set to 0.0 V.

BUS:DELete (No Query Form)

This command deletes the specified bus.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-393

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:DELete <QString>

Arguments <QString> specifies the bus to delete and is of the form "B<NR1>", where
<NR1> is ≥1.

Examples BUS:DELETE B1 deletes bus B1.

BUS:LIST? (Query Only)

This query returns a comma separated list of all currently defined buses.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:LIST?

Returns Returns all currently defined buses.

Examples BUS:LIST? might return BUS:LIST B1,B4 indicating the bus 1 and bus 4 are
defined.

BUSTABle:ADDNew (No Query Form)

Adds the specified bus table. Argument is of the form "TABLE<NR1>", where
<NR1> is ≥1).

Group Bus

Syntax BUSTABle:ADDNew <QString>

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that is the name of the new bus table.

Examples BUSTABLE:ADDNEW "Table1" adds bus table Table1.

2-394 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUSTABle:DELete (No Query Form)

Deletes the specified bus table. Argument is of the form "TABLE<NR1>", where
<NR1> is ≥1).

Group Bus

Syntax BUSTABle:DELete <QString>

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that is the name of the bus table to delete.

Examples BUSTABLE:DELETE "Table1" deletes bus table Table1.

BUSTABle:LIST? (Query Only)

This query lists all currently defined bus tables.

Group Bus

Syntax BUSTABle:LIST?

Returns Returns a list of all currently defined bus tables.

Examples BUSTABLE:LIST? might return BUSTABLE:LIST TABLE1 indicating TABLE1

is currently the only defined bus table.

BUSY? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the status of the instrument. This command
allows you to synchronize the operation of the instrument with your application
program.

Group Status and Error

Syntax BUSY?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-395

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands *OPC

*WAI

Returns <NR1> = 0 means that the instrument is not busy processing a command whose
execution time is extensive.
<NR1> = 1 means that the instrument is busy processing Commands that Generate
an OPC Message(See Table 3-3.).

Examples BUSY? might return BUSY 1, indicating that the instrument is currently busy.

*CAL? (Query Only)

This query-only command starts signal path calibration (SPC) and returns the
status upon completion.

NOTE. When running SPC through the remote interface, calibration status cannot
be obtained until after the SPC completes. SPC takes approximately 15 minutes
per channel which means a total of 2 hours on an 8-channel model. Any remote
command that performs an action on the instrument is also disabled until the
SPC is complete.

Group Calibration

Syntax *CAL?

Returns 0 indicates SPC passed.

-1 indicates SPC failed or did not complete.

Examples *CAL? starts the signal path calibration and returns the status upon completion.

CALibrate? (Query Only)

This query returns the status of signal path calibration.

NOTE. When running SPC through the remote interface, calibration status cannot
be obtained until after the SPC completes, which can take several minutes.

2-396 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Calibration

Syntax CALibrate?

Examples CALIBRATE? might return CALIBRATE:INTERNAL:STATUS PASS, indicating

the calibration status.

CALibrate:INTERNal (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) starts the signal path calibration (SPC) of the
instrument. You can use the CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus? query to return the
current status of the signal path calibration of the instrument.

Group Calibration

Syntax CALibrate:INTERNal

Related Commands CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus?

Examples CALIBRATE:INTERNAL starts the signal path calibration of the instrument.

CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) starts the signal path calibration (SPC) of the
analog channels. This command is the same as the CALibrate:INTERNal
command. You can use the CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus? query to return the
current status of the signal path calibration of the instrument.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-397

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Calibration

Syntax CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt

Related Commands CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus?

Examples CALIBRATE:INTERNAL:START starts the signal path calibration.

CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the current status of the signal path calibration.

Group Calibration

Syntax CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus?

Related Commands *CAL?

Returns This query will return one of the following:

INIT indicates the instrument has not had signal path calibration run. The
instrument may need to be readjusted at the Tektronix service center.
PASS indicates that the signal path calibration completed successfully.

FAIL indicates that the signal path calibration did not complete successfully.

TEMPDRIFT indicates that a signal path calibration is recommended due to

a temperature drift since the last signal path calibration. TEMPDRIFT is
notified if the temperature shifts more than ±4C. This return only applies to
6 Series MSO instruments.
WARMUP indicates that the instrument has been powered on for less than
20 minutes and has not reached a stable temperature yet. This return only
applies to 6 Series MSO instruments.

2-398 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples CALIBRATE:INTERNAL:STATUS? might return PASS, indicating that the current

status of the signal path calibration is that the signal path calibration completed
successfully.

CALibrate:PWRUpstatus? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the current status of the power-up calibration.

Group Calibration

Syntax CALibrate:PWRUpstatus?

Returns This query will return one of the following:

0 Indicating the power-up calibration failed.
1 Indicating the power-up calibration passed.

Examples CALIBRATE:PWRUPSTATUS? might return 0, indicating that the power-up

calibration failed.

CALLOUTS:ADDNew (No Query Form)

This command adds the specified callout. A Note is the default callout type.

Group Callouts

Syntax CALLOUTS:ADDNew <QString>

Arguments <QString> specifies the callout. The argument is of the form

"CALLOUT<NR1>", where <NR1> is a number value ≥ 1.

Examples CALLOUTS:ADDNew "CALLOUT1" creates a new callout named CALLOUT1.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:BOOKMark:SOURCE
This command sets or queries the source of the Bookmark callout type.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-399

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Callouts

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:BOOKMark:SOURCE {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4}

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:BOOKMark:SOURCE?

Arguments CH1 specifies the bookmark callout source as Ch1.

CH2 specifies the bookmark callout source as Ch2.

CH3 specifies the bookmark callout source as Ch3.

CH4 specifies the bookmark callout source as Ch4.

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:BOOKMark:SOURCE CH2 sets the bookmark callout

source as Ch2 for callout1.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:BOOKMark:SOURCE?, might return "CH1", indicating
that the bookmark callout source is Ch1.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:BOOKMark:XPOS
This command sets or queries the X-Position of the Bookmark callout type.

Group Callouts

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:BOOKMark:XPOS <NR1>

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:BOOKMark:XPOS?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the location of the bookmark linked to the source waveform
in X-axis.

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:BOOKMark:XPOS 9.28μs sets the bookmark callout

X-Position to 9.28 μs for callout1.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:BOOKMark:XPOS?, might return "9.28 μs", indicating
the bookmark callout X-Position is 9.28 μs.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:COLOR
This command sets or queries the text color of the callout.

Group Callouts

2-400 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:COLOR <QString>

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:COLOR?

Arguments <QString> specifies the callout text color using hexadecimal color values.

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:COLOR "#FF0000" sets the text color of callout 1 to red.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:COLOR?, might return "#FF0000", indicating the text

color is red.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:DISPLAYPOSition:X
This command sets or queries horizontal display position of the callout text.

Group Callouts

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:DISPLAYPOSition:X <NR1>

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:DISPLAYPOSition:X?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the callout horizontal display position.

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:DISPLAYPOSition:X 50 sets the callout text in the

center on the horizontal axis of the display on the scopeapp.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:DISPLAYPOSition:X?, might return "50", indicating
the callout text is in the center on the horizontal axis of the display on the scopeapp

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:DISPLAYPOSition:Y
This command sets or queries vertical display position of the callout text.

Group Callouts

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:DISPLAYPOSition:Y <NR1>

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:DISPLAYPOSition:Y?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the callout vertical display position.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-401

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:DISPLAYPOSition:Y 50 sets the callout text in the

center on the vertical axis of the display on the scopeapp.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:DISPLAYPOSition:Y?, might return "50", indicating
the callout text is in the center on the vertical axis of the display on the scopeapp

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:BOLD
This command sets or queries the bold state of the callout text.

Group Callouts

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:BOLD {1|0}

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:BOLD?

Arguments 1 specifies the callout font weight as bold.

0 specifies the callout font weight as normal.

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:FONT:BOLD 1 sets the font weight of callout1 to bold.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:FONT:BOLD?, might return "0", indicating the font

weight is set to normal.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:ITALIC
This command sets or queries the italic state of the callout text.

Group Callouts

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:ITALIC {1|0}

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:ITALIC?

Arguments 1 specifies the callout font style as italic.

0 does not specify the font style as italic.

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:FONT:ITALIC 1 sets the font style of callout1 to italic.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:FONT:ITALIC?, might return "0", indicating the font

style is not italic.

2-402 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:SIZE
This command sets or queries the font size of the callout text.

Group Callouts

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:SIZE <NR1>

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:SIZE?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the font size in points.

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:FONT:SIZE 11 sets the font size of callout1 to 11 points.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:FONT:SIZE?, might return "14", indicating the font

size is 14 points.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:TYPE
This command sets or queries type of the callout.

Group Callouts

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:TYPE <QString>

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:TYPE?

Arguments <QString> specifies the type of font for the callout text. The available font
types include: DejaVu Sans, DejaVu Sans Mono, DejaVu Serif, Frutiger LT Std,
Monospace, Sans Serif, Serif, Ubuntu, Ubuntu Condensed, and Ubuntu Mono.

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:FONT:TYPE "Serif" sets the font type of callout1 to

serif.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:FONT:TYPE?, might return "Monospace", indicating the
font type is monospace.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:UNDERLine
This command sets or queries the underline state of the callout text.

Group Callouts

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-403

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:UNDERLine {1|0}

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:UNDERLine?

Arguments 1 underlines the callout text.

0 does not underline the callout text.

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:FONT:UNDERLine 1 displays the text of callout 1 as

underlined.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:FONT:UNDERLine?, might return "0", indicating the
callout text is not underlined.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:TEXT
This command sets or queries the callout text.

Group Callouts

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:TEXT <QString>

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:TEXT?

Arguments <QString> specifies the callout text.

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:TEXT "Review measurements" sets the text for

callout 1 as "Review measurements".
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:TEXT?, might return "Review measurements",
indicating the text for callout 1 is "Review measurements".

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:TYPE
This command sets or queries type of the callout.

Group Callouts

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:TYPE {NOTE|ARROW|RECTANGLE|BOOKMARK}

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:TYPE?

2-404 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments NOTE specifies callout type as note.

ARROW specifies callout type as arrow.

RECTANGLE specifies callout type as rectangle.

BOOKMARK specifies callout type as bookmark.

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:TYPE NOTE sets the callout type of callout1 to note.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:TYPE?, might return "ARROW", indicating the callout

type is arrow.

CALLOUTS:DELete (No Query Form)

This command deletes the specified callout. A Note is the default callout type.

Group Callouts

Syntax CALLOUTS:DELete <QString>

Arguments <QString> specifies the callout. The argument is of the form

"CALLOUT<NR1>", where <NR1> is a number value ≥ 1.

Examples CALLOUTS:DELete "CALLOUT1" deletes the callout named CALLOUT1.

CH<x>? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the vertical parameters for the specified
channel. The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>?

Examples CH1? might return the following vertical parameters for channel 1:
"N/A";"N/A";PASSED;600.0000;DEFAULT;"V";100.0000E-3;0;0;10.0000E+6;DE

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-405

Commands listed in alphabetical order

CH<x>:BANdwidth
This command sets or queries the selectable low-pass bandwidth limit filter of
the specified channel. The channel is specified by x.
The query form of this command always returns the approximate realized
bandwidth of the channel.
Available arguments depend upon the instrument and the attached accessories.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:BANdwidth {<NR3>|FULl}

CH<x>:BANdwidth?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR3> is the desired bandwidth. The instrument rounds this value to an available
bandwidth using geometric rounding and then uses this value to set the upper
bandwidth.
FULl disables any optional bandwidth limiting. The specified channel operates at
its maximum bandwidth.

Examples CH1:BANDWIDTH 20 sets the bandwidth of Channel 1 to 20 MHz.

CH2:BANDWIDTH?, might return :CH2:BANDWIDTH 500.0000E+06, indicating

that there is bandwidth limiting on Channel 2.

CH<x>:BANdwidth:FILTer:OPTIMIZation
This command sets or queries the channel filter shape. The channel is specified
by x.

Conditions Only available on 6 Series MSO instruments.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:BANdwidth:FILTer:OPTIMIZation {STEPRESPONSE|FLATNESS}

CH<x>:BANdwidth:FILTer:OPTIMIZation?

2-406 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

STEPRESPONSE sets a Bessel-Thompson filter that minimizes overshoot with

a gradual rollof.

FLATNESS sets selects a brick-wall filter optimized for flatness within band with a
sharp rolloff. Flatness filtering is not compatible with Peak Detect and Envelope
acquisition modes..

Examples CH1:BANdwidth:FILTer:OPTIMIZation FLATNESS sets channel 1 filter

shape to Flatness.
CH1:BANdwidth:FILTer:OPTIMIZation?, might return
:CH1:BANdwidth:FILTer:OPTIMIZation FLATNESS, indicating
that the filter shape is Flatness for channel 2.

CH<x>:CLIPping? (Query Only)

Queries whether the specified channel’s input signal is clipping (exceeding) the
channel A/D converter range. The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:CLIPping?

Related Commands CH<x>:SCAle

CH<x>:POSition

Returns This query will return one of the following:

0 indicates the channel is not clipping.

1 indicates the channel is clipping.

Examples CH4:CLIPping? might return CH4:CLIPping? 1, indicating that the input

signal range is exceeding (clipping) the channel 4 A/D converter range.

CH<x>:COUPling
This command sets or queries the input coupling setting for the specified analog
channel. The channel is specified by x. The available arguments depend on the
attached accessories.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-407

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:COUPling {AC|DC|DCREJect}

CH<x>:COUPling?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

AC sets the specified channel to AC coupling.

DC sets the specified channel to DC coupling.

DCREJect sets DC Reject coupling when probes are attached that support that
feature.

Examples CH2:COUPLING AC sets Channel 2 coupling to AC.

CH3:COUPLING? might return :CH3:COUPLING DC, indicating that Channel 3

is set to DC coupling.

CH<x>:DESKew
This command sets or queries the horizontal deskew time for the specified
channel. The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:DESKew <NR3>

CH<x>:DESKew?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR3> is the deskew time for this channel, ranging from -125 ns to +125 ns with a
resolution of 40 ps. Out-of-range values are clipped.

Examples CH4:DESKEW 5.0E-9 sets the deskew time for Channel 4 to 5 ns.

CH2:DESKEW? might return CH2:DESKEW 2.0000E-09, indicating that the

deskew time for Channel 2 is set to 2 ns.

2-408 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

CH<x>:DITHERrange
This command sets or returns the amount of dithering for the specified analog
channel. The channel is specified by x. The amount of dithering is a percentage
of full scale (10 times volts/division).
Note: Setting this value to 0.0 for any unused channels may slightly improve
performance.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:DITHERrange <NR3>

Arguments <NR3> is the amount of dithering as a percentage of full scale. Must be between
0.0 and 100.0 and 0.0 disables dithering.

Examples CH1:DITHERrange 10 sets the amount of dithering as a percentage of full scale

to 10.
CH1:DITHERrange? might return CH1:DITHERrange 10, which if vertical
scale is 1V/div then the dithering amplitude will be 1 Vpk-pk.

CH<x>:INVert
This command sets or queries invert state of the specified channel. The channel
is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:INVert {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

CH<x>:INVert?

Arguments OFF turns off the channel invert.

ON turns on the channel invert.

<NR1> 0 turns off the channel invert; any other value turns on the channel invert.

Examples CH2:INVert OFF turns off the invert on channel 2.

CH2:INVert? might return CH2:INVert 1, indicating channel 2 is inverted.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-409

Commands listed in alphabetical order

CH<x>:LABel:COLor
This command sets or queries the color of the specified channel label. The
channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:LABel:COLor <QString>

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<QString> is the label color. To return the color to the default color, send an
empty string as in this example: CH5:LABEL:COLOR "".

Examples CH2:LABel:COLor "#FFFF00" sets the label color to yellow.

CH2:LABel:COLor? might return CH2:LABEL:COLOR "#FF0000" indicating

the color is red.

CH<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD
This command sets or queries the bold state of the specified channel label. The
channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

OFF argument turns off bold font.

ON argument turns on bold font.

<NR1> = 0 turns off bold font; any other value turns on bold font.

Examples CH2:LABel:FONT:BOLD OFF turns off the bold font.

CH2:LABel:FONT:BOLD? might return CH2:LABEL:FONT:BOLD 1 indicating a

bold font.

2-410 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

CH<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic
This command sets or queries the italic state of the specified channel label. The
channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

OFF argument turns off italic font.

ON argument turns on italic font.

<NR1> = 0 turns off italic font; any other value turns on italic font.

Examples CH2:LABel:FONT:ITALic ON set the font to italic.

CH2:LABel:FONT:ITALic? might return CH2:LABEL:FONT:ITALIC 0

indicating the font is not italic.

CH<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE
This command sets or queries the font size of the specified channel label. The
channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE <NR1>

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR1> is the font size.

Examples CH2:LABel:FONT:SIZE 16 sets the font size to 16 point size.

CH2:LABel:FONT:SIZE? might return CH2:LABEL:FONT:SIZE 20 indicating

a 20 point font size.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-411

Commands listed in alphabetical order

CH<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE
This command sets or queries the font type of the specified channel label, such as
Arial or Times New Roman. The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE <QString>

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<QString> is the specified font type.

Examples CH2:LABel:FONT:TYPE "Monospace" sets the font to a mono space font.

CH2:LABel:FONT:TYPE? might return CH2:LABEL:FONT:TYPE "Frutiger

LT Std 55 Roman".

CH<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline
This command sets or queries the underline state of the specified channel label.
The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

OFF argument turns off underlined font.

ON argument turns on underlined font.

<NR1> = 0 turns off underlined font; any other value turns on underlined font.

Examples CH2:LABel:FONT:UNDERline ON sets the font to underlined.

CH2:LABel:FONT:UNDERline? might return CH2:LABEL:FONT:UNDERLINE

0 indicating the font is not underlined.

2-412 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

CH<x>:LABel:NAMe
This command sets or queries the label attached to the displayed waveform for
the specified channel. The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:LABel:NAMe <QString>

CH<x>:LABel:NAMe?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<QString> is an alphanumeric character string, ranging from 1 through 32

characters in length.

Examples CH2:LABEL:NAME "Pressure" changes the waveform label for the Channel 2
waveform to “Pressure”.
CH3:LABEL:NAME? might return CH3:LABEL:NAME "Force", indicating that
the waveform label for the Channel 3 waveform is “Force”.

CH<x>:LABel:XPOS
This command sets or queries the X-position of the specified channel label. The
channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:LABel:XPOS <NR3>

CH<x>:LABel:XPOS?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR3> is the location (in pixels) where the waveform label for the selected
channel is displayed, relative to the left edge of the screen.

Examples CH3:LABEL:XPOS 5 moves the waveform label for Channel 3 so that it begins
5 pixels to the right of the left edge of the screen.
CH2:LABEL:XPOS? might return CH2:LABEL:XPOS 5, indicating that the
waveform label for the Channel 2 currently 5 pixels to the right of the left edge
of the screen.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-413

Commands listed in alphabetical order

CH<x>:LABel:YPOS
This command sets or queries the Y-position of the specified channel label. The
channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:LABel:YPOS <NR3>

CH<x>:LABel:YPOS?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR3> is the location (in pixels) where the waveform label for the selected
channel is displayed, relative to the baseline of the waveform. Positive values are
above the baseline and negative values are below.

Examples CH3:LABEl:YPOS -20 moves the waveform label for the Channel 3 20 pixels
below the baseline of the waveform.
CH2:LABEl:YPOS? might return CH2:LABEL:YPOS 0, indicating that the
waveform label for the Channel 2 is currently located at the baseline of the
waveform.

CH<x>:OFFSet
This command sets or queries the vertical offset for the specified analog channel.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:OFFSet <NR3>

CH<x>:OFFSet?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR3> is the offset value for the specified channel.

Examples CH3:OFFSET 2.0E-3 sets the offset for Channel 3 to 2 mV.

CH4:OFFSET? might return :CH4:OFFSET 1.0000E-03, indicating that the

offset for Channel 4 is set to 1 mV.

2-414 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

CH<x>:POSition
This command sets or queries the vertical position for the specified analog channel.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:POSition <NR1>

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR1> is the vertical position for the specified analog channel.

Examples CH2:POSition -2.0 sets the position to -2 divisions.

CH2:POSition? might return CH2:POSITION -2.2400 indicating the position

is -2.24 divisions.

CH<x>:PRObe? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns all information concerning the probe that is
attached to the specified channel. The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PRObe?

Related Commands CH<x>:PROBECal?

Examples CH2:PROBE? might return CH2:PROBE:GAIN 1.0000E-01; RESISTANCE

1.0000E+07;UNITS "V";ID:TYPE "10X"'SERNUMBER "N/A" for a 10X
probe, indicating that (among other parameters) the attenuation factor for the probe
attached to Channel 2 is 100.0 mV (assuming that probe units are set to volts).

CH<x>:PRObe:AUTOZero (No Query Form)

This command executes the attached probe’s Auto Zero function, for probes that
support this feature. See your probe documentation for more details. The channel
is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-415

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:AUTOZero EXECute

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

EXECute sets the probe attached to the specified channel to autozero.

Examples CH1:PROBE:AUTOZERO EXECUTE sets the probe attached to the Channel 1 to

autozero.

CH<x>:PRObe:COMPensate (No Query Form)

This command starts the probe compensation procedure for passive probes. The
channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:COMPensate

Examples CH1:PRObe:COMPensate starts probe compensation for passive probes (TPP).

CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUSS (No Query Form)

This command starts a degauss cycle of the TekVPI probe attached to the specified
channel. The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUSS EXECute

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

EXECute starts the degauss cycle.

Examples CH1:PROBE:DEGAUSS EXECUTE causes the probe attached to Channel 1 to

degauss.

2-416 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUSS:STATE? (Query Only)

This command queries whether the probe attached to the specified channel
requires a degauss operation. The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUSS:STATE?

Returns Required indicates the probe should be degaussed before taking measurements.

Recommended indicates the measurement accuracy might be improved by

degaussing the probe.
Passed indicates the probe is degaussed.

Failed indicates the degauss operation failed.

Inprocess indicates the probe degauss operation is currently in progress.

Examples CH2:PROBE:DEGAUSS:STATE? might return CH2:PROBE:DEGAUSS:STATE

PASSED, indicating that the probe attached to the Channel 2 is degaussed.

CH<x>:PRObe:FORCEDRange
This command sets the attached TekVPI probe to the specified range, or it queries
the range of the probe attached to the specified channel. If the <NR3> argument
does not match one of the available ranges, the closest range will be selected.
The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:FORCEDRange <NR3>

CH<x>:PRObe:FORCEDRange?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR3> specifies the probe dynamic range.

Examples If a TCP0030 current probe is attached to the Channel 1 input,

CH1:PROBE:FORCEDRANGE 5.0 sets the attached probe to its 5 Ampere range.
CH1:PROBE:FORCEDRANGE 15 sets the attached probe to its 5 Ampere range.
CH1:PROBE:FORCEDRANGE 20 sets the attached probe to its 30 Ampere range.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-417

Commands listed in alphabetical order

CH3:PROBE:FORCEDRANGE? might return CH1:PROBE:FORCEDRANGE

30.0000, indicating that the range of the probe attached to the Channel 3 is
set to 30 Amperes.

CH<x>:PRObe:GAIN? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the gain factor of the probe that is attached to
the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The gain of a probe is the
output divided by the input transfer ratio. For example, a common 10x probe
has a gain of 0.1.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:GAIN?

Examples CH2:PROBE:GAIN? might return CH2:PROBE:GAIN 100.0000E-3, indicating

that the attached 10X probe delivers 0.1 V to the Channel 2 BNC for every 1.0 V
applied to the probe input.

CH<x>:PRObe:ID? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the type and serial number of the probe that is
attached to the specified channel. The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:ID?

Examples CH2:PROBE:ID? might return CH2:PROBE:ID:TYPE "10X";SERNUMBER

"N/A", indicating that a passive 10X probe of unknown serial number is attached
to Channel 2.

CH<x>:PRObe:ID:SERnumber? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the serial number of the probe that is attached
to the specified channel. The channel is specified by x.

NOTE. For Level 0 and 1 probes, the serial number will be “N/A”.

2-418 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:ID:SERnumber?

Examples CH1:PROBE:ID:SERNUMBER? might return CH1:PROBE:ID:SERNUMBER

"B010289", indicating that the serial number of the probe attached to Channel 1
is B010289.

CH<x>:PRObe:ID:TYPe? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the type of probe that is attached to the
specified channel. The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:ID:TYPe?

Examples CH1:PROBE:ID:TYPE? might return CH1:PROBE:ID:TYPE "TCP0030",

indicating that a TCP0030 current probe is attached to Channel 1.

CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode
Sets or queries the input mode of the probe that is attached to the specified channel.

Conditions Requires a probe with dual inputs.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode {A|B|COMMONMODE|DIFFERENTIAL}

CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

A sets the probe to send single-ended A signals to the instrument.

B sets the probe to send single-ended B signals to the instrument.

COMMONMODE sets the probe to send common-mode signals to the instrument.

DIFFERENTIAL sets the probe to send differential signals to the instrument.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-419

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples CH8:PROBE:INPUTMODE COMMONMODE sets the probe input type to send

common mode signals to channel 8.
CH6:PROBE:INPUTMODE? might return CH6:PROBE:INPUTMODE A,
indicating that the input mode of the probe that is attached to the Channel 6 is
set to single ended A signals.

CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode:AOFFSet
Sets or queries the A mode offset control of the probe that is attached to the
specified channel.

Conditions Requires a probe with dual inputs.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode:AOFFSet <NR3>

CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode:AOFFSet?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR3> sets the A mode offset value, in vertical units (V or A).

Examples CH2:PROBE:INPUTMODE:AOFFSET 5.0 sets the A mode offset control value

of the probe that is attached to the Channel 2 to 5.
CH1:PROBE:INPUTMODE:AOFFSET? might return
CH1:PROBE:INPUTMODE:AOFFSET? 0.0000, indicating that the A mode offset
value of the probe that is attached to the channel 1 is set to 0.0.

CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode:BOFFSet
Sets or queries the B mode offset control of the probe that is attached to the
specified channel.

Conditions Requires a probe with dual inputs.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode:BOFFSet <NR3>

CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode:BOFFSet?

2-420 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR3> sets the B mode offset value, in vertical units (V or A).

Examples CH2:PROBE:INPUTMODE:BOFFSET 5.0 sets the B mode offset value of the

probe that is attached to the Channel 2 to 5.
CH5:PROBE:INPUTMODE:BOFFSET? might return
CH5:PROBE:INPUTMODE:BOFFSET? 1.2500, indicating that the B mode offset
value of the probe that is attached to the channel 5 is set to 1.25.

CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode:COFFSet
Sets or queries the common mode offset value of the probe that is attached to
the specified channel.

Conditions Requires a probe with dual inputs.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode:COFFSet <NR3>

CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode:COFFSet?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR3> sets the C (common) mode offset value, in vertical units (V or A).

Examples CH7:PROBE:INPUTMODE:COFFSET 3.2 sets the C mode offset value of the

probe that is attached to the Channel 7 to 3.2.
CH5:PROBE:INPUTMODE:COFFSET? might return
CH5:PROBE:INPUTMODE:COFFSET? 1.0250, indicating that the C mode offset
value of the probe that is attached to the channel 5 is set to 1.025.

CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode:DOFFSet
Sets or queries the differential offset value of the probe that is attached to the
specified channel.

Conditions Requires a probe with dual inputs.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-421

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode:DOFFSet <NR3>

CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode:DOFFSet?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR3> sets the D (differential) mode offset value, in vertical units (V or A).

Examples CH7:PROBE:INPUTMODE:DOFFSET 3.2 sets the D mode offset value of the

probe that is attached to the Channel 7 to 3.2.
CH5:PROBE:INPUTMODE:DOFFSET? might return
CH5:PROBE:INPUTMODE:DOFFSET? 1.0250, indicating that the D mode offset
value of the probe that is attached to the channel 5 is set to 1.025.

CH<x>:PRObe:RESistance? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the resistance of the probe that is attached to
the specified channel. The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:RESistance?

Examples CH2:PROBE:RESISTANCE? might return :CH2:PROBE:RESISTANCE

1.0000E+06, indicating that the input resistance of the probe attached to
Channel 2 is 1 MΩ.

CH<x>:PRObe:SELFCal (No Query Form)

This command initiates self-calibration on the probe. The channel is specified
by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:SELFCal EXECUTE

Examples CH1:PRObe:SELFCal EXECUTE runs self-calibration on the Channel 1 probe.

2-422 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

CH<x>:PRObe:SELFCal:State? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the self-calibration state. The channel is
specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:SELFCal:State? EXECUTE

Returns This query returns the self-calibration state of RECOMMENDED, RUNNING,

or PASSED.

Examples CH1:PRObe:SELFCal:State? might return :CH1:PRObe:SELFCal:State

RUNNING, indicating that the Channel 1 probe is currently running a
self-calibration.

CH<x>:PRObe:SET
This command sets or queries aspects of probe accessory user interfaces, for
example probe attenuation factors or probe audible over range. The available
arguments for this command will vary depending on the accessory you attach to
the instrument. The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:SET <QString>

CH<x>:PRObe:SET?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<QString> is a quoted string representing a settable aspect of the attached

accessory.

Examples CH6:PRObe:SET "ATTENUATION 10X" sets the probe to 10X attenuation.

CH6:PRObe:SET? might return CH6:PROBE:SET "ATTENUATION 25X"

indicating that the probe is set to the selection for 25X attenuation.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-423

Commands listed in alphabetical order

CH<x>:PRObe:STATus? (Query Only)

Queries the probe unsigned integer error value.

Conditions Requires a probe that supports the relevant error messages.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:STATus?

Returns Returns an integer number that represents the sum total of binary error bits B0 –
B15. The error bits are not displayed; they are concatenated into the integer value.
The following is a list of the error for each bit.
B0 – Probe disabled
B1 – Jaws open
B2 – Over range
B3 – Probe temperature out of limits
B4 – Degauss needed
B5 – Probe tip missing
B6 – Probe tip failed
B7 – Probe tip not supported
B8 through B15 – Reserved

Examples CH4:PROBE:STATus? might return CH4:PROBE:STATus 0, indicating that

the probe is not reporting any errors.
CH4:PROBE:STATus? might return CH4:PROBE:STATus 20, indicating that the
probe is reporting an over range error and a Degauss needed error.
CH4:PROBE:STATus? might return CH4:PROBE:STATus 2, indicating that the
probe is reporting an open jaws error.

CH<x>:PRObe:UNIts? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns a string describing the units of measure for the
probe attached to the specified channel. The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

2-424 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:UNIts?

Related Commands CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits

Examples CH4:PROBE:UNITS? might return :CH4:PROBE:UNITS "V", indicating that the

units of measure for the probe attached to Channel 4 are volts.

CH<x>:PROBECal? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the probe calibration state for the specified
channel. The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PROBECal?

Returns This query will return one of the following:

Failed signifies that the probe calibration has failed for the selected channel.

Default signifies that the probe calibration has not yet been run for the
selected channel.
Passed signifies the probe calibration has passed for the selected channel.

Running signifies the probe calibration is running.

Examples CH2:PROBECAL? might return CH2:PROBECAL PASSED indicating that the probe
calibration has passed for Channel 2.

CH<x>:PROBECOntrol
This command sets or queries multirange probe range-control policy preference of
the probe that is attached to CH<x>. The channel number is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PROBECOntrol {AUTO|MANual}

CH<x>:PROBECOntrol?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-425

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

AUTO sets the values. The probe range is automatically calculated.

MANual allows you to select various valid values for the probe connected to a
particular channel.

Examples CH2:PROBECONTROL AUTO sets the values and the probe range is automatically
calculated.
CH2:PROBECONTROL? might return CH2:PROBECONTROL MANUAL indicating
that you can select various valid values for the probe connected to channel 2.

CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten
This command is used to specify the attenuation value as a multiplier to the given
scale factor on the specified channel. The channel is specified by x.
The query form of this command returns the user-specified attenuation.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten <NR3>

CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten?

Related Commands CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR3> is the attenuation value, which is specified as a multiplier in the range

from 1.00E-10 to 1.00E+10.

Examples CH1:PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN 167.00E-3 specifies an external attenuation,

which is connected between the your input signal and the input of the probe
attached to Channel 1.
CH2:PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN? might return CH2:PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN
1.0000E+00, indicating that the probe attached to Channel 2 is connected
directly to the user's signal.

2-426 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten
This command sets or queries the input-output ratio (expressed in decibel units) of
external attenuation or gain between the signal and the instrument input channels.
The channel is specified by x.
The query form of this command returns the user-specified attenuation in decibels.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten <NR3>

CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten?

Related Commands CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR3> is the attenuation value, which is specified in the range from -200.00 dB
to 200.00 dB.

Examples CH3:PROBEFUNC:EXTDBATTEN 2.5 specifies an external 2.5 dB attenuator

on Channel 3.
CH1:PROBEFUNC:EXTDBATTEN? might return CH1:PROBEFUNC:EXTDBATTEEN
2.5000E+00, indicating that the attenuation for Channel 1 is 2.5 dB.

CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits
This command sets the unit of measurement for the external attenuator of the
specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The alternate units are used if
they are enabled. Use the CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits:STATE command to
enable or disable the alternate units.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits <QString>

CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits?

Related Commands CH<x>:PRObe:UNIts?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-427

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<QString> indicates the attenuation unit of measurement for the specified

channel.

Examples CH4:PROBEFUNC:EXTUNITS "Pascals" sets the unit of measurement for the

Channel 4 external attenuator.
CH2:PROBEFUNC:EXTUNITS? might return :CH2:PROBEFUNC:EXTUNITS
"Pascals", indicating that the Channel 2 external attenuator units of
measurement are Pascals.

CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits:STATE
This command sets or queries the custom units enable state for the specified
channel. The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

OFF argument turns off external units.

ON argument turns on external units.

<NR1> = 0 turns off external units; any other value turns on external units.

Examples CH2:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits:STATE ON turns on external units.

CH2:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits:STATE? might return

CH2:PROBEFUNC:EXTUNITS:STATE 0 indicating that external units are off for
the specified channel.

CH<x>:PROBETYPE? (Query Only)

This command returns the probe type connected to the specified channel. The
channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

2-428 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax CH<x>:PROBETYPE?

Returns The probe type value returns analog or digital.

Examples CH1:PROBETYPE? might return :CH1:PROBETYPE ANALOG, indicating the probe

type for channel 1 is analog.

CH<x>:SCAle
This command sets or returns the vertical scale for the specified analog channel.
The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:SCAle <NR3>

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR3> is the vertical scale for the specified analog channel.

Examples CH2:SCAle 200E-3 sets the scale to 200 mV per division.

CH2:SCAle? might return CH2:SCALE 500.0000E-3 indicating the vertical

scale for the specified channel is 500 mV per division.

CH<x>:SCALERATio
This command sets or returns the scale ratio for the specified analog channel.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:SCALERATio <NR2>

CH<x>:SCALERATio?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR2> is the scale ratio for the specified analog channel.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-429

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples CH2:SCALERATio 2.0 sets the scale ratio to 2.0.

CH2:SCALERATio? might return CH2:SCALERATIO 1.0000 indicating the

scale ratio is 1.0.

CH<x>:SV:CENTERFrequency
This command sets or queries the center frequency of the specified spectrum trace
channel for Spectrum View.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax CH<x>:SV:CENTERFrequency <NR3>

CH<x>:SV:CENTERFrequency?

Related Commands SV:LOCKCenter

Arguments CH<x> specifies the spectrum trace channel source.

<NR3> specifies the spectrum trace center frequency for the specified channel,
in hertz. The range of values is 0.0 to the maximum licensed bandwidth of the
instrument.

Examples CH4:SV:CENTERFrequency 3.0E+06 sets the center frequency of the channel

4 spectrum trace to 3 MHz.
CH2:SV:CENTERFrequency? might return 1.0E+07, indicating that the center
frequency of the channel 2 spectrum trace is set to 10 MHz.

CH<x>:SV:POSition
This command sets or queries the Spectrum Time setting of the specified spectrum
trace channel in the Spectrum View.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax CH<x>:SV:POSition <NR3>

CH<x>:SV:POSition?

Related Commands SV:LOCKSpectrum

2-430 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments CH<x> specifies the spectrum trace channel source.

<NR3> specifies the spectrum time location, as a percentage of the record length.
The range of values is 0.0% to 100%.

Examples CH6:SV:POSition 25 sets the channel 6 spectrum trace spectrum time value
to 25%.
CH1:SV:POSition? might return 74.0, indicating that the spectrum time value
of the channel 1 spectrum trace is set to 74%.

CH<x>:SV:SPANABovebw? (Query Only)

This command queries whether the stop frequency for the specified spectrum trace
channel is above the scope input bandwidth.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax CH<x>:SV:SPANABovebw?

Arguments CH<x> specifies the spectrum trace channel source.

Returns 0 specifies the stop frequency is not above the scope bandwidth.

1 specifies the stop frequency is above the scope bandwidth.

Examples CH3:SV:SPANABovebw? might return 0, indicating the stop frequency is not

above the scope bandwidth.

CH<x>:SV:SPANBELowdc? (Query Only)

This command queries whether the start frequency for the specified spectrum
trace channel is below 0 Hz.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax CH<x>:SV:SPANBELowdc?

Arguments CH<x> specifies the spectrum trace channel source.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-431

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Returns 0 specifies the start frequency is not below 0 Hz.

1 specifies the start frequency is below 0 Hz.

Examples CH<x>:SV:SPANBELowdc? might return 0, indicating the start frequency is

not below 0 Hz.

CH<x>:SV:STARTFrequency? (Query Only)

This command queries the start frequency of the specified spectrum trace channel
in the Spectrum View window

Group Spectrum View

Syntax CH<x>:SV:STARTFrequency?

Arguments CH<x> specifies the spectrum trace channel source.

Returns <NR3> specifies the start frequency value in hertz.

Examples CH3:SV:STARTFrequency? might return 35.7E+6, indicating the start

frequency for the channel 3 spectrum trace is 35.7 MHz.

CH<x>:SV:STATE
This command sets or queries the on/off setting of data acquisition for the
specified spectrum trace channel.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax CH<x>:SV:STATE {ON|OFF}

CH<x>:SV:STATE?

Arguments CH<x> specifies the spectrum trace channel source.

ON enables spectrum data acquisition for the specified spectrum trace channel
source.
OFF disables spectrum data acquisition for the specified spectrum trace channel
source.

2-432 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SV:CH1:STATE ON turns on Spectrum View data acquisition for the channel
1 spectrum trace.
SV:CH3:STATE? might return OFF, indicating that Spectrum View data
acquisition is turned off for the channel 3 spectrum trace.

CH<x>:SV:STOPFrequency? (Query Only)

This command queries the stop frequency of the specified spectrum trace channel
in the Spectrum View window

Group Spectrum View

Syntax CH<x>:SV:STOPFrequency?

Arguments CH<x> specifies the spectrum trace channel source.

Returns <NR3> specifies the stop frequency value in hertz.

Examples CH2:SV:STOPFrequency? might return 95.1E+6, indicating the stop frequency

for the channel 2 spectrum trace is 95.1 MHz.

CH<x>:TERmination
This command sets or queries the vertical termination for the specified analog
channel. The channel is specified by x.

NOTE. The available arguments depend on the instrument model and the attached
accessories.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:TERmination <NR3>

CH<x>:TERmination?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR3> specifies the channel input resistance, which can be specified as 50 Ω or

1,000,000 Ω.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-433

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples CH4:TERMINATION 50.0E+0 establishes 50 Ω impedance on Channel 1.

CH2:TERMINATION? might return CH2:TERMINATION 50.0E+0, indicating that

Channel 2 is set to 50 Ω impedance.

CH<x>:VTERm:BIAS
Sets or queries the termination bias voltage for the specified channel (if control
is available).

Conditions Requires a probe with dual inputs.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:VTERm:BIAS <NR3>

CH<x>:VTERm:BIAS?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR3> is the termination voltage.

Examples CH1:VTERm:BIAS 1.5 sets the termination bias voltage on channel 1 to 1.5 Volts

CH2:VTERm:BIAS? might return CH2:VTERm:BIAS 0.0000, indicating that the

termination bias voltage for channel 2 is set to 0 volts.

CH<x>_DALL:LABel:COLor
This command sets or queries the color of the specified digital group label. The
channel is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax CH<x>_DALL:LABel:COLor <QString>

CH<x>_DALL:LABel:COLor?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<QString> is the color of the digital group label. To return the color to the default
color, send an empty string as in this example: :CH5_DALL:LABEL:COLOR "".

2-434 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples CH1_DALL:LABel:COLor "#FF0000" sets the font color to red.

CH1_DALL:LABel:COLor? might return CH1_DALL:LABEL:COLOR

"#FFFF00" indicating the font color is yellow.

CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:BOLD
This command sets or queries the bold state of the specified digital group. The
channel is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:BOLD {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:BOLD?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

OFF argument turns off bold font.

ON argument turns on bold font.

<NR1> = 0 turns off bold font; any other value turns on bold font.

Examples CH1_DALL:LABel:FONT:BOLD ON sets the font to bold.

CH1_DALL:LABel:FONT:BOLD? might return CH1_DALL:LABEL:FONT:BOLD

0 indicating the font is not bold.

CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:ITALic
This command sets or queries the italic state of the specified digital group. The
channel is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:ITALic {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:ITALic?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

OFF argument turns off italic font.

ON argument turns on italic font.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-435

Commands listed in alphabetical order

<NR1> = 0 turns off italic font; any other value turns on italic font.

Examples CH1_DALL:LABel:FONT:ITALic 1 turns on italic font.

CH1_DALL:LABel:FONT:ITALic? might return

CH1_DALL:LABEL:FONT:ITALIC 0 indicating the font is not italic.

CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:SIZE
This command sets or queries the font size of the specified digital group. The
channel is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:SIZE <NR1>

CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:SIZE?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR1> is the font size.

Examples CH1_DALL:LABel:FONT:SIZE 16 sets the font size to 16 points.

CH1_DALL:LABel:FONT:SIZE? might return CH1_DALL:LABEL:FONT:SIZE

20 indicating the font size is 20 points.

CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:TYPE
This command sets or queries the font type of the specified digital group, such as
Arial or Times New Roman. The channel is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:TYPE <QString>

CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:TYPE?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<QString> is the font type.

2-436 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples CH1_DALL:LABel:FONT:TYPE "Monosapce" sets the font to a monospace

font.
CH1_DALL:LABel:FONT:TYPE? might return CH1_DALL:LABEL:FONT:TYPE
"Frutiger LT Std 55 Roman".

CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:UNDERline
This command sets or queries the underline state of the specified digital group.
The channel is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:UNDERline {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:UNDERline?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

OFF argument turns off underline font.

ON argument turns on underline font.

<NR1> = 0 turns off underline font; any other value turns on underline font.

Examples CH1_DALL:LABel:FONT:UNDERline ON specifies an underlined font.

CH1_DALL:LABel:FONT:UNDERline? might return

CH1_DALL:LABEL:FONT:UNDERLINE 0 indicating underline is off.

CH<x>_DALL:LABel:NAMe
This command sets or queries the label of the specified digital group. The channel
is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax CH<x>_DALL:LABel:NAMe <QString>

CH<x>_DALL:LABel:NAMe?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<QString> is the name of the group.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-437

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples CH1_DALL:LABel:NAMe “Clock Out” sets the label name to Clock Out.

CH1_DALL:LABel:NAMe? might return CH1_DALL:LABEL:NAME "This is

the digital name".

CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:COLor
This command sets or queries the color of the label of the specified digital bit.
The channel is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:COLor <QString>

CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:COLor?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<QString> is the label color. To return the color to the default color, send an
empty string as in this example: :CH5_D1:LABEL:COLOR "".

Examples CH1_D1:LABel:COLor "#FF0000" sets the color to red.

CH1_D1:LABel:COLor? might return CH1_D1:LABEL:COLOR "#FFFF00"

indicating the color is yellow.

CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD
This command sets or queries the bold state of the label of the specified digital bit.
The channel is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

OFF argument turns off bold font.

ON argument turns on bold font.

<NR1> = 0 turns off bold font; any other value turns on bold font.

2-438 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples CH1_D1:LABel:FONT:BOLD ON sets the font to bold.

CH1_D1:LABel:FONT:BOLD? might return CH1_D1:LABEL:FONT:BOLD 0

indicating the font is not bold.

CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic
This command sets or queries the italic state of the label of the specified digital
bit. The channel is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

OFF argument turns off italic font.

ON argument turns on italic font.

<NR1> = 0 turns off italic font; any other value turns on italic font.

Examples CH1_D1:LABel:FONT:ITALic OFF turns off italic font.

CH1_D1:LABel:FONT:ITALic? might return CH1_D1:LABEL:FONT:ITALIC

1 indicating the font is italic.

CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE
This command sets or queries the font size of the label of the specified digital bit.
The channel is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE <NR1>

CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR1> is the font size.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-439

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples CH1_D1:LABel:FONT:SIZE 16 sets the font size to 16 points.

CH1_D1:LABel:FONT:SIZE? might return CH1_D1:LABEL:FONT:SIZE 20

indicating the font size is 20 points.

CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE
This command sets or queries the font type of the label of the specified digital bit,
such as Arial or Times New Roman. The channel is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE <QString>

CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<QString> is the font type of the label.

Examples CH1_D1:LABel:FONT:TYPE "Monospace" sets the font to Monospace.

CH1_D1:LABel:FONT:TYPE? might return CH1_D1:LABEL:FONT:TYPE

"Frutiger LT Std 55 Roman".

CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline
This command sets or queries the underline state of the label of the specified
digital bit. The channel is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

OFF argument turns off underline font.

ON argument turns on underline font.

<NR1> = 0 turns off underline font; any other value turns on underline font.

2-440 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples CH1_D1:LABel:FONT:UNDERline ON turns on underline font.

CH1_D1:LABel:FONT:UNDERline? might return

CH1_D1:LABEL:FONT:UNDERLINE 0 indicating the underline font is off.

CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:NAMe
Sets or queries the label of the specified digital bit. The channel is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:NAMe <QString>

CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:NAMe?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<QString> is the label.

Examples CH1_D1:LABel:NAMe "Clock in" sets the name to Clock in.

CH1_D1:LABel:NAMe? might return CH1_D1:LABEL:NAME "Digital 1".

CLEAR (No Query Form)

This command clears acquisitions, measurements, and waveforms.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax CLEAR

Examples CLEAR clears all acquisitions, measurements, and waveforms.

*CLS (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) clears the following:
Event Queue
Standard Event Status Register
Status Byte Register (except the MAV bit)

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-441

Commands listed in alphabetical order

If the *CLS command immediately follows an <EOI>, the Output Queue and
MAV bit (Status Byte Register bit 4) are also cleared. MAV indicates that
information is in the output queue. The device clear (DCL) control message
will clear the output queue and thus MAV. *CLS does not clear the output queue
or MAV.
*CLS can suppress a Service Request that is to be generated by an *OPC. This
will happen if a single sequence acquisition operation is still being processed
when the *CLS command is executed.

Group Status and Error

Syntax *CLS

Related Commands DESE

*ESE
*ESR?
EVENT?
EVMsg?
*SRE
*STB?

Examples *CLS clears the instrument status data structures.

CONFIGuration:ANALOg:BANDWidth? (Query Only)

This command queries the maximum licensed bandwidth of the instrument.

Group Vertical

Syntax CONFIGuration:ANALOg:BANDWidth?

Returns The maximum licensed bandwidth of the instrument is returned.

Examples CONFIGuration:ANALOg:BANDWidth? might return

CONFIGURATION:ANALOG:BANDWIDTH 2.0000E+9 indicating the
bandwidth is 2.0 GHz.

2-442 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

CONNected:REQUested:STATus (No Query Form)

This command sets the status of the Connected Scope Preference feature. After
issuing the status command, the CONNected:SAVEPREferences command
should be set immediately to make the feature enabled. On the instrument,
the feature is found in Utility > User Preferences > Other > Connected Scope
Preferences.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax CONNected:REQUested:STATus <NR1>

Arguments <NR1> enables or disables the Connected Scope Preference feature. The argument
can be either 1 or 0. Setting 1 will enable the feature.

Examples CONNected:REQUested:STATus 1 CONNected:SAVEPREferences enables

and saves Connected Scope Preference feature.

CONNected:STATus? (Query Only)

This query command returns the status of the Connected Scope Preference feature.
On the instrument, the feature is found in Utility > User Preferences > Other >
Connected Scope Preferences.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax CONNected:STATus?

Returns This command returns either 1 or 0. A return value of 1 means the feature is
enabled and 0 means the feature is disabled.

Examples CONNected:STATus? might return :CONNected:STATus 1, indicating the

Connected Scope Preference feature is enabled.

CONNected:USAGe:TRack:REQUested:STATus (No Query Form)

This command sets the tracking usage status of the Connected Scope Preference
feature. After issuing the status command, the CONNected:SAVEPREferences
command should be set immediately to make the feature enabled. On the

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-443

Commands listed in alphabetical order

instrument, the feature is found in Utility > User Preferences > Other > Connected
Scope Preferences.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax CONNected:USAGe:TRack:REQUested:STATus<NR1>

Arguments <NR1> enables or disables the Connected Scope Preference feature. The argument
can be either 1 or 0. Setting 1 will enable the tracking usage status of the
Connected Scope Preference feature.

Examples CONNected:USAGe:TRack:REQUested:STATus 1
CONNected:SAVEPREferences enables and saves the tracking usage status of
the Connected Scope Preference feature.

CONNected:USAGe:TRack:STATus? (Query Only)

This query command returns the tracking usage status of the Connected Scope
Preference feature. On the instrument, the feature is found in Utility > User
Preferences > Other > Connected Scope Preferences.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax CONNected:USAGe:TRack:STATus?

Returns This command returns either 1 or 0. A return value of 1 means the feature is
enabled and 0 means the feature is disabled.

Examples CONNected:USAGe:TRack:STATus? might return

:CONNected:USAGe:TRack:STATus 1, indicating the tracking usage status of
the Connected Scope Preference feature is enabled.

CURVe? (Query Only)

This command transfers waveform data from the instrument. Each waveform that
is transferred has an associated waveform preamble that contains information
such as data format and scale.

2-444 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

The CURVe? query transfers data from the instrument. The data source is specified
by the DATa:SOUrce command. The first and last data points are specified by the
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands.
For digital sources, CH<x>_D<x> or CH<x> _DALL, when the :DATa:WIDth
is 1, the returned data is state only. When the :DATa:WIDth is 2, the returned
data is transition data with 2 bits per digital channel representing the transition
information as follows:
0 0 low
0 1 high
1 1 multiple transitions in interval ending with high
1 0 multiple transitions in interval ending with low
For individual digital channels (such as CH<x>_D<x> ), :DATa:WIDth 2 provides
the 2-bit transition data with the upper 14 bits zero. :DATa:WIDth 1 provides only
the state in the LSB with the upper 7 bits all zero.
For CH<x>_DAll sources, :DATa:WIDth 2 provides the 2-bit transition data
for each of the 8 constituent channels with the D7 bit represented in the 2 most
significant bits, D6 in the next 2, and so on. :DATa:WIDth 1 provides the states
of each of the 8 constituent channels with D7 represented in the most significant
bit and D0 in the least significant bit.
Depending on the sample rate, multi-transition data may not be available and
:CURVe? queries for digital channels with :DATa:WIDth 2 may result in a
warning event "Execution warning: Multi-transition data not available". In this
case, the transition data returned will be 0 0 or 0 1.
For MATH sources, only 8-byte double precision floating point data is returned in
:CURVe? queries.
A Fast Acquisition waveform Pixmap data is a 500 (vertical) by 1000 (horizontal)
point bitmap. Each point represents display intensity for that screen location. 500
(vertical) which is the row count in the bitmap, might vary based on how many
channels enabled from same FastAcq group. To query and get the Fast Acq Pixel
Map data, the following command set should be sent:
ACQuire:FASTAcq:STATE ON

DATA:MODe PIXmap

When the FastAcq is on, Curve? on Ch<x> will return pixmap data (if
DATA:MODe is PIXmap). The number of rows in the pixmap will vary based on
how many ch<x> sources are turned on and how they are grouped in acquisition
HW. The grouping can vary from model to model. The number of columns in
pixmap data is fixed to 1000. For example, on a MSO58 instrument, Ch1 to Ch4
is “group1” and Ch5 to Ch8 is “group2”. If Ch1 is turned on (in group1) then Ch1
rows will be 500. If Ch2 and Ch3 are turned on (in group1) then Ch2 and Ch3
rows will be 250 each. When all Ch1/2/3/4 are turned on (in group1) then 125

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-445

Commands listed in alphabetical order

rows per channel. If Ch1 (in group1) and Ch8 (in group2) are turned on then 500
rows will be returned for each channel. To calculate the number of rows, you can
use- (number of bytes from curve header/BYT_NR)/1000.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax CURVe?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

DATa:STARt
DATa:STOP
SAVe:WAVEform
SAVEON:WAVEform:FILEFormat
WFMOutpre?

Returns CH<x>_SV_NORMal, CH<x>_SV_AVErage, CH<x>_SV_MAXHold,

CH<x>_SV_MINHold: When DATa:SOUrce is set to one of these traces, the data
points represent the amplitude of the Spectrum View frequency domain traces in
the current units, and are floating point values. The frequency domain trace data is
returned as 8-byte floating point values.
CH<x>_SV_AMPlitude, CH<x>_SV_FREQuency, CH<x>_SV_PHASe: When
DATa:SOUrce is set to one of these traces, the data points are the Magnitude
vs. Time, Frequency vs. Time, or Phase vs. Time representations of the RF
input signal (Spectrum View) time domain traces. The RF time domain traces
are returned as floating point values.
CH<x>_FREQ_vs_time is the frequency in Hz.

CH<x>_PHASE_vs_time is the phase in degrees.

CH<x>_MAG_vs_time is the magnitude in Volts.

CH<x>_SV_BASEband_IQ is the Spectrum View RF baseband IQ traces. When

DATa:SOUrce is set to one of these traces, the data points represent the digitizing
levels of the IQ data. The IQ data is formatted as pairs of integer values (i.e.
<I>,<Q>,<I>,<Q>,...)

Examples CURVE? with ASCII encoding, start and stop of 1 and 10 respectively, and a width
set to 1 might return :CURVE 61,62,61,60,60,-59,-59,-58,-58,-59

2-446 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

NOTE. Curve data is transferred from the instrument asynchronously and,

depending upon the length of the curve record, such transfers can require several
seconds to complete. During this time, the instrument will not respond to user
controls. You can interrupt these asynchronous data transfers by sending a
device clear message to the instrument or by interrupting the query with another
command or query. Verify that curve data is completely transferred.
It is recommended that you follow such queries with an *ESR? query and verify
that the error bit returned and, if set, check the event queue to ascertain the
reason for the error. If the error was caused by an interrupted query, then the
asynchronous data transfer had not completed when the *ESR? query was sent.
In this case, you might need increase your program's time-out value to ensure
that all data is transferred and read.

CURVEStream? (Query Only)

This query-only command continuously transfers waveform data from the
instrument as it is acquired.
This command puts the instrument into a streaming data mode, allowing the
controller to receive waveform records as fast as they are acquired. Use the
DATa:SOUrce command to specify the waveform sources. The command
supports all the same data formatting options as the CURVe? command.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-447

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Control of the instrument through the user interface or other external clients is
not allowed while in streaming data mode.
The GPIB controller must take the instrument out of this streaming data mode
to terminate the query and allow other input sources to resume communication
with the instrument. The following options are available to transition out of
streaming data mode:
Send a device clear over the bus
Send another command or query to the instrument
Turning the waveform screen display mode off (:DISplay:WAVEform OFF)
may increase waveform throughput during streaming mode.
Using a data encoding of SRIbinary (DATa:ENCdg SRIbinary) may also
increase the waveform throughput since that is the raw native data format of
the oscilloscope.
While in streaming data mode, two extreme conditions can occur.
If the waveform records are being acquired slowly (high resolution),
configure the controller for a long time-out threshold, as the data is not
sent out until each complete record is acquired.
If the waveform records are being acquired rapidly (low resolution), and
the controller is not reading the data off the bus fast enough, the trigger
rate is slowed to allow each waveform to be sent sequentially.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax CURVEStream?

Related Commands CURVe?

DATa:SOUrce
DATa:STARt
DATa:STOP
DATa:ENCdg
DATa:WIDth
WFMOutpre?

Returns Formatted waveform data, once per acquisition.

2-448 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples CURVESTREAM? with ASCII encoding, start and stop of 1 and 10

respectively, and a width set to 1 might return :CURVESTREAM
61,62,61,60,60,-59,-59,-58,-58,-59

NOTE. Curve data is transferred from the instrument asynchronously and,

CUSTOMTABle:ADDNew (No Query Form)

This command adds new custom results table.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax CUSTOMTABle:ADDNew <Qstring>

Arguments <Qstring> specifies the custom results table name.

Examples CUSTOMTABLE:ADDNEW"TABLE1" adds a new custom table named TABLE1.

CUSTOMTABle:DELete (No Query Form)

This command deletes the custom result(s) table that was added.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax CUSTOMTABle:DELete <Qstring>

Arguments <Qstring> specifies the custom results table name.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-449

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples CUSTOMTABLE:DELETE"TABLE1" deletes the new custom table named TABLE1.

CUSTOMTABle:LIST? (Query Only)

This command queries the list of custom result tables has been added.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax CUSTOMTABle:LIST? <Qstring>

Arguments <Qstring> specifies the custom results table name.

Examples CUSTOMTABLE:LIST? might return :CUSTOMTABle:LIST TABLE1, TABLE2 ,

indicating there are two custom result tables.

DATa
This command sets or queries the format and location of the waveform data that is
transferred with the CURVe? command.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax DATa {INIT|SNAp}

DATa?

Related Commands CURVe?

DATa:STARt
DATa:STOP
DATa:ENCdg
SAVEON:WAVEform:FILEFormat
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?

Arguments INIT initializes the waveform data parameters to their factory defaults except for
DATa:STOP, which isset to the current acquisition record length.
SNAp Sets DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP to match the current waveform cursor
positions of WAVEVIEW1 CURSOR1 if these waveform cursors are currently

2-450 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

on. If these waveform cursors are not on when the DATa SNAp command is sent,
it is silently ignored and DATa:STARt and :STOP remain unchanged.
If either of the cursors is outside the record, DATa:STARt and :STOP are set to
nearest values within the record. This will cause DATa:STARt and/or :STOP to
snap to the beginning or end of the record whichever is nearest, and the following
event is set: 500, "Execution warning", "One or both cursors outside of waveform
record".
If there is no acquired waveform for the cursor source, then DATa:STARt and
:STOP remain unchanged and the following event is set: 500, "Execution
warning", "No acquired waveform record".
If DATa:STARt is greater than :STOP, the values of DATa:STARt and STOp are
swapped and the following event is set: 530, "Data start > stop, Values swapped
internally".

Examples DATA INIT initializes the waveform data parameters to their factory defaults.

DATA? might return DATA:ENCDG RIBINARY;SOURCE CH1;START 1;STOP

1000;FRAMESTART 1;FRAMESTOP 1000.

DATa:ENCdg
This command sets or queries the format of outgoing waveform data. This
command is equivalent to setting WFMOutpre:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt,
and WFMOutpre:BYT_Or. Setting the DATa:ENGdg value causes the
corresponding WFMOutpre values to be updated and vice versa.

NOTE. Values are constrained (for outbound data) to the format of the data
specified by DATa:SOUrce.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax DATa:ENCdg {ASCIi| RIBinary| RPBinary| FPBinary| SRIbinary|

SRPbinary| SFPbinary}
DATa:ENCdg?

Related Commands WFMOutpre:ENCdg

WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-451

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments ASCIi specifies the ASCII representation of signed INT, FLOAT. If ASCII is the
value, then :BN_Fmt and :BYT_Or are ignored. The following are the DATa and
WFMOutpre parameter settings (separated by semicolons): :ENCdg = ASC ;
:BN_Fmt = N/A ; :BYT_Or = N/A ; :BYT_NR = 1,2,4.
RIBinary specifies the positive integer data-point representation, with the most
significant byte transferred first. When :BYT_Nr is 1, the range from 0 through
255. When :BYT_Nr is 2,the range is from 0 to 65,535. When :BYT_Nr is 4, then
the waveform being queried would return Fast Acquisition Pixmap data (if fast
acq is turned on and data mode is set to pixmap). The following are the DATa
and WFMOutpre parameter settings (separated by semicolons): :ENCdg = BIN ;
:BN_Fmt = RI ; :BYT_Or = MSB ; :BYT_NR = 1,2.
RPBinary specifies the positive integer data-point representation, with the most
significant byte transferred first. When :BYT_Nr is 1, the range from 0 through
255. When :BYT_Nr is 2, the range is from 0 to 65,535. The following are the
DATa and WFMOutpre parameter settings (separated by semicolons): :ENCdg =
ASC ; :BN_Fmt = RP ; :BYT_Or = MSB ; :BYT_NR = 1,2.
FPBinary specifies the floating point (width = 4) data. The range is from –3.4 ×
1038 to 3.4 × 1038. The center of the screen is 0. The upper limit is the top of the
screen and the lower limit is the bottom of the screen. The FPBinary argument is
only applicable to math waveforms or ref waveforms saved from math waveforms.
The following are the DATa and WFMOutpre parameter settings (separated by
semicolons): :ENCdg = BIN ; :BN_Fmt = FP ; :BYT_Or = MSB ; :BYT_NR = 4.
SRIbinary is the same as RIBinary except that the byte order is swapped,
meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first. This format is useful
when transferring data to IBM compatible PCs. The following are the DATa and
WFMOutpre parameter settings (separated by semicolons): :ENCdg = BIN ;
:BN_Fmt = RI ; :BYT_Or = LSB ; :BYT_NR = 1,2.
SRPbinary is the same as RPBinary except that the byte order is swapped,
meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first. This format is useful
when transferring data to PCs. The following are the DATa and WFMOutpre
parameter settings (separated by semicolons): :ENCdg = BIN ; :BN_Fmt = RP
; :BYT_Or = LSB ; :BYT_NR = 1,2.
SFPbinary specifies floating point data in IBM PC format. The SFPbinary
argument only works on math waveforms or ref waveforms saved from math
waveforms. The following are the DATa and WFMOutpre parameter settings
(separated by semicolons): :ENCdg = BIN ; :BN_Fmt = FP ; :BYT_Or = LSB
; :BYT_NR = 4.

Examples DATA:ENCDG RPBinary sets the data encoding format to be a positive integer
data-point representation, where the most significant byte is transferred first.
DATA:ENCDG? might return DATa:ENCDG SRPBINARY for the format of the
outgoing waveform data.

2-452 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DATa:FRAMESTARt
This command sets or queries the starting acquisition for waveform transfer using
the CURVE? query. This is only relevant when History or FastFrame acquisition
modes are enabled.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax DATa:FRAMESTARt <NR1>

DATa:FRAMESTARt?

Arguments <NR1> is the first acquisition that will be transferred, which ranges from 1 to
the number of History or FastFrame acquisitions. Results are transferred from
acquisition <NR1> to DATa:FRAMESTOP or the total number of acquisitions,
whichever is less. If <NR1> is greater than the number of acquisitions, then
only the last acquisition is transferred. If DATa:FRAMESTARt is greater than
DATa:FRAMESTOP, then only a single acquisition at <NR1> is transferred.

Examples DATA:FRAMESTART 10 specifies that the waveform transfer will begin with the
10th acquisition.
DATA:FRAMESTART? might return :DATa:FRAMESTARt 25, indicating that
acquisition 25 is the first one that will be transferred.

DATa:FRAMESTOP
This command sets or queries the last acquisition for waveform transfer using the
CURVE? query. This is only relevant when History or FastFrame acquisition
modes are enabled.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax DATa:FRAMESTOP {<NR1>|MAX}

DATa:FRAMESTOP?

Arguments <NR1> is the last acquisition that will be transferred, which ranges from 1 to
the number of History or FastFrame acquisitions. Results will be transferred
from acquisitions DATa:FRAMESTARt to <NR1>. If <NR1> is greater than the
number of acquisitions, then data will be transferred up to the last acquisition.
If DATa:FRAMESTOP is less than DATa:FRAMESTARt, then only a single
acquisition at DATa:FRAMESTARt is transferred.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-453

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MAX indicates that data is always transferred up to the last acquisition.

Examples DATA:FRAMESTOP 100 specifies that the waveform transfer will stop with the
100th acquisition.
DATA:FRAMESTOP? might return :DATA:FRAMESTOP 250, indicating that
acquisition 250 is the last one that will be transferred.

DATa:MODe
This command sets or queries the mode for waveform data sent to returned by
CURVe?. When FastAcq mode is ON, and the value is PIXmap, it returns Fast
Acquisition pixmap data or the vector data is returned. When the data mode is
set as VECtor then you get the waveform sampled data. The Data width is reset
to 1 or 2 instead of 4.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax DATa:MODe {VECtor|PIXmap}

DATa:MODe ?

Arguments VECtor sets the mode for waveform data to vector.

PIXmap sets the mode for waveform data to pixmap.

Examples DATA:MODE VECtor sets the mode for waveform data to vector.

DATA:MODE ? might return :DATa:MODe VECtor, indicating that the mode for
waveform data is set to vector.

DATa:RESample
This command sets or queries the resampling of outgoing waveform data.
This command is equivalent to setting WFMOutpre:RESample. Setting the
DATa:RESample value causes the corresponding WFMOutpre value to be
updated and vice versa.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax DATa:RESample <NR1>

DATa:RESample?

2-454 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands WFMOutpre:RESample

Arguments <NR1> is the resampling rate. The default value is 1, which means every sample
is returned. A value of 2 returns every other sample, while a value of 3 returns
every third sample, and so on.

Examples DATA:RESAMPLE 1 sets the resampling to return all waveform data samples.

DATA:RESAMPLE? might return :DATa:RESAMPLE 4, indicating that every forth

sample of the waveform data is returned.

DATa:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the location of waveform data that is transferred
from the instrument by the CURVe? Query.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax DATa:SOUrce <wfm>[<,><wfm>]

DATa:SOUrce?

Related Commands CURVe?

DATa

Arguments <wfm> is the location of the waveform data that will be transferred from the
instrument to the controller. It can consist of CH<x>, MATH<x>, REF<x>,
DIGITALALL. Note that digital data is transferred as 16-bit data, with the
least-significant bit representing D0, and the most-significant bit representing D15.
<wfm> can consist of the following:

CH<x> selects the specified analog channel as the source.

MATH<x> selects the specified reference waveform as the source. The reference
number is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4.
REF<x> selects the specified reference waveform as the source. The reference
number is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.
CH<x>_D<x> selects the specified digital channel.

CH<x>_DAll selects the specified channel group of digital channels.

DIGITALALL selects digital waveforms as the source. The Digital data is

transferred as 16-bit data, with the least-significant bit representing D0, and the

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-455

Commands listed in alphabetical order

most-significant bit representing D15. The LSB always contains D0-D7 and
MSB always contains D8-D15 data.
CH<x>_SV_NORMal, CH<x>_SV_AVErage, CH<x>_SV_MAX_Hold,
CH<x>_SV_MIN_Hold selects the specified Spectrum View waveform.

CH<x>_MAG_VS_TIME, CH<x>_FREQ_VS_TIME, CH<x>_PHASE_VS_TIME

selects the specified RF vs. Time waveform.
CH<x>_SV_BASEBAND_IQ selects the specified RF baseband IQ data.

Examples DATA:SOURCE CH1 specifies that the CH1 waveforms will be transferred in the
next CURVe? query.
DATA:SOURCE? might return DATA:SOURCE REF3, indicating that the source for
the waveform data which is transferred using a CURVe? query is reference 3.

DATa:SOUrce:AVAILable? (Query Only)

This query returns a list of enumerations representing the source waveforms that
are currently available for :CURVe? queries. This means that the waveforms have
been acquired. If there are none, NONE is returned.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax DATa:SOUrce:AVAILable?

Related Commands CURVe?

Returns Returns a list of source waveforms that are currently available for :CURVe?
queries.

Examples DATA:SOURCE:AVAILABLE? might return DATA:SOURCE:AVAILABLE

CH2,CH3,CH6,CH7,MATH1,REF1 indicating that CH2, CH3, CH6, CH7,
MATH1, and REF1 are available.

DATa:STARt
This command sets or queries the starting data point for waveform transfer.
This command allows for the transfer of partial waveforms to and from the
instrument. Data will be transferred from <NR1> to DATa:STOP or the record
length, whichever is less. If <NR1> is greater than the record length, the last
data point in the record is transferred.

2-456 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP are order independent. When DATa:STOP is

greater than DATa:STARt, the values will be swapped internally for the CURVE?
query.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax DATa:STARt <NR1>

DATa:STARt?

Related Commands CURVe?

DATa
DATa:STOP
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?

Arguments <NR1> is the first data point that will be transferred, which ranges from 1 to the
record length.

Examples DATA:START 10 specifies that the waveform transfer will begin with data point 10.

DATA:START? might return DATA:START 214, indicating that data point 214 is
the first waveform data point that will be transferred.

DATa:STOP
This command sets or queries the last data point that will be transferred when using
the CURVe?? query. When using the CURVe? command, DATa:STOP is ignored.
This command allows for the transfer of partial waveforms to the controller.
If <NR1> is greater than the record length, then data will be transferred up to the
record length. If both DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP are greater than the record
length, the last data point in the record is returned.
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP are order independent. When DATa:STOP is less
than DATa:STARt, the values will be swapped internally for the CURVE? query.
If you always want to transfer complete waveforms, set DATa:STARt to 1 and
DATa:STOP to the maximum record length, or larger.
Changes to the record length value are not automatically reflected in the
DATa:STOP value. As record length is varied, the DATa:STOP value must be
explicitly changed to ensure the entire record is transmitted. In other words, curve
results will not automatically and correctly reflect increases in record length if

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-457

Commands listed in alphabetical order

the distance from DATa:STARt to DATa:STOP stays smaller than the increased
record length.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax DATa:STOP <NR1>

DATa:STOP?

Related Commands CURVe?

DATa
DATa:STARt
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?

Arguments <NR1> is the last data point that will be transferred, which ranges from 1 to the
record length.

Examples DATA:STOP 15000 specifies that the waveform transfer will stop at data point
15000.
DATA:STOP? might return DATA:STOP 14900, indicating that 14900 is the last
waveform data point that will be transferred.

DATa:WIDth
This command specifies the width, in bytes per point, for waveform data
transferred from the instrument via the CURVe? query. (This command is
synonymous with WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr.)

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax DATa:WIDth <NR1>

DATa:WIDth?

Related Commands WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr

Arguments <NR1> is an integer that indicates the number of bytes per point for the outgoing
waveform data when queried using the CURVe? command.

2-458 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

For analog channels, NR1 can be 1 or 2.

For digital channels, NR1 can be 1 or 2.
For the digital collection, NR1 can be 4 or 8.
For CH<x>_SV_NORMal, CH<x>_SV_AVErage, CH<x>_SV_MAXHold,
CH<x>_SV_MINHold, CH<x>_MAG_VS_TIME,
CH<x>_FREQ_VS_TIME, and CH<x>_PHASE_VS_TIME, NR1 can
only be 8.
For CH<x>_SV_BASEBAND_IQ, NR1 can be 1 or 2.

Examples DATA:WIDTH 1 sets the data width to 1 byte.

DATA:WIDTH? might return DATA:WIDTH 1 indicating the width, in bytes per

point, for waveform data transferred bya the CURVE? query is 1 byte.

DATE? (Query Only)

This command queries the date that the instrument displays.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax DATE?

Related Commands TIMe

Returns <QString> is a date in the form “yyyy-mm-dd” where yyyy refers to a four-digit
year number, mm refers to a two-digit month number from 01 to 12, and dd refers
to a two-digit day number in the month.

Examples DATE? might return DATE 2000-01-24, indicating the current date is set to
January 24, 2000.

*DDT
This command allows you to specify a command or a list of commands that are
executed when the instrument receives a *TRG command. Define Device Trigger
(*DDT) is a special alias that the *TRG command uses.

Group Miscellaneous

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-459

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax *DDT {<Block>|<QString>}

*DDT?

Related Commands ALIas

*TRG

Arguments <Block> is a complete sequence of program messages. The messages can contain
only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons and must follow all
rules for concatenating commands. The sequence must be less than or equal to 80
characters. The format of this argument is always returned as a query.
<QString> is a complete sequence of program messages. The messages can
contain only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons and must
follow all rules for concatenating commands. The sequence must be less than or
equal to 80 characters.

Examples *DDT #217ACQUIRE:STATE RUN specifies that the acquisition system will be
started each time a *TRG command is sent.

DESE
This command sets and queries the bits in the Device Event Status Enable Register
(DESER). The DESER is the mask that determines whether events are reported to
the Standard Event Status Register (SESR), and entered into the Event Queue.
For a more detailed discussion of the use of these registers, see Registers.

Group Status and Error

Syntax DESE <NR1>

DESE?

Related Commands *CLS

*ESE
*ESR?
EVENT?
EVMsg?
*SRE
*STB?

2-460 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR1> The binary bits of the DESER are set according to this value, which ranges
from 1 through 255. For example, DESE 209 sets the DESER to the binary value
11010001 (that is, the most significant bit in the register is set to 1, the next most
significant bit to 1, the next bit to 0, etc.).
The power-on default for DESER is all bits set if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the
DESER maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle.

NOTE. Setting the DESER and ESER to the same value allows only those codes
to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit (bit 5) of the
Status Byte Register. Use the *ESE command to set the ESER.

Examples DESE 209 sets the DESER to binary 11010001, which enables the PON, URQ,
EXE and OPC bits.
DESE? might return DESE 186, showing that the DESER contains the binary
value 10111010.

DIAg:LOOP:OPTion
This command sets or queries the type of looping desired.

Group Self Test

Syntax DIAg:LOOP:OPTion {FAIL|ONCE|ALWAYS|ONFAIL|NTIMES}

DIAg:LOOP:OPTion?

Arguments Fail - run until a failure is found, then halt.

Once - run through one loop.

Always - run forever.

Onfail - run until a failure is found, then loop on it.

Ntimes - run n number of loops.

Examples DIAG:LOOP:OPTION ALWAYS sets loop option to ALWAYS.

DIAG:LOOP:OPTION? returns current looping option value.

DIAg:LOOP:OPTion:NTIMes
This command sets or queries how many loops to run, if N-times is being used.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-461

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Self Test

Syntax DIAg:LOOP:OPTion:NTIMes <NR1>

DIAg:LOOP:OPTion:NTIMes?

Arguments <NR1> is how many loops to run.

Examples DIAG:LOOP:OPTION:NTIMES 2 sets diagnostics to loop 2 times.

DIAG:LOOP:OPTION:NTIMES? might return DIAG:LOOP:OPTION:NTIMES 1

indicating diagnostics will run once.

DIAg:LOOP:STOP (No Query Form)

Request that diagnostics stop looping.

Group Self Test

Syntax DIAg:LOOP:STOP

Examples DIAG:LOOP:STOP stops diagnostics looping.

DIAg:MODe
This command sets or queries the diagnostics mode.

Group Self Test

Syntax DIAg:MODe {POST|EXTENDED|SERVICE}

DIAg:MODe?

Arguments POST specifies the power on self test diagnostics.

EXTENDED specifies the extended diagnostics.

SERVICE specifies the service diagnostics.

Examples DIAG:MODE POST specifies the power on self test diagnostics.

2-462 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DIAg:RESUlt? (Query Only)

This query returns both the overall diagnostics test results and the results of each
individual test area.

Group Self Test

Syntax DIAg:RESUlt?

Returns The diagnostics results.

Examples DIAG:RESULT? might return DIAG:RESULT:FLAG "NOT RUN";LOG

"PASS--IO,PASS--ANALOG,PASS--SYSTEM,PASS--ASIC,PASS--ACQ,
PASS--SIGNAL,PASS--MEMORY" indicating the diagnostics results.

DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg? (Query Only)

This query returns the status of the diagnostic test area that has been selected.

Group Self Test

Syntax DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?

Related Commands DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?

Returns The status of the diagnostics (single area).

Examples DIAG:RESULT:FLAG? might return DIAG:RESULT:FLAG "NOT RUN"

indicating the diagnostics have not been run.

DIAg:RESUlt:LOG? (Query Only)

This query returns the test Pass/Fail status of each diagnostic area. It does not
return the overall status.

Group Self Test

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-463

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?

Returns The status of the diagnostic area.

Examples DIAG:RESULT:LOG? might return :DIAG:RESULT:LOG

"PASS--IO,PASS--ANALOG,PASS--SYSTEM,PASS--ASIC,PASS--ACQ,
PASS--SIGNAL,PASS--MEMORY" indicating the diagnostics result stored in
the log.

DIAg:SELect (No Query Form)

This command selects an available diagnostic area.

Group Self Test

Syntax DIAg:SELect {ALL|IO|ANALOG|SYSTEM|ASIC|ACQ|SIGNAL|MEMORY}

Arguments ALL selects all diagnostic areas.

IO selects the IO group.

ANALOG selects the ANALOG diagnostic area.

SYSTEM selects the SYSTEM diagnostic area.

ASIC selects the ASIC diagnostic area.

ACQ selects the ACQ diagnostic area.

SIGNAL selects the SIGNAL diagnostic area.

MEMORY selects the MEMORY diagnostic area.

Examples DIAG:SELECT IO will select the IO group.

DIAg:STATE (No Query Form)

This command starts or aborts Self Test. Abort happens after group under test
completes.

Group Self Test

2-464 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DIAg:STATE {EXECute|ABOrt}

Arguments EXECUTE starts execution of the diagnostics.

ABOrt disables diagnostics capabilities and returns the instrument to a normal

operating state.

Examples DIAG:STATE ABORT turns off diagnostics capabilities and returns the instrument
to a normal operating state.
DIAG:STATE? might return DIAG:STATE ABORT, indicating that diagnostics
are disabled.

DIGGRP<x>:D<x>:THReshold
Sets or queries the threshold level in volts for the specified digital channel. If the
source channel doesn't exist, a hardware missing error event is set.

Group Digital

Syntax DIGGRP<x>:D<x>:THReshold <NR3>

DIGGRP<x>:D<x>:THReshold?

Arguments DIGGRP<x> is the channel number.

D<x> is the digital channel bit number (0-7).

<NR3> is the threshold level in volts for the specified digital channel.

Examples DIGGRP1:D1:THReshold 30.0E-3 sets the threshold to 30 mV.

DIGGRP1:D1:THReshold? might return DIGGRP1:D1:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0

indicating the threshold is 0.0 V.

DISplay? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the current Display settings.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-465

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISPLAY? might return DISPLAY:CLOCK 1;COLOR:PALETTE:IMAGEVIEW

MONOGREEN; RECORDVIEW TEMPERATURE;USER:GRATICULE
165,50,15;CH1 180,50,100; CH2 300,50,100;CH3
60,50,100;CH4 240,50,100;REF1 0,90,0; REF2
0,90,100;REF3 60,90,100;REF4 240,90,100;MATH1
160,50,100; MATH2 40,60,100;MATH3 120,60,100;MATH4
195,50,100; HISTOGRAM 320,50,100;CARET 150,50,100;MASK
0,25,75;MASKHIGHLIGHT 140,50,100;:DISPLAY:COLOR:MATHCOLOR
DEFAULT;REFCOLOR DEFAULT; :DISPLAY:FILTER SINX;FORMAT
YT;GRATICULE IRE;INTENSITY :WAVEFORM:IMAGEVIEW
81.0000;RECORDVIEW 81.0000;:DISPLAY :INTENSITY:AUTOBRIGHT
0; :DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE OFF;STYLE DOTS;TRIGBAR OFF;TRIGT
1; CURSORTICK LONG;VARPERSIST 2.6000;SCREENTEXT:STATE
1; LABEL1:NAME "";XPOS 100;YPOS 5;:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT
:LABEL2:NAME "THIS IS SCREEN TEXT";XPOS 100;YPOS 20;
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL3:NAME "";XPOS 100;YPOS 35;
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL4:NAME "";XPOS 100;YPOS 50;
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL5:NAME "";XPOS 100;YPOS 343;
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL6:NAME "";XPOS 100;YPOS 80;
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL7:NAME "";XPOS 100;YPOS 95;
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL8:NAME "";XPOS 100;YPOS 110;
:DISPLAY:WAVEFORM 1.

DISplay:{CH<x>|Math<x>|REF<x>}:INVERTColor
This command sets or queries the Inverted mode color of the specified input
source to the specified color. You can assign one of 48 unique colors to any
channel, math, or reference waveform. These colors replace the default Inverted
colors and remain in effect until you reset the colors.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:{CH<x>|Math<x>|REF<x>}:INVERTColor COLOR<y>

DISplay:{CH<x>|Math<x>|REF<x>}:INVERTColor?

Arguments CH<x> specifies the input channel for which you want to change the waveform
color, where <x> is the channel number.
MATH<x> specifies the math waveform for which you want to change the
waveform color, where <x> is the math waveform number.
REF<x> specifies the reference waveform for which you want to change the
waveform color, where <x> is the reference waveform number.
COLOR<y> specifies the color to assign to the specified waveform, where <y> =
0 to 47.

2-466 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:Ch1:INVERTColor COLOR23 sets the channel 2 Inverted waveform

color to the value 23.
DISplay:REF3:INVERTColor? might return COLOR2, indicating that the
Inverted waveform color setting for reference waveform 3 is 2.

DISplay:{CH<x>|Math<x>|REF<x>}:NORMALColor
This command sets or queries the normal mode color of the specified input source
to the specified color. You can assign one of 48 unique colors to any channel,
math, or reference waveform. These colors replace the default normal colors and
remain in effect until you reset the colors.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:{CH<x>|Math<x>|REF<x>}:NORMALColor COLOR<y>

DISplay:{CH<x>|Math<x>|REF<x>}:NORMALColor?

Examples DISplay:Ch1:NORMALColor COLOR13 sets the channel 2 normal waveform

color to the value 13.
DISplay:REF3:NORMALColor? might return COLOR12, indicating that the
normal waveform color setting for reference waveform 3 is 12.

DISplay:COLors
Sets or queries the color mode for the graticule and waveform display.

Group Display Control

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-467

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:COLors {NORMal|INVERTed}

DISplay:COLors?

Arguments NORMal specifies normal color mode.

INVERTed specifies inverted color mode.

Examples DISPLAY:COLORS NORMAL sets the display colors to normal.

DISPLAY:COLORS? might return DISPLAY:COLORS INVERTED indicating the

display colors are inverted.

DISplay:GLObal:B<x>:STATE
This command sets or queries the global state (display mode On or Off) of the
specified bus. Setting this value true (On or NR1 ≠ 0 ) turns on the source in the
waveform view. Setting this value false (Off or NR1 = 0 ) turns off the source
in the waveform view. This command only works if the specified bus is added
already.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:GLObal:B<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DISplay:GLObal:B<x>:STATE?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables the display of the specified bus; any other value enables
display of the bus.
ON enables display of the specified bus.

OFF disables display of the specified bus.

Examples DISplay:GLObal:B1:STATE OFF turns off the display of bus 1.

DISplay:GLObal:B1:STATE? might return DISPLAY:GLOBAL:B1:STATE 1

indicating the bus is displayed.

DISplay:GLObal:CH<x>:STATE
This command sets or queries the global state (display mode On or Off) of the
specified channel (both analog and digital). Setting this value true (On or NR1
≠ 0 ) turns on the source in the waveform view. Setting this value false (Off or

2-468 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

NR1 = 0 ) turns off the source in the waveform view. This command only works
if the specified channel is added already.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:GLObal:CH<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DISplay:GLObal:CH<x>:STATE?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables the display of the specified channel; any other value enables
display of the channel.
ON enables display of the specified channel.

OFF disables display of the specified channel.

Examples DISplay:GLObal:CH1:STATE OFF turns off the display of channel 1.

DISplay:GLObal:CH1:STATE? might return :DISPLAY:GLOBAL:CH1:STATE

0 indicating that channel 1 is not displayed.

DISplay:GLObal:MATH<x>:STATE
This command sets or queries the global state (display mode On or Off) of the
specified math. Setting this value true (On or NR1 ≠ 0 ) turns on the source in the
waveform view. Setting this value false (Off or NR1 = 0 ) turns off the source in
the waveform view. This command only works if the specified math waveform
is added already.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:GLObal:MATH<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DISplay:GLObal:MATH<x>:STATE?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables the display of the specified math; any other value enables
display of the math.
ON enables display of the specified math.

OFF disables display of the specified math.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-469

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:GLObal:MATH1:STATE 1 displays math 1.

DISplay:GLObal:MATH1:STATE? might return

:DISPLAY:GLOBAL:MATH1:STATE 1 indicating that math1 is displayed.

DISplay:GLObal:PLOT<x>:STATE
This command sets or queries the global state (display mode On or Off) of the
specified time trend plot. Setting this value true (On or NR1 ≠ 0 ) turns on the
source in the waveform view. Setting this value false (Off or NR1 = 0 ) turns off
the source in the waveform view. This command only works if the specified
plot is added already.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:GLObal:PLOT<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DISplay:GLObal:PLOT<x>:STATE?

Arguments PLOT<x> is the plot number.

<NR1> = 0 disables the display of the specified plot; any other value enables
display of the plot.
ON enables display of the specified plot.

OFF disables display of the specified plot.

Examples DISplay:GLObal:PLOT1:STATE ON displays plot 1.

DISplay:GLObal:PLOT1:STATE? might return

:DISPLAY:GLOBAL:PLOT1:STATE 1 indicating plot 1 is displayed.

DISplay:GLObal:REF<x>:STATE
this command sets or queries the global state (display mode On or Off) of the
specified reference waveform. Setting this value true (On or NR1 ≠ 0 ) turns on
the source in the waveform view. Setting this value false (Off or NR1 = 0 ) turns
off the source in the waveform view. This command only works if the specified
reference waveform is added already.

Group Display Control

2-470 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:GLObal:REF<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DISplay:GLObal:REF<x>:STATE?

Arguments REF<x> is the Reference waveform number.

<NR1> = 0 disables the display of the specified reference; any other value enables
display of the reference.

ON enables display of the specified reference.

OFF disables display of the specified reference.

Examples DISplay:GLObal:REF1:STATE 1 displays reference 1.

DISplay:GLObal:REF1:STATE? might return

:DISPLAY:GLOBAL:REF1:STATE 1 indicating that reference 1 is displayed.

DISplay:INTENSITy? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the waveform saturation level and screen saver
settings.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:INTENSITy?

Examples DISPLAY:INTENSITY? might return :DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT 1,

indicating the intensity is set to 1.

DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight
This command sets or queries the display backlight intensity setting.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight {LOW|MEDium|HIGH}

DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight?

Arguments LOW selects a low brightness level.

MEDium selects a moderate brightness level.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-471

Commands listed in alphabetical order

HIGH selects a full brightness level.

Examples DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT LOW sets the display backlight to low

brightness level.
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT? might return
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT HIGH, indicating that the display backlight
is set to full brightness level.

DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight:AUTODim:ENAble
Sets or queries the state of the display auto-dim feature. The default is enabled.
Once the backlight has dimmed, any button push, knob turn or mouse movement
returns the backlight value to the value set by :DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight:AUTODim:ENAble {ON|OFF}

DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight:AUTODim:ENAble?

Related Commands DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight

Arguments ON enables the display auto-dim feature.

OFF disables the display auto-dim feature.

Examples DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT:AUTODIM:ENABLE ON enables

auto-dimming of the backlight.
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT:AUTODIM:ENABLE? might return
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT:AUTODIM:ENABLE ON, indicating that
auto-dimming of the backlight is enabled.

DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight:AUTODim:TIMe
Sets or queries the amount of time, in minutes, to wait for no user interface activity
before automatically dimming the display. The time can range from a minimum of
10 minutes to a maximum of 1440 minutes (24 hours). The default is 10 minutes.

Group Display Control

2-472 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight:AUTODim:TIMe <NR1>

DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight:AUTODim:TIMe?

Arguments <NR1> is the amount of time, in minutes, to wait for no user interface activity
before automatically dimming the display.

Examples DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT:AUTODIM:TIME 30 sets the backlight to

autodim in 30 minutes.
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT:AUTODIM:TIME? might return
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT:AUTODIM:TIME 60, indicating the
backlight will auto-dim in 60 minutes.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:ROLOCATION
This command sets or queries the location to display the specified Math FFT plot
cursor readouts (in the plot graticule or in a badge in the Results Bar).

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:ROLOCATION {GRATICULE|BADGE}

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:ROLOCATION?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math FFT plot number.

GRATICULE sets the Math FFT plot cursor readouts to display as part of the
cursors in the plot view.
BADGE removes the Math FFT plot cursor readouts from the cursors in the
graticule and displays the cursor information as a badge in the Results Bar.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView4:CURSor:ROLOCATION GRATICULE sets the cursor

readout information for Math FFT plot 4 to display in the plot graticule.
DISplay:MATHFFTView2:CURSor:ROLOCATION? might return
DISplay:MATHFFTView2:CURSor:ROLOCATION BADGE, indicating that cursor
readout information for Math FFT plot 2 is set to display as a badge in the Results
Bar.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:AUTOScale
This command sets or returns the enabled state of autoscale for Math/FFT
waveforms.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-473

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:AUTOScale {OFF|ON|<NR1>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:AUTOScale?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

OFF disables the autoscale feature.

ON enables the autoscale feature.

<NR1> = 0 disables the autoscale feature; any other value enables the autoscale
feature.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:AUTOScale OFF disables the autoscale feature.

DISplay:MATHFFTView3:AUTOScale? might return

DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW3:AUTOSCALE 1, indicating that autoscale
is on for the Math3 FFT waveform.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:ASOUrce? (Query Only)

This command queries the Math-FFT waveform view source for cursor A.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:ASOUrce?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:ASOUrce? might return

DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:ASOURCE MATH1, indicating the source
is MATH 1.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:BSOUrce? (Query Only)

This command queries the Math-FFT waveform view source for cursor B.

Group Cursor

2-474 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:BSOUrce?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView5:CURSor:BSOUrce? might return

DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:BSOURCE MATH5, indicating the source
is Math waveform MATH 5.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:DDT? (Query Only)

This command queries the delta Y over delta X (ΔY/Δ X) cursor readout value of
the specified cursor in the specified Math-FFT view.

NOTE. If the current cursor is set to horizontal mode, this command will time out.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:DDT?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:DDT? might return

DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:DDT 14.0056E-9, indicating
the ΔY/Δ X cursor readout value is 14.0056E-9.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:FUNCtion
This command sets or queries the cursor type for the specified Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:FUNCtion
{WAVEform|VBArs|HBArs|SCREEN}
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:FUNCtion?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-475

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

WAVEFORM specifies to display the paired vertical cursors in YT display format for
measuring waveform amplitude and time. Measurements are taken at where the
cursor intersects the waveform, and tracks waveform changes.

VBArs specifies vertical bar cursors, which measure in horizontal units.

HBArs specifies horizontal bar cursors, which measure in vertical units.

SCREEN specifies to display both horizontal and vertical bar cursors, which
display the horizontal and vertical positions of the cursors, not waveform levels.
Use these cursors to measure anywhere in the waveform display area.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView5:CURSor:FUNCtion HBARS sets Math-FFT

waveform 5 to use horizontal bar cursors.
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:FUNCtion? might return
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:FUNCtion? SCREEN, indicating that
Math-FFT waveform 2 is set to use both horizontal and vertical cursors.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition
This command sets or returns the position of horizontal cursor A for the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> is the cursor position of the specified cursor in the specified view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition 50.0e-3 sets the

position to 50 mV.
DISplay:MATHFFTView4:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition? might return
DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW4:CURSOR:HBARS:APOSITION —274.2247E-3,
indicating the A cursor position is –274.2247E-3.

2-476 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:AUNIts? (Query Only)

This command queries the vertical units of horizontal cursor A for the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:AUNIts?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:HBArs:AUNIts? might return

DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:HBARS:AUNITS "dBm", indicating the
vertical units are dBm.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition
This command sets or returns the position of horizontal cursor B for the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> is the vertical cursor B position for the specified Math-FFT view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition 50e-3 sets the

position to 0.005 vertical units.
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition? might return
DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:HBARS:BPOSITION —40.4061, indicating
the position is –40.4061 vertical units.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BUNIts? (Query Only)

This command queries the vertical units of horizontal cursor B for the specified
Math-FFT view.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-477

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BUNIts?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView3:CURSor:HBArs:BUNIts? might return

DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW3:CURSOR:HBARS:BUNITS "dBm", indicating the
cursor units are dBm.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)

This command queries the horizontal cursor’s delta value of the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? might return

DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA 30.61448, indicating the
cursor readout is 30.61488 units.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:MODe
This command sets or queries the cursor tracking mode of the specified Math-FFT
view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:MODe {INDEPENDENT|TRACK}

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

INDEPENDENT allows independent adjustment of the two cursors.

2-478 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRACK ties the navigational functionality of the two cursors together. For cursor 1
adjustments, this ties the movement of the two cursors together; however, cursor 2
continues to move independently of cursor 1.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:MODe INDEPENDENT allows independent

adjustment of the two cursors.
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:MODe? might return
:DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:MODE INDEPENDENT, indicating the mode
is set to independent.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE? (Query Only)

This command queries the one over delta cursor readout value of the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE? might return

DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE 2.6005E-9,
indicating the one over delta time value is 2.6005 nanoseconds.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition
This command sets or returns the vertical cursor A x-axis waveform measurement
position of the specified Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> is the cursor position in MHz.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-479

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:SCREEN:AXPOSITION 700.000E+6 sets

the cursor position to 700 MHz.
DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW3:CURSOR:SCREEN:AXPOSITION? might return
DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW3:CURSOR:SCREEN:AXPOSITION 125.000E+6,
indicating the x-axis value of cursor A is 125 MHz.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition
This command sets or returns the vertical cursor A y-axis amplitude measurement
value of the specified Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> is the cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView2:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition 1.0e0 sets the

cursor position to 1.0 dBm.
DISplay:MATHFFTView5:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition? might
return DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:SCREEN:AYPOSITION
1.1741714106633, indicating the cursor position is 1.174 vertical units (such
as dBm).

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition
This command sets or returns the vertical cursor Bx-axis waveform time
measurement position of the specified Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition?

2-480 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> is the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition 3.5e9 sets the

cursor position to 3.5 GHz.
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition? might return
DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:SCREEN:BXPOSITION 2.50E+9,
indicating the cursor position is 2.5 GHz.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition
This command sets or returns the vertical cursor B y-axis amplitude measurement
value of the specified Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> is the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition -50.0e0 sets the

cursor position to -50.0.
DISplay:MATHFFTView4:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition? might
return DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW4:CURSOR:SCREEN:BYPOSITION
-59.0460929065173, indicating the cursor position is at -59.0 dBm.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:STATE
This command sets or queries the visible state of cursors for the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:STATE {ON|OFF|0|1}

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:STATE?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-481

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

ON enables the cursors.

1 enables the cursors.

OFF disables the cursors.

0 disables the cursors.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView2:CURSor:STATE OFF turns off the cursors for

Math-FFT waveform 2.
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:STATE? might return
DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:STATE 1 indicating the cursors
are enabled.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition
This command sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position for the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> sets the vertical cursor A position in the specified view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition 500.0e6 sets the

cursor A position to 500 MHz.
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition? might
return DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:VBARS:APOSITION
585.533869115958E+6, indicating cursor position is 585.5 MHz.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:AUNIts? (Query Only)

This command queries the vertical cursor A measurement units for the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

2-482 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:AUNIts?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:VBArs:AUNIts? might return

:DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS "dBm", indicating the
cursor units are dBm.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition
This command sets or queries the vertical cursor B position for the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> sets the vertical cursor B position in the specified view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition 2.0e9 sets the cursor

B position to 2.0 GHz.
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition? might return
DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:VBARS:BPOSITION 2.50E+9, indicating
the cursor position is at 2.5 GHz.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:BUNIts? (Query Only)

This command queries the vertical cursor B measurement units for the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:BUNIts?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-483

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:VBArs:BUNIts? might return

:DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:VBARS:BUNITS "Hz" indicating the
cursor units are Hz.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)

This command queries the vertical cursor’s delta T readout value for the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? might return

DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:VBARS:DELTA 1.9144661308840E+9,
indicating the delta T cursor value is 1.9 GHz.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition
This command sets or queries the waveform cursor A position for the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> is the waveform cursor A position in the specified plot view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition 600.0e6 sets the

position to 600 MHz.
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition? might return
DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:APOSITION 25.000E+6,
indicating the cursor position is 25 MHz.

2-484 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition
This command sets or queries the waveform cursor B position for the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> is the waveform cursor B position in the specified plot view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition 2.0E+9 sets the

cursor position to 2.0 GHz.
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition? might return
DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:BPOSITION 250.0E+6,
indicating the waveform cursor B position is 250 MHz.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:GRIDlines
This command sets or queries the grid lines setting for the specified Math-FFT
view.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:GRIDlines {HORizontal|VERTical|BOTH}

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:GRIDlines?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

HORizontal specifies horizontal grid lines.

VERTical specifies vertical grid lines.

BOTH specifies both vertical and horizontal grid lines.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-485

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:GRIDlines VERTICAL specifies vertical grid lines.

DISplay:MATHFFTView1:GRIDlines? might return

:DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:GRIDLINES BOTH indicating both
horizontal and vertical grid lines are displayed.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:STATE
This command sets or queries the display state of the specified math waveform for
the specified Math-FFT view.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:STATE {OFF|ON|<NR1>}

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

OFF disables displaying the specified Math-FFT view.

ON enables displaying the specified Math-FFT view.

<NR1> = 0 disables the specified Math-FFT view; any other value enables the
specified Math-FFT view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:MATH:MATH1:STATE ON enables the specified

Math-FFT view.
DISplay:MATHFFTView4:MATH:MATH4:STATE? might return
:DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:MATH:MATH1:STATE 1, indicating the waveform
Math-FFT 1 is displayed.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE
This command sets or queries the x-axis scale (Linear or Log) for the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE {LINEAr|LOG}

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE?

2-486 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

LINEAr specifies a linear scale.

LOG specifies a logarithmic scale.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:XAXIS:SCALE LOG specifies a logarithmic scale.

DISplay:MATHFFTView1:XAXIS:SCALE? might return

DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:XAXIS:SCALE LINEAR, indicating that
the scale setting is linear.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:YAXIS:SCALE
This command sets or queries the vertical scale setting (Linear or dBm) for the
specified Math-FFT view.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:YAXIS:SCALE {LINEAr|DBM}

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:YAXIS:SCALE?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

LINEAr specifies a linear scale.

DBM specifies a dBm scale.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:YAXIS:SCALE LINEAR specifies a linear scale.

DISplay:MATHFFTView1:YAXIS:SCALE? might return

DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:YAXIS:SCALE DBM, indicating that the
scale is dBm.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM
This command sets or queries the value of the left edge of the zoom area for
the specified Math-FFT view.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-487

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> is the value of the left edge of the zoom x axis in the specified plot view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM 800.e6 sets the x axis value of

the left edge of the plot view to 800 MHz.
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM? might return
DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM 781.0E+6, indicating the x
axis value of the left edge of the plot view is at 781 MHz.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO
This command sets or queries the value of the right edge value of the zoom area
for the specified Math-FFT view.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO <NR3>

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> is the value of the right edge of the zoom x axis in the specified plot view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO 2.3E+9 sets the value of the right

edge of the x axis to 2.3 GHz.
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO? might return
:DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO 2.343750E+9,
indicating the value of the right edge of the zoom x axis is 2.34 GHz.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM
This command sets or queries the bottom edge value of the zoom y-axis area for
the specified Math-FFT view.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM?

2-488 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> is the bottom value of the zoom y axis in the specified plot view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM -75.0e0 sets the bottom value

of the y axis to -75 dBm.
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM? might return
DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM -78.8258285893367
indicating the bottom value of the y axis is -78.8 dBm.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO
This command sets or queries the top edge value of the zoom y-axis area for
the specified Math-FFT view.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> is the top value of the zoom y axis in the specified plot view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO 21.0E0 sets the top value of the

zoom y axis in the specified plot view to 21 dBm.
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO? might return
DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO 21.1741714106633,
indicating the top value of the zoom y axis in the specified plot view is 21.17 dBm.

DISplay:MEAS<x>:NAVIgate:TYPE
This command sets or returns the badge navigation type for WBG measurements.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Display Control, WBG

Syntax DISplay:MEAS<x>:NAVIgate:TYPE {ALLOCCURRENCES|FAILURES}

DISplay:MEAS<x>:NAVIgate:TYPE?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-489

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments ALLOCCURRENCES specifies the badge navigation type for WBG measurements
as all occurrences.
FAILURES specifies the badge navigation type for WBG measurements as failures.

Examples DISplay:MEAS1:NAVIgate:TYPE ALLOCCURRENCES specifies the badge

navigation type as all occurrences.
DISplay:MEAS1:NAVIgate:TYPE? might return
:DISplay:MEAS1:NAVIgate:TYPE ALLOCCURRENCES, indicating that the
badge navigation type is all occurrences.

DISplay:PERSistence
This command sets or queries the display persistence for analog waveforms.
Persistence is valid for wave views only.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:PERSistence
{OFF|AUTO|INFPersist|INFInite|VARpersist|CLEAR}
DISplay:PERSistence?

Related Commands DISplay:VARpersist

Arguments OFF disables the persistence aspect of the display.

AUTO automatically set the persistence.

INFPersist sets a display mode where any pixels, once touched by samples,
remain set until cleared by a mode change.
INFInite sets a display mode where any pixels, once touched by samples,
remain set until cleared by a mode change.
VARPersist sets a display mode where set pixels are gradually dimmed.

CLEAR resets the persist time count down and clears the display of acquired points.

Examples DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE VARPERSIST sets the persistence aspect of the display

to fade set pixels according to the time set in the DISplay:VARpersist command.
DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE? might return :DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE OFF,
indicating that the persistence aspect of the display is disabled.

2-490 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:PERSistence:RESET (No Query Form)

This command controls the clearing of persistence data that has been built up over
time. Persistence is valid for wave views only.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:PERSistence:RESET

Related Commands DISplay:PERSistence

DISplay:VARpersist

Examples DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE:RESET clears the display of persistence data.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:ROLOCATION
This command sets or queries the location to display the specified plot cursor
readouts (in the plot graticule or in a badge in the Results Bar).

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:ROLOCATION {GRATICULE|BADGE}

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:ROLOCATION?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the waveform plot number.

GRATICULE sets the plot cursor readouts to display as part of the cursors in the
plot view.
BADGE removes the plot cursor readouts from the cursors in the graticule and
displays the cursor information as a badge in the Results Bar.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:ROLOCATION GRATICULE sets the cursor

readout information for plot 1to display in the plot graticule.
DISplay:PLOTView2:CURSor:ROLOCATION? might return
DISplay:PLOTView2:CURSor:ROLOCATION BADGE, indicating that cursor
readout information for plot 2 is set to display as a badge in the Results Bar.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-491

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:AUTOScale
This command sets or queries the enabled state of autoscale for the specified plot.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:AUTOScale {OFF|ON|<NR1>}

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:AUTOScale?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

OFF disables the autoscale feature.

ON enables the autoscale feature.

<NR1> = 0 disables the autoscale feature; any other value enables the autoscale
feature.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:AUTOScale OFF turns off plot autoscale.

DISplay:PLOTView3:AUTOScale? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW3:AUTOSCALE 0, indicating the plot autoscale is off
for plot 3.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:ASOUrce? (Query Only)

This command queries the cursor source for plot cursor A.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:ASOUrce?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:ASOUrce? might return

DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:ASOURCE PLOT1 indicating the
source of the cursor is plot 1.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:BSOUrce? (Query Only)

This command queries the cursor source for plot cursor B.

2-492 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:BSOUrce?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:BSOUrce? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:BSOURCE PLOT1 indicating the B
cursor source is plot 1.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:DDT? (Query Only)

This command returns the delta V over delta T cursor readout value for the
specified Plot view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:DDT?

Arguments PlotView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:DDT? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:DDT 131.0470E+6 indicating the cursor
readout value is 131.0470E+6.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:FUNCtion
This command sets or queries the cursor mode for the specified Plot view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:FUNCtion
{WAVEFORM|VBArs|HBArs|SCREEN}
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:FUNCtion?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-493

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

WAVEFORM specifies to display the paired cursors in YT display format for

measuring waveform amplitude and time.

VBArs specifies vertical bar cursors, which measure in horizontal units.

HBArs specifies horizontal bar cursors, which measure in vertical units.

SCREEN specifies to display both horizontal and vertical bar cursors, which
measure the selected waveform in horizontal and vertical units. Use these cursors
to measure anywhere in the waveform display area.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:FUNCtion VBARS displays vertical bar cursors.

DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:FUNCtion? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:FUNCTION SCREEN indicating that
both horizontal and vertical bar cursors are displayed.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition
This command sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position for the specified
Plot view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the cursor position.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition 2.0 sets the cursor to

2 Volts.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:HBARS:APOSITION 2.2186 indicating the
HBArs cursors are at 2.2186 Volts.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:AUNIts? (Query Only)

This command queries the horizontal cursor A vertical units for the specified
Plot view.

2-494 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:AUNIts?

Returns PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:HBArs:AUNIts? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:HBARS:AUNITS "V", indicating the A units
are volts.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition
This command sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position for the specified
Plot view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the HBArs vertical position.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition 2.0 sets the cursor to

2 Volts.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:HBARS:BPOSITION 2.2186 indicating the
HBArs cursors are at 2.2186 Volts.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BUNIts? (Query Only)

This command queries the cursor B vertical units for the specified Plot view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BUNIts?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-495

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:HBArs:BUNIts? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:HBARS:BUNITS "V" indicating the units are
Volts.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)

This command queries the delta V cursor readout value for the specified Plot view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

Returns Returns an <NR3> that is the delta V cursor value.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA 1.2543, indicating the delta
value is 1.2543 V.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:MODe
This command sets or queries the cursor tracking mode for the specified Plot view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:MODe {INDEPENDENT|TRACK}

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:MODe?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

INDEPENDENT allows independent adjustment of the two cursors.

TRACK ties the navigational functionality of the two cursors together. For cursor A
adjustments, this ties the movement of the two cursors together; however, cursor
B continues to move independently of cursor A.

2-496 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:MODe TRACK sets the cursor to track together.

DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:MODe? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:MODE INDEPENDENT, indicating independent
adjustment of the cursors is allowed.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE? (Query Only)

This command sets or queries the one over delta T cursor readout value for the
specified Plot view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

Returns Returns an <NR3> that is the one over delta T cursor readout value (it may not be
delta T, depending on the plot units).

Examples DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE 88.2295E+6
indicating the 1 over delta time value is 88.2295 MHz.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition
This command sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified
cursor in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the horizontal cursor A position.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-497

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition -5.0 sets the A X

cursor position to —5.0 ns.
DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:SCREEN:AXPOSITION -5.5460E-9
indication the cursor A X position is -5.546 ns.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition
This command sets or queries the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the vertical cursor A position.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition 2.0 set the A cursor

Y position to 2.0 Volts.
DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:SCREEN:AYPOSITION 1.9035 indicating
the A cursor Y position is 1.9035 V.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition
This command sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified
cursor in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the horizontal cursor B position.

2-498 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition 59.0E-9 sets the B

cursor X position to 59.0 ns.
DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:SCREEN:BXPOSITION 59.6802E-9
indicating the B cursor X position is 59.6802 ns.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition
This command sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the vertical cursor B position.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition 0.589 sets the B cursor

Y position to 589 mV.
DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:SCREEN:BYPOSITION 589.0696E-3
indicating the B cursor Y position is 589.0696 mV.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SPLITMODE
This command sets or queries the cursor source mode in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SPLITMODE {SAME|SPLIT}

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SPLITMODE?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

SAME specifies that both cursors are on the same waveform.

SPLIT specifies that the cursors can be on different waveforms.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-499

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:SPLITMODE SAME sets the cursors to be on the

same waveform.
DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:SPLITMODE? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:SPLITMODE SAME indicating both
cursors are on the same waveform.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:STATE
This command sets or queries the visible state of the cursor of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:STATE {OFF|ON|<NR1>}

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:STATE?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

OFF disables the specified cursor.

ON enables the specified cursor.

<NR1> = 0 disables the specified cursor; any other value enables the specified
cursor.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:STATE OFF disables the specified cursor.

DISplay:PLOTView5:CURSor:STATE? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW5:CURSOR:STATE 1 indicating cursors are on.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition
This command sets or queries the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition?

2-500 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the vertical cursor A position.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition 50.0E-9 sets the VBARS

APOSITION to 50 ns.

DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:VBARS:APOSITION -60.0796E-9
indicating the VBARS APOSITION is set to -60.08 ns.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition
This command sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the vertical cursor B position.

Examples :DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:VBARS:BPOSITION 50.0E-9 sets the VBARS

BPOSITION to 50 ns.

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:VBARS:BPOSITION? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:VBARS:BPOSITION -60.0796E-9
indicating the VBARS BPOSITION is set to 60.08 ns.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)

This command queries the delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-501

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

Returns The delta T cursor readout value is returned.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:VBARS:DELTA 119.7593E-9 indicating
the VBARS DELTA is set to 119.76 ns.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:UNIts? (Query Only)

This command queries the VBArs cursor readout units of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:UNIts?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

Returns The VBArs cursor readout units are returned.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:UNIts? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW5:CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS "V" indicating the units are
Volts.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition
This command sets or queries the waveform cursor A horizontal position of the
specified cursor in the specified view.

NOTE. In case of XY plot, this command has no effect when used to set the value.
In case of bathtub plot, this command sets or returns the cursor A vertical position.
For all other plots, this command sets or returns the cursor A horizontal position.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition?

2-502 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the horizontal cursor A position.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition -50.0E-9 sets the

waveform APOSITION to -50.0 ns.
DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:APOSITION -60.0796E-9
indicating the waveform APOSITION is set to -60.08 ns.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition
This command sets or queries the waveform cursor B horizontal position of the
specified cursor in the specified view.

NOTE. In case of XY plot, this command has no effect when used to set the value.
In case of bathtub plot, this command has no effect. Query returns invalid values.
For all other plots, this command sets or returns the cursor B horizontal position.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the horizontal cursor B position.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition 3.0 sets the position

to 3.0 V.
DISplay:PLOTView5:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW5:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:BPOSITION 2.600517840
indicating the position is 2.5 V.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:GRIDlines
This command sets or queries the Grid (graticule) lines setting of the specified
plot. This command works for plots that have vertical and horizontal units
associated with the graticule. For example, this command does not work for
XY or XYZ plots.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-503

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:GRIDlines {HORizontal|VERTical|BOTH}

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:GRIDlines?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

HORizontal specifies horizontal grid lines.

VERTical specifies vertical grid lines.

BOTH specifies both vertical and horizontal grid lines.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:GRIDlines Vertical sets the vertical grid lines to

display.
DISplay:PLOTView1:GRIDlines? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:GRIDLINES BOTH indicating that both vertical and
horizontal grid lines are displayed.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE
This command sets or queries the horizontal scale setting for applicable plots
(Linear or Log) for the specified plot view.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE {LINEAR|LOG}

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

LINEAR creates a plot with linear scales.

LOG creates a plot with logarithmic scales.

Examples DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:XAXIS:SCALE LOG creates a plot with a logarithmic

horizontal scale.
DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:XAXIS:SCALE? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:XAXIS:SCALE LINEAR indicating plots will have
linear scales.

2-504 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:YAXIS:SCALE
This command sets or queries the vertical scale setting for applicable plots (Linear
or Log) in the specified plot view.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:YAXIS:SCALE {LINEAR|LOG}

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

LINEAR specifies a linear vertical scale.

LOG specifies a logarithmic vertical scale.

Examples DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:YAXIS:SCALE LINEAR sets the plot to use a linear

vertical scale.
DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:YAXIS:SCALE? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:YAXIS:SCALE LOG indicating a logarithmic vertical
scale is used.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM
This command sets or queries the value of the left edge of the specified plot.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is start of the zoom x-axis.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM 2.0 sets the start of the zoom

x-axis to 2.0 V.
DISplay:PLOTView3:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM? might return
DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW3:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM 1.9844803459459
indicating the start of the zoom x-axis is 1.9845 V.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-505

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO
This command sets or queries the value of the right edge of the specified plot.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the end of the zoom x-axis.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO 2.5 sets the end of the zoom x-axis

to 2.5 V.
DISplay:PLOTView3:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO? might return
DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW3:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO 2.2144883507508
indicating the end of the zoom x-axis is 2.21 V.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM
This command sets or queries the bottom value of the zoom y-axis in the specified
plot view.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the bottom value of the zoom y-axis.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM -1.0E+20 sets the bottom value

of the zoom y-axis to -1E+20.
DISplay:PLOTView1:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM -1.0E+21 indicating
the bottom value of the zoom y-axis is -1E+21.

2-506 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO
This command sets or queries the top value of the zoom y-axis in the specified
plot view.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the top value of the zoom y-axis.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO 100 sets the top value of the zoom

y-axis to 100.
DISplay:PLOTView1:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW3:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM 0.0E+0 indicating the
top value of the zoom y-axis is 0.0 hits (for a histogram plot, or it could be Volts
for an XY plot).

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:ROLOCATION
This command sets or queries the location to display the specified Reference FFT
plot cursor readouts (in the plot graticule or in a badge in the Results Bar).

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:ROLOCATION {GRATICULE|BADGE}

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:ROLOCATION?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

GRATICULE sets the Reference FFT plot cursor readouts to display as part of
the cursors in the plot view.
BADGE removes the Reference FFT plot cursor readouts from the cursors in the
graticule and displays the cursor information as a badge in the Results Bar.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView1:CURSor:ROLOCATION GRATICULE sets the cursor

readout information for Reference FFT plot 1 to display in the plot graticule.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-507

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:REFFFTView2:CURSor:ROLOCATION? might return

DISplay:REFFFTView2:CURSor:ROLOCATION BADGE, indicating that cursor
readout information for Reference FFT plot 2 is set to display as a badge in the
Results Bar.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:AUTOScale
This command sets or queries the enabled state of auto-scale for plots.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:AUTOScale {OFF|ON|0|1}

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:AUTOScale?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

OFF disables auto-scale on the specified reffftview.

0 disables auto-scale on the specified reffftview.

ON enables the specified channel on the specified Waveform View.

1 enables the specified channel on the specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView1:AUTOScale 1 enables auto-scale on the specified

view.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:AUTOScale? might return
:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:AUTOSCALE 1 indicating auto-scale is on.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:ASOUrce? (Query Only)

This command returns the cursor source for plot cursor A

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:ASOUrce?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

Returns Returns the cursor source for plot cursor A.

2-508 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:ASOUrce? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:ASOURCE REF5 indicating the A cursor
source is reference 5.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:BSOUrce? (Query Only)

This command returns the cursor source for plot cursor B.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:BSOUrce?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

Returns Returns the cursor source for plot cursor B.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:BSOUrce? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:BSOURCE REF5 indicating the source of the
B cursor is reference 5.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:DDT? (Query Only)

This command returns the delta V over delta T cursor readout value of the
specified cursor in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:DDT?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

Returns Returns the delta V over delta T cursor readout value

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:DDT? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:DDT 9.91E+37 indicating the delta V over
delta T cursor readout value is 9.91E+37.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-509

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:FUNCtion
This command sets or queries the cursor type of the specified cursor in the
specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:FUNCtion
{WAVEform|VBArs|HBArs|SCREEN}
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:FUNCtion?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

HBArs specifies horizontal bar cursors, which measure in vertical units.

VBArs specifies vertical bar cursors, which measure in horizontal units.

SCREEN specifies both horizontal and vertical bar cursors, which measure in
horizontal and vertical units specified by the cursor sources. Use these cursors
to measure anywhere in the waveform display area.
WAVEform specifies paired or split cursors in YT display format for measuring
waveform amplitude and time. In XY and XYZ format, these cursors indicate the
amplitude positions of an XY pair (Ch1 vs Ch2 voltage, where Ch1 is the X axis
and Ch2 is the Y axis) relative to the trigger.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:FUNCtion screen sets the cursor function

to screen.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:FUNCtion? might return
:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:FUNCTION WAVEFORM indicating the cursor
function is set to waveform.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition
This command sets or queries the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition?

2-510 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

<NR3> is the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition -20 sets the A cursor

position to -20.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:HBARS:APOSITION
-14.4762489421361 indicating the A cursor position is -14.48 dBm.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:AUNIts? (Query Only)

This command returns cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the
specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:AUNIts?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

Returns Returns the cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:HBArs:AUNIts? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:HBARS:AUNITS "dBm" indicating the A
cursor units are dBm.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition
This command sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-511

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

<NR3> is the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition -90 sets the B cursor

position to -90.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:HBARS:BPOSITION
-100.6262359333038 indicating the B cursor position is -100.6.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BUNIts? (Query Only)

This command returns the cursor B vertical units of the specified cursor in the
specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BUNIts?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

Returns Returns the cursor B vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:HBArs:BUNIts? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:HBARS:BUNITS "dBm" indicating the units
are dBm.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)

This command returns the delta V cursor readout value of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

2-512 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Returns Returns the delta V cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified
view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA 59.9867396737569
indicating the delta V cursor readout value is 59.99.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:MODe
This command sets or queries the cursor tracking mode of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:MODe {INDEPENDENT|TRACK}

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:MODe?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:MODe TRACK sets the cursors to track

together.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:MODe? might return
:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:MODE INDEPENDENT indicating
the cursors move independently.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE? (Query Only)

This command returns the one over delta T cursor readout value of the specified
cursor in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-513

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE? might

return :DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE
2.540935140340E-9 indicating the one over delta T cursor readout value is
2.54 ns.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition
This command sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified
cursor in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

<NR3> is the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition 1.0E+6 sets the

cursor position to 1.0 MHz.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:SCREEN:AXPOSITION
792.4465962305570E+3 indicating the A cursor horizontal position is
792.447 kHz.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition
This command sets or queries the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition?

2-514 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

<NR3> is the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition -20.9 sets the

position to -20 dBm.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:SCREEN:AYPOSITION
-30.0132603262431 indicating the A cursor vertical position is -30.01 dBm.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition
This command sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified
cursor in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

<NR3> is the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition 300 sets the position

to 300 MHz.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:SCREEN:BXPOSITION
394.3483403001212E+6 indicating the B cursor horizontal position is
394.348 MHz.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition
This command sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-515

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

<NR3> is the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition -80 sets the cursor

position to -90 dBm.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition? might return
:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:SCREEN:BYPOSITION -90.0 indicating
the B cursor vertical position is -90 dBm.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SPLITMODE
This command sets or queries whether both cursors have same or different source.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SPLITMODE {SAME|SPLIT}

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SPLITMODE?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

SAME specifies both cursors have the same sources.

SPLIT specifies both cursors have different sources.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:SPLITMODE SPLIT specified that the cursors

have different sources.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:SPLITMODE? might return
:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:SPLITMODE SAME indicating both cursors
have the same source.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:STATE
This command sets or queries the visible state of the cursor of the specified cursor
n the specified view.

Group Cursor

2-516 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:STATE {OFF|ON|0|1}

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:STATE?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

OFF specifies the cursor is not visible.

0 specifies the cursor is not visible.

ON displays the cursor.

1 displays the cursor.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:STATE ON specifies the cursor is visible.

DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:STATE? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:STATE 1 indicating the cursor is
visible.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition
This command sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified
cursor in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

<NR3> is the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition 1.0E+6 sets the cursor

to 1 MHz.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:VBARS:APOSITION
792.4465962305570E+3 indicating the cursor position is 792.447 kHz.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition
This command sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified
cursor in the specified view.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-517

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

<NR3> is the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition 300.0E+6 sets the

cursor position to 300 MHz.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:VBARS:BPOSITION
394.3483403001212E+6 indicating the B cursor horizontal position is
394.348 MHz.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)

This command returns the delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

Returns Returns the delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified
view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:VBARS:DELTA 393.5558937038906E+6
indicating the delta T cursor readout value is 393.556 MHz.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:UNIts? (Query Only)

This command returns cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the
specified view.

2-518 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:UNIts?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

Returns Returns cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:VBArs:UNIts? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS "Hz" indicating the A
cursor vertical units are Hz.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:AHPOSition? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the value of the cursor A horizontal position.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:AHPOSition?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView1:CURSor:WAVEform:AHPOSition? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:AHPOSITION 9.91E+37.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition
Sets or returns the waveform cursor A position in the specified plot view.

NOTE. In case of an XY plot, this command has no effect when used to set the
value. In the case of a bathtub plot, this command sets or queries the cursor A
vertical position. For all other plots, this command sets or queries the cursor
A horizontal position.

Group Cursor

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-519

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

<NR3> is the waveform cursor A position in the specified plot view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition 7E+5 sets the

position to 700 kHz.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:APOSITION
792.4465962305570E+3 indicating the A cursor waveform position is
792.4 kHz.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:AVPOSition? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the value of the cursor A vertical position.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:AVPOSition?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:AVPOSition? might return

:DISplay:REFFFTView1:CURSor:WAVEform:AVPOSition 1.605E+0
indicating the cursor vertical position is 1.6 dBm.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BHPOSition? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the value of the cursor B horizontal position.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BHPOSition?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

2-520 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BHPOSition? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:BHPOSITION 9.91E+37.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition
Sets or returns the waveform cursor B position in the specified plot view.

NOTE. In case of an XY plot, this command has no effect when used to set the
value. In the case of a bathtub plot, this command has no effect. Queries return
invalid values. For all other plots, this command sets or queries the cursor
B horizontal position.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

<NR3> is the waveform cursor B position in the specified plot view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition 4E+8 sets the

cursor position to 400 MHz.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:BPOSITION
394.3483403001212E+6 indicating the B waveform curosr position is
394.35 MHz.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BVPOSition? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the value of the cursor B vertical position.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BVPOSition?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-521

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView1:CURSor:WAVEform:BVPOSition? might

return :DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BVPOSition
-119.866E+0 indicating the cursor vertical position is -119.9 dBm.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:GRIDlines
This command sets or returns the grid lines setting of the plot.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:GRIDlines {HORizontal|VERTical|BOTH}

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:GRIDlines?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

HORizontal specifies horizontal grid lines.

VERTical specifies vertical grid lines.

BOTH specifies both horizontal and vertical grid lines.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:GRIDlines hhorizontal specifies horizontal gird

lines.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:GRIDlines? might return
:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:GRIDLINES BOTH indicating that both vertical
and horizontal grid lines are diplayed

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:REF:REF<x>:STATE
This command sets or queries the state of the specified reference waveform in
the specified Waveform View.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:REF:REF<x>:STATE {OFF|ON|0|1}

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:REF:REF<x>:STATE?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

OFF disables the display the specified reference.

0 disables the display the specified reference.

2-522 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ON enables the specified reference.

1 enables the specified reference.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:REF:REF5:STATE 0 turns display of the reference off.

DISplay:REFFFTView5:REF:REF5:STATE? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:REF:REF5:STATE 1 indicating the
reference is displayed.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE
This command sets or queries the x-axis scale setting for Ref FFT.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE {LINEAr|LOG}

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE?

Arguments LINEAr specifies a linear scale.

LOG specifies a logarithmic scale.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:XAXIS:SCALE linear sets the x-axis scale to linear.

DISplay:REFFFTView5:XAXIS:SCALE? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:XAXIS:SCALE LOG indicating x-axis
scale for the specified reference view is logarithmic.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM
This command sets or returns the left edge of the zoom x-axis in the specified
plot view.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM?

Arguments <NR3> is the left edge of the zoom x-axis in the specified plot view.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-523

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM 2.0E+6 sets the left edge of

the specified view to 2.0 MHz.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM? might return
:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM 1.3295739742362E+6
indicating the left edge of the specified view is 1.33 MHz.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO
This command sets or queries the right edge of the zoom x-axis in the specified
plot view.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO?

Arguments <NR3> is the right edge of the zoom x-axis in the specified plot view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO 2.0E+8 sets the right edge of the

zoom x-axis to 200 MHz.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO? might return
:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO 235.0376933178995E+6
indicating the right edge of the zoom x-axis is 235.0 MHz.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM
This command sets or queries the bottom value of the zoom y-axis in the specified
plot view.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM?

Arguments <NR3> is the bottom value of the zoom y-axis in the specified plot view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM -120.0 sets the bottom value of

the zoom y-axis to -120.0 dBm.

2-524 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:REFFFTView5:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM -129.7533120632172
indicating the bottom value of the zoom y-axis is -129.8 dBm.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO
This command sets or queries the top value of the zoom y-axis in the specified
plot view.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO?

Arguments <NR3> is the top value of the zoom y-axis in the specified plot view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO 0.0 sets the top value of the zoom

y-axis to 0.0 dBm.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO? might return
:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO 15.8820685863495
indicating the top value of the zoom y-axis is 15.9 dBm.

DISplay:SELect:BUS
This command sets or queries the overall selected bus. Sets are applied to all views
that contain the source and the selected view is changed. When multiple buses are
open, querying the command gives the correct result, but the bus cannot set.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:SELect:BUS BUS<x>

DISplay:SELect:BUS?

Arguments BUS<x> is the selected bus.

Examples DISplay:SELect:BUS BUS2 sets Bus 2 as the selected bus.

DISplay:SELect:BUS? might return :DISPLAY:SELECT:BUS BUS1

indicating Bus 1 is the selected bus.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-525

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:SELect:MATH
This command sets or queries the overall selected math. Sets are applied to all
views that contain the source and the selected view is changed. When multiple
Math are open, querying the command gives the correct result, but the required
Math cannot be set.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:SELect:MATH MATH<x>

DISplay:SELect:MATH?

Arguments MATH<x> is the selected math.

Examples DISplay:SELect:MATH MATH1 selects Math 1.

DISplay:SELect:MATH? might display :DISPLAY:SELECT:MATH MATH2

indicating that Math 2 is selected.

DISplay:SELect:REFerence
This command sets or queries the overall selected reference waveform. Sets are
applied to all views that contain the source and the selected view is changed.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:SELect:REFerence {NONE|REF<x>}

Arguments NONE specifies no reference waveforms.

REF<x> specifies the reference waveform.

Examples DISplay:SELect:REFerence REF2 selects reference 2.

DISplay:SELect:REFERENCE? might return DISPLAY:SELECT:REFERENCE

NONE indicating no reference is selected.

DISplay:SELect:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the overall selected source. Sets are applied to all
views that contain the source and the selected view is changed.

2-526 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:SELect:SOUrce
{NONE|CH<x>|BUS<x>|MATH<x>|PLOT<x>|REF<x>}

Arguments NONE specifies no source.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as source.

BUS<x> specifies a bus as source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as source.

PLOT<x> specifies a plot as the source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source.

Examples DISplay:SELect:SOUrce Bus1 selects Bus1 as the selected source.

DISplay:SELect:SOUrce? might return :DISPLAY:SELECT:SOURCE MATH1

indicating Math 1 is the selected source.

DISplay:SELect:SPECView<x>:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the spectrum trace (source channel) to select in
the Spectrum View window.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:SELect:SPECView<x>:SOUrce {CH<x>}

DISplay:SELect:SPECView<x>:SOUrce?

Arguments SPECView<x> specifies the Spectrum View number. <x> is always 1.

CH<x> specifies the spectrum trace (source channel) to select (make active)
in the Spectrum View.

Examples DISplay:SELect:SPECView1:SOUrce CH1 sets the spectrum trace associated

with channel 1 as the selected trace.
DISplay:SELect:SPECView1:SOUrce? might return CH3, indicating that the
spectrum trace associated with channel 3 is selected in the Spectrum View.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-527

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:SELect:VIEW
This command sets or queries the selected view.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:SELect:VIEW
{WAVEVIEW1|MATHFFT<x>|PLOTVIEW<x>|REFFFT<x>}

Arguments WAVEVIEW1 sets WAVEVIEW as the selected view.

MATHFFT<x> sets MATHFFT as the selected view.

PLOTVIEW<x> sets PLOTVIEW as the selected view.

REFFFT<x> sets REFFFT as the selected view.

Examples DISplay:SELect:VIEW PLOTVIEW1 selects PLOTVIEW1 as the selected view.

DISplay:SELect:VIEW? might return :DISPLAY:SELECT:VIEW MATHFFT1

indicating MATHFFT1 is the selected view.

DISplay:SELect:WAVEView<x>:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the selected source in the given waveview.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:SELect:WAVEView<x>:SOUrce
{CH<x>|MATH<x>|BUS<x>|REF<x>|PLOT<x>}

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as source.

BUS<x> specifies a bus as source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source.

PLOT<x> specifies a plot as the source.

Examples DISplay:SELect:WAVEView1:SOUrce MATH1 sets MATH1 as the selected

source.

2-528 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:SELect:WAVEView1:SOUrce? might return

:DISPLAY:SELECT:WAVEVIEW1:SOURCE CH2 indicating CH2 is the
selected source.

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:ANOISEDensity? (Query Only)

Returns the noise density of the selected RF trace at the Cursor A position

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:ANOISEDensity?

Related Commands DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:BNOISE?

Arguments SPECView<x> is the specified Spectrum View and must be SPECView1.

Returns The noise density of the selected RF trace at the horizontal position of Cursor A in
<RF Units>/Hz units, where <RF Units> are the vertical units of the RF trace.

Examples DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:ANOISEDensity? might return

–133.2350, indicating a noise density of –133.2350 dBm/Hz at the Cursor A
position.

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:ASOUrce
This command sets or queries the Cursor A source in the Spectrum View.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:ASOUrce {AUTO|CH<x>}

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:ASOUrce?

Arguments SPECView<x> specifies the Spectrum View number. <x> is always 1.

AUTO specifies to use the selected analog channel as the Spectrum View source.

CH<x> specifies the analog channel to use as the Spectrum View source.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-529

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:SPECView2:CURSor:CURSOR:ASOUrce CH1 sets the Cursor A

source of Spectrum View 2 to Channel 1.
DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:ASOUrce? might return
DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:ASOUrce AUTO, indicating the Cursor
A source of Spectrum View 1 is the selected source.

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:BNOISE? (Query Only)

Returns the noise density of the selected RF trace at the Cursor B position when in
Absolute mode, or the phase noise when in Delta mode.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:BNOISE?

Related Commands DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:ANOISEDensity?

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:READout

Arguments SPECView<x> is the specified Spectrum View and must be SPECView1.

Returns In Absolute mode: The noise density of the selected RF trace at the horizontal
position of Cursor B in <RF Units>/Hz units, where <RF Units> are the vertical
units of the RF trace.
In Delta mode: The phase noise of the selected RF trace at the horizontal position
of Cursor B in dBc/Hz units.

Examples DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:BNOISE? might return –60.1289,

indicating a phase noise of –60.1289 dBc/Hz at the Cursor B position in Delta
mode.
DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:BNOISE? might return –47.922,
indicating a phase noise of –47.922 dBm/Hz at the Cursor B position in Absolute
mode.

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:BSOUrce
This command sets or queries the Cursor B source in the Spectrum View.

Group Cursor

2-530 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:BSOUrce {AUTO|CH<x>}

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:BSOUrce?

Arguments SPECView<x> specifies the Spectrum View number. <x> is always 1.

AUTO specifies to use the selected analog channel as the Spectrum View source.

CH<x> specifies the analog channel to use as the Spectrum View source.

Examples DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:ASOUrce CH1 sets the Cursor A

source of Spectrum View 1 to Channel 1.
DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:ASOUrce? might return
DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:ASOUrce AUTO, indicating the Cursor
A source of Spectrum View 1 is the selected source.

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:APOSition
This command queries the Cursor A horizontal bar’s vertical position (where it
crosses the spectrum signal) in the Spectrum View.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:APOSition?

Related Commands DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:AUNIts?

Arguments SPECView<x> specifies the Spectrum View number. <x> is always 1.

Returns The vertical position of Cursor A in the vertical units of the cursor source.

Examples DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:APOSition? might

return DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:APOSition -40.0
indicating the Cursor A vertical position is -40.0 units (such as dBm).

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:AUNIts? (Query Only)

This command queries the horizontal bar Cursor A horizontal bar’s amplitude
units in the Spectrum View.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-531

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:AUNIts?

Related Commands DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:APOSition

Arguments SPECView<x> specifies the Spectrum View number. <x> is always 1.

Returns The vertical units of the Spectrum View Cursor A as a Qstring.

Examples DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:AUNIts? might return

DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:AUNIts "dBmV", indicating
the Cursor A vertical units are decibel millivolts.

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:BPOSition
This command queries the horizontal bar Cursor B horizontal bar’s vertical
position (where it crosses the spectrum signal) in the Spectrum View.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:BPOSition?

Related Commands DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:BUNIts?

Arguments SPECView<x> specifies the Spectrum View number. <x> is always 1.

Returns The vertical position of Cursor B in the vertical units of the cursor source.

Examples DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:BPOSition? might

return DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:BPOSition -67.8
indicating the Cursor A vertical position is -67.8 units (such as dBm).

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:BUNIts? (Query Only)

This command queries the Cursor B horizontal bar’s amplitude units in the
Spectrum View.

2-532 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:BUNIts?

Related Commands DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:BPOSition

Arguments SPECView<x> specifies the Spectrum View number. <x> is always 1.

Returns The vertical units of the Spectrum View Cursor B as a Qstring.

Examples DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:BUNIts? might return

DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:BUNIts "dBmV", indicating
the Cursor A vertical units are decibel millivolts.

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:READout
This command sets or queries the Cursor B readout type in the Spectrum View.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:READout {ABSOLUTE|DELTA}

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:READout?

Arguments SPECView<x> specifies the Spectrum View number. <x> is always 1.

ABSOLUTE specifies the Cursor B readout displays absolute frequency and

amplitude.
DELTA specifies the Cursor B readout displays delta frequency and amplitude
from Cursor A.

Examples DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:READout ABSOLUTE sets the readout

type to Absolute for Cursor B.
DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:READout? might return
DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:READout DELTA, indicating the
readout type is Delta between Cursor A and B.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-533

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:SPLITMODE
This command sets or queries whether both Spectrum View cursors have the
same or different sources.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:SPLITMODE {SAME|SPLIT}

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:SPLITMODE?

Arguments SPECView<x> specifies the Spectrum View number. <x> is always 1.

SAME specifies that both Spectrum View cursors have the same source

SPLIT specifies that both Spectrum View cursors have independent sources.

Examples DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:SPLITMODE SPLIT sets the Spectrum

View cursors have independent sources.
DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:SPLITMODE? might return
DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:SPLITMODE SAME, indicating the
Spectrum View cursors have the same source.

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:STATE
This command sets or queries the visibility state of the cursors in the Spectrum
View.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:STATE {ON|OFF}

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:STATE?

Arguments SPECView<x> specifies the Spectrum View number. <x> is always 1.

ON enables viewing cursors in the Spectrum View.

OFF disables viewing cursors in the Spectrum View.

Examples DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:STATE OFF enables (displays) cursors

in the Spectrum View.

2-534 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:STATE? might return

DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:STATE ON, indicating the Spectrum
View cursors are enabled (being displayed).

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:APOSition
This command sets or queries the Cursor A vertical bar’s horizontal position
in the Spectrum View.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:APOSition <NR3>

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:APOSition?

Arguments SPECView<x> specifies the Spectrum View number. <x> is always 1.

<NR3> specifies the horizontal position of Cursor A in Hz. The available

frequency range is set by the frequencies at the left and right edges of the
Spectrum View for the cursor source.

Examples DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:APOSition 50E+6 sets the

Spectrum View Cursor B position to 50 MHz.
DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:APOSition? might return
DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:APOSition 48.5E+6,
indicating the Spectrum View Cursor B position is 48.5 MHz.

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:BPOSition
This command sets or queries the Cursor B vertical bar’s horizontal position
in the Spectrum View.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:BPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:BPOSition?

Arguments SPECView<x> specifies the Spectrum View number. <x> is always 1.

<NR3> specifies the horizontal position of Cursor B in Hz. The available

frequency range is set by the frequencies at the left and right edges of the
Spectrum View for the cursor source.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-535

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:BPOSition 55E+6 sets the

Spectrum View Cursor B position to 55 MHz.
DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:APOSition? might return
DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:APOSition 482.5E+6,
indicating the Spectrum View Cursor B position is 42.5 MHz.

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:UNIts? (Query Only)

This command queries the cursor horizontal units in the Spectrum View.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:UNIts?

Arguments SPECView<x> specifies the Spectrum View number. <x> is always 1.

Returns The horizontal units of the Spectrum View as a Qstring.

Examples DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:UNIts? might return

DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:UNIts "Hz", indicating the
cursor horizontal units are Hertz.

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:APOSition
This command sets or queries the Cursor A horizontal position in the Spectrum
View.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:APOSition <NR3>

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:APOSition?

Arguments SPECView<x> specifies the Spectrum View number. <x> is always 1.

<NR3> specifies the horizontal position of Spectrum View Cursor A in Hz. The
range of values is the frequencies at the left and right edges of the Spectrum
View for the cursor source

2-536 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:APOSition 22E+6 sets

the Spectrum View Cursor B position to 22 MHz.
DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:APOSition? might
return DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:APOSition
48.5E+6, indicating the Spectrum View Cursor A position is 48.5 MHz.

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:BPOSition
This command sets or queries the Cursor B horizontal position in the Spectrum
View.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:BPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:BPOSition?

Arguments SPECView<x> specifies the Spectrum View number. <x> is always 1.

<NR3> specifies the horizontal position of Spectrum View Cursor B in Hz. The
range of values is the frequencies at the left and right edges of the Spectrum
View for the cursor source

Examples DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:BPOSition 22E+6 sets

the Spectrum View Cursor B position to 22 MHz.
DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:BPOSition? might
return DISplay:SPECView1:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:BPOSition
48.5E+6, indicating the Spectrum View Cursor B position is 48.5 MHz.

DISplay:SPECView<x>:HORZ
This command sets or queries the horizontal display scaling of the Spectrum
View window.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:SPECView<x>:HORZ {LOG|LINEAr}

DISplay:SPECView<x>:HORZ?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-537

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments SPECView<x> specifies the Spectrum View number. <x> is always 1.

LINEAr sets the Spectrum View horizontal scaling to linear.

LOG sets the Spectrum View horizontal scaling to log.

Examples DISplay:SPECView1:HORZ LOG sets the horizontal display scaling in the

Spectrum View window to log.
DISplay:SPECView1:HORZ? might return :DISplay:SPECView1:HORZ LOG,
indicating that the horizontal display scaling in the Spectrum View window
is set to log.

DISplay:SPECView<x>:GRAticule
This command sets or queries the type of graticule shown in the Spectrum View
window. The same grid is used for all spectrum traces.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:SPECView<x>:GRAticule {GRId|TIMe|FULl|NONe}

DISplay:SPECView<x>:GRAticule?

Arguments SPECView<x> specifies the Spectrum View number. <x> is always 1.

GRId specifies to show the Grid graticule (frame and grid) in the Spectrum View
window.
TIMe specifies to show the Time graticule in the Spectrum View window.

FULl specifies to show the Full graticule (frame, a grid and cross hairs) in the
Spectrum View window.
NONe specifies to show no graticule in the Spectrum View window.

Examples DISplay:SPECView1:GRAticule TIME sets the Spectrum View window to

show a Time graticule.
DISplay:SPECView1:GRAticule? might return GRID, indicating that the
Spectrum View is showing a Grid graticule.

DISplay:SPECView<x>:INTENSITy:GRATicule
This command sets or queries the graticule saturation (brightness) level in the
Spectrum View window.

2-538 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

NOTE. This command also changes the intensity of the vertical scale values on
the graticule.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:SPECView<x>:INTENSITy:GRATicule <NR2>

DISplay:SPECView<x>:INTENSITy:GRATicule?

Arguments SPECView<x> specifies the Spectrum View number. <x> is always 1.

<NR2> specifies the Spectrum View graticule intensity lever as a percent between
0% and 100%.

Examples DISplay:SPECView1:INTENSITy:GRATicule 75 sets the Spectrum View

graticule saturation level to 75%.
DISplay:SPECView1:INTENSITy:GRATicule? might return 66.0, indicating
the Spectrum View graticule saturation level is at 66%.

DISplay:SPECView<x>:INTENSITy:WAVEform
This command sets or queries the spectrum trace saturation (brightness) level in
the Spectrum View window.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:SPECView<x>:INTENSITy:WAVEform <NR2>

DISplay:SPECView<x>:INTENSITy:WAVEform?

Arguments SPECView<x> specifies the Spectrum View number. <x> is always 1.

<NR2> specifies the spectrum trace intensity lever as a percent between 1% and
100%.

Examples DISplay:SPECView1:INTENSITy:WAVEform 75 sets the spectrum trace

saturation level to 75%.
DISplay:SPECView1:INTENSITy:WAVEform? might return 80.0, indicating
the spectrum trace saturation level is at 80%.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-539

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:SPECView<x>:VIEWStyle
This command sets or queries the spectrum trace layout style used by the
Spectrum View window.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:SPECView<x>:VIEWStyle {OVErlay|STAcked}

DISplay:SPECView<x>:VIEWStyle?

Arguments SPECView<x> specifies the Spectrum View number. <x> is always 1.

OVErlay specifies the Spectrum View window to show all spectrum traces drawn
on top of each other.
STAcked specifies the Spectrum View window to show each spectrum trace in a
separate horizontal slice.

Examples DISplay:SPECView1:VIEWStyle OVErlay sets the view style to overlay.

DISplay:SPECView1:VIEWStyle? might return STACKED, indicating the

Spectrum View window is showing spectrum traces in stacked mode.

DISplay:VARpersist
This command sets or queries display persistence decay time, which is the
approximate decay time for a freshly struck persistence sample.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:VARpersist <NR3>

DISplay:VARpersist?

Related Commands DISplay:PERSistence

Arguments <NR3> indicates the persistence decay time and ranges from 0.5 to 100.

Examples DISPLAY:VARPERSIST 5 sets the persistence decay time to 5.

DISPLAY:VARPERSIST? might return :DISPLAY:VARPERSIST 3.0000E-01,

indicating that persistence decay time is currently set to 0.300.

2-540 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:WAVEform
This command globally enables or disables the waveform display. When
disabled, the waveform is still acquired and held in memory, but it is not drawn to
the screen. Disabling the waveform display may improve processing speed.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEform {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DISplay:WAVEform?

Arguments <NR1> enables or disables the waveform display. 0 disables the waveform
display; any other value enables the waveform display.
ON enables the waveform display.

OFF disables the waveform display.

Examples DISplay:WAVEform OFF disables the waveform display.

DISplay:WAVEform? might return DISplay:WAVEform 1, indicating that the

waveform display is enabled.

DISplay:WAVEView:CURSor:CURSOR1:ROLOCATION
This command sets or queries the location to display the Waveform View cursor
readouts (in the Waveform View graticule or in a badge in the Results Bar).

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView:CURSor:CURSOR1:ROLOCATION {GRATICULE|BADGE}

DISplay:WAVEView:CURSor:CURSOR1:ROLOCATION?

Arguments GRATICULE sets the Waveform View cursor readouts to display as part of the
cursors in the plot view.
BADGE removes the Waveform View cursor readouts from the cursors in the
graticule and displays the cursor information as a badge in the Results Bar.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView:CURSor:CURSOR1:ROLOCATION GRATICULE sets the

cursor readout information for the Waveform View to display in the Waveform
View graticule.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-541

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:WAVEView:CURSor:CURSOR1:ROLOCATION? might return

DISplay:WAVEView:CURSor:CURSOR1:ROLOCATION BADGE, indicating that
cursor readout information for the Waveform View is set to display as a badge
in the Results Bar.

DISplay:WAVEView:GRIDTYPE
This command sets or queries the Waveform View Graticule type.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView:GRIDTYPE {MOVEABLE|FIXED}

DISplay:WAVEView:GRIDTYPE?

Arguments MOVEABLE sets the Waveform View so that both the waveform and the grid
(graticule) move together when moving the waveform horizontally
FIXED sets the Waveform View so that the grid dows not move when moving the
waveform horizontally.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView:GRIDTYPE MOVEABLE sets the Waveform View to enable

both the graticule and the waveform to move together.
DISplay:WAVEView:GRIDTYPE? might return FIXED, indicating that the
graticule will not change positions if the waveform moves horizontally.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:STATE
Sets or queries the state of the specified bus in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:STATE {OFF|ON|0|1}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:STATE?

Arguments 0 turns specified bus off.

1 turns the specified bus on.

2-542 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ON turns the specified bus on.

OFF turns specified bus off.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:BUS:B1:STATE OFF turns specified bus off.

DISplay:WAVEView1:BUS:B1:STATE? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:BUS:B1:STATE 1 indicating the specified bus is on.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:VERTical:POSition
Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified bus in the specified Waveform
View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:VERTical:POSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:VERTical:POSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical position of the specified bus.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:BUS:B1:VERTical:POSition 1.0e0 sets the position

to 1 division.
DISplay:WAVEView1:BUS:B1:VERTical:POSition? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:BUS:B1:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E+0 indicating
the position is 0.0 divisions.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:STATE
Sets or queries the state of the specified channel in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:STATE?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-543

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables the specified channel on the specified Waveform View; any
other value turns this feature on.
OFF disables the display the specified channel on the specified Waveform View.

ON enables the specified channel on the specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CH1:STATE ON turns on channel 1.

DISplay:WAVEView1:CH1:STATE? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH1:STATE 0 indicating channel 1 is off.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:VERTical:POSition
Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified channel in the specified
Waveform View in divisions. 0.0 divisions is center, 5.0 top of the window, and
-5.0 the bottom of the window.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:VERTical:POSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:VERTical:POSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical position in divisions. 0.0 divisions is center, 5.0 top of the
window, and -5.0 the bottom of the window.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CH1:VERTical:POSition 1.0e0 sets the position

to 1 division.
DISplay:WAVEView1:CH1:VERTical:POSition? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH1:VERTICAL:POSITION -3.4400 indicating the
channel 1 vertical position is -3.44 divisions.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:VERTical:SCAle
Sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified channel in volts per division
within the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

2-544 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:VERTical:SCAle <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:VERTical:SCAle?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical scale of the specified channel.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CH1:VERTical:SCAle 2.0e2 sets the vertical scale to

200 mV per division.
DISplay:WAVEView1:CH1:VERTical:SCAle? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH1:VERTICAL:SCALE 200.0000E-3 indicating the
scale is 200 mV per division.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>_DALL:STATE
This command sets or queries the display state of the specified digital channel in
the specified Waveform View.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>_DALL:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>_DALL:STATE?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables the display of the specified channels on the specified
Waveform View; any other value turns this feature on.
OFF disables the display of the specified channels on the specified Waveform View.

ON enables the display of the specified channels on the specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CH1_DALL:STATE ON enables the display of the

specified channels on the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView1:CH1_DALL:STATE? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH1_DALL:STATE 0 indicating specified
digital channels in the specified Waveform View are off.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-545

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>_DALL:VERTical:POSition
This command sets or queries the vertical position of the specified digital channel
in the specified Waveform View in divisions. The position ranges from 5.0 to
-5.0 divisions.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>_DALL:VERTical:POSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>_DALL:VERTical:POSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical position of the specified digital channel in the specified
Waveform View in divisions.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CH1_DALL:VERTical:POSition 1.0e0 sets the

vertical position to 1.0 divisions.
DISplay:WAVEView1:CH1_DALL:VERTical:POSition? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH1_DALL:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E+0 indicating
the vertical position is 0.0 divisions.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>_D<x>:STATE
This command sets or queries the display state of the specified digital channel in
the specified Waveform View.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>_D<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>_D<x>:STATE?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables the display of the specified channel on the specified Waveform
View; any other value turns this feature on.
OFF disables the display of the specified channel on the specified Waveform View.

ON enables the display of the specified channel on the specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CH1_D1:STATE OFF turns off the specified digital

channel.

2-546 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:WAVEView1:CH1_D1:STATE? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH1_D1:STATE 1 indicating the specified digital
channel is on.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor? (Query Only)

This query returns the cursor parameters for the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor?

Returns Returns the cursor parameters for the specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor? might return

WAVEFORM;AUTO;2.4993299784074;2.4958885115371;
-3.4414668702805E-3;"A";"A";300.0E-6;2.2369669999970;
256.967000E-3;-300.0E-6;-300.0E-6;300.0E-6; "????
????";"s";"???? ????";600.0E-6;1.6666666666667E+3;
1;300.0E-6;-300.0E-6;SAME;4.1655499640123E+3;INDEPENDENT;AUTO

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>? (Query Only)

This query returns the cursor parameters for the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>?

Returns Returns the cursor parameters for the specified cursor in the specified Waveform
View.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-547

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:BPOSITION
5.0E-6;APOSITION
-5.0E-6;:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR:BSOURCE
AUTO;HBARS:BPOSITION 9.91E+37;BUNITS
"V";AUNITS "V";APOSITION 9.91E+37;DELTA
9.91E+37;:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR:VBA
RS:BPOSITION 5.0E-6;APOSITION -5.0E-6;UNITS "s";DELTA
10.0E-6;ALTERNATEB "???? ????";ALTERNATEA
"???? ????";:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR:STATE
1;FUNCTION WAVEFORM;SCREEN:AYPOSITION
-2.0E-3;BXPOSITION -5.0E-6;BYPOSITION -2.0E-3;AXPOSITIO N
-5.0E-6;:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR:MODE
INDEPENDENT;ASOURCE AUTO;DDT
9.91E+37;ONEOVERDELTATVALUE 100.0E+3;SPLITM ODE
SAME;LINESTYLE SOLID.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:ASOUrce
This command sets or queries the cursor A source of the specified cursor in the
specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:ASOUrce
{AUTO|CH<x>|BUS<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|PLOT<x>}
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:ASOUrce?

Arguments AUTO specifies to use the selected source.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as source.

BUS<x> specifies a bus as source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source.

PLOT<x> specifies a plot as the source.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:ASOUrce CH1 sets the cursor

1 source to channel 1.

2-548 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:ASOUrce? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:ASOURCE REF1 indicating the
cursor A source is reference 1.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:BSOUrce
This command sets or queries the cursor B source of the specified cursor in the
specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:BSOUrce
{CH<x>|BUS<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|PLOT<x>}
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:BSOUrce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as source.

BUS<x> specifies a bus as source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source.

PLOT<x> specifies a plot as the source.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:BSOUrce CH1 sets the cursor B

source to channel 1.
DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:BSOUrce? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:BSOURCE REF1 indicating the
cursor b source is reference 1.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:DDT? (Query Only)

This query returns the delta V over delta T cursor readout value of the specified
cursor in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-549

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:DDT?

Returns The delta V over delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the
specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:DDT? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:DDT 9.91E+37 indicating the delta
V over delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor is 9.91E+37.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:FUNCtion
This command sets or queries the cursor type of the specified cursor in the
specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:FUNCtion
{SCREEN|WAVEFORM|VBArs|HBArs}
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:FUNCtion?

Arguments HBArs specifies horizontal bar cursors, which measure in vertical units.

VBArs specifies vertical bar cursors, which measure in horizontal units.

SCREEN specifies both horizontal and vertical bar cursors, which measure in
horizontal and vertical units specified by the Cursor 1 and Cursor 2 Sources. Use
these cursors to measure anywhere in the waveform display area.
WAVEform specifies paired or split cursors in YT display format for measuring
waveform amplitude and time. In XY and XYZ format, these cursors indicate the
amplitude positions of an XY pair (Ch1 vs Ch2 voltage, where Ch1 is the X axis
and Ch2 is the Y axis) relative to the trigger.

Examples DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:FUNCTION VBArs selects the

vertical bar cursor type for the specified Waveform View and cursor.

2-550 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:FUNCTION? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:FUNCTION HBArs indicating that
the specified cursor is set to HBArs.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:HBArs:APOSition
Sets or queries the HBARs vertical A position of the specified cursor in the
specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:HBArs:APOSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:HBArs:APOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View. 0.0 divisions is center, 5.0 top of the waveview, and -5.0 the
bottom of the waveview.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:HBArs:APOSition 3.0e0 sets the

cursor position to 3 V.
DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:HBArs:APOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:HBARS:APOSITION
2.9303448275862 indicating the cursor position is 2.93 V.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:HBArs:AUNIts? (Query Only)

This command queries the cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the
specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:HBArs:AUNIts?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-551

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <QString> is the cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:HBArs:AUNIts? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:HBARS:AUNITS "V" indicating
the AUNITS are set to Volts.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:HBArs:BPOSition
Sets or queries the HBARs vertical B position of the specified cursor in the
specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:HBArs:BPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:HBArs:BPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:HBArs:BPOSition 4.0e-1 sets

the position to 400 mV.
DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:HBArs:BPOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:HBARS:BPOSITION
387.9148706896567E-3 indicating the B cursor position is 387.9 mV.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:HBArs:BUNIts? (Query Only)

This command queries the cursor B vertical units of the specified cursor in the
specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

2-552 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:HBArs:BUNIts?

Returns <QString> is the cursor B vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:HBArs:BUNIts? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:HBARS:BUNITS "V" indicating
the BUNITS are set to Volts.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:HBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)

This command queries the delta V cursor readout value of the specified cursor in
the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:HBArs:DELTa?

Returns The delta V cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified Waveform
View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:HBArs:DELTa? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:HBARS:DELTA 2.612085129310
indicating the delta between the cursors is 2.61 V.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:MODe
Sets or queries the cursor tracking mode of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-553

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:MODe
{INDEPENDENT|TRACK}

Arguments TRACK ties the navigational functionality of the two cursors together. For cursor 1
adjustments, this ties the movement of the two cursors together; however, cursor 2
continues to move independently of cursor 1.
INDEPENDENT allows independent adjustment of the two cursors.

Examples DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:MODE TRACK specifies that the

cursor positions move in unison.
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:MODE? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:MODE TRACK, indicating that the
two cursors move in unison.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE? (Query
Only)
This query returns the one over delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor
in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE?

Returns The one over delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE? might

return :DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE
179.3188E+3 indicating the one over delta time value is 179.3 kHz.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:AXPOSition
Sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the
specified Waveform View.

2-554 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:AXPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:AXPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SCREEN:AXPOSITION 15.0E-3

sets the x position of screen cursor1 in waveview1 to 15 mV.
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SCREEN:AXPOSITION? might
return :DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SCREEN:AXPOSITION
-64.0000E-03 indicating that x position of the specified screen cursor in the
specified Waveform View is set to -64 mV.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:AYPOSition
This command sets or queries the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor
in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:AYPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:AYPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SCREEN:AYPOSITION 25.0E-3

sets the y position of the specified screen cursor of the specified Waveform View
to 25 mV.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-555

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SCREEN:AYPOSITION? might
return :DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SCREEN:AYPOSITION
-53.0000E-03 indicating that y position of the specified screen cursor of the
specified Waveform View is set to -53 mV.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:BXPOSition
Sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the
specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:BXPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:BXPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SCREEN:AXPOSITION 15.0E-3

sets the x position of the specified screen cursor in the specified Waveform View
to 15 mV.
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SCREEN:AXPOSITION? might
return :DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SCREEN:AXPOSITION
-64.0000E-03 indicating that x position of the specified screen cursor in the
specified Waveform View is set to -64 mV.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:BYPOSition
This command sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor
in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

2-556 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:BYPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:BYPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SCREEN:BYPOSITION 25.0E-3

sets the y position of the screen cursor of waveview1 to 25 mV.
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SCREEN:BYPOSITION? might
return :DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SCREEN:BYPOSITION
-53.0000E-03 indicating that y position of the specified screen cursor of the
specified Waveform View is set to -53 mV.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SPLITMODE
This command sets or queries whether both cursors have the same or different
sources.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SPLITMODE {SAME|SPLIT}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SPLITMODE?

Arguments SAME specifies both cursors have the same source.

SPLIT specifies the cursors have different sources.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:SPLITMODE SPLIT specifies the

cursors have different sources.
DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:SPLITMODE? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SPLITMODE SAME indicating the
cursors have the same source.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:STATE
This command sets or queries the visible state of the specified cursor in the
specified Waveform View.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-557

Commands listed in alphabetical order

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:STATE?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables the specified cursor in the specified Waveform View; any
other value turns this feature on.
OFF disables the specified cursor in the specified Waveform View.

ON enables the specified cursor in the specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:STATE OFF turns the specified

cursor off.
DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:STATE? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:STATE 1 indicating the specified
cursor in the specified Waveform View is on.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:VBArs:APOSition
This command sets or queries the cursor A horizontal position of the specified
cursor in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:VBArs:APOSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:VBArs:APOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:VBArs:APOSition -4.0e-6 set

the cursor position to 4.0 μs.

2-558 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:VBArs:APOSition? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:VBARS:APOSITION -5.0E-6
indicating the cursor A position is -5.0 μs.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:VBArs:BPOSition
This command sets or queries the cursor B horizontal position of the specified
cursor in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:VBArs:BPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:VBArs:BPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:VBArs:BPOSition 4.0e-6 sets

the cursor position to 4.0 μs.
DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:VBArs:BPOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:VBARS:BPOSITION
3.2736951319481E-6 indicating the B cursor position is 3.27 μs.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:VBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)

This query sets or returns the delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor
in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:VBArs:DELTa?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-559

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Returns The delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified Waveform
View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:VBArs:DELTa? might

return :DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:VBARS:DELTA
6.7926388747725E-6 indicating the delta T cursor readout value is 6.79 μs.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:VBArs:UNIts? (Query Only)

This query returns cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:VBArs:UNIts?

Returns The cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:VBArs:UNIts? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:VBARS:UNITS "s" indicating
the cursor units are seconds.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:WAVEform:APOSition
This command sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified
cursor in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:WAVEform:APOSition
<NR3>
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:WAVEform:APOSition?

2-560 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:WAVEform:APOSition 1.5e-6

sets the position to 1.5 μs.
DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:WAVEform:APOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:WAVEFORM:APOSITION
-1.2667480236557E-6 indicating the position is 1.27 μs.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:AVPOSition? (Query Only)

This command queries the vertical waveform value at the cursor A position in
the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1. .

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:AVPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:AVPOSition? might

return :DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:AVPOSition
1.35, indicating that the vertical waveform value at the Cursor A position is
1.35 V.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:WAVEform:BPOSition
This command sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified
cursor in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-561

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:WAVEform:BPOSition
<NR3>
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:WAVEform:BPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:WAVEform:BPOSition 8.0e-9

sets the position to 8.0 ns.
DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:WAVEform:BPOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:WAVEFORM:BPOSITION
711.6310718892624E-9 indicating the cursor position is 711.6 ns.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:BVPOSition? (Query Only)

This command queries the vertical waveform value at the cursor B position in
the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1. .

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:BVPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:BVPOSition? might

return :DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:BVPOSition
-0.72, indicating that the vertical waveform value at the Cursor B position is
-0.72 V.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:ALL:Values? (Query Only)

This query returns all values (Time, Voltage, Delta) associated with all the active
sources in the Waveform View.

Group Cursor

2-562 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:ALL:Values?

Returns All values (Time, Voltage, Delta) associated with all the active
sources of the specified cursor in the specified Waveform View.
Returned query response should be in the following format:
t(<AH>,<BH>,<dt>,<1/dt>),<src1_name>(<AV>,<BV>,<dv>,<dv/dt>),<src2_name>
(<AV>,<BV>,<dv>,<dv/dt>),<src3_name>
(<AV>,<BV>,<dv>,<dv/dt>),<src4_name>
(<AV>,<BV>,<dv>,<dv/dt>),<src5_name> (<AV>,<BV>,<dv>,<dv/dt>) etc..

Examples :DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR:Waveform:ALL:Values?
might return
t(1.2e-06,1.2e-06,2.4e-06,416667),ch1(0.9958,0.9074,1.9032,793000),re
ref2(1,0.9,1.9,791667),math1(1.9916,1.8148,3.8064,1.586e+06).

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:FILTer
This command sets or queries the type of interpolation filter for the display.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:FILTer {SINX|LINear}

Arguments LINEAr specifies linear interpolation, where acquired points are connected with
straight lines.
SINX specifies sin(x)/x interpolation, where acquired points are fit to a curve.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:FILTer SINX specifies sine-curve interpolation, when

magnifying waveforms.
DISplay:WAVEView1:FILTer? might return :DISplay:WAVEView1:FILTer
LINEAR, indicating that straight-line interpolation is specified for magnifying
waveforms.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:GRAticule
This command selects or queries the type of graticule that is displayed.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-563

Commands listed in alphabetical order

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:GRAticule {GRId|TIMe|FULl|NONe}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:GRAticule?

Arguments GRId specifies a frame and grid only.

TIMe specifies a time graticule only.

FULl specifies a frame, a grid and cross hairs.

NONe specified no graticule.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:GRAticule TIME specifies a time graticule.

DISplay:WAVEView1:GRAticule? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:GRATICULE GRID indicating the graticule is a grid.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:INTENSITy:GRATicule
This command sets or queries the graticule saturation level.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:INTENSITy:GRATicule <NR2>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:INTENSITy:GRATicule?

Arguments <NR2> is the graticule saturation level.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:INTENSITy:GRATicule 75 sets the saturation level

to 75%.
DISplay:WAVEView1:INTENSITy:GRATicule? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:INTENSITY:GRATICULE 66.0000 indicating the
saturation level is at 66%.

2-564 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:INTENSITy:WAVEform
This command sets or queries the waveform saturation level.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:INTENSITy:WAVEform <NR2>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:INTENSITy:WAVEform?

Arguments <NR2> is the waveform saturation level.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:INTENSITy:WAVEform 75 sets the saturation level

to 75%.
DISplay:WAVEView1:INTENSITy:WAVEform? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM 62.0000 indicating the
saturation level is 62%.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:AUTOScale
This command sets or queries whether the specified math gets auto-scaled when
the math equation changes within the specified Waveform View.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:AUTOScale {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:AUTOScale?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables the autoscaling the math in the specified Waveform View;
any other value turns this feature on.
OFF disables the autoscaling the math in the specified Waveform View.

ON enables the autoscaling the math in the specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:MATH:MATH3:AUTOScale 1 enables the autoscaling the

math in the specified Waveform View.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-565

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:WAVEView1:MATH:MATH3:AUTOScale? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:MATH:MATH3:AUTOSCALE 0 indicating that Math
3 will not auto-scale.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:STATE
This command sets or queries the state of the specified math waveform in the
specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:STATE?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables the specified math in the specified Waveform View; any other
value turns this feature on.
OFF disables the specified math in the specified Waveform View.

ON enables the specified math in the specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:MATH:MATH1:STATE OFF disables the specified math in

the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView1:MATH:MATH2:STATE? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:MATH:MATH2:STATE 1 indicating the math
is displayed.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition
This command sets or queries the vertical position in divisions of the specified
math waveform in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition?

2-566 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical position in divisions of the specified math waveform.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:MATH:MATH1:VERTical:POSition 0 sets the position

to 0 divisions.
DISplay:WAVEView1:MATH:MATH1:VERTical:POSition? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:MATH:MATH1:VERTICAL:POSITION -2.2800
indicating the position is at -2.28 divisions.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle
Sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified math in volts per division within
the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical scale of the specified math waveform.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:MATH:MATH1:VERTical:SCAle 400e-3 sets the scale

to 400 mV per division.
DISplay:WAVEView1:MATH:MATH1:VERTical:SCAle? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:MATH:MATH1:VERTICAL:SCALE 395.0000E-3
indicating the scale is 395 mV.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:PLOT:PLOT<x>:AUTOScale
This command sets or queries whether the specified trend gets auto-scaled when
the new data is available within the specified Waveform View.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:PLOT:PLOT<x>:AUTOScale {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:PLOT:PLOT<x>:AUTOScale?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-567

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables auto-scaling the specified plot in the specified Waveform
View; any other value turns this feature on.
OFF disables auto-scaling the specified plot in the specified Waveform View.

ON enables auto-scaling the specified plot in the specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:PLOT:PLOT1:AUTOScale 1 enables auto-scaling the

specified plot in the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView1:PLOT:PLOT1:AUTOScale? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:PLOT:PLOT1:AUTOSCALE 0 indicating that
auto-scaling for plot 1 is off.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:PLOT:PLOT<x>:STATE
This command sets or queries the state of the specified time trend plot waveform
in the specified Waveform View.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:PLOT:PLOT<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:PLOT:PLOT<x>:STATE?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables the specified plot in the specified Waveform View; any other
value turns this feature on.
OFF disables the specified plot in the specified Waveform View.

ON enables the specified plot in the specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:PLOT:PLOT1:STATE OFF disables the specified plot in

the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView1:PLOT:PLOT1:STATE? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:PLOT:PLOT1:STATE 1 indicating the
specified plot in the specified Waveform View is on.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:PLOT:PLOT<x>:VERTical:POSition
This command sets or queries the vertical position of the specified time trend in
the specified Waveform View in absolute units.

Group Display Control

2-568 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:PLOT:PLOT<x>:VERTical:POSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:PLOT:PLOT<x>:VERTical:POSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical position.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:PLOT:PLOT1:VERTical:POSition 2.0e0 sets the

position to 2.0 units.
DISplay:WAVEView1:PLOT:PLOT1:VERTical:POSition? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:PLOT:PLOT1:VERTICAL:POSITION 1.9918
indicating the position is 1.99 units.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:PLOT:PLOT<x>:VERTical:SCAle
This command sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified time trend in units
per division in the specified Waveform View.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:PLOT:PLOT<x>:VERTical:SCAle <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:PLOT:PLOT<x>:VERTical:SCAle?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical scale.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:PLOT:PLOT1:VERTical:SCAle 725.0e-3 sets the

scale to 725 mUnits.
DISplay:WAVEView1:PLOT:PLOT1:VERTical:SCAle? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:PLOT:PLOT1:VERTICAL:SCALE 730.0000E-3
indicating the scale is 730.0 mUnits.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:STATE
This command sets or queries the state of the specified reference waveform in
the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-569

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:STATE?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables the specified reference in the specified Waveform View; any
other value turns this feature on.
OFF disables the specified reference in the specified Waveform View.

ON enables the specified reference in the specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:REF:REF1:STATE OFF disables the specified reference

in the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView1:REF:REF1:STATE? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:REF:REF1:STATE 1 indicating the specified
reference in the specified Waveform View is on.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:VERTical:POSition
This command sets or queries the vertical position in divisions of the specified
reference in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:VERTical:POSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:VERTical:POSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical position in divisions.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:REF:REF1:VERTical:POSition -2.5e0 sets the

position to -2.5 divisions.
DISplay:WAVEView1:REF:REF1:VERTical:POSition? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:REF:REF1:VERTICAL:POSITION -2.6400
indicating the position is set to -2.64 divisions.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle
This command sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified reference in volts
per div within the specified Waveform View.

2-570 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical scale of the specified reference waveform.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:REF:REF1:VERTical:SCAle 400e-3 sets the scale to

400 mV per division.
DISplay:WAVEView1:REF:REF1:VERTical:SCAle? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:REF:REF1:VERTICAL:SCALE 378.0000E-3
indicating the scale is 378 mV per division.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_FREQuency<x>:VERTical:POSition
This command sets or queries the vertical position of the specified Frequency vs.
Time trace in the Waveform View, in divisions.

Conditions Requires option SV-RFVT

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_FREQuency<x>:VERTical:POSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_FREQuency<x>:VERTical:POSition?

Arguments WAVEView<x> is always WAVEView1.

RF_FREQuency<x> specifies the number of the Frequency vs. Time waveform.

NR3 sets the vertical position in divisions. 0.0 divisions is center, 5.0 is the top of
the Waveform View, and -5.0 is the top of the Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:RF_FREQuency2:VERTical:POSition 1.2 sets the

vertical position of the Channel 2 Frequency vs. Time trace to 1.2 divisions.
DISplay:WAVEView1:RF_FREQuency1:VERTical:POSition? might return
DISplay:WAVEView1:RF_FREQuency1:VERTical:POSition -4.79,
indicating the Channel 1 Frequency vs. Time vertical position is -4.79 divisions.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-571

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_FREQuency<x>:VERTical:SCAle
This command sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified Frequency vs.
Time trace in the Waveform View, in divisions.

Conditions Requires option SV-RFVT

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_FREQuency<x>:VERTical:SCAle <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_FREQuency<x>:VERTical:SCAle?

Arguments WAVEView<x> is always WAVEView1.

RF_FREQuency<x> specifies the number of the Frequency vs. Time waveform.

NR3 sets the vertical scale, in Hertz per division.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:RF_FREQuency3:VERTical:SCAle 5.0e6 sets the

vertical scale of the Channel 3 Frequency vs. Time trace to 5.0 MHz per division.
DISplay:WAVEView1:RF_FREQuency2:VERTical:SCAle? might return
DISplay:WAVEView1:RF_FREQuency2:VERTical:SCAle 2.0E3, indicating
the vertical scale of the Channel 2 Frequency vs. Time trace is 2 KHz per division.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_MAGnitude<x>:VERTical:POSition
This command sets or queries the vertical position of the specified Magnitude vs.
Time trace in the Waveform View, in divisions.

Conditions Requires option SV-RFVT

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_MAGnitude<x>:VERTical:POSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_MAGnitude<x>:VERTical:POSition?

Arguments WAVEView<x> is always WAVEView1.

RF_MAGnitude<x> specifies the number of the Magnitude vs. Time Frequency

waveform.

2-572 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

NR3 sets the vertical position in divisions. 0.0 divisions is center, 5.0 is the top of
the Waveform View, and -5.0 is the top of the Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:RF_MAGnitude2:VERTical:POSition 1.2 sets the

vertical position of the Channel 2 Magnitude vs. Time trace to 1.2 divisions.
DISplay:WAVEView1:RF_MAGnitude1:VERTical:POSition? might
return DISplay:WAVEView1:RF_MAGnitude1:VERTical:POSition -4.0,
indicating the Channel 1 Magnitude vs. Time vertical position is -4.0 divisions.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_MAGnitude<x>:VERTical:SCAle
This command sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified Magnitude vs.
Time trace in the specified Waveform View in Volts, Watts, or dB per division.

Conditions Requires option SV-RFVT

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_MAGnitude<x>:VERTical:SCAle <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_MAGnitude<x>:VERTical:SCAle?

Arguments WAVEView<x> is always WAVEView1.

RF_MAGnitude<x> specifies the number of the Magnitude vs. Time Frequency

waveform.
NR3 sets the vertical scale. The units for the vertical scale depend on the
Magnitude Format setting. If the format is "Amplitude (linear)", then the units
are Volts/div. If the format is "Power (linear)", then the units are Watts/div. If the
format is "Power (log)", then the units are dB/div.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:RF_MAGnitude3:VERTical:SCAle 5.0 sets the

vertical scale of the Channel 3 Magnitude vs. Time trace to 5.0 Volts per division.
DISplay:WAVEView1:RF_MAGnitude2:VERTical:SCAle? might return
DISplay:WAVEView1:RF_MAGnitude2:VERTical:SCAle 20.0E-3,
indicating the vertical scale of the Channel 2 Magnitude vs. Time trace is 20
mV per division.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-573

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_PHASe<x>:VERTical:POSition
This command sets or queries the vertical position of the specified Phase vs. Time
trace in the Waveform View, in divisions.

Conditions Requires option SV-RFVT

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_PHASe<x>:VERTical:POSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_PHASe<x>:VERTical:POSition?

Arguments WAVEView<x> is always WAVEView1.

RF_PHASe<x> specifies the number of the Phase vs. Time Frequency waveform.

NR3 sets the vertical position in divisions. 0.0 divisions is center, 5.0 is the top of
the Waveform View, and -5.0 is the top of the Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:RF_PHASe2:VERTical:POSition 2.1 sets the

vertical position of the Channel 2 Phase vs. Time trace to 2.1 divisions.
DISplay:WAVEView1:RF_PHASe1:VERTical:POSition? might return
DISplay:WAVEView1:RF_PHASe1:VERTical:POSition -1.7, indicating
the Channel 1 Phase vs. Time vertical position is -1.7 divisions.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_PHASe<x>:VERTical:SCAle
This command sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified Phase vs. Time
trace in the specified Waveform View in degrees per division.

Conditions Requires option SV-RFVT

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_PHASe<x>:VERTical:SCAle <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_PHASe<x>:VERTical:SCAle?

Arguments WAVEView<x> is always WAVEView1.

RF_PHAse<x> specifies the number of the Phase vs. Time Frequency waveform.

2-574 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

<NR3> sets the vertical scale, in degrees per division.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:RF_PHASe3:VERTical:SCAle 10.0 sets the vertical

scale of the Channel 3 Phase vs. Time trace to 10 degrees per division.
DISplay:WAVEView1:RF_PHASe2:VERTical:SCAle? might return
DISplay:WAVEView1:RF_PHASe2:VERTical:SCAle 50.0, indicating the
vertical scale of the Channel 2 Phase vs. Time trace is set to 50 degrees per
division.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:STYle
This command sets or queries how the waveforms are displayed for analysis mode.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:STYle {VECtors|DOTsonly}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:STYle?

Arguments DOTs displays individual data points. New points immediately replace old ones.

VECtors connects adjacent data points. New points immediately replace old ones.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:STYle VECTORS sets the display to connect adjacent

data points.
DISplay:WAVEView1:STYle? might return :DISplay:WAVEView1:STYle
DOTs, indicating that data points are not connected.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:VIEWStyle
The command sets or queries the waveform layout style used by the display.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-575

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:VIEWStyle {OVErlay|STAcked}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:VIEWStyle?

Arguments OVErlay specifies that the display view style used by the specified Waveform
View is overlay.
STAcked specifies that the display view style used by the specified Waveform
View is stacked.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:VIEWStyle OVERLAY sets the view style to overlay.

DISplay:WAVEView1:VIEWStyle? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:VIEWSTYLE STACKED indicating the view style
is stacked.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM? (Query Only)

This query returns the zoom parameters of the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM?

Returns Returns the zoom parameters of the specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:Zoom? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:HORIZONTAL:SCALE
2.5000;POSITION 70.0000;WINSCALE
400.0000E-9;:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:ZOOM:ZOOM 1:VERTICAL:SCALE
3.8000;POSITION 2.5951;:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATE 0.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>? (Query Only)

This query returns the zoom parameters of the specified zoom in the specified
Waveform View. <x> must be 1.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

ZOOM<x> is the specified zoom and must be ZOOM1.

2-576 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>?

Returns Returns the zoom parameters of the specified zoom in the specified Waveform
View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM1? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:HORIZONTAL:SCALE
2.5000;POSITION 70.0000;WINSCALE
400.0000E-9;:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:ZOOM:ZOOM 1:VERTICAL:SCALE
3.8000;POSITION 2.5951;:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATE 0.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:POSition
Sets or queries the horizontal zoom position (of the specified zoom in the specified
Waveform View) of the zoomed waveform or zoom waveform in the display,
around which the zoom waveform displays. It is freely movable around the
acquisition settings (horizontal span). An acquired waveform or reference could
extend off screen. The valid zoom area does not care about the waveform itself,
only the user setting for acquisition.
For example, if horizontal scale is set to 1 second, position to 50, then the
acquisition area will go from -5 s to +5 s. Zoom window 0 will focus on -5 s
and zoom area 100 will focus on +5 s. If the instrument is stopped and the scale
changed to 0.5 s, there will be data off the ends of the display. However, 0% zoom
will put the user focus on -2.5 s, the lower bound of the acquisition span.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

ZOOM<x> is the specified zoom and must be ZOOM1.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:POSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:POSition?

Arguments <NR3> is a value from 0 to 100.00 and is the percent of the waveform that is to the
left of screen center, when the zoom factor is 2× or greater.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-577

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50 sets the

horizontal position of the zoom box of waveview1 to 50 so that it is centered
horizontally on the screen.
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 10.0000,
indicating that the horizontal position of the zoom box of waveview 1 is centered
over the first major graticule division.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:SCALe
This command sets or queries the horizontal zoom factor of the specified zoom in
the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

ZOOM<x> is the specified zoom and must be ZOOM1.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:SCALe <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:SCALe?

Arguments <NR3> is the amount of expansion in the horizontal direction in 1-2-4 increments
of the specified zoom in the specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:HORizontal:SCALe 5 sets the horizontal

zoom factor of zoom1 in waveview1 to 5x.
DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:HORizontal:SCALe? might return
:DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:HORizontal:SCALe 10, indicating that
the zoom factor of waveview1 is set to 10x.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:WINSCALe
This command sets or queries the overview window horizontal scale in the
specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

ZOOM<x> is the specified zoom and must be ZOOM1.

Group Zoom

2-578 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:WINSCALe <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:WINSCALe?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal scale of the zoom window.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM1HORizontal:WINSCALe? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:HORIZONTAL:WINSCALE 80.0000E-9
indicating that the horizontal scale of the overview window is 80 ns per division.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:STATe
This command sets or queries the zoom display state of the specified zoom in the
specified Waveform View. This command is equivalent to pushing the zoom
button on the front panel.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

ZOOM<x> is the specified zoom and must be ZOOM1.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:STATe {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:STATe?

Arguments ON turns the specified zoom on.

OFF turns specified zoom off.

<NR1> = 0 disables the specified zoom; any other value enables the specified
zoom.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATe ON turns the specified zoom on.

DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATe? might return

:DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATe 1, indicating that specified zoom
is on.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:VERTical:POSition
This command sets or queries the vertical position of the specified zoom in the
specified Waveform View. It is freely movable within the confines of the acquired
waveform. It is measured from the top to bottom of the acquisition window.
The top of the zoom window is -5 * vertical zoom factor. The bottom of the

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-579

Commands listed in alphabetical order

zoom window is +5 * the vertical zoom factor. For a zoom of 5x, the position
ranges from -25 to 25.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

ZOOM<x> is the specified zoom and must be ZOOM1.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:VERTical:POSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:VERTical:POSition?

Arguments NR3 is the vertical position of the specified zoom in the specified Waveform View.
It is freely movable within the confines of the acquired waveform. The top of the
zoom window is -5 * vertical zoom factor. The bottom of the zoom window is
+5 * the vertical zoom factor. For a vertical zoom of 5x, the position ranges
from -25 to 25.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:VERTical:POSition 50 sets the vertical

position of the specified zoom in the specified Waveform View to 50, where the
vertical zoom factor is 10x, top of screen is -50 and bottom if +50, and 0 is the
vertical center.
DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:VERTical:POSition? might return
:DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:VERTical:POSition 23.90000,
indicating that the vertical position of the specified zoom in the specified
Waveform View is set to 23.9, where the vertical zoom factor is 10x, top of screen
is -50 and bottom if +50, and 0 is the vertical center.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:VERTical:SCALe
This command sets or queries the vertical zoom factor of the specified zoom in
the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

ZOOM<x> is the specified zoom and must be ZOOM1.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:VERTical:SCALe <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:VERTical:SCALe?

2-580 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR3> is the amount of vertical expansion or compression. Based on the value
that you entered, this command uses the nearest scale factor. Setting the vertical
scale to 1 indicates unity (no zoom).

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM2:VERTical:SCALe 5 sets the vertical

scale of zoom1 of waveview1 to 5×.
DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM2:VERTical:SCALe? might return
:DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM2:VERTical:SCALe 2.0000, indicating
that the vertical scale of zoom1 of waveview1 is 2×.

DISplay:WAVEView<y>:REF:REF<x>:FRAMe
This command sets or returns the selected frame of the specified analog ref. Each
ref has a unique selected frame.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<y>:REF:REF<x>:FRAMe <NR1>

DISplay:WAVEView<y>:REF:REF<x>:FRAMe?

Arguments <NR1> is the selected frame of the specified analog ref.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:REF:REF2:FRAMe? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:REF:REF2:FRAME 1, indicating the selected
frame is 1.

DISplay:WAVEView<y>:REF<x>_DALL:FRAMe
This command sets or returns the selected frame of the specified digital ref. Each
ref has a unique selected frame.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<y>:REF<x>_DALL:FRAMe <NR1>

DISplay:WAVEView<y>:REF<x>_DALL:FRAMe?

Arguments <NR1> is the selected frame of the specified digital ref.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-581

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:WAVEView<y>:REF<x>_DALL:FRAMe? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:REF1_DALL:FRAME 1, indicating the selected frame
is 1.

DVM (No Query Form)

Resets the Digital Voltmeter measurements and history.

Conditions Requires DVM option (free with product registration).

Group DVM

Syntax DVM RESET

Arguments RESET specifies resetting DVM measurements and history.

Examples DVM RESET resets the DVM measurement and history.

DVM:AUTORange
Sets (or queries) the autorange state for the Digital Voltmeter.

NOTE. the DVM will not autorange as long as the DVM source is the same
channel as the trigger source.

Conditions Requires DVM option (free with product registration).

Group DVM

Syntax DVM:AUTORange {0|1|OFF|ON}

DVM:AUTORange?

Arguments 1 or ON turns on autorange for the Digital Voltmeter.

0 or OFF turns autorange off.

Examples DVM:AUTOR ON turns on autorange for the Digital Voltmeter.

2-582 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DVM:MEASUrement:FREQuency? (Query Only)

This command returns the current frequency value for the DVM.

Conditions Requires DVM option (free with product registration).

Group DVM

Syntax DVM:MEASUrement:FREQuency?

Related Commands DVM:TRIGger:FREQuency:COUNTer

Examples DVM:MEASU:FREQ? might return 100.0000E+3, which represents 100 kHz as

the current frequency value for the DVM.

DVM:MEASUrement:HIStory:AVErage? (Query Only)

Returns the average DVM readout value over the history period. The history
period is a constant period of 5 seconds.

Conditions Requires DVM option (free with product registration).

Group DVM

Syntax DVM:MEASUrement:HIStory:AVErage?

Examples DVM:MEASU:HIS:AVE? might return :DVM:MEASUREMENT:HISTORY:AVERAGE

429.3000E-3 which represents the average DVM readout value over the history
period in volts.

DVM:MEASUrement:HIStory:MAXimum? (Query Only)

Returns the maximum readout value for the DVM function over the history
period. The history period is a constant period of 5 seconds.

Conditions Requires DVM option (free with product registration).

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-583

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group DVM

Syntax DVM:MEASUrement:HIStory:MAXimum?

Examples DVM:MEASU:HIS:MAX? might return :DVM:MEASUREMENT:HISTORY:MAXIMUM

431.9000E-3, which represents the maximum readout value for the DVM
function over the history period in volts.

DVM:MEASUrement:HIStory:MINImum? (Query Only)

Returns the minimum readout value for the DVM over the history period. The
history period is a constant period of 5 seconds.

Conditions Requires DVM option (free with product registration).

Group DVM

Syntax DVM:MEASUrement:HIStory:MINImum?

Examples DVM:MEASU:HIS:MINI? might return

:DVM:MEASUREMENT:HISTORY:MINIMUM 430.9000E-3, which represents the
minimum readout value for the DVM function over the history period in volts.

DVM:MEASUrement:INFMAXimum? (Query Only)

Returns the maximum DVM readout value over the entire time that the DVM has
been on since the last change using the DVM:MODe or DVM:SOUrce commands
or DVM RESET.

Conditions Requires DVM option (free with product registration).

Group DVM

Syntax DVM:MEASUrement:INFMAXimum?

Examples DVM:MEASU:INFMAX? might return :DVM:MEASUREMENT:INFMAXIMUM

432.9000E-3, which represents the maximum readout value (in volts)of the

2-584 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DVM function over the entire time that the DVM has been on since the last
change using the DVM:MODe or DVM:SOUrce commands or DVM RESET.

DVM:MEASUrement:INFMINimum? (Query Only)

Returns the minimum readout value of the DVM over the entire time that the
DVM has been on since the last change using the DVM:MODe or DVM:SOUrce
commands or DVM RESET.

Conditions Requires DVM option (free with product registration).

Group DVM

Syntax DVM:MEASUrement:INFMINimum?

Examples DVM:MEASU:INMIN? might return :DVM:MEASUREMENT:INFMINIMUM

427.3000E-3, which represents the minimum readout value of the DVM
function (in volts) over the entire time that the DVM has been on since the last
change using the DVM:MODe or DVM:SOUrce commands or DVM RESET.

DVM:MEASUrement:VALue? (Query Only)

Returns the DVM readout value (the largest displayed value at the top of the
DVM screen).

Conditions Requires DVM option (free with product registration).

Group DVM

Syntax DVM:MEASUrement:VALue?

Examples DVM:MEASU:VAL? might return :DVM:MEASUREMENT:VALUE 430.7000E-3,

which represents the DVM value.

DVM:MODe
This command specifies (or queries) the mode to use for the Digital Voltmeter.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-585

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires DVM option (free with product registration).

Group DVM

Syntax DVM:MODe {ACRMS|ACDCRMS|DC|OFF}

DVM:MODe?

Arguments ACRMS – displays the root-mean-square value of the acquired data, with the DC
component removed.
ACDCRMS – displays the RMS value of the acquired data.
DC – displays the DC value of the acquired data.
OFF

Examples DVM:MODE DC sets the mode for the DVM to DC, which displays the DC value of
the acquired data.
DVM:MOD? might return ACRMS, which indicates the mode is currently set
to ACRMS.

DVM:SOUrce
This command sets (or queries) the source for the DVM.

Conditions Requires DVM option (free with product registration).

Group DVM

Syntax DVM:SOUrce {CH<x>}

DVM:SOUrce?

Arguments CH<x> specify which channel to use as the source for the DVM.

Examples DVM:SOURCE CH4 sets the DVM source to Channel 4.

DVM:TRIGger:FREQuency:COUNTer
This command sets or queries the state of the trigger frequency counter readout in
the trigger badge.

2-586 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires DVM option (free with product registration).

Group DVM

Syntax DVM:TRIGger:FREQuency:COUNTer {0|1|OFF|ON}

DVM:TRIGger:FREQuency:COUNTer?

Arguments 1 or ON turns on the trigger frequency counter for the Digital Voltmeter.

0 or OFF turns it off.

Examples DVM:TRIGGER:FREQUENCY:COUNTER 0 turns off the counter.

DVM:TRIGGER:FREQUENCY:COUNTER? might return

:DVM:TRIGGER:FREQUENCY:COUNTER 1 indicating the counter is on.

*ESE
This command sets and queries the bits in the Event Status Enable Register
(ESER). The ESER prevents events from being reported to the Status Byte
Register (STB). For a more detailed discussion of the use of these registers, see
Registers.

Group Status and Error

Syntax *ESE <NR1>

*ESE?

Related Commands *CLS

DESE
*ESR?
EVENT?
EVMsg?
*SRE
*STB?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the binary bits of the ESER according to this value, which ranges
from 0 through 255.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-587

Commands listed in alphabetical order

The power-on default for the ESER is 0 if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the ESER
maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle.

NOTE. Setting the DESER and the ESER to the same values allows only those
codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit (bit 5) of
the Status Byte Register. Use the DESE command to set the DESER.

Examples *ESE 209 sets the ESER to binary 11010001, which enables the PON, URQ,
EXE, and OPC bits.
*ESE? might return 186, showing that the ESER contains DESE the binary
value 10111010.

*ESR? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the contents of the Standard Event Status
Register (SESR). *ESR? also clears the SESR (since reading the SESR clears it).
For a more detailed discussion of the use of these registers, see Registers.

Group Status and Error

Syntax *ESR?

Related Commands ALLEv?

*CLS
DESE
*ESE
EVENT?
EVMsg?
*SRE
*STB?

Examples *ESR? might return *ESR 213, showing that the SESR contains the binary
value 11010101.

2-588 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ETHERnet:DHCPbootp
This command sets the network configuration method to DHCP (that is ON) or
static IP address (that is OFF).

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:DHCPbootp {ON|OFF}

ETHERnet:DHCPbootp?

Arguments ON enables the instrument to search the network for a DHCP server in order to
automatically assign a dynamic IP address to the instrument.

NOTE. Do not use DHCP searching if your instrument has been assigned a static
address on a network. If you set this command to ON, the DHCP search will
delete or change your static IP address information.

OFF disables the instrument to search the network for a DHCP server.

Examples ETHERNET:DHCPBOOTP ON sets the instrument to search for a DHCP server and
assign a dynamic IP address to the instrument.

ETHERnet:DNS:IPADDress
This command specifies the network Domain Name Server (DNS) IP address.

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:DNS:IPADDress <QString>

ETHERnet:DNS:IPADDress?

Arguments <QString> is a standard IP address value, enclosed in quotes.

Examples ETHERNET:DNS:IPADDRESS "128.196.13.252" sets the DNS IP address that

the instrument uses to communicate with the network.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-589

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ETHERnet:DOMAINname
This command specifies the network domain name.

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:DOMAINname <QString>

ETHERnet:DOMAINname?

Arguments <QString> is the network domain name, enclosed in quotes.

Examples ETHERNET:DOMAINNAME "Alpha1.Mycorp.com" sets the domain name that

the instrument uses to communicate with the network.

ETHERnet:ENET:ADDress? (Query Only)

Returns the Ethernet address (MAC address) value assigned to the instrument.
This is assigned at the factory and can not be changed.

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:ENET:ADDress?

Examples ETHERNET:ENET:ADDRESS? returns an Ethernet address such as

08:00:11:01:02:03

ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress
This command specifies the network gateway IP address.

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress <QString>

ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress?

Related Commands ETHERnet:NETWORKCONFig

ETHERnet:IPADDress

2-590 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ETHERnet:SUBNETMask

Arguments <QString> is a standard IP address value, enclosed in quotes.

Examples ETHERNET:GATEWAY:IPADDRESS "128.143.16.1" sets the gateway IP

address.

ETHERnet:IPADDress
This command sets the IP address assigned to the instrument.

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:IPADDress <QString>

ETHERnet:IPADDress?

Related Commands ETHERnet:NETWORKCONFig

ETHERnet:SUBNETMask
ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress

Arguments <QString> is a standard IP address value, enclosed in quotes.

Examples ETHERNET:IPADDRESS "123.121.13.214" sets the instrument's IP address.

ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:RESET (No Query Form)

This command resets the LXI local area network.

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:RESET

Examples ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:RESET resets the LXI local area network.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-591

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:SERVICENAMe
This command sets or queries the service name used for the LXI interface.

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:SERVICENAMe <QString>

ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:SERVICENAMe?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 64 characters that specifies the mDNS

service name used for the LXI interface.

Examples ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:SERVICENAMe? might return "Tektronix Oscilloscope

MSO5 053CVV"

ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:STATus? (Query Only)

This query returns the LXI network status: one of OK, FAULT, or IDENTIFY.
IDENTIFY indicates that the device identify mode is enabled.

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:STATus?

Related Commands ETHERnet:PING

ETHERnet:PING:STATus?

Returns OK — indicates the network is running and the instrument can “see” the network.

FAULT — indicates the network is not visible, or the network settings are incorrect.

IDENTIFY indicates that a message is being displayed on the instrument’s front

panel indicating which scope the user is currently accessing.

Examples ETHER:LXI:LAN:STAT? might return FAULT, indicating the network is not

visible, or the network settings are incorrect.

2-592 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ETHERnet:NAME
This command sets or queries the instrument Ethernet hostname assigned to the
instrument.

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:NAME <QString>

ETHERnet:NAME?

Arguments <QString> is the network name assigned to the instrument, enclosed in quotes.

Examples ETHERNET:NAME "labscope1" sets the instrument's network name.

ETHERnet:NETWORKCONFig
This command specifies the Ethernet network configuration setting.

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:NETWORKCONFig {AUTOmatic|MANual}

ETHERnet:NETWORKCONFig?

Related Commands ETHERnet:NAME

ETHERnet:IPADDress
ETHERnet:SUBNETMask
ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress
ETHERnet:DHCPbootp

Arguments AUTOmatic specifies that the instrument’s IP address, subnet mask and gateway
settings will be received from a DHCP server on the local network.
MANual specifies that the Ethernet settings will be configured
manually, using ETHERnet:IPADDress, ETHERnet:SUBNETMask, and
ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress.

Examples ETHERnet:NETWORKCONFig MANual specifies to configure the Ethernet

settings manually.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-593

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ETHERnet:NETWORKCONFig? might return AUTOMATIC, indicating the

settings are being configured automatically.

ETHERnet:PING (No Query Form)

Sends a ping packet to the instrument gateway and sets the status accordingly.

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:PING EXECute

Examples ETHERNET:PING EXECute causes the instrument to ping the gateway IP address.

ETHERnet:PING:STATus? (Query Only)

Returns the results of sending the ETHERnet:PING command to ping the gateway
IP address.

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:PING:STATus?

Returns OK is returned if the computer at the gateway IP address answers.

NORESPOnsE is returned if the computer at the gateway IP address does not

answer.
TRYING is returned if the ping operation is still executing.

NEVER is returned if ETHERnet:PING EXECute has not been previously

sent, indicating that no ping response has ever been received in response to an
ETHERnet:PING EXECute command since the instrument was powered on.

ETHERnet:SUBNETMask
This command sets or queries the instrument subnet mask value.

Group Ethernet

2-594 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax ETHERnet:SUBNETMask <QString>

ETHERnet:SUBNETMask?

Related Commands ETHERnet:NETWORKCONFig

ETHERnet:IPADDress
ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress

Arguments <QString> is the subnet mask value, enclosed in quotes.

Examples ETHERNET:SUBNETMASK "255.255.255.0" sets the subnet mask value using

standard IP address notation format.

EVENT? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns an event code from the Event Queue that
provides information about the results of the last *ESR? read. EVENT? also
removes the returned value from the Event Queue.

Group Status and Error

Syntax EVENT?

Related Commands ALLEv?

*CLS
DESE
*ESE
*ESR?
EVMsg?
*SRE
*STB?

Examples EVENT? might return :EVENT 110, showing that there was an error in a command
header.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-595

Commands listed in alphabetical order

EVMsg? (Query Only)

This query-only command removes a single event code from the Event Queue that
is associated with the results of the last *ESR? read and returns the event code
with an explanatory message. For more information, see Event Handling.

Group Status and Error

Syntax EVMsg?

Related Commands ALLEv?

*CLS
DESE
*ESE
*ESR?
EVENT?
*SRE
*STB?

Returns The event code and message in the following format:

<Event Code><Comma><QString>[<Event
Code><Comma><QString>...]<QString>::= <Message>;[<Command>]
where <Command> is the command that caused the error and may be returned
when a command error is detected by the instrument. As much of the command
will be returned as possible without exceeding the 60 character limit of the
<Message> and <Command> string combined. The command string is
right-justified.

Examples EVMSG? might return :EVMSG 110,"Command header error".

EVQty? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the number of events that are enabled in the
queue. This is useful when using the ALLEv? query, since it lets you know
exactly how many events will be returned.

Group Status and Error

2-596 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax EVQty?

Related Commands ALLEv?

EVENT?
EVMsg?

Examples EVQTY? might return :EVQTY 3, indicating the number of event codes in the
Event Queue.

EYEMASK:MASK<x>:COUNt:HITS? (Query Only)

This command returns the total number of hit violations for all segments in the
specified mask test.

Conditions Requires option 5-DJA or 6-DJA (Advanced Jitter Analysis).

Group Mask

Syntax EYEMASK:MASK<x>:COUNt:HITS?

Related Commands PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASK?

Arguments MASK<x> is the number of the specified mask test in an eye diagram plot.

Examples EYEMASK:MASK2:COUNt:HITS? might return 211, indicating that mask 2 has a

total of 211 violations for all segments in the mask.

EYEMASK:MASK<x>:COUNt:SEG<y>:HITS? (Query Only)

This command returns the number of hit violations for the specified segment
(area).

Conditions Requires option 5-DJA or 6-DJA (Advanced Jitter Analysis).

Group Mask

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-597

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax EYEMASK:MASK<x>:COUNt:SEG<y>:HITS?

Related Commands PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASK?

Arguments MASK<x> is the number of the specified mask test (or mask test plot?).

SEG<y> is the number of the mask segment for which to return hit violations data.

Returns Returns an integer number representing the number of mask test violations for the
specified mask est and mask segment.

Examples EYEMASK:MASK1:COUNt:SEG3:HITS? might return 435, indicating that

segment 3 of mask test 1 has 435 hit violations.

EYEMASK:MASK<x>:CREATor? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the name of the eye diagram plot that created
the mask.

Conditions Requires option 5-DJA or 6-DJA (Advanced Jitter Analysis).

Group Mask

Syntax EYEMASK:MASK<x>:CREATor?

Related Commands PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASK?

Arguments MASK<x> is the number of the specified mask test (or mask test plot?).

Returns <QString> is a quoted string that contains the name of the eye diagram plot
associated with the specified mask.

Examples EYEMASK:MASK4:CREATor? might return "plot2".

EYEMASK:MASK<x>:ENAbled
This command enables or disables eye mask testing in the specified plot.

2-598 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-DJA or 6-DJA (Advanced Jitter Analysis).

Group Mask

Syntax EYEMASK:MASK<x>:ENAbled {ON|OFF}

EYEMASK:MASK<x>:ENAbled?

Related Commands PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASK?

Arguments MASK<x> is the number of the specified mask test (or mask test plot?).

Returns Returns an integer number representing enabled (1) or disabled (0).

Examples EYEMASK:MASK4:ENAbled ON enables the eye mask test in the specified mask
plot.
EYEMASK:MASK2:ENAbled? might return 0, indicating that mask testing is
disabled in the specified mask plot.

EYEMASK:MASK<x>:MASKfile
This command sets or queries the current mask definition file name for the
specified mask test.

Conditions Requires option 5-DJA or 6-DJA (Advanced Jitter Analysis).

Group Mask

Syntax EYEMASK:MASK<x>:MASKfile <Qstring>

EYEMASK:MASK<x>:MASKfile?

Related Commands PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASK?

Arguments <x> is the number of the specified mask test (or mask test plot?).

<Qstring> is a quoted string that defines the file path that specifies the location
of the mask file to use, in the format ‘[<path>]<filename.ext>’. Specifying a path
is optional. If no path is entered, the instrument will search in the current working
directory as set in FILESystem:CWD.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-599

Commands listed in alphabetical order

If the file argument begins with a file path separator (forward slash character)
or a drive designator such as C:, then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a file path separator appearing
anywhere other than the first character position, then the file name is treated
as a path that is relative to the current working directory.

Examples EYEMASK:MASK1:MASKfile "/C:/Applications/Masks/Serial

RapidIO/RIO Serial 2_5G.msk" sets mask1 to use the RIO serial 2.5G mask
file at the specified location
EYEMASK:MASK4:MASKfile? might return
"/media/C:/Applications/Masks/1394b/S400b T1.msk"

EYEMASK:MASK<x>:MASKOffset:HORizontal:AUTOfit? (Query Only)

This command returns the mask offset value in the specified mask in seconds. The
mask test number is specified by <x>

Conditions Requires option 5-DJA or 6-DJA (Advanced Jitter Analysis).

Group Mask

Syntax EYEMASK:MASK<x>:MASKOffset:HORizontal:AUTOfit?

Related Commands PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASK?

Examples EYEMASK:MASK2:MASKOffset:HORizontal:AUTOfit? might return

:EYEMASK:MASK2:MASKOffset:HORizontal:AUTOfit 12e-12, indicating
that mask autofit moved mask 2 by 12 ps

EYEMASK:MASK<x>:TESt:SAMple:THReshold
This command sets or queries the total number of hit violations that will cause a
mask test failure.

Conditions Requires option 5-DJA or 6-DJA (Advanced Jitter Analysis).

Group Mask

2-600 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax EYEMASK:MASK<x>:TESt:SAMple:THReshold <NR1>

EYEMASK:MASK<x>:TESt:SAMple:THReshold?

Related Commands PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASK?

Arguments MASK<x> is the number of the specified mask test (or mask test plot?).

<NR1> is a positive integer indicating the number of mask hits required to cause a
fail condition for that mask test.

Examples EYEMASK:MASK1:TESt:SAMple:THReshold 15 sets the specified mask test to

fail if 15 or more mask violations occur.
EYEMASK:MASK3:TESt:SAMple:THReshold? might return 20, indicating that
the specified mask test is set to fail if 20 or more mask violations occur.

EYEMASK:MASK<x>:TESt:STATUS? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the mask hit test status.

Conditions Requires option 5-DJA or 6-DJA (Advanced Jitter Analysis).

Group Mask

Syntax EYEMASK:MASK<x>:TESt:STATUS?

Related Commands PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASK?

Arguments MASK<x> is the number of the specified mask test (or mask test plot?).

Returns This command returns a string with the mask test status. Valid status strings are:
PASS. The number of mask hits is less than the target fail threshold.
FAIL. The number of mask hits is greater than or equal to the target fail
threshold.
OFF. Mask testing disabled on the specified mask plot.

Examples EYEMASK:MASK2:TESt:STATUS? might return Fail, indicating that mask

testing has failed in the specified mask plot.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-601

Commands listed in alphabetical order

FACtory (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) resets the instrument to its factory default settings.
This command is equivalent to pressing the DEFAULT SETUP button located on
the instrument front panel or selecting Default Setup from the File menu.
This command Performs the following in addition to what is done for the *RST
command:
Clears any pending OPC operations.
Resets the following IEEE488.2 registers:
*ESE0 (Event Status Enable Register)
*SRE 0 (Service Request Enable Register)
DESE255 (Device Event Status Enable Register)
*PSC1 (Power-on Status Clear Flag)
Deletes all defined aliases.
Enables command headers (:HEADer 1).

Group Save and Recall

Syntax FACtory

Related Commands *PSC

RECAll:SETUp

*RST

Arguments None

Examples FACTORY resets the instrument to its factory default settings.

FILESystem? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the directory listing of the current working
directory. This query is the same as the FILESystem:DIR? query.

Group File System

2-602 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax FILESystem?

Related Commands FILESystem:COPy

FILESystem:CWD
FILESystem:DELEte
FILESystem:DIR?
FILESystem:READFile
FILESystem:REName
FILESystem:WRITEFile

Arguments None.

Examples FILESYSTEM? might return :FILESYSTEM:DIR

"myFile.txt","myWaveform.wfm".

FILESystem:COPy (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) copies a named file to a new file. The new file
might be in a totally separate directory than the old file. You can only copy one
file at a time using this command. Wild card characters are not allowed.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:COPy {<source_file_path>,<destination_file_path>}

Related Commands FILESystem:CWD

FILESystem:DELEte

Arguments <source_file_path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path or
directory. If the file path is within the current working directory, you need only
specify the file name.
<destination_file_path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and
path. If the file path is within the current working directory, you need only specify
the file name.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-603

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples FILESYSTEM:COPY "E:/setup1.set","E:/SETUPS/setup1.set" copies

the file named setup1.set, on the E drive to a file named setup1.set in the SETUPS
directory on the E drive.
:FILESystem:CWD "E:/SETUPS"
:FILESystem:COPy ".","I:/Archive/SETUPS"
:FILESystem:COPy "../ch1.isf","I:/SavedWfms/ch1_new.isf"

FILESystem:CWD
This command sets or queries the current working directory. CWD is short
for Current Working Directory. It changes the directory (folder) that the other
FILESystem commands operate on.

NOTE. There are three host ports on the front panel (E:, F:, and G:), and two
on the back panel (H: and I:.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:CWD {<new_working_directory_path>}

FILESystem:CWD?

Arguments <new_working_directory_path> is a quoted string that defines the current

working; a directory name can be up to 128 characters.

Examples FILESYSTEM:CWD "E:/waveforms/" changes the current working directory

to a folder named "waveforms" on the USB flash drive installed in the "E:" USB
Host port.
FILESYSTEM:CWD? might return :FILESYSTEM:CWD "E:/" Indicates the
current working directory is the root folder of the E: USB flash drive port.

FILESystem:DELEte (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) deletes a named file or directory from a mass
storage device. Once removed, the data in that file or directory can no longer be
accessed. If the specified file is a directory, it must be empty before it can be
deleted.

Group File System

2-604 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax FILESystem:DELEte <file_path>

Related Commands FILESystem:COPy

FILESystem:CWD
FILESystem:RMDir

Arguments <file_path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file
path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the file name.

Examples FILESYSTEM:DELETE "NOT_MINE.SET" deletes the file

named NOT_MINE.SET from the folder referred to by the
FILESYSTEM:CWDFILESystem:CWD command.

FILESystem:DIR? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns a comma separated list of quoted strings. Each
string contains the name of a file or directory in the folder referred to by the
FILESYSTEM:CWDFILESystem:CWD command.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:DIR?

Related Commands FILESystem:CWD

FILESystem:MKDir

Arguments None

Examples FILESYSTEM:DIR? might return :FILESYSTEM:DIR

"161012_132039_000.wfm","161012_132039_001.wfm","161220_191452.png",
"161220_191554.csv","170320_132925_0 00.wfm","170320_132929_000.set",
"Ch2-Ch3_000.set","E:","F:","G:","H:","I:","J:","Rgjtest_000.set",
"RgjSetupRuntTrig4chnl
s_000.set","RgjSetup_000.set","ScrnShot1jeh2_000.wfm","ScrnShot1jeh_000.wfm",
"ScrnShot_000.png","ScrnShot_000.wfm","Scrn
_000.set","Scrn_001.set","Scrn_002.set","Scrn_003.set","Scrn_004.set",
"Wfm_000.wfm","Wfm_001.wfm","Wfm_002.wfm","Wfm_003
.wfm","Wfm_004.wfm","Wfm_005.wfm","Wfm_006.wfm","digChans_000.wfm".

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-605

Commands listed in alphabetical order

FILESystem:HOMEDir? (Query Only)

This query returns the current user's home directory.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:HOMEDir?

Returns The current user's home directory as a quoted string.

Examples FILESYSTEM:HOMEDIR? might return: "C:".

FILESystem:LDIR? (Query Only)

Returns a comma separated list of every file, file size, type,
modification date and time, and directory in the folder referred to by the
FILESYSTEM:CWDFILESystem:CWD command. This is different than the
:DIR query in that it provides a long output format with the file size, type,
and modification date/time. Each entry is a semicolon separated list: < file
name>;<type>;<size in bytes>;<date>;<time>

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:LDIR?

Returns A comma separated list of every file, file size, type, modification date and time,
and directory in the folder referred to by the FILESystem:CWDcommand.

Examples FILESYSTEM:LDIR? might return "tek0000CH1.isf;FILE;20342;2009-05-21;13:

58:24", "TEMP;DIR;4096;2009-09-15;06:20:44".

FILESystem:MKDir (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) creates a new directory.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:MKDir <directory_path>

2-606 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands FILESystem:CWD

FILESystem:DIR?

Arguments <directory_path> is a quoted string that specifies the directory to create.

Examples FILESYSTEM:MKDIR "E:\NewDirectory" creates the directory named

NewDirectory at the root of the E drive.
These two commands create the directory MyNewSubDirectory within the
existing directory MyDirectory at the root of the E drive:
FILESYSTEM:CWD "E:/MyDirectory"; FILESYSTEM:MKDIR
"MyNewSubDirectory"

FILESystem:MOUNT:DRIVE
The command form mounts a network drive specified by the quoted string
argument. The quoted string argument is a semicolon separated list of the
following fields:
Drive name - The drive name to be mounted. It is a case insensitive single
letter followed by a colon. The drive name must be a letter between 'L:' and
'Z:', inclusive.
Server identity - The server identity is the DNS name of the server or the IP
address of the server.
Path - The path to be mounted (e.g. /level1/level2/mydirectory).
User name - The user name for the drive.
User password - The password for the drive.
Domain name - The domain/workgroup of the target mount.
Verbose - The verbose option to capture mount failure messages.
Domain name, user name, user password, and verbose are optional and are only
used for mounts requiring SMB/CIFS interworking (MS Windows and MacOS).
The query form returns a 0 or 1 to indicate that the drive name (quoted string) is
currently mounted or not. A return of 1 indicates the drive is mounted. A return of
0 indicated the drive is not mounted.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:MOUNT:DRIVE <QString>

FILESystem:MOUNT:DRIVE? <QString>

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-607

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples FILESYSTEM:MOUNT:DRIVE "L:;000.000.0.0;/level1/level2/mydir"

specifies to mount the L: drive using the drive name, server identity, and path.
FILESYSTEM:MOUNT:DRIVE? "L:" might return 0, indicating the L: drive is
not mounted.

FILESystem:MOUNT:TEKDrive
This command mounts the TekDrive specified by the quoted string
arguments. The argument must contain the drive name, AutoDisconnectMode,
RestrictToCurrentIP, and AutoDisconnectTime.
The drive name is the TekDrive name to be mounted. It is case insensitive.
There are three options available for AutoDisconnectMode:
Select Power Cycle to unmount the TekDrive after power cycling the
oscilloscope. There is no time restriction when this option is selected
Select Never to mount the TekDrive connection permanently.
Select Custom to disconnect the TekDrive after a chosen duration. The default
selection is Power Cycle.
RestrictToCurrentIP restricts the connection to current network IP only. This may
be used for additional network security.
AutoDisconnectTime is the required time for the Auto Disconnect. The TekDrive
gets disconnected automatically from the instrument after the specified time. The
duration is in hours. The minimum is 0.25 hours and the maximum is 744 hours.
The query form of this command returns whether or not the specified TekDrive is
mounted.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:MOUNT:TEKDrive <QString>

FILESystem:MOUNT:TEKDrive? <QString>

Arguments <QString> provides the information needed to mount the TekDrive and
must have the drive name, AutoDisconnectMode, RestrictToCurrentIP, and
AutoDisconnectTime.

Returns This command returns a 1 or 0. 1 indicates that the specified drive is mounted. 0
indicates the specified drive is not mounted.

2-608 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples FILESystem:MOUNT:TEKDrive "TekDrive1;Custom;true;8" specifies to

mount TekDrive1, auto disconnect it after 8 hours, and restrict the connection to
current network IP only.
FILESYSTEM:MOUNT:DRIVE? "TekDrive1" might return 1, indicating
TekDrive1 is mounted.

FILESystem:READFile (No Query Form)

This command writes the contents of the specified file to the current interface.
If the specified file does not exist or is not readable, an appropriate error event
is posted.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:READFile <QString>

Related Commands FILESystem:CWD

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file path is
within the current working directory, you need only specify the file name.

Examples FILESYSTEM:READFILE “E:/test_data/tek00016CH1.csv” reads the

content of the specified file, if the file exists and is readable, and sends the content
of the file to the current interface.

FILESystem:REName (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) assigns a new name to an existing file or folder.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:REName <old_file_path>,<new_file_path>

Related Commands FILESystem:CWD

Arguments <old_file_path> is a quoted string that defines the file or folder name and
path. If the path is within the current working directory, you need only specify
the file or folder name.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-609

Commands listed in alphabetical order

<new_file_path> is a quoted string that defines the file or folder name and
path. If the path is within the current working directory, you need only specify
the file or folder name.

Examples FILESYSTEM:RENAME "E:/TEK00000.SET","E:/MYSETTING.SET" gives the

file named TEK00000.SET the new name of MYSETTING.SET. The file remains
in the root directory on the E drive.
FILESYSTEM:RENAME
"e:/mySettings/tek00000.set","e:/setup1.set". This example
illustrates how to move a file from one folder to another.

FILESystem:RMDir (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) deletes a named directory. The directory must
be empty.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:RMDir <directory_path>

Related Commands FILESystem:CWD

Arguments <directory_path> is a quoted string that defines the folder name and path. If
the folder path is within the current working directory, you need only specify
the folder name.

Examples FILESYSTEM:RMDIR "E:/OldDirectory" removes the directory named

OldDirectory from the root of the E drive.

FILESystem:TEKDrive:CODE? (Query Only)

This command returns short code in string format. This code must be entered (or
pasted) at http://drive.tekcloud.com/activate. After the code is entered click the
Activate button to complete the mounting of the TekDrive.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:TEKDrive:CODE?

2-610 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples FILESYSTEM:TEKDRIVE:CODE? might return "xYxrr", indicating the code

string xYxrr needs to entered at http://drive.tekcloud.com/activate and activated.

FILESystem:TEKDrive:CODE:EXPirytime? (Query Only)

This command returns expiry time of short code. It is the absolute time that the
expiry command returns. For example, if 2:11 pm is the time the user initiated the
TekDrive mounting, then the expiry query returns + 5 minutes (2:16 pm).

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:TEKDrive:CODE:EXPirytime?

Examples FILESYSTEM:TEKDRIVE:CODE:EXPIRYTIME? might return “Wed Nov 11

17:29:44 2020”.

FILESystem:TEKDrive:CODE:STATus? (Query Only)

This command returns status of short code.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:TEKDrive:CODE:STATus?

Returns Success indicates the operation was successful.

AccessDenied indicates it is unable to process the request as permission was

denied.
Invalid indicates the operation was invalid.

Unknown indicates it is unable to process the request due to an unknown error.

Pending indicates it is able to generate the code.

NetworkNotFound indicates it is unable to connect to internet.

UserCancelled indicates the operation was cancelled by user.

Examples FILESYSTEM:TEKDRIVE:CODE:STATUS? might return Pending, indicating it

is able to generate the code.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-611

Commands listed in alphabetical order

FILESystem:UNMOUNT:DRIve (No Query Form)

This command unmounts the USB drive specified by the quoted string argument.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:UNMOUNT:DRIve <QString>

Related Commands
Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that specifies which USB drive to unmount. String
is a case insensitive single letter followed by a colon.

Examples FILESYSTEM:UNMOUNT:DRIVE "G:" specifies to unmount the flash drive

installed in the right-most USB slot on the front of the instrument.

FILESystem:UNMOUNT:TEKDrive (No Query Form)

This command unmounts the TekDrive specified by the quoted string argument
and the drive name is case insensitive.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:UNMOUNT:TEKDrive <QString>

Related Commands
Arguments <QString> specifies the TekDrive to unmount.

Examples FILESystem:UNMOUNT:TEKDrive "TekDrive1" specifies to unmount the

TekDrive named "TekDrive1".

FILESystem:WRITEFile (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) writes the specified block data to the specified
file on the instruments file system. If the destination file cannot be written, an
error event is posted.

Group File System

2-612 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax FILESystem:WRITEFile <file_path>,<data>

Related Commands FILESystem:CWD

Arguments <file_path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file
path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the file name.
<data> is the specified block data to be written.

FPAnel:PRESS (No Query Form)

This command is used to emulate a button press. When used with knob
enumerations, this command pushes the knob. Use the FPAnel:TURN command
to emulate knob turns.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax FPAnel:PRESS {AUTOset| BUS| CH<x>| CLEAR| CURsor|

DEFaultsetup| FASTAcq| FORCetrig| GPKNOB1| GPKNOB2| HIGHRES|
HORZPOS| HORZScale| MATh| NEXt| PREv| REF| RUNSTop| SETTO50|
SINGleseq| TOUCHSCReen| TRIGMode| TRIGSlope| USER| VERTPOS|
VERTSCALE| ZOOM}

Arguments AUTOset emulates a Autoset button press.

BUS emulates a Bus button press.

CH<x> emulates a Channel button press. The channel number is specified by x.

CLEAR emulates a Clear button press.

CURsor emulates a Cursor button press.

DEFaultsetup emulates a Default Setup button press.

FASTAcq emulates a Fast Acq button press.

FORCetrig emulates a Force trigger button press.

GPKNOB1 emulates a Multipurpose A knob press.

GPKNOB2 emulates a Multipurpose B knob press.

HIGHRES emulates a High Res button press.

HORZPOS emulates a Horizontal knob press.

HORZScale emulates a Horizontal Scale knob press.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-613

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MATh emulates a Math button press.

NEXt emulates a Next button press.

PREv emulates a Previous button press.

REF emulates a Ref button press.

RUNSTop emulates a Run/Stop button press.

SETTO50 emulates a Set to 50% threshold button press.

SINGleseq emulates a Single/Seq button press.

TOUCHSCReen emulates a Touch Screen button press.

TRIGMode emulates a Trigger Mode button press.

TRIGSlope emulates a Trigger Slope button press.

USER emulates a User button press.

VERTPOS emulates a Vertical Position knob press.

VERTSCALE emulates a Vertical Scale knob press.

ZOOM emulates a Zoom button press.

Examples FPANEL:PRESS FORCETRIG emulates pressing the Force trigger button.

FPAnel:TURN
This command is used to emulate a knob turn. The optional NR1 specifies
the number of clicks where negative values indicate counter clockwise. If not
specified, the default of 1 click is used indicating the knob is turned clockwise
1 click.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax FPAnel:TURN {GPKNOB1|GPKNOB2|HORZPOS|HORZScale|PANKNOB|

TRIGLevel|VERTPOS|VERTSCALE|ZOOM} [,<NR1>]

Arguments GPKNOB1 emulates a Multipurpose A knob turn.

GPKNOB2 emulates a Multipurpose B knob turn.

HORZPOS emulates a Horizontal knob turn.

HORZScale emulates a Horizontal Scale knob turn.

PANKNOB emulates a Pan knob turn.

2-614 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGLevel emulates a Trigger Level knob turn.

VERTPOS emulates a Vertical Position knob turn.

VERTSCALE emulates a Vertical Scale knob turn.

ZOOM emulates a Zoom knob turn.

<NR1> is the number of clicks to turn the knob.

Examples FPANEL:TURN TRIGLEVEL ,3 emulates turning the trigger Level knob 3 clicks
in the clockwise direction.

HEADer
This command sets or queries the Response Header Enable State that causes the
instrument to either include or omit headers on query responses.

NOTE. This command does not affect IEEE Std 488.2-1987 Common Commands
(those starting with an asterisk); these commands never return headers.

Whether the long or short form of header keywords and enumerations are returned
is dependent upon the state of :VERBose.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax HEADer {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

HEADer?

Related Commands VERBose

Arguments <NR1> = 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to false; any other value sets
this state to true.
OFF sets the Response Header Enable State to false. This causes the instrument to
omit headers on query responses, so that only the argument is returned.
ON sets the Response Header Enable State to true. This causes the instrument
to include headers on applicable query responses. You can then use the query
response as a command.

Examples HEADER OFF specifies that the instrument omits headers on query responses,
so that only the argument is returned.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-615

Commands listed in alphabetical order

HEADER? might return :HEADER 1, indicating that the instrument is including

headers on applicable query responses.
With :VERBose ON and :HEADer ON, the :ACQuire:MODe? query might
return: :ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE.
With :VERBose OFF and :HEADer ON, the :ACQuire:MODe? query might
return: :ACQ:MOD SAM
With :VERBose ON and :HEADer OFF, the :ACQuire:MODe? query might
return: SAMPLE
With :VERBose OFF and :HEADer OFF, the :ACQuire:MODe? query might
return: SAM

HISTogram:ADDNew (No Query Form)

This command adds the specified waveform histogram.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:ADDNew <QString>

Arguments <QString> specifies the waveform histogram to add. The argument is of the
form "HIST<NR1>", where NR1 is a number value ≥ 1.

Examples HISTogram:ADDNew "HIST7" adds waveform histogram 7.

HISTogram:DELete (No Query Form)

This command deletes the specified histogram.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:DELete <QString>

Arguments <QString> specifies the waveform histogram to delete. The argument is of the
form "HIST<NR1>", where NR1 is a number value ≥ 1.

Examples HISTogram:DELETE "HIST4" deletes histogram 4.

2-616 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

HISTogram:DELETEALL (No Query Form)

This command deletes all the active instances of histograms defined in the scope
application.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:DELETEALL

Examples HISTogram:DELETEALL deletes all the active instances of histograms.

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:BOX
This command sets or queries the top, left, bottom and right positions of the
histogram box in source waveform coordinates. The argument is of the form
<top>,<left>,<bottom>,<right>.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:BOX <NR3>,<NR3>,<NR3>,<NR3>

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:BOX?

Arguments HISTogram<x> specifies the histogram number.

<NR3> specifies four position values, separated by commas. The values are the
top, left, bottom, and right coordinates in that order.

Examples HISTogram:HISTogram2:BOX
250.00E-3,-50.0E-9,-250.00E-3,50.0E-9 sets the box coordinates
of histogram 2 to 250 mV on the top, -50 ns on the left, -250 mV on the
bottom, and 50 ns on the right.
HISTogram:HISTogram2:BOX? might return :HISTogram:HISTogram2:BOX
250.00E-3,-50.0E-9,-250.00E-3,50.0E-9, indicating the box coordinates
are 250 mV on the top, -50 ns on the left, -250 mV on the bottom, and 50 ns
on the right.

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:BSTate
This command sets or queries whether the histogram badge is displayed.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-617

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:BSTate {ON|OFF}

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:BSTate?

Arguments HISTogram<x> specifies the histogram number.

ON enables the histogram badge display.

OFF disables the histogram badge display.

Examples HISTogram:HISTogram2:BSTate ON enables the badge display for histogram

2.
HISTogram:HISTogram2:BSTate? might return
:HISTogram:HISTogram2:BSTate OFF, indicating the badge display for
histogram 2 is disabled.

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:DATa? (Query Only)

This query only command returns a comma separated list of numbers representing
the histogram bin data.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:DATa?

Returns Returns a comma separated list of the histogram bin data. HISTogram<x>
specifies the histogram number.

Examples HISTogram:HISTogram2:DATa? might return :HISTogram2:DATa

332.224000E+3, 337.415000E+3, 337.415000E+3,
337.415000E+3,166.112000E+3, listing the histogram bin
data.

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:DISPlay
This command sets or queries the histogram scaling display setting.

Group Histogram

2-618 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:DISPlay {LINEAr|LOG}

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:DISPlay?

Arguments HISTogram<x> specifies the histogram number.

LINEAr sets the histogram scaling to linear mode.

LOG sets the histogram scaling to logarithmic mode.

Examples HISTogram:HISTogram2:DISPlay LOG sets the scaling display mode for

histogram 2 to logarithmic mode.
HISTogram:HISTogram2:DISPlay? might return
:HISTogram:HISTogram2:DISPlay LINEAR, indicating the display mode for
histogram 2 is linear mode.

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:FUNCtion
This command sets or queries the histogram mode.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:FUNCtion {HORizontal|VERTical}

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:FUNCtion?

Arguments HISTogram<x> specifies the histogram number.

HORizontal sets the histogram mode to horizontal.

VERTical sets the histogram mode to vertical.

Examples HISTogram:HISTogram2:FUNCtion VERTical sets the histogram mode for

histogram 2 to Vertical.
HISTogram:HISTogram2:FUNCtion? might return
:HISTogram:HISTogram2:FUNCtion HORIZONTAL, indicating the function
for histogram 2 is Horizontal.

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:COUNt
This command sets or queries whether the waveform count measurement is
enabled on the histogram.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-619

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:COUNt {ON|OFF}

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:COUNt?

Arguments HISTogram<x> specifies the histogram number.

ON enables the waveform count measurement.

OFF disables the waveform count measurement.

Examples HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:COUNt ON enables the waveform

count measurement for histogram 2.
HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:COUNt? might return
:HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:COUNt OFF, indicating the
waveform count measurement for histogram 2 is disabled.

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:HITS
This command sets or queries whether the Hits in Box measurement is enabled
on the histogram.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:HITS {ON|OFF}

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:HITS?

Arguments HISTogram<x> specifies the histogram number.

ON enables the Hits in Box measurement.

OFF disables the Hits in Box measurement.

Examples HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:HITS ON enables the Hits in Box

measurement for histogram 2.
HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:HITS? might return
:HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:HITS OFF, indicating the Hits in
Box measurement for histogram 2 is disabled.

2-620 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:MAX
This command sets or queries whether the Max measurement is enabled on the
histogram.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:MAX {ON|OFF}

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:MAX?

Arguments HISTogram<x> specifies the histogram number.

ON enables the Max measurement.

OFF disables the Max measurement.

Examples HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:MAX ON enables the Max

measurement for histogram 2.
HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:MAX? might return
:HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:MAX OFF, indicating the Max
measurement for histogram 2 is disabled.

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:MEAN
This command sets or queries whether the Mean measurement is enabled on
the histogram.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:MEAN {ON|OFF}

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:MEAN?

Arguments HISTogram<x> specifies the histogram number.

ON enables the Mean measurement.

OFF disables the Mean measurement.

Examples HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:MEAN ON enables the Mean

measurement for histogram 2.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-621

Commands listed in alphabetical order

HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:MEAN? might return

:HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:MEAN OFF, indicating the Mean
measurement for histogram 2 is disabled.

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:MEDian
This command sets or queries whether the Median measurement is enabled on
the histogram.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:MEDian {ON|OFF}

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:MEDian?

Arguments HISTogram<x> specifies the histogram number.

ON enables the Median measurement.

OFF disables the Median measurement.

Examples HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:MEDian ON enables the Median

measurement for histogram 2.
HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:MEDian? might return
:HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:MEDian OFF, indicating the
Median measurement for histogram 2 is disabled.

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:MIN
This command sets or queries whether the Min measurement is enabled on the
histogram.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:MIN {ON|OFF}

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:MIN?

Arguments HISTogram<x> specifies the histogram number.

ON enables the Min measurement.

OFF disables the Min measurement.

2-622 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:MIN ON enables the Min

measurement for histogram 2.
HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:MIN? might return
:HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:MIN OFF, indicating the Min
measurement for histogram 2 is disabled.

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:MODE
This command sets or queries whether the Mode measurement is enabled on
the histogram.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:MODE {ON|OFF}

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:MODE?

Arguments HISTogram<x> specifies the histogram number.

ON enables the Mode measurement.

OFF disables the Mode measurement.

Examples HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:MODE ON enables the Mode

measurement for histogram 2.
HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:MODE? might return
:HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:MODE OFF, indicating the Mode
measurement for histogram 2 is disabled.

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:ONESigma
This command sets or queries whether the μ±1σ measurement is enabled on the
histogram.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:ONESigma {ON|OFF}

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:ONESigma?

Arguments HISTogram<x> specifies the histogram number.

ON enables the μ±1σ measurement.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-623

Commands listed in alphabetical order

OFF disables the μ±1σ measurement.

Examples HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:ONESigma ON enables the μ±1σ

measurement for histogram 2.
HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:ONESigma? might return
:HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:ONESigma OFF, indicating the
μ±1σ measurement for histogram 2 is disabled.

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:PHITs
This command sets or queries whether the Peak Hits measurement is enabled
on the histogram.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:PHITs {ON|OFF}

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:PHITs?

Arguments HISTogram<x> specifies the histogram number.

ON enables the Peak Hits measurement.

OFF disables the Peak Hits measurement.

Examples HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:PHITs ON enables the Peak Hits

measurement for histogram 2.
HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:PHITs? might return
:HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:PHITs OFF, indicating the Peak
Hits measurement for histogram 2 is disabled.

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:PK2PK
This command sets or queries whether the Peak-to-peak measurement is enabled
on the histogram.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:PK2PK {ON|OFF}

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:PK2PK?

2-624 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments HISTogram<x> specifies the histogram number.

ON enables the Peak-to-peak measurement.

OFF disables the Peak-to-peak measurement.

Examples HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:PK2PK ON enables the Peak-to-peak

measurement for histogram 2.
HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:PK2PK? might return
:HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:PK2PK OFF, indicating the
Peak-to-peak measurement for histogram 2 is disabled.

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:RESUlts? (Query Only)

This query only command returns the measurement results from the specified
histogram. The argument must be in the form of {argument 1},{argument
2},{argument 3}. Argument 1 specifies which histogram measurement to return
results for. Argument 2 specifies which acquisitions to return measurement results
for. Argument 3 specifies which statistic to return measurement results for.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:RESUlts? {COUNt|

HITS| MAX| MIN| PK2PK| MODE| MEAN| MEDian| PHITs| STDDev|
ONESigma| TWOSigma| THRSigma},{ALLAcqs| CURRentacq|
HISTory},{MAXimum| MEAN| MINimum| PK2PK| POPUlation| STDDev}

Arguments HISTogram<x> specifies the histogram number.

COUNt specifies the Count as the histogram measurement to return results for.

HITS specifies the Hits as the histogram measurement to return results for.

MAX specifies the Max as the histogram measurement to return results for.

MIN specifies the Min as the histogram measurement to return results for.

PK2PK specifies the Peak-to-peak as the histogram measurement or statistic to

return results for.
MODE specifies the Mode as the histogram measurement to return results for.

MEAN specifies the Mean as the histogram measurement or statistic to return

results for.
MEDian specifies the Median as the histogram measurement to return results for.

PHITs specifies the Peak Hits as the histogram measurement to return results for.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-625

Commands listed in alphabetical order

STDDev specifies the Standard Deviation as the histogram measurement or

statistic to return results for.
ONESigma specifies the μ±1σ as the histogram measurement to return results for.

TWOSigma specifies the μ±2σ as the histogram measurement to return results for.

THRSigma specifies the μ±3σ as the histogram measurement to return results for.

ALLAcqs specifies the All Acquisitions as the acquisitions to return results for.

CURRentacq specifies the Current Acquisitions as the acquisitions to return

results for.
HISTory specifies the History as the acquisitions to return results for.

MAXimum specifies the Maximum as the statistic to return results for.

MINimum specifies the Minimum as the statistic to return results for.

POPUlation specifies the Population as the statistic to return results for.

Returns Returns results in the form of {histogram measurement results},{acquisition

results},{statistic results}.

Examples HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:RESUlts?
COUNt,ALLAcqs,MEAN might return
:HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:RESUlts COUN,ALLA,MEAN,1.0.

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:STDDev
This command sets or queries whether the Standard Deviation measurement is
enabled on the histogram.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:STDDev {ON|OFF}

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:STDDev?

Arguments HISTogram<x> specifies the histogram number.

ON enables the Standard Deviation measurement.

OFF disables the Standard Deviation measurement.

Examples HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:STDDev ON enables the Standard

Deviation measurement for histogram 2.

2-626 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:STDDev? might return

:HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:STDDev OFF, indicating the
Standard Deviation measurement for histogram 2 is disabled.

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:THRSigma
This command sets or queries whether the μ±3σ measurement is enabled on the
histogram.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:THRSigma {ON|OFF}

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:THRSigma?

Arguments HISTogram<x> specifies the histogram number.

ON enables the μ±3σ measurement.

OFF disables the μ±3σ measurement.

Examples HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:THRSigma ON enables the μ±3σ

measurement for histogram 2.
HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:THRSigma? might return
:HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:THRSigma OFF, indicating the
μ±3σ measurement for histogram 2 is disabled.

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:TWOSigma
This command sets or queries whether the μ±2σ measurement is enabled on the
histogram.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:TWOSigma {ON|OFF}

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:TWOSigma?

Arguments HISTogram<x> specifies the histogram number.

ON enables the μ±2σ measurement.

OFF disables the μ±2σ measurement.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-627

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:TWOSigma ON enables the μ±2σ

measurement for histogram 2.
HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:TWOSigma? might return
:HISTogram:HISTogram2:MEASurement:TWOSigma OFF, indicating the
μ±2σ measurement for histogram 2 is disabled.

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:SAVe (No Query Form)

This command saves the specified histograms data as a comma separated list
of values.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:SAVe <QString>

Arguments HISTogram<x> specifies the histogram number.

<QString> is the file path to save the .csv file to.

Examples HISTogram:HISTogram2:SAVe
"C:/Users/Tek_Local_Admin/Documents/hist2.csv" saves the
histogram 2 data to the specified location.

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:SIZe
This command sets or queries the height or width of the specified histogram bins
in divisions. This size can be larger than the box, which allows you to view the
histogram bins easily.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:SIZe <NR3>

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:SIZe?

Arguments HISTogram<x> specifies the histogram number.

<NR3> specifies the number of divisions to set the height or width of the histogram
bins to.

2-628 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples HISTogram:HISTogram2:SIZe 2.5 sets the height or width for the bins of
histogram 2 to 2.5 divisions.
HISTogram:HISTogram2:SIZe? might return
:HISTogram:HISTogram2:SIZe 7.0, indicating the height or width for the
bins of histogram 2 is 7 divisions.

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:SOUrce
This command sets or queries which source waveform will be compared against
the histogram box when the histogram testing is enabled.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:SOUrce?

Arguments HISTogram<x> specifies the histogram number.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source.

Examples HISTogram:HISTogram2:SOUrce CH3 sets the histogram source to channel 3.

HISTogram:HISTogram2:SOUrce? might return

:HISTogram:HISTogram2:SOUrce CH2, indicating the histogram source is
channel 2.

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:STATE
This command sets or queries whether histogram calculations are enabled for
the specified histogram.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:STATE {ON|OFF}

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:STATE?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-629

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments HISTogram<x> specifies the histogram number.

ON enables the histogram calculations.

OFF disables the histogram calculations.

Examples HISTogram:HISTogram2:STATE ON enables calculations for histogram 2.

HISTogram:HISTogram2:STATE? might return

:HISTogram:HISTogram2:STATE OFF, indicating the calculations for
histogram 2 are disabled.

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:TRANsparency
This command sets or queries the transparency of the histogram bins.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:TRANsparency <NR3>

HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:TRANsparency?

Arguments HISTogram<x> specifies the histogram number.

<NR3> specifies the transparency as a percentage, with a minimum of 0 and a

maximum of 100.

Examples HISTogram:HISTogram2:TRANsparency 50 sets the transparency for

histogram 2 to 50%.
HISTogram:HISTogram2:TRANsparency? might return
:HISTogram:HISTogram2:TRANsparency 70, indicating the
transparency of histogram 2 is 70%.

HISTogram:LIST? (Query Only)

This query returns a comma separated list of all currently defined histograms.

Group Histogram

Syntax HISTogram:LIST?

Returns Returns a comma separated list of all currently defined histograms.

2-630 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples HISTogram:LIST? might return :HISTogram:LIST

HIST1,HIST2,HIST3,HIST4, indicating 4 histograms are defined.

HORizontal? (Query Only)

Queries the current horizontal settings.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal?

Examples HORIZONTAL? might return :HORIZONTAL:SAMPLERATE

6.2500E+9;SAMPLERATE:ANALYZEMODE:MINIMUM:VALUE
AUTOMATIC;OVERRIDE 1;:HORIZONTAL:MODE
AUTO;MODE:AUTOMATIC:FASTACQ:RECORDLENGTH:MAXIMUM:ZOOMOVERRIDE
1;VALUE 1250;:HORIZONTAL:MODE:MANUAL:CONFIGURE
HORIZONTALSCALE;:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:UNITS
S;:HORIZONTAL:DIVISIONS 10;RECORDLENGTH 62500;DELAY:TIME
0.0E+0;MODE 1;:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;SCALE
1.0000E-6;ACQDURATION 10.0000E-6.

HORizontal:ACQDURATION? (Query Only)

This query returns the timebase duration.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:ACQDURATION?

Returns <NR3> returns the duration of the acquisition.

Examples HORIZONTAL:ACQDURATION? might return :HORIZONTAL:ACQDURATION

5.0E-9, indicating the acquisition duration is 5.0 us.

HORizontal:DELay:MODe
This command sets or queries the horizontal delay mode.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-631

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:DELay:MODe {OFF|ON|<NR1>}

HORizontal:DELay:MODe?

Related Commands HORizontal:POSition

Arguments OFF sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to off. This causes the HORizontal:POSition
command to operate like the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front panel.
ON sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to on. This causes the
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe command to operate like the HORIZONTAL
POSITION knob on the front panel.
<NR1> = 0 sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to off; any other value sets this mode
to on.

Examples HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE OFF sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to off, allowing
the horizontal position command to operate like the HORIZONTAL POSITION
knob on the front panel.
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE? might return HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE OFF
indicating that the Horizontal Delay Mode is off and that the horizontal position
command operates like the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front panel.

HORizontal:DELay:TIMe
This command sets or queries the horizontal delay time that is used when delay
mode is on.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:DELay:TIMe <NR3>

HORizontal:DELay:TIMe?

Related Commands HORizontal:POSition

Arguments NR3 is the delay in seconds.

Examples HORizontal:DELay:TIME 0.3 sets the delay of acquisition data so that the
resulting waveform is centered 300 ms after the trigger occurs.

2-632 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

HORizontal:DIVisions? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the number of graticule divisions.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:DIVisions?

Examples HORIZONTAL:DIVISIONS? might return :HORIZONTAL:DIVISIONS 10.0000,

indicating that the waveform is displayed across ten divisions.

HORizontal:FASTframe? (Query Only)

This query returns all information under horizontal:fastframe.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe?

Examples HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME? might return

:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED 1;SUMFRAME:STATE
0;:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:COUNT 2;MULTIPLEFRAMES:MODE
OFF;:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:STATE 0;REF:INCLUDE 0;FRAME 1, the
current FastFrame settings.

HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt
This command sets or returns the number of frames.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt <NR1>

HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt?

Arguments <NR1> is the number of frames.

Examples :HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt 10 sets the number of frames to be acquired

to 10. If this is beyond the maximum number of frames, the value will be

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-633

Commands listed in alphabetical order

constrained. For example, if 8 is the current maximum (based on record length) 8

will be set instead of 10.

HORizontal:FASTframe:MAXFRames? (Query Only)

This query returns the maximum number of frames.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:MAXFRames?

Examples HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MAXFRAMES? might return

:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MAXFRAMES 2, indicating the maximum number
of frames is 2.

HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:MODe
This command sets or returns the overlay display type.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:MODe {OFF|OVERlay}

HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:MODe?

Arguments OFF specifies only displaying the selected frame.

OVERlay specifies overlaying all frames with the temperature palette. The
summary frame is not included in the overlay. The selected frame is drawn in
blue on top of all other frames.

Examples :HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:MODE OVERlay will cause the

entire acquired set of frames to be rendered in a single image, similar to how
FastAcq appears. The currently selected frame is drawn on top in blue.

HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAme
This command sets or returns the reference frame number.

Group Horizontal

2-634 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAme <NR1>

HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAme?

Arguments <NR1> is the reference frame number.

Examples HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:REF:FRAME? might return

:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:REF:FRAME 1, indicating the reference frame
number is 1.

HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:INCLUde
This command sets or returns whether the reference frame delta information is
shown in the display.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:INCLUde {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:INCLUde?

Arguments ON displays the delta information.

OFF does not display the delta information.

<NR1> a 0 indicates the delta information is off; any other value displays the
delta information.

HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED
This command sets or returns the selected frame number for acquired frames.
Refs have their own selected frames.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED <NR1>

HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED?

Arguments <NR1> is the selected frame number for acquired frames.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-635

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED? might return

:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED 1, indicating the selected frame number
is 1.

HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE
This command sets or returns the state of FastFrame. Acquisition modes Envelope
and Average are not compatible with FastFrame. If FastFrame is on, an attempted
set to those acquisition modes will fail and revert to Sample mode. If FastFrame
is turned on while in one of those acquisition modes, the acquisition mode is
changed to Sample.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE?

Arguments ON indicates FastFrame is active.

OFF indicates that FastFrame is off.

<NR1> A 0 turns off FastFrame; any other value activates FastFrame.

Examples HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:STATE? might return

:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:STATE 0, indicating FastFrame is off.

HORizontal:FASTframe:SUMFrame
This command sets or returns the summary frame type. Turning on Summary
Frame does not adjust the numberFrames value as long as there is room for an
additional frame. If there is not enough room then numberFrames will be reduced
by 1. The numberFrames value is always the number of frames to acquire.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:SUMFrame {NONe|AVErage|ENVelope}

HORizontal:FASTframe:SUMFrame

Arguments NONe sets the Summary frame to off.

AVErage sets the Summary frame to average of all acquired frames.

2-636 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ENVelope sets the Summary frame to envelope of all acquired frames.

Examples HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SUMFRAME might return

:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SUMFRAME NONE, indicating the summary frame
is off.

HORizontal:FASTframe:SUMFrame:STATE
This command sets or returns the state of FastFrame summary frame. Summary
frame mode is set automatically based on the acquisition mode. When in Sample
mode, the summary frame type is set to Average. When in Peak Detect mode, the
summary frame type is set to Envelope. When in High Res mode, the summary
frame type is set to Average.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:SUMFrame:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

HORizontal:FASTframe:SUMFrame:STATE?

Arguments ON indicates summary frame is active.

OFF indicates that summary frame is off.

<NR1> a 0 turns off summary frame; any other value activates the summary frame.

Examples HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SUMFRAME:STATE? might return

:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SUMFRAME:STATE 0, indicating the summary
frame is off.

HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:ALL? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the time stamp of all frames. The format is
(Frame #: TimeStamp, Frame #: TimeStamp, and so on). Each time-stamp string
is of the form DD.MM.YYYY.HH:MM::SS.xxxxxxxxxxxx.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:ALL?

Returns Returns all of the timestamps.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-637

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:ALL? might

return :HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:ALL "1:
31.12.1969.16:00:00.000000000000", indicating the only time

HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:DELTa? (Query Only)

This query returns the time difference between the Selected and Reference
time-stamps.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:DELTa?

Returns Return value is in seconds and fraction of a second.

Examples HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:DELTA? might return

:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:DELTA "0.000000000000"
indicating the time difference is 0.0 seconds.

HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:REFerence? (Query Only)

This query returns the time-stamp of the FastFrame Reference frame.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:REFerence?

Examples HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:REFERENCE? might

return :HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:REFERENCE
"31.12.1969.17:00:00.000000000000" indicating the reference timestamp
is 31.12.1969.17:00:00.000000000000.

HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:SELECTED? (Query Only)

This query returns the time-stamp of the FastFrame Selected acquired frame.

Group Horizontal

2-638 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:SELECTED?

Examples HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:SELECTED? might

return :HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:SELECTED
"31.12.1969.17:00:00.000000000000" indicating the timestamp of the
selected frame is 31.12.1969.17:00:00.000000000000.

HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:ALL? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the sub-sample time between the trigger
sample (designated by PT_OFF) and the occurrence of the actual trigger for the
waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command for all frames. This value is
in units of WFMOutpre:XUNit. The format is a string of the form (frame #:zxero,
frame #:xzero, and so on).

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:ALL?

Returns This returns the XZERO values for all of the frames.

Examples HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:XZERO:ALL? might return

:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:XZERO:ALL "1: 1.6000E-10", indicating the
time between the trigger sample and the actual trigger.

HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:REF? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the sub-sample time between the trigger sample
(designated by PT_OFF) and the occurrence of the actual trigger for the waveform
specified by the DATa:SOUrce command for the reference frame. This value is in
units of WFMOutpre:XUNit.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:REF?

Examples HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:XZERO:REF? might return

:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:XZERO:REF 1.0 indicating the sub-sample time
is 1.0.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-639

Commands listed in alphabetical order

HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:SELECTED? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the sub-sample time between the trigger sample
(designated by PT_OFF) and the occurrence of the actual trigger for the waveform
specified by the DATa:SOUrce command for the selected frame. This value is in
units of WFMOutpre:XUNit.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:SELECTED?

Examples HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:XZERO:SELECTED? might return

:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:XZERO:SELECTED 1.0 indicating the sub-sample
time is 1.0.

HORizontal:HISTory:CSTAts
This command sets or returns the history cumulative statistics type. When in All
Acquisitions mode, statistics and plots reflect all acquisitions since the scope
began acquiring. This may include results from acquisitions that go further back
in time than those captured in history. When in History Only mode, statistics and
plots only include acquisitions in history. The cumulative statistics type is set to
All Acquisitions by default.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:HISTory:CSTAts {AACQs|HONLy}

HORizontal:HISTory:CSTAts?

Arguments AACQs sets the history cumulative statistics type to all acquisitions.

HONLy sets the history cumulative statistics type to history only.

Examples HORIZONTAL:HISTORY:CSTATS HONLy sets the history cumulative statistics

type to history only.
HORIZONTAL:HISTORY:CSTATS? might return
:HORIZONTAL:HISTORY:CSTATS AACQs, indicating the history cumulative
statistics type is set to all acquisitions.

2-640 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

HORizontal:HISTory:OVERlay
This command sets or returns whether all acquisitions in history are overlaid
in the waveform view.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:HISTory:OVERlay {ON|OFF}

HORizontal:HISTory:OVERlay?

Arguments ON overlays all acquisitions in history in the waveform view.

OFF only shows the current acquisition in the waveform view.

Examples HORIZONTAL:HISTORY:OVERLAY ON sets all acquisitions in history to be

overlaid in the waveform view.
HORIZONTAL:HISTORY:OVERLAY? might return
:HORIZONTAL:HISTORY:OVERLAY OFF, indicating that only the current
acquisition is shown in the waveform view.

HORizontal:HISTory:REF:ACQ
This command sets or queries the reference acquisition in History. By default
this is the first acquisition in History.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:HISTory:REF:ACQ <NR1>

HORizontal:HISTory:REF:ACQ?

Arguments <NR1> is the acquisition number to set. Must be between 1 and the total number
of acquisitions in History.

Examples HORIZONTAL:HISTORY:REF:ACQ 1 selects the first acquisition in History.

HORIZONTAL:HISTORY:REF:ACQ? might return

:HORIZONTAL:HISTORY:REF:ACQ 1, indicating the first acquisition in History
is selected.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-641

Commands listed in alphabetical order

HORizontal:HISTory:REF:INClude
This command sets or returns whether the history reference acquisition is included
in the user interface history badge or not.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:HISTory:REF:INClude {ON|OFF}

HORizontal:HISTory:REF:INClude?

Arguments ON includes the reference acquisition.

OFF does not include the reference acquisition.

Examples HORIZONTAL:HISTORY:REF:INCLUDE OFF does not include the reference

acquisition.
HORIZONTAL:HISTORY:REF:INCLUDE? might return
:HORIZONTAL:HISTORY:REF:INCLUDE OFF, indicating the reference
acquisition is not included in the badge.

HORizontal:HISTory:SELected
This command sets or queries the selected acquisition in History. By default this
is the most recent acquisition in History.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:HISTory:SELected <NR1>

HORizontal:HISTory:SELected?

Arguments <NR1> is the acquisition number to set. Must be between 1 and the total number
of acquisitions in History.

Examples HORIZONTAL:HISTORY:SELECTED 1 selects the first acquisition in History

HORIZONTAL:HISTORY:SELECTED? might return

:HORIZONTAL:HISTORY:SELECTED 1, indicating the first acquisition in
History is selected.

2-642 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

HORizontal:HISTory:STATe
This command sets or returns the state of History. Acquisition modes Peak
Detect, Envelope and Average are not compatible with History. If History is on,
an attempted set to those acquisition modes will fail and revert to Sample mode.
If History is turned on while in one of those acquisition modes, the acquisition
mode is changed to Sample.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:HISTory:STATe {OFF|ON|1|0}

HORizontal:HISTory:STATe?

Arguments ON enables History.

OFF disables History.

1 enables History.

0 disables History; any other number value turns this feature on.

Examples HORIZONTAL:HISTORY:STATE 1 enables History.

HORIZONTAL:HISTORY:STATE? might return :HORIZONTAL:HISTORY:STATE

0, indicating History is off.

HORizontal:HISTory:TIMEStamp:DELTa? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the difference between the timestamps of the
history reference acquisition and the history selected acquisition.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:HISTory:TIMEStamp:DELTa?

Returns Return value is in seconds and fraction of a second.

Examples HORIZONTAL:HISTORY:TIMESTAMP:DELTA? might return

:HORIZONTAL:HISTORY:TIMESTAMP:DELTA "0.326483333120",
indicating the timestamp delta is 0.326483333120.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-643

Commands listed in alphabetical order

HORizontal:HISTory:TIMEStamp:REFerence? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the timestamp of the history reference
acquisition.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:HISTory:TIMEStamp:REFerence?

Examples HORIZONTAL:HISTORY:TIMESTAMP:REFERENCE? might

return :HORIZONTAL:HISTORY:TIMESTAMP:REFERENCE
"08.09.2021.05:56:00.250715955200", indicating the timestamp of the
reference acquisition is 08.09.2021.05:56:00.250715955200.

HORizontal:HISTory:TIMEStamp:SELECTED? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the timestamp of the history selected
acquisition.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:HISTory:TIMEStamp:SELECTED?

Examples HORIZONTAL:HISTORY:TIMESTAMP:SELECTED? might

return :HORIZONTAL:HISTORY:TIMESTAMP:SELECTED
"08.09.2021.05:56:00.250715955200", indicating the timestamp of the
history selected acquisition is 08.09.2021.05:56:00.250715955200.

HORizontal:MAIn:INTERPRatio? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the Horizontal interpolation ratio.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:MAIn:INTERPRatio?

Examples HORIZONTAL:MAIN:INTERPRATIO? might return

:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:INTERPRATIO 10.0.

2-644 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

HORizontal:MODe
This command set or queries the horizontal operating mode.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:MODe {AUTO|MANual}

HORizontal:MODe?

Related Commands HORizontal:MODe:RECOrdlength

HORizontal:MODe:SAMPLERate
HORizontal:MODe:SCAle

Arguments AUTO selects the automatic horizontal model. Auto mode automatically adjusts
the sample rate and record length to provide a high acquisition rate in Fast Acq or
signal fidelity in analysis. Record length is read only.
MANUAL selects the manual horizontal model. Manual mode lets you change
the sample rate, horizontal scale, and record length. These values interact. For
example, when you change record length then the horizontal scale also changes.

Examples HORIZONTAL:MODE AUTO sets the horizontal mode to auto.

HORIZONTAL:MODE? might return :HORIZONTAL:MODE MANUAL, indicating that

the horizontal mode is manual.

HORizontal:MODe:AUTOmatic:FASTAcq:RECOrdlength:MAXimum:VALue
Sets or queries the horizontal FastAcq maximum record length.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:MODe:AUTOmatic:FASTAcq:RECOrdlength:MAXimum:VALue
<NR1>
HORizontal:MODe:AUTOmatic:FASTAcq:RECOrdlength:MAXimum:
VALue?

Arguments <NR1> is the horizontal FastAcq maximum record length.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-645

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples HORIZONTAL:MODE:AUTOMATIC:FASTACQ:RECORDLENGTH:MAXIMUM:VALUE
6250 sets the maximum value to 6.25 k.

HORizontal:MODe:AUTOmatic:FASTAcq:RECOrdlength:MAXimum:ZOOMOVERride
Sets or queries the flag which allows override of the horizontal FastAcq maximum
record length.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:MODe:AUTOmatic:FASTAcq:RECOrdlength:MAXimum:
ZOOMOVERride {OFF|ON|0| 1}
HORizontal:MODe:AUTOmatic:FASTAcq:RECOrdlength:MAXimum:
ZOOMOVERride?

Arguments OFF does not allow override of the horizontal FastAcq maximum record length.

ON allows override of the horizontal FastAcq maximum record length.

0 does not allow override of the horizontal FastAcq maximum record length.

1 allows override of the horizontal FastAcq maximum record length.

Examples HORIZONTAL:MODE:AUTOMATIC:FASTACQ:RECORDLENGTH:MAXIMUM:
ZOOMOVERRIDE 0 does not allow override of the horizontal FastAcq maximum
record length.
HORIZONTAL:MODE:AUTOMATIC:FASTACQ:
RECORDLENGTH:MAXIMUM:ZOOMOVERRIDE? might return
:HORIZONTAL:MODE:AUTOMATIC:FASTACQ:RECORDLENGTH:
MAXIMUM:ZOOMOVERRIDE 1 indicating that override of the horizontal FastAcq
maximum record length is allowed.

HORizontal:MODe:MANual:CONFIGure
Sets or queries which horizontal control (scale or record length) will primarily
change when the sample rate is changed in Manual mode. If the selected control
(scale or record length) reaches a limit then the unselected control (record length
or scale) may also change.

Group Horizontal

2-646 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax HORizontal:MODe:MANual:CONFIGure
{HORIZontalscale|RECORDLength}
HORizontal:MODe:MANual:CONFIGure?

Arguments HORIZontalscale will change when sample rate is adjusted.

RECORDLength will change when sample rate is adjusted.

Examples HORIZONTAL:MODE:MANUAL:CONFIGURE RECORDLength allows the record

length be adjusted when sample rate is changed in Manual mode.

HORizontal:MODe:RECOrdlength
This command sets or queries the record length.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:MODe:RECOrdlength <NR1>

HORizontal:MODe:RECOrdlength?

Arguments <NR1> is the record length in samples. Manual mode lets you change the record
length, while the record length is read only for Automatic mode.

Examples HORIZONTAL:MODE:RECORDLENGTH 1000 sets the record length to

1000 samples.
HORIZONTAL:MODE:RECORDLENGTH? might return
:HORIZONTAL:MODE:RECORDLENGTH 1000000, indicating that the record
length is set to 1,000,000 samples

HORizontal:MODe:SAMPLERate
This command sets or queries the sample rate.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:MODe:SAMPLERate <NR1>

HORizontal:MODe:SAMPLERate?

Arguments <NR1> is the sample rate in samples per second.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-647

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples HORIZONTAL:MODE:SAMPLERATE 1e6 sets the sample rate to 1 million samples

per second.
HORIZONTAL:MODE:SAMPLERATE? might return
:HORIZONTAL:MODE:SAMPLERATE 5.0000E+6, indicating that the sample rate
is set to 5 million samples per second.

HORizontal:MODe:SCAle
This command sets or queries the horizontal scale.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:MODe:SCAle <NR1>

HORizontal:MODe:SCAle?

Arguments <NR1> is the horizontal scale in seconds per division.

Examples HORIZONTAL:MODE:SCALE 2e-9 sets the horizontal scale to 2 ns per division.

HORIZONTAL:MODE:SCALE? might return :HORIZONTAL:MODE:SCALE

20.0000E-6, indicating that the horizontal scale is set to 10 μs per division.

HORizontal:POSition
This command sets or queries the horizontal position as a percent of screen
width. When Horizontal Delay Mode is turned off, this command is equivalent
to adjusting the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front panel. When
Horizontal Delay Mode is turned on, the horizontal position is forced to 50%.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:POSition <NR3>

HORizontal:POSition?

Arguments <NR3> is from 0 to ≈100 and is the position of the trigger point on the screen (0 =
left edge, 100 = right edge).

Examples HORIZONTAL:POSITION 10 sets the trigger position of the waveform such that
10% of the display is to the left of the trigger position.

2-648 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

HORIZONTAL:POSITION? might return :HORIZONTAL:POSITION

5.0000E+01 indicates the trigger point displayed on the screen.

HORizontal:PREViewstate? (Query Only)

This query returns the display system preview state.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:PREViewstate?

Returns <NR1> = 1 if the system is in the preview state.

<NR1> = 0 if the system is not in the preview state.

Examples HORIZONTAL:PREVIEWSTATE? might return :HORIZONTAL:PREVIEWSTATE

0 indicating the system is not in the preview state.

HORizontal:RECOrdlength
This command sets or queries the horizontal record length. To change the record
length the Horizontal Mode must be set to Manual.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:RECOrdlength <NR1>

HORizontal:RECOrdlength?

Arguments <NR1> is the horizontal record length.

Examples HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 1000 sets the record length to 1000 samples.

HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH? might return :HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH

1000000, indicating that the record length is set to 1,000,000 samples

HORizontal:ROLL? (Query Only)

Queries the horizontal roll mode status.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-649

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:ROLL?

Returns ON indicates roll mode is active.

OFF indicates that summary frame is off.

<NR1> a 0 indicates roll mode is off; any other value activates roll mode.

Examples HORIZONTAL:ROLL? might return :HORIZONTAL:ROLL 0 indicating roll mode

is off.

HORizontal:SAMPLERate
This command sets or queries the horizontal sample rate.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:SAMPLERate <NR3>

HORizontal:SAMPLERate?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal sample rate in samples per second.

Examples HORIZONTAL:SAMPLERATE 1e6 sets the sample rate to 1 million samples per
second.
HORIZONTAL:SAMPLERATE? might return :HORIZONTAL:SAMPLERATE
5.0000E+6, indicating that the sample rate is set to 5 million samples per second.

HORizontal:SAMPLERate:ANALYZemode:MINimum:OVERRide
Sets or queries the flag which allows override of the horizontal analyze minimum
sample rate.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:SAMPLERate:ANALYZemode:MINimum:OVERRide
{OFF|ON|0|1}
HORizontal:SAMPLERate:ANALYZemode:MINimum:OVERRide?

2-650 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments 0 does not allow override of the horizontal analyze minimum sample rate.

1 allows override of the horizontal analyze minimum sample rate.

OFF does not allow override of the horizontal analyze minimum sample rate.

ON allows override of the horizontal analyze minimum sample rate.

Examples HORIZONTAL:SAMPLERATE:ANALYZEMODE:MINIMUM:OVERRIDE OFF does not

allow override of the horizontal analyze minimum sample rate.
HORIZONTAL:SAMPLERATE:ANALYZEMODE:MINIMUM:OVERRIDE? might
return :HORIZONTAL:SAMPLERATE:ANALYZEMODE:MINIMUM:OVERRIDE 1
indicating that override of the horizontal analyze minimum sample rate is allowed.

HORizontal:SAMPLERate:ANALYZemode:MINimum:VALue
Sets or queries the minimum sample rate used by Analysis Automatic horizontal
mode.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:SAMPLERate:ANALYZemode:MINimum:VALue
{AUTOmatic|<NR3>}
HORizontal:SAMPLERate:ANALYZemode:MINimum:VALue?

Related Commands
Arguments AUTOmatic allows the instrument to set the minimum value.

<NR3> is the minimum sample rate.

Examples HORizontal:SAMPLERate:ANALYZemode:MINimum:VALue AUTOMATIC

allows the instrument to set the minimum value.
HORizontal:SAMPLERate:ANALYZemode:MINimum:VALue? might return
HORIZONTAL:SAMPLERATE:ANALYZEMODE:MINIMUM:VALUE AUTOMATIC
indicating the instrument automatically sets the minimum value.

HORizontal:SCAle
This command sets or queries the horizontal scale.

Group Horizontal

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-651

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax HORizontal:SCAle <NR3>

HORizontal:SCAle?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal scale in time per division.

Returns The current horizontal scale is returned.

Examples HORIZONTAL:SCALE 20e-9 sets the horizontal scale to 20 ns/division.

HORIZONTAL:SCALE? might return HORIZONTAL:SCALE 20e-9 indicating the

horizontal scale is set to 20 ns/division.

ID? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns identifying information about the instrument
and related firmware similar to that returned by the *IDN? IEEE488.2 common
query but does not include the instrument serial number.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax ID?

Related Commands *IDN?

Examples ID? might return ID TEK/MSO54,CF:91.1CT,FV:1.2.0.2886, indicating that

the instrument model number is set to MSO54, codes and formats is CF:91.1CT,
and firmware version is FV:1.2.0.

*IDN? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the instrument identification code.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax *IDN?

Related Commands ID?

2-652 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples *IDN? might return TEKTRONIX,MSO54,C100123,CF:91.1CT

FV:1.2.0.2886, indicating the instrument model number, serial number, codes
and formats number, and firmware version number.

LICense? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns all license parameters.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax LICense?

Examples LICENSE? might return :LICENSE:GMT

"2016-05-23T17:05:10-07:00";HID "TMS-AAA9CS4US5SGJN6X";LIST
"5-BW-1000";COUNT 1.

LICense:APPID? (Query Only)

This query returns a comma-separated list of the active application IDs. If a string
argument is provided, a “0” or “1” is returned, according to whether the string
matches an active application ID.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax LICense:APPID? {<QString>}

Returns This query returns a comma-separated list of the active application IDs. If a string
argument is provided, a “0” or “1” is returned, according to whether the string
matches an active application ID.

Examples LIC:APPID? might return “BW5-2000, AFG, DVM, DJA”, which is a complete
list of the active applications.
LIC:APPID? “AFG” would return “1” because the app is active.

LICense:COUNt? (Query Only)

This query returns a count of the number of active licenses installed.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-653

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax LICense:COUNt?

Returns A count of the number of active licenses installed.

Examples LICENSE:COUNT? might return :LICENSE:COUNT 2 indicating that 2 active

licenses are installed

LICense:ERRor? (Query Only)

This query-only command prompts the instrument to return all events and their
messages (delimited by commas), and removes the returned events from the Event
Queue. This command is an alias for ALLEV?.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax LICense:ERRor?

Related Commands ALLEv?

*ESR?
EVMsg?

Examples LICense:ERRor? might return 0, "No events to report- queue empty".

LICense:GMT? (Query Only)

This query returns the GMT time in ISO 8601 format, the local date, 24 hour time
and time-zone offset.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax LICense:GMT?

Returns The GMT time in ISO 8601 format, the local date, 24 hour time and time-zone
offset.

2-654 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples LICENSE:GMT? might return :LICENSE:GMT

"2016-05-23T17:05:10-07:00" indicating the local GMT time.

LICense:HID? (Query Only)

This query returns the instrument HostID unique identifier.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax LICense:HID?

Returns The instrument HostID unique identifier.

Examples LICENSE:HID? might return :LICENSE:HID "TMS-9CS4US5SGJN6X"

LICense:INSTall (No Query Form)

This command accepts a block data license and installs it on the instrument.
Restarting the instrument may be necessary to fully activate the additional
capabilities. The format of the block data in the argument must have the following:
#<File size (Number of characters in LIC file)>

<LIC file content>

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax LICense:INSTall <Block>

Arguments <Block> is the license in block data format.

Examples LICENSE:INSTALL #42312[Header] Version=1 Type="Enter"...

LICense:ITEM? (Query Only)

This query returns the details pertaining to a specific license. The NR1 argument
is zero-indexed. If no argument is provided, zero is assumed.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-655

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax LICense:ITEM? <NR1>

Arguments <NR1> is the zero-indexed argument specifying a specific license.

Returns The details pertaining to a specific license.

Examples LICENSE:ITEM? 0 might return

"5-BW-1000,Fixed,2116-06-15T14:55:54-07:00,11870047,BW5-1000,1 GHz
bandwidth on 5 series oscilloscopes"

LICense:LIST? (Query Only)

This query returns the active license nomenclatures as a comma-separated list of
strings. Duplicate nomenclatures, that is, the same license but with different
expiration dates, are included.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax LICense:LIST?

Returns The active license nomenclatures as a comma-separated list of strings.

Examples LICENSE:LIST? might return :LICENSE:LIST

"5-BW-1000","SUP5-RL125M".

LICense:UNINSTALL? (Query Only)

Returns the exit license indicated for the user to return to their TekAMS
account. Active licenses can be specified by their nomenclature. TransactionIDs
can be used to specify an active license or a previously uninstalled license. In
either case, the exit-license is returned as block data.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax LICense:UNINSTALL? <QString>

2-656 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <QString> is the nomenclature of an active license or a TransactionIDs to

specify an active license or a previously uninstalled license.

Returns The exit-license is returned as block data.

Examples LICense:UNINSTALL? “LIC5-SRAERO” uninstalls the given license and

returns the license block data.
LICense:UNINSTALL? “569765772” uninstalls the license with the given
transaction ID and returns the license block data.

LICense:VALidate? (Query Only)

This query accepts a license nomenclature as an argument and returns True (1) if
that nomenclature is active and any required hardware is installed, or False (0) if
either the nomenclature is not active or required hardware is not installed.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax LICense:VALidate? <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the license nomenclature.

Returns True (1) if that nomenclature is active and any required hardware is installed.

False (0) if either the nomenclature is not active or required hardware is not
installed.

Examples LICENSE:VALIDATE? "AFG" might return :LICENSE:VALIDATE

"AFG",0 indicating the license is not active.

LOCk
This command enables or disables the touch screen and all front panel buttons and
knobs. There is no front panel equivalent.
When the front panel is locked, the front panel commands will not work and
will not generate error events. You can work around a locked front panel,
by using the appropriate programmatic interface commands, instead of the
front-panel commands. For example, to set the trigger level to 50%, you could
use TRIGger:A SETLevel. To force a trigger, you could use TRIGger FORCe.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-657

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax LOCk {ALL|NONe}

LOCk?

Related Commands UNLock

TOUCHSCReen:STATe

Arguments ALL disables all front panel controls and the touch screen.

NONe enables all front panel controls and the touch screen. The UNLock ALL
command only unlocks the front panel controls.
If the instrument is in the Remote With Lockout State (RWLS), the LOCk
NONe command has no effect. For more information, see the ANSI/IEEE Std
488.1-1987 Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation, section
2.8.3 on RL State Descriptions.

Examples LOCK ALL locks the front panel controls and touch screen.

LOCK? might return :LOCK NONE, indicating that the front panel controls are
enabled.

*LRN? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the commands that list the instrument settings,
allowing you to record or “learn” the current instrument settings. You can use
these commands to return the instrument to the state it was in when you made the
*LRN? query. This command is identical to the SET? command.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax *LRN?

Related Commands SET?

Examples LRN? might return the following response: RST;:PARAMBATCHING

0;:HEADER 1;:VERBOSE 1;:ALIAS:STATE 0;:ACQUIRE:STATE
1;:ACQUIRE:NUMENV INFINITE;:FASTACQ:STATE 0;:FASTACQ:PALETTE
TEMPERATURE;:HORIZONTAL:SAMPLERATE:ANALYZEMODE:MINIMUM:VALUE
AUTOMATIC;:SELECT:CH1 1;:SELECT:CH2 0;:SELECT:CH3

2-658 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

0;:SELECT:CH4 0;:SELECT:CH5 0;:SELECT:CH6 0;:SELECT:CH7

0;:SELECT:CH8 0;:CH1:BANDWIDTH 250.0000E+6;:CH2:BANDWIDTH
500.0000E+6;:CH3:BANDWIDTH 500.0000E+6;:CH4:BANDWIDTH
500.0000E+6;:CH5:BANDWIDTH 500.0000E+6;:CH6:BANDWIDTH
500.0000E+6;:CH7:BANDWIDTH 120.0000E+6;:CH8:BANDWIDTH
500.0000E+6;:CH1:BANDWIDTH:ENHANCED
0;:CH2:BANDWIDTH:ENHANCED 0;:CH3:BANDWIDTH:ENHANCED
0;:CH4:BANDWIDTH:ENHANCED 0;:CH5:BANDWIDTH:ENHANCED
0;:CH6:BANDWIDTH:ENHANCED 0;:CH7:BANDWIDTH:ENHANCED
0;:CH8:BANDWIDTH:ENHANCED 0;:DATA:DESTINATION
REF1;:DATA:ENCDG ASCII;:DATA:SOURCE CH1;:DATA:START
1;:DATA:STOP 1000000;:CH1:PROBETYPE
ANALOG;:CH2:PROBETYPE ANALOG;:CH3:PROBETYPE
ANALOG;:CH4:PROBETYPE ANALOG;:CH5:PROBETYPE
DIGITAL;:CH6:PROBETYPE ANALOG;:CH7:PROBETYPE
ANALOG;:CH8:PROBETYPE ANALOG;:HORIZONTAL:MODE
AUTO;:HORIZONTAL:SAMPLERATE:ANALYZEMODE:MINIMUM:OVERRIDE
1;:HORIZONTAL:MODE:AUTOMATIC:FASTACQ:RECORDLENGTH:MAXIMUM:
ZOOMOVERRIDE
1;:HORIZONTAL:MODE:AUTOMATIC:FASTACQ:RECORDLENGTH:
MAXIMUM:VALUE 1250;:HORIZONTAL:MODE:MANUAL:CONFIGURE
HORIZONTALSCALE;:HORIZONTAL:SAMPLERATE
6.2500E+9;:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000;:TRIGGER:B:TYPE EDGE;:TRIGGER:A:TYPE
EDGE;:ACQUIRE:SEQUENCE:NUMSEQUENCE
1;:ACQUIRE:SEQUENCE:MODE NUMACQS;:ACQUIRE:MODE
SAMPLE;:ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;:ACQUIRE:FASTACQ:PALETTE
TEMPERATURE;:ACQUIRE:FASTACQ:STATE 0;:ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 16T.

MAINWindow:BADGe:BRINgtoview (No Query Form)

This command is used to automatically scroll the specified badge to make it
visible. The input to the command is the badge title name.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax MAINWindow:BADGe:BRINgtoview <Qstring>

Arguments <Qstring> specifies a badge title name to make the badge visible.

Examples MAINWindow:BADGe:BRINgtoview "Meas 1" makes sure the Meas1 badge

is shown in the RRB.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-659

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MAINWindow:FONTSize (No Query Form)

Sets the font size for UI text elements. Font size range is 12 to 20 points.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax MAINWindow:FONTSize <NR1>

Arguments <NR1> specifies the font size.

Examples MAINWindow:FONTSize 18 sets the UI text size to 18 points.

MAINWindow:RRBDisplaystate (No Query Form)

Sets the display state of the Results readout bar to ON (displayed) or OFF (not
displayed).

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax MAINWindow:RRBDisplaystate {1|ON|0|OFF}

Arguments 1 or ON enables Autoset to change vertical settings.

0 or OFF disables Autoset from changing vertical settings.

Examples MAINWindow:RRBDisplaystate 1 expands (displays) the Results readout bar.

MASK:DELete (No Query Form)

This command deletes all mask segments of the specified mask test.

Conditions Requires option MTM.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:DELete “MASK<x>”

2-660 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask test. This argument is enclosed in quotes.

Examples MASK:DELETE “mask2” will delete all mask segments of mask test 2.

MASK:MASK<x>:COUNT? (Query Only)

This command returns the total number of mask hits in all segments and the
number of mask hits in each individual mask segment for the specified mask test.

Conditions Requires option MTM.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:COUNT?

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask test.

Returns <NR1> is the total number of mask hits in all segments and the number of mask
hits in each individual mask segment.

Examples MASK:MASK1:COUNT? might return :MASK:MASK1:COUNT:HITS

211;SEG1:HITS;:MASK:MASK1:COUNT:SEG2:HITS 199;
MASK:MASK1:COUNT:SEG3:HITS 12, indicating the number of mask hits on
segment 1, 2, and 3 for mask test 1.

MASK:MASK<x>:COUNT:HITS? (Query Only)

This command returns the total number of mask hits in all mask segments for
the specified mask test.

Conditions Requires option MTM.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:COUNT:HITS?

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask test.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-661

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Returns <NR1> is the total number of mask hits in all mask segments.

Examples MASK:MASK1:COUNT:HITS? might return :MASK:MASK1:COUNT:HITS

211, indicating 211 mask hits for mask test 1.

MASK:MASK<x>:DEFinedby
This command sets or queries whether the specified mask is defined by segments
or tolerances. Segment masks are defined by one or more polygons. Tolerance
masks are defined by specified horizontal and vertical tolerances around the
mask source.

Conditions Requires option MTM.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:DEFinedby {SEGments|TOLerances}

MASK:MASK<x>:DEFinedby?

Related Commands MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:HORizontal

MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:VERTical
MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:UPDatenow

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask number.

SEGments defines the mask by segments.

TOLerances defines the mask by horizontal and vertical tolerances around

mask source.

Examples MASK:MASK1:Definedby SEGments sets mask 1 to be defined by segments.

MASK:MASK1:Definedby? might return :MASK:MASK1:Definedby

TOLerances, indicating mask 1 is defined by the horizontal and vertical
tolerances.

MASK:MASK<x>:DISplay
This command sets or queries the display state of the mask used for the specified
mask test.

2-662 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option MTM.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:DISplay {ON|OFF}

MASK:MASK<x>:DISplay?

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask test.

ON sets the display state of the specified mask to on.

OFF sets the display state of the specified mask to off.

Examples MASK:MASK1:DISPLAY OFF disables the display of the mask used by mask test 1.

MASK:MASK1:DISPLAY? might return :MASK:MASK1:DISPLAY OFF, indicating

the display state for mask test 1 is off.

MASK:MASK<x>:LIST? (Query Only)

This command queries the list of segments in the mask used by the specified
mask test.

Conditions Requires option MTM.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:LIST?

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask test.

Returns A comma separated list of segment names.

Examples MASK:MASK1:LIST? might return :MASK:MASK1:LIST

SEG1,SEG2,SEG3, indicating that segment 1, 2, and 3 are used by
mask test 1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-663

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MASK:MASK<x>:SEG<x>COUNT:HITS? (Query Only)

The command returns the total number of mask hits in the specified mask segment
of the specified mask test.

Conditions Requires option MTM.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:SEG<x>COUNT:HITS?

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask test.

SEG<x> specifies the mask segment.

Returns <NR1> is the total number of mask hits in the specified segment.

Examples MASK:MASK1:COUNT:SEG2:HITS? might return

:MASK:MASK1:COUNT:SEG2:HITS 211, indicating 211 mask 1 hits in segment
2.

MASK:MASK<x>:SEG<x>:POINTS
This command sets or queries the X/Y coordinates of all points in the designated
mask segment. Mask vertices are in time/volts (currently limited to 1024
characters). The set form defines new points in the mask, replacing any existing
points.

Conditions Requires option MTM.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:SEG<x>:POINTS
MASK:MASK<x>:SEG<x>:POINTS?

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask test.

SEG<x> specifies the mask segment.

2-664 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MASK:MASK1:SEG1:POINTS “-40E-9,-200E-3,0,0,-40E-9,0” sets the

X/Y coordinates of all the points in segment 1 of mask test 1.
MASK:MASK1:SEG1:POINTS? might return :MASK:MASK1:SEG1:POINTS
“-40E-9,-200E-3,0,0,-40E-9,0”, indicating the X/Y coordinates of all
the points in segment 1 of mask test 1.

MASK:MASK<x>:SOUrce
This command sets or queries analog source for the specified mask test.

Conditions Requires option MTM.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:SOUrce {CH<x>|REF<x>|MATH<x>|RFvsTime}

MASK:MASK<x>:SOUrce?

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask test.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source.

RFvsTime specifies a RF vs Time as the source.

Examples MASK:MASK1:SOURCE CH2 sets the analog source for mask test 1 to Channel 2.

MASK:MASK1:SOURCE? might return :MASK:MASK1:SOURCE CH2, indicating

the analog source for mask test 1 is Channel 2.

MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:CTHReshold
This command sets or queries the number of consecutive waveform violations
needed for the specified mask test to change from PASS to FAIL.

Conditions Requires option MTM.

Group Mask

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-665

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:CTHReshold <NR1>

MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:CTHReshold?

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask test.

<NR1> specifies the threshold value.

Examples MASK:MASK1:TEST:CTHRESHOLD 5 sets the number of consecutive waveform

violations to 5 for mask test 1 to fail.
MASK:MASK1:TEST:CTHRESHOLD? might return
:MASK:MASK1:TEST:CTHRESHOLD 5, indicating 5 consecutive waveform
violations must occur on mask test 1 for mask test 1 to fail.

MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:STATE
This command sets or queries the state of the specified mask test.

Conditions Requires option MTM.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:STATE {ON|OFF}

MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:STATE?

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask test.

ON sets the mask test state to ON. When the state is ON the Pass/Fail status and hit
count information are reset and the mask test is started.
OFF sets the mask test state to OFF. When the mask test completes the state is set
to OFF.

Examples MASK:MASK1:TEST:STATE ON sets the state of mask test 1 to ON.

MASK:MASK1:TEST:STATE? might return :MASK:MASK1:TEST:STATE

OFF, indicating mask test 1 is OFF.

MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:STATUS? (Query Only)

This command returns the status of the specified mask test.

2-666 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option MTM.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:STATUS?

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask test.

Returns Return values are PASSING, FAILING, PASSED, or FAILED. When the total hit
count equals or exceeds the minimum threshold the status changes from PASSING
to FAILING. When the test completes the status changes to PASSED or FAILED.
Default value when test state is first set ON or after CLEAR is PASSING.

Examples MASK:MASK1:TEST:STATUS? might return :MASK:MASK1:TEST:STATUS

PASSED, indicating mask test 1 passed.

MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:THReshold
This command sets or queries the number of waveform violations needed for the
specified mask test to change from PASS to FAIL.

Conditions Requires option MTM.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:THReshold <NR1>

MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:THReshold?

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask test.

<NR1> specifies the threshold value.

Examples MASK:MASK1:TEST:THRESHOLD 10 sets the number of waveform violations

to 10 for mask test 1 to fail.
MASK:MASK1:TEST:THRESHOLD? might return
:MASK:MASK1:TEST:THRESHOLD 10, indicating 10 waveform violations
on mask test 1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-667

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:HABSolute
This command sets or queries the mask horizontal tolerance in absolute units of
seconds. This value is used when the mask TTYPe is set to ABSolute and the
UPDatenow command is sent.

Conditions Requires option MTM.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:HABSolute <NR3>

MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:HABSolute?

Related Commands MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:UPDatenow

MASK:MASK<x>:TTYPe

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask number.

<NR3> is the tolerance in units of seconds. The maximum time is the equivalent
of one horizontal graticule division.

Examples MASK:MASK1:TOLerance:HABSolute 1.5e-9 sets the horizontal tolerance of

Mask1 to 1.5 ns. The mask is not recalculated until an UPDatenow command is
sent.
MASK:MASK2:TOLerance:HABSolute? might return
:MASK:MASK2:TOLerance:HABSolute 3.75e-7, indicating that
the horizontal tolerance of Mask2 is 375 ns.

MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:HORizontal
This command sets or queries the mask horizontal tolerance.

Conditions Requires option MTM.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:HORizontal <NR3>

MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:HORizontal?

2-668 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:UPDatenow

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask number.

<NR3> is the tolerance in units of graticule divisions. The maximum is 1 division.

Examples MASK:MASK1:TOLerance:HORizontal .200 sets the tolerance of mask 1 to

200 mdiv or 20% of a division. The mask is not recalculated until an UPDatenow
command is sent.
MASK:MASK1:TOLerance:HORizontal? might return
:MASK:MASK1:TOLerance:HORizontal .200, indicating the
tolerance of mask 1 is 200 mdiv.

MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:UPDatenow (No Query Form)

This command causes the tolerance mask to be recalculated with the current
horizontal and vertical tolerances.

Conditions Requires option MTM.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:UPDatenow

Related Commands MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:HORizontal

MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:VERTical

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask number.

Examples MASK:MASK1:TOLerance:UPDatenow recalculates the tolerance of mask 1 with

the current horizontal and vertical tolerance settings.

MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:VABSolute
This command sets or queries the mask vertical tolerance in absolute units of the
mask source (generally volts). This value is used when the mask TTYPe is set
to ABSolute and the UPDatenow command is sent.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-669

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option MTM.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:VABSolute <NR3>

MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:VABSolute?

Related Commands MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:UPDatenow

MASK:MASK<x>:TTYPe

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask number.

<NR3> is the tolerance in units of the mask source. Most traces in the waveform
window have vertical units of volts, but other units such as amps or degrees are
possible. The maximum value is the equivalent of one vertical graticule division.

Examples MASK:MASK1:TOLerance:VABSolute 1.75 sets the vertical tolerance of

Mask1 to 1.75 V. The mask is not recalculated until an UPDatenow command is
sent.
MASK:MASK2:TOLerance:VABSolute? might return
:MASK:MASK2:TOLerance:VABSolute 2.5e-2, indicating that the
vertical tolerance of Mask2 is 25 mV.

MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:VERTical
This command sets or queries the mask vertical tolerance.

Conditions Requires option MTM.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:VERTical <NR3>

MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:VERTical?

Related Commands MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:UPDatenow

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask number.

<NR3> is the tolerance in units of graticule divisions. The maximum is 1 division.

2-670 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MASK:MASK1:TOLerance:VERTical .100 sets the tolerance of mask 1 to 100

mdiv or 10% of a division. The mask is not recalculated until an UPDatenow
command is sent.
MASK:MASK1:TOLerance:VERTical? might return
:MASK:MASK1:TOLerance:VERTical .100, indicating the tolerance of
mask 1 is 100 mdiv.

MASK:MASK<x>:TTYPe
This command sets or queries the type of tolerance values used when defining
a tolerance mask.

Conditions Requires option MTM.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:TTYPe {SCReen|ABSolute}

MASK:MASK<x>:TTYPe?

Related Commands MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:HORizontal

MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:VERTical
MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:HABSolute
MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:VABSolute

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask number.

SCReen indicates that the horizontal and vertical mask tolerances are defined in
relative units of graticule divisions. There are always 10 horizontal divisions and
10 vertical divisions on the scope waveform display. When the tolerance type is
SCReen, the tolerance values set by the HORizontal and VERTical commands are
used to define the tolerance mask when an UPDatenow command is sent.
ABSolute indicates that the horizontal and vertical mask tolerances are defined in
the absolute units of the mask source waveform. These units are normally seconds
and volts respectively. When the tolerance type is ABSolute, the tolerance values
set by the HABSolute and VABSolute commands are used to define the tolerance
mask when an UPDatenow command is sent.

Examples MASK:MASK1:TTYPE ABSOLUTE specifies that the horizontal and vertical

tolerances for Mask1 are specified in absolute s and V units.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-671

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MASK:MASK2:TTYPE? might return :MASK:MASK2:TTYPE SCReen, indicating

that the horizontal and vertical tolerances for Mask2 are defined in screen-relative
graticule division units

MASK:TESt:WAVEforms
This command sets or queries the number of waveform acquisitions to test during
mask testing. The number of waveforms applies to all mask tests.

Conditions Requires option MTM.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:TESt:WAVEforms <NR1>

MASK:TESt:WAVEforms?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the number of waveform acquisitions.

Examples MASK:TEST:WAVEFORMS 1k sets the number of waveform acquisitions to test

to 1000.
MASK:TEST:WAVEFORMS? might return :MASK:TEST:WAVEFORMS
1k, indicating the number of waveform acquisitions to test is 1000.

MATH:ADDNew (No Query Form)

This command adds the specified math.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:ADDNew <QString>

Related Commands MATH:LIST?

MATH:DELete

Arguments <QString> is the quoted string specifying the math waveform to add. The
argument is of the form "MATH<NR1>”, where <NR1> is ≥1.

2-672 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MATH:ADDNEW "MATH2" adds MATH2.

MATH:DELete (No Query Form)

This command deletes the specified math.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:DELete <QString>

Related Commands MATH:ADDNew

MATH:LIST?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string specifying the math waveform to delete. The
quoted string is of the form "MATH<NR1>”, where <NR1> is ≥1.

Examples MATH:DELETE "MATH1", which deletes the MATH1 waveform.

MATH:LIST? (Query Only)

This query returns a comma separated list of all currently defined math waveforms.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:LIST?

Related Commands MATH:ADDNew

MATH:DELete

Returns All currently defined math waveforms.

Examples MATH:LIST? Might return :MATH:LIST MATH1,MATH4, indicating MATH1 and

MATH4 are the currently defined math waveforms.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-673

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MATH:MATH<x>:ARINC429A:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
ARINC429A bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:ARINC429A:SUPPortedfields {DATa}

MATH:MATH<x>:ARINC429A:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

Examples MATH:MATH2:ARINC429A:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to

DATa.
MATH:MATH2:ARINC429A:SUPPortedfields? might return
:MATH:MATH2:ARINC429A:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field type
for MATH2 for the bus source for ARINC429A bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:AUDIO:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
Audio bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:AUDIO:SUPPortedfields
{LCHannel|RCHannel|TDMChannel}
MATH:MATH<x>:AUDIO:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments LCHannel sets the field type to LCHannel.

RCHannel sets the field type to RCHannel.

TDMChannel sets the field type to TDMChannel.

Examples MATH:MATH2:AUDIO:SUPPortedfields LCHannel sets the field type to

LCHannel.
MATH:MATH2:AUDIO:SUPPortedfields? might return
:MATH:MATH2:AUDIO:SUPPortedfields LCHannel, indicating
the field type for MATH2 for the bus source for Audio bus is LCHannel.

2-674 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MATH:MATH<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
AUTOETHERnet bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SUPPortedfields
{DATa|IPData|TDATa}
MATH:MATH<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

IPData sets the field type to IPData.

TDATa sets the field type to TDATa.

Examples MATH:MATH2:AUTOETHERnet:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type

to DATa.
MATH:MATH2:AUTOETHERnet:SUPPortedfields? might return
:MATH:MATH2:AUTOETHERnet:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field
type for MATH2 for the bus source for AUTOETHERnet bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:AVG:MODE
This command sets or queries the math average mode flag. If the flag is set to 1,
math averaging is turned on. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:AVG:MODE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

Related Commands MATH:MATH<x>:AVG:WEIGht

Arguments <NR1> = 0 turns off average mode, and any other integer turns on average mode.

OFF turns off average mode.

ON turns on average mode.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-675

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MATH:MATH2:AVG:MODE ON sets the average mode on.

MATH:MATH1:AVG:MODE? might return :MATH:MATH1:AVG:MODE 0,
indicating average mode is off.

MATH:MATH<x>:AVG:WEIGht
This command sets or queries the number of acquisitions at which the averaging
algorithm will begin exponential averaging. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:AVG:WEIGht <NR1>

Related Commands MATH:MATH<x>:AVG:MODE

Arguments <NR1> is the number of acquisitions at which the averaging algorithm will begin
exponential averaging.

Examples MATH:MATH2:AVG:WEIGHT 143 sets the number of acquisitions needed

to begin averaging to 20 MATH:MATH3:AVG:WEIGHT? might return
:MATH:MATH3:AVG:WEIGHT 20 indicating the number of acquisitions needed
to begin averaging is 8.

MATH:MATH<x>:CAN:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
CAN bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:CAN:SUPPortedfields {DATa}

MATH:MATH<x>:CAN:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

2-676 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MATH:MATH2:CAN:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:CAN:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:CAN:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field
type for MATH2 for the bus source for CAN bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:CXPI:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
CXPI bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:CXPI:SUPPortedfields {DATa}

MATH:MATH<x>:CXPI:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

Examples MATH:MATH2:CXPI:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:CXPI:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:CXPI:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field
type for MATH2 for the bus source for CXPI bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:DEFine
This command allows you to define new waveforms using mathematical
expressions. The query form of this command returns the math definition for the
specified math waveform. The math waveform is specified by x.
You can specify a math expression from waveforms, measurements and scalar
sources, functions, operands, and numerical constants.
Math expressions can be simple, such as Ch1, which specifies that a waveform
should show the signal source of Channel 1 with no mathematical computation.
Math expressions can also be complex, consisting of 100 plus characters and
comprising many sources (including other math waveforms), functions, and
operands. As an example, you can enter the expression Log(Ch1+Ch2), which
specifies that the signals from channels 1 and 2 are to be algebraically added, and
the base 10 log of the sum is to be shown as the final math waveform.

Group Math

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-677

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:DEFine <QString>

MATH:MATH<x>:DEFine?

Arguments <QString> quoted string argument is the mathematical expression that defines the
waveform. MATH:MATH<x>:DEFINE? is for use when the MATH:MATH<x>:TYPE
is ADVANCED.

Examples MATH:MATH2:DEFine "CH1+CH2" adds the Channel 1 and Channel 2, defines

the Math2 waveform to be Channel1 and Channel2 added together.
MATH:MATH1:DEFine? might return

:MATH:MATH1:DEFine "CH2*REF2" as the expression that defines Math 1

waveform.

MATH:MATH<x>:ESPI:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
ESPI bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:ESPI:SUPPortedfields {DATa|CDATa|RDATa}

MATH:MATH<x>:ESPI:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

CDATa sets the field type to CDATa.

RDATa sets the field type to RDATa.

Examples MATH:MATH2:ESPI:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:ESPI:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:ESPI:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field
type for MATH2 for the bus source for ESPI bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:ETHERCAT:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
ETHERCAT bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

2-678 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:ETHERCAT:SUPPortedfields
{DATa|SDATa|NWVariabledata}
MATH:MATH<x>:ETHERCAT:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

SDATa sets the field type to SDATa.

NWVariabledata sets the field type to NWVariabledata.

Examples MATH:MATH2:ETHERCAT:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:ETHERCAT:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:ETHERCAT:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field type
for MATH2 for the bus source for ETHERCAT bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:ETHERnet:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
ETHERnet bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:ETHERnet:SUPPortedfields {DATa|IPData|TDATa}

MATH:MATH<x>:ETHERnet:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

IPData sets the field type to IPData.

TDATa sets the field type to TDATa.

Examples MATH:MATH2:ETHERnet:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:ETHERnet:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:ETHERnet:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field type
for MATH2 for the bus source for ETHERnet bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:EUSB:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
EUSB bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-679

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:EUSB:SUPPortedfields {DATa|DDATa}

MATH:MATH<x>:EUSB:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa. DATa field can be set when eUSB Bus
configuration for Speed is set to High and Signal type is Diff.
DDATa sets the field type to DDATa.

Examples MATH:MATH2:EUSB:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:EUSB:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:EUSB:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field
type for MATH2 for the bus source for EUSB bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:CFReq
This command sets or queries the filter cutoff frequency. The math waveform
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires UDFLT licenses on 5, 6 series MSO instruments and Tekscope (Offline).

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:CFReq <NR3>

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:CFReq?

Arguments <NR3> sets the filter cutoff frequency.

Examples MATH:MATH1:FILTer:CFReq 312.5E+9 sets the filter cutoff frequency to

312.5E+9.
MATH:MATH1:FILTer:CFReq? might return :MATH:MATH1:FILTer:CFReq
312.5E+9, indicating the filter cutoff frequency is 312.5E+9.

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:DELay
This command sets or queries the delay for all pass filter. The math waveform
is specified by x.

2-680 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires UDFLT licenses on 5, 6 series MSO instruments and Tekscope (Offline).

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:DELay <NR3>

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:DELay?

Arguments <NR3> sets the delay for all pass filter.

Examples MATH:MATH1:FILTer:DELay 200E-6 sets the delay for all pass filter to 200E-6.

MATH:MATH1:FILTer:DELay? might return :MATH:MATH1:FILTer:DELay

200E-6, indicating the delay for all pass filter is 200E-6.

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:DESIgn (No Query Form)

This command performs filter specific Apply, Abort, and Generate operations.
The math waveform is specified by x.

Conditions Requires UDFLT licenses on 5, 6 series MSO instruments and Tekscope (Offline).

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:DESIgn {EXECUTE|ABORT|APPLY}

Arguments EXECUTE executes filter file creation.

APPLY applies the filter definition on the Math waveform.

ABORT aborts the filter execution.

Examples MATH:MATH1:FILTer:DESIgn EXECUTE executes filter file creation.

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:HCFReq
This command sets or queries the high cutoff frequency for bandpass or band stop
filter. The math waveform is specified by x.

Conditions Requires UDFLT licenses on 5, 6 series MSO instruments and Tekscope (Offline).

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-681

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:HCFReq <NR3>

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:HCFReq?

Arguments <NR3> sets the high cutoff frequency for bandpass or band stop filter.

Examples MATH:MATH1:FILTer:HCFReq 1.25E+9 sets the high cutoff frequency for

bandpass or band stop filter to 1.25E+9.
MATH:MATH1:FILTer:HCFReq? might return :MATH:MATH1:FILTer:HCFReq
1.25E+9, indicating the high cutoff frequency for bandpass or band stop filter is
1.25E+9.

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:INFo? (Query Only)

This command returns filter information output when the user creates a filter.
The math waveform is specified by x.

Conditions Requires UDFLT licenses on 5, 6 series MSO instruments and Tekscope (Offline).

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:INFo?

Returns Returns a filter information message.

Examples MATH:MATH1:FILTer:INFo? might return :MATH:MATH1:FILTer:INFo

"Info:Filter is valid for these sample rates 2.5 kS/s - 12.5
kS/s", indicating the filter information message is “Filter is valid for these
sample rates 2.5 kS/s - 12.5 kS/s”.

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:LCFReq
This command sets or queries the low cutoff frequency for bandpass or band stop
filter. The math waveform is specified by x.

Conditions Requires UDFLT licenses on 5, 6 series MSO instruments and Tekscope (Offline).

2-682 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:LCFReq <NR3>

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:LCFReq?

Arguments <NR3> sets the low cutoff frequency for bandpass or band stop filter.

Examples MATH:MATH1:FILTer:LCFReq 500E+6 sets the low cutoff frequency for

bandpass or band stop filter to 500E+6.
MATH:MATH1:FILTer:LCFReq? might return :MATH:MATH1:FILTer:LCFReq
500E+6, indicating the low cutoff frequency for bandpass or band stop filter is
500E+6.

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:LOAD (No Query Form)

This command loads the filter file. The math waveform is specified by x.

Conditions Requires UDFLT licenses on 5, 6 series MSO instruments and Tekscope (Offline).

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:LOAD <QString>

Arguments <QString> sets the path to the filter file to load. Linux default location is C:\.
Windows default location is C:\Users\Public\Tektronix\TekScope\Filters.

Examples MATH:MATH1:FILTer:LOAD "C:/Users/filterCoeff.flt" loads filter file

filterCoeff.flt from the specified location.

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:LOAD:RESPonse
This command will load the filter responses and automatically apply filter option.
The math waveform is specified by x.

Conditions Requires UDFLT licenses on 5, 6 series MSO instruments and Tekscope (Offline).

Group Math

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-683

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:LOAD:RESPonse {1|0}

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:LOAD:RESPonse?

Arguments 1 enables recall of filter response image.

0 disables recall of filter response image.

Examples MATH:MATH1:FILTer:LOAD:RESPonse 1 enables recall of filter response

image.
MATH:MATH1:FILTer:LOAD:RESPonse? might return
:MATH:MATH1:FILTer:LOAD:RESPonse 1, indicating the recall of
filter response image is enabled.

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:ORDer
This command sets or queries the filter order. The math waveform is specified
by x.

Conditions Requires UDFLT licenses on 5, 6 series MSO instruments and Tekscope (Offline).

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:ORDer <NR1>

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:ORDer?

Arguments <NR1> sets the filter order.

Examples MATH:MATH1:FILTer:ORDer 2 sets the filter order to 2.

MATH:MATH1:FILTer:ORDer? might return :MATH:MATH1:FILTer:ORDer

2, indicating the filter order is 2.

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:PRIPple
This command sets or queries the pass band ripple in the filter response. The
math waveform is specified by x.

Conditions Requires UDFLT licenses on 5, 6 series MSO instruments and Tekscope (Offline).

2-684 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:PRIPple <NR3>

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:PRIPple?

Arguments <NR3> sets the pass band ripple in the filter response.

Examples MATH:MATH1:FILTer:PRIPple 5.0000 sets the pass band ripple in the filter
response to 5.0000.
MATH:MATH1:FILTer:PRIPple? might return
:MATH:MATH1:FILTer:PRIPple 5.0000, indicating the pass band ripple in
the filter response is 5.0000.

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:RESPonse
This command will load the filter responses and automatically apply filter option.
The math waveform is specified by x.

Conditions Requires UDFLT licenses on 5, 6, 6B series MSO instruments and Tekscope

(Offline).

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:RESPonse {BUTTerworth| CHEBYONe|

CHEBYTWo| ELLiptical| GAUSsian| BESSelCUSTom}
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:RESPonse?

Arguments BUTTerworth specifies the filter response as BUTTerworth.

CHEBYONe specifies the filter response as CHEBYONe.

CHEBYTWo specifies the filter response as CHEBYTWo.

ELLiptical specifies the filter response as ELLiptical.

GAUSsian specifies the filter response as GAUSsian.

BESSelCUSTom specifies the filter response as BESSelCUSTom.

Examples MATH:MATH1:FILTer:RESPonse ELLiptical sets the filter response to

ELLiptical.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-685

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MATH:MATH1:FILTer:RESPonse? might return

:MATH:MATH1:FILTer:RESPonse ELLiptical, indicating the filter response
is ELLiptical.

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:ROFactor
This command sets or queries roll off factor for raised cosine or root raised cosine
filter. The math waveform is specified by x.

Conditions Requires UDFLT licenses on 5, 6 series MSO instruments and Tekscope (Offline).

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:ROFactor <NR1>

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:ROFactor?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the Roll-off Factor value for Rasied-Cosine(RC) filter type.

Examples MATH:MATH1:FILTer:ROFactor 1 sets the Roll-off Factor value as 1.

MATH:MATH1:FILTer:ROFactor? might return

:MATH:MATH1:FILTer:ROFactor 1, indicating the Roll-off Factor value is 1.

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SATTenuation
This command sets or queries the stop band attenuation in the filter response.
The math waveform is specified by x.

Conditions Requires UDFLT licenses on 5, 6 series MSO instruments and Tekscope (Offline).

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SATTenuation <NR3>

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SATTenuation?

Arguments <NR3> sets the stop band attenuation in the filter response.

2-686 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MATH:MATH1:FILTer:SATTenuation 10.0000 sets the stop band attenuation

in the filter response to 10.0000.
MATH:MATH1:FILTer:SATTenuation? might return
:MATH:MATH1:FILTer:SATTenuation 10.0000, indicating the
stop band attenuation in the filter response is 10.0000.

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SAVe
This command saves the filter file. The math waveform is specified by x.

Conditions Requires UDFLT licenses on 5, 6 series MSO instruments and Tekscope (Offline).

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SAVe <QString>

Arguments <QString> saves the created filter in .flt format to the specified save location.

Examples MATH:MATH1:FILTer:SAVe "LowPassButterworth" saves the

LowPassButterworth.flt filter to the specified save location.

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SAVe:RESPonse
This command set the filter response images to be saved while saving the filter
file. The math waveform is specified by x.

Conditions Requires UDFLT licenses on 5, 6 series MSO instruments and Tekscope (Offline).

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SAVe:RESPonse {1|0}

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SAVe:RESPonse?

Arguments 1 enables the save of the filter response image.

0 disables the save of the filter response image. This is the default value.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-687

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MATH:MATH1:FILTer:SAVE:RESPonse 1 enables the save of the filter

response image.
MATH:MATH1:FILTer:SAVE:RESPonse? might return
:MATH:MATH1:FILTer:SAVE:RESPonse 1, indicating the save of
the filter response image is enabled.

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SDEViation
This command sets or queries the standard deviation in Gaussian filter. The math
waveform is specified by x.

Conditions Requires UDFLT licenses on 5, 6 series MSO instruments and Tekscope (Offline).

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SDEViation <NR3>

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SDEViation?

Arguments <NR3> sets the standard deviation in gaussian filter.

Examples :MATH:MATH1:FILTer:SDEViation 15 sets the standard deviation in gaussian

filter to 15.
MATH:MATH1:FILTer:SDEViation? might return
::MATH:MATH1:FILTer:SDEViation 15, indicating the standard deviation in
gaussian filter is 15.

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SDURation
This command sets or queries the symbol duration for raised cosine or root raised
cosine filter. The math waveform is specified by x.

Conditions Requires UDFLT licenses on 5, 6 series MSO instruments and Tekscope (Offline).

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SDURation <NR3>

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SDURation?

2-688 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR3> specifies the number of symbol duration for Root-Raised-Cosine (RRC)
filter type.

Examples :MATH:MATH1:FILTer:SDURation 10.0000E-9 sets the number of symbol

duration for Root-Raised-Cosine (RRC) filter type to 10.0000E-9.
MATH:MATH1:FILTer:SDURation? might return
::MATH:MATH1:FILTer:SDURation 10.0000E-9, indicating the number of
symbol duration for Root-Raised-Cosine (RRC) filter type is 10.0000E-9. .

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SOURce
This command sets or queries the math waveform filter source. The math
waveform and source are specified by x.

Conditions Requires UDFLT licenses on 5, 6 series MSO instruments and Tekscope (Offline).

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SOURce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SOURce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source.

Examples MATH:MATH2:FILTer:SOURce CH1 sets the filter source of Math 2 to Channel 1.

MATH:MATH3:FILTer:SOURce? might return :MATH:MATH3:FILTer:SOURce

REF3 indicating the filter source of Math 3 is Ref 3.

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SYMBols
This command sets or queries the symbol for raised cosine or root raised cosine
filter. The math waveform is specified by x.

Conditions Requires UDFLT licenses on 5, 6 series MSO instruments and Tekscope (Offline).

Group Math

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-689

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SYMBols <NR1>

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SYMBols?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the number of symbols for Raised-Cosine (RC) filter type.

Examples MATH:MATH1:FILTer:SYMBols 2 sets the number of symbols for

Raised-Cosine (RC) filter type to 2.
MATH:MATH1:FILTer:SYMBols? might return
:MATH:MATH1:FILTer:SYMBols 2, indicating the number of symbols for
Raised-Cosine (RC) filter type is 2.

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:TWIDth
This command sets or queries the filter Transition Width for Custom filter
response. The math waveform is specified by x.

Conditions Requires UDFLT licenses on 5, 6 series MSO instruments and Tekscope (Offline).

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:TWIDth <NR3>

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:TWIDth?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the Transition Width for Custom filter response.

Examples MATH:MATH1:FILTer:TWIDth 1 sets the Transition Width for Custom filter

response to 2.
MATH:MATH1:FILTer:TWIDth? might return :MATH:MATH1:FILTer:TWIDth
2, indicating the Transition Width for Custom filter response is 1.

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:TYPe
This command specifies or queries the filter type. The math waveform is specified
by x.

Conditions Requires UDFLT licenses on 5, 6, 6B series MSO instruments and Tekscope

(Offline).

2-690 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:TYPe {LPASs| HPASs| BPASs| BSTop| APASs|

HILBert| DIFFerentiator| RC| RRC}
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:TYPe?

Arguments LPASs specifies the filter type as LPASs.

HPASs specifies the filter type as HPASs.

BPASs specifies the filter type as BPASs.

BSTop specifies the filter type as BSTop.

APASs specifies the filter type as APASs.

HILBert specifies the filter type as HILBert.

DIFFerentiator specifies the filter type as DIFFerentiator.

RC specifies the filter type as RC.

RRC specifies the filter type as RRC.

Examples MATH:MATH1:FILTer:TYPE LPASs sets the filter type to LPASs.

MATH:MATH1:FILTer:TYPE? might return :MATH:MATH1:FILTer:TYPE

LPASs, indicating the filter type is LPASs.

MATH:MATH<x>:FLEXray:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
FLEXray bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:FLEXray:SUPPortedfields {DATa}

MATH:MATH<x>:FLEXray:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

Examples MATH:MATH2:FLEXray:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:FLEXray:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:FLEXray:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field type
for MATH2 for the bus source for FLEXray bus is DATa.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-691

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MATH:MATH<x>:FUNCtion
This command sets or queries the basic math arithmetic function. The math
waveform is specified by x.

NOTE. This command does not affect the same Math equation in Advanced math
(also accessed via the command MATH:MATH<x>:DEFINE).

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:FUNCtion {ADD|SUBtract|MULTiply|DIVide}

Arguments ADD sets the basic math function to add.

SUBtract sets the basic math function to subtract.

MULTiply sets the basic math function to multiply.

DIVide sets the basic math function to divide.

Examples MATH:MATH2:FUNCTION MULTIPLY sets the basic math function to multiply.

MATH:MATH1:FUNCTION? might return :MATH:MATH1:FUNCTION ADD
indicating the current basic math function is addition.

MATH:MATH<x>:I2C:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
I2C bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:I2C:SUPPortedfields {DATa}

MATH:MATH<x>:I2C:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

Examples MATH:MATH2:I2C:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:I2C:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:I2C:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field
type for MATH2 for the bus source for I2C bus is DATa.

2-692 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MATH:MATH<x>:I3C:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
I3Cbus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:I3C:SUPPortedfields {DATa}

MATH:MATH<x>:I3C:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

Examples MATH:MATH2:I3C:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:I3C:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:I3C:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field
type for MATH2 for the bus source for I3Cbus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:INTERpolation
This command
sets or queries whether sinc interpolation is enabled for math on bus source.
The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:INTERpolation {ON|OFF}

Arguments ON indicates that the sinc interpolation is used for math waveform.

OFF indicates no interpolation is used for math waveform. Waveform will appear
“stair-steppy” in this case.

Examples MATH:MATH2:INTERpolation ON enables sinc interpolation.

MATH:MATH1:INTERpolation? might return :MATH:MATH1:INTERpolation

ON indicating that the sinc interpolation is used for math waveform.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-693

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MATH:MATH<x>:GATing
This command specifies or returns the gating setting. It only applies to Math FFT
plots. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:GATing {NONE|SCREEN|CURSor}

MATH:MATH<x>:GATing?

Related Commands MATH:MATH<x>:TYPe

Arguments NONE turns off math gating.

SCREEN turns on gating, using the left and right edges of the screen.

CURSor limits math to the portion of the waveform between the vertical bar
cursors, even if they are off screen.

Examples MATH:MATH3:GATING CURSOR sets the spectral math plot to be gated by the
cursors.
MATH:MATH2:GATING? might return :MATH:MATH:2:GATING SCREEN which
indicates the spectral math plot is gated by the screen.

MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:COLor
This command sets or queries color of the specified math's label. The math
waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:COLor <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the color of the label. To return the color to the default color, send
an empty string as in this example: :MATH:MATH1:LABEL:COLOR "".

Examples MATH:MATH3:LABEL:COLOR "GREEN" sets the Math 3 label color to green.

MATH:MATH1:LABEL:COLOR? might return :MATH:MATH1:LABEL:COLOR
"BLUE" indicating the color of the Math1 label is blue.

2-694 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD
This command sets or queries the bold state of the specified math label. The
math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

Arguments <NR1> = 0 turns off bold, and any other integer turns on bold.

OFF turns off bold.

ON turns on bold.

Examples MATH:MATH3:FONT:BOLD ON set the math 3 label to bold.

MATH:MATH2:FONT:BOLD? might return :MATH:MATH2:FONT:BOLD

0 indicating the math 2 label is not currently bold.

MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic
This command sets or queries italic state of the specified math label. The math
waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

Arguments <NR1> = 0 turns off italic, and any other integer turns on italic.

OFF turns off italic.

ON turns on italic.

Examples MATH:MATH4:FONT:ITALIC ON set the math 4 label to be italic.

MATH:MATH1:FONT:ITALIC? might return :MATH:MATH1:FONT:ITALIC

0 indicating the math 1 label is not currently italic.

<NR1> is the font size of the label.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-695

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE
This command sets or queries font size of the specified math label. The math
waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE <NR1>

Arguments <NR1> sets the label size in points.

Examples MATH:MATH4:LABEL:FONT:SIZE 32 sets the math 4 label size to 32.

MATH:MATH2:LABEL:FONT:SIZE? might return

:MATH:MATH2:LABEL:FONT:SIZE 14 indicating the math 2 label size is
currently 14.

MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE
This command sets or queries font type of the specified math label, such as Arial
or Times New Roman. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the name of the font type.

Examples MATH:MATH2:LABEL:FONT:TYPE "Serif" sets the math 2 label font type to Serif.

MATH:MATH3:LABEL:FONT:TYPE? might return

:MATH:MATH3:LABEL:FONT:TYPE "Monospace" indicating the math 3 font
type is currently Monospace.

MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline
This command sets or queries the underline state of the specified math label.
The math waveform is specified by x.

2-696 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

Arguments <NR1> = 0 turns off underline, and any other integer turns on underline.

OFF turns off underline.

ON turns on underline.

Examples MATH:MATH3:FONT:UNDERLINE ON sets the math 3 label to be underlined.

MATH:MATH2:FONT:UNDERLINE? might return

:MATH:MATH2:FONT:UNDERLINE 0 indicating the math 2 label is currently
not underlined.

MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:NAMe
This command sets or queries the label string, which is used for annotating the
math waveform on the screen. The math waveform to which the label is attached
is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:NAMe <QString>

MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:NAMe?

Arguments <QString> specifies the label to annotate the math waveform.

Examples MATH:MATH2:LABel:NAMe "PROBE POINT7" assigns "Probe point7" Math

2 waveform.
MATH:MATH2:LABel:NAMe? might return :MATH:MATH2:LABel:NAMe
"Probe point7", indicating that Probe point 7 is the label for the Math 2
waveform.

MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:XPOS
This command sets or queries the X position of the specified math label. Maths
are specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-697

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:XPOS <NR1>

MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:XPOS?

Related Commands MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:YPOS

Arguments <NR1> is the location (in pixels) where the label for the selected math waveform
is displayed, relative to the left edge of the display.

Examples MATH:MATH2:LABEL:XPOS 5 moves the waveform label for the Math 2

waveform so that it begins 5 pixels to the right of the left edge of the screen.
MATH:MATH2:LABEL:XPOS? might return :MATH:MATH2:LABEL:XPOS 2.5,
indicating that the waveform label for the Math 2 waveform is currently 2.5 pixels
to the right of the left edge of the display.

MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:YPOS
This command sets or queries the y-position of the specified math label. The
Math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:YPOS <NR1>

MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:YPOS?

Related Commands MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:XPOS

Arguments <NR1> is the location (in pixels) where the label for the selected math waveform
is displayed, relative to the baseline of the waveform.

Examples MATH:MATH2:LABEL:YPOS -2.5 moves the waveform label for the Math 2
waveform to 2.5 pixels below the baseline of the waveform.
MATH:MATH2:LABEL:YPOS? might return :MATH:MATH2:LABEL:YPOS 0,
indicating that the waveform label for the Math 2 waveform is currently located at
the baseline of the waveform.

2-698 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MATH:MATH<x>:LIN:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
LIN bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:LIN:SUPPortedfields {DATa}

MATH:MATH<x>:LIN:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

Examples MATH:MATH2:LIN:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:LIN:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:LIN:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field
type for MATH2 for the bus source for LIN bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:MDIO:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
MDIO bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:MDIO:SUPPortedfields {DATa}

MATH:MATH<x>:MDIO:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

Examples MATH:MATH2:MDIO:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:MDIO:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:MDIO:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field
type for MATH2 for the bus source for MDIO bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:MIL1553B:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
MIL1553B bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-699

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:MIL1553B:SUPPortedfields {DATa|PAYLoad}

MATH:MATH<x>:MIL1553B:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

PAYLoad sets the field type to PAYLoad.

Examples MATH:MATH2:MIL1553B:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:MIL1553B:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:MIL1553B:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field type
for MATH2 for the bus source for MIL1553B bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:ONEWIRe:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
ONEWIRe bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:ONEWIRe:SUPPortedfields {DATa}

MATH:MATH<x>:ONEWIRe:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

Examples MATH:MATH2:ONEWIRe:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:ONEWIRe:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:ONEWIRe:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field type
for MATH2 for the bus source for ONEWIRe bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:PARallel:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
PARallel bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

2-700 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:PARallel:SUPPortedfields {DATa}

MATH:MATH<x>:PARallel:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

Examples MATH:MATH2:PARallel:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:PARallel:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:PARallel:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field type
for MATH2 for the bus source for PARallel bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:PSIFIVe:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
PSIFIVe bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:PSIFIVe:SUPPortedfields {DATa|DRA|DRB|SDATa}

MATH:MATH<x>:PSIFIVe:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

DRA sets the field type to DRA.

DRB sets the field type to DRB.

SDATa sets the field type to SDATa.

Examples MATH:MATH2:PSIFIVe:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:PSIFIVe:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:PSIFIVe:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field type
for MATH2 for the bus source for PSIFIVe bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:RS232C:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
RS232C bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-701

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:RS232C:SUPPortedfields {DATa|TXData|RXData}

MATH:MATH<x>:RS232C:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

TXData sets the field type to TXData. TXData field can be set when RS232 Bus
configuration for Data Inputs is set to Two.
RXData sets the field type to RXData. RXData field can be set when RS232 Bus
configuration for Data Inputs is set to Two.

Examples MATH:MATH2:RS232C:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:RS232C:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:RS232C:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the
field type for MATH2 for the bus source for RS232C bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:SDLC:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
SDLC bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:SDLC:SUPPortedfields {DATa}

MATH:MATH<x>:SDLC:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

Examples MATH:MATH2:SDLC:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:SDLC:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:SDLC:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field
type for MATH2 for the bus source for SDLC bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:SENT:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
SENT bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

2-702 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:SENT:SUPPortedfields
{FCData|FCDFirst|FCDTwo|SDATa}
MATH:MATH<x>:SENT:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments FCData sets the field type to FCData. FCData field is available to select when
SENT Bus configuration for Fast Data Channels is set to 2.
FCDFirst sets the field type to FCDFirst.

FCDTwo sets the field type to FCDTwo.

SDATa sets the field type to SDATa. SDATa is available when SENT Bus
configuration for Slow Channel is not None.

Examples MATH:MATH2:SENT:SUPPortedfields FCData sets the field type to FCData.

MATH:MATH2:SENT:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:SENT:SUPPortedfields FCData, indicating the
field type for MATH2 for the bus source for SENT bus is FCData.

MATH:MATH<x>:SIGNeddata
This command sets or queries value to denote that bus field is decoded as
signed/unsigned data for math on bus source. The math waveform is specified
by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:SIGNeddata {ON|OFF}

MATH:MATH<x>:SIGNeddata?

Arguments ON indicates that the bus field is decoded as signed data for drawing the math
waveform.
OFF indicates that the bus field is decoded as unsigned data for drawing the
math waveform.

Examples MATH:MATH2:SIGNeddata ON turns on signed data for MATH2 waveform.

MATH:MATH2:SIGNeddata? might return :MATH:MATH2:SIGNeddata ON,

indicating that the bus field is decoded as signed data for drawing the math
waveform.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-703

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MATH:MATH<x>:SMBUS:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
SMBUS bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:SMBUS:SUPPortedfields {DATa}

MATH:MATH<x>:SMBUS:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

Examples MATH:MATH2:SMBUS:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:SMBUS:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:SMBUS:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the
field type for MATH2 for the bus source for SMBUS bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:SOUrce<x>
This command sets or queries the specified math source. The source in the
command can be either 1 or 2. This command sets the Basic Math components in
the user interface, with two sources and a function. You would also need to set the
math type to Basic to see the change in the user interface but this will not effect
the programmable interface. The math waveform and source are specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:SOUrce<x> {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

Related Commands MATH:MATH<x>:TYPe

MATH:MATH<x>:FUNCtion

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source.

SOUrce<x> specifies the source number. SOURCE1 and SOURCE2 are for use
when the MATH:MATH<x>:TYPE is BASIC.

2-704 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MATH:MATH2:SOURCE1 CH1 sets the first source of math 2 to Channel 1.

MATH:MATH3:SOURCE2? might return :MATH:MATH3:SOURCE2 REF3

indicating the second source of Math 3 is Ref 3.

MATH:MATH<x>:SPACEWIRe:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
SPACEWIRe bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:SPACEWIRe:SUPPortedfields {DATa}

MATH:MATH<x>:SPACEWIRe:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

Examples MATH:MATH2:SPACEWIRe:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to

DATa.
MATH:MATH2:SPACEWIRe:SUPPortedfields? might return
:MATH:MATH2:SPACEWIRe:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field type
for MATH2 for the bus source for SPACEWIRe bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:HORZ
This command sets or queries the horizontal display scale of the spectral math
waveform. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:HORZ {LOG|LINEAr}

MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:HORZ?

Arguments LINEAr sets the SpectralMag units to linear.

LOG sets the SpectralMag units to log.

Examples MATH:MATH2:SPECTRAL:HORZ LOG sets the horizontal display scale of the

spectral math waveform to log.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-705

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MATH:MATH3:SPECTRAL:HORZ? might return :MATH:MATH3:SPECTRAL:HORZ

LINEAR indicating the horizontal display scale of the Math 3 spectral math
waveform is currently set to linear.

MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:MAG
This command sets or queries the units of the SpectralMag function in the
specified math definition string. The Math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:MAG {LINEAr|DBM}

MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:MAG?

Arguments LINEAR sets the SpectralMag units to linear.

DBM sets the SpectralMag units to decibels. It also sets the Ref Level Offset to a
value that is the equivalent of 1 mW into 50 Ω.

Examples MATH:MATH2:SPECTral:MAG DBM sets the SpectralMag units for Math 2

waveform to decibels.
MATH:MATH2:SPECTral:MAG? might return :MATH:MATH2:SPECTral:MAG
DBM, indicating that the SpectralMag units for Math 2 waveform are set to decibels.

MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:PHASE
This command sets or queries the units of a SpectralPhase function in the specified
math definition string. The Math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:PHASE {DEGrees|RADians|GROUPDelay}

MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:PHASE?

Arguments DEGREES sets the SpectralPhase units to degrees.

RADIANS sets the SpectralPhase units to radians.

GROUPDELAY sets the SpectralPhase units to groupdelay, which computes the

derivative of unwrapped phase spectrum. Units are expressed in seconds.

2-706 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MATH:MATH2:SPECTral:PHASE DEGREES sets the SpectralPhase units for

Math 2 waveform to degrees.
MATH:MATH2:SPECTral:PHASE? might return
:MATH:MATH2:SPECTral:PHASE RADIANS, indicating that the SpectralPhase
units for Math 2 waveform are set to radians.

MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the specified spectral math source. This only works
with a math of type FFT. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:SOUrce?

Related Commands MATH:MATH<x>:TYPe

Arguments Arguments are math sources. MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTRAL:SOURCE is for use

when the MATH:MATH<x>:TYPE is FFT.

Examples MATH:MATH3:SPECTRAL:SOURCE REF3 sets the source of the Spectral Math

waveform to Ref 3.
MATH:MATH2:SPECTRAL:SOURCE? might return
:MATH:MATH2:SPECTRAL:SOURCE CH4 indicating the Math 2 spectral source
is Channel 4.

MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress
This command sets or queries whether suppression threshold for the specified
math waveform is enabled. This is only applied when Spectral Plot type is Phase.
The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress {OFF|ON|0|1}

MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-707

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:TYPE

Arguments 0 disables suppression threshold for the specified math waveform.

1 enables suppression threshold for the specified math waveform.

ON enables suppression threshold for the specified math waveform.

OFF disables suppression threshold for the specified math waveform.

Examples MATH:MATH3:SPECTRAL:SUPPRESS ON enables the suppression threshold on

the Math 3 spectral waveform.
MATH:MATH2:SPECTRAL:SUPPRESS? might return
:MATH:MATH2:SPECTRAL:SUPPRESS 0 indicating the suppression threshold is
disabled on the Math 2 spectral waveform.

MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress:VALue
This command sets or queries in volts the value of suppression threshold of the
specified math waveform. This requires the Spectral type to be Phase and the
Suppression to be enabled for this PI command to have any affect. The math
waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress:VALue <NR3>

MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress:VALue?

Related Commands MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:TYPE

MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress

Arguments <NR3> is the value of suppression threshold of the specified math waveform in
volts.

Examples MATH:MATH3:SPECTRAL:SUPPRESS:VALUE 100.0E-3 sets the suppression

threshold of Math 3 to 100 mV.
MATH:MATH1:SPECTRAL:SUPPRESS:VALUE? might return
MATH:MATH1:SPECTRAL:SUPPRESS:VALUE 10.0000E+3 indicating
the suppression threshold of Math 1 is currently set to 10 kV.

2-708 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:TYPE
This command sets or queries the FFT type selected for spectral analysis. The
math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:TYPE {MAGNitude|PHASe|REAL|IMAGinary}

MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:TYPE?

Arguments MAGNitude specifies the magnitude spectral function.

PHASe specifies the phase spectral function.

REAL specifies the real spectral function.

IMAGinary specifies the imaginary spectral function.

Examples MATH:MATH1:SPECTral:TYPE REAL specifies the real spectral function.

MATH:MATH1:SPECTral:TYPE? might return :MATH:MATH1:SPECTRAL:TYPE

MAGNITUDE indicating the math is the magnitude spectral function.

MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:UNWRap
This command sets or queries whether phase unwrap of the spectral analyzer
output data is enabled. The Math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:UNWRap {OFF|ON|0|1}

MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:UNWRap?

Arguments 0 disables phase unwrap for the specified math waveform.

1 enables phase unwrap for the specified math waveform.

ON enables phase unwrap for the specified math waveform.

OFF disables phase unwrap for the specified math waveform.

Examples MATH1:SPECTRAL:UNWRAP ON enables phase unwrap of the spectral analyzer

output data.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-709

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MATH1:SPECTRAL:UNWRAP? might return :MATH1:SPECTRAL:UNWRAP 0,

indicating that the phase unwrap of the spectral analyzer output data is disabled.

MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:UNWRap:DEGrees
This command sets or queries how many degrees adjacent phase values can
jump before being unwrapped. This requires the Spectral type to be Phase and
the UNWRAP to be enabled for this PI command to have any affect. The math
waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:UNWRap:DEGrees <NR3>

MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:UNWRap:DEGrees?

Related Commands MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:TYPE

MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:UNWRap

Arguments <NR3> is the value of unwrap phase in degrees.

Examples MATH:MATH2:SPECTRAL:UNWRAP:DEGREES 90 sets the unwrap phase of the

spectral Math 2 to 90 degrees.
MATH:MATH2:SPECTRAL:UNWRAP:DEGREES? might return
:MATH:MATH2:SPECTRAL:UNWRAP:DEGREES 180 indicating unwrap
phase of the spectral math 3 waveform is 180 degrees.

MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:WINdow
This command sets or queries the window function used to apply the specified
FFT window to the input data for the specified math waveform. The Math
waveform is specified by x. A spectral window determines what the filter shape
of the spectral analyzer will be in the frequency domain. It can be described by
a mathematical function that is multiplied point-by-point times the input data to
the spectral analyzer.
Following is a list of arguments that specify the window function used to multiply
the input data. The windows are listed in the order of their ability to resolve
frequencies (resolution bandwidth).

Group Math

2-710 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:WINdow {RECTANGular|HAMMing|

HANNing|BLACKMANHarris|KAISERBessel|GAUSSian|
FLATTOP2|TEKEXPonential}
MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:WINdow?

Related Commands MATH:MATH<x>:TYPe

Arguments RECTANGular window function is equivalent to multiplying all gate data by one.

HAMMing window function is based on a cosine series.

HANNing window function is based on a cosine series.

BLACKMANHarris window function is based on a cosine series.

KAISERBessel window function is based on a cosine series.

GAUSSian window function has the best localization characteristics in the joint
time/frequency plane
FLATTOP2 window function is a cosine series window with a flattened frequency
response lobe.
TEKEXPonential window has an exponential nonsymmetrical shape in the time
domain and a triangular shape in the frequency domain.

Examples MATH2:SPECTRAL:WINDOW GAUSSIAN applies a Gaussian window to the

spectral analyzer input data.
MATH2:SPECTRAL:WINDOW? might return :MATH2:SPECTRAL:WINDOW
BLACKMANHarris, indicating that the window function used to multiply the
spectral analyzer input data is the BLACKMANHarris function.

MATH:MATH<x>:SPI:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for SPI
bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:SPI:SUPPortedfields {DATa|MOSIdata|MISOdata}

MATH:MATH<x>:SPI:SUPPortedfields?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-711

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MOSIdata sets the field type to MOSIdata. MOSIdata field is available to select
when SPI Bus configuration for Data Inputs is set to Two.
MISOdata sets the field type to MISOdata. MISOdata field is available to select
when SPI Bus configuration for Data Inputs is set to Two.

Examples MATH:MATH2:SPI:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:SPI:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:SPI:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field
type for MATH2 for the bus source for SPI bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:SPMI:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
SPMI bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:SPMI:SUPPortedfields {DATa|CDATa|RDATa}

MATH:MATH<x>:SPMI:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

CDATa sets the field type to CDATa.

RDATa sets the field type to RDATa.

Examples MATH:MATH2:SPMI:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:SPMI:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:SPMI:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field
type for MATH2 for the bus source for SPMI bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:SVID:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
SVID bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

2-712 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:SVID:SUPPortedfields {MPAYload|SPAYload}

MATH:MATH<x>:SVID:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments MPAYload sets the field type to MPAYload.

SPAYload sets the field type to SPAYload.

Examples MATH:MATH2:SVID:SUPPortedfields MPAYload sets the field type to

MPAYload.
MATH:MATH2:SVID:SUPPortedfields? might return
:MATH:MATH2:SVID:SUPPortedfields MPAYload, indicating the
field type for MATH2 for the bus source for SVID bus is MPAYload.

MATH:MATH<x>:TYPe
This command sets or queries the math type. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:TYPe {BASic|FILTER|FFT|ADVanced}

Arguments BASic set the type to basic math.

FILTER sets the math type to filter. Requires UDFLT licenses on 5, 6 series MSO
instruments and Tekscope (Offline).
FFT sets the type to FFT math, which can use any live analog or reference
waveform in the time domain. NOTE. You can also use FFT as part of a math
expression by declaring the type
ADVanced. See examples for the command MATH:MATH<x>:DEFine.
ADVanced sets the type to advanced math.

Examples MATH:MATH2:TYPE BASIC sets the type of Math 2 to basic.

MATH:MATH2:TYPE? might return :MATH:MATH2:TYPE FFT indicating the

type of Math 4 is currently FFT.

MATH:MATH<x>:USB:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
USB bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-713

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:USB:SUPPortedfields {DATa}

MATH:MATH<x>:USB:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

Examples MATH:MATH2:USB:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:USB:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:USB:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field
type for MATH2 for the bus source for USB bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:VUNIT
This command specifies or returns the math custom vertical units. The math
waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:VUNIT <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the custom vertical units.

Examples MATH:MATH2:VUNIT "Small"

MATH:MATH2:VUNIT? might return :MATH:MATH2:VUNIT "Large" indicating

the Math 2 vertical unit is set to "Large".

MATHArbflt<x>:FILepath
This command or query sets the file path for a file of filter coefficients for the
specified arbitrary filter. Setting a path will read that file and load the filter for
ARBFLT<x>. Access these filters using a Math with an expression of the form
"ARBFlt<x>()”.

Group Math

2-714 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MATHArbflt<x>:FILepath <QString>

MATHArbflt<x>:FILepath?

Arguments <QString> specifies the path to the file of filter coefficients.

Examples MATHARBFLT8:FILEPATH "c:/myfilters/20mhz.flt" reads filter

coefficients from the file and loads the filter for ARBFLT8.
MATHARBFLT1:FILEPATH? might return :MATHARBFLT1:FILEPATH
"C:\Users\Public\Tektronix\TekScope\Math Arbitrary
Filters\LowPass-Norm\lowpass_0.bw.flt", indicating that the path to
the file of filter coefficients is set to "C:\Users\Public\Tektronix\TekScope\Math
Arbitrary Filters\LowPass-Norm\lowpass_0.bw.flt".

MEASTABle:ADDNew (No Query Form)

This command adds a new measurement results view table to the scope
application. The results view table can be named through the argument sent to
the command.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASTABle:ADDNew <QString>

Arguments <QString> specifies a new measurement results view table to the scope
application.

Examples MEASTABle:ADDNew "TABLE1" adds a new table view by name TABLE1.

MEASTABle:DELETE (No Query Form)

This command removes the requested measurement results view table from the
scope application.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASTABle:DELETE <QString>

Arguments <QString> specifies a measurement results view table to remove.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-715

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASTABle:DELETE "TABLE1" removes TABLE1 from the view.

MEASUrement? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns all measurement parameters.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement?

Examples MEASUREMENT? might return :MEASUREMENT:GATING

OFF;IMMED:TYPE UNDEFINED;UNITS "V";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH1;SOURCE1:SIGTYPE PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2:SIGTYPE
PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2
RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:METHOD
PERCENT;ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0000;LOW 0.0000;MID1 0.0000;MID2
0.0000;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90.0000;LOW
10.0000;MID1 50.0000;MID2 50.0000;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:METHOD
HISTOGRAM;NOISE HIGH;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STATE
0;TYPE UNDEFINED;UNITS "V";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH1;SOURCE1:SIGTYPE PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE2:SIGTYPE
PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2
RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:METHOD
PERCENT;ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0000;LOW 0.0000;MID1 0.0000;MID2
0.0000;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90.0000;LOW
10.0000;MID1 50.0000;MID2 50.0000;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:METHOD
HISTOGRAM;NOISE HIGH;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:STATE
0;TYPE UNDEFINED;UNITS "V";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH1;SOURCE1:SIGTYPE PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE2:SIGTYPE
PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2
RISE;DIRECTION.

MEASUrement:ADDMEAS (No Query Form)

This command adds a measurement.

Conditions Refer to the Arguments list for measurements are require the DJA option or are
not available on 4 Series MSO instruments.

Group Measurement, IMDA

2-716 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:ADDMEAS {ACCOMMONMODE |ACPR |ACRMS |AMPlITUDE

|AREA |BASE |BITAMPLITUDE |BITHIGH |BITLOW |BURSTWIDTH
|CCJITTER |COMMONMODE |CPOWER |DATARATE |DCD |DDJ
|DDRAOS |DDRAOSPERTCK |DDRAOSPERUI |DDRAUS |DDRAUSPERTCK
|DDRAUSPERUI |DDRHOLDDIFF |DDRSETUPDIFF |DDRTCHABS
|DDRTCHAVERAGE |DDRTCKAVERAGE |DDRTCLABS |DDRTCLAVERAGE
|DDRTERRMN |DDRTERRN |DDRTJITCC |DDRTJITDUTY |DDRTJITPER
|DDRTPST |DDRTRPRE |DDRTWPRE |DDRVIXAC |DDRTDQSCK |DELAY |DJ
|DJDIRAC |DPMPSIJ |EYEHIGH |EYELOW |FALLSLEWRATE |FALLTIME
|FREQUENCY |F2 |F4 |F8 |HEIGHT |HEIGHTBER |HIGH |HIGHTIME
|HOLD |IMDAANGLE |IMDADIRECTION |IMDADQ0 |IMDAEFFICIENCY
|IMDAHARMONICS |IMDAMECHPWR |IMDAPOWERQUALITY |IMDASPEED
|IMDASYSEFF |IMDATORQUE |JITTERSUMMARY |J2 |J9 |LOW |LOWTIME
|MAXIMUM |MEAN |MINIMUM |NDUty |NOVERSHOOT |NPERIOD |NPJ
|NWIDTH |OBW |PDUTY |PERIOD |PHASE |PHASENOISE |PJ |PK2Pk
|POVERSHOOT |PWIDTH |QFACTOR |RISESLEWRATE |RISETIME |RJ
|RJDIRAC |RMS |SETUP |SKEW |SRJ |SSCFREQDEV |SSCMODRATE |TIE
|TIMEOUTSIDELEVEL |TIMETOMAX |TIMETOMIN |TJBER |TNTRATIO
|TOP |UNITINTERVAL |VDIFFXOVR |WBGDDT |WBGDIODEDDT |WBGEOFF
|WBGEON |WBGERR |WBGIPEAK |WBGIRRM |WBGQOSS |WBGQRR
|WBGTDOFF |WBGTDON |WBGTF |WBGTON |WBGTOFF |WBGTR |WBGTRR
|WBGTDT |WBGVPEAK |WIDTH |WIDTHBER}

Arguments ACCOMMONMODE AC Common Mode (Pk-Pk) is the peak-to-peak of the common

mode voltage of two sources. This measurement is made across the entire record.
This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series
MSO instrument.
ACPR (Adjacent Channel Power Ratio) is the amount of power that leaks into
adjacent channels. This can be specified in terms of absolute power or a ratio of
adjacent channel power to the main channel power, called adjacent channel power
ratio (ACPR) or adjacent channel leakage ratio (ACLR).
ACRMS (AC RMS) is the true Root Mean Square of the data points, about the
Mean. This measurement can be made across the entire record, or on each cycle
in the record.
AMPLITUDE is the difference between the Top value and the Base value. This
measurement can be made across the entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
Amplitude = High - Low
AREA is the area under the curve, calculated by integrating the data points. The
area measured above ground is positive. The area measured below ground is
negative. This measurement can be made across the entire record, or on each
cycle in the record.
BASE is the most common data value below the midpoint of the waveform. This
measurement can be made across the entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
BITAMPLITUDE (Bit Amplitude) is the difference between the amplitudes of the 1
bit and the 0 bit surrounding a transition. The amplitude is measured over a user

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-717

Commands listed in alphabetical order

specified portion at the center of the recovered unit interval. This measurement
is made on each transition bit in the record (Mean) or across the entire record
(Mode). This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4
Series MSO instrument.
BITHIGH (Bit High) is the amplitude of a 1 bit. The amplitude is measured
over a user specified portion at the center of the recovered unit interval. This
measurement is made on each high bit in the record (Mean) or across the entire
record (Mode). This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on
a 4 Series MSO instrument.
BITLOW (Bit Low) is the amplitude of a 0 bit. The amplitude is measured
over a user specified portion at the center of the recovered unit interval. This
measurement is made on each high bit in the record (Mean) or across the entire
record (Mode). This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on
a 4 Series MSO instrument.
BURSTWIDTH (Burst Width) is the duration of a series of adjacent crossings of
the Mid reference level (RM). Bursts are separated by a user-defined idle time (tI).
This measurement is made on each burst in the record.
CCJITTER (Cycle-to-Cycle jitter) measures how much the clock period changes
between any two adjacent cycles. Cycle-to-Cycle jitter is measured by applying
a first order difference operation to the period jitter.
COMMONMODE (DC Common Mode) is the arithmetic mean of the common mode
voltage of two sources. This measurement is made across the entire record.
This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series
MSO instrument.
CPOWER (Channel Power) is the measurement of integrated power within a
specified channel bandwidth for a RF signal. The resulting channel power is an
absolute power measurement.
DATARATE (Data Rate) is the reciprocal of Unit Interval. This measurement is
made on each bit in the record.
DCD (duty cycle distortion) is the peak-to-peak amplitude of the component of the
deterministic jitter correlated with the signal polarity. This measurement is made
across the entire record. This measurement requires the DJA option and is not
available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
DDJ (data dependent jitter) is the peak-to-peak amplitude of the component of
the deterministic jitter correlated with the data pattern in the waveform. This
measurement is made across the entire record. This measurement requires the
DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
DDRAOS (area above signal) is the total area of the signal above a specified
reference level. This measurement is made across the entire record.

2-718 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DDRAOSPERTCK (area over signal for tCK events) is the total area of the signal
above a specified reference level calculated over consecutive tCK intervals. It is
applicable to clock and address/command waveforms.
DDRAOSPERUI (area over signal for UI events) is the total area of the signal
above a specified reference level calculated over consecutive unit intervals. It is
applicable to data and data strobe waveforms.
DDRAUS (area under signal) is the total area of the signal below a specified
reference level. This measurement is made across the entire record.
DDRAUSPERTCK (area under signal for tCK events) is the total area of the signal
below a specified reference level calculated over consecutive tCK intervals. It is
applicable to clock and address/command waveforms.
DDRAUSPERUI (area under signal for UI events) is the total area of the signal
below a specified reference level calculated over consecutive unit intervals. It is
applicable to data and data strobe waveforms.
DDRHOLDDIFF (hold difference) is the elapsed time between the specified edge
of a single-ended clock waveform and the specified edge of a differential data
waveform. The measurement uses the closest respective waveform edges that fall
within the range limits.This measurement is made across the entire record.
DDRSETUPDIFF (setup difference) is the elapsed time between the specified edge
of a single-ended clock waveform and when the specified edge of a differential
data waveform crosses a specified level. The measurement uses the closest
respective waveform edges that fall within the range limits. This measurement is
made across the entire record.
DDRTCHABS (absolute high pulse width) is the absolute value of the high pulse
width as measured from one rising edge to the next falling edge.
DDRTCHAVERAGE (average high pulse width) is the average value of the high
pulse width as measured from one rising edge to the next falling edge, across 200
consecutive cycles. This measurement is made across the entire record.
DDRTCKAVERAGE (average clock period) is the average clock period calculated
from rising edge to rising edge, across 200 consecutive cycles. This measurement
is made across the entire record.
DDRTCLABS (absolute low pulse width) is the absolute value of the low pulse
width as measured from a falling edge to the next rising edge. This measurement
is made across the entire record.
DDRTCLAVERAGE (average low pulse width) is the average value of the low
pulse width as measured from one falling edge to the next rising edge, across
200 consecutive cycles.
DDRTERRMN (cumulative error) is the cumulative error across multiple consecutive
defined cycles from tCK(avg).

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-719

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DDRTERRN (cumulative error) is the cumulative error across specified consecutive

cycles from tCK(avg). In other words, this measures the time difference between
the sum of the clock period from a 200 cycle window and n times tCK(avg).
DDRTJITCC (cycle to cycle jitter period) is the absolute difference in clock period
between two consecutive clock cycles. This measurement is made across the
entire record.
DDRTJITDUTY (half period jitter) is the largest elapsed time between tCH and
tCH(avg), and tCL and tCL(avg), over 200 consecutive cycles.
DDRTJITPER (clock period jitter) is the largest deviation of any tCK signal from
tCK(avg). This measurement is made across the entire record.
DDRTPST (read/write burst postamble) is the width of the Read or Write burst
postamble, measured from the last falling edge of the mid reference level to the
start of an undriven state. This measurement is made across the entire record.
DDRTRPRE (read burst preamble) is the width of the Read burst preamble,
measured from exiting tristate levels to the first driving edge of the differential
strobe. This measurement is made across the entire record.
DDRTWPRE is the width of the Write burst preamble, measured from exiting tristate
levels to the first driving edge of the differential strobe. This measurement is
made across the entire record.
DDRVIXAC is the differential input cross-point voltage measured from the true
state transition (and it’s compliment) to a specified reference level, measured on
a single-ended signal.
DDRTDQSCK is the strobe output access time, measured between the rising edge of
the clock and before or after the differential strobe Read preamble time. Signal
edges are determined by the mid-ref threshold level settings.
DELay is the time between the specified Mid reference level (RM) crossing on one
source to a specified Mid reference level (RM) crossing on a second source. This
measurement is made on the first occurrence in the record.
DJ (deterministic jitter) is the peak-to-peak amplitude of all timing errors that
exhibit deterministic behavior. This measurement is made across the entire record.
This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series
MSO instrument.
DJDIRAC (dual-dirac deterministic jitter) is deterministic jitter based on a
simplifying assumption that the histogram of all deterministic jitter can be
modeled as a pair of equal-magnitude Dirac functions. This measurement is made
across the entire record. This measurement requires the DJA option and is not
available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
DPMPSIJ is the Power Supply Induced Jitter. This measurement helps in
suppressing the jitter in high speed signals (victim) induced from power rail
signals (aggressor).

2-720 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

EYEHIGH (Eye High) is the amplitude of a high (1) bit measured at a user specified
location within the recovered unit interval. This measurement is made on each
high bit in the record. This measurement requires the DJA option and is not
available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
EYELOW (Eye Low) is the amplitude of a low (0) bit measured at a user specified
location within the recovered unit interval. This measurement is made on each
low bit in the record. This measurement requires the DJA option and is not
available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
FALLSLEWRATE (Falling Slew Rate) is the rate of change in voltage as an edge
transitions from the Top reference level (RT) to the Bottom reference level (RB).
This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
FALLTIME (Fall Time) is the time required for an edge to fall from the Top
reference level (RT) to the Base reference level (RB). This measurement is made
on each cycle in the record.
FREQuency is the reciprocal of Period. This measurement is made on each cycle
in the record.
F2 is the peak-to-peak amplitude of the periodic jitter occurring at a rate of Fb
(data rate) divided by 2. This measurement is made across the entire record.
This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series
MSO instrument.
F4 is the peak-to-peak amplitude of the periodic jitter occurring at a rate of Fb
(data rate) divided by 4. This measurement is made across the entire record.
This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series
MSO instrument.
F8 is the peak-to-peak amplitude of the periodic jitter occurring at a rate of Fb
(data rate) divided by 8. This measurement is made across the entire record.
This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series
MSO instrument.
HIGH (Eye High) is the amplitude of a high (1) bit measured at a user specified
location within the recovered unit interval. This measurement is made on each
high bit in the record.
HEIGHT (Eye Height) is the minimum vertical eye opening at the center of the
recovered unit interval. This measurement is made across the entire record.
This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series
MSO instrument.
HEIGHTBER (Eye Height@BER) is the predicted vertical eye opening that will be
violated with a probability equal to the bit error rate. This measurement is made
across the entire record. This measurement requires the DJA option and is not
available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
HIGH

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-721

Commands listed in alphabetical order

HIGHTIME (High Time) is the time the signal remains above the Top reference
level (RT). This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
HOLD (Hold Time) is the time between the specified Mid reference level crossing
(RM) on the Clock source to the closest specified Mid reference level (RM) crossing
on the Data source. This measurement is made on each specified Clock edge
in the record.
IMDAANGLE (Angle) measures the phase angle. Configure QEI or Hall sensor to
compute the angle measurement. Requires a IMDA-MECH License.
IMDADIRECTION (Direction) defines the direction of rotation of the motor. Set
the direction A-B-C or A-C-B for Hall sensors and CW or CCW for QEI based on
the motor configuration. Requires a IMDA-MECH License.
IMDADQ0 measures the DQ0 values of the phasor plot. This measurement requires
options IMDA and IMDA-DQ0. Requires a IMDA-MECH License.
IMDAEFFICIENCY (Efficiency) measures the ratio of sum of output power(s) to
input power for respective input and output Voltage and Current pairs. Note: the
current release cannot support 3V and 3I pairs, since this requires 12 channels.
We restrict to 2V and 2I which needs 8 scope channels. Requires a IMDA-MECH
License.
IMDAHARMONICS (Harmonics) plots the signal amplitude at the fundamental
line frequency and its harmonics and measures the RMS amplitude and Total
Harmonic Distortion of the signal. Requires a IMDA-MECH License.
IMDAMECHPWR (Mechanical Power) measures the mechanical power of the motor
drive system. It is determined by the Speed and Torque. It is measured in watts.
Requires a IMDA-MECH License.
IMDAPOWERQUALITY (Power Quality) measures the Frequency and RMS values
of the voltage and current, Crest Factors of the voltage and current, True Power
(PTRUE), Reactive Power (PRE), Apparent Power (PAPP), Power Factor, and
Phase Angle (θ) of the AC signal. Requires a IMDA-MECH License.
IMDASPEED (Speed) measures the speed and acceleration. Requires a
IMDA-MECH License.
IMDASYSEFF (System Efficiency) measures the total efficiency of the motor drive
system. Requires a IMDA-MECH License.
IMDATORQUE (Torque) measures the torque of the motor. Configure Sensor
(analog) or Current method to measure the torque. Requires a IMDA-MECH
License.
JITTERSUMMARY (Jitter Summary) is a group consisting of the following
measurements: TIE, TJ@BER, Eye Width@BER, Eye Height@BER, RJ-δδ,
DJ-δδ, PJ, DDJ, DcD, F/2, F/4, F/8. This measurement requires the DJA option
and is not available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.

2-722 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

J2 is the total jitter at a bit error rate of 2.5e-3 ([email protected]). This measurement is
made across the entire record. This measurement requires the DJA option and is
not available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
J9 is the total jitter at a bit error rate of 2.5e-10 ([email protected]). This measurement
is made across the entire record. This measurement requires the DJA option and is
not available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
LOW (Eye Low) is the amplitude of a low (0) bit measured at a user specified
location within the recovered unit interval. This measurement is made on each
low bit in the record.
LOWTIME (Low Time) is the time the signal remains below the Base reference
level (RB). This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
MAXimum is the maximum data point. This measurement can be made across the
entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
MEAN is the arithmetic mean of the data points. This measurement can be made
across the entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
MINImum is the minimum data point. This measurement can be made across the
entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
NDUty (Negative Duty Cycle) is the ratio of the Negative Pulse Width to the
Period. This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
Negative Duty Cycle = (Negative Width) / Period × 100%
NPERIOD (Duration N-Periods) is the time required to complete N cycles. A cycle
is the time between two adjacent (same direction) crossings of the Mid reference
level (RM). This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
NPJ (non-periodic jitter) is the portion of the BUJ (bounded uncorrelated jitter)
that is random. BUJ excludes DDJ, DCD and RJ. This measurement is made
across the entire record. This measurement requires the DJA option and is not
available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
NOVershoot (Negative Overshoot) is the difference between Minimum and
Base, divided by the Amplitude. This measurement can be made across the entire
record, or on each cycle in the record.
Negative Overshoot = (Base - Minimum) / Amplitude × 100%)
NWIDTH (Negative Pulse Width) is the time the signal remains below the Mid
reference level (RM). This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
OBW (Occupied Bandwidth) refers to the bandwidth, including energy of a certain
proportion of the total transmitted power, with the center frequency of the
specified channel as the center.
PDUTY (Positive Duty Cycle) is the ratio of the Positive Pulse Width to the Period.
This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
Positive Duty Cycle = (Positive Width)/Period × 100%

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-723

Commands listed in alphabetical order

PERIOD is the time required to complete a cycle. A cycle is the time between
two adjacent (same direction) crossings of the Mid reference level (RM). This
measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
PHASE is the ratio of the Skew between two sources to the Period of the first
source. This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
PHASENOISE (Phase Noise) is the RMS magnitude of all integrated jitter falling
within a user specified offset range of the fundamental clock frequency. This
measurement is made across the entire record. This measurement is not available
on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
PJ (periodic jitter) is the peak-to-peak amplitude of the uncorrelated sinusoidal
components of the deterministic jitter. This measurement is made across the
entire record. This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on
a 4 Series MSO instrument.
PK2Pk (Peak-to-peak) is the difference between Maximum and Minimum. This
measurement can be made across the entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
POVERSHOOT (Positive Overshoot) is the difference between Maximum and Top,
divided by the Amplitude. This measurement can be made across the entire
record, or on each cycle in the record.
Positive Overshoot = (Maximum - Top) / Amplitude ×100%
PWIDTH (Positive Pulse Width) is the time the signal remains above the Mid
reference level (RM). This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
QFACTOR (Q-Factor) is the ratio of the vertical eye opening to RMS vertical noise
measured at a user specified location within the recovered unit interval. This
measurement is made across the entire record. This measurement requires the
DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
RISESLEWRATE (Rising Slew Rate) is the rate of change in voltage as an edge
transitions from the Base reference level (RB) to the Top reference level (RT). This
measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
RISETIME Rise Time is the time required for an edge to rise from the Base
reference level (RB) to the Top reference level (RT). This measurement is made on
each cycle in the record.
RJ (random jitter) is the RMS magnitude of all random timing errors following
a Gaussian distribution. This measurement is made across the entire record.
This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series
MSO instrument.
RJDIRAC (dual-dirac random jitter) is random jitter based on a simplifying
assumption that the histogram of all deterministic jitter can be modeled as a
pair of equal-magnitude Dirac functions. This measurement is made across the
entire record. This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on
a 4 Series MSO instrument.

2-724 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

RMS is the true Root Mean Square of the data points. This measurement can be
made across the entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
SRJ (sub-rate jitter) is the composite jitter due to periodic components at 1/2,
1/4 and 1/8 of the data rate. This measurement is made across the entire record.
This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series
MSO instrument.
SSCFREQDEV (SSC Frequency Deviation) is the spread spectrum clock frequency
deviation. This measurement enables a time trend plot of the spread spectrum
clock modulation profile. This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series
MSO instrument.
SSCMODRATE (SSC Modulation Rate) is the modulating frequency of a spread
spectrum clock. This measurement is made on each cycle in the record. This
measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series MSO
instrument.
SETUP (Setup Time) is the time between the specified Mid reference level (RM)
crossing on the Data source to the closest specified Mid reference level (RM)
crossing on the Clock source. This measurement is made on each specified Clock
edge in the record.
SKEW Skew is the time between the specified Mid reference level (RM) crossing
on one source to the following specified Mid reference level (RM) crossing on a
second source. This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
TIE (time interval error) is the difference, in time, between an edge in the source
waveform and the corresponding edge in a recovered reference clock. This
measurement is made on each edge in the waveform. This measurement is not
available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
TIMEOUTSIDELEVEL Time Outside Level is the time the signal remains above
the Top reference level (RT) and/or below the Base reference level (RB). This
measurement is made on each occurrence in the record.
TIMETOMAX Time to Max is the amount of time from the trigger point to the
maximum data point. This measurement can be made across the entire record
or on each cycle in the record.
TIMETOMIN Time to Min is the amount of time from the trigger point to the
minimum data point. This measurement can be made across the entire record
or on each cycle in the record.
TJBER (total jitter at a specified bit error rate) is the predicted peak-to-peak
amplitude of jitter that will only be exceeded with a probability equal to the bit
error rate. This measurement is made across the entire record. This measurement
requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
TNTRATIO T/nT Ratio is the ratio of a non-transition bit voltage (2nd and
subsequent bit voltage after a transition) to its nearest preceding transition bit

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-725

Commands listed in alphabetical order

voltage (1st bit voltage after the transition). Bit voltages are measured at the
interpolated midpoint of the recovered unit interval. This measurement is made on
each non-transition bit in the record. This measurement requires the DJA option
and is not available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
TOP is the most common data value above the midpoint of the waveform. This
measurement can be made across the entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
UNITINTERVAL (Unit Interval) is the time difference between two successive bits.
This measurement is made on each bit in the record.
VDIFFXOVR (Differential Crossover) is the voltage level of a differential signal
pair at the crossover points. This measurement is made at each crossover point
in the record. This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on
a 4 Series MSO instrument.
WBGDDT (d/dt) measures the rate of change of voltage or current (slew rate) from
the configured start level to the stop level. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGDIODEDDT (Diode d/dt) measures the rate of change of voltage or current
(slew rate) during the specified start and stop integration levels. Diode d/dt can be
measured during rising or falling edge. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGEOFF (Eoff) measures the energy dissipated in the Power Device during off
region using the configured levels. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGEON (Eon) measures the energy dissipated in the Power Device during on
region using the configured levels. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGERR (Err) measures the reverse recovery energy dissipated in the Power
Device using the configured levels. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGIPEAK (Ipeak) measures the peak current of the Power Device in the on
region. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGIRRM (Irrm) measures the maximum current dissipated in the Power Device in
the reverse recovery region. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGQOSS (Qoss) is the charge that must be supplied to the output capacitance of
the power device during a specified time interval. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGQRR (Qrr) measures the reverse recovery charge in the Power Device using
the configured levels. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGTDOFF (Td(off)) measures the turn off delay time of the Power Device in the
off region using the configured levels. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGTDON (Td(on)) measures the turn on delay time of the Power Device in the on
region using the configured levels. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGTF (Tf) measures the fall time of the Power Device in the off region using
the configured levels.
WBGTOFF (Toff) measures the turn off time of the Power Device. It is the sum of
the turn off delay time and the fall time. Requires a WBG-DPT License.

2-726 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

WBGTON (Ton) measures the turn on time of the Power Device. It is the sum of the
turn on delay time and the rise time. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGTR (Tr) measures the rise time of the Power Device in the on region using the
configured levels. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGTRR (Trr) measures the reverse recovery time of the Power Device using the
configured levels. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGTDT (Tdt) the time delay between turn on time of the high side MOSFET
and turn on time of the low side MOSFET during the simultaneous switching.
Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGVPEAK (Vpeak) measures the peak voltage of the Power Device in the off
region. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WIDTH (Eye Width) is the minimum horizontal eye opening at the user specified
reference level. This measurement is made across the entire record. This
measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series MSO
instrument.
WIDTHBER (Eye Width@BER) is the predicted horizontal eye opening that will be
violated with a probability equal to the bit error rate. This measurement is made
across the entire record. This measurement requires the DJA option and is not
available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.

Examples MEASUREMENT:ADDMEAS FREQUENCY adds a frequency measurement.

MEASUrement:ADDNew (No Query Form)

This command adds the specified measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:ADDNew "QString"

Arguments "QString" is the measurement to add. The argument is of the form

"MEAS<NR1>" where NR1 ≥ 1.

Examples MEASUrement:ADDNew "MEAS11" adds measurement 11.

MEASUrement:ANNOTate
This command sets or queries the annotation state for measurements.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-727

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:ANNOTate {OFF|AUTO}

MEASUrement:ANNOTate?

Arguments OFF turns off measurement annotations.

AUTO turns on visible measurement annotations.

Examples MEASUREMENT:ANNOTATE OFF turns off measurement annotations.

MEASUREMENT:ANNOTATE? might return :MEASUREMENT:ANNOTATION:STATE

OFF, indicating that no measurement annotations are active.

MEASUrement:AUTOset (No Query Form)

This command performs a specified autoset.

Group Measurement, IMDA, DPM, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:AUTOset {DPMAutoset |DPMPReset |EXECute

|THREEPHASEAUTOset |WBGDeskewexec |WBGPREset |WBGGSTIM}

Arguments DPMAutoset performs a power rail autoset operation. Requires a DPM license.

DPMPReset performs a power rail preset operation. Requires a DPM license.

EXECute performs an analysis jitter autoset.

THREEPHASEAUTOset performs an IMDA 3 phase autoset.

WBGDeskewexec performs WBG deskew on specific measurements. Requires

a WBG-DPT license.
WBGPREset performs a measurement specific preset. Requires a WBG-DPT
license.
WBGGSTIM performs gate stimulus for WBG measurement. Requires a WBG-DPT
license.

Examples MEASUREMENT:AUTOSET EXECute performs an analysis jitter autoset.

MEASUREMENT:AUTOSET THREEPHASEAUTOset performs an IMDA 3 phase

autoset.

2-728 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh
This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the
falling edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute. The channel
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh?

Arguments <NR3> is the high reference level, and is the zero percent level when
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLHIGH 1.5 sets the high

reference level of the falling edge to 1.5 V.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLHIGH? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLHIGH 1.0000 indicating
that the high reference level of the falling edge is 1.0 V.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow
This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the
falling edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute. The channel
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow?

Arguments <NR3> is the high reference level, and is the zero percent level when
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLLOW 1.5 sets the low

reference level of the falling edge to 1.5 V.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLLOW? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLLOW 1.5000 indicating
that the low reference level of the falling edge is 1.5 V.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-729

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid
This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the
falling edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute. The channel
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid?

Arguments <NR3> is the mid reference level used to calculate the mid reference level when
the measurement's Ref level method is set to Absolute.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLMID 0 sets the mid reference

level of the falling edge to 0.0 V.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLMID? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLMID 0.0E+0 indicating
that the mid reference level of the falling edge is 0.0 V.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the value of the hysteresis of the reference level
when the source ref level method is set to absolute. The channel number is
specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis?

Arguments <NR3> is the hysteresis value used for autoset.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:HYSTERESIS 30.0000E-3 sets

the reference hysteresis level to 30 mV.
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:HYSTERESIS? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:HYSTERESIS 30.0000E-3
indicating that reference hysteresis level is set to 30 mV.

2-730 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh
This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the
rising edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute. The channel
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh?

Arguments <NR3> is the high reference level of the rising edge when the source ref level
method is set to absolute.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISEHIGH 1.5 sets the high

reference level of the rising edge to 1.5 V.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISEHIGH? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISEHIGH 1.0000 indicating
that the high reference level of the rising edge is 1.0 V.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow
This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the
rising edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute. The channel
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow?

Arguments <NR3> is the low reference level of the rising edge when the source ref level
method is set to absolute.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISELOW 1.5 sets the low

reference level of the rising edge to 1.5 V.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISELOW? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISELOW 1.0000 indicating
that the low reference level of the rising edge is 1.0 V.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-731

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid
This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the
rising edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute. The channel
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid?

Arguments <NR3> is the mid reference level of the rising edge when the source ref level
method is set to absolute.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISEMID 0 sets the mid reference

level of the rising edge to 0.0 V.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISEMID? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISEMID 0.0E+0 indicating
that the mid reference level of the rising edge is 0.0 V.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE
This command sets or queries the reference level type for the source. The channel
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE {SAME|UNIQue}

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE?

Arguments SAME specifies that the absolute reference levels for the specified measurement
channel are the same.
UNIQue specifies that the absolute reference levels for the specified measurement
channel are not the same.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:TYPE SAME set the reference

levels to be the same.

2-732 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:TYPE? might return

:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:TYPE SAME indicating that the
reference levels for absolute measurements are the same.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:BASETop
This command sets or queries the method used to calculate the TOP and BASE,
used to calculate reference levels for the measurement. The channel number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:BASETop
{AUTO|MINMax|MEANhistogram|MODEhistogram|EYEhistogram}
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:BASETop?

Arguments AUTO automatically chooses a reference level method.

MINMax specifies that reference levels are relative to the measurement MIN and
MAX.
MEANhistogram specifies that reference levels are relative to the histogram mean
BASE and TOP.
MODEhistogram specifies that reference levels are relative to the histogram mode
BASE and TOP.
EYEhistogram specifies that reverence levels are relative to the eye histogram
BASE and TOP.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:BASETOP MINMAX specifies that reference

levels are relative to the measurement MIN and MAX.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:BASETOP? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:BASETOP AUTO indicating the
reference levels are chosen automatically.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:METHod
This command sets or queries the method used to calculate reference levels for the
measurement. The channel number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-733

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:METHod {PERCent|ABSolute}

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:METHod?

Arguments PERCent specifies percent reference level units.

ABSolute specifies absolute reference level units.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:METHOD PERCENT sets reference levels to be

calculated in percent.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:METHOD? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:METHOD PERCENT indicating the
reference levels are calculated in percent.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and
1% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the falling
edge when the source ref level method is set to percent. The channel number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP) used to calculate the high
reference level when the measurement's Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLHIGH 90.0000 sets the high

reference level for the falling edge to 90%.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLHIGH? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLHIGH 90.0000 indicating
the high reference level for the falling edge is set to 90%.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and
1% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the falling
edge when the source ref level method is set to percent. The channel number
is specified by x.

2-734 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP) used to calculate the low
reference level when the measurement Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLLOW 10.0000 sets the

reference levels for the falling edge to 10%.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLLOW? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLLOW 10.0000 indicating the
reference levels for the falling edge is set to 10%.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and
1% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling
edge when the source ref level method is set to percent. The channel number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage (where 50% is equal to MID) used to calculate the mid
reference level when the measurement's Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLMiD 50.0000 sets the MID

reference level for the falling edge to 50%.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLMID? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLMID 50.0000 indicating the
MID reference level for the falling edge is set to 50%.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to MAX
and 0% is equal to MIN) used to calculate the hysteresis of the reference level

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-735

Commands listed in alphabetical order

when the measurement ref level method is set to percent. The channel number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis?

Arguments <NR3> is the hysteresis value used for the autoset.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:HYSTERESIS 5.0000 sets the

reference level hysteresis to 5.0 mV.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:HYSTERESIS? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:HYSTERESIS 5.0000 indicating
the reference level hysteresis is set to 5.0 mV.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and
1% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement ref level method is set to percent. The channel number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP) used to calculate the high
reference level when the measurement's Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEHIGH 90.0000 sets the high

reference level for the rising edge to 90%.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEHIGH? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEHIGH 90.0000 indicating
the high reference level for the rising edge is set to 90%.

2-736 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and
1% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement ref level method is set to percent. The channel number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP) used to calculate the mid
reference level when the measurement's Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISELOW 10.0000 sets the

reference levels for the rising edge to 10%.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISELOW? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISELOW 10.0000 indicating the
reference levels for the rising edge is set to 10%.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and
1% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement ref level method is set to percent. The channel number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage (where 50% is equal to MID) used to calculate the mid
reference level when the measurement's Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEMiD 50.0000 sets the MID

reference level for the rising edge to 50%.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-737

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEMID? might return

:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEMID 50.0000 indicating the
MID reference level for the rising edge is set to 50%.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE
This command specifies or queries the reference level percent type for the
measurement. The channel number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE
{TENNinety|TWENtyeighty|CUSTom}
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE?

Arguments TENNinety specifies reference levels at the 10 and 90% levels.

TWENtyeighty specifies reference levels at the 20 and 80% levels.

CUSTom specifies custom reference levels.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:TYPE TENNINETY sets the

reference levels to the 10 and 90% levels.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:TYPE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:TYPE TWENTYEIGHTY indicating
the reference levels are set to the 20 and 80% levels.

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:ADVanced:METHod
This command sets or queries the global advanced clock
recovery method. This will affect measurements whose
:MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:GLOBal flag is set to
1.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:ADVanced:METHod
{NONE|NOMinal|PATTern}
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:ADVanced:METHod?

2-738 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments NONE sets to use no advanced CRD method.

NOMinal sets the advanced CRD method to Nominal Data Rate.

PATTern sets the advanced CDR method to use a Known Data Pattern.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:ADVANCED:METHOD NOMINAL sets the CDR

method to use a Known Data Pattern.
MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:ADVANCED:METHOD? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:ADVANCED:METHOD NONE indicating that no
advanced CRD method will be used.

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:CLOCKFrequency
This command sets or queries the global clock frequency used when fixed constant
clock recovery is used for the measurement. This will affect measurements whose
:MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:GLOBal flag is set to 1.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:CLOCKFrequency <NR3>

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:CLOCKFrequency?

Arguments <NR3> is the global clock frequency used with Constant Clock - Fixed clock
recovery method.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:CLOCKFREQUENCY 2.0E+9 sets the clock

frequency to 2.0 GHz.
:MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:CLOCKFREQUENCY? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:CLOCKFREQUENCY 2.5000E+9 indicating
the clock frequency is set to 2.5 GHz.

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:CLOCKMultiplier
This command sets or queries the global clock multiplier used when explicit
clock recovery is used for the measurement. This will affect measurements whose
:MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:GLOBal flag is set to 1.

Group Measurement

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-739

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:CLOCKMultiplier <NR3>

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:CLOCKMultiplier?

Arguments <NR3> is the global clock multiplier.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:CLOCKMULTIPLIER 1.000 sets the clock

multiplier to 1.000.
MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:CLOCKMULTIPLIER? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:CLOCKMULTIPLIER 1.0000 indicating
the clock multiplier is set to 1.0000.

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:CONSTCLOCKMODe
This command sets or queries the global constant clock mode used when constant
clock recovery is used for the measurement. This will affect measurements whose
:MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:GLOBal flag is set to 1.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:CONSTCLOCKMODe {MEAN|MEDian|FIXed}

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:CONSTCLOCKMODe?

Arguments MEAN sets the constant clock mode to MEAN.

MEDian sets the constant clock mode to MEDian.

FIXed sets the constant clock mode to FIXed.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:CONSTCLOCKMODE MEAN sets the constant

clock mode to MEAN.
MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:CONSTCLOCKMODE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:CONSTCLOCKMODE MEAN indicating the
constant clock mode is set to MEAN.

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:DAMPing
This command sets or queries the global damping value used when PLL clock
recovery is used for the measurement. This will affect measurements whose
:MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:GLOBal flag is set to 1.

2-740 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:DAMPing <NR3>

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:DAMPing?

Arguments <NR3> is the global clock recovery damping value.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:DAMPING

:MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:DAMPING? might return

:MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:DAMPING 700.0000E-3 indicating the
damping value is set to

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:DATAPath
This command sets or queries the global file containing the data pattern used when
known data pattern clock recovery is used for the measurement. This will affect
measurements whose :MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:GLOBal
flag is set to 1.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:DATAPath <QString>

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:DATAPath?

Arguments <QString> is the path and filename, in quotes, of the file containing the data
pattern.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:DATAPATH "C:/E:" sets the data path to C:/E:.

MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:DATAPATH? might return

:MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:DATAPATH "C:/E".

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:DATARate
This command sets or queries the global nominal data bit rate used when
nominal data rate clock recovery is used for the measurement. This will affect
measurements whose :MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:GLOBal
flag is set to 1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-741

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:DATARate <NR3>

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:DATARate?

Arguments <NR3> is the global value for the Nominal data rate.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:DATARATE 2.0e+9 sets the data rate for clock

recovery to 2.0 GHz.
MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:DATARATE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:DATARATE 2.5000E+9 indicating
the data rate is 2.5 GHz.

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:EXPLICITCLOCKMODe
This command sets or queries the global explicit clock mode used when explicit
clock recovery is used for the measurement. This will affect measurements whose
:MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:GLOBal flag is set to 1.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:EXPLICITCLOCKMODe {EDGE|PLL}

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:EXPLICITCLOCKMODe?

Arguments EDGE sets the clock mode to clock edge.

PLL sets the clock mode to phase locked loop.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:EXPLICITCLOCKMODE EDGE sets the clock

mode to edge.
MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:EXPLICITCLOCKMODE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:EXPLICITCLOCKMODE EDGE indicating
the clock mode is edge.

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:JTFBandwidth
This command sets or queries the global JTF bandwidth used when PLL clock
recovery is used for the measurement. This will affect measurements whose
:MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:GLOBal flag is set to 1.

2-742 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:JTFBandwidth <NR3>

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:JTFBandwidth?

Arguments <NR3> is the global clock recovery JTF bandwidth.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:JTFBANDWIDTH 2.0e6 sets the bandwidth

to 2.0 MHz.
MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:JTFBANDWIDTH? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:JTFBANDWIDTH 1.0000E+6 indicating the
bandwidth is 1.0 MHz.

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:LOOPBandwidth
This command sets or queries the global loop bandwidth used when PLL clock
recovery is used for the measurement. This will affect measurements whose
:MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:GLOBal flag is set to 1.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:LOOPBandwidth <NR3>

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:LOOPBandwidth?

Arguments <NR3> is the global loop bandwidth.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:LOOPBANDWIDTH 2.0e6 sets the loop

bandwidth to 2.0 MHz.
MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:LOOPBANDWIDTH? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:LOOPBANDWIDTH 1.0000E+6 indicating the
loop bandwidth is 1.0 MHz.

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:MEANAUTOCalculate
This command sets or queries how often the clock is calculated when constant
clock recovery is used for the measurement. This will affect measurements whose
:MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:GLOBal flag is set to 1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-743

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:MEANAUTOCalculate {FIRST|EVERY}

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:MEANAUTOCalculate?

Arguments FIRST calculates the clock on the first acquisition.

EVERY calculates the clock on every acquisition.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:MEANAUTOCALCULATE EVERY calculates the

clock on every acquisition.
MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:MEANAUTOCALCULATE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:MEANAUTOCALCULATE FIRST indicating the
clock is calculated on the first acquisition.

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:METHod
This command sets or queries the global clock recovery method
for the measurement. This will affect measurements whose
:MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:GLOBal flag is set to 1.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:METHod
{PLL|CONSTANTCLOCK|EXPLICITCLOCK}
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:METHod?

Arguments PLL specifies using the phase locked loop.

CONSTANTCLOCK specifies using a constant clock.

EXPLICITCLOCK specifies using an explicit clock.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:METHOD EXPLICITCLOCK specifies using

an explicit clock.
MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:METHOD? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:METHOD PLL indicating the
method is set to PLL.

2-744 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:MODel
This command sets or queries the global phase locked loop (PLL) clock recovery
model used when PLL clock recovery is used for the measurement. This will affect
measurements whose :MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:GLOBal
flag is set to 1.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:MODel {TYPE1|TYPE2}

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:MODel?

Arguments TYPE1 PLL clock recovery uses PLL model type I.

TYPE2 PLL clock recovery uses PLL model type II.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:MODEL TYPE2 sets the model to type 2.

MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:MODEL? might return

:MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:MODEL TYPE1 indicating the
recovery model is type 1.

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:NOMINALOFFset
This command sets or queries the global offset value used when explicit clock
recovery is used for the measurement. This will affect measurements whose
:MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:GLOBal flag is set to 1.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:NOMINALOFFset <NR3>

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:NOMINALOFFset?

Arguments <NR3> is the global clock offset.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:NOMINALOFFSET 1.0 sets the offset to 1.0.

MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:NOMINALOFFSET? might return

:MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:NOMINALOFFSET 0.0E+0 indicating the
offset is set to 0.0.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-745

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:NOMINALOFFset:SELECTIONtype
This command sets or queries the global offset type used when explicit clock
recovery is used for the measurement. This will affect measurements whose
:MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:GLOBal flag is set to 1.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:NOMINALOFFset:SELECTIONtype
{AUTO|MANUAL}
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:NOMINALOFFset:SELECTIONtype?

Arguments AUTO sets the selection type to AUTO.

MANUAL sets the selection type to MANUAL.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:NOMINALOFFSET:SELECTIONTYPE AUTO

sets the selection type to auto.
MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:NOMINALOFFSET:SELECTIONTYPE? might
return :MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:NOMINALOFFSET:SELECTIONTYPE
MANUAL indicating the selection type is manual.

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:STAndard
This command sets or queries the global communications standard used when
PLL clock recovery is used for the measurement. This will affect measurements
whose :MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:GLOBal flag is set to 1.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:STAndard {CUSTom| ENET100|

FW1394BS400B| FW1394BS800B| FW1394BS1600B| FBD1| FBD2|
FBD3| FC133| FC266| FC531| FC1063| FC2125| FC4250|
FC8500| ENET1000| IBA2500| IBA_GEN2| OC1| OC3| OC12| OC48|
PCIE_GEN1| PCIE_GEN2| PCIE_GEN3| RIO125| RIO250| RIO3125|
SAS15_NOSSC| SAS3_NOSSC| SAS6_NOSSC| SAS12_NOSSC| SAS15_SSC|
SAS3_SSC| SAS6_SSC| SAS12_SSC| SATA_GEN1| SATA_GEN2|
SATA_GEN3| USB3| XAUI| XAUI_GEN2}
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:STAndard?

Arguments CUSTom sets a custom standard.

ENET100 sets the standard to ENET100.

2-746 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

FW1394BS400B sets the standard to FW1394BS400B.

FW1394BS800B sets the standard to FW1394BS800B.

FW1394BS1600B sets the standard to FW1394BS1600B.

FBD1 sets the standard to FBD1.

FBD2 sets the standard to FBD2.

FBD3 sets the standard to FBD3.

FC133 sets the standard to FC133.

FC266 sets the standard to FC266.

FC531 sets the standard to FC531.

FC1063 sets the standard to FC1063.

FC2125 sets the standard to FC2125.

FC4250 sets the standard to FC4250.

FC8500 sets the standard to FC8500.

ENET1000 sets the standard to ENET1000.

IBA2500 sets the standard to IBA2500.

IBA_GEN2 sets the standard to IBA_GEN2.

OC1 sets the standard to OC1.

OC3 sets the standard to OC3.

OC12 sets the standard to OC12.

OC48 sets the standard to OC48.

PCIE_GEN1 sets the standard to PCIE_GEN1.

PCIE_GEN2 sets the standard to PCIE_GEN2.

PCIE_GEN3 sets the standard to PCIE_GEN3.

RIO125 sets the standard to RIO125.

RIO250 sets the standard to RIO250.

RIO3125 sets the standard to RIO3125.

SAS15_NOSSC sets the standard to SAS15_NOSSC.

SAS3_NOSSC sets the standard to SAS3_NOSSC.

SAS6_NOSSC sets the standard to SAS6_NOSSC.

SAS12_NOSSC sets the standard to SAS12_NOSSC.

SAS15_SSC sets the standard to SAS15_SSC.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-747

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SAS3_SSC sets the standard to SAS3_SSC.

SAS6_SSC sets the standard to SAS6_SSC.

SAS12_SSC sets the standard to SAS12_SSC.

SATA_GEN1 sets the standard to SATA_GEN1.

SATA_GEN2 sets the standard to SATA_GEN2.

SATA_GEN3 sets the standard to SATA_GEN3.

USB3 sets the standard to USB3.

XAUI sets the standard to XAUI.

XAUI_GEN2 sets the standard to XAUI_GEN2.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:STANDARD PCIE_GEN3 sets the standard to

PCIE_GEN3.
MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:STANDARD? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:STANDARD PCIE_GEN1 indicating
the standard is set to PCIE_GEN1.

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:TDCOMPensation
This command sets the PLL clock recovery loop feedback
time-constants such that the actual transfer function matches closely
to a mathematical filter polynomial. This will affect measurements whose
:MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:GLOBal flag is set to 1.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:TDCOMPensation {1|0}

MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:TDCOMPensation?

Arguments 1 specifies automatic transition density compensation is on.

0 specifies automatic transition density compensation is off.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:TDCOMPENSATION 1 sets automatic transition

density compensation to on for PLL.
MEASUREMENT:CLOCKRECOVERY:TDCOMPENSATION? might return
:MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:TDCOMPensation 0, indicating automatic
transition density compensation is off.

2-748 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:DELete (No Query Form)

The command deletes the specified measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:DELete <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the measurement to delete. Argument is of the form "MEAS<NR1>"

where <NR1> is ≥1.

Examples MEASUREMENT:DELETE "MEAS4" deletes measurement 4.

MEASUrement:DELETEALL (No Query Form)

This command deletes all the active instances of measurements defined in the
scope application.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:DELETEALL

Examples MEASUREMENT:DELETEALL deletes all the active instances of measurements.

MEASUrement:DIRacmodel
This command sets or queries the dirac model used to separate random from
deterministic jitter for jitter measurements.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:DIRacmodel {PCIExpress|FIBREchannel}

MEASUrement:DIRacmodel?

Arguments PCIExpress specifies the PCIExpress dirac model.

FIBREchannel specifies the FIBREchannel dirac model.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-749

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUREMENT:DIRACMODEL FIBRECHANNEL sets the dirac model to

FIBRECHANNEL.
MEASUREMENT:DIRACMODEL? might return :MEASUREMENT:DIRACMODEL
PCIEXPRESS indicating the dirac model is set to PCIECPRESS.

MEASUrement:DISPLAYUnits
This command sets or queries the display units used for jitter summary
measurements.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:DISPLAYUnits {SEConds|UNITINtervals}

MEASUrement:DISPLAYUnits?

Arguments SEConds set the display units to seconds.

UNITINtervals set the display units to unit intervals.

Examples MEASUREMENT:DISPLAYUNITS UNITINTERVALS sets the display units to unit

intervals.
MEASUREMENT:DISPLAYUNITS? might return :MEASUREMENT:DISPLAYUNITS
SECONDS indicating the display units are seconds.

MEASUrement:EDGE<x>
This command sets or queries the type of the edge for the measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:EDGE<x> {RISE|FALL|BOTH}

Arguments FALL specifies the falling edge of the waveform.

RISE specifies the rising edge of the waveform.

BOTH specifies both a rising and falling edge of the waveform.

2-750 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:EDGE2
MEASUrement:EDGE2? might return :MEASUREMENT:EDGE2 BOTH
indicating

MEASUrement:EYERENDER
This command sets or queries the state of high-performance eye rendering for an
eye diagram.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:EYERENDER {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

MEASUrement:EYERENDER?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables high-performance eye rendering for an eye diagram; any
other value turns this feature on.
OFF disables high-performance eye rendering for an eye diagram.

ON enables high-performance eye rendering for an eye diagram.

Examples MEASUREMENT:EYERENDER

MEASUREMENT:EYERENDER? might return :MEASUREMENT:EYERENDER 1

indicating high-performance eye rendering is on.

MEASUrement:FILTers:BLANKingtime
This command sets or queries the global filter blanking time.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:FILTers:BLANKingtime <NR3>

MEASUrement:FILTers:BLANKingtime?

Arguments <NR3> is the current filter blanking time.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-751

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUREMENT:FILTERS:BLANKINGTIME 3.0 sets the blanking time to 3.0.

MEASUREMENT:FILTERS:BLANKINGTIME? might return

:MEASUREMENT:FILTERS:BLANKINGTIME 4.0000 indicating the
blanking time is 4.0.

MEASUrement:FILTers:HIGHPass:FREQ
This command sets or queries the global high pass filter frequency for the
measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:FILTers:HIGHPass:FREQ <NR3>

MEASUrement:FILTers:HIGHPass:FREQ?

Arguments <NR3> is the current high pass filter frequency.

Examples MEASUREMENT:FILTERS:HIGHPASS:FREQ 20.0e6 sets the frequency to

20 MHz.
MEASUREMENT:FILTERS:HIGHPASS:FREQ? might return
:MEASUREMENT:FILTERS:HIGHPASS:FREQ 10.0000E+6 indicating
the filter frequency is set to 10.0 MHz.

MEASUrement:FILTers:HIGHPass:SPEC
This command sets or queries the global high pass filter order for the measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:FILTers:HIGHPass:SPEC {NONE|FIRST|SECOND|THIRD}

MEASUrement:FILTers:HIGHPass:SPEC?

Arguments NONE specifies no high pass filter.

FIRST specifies a first order high pass filter.

SECOND specifies a second order high pass filter.

THIRD specifies a third order high pass filter.

2-752 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUREMENT:FILTERS:HIGHPASS:SPEC NONE specifies no high pass filter.

MEASUREMENT:FILTERS:HIGHPASS:SPEC? might return

:MEASUREMENT:FILTERS:HIGHPASS:SPEC SECOND indicating a
second order high pass filter.

MEASUrement:FILTers:LOWPass:FREQ
This command sets or queries the global low pass filter cutoff frequency for the
measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:FILTers:LOWPass:FREQ <NR3>

MEASUrement:FILTers:LOWPass:FREQ?

Arguments <NR3> is the current low pass filter frequency.

Examples MEASUREMENT:FILTERS:LOWPASS:FREQ 20.0e6 sets the low pass frequency

to 20 MHz.
MEASUREMENT:FILTERS:LOWPASS:FREQ? might return
:MEASUREMENT:FILTERS:LOWPASS:FREQ 10.0000E+6 indicating
the low pass frequency is 10.0 MHz.

MEASUrement:FILTers:LOWPass:SPEC
This command sets or queries the global low pass filter order for the measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:FILTers:LOWPass:SPEC {NONE|FIRST|SECOND|THIRD}

MEASUrement:FILTers:LOWPass:SPEC?

Arguments NONE specifies no low pass filter.

FIRST specifies a first order low pass filter.

SECOND specifies a second order low pass filter.

THIRD specifies a third order low pass filter.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-753

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUREMENT:FILTERS:LOWPASS:SPEC SECOND specifies a second order low

pass filter.
MEASUREMENT:FILTERS:LOWPASS:SPEC? might return
:MEASUREMENT:FILTERS:LOWPASS:SPEC NONE indicating no low
pass filter.

MEASUrement:FILTers:RAMPtime
This command sets or queries the global filter ramp time for the measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:FILTers:RAMPtime <NR3>

MEASUrement:FILTers:RAMPtime?

Arguments <NR3> is the current filter ramp time.

Examples MEASUREMENT:FILTERS:RAMPTIME 3.0 sets the ramp time to 3.0.

MEASUREMENT:FILTERS:RAMPTIME? might return

:MEASUREMENT:FILTERS:RAMPTIME 2.0000 indicating the ramp time is 2.0.

MEASUrement:GATing
This command sets or queries the global gating type for the measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:GATing {NONE|SCREEN|CURSor|LOGic|SEARch|TIMe}

MEASUrement:GATing?

Related Commands MEASUrement:GATing:ENDtime

MEASUrement:GATing:STARTtime

Arguments NONE turns off measurement gating.

SCREen turns on gating, using the left and right edges of the screen.

CURSor limits measurements to the portion of the waveform between the vertical
bar cursors, even if they are off screen.

2-754 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

LOGic specifies that measurements are taken only on the portion of the waveform
where the logic source is in the active state.
SEARCH specifies that measurements are taken based on search criteria.

TIMe limits measurements to the portion of the waveform between the Start and
End gate times

Examples MEASUREMENT:GATING SCREEN turns on measurement gating, using the left

and right edges of the screen.
MEASUREMENT:GATING? might return :MEASUREMENT:GATING CURSOR,
indicating that measurements are limited to the portion of the waveform between
the vertical bar cursors.

MEASUrement:GATing:ACTive
This command sets or queries the global gating active level used for logic gating.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:GATing:ACTive {HIGH|LOW}

MEASUrement:GATing:ACTive?

Arguments HIGH specifies the gate is HIGH.

LOW specifies the gate is LOW.

Examples MEASUREMENT:GATING:ACTIVE LOW specifies a low gate.

MEASUREMENT:GATING:ACTIVE? might return

:MEASUREMENT:GATING:ACTIVE HIGH indicating the gate is high.

MEASUrement:GATing:ENDtime
Sets or queries the end gate time for all measurements that use Global gating.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:GATing:ENDtime <NR3>

MEASUrement:GATing:ENDtime?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-755

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands MEASUrement:GATing

Arguments <NR3> is the time gating end gate time in seconds. The valid range is -10000
s to 10000 s.

Examples MEASUrement:GATing:ENDtime 5.31e-2 sets the global end gate time to

53.1 ms.
MEASUrement:GATing:ENDtime? might return 1.05 indicating that the global
end gate time is 1.05 s

MEASUrement:GATing:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the global gating hysteresis value used for logic
gating.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:GATing:HYSTeresis <NR3>

MEASUrement:GATing:HYSTeresis?

Arguments <NR3> is the gating hysteresis.

Examples MEASUREMENT:GATING:HYSTERESIS 40.0e-3 sets the hysteresis to 40 mV.

MEASUREMENT:GATING:HYSTERESIS? might return

:MEASUREMENT:GATING:HYSTERESIS 30.0000E-3 indicating the hysteresis
is 30 mV.

MEASUrement:GATing:LOGICSource
This command sets or queries the gating data source used for logic gating.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:GATing:LOGICSource {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

MEASUrement:GATing:LOGICSource?

2-756 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source.

Examples MEASUREMENT:GATING:LOGICSOURCE MATH1 sets the logic source to MATH 1.

MEASUREMENT:GATING:LOGICSOURCE? might return

:MEASUREMENT:GATING:LOGICSOURCE CH6 indicating the logic source is
channel 6.

MEASUrement:GATing:MIDRef
This command sets or queries the global gating mid ref value used for logic gating.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:GATing:MIDRef <NR3>

MEASUrement:GATing:MIDRef?

Arguments <NR3> is the mid ref value for gating.

Examples MEASUREMENT:GATING:MIDREF 2.0 set the gating mid ref to 2.0 V.

MEASUREMENT:GATING:MIDREF? might return

:MEASUREMENT:GATING:MIDREF 1.5000 indicating the gating mid ref is 1.5 V.

MEASUrement:GATing:SEARCHSource
This command sets or queries the global gating search source when the gating
type is search.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:GATing:SEARCHSource SEARCH<x>

MEASUrement:GATing:SEARCHSource?

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search source.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-757

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUREMENT:GATING:SEARCHSOURCE SEARCH1 set the search source to

search 1.
MEASUREMENT:GATING:SEARCHSOURCE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:GATING:SEARCHSOURCE UNDEFINED indicating the
search source is not defined.

MEASUrement:GATing:STARTtime
Sets or queries the start gate time for all measurements that use Global gating.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:GATing:STARTtime <NR3>

MEASUrement:GATing:STARTtime?

Related Commands MEASUrement:GATing

Arguments <NR3> is the time gating start gate time in seconds. The valid range is -10000
s to 10000 s.

Examples MEASUrement:GATing:STARTtime -1.5e-3 sets the global start gate time to

-1.5 ms.
MEASUrement:GATing:STARTtime? might return 3.0e-9, indicating that the
global start gate time is 3 ns.

MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:CONFIGuration
This command sets or queries the global input and output configuration.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:CONFIGuration {INPUT|OUTPUT}

MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:CONFIGuration?

Arguments INPUT specifies the source settings configuration as input.

OUTPUT specifies the source settings configuration as output.

2-758 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:CONFIGURATION INPUT sets the source settings

configuration as input.
MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:CONFIGURATION? might return
:MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:CONFIGuration INPUT, indicating the source
settings configuration is input.

MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:EDGEQUALifier
This command sets or queries global input edge qualifier source.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:EDGEQUALifier {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:EDGEQUALifier?

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source.

Examples MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:EDGEQUALIFIER CH1 sets the global input edge

qualifier source as channel 1.
MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:EDGEQUALIFIER? might return
:MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:EDGEQUALifier CH1, indicating the global input
edge qualifier source is channel 1.

MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:INLOWPass:FREQ
This command sets or queries global input low pass filter frequency.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:INLOWPass:FREQ <NR3>

MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:INLOWPass:FREQ?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the global input low pass filter frequency. The argument range is
20 Hz to 10e6 Hz.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-759

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:INLOWPASS:FREQ 1e3 sets the global input low

pass filter frequency as 1e3 Hz.
MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:INLOWPASS:FREQ? might return
:MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:INLOWPass:FREQ 1e3, indicating the global
input low pass filter frequency is 1e3 Hz.

MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:INLOWPass:SPEC
This command sets or queries global input low pass filter order.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:INLOWPass:SPEC
{NONE|FIRST|SECOND|THIRD}
MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:INLOWPass:SPEC?

Arguments NONE specifies the global input low pass filter order as none.

FIRST specifies the global input low pass filter order as first.

SECOND specifies the global input low pass filter order as second.

THIRD specifies the global input low pass filter order as third.

Examples MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:INLOWPASS:SPEC FIRST sets the global input

low pass filter order as first.
MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:INLOWPASS:SPEC? might return
:MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:INLOWPass:SPEC FIRST, indicating the global
input low pass filter order is first.

MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:L2LTOL2N
This command enables the Line-to-Line to Line-to-Neutral Conversion.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:L2LTOL2N {0|1}

MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:L2LTOL2N?

Examples MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:L2LTOL2N 1 enables Line-to-Line to

Line-to-Neutral Conversion.

2-760 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:L2LTOL2N? might return

:MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:L2LTOL2N 0, indicating Line-to-Line to
Line-to-Neutral Conversion is disabled.

MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:LINESelected
This command sets or queries global input select lines.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:LINESelected {ABCB|ACBC|BACA|AN|BN|CN}

MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:LINESelected?

Arguments ABCB specifies the global input select lines as ABCB.

ACBC specifies the global input select lines as ACBC.

BACA specifies the global input select lines as BACA.

AN specifies the global input select lines as AN.

BN specifies the global input select lines as BN.

CN specifies the global input select lines as CN.

Examples MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:LINESELECTED ABCB sets the global input select

lines as ABCB.
MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:LINESELECTED? might return
:MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:LINESelected ABCB, indicating the
global input select lines is ABCB.

MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTEDGEQUALifier
This command sets or queries global output edge qualifier source.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTEDGEQUALifier
{CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}
MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTEDGEQUALifier?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-761

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source.

Examples MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:OUTEDGEQUALIFIER CH1 sets the global output

edge qualifier source as channel 1.
MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:OUTEDGEQUALIFIER? might return
:MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTEDGEQUALifier CH1, indicating the global
output edge qualifier source is channel 1.

MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTLOWPass:FREQ
This command sets or queries global output low pass filter frequency.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTLOWPass:FREQ <NR3>

MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTLOWPass:FREQ?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the global output low pass filter frequency. The argument range
is 20 Hz to 10e6 Hz.

Examples MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:OUTLOWPASS:FREQ 1e3 sets the global output

low pass filter frequency as 1e3 Hz.
MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:OUTLOWPASS:FREQ? might return
:MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTLOWPass:FREQ 1e3, indicating the global
output low pass filter frequency is 1e3 Hz.

MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTLOWPass:SPEC
This command sets or queries global output low pass filter order.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTLOWPass:SPEC
{NONE|FIRST|SECOND|THIRD}
MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTLOWPass:SPEC?

2-762 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments NONE specifies the global output low pass filter order as none.

FIRST specifies the global output low pass filter order as first.

SECOND specifies the global output low pass filter order as second.

THIRD specifies the global output low pass filter order as third.

Examples MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:OUTLOWPASS:SPEC FIRST sets the global output

low pass filter order as first.
MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:OUTLOWPASS:SPEC? might return
:MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTLOWPass:SPEC FIRST, indicating the global
output low pass filter order is first.

MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTL2LTOL2N
This command sets or queries global output Line-to-Line to Line-to-Neutral
Conversion.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTL2LTOL2N {0|1}

MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTL2LTOL2N?

Examples MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:OUTL2LTOL2N 1 enables global output Line-to-Line

to Line-to-Neutral Conversion.
MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:OUTL2LTOL2N? might return
:MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTL2LTOL2N 0, indicating global
output Line-to-Line to Line-to-Neutral Conversion is disabled.

MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTLINESelected
This command sets or queries global output select lines.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTLINESelected
{XYZY|XZYZ|YXZX|XN|YN|ZN}
MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTLINESelected?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-763

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments XYZY specifies the global output select lines as XYZY.

XZYZ specifies the global output select lines as XZYZ.

YXZX specifies the global output select lines as YXZX.

XN specifies the global output select lines as XN.

YN specifies the global output select lines as YN.

ZN specifies the global output select lines as ZN.

Examples MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:OUTLINESELECTED XYZY sets the global output

select lines as XYZY.
MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:OUTLINESELECTED? might return
:MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTLINESelected XYZY, indicating the global
output select lines is XYZY.

MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTSOURCE
This command sets or queries global output source.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTSOURCE {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTSOURCE?

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source.

Examples MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:OUTSOURCE CH1 sets the global output source as

channel 1.
MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:OUTSOURCE? might return
:MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTSOURCE CH1, indicating the global
output source is channel 1.

MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTWIRing
This command sets or queries the global output wiring.

2-764 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTWIRing
{P1W2V1I1|P3W3V2I2|P3W3V3I3|P3W4|DCP1W2}
MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTWIRing?

Arguments P1W2V1I1 specifies 1 phase- 2 wire (with 1 voltage and 1 current sources) wiring
configuration.
P3W3V2I2 specifies 3 phase- 3 wire (with 2 voltage and 2 current sources) wiring
configuration.
P3W3V3I3 specifies 3 phase- 3 wire (with 3 voltage and 3 current sources) wiring
configuration.
P3W3 specifies 3 phase and 3 wire, the 3rd wire being Neutral.

DCP1W2 specifies DC 1 phase and 2 wire, the 2nd wire being Neutral.

Examples MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:OUTWIRING P3W4 sets the global output wiring

configuration to P3W3.
MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:OUTWIRING? might return
:MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTWIRing P3W3V3I3, indicating the
global output wiring configuration is P3W3V3I3.

MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:SOURCE
This command sets or queries global input source.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:SOURCE {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:SOURCE?

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as source.

MATH<x> specifies a math channel as source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source.

Examples MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:SOURCE CH1 sets the global input source as channel

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-765

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:SOURCE? might return

:MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:SOURCE CH1, indicating theglobal input source is
channel 1.

MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:WIRing
This command sets or queries the wiring configuration for the measurement.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:WIRing
{P1W2V1I1|P1W3V2I2|P3W3V2I2|P3W3V3I3|P3W3|DCP1W2}
MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:WIRing?

Arguments P1W2V1I1 specifies 1 phase- 2 wire (with 1 voltage and 1 current sources) wiring
configuration.
P1W3V2I2 specifies 1 phase- 3 wire (with 2 voltage and 2 current sources) wiring
configuration.
P3W3V2I2 specifies 3 phase- 3 wire (with 2 voltage and 2 current sources) wiring
configuration.
P3W3V3I3 specifies 3 phase- 3 wire (with 3 voltage and 3 current sources) wiring
configuration.
P3W3 specifies 3 phase and 3 wire, the 3rd wire being Neutral.

DCP1W2 specifies DC 1 phase and 2 wire, the 2nd wire being Neutral.

Examples MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:WIRING P3W4 sets the wiring configuration to

P3W3.
MEASUREMENT:HIGHLEVEL:WIRING? might return
:MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:WIRing P3W3V3I3, indicating the wiring
configuration is P3W3V3I3.

MEASUrement:INTERp
This command sets or queries the interpolation mode used to locate edge crossings.

Group Measurement

2-766 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:INTERp {AUTO|SINX|LINear}

MEASUrement:INTERp?

Arguments AUTO automatically selects the interpolation mode.

SINX specifies sin(x)/x interpolation, where acquired points are fit to a curve.

LINear specifies linear interpolation, where acquired points are connected with
straight lines.

Examples MEASUREMENT:INTERP SINX set the interpolation mode to sin(x)/x.

MEASUREMENT:INTERP? might return :MEASUREMENT:INTERP AUTO indicating

the interpolation mode is auto.

MEASUrement:JITTermodel
This command sets or queries the model used to separate random from
deterministic jitter for jitter measurements.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:JITTermodel {SPECTRAL|SPECTRALBUJ}

MEASUrement:JITTermodel?

Arguments SPECTRAL sets the jitter separation model to spectral only.

SPECTRALBUJ sets the jitter separation model to spectral plus BUJ.

Examples MEASUREMENT:JITTERMODEL SPECTRAL set the jitter model to spectral.

MEASUREMENT:JITTERMODEL? might return :MEASUREMENT:JITTERMODEL

SPECTRAL indicating the jitter model is set to spectral.

MEASUrement:LIST? (Query Only)

This query returns a comma separated list of all currently defined measurements.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:LIST?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-767

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Returns Returns a list of all currently defined measurements. When no measurements are
defined, the command returns NONE.

Examples MEASUREMENT:LIST? might return :MEASUREMENT:LIST

MEAS1,MEAS2,MEAS3,MEAS4,MEAS5,MEAS6 indicating 6 measurements are
defined.

MEASUrement:LOCKRJ
This command sets or queries the state of RJ locking.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:LOCKRJ {OFF|ON|1|0}

MEASUrement:LOCKRJ?

Arguments ON indicates that RJ locking is active.

OFF indicates that RJ locking is off.

1 turns on RJ locking. Any number value other than 0 will turn RJ locking on.

0 turns off RJ locking.

Examples MEASUREMENT:LOCKRJ ON activates RJ locking

MEASUrement:LOCKRJValue
This command sets or queries the RJ lock value.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:LOCKRJValue <NR3>

MEASUrement:LOCKRJValue?

Arguments <NR3> default value = 1e-12; minimum value = 1e-15; maximum value = 1.

2-768 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUREMENT:LOCKRJVALUE 1 sets the lock value to the maximum value of 1.

MEASUREMENT:LOCKRJVALUE? might return :MEASUREMENT:LOCKRJVALUE

1.0000E-12, indicating the lock value is set to the default value of 1e-12.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh
This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the
falling edge when the measurement ref level method is set to absolute. The math
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh?

Arguments MATH<x> specifies the math number.

<NR3> is the high reference level, and is the zero percent level when
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH1:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh 1.5 sets the

reference level to 1.5 V.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLHIGH 1.0000
indicating the reference level is 1.0 V.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow
This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the
falling edge when the measuement ref level method is set to absolute. The math
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-769

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MATH<x> specifies the math number.

<NR3> is the high reference level, and is the zero percent level when
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow -1.5 sets the

reference level to -1.5 V.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLLOW -1.0000
indicating the reference level is -1.0 V.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid
This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the
falling edge when the measurement ref level method is set to absolute. The math
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid?

Arguments MATH<x> specifies the math number.

<NR3> is the mid reference level (where 50% is equal to MID) used to calculate the
mid reference level when the measurement's Ref level method is set to Absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid 0.0 sets the

reference level to 0.0 V.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLMID 0.0E+0 indicating
the reference level is 0.0 V.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the value of the hysteresis of the reference level
when the measurement ref level method is set to absolute. The math number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

2-770 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis?

Arguments MATH<x> specifies the math number.

<NR3> is the hysteresis value used for the autoset.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis 20.0E-3 sets

the hysteresis to 20.0 mV.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:HYSTERESIS 30.0000E-3
indicating the hysteresis value is 30.0 mV.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh
This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the
rising edge when the measurement ref level method is set to absolute. The math
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh?

Arguments MATH<x> specifies the math number.

<NR3> is the high reference level, and is the zero percent level when
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh 1.5 sets the

reference level to 1.5 V.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISEHIGH 1.0000
indicating the reference level is 1.0 V.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow
This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the
rising edge when the measurement ref level method is set to absolute. The math
number is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-771

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow?

Arguments MATH<x> specifies the math number.

<NR3> is the high reference level, and is the zero percent level when
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow -1.5 sets the

reference level to -1.5 V.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISELOW -1.0000
indicating the reference level is -1.0 V.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid
This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the
rising edge when the measurement ref level method is set to absolute. The math
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid?

Arguments MATH<x> specifies the math number.

<NR3> is the mid reference level (where 50% is equal to MID) used to calculate
the mid reference level when the measurement Ref level method is set to Absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid 30.0E-3 sets the

reference level to 30 mV.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISEMID 0.0E+0 indicating
the reference level is 0.0 V.

2-772 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE
This command sets or queries the reference level type for the measurement. The
math number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE {SAME|UNIQue}

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE?

Arguments MATH<x> specifies the math number.

SAME specifies that the absolute levels are set the same.

UNIQue specifies that the absolute levels can be set independently.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE UNIQUE specifies that

the absolute levels can be set independently.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:TYPE SAME indicating that
the absolute levels are set the same.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:BASETop
This command sets or queries the method used to calculate the TOP and BASE
used to calculate reference levels for the measurement. The math number is
specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:BASETop
{AUTO|MINMax|MEANhistogram| MODEhistogram|EYEhistogram}
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:BASETop?

Arguments MATH<x> specifies the math number.

AUTO automatically chooses a reference level method.

MINMax specifies that reference levels are relative to the measurement MIN and
MAX.
MEANhistogram specifies that reference levels are relative to the histogram mean
BASE and TOP.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-773

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MODEhistogram specifies that reference levels are relative to the histogram mode
BASE and TOP.
EYEhistogram specifies that reverence levels are relative to the eye histogram
BASE and TOP.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH1:REFLevels:BASETop MINMax specifies that reference

levels are relative to the measurement MIN and MAX.
MEASUrement:MATH1:REFLevels:BASETop? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:BASETOP AUTO indicating the instrument
automatically chooses a reference level method.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:METHod
This command sets or queries the method used to calculate reference levels for the
measurement. The math number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:METHod {PERCent|ABSolute}

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:METHod?

Arguments MATH<x> specifies the math number.

PERCent specifies that the reference levels are calculated as a percent

relative to HIGH and LOW. The percentages are defined using the
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevel:PERCent commands.
ABSolute specifies that the reference levels are set explicitly using the
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute commands. This method is
useful when precise values are required.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:METHod ABSOLUTE specifies that the

reference levels are set explicitly
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:METHod? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:METHOD PERCENT indicating reference
levels are in percent relative to HIGH and LOW.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and
1% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the falling

2-774 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

edge when the measurement ref level method is set to percent. The math number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh?

Arguments MATH<x> specifies the math number.

<NR3> is the percentage (where 100% is equal to HIGH) used to calculate the
high reference level when the measurement Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh 95 sets the reference

level to 95% of TOP.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLHIGH 90.0000
indicating the reference level is set to 90% of TOP.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and
1% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the falling
edge when the measurement ref level method is set to percent. The math number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow?

Arguments MATH<x> specifies the math number.

<NR3> is the percentage (where 100% is equal to HIGH) used to calculate the mid
reference level when the measurement's Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow 5 sets the reference

level to 5% of TOP.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLLOW 10.0000 indicating
the reference level is set to 10% of TOP.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-775

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and
1% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling
edge when the measurement ref level method is set to percent. The math number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid?

Arguments MATH<x> specifies the math number.

<NR3> is the percentage (where 50% is equal to MID) used to calculate the mid
reference level when the measurement Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid 50 sets the reference

level to 50% of TOP.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLMID 50.0000 indicating
the reference level is set to 50% of TOP.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to MAX
and 0% is equal to MIN) used to calculate the hysteresis of the reference level
when the measurement ref level method is set to percent. The math number is
specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis?

Arguments MATH<x> specifies the math number.

<NR3> is the hysteresis value used for the autoset.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis 2.5 sets the

hysteresis to 2.5% of MAX

2-776 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:HYSTERESIS 5.0000
indicating the hysteresis is set to 5% of MAX.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and
1% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement ref level method is set to percent. The math number is
specified by x. The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh?

Arguments MATH<x> specifies the math number.

<NR3> is the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP) used to calculate the high
reference level when the measurement's Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh 95 sets the reference

level to 95% of TOP.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEHIGH 90.0000
indicating the reference level is set to 90% of TOP.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and
1% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement ref level method is set to percent. The math number is
specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-777

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MATH<x> specifies the math number.

<NR3> is the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP) used to calculate the mid
reference level when the measurement Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow 5 sets the reference

level to 5% of TOP.
MEASUrement:MATH2REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISELOW 10.0000 indicating
the reference level is set to 10% of TOP.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and
1% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement ref level method is set to percent. The math number is
specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid?

Arguments MATH<x> specifies the math number.

<NR3> is the percentage (where 50% is equal to MID) used to calculate the mid
reference level when the measurement Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid 50 sets the reference

level to 50% of TOP.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEMID 50.0000 indicating
the reference level is set to 50% of TOP.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE
This command specifies or queries the reference level percent type for the
measurement. The math number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

2-778 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE
{TENNinety|TWENtyeighty|CUSTom}
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE?

Arguments MATH<x> specifies the math number.

TENNinety sets the values for Low, Mid and High Ref to 10%, 50% and 90%
respectively.
TWENtyeighty sets the values for Low, Mid and High Ref are set to 20%, 50%
and 80% respectively.
CUSTom allows setting other reference level percents.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE TWENTYEIGHTY sets the

values for Low, Mid and High Ref are set to 20%, 50% and 80% respectively.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:TYPE TENNINETY indicating
the reference levels are set to 10%, 50% and 90%.

MEASUrement:MEASRange:MAX
This command sets or queries the global range maximum value.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEASRange:MAX <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEASRange:MAX?

Arguments <NR3> is the maximum measurement range limit value.

Examples MEASUREMENT:MEASRANGE:MAX 1.5 sets the maximum range limit to 1.5 V.

MEASUREMENT:MEASRANGE:MAX? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEASRANGE:MAX 1.0000 indicating the maximum range
limit is 1.0 V.

MEASUrement:MEASRange:MIN
This command sets or queries the global range minimum value.

Group Measurement

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-779

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEASRange:MIN <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEASRange:MIN?

Arguments <NR3> is the minimum measurement range limit value.

Examples MEASUREMENT:MEASRANGE:MIN 30.0E-3 sets the minimum measurement range

limit to 30.0 mV.
MEASUREMENT:MEASRANGE:MIN? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEASRANGE:MIN 0.0E+0 indicating minimum range limit is
0.0 V.

MEASUrement:MEASRange:STATE
This command sets or queries the global range state.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEASRange:STATE {OFF|ON|0|1}

MEASUrement:MEASRange:STATE?

Arguments OFF specifies that the measurement results are not limited.

ON specifies that the measurement results are limited to results with values
between the range minimum and maximum.
0 specifies that the measurement results are not limited.

1 specifies that the measurement results are limited to results with values between
the range minimum and maximum.

Examples MEASUREMENT:MEASRANGE:STATE 1 specifies that the measurement results are

limited to results with values between the range minimum and maximum.
MEASUREMENT:MEASRANGE:STATE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEASRANGE:STATE 0 indicating that the measurement results
are not limited.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:ABANdwidth
This command sets or queries the analysis bandwidth for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

2-780 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:ABANdwidth <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:ABANdwidth?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> sets the analysis bandwidth. The default value is 10.0e6 and the valid
range is 1.0e3 to 8.0e9.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:ABANdwidth 1E+6 sets the analysis bandwidth to 1E+6.

MEASUrement:MEAS2:ABANdwidth? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:ABANdwidth 1E+6 indicating the analysis bandwidth
is 1E+6.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:ACHANnels
This command sets or queries the number of adjacent channels for the
measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:ACHANnels <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:ACHANnels?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> sets the number of adjacent channels. The default value is 1 and the valid
range is 1 to 5.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:ACHANnels 1 turns on 1 adjacent channel.

MEASUrement:MEAS2:ACHANnels? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:ACHANnels 1 indicating 1 adjacent channel is on.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:AMEThod
This command sets or queries the analysis method used to compute eye width
or eye height.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-781

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:AMEThod {PARAmetric|HISTogram}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:AMEThod?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

PARAmetric sets the analysis method to parametric.

HISTogram sets the analysis method to histogram.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:AMEThod HISTogram selects histogram analysis method

for measurement 1.
MEASUrement:MEAS2:AMEThod? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:AMEThod HISTogram, indicating that histogram
analysis method is selected for measurement 2.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BER
This command sets or queries BER value for the measurement. Measurements
are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BER <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BER?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is BER value for the measurement.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:BER 10.0 sets the BER for the measurement to 10.0.

MEASUrement:MEAS2:BER? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:BER

12.0000 indicating the measurement BER is 12.0.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BER:TARGETBER
This command sets or queries the target BER value for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

2-782 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BER:TARGETBER <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BER:TARGETBER?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the target BER value.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:BER:TARGETBER 14.0 sets the target BER to 14.0.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:BER:TARGETBER? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:BER:TARGETBER 12.0000 indicating the
target BER is 12.0.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BIN
This command sets or queries the bin count for the measurement. Measurements
are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BIN <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BIN?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the bin count.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:BIN 2 sets the bin count to 2.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:BIN? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:BIN 1

indicating the bin count is 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITAbsolute
This command sets or queries the bit center as an absolute value.

Group Measurement

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-783

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITAbsolute <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITAbsolute?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the value for the bit center.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:BITAbsolute 50E-12 sets the bit absolute to 50E-12

for measurement 1.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:BITAbsolute? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:BITAbsolute 50E-12, indicating the bit absolute is
50E-12 for measurement 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITCfgmode
This command sets or queries whether the measurement returns the mean or
mode statistic result when the measurement type is bit amplitude/high/low.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITCfgmode {MEAN|MODE}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITCfgmode?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

MEAN specifies that the measurement returns results for each bit.

MODE specifies that the measurement returns the mode of its results.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:BITCfgmode MODE specifies that the measurement

returns the mode of its results.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:BITCfgmode? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:BITCFGMODE MEAN indicating the configuration mode
is set to MEAN.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITEnd
This command sets or queries the bit end as a percentage of the unit interval.
Measurements are specified by x.

2-784 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITEnd <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITEnd?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the bit end.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:BITEnd 60 sets the bit end to 60% of the unit interval.

MEASUrement:MEAS2:BITEnd? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:BITEND

50.0000 indicating the bit end is 50%.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITPcnt
This command sets or queries the bit center as a percentage of the unit interval.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITPcnt <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITPcnt?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the bit center percentage value to be measured for the bit type selected.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:BITPcnt 55 sets the bit center to 55% of the unit

interval.
MEASUrement:MEAS2:BITPcnt? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:BITPCNT 50.0000 indicating bit center is 50% of
the unit interval.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITSTart
This command sets or queries the bit start as a percentage of the unit interval.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-785

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITSTart <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITSTart?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the bit start.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:BITSTart 45 sets the bit start to 45% of the unit interval.

MEASUrement:MEAS2:BITSTart? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:BITSTART 50.0000 indicating the bit start is 50%
of the unit interval.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITType
This command sets or queries the bit type for the measurement. Measurements
are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITType
{ALLBits|TRANSition|NONTRANsition}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITType?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

ALLBits specifies that the measurement returns results for all bits.

TRANSition specifies that the measurement returns results for transitions bit only.

NONTRANsition specifies that the measurement returns results for non-transition

bits only.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:BITType TRANSITION specifies that the measurement

returns results for transition bits only.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:BITType? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:BITTYPE ALLBITS indicating that measurements
return results for all bits.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BURSTEDGTYPe
This command sets or queries the burst edge type for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

2-786 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BURSTEDGTYPe {RISE|FALL}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BURSTEDGTYPe?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

RISE specifies a burst with a rising edge.

FALL specifies a burst with a falling edge.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:BURSTEDGTYPe FALL specifies a burst with a falling

edge.
MEASUrement:MEAS2:BURSTEDGTYPe? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:BURSTEDGTYPE RISE indicating a burst
with a rising edge.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BVOLTage
This command sets or returns the bias voltage for WBG measurement.

Conditions Requires a WBG-DPT License.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BVOLTage <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BVOLTage?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> specifies the value for bias voltage of the WBG measurement.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:BVOLTage 5.9000E+3 specifies the value for bias

voltage as 5.9000E+3 for measurement 2.
MEASUrement:MEAS2:BVOLTage? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:BVOLTage 5.9000E+3 indicating the value for bias
voltage is 5.9000E+3 for measurement 2.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-787

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:MAXimum? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the maximum cycle-cycle value for the
specified measurement for all acquisitions. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:MAXimum?

Returns The maximum cycle-cycle statistic value for the specified measurement for all
acquisitions.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:MAXimum? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:CCRESULTS:ALLACQS:MAXIMUM 9.91E+37.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:MEAN? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the mean cycle-cycle value for the specified
measurement for all acquisitions. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:MEAN?

Returns The mean cycle-cycle statistic value for the specified measurement for all
acquisitions.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:MEAN? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:CCRESULTS:ALLACQS:MEAN 9.91E+37.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:MINimum? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the minimum cycle-cycle value for the specified
measurement for all acquisitions. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:MINimum?

2-788 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Returns The minimum cycle-cycle statistic value for the specified measurement for all
acquisitions.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:MINimum? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:CCRESULTS:ALLACQS:MINIMUM 9.91E+37.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:PK2PK? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the peak to peak cycle-cycle statistic for the
specified measurement for all acquisitions. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:PK2PK?

Returns The peak to peak cycle-cycle statistic value for the specified measurement all
acquisitions.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:PK2PK? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:CCRESULTS:ALLACQS:PK2PK 9.91E+37.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:POPUlation? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the population of all cycle-cycle statistics for
the specified measurement for all acquisitions accumulated since statistics were
last reset. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:POPUlation?

Returns The population of all cycle-cycle statistics for the specified measurement
accumulated over all acquisitions since statistics were last reset.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:POPUlation? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:CCRESULTS:ALLACQS:POPULATION 0 indicating no
statistics for the measurement.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-789

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:STDDev? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the standard deviation cycle-cycle for the
specified measurement for all acquisitions. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:STDDev?

Returns The standard deviation cycle-cycle statistic value for the specified measurement
all acquisitions.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:STDDev? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:CCRESULTS:ALLACQS:STDDEV 9.91E+37.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:MAXimum? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the maximum cycle-cycle value for the
specified measurement for the current acquisition. Measurements are specified
by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:MAXimum?

Returns The maximum cycle-cycle statistic value for the specified measurement for the
current acquisition.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:MAXimum? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CCRESULTS:CURRENTACQ:MAXIMUM 9.91E+37.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the mean cycle-cycle value for the specified
measurement for the current acquisition. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

2-790 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN?

Returns The mean cycle-cycle statistic value for the specified measurement for the current
acquisition.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CCRESULTS:CURRENTACQ:MEAN 9.91E+37.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:MINimum? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the minimum cycle-cycle value for the specified
measurement for the current acquisition. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:MINimum?

Returns The minimum cycle-cycle statistic value for the specified measurement for the
current acquisition.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:MINimum? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CCRESULTS:CURRENTACQ:MINIMUM 9.91E+37.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:PK2PK? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the peak to peak cycle-cycle statistic for the
specified measurement for the current acquisition. Measurements are specified
by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:PK2PK?

Returns The peak to peak cycle-cycle statistic value for the specified measurement for
the current acquisition.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:PK2PK? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CCRESULTS:CURRENTACQ:PK2PK 9.91E+37.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-791

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:POPUlation? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the population of the cycle-cycle statistics
for the specified measurement for the current acquisition. Measurements are
specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:POPUlation?

Returns The population of the cycle-cycle statistics for the specified measurement for
the current acquisition.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:POPUlation? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CCRESULTS:CURRENTACQ:POPULATION 0 indicating
the population is 0.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:STDDev? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the standard deviation cycle-cycle for the
specified measurement for the current acquisition. Measurements are specified
by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:STDDev?

Returns The standard deviation cycle-cycle statistic value for the specified measurement
for the current acquisition.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:STDDev? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CCRESULTS:CURRENTACQ:STDDEV 9.91E+37.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:ADVanced:METHod
This command sets or queries the advanced clock recovery method when advanced
clock recovery is used for the measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

2-792 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:ADVanced:METHod
{NONE|NOMinal|PATTern}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:ADVanced:METHod?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

NOMinal sets the advanced CRD method to Nominal Data Rate.

PATTern sets the advanced CDR method to use a Known Data Pattern.

NONE sets no advanced CRD method.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:ADVanced:METHod PATTERN sets

the advanced CDR method to use a Known Data Pattern.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:ADVanced:METHod? might
return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CLOCKRECOVERY:ADVANCED:METHOD NONE
indicating no advanced CRD method.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:CLOCKFrequency
This command sets or queries the clock frequency used when fixed constant clock
recovery is used for the measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:CLOCKFrequency <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:CLOCKFrequency?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the clock frequency.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:CLOCKFrequency 2.0E+9 sets the

frequency to 2.0 GHz.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:CLOCKFrequency? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CLOCKRECOVERY:CLOCKFREQUENCY 2.5000E+9
indicating the frequency is 2.5 GHz.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:CLOCKMultiplier
This command sets or queries the clock multiplier used when explicit clock
recovery is used for the measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-793

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:CLOCKMultiplier <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:CLOCKMultiplier?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the clock multiplier.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:CLOCKMultiplier 1.5 sets the

clock multiplier to 1.5.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:CLOCKMultiplier? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CLOCKRECOVERY:CLOCKMULTIPLIER 1.0000
indicating the clock multiplier is 1.0.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:CONSTCLOCKMODe
This command sets or queries the constant clock mode used when constant clock
recovery is used for the measurement. The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:CONSTCLOCKMODe
{MEAN|MEDian|FIXed}

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

MEAN specifies that clock recovery uses the mean of the clock signal as the clock
frequency.
MEDian specifies that clock recovery uses the mode of the clock signal as the
clock frequency.
FIXed specifies that clock recovery uses the value set by the user as the clock
frequency.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:CONSTCLOCKMODe FIXED specifies

that clock recovery uses the value set by the user as the clock frequency.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:CONSTCLOCKMODe? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CLOCKRECOVERY:CONSTCLOCKMODE MEAN indicating
that clock recovery uses the mean of the clock signal as the clock frequency.

2-794 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:DAMPing
This command sets or queries the damping value used when PLL clock recovery
is used for the measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:DAMPing <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:DAMPing?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the clock recovery damping value.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:DAMPing 700.0E-3 sets the

damping value to 0.70.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:DAMPing? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CLOCKRECOVERY:DAMPING 700.0000E-3 indicating
the damping value is 0.70.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:DATAPath
This command sets or queries the file containing the data pattern used when
known data pattern clock recovery is used for the measurement. Measurements
are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:DATAPath <QString>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:DATAPath?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<QString> is the file containing the data pattern to be used for known data
pattern clock recovery.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:DATAPath "TEST125.txt specifies

the file containing the data pattern is TEST125.txt.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:DATAPath? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CLOCKRECOVERY:DATAPATH "PRBS127.txt"
indicating the file containing the data pattern is PRBS127.txt.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-795

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:DATARate
This command sets or queries the nominal data bit rate when nominal data rate
clock recovery is used for the measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:DATARate <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:DATARate?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the value for the Nominal data rate.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:DATARate 2.0000E+9 sets the data

rate to 2.0 Gb/s.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:DATARate? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CLOCKRECOVERY:DATARATE
2.5000E+9 indicating the data rate is 2.5 Gb/s.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:EXPLICITCLOCKMODe
This command sets or queries the explicit clock mode used when explicit clock
recovery is used for the measurement. The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:EXPLICITCLOCKMODe
{EDGE|PLL}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:EXPLICITCLOCKMODe?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

EDGE specifies the clock edge.

PLL specifies the phase locked loop.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:EXPLICITCLOCKMODe EDGE sets

the clock mode to edge.

2-796 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:EXPLICITCLOCKMODe? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CLOCKRECOVERY:EXPLICITCLOCKMODE EDGE
indicating the explicit clock mode is edge.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:GLOBal
This command sets or queries the clock recovery settings global flag for the
measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:GLOBal {OFF|ON|0|1}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:GLOBal?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

OFF clock recovery settings are changed independently for each individual
measurement.
ON applies global clock recovery settings to all the measurements' clock recovery
settings.
0 clock recovery settings are changed independently for each individual
measurement.
1 applies global clock recovery settings to all the measurements' clock recovery
settings.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:GLOBal 1 applies global clock

recovery settings to all the measurements' clock recovery settings.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:GLOBal? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CLOCKRECOVERY:GLOBAL 0 indicating clock recovery
settings are changed independently for each individual measurement.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:JTFBandwidth
This command sets or queries the JTF bandwidth used when PLL clock recovery
is used for the measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-797

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:JTFBandwidth <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:JTFBandwidth?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the clock recovery JTF bandwidth.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:JTFBandwidth 1.10E+6 sets the

bandwidth to 1.1 MHz.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:JTFBandwidth? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CLOCKRECOVERY:JTFBANDWIDTH 1.0000E+6
indicating the bandwidth is 1.0 MHz.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:LOOPBandwidth
This command sets or queries the loop bandwidth used when PLL clock recovery
is used for the measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:LOOPBandwidth <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:LOOPBandwidth?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the clock recovery loop bandwidth.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:LOOPBandwidth 1.10E+6 sets the

bandwidth to 1.1 Mhz.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:LOOPBandwidth? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CLOCKRECOVERY:LOOPBANDWIDTH 1.0000E+6
indicating the bandwidth is 1.0 MHz.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:MEANAUTOCalculate
This command sets or queries how often the clock is calculated when constant
clock recovery is used for the measurement. The measurement number is
specified by x.

Group Measurement

2-798 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:MEANAUTOCalculate
{FIRST|EVERY}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:MEANAUTOCalculate?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

FIRST calculates the clock on the first acquisition.

EVERY calculates the clock on every acquisition.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:MEANAUTOCalculate EVERY causes

the clock to be calculated on every acquisition.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:MEANAUTOCalculate? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CLOCKRECOVERY:MEANAUTOCALCULATE FIRST
indicating the clock is calculated on the first acquisition.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:METHod
This command sets or queries the clock recovery method for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:METHod
{PLL|CONSTANTCLOCK|EXPLICITCLOCK}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:METHod?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

PLL specifies a phase locked loop clock recovery method.

CONSTANTCLOCK specifies using a constant clock.

EXPLICITCLOCK specifies using an explicit clock.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:METHod PLL specifies a phase locked

loop clock recovery method.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:METHod? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CLOCKRECOVERY:METHOD CONSTANTCLOCK
indicating a constant clock is in use.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-799

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:MODel
This command sets or queries the PLL clock recovery model used when PLL
clock recovery is used for the measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:MODel {TYPE1|TYPE2}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:MODel?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

Arguments are the clock recovery model type.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:MODel TYPE1 set the clock recovery

model lto type 1.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:MODel? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CLOCKRECOVERY:MODEL TYPE1 indicating the clock
recovery model is type 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:NOMINALOFFset
This command sets or queries the offset value used when explicit clock recovery
is used for the measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:NOMINALOFFset <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:NOMINALOFFset?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the clock offset.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:NOMINALOFFset 1.0e-9 sets the

clock offset to 1 ns.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:NOMINALOFFset? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CLOCKRECOVERY:NOMINALOFFSET
0.0E+0 indicating the offset is 0.0 ns.

2-800 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:NOMINALOFFset:SELECTIONtype
This command sets or queries the offset type used when explicit clock recovery is
used for the measurement. The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:NOMINALOFFset:
SELECTIONtype {AUTO|MANUAL}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:NOMINALOFFset:
SELECTIONtype?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

AUTO automatically calculates the offset.

MANUAL allows the user to set the offset.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:NOMINALOFFset:SELECTIONtype
AUTO sets the offset selection type to auto.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:NOMINALOFFset:SELECTIONtype?
might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CLOCKRECOVERY:NOMINALOFFSET:SELECTIONTYPE
MANUAL indicating the selection type is manual.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:STAndard
This command sets or queries the communications standard when PLL clock
recovery is used for the measurement. The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:STAndard {CUSTom|

ENET100|FW1394BS400B|FW1394BS800B|FW1394BS1600B|FBD1|
FBD2|FBD3|FC133|FC266|FC531|FC1063|FC2125|FC4250|
FC8500|ENET1000|IBA2500|IBA_GEN2|OC1|OC3|OC12|OC48|
PCIE_GEN1|PCIE_GEN2|PCIE_GEN3|RIO125|RIO250|RIO3125|
SAS15_NOSSC|SAS3_NOSSC|SAS6_NOSSC|SAS12_NOSSC|SAS15_SSC|
SAS3_SSC|SAS6_SSC|SAS12_SSC|SATA_GEN1|SATA_GEN2|
SATA_GEN3|USB3|XAUI|XAUI_GEN2}

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-801

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

Arguments are the clock recovery standards.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:STAndard PCIE_GEN2 sets the

standard to PCIE_GEN2.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:STAndard? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CLOCKRECOVERY:STANDARD PCIE_GEN1 indicating
the standard is PCIE_GEN1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:TDCOMPensation
This command sets the PLL clock recovery loop feedback
time-constants such that the actual transfer function matches closely
to a mathematical filter polynomial. This will affect measurements whose
:MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:GLOBal flag is set to 0.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:TDCOMPensation {0|1}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:TDCOMPensation?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

0 specifies automatic transition density compensation is off.

1 specifies automatic transition density compensation is on.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:TDCOMPensation ON specifies

turning on automatic transition density compensation for PLL.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:TDCOMPensation? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:CLOCKRecovery:TDCOMPensation 0, indicating
automatic transition density compensation is off for PLL.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COMMONMode:FILTers:STATE
This command sets or queries whether a filter is used for the measurement when
the measurement type is AC common mode. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

2-802 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COMMONMode:FILTers:STATE {OFF|ON|0|1}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COMMONMode:FILTers:STATE?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

OFF turns the filter off.

ON turns the filter on.

0 turns the filter off.

1 turns the filter on.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:COMMONMode:FILTers:STATE ON sets the filter to on.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:COMMONMode:FILTers:STATE? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:COMMONMODE:FILTERS:STATE 0 indicating the filter
is off.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COMMONMode:SOURCEs
This command sets or queries the number of sources for the measurement when
the measurement type is AC common mode. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COMMONMode:SOURCEs {SINGLE|DOUBLE}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COMMONMode:SOURCEs?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

SINGLE specifies a single source.

DOUBLE specifies double sources.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:COMMONMode:SOURCEs SINGLE specifies a single

source.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:COMMONMode:SOURCEs? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:COMMONMODE:SOURCES DOUBLE indicating sources
are set to double.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-803

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COVer
This command sets or queries the Calculate Over for the Power Quality
measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Conditions IMDA license on MSO 5 and 6 Series MSO instruments and 3-Phase license
on 4 Series MSO instruments.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COVer {FFREQuency|AFREQuencies}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COVer?

Arguments FFREQuency sets Calculate Power Quality measurement.

AFREQuencies sets Calculate Power Quality measurement for all frequencies.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:COVer AFREQuencies sets Calculate Power Quality

measurement for all frequencies.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:COVer? might return :MEASUrement:MEAS1:COVer
AFREQuencies, indicating the Calculate Power Quality measurement is set for
all frequencies.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CPWIDTh
This command sets or queries the channel power width for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CPWIDTh <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CPWIDTh?

Arguments <NR3> is the channel power width. The default value is 10.0e6 and the valid
range is 1.0e3 to 8.0e9.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:CPWIDTh 1E+6 sets the channel power width to 1E+6.

MEASUrement:MEAS2:CPWIDTh? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS2:CPWIDTh 1E+6, indicating the channel power width
is set to 1E+6 for Measurement 2.

2-804 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CSPACing
This command sets or queries the channel spacing for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CSPACing <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CSPACing?

Arguments <NR3> is the channel spacing. The default value is 5.0e6 and the valid range
is 1.0e3 to 8.0e9.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:CSPACing 5.0e6 sets the channel power width to 1E+6.

MEASUrement:MEAS2:CSPACing? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS2:CSPACing 5.0e6, indicating the channel spacing
is set to 5.0e6 for Measurement 2.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CUSTOMLIMITSFile
This command sets or queries the custom limits file path for custom harmonics
standard. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CUSTOMLIMITSFile <Qstring>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CUSTOMLIMITSFile?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<Qstring> specifies the location of limits file.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CUSTOMLIMITSFile <C:\MyDir\Limits.csv> sets

the location of the limits file as C:\MyDir\.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:CUSTOMLIMITSFile? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:CUSTOMLIMITSFile <C:\MyDir\Limits.csv>,
indicating the location of the Limits.csv file.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-805

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CYCLemode
This command sets or queries the cycle mode for the measurement. Measurements
are specified by x.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CYCLemode {RECORD|CYCLE|ROTATION}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CYCLemode?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

RECORD specifies that the measurement is taken over the whole record.

CYCLE specifies that measurements are taken on each cycle of the source.

ROTATION specifies that measurements are taken on a rotation of the source.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CYCLemode CYCLE sets the measurement to be taken

over each cycle of the source.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:CYCLemode? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CYCLEMODE RECORD indicating the measurement is
taken over the whole record.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DBDown
This command sets or queries the dB down value for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DBDown <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DBDown?

Related Commands MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OBWMethod

Arguments <NR3> sets the dB down value. The default value is -26 and the valid range is
-80 to -1.

2-806 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DBDown -25 sets the dB down to -25 for measurement 3.

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:DBDown? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:DBDown -25 indicating the dB down value is to -25.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x>
This command sets or queries the 'to edge' type when EDGE<x> is EDGE1 and
the 'from edge' type when EDGE<x> is EDG2, for the measurement when the
measurement type is DELAY. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x>
{FALL|RISe|BOTH|SAMEas|OPPositeas}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x>?

Related Commands MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOEdge

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

FALL specifies the falling edge of the waveform.

RISE specifies the rising edge of the waveform.

BOTH specifies both a rising and falling edge of the waveform.

SAMEas specifies that both edges of the waveform are the same.

OPPositeas specifies that the edges of the waveform are not the same.

Examples MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:EDGE2 RISE specifies that the rising edge of the

waveform be used for measurement 3.
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE2? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE2 FALL, indicating that the falling edge
of the waveform is being used for measurement 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DISPlaystat:ENABle
This command turns on and off display of statistics in measurement badges in the
user interface. This command affects only the display of statistics, basic-statistics
are computed regardless of the state of this command. Measurements are specified
by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-807

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DISPlaystat:ENABle {OFF|ON|<NR1>}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DISPlaystat:ENABle?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

OFF turns off the display of statistics in measurement badges.

ON turns on the display of statistics in measurement badges.

<NR1> = 0 turns off the display of statistics in the measurement badge, any other
value turns on the display of statistics.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DISPlaystat:ENABle 0 turns off the display of

statistics in the measurement badge.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DISPlaystat:ENABle? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DISPLAYSTAT:ENABLE 1 indicating that the display of
statistics in the measurement badge is on.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEIncre
This command sets or queries the edge increment value for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEIncre <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEIncre?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the measurements edge increment value.

Examples :MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:EDGEINCRE? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:EDGEINCRE 1.0000 indicating the edge increment
value is set to 1.0000.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEQUALifier
This command sets or queries the edge qualifier source.

2-808 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-DPM (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-DPM (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group DPM, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEQUALifier
{CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|CH5|CH6|CH7|CH8|MATH<x>|REF<x>}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEQUALifier?

Arguments MEAS<x> is the measurement number.

CH1–CH8 is the edge qualifier source channel.

MATH<x> is the edge qualifier source math waveform; <x> is ≥1.

REF<x> is the edge qualifier source reference waveform; <x> is ≥1.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:EDGEQUALifier CH4 sets the edge qualifier source for

measurement 1 to Channel 4.
MEASUrement:MEAS3:EDGEQUALifier? might return UNDEFINED, indicating
that there is no edge qualifier source set for measurement 3.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEQUALONE
This command set or queries the measurement 1 input edge qualifier one source
for Efficiency measurement.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEQUALONE <Qstring>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEQUALONE?

Arguments MEAS<x> is the measurement number.

<Qstring> specifies the edge qualifier source at input configuration.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:EDGEQUALONE Vac sets the edge qualifier source for

measurement 1 to Vac at input configuration.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:EDGEQUALONE? might return Vac, indicating that the
edge qualifier source for measurement 1 is Vac at input configuration.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-809

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEQUALTWO
This command sets or queries the measurement 1 output edge qualifier two source
for Efficiency measurement.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEQUALTWO <Qstring>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEQUALTWO?

Arguments MEAS<x> is the measurement number.

<Qstring> specifies the edge qualifier source at output configuration.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:EDGEQUALTWO Vxz sets the edge qualifier source for

measurement 1 to Vxz at output configuration.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:EDGEQUALTWO? might return Vxz, indicating that the
edge qualifier source for measurement 1 is Vxz at output configuration.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:FROMLevel
This command sets or queries the 'from level' edge for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:FROMLevel {MID|LOW|HIGH}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:FROMLevel?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

MID specifies the MID level.

HIGH specifies the HIGH level.

LOW specifies the LOW level.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:EDGES:FROMLevel HIGH set the from level to the high

level

2-810 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS1:EDGES:FROMLevel? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:EDGES:FROMLEVEL LOW indicating the from
level is the low level.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:LEVel
This sets or queries the level type for the 'time outside level' measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:LEVel {HIGH|LOW|BOTH}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:LEVel?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

HIGH specifies the HIGH level.

LOW specifies the LOW level.

BOTH specifies both the HIGH and LOW level.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:EDGES:LEVel LOW sets the level to the low level.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:EDGES:LEVel? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:EDGES:LEVEL HIGH indicating the level is set to
the high level.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:LOWERFREQuency
This command sets or queries the lower frequency for the measurement when the
measurement type is phase noise. Lower frequencies are ignored. Measurements
are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:LOWERFREQuency <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:LOWERFREQuency?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the lower frequency of the edge.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-811

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:EDGES:LOWERFREQuency 1.0e3 sets the lower

frequency to 1 kHz.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:EDGES:LOWERFREQuency? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:EDGES:LOWERFREQUENCY 0.0E+0 indicating the
lower frequency is set to 0.0 Hertz.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:N
The command sets or queries the number of accumulation cycles for the
measurement when the measurement type is nperiod. Measurements are specified
by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:N <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:N?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the maximum number of edges used by the measurement.

Examples measurement:meas1:edges:n 2 sets the number of edges to 2.

measurement:meas1:edges:n? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:EDGES:N 6.0000.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:SLEWRATEMethod
This command sets or queries the slew rate method for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:SLEWRATEMethod {NOMinal|DDR}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:SLEWRATEMethod?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

NOMinal specifies the nominal slew rate method.

DDR specifies the DDR slew rate method.

2-812 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples measurement:meas1:edges:slewratemethod NOMINAL specifies the

nominal slew rate method.
measurement:meas1:edges:slewratemethod? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:EDGES:SLEWRATEMETHOD NOMINAL indicating the
slew rate method is set to NOMINAL.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:TOLevel
This command sets or queries the 'to level' edge for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:TOLevel {HIGH|MID|LOW}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:TOLevel?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

HIGH specifies the HIGH level.

MID specifies the MID level.

LOW specifies the LOW level.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:EDGES:TOLevel HIGH specifies the High to level.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:EDGES:TOLevel? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:EDGES:TOLEVEL LOW indicating the to level
edge is set to the Low level.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:UPPERFREQuency
This command sets or queries the upper frequency for the measurement when the
measurement type is phase noise. Higher frequencies are ignored. Measurements
are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:UPPERFREQuency <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:UPPERFREQuency?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-813

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the upper frequency of the edge.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:EDGES:UPPERFREQuency 1.5 sets the upper frequency

to 1.5 MHz.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:EDGES:UPPERFREQuency? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:EDGES:UPPERFREQUENCY 1.0000E+6 indicating the
upper frequency is 1.0 MHz.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGE<x>
This command sets or queries the type of the specified edge, rise or fall, for the
measurement. The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGE<x> {RISE|FALL|BOTH}

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

RISE specifies the rising edge.

FALL specifies the falling edge.

BOTH specifies either the rising or falling edge.

Examples MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:EDGE1? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:EDGE1

RISE indicating that edge 1 of measurement 2 is the rising edge.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EEQUal
This command turns on or off the edge qualifier settings as input waveform to
measurement. The measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires a WBG-DPT license.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EEQUal {ON|OFF}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EEQUal?

2-814 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

ON specifies the edge qualifier settings has been turned on.

OFF specifies the edge qualifier settings has been turned off.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:EEQUal ON the edge qualifier settings to on.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:EEQUal? might return :MEASUrement:MEAS1:EEQUal

OFF, indicating the edge qualifier settings is off.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EINDuctance
This command sets or returns the effective inductance for WBG measurement.

Conditions Requires a WBG-DPT License.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EINDuctance <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EINDuctance?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> specifies the value for effective inductance of the WBG measurement.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:EINDuctance 1.0000 specifies the value for effective

inductance as 1 for measurement 2.
MEASUrement:MEAS2:EINDuctance? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:EINDuctance 1.0000 indicating the value for
effective inductance is 1 for measurement 2.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EINTerpolation
This command sets or queries whether dot mode eye diagram is enabled.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EINTerpolation {ON|OFF}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EINTerpolation?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-815

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

ON enables interpolation between samples.

OFF disables interpolation between samples.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:EINTerpolation ON enables interpolation between

samples for measurement 1.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:EINTerpolation? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:EINTerpolation OFF, indicating that
interpolation between samples is disabled for measurement 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EXTENDuis
This command sets or returns number of UIs considered for analysis of eye width
or eye height measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EXTENDuis <NR1>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EXTENDuis?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR1> is the number of UIs considered for analysis.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:EXTENDuis 250 sets the number of UIs considered

for analysis as 250 for measurement 1.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:EXTENDuis? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:EXTENDuis 250, indicating that number of UIs
considered for analysis is 250 for measurement 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EYERender
This command sets or queries the eye rendering method.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EYERender {FAst|COMPlete}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EYERender?

2-816 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

FAst sets the eye rendering method to fast.

COMPlete sets the eye rendering method to complete.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:EYERender COMPlete enables complete eye rendering

for measurement 1.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:EYERender? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:EYERender COMPlete, indicating that complete eye
rendering is selected for measurement 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FAILCount? (Query Only)

This command returns the number of measurement failures, if applicable, for the selected meas
The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FAILCount?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE

Returns A running sum of the number of violations of the user specified measurement limit.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:FAILCount? might return

:MEASUrement:MEAS2:FAILCount 2 indicating that measurement 2 has
two measurement failures.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTERRANGEFROM
This command sets or queries harmonics filter from order. Measurements are
specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-817

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTERRANGEFROM <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTERRANGEFROM?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> specifies the filter range from value. The default value is 1.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:FILTERRANGEFROM 4 sets filter range from value for

measurement 1 to 4.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:FILTERRANGEFROM? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:FILTERRANGEFROM 3, indicating the filter
range from value is 3.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTERRANGETO
This command sets or queries harmonics filter to order. Measurements are
specified by x.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTERRANGETO <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTERRANGETO?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> specifies the filter range to value. The default value is 50.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:FILTERRANGETO 50 sets filter range to value for

measurement 1 to 50.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:FILTERRANGETO? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:FILTERRANGETO 50, indicating the filter
range to value is 50.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:BLANKingtime
This command sets or queries the filter blanking time for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

2-818 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:BLANKingtime <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:BLANKingtime?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the current filter blanking time.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:FILTers:BLANKingtime 3.5 sets the blanking time to

3.5.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:FILTers:BLANKingtime? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:FILTERS:BLANKINGTIME 4.0000 indicating the filter
blanking time is 4.0.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:GLOBal
This command sets or queries the global flag for filter settings for the
measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:GLOBal {OFF|ON|0|1}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:GLOBal?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

OFF causes filter settings to be changed independently for each individual

measurement.
ON applies global filter settings to all the measurements' filter settings.

0 causes filter settings to be changed independently for each individual

measurement.
1 applies global filter settings to all the measurements' filter settings.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:GLOBal OFF causes filter settings to be

changed independently for each individual measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:GLOBal? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:FILTERS:GLOBAL 1 indicating filter settings are for
all measurements.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-819

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:HIGHPass:FREQ
This command sets or queries the high pass filter frequency for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:HIGHPass:FREQ <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:HIGHPass:FREQ?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the current high pass filter frequency.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:FILTers:HIGHPass:FREQ 15.0E+6 sets the high

pass frequency to 15.0 MHz.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:FILTers:HIGHPass:FREQ? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:FILTERS:HIGHPASS:FREQ 10.0000E+6 indicating
the high pass frequency is set to 10.0 MHz.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:HIGHPass:SPEC
This command sets or queries the high pass filter order for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:HIGHPass:SPEC
{NONE|FIRST|SECOND|THIRD}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:HIGHPass:SPEC?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

NONE specifies no filter.

FIRST specifies a first-order filter.

SECOND specifies a second-order filter.

THIRD specifies a third-order filter.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:FILTers:HIGHPass:SPEC FIRST specifies a

first-order filter.

2-820 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS1:FILTers:HIGHPass:SPEC? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:FILTERS:HIGHPASS:SPEC NONE indicating no high
pass filter is used.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:LOWPass:FREQ
This command sets or queries the low pass filter cutoff frequency for the
measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:LOWPass:FREQ <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:LOWPass:FREQ?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the current low pass filter frequency. The argument range is 20 Hz
to 10e6 Hz.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:FILTers:LOWPass:FREQ 5.0E+6 sets the low pass

frequency to 5.0 MHz.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:FILTers:LOWPass:FREQ? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:FILTERS:LOWPASS:FREQ 10.0000E+6 indicating
the low pass frequency is 10.0 MHz.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:LOWPass:SPEC
This command sets or queries the low pass filter order for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:LOWPass:SPEC
{NONE|FIRST|SECOND|THIRD}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:LOWPass:SPEC?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

NONE specifies no filter.

FIRST specifies a first-order filter.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-821

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SECOND specifies a second-order filter.

THIRD specifies a third-order filter.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:FILTers:LOWPass:SPEC FIRST specifies a first-order

filter.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:FILTers:LOWPass:SPEC? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:FILTERS:LOWPASS:SPEC NONE indicating no low
pass filter is used.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:RAMPtime
This command sets or queries the filter ramp time for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:RAMPtime <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:RAMPtime?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the current filter ramp time.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:FILTers:RAMPtime 1.5 sets the ramp time to 1.5.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:FILTers:RAMPtime? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:FILTERS:RAMPTIME 2.0000 indicating the ramp
time is 2.0.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FORDer
This command sets or returns the differential filter order for WBG measurement.

Conditions Requires a WBG-DPT License.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FORDer <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FORDer?

2-822 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> specifies the differential filter order of the WBG measurement.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:FORDer 1.0000 specifies the differential filter order as

1 for measurement 2.
MEASUrement:MEAS2:FORDer? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:FORDer
1.0000 indicating the differential filter order is 1 for measurement 2.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FPARAmeter
This command sets or queries the roll off factor for the RRC filter in the
measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FPARAmeter <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FPARAmeter?

Related Commands MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FTYPe

Arguments <NR3> sets the roll off factor. The default is 0.22. The valid range is from 0.001
to 1.0.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:FPARAmeter 0.22 sets the roll off factor to 0.22.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:FPARAmeter? might return

:MEASUrement:MEAS1:FPARAmeter 0.22, indicating the roll off factor is
0.22.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FREQ
This command sets or queries switching frequency for Switching Ripple
measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FREQ <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FREQ?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-823

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> specifies the switching frequency. The default is 100k Hz, The minimum
is 50 Hz, and the maximum is 1 GHz

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:FREQ 50k sets the switching frequency of measurement

1 to 50k Hz.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:FREQ? might return :MEASUrement:MEAS1:FREQ
100k, indicating the switching frequency is 100k Hz.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMedge
This command sets or queries the from edge type for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMedge {RISe|FALL|BOTH}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMedge?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

FALL specifies the falling edge of the waveform.

RISE specifies the rising edge of the waveform.

BOTH specifies both the rising and falling edges of the waveform.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:FROMedge RISE specifies the rising edge of the

waveform.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:FROMedge? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:FROMEDGE BOTH indicating both the rising and falling
edges of the waveform.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMEDGESEARCHDIRect
This command sets or queries the from edge search direction for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

2-824 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMEDGESEARCHDIRect {FORWard|BACKWard}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMEDGESEARCHDIRect?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

FORWard specifies a forward search from the edge.

BACKWard specifies a backward search from the edge.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:FROMEDGESEARCHDIRect BACKWard specifies a

backward search from the edge.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:FROMEDGESEARCHDIRect? might return
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:FROMEDGESEARCHDIRECT FORWARD indicating a
forward search from the edge.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol:LOGIC2SOUrce
This command sets or queries the DDR digital measurement logic 1 source From
symbol.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol:LOGIC2SOUrce {H|L|X}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol:LOGIC2SOUrce?

Related Commands MEASUrement:ADDMEAS

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

H sets the logic source 1 From Symbol to H (High).

L sets the logic source 1 From Symbol to L (Low).

X sets the logic source 1 From Symbol to X (Don’t care).

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:FROMSymbol:LOGIC2SOUrce H sets the DDR digital

measurement (DDRTRPMRS/DDRTRPACT) logic 1 source From Symbol to
High.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-825

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS1:FROMSymbol:LOGIC2SOUrce? might return

MEASUrement:MEAS1:FROMSymbol:LOGIC2SOUrce H, indicating that the
DDR digital measurement (DDRTRPMRS/DDRTRPACT) From symbol is set
to H.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol:LOGIC3SOUrce
This command sets or queries the DDR digital measurement logic 2 source From
symbol.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol:LOGIC3SOUrce {H|L|X}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol:LOGIC3SOUrce?

Related Commands MEASUrement:ADDMEAS

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

H sets the logic source 2 From Symbol to H (High).

L sets the logic source 2 From Symbol to L (Low).

X sets the logic source 2 From Symbol to X (Don’t care).

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:FROMSymbol:LOGIC3SOUrce H sets the DDR digital

measurement (DDRTRPMRS/DDRTRPACT) logic 1 source From Symbol to
High.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:FROMSymbol:LOGIC3SOUrce? might return
MEASUrement:MEAS1:FROMSymbol:LOGIC3SOUrce H, indicating that the
DDR digital measurement (DDRTRPMRS/DDRTRPACT) From symbol is set
to H.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol:LOGIC4SOUrce
This command sets or queries the DDR digital measurement logic 3 source From
symbol.

2-826 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol:LOGIC4SOUrce {H|L|X}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol:LOGIC4SOUrce?

Related Commands MEASUrement:ADDMEAS

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

H sets the logic source 3 From Symbol to H (High).

L sets the logic source 3 From Symbol to L (Low).

X sets the logic source 3 From Symbol to X (Don’t care).

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:FROMSymbol:LOGIC4SOUrce H sets the DDR digital

measurement (DDRTRPMRS/DDRTRPACT) logic 1 source From Symbol to
High.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:FROMSymbol:LOGIC4SOUrce? might return
MEASUrement:MEAS1:FROMSymbol:LOGIC4SOUrce H, indicating that the
DDR digital measurement (DDRTRPMRS/DDRTRPACT) From symbol is set
to H.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol:LOGIC5SOUrce
This command sets or queries the DDR digital measurement logic 4 source From
symbol.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol:LOGIC5SOUrce {H|L|X}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol:LOGIC5SOUrce?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-827

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands MEASUrement:ADDMEAS

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

H sets the logic source 4 From Symbol to H (High).

L sets the logic source 4 From Symbol to L (Low).

X sets the logic source 4 From Symbol to X (Don’t care).

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:FROMSymbol:LOGIC5SOUrce H sets the DDR digital

measurement (DDRTRPMRS/DDRTRPACT) logic 1 source From Symbol to
High.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:FROMSymbol:LOGIC5SOUrce? might return
MEASUrement:MEAS1:FROMSymbol:LOGIC5SOUrce H, indicating that the
DDR digital measurement (DDRTRPMRS/DDRTRPACT) From symbol is set
to H.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol:MEASUREAT
This command sets or queries the DDR digital measurement From Symbol
MeasureAT value.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol:MEASUREAT
{Start|Stop|ClockEdge}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol:MEASUREAT?

Related Commands MEASUrement:ADDMEAS

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

Start sets the FromSymbol MeasureAT to Start.

Stop sets the FromSymbol MeasureAT to Stop.

ClockEdge sets the FromSymbol MeasureAT to ClockEdge.

2-828 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:FROMSymbol:MEASUREAT Start sets the DDR digital

measurement (DDRTRPMRS/DDRTRPACT/DDRTCKSRE/DDRTCKSRX)
FromSymbol MeasureAT value to Start.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:FROMSymbol:MEASUREAT? might
return the MEASUrement:MEAS1:FROMSymbol:MEASUREAT
Stop, indicating that the DDR digital measurement
(DDRTRPMRS/DDRTRPACT/DDRTCKSRE/DDRTCKSRX) FromSymbol
MeasureAT value is set to Stop.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FTYPe
This command sets or returns whether the RRC filter is enabled or not.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FTYPe {True|False}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FTYPe?

Arguments True enables the RRC filter.

False disables the RRC filter.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:FTYPe True enables the RRC filter.

MEASUrement:MEAS2:FTYPe? might return the :MEASUrement:MEAS2:FTYPe

False, indicating the RRC filter is disabled for Measurement 2.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FUNDCURRent
This command sets or queries the fundamental current value for IEC-Class C type
harmonics standard. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FUNDCURRent <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FUNDCURRent?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-829

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> specifies the value for the fundamental current for class C harmonics
standard.
\

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:FUNDCURRent 16.0000 specifies the fundamental

current as 16.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:FUNDCURRent? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:FUNDCURRent 16.0000 indicating the fundamental
current is 16.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing
This command sets or queries the gating type for the measurement. Measurements
are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing
{NONE|SCREEN|CURSor|LOGic|SEARch|TIMe}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing?

Related Commands MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:ENDtime

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:STARTtime

Arguments MEAS<x> is the measurement number for which to return a value.

NONE specifies measurements are taken across the entire record.

SCREEN turns on gating, using the left and right edges of the screen.

CURSor limits measurements to the portion of the waveform between the vertical
bar cursors, even if they are off screen.
LOGic specifies that measurements are taken only when the logical state of other
waveforms is true.
SEARch specifies that measurements are taken only where the results of a user
specified search are found.
TIMe limits measurements to the portion of the waveform between the Start and
End gate times.

2-830 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing CURSOR limits measurements to the portion of

the waveform between the vertical bar cursor.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:GATING
NONE indicating measurements are taken across the entire record.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:ACTive
This command sets or queries the gating active level when the gating type is
logic. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:ACTive {HIGH|LOW}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:ACTive?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

HIGH takes a measurement when logic gating is High.

LOW takes a measurement when logic gating Low.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:ACTive LOW specifies taking measurements

when logic gating is Low.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:ACTive? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:GATING:ACTIVE HIGH indicating measurements are
taken when logic gating is High.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:ENDtime
Sets or queries the end gate time for the measurement when using Local gating.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:ENDtime <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:ENDtime?

Related Commands MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-831

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the time gating end gate time in seconds. The valid range is -10000
s to 10000 s.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS4:GATing:ENDtime 5.31e-2 sets the local end gate

time for Meas 4 to 53.1 ms.
MEASUrement:MEAS6:GATing:ENDtime? might return 1.05, indicating that
the local end gate time for Meas 6 is 1.05 s.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:GLOBal
This command sets or queries the gating settings global flag. Measurements are
specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:GLOBal {OFF|ON|0|1}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:GLOBal?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

OFF specifies gate settings can be changed independently for each individual
measurement.
ON applies global gate settings to all the measurements' gate settings.

0 specifies gate settings can be changed independently for each individual

measurement.
1 applies global gate settings to all the measurements' gate settings.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:GLOBal OFF specifies gate settings can be

changed independently for each individual measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:GLOBal? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:GATING:GLOBAL 1 indicating that gating
settings apply to all measurements.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the gating hysteresis value when the gating type is
logic. Measurements are specified by x.

2-832 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:HYSTeresis <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:HYSTeresis?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the gating hysteresis.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:HYSTeresis 25.0E-3 sets the hysteresis

to 25 mV.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:HYSTeresis? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:GATING:HYSTERESIS 30.0000E-3 indicating the
hysteresis is set to 30.0 mV.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:LOGICSource
This command sets or queries the gating data source when the gating type is logic.
The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:LOGICSource
{CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

Arguments are the sources for logic gating.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:LOGICSource CH3 sets the gating logic source

to channel 3.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:LOGICSource? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:GATING:LOGICSOURCE CH2 indicating the gating
logic source is channel 2.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:MIDRef
This command sets or queries the gating mid ref value when the gating type is
logic. Measurements are specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-833

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:MIDRef <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:MIDRef?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the mid ref value for gating.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:MIDRef 1.0E+0 sets the gating midref to 1.0.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:MIDRef? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:GATING:MIDREF 0.0E+0 indicating the
midref value is set to 0.0.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:SEARCHSource
This command sets or queries the gating search source when the gating type is
search. The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:SEARCHSource SEARCH1

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

SEARCH1 is the gating source for search gating.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:SEARCHSource SEARCH1 sets the gating

search source to SEARCH1.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:SEARCHSource? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:GATING:SEARCHSOURCE SEARCH1 indicating the
gating search source is SEARCH1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:STARTtime
Sets or queries the start gate time for the measurement when using Local gating.

Group Measurement

2-834 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:STARTtime <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:STARTtime?

Related Commands MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the time gating start gate time in seconds. The valid range is -10000
s to 10000 s.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:STARTtime -1.5e-3 sets the local start gate

time for Meas 1 to -1.5 ms.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:STARTtime? might return 3.0e-9, indicating
that the local start gate time for Meas 1 is 3 ns.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GLOBalref
This command sets or queries the reference levels global flag for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GLOBalref {OFF|ON|0|1}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GLOBalref?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

OFF allows ref levels to be set separately for each measurement.

ON applies the same ref levels to all measurements.

0 allows ref levels to be set separately for each measurement.

1 applies the same ref levels to all measurements.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:GLOBalref 0 allows ref levels to be set separately for

each measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:GLOBalref? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:GLOBALREF 1 indicating the same ref levels apply
to all measurements.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-835

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HARMONICSCLass
This command sets or queries the class type for the harmonics measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HARMONICSCLass
{CLASSA|CLASSB|CLASSC|CLASSD}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HARMONICSCLass?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

CLASSA specifies the class type to A.

CLASSB specifies the class type to B.

CLASSC specifies the class type to C.

CLASSD specifies the class type to D.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:HARMONICSCLass CLASSC sets the class type for

measurement 1 as class C.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:HARMONICSCLass? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:HARMONICSCLass A, indicating the class
type is set to class A.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HARMONICSSOURce
This command sets or queries harmonics source. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HARMONICSSOURce {CURRENT|VOLTAGE}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HARMONICSSOURce?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

CURRENT specifies current as the harmonics source.

VOLTAGE specifies voltage as the harmonics source.

2-836 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:HARMONICSSOURce CURRENT sets the harmonics source

for measurement 1 as current.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:HARMONICSSOURce? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:HARMONICSSOURce VOLTAGE, indicating
the harmonics source as voltage.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HARMONICSStd
This command sets or queries harmonics standard. Measurements are specified
by x.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HARMONICSStd {NONE| IEC| IEEE519|

CUSTOM| REVIEEE5192022}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HARMONICSStd?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

NONE specifies none as the harmonics test standard.

IEC specifies IEC as the harmonics test standard.

IEEE519 specifies IEEE519 as the harmonics test standard.

REVIEEE5192022 specifies REVIEEE5192022 as the harmonics test standard.

CUSTOM specifies that there is a custom harmonics test standard.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:HARMONICSStd IEC sets the harmonics test standard for

measurement 1 as IEC.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:HARMONICSStd? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:HARMONICSStd NONE, indicating no
harmonics test standard has been set.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HARMONICSUNits
This command sets or queries harmonics units. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement, IMDA

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-837

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HARMONICSUNits {LOGARITHM|LINEAR}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HARMONICSUNits?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

LOGARITHM specifies logarithmic as the harmonics units.

LINEAR specifies linear as the harmonics units.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:HARMONICSUNits LINEAR sets the harmonics units

standard for measurement 1 as linear.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:HARMONICSUNits? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:HARMONICSUNits LINEAR, indicating the
harmonics units are linear.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel:CONFIGuration
This command sets or queries the local input and output configuration.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel:CONFIGuration {INPUT|OUTPUT}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel:CONFIGuration?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

INPUT specifies the local Input or Output source settings as input.

OUTPUT specifies the local Input or Output source settings as output.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:HIGHLEVel:CONFIGuration INPUT sets the local

Input or Output source settings for measurement 1 as input.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:HIGHLEVel:CONFIGuration? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:HIGHLEVel:CONFIGuration INPUT, indicating the
local Input or Output source settings for measurement 1 is input.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel:L2LTOL2N
This command sets or queries local input Line-to-Line to Line-to-Neutral
Conversion.

2-838 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel:L2LTOL2N {0|1}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel:L2LTOL2N?

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:HIGHLEVel:L2LTOL2N 1 enables local input

Line-to-Line to Line-to-Neutral Conversion.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:HIGHLEVel:L2LTOL2N? might return
:MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:L2LTOL2N 0, indicating local input Line-to-Line
to Line-to-Neutral Conversion is disabled.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel:LINESelected
This command sets or queries local input select lines.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel:LINESelected
{ABCB|ACBC|BACA|AN|BN|CN}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel:LINESelected ?

Arguments ABCB specifies the local input select lines as ABCB.

ACBC specifies the local input select lines as ACBC.

BACA specifies the local input select lines as BACA.

AN specifies the local input select lines as AN.

BN specifies the local input select lines as BN.

CN specifies the local input select lines as CN.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:HIGHLEVel:LINESelected ABCB sets the local input

select lines as ABCB.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:HIGHLEVel:LINESelected? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:HIGHLEVel:LINESelected ABCB, indicating the
local input select lines is ABCB.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-839

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel:OUTL2LTOL2N
This command sets or queries local output Line-to-Line to Line-to-Neutral
Conversion .

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel:OUTL2LTOL2N {0|1}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel:OUTL2LTOL2N?

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS?:HIGHLEVel:OUTL2LTOL2N 1 enables local output

Line-to-Line to Line-to-Neutral Conversion.
MEASUrement:MEAS?:HIGHLEVel:OUTL2LTOL2N? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS?:HIGHLEVel:OUTL2LTOL2N 0, indicating local output
Line-to-Line to Line-to-Neutral Conversion is disabled.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel:OUTLINESelected
This command sets or queries local output select lines.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel:OUTLINESelected
{XYZY|XZYZ|YXZX|XN|YN|ZN}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel:OUTLINESelected?

Arguments XYZY specifies the local output select lines as XYZY.

XZYZ specifies the local output select lines as XZYZ.

YXZX specifies the local output select lines as YXZX.

XN specifies the local output select lines as XN.

YN specifies the local output select lines as YN.

ZN specifies the local output select lines as ZN.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:HIGHLEVel:OUTLINESelected XYZY sets the local

output select lines as XYZY.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:HIGHLEVel:OUTLINESelected? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:HIGHLEVel:OUTLINESelected XYZY, indicating
the local output select lines is XYZY.

2-840 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel:OUTWIRing
This command sets or queries the local output wiring.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel:OUTWIRing
{P1W2V1I1|P1W3V2I2|P3W3V3I3|P3W4|DCP1W2}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel:OUTWIRing?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

P1W2V1I1 specifies P1W2V1I1 as the local output wiring.

P3W3V2I2 specifies P3W3V2I2 as the local output wiring.

P3W3V3I3 specifies P3W3V3I3 as the local output wiring.

P3W4 specifies P3W4 as the local output wiring.

DCP1W2 specifies DCP1W2 as the local output wiring.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:HIGHLEVel:OUTWIRing P1W2V1I1 sets the local

output wiring for measurement 1 as P1W2V1I1.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:HIGHLEVel:OUTWIRing? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:HIGHLEVel:OUTWIRing P1W2V1I1, indicating the
local output wiring is configured as P1W2V1I1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel:USEGLOBAL
This command sets or queries the IMDA source settings as global or local.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel:USEGLOBAL {1|0|ON|OFF}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel:USEGLOBAL?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

1 specifies the source settings as global.

0 specifies the source settings as local.

ON specifies the source settings as global.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-841

Commands listed in alphabetical order

OFF specifies the source settings as local.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:HIGHLEVel:USEGLOBAL 1 sets the IMDA source

settings for measurement 1 as global.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:HIGHLEVel:USEGLOBAL? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:HIGHLEVel:USEGLOBAL 1, indicating the IMDA
source settings are global.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel:WIRing
This command sets or queries the local Input wiring.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel:WIRing
{P1W2V1I1|P1W3V2I2|P3W3V2I2|P3W3V3I3|P3W3|DCP1W2}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel:WIRing?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

P1W2V1I1 specifies P1W2V1I1 as the local input wiring.

P1W3V2I2 specifies P1W3V2I2 as the local input wiring.

P3W3V2I2 specifies P3W3V2I2 as the local input wiring.

P3W3V3I3 specifies P3W3V3I3 as the local input wiring.

P3W3 specifies P3W3 as the local input wiring.

DCP1W2 specifies DCP1W2 as the local input wiring.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:HIGHLEVel:WIRing P1W2V1I1 sets the local input

wiring for measurement 1 as P1W2V1I1.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:HIGHLEVel:WIRing? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:HIGHLEVel:WIRing P1W2V1I1, indicating the local
input wiring is configured as P1W2V1I1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHREFVoltage
This command sets or queries the high reference voltage value for the 'time
outside level' measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

2-842 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHREFVoltage <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHREFVoltage?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the high reference voltage value for the selected configuration.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:HIGHREFVoltage 1.5 sets the high reference voltage

to 1.5 V.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:HIGHREFVoltage? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:HIGHREFVOLTAGE 1.0000 indicating the
high reference voltage is set to 1.0 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HLEVel:OUTPut:UGLobal
This command turns on or off output global settings for measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Conditions Requires IMDA-MECH license on MSO 5, 6, 6B series instruments.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HLEVel:OUTPut:UGLobal {ON|OFF}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HLEVel:OUTPut:UGLobal?

Arguments ON sets the output global settings for measurement to on.

OFF sets the output global settings for measurement to off.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:HLEVel:OUTPut:UGLobal ON sets the output global

settings for measurement to on.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:HLEVel:OUTPut:UGLobal? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:HLEVel:OUTPut:UGLobal OFF indicating the output
global settings for measurement is off.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-843

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HTORque
This command sets or queries the measurement High Torque value.

Conditions Requires IMDA-MECH license on MSO 5, 6, 6B series instruments.

Group IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HTORque <NR1>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HTORque?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR1> specifies the High Torque value of the measurement in the range of 11
to 10000000.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:HTORque 15.2 sets the High Torque value for

measurement 1 to 15.2.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:HTORque? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:HTORque 15.2, indicating the High Torque value
for measurement 1 is 15.2.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HVOLtage
This command sets or queries the measurement Torque High Voltage value.

Conditions Requires IMDA-MECH license on MSO 5, 6, 6B series instruments.

Group IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HVOLtage <NR1>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HVOLtage?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR1> specifies the High Voltage value of the measurement in the range of 1 to
100.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:HVOLtage 15.2 sets the High Voltage value for

measurement 1 to 15.2.

2-844 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS1:HVOLtage? might return

:MEASUrement:MEAS1:HVOLtage 15.2, indicating the High Voltage value
for measurement 1 is 15.2.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:IDLETime
This command sets or queries the idle time for the measurement when the
measurement type is burst width. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:IDLETime <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:IDLETime?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the idle time.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:IDLETime 40.0E-6 sets the idle time to 40.0 μs.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:IDLETime? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:IDLETIME 50.0000E-6 indicating the idle time
is 50.0 μs.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:INPUTLEVel
Sets or queries the input trigger voltage level.

Conditions Requires option 5-DPM (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-DPM (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group DPM

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:INPUTLEVel <NR2>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:INPUTLEVel?

Arguments MEAS<x> is the measurement number.

<NR2> is the trigger voltage, in the range of -500 V to +500 V.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-845

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:INPUTLEVel 60 sets the input trigger level of

measurement 1 to +60 volts.
MEASUrement:MEAS3:INPUTLEVel? might return 1.2500, indicating that the
input trigger level of measurement 3 is +1.25 volts.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:INPUTPOwer
This command sets or queries the input power value for IEC-Class C and Class
D harmonics standard .

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:INPUTPOwer <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:INPUTPOwer?

Arguments MEAS<x> is the measurement number.

<NR3> specifies the input power value for class C harmonics standard.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:INPUTPOwer 100W sets the input power value for class
C harmonics standard to 100W.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:INPUTPOwer? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:INPUTPower 100W, indicating that the input power
value for class C harmonics standard is 100W.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:DCD
This command sets or queries whether DCD is included in the jitter summary for
the measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:DCD {0|1}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:DCD?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

1 adds the DCD measurement as part of jitter summary.

0 do not add the DCD measurement as part of jitter summary.

2-846 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:JITTERSummary:DCD 0 specifies that the DCD

measurement is not part of the jitter summary.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:JITTERSummary:DCD? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:JITTERSUMMARY:DCD 1 indicating the DCD
measurement is part of the jitter summary.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:DDJ
This command sets or queries whether DDJ is included in the jitter summary for
the measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:DDJ {0|1}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:DDJ?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

1 adds the DDJ measurement as part of jitter summary.

0 do not add the DDJ measurement as part of jitter summary.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS4:JITTERSummary:DDJ 0 specifies that the DDJ

measurement is not part of the jitter summary.
MEASUrement:MEAS4:JITTERSummary:DDJ? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:JITTERSUMMARY:DDJ 1 indicating the DDJ
measurement is part of the jitter summary.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:DJDD
This command sets or queries whether DJ-dd is included in the jitter summary for
the measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:DJDD {0|1}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:DJDD?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

1 add the DJDD measurement as part of jitter summary.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-847

Commands listed in alphabetical order

0 do not add the DJDD measurement as part of jitter summary.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS4:JITTERSummary:DJDD 0 specifies the DJDD

measurement is not part of the jitter summary.
MEASUrement:MEAS4:JITTERSummary:DJDD? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:JITTERSUMMARY:DJDD 1 indicating the DJDD
measurement is part of the jitter summary.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:EYEWIDTHBER
This command sets or queries whether EyeWidth@BER is included in the jitter
summary for the measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:EYEWIDTHBER {0|1}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:EYEWIDTHBER?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

1 add the EyeWidth@BER measurement as part of jitter summary.

0 do not add the EyeWidth@BER measurement as part of jitter summary.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS4:JITTERSummary:EYEWIDTHBER 0 specifies that the

EyeWidth@BER measurement is not part of the jitter summary.
MEASUrement:MEAS4:JITTERSummary:EYEWIDTHBER? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:JITTERSUMMARY:EYEWIDTHBER 1 indicating
EyeWidth@BER is part of the jitter summary

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:NPJ
This command sets or queries whether NPJ is included in the jitter summary for
the measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:NPJ {0|1}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:NPJ?

2-848 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

1 add the NPJ measurement as part of jitter summary.

0 do not add the NPJ measurement as part of jitter summary.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS4:JITTERSummary:NPJ 0 specifies that the NPJ

measurement is not part of jitter summary.
MEASUrement:MEAS4:JITTERSummary:NPJ? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:JITTERSUMMARY:NPJ 1 indicating the NPJ
measurement is part of the jitter summary.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:PJ
This command sets or queries whether PJ is included in the jitter summary for
the measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:PJ {0|1}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:PJ?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

1 add the PJ measurement as part of jitter summary.

0 do not add the PJ measurement as part of jitter summary.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS4:JITTERSummary:PJ 0 specifies the PJ measurement

is not part of jitter summary.
MEASUrement:MEAS4:JITTERSummary:PJ? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:JITTERSUMMARY:PJ 1 indicating the PJ
measurement is part of jitter summary.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:RJDD
This command sets or queries whether RJ-dd is included in the jitter summary for
the measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-849

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:RJDD {0|1}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:RJDD?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

1 add the RJ-dd measurement as part of jitter summary.

0 do not add the RJ-dd measurement as part of jitter summary.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS4:JITTERSummary:RJDD 0 specifies the RJ-dd

measurement is not part of the jitter summary.
MEASUrement:MEAS4:JITTERSummary:RJDD? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:JITTERSUMMARY:RJDD 1 indicating the RJ-dd
measurement is part of the jitter summary.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:TIE
This command sets or queries whether TIE is included in the jitter summary for
the measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:TIE {0|1}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:TIE?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

1 add the TIE measurement as part of jitter summary.

0 do not add the TIE measurement as part of jitter summary.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS4:JITTERSummary:TIE 0 specifies the TIE measurement

is not part of jitter summary.
MEASUrement:MEAS4:JITTERSummary:TIE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:JITTERSUMMARY:TIE 1 indicating the TIE
measurement is part of jitter summary.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:TJBER
This command sets or queries whether TJ@BER is included in the jitter summary
for the measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

2-850 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:TJBER {0|1}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary:TJBER?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

1 add the TJ@BER measurement as part of jitter summary.

0 do not add the TJ@BER measurement as part of jitter summary.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS4:JITTERSummary:TJBER 0 specifies that the TJ@BER

measurement is not part of jitter summary.
MEASUrement:MEAS4:JITTERSummary:TJBER? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:JITTERSUMMARY:TJBER 1 indicating the TJ@BER
measurement is part of jitter summary.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LABel
This command sets or queries the label for the measurement. As the label can
contain non 7-bit ASCII text, it is stored in Percent Encoding format. The
measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LABel <QString>

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<QString> is the measurement label.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:LABel “Delay” sets the label to Delay.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:LABel? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:LABEL

"Peak-to-Peak" indicating that the measurement 1 label is Peak-to-peak.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LINESelected
This command sets or queries selected lines for the measurement. The
measurement number is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-851

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LINESelected
{ABCB|ACBC|BACA|XYZY|XZYZ|YXZX}

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

The arguments specify the selected lines.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:LINESelected ABCB sets the selected lines for

measurement 1.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:LINESelected? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:LINESelected ABCB, indicating that
selected lines for measurement 1 are ABCB.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LOWREFVoltage
This command sets or queries the low reference voltage value for the 'time outside
level' measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LOWREFVoltage <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LOWREFVoltage?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the low reference voltage value for the selected configuration.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:LOWREFVoltage -1.30 sets the low reference voltage

to -1.3 V.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:LOWREFVoltage? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:LOWREFVOLTAGE -1.0000 indicating the
low ref voltage is -1.0 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LTORque
This command sets or queries the measurement Low Torque value.

2-852 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires IMDA-MECH license on MSO 5, 6, 6B series instruments.

Group IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LTORque <NR1>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LTORque?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR1> specifies the Low Torque value of the measurement in the range of 0 to
10000000.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:LTORque 10.5 sets the Low Torque value for

measurement 1 to 10.5.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:LTORque? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:LTORque 10.5, indicating the Low Torque value
for measurement 1 is 10.5.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LTYPe
This command sets or returns the value for the level type as auto or custom.
Measurements are specified by x.

Conditions Requires a WBG-DPT license.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LTYPe {AUTO|CUSTom}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LTYPe?

Arguments AUTO specifies the value for the level type as auto.

CUSTom specifies the value for the level type as custom.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:LTYPe AUTO sets the value for the level type to auto.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:LTYPe? might return :MEASUrement:MEAS1:LTYPe

AUTO, indicating the value for the level type is auto.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-853

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LUNITs
This command sets or returns the value for the level units as percentage or
absolute. Measurements are specified by x.

Conditions Requires a WBG-DPT license.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LUNITs {PERCent|ABSolute}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LUNITs?

Arguments PERCent specifies the value for the level units as percent.

ABSolute specifies the value for the level units as absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:LUNITs PERCent sets the value for the level units as
percent.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:LUNITs? might return :MEASUrement:MEAS1:LUNITs
PERCent, indicating the value for the level units is percent.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LVOLtage
This command sets or queries the measurement Torque Low Voltage value.

Conditions Requires IMDA-MECH license on MSO 5, 6, 6B series instruments.

Group IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LVOLtage <NR1>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LVOLtage?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR1> specifies the Low Voltage value of the measurement in the range of -100 to
100.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:LVOLtage 10.5 sets the Low Voltage value for

measurement 1 to 10.5.

2-854 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS1:LVOLtage? might return

:MEASUrement:MEAS1:LVOLtage 10.5, indicating the Low Voltage value
for measurement 1 is 10.5.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXCUrrent
This command sets or returns the maximum current. Measurements are specified
by x.

Conditions Requires a WBG-DPT license.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXCUrrent <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXCUrrent?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the maximum current.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:MAXCUrrent 5.0000 sets the maximum current as

5.0000.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:MAXCUrrent? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:MAXCUrrent 5.0000, indicating the maximum current
is 5.0000.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXCycle
This command sets or queries the maximum cycle value for the DDRTERRN and
DDRTERRMN measurements.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3

Requires 6 Series MSO instrument

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXCycle <NR1>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXCycle?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-855

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR1> is the maximum cycle range limit value in the range or 2 to 50.

Examples MEASurement:MEAS2:MAXCycle 45 sets the maximum cycle value for

measurement 2 to 45.
MEASurement:MEAS1:MAXCycle? might return
MEASurement:MEAS1:MAXCycle 17, indicating the maximum cycle value is
set to 17 for measurement 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXG<x>Voltage
This command sets or returns the maximum gate voltage 1 or 2 value for Tdt
measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Conditions Requires a WBG-DPT license.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXG<x>Voltage <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXG<x>Voltage?

Arguments MAXG<x>Voltage specifies the maximum gate voltage number. The valid values
for x are 1 or 2.
<NR3> specifies the maximum gate voltage.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:MAXG1Voltage 10.0000 sets the maximum gate

voltage 1 value as 10.0000.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:MAXG1Voltage? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:MAXGVoltage 10.0000, indicating the
maximum gate voltage 1 value is 10.0000.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXGVoltage
This command sets or returns the maximum gate voltage. Measurements are
specified by x.

Conditions Requires a WBG-DPT license.

2-856 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXGVoltage <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXGVoltage?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the maximum gate voltage.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:MAXGVoltage 10.0000 sets the maximum gate voltage

as 10.0000.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:MAXGVoltage? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:MAXGVoltage 10.0000, indicating the maximum gate
voltage is 10.0000.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXVoltage
Sets or queries the maximum input voltage. Measurements are specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-DPM (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-DPM (6 Series MSO
instrument) or a WBG-DPT license.

Group DPM, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXVoltage <NR2>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXVoltage?

Arguments <NR2> is the maximum input voltage, in the range of -61 V to +61 V.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:MAXVoltage 40 sets the maximum input voltage of

measurement 2 to +40 volts.
MEASUrement:MEAS4:MAXVoltage? might return 2.5000, indicating that the
maximum input voltage of measurement 4 is +2.5 volts.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEASRange:GLOBal
This command sets or queries the range settings global flag for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-857

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEASRange:GLOBal {OFF|ON|0|1}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEASRange:GLOBal?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

OFF specifies that range settings can be set independently for each individual
measurement.
ON applies global measurement range settings to all the measurements' range
settings.
0 specifies that range settings can be set independently for each individual
measurement.
1 applies global measurement range settings to all the measurements' range
settings.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:MEASRange:GLOBal 1 applies global measurement

range settings to all the measurements' range settings.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:MEASRange:GLOBal? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MEASRANGE:GLOBAL 0 indicating that range settings
can be set independently for each individual measurement.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEASRange:MAX
This command sets or queries the range maximum value for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEASRange:MAX <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEASRange:MAX?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the maximum measurement range limit value.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:MEASRange:MAX 2.50 sets the maximum range to 2.5 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:MEASRange:MAX? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MEASRANGE:MAX 1.0000 indicating the
maximum range is 1.0 V.

2-858 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEASRange:MIN
This command sets or queries the range minimum value for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEASRange:MIN <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEASRange:MIN?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the minimum measurement range limit value.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:MEASRange:MIN -1.0 sets the minimum measurement

range to -1.0 V.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:MEASRange:MIN? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MEASRANGE:MIN 0.0E+0 indicating the
minimum range is 0.0 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEASRange:STATE
This command sets or queries the range state for the measurement. Measurements
are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEASRange:STATE {OFF|ON|0|1}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEASRange:STATE?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

OFF turns off the measurement range limits.

ON turns on the measurement range limits.

0 turns off the measurement range limits.

1 turns on the measurement range limits.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:MEASRange:STATE 0 turns off the measurement range

limits.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-859

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS1:MEASRange:STATE? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MEASRANGE:STATE 1 indicating the
measurement range limits are on.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:EINDexz
This command sets or queries the specified mechanical Index Z source.
Measurements are specified by x.

Conditions Requires IMDA-MECH license on MSO 5, 6, 6B series instruments.

Group IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:EINDexz {ON|OFF|1|0}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:EINDexz?

Arguments ON specifies the Index Z check box state as enabled.

OFF specifies the Index Z check box state as disabled.

1 specifies the Index Z check box state as enabled.

0 specifies the Index Z check box state as disabled.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:MECH:EINDexz ON sets the Index Z check box state as

enabled.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:MECH:EINDexz? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MECH:EINDexz ON, indicating the Index Z
check box state is enabled.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:GRATio
This command sets or queries the gear ratio for the specific measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Conditions IMDA-MECH license on 5 and 6 Series MSO instruments.

Group Measurement, IMDA

2-860 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:GRATio <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:GRATio?

Arguments <NR3> defines the gear ratio value for specified measurement. The minimum to
maximum range is 0.001-1000.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:MECH:GRATio 1.000E-3 defines the gear ratio value

for specified measurement as 1.000E-3.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:MECH:GRATio? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MECH:GRATio 1.000E-3 indicating the gear ratio
value for specified measurement is 1.000E-3.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:MUNits
This command sets or queries the specified mechanical measurement results units.
Measurements are specified by x.

Conditions Requires IMDA-MECH license on MSO 5, 6, 6B series instruments.

Group IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:MUNits
{NM|OZINCH|FTLB|INCHLB|DEGREES|RADIANS}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:MUNits?

Arguments NM defines the results units of the measurement as NM.

OZINCH defines the results units of the measurement as OZINCH.

FTLB defines the results units of the measurement as FTLB.

INCHLB defines the results units of the measurement as INCHLB.

DEGREES defines the results units of the measurement as DEGREES.

RADIANS defines the results units of the measurement as RADIANS.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:MECH:MUNits DEGREES defines the results units of the

measurement as DEGREES.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:MECH:MUNits? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MECH:MUNits DEGREES, indicating the results units
of the measurement is DEGREES.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-861

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:PPAirs
This command sets or queries the number of pole pairs for the specific
measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Conditions IMDA-MECH license on 5 and 6 Series MSO instruments.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:PPAirs <NR1>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:PPAirs?

Arguments <NR1> defines the number of pole pairs for the specified measurement. The
minimum to maximum range is 1 to 20.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:MECH:PPAirs 4 defines the number of pole pairs for the

specified measurement as 4.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:MECH:PPAirs? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MECH:PPAirs 4 indicating the number of pole pairs
for the specified measurement is 4.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:PPRotation
This command sets or queries the specified pulses per rotation of the measurement.

Conditions Requires IMDA license on MSO 5, 6, 6B series instrments, 3-Phase license on

MSO 4 series.

Group IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:PPRotation <NR1>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:PPRotation?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR1> defines the pulses per rotation of the measurement in the range of 1 to
10000.

2-862 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:PPRotation 25 defines the pulses per rotation for

measurement 1 as 25.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:PPRotation? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:PPRotation 25, indicating the pulses per rotation for
measurement 1 is 25.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:STYPe
This command sets or queries the local measurement sensor type.

Conditions IMDA-MECH license on 5 and 6 Series MSO instruments.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:STYPe {HSENSOR|QEI|RESOLVER}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:STYPe?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

HSENSOR specifies the sensor type as HSENSOR.

QEI specifies the sensor type as QEI.

RESOLVER specifies the sensor type as RESOLVER.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:MECH:STYPe HSENSOR specifies the sensor type as

HSENSOR.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:MECH:STYPe? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MECH:STYPe HSENSOR, indicating the sensor type
is HSENSOR.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINCycle
This command sets or queries the minimum cycle value for the DDRTERRN and
DDRTERRMN measurements.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3

Requires 6 Series MSO instrument

Group Measurement

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-863

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINCycle <NR1>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINCycle?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR1> is the minimum cycle range limit value in the range or 2 to 50.

Examples MEASurement:MEAS2:MINCycle 20 sets the minimum cycle value for

measurement 2 to 20.
MEASurement:MEAS1:MINCycle? might return
MEASurement:MEAS1:MINCycle 17, indicating the minimum cycle value is
set to 17 for measurement 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OBWMethod
This command sets or queries the RF measurement Occupied Bandwidth method
type. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OBWMethod {percOfPwr|dBDown}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OBWMethod?

Arguments percOfPwr specifies the method type as percentage of power. This is the default
value.
dBDown specifies the method type as dB down.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:OBWMethod percOfPwr specifies the method type to

percentage of power.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:OBWMethod? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:OBWMethod percOfPwr, indicating the method type is
percentage of power.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:ODDEVen
This command sets or queries harmonics oddeven.

Group Measurement, IMDA

2-864 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:ODDEVen {ALL|EVEN|ODD}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:ODDEVen?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

ALL displays all the results.

EVEN displays the even results.

ODD displays the odd results.

Examples MEASurement:MEAS1:ODDEVen ALL displays all the harmonics results for

measurement 1.
MEASurement:MEAS1:ODDEVen? might return
:MEASurement:MEAS1:ODDEVen EVEN, indicating the even results are
displayed.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OFILters:LOWPass:FREQ
This command sets or returns the cut-off frequency value for a measurement.

Conditions Requires IMDA-MECH license on MSO 5, 6, 6B series instruments.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OFILters:LOWPass:FREQ <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OFILters:LOWPass:FREQ?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> specifies the cut-off frequency value for a measurement.

Examples MEASurement:MEAS1:OFILters:LOWPass:FREQ 500E+6 specifies the

cut-off frequency value of the measurement as 500E+6 for measurement 1.
MEASurement:MEAS1:OFILters:LOWPass:FREQ? might return
:MEASurement:MEAS1:OFILters:LOWPass:FREQ 500E+6, indicating the
cut-off frequency value of the measurement is 500E+6.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OFILters:LOWPass:SPEC
This command sets or returns low pass filter specification for a measurement.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-865

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires IMDA-MECH license on MSO 5, 6, 6B series instruments.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OFILters:LOWPass:SPEC
{NONE|FIRST|SECOND|THIRD}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OFILters:LOWPass:SPEC?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

NONE specifies the low pass filter specification as none.

FIRST specifies the low pass filter specification set to 1st Order for the
measurement.
SECOND specifies the low pass filter specification set to 2nd Order for the
measurement.
THIRD specifies the low pass filter specification set to 3rd Order for the
measurement.

Examples MEASurement:MEAS1:OFILters:LOWPass:SPEC FIRST specifies the low

pass filter specification set to 1st Order for the measurement.
MEASurement:MEAS1:OFILters:LOWPass:SPEC? might return
:MEASurement:MEAS1:OFILters:LOWPass:SPEC FIRST, indicating the low
pass filter specification is set to 1st Order for the measurement.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OSANgle
This command sets or queries the specified measurement Offset angle.

Conditions Requires IMDA-MECH license on MSO 5, 6, 6B series instruments.

Group IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OSANgle <NR1>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OSANgle?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR1> specifies the offset angle of the measurement in the range or -360 to 360.

2-866 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASurement:MEAS1:OSANgle 10 specifies the offset angle of the

measurement as 10 for measurement 1.
MEASurement:MEAS1:OSANgle? might return
:MEASurement:MEAS1:OSANgle 10, indicating the offset angle of the
measurement is 10.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OUTEDGEQUALifier
This command sets or queries local output edge qualifier source.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OUTEDGEQUALifier {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

Arguments are the local output edge qualifier source.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:OUTEDGEQUALifier CH3 sets the local output edge

qualifier source to channel 3.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:OUTEDGEQUALifier? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:OUTEDGEQUALifier CH2 indicating the local output
edge qualifier source is channel 2.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OUTFILTers:LOWPass:FREQ
This command sets or queries the measurement output low pass filter frequency
cutoff frequency on the scope.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OUTFILTers:LOWPass:FREQ <NR2>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OUTFILTers:LOWPass:FREQ?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR2> specifies the values for the output filter cutoff frequency. The argument
range is 20 Hz to 10e6 Hz.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-867

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASurement:MEAS1:OUTFILTers:LOWPass:FREQ 2.000E+6 sets the value

for the output filter cutoff frequency for measurement 1 as 2.000E+6.
MEASurement:MEAS1:OUTFILTers:LOWPass:FREQ? might return
:MEASurement:MEAS1:OUTFILTers:LOWPass:FREQ 2.000E+6, indicating
the value for the output filter cutoff frequency for is 2.000E+6.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OUTFILTers:LOWPass:SPEC
This command sets or queries the measurement output low pass filter specification
filter order on the scope. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OUTFILTers:LOWPass:SPEC
{NONE|FIRST|SECOND|THIRD}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OUTFILTers:LOWPass:SPEC?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

NONE specifies the filter order none.

FIRST specifies the filter order first.

SECOND specifies the filter order second.

THIRD specifies the filter order third.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:OUTFILTers:LOWPass:SPEC SECOND sets the filter

order of measurement 1 to second.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:OUTFILTers:LOWPass:SPEC? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:OUTFILTers:LOWPass:SPEC SECOND, indicating
the filter order is set to second.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OUTPUT<x>VOLTage
Sets or queries the voltage level for the specified output voltage source n.

Conditions Requires option 5-DPM (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-DPM (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group DPM

2-868 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OUTPUT<x>VOLTage <NR2>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OUTPUT<x>VOLTage?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR2> is the output voltage for source n, in the range of -61 V to +61 V.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:OUTPUT3VOLTage –24 sets the output voltage for

source 3 of measurement 1 to –24 volts.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:OUTPUT3VOLTage? might return 2.500, indicating that
the output voltage for source 3 of measurement 1 is 2.5 volts.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILENabled
This command returns or sets the pass/fail test enable status. If enabled, this
will turn on pass fail testing for the specified measurement. Measurements are
specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILENabled <NR1>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILENabled?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE

Arguments <NR1> enables or disables pass fail testing for the specified measurement. A value
of 1 enables and a value of 0 disables.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILENabled 1 enables pass fail testing for the

specified measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILENabled? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILENabled 0 indicating that pass
fail testing for the specified measurement is disabled.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-869

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILHIGHlimit
This command returns or sets the high limit for a measurement test. Used as the
test value when the "fail when" criteria is set to "less than" or "greater than".
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILHIGHlimit <NR2>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILHIGHlimit?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE

Arguments <NR2> sets the high limit for a measurement test. The high limit is a number
which a measurement result will be tested against.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILHIGHlimit 710 specifies 710 as the high

limit for measurement 1.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILHIGHlimit? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILHIGHlimit 710 indicating that 710 is the
high limit for measurement 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILLIMit
This command returns or sets the limit for a measurement test. Used as the
test value when the "fail when" criteria is set to "less than" or "greater than".
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILLIMit <NR2>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILLIMit?

2-870 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE

Arguments <NR2> sets the limit for a measurement test. The limit is a number which a
measurement result will be tested against.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILLIMit 710 specifies 710 as the limit for

measurement 1.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILLIMit? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILLIMit 710 indicating that 710 is
the limit for measurement 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILLOWlimit
This command returns or sets the low limit for a measurement test. Used as the
test value when the "fail when" criteria is set to "less than" or "greater than".
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILLOWlimit <NR2>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILLOWlimit?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE

Arguments <NR2> sets the low limit for a measurement test. The limit is a number which a
measurement result will be tested against.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-871

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILLOWlimit 690 specifies 690 as the limit

for measurement 1.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILLOWlimit? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILLOWlimit 690 indicating that 690 is the
low limit for measurement 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILMARgin
This command returns or sets the allowed margin for limit comparisons for all pass/fail checks.
This is given as a percentage with a default value of 0.05 representing
5%. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILMARgin <NR2>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILMARgin?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE

Arguments <NR2> sets the allowed margin for limit comparisons for all pass/fail checks.
The margin as a percentage of the limit.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILMARgin 0.10 specifies 10% as

the allowed margin for limit comparisons for all pass/fail checks.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILMARgin? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILMARgin 0.10 indicating that
10% is the allowed margin for limit comparisons for all pass/fail checks on
measurement 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILWHEN
This command sets or returns the condition on which a measurement test fails. Measurements
are specified by x.

2-872 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILWHEN {LESSthan| GREATERthan|

Equals| NOTEQuals| INSIDErange| OUTSIDErange}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILWHEN?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE

Arguments LESSthan sets the condition for measurement test failure as less than the given
limit. This is the default value.
GREATERthan sets the condition for measurement test failure as greater than
the given limit.
Equals sets the condition for measurement test failure as equals the given limit.

NOTEQuals sets the condition for measurement test failure as not equal to the
given limit.
INSIDErange sets the condition for measurement test failure as inside the limit
range.
OUTSIDErange sets the condition for measurement test failure as outside the
limit range.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILWHEN LESSthan specifies the condition for

measurement 1 test failure as less that the given limit.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILWHEN? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILWHEN LESSthan indicating that the
condition for measurement 1 test failure as less that the given limit.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PATTERNDETECTION
This command sets or queries the pattern detection type for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-873

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PATTERNDETECTION {AUTO|MANUAL}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PATTERNDETECTION?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

AUTO automatically detects the pattern.

MANUAL requires manually detecting the pattern.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:PATTERNDETECTION MANUAL specifies manually

detecting the pattern.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:PATTERNDETECTION? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:PATTERNDETECTION AUTO indicating
patterns are automatically detected.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PATTERNLENgth
This command sets or queries the pattern length for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PATTERNLENgth <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PATTERNLENgth?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the pattern length.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:PATTERNLENgth 3.0 sets the pattern length to 3.0.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:PATTERNLENgth? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:PATTERNLENGTH 2.0000 indicating the
patternlength is 2.0.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PATTERNTYPe
This command sets or queries the pattern type for the measurement. Measurements
are specified by x.

Group Measurement

2-874 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PATTERNTYPe {REPeating|ARBitrary}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PATTERNTYPe?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

REPeating specifies a repeating pattern.

ARBitrary specifies an arbitrary pattern.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:PATTERNTYPe ARBITRARY specifies an arbitrary pattern.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:PATTERNTYPe? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:PATTERNTYPE REPEATING indicating a repeating
pattern.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PCOUNt
This command sets or returns number of pulses. Measurements are specified by x.

Conditions Requires a WBG-DPT license.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PCOUNt <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PCOUNt?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the number of pulses.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:PCOUNt 10 sets the number of pulses to 10.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:PCOUNt? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:PCOUNt

10, indicating the number of pulses is 10.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PERFREQ:EDGE
This command sets or queries the edge type of a Period/Frequency measurement.
The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-875

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PERFREQ:EDGE {FIRST|RISE|FALL}

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

FIRST computes the measurement between Rising edges if the first edge is Rising.
Computes the measurement between Falling edges if the first edge is Falling.
RISE computes the measurement between Rising edges.

FALL computes the measurement between Falling edges.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:PERFREQ:EDGE RISE specifies computing the

measurement between Rising edges.
measurement:meas1:perfreq:edge? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:PERFREQ:EDGE FIRST if the measurement
is computed between edges of the first type edge found.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PFREquency
This command sets or returns the PJ max frequency value of PSIJ measurement.

Conditions Requires a DPM License.

Group Measurement, DPM

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PFREquency <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PFREquency?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> specifies the value of PJ max frequency for PSIJ measurement.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:PFREquency 1.0000 specifies the value of PJ max

frequency as 1 for measurement 2.
MEASUrement:MEAS2:PFREquency? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:PFREquency 1.0000 indicating the value of PJ max
frequency is 1 for measurement 2.

2-876 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POLarity
This command sets or queries the polarity for the measurement when the
measurement type is burst width. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POLarity {NORMal|INVerted}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POLarity?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

NORMal specifies normal polarity.

INVerted specifies inverted polarity.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:POLarity INVERTED specifies inverted polarity.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:POLarity? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:POLARITY NORMAL indicating normal polarity.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POPower
This command sets or queries the Percentage Power to be measured for the
Occupied Bandwidth measurement. The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POPower <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POPower?

Related Commands MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OBWMethod

Arguments <NR3> sets the Percentage Power value. The default value is 99.9 and the valid
range is 60.0 to 99.9.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:POPower 99 sets power to 99%.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:POPower? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:POPower 99 indicating the power is set to 99%.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-877

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POPUlation:GLOBal
This command sets or queries the population settings global flag. The
measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POPUlation:GLOBal {OFF|ON|0|1}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POPUlation:GLOBal?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

OFF specifies that population settings can be changed independently for each
individual measurement.
ON applies the global population settings to all the measurements' population
settings.
0 specifies that population settings can be changed independently for each
individual measurement.
1 applies the global population settings to all the measurements' population
settings.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:POPUlation:GLOBal 1 applies the global population

settings to all the measurements' population settings.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:POPUlation:GLOBal? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:POPULATION:GLOBAL 0 indicating that population
settings can be changed independently for each individual measurement.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POPUlation:LIMIT:STATE
This command sets or queries the population limit state for the measurement. The
measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POPUlation:LIMIT:STATE {OFF|ON|0|1}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POPUlation:LIMIT:STATE?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

OFF turns off the population limit.

2-878 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ON turns on the population limit.

0 turns off the population limit.

1 turns on the population limit.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:POPUlation:LIMIT:STATE 0 turns off the population

limit.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:POPUlation:LIMIT:STATE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:POPULATION:LIMIT:STATE 1 indicating the
population limit is on.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POPUlation:LIMIT:VALue
This command sets or queries the population limit value for the measurement.
The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POPUlation:LIMIT:VALue <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POPUlation:LIMIT:VALue?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> the current limit value.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:POPUlation:LIMIT:VALue 2000 sets the population

limit to 2000.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:POPUlation:LIMIT:VALue? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:POPULATION:LIMIT:VALUE 1000 indicating the limit
is set to 1000.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POWERFACtor
This command sets or queries the power factor value for IEC-Class C type
harmonics standard. The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POWERFACtor <NR2>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POWERFACtor?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-879

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR2> specifies the power factor value for class C harmonics standard.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:POWERFACtor sets the .

MEASUrement:MEAS1:POWERFACtor? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:POWERFACtor indicating the .

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PREGion
This command sets or returns pulse region for a measurement. Measurements
are specified by x.

Conditions Requires a WBG-DPT license.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PREGion {FPULse|SPULse|MPULse}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PREGion?

Arguments FPULse is the pulse region as Fpulse.

SPULse is the pulse region as Spulse.

MPULse is the pulse region as Mpulse.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:PREGion Fpulse sets the pulse region to Fpulse.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:PREGion? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:PREGion Fpulse, indicating the pulse region is
set to Fpulse.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PRESistance
This command sets or returns the probe resistance for WBG measurement.

Conditions Requires a WBG-DPT License.

Group Measurement, WBG

2-880 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PRESistance <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PRESistance?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> specifies the value for probe resistance of the WBG measurement.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:PRESistance 1.0000E+3 specifies the value for probe

resistance as 1.0000E+3 for measurement 2.
MEASUrement:MEAS2:PRESistance? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:PRESistance 1.0000E+3 indicating the value for
probe resistance is 1.0000E+3 for measurement 2.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PTHReshold
This command sets or returns the PJ threshold value of PSIJ measurement.

Conditions Requires a DPM License.

Group Measurement, DPM

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PTHReshold <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PTHReshold?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> specifies the value of PJ threshold for PSIJ measurement.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:PTHReshold 1.00E-21 specifies the value of PJ

threshold as 1.00E-21 for measurement 2.
MEASUrement:MEAS2:PTHReshold? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:PTHReshold 1.00E-21 indicating the value of PJ
threshold is 1.00E-21 for measurement 2.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PWIDth
This command sets or returns pulse width. Measurements are specified by x.

Conditions Requires a WBG-DPT license.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-881

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PWIDth <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PWIDth?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the pulse width.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:PWIDth 15.0000 sets the pulse width to 15.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:PWIDth? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:PWIDth

15.0000, indicating the pulse width is 15.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REDGe
This command turns on or off the Refine edge on qualifier. Measurements are
specified by x.

Conditions Requires a WBG-DPT license.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REDGe {ON|OFF}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REDGe?

Arguments ON specifies the Refine edge settings has been turned on.

OFF specifies the Refine edge settings has been turned off.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REDGe ON turns on the Refine edge on qualifier.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:REDGe? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REDGe

ON, indicating the Refine edge settings has been turned on.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh
This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of
the falling edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.
Measurements are specified by x.

NOTE. This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements

2-882 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the high reference level in volts. The default is 0.0 V.

Examples MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLHIGH 1.71 sets the high

reference level to 1.71 V.
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLHIGH? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLHIGH 1.7100E+00,
indicating that the absolute high reference level is set to 1.71 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:FALLLow
This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of
the falling edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.
Measurements are specified by x.

NOTE. This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:FALLLow <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:FALLLow?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the low reference level in volts. The default is 0.0 V.

Examples MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:ABSOLUTE:FALLLOW 0.0 V sets the

low reference level to 0.0 V.
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:ABSOLUTE:FALLLOW? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:ABSOLUTE:FALLLOW 0.0000E+00,
indicating that the absolute low reference level is set to 0.0 V.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-883

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:FALLMid
This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of
the falling edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.
Measurements are specified by x.

NOTE. This command affects the results of period, frequency, delay, and all
cyclic measurements.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:FALLMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:FALLMid?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the mid reference level in volts. The default is 0.0 V.

Examples MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:ABSOLUTE:FALLMID 0.5 sets the mid

reference level for the delay waveform to 0.5 V.
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:ABSOLUTE:FALLMID? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:ABSOLUTE:FALLMID 0.5000E+00,
indicating that the absolute mid reference level is set to 0.5 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the value of the hysteresis of the reference level
when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute. The measurement
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:HYSTeresis <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:HYSTeresis?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the hysteresis value used for autoset.

2-884 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:ABSolute:HYSTeresis 25.0E-3 sets

the hysteresis to 25 mV.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:ABSolute:HYSTeresis? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:ABSOLUTE:HYSTERESIS 30.0000E-3
indicating the hysteresis is set to 30 mV.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:RISEHigh
This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the
rising edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute. The
measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:RISEHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:RISEHigh?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the high reference level, and is the zero percent level when the
measurement's Ref level method is set to Absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:ABSolute:RISEHigh 1.50 sets the

high reference level to 1.5 V.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:ABSolute:RISEHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:ABSOLUTE:RISEHIGH 1.0000
indicating the high reference level is set to 1.0 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:RISELow
This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the
rising edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute. The
measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:RISELow <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:RISELow?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-885

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the low reference level, and is the zero percent level when the
measurement's Ref level method is set to Absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:ABSolute:RISELow -1.50 sets the

low reference level to -1.5 V.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:ABSolute:RISELow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:ABSOLUTE:RISELOW -1.0000
indicating the low reference level is -1.0 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:RISEMid
This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the
rising edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute. The
measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:RISEMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:RISEMid?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the mid reference level (where 50% is equal to MID) used to calculate the
mid reference level when the measurement's Ref level method is set to Absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:ABSolute:RISEMid 30.0E-3 sets the

mid reference level to 30 mV.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:ABSolute:RISEMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:ABSOLUTE:RISEMID 0.0E+0
indicating the mid reference level is 0.0 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:TYPE
This command sets or queries the reference level type for the measurement. The
measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

2-886 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:TYPE {SAME|UNIQue}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:TYPE?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

SAME specifies that the absolute levels are set the same.

UNIQue specifies that the absolute levels can be set independently.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:ABSolute:TYPE UNIQUE specifies that

the absolute levels can be set independently.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:ABSolute:TYPE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:ABSOLUTE:TYPE SAME indicating the
absolute levels are set the same.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:BASETop
This command sets or queries the method used to calculate the TOP and BASE
used to calculate reference levels for the measurement. The measurement number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:BASETop
{AUTO|MINMax|MEANhistogram| MODEhistogram|EYEhistogram}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:BASETop?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

AUTO automatically chooses a reference level method.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:BASETop MINMAX specifies that reference

levels are relative to the measurement MIN and MAX.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-887

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:BASETop? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:BASETOP AUTO indicating the
instrument automatically chooses a reference level method.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:METHod
This command sets or queries the method used to calculate reference levels for the
measurement. The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:METHod {PERCent|ABSolute}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:METHod?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

PERCent specifies that the reference levels are calculated as a percent

relative to HIGH and LOW. The percentages are defined using the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent commands.
ABSolute specifies that the reference levels are set explicitly using the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute commands. This method is
useful when precise values are required.

Examples MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:METHOD ABSOLUTE specifies that explicit

user-defined values are used for the reference levels.
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:METHOD? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:METHOD PERCENT, indicating that the
reference level units used are calculated as a percent relative to HIGH and LOW.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:FALLHigh
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1%
is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the falling edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent. The measurement
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:FALLHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:FALLHigh?

2-888 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the percentage (where 100% is equal to HIGH) used to calculate the
high reference level.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:FALLHigh 95.0 sets the high

reference level of the falling edge to 95%.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:FALLHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:PERCENT:FALLHIGH 90.0000
indicating the high reference level is set to 90%.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:FALLLow
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and
1% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the falling edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent. The measurement
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:FALLLow <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:FALLLow?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the percentage (where 100% is equal to HIGH) used to calculate the
mid reference level.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:FALLLow 5.0 sets the low

reference level of the falling edge is 5%.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:FALLLow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:PERCENT:FALLLOW 10.0000
indicating the low reference level of the falling edge is 10%.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:FALLMid
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1%
is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent. The measurement
number is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-889

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:FALLMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:FALLMid?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the percentage (where 50% is equal to MID) used to calculate the mid
reference level.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:FALLMid 50.0 sets the mid

reference level of the falling edge to 50%.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:FALLMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:PERCENT:FALLMID 50.0000
indicating the mid reference level of the falling edge is set to 50%.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to MAX and
1% is equal to MIN) used to calculate the hysteresis of the reference level when
the measurement's ref level method is set to percent. The measurement number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:HYSTeresis <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:HYSTeresis?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the hysteresis value used for the autoset.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:HYSTeresis 5.0 sets the

hysteresis level to 5%.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:HYSTeresis? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:PERCENT:HYSTERESIS 5.0000
indicating the hysteresis is 5.0%.

2-890 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:RISEHigh
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and
1% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent. The measurement
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:RISEHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:RISEHigh?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP) used to calculate the high
reference level when the measurement's Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:RISEHigh 95.0 sets the high

reference level of the rising edge is set to 95%.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:RISEHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:PERCENT:RISEHIGH 90.0000
indicating the high reference level of the rising edge is set to 90%.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:RISELow
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and
1% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent. The measurement
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:RISELow <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:RISELow?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP) used to calculate the mid
reference level when the measurement's Ref level method is set to Percent.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-891

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:RISELow 5.0 sets the low

reference level is set to 5.0%.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:RISELow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:PERCENT:RISELOW 10.0000
indicating the low reference level is set to 10.0%.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:RISEMid
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and
1% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent. The measurement
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:RISEMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:RISEMid?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> the percentage (where 50% is equal to MID) used to calculate the mid
reference level when the measurement Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:RISEMid 50.0000 sets the

mid reference level of the rising edge is set to 50.0%.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:RISEMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:PERCENT:RISEMID 50.0000
indicating the mid reference level of the rising edge is set to 50.0%.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:TYPE
This command specifies or queries the reference level percent type for the
measurement. The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:TYPE
{TENNinety|TWENtyeighty|CUSTom}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:TYPE?

2-892 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:TYPE TWENtyeighty sets the

reference levels percent to 20%, 50% and 80%.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:TYPE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:PERCENT:TYPE TENNINETY indicating
the reference levels percent type is 10%, 50% and 90% respectively

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFMode
This command sets or queries the reference level mode for the measurement. The
measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFMode {AUTO|MANual}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFMode?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

AUTO sets the reference level for the measurement automatically.

MANual allows the user to set the reference level for the measurement.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFMode Manual allows the user to set the reference

level for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFMode? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFMODE AUTO indicating the reference levels for the
measurement are set automatically.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFVoltage
This command sets or queries the reference voltage value for the measurement.
The measurement number is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-893

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFVoltage <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFVoltage?

Arguments MEAS<x> is the measurement number.

<NR3> is the reference voltage value for the selected configuration.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFVoltage 30.E-3 sets the reference voltage value

for the measurement to 30 mV.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFVoltage? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFVOLTAGE 0.0E+0 indicating the reference voltage
value for the measurement is 0.0 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFVOLTAGE<x>Val
Sets or queries the reference voltage per rail of Overshoot and Undershoot
measurements.

Conditions Requires option 5-DPM (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-DPM (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group DPM

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFVOLTAGE<x>Val <NR2>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFVOLTAGE<x>Val?

Arguments MEAS<x> is the measurement number.

REFVOLTAGE<x> is the rail number.

<NR2> is the reference voltage, in the range of -500 V to +500 V.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFVOLTAGE3Val –125 sets the reference voltage for

rail 3 of measurement 1 to –125 volts.
MEASUrement:MEAS3:REFVOLTAGE1Val? might return 55.200, indicating
that the reference voltage of rail 1 on measurement 3 is set to +55.2 volts.

2-894 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MAXimum? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the maximum value for all accumulated
measurement acquisitions of the specified measurement. The measurement
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MAXimum?

Returns The maximum value for all accumulated measurement acquisitions of the
specified measurement.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MAXimum? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:ALLACQS:MAXIMUM 2.420 indicating the
maximum measurement value is 2.420 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MEAN? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the mean value for all accumulated
measurement acquisitions for measurement <x>.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MEAN?

Returns The mean value for all accumulated measurement acquisitions for measurement
<x>.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MEAN? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:ALLACQS:MEAN 2.2807617754647
indicating the measurement mean is 2.28 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MINimum? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the minimum value for all accumulated
measurement acquisitions for measurement <x>.

Group Measurement

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-895

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MINimum?

Returns The minimum value for all accumulated measurement acquisitions for
measurement <x>.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MINimum? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:ALLACQS:MINIMUM 2.220 indicating the
measurement minimum value is 2.220 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:PK2PK? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the peak-to-peak value for all accumulated
measurement acquisitions for measurement <x>.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:PK2PK?

Returns The peak-to-peak value for all accumulated measurement acquisitions for
measurement <x>.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:PK2PK? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:ALLACQS:PK2PK 200.0E-3 indicating the
measurement peak-to-peak value is 200 mV.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:POPUlation? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the population measurement value for
measurement <x>.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:POPUlation?

Returns The population measurement value for measurement <x>.

2-896 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:POPUlation? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:ALLACQS:POPULATION 29825 indicating
the measurement population is 29825 measurements.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:STDDev? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the standard deviation for all accumulated
measurement acquisitions for measurement <x>.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:STDDev?

Returns The standard deviation for all accumulated measurement acquisitions for
measurement <x>.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:STDDev? might

return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:ALLACQS:STDDEV
23.5741246494459E-3 indicating the measurement standard deviation is
23.57 mV.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MAXimum? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the maximum value found for the specified
measurement since the last statistical reset. The measurement number is specified
by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MAXimum?

Returns The maximum value found for the specified measurement since the last statistical
reset.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MAXimum? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:CURRENTACQ:MAXIMUM 2.280 indicating
the current measurement maximum value is 2.28 V.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-897

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the mean value for the measurement for the
current acquisition.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN?

Arguments MEAS<x> is the measurement number for which to return a value. This is the
equivalent of the number shown in the measurement badge on the UI.

Returns The mean value accumulated for the specified measurement since the last
statistical reset.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS3:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:RESULTS:CURRENTACQ:MEAN 2.30 indicating the
mean of measurement 3 in the current acquisition is 2.3 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MINimum? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the minimum value found for the specified
measurement since the last statistical reset. The measurement number is specified
by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MINimum?

Returns The minimum value found for the specified measurement since the last statistical
reset.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MINimum? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:CURRENTACQ:MINIMUM 2.260 indicating
the minimum value of the measurement in the current acquisition is 2.26 V.

2-898 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:PK2PK? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the peak-to-peak value for the specified
measurement for the current acquisition. The measurement number is specified
by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:PK2PK?

Returns The peak-to-peak value for the specified measurement.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:PK2PK? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:CURRENTACQ:PK2PK 0.0E+0 indicating
the peak-to-peak value for the specified measurement for the current acquisition
is 0.0 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:POPUlation? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the population for the specified measurement
for the current acquisition. The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:POPUlation?

Returns The population measurement value for the specified measurement.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:POPUlation? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:CURRENTACQ:POPULATION 1 indicating the
population for the current measurement is 1 measurement.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:STDDev? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the standard deviation for the specified
measurement for all acquisitions accumulated since statistics were last reset. The
measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-899

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:STDDev?

Returns The standard deviation of values accumulated for the specified measurement
since the last statistical reset.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:STDDev? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:CURRENTACQ:STDDEV 0.0E+0 indicating
the standard deviation for the measurement is 0.0 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory:MAXimum? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the maximum value for the specified
measurement for each acquisition in the history. The measurement number is
specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory:MAXimum?

Returns A comma-separated list of the maximum values for each acquisition in the history.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:HISTory:MAXimum? might return

:MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:HISTory:MAXimum 2.28,2.31,2.27
indicating there are three acquisitions in the history and the maximum value for
measurement 1 is 2.28 V for the first acquisition, 2.31 V for the second acquisition
and 2.27 V for the third acquisition.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory:MEAN? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the mean value for the specified measurement
for each acquisition in the history. The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory:MEAN?

Returns A comma-separated list of the mean values for each acquisition in the history.

2-900 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:HISTory:MEAN? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:HISTORY:MEAN 2.30,2.25,2.32
indicating there are three acquisitions in the history and the mean value for
measurement 1 is 2.3 V for the first acquisition, 2.25 V for the second acquisition,
and 2.32 V for the third acquisition.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory:MINimum? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the minimum value for the specified
measurement for each acquisition in the history. The measurement number is
specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory:MINimum?

Returns A comma-separated list of the minimum values for each acquisition in the history.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:HISTory:MINimum? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:HISTORY:MINIMUM 2.26,2.14,2.29
indicating there are three acquisitions in the history and the minimum value
for measurement 1 is 2.26 V for the first acquisition, 2.14 V for the second
acquisition, and 2.29 V for the third acquisition.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory:PK2PK? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the peak-to-peak value for the specified
measurement for each acquisition in the history. The measurement number is
specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory:PK2PK?

Returns A comma-separated list of the peak-to-peak values for each acquisition in the
history.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:HISTory:PK2PK? might

return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:HISTORY:PK2PK

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-901

Commands listed in alphabetical order

0.0E+0,0.0E+0,0.0E+0 indicating there are three acquisitions in

the history and the peak-to-peak value for measurement 1 for each acquisition
is 0.0 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory:POPUlation? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the population value for the specified
measurement for each acquisition in the history. The measurement number is
specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory:POPUlation?

Returns A comma-separated list of the population values for each acquisition in the history.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory:POPUlation? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:HISTORY:POPULATION 1,1,1 indicating
there are three acquisitions in the history and the population for measurement 1
for each acquisition is 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory:STDDev? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the standard deviation value for the specified
measurement for each acquisition in the history. The measurement number is
specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory:STDDev?

Returns A comma-separated list of the standard deviation values for each acquisition
in the history.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory:STDDev? might

return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:HISTORY:STDDEV
0.0E+0,0.0E+0,0.0E+0 indicating there are three acquisitions in the history
and the standard deviation value for measurement 1 for each acquisition is 0.0 V.

2-902 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RFREquency
This command sets or returns the center frequency value of PSIJ measurement.

Conditions Requires a DPM License.

Group Measurement, DPM

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RFREquency <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RFREquency?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> specifies the value of center frequency for PSIJ measurement.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:RFREquency 100.00E+3 specifies the value of center

frequency as 100.00E+3 for measurement 2.
MEASUrement:MEAS2:RFREquency? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:RFREquency 100.00E+3 indicating the value of
center frequency is 100.00E+3 for measurement 2.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RIPPLEFREQ<x>Val
Sets or queries the ripple frequency per specified rail for Ripple measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-DPM (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-DPM (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group DPM

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RIPPLEFREQ<x>Val <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RIPPLEFREQ<x>Val?

Arguments MEAS<x> is the measurement number.

RIPPLEFREQ<x> is the rail number.

<NR3> is the frequency, in the range of 1 Hz to 4 GHz.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-903

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:RIPPLEFREQ3Val 5.2e6 sets the ripple frequency for

rail 3 of measurement 1 to 5.2 MHz.
MEASUrement:MEAS3:RIPPLEFREQ1val? might return 1.0000E+6, indicating
that the ripple frequency of rail 1 on measurement 3 is set to 1 MHz.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RRANGE
This command sets or returns the span value of PSIJ measurement.

Conditions Requires a DPM License.

Group Measurement, DPM

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RRANGE <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RRANGE?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> specifies the value of span for PSIJ measurement.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:RRANGE 100.000 specifies the value of span as 100

for measurement 2.
MEASUrement:MEAS2:RRANGE? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:RRANGE
100.000 indicating the value of span is 100 for measurement 2.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SEQuence
This command sets or queries the sequence of hall edges. The measurement
number is specified by x.

Conditions IMDA-MECH license on 5 and 6 Series MSO instruments.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SEQuence {ABC|ACB}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SEQuence?

2-904 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

ABC specifies the motor Hall edges sequence as ABC.

ACB specifies the motor Hall edges sequence as ACB.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SEQuence ACB specifies the motor Hall edges sequence

as ACB.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:SEQuence? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SEQuence ACB, indicating the motor Hall edges
sequence is ACB.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SIGNALFREQUEncy
This command sets or queries line frequency for Harmonics and Ripple line
frequency. The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SIGNALFREQUEncy
{AUTO|FIFTYHZ|SIXTYHZ|FOURHUNDREDHZ|CUSTOM}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SIGNALFREQUEncy?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

AUTO specifies the line frequency as auto. Only available for Harmonics line
frequency.
FIFTYHZ specifies the line frequency as 50 Hz.

SIXTYHZ specifies the line frequency as 60 Hz.

FOURHUNDREDHZ specifies the line frequency as 400 Hz. .

CUSTOM specifies the line frequency as custom.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SIGNALFREQUEncy FIFTYHZ specifies the line

frequency as 50 Hz for measurement 1.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:SIGNALFREQUEncy? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SIGNALFREQUEncy FIFTYHZ, indicating
the line frequency is 50 Hz.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-905

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SIGNALType
This command sets or queries the signal type of source 1 for the measurement.
The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SIGNALType {CLOCK|DATA|AUTO}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SIGNALType?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

CLOCK specifies a clock signal type.

DATA specifies a data signal type.

AUTO automatically selects the signal type.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SIGNALType CLOCK specifies a clock signal type.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:SIGNALType? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SIGNALTYPE AUTO indicating the instrument
automatically selects the signal type.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SLABs
This command sets or returns the value for the start level in absolute.

Conditions Requires a WBG-DPT license.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SLABs <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SLABs?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> specifies the value for the start level in absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SLABs -100.0000 sets the value for the start level to
-100.

2-906 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS1:SLABs? might return :MEASUrement:MEAS1:SLABs

-100.0000, indicating the value for the start level is -100.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SLPCt
This command sets or returns the value for the start level in percentage.

Conditions Requires a WBG-DPT license.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SLPCt <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SLPCt?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> specifies the value for the start level in percentage

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SLPCt 10.0000E-3 sets the value for the start level
in percentage to 10.0000E-3.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:SLPCt? might return :MEASUrement:MEAS1:SLPCt
10.0000E-3, indicating the value for the start level in percentage is 10.0000E-3.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SLTYpe
This command sets or returns the start level source type.

Conditions Requires a WBG-DPT license.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SLTYpe {VDS|ID|VGE|VCE|IC}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SLTYpe?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

VDS specifies the start level source type as VDS.

ID specifies the start level source type as ID.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-907

Commands listed in alphabetical order

VGE specifies the start level source type as VGE.

VCE specifies the start level source type as VCE.

IC specifies the start level source type as IC.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SLTYpe ID sets the start level source type to ID.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:SLTYpe? might return :MEASUrement:MEAS1:SLTYpe

ID, indicating the start level source type is ID.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SMOOTHINGFILTER
This command sets or queries the status of smoothing filter.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SMOOTHINGFILTER <NR1>

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR1> sets the value to 1 or 0. 1 enables smoothing filter and 0 disables it.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SMOOTHINGFILTER 1 sets smoothing filter to ON.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:SMOOTHINGFILTER? might return

:MEASUrement:MEAS1:SMOOTHINGFILTER 1, indicating the
smoothing filter is ON.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE
This command sets or queries local input source.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

Argument is the local input source.

2-908 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SOURCE CH3 sets the local input source to channel 3.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:SOURCE? might return :MEASUrement:MEAS1:SOURCE

CH2 indicating the local input source is channel 2.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x>
This command sets or queries the measurement source. The measurement number
and source are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x>
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x>?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

SOUrce<x> specifies the source number.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SOUrce CH1 sets the source for measurement 1 to

channel 1.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:SOUrce? might return :MEASUrement:MEAS1:SOUrce
CH1 indicating the measurement source is channel 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SRATe
This command sets or queries the symbol rate for the RRC filter in the
measurement. The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SRATe <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SRATe?

Related Commands MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FTYPe

Arguments <NR3> sets the symbol rate. The default is 3.84e6 and the valid range is 1.0 to
5.0e9.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-909

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SRATe 3.84e6 sets the symbol rate to 3.84e6.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:SRATe? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SRATe

3.84e6 indicating the symbol rate is 3.84e6.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SSC:NOMinalfreq
This command sets or queries the user-defined frequency for the measurement
when the measurement type is SSC. The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SSC:NOMinalfreq <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SSC:NOMinalfreq?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the user-defined nominal frequency type for SSC configurations.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SSC:NOMinalfreq 2.0E+9 sets the frequency to

2.0 GHz.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:SSC:NOMinalfreq? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SSC:NOMINALFREQ 2.5000E+9 indicating
the frequency is 2.5 GH.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SSC:NOMinalfreq:SELECTIONtype
This command sets or queries the frequency detection type for the measurement
when the measurement type is SSC. The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SSC:NOMinalfreq:SELECTIONtype
{AUTO|MANual}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SSC:NOMinalfreq:SELECTIONtype?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

AUTO automatically sets the detection type.

MANual specifies the manual detection type.

2-910 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SSC:NOMinalfreq:SELECTIONtype AUTO specifies

the auto-detection type.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:SSC:NOMinalfreq:SELECTIONtype? might
return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SSC:NOMINALFREQ:SELECTIONTYPE AUTO
indicating the auto-detection type is selected.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SSDirection
This command sets or returns the start search direction for measurement. The
measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires WBG-DPT License.

Group Wide Bandgap Analysis

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SSDirection {FORWARD|BACKWARD}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SSDirection?

Arguments FORWARD specifies the start search direction for measurement as forward.

BACKWARD specifies the start search direction for measurement as backward.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SSDirection FORWARD specifies the start search

direction for measurement as forward.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:SSDirection? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SSDirection FORWARD indicating the start search
direction for measurement is forward.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATUS? (Query Only)

This command returns the pass fail status, if applicable, for the selected measurement. Measur
are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATUS?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-911

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE

Arguments PASS specifies that the user specified measurement limit has not been violated.

FAIL specifies that the user specified measurement limit has been violated.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:STATUS? might return :MEASUrement:MEAS1:STATUS

PASS indicating that the user specified measurement limit has not been violated.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STLABs
This command sets or returns the value for the stop level in absolute.

Conditions Requires a WBG-DPT license.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STLABs <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STLABs?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> specifies the value for the stop level in absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:STLABs 5.0000 sets the value for the stop level in
absolute to 5.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:STLABs 5.0000? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:STLABs 5.0000, indicating the value for
the stop level in absolute is 5.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STLPct
This command sets or returns the value for the stop level in percentage.

2-912 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires a WBG-DPT license.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STLPct <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STLPct?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> specifies the value for the stop level in percentage

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:STLPct 10.0000E-3 sets the value for the stop level
in percentage to 10.0000E-3.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:STLPct? might return :MEASUrement:MEAS1:STLPct
10.0000E-3, indicating the value for the stop level in percentage is 10.0000E-3.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STLTYpe
This command sets or returns the stop level source type.

Conditions Requires a WBG-DPT license.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STLTYpe {VDS|ID|VGE|VCE|IC}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STLTYpe?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

VDS specifies the stop level source type as VDS.

ID specifies the stop level source type as ID.

VGE specifies the stop level source type as VGE.

VCE specifies the stop level source type as VCE.

IC specifies the stop level source type as IC.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-913

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SLTYpe ID sets the stop level source type to ID.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:SLTYpe? might return :MEASUrement:MEAS1:SLTYpe

ID, indicating the stop level source type is ID.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STSDirection
This command sets or returns the stop search direction for measurement. The
measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires WBG-DPT License.

Group Wide Bandgap Analysis

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STSDirection {FORWARD|BACKWARD}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STSDirection?

Arguments FORWARD specifies the stop search direction for measurement as forward.

BACKWARD specifies the stop search direction for measurement as backward.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:STSDirection FORWARD specifies the stop search

direction for measurement as forward.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:STSDirection? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STSDirection FORWARD indicating the
stop search direction for measurement is forward.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STYPe
This command sets or queries the source type.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STYPe {VOLTage|CURRent}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STYPe?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

VOLTage sets source type as Voltage.

CURRent sets source type as Current.

2-914 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:STYPe VOLTage sets source type as Voltage.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:STYPe? might return MEASUrement:MEAS1:STYPe

VOLTage, indicating that the sets source type is Voltage.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MAXimum? (Query
Only)
This query returns the maximum value of the measurement specified by the string,
for all acquisitions.

Conditions Requires option 5-DPM (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-DPM (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group DPM

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MAXimum?
<Qstring>

Arguments <Qstring> = INPUT|OUTPUT1|OUTPUT2|OUTPUT3|OUTPUT4|OUTPUT5|

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MAXimum? "INPUT"

returns the maximum value of measurement INPUT, for all acquisitions.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MEAN? (Query Only)

This query returns the mean value of the measurement specified by the string,
for all acquisitions.

Conditions Requires option 5-DPM (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-DPM (6 Series MSO
instrument)

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-915

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group DPM

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MEAN? <Qstring>

Arguments <Qstring> = INPUT|OUTPUT1|OUTPUT2|OUTPUT3|OUTPUT4|OUTPUT5|

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MEAN? "RAIL1DPMOVERSHOOT"

returns the mean value of measurement RAIL1DPMOVERSHOOT, for all
acquisitions.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MINimum? (Query
Only)
This query returns the minimum value of the measurement specified by the string,
for all acquisitions.

Conditions Requires option 5-DPM (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-DPM (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group DPM

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MINimum?
<Qstring>

Arguments <Qstring> = INPUT|OUTPUT1|OUTPUT2|OUTPUT3|OUTPUT4|OUTPUT5|

2-916 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

|RAIL5PK2PK|RAIL5RMS |RAIL5RMSFULL |RAIL6FREQUENCY

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MINimum? "OUTPUT7"

returns the minimum value of measurement OUTPUT7, for all acquisitions.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:PK2PK? (Query Only)

This query returns the peak-to-peak value of the measurement specified by the
string, for all acquisitions.

Conditions Requires option 5-DPM (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-DPM (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group DPM

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:PK2PK?
<Qstring>

Arguments <Qstring> = INPUT|OUTPUT1|OUTPUT2|OUTPUT3|OUTPUT4|OUTPUT5|

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:PK2PK? "OUTPUT4"

returns the peak-to-peak value of measurement OUTPUT4, for all acquisitions.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:POPUlation? (Query
Only)
This query returns the population value of the measurement specified by the
string, for all acquisitions.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-917

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-DPM (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-DPM (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group DPM

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:POPUlation?
<Qstring>

Arguments <Qstring> = INPUT|OUTPUT1|OUTPUT2|OUTPUT3|OUTPUT4|OUTPUT5|

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:POPUlation? "RAIL1DPMUNDERSH

returns the population value of measurement RAIL1DPMUNDERSHOOT, for all
acquisitions.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:STDDev? (Query Only)

This query returns the standard deviation value of the measurement specified by
the string, for all acquisitions.

Conditions Requires option 5-DPM (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-DPM (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group DPM

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:STDDev?
<Qstring>

Arguments <Qstring> = INPUT|OUTPUT1|OUTPUT2|OUTPUT3|OUTPUT4|OUTPUT5|

2-918 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

|RAIL2RMSFULL |RAIL3FREQUENCY |RAIL3PK2PK

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:STDDev? "RAIL7PK2PK"

returns the standard deviation value of measurement RAIL7PK2PK, for all
acquisitions.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MAXimum? (Query
Only)
This query returns the maximum value of the measurement specified by the string,
for the current acquisition.

Conditions Requires option 5-DPM (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-DPM (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group DPM

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MAXimum?
<Qstring>

Arguments <Qstring> = INPUT|OUTPUT1|OUTPUT2|OUTPUT3|OUTPUT4|OUTPUT5|

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MAXimum? "INPUT"

returns the maximum value of measurement INPUT, for the current acquisition.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-919

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN? (Query
Only)
This query returns the mean value of the measurement specified by the string, for
the current acquisition.

Conditions Requires option 5-DPM (5 Series MSO instruments) or option 5-IMDA (MSO58
and MSO56 instruments) or 6-DPM (6 Series MSO instrument)

Group DPM, Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN?
<Qstring>

Arguments <Qstring> = INPUT |OUTPUT1 |OUTPUT2 |OUTPUT3 |OUTPUT4

2-920 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

|L2LPH2Frequency |L2LPH2MagnitudeAbs |L2LPH2MagnitudePct

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN? "RAIL1DPMOVERSHOO

returns the mean value of measurement RAIL1DPMOVERSHOOT, for the
current acquisition.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MINimum? (Query
Only)
This query returns the minimum value of the measurement specified by the string,
for the current acquisition.

Conditions Requires option 5-DPM (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-DPM (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group DPM

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-921

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MINimum?
<Qstring>

Arguments <Qstring> = INPUT|OUTPUT1|OUTPUT2|OUTPUT3|OUTPUT4|OUTPUT5|

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MINimum? "OUTPUT7"

returns the minimum value of measurement OUTPUT7, for the current acquisition.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:CURRentacq:PK2PK? (Query
Only)
This query returns the peak-to-peak value of the measurement specified by the
string, for the current acquisition.

Conditions Requires option 5-DPM (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-DPM (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group DPM

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:CURRentacq:PK2PK?
<Qstring>

Arguments <Qstring> = INPUT|OUTPUT1|OUTPUT2|OUTPUT3|OUTPUT4|OUTPUT5|

2-922 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

|RAIL2RMSFULL |RAIL3FREQUENCY |RAIL3PK2PK

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:CURRentacq:PK2PK? "OUTPUT4"

returns the peak-to-peak value of measurement OUTPUT4, for the
current acquisition.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:CURRentacq:POPUlation?
(Query Only)
This query returns the population value of the measurement specified by the
string, for the current acquisition.

Conditions Requires option 5-DPM (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-DPM (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group DPM

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:CURRentacq:POPUlation?
<Qstring>

Arguments <Qstring> = INPUT|OUTPUT1|OUTPUT2|OUTPUT3|OUTPUT4|OUTPUT5|

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:CURRentacq:POPUlation? "RAIL1DPMUN

returns the population value of measurement RAIL1DPMUNDERSHOOT, for the
current acquisition.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-923

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:CURRentacq:STDDev? (Query
Only)
This query returns the standard deviation value of the measurement specified by
the string, for the current acquisition.

Conditions Requires option 5-DPM (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-DPM (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group DPM

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:CURRentacq:STDDev?
<Qstring>

Arguments <Qstring> = INPUT|OUTPUT1|OUTPUT2|OUTPUT3|OUTPUT4|OUTPUT5|

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:CURRentacq:STDDev? "RAIL7PK2PK"

returns the standard deviation value of measurement RAIL7PK2PK, for the
current acquisition.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUNits
This command sets or queries the speed units for the specific measurement.

Conditions IMDA-MECH license on 5 and 6 Series MSO instrument.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUNits {RPM|HZ}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUNits?

2-924 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

RPM defines the speed measurement units as RPM.

HZ defines the speed measurement units as HZ.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SUNits HZ sets the speed measurement units as HZ.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:SUNits? might return MEASUrement:MEAS1:SUNits

HZ, indicating thatthe speed measurement units is HZ.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TCKAVG
This command sets or queries the average clock period value used in DDR
measurements.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TCKAVG <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TCKAVG?

Related Commands MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TIMINGMode

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

NR3 is a floating point number that represents the DDR average clock period in
seconds.

Examples MEASurement:MEAS7:TCKAVG 2.5E-9 sets the average clock period value

as 3.2 ns for measurement 7.
MEASurement:MEAS2:TCKAVG? might return MEASurement:MEAS2:TCKAVG
2.0E-9 indicating that average clock period is set to 2.0 ns for measurement 2.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TCONstant
This command sets or queries the measurement Torque Constant.

Conditions Requires IMDA-MECH license on MSO 5, 6, 6B series instruments.

Group IMDA

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-925

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TCONstant <NR1>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TCONstant?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

NR1 specifies the current multiplier value of the measurement in the range of
0 to 100.

Examples MEASurement:MEAS7:TCONstant 15.2 specifies the current multiplier value

for measurement 7 as 15.2.
MEASurement:MEAS2:TCONstant? might return
MEASurement:MEAS2:TCONstant 15.2 , indicating the current multiplier
value for measurement 2 is 15.2.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TMEThod
This command sets or queries the measurement torque method.

Conditions Requires IMDA-MECH license on MSO 5, 6, 6B series instruments.

Group IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TMEThod {SENSOR|CURRENT}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TMEThod?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

SENSOR specifies the Torque Method as SENSOR.

CURRENT specifies the Torque Method as CURRENT.

Examples MEASurement:MEAS7:TMEThod SENSOR specifies the Torque Method for

measurement 7 as SENSOR.
MEASurement:MEAS2:TMEThod? might return
MEASurement:MEAS2:TMEThod SENSOR , indicating the Torque Method for
measurement 2 is SENSOR.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TIMINGMode
This command sets or queries the Timing mode for the specified DDR
measurement.

2-926 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TIMINGMode
{EACHCLOCKCYCLE|TWOCLOCKCYCLES}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TIMINGMode?

Related Commands MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TCKAVG

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

EACHCLOCKCYCLE sets the DDR Timing Mode to use each clock cycle at a time.

TWOCLOCKCYCLES sets the DDR Timing Mode to use two cycles at a time.

Examples MEASurement:MEAS1:TIMINGMode EACHCLOCKCYCLE sets the Timing Mode

to consider each clock cycle.
MEASurement:MEAS1:TIMINGMode? might return
MEASurement:MEAS1:TIMINGMode EACHCLOCKCYCLE, indicating that Timing
Mode is set to EACHCLOCKCYCLE.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TLEVel
This command sets or queries whether histogram center is percentage relative to
unit amplitude or an absolute value, for eye height measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TLEVel {PERCent|ABSolute}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TLEVel?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

PERCent sets the histogram center as a percentage relative to unit amplitude.

ABSolute sets the histogram center as an absolute value.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:TLEVel PERCent sets the histogram center as a

percentage relative to unit amplitude for measurement 1.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:TLEVel? might return :MEASUrement:MEAS1:TLEVel
PERCent indicating histogram center is set as a percentage relative to unit
amplitude for measurement 1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-927

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOEdge
This command sets or queries the 'to edge' type for the measurement. The
measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOEdge
{SAMEas|OPPositeas|RISe|FALL|BOTH}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOEdge?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

FALL specifies the falling edge of the waveform.

RISE specifies the rising edge of the waveform.

BOTH specifies both a rising and falling edge of the waveform.

SAMEas specifies that both edges of the waveform are the same.

OPPositeas specifies that the edges of the waveform are not the same.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:TOEdge FALL specifies the to edge is the falling edge

of the waveform.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:TOEdge? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TOEDGE
SAMEAS indicating that both edges of the waveform are the same.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOEDGESEARCHDIRect
This command sets or queries the to edge search direction for the measurement.
The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOEDGESEARCHDIRect {FORWard|BACKWard}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOEDGESEARCHDIRect?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

FORWard specifies a forward search to the edge.

BACKWard specifies a backward search to the edge.

2-928 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:TOEDGESEARCHDIRect FORWARD specifies a forward

search to the edge.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:TOEDGESEARCHDIRect? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TOEDGESEARCHDIRECT FORWARD indicating the
instrument will search in the forward direction for the to edge.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol:LOGIC2SOUrce
This command sets or queries the DDR digital measurement logic 1 source To
Symbol.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol:LOGIC2SOUrce {H|L|X}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol:LOGIC2SOUrce?

Related Commands MEASUrement:ADDMEAS

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

H sets the logic source 1 To Symbol to H (High).

L sets the logic source 1 To Symbol to L (Low).

X sets the logic source 1 To Symbol to X (Don’t care).

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:TOSYmbol:LOGIC2SOUrce H sets the DDR digital

measurement (DDRTRPMRS/DDRTRPACT/DDRTCKSRE/DDRTCKSRX)
logic 1 source To Symbol to High.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:TOSYmbol:LOGIC2SOUrce? might
return MEASUrement:MEAS1::TOSYmbol:LOGIC2SOUrce
H, indicating that the DDR digital measurement
(DDRTRPMRS/DDRTRPACT/DDRTCKSRE/DDRTCKSRX) To Symbol
is set to High.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-929

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol:LOGIC3SOUrce
This command sets or queries the DDR digital measurement logic 2 source To
Symbol.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol:LOGIC3SOUrce {H|L|X}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol:LOGIC3SOUrce?

Related Commands MEASUrement:ADDMEAS

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

H sets the logic source 2 To Symbol to H (High).

L sets the logic source 2 To Symbol to L (Low).

X sets the logic source 2 To Symbol to X (Don’t care).

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:TOSYmbol:LOGIC3SOUrce H sets the DDR digital

measurement (DDRTRPMRS/DDRTRPACT/DDRTCKSRE/DDRTCKSRX)
logic 1 source To Symbol to High.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:TOSYmbol:LOGIC3SOUrce? might
return MEASUrement:MEAS1::TOSYmbol:LOGIC3SOUrce
H, indicating that the DDR digital measurement
(DDRTRPMRS/DDRTRPACT/DDRTCKSRE/DDRTCKSRX) To Symbol
is set to High.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol:LOGIC4SOUrce
This command sets or queries the DDR digital measurement logic 3 source To
Symbol.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.

2-930 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol:LOGIC4SOUrce {H|L|X}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol:LOGIC4SOUrce?

Related Commands MEASUrement:ADDMEAS

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

H sets the logic source 3 To Symbol to H (High).

L sets the logic source 3 To Symbol to L (Low).

X sets the logic source 3 To Symbol to X (Don’t care).

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:TOSYmbol:LOGIC4SOUrce H sets the DDR digital

measurement (DDRTRPMRS/DDRTRPACT/DDRTCKSRE/DDRTCKSRX)
logic 1 source To Symbol to High.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:TOSYmbol:LOGIC4SOUrce? might
return MEASUrement:MEAS1::TOSYmbol:LOGIC4SOUrce
H, indicating that the DDR digital measurement
(DDRTRPMRS/DDRTRPACT/DDRTCKSRE/DDRTCKSRX) To Symbol
is set to High.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol:LOGIC5SOUrce
This command sets or queries the DDR digital measurement logic 4 source To
Symbol.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol:LOGIC5SOUrce {H|L|X}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol:LOGIC5SOUrce?

Related Commands MEASUrement:ADDMEAS

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-931

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

H sets the logic source 4 To Symbol to H (High).

L sets the logic source 4 To Symbol to L (Low).

X sets the logic source 4 To Symbol to X (Don’t care).

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:TOSYmbol:LOGIC5SOUrce H sets the DDR digital

measurement (DDRTRPMRS/DDRTRPACT/DDRTCKSRE/DDRTCKSRX)
logic 1 source To Symbol to High.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:TOSYmbol:LOGIC5SOUrce? might
return MEASUrement:MEAS1::TOSYmbol:LOGIC5SOUrce
H, indicating that the DDR digital measurement
(DDRTRPMRS/DDRTRPACT/DDRTCKSRE/DDRTCKSRX) To Symbol
is set to High.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol:MEASUREAT
This command sets or queries the DDR digital measurement ToSymbol
MeasureAT value.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol:MEASUREAT
{Start|Stop|ClockEdge}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol:MEASUREAT?

Related Commands MEASUrement:ADDMEAS

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

Start sets the ToSymbol MeasureAT to Start.

Stop sets the ToSymbol MeasureAT to Stop.

ClockEdge sets the sets the ToSymbol MeasureAT to ClockEdge.

2-932 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:ToSYmbol:MEASUREAT Start sets the DDR digital

measurement (DDRTRPMRS/DDRTRPACT/DDRTCKSRE/DDRTCKSRX)
ToSymbol MeasureAT value to Start.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:ToSYmbol:MEASUREAT? might
return the MEASUrement:MEAS1:ToSYmbol:MEASUREAT
Stop, indicating that the DDR digital measurement
(DDRTRPMRS/DDRTRPACT/DDRTCKSRE/DDRTCKSRX) ToSymbol
MeasureAT value is set to Stop.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TRANSition
This command sets or queries the transition edges flag for the measurement. The
measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TRANSition {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

Arguments <NR1> = 1, the measurement is computed on rising (if measurement type is

rise time) or falling edges (if measurement type is fall time) following a double
transition only. If it is set to 0, the measurement is computed on all rising (if
measurement type is rise time) or falling (if measurement type is fall time) edges.
OFF computes the measurement on all rising (if measurement type is rise time)
or falling (if measurement type is fall time) edges.
ON computes the measurement on rising (if measurement type is rise time) or
falling edges (if measurement type is fall time) following a double transition only.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:TRANSition 1 specifyingthe measurement is computed

on rising (if measurement type is rise time) or falling edges (if measurement type
is fall time) following a double transition only.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:TRANSition? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TRANSITION 0 indicating the measurement is
computed on all rising (if measurement type is rise time) or falling (if
measurement type is fall time) edges.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
This command sets or queries the measurement type for the measurement
specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-933

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe {ACCOMMONMODE |ACPR |ACRMS

|AMPlITUDE |AREA |BASE |BITAMPLITUDE |BITHIGH | BITLOW
|BURSTWIDTH |COMMONMODE |CPOWER |DATARATE |DCD |DDJ
|DDRAOS |DDRAOSPERTCK |DDRAOSPERUI |DDRAUS |DDRAUSPERTCK
|DDRAUSPERUI |DDRHOLDDIFF |DDRSETUPDIFF |DDRTCHABS
|DDRTCHAVERAGE |DDRTCKAVERAGE |DDRTCLABS |DDRTCLAVERAGE
|DDRTERRMN |DDRTERRN |DDRTJITCC |DDRTJITDUTY |DDRTJITPER
|DDRTPST |DDRTRPRE |DDRTWPRE |DDRVIXAC |DDRTDQSCK |DELAY
|DJ |DJDIRAC |DPMOVERSHOOT |DPMPSIJ |DPMUNDERSHOOT
|DPMRIPPLE |DPMTURNOFFTIME |DPMTURNONTIME |EYEHIGH |EYELOW
|FALLSLEWRATE |FALLTIME |FREQUENCY |F2 |F4 |F8 |HIGH
|HEIGHT |HEIGHTBER |HIGHTIME |HOLD |IMDAANGLE |IMDADIRECTION
|IMDADQ0 |IMDAEFFICIENCY |IMDAHARMONICS |IMDAMECHPWR
|IMDAPOWERQUALITY |IMDASPEED |IMDASYSEFF |IMDATORQUE
|JITTERSUMMARY |J2 |J9 |LOW |LOWTIME |MAXIMUM |MEAN |MINIMUM
|NDUtY |NPERIOD |NPJ |NOVERSHOOT |NWIDTH |OBW |PDUTTY
|PERIOD |PHASE |PHASENOISE |PJ |PK2Pk |POVERSHOOT |PWIDTH
|QFACTOR |RISESLEWRATE |RISETIME |RJ |RJDIRAC |RMS |SRJ
|SSCFREQDEV |SSCMODRATE |SETUP |SKEW |TIE |TIMEOUTSIDELEVEL
|TJBER |TNTRATIO |TOP |UNITINTERVAL |VDIFFXOVR |WBGDDT
|WBGDIODEDDT |WBGEOFF |WBGEON |WBGERR |WBGIPEAK |WBGIRRM
|WBGQOSS |WBGQRR |WBGTDOFF |WBGTDON |WBGTF |WBGTON |WBGTOFF
|WBGTR |WBGTRR | WBGTDT| WBGVPEAK |WIDTH |WIDTHBER}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe?

Arguments ACCOMMONMODE AC Common Mode (Pk-Pk) is the peak-to-peak of the common

2-934 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BASE is the most common data value below the midpoint of the waveform. This
measurement can be made across the entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
BITAMPLITUDE (Bit Amplitude) is the difference between the amplitudes of the 1
bit and the 0 bit surrounding a transition. The amplitude is measured over a user
specified portion at the center of the recovered unit interval. This measurement
is made on each transition bit in the record (Mean) or across the entire record
(Mode). This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4
Series MSO instrument.
BITHIGH (Bit High) is the amplitude of a 1 bit. The amplitude is measured
over a user specified portion at the center of the recovered unit interval. This
measurement is made on each high bit in the record (Mean) or across the entire
record (Mode). This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on
a 4 Series MSO instrument.
BITLOW (Bit Low) is the amplitude of a 0 bit. The amplitude is measured
over a user specified portion at the center of the recovered unit interval. This
measurement is made on each high bit in the record (Mean) or across the entire
record (Mode). This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on
a 4 Series MSO instrument.
BURSTWIDTH (Burst Width) is the duration of a series of adjacent crossings of
the Mid reference level (RM). Bursts are separated by a user-defined idle time (tI).
This measurement is made on each burst in the record.
COMMONMODE (DC Common Mode) is the arithmetic mean of the common mode
voltage of two sources. This measurement is made across the entire record.
This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series
MSO instrument.
CPOWER (Channel Power) is the measurement of integrated power within a
specified channel bandwidth for a RF signal. The resulting channel power is an
absolute power measurement.
DATARATE (Data Rate) is the reciprocal of Unit Interval. This measurement is
made on each bit in the record.
DCD (duty cycle distortion) is the peak-to-peak amplitude of the component of the
deterministic jitter correlated with the signal polarity. This measurement is made
across the entire record. This measurement requires the DJA option and is not
available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
DDJ (data dependent jitter) is the peak-to-peak amplitude of the component of
the deterministic jitter correlated with the data pattern in the waveform. This
measurement is made across the entire record. This measurement requires the
DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
DDRAOS (area above signal) is the total area of the signal above a specified
reference level. This measurement is made across the entire record.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-935

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DDRAOSPERTCK (area over signal for tCK events) is the total area of the signal
above a specified reference level calculated over consecutive tCK intervals. It is
applicable to clock and address/command waveforms.
DDRAOSPERUI (area over signal for UI events) is the total area of the signal
above a specified reference level calculated over consecutive unit intervals. It is
applicable to data and data strobe waveforms.
DDRAUS (area under signal) is the total area of the signal below a specified
reference level. This measurement is made across the entire record.
DDRAUSPERTCK (area under signal for tCK events) is the total area of the signal
below a specified reference level calculated over consecutive tCK intervals. It is
applicable to clock and address/command waveforms.
DDRAUSPERUI (area under signal for UI events) is the total area of the signal
below a specified reference level calculated over consecutive unit intervals. It is
applicable to data and data strobe waveforms.
DDRHOLDDIFF (hold difference) is the elapsed time between the specified edge
of a single-ended clock waveform and the specified edge of a differential data
waveform. The measurement uses the closest respective waveform edges that fall
within the range limits.This measurement is made across the entire record.
DDRSETUPDIFF (setup difference) is the elapsed time between the specified edge
of a single-ended clock waveform and when the specified edge of a differential
data waveform crosses a specified level. The measurement uses the closest
respective waveform edges that fall within the range limits. This measurement is
made across the entire record.
DDRTCHABS (absolute high pulse width) is the absolute value of the high pulse
width as measured from one rising edge to the next falling edge.
DDRTCHAVERAGE (average high pulse width) is the average value of the high
pulse width as measured from one rising edge to the next falling edge, across 200
consecutive cycles.This measurement is made across the entire record.
DDRTCKAVERAGE (average clock period) is the average clock period calculated
from rising edge to rising edge, across 200 consecutive cycles.This measurement
is made across the entire record.
DDRTCLABS (absolute low pulse width) is the absolute value of the low pulse
width as measured from a falling edge to the next rising edge. This measurement
is made across the entire record.
DDRTCLAVERAGE (average low pulse width) is the average value of the low
pulse width as measured from one falling edge to the next rising edge, across
200 consecutive cycles.
DDRTERRMN (cumulative error) is the cumulative error across multiple consecutive
defined cycles from tCK(avg).

2-936 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DDRTERRN (cumulative error) is the cumulative error across specified consecutive

cycles from tCK(avg). In other words, this measures the time difference between
the sum of the clock period from a 200 cycle window and n times tCK(avg).
DDRTJITCC (cycle to cycle jitter period) is the absolute difference in clock period
between two consecutive clock cycles. This measurement is made across the
entire record.
DDRTJITDUTY (half period jitter) is the largest elapsed time between tCH and
tCH(avg), and tCL and tCL(avg), over 200 consecutive cycles.
DDRTJITPER (clock period jitter) is the largest deviation of any tCK signal from
tCK(avg). This measurement is made across the entire record.
DDRTPST (read/write burst postamble) is the width of the Read or Write burst
postamble, measured from the last falling edge of the mid reference level to the
start of an undriven state. This measurement is made across the entire record.
DDRTRPRE (read burst preamble) is the width of the Read burst preamble,
measured from exiting tristate levels to the first driving edge of the differential
strobe. This measurement is made across the entire record.
DDRTWPRE is the width of the Write burst preamble, measured from exiting tristate
levels to the first driving edge of the differential strobe. This measurement is
made across the entire record.
DDRVIXAC is the differential input cross-point voltage measured from the true
state transition (and it’s compliment) to a specified reference level, measured on
a single-ended signal.
DDRTDQSCK is the strobe output access time, measured between the rising edge
of the clock and before or after the differential strobe Read preamble time. Signal
edges are determined by the mid-ref threshold level settings.
DELay is the time between the specified Mid reference level (RM) crossing on one
source to a specified Mid reference level (RM) crossing on a second source. This
measurement is made on the first occurrence in the record.
DJ (deterministic jitter) is the peak-to-peak amplitude of all timing errors that
exhibit deterministic behavior. This measurement is made across the entire record.
This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series
MSO instrument.
DJDIRAC (dual-dirac deterministic jitter) is deterministic jitter based on a
simplifying assumption that the histogram of all deterministic jitter can be
modeled as a pair of equal-magnitude Dirac functions. This measurement is made
across the entire record. This measurement requires the DJA option and is not
available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
DPMOVERSHOOT is the difference between Maximum and Top, divided by the
amplitude. This measurement can be made across the entire record or on each
cycle in the record at the specified reference voltage.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-937

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DPMPSIJ is the Power Supply Induced Jitter. This measurement helps in

suppressing the jitter in high speed signals (victim) induced from power rail
signals (aggressor).
DPMUNDERSHOOT is the difference between Minimum and Base, divided by the
amplitude. This measurement can be made across the entire record or on each
cycle in the record at the specified reference voltage.
DPMRIPPLE is the RMS and peak-to-peak values of the output signal on the DC
Rail.
DPMTURNOFFTIME is the time delay between load current going low to other rail
outputs going low during power down.
DPMTURNONTIME is the time delay between load current going high to other rail
outputs going high during power on
EYEHIGH (Eye High) is the amplitude of a high (1) bit measured at a user specified
location within the recovered unit interval. This measurement is made on each
high bit in the record. This measurement requires the DJA option and is not
available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
EYELOW (Eye Low) is the amplitude of a low (0) bit measured at a user specified
location within the recovered unit interval. This measurement is made on each
low bit in the record. This measurement requires the DJA option and is not
available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
FALLSLEWRATE (Falling Slew Rate) is the rate of change in voltage as an edge
transitions from the Top reference level (RT) to the Bottom reference level (RB).
This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
FALLTIME (Fall Time) is the time required for an edge to fall from the Top
reference level (RT) to the Base reference level (RB). This measurement is made
on each cycle in the record.
FREQuency is the reciprocal of Period. This measurement is made on each cycle
in the record.
F2 is the peak-to-peak amplitude of the periodic jitter occurring at a rate of Fb
(data rate) divided by 2. This measurement is made across the entire record.
This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series
MSO instrument.
F4 is the peak-to-peak amplitude of the periodic jitter occurring at a rate of Fb
(data rate) divided by 4. This measurement is made across the entire record.
This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series
MSO instrument.
F8 is the peak-to-peak amplitude of the periodic jitter occurring at a rate of Fb
(data rate) divided by 8. This measurement is made across the entire record.
This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series
MSO instrument.

2-938 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

HIGH (Eye High) is the amplitude of a high (1) bit measured at a user specified
location within the recovered unit interval. This measurement is made on each
high bit in the record.
HEIGHT (Eye Height) is the minimum vertical eye opening at the center of the
recovered unit interval. This measurement is made across the entire record.
This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series
MSO instrument.
HEIGHTBER (Eye Height@BER) is the predicted vertical eye opening that will be
violated with a probability equal to the bit error rate. This measurement is made
across the entire record. This measurement requires the DJA option and is not
available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
HIGH
HIGHTIME (High Time) is the time the signal remains above the Top reference
level (RT). This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
HOLD (Hold Time) is the time between the specified Mid reference level crossing
(RM) on the Clock source to the closest specified Mid reference level (RM) crossing
on the Data source. This measurement is made on each specified Clock edge
in the record.
IMDAANGLE (Angle) measures the phase angle. Configure QEI or Hall sensor to
compute the angle measurement. Requires a IMDA-MECH License.
IMDADIRECTION (Direction) defines the direction of rotation of the motor. Set
the direction A-B-C or A-C-B for Hall sensors and CW or CCW for QEI based on
the motor configuration. Requires a IMDA-MECH License.
IMDADQ0 measures the DQ0 values of the phasor plot. This measurement requires
options IMDA and IMDA-DQ0. Requires a IMDA-MECH License.
IMDAEFFICIENCY (Efficiency) measures the ratio of sum of output power(s) to
input power for respective input and output Voltage and Current pairs. Note: the
current release cannot support 3V and 3I pairs, since this requires 12 channels.
We restrict to 2V and 2I which needs 8 scope channels. Requires a IMDA-MECH
License.
IMDAHARMONICS (Harmonics) plots the signal amplitude at the fundamental
line frequency and its harmonics and measures the RMS amplitude and Total
Harmonic Distortion of the signal. Requires a IMDA-MECH License.
IMDAMECHPWR (Mechanical Power) measures the mechanical power of the motor
drive system. It is determined by the Speed and Torque. It is measured in watts.
Requires a IMDA-MECH License.
IMDAPOWERQUALITY (Power Quality) measures the Frequency and RMS values
of the voltage and current, Crest Factors of the voltage and current, True Power
(PTRUE), Reactive Power (PRE), Apparent Power (PAPP), Power Factor, and
Phase Angle (θ) of the AC signal. Requires a IMDA-MECH License.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-939

Commands listed in alphabetical order

IMDASPEED (Speed) measures the speed and acceleration. Requires a

IMDA-MECH License.
IMDASYSEFF (System Efficiency) measures the total efficiency of the motor drive
system. Requires a IMDA-MECH License.
IMDATORQUE (Torque) measures the torque of the motor. Configure Sensor
(analog) or Current method to measure the torque. Requires a IMDA-MECH
License.
JITTERSUMMARY (Jitter Summary) is a group consisting of the following
measurements: TIE, TJ@BER, Eye Width@BER, Eye Height@BER, RJ-δδ,
DJ-δδ, PJ, DDJ, DcD, F/2, F/4, F/8. This measurement requires the DJA option
and is not available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
J2 is the total jitter at a bit error rate of 2.5e-3 ([email protected]). This measurement is
made across the entire record. This measurement requires the DJA option and is
not available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
J9 is the total jitter at a bit error rate of 2.5e-10 ([email protected]). This measurement
is made across the entire record. This measurement requires the DJA option and is
not available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
LOW (Eye Low) is the amplitude of a low (0) bit measured at a user specified
location within the recovered unit interval. This measurement is made on each
low bit in the record.
LOWTIME (Low Time) is the time the signal remains below the Base reference
level (RB). This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
MAXimum is the maximum data point. This measurement can be made across the
entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
MEAN is the arithmetic mean of the data points. This measurement can be made
across the entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
MINImum is the minimum data point. This measurement can be made across the
entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
NDUty (Negative Duty Cycle) is the ratio of the Negative Pulse Width to the
Period. This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
Negative Duty Cycle = (Negative Width) / Period × 100%
NPERIOD (Duration N-Periods) is the time required to complete N cycles. A cycle
is the time between two adjacent (same direction) crossings of the Mid reference
level (RM). This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
NPJ (non-periodic jitter) is the portion of the BUJ (bounded uncorrelated jitter)
that is random. BUJ excludes DDJ, DCD and RJ. This measurement is made
across the entire record. This measurement requires the DJA option and is not
available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.

2-940 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

NOVershoot (Negative Overshoot) is the difference between Minimum and

Base, divided by the Amplitude. This measurement can be made across the entire
record, or on each cycle in the record.
Negative Overshoot = (Base - Minimum) / Amplitude × 100%)
NWIdth (Negative Pulse Width) is the time the signal remains below the Mid
reference level (RM). This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
OBW (Occupied Bandwidth) refers to the bandwidth, including energy of a certain
proportion of the total transmitted power, with the center frequency of the
specified channel as the center.
PDUTY (Positive Duty Cycle) is the ratio of the Positive Pulse Width to the Period.
This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
Positive Duty Cycle = (Positive Width)/Period × 100%
PERIOD is the time required to complete a cycle. A cycle is the time between
two adjacent (same direction) crossings of the Mid reference level (RM). This
measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
PHASE is the ratio of the Skew between two sources to the Period of the first
source. This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
PHASENOISE (Phase Noise) is the RMS magnitude of all integrated jitter falling
within a user specified offset range of the fundamental clock frequency. This
measurement is made across the entire record. This measurement is not available
on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
PJ (periodic jitter) is the peak-to-peak amplitude of the uncorrelated sinusoidal
components of the deterministic jitter. This measurement is made across the
entire record. This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on
a 4 Series MSO instrument.
PK2Pk (Peak-to-peak) is the difference between Maximum and Minimum. This
measurement can be made across the entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
POVERSHOOT (Positive Overshoot) is the difference between Maximum and Top,
divided by the Amplitude. This measurement can be made across the entire
record, or on each cycle in the record.
Positive Overshoot = (Maximum - Top) / Amplitude ×100%
PWIDTH (Positive Pulse Width) is the time the signal remains above the Mid
reference level (RM). This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
QFACTOR (Q-Factor) is the ratio of the vertical eye opening to RMS vertical noise
measured at a user specified location within the recovered unit interval. This
measurement is made across the entire record. This measurement requires the
DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-941

Commands listed in alphabetical order

RISESLEWRATE (Rising Slew Rate) is the rate of change in voltage as an edge

transitions from the Base reference level (RB) to the Top reference level (RT). This
measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
RISETIME Rise Time is the time required for an edge to rise from the Base
reference level (RB) to the Top reference level (RT). This measurement is made on
each cycle in the record.
RJ (random jitter) is the RMS magnitude of all random timing errors following
a Gaussian distribution. This measurement is made across the entire record.
This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series
MSO instrument.
RJDIRAC (dual-dirac random jitter) is random jitter based on a simplifying
assumption that the histogram of all deterministic jitter can be modeled as a
pair of equal-magnitude Dirac functions. This measurement is made across the
entire record. This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on
a 4 Series MSO instrument.
RMS is the true Root Mean Square of the data points. This measurement can be
made across the entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
SRJ (sub-rate jitter) is the composite jitter due to periodic components at 1/2,
1/4 and 1/8 of the data rate. This measurement is made across the entire record.
This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series
MSO instrument.
SSCFREQDEV (SSC Frequency Deviation) is the spread spectrum clock frequency
deviation. This measurement enables a time trend plot of the spread spectrum
clock modulation profile. This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series
MSO instrument.
SSCMODRATE (SSC Modulation Rate) is the modulating frequency of a spread
spectrum clock. This measurement is made on each cycle in the record. This
measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series MSO
instrument.
SETUP (Setup Time) is the time between the specified Mid reference level (RM)
crossing on the Data source to the closest specified Mid reference level (RM)
crossing on the Clock source. This measurement is made on each specified Clock
edge in the record.
SKEW Skew is the time between the specified Mid reference level (RM) crossing
on one source to the following specified Mid reference level (RM) crossing on a
second source. This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
TIE (time interval error) is the difference, in time, between an edge in the source
waveform and the corresponding edge in a recovered reference clock. This
measurement is made on each edge in the waveform. This measurement is not
available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.

2-942 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TIMEOUTSIDELEVEL Time Outside Level is the time the signal remains above
the Top reference level (RT) and/or below the Base reference level (RB). This
measurement is made on each occurrence in the record.
TJBER (total jitter at a specified bit error rate) is the predicted peak-to-peak
amplitude of jitter that will only be exceeded with a probability equal to the bit
error rate. This measurement is made across the entire record. This measurement
requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
TNTRATIO T/nT Ratio is the ratio of a non-transition bit voltage (2nd and
subsequent bit voltage after a transition) to its nearest preceding transition bit
voltage (1st bit voltage after the transition). Bit voltages are measured at the
interpolated midpoint of the recovered unit interval. This measurement is made on
each non-transition bit in the record. This measurement requires the DJA option
and is not available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.
TOP is the most common data value above the midpoint of the waveform. This
measurement can be made across the entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
UNITINTERVAL (Unit Interval) is the time difference between two successive bits.
This measurement is made on each bit in the record.
VDIFFXOVR (Differential Crossover) is the voltage level of a differential signal
pair at the crossover points. This measurement is made at each crossover point
in the record. This measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on
a 4 Series MSO instrument.
WBGDDT (d/dt) measures the rate of change of voltage or current (slew rate) from
the configured start level to the stop level. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGDIODEDDT (Diode d/dt) measures the rate of change of voltage or current
(slew rate) during the specified start and stop integration levels. Diode d/dt can be
measured during rising or falling edge. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGEOFF (Eoff) measures the energy dissipated in the Power Device during off
region using the configured levels. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGEON (Eon) measures the energy dissipated in the Power Device during on
region using the configured levels. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGERR (Err) measures the reverse recovery energy dissipated in the Power
Device using the configured levels. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGIPEAK (Ipeak) measures the peak current of the Power Device in the on
region. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGIRRM (Irrm) measures the maximum current dissipated in the Power Device in
the reverse recovery region. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGQOSS (Qoss) is the charge that must be supplied to the output capacitance of
the power device during a specified time interval. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGQRR (Qrr) measures the reverse recovery charge in the Power Device using
the configured levels. Requires a WBG-DPT License.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-943

Commands listed in alphabetical order

WBGTDOFF (Td(off)) measures the turn off delay time of the Power Device in the
off region using the configured levels. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGTDON (Td(on)) measures the turn on delay time of the Power Device in the on
region using the configured levels. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGTF (Tf) measures the fall time of the Power Device in the off region using the
configured levels. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGTOFF (Toff) measures the turn off time of the Power Device. It is the sum of
the turn off delay time and the fall time. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGTON (Ton) measures the turn on time of the Power Device. It is the sum of the
turn on delay time and the rise time. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGTR (Tr) measures the rise time of the Power Device in the on region using the
configured levels. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGTRR (Trr) measures the reverse recovery time of the Power Device using the
configured levels. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGTDT (Tdt) the time delay between turn on time of the high side MOSFET
and turn on time of the low side MOSFET during the simultaneous switching.
Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WBGVPEAK (Vpeak) measures the peak voltage of the Power Device in the off
region. Requires a WBG-DPT License.
WIDTH (Eye Width) is the minimum horizontal eye opening at the user specified
reference level. This measurement is made across the entire record. This
measurement requires the DJA option and is not available on a 4 Series MSO
instrument.
WIDTHBER (Eye Width@BER) is the predicted horizontal eye opening that will be
violated with a probability equal to the bit error rate. This measurement is made
across the entire record. This measurement requires the DJA option and is not
available on a 4 Series MSO instrument.

Examples MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:TYPE FREQUENCY defines measurement 2 as a

measurement of the frequency of a waveform.
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE RMS,
indicating that measurement 1 is defined to measure the RMS value of a waveform.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VLEVel
This command sets or queries whether histogram center is percentage relative to
unit interval or an absolute value for eye width measurement.

Group Measurement

2-944 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VLEVel {PERCent|ABSolute}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VLEVel?

Arguments MEAS<x> is the measurement number.

PERCent sets the histogram center as a percentage relative to unit interval.

ABSolute sets the histogram center as an absolute value.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:VLEVel PERCent sets the histogram center as a

percentage relative to unit interval for measurement 1.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:VLEVel? might return :MEASUrement:MEAS1:VLEVel
PERCent, indicating histogram center is set as a percentage relative to unit
interval for measurement 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WAITTime
Sets or queries the wait time.

Conditions Requires option 5-DPM (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-DPM (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group DPM

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WAITTime <NR2>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WAITTime?

Arguments MEAS<x> is the measurement number.

<NR2> is the wait time, in the range of 1 s to 500 s.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:WAITTime 60 sets the input trigger level of measurement

1 to +60 volts.
MEASUrement:MEAS3:WAITTime? might return 2.500, indicating that the wait
time of measurement 3 is 2.5 seconds.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:AFGaddress
This command sets or returns the AFG address of external AFG connected for
WBG measurement.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-945

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions WBG-DPT License.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:AFGaddress <QString>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:AFGaddress?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<QString> specifies the AFG IP address to connect external AFG for WBG
measurements.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:WBG:AFGaddress "134.64.246.214" specifies the

AFG IP address as 134.64.246.214 for measurement 2.
MEASUrement:MEAS2:WBG:AFGaddress? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:WBG:AFGaddress "134.64.246.214"
indicating the AFG IP address is 134.64.246.214 for measurement 2.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:AFGSetup (No Query Form)

This command executes AFG test connection or once AFG connection succeeded,
Run will setup configuration on connected AFG.

Conditions WBG-DPT License.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:AFGSetup {CONNECT|RUN}

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

CONNECT executes AFG test connection.

RUN will setup AFG configuration.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:WBG:AFGSetup CONNECT executes AFG test connection

for measurement 2.

2-946 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:CSTatus? (Query Only)

This command queries the AFG test connection status.

Conditions WBG-DPT License.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:CSTatus?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

Returns SUCCESS indicates that AFG connected successfully.

FAILURE indicates that the AFG connection failed.

UNSUPPORTED indicates that the AFG connection is unsupported.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:WBG:CSTatus? might return

:MEASUrement:MEAS1:WBG:CSTatus SUCCESS, indicating that AFG
connected successfully for measurement 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:GTYPe
This command sets or returns the generator type for WBG measurements.

Conditions WBG-DPT License.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:GTYPe {AFG31000|OTHER}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:GTYPe?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

AFG31000 specifies the generator type for WBG measurement as AFG31000.

OTHER specifies the generator type for WBG measurement as OTHER.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-947

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:WBG:GTYPe AFG31000 specifies the generator type

for WBG measurement as AFG31000.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:WBG:GTYPe? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:WBG:GTYPe OTHER, indicating the generator type for
WBG measurement is OTHER for measurement 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:HIGH
This command sets or returns the high voltage value of AFG for WBG
measurements.

Conditions WBG-DPT License.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:HIGH <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:HIGH?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> specifies the high voltage of AFG for WBG measurements.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:WBG:HIGH 2.5000 specifies the high voltage of AFG as

2.5 for measurement 2.
MEASUrement:MEAS2:WBG:HIGH? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:WBG:HIGH 2.5000 indicating the high voltage of AFG
is 2.5 for measurement 2.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:LOAD
This command sets or returns the load type of AFG for WBG measurements.

Conditions WBG-DPT License.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:LOAD {FIFTY|HIGHZ}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:LOAD?

2-948 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

FIFTY specifies the load type of AFG as Fifty for WBG measurements.

HIGHZ specifies the load type of AFG as High Z for WBG measurements.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:WBG:LOAD FIFTY specifies the load type of AFG as

Fifty for measurement 2.
MEASUrement:MEAS2:WBG:LOAD? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:WBG:LOAD FIFTY indicating the load type of AFG
is Fifty for measurement 2.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:LOW
This command sets or returns the low voltage value of AFG for WBG
measurements.

Conditions WBG-DPT License.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:LOW <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:LOW?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> specifies the low voltage of AFG for WBG measurements.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:WBG:LOW 0.0E+0 specifies the low voltage of AFG

as 0.0E+0 for measurement 2.
MEASUrement:MEAS2:WBG:LOW? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:WBG:LOW 0.0E+0 indicating the low voltage of AFG is
0.0E+0 for measurement 2.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:NPULs
This command sets or returns the number of pulse of AFG for WBG
measurements.

Conditions WBG-DPT License.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-949

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:NPULs <NR1>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:NPULs?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR1> specifies the number of pulse of AFG to generate pulse signal for WBG
measurements.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:WBG:NPULs 8 specifies the number of pulse of AFG as

8 for measurement 2.
MEASUrement:MEAS2:WBG:NPULs? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:WBG:NPULs 8 indicating the number of pulse of
AFG is 8 for measurement 2.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:PG<x>Val
This command sets or returns the pulse gap of AFG for WBG measurements.

Conditions WBG-DPT License.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:PG<x>Val <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:PG<x>Val?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

PG<x> specifies the number of pulse. The valid values are 1 to 8.

<NR3> specifies the pulse gap of AFG for WBG measurements.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:WBG:PG8Val 150.0000E-6 specifies the 8 pulse gap as

150.0000E-6 for measurement 2.
MEASUrement:MEAS2:WBG:PG8Val? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:WBG:PG8Val 150.0000E-6 indicating the 8 pulse gap
is 150.0000E-6 for measurement 2.

2-950 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:PW<x>Val
This command sets or returns the pulse width of AFG for WBG measurements.

Conditions WBG-DPT License.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:PW<x>Val <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:PW<x>Val?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

PW<x> specifies the pulse width number. The valid values are 1 to 8.

<NR3> specifies the pulse width of AFG for WBG measurements.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:WBG:PW1Val 60.0000E-9 specifies the value of pulse

width 1 as 60.0000E-9 for measurement 2.
MEASUrement:MEAS2:WBG:PW1Val? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:WBG:PW1Val 60.0000E-9 indicating the value of
pulse width 1 is 60.0000E-9 for measurement 2.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:TIMer
This command sets or returns the trigger interval of AFG for WBG measurements.

Conditions WBG-DPT License.

Group Measurement, WBG

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:TIMer <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:TIMer?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> specifies the trigger interval of AFG for WBG measurements.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:WBG:TIMer 500.0000 specifies the trigger interval as

500 for measurement 2.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-951

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS2:WBG:TIMer? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:WBG:TIMer 500.0000 indicating the trigger interval
is 500 for measurement 2.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WIDTh
This command sets or queries the histogram width in terms of percentage.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WIDTh <NR1>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WIDTh?

Arguments MEAS<x> is the measurement number.

<NR1> is the value for the width.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:WIDTh 10 sets the width as 10% for measurement 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:WIDTh? might return :MEASUrement:MEAS1:WIDTh

10, indicating width is set to 10% for measurement 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WINDOWLENgth
This command sets or queries the window length for the measurement. The
measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WINDOWLENgth <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WINDOWLENgth?

Arguments <NR3> is the value for the window length.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:WINDOWLENgth 10 sets the window length to 10.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:WINDOWLENgth? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:WINDOWLENGTH 10.0000 indicating the
window length is 10.

2-952 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:XUNIT? (Query Only)

Returns the horizontal scale units of the specified measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:XUNIT?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:XUNIT? might return "V", indicating that the horizontal

unit for measurement 2 is seconds.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:YUNIT? (Query Only)

Returns the vertical scale units of the specified measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:YUNIT?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS12:YUNIT? might return “V”, indicating that the vertical

unit for measurement 12 is volts.

MEASUrement:MECH:EINDexz
This command sets or queries the global mechanical Index Z source.

Conditions IMDA-MECH license on 5, 6, 6B series MSO instruments.

Group IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MECH:EINDexz {ON|OFF|1|0}

MEASUrement:MECH:EINDexz?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-953

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments ON specifies the Index Z check box state as enabled.

OFF specifies the Index Z check box state as disabled.

1 specifies the Index Z check box state as enabled.

0 specifies the Index Z check box state as disabled.

Examples MEASUrement:MECH:EINDexz ON specifies the global mechanical Index Z

source as enabled.
MEASUrement:MECH:EINDexz? might return :MEASUREMENT:MECH:EINDexz
ON, indicating the global mechanical Index Z source is enabled.

MEASUrement:MECH:GRATio
This command sets or queries the measurement gear ratio.

Conditions IMDA-MECH license on 5 and 6 Series MSO instruments.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MECH:GRATio <NR3>

MEASUrement:MECH:GRATio?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the gear ratio value for a specified measurement. The minimum
and maximum values are 0.001 to 1000.

Examples MEASUREMENT:MECH:GRATIO 1.000E-3 sets the gear ratio value to 1.000E-3.

MEASUREMENT:MECH:GRATIO? might return :MEASUREMENT:MECH:GRATio

1.000E-3, indicating the gear ratio value is 1.000E-3.

MEASUrement:MECH:MUNits
This command sets or queries the global mechanical measurement results units.

Conditions IMDA-MECH license on 5, 6, 6B series MSO instruments.

Group IMDA

2-954 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MECH:MUNits
{NM|OZINCH|FTLB|INCHLB|DEGREES|RADIANS}
MEASUrement:MECH:MUNits?

Arguments NM specifies the results units of mechanical Torque measurement as NM.

OZINCH specifies the results units of mechanical Torque measurement as

OZINCH.
FTLB specifies the results units of mechanical Torque measurement as FTLB.

INCHLB specifies the results units of mechanical Torque measurement as

INCHLB.
DEGREES specifies the results units of mechanical Torque measurement as
DEGREES.
RADIANS specifies the results units of mechanical Torque measurement as
RADIANS.

Examples MEASUrement:MECH:MUNits NM specifies the results units of mechanical

Torque measurement as NM.
MEASUrement:MECH:MUNits? might return :MEASUREMENT:MECH:MUNits
NM, indicating the results units of mechanical Torque measurement is NM.

MEASUrement:MECH:PPAirs
This command sets or queries the measurement number of pole pairs.

Conditions IMDA-MECH license on 5 and 6 Series MSO instruments.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MECH:PPAirs <NR1>

MEASUrement:MECH:PPAirs?

Arguments <NR1> defines the number of pole pairs for the specified measurement. The
minimum to maximum range is 1 to 20.

Examples MEASUrement:MECH:PPAirs 4 defines the number of pole pairs as 4.

MEASUrement:MECH:PPAirs? might return :MEASUREMENT:MECH:PPAirs 4

indicating the number of pole pairs is 4.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-955

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MECH:PPRotation
This command sets or queries the global pulses per rotation of the measurement.

Conditions IMDA-MECH license on 5, 6, 6B series MSO instruments.

Group IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MECH:PPRotation <NR1>

MEASUrement:MECH:PPRotation?

Arguments <NR1> defines the pulses per rotation of the measurement. The minimum to
maximum range is 1 to 100000.

Examples MEASUrement:MECH:PPRotation 25 defines the pulses per rotation of the

measurement as 25.
MEASUrement:MECH:PPRotation? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MECH:PPRotation 25, indicating the pulses per rotation
of the measurement is 25.

MEASUrement:MECH:SOUrce<x>
This command sets or queries the global mechanical source of the specified
source number.

Conditions IMDA-MECH license on 5 and 6 Series MSO instruments.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MECH:SOUrce<x> {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|CH<x>_D<x>}

MEASUrement:MECH:SOUrce<x>?

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source waveform.

MATH<x> specifies a math waveform as the source waveform.

REF<x> specifies an reference waveform as the source waveform .

CH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel as the source waveform.

2-956 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MECH:SOUrce2 CH2 defines the global mechanical source as

channel 2.
MEASUrement:MECH:SOUrce2? might return :MEASUREMENT:MECH:SOUrce2
CH2, indicating the global mechanical source is channel 2.

MEASUrement:MECH:STYPe
This command sets or queries the measurement sensor type.

Conditions IMDA-MECH license on 5 and 6 Series MSO instruments.

Group Measurement, IMDA

Syntax MEASUrement:MECH:STYPe {HSENSOR|QEI|RESOLVER}

MEASUrement:MECH:STYPe?

Arguments HSENSOR specifies the sensor type as HSENSOR.

QEI specifies the sensor type as QEI.

RESOLVER specifies the sensor type as RESOLVER.

Examples MEASUrement:MECH:STYPe HSENSOR specifies the sensor type as HSENSOR.

MEASUrement:MECH:STYPe? might return :MEASUREMENT:MECH:STYPe

HSENSOR, indicating the sensor type is HSENSOR.

MEASUrement:MINUI
This command sets or queries the minimum number of unit intervals required
for BUJ analysis.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MINUI <NR3>

MEASUrement:MINUI?

Arguments <NR3> is the minimum number of unit intervals required for BUJ analysis.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-957

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUREMENT:MINUI 1.0000E+6 sets the minimum number of unit intervals

required for BUJ analysis to 1,000,000.
MEASUREMENT:MINUI? might return :MEASUREMENT:MINUI 1.0000E+6
indicating the minimum number of unit intervals required for BUJ analysis is
1,000,000.

MEASUrement:POPUlation:LIMIT:STATE
This command sets or queries the global population limit state for the
measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:POPUlation:LIMIT:STATE {OFF|ON|0|1 }

MEASUrement:POPUlation:LIMIT:STATE?

Arguments OFF turns off the population limit.

ON turns on the population limit.

0 turns off the population limit.

1 turns on the population limit.

Examples MEASUREMENT:POPULATION:LIMIT:STATE 1 turns on the population limit.

MEASUREMENT:POPULATION:LIMIT:STATE? might return

:MEASUREMENT:POPULATION:LIMIT:STATE 0 indicating the
population limit is off.

MEASUrement:POPUlation:LIMIT:VALue
This command sets or queries the global population limit value for the
measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:POPUlation:LIMIT:VALue <NR1>

MEASUrement:POPUlation:LIMIT:VALue?

Arguments <NR1> is the current limit value.

2-958 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUREMENT:POPULATION:LIMIT:VALUE 2000 sets the population limit to

2000.
MEASUREMENT:POPULATION:LIMIT:VALUE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:POPULATION:LIMIT:VALUE 1000 indicating the
population limit value is 1000.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh
This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the
falling edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh?

Arguments <NR3> is the value used as the high reference level of the falling edge when the
measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh 1.5 sets the high reference

level to 1.5 V.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLHIGH 1.0000 indicating the
high reference level is 1.0 V.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow
This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the
falling edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow?

Arguments <NR3> is the value used as the low reference level of the falling edge.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-959

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow -1.5 sets the low reference

level to -1.5 V.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLLOW -1.0000 indicating the
low reference level is -1.0 V.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid
This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the
falling edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid?

Arguments <NR3> is the value used as the mid reference level of the falling edge.

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid 10.0E-3 sets the mid

reference level to 10.0 mV.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLMID 0.0E+0 indicating the mid
reference level is 0.0 V.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the value of the hysteresis of the reference level
when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis?

Arguments <NR3> is the value of the hysteresis of the reference level.

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis 20.0E-3 sets the

hysteresis to 20.0 mV.

2-960 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis? might return

:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:HYSTERESIS 30.0000E-3
indicating the hysteresis is set to 30.0 mV.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh
This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the
rising edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh?

Arguments <NR3> is the value used as the high reference level of the rising edge.

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh 1.5 sets the high reference

to 1.5 V.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISEHIGH 1.0000 indicating the
high reference is 1.0 V.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow
This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the
rising edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow?

Arguments <NR3> is the value used as the the low reference level of the rising edge

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow -1.5 sets the low reference

level to -1.5 V.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-961

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow? might return

:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISELOW -1.0000 indicating the
low reference level is -1.0 V.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid
This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the
rising edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid?

Arguments <NR3> is the mid reference level of the rising edge.

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid 10.0E-3 sets the mid

reference to 10.0 mV.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISEMID 0.0E+0 indicating the mid
reference is 0.0 V.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE
This command sets or queries the reference level type for the measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE {SAME|UNIQue}

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE?

Arguments SAME specifies that the absolute levels are set the same.

UNIQue specifies that the absolute levels can be set independently.

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE UNIQUE specifies that the

absolute levels can be set independently.

2-962 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE? might return

:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:TYPE SAME indicating the absolute
levels are set the same.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:BASETop
This command sets or queries the method used to calculate the TOP and BASE,
used to calculate reference levels for the measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:BASETop {AUTO| MINMax| MEANhistogram|

MODEhistogram| EYEhistogram}
MEASUrement:REFLevels:BASETop?

Arguments AUTO sets the base top method to AUTO.

MINMax sets the base top method to MINMax.

MEANhistogram sets the base top method to MEANhistogram.

MODEhistogram sets the base top method to MODEhistogram.

EYEhistogram sets the base top method to EYEhistogram.

Examples MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:BASETOP MINMAX selects the MINMAX base top

method.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:BASETOP? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:BASETOP MINMAX indicating the base top method
is MINMAX.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:JITTERMODE
This command sets or queries how often reference levels are calculated on Jitter
measurements. If the mode is set to Latch, ref levels are calculated only on the
first acquisition after a statistics reset. If it is set to Continuous, reference levels
are calculated on every acquisition.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:JITTERMODE {CONTinuous|LATCh}

MEASUrement:REFLevels:JITTERMODE?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-963

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments CONTinuous specifies that reference levels are calculated on every acquisition.

LATCh specifies that reference levels are calculated only on the first acquisition
after a statistics reset.

Examples MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:JITTERMODE CONTINUOUS specifies that reference

levels are calculated on every acquisition.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:JITTERMODE? might return LATCH indicating that
reference levels are calculated only on the first acquisition after a statistics reset.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:METHod
This command sets or queries the method used to calculate reference levels for
the measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:METHod {PERCent|ABSolute}

MEASUrement:REFLevels:METHod?

Arguments PERCent specifies that the reference levels are calculated as a percent
relative to HIGH and LOW. The percentages are defined using the
MEASUrement:REFLevels:REFLevel:PERCent commands.

ABSolute specifies that the reference levels are set explicitly using the
MEASUrement:REFLevels:REFLevel:ABSolute commands. This method is
useful when precise values are required.

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:METHod ABSOLUTE specifies that the reference

levels are set explicitly.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:METHod? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:METHOD PERCENT indicating the reference levels
are calculated as a percent relative to HIGH and LOW.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:MODE
This command sets or queries how often reference levels are calculated.

Group Measurement

2-964 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:MODE {LATCh|CONTinuous}

MEASUrement:REFLevels:MODE?

Arguments LATCh calculates reference levels only on the first acquisition after a statistics
reset.
CONTinuous calculates reference levels on every acquisition.

Examples MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:MODE CONTINUOUS calculates reference levels on

every acquisition.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:MODE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:MODE LATCH indicating reference levels are
calculated only on the first acquisition after a statistics reset.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1%
is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the falling edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the high reference level of the falling
edge

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh 90 sets the high reference

level to 90%.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLHIGH 80.0000 indicating the
high reference level is 80%.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1%
is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-965

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling
edge.

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow 10 sets the low reference level

to 10%.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLLOW 20.0000 indicating the low
reference level is 20%.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1%
is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling
edge

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid 55 sets the mid reference

level to 55%.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLMID 50.0000 indicating the mid
reference level is 50%.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to MAX and
1% is equal to MIN) used to calculate the hysteresis of the reference level when
the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

2-966 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the hysteresis of the reference level.

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis 3 sets the hysteresis to 3%.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis? might return

:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:HYSTERESIS 5.0000 indicating the
hysteresis is set to 5%.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and
1% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the high reference level of the rising
edge.

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh 90 sets the high reference

level to 90%.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEHIGH 80.0000 indicating the
high ref level is 80%.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and
1% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-967

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the low reference level of the rising edge.

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow 10 sets the low reference level

to 10%.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISELOW 20.0000 indicating the low
reference level is 20%.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and
1% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising
edge.

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid 55 sets the mid reference

level to 55%.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEMID 50.0000 indicating the mid
reference level is 50%.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE
This command sets or queries the reference level percent type for the measurement.

Group Measurement

2-968 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE
{TENNinety|TWENtyeighty|CUSTom}
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE?

Arguments TENNinety sets the values for Low, Mid and High Ref to 10%, 50% and 90%
respectively.
TWENtyeighty sets the values for Low, Mid and High Ref are set to 20%, 50%
and 80% respectively.
CUSTom allows setting other reference level percents.

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE TENNINETY sets the values for

Low, Mid and High Ref to 10%, 50% and 90% respectively.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:TYPE CUSTOM indicating
that custom reference levels can be set.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:TYPE
This command sets or queries the shared reference level method used for sources
of measurement calculations.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:TYPE {GLOBal|PERSource}

MEASUrement:REFLevels:TYPE?

Arguments GLOBal shares reference levels across measurements.

PERSource causes reference levels to be used on individual measurements.

Examples MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:TYPE PERSource causes reference levels to be used

on individual measurements.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:TYPE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:TYPE GLOBAL indicating reference levels are
shared across measurements.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh
This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the
falling edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-969

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh?

Arguments <NR3> is the value used as the high reference level of the falling edge when the
measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh 1.5 sets the

reference level to 1.5 V.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLHIGH 1.0000 indicating
the reference level is 1.0 V.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow
This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the
falling edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow?

Arguments <NR3> is the value used as the low reference level of the falling edge when the
measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow -1.5 sets the low

reference level to -1.5 V.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLLOW -1.0000 indicating
the low reference level is -1.0 V.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid
This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the
falling edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

2-970 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid?

Arguments <NR3> is the value used as the mid reference level of the falling edge when the
measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid 50.0E-3 sets the

mid reference level to 50.0 mV.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLMID 0.0E+0 indicating
the reference level is 0.0 V.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the value of the hysteresis of the reference level
when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis?

Arguments <NR3> is the value of the hysteresis of the reference level when the measurement's
ref level method is set to absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis 20.0E-3 sets the

hysteresis to 20.0 mV.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:HYSTERESIS 30.0000E-3
indicating the hysteresis is 30.0 mV.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh
This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the
rising edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-971

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh?

Arguments <NR3> is the value used as the high reference level of the rising edge when the
measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh 1.5 sets the

reference level to 1.5 V.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISEHIGH 1.0000 indicating
the reference level is 1.0 V.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow
This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the
rising edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow?

Arguments <NR3> is the value used as the low reference level of the rising edge when the
measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow -1.5 sets the

reference level to -1.5 V.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISELOW -1.0000 indicating
the reference level is -1.0 V.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid
This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the
rising edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

2-972 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid?

Arguments <NR3> is the value used as the mid reference level of the rising edge when the
measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid 10.0E-3 sets the

reference level to 10.0 mV.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISEMID 0.0E+0 indicating
the mid reference level is 0.0 V.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE
This command sets or queries the reference level type for the measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE {SAME|UNIQue}

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE?

Arguments SAME specifies that the absolute levels are set the same.

UNIQue specifies that the absolute levels can be set independently.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE UNIQUE specifies that the

absolute levels can be set independently.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:TYPE SAME indicating that the
absolute levels are set the same.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:BASETop
This command sets or queries the method used to calculate the TOP and BASE,
used to calculate reference levels for the measurement.

Group Measurement

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-973

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:BASETop

Arguments AUTO automatically chooses a reference level method.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:BASETop MINMAX specifies that reference

levels are relative to the measurement MIN and MAX.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:BASETop? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:BASETOP AUTO indicating the instrument
automatically chooses a reference level method.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:METHod
This command sets or queries the method used to calculate reference levels for
the measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:METHod {PERCent|ABSolute}

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:METHod?

Arguments PERCent specifies that the reference levels are calculated as a percent
relative to HIGH and LOW. The percentages are defined using the
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevel:PERCent commands.

ABSolute specifies that the reference levels are set explicitly using the
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute commands. This method is
useful when precise values are required.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:METHod ABSOLUTE specifies that the

reference levels are set explicitly.

2-974 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:METHod? might return

:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:METHOD PERCENT indicating the
reference levels are calculated as a percent relative to HIGH and LOW.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1%
is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the falling edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the high reference level of the falling
edge

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh 95 sets the reference

level to 95%.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLHIGH 90.0000 indicating
the reference level is 90%.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and
1% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the falling edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the low reference level

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow 5 sets the low reference

level to 5%.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-975

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow? might return

:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLLOW 10.0000 indicating
the low reference level is 10%.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and 1%
is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling
edge.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid 55 sets the reference

level to 50%.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLMID 50.0000 indicating
the mid reference level is 50%.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to MAX and
1% is equal to MIN) used to calculate the hysteresis of the reference level when
the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the hysteresis of the reference level.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis 2 sets the hysteresis

to 2%.

2-976 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis? might return

:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:HYSTERESIS 5.0000
indicating the hysteresis is 5%.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and
1% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the high reference level of the rising
edge

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh 95 sets the reference

level to 95%.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEHIGH 90.0000 indicating
the reference level is 90%.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and
1% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the low reference level of the rising edge.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow 5 sets the low reference

level to 5%.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-977

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow? might return

:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISELOW 10.0000 indicating
the reference level is 10%.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 99% is equal to TOP and
1% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising
edge.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid 55 sets the mid

reference level to 55%.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEMID 50.0000 indicating
the mid reference level is 50%.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE
This command sets or queries the reference level percent type for the measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE
{TENNinety|TWENtyeighty|CUSTom}
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE?

2-978 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE TWENTYEIGHTY sets the

values for Low, Mid and High Ref are set to 20%, 50% and 80% respectively.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:TYPE TENNINETY indicating the
values for Low, Mid and High Ref to 10%, 50% and 90% respectively.

MEASUrement:RESUlts:HISTory:STARt
This command sets or queries the starting acquisition number for transferring
measurement history results.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:RESUlts:HISTory:STARt <NR1>

MEASUrement:RESUlts:HISTory:STARt?

Related Commands MEASUrement:RESUlts:HISTory:STOP,

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory:MAXimum?,
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory:MEAN?,
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory:MINimum?,
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory:PK2PK?,
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory:POPUlation?,
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory:STDDev?

Arguments <NR1> is the first acquisition that will be transferred, which ranges from 1 to the
number of history acquisitions. Results will be transferred from acquisitions
<NR1> to MEASUrement:RESUlts:HISTory:STOP.

Examples MEASUrement:RESUlts:HISTory:STARt 25 specifies that measurement

history results transfer will begin with acquisition 25.
MEASUrement:RESUlts:HISTory:STARt? might return
:MEASUrement:RESUlts:HISTory:STARt 10 indicating that
measurement history results transfer will begin at acquisition 10.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-979

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:RESUlts:HISTory:STOP
This command sets or queries the last acquisition number that will be transferred
for measurement history results.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:RESUlts:HISTory:STOP <NR1>

MEASUrement:RESUlts:HISTory:STOP?

Related Commands MEASUrement:RESUlts:HISTory:STARt,

Arguments <NR1> is the last acquisition that will be transferred, which ranges from
1 to the number of history acquisitions. Results will be transferred from
MEASUrement:RESUlts:HISTory:STARt to <NR1>. A special value of 0 for
<NR1> indicates that the stop position is always the last history acquisition.

Examples MEASUrement:RESUlts:HISTory:STOP 50 specifies that measurement

history results transfer will end with acquisition 50.
MEASUrement:RESUlts:HISTory:STOP? might return
:MEASUrement:RESUlts:HISTory:STOP 0 indicating that
measurement history results transfer will end with the last history acquisition.

MEASUrement:STATIstics:CYCLEMode
This command turns on and off cycle to cycle measurement statistics tracking
and affects computation and display of cycle-cycle statistics in the Measurement
Result table. It affects measurement statistics after being enabled and after new
data is acquired and measured.

Group Measurement

2-980 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:STATIstics:CYCLEMode {OFF|ON|0|1}

MEASUrement:STATIstics:CYCLEMode?

Arguments OFF turns off statistics for all measurements. This is the default value.

ON turns on statistics and displays all statistics for each measurement.

0 turns off statistics for all measurements.

1 turns on statistics and displays all statistics for each measurement.

Examples MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:CYCLEMODE OFF turns off statistics for all

measurements.
MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:CYCLEMODE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:CYCLEMODE 1 indicating that
statistics are displayed for each measurement.

MEASUrement:WBG:PDEVice
This command sets or returns the type of the Power device.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:WBG:PDEVice {IGBT|MOSFET}

MEASUrement:WBG:PDEVice?

Arguments IGBT specifies the type of the Power device as IGBT.

MOSFET specifies the type of the Power device as MOSFET.

Examples MEASUREMENT:WBG:PDEVICE MOSFET sets the type of the Power device to

MOSFET.
MEASUREMENT:WBG:PDEVICE? might return :MEASUrement:WBG:PDEVice
MOSFET indicating that the type of the Power device is MOSFET.

NEWpass (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) changes the password that enables access to
password protected data. The PASSWord command must be successfully executed
before using this command or an execution error will be generated.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-981

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax NEWpass <QString>

Related Commands PASSWord

*PUD

Arguments <QString> is the new password, which can contain up to 10 characters.

Examples NEWPASS"mypassword" creates a new password (mypassword) for accessing

your protected data.

*OPC
This command generates the operation complete message in the Standard Event
Status Register (SESR) when all pending commands that generate an OPC
message are complete. The *OPC? query places the ASCII character “1” into the
output queue when all such OPC commands are complete. The *OPC? response is
not available to read until all pending operations finish. For a complete discussion
of the use of these registers and the output queue, see Registers and Queues.
The *OPC command allows you to synchronize the operation of the instrument
with your application program. For more information, see Synchronization
Methods. Refer to the Oscilloscope operations that can generate OPC table for a
list of commands that generate an OPC message. (See Table 3-3.)

Group Status and Error

Syntax *OPC
*OPC?

Related Commands BUSY?

*WAI

Examples *OPC generates the operation complete message in the SESR at the completion of
all pending OPC operations.
*OPC? might return 1 to indicate that all pending OPC operations are finished.

2-982 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

*OPT? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns a comma separated list of installed options as
an arbitrary ASCII string (no quotes) of the form:
<optionCode>:<optionDescription>,<optionCode>:<optionDescription>...
The last section of each entry (the text following the last hyphen) indicates the
license type.
If no options are found, NONE is returned.

Group Status and Error

Syntax *OPT?

Examples *OPT? response (with each option listed on a separate line for clarity):

5-BW-1000 – 1 GHz ,

5-DJA – Advanced Jitter and Eye Analysis– NODE.

PASSWord (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) enables the *PUD and NEWpass set commands.
Sending PASSWord without any arguments disables these same commands. Once
the password is successfully entered, the *PUD and NEWpass commands are
enabled until the instrument is powered off, or until the FACtory command, the
PASSWord command with no arguments, or the *RST command is issued.
To change the password, you must first enter the valid password with the
PASSWord command and then change to your new password with the NEWpass
command. Remember that the password is case sensitive.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax PASSWord <QString>

Related Commands NEWpass

*PUD

Arguments <QString> is the password, which can contain up to 10 characters. The factory
default password is “XYZZY” and is always valid.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-983

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples PASSWORD "XYZZY" enables the *PUD and NEWPass set commands.

PASSWORD disables the *PUD and NEWPass set commands. You can still use the
query version of *PUD.

PAUSe (No Query Form)

This command causes the interface to pause the specified number of seconds
before processing any other commands.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax PAUSe <NR3>

Arguments <NR3> is the specified number of seconds the interface is to pause before
processing any other commands. The pause time is specified as a floating point
value in seconds and must be > 0.0 and ≥1800.0.

Examples PAUSE 10.0e0;:ACQUIRE:NUMACQ causes the interface to pause 10 seconds

before returning the number of acquisitions.

PEAKSTABle:ADDNew (No Query Form)

This command adds the specified peak markers table.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax PEAKSTABle:ADDNew <QString>

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that is the name of the new peak markers table. The
argument is of the form “TABLE<NR1>”, where <NR1> ≥ 1.

Examples PEAKSTABLE:ADDNEW "Table1" adds peak markers table, Table1.

PEAKSTABle:DELete (No Query Form)

This command deletes the specified peak markers table.

2-984 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Spectrum View

Syntax PEAKSTABle:DELete <QString>

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that is the name of the peak markers table to delete.
The argument is of the form “TABLE<NR1>”, where <NR1> ≥ 1.

Examples PEAKSTABLE:DELETE "Table1" deletes peak markers table, Table1.

PEAKSTABle:LIST? (Query Only)

This command deletes the specified peak markers table.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax PEAKSTABle:LIST?

Returns Returns a list of all currently defined peak markers tables.

Examples PEAKSTABLE:LIST? might return :PEAKSTABle:LIST TABLE1 , indicating

TABLE1 is currently the only defined peak markers table.

PEAKSTABle:TABle<x>:FRESolution
This command sets or queries the Frequency Resolution state for peak markers
table.

Group Plot

Syntax PEAKSTABle:TABle<x>:FRESolution {AUTO|PRECISE}

PEAKSTABle:TABle<x>:FRESolution?

Arguments AUTO shows the frequency with the same precision as shown in the Spectrum
View display.
PRECISE shows the frequency down to single Hz resolution.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-985

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples PEAKSTABle:TABle1:FRESolution AUTO sets Frequency Resolution to Auto.

PEAKSTABle:TABle1:FRESolution? might return

:PEAKSTABle:TABle1:FRESolution AUTO, indicating Frequency Resolution
is Auto.

PILOGger:FILEName
This command sets or queries the location where the programmatic interface
command log will be saved.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax PILOGger:FILEName <QString>

PILOGger:FILEName?

Related Commands PILOGger:STATE

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that defines the file path that specifies the location
to save the command log, in the format ‘[<path>]<filename.ext>’. Specifying a
path is optional. If no path is entered, the instrument will search in the current
working directory as set in FILESystem:CWD.

Examples PILOGger:FILEName
"C:/Users/Tek_Local_Admin/Tektronix/TekScope/piCmdLog.txt"
sets this as the location to save the PI command log.
PILOGger:FILEName? might return :PILOGger:FILEName
"command_log.txt", indicating the PI command log will be saved in the
current working directory with the file name command_log.txt.

PILOGger:STATE
This command sets or queries the state of the programmatic interface command
log. If the location specified by PILOGger:FILEName does not exist or is not
writable, attempts to turn the PI command logger ON will fail, and the state will
be set to 0 (OFF).

Group Miscellaneous

2-986 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax PILOGger:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

PILOGger:STATE?

Related Commands PILOGger:FILEName

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables the PI command logger; any other value turns the PI command
logger on.
OFF disables the PI command logger.

ON enables the PI command logger.

Examples PILOGger:STATE ON enables the PI command logger.

PILOGger:STATE? might return :PILOGger:STATE 0, indicating the PI

command logger is disabled.

PLOT:ADDNew (No Query Form)

This command adds the specified plot.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:ADDNew <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the specified plot. The argument is of the form “PLOT<NR1>”,
where <NR1> ≥ 1.

Examples PLOT:ADDNEW "PLOT1" adds PLOT1.

PLOT:DELete (No Query Form)

This command deletes the specified plot.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:DELete <QString>

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-987

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <QString> is the specified plot. Argument is of the form “PLOT<NR1>, where
<NR1> is ≥ 1).

Examples PLOT:DELETE "PLOT1" deletes PLOT1.

PLOT:LIST? (Query Only)

This command lists all currently defined plots.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:LIST?

Returns A list of all currently defined plots is returned.

Examples PLOT:LIST? might return :PLOT:LIST

PLOT1,PLOT3,PLOT4,PLOT5,PLOT6,PLOT7 listing all currently defined plots.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:BATHtub:BER
This command sets or queries the bathtub BER value.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:BATHtub:BER <NR1>

PLOT:PLOT<x>:BATHtub:BER?

Arguments <NR1> is the bathtub BER value.

Examples PLOT:PLOT1:BATHtub:BER 16 sets the BER value to 16.

PLOT:PLOT1:BATHtub:BER? might return :PLOT:PLOT1:BATHTUB:BER 14

indicating the BER value is 14.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:BATHtub:XAXISUnits
This command sets or queries the X-Axis unit, either unit intervals or seconds.

2-988 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:BATHtub:XAXISUnits {UNITIntervals|SECOnds}

PLOT:PLOT<x>:BATHtub:XAXISUnits?

Arguments UNITIntervals specifies units as unit intervals.

SECOnds specifies units as seconds.

Examples PLOT:PLOT1:BATHtub:XAXISUnits SECONDS sets the units to seconds.

PLOT:PLOT1:BATHtub:XAXISUnits? might return SECONDS.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:BITType
This command sets or queries the bit type to display for the specified eye diagram
plot.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:BITType {ALLBits|TRANSition|NONTRANsition}

PLOT:PLOT<x>:BITType?

Arguments PLOT<x> is the plot number.

ALLBits sets the eye diagram plot to show both transition and nontransition bits.

TRANSition sets the eye diagram plot to show only bits where a logic level
transition occurs.
NONTRANsition sets the eye diagram plot to show only bits where no logic
level transition occurs.

Examples PLOT:PLOT1:BITType TRANSition sets the eye diagram in Plot 1 to only

show transition bits.
PLOT:PLOT3:BITType? might return ALLBITS, indicating that the eye diagram
in Plot 3 is set to show both transition and nontransition bits in the plot.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:EINTerpolation
This command sets or queries whether dot mode eye diagram is enabled.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-989

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:EINTerpolation {ON|OFF}

PLOT:PLOT<x>:EINTerpolation?

Arguments PLOT<x> is the plot number.

ON enables interpolation between samples .

OFF disables interpolation between samples .

Examples PLOT:PLOT2:EINTerpolation ON enables interpolation for plot 2.

PLOT:PLOT2:EINTerpolation? might return

:PLOT:PLOT2:EINTerpolation ON, indicating that eye interpolation is
enabled for plot 2.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:EXPORTRaw? (Query Only)

This command returns a binary stream of double values containing the x,y
and hits value. Use this command along with MEASUREMENT:ADDMEAS TIE,
PLOT:PLOT1:TYPE EYEDIAGRAM, DISplay:SELect:VIEW plotview1 to
export the eye diagram plot data.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:EXPORTRaw?

Related Commands MEASUrement:ADDMEAS

DISplay:SELect:VIEW

PLOT:PLOT<x>:TYPe

Returns A binary stream of double values containing the x,y and hits value. The data that
is returned is of binary format.

Examples PLOT:PLOT1:EXPORTRaw? might return :#73000000{øÔ$y¾„´Æ B @,

indicating the x,y and hits value.

2-990 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

PLOT:PLOT<x>:EXTENDuis
This command sets or queries number of UIs surrounding the eye boundary UIs
that are used for fast eye rendering.

Conditions Requires option DJA.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:EXTENDuis <NR1>

PLOT:PLOT<x>:EXTENDuis?

Arguments PLOT<x> is the plot number.

<NR1> is the number of surrounding UIs.

Examples PLOT:PLOT2:EXTENDUIS 250 sets fast eye rendering to use 250 UIs in plot 2.
PLOT:PLOT2:EXTENDUIS? might return :PLOT:PLOT2:EXTENDUIS 250,
indicating that 250 UIs are used for fast eye rendering in plot 2.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:EYERender
This command sets or queries the eye rendering method for the specified plot.

Conditions Requires option DJA.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:EYERender {FAst|COMPlete}

PLOT:PLOT<x>:EYERender?

Arguments PLOT<x> is the plot number.

FAst sets the eye rendering method to fast.

COMPlete sets the eye rendering method to complete.

Examples PLOT:PLOT2:EYERENDER FAST enables fast eye rendering for plot 2.

PLOT:PLOT2:EYERENDER? might return :PLOT:PLOT2:EYERENDER FAST,

indicating that fast eye rendering is enabled in plot 2.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-991

Commands listed in alphabetical order

PLOT:PLOT<x>:INTerpolate
This command turns on or off the interpolation state for SOA plot.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR.

Group Power

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:INTerpolate {ON|OFF}

PLOT:PLOT<x>:INTerpolate?

Arguments PLOT<x> is the plot number.

ON specifies the interpolation state has been turned on for SOA plot.

OFF specifies the interpolation state has been turned off for SOA plot.

Examples PLOT:PLOT2:INTerpolate ON specifies the interpolation state has been turned

on for SOA plot.
PLOT:PLOT2:INTerpolate? might return :PLOT:PLOT2:INTerpolate ON,
indicating the interpolation state is on for SOA plot.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:IMDA:MEAS
This command sets or returns the measurement selection of trend plot and acq
trend plot.

Conditions Requires option IMDA.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:IMDA:MEAS {VRMS |IRMS |PHASE |FREQuency |TRPWR

|REPWR |APPPWR |TRPWRSUM |REPWRSUM |APPPWRSUM |DCPWR |INPWR
|OUTPWR |EFFiciency |TOTALEFFiciency |INPWRSUM |OUTPWRSUM}
PLOT:PLOT<x>:IMDA:MEAS?

Arguments PLOT<x> is the plot number.

VRMS sets the IMDA measurement selection to VRMS.

IRMS sets the IMDA measurement selection to IRMS.

2-992 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

PHASE sets the IMDA measurement selection to PHASE.

FREQuency sets the IMDA measurement selection to FREQuency.

TRPWR sets the IMDA measurement selection to TRPWR.

REPWR sets the IMDA measurement selection to REPWR.

APPPWR sets the IMDA measurement selection to APPPWR.

TRPWRSUM sets the IMDA measurement selection to TRPWRSUM.

REPWRSUM sets the IMDA measurement selection to REPWRSUM.

APPPWRSUM sets the IMDA measurement selection to APPPWRSUM.

DCPWR sets the IMDA measurement selection to DCPWR. This selection is

applicable only for acq trend plots.
INPWR sets the IMDA measurement selection to INPWR. This selection is
applicable only for acq trend plots.
OUTPWR sets the IMDA measurement selection to OUTPWR. This selection is
applicable only for acq trend plots.
EFFiciency sets the IMDA measurement selection to EFFiciency.

TOTALEFFiciency sets the IMDA measurement selection to TOTALEFFiciency.

This selection is applicable only for acq trend plots.
INPWRSUM sets the IMDA measurement selection to INPWRSUM. This selection
is applicable only for acq trend plots.
OUTPWRSUM sets the IMDA measurement selection to OUTPWRSUM. This
selection is applicable only for acq trend plots.

Examples PLOT:PLOT1:IMDA:MEAS VRMS sets the measurement selection to VRMS.

PLOT:PLOT1:IMDA:MEAS? might return :PLOT:PLOT1:IMDA:MEAS VRMS

indicating the measurement selection is set to VRMS.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:IMDAPLOTDisplay
This command sets or returns the IMDA time trend and acq trend plot display
configuration.

Conditions Requires option IMDA.

Group Plot

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-993

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:IMDAPLOTDisplay {ALL |ONEPAIRVI |ONEPAIRV

|ONEPAIRI |PHASEONE |PHASETWO |PHASETHREE |ABC |DQ0}
PLOT:PLOT<x>:IMDAPLOTDisplay?

Arguments PLOT<x> is the plot number.

ALL sets the IMDA time trend and acq trend plot display configuration to ALL.

ONEPAIRVI sets the IMDA time trend and acq trend plot display configuration
to ONEPAIRVI.
ONEPAIRV sets the IMDA time trend and acq trend plot display configuration to
ONEPAIRV.
ONEPAIRI sets the IMDA time trend and acq trend plot display configuration to
ONEPAIRI.
PHASEONE sets the IMDA time trend and acq trend plot display configuration
to PHASEONE.
PHASETWO sets the IMDA time trend and acq trend plot display configuration
to PHASETWO.
PHASETHREE sets the IMDA time trend and acq trend plot display configuration
to PHASETHREE.
ABC sets the IMDA time trend plot display to ABC.

DQ0 sets the IMDA time trend plot display to DQ0.

Examples PLOT:PLOT1:IMDAPLOTDisplay ALL sets the plot display configuration to all.

PLOT:PLOT1:IMDAPLOTDisplay? might return

:PLOT:PLOT1:IMDAPLOTDisplay ALL indicating the plot display
configuration is set to all.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:COLor
This command sets or queries the color of the specified trend label. This
command/query only applies to Time Trend plots.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:COLor <QString>

PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:COLor?

2-994 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <QString> is the label color. The default color is specified by a quoted empty
string, and is the only available color.

Examples PLOT:PLOT2:LABel:COLor " " sets the plot color to the default color.

PLOT:PLOT2:LABel:COLor? might return :PLOT:PLOT2:LABEL:COLOR ""

indicating the plot color is the default color.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD
This command sets or queries the bold state of the specified trend label. This
command/query only applies to Time Trend plots.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables bold font; any other value turns this feature on.

OFF disables bold font.

ON enables bold font.

Examples PLOT:PLOT1:LABEL:FONT:BOLD 1 sets the label to a bold font.

PLOT:PLOT1:LABEL:FONT:BOLD? might return

:PLOT:PLOT1:LABEL:FONT:BOLD 1 indicating the label is bold.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic
This command sets or queries the italic state of the specified trend label. This
command/query only applies to Time Trend plots.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables italic font; any other value turns this feature on.

OFF disables italic font.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-995

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ON enables italic font.

Examples PLOT:PLOT1:LABel:FONT:ITALic 1 sets the font to italic.

PLOT:PLOT1:LABel:FONT:ITALic? might return

:PLOT:PLOT1:LABEL:FONT:ITALIC 0 indicating the font in not italic.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE
This command sets or queries the font size of the specified trend label. This
command/query only applies to Time Trend plots.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE <NR1>

PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE?

Arguments <NR1> is the font size.

Examples PLOT:PLOT1:LABel:FONT:SIZE 12 sets the font size to 12 points.

PLOT:PLOT1:LABel:FONT:SIZE? might return

:PLOT:PLOT1:LABEL:FONT:SIZE 72 indicating the font size is 72 points.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE
This command sets or queries the font type of the specified trend label, such as
Arial or Times New Roman. This command/query only applies to Time Trend
plots.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE <QString>

PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE?

Arguments <QString> is the font type: Times New Roman, Arial, Frutiger LT Std 55
Roman, DejaVu Sans, DejaVu Sans Mono, Frutiger LT Std, Monospace, Sans
Serif, Serif, Ubuntu, Ubuntu Condensed, and Ubuntu Mono.

2-996 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples PLOT:PLOT1:LABel:FONT:TYPE Arial sets the font type to Arial.

PLOT:PLOT1:LABel:FONT:TYPE? might return
:PLOT:PLOT1:LABEL:FONT:TYPE "Frutiger LT Std 55 Roman" indicating the
font type is Frutiger LT Std 55 Roman.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline
This command sets or queries the underline state of the specified trend label. This
command/query only applies to Time Trend plots.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables underline font; any other value turns this feature on.

OFF disables underline font.

ON enables underline font.

Examples PLOT:PLOT1:LABel:FONT:UNDERline 1 set the font to underlined.

PLOT:PLOT1:LABel:FONT:UNDERline?
:PLOT:PLOT1:LABEL:FONT:UNDERLINE 0 indicating the font is underlined.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:NAMe
This command sets or queries the specified trend's label. This command/query
only applies to Time Trend plots.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:NAMe <QString>

PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:NAMe?

Arguments <QString> is the label.

Examples PLOT:PLOT1:LABel:NAMe "Time Trend number 1" sets the plot name to
Time Trend number 1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-997

Commands listed in alphabetical order

PLOT:PLOT1:LABel:NAMe? might return :PLOT:PLOT1:LABEL:NAME "This

is a label test plot" indicating the label name is This is a label test plot.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:XPOS
This command sets or queries the x-position of the specified trend label. This
command/query only applies to Time Trend plots.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:XPOS <NR3>

PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:XPOS?

Arguments <NR3> is the y-position, in pixels relative to the left edge of the display, of the
label.

Examples PLOT:PLOT1:LABel:XPOS 200 sets the X position to 200.

PLOT:PLOT1:LABel:XPOS? might return :PLOT:PLOT1:LABEL:XPOS

45.0000 indicating the X position is 45.0 pixels to the right of the left edge
of the display.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:YPOS
This command sets or queries the y-position of the specified trend label. This
command/query only applies to Time Trend plots.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:YPOS <NR3>

PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:YPOS?

Arguments <NR3> is the x-position, in pixels relative to the baseline of the waveform, of
the label.

Examples PLOT:PLOT1:LABel:YPOS 100 sets the Y position to 100.

PLOT:PLOT1:LABel:YPOS? might return :PLOT:PLOT1:LABEL:YPOS

0.0E+0 indicating the Y position of the label is at the baseline of the waveform.

2-998 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASK? (Query Only)

This command returns the name of the mask test associated with the specified
eye diagram plot.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASK?

Arguments PLOT<x> is the plot number.

Returns <String> is a quoted string that contains the name of the eye diagram mask test
associated with the specified plot. If a plot does not have an eye diagram mask
test, the command returns an empty string "".

Examples PLOT:PLOT1:MASK? might return "mask2", indicating that the eye diagram
mask test mask2 is associated with plot 1.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASKOffset:HORizontal:AUTOfit
This command enables or disables eye mask autofit in the specified plot.

Conditions Requires option 5-DJA or 6-DJA (Advanced Jitter Analysis).

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASKOffset:HORizontal:AUTOfit {ON|OFF}

PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASKOffset:HORizontal:AUTOfit?

Arguments PLOT<x> is the plot number.

ON enables eye mask autofit.

OFF disables eye mask autofit.

Examples PLOT:PLOT1:MASKOffset:HORizontal:AUTOfit ON enables the eye mask

autofit in mask plot 1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-999

Commands listed in alphabetical order

PLOT:PLOT2:MASKOffset:HORizontal:AUTOfit? might return

:PLOT:PLOT2:MASKOffset:HORizontal:AUTOfit 0, indicating that mask
autofit is disabled in mask plot 2.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:NUMBins
This command sets or queries the current histogram resolution.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:NUMBins {TWENtyfive| FIFTY| HUNdred| TWOFifty|

FIVEHundred| TWOThousand| MAXimum}
PLOT:PLOT<x>:NUMBins?

Arguments TWENtyfive sets the number of bins to 25.

FIFTY sets the number of bins to 50.

HUNdred sets the number of bins to 100.

TWOFifty sets the number of bins to 250.

FIVEHundred sets the number of bins to 500.

TWOThousand sets the number of bins to 2000.

MAXimum sets the number of bins to the maximum value.

Examples PLOT:PLOT4:NUMBins TWENTYFIVE sets the number of bins to 25.

PLOT:PLOT4:NUMBins? might return :PLOT:PLOT4:NUMBINS TWOFIFTY

indicating the histogram resolution is 250 bins.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASKOffset:PERCENTui:FROM
This command sets or queries the allowed range for the mask to move in the left
direction. Only applies to eye diagram plots.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASKOffset:PERCENTui:FROM <NR3>

PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASKOffset:PERCENTui:FROM?

2-1000 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments PLOT<x> is the plot number.

<NR3> is the allowed range in percentage for the mask to move in the left direction.

Examples PLOT:PLOT1:MASKOffset:PERCENTui:FROM 10 sets the mask movement

range (From) to 10%.
PLOT:PLOT1:MASKOffset:PERCENTui:FROM? might return
:PLOT:PLOT1:MASKOffset:PERCENTui:FROM 10.0, indicating the mask
movement range (From) is 10%.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASKOffset:PERCENTui:TO
This command sets or queries the allowed range for the mask to move in the right
direction. Only applies to eye diagram plots.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASKOffset:PERCENTui:TO <NR3>

PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASKOffset:PERCENTui:TO?

Arguments PLOT<x> is the plot number.

<NR3> is the allowed range in percentage for the mask to move in the right
direction.

Examples PLOT:PLOT1:MASKOffset:PERCENTui:TO 10 sets the mask movement range

(To) to 10%.
PLOT:PLOT1:MASKOffset:PERCENTui:TO? might return
:PLOT:PLOT1:MASKOffset:PERCENTui:TO 10.0, indicating the
mask movement range (To) is 10%.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:PREGion
This command sets or returns the pulse region for recovery plot.

Conditions Requires WBG-DPT License.

Group Plot

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1001

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:PREGion {SELECTED|ALL}

PLOT:PLOT<x>:PREGion?

Arguments PLOT<x> is the plot number.

SELECTED specifies the pulse region for recovery plot as selected.

ALL specifies the pulse region for recovery plot as all.

Examples PLOT:PLOT2:PREGion SELECTED sets the pulse region for recovery plot as
selected.
PLOT:PLOT1:PREGion? might return :PLOT:PLOT1:PREGion? SELECTED
indicating the pulse region for recovery plot is selected.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:PTYPe
This command sets or returns the phasor type of the phasor diagram plot.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:PTYPe {RMS|MAGNITUDE}

PLOT:PLOT<x>:PTYPe?

Arguments PLOT<x> is the plot number.

RMS sets the phasor type to RMS.

MAGNITUDE sets the phasor type to MAGNITUDE.

Examples PLOT:PLOT1:PTYPe? Returns RMS sets the phasor type to RMS.

PLOT:PLOT1:PTYPe? might return :PLOT:PLOT1:PTYPe? RMS indicating

the phasor type is RMS.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:RAILNUM
Sets the DPM histogram source.

Conditions Requires option 5-DPM (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-DPM (6 Series MSO
instrument)

2-1002 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group DPM

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:RAILNUM RAIL[1–7]

PLOT:PLOT<x>:RAILNUM?

Arguments PLOT<x> is the plot number.

Rail[1–7] is the rail number.

Examples PLOT:PLOT2:RAILNUM RAIL6 sets the DPM histogram source to Rail 6 of

plot 2.
PLOT:PLOT5:RAILNUM? might return RAIL1, indicating that the DPM histogram
source is Rail 1 of plot 5.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:SOUrce<x>
This command sets or queries the plot source.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:SOUrce<x> MEAS<x>

PLOT:PLOT<x>:SOUrce<x>?

Arguments MEAS<x> is the specified measurement source for the specified plot.

Examples PLOT:PLOT1:SOUrce1 MEAS2 sets source 1 of plot 1 to measurement 2.

PLOT:PLOT1:SOUrce1? might return :PLOT:PLOT1:SOURCE1 MEAS1

indicating the specified source of the specified plot is measurement 1.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:SPECtrum:BASE
This command sets or queries the spectrum base. Undefined for non-spectrum
plots.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:SPECtrum:BASE <NR1>

PLOT:PLOT<x>:SPECtrum:BASE?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1003

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR1> is the spectrum base.

Examples PLOT:PLOT3:SPECtrum:BASE -10 sets the base to -10.

PLOT:PLOT3:SPECtrum:BASE? might return :PLOT:PLOT3:SPECTRUM:BASE

-15 indicating the base is -15.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:SPECtrum:DYNRange
This command sets or queries the dynamic range value.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:SPECtrum:DYNRange <NR3>

PLOT:PLOT<x>:SPECtrum:DYNRange?

Arguments <NR3> is the dynamic range value.

Examples PLOT:PLOT3:SPECtrum:DYNRange 150 sets the dynamic range to 150 dB.

PLOT:PLOT3:SPECtrum:DYNRange? might return

:PLOT:PLOT3:SPECTRUM:DYNRANGE 100 indicating the dynamic range
is 100 dB.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:TRESponse:RTYPe
This command sets the plot response type.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR.

Group Power

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:TRESponse:RTYPe {PHASE| GRPDELAY| GDELAY}

PLOT:PLOT<x>:TRESponse:RTYPe?

Arguments PLOT<x> sets the plot measurement number. This is the equivalent of the number
shown on a plot heading in the UI.
PHASE sets the plot response type to phase.

GRPDELAY sets the plot response type to GRPDELAY.

2-1004 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

GDELAY sets the plot response type to GDELAY.

Examples PLOT:PLOT1:TRESponse:RTYPe PHASE sets the plot response type to phase

for plot 1.
PLOT:PLOT1:TRESponse:RTYPe? might return
:PLOT:PLOT1:TRESponse:RTYPe PHASE, indicating that the plot response
type is phase for plot 1.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:TYPe
This command sets or returns the current plot type of the specified plot.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:TYPe {NONE |BATHTUB |EYEDIAGRAM |HARMONICS

|HISTOGRAM |IMDATIMETREND|IMDAACQTREND |INDUCTANCE
|IVSINTEGRALV |MAGPROPERTY |PHASENOISE |PHASOR |RECOVERY
|SOA |SPECTRUM |SSCPROFILE |SWL |TIEHISTOGRAM |TIETIMETREND
|TIESPECTRUM |TIMETREND |TRESPONSE |XY |XYZ}

Arguments <x> is the plot number. This is the equivalent of the number shown on a plot
heading in the UI.
NONE does not create a plot.

BATHTUB creates a bathtub plot.

EYEDIAGRAM creates an eye diagram. This plot type is not available on a 4 Series
MSO instrument.
HARMONICS creates a harmonics bar graph.

HISTOGRAM creates a histogram plot.

IMDATIMETREND creates a IMDA time trend plot. This plot type requires option
IMDA.
IMDAACQTREND creates a IMDA acq trend plot. This plot type requires option
IMDA.
INDUCTANCE creates a inductance plot.

IVSINTEGRALV creates a I vs. ∫V plot.

MAGPROPERTY creates a BH curve.

PHASENOISE creates a phase noise plot.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1005

Commands listed in alphabetical order

PHASOR creates the Phasor Diagram. This plot type requires option 5-DPM on
MSO58/56 series instruments.
RECOVERY creates a recovery plot. This plot type requires a WBG-DPT License.

SOA creates an SOA plot.

SPECTRUM creates a spectrum plot.

SSCPROFILE creates a SSC profile plot.

SWL creates a Switching Loss plot

TIEHISTOGRAM creates a TIE histogram plot.

TIESPECTRUM creates a TIE spectrum plot.

TIETIMETREND creates a TIE time trend plot.

TIMETREND creates a time trend plot.

TRESPONSE creates a response plot.

XY creates a XY plot.

XYZ creates a XYZ plot.

Examples PLOT:PLOT2:TYPe BATHTUB creates a bathtub plot.

PLOT:PLOT2:TYPe? might return :PLOT:PLOT2:TYPE EYEDIAGRAM

indicating the plot is an eye diagram.

POWer:ADDNew (No Query Form)

This command adds the specified power measurement number. The power
measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:ADDNew “POWER<x>”

Examples POWER:ADDNEW “POWER1” adds POWER1 measurement badge and selects

Switching Loss measurement by default.

2-1006 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:DELete (No Query Form)

This command deletes the specified power measurement number. The power
measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:DELete "POWER<x>"

Examples POWER:DELETE "POWER1" deletes the POWER1 measurement badge.

POWer:POWer<x>:AUTOSet (No Query Form)

This command executes power autoset for the specified power measurement
number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:AUTOSet EXECute

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown on a power measurement badge in the UI.

Examples POWer:POWer1:AUTOSet EXECute executes the power autoset for the power
measurement Power 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:AMP<x>Val
This command sets or queries the generator amplitude value of the specified
configuration step for the Control Loop Response power measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR or 6-PWR

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1007

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:AMP<x>Val <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:AMP<x>Val?

Arguments Power<x> sets the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
AMP<x> sets the configuration step number, in the range of 1 to 10. Values outside
this range will report an error.
<NR3> sets the generator amplitude for the specified configuration step, in the
range of –100 V to 100 V.

Examples POWer:POWer1:CLRESPONSE:AMP3Val 20 sets the generator output amplitude

for configuration step 3 to 20 volts, for power measurement 1.
POWer:POWer2:CLRESPONSE:AMP8Val? might return 60, indicating that the
generator output amplitude setting of configuration step 8 is 60 volts, for power
measurement 2.

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:AMPMode
This command sets or queries the amplitude mode for the Control Loop Response
power measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR or 6-PWR

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:AMPMode {CONSTant|PROFile}

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:AMPMode?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
CONSTant sets the amplitude mode to output a constant amplitude signal from
the DUT stimulus generator for all frequency bands.
PROFile enables configuring the generator to set amplitude values for each
frequency band.

2-1008 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples POWer:POWer1:CLRESPONSE:AMPMode CONSTant sets the amplitude mode

to Constant for power measurement 1.
POWer:POWer2:CLRESPONSE:AMPMode? might return PROFile, indicating
that the amplitude mode power measurement 2 is set to Profile.

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:ANALYSISMethod
This command sets or queries the Analysis Method for Control Loop Response
measurement.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:ANALYSISMethod {SV|FFT}

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:ANALYSISMethod?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
SV sets the Analysis Method as Spectrum View.

FFT sets the Analysis Method as FFT.

Examples POWer:POWer1:CLRESPONSE:ANALYSISMethod SV sets the Analysis Method

as Spectrum View for power measurement 1.
POWer:POWer1:CLRESPONSE:ANALYSISMethod? might return
:POWer:POWer1:CLRESPONSE:ANALYSISMethod SV, indicating that the
Analysis Method is Spectrum View.

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:AUTORbw
This command enables Auto RBW computation.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:AUTORbw {True|False}

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:AUTORbw?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
True enables Auto RBW computation.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1009

Commands listed in alphabetical order

False disables Auto RBW computation.

Examples POWer:POWer1:CLRESPONSE:AUTORbw true enables Auto RBW computation.

POWer:POWer1:CLRESPONSE:AUTORbw? might return

:POWer:POWer1:CLRESPONSE:AUTORbw true, indicating that
Auto RBW computation is enabled.

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:CONNECTSTATus? (Query Only)

Queries connection status to the external generator used with the specified Control
Loop Response power measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-PWR (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:CONNECTSTATus?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:GENIPADDress

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:GENerator

Arguments POWer<x> is the number of the power measurement.

Returns SUCCess indicates the instrument recognizes the connection to the external
generator.
FAILure indicates the instrument could not make the connection to the external
generator.
UNSUPPorted indicates that the connected generator is not recognized.

Examples POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:CONNECTSTATus? might return FAILURE,

indicating that the instrument could not connect to the external generator at the
specified IP address.

2-1010 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:CONSTAMPlitude
This command sets or queries the constant amplitude voltage for the Control
Loop Response power measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR or 6-PWR

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:CONSTAMPlitude <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:CONSTAMPlitude?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR3> is the constant amplitude voltage value for the measurement, in the range
of –100 V to 100 V.

Examples POWer:POWer3:CLRESPONSE:CONSTAMPlitude 120 sets the constant

amplitude voltage for Power measurement 3 to be 120 volts.
POWer:POWer5:CLRESPONSE:CONSTAMPlitude? might return -15, indicating
that the constant amplitude voltage for power measurement 5 is –15 volts.

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:FREQ<x>Val
This command sets or queries the generator frequency value of the specified
configuration step for the Control Loop Response power measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR or 6-PWR

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:FREQ<x>Val <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:FREQ<x>Val?

Arguments Power<x> sets the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
FREQ<x> sets the configuration step number, in the range of 1 to 11. Values
outside this range will report an error.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1011

Commands listed in alphabetical order

<NR3> sets the frequency of the specified configuration step number, in the range
of 10 Hz to 50 MHz.

Examples POWer:POWer5:CLRESPONSE:FREQ1Val 200 sets the generator frequency

value for frequency band 1 to 200 Hz, for power measurement 5.
POWer:POWer2:CLRESPONSE:FREQ3Val? might return 2.000E+6, indicating
that the generator frequency output for frequency band 3 is 2.0 MHz, for power
measurement 2.

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:GENerator
This command sets or queries the generator source used to send stimulus signals
to the DUT, for the Control Loop Response power measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR or 6-PWR

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:GENerator {INTernal}

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:GENerator?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
INTernal sets the generator to the instrument AFG. This is the only valid
argument.

Examples POWer:POWer3:CLRESPONSE:GENerator INTernal sets the generator to the

instrument AFG for power measurement 3.
POWer:POWer2:CLRESPONSE:GENerator? might return INTERNAL, indicating
that the generator source for power measurement 2 is the instrument AFG.

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:GENerator
Sets or queries the generator source for the specified Control Loop Response
power measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-PWR (6 Series MSO
instrument)

2-1012 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:GENerator {INTernal|EXTernal}

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:GENerator?

Arguments POWer<x> is the number of the power measurement.INTernal sets the internal
generator as the source for the Control Loop Response power measurement.
EXTernal sets the external generator as the source for the Control Loop Response
power measurement.

Examples POWer:POWer1:CLRESPONSE:GENerator Internal sets the internal

generator as the source for the Control Loop Response measurement.
POWer:POWer1:CLRESPONSE:GENerator? might return EXTERNAL, indicating
that the Control Loop Response measurement is set to use an external generator.

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:GENIPADDress
Sets or queries the IP address of the external generator to be used with the
specified Control Loop Response measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-PWR (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:GENIPADDress <NR2>

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:GENIPADDress?

Arguments POWer<x> is the number of the power measurement.<NR2> is the IP address

of the generator.

Examples POWer:POWer4:CLRESPONSE:GENIPADDress 127.1.1.1 sets the IP address

of the external generator to 127.1.1.1.
POWer:POWer1:CLRESPONSE:GENIPADDress? might return "", indicating
that there is no address set for the external generator associated with Control
Loop Response power measurement 4.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1013

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:IMPEDance
This command sets or queries the vertical termination impedance for the Control
Loop Response power measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR or 6-PWR

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:IMPEDance {FIFTy|HIGHZ}

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:IMPEDance?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
FIFTy sets the impedance to be 50 Ω.

HIGHZ sets the impedance to be 1 MΩ.

Examples POWer:POWer3:CLRESPONSE:IMPEDance FIFTy sets the vertical termination

impedance for power measurement 3 to be 50 Ω.
POWer:POWer2:CLRESPONSE:IMPEDance? might return HIGHZ, indicating
that the vertical termination impedance for power measurement 2 is 1 MΩ.

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:INPUTSOurce
This command sets or queries the input source for the Control Loop Response
power measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR or 6-PWR

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:INPUTSOurce CH<x>

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:INPUTSOurce?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
CH<x> sets the channel to use for the output signal source.

2-1014 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples POWer:POWer2:CLRESPONSE:INPUTSOurce CH8 sets the input for power

measurement 2 to be the channel 8 waveform.
POWer:POWer2:CLRESPONSE:INPUTSOurce? might return CH1, indicating
that the input source for power measurement 1 is channel 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:MON
This command sets or returns the measure on for the control loop response, PSRR
or impedance measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR or 6-PWR

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:MON {SAVG|SSEQ}

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:MON?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
SAVG specifies the measure analysis method for the Control Loop Response/PSRR
or Impedance measurement to SAVG.
SSEQ specifies the measure analysis method for the Control Loop Response/PSRR
or Impedance measurement to SSEQ.

Examples POWer:POWer2:CLRESPONSE:INPUTSOurce SSEQ sets the measure analysis

method for the Control Loop Response/PSRR or Impedance measurement to
SSEQ.
POWer:POWer2:CLRESPONSE:INPUTSOurce? might return
:POWer:POWer2:CLRESPONSE:INPUTSOurce SSEQ, indicating that the
measure analysis method for the Control Loop Response/PSRR or Impedance
measurement is SSEQ.

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:OUTPUTSOurce
This command sets or queries the output source for the Control Loop Response
power measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR or 6-PWR

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1015

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:OUTPUTSOurce CH<x>

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:OUTPUTSOurce?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
CH<x> sets the channel to use for the output signal source.

Examples POWer:POWer1:CLRESPONSE:OUTPUTSOurce CH5 sets the output source for

power measurement 1 to be the channel 5 waveform.
POWer:POWer3:CLRESPONSE:OUTPUTSOurce? might return CH6, indicating
that the output source for power measurement 3 is channel 6.

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:PPD
This command sets or queries the points per decade (PPD) value for the Control
Loop Response power measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR or 6-PWR

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:PPD <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:PPD?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR3> is the PPD value for the measurement, in the range of 10 to 100 points.

Examples POWer:POWer3:CLRESPONSE:PPD 30 sets the PPD for Power measurement

3 to be 30 points.
POWer:POWer5:CLRESPONSE:PPD? might return 20, indicating that the PPD
value for power measurement 5 is 20 points.

2-1016 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:STARTFREQuency
This command sets or queries the start frequency value for the Control Loop
Response power measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR or 6-PWR

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:STARTFREQuency <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:STARTFREQuency?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR3> is the starting frequency for the measurement, in the range of 10 Hz to
50 MHz.

Examples POWer:POWer8:CLRESPONSE:STARTFREQuency 12 sets the starting frequency

for power measurement 8 to be 12 Hz.
POWer:POWer3:CLRESPONSE:STARTFREQuency? might return 2400,
indicating that the starting frequency for power measurement 3 is 2400 Hz.

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:STOPFREQuency
This command sets or queries the stop frequency value for the Control Loop
Response power measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR or 6-PWR

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:STOPFREQuency <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:STOPFREQuency?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR3> is the stop frequency for the measurement, in the range of 10 Hz to 50 MHz.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1017

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples POWer:POWer3:CLRESPONSE:STOPFREQuency 120 sets the stop frequency

for the control loop response power measurement 8 to be 120 Hz.
POWer:POWer5:CLRESPONSE:STOPFREQuency? might return 2000, indicating
that the stop frequency for the control loop response power measurement 5 is
2000 Hz.

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:TESTCONNection (No Query Form)

This command tests the connection to the external generator used with the
specified Control Loop Response power measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-PWR (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:TESTCONNection EXECute

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:CONNECTSTATus?

POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:GENIPADDress

Arguments POWer<x> is the number of the PSRR power measurement.

EXECute runs the test connection function.

Examples POWer:POWer5:CLRESPONSE:TESTCONNection EXECute runs the test

connection function for Control Loop Response power measurement 5.

POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEAmp:INPUTSOurce
This command sets or queries the input source for cycle amplitude measurement
of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

2-1018 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEAmp:INPUTSOurce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEAmp:INPUTSOurce?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown on a power measurement badge in the UI.
CH<x> = A channel specifier; <x> is 1 through 8 and is limited by the number
of FlexChannels in your instrument.
MATH<x> = A math waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:CYCAmp:INPUTSOurce CH1 sets the input source for cycle

amplitude measurement as CH1 for the power measurement badge Power 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEBase:INPUTSOurce
This command sets or queries the input source for cycle base measurement of the
specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEBase:INPUTSOurce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEBase:INPUTSOurce?

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:CYCLEBase:INPUTSOurce CH2 sets the input source for cycle

base measurement as CH2 for the power measurement badge Power 1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1019

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEMAX:INPUTSOurce
This command sets or queries the input source for cycle maximum measurement
in the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEMAX:INPUTSOurce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEMAX:INPUTSOurce?

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:CYCMAX:INPUTSOurce CH2 sets the input source for cycle

maximum measurement as CH2 for the power measurement badge Power 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEMin:INPUTSOurce
This command sets or queries the input source for cycle minimum measurement
in the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEMin:INPUTSOurce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEMin:INPUTSOurce?

2-1020 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MATH<x> = A math waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:CYCMin:INPUTSOurce CH2 sets the input source for cycle

minimum measurement as CH2 for the power measurement badge Power 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEPKPK:INPUTSOurce
This command sets or queries the input source for cycle peak-to-peak
measurement in the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEPKPK:INPUTSOurce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEPKPK:INPUTSOurce?

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:CYCPKPK:INPUTSOurce REF1 sets the input source for cycle

peak-to-peak measurement as REF1 for the power measurement badge Power 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLETop:INPUTSOurce
This command sets or queries the input source for cycle top measurement in the
specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1021

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLETop:INPUTSOurce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLETop:INPUTSOurce?

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:CYCTop:INPUTSOurce REF3 sets the input source for cycle

top measurement as REF3 for the power measurement badge Power 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:DIDT:INPUTSOurce
This command sets or queries the input source for di/dt measurement in the
specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:DIDT:INPUTSOurce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:DIDT:INPUTSOurce?

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:DIDT:INPUTSOurce CH6 sets the input source for di/dt

measurement as channel 2.

2-1022 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:DIDT:SOURCEEDGEType
This command sets or queries the edge type for di/dt measurement of the specified
power measurement number. <x> specifies the number of the power measurement
badge.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:DIDT:SOURCEEDGEType {RISE|FALL}

POWer:POWer<x>:DIDT:SOURCEEDGEType?

Examples POWer:POWer1:DIDT:SOURCEEDGEType RISE sets the edge type as rise for

the di/dt measurement.

POWer:POWer<x>:DVDT:INPUTSOurce
This command sets or queries the input source for dv/dt measurement of the
specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:DVDT:INPUTSOurce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:DVDT:INPUTSOurce?

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:DVDT:INPUTSOurce CH1 sets the input source for dv/dt

measurement as channel 1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1023

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:DVDT:SOURCEEDGEType
This command sets or queries the edge type for dv/dt measurement in the specified
power measurement number. The power measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:DVDT:SOURCEEDGEType {RISE|FALL}

POWer:POWer<x>:DVDT:SOURCEEDGEType?

Examples POWer:POWer1:DVDT:SOURCEEDGEType RISE sets the edge type as rise for

the dv/dt measurement.

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:INPUTType
This command sets or queries the input type (AC or DC) for power Efficiency
measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:INPUTType {AC|DC}

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:INPUTType?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:OUTPUT1Type

Arguments Power<x> is the number of a power efficiency measurement. This is the

equivalent of the number shown on the power measurement badge of the UI.
AC sets the input voltage type to AC.

DC sets the input voltage type to DC.

Examples POWer:POWer1:EFFICIENCY:INPUTType DC sets the input voltage type to DC

for power Efficiency measurement 1
POWer:POWer2:EFFICIENCY:INPUTType? might return AC, indicating that the
input voltage type for power Efficiency measurement 2 is AC.

2-1024 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:IOUT1SOUrce
This command sets or queries the output 1 current source for the power Efficiency
measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:IOUT1SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:IOUT1SOUrce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:IOUT2SOUrce

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:IOUT3SOUrce

Arguments Power<x> is the number of a power efficiency measurement. This is the

equivalent of the number shown in the power measurement badge on the UI.
CH<x> = A channel specifier; <x> is 1 through 8 and is limited by the number
of FlexChannels in your instrument.
MATH<x> = A math waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:EFFICIENCY:IOUT1SOUrce CH4 sets the source for the output

1 current efficiency measurement of power measurement 1 to Channel 4.
POWer:POWer1:EFFICIENCY:IOUT1SOUrce? might return CH6, indicating that
the source for the output 1 current efficiency measurement of power measurement
1 is Channel 6.

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:IOUT2SOUrce
This command sets or queries the output 2 current source for the power Efficiency
measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1025

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:IOUT2SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:IOUT2SOUrce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:IOUT1SOUrce

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:IOUT3SOUrce

Arguments Power<x> is the number of a power efficiency measurement. This is the

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer3:EFFICIENCY:IOUT2SOUrce REF2 sets the source for the

output 2 current efficiency measurement of power measurement 3 to Reference
waveform 2.
POWer:POWer1:EFFICIENCY:IOUT2SOUrce? might return MATH1, indicating
that the source for the output 2 current efficiency measurement of power
measurement 1 is Math waveform 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:IOUT3SOUrce
This command sets or queries the output 3 current source for the power Efficiency
measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:IOUT3SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:IOUT3SOUrce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:IOUT1SOUrce

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:IOUT2SOUrce

Arguments Power<x> is the number of a power efficiency measurement. This is the

equivalent of the number shown on the power measurement badge in the UI.

2-1026 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

CH<x> = A channel specifier; <x> is 1 through 8 and is limited by the number

of FlexChannels in your instrument.
MATH<x> = A math waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:EFFICIENCY:IOUT3SOUrce REF2 sets the source for the

output 3 current efficiency measurement of power measurement 1 to Reference
waveform 2.
POWer:POWer4:EFFICIENCY:IOUT3SOUrce? might return CH8, indicating that
the source for the output 3 current efficiency measurement of power measurement
4 is Channel 8.

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:ISOUrce
This command sets or queries the current source for the power Efficiency
measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:ISOUrce
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:ISOUrce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:VSOUrce

Arguments Power<x> is the number of a power efficiency measurement. This is the

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:EFFICIENCY:ISOUrce CH2 sets the input current source for

power Efficiency measurement 1 to Channel 2.
POWer:POWer6:EFFICIENCY:ISOUrce? might return CH2, indicating that the
input current source for power Efficiency measurement 6 is Channel 2.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1027

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:NUMOFOutputs
This command sets or queries the number of outputs for the power Efficiency
measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:NUMOFOutputs {ONE|TWO|THREE}

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:NUMOFOutputs?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:IOUT1SOUrce

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:IOUT2SOUrce
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:IOUT3SOUrce
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:VOUT1SOUrce
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:VOUT2SOUrce
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:VOUT3SOUrce

Arguments Power<x> is the number of a power efficiency measurement. This is the

equivalent of the number shown in the power measurement badge on the UI.
ONE, TWO, THREE sets the number of outputs to test in the power efficiency
measurement.

Examples POWer:POWer4:EFFICIENCY:NUMOFOutputs TWO sets the number of outputs

to measure in power measurement 4 to two.
POWer:POWer3:EFFICIENCY:NUMOFOutputs? might return ONE, indicating
that the number of outputs being measured in power measurement 3 is one.

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:OUTPUT1Type
This command sets or queries the Output1 type (AC or DC) for the power
Efficiency measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

2-1028 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:OUTPUT1Type {AC|DC}

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:OUTPUT1Type?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:INPUTType

Arguments Power<x> is the number of a power efficiency measurement. This is the

equivalent of the number shown on the power measurement badge of the UI.
AC sets the output1 voltage type to AC.

DC sets the output1 voltage type to DC.

Examples POWer:POWer1:EFFICIENCY:OUTPUT1Type DC sets the output type to DC

for power Efficiency measurement 1.
POWer:POWer3:EFFICIENCY:OUTPUT1Type? might return AC, indicating that
the power output type for power Efficiency measurement 3 is AC.

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:OUTPUT2Type
This command sets or queries the Output2 type (AC or DC) for the power
Efficiency measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:OUTPUT2Type {AC|DC}

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:OUTPUT2Type?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:INPUTType

Arguments Power<x> is the number of a power efficiency measurement. This is the

equivalent of the number shown on the power measurement badge of the UI.
AC sets the Output2 voltage type to AC.

DC sets the Output2 voltage type to DC.

Examples POWer:POWer1:EFFICIENCY:OUTPUT2Type DC sets the Output2 type to DC

for power Efficiency measurement 1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1029

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer3:EFFICIENCY:OUTPUT2Type? might return AC, indicating that

the power Output2 type for power Efficiency measurement 3 is AC.

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:OUTPUT3Type
This command sets or queries the Output3 type (AC or DC) for the power
Efficiency measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:OUTPUT3Type {AC|DC}

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:OUTPUT3Type?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:INPUTType

Arguments Power<x> is the number of a power efficiency measurement. This is the

equivalent of the number shown on the power measurement badge of the UI.
AC sets the Output3 voltage type to AC.

DC sets the Output3 voltage type to DC.

Examples POWer:POWer1:EFFICIENCY:OUTPUT3Type DC sets the Output3 type to DC

for power Efficiency measurement 1.
POWer:POWer3:EFFICIENCY:OUTPUT3Type? might return AC, indicating that
the power Output3 type for power Efficiency measurement 3 is AC.

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:OUTPUTType
This command sets or queries the output type (AC or DC) for power Efficiency
measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

2-1030 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:OUTPUTType {AC|DC}

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:OUTPUTType?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:INPUTType

Arguments Power<x> is the number of a power efficiency measurement. This is the

equivalent of the number shown on the power measurement badge of the UI.
AC sets the output voltage type to AC.

DC sets the output voltage type to DC.

Examples POWer:POWer1:EFFICIENCY:OUTPUTType DC sets the output type to DC

for power Efficiency measurement 1
POWer:POWer3:EFFICIENCY:OUTPUTType? might return AC, indicating that
the power output type for power Efficiency measurement 3 is AC.

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:VOUT1SOUrce
This command sets or queries the output 1 voltage source for the power Efficiency
measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:VOUT1SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:VOUT1SOUrce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:VOUT2SOUrce

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:VOUT3SOUrce

Arguments Power<x> is the number of a power efficiency measurement. This is the

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1031

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples POWer:POWer4:EFFICIENCY:VOUT1SOUrce CH4 sets the source for the output

1 voltage efficiency measurement of power measurement 4 to Channel 4.
POWer:POWer1:EFFICIENCY:VOUT1SOUrce? might return CH3, indicating that
the source for the output 1 voltage efficiency measurement of power measurement
1 is Channel 3.

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:VOUT2SOUrce
This command sets or queries the output 2 voltage source for the power Efficiency
measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:VOUT2SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:VOUT2SOUrce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:VOUT1SOUrce

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:VOUT3SOUrce

Arguments Power<x> is the number of a power efficiency measurement. This is the

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer4:EFFICIENCY:VOUT2SOUrce CH5 sets the source for the output

2 voltage efficiency measurement of power measurement 4 to Channel 5.
POWer:POWer1:EFFICIENCY:VOUT2SOUrce? might return CH3, indicating that
the source for the output 2 voltage efficiency measurement of power measurement
1 is Channel 3.

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:VOUT3SOUrce
This command sets or queries the output 3 voltage source for the power Efficiency
measurement of the specified power measurement number.

2-1032 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:VOUT3SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:VOUT3SOUrce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:VOUT1SOUrce

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:VOUT2SOUrce

Arguments Power<x> is the number of a power efficiency measurement. This is the

equivalent of the number shown on the power measurement badge in the UI.
CH<x> = A channel specifier; <x> is 1 through 8 and is limited by the number
of FlexChannels in your instrument.
MATH<x> = A math waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer4:EFFICIENCY:VOUT3SOUrce REF7 sets the source for the

output 3 voltage efficiency measurement of power measurement 4 to Reference
waveform 7.
POWer:POWer1:EFFICIENCY:VOUT3SOUrce? might return CH5, indicating that
the source for the output 3 voltage efficiency measurement of power measurement
1 is Channel 5.

POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:VSOUrce
This command sets or queries the voltage source for the power Efficiency
measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:VSOUrce
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:VSOUrce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:ISOUrce

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1033

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments Power<x> is the number of a power efficiency measurement. This is the

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer2:EFFICIENCY:VSOUrce CH4 sets the input voltage source for

power Efficiency measurement 2 to Channel 4.
POWer:POWer1:EFFICIENCY:VSOUrce? might return CH3, indicating that the
input voltage source for power Efficiency measurement 1 is Channel 3.

POWer:POWer<x>:FREQUENCY:EDGe
This command sets or queries the edge type for frequency measurement of the
specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:FREQUENCY:EDGe {RISE|FALL}

POWer:POWer<x>:FREQUENCY:EDGe?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:FREQUENCY:INPUTSOurce

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the power measurement badge on the UI.

Examples POWer:POWer1:FREQUENCY:EDGe FALL sets the edge type as fall for the
frequency measurement.

POWer:POWer<x>:FREQUENCY:INPUTSOurce
This command sets or queries the input source for frequency measurement of the
specified power measurement number.

2-1034 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:FREQUENCY:INPUTSOurce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:FREQUENCY:INPUTSOurce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:FREQUENCY:EDGe

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:FREQUENCY:INPUTSOurce REF1 sets the input source for

frequency measurement as REF1.

POWer:POWer<x>:GATing
This command sets or queries the gating type for the specified power measurement
number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:GATing {NONE|CURSOR|SCREEN|LOGIC}

POWer:POWer<x>:GATing?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown on a power measurement badge in the UI.
NONE makes measurement across the entire waveform record.

CURSOR makes measurements on that portion of the waveform between the

cursors. Selecting Cursors opens cursors on the measurement source. Set the
cursors so that the waveform area of interest is in between the cursors.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1035

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SCREEN takes measurements on that portion of the waveform shown in the

display. When Zoom is on, the display is the zoom window.
LOGIC takes measurements only when the logical state of a specified waveform is
true.

Examples POWer:POWer1:GATing CURSOR sets the gating type for the power
measurement badge 1 as Cursor.
POWer:POWer2:GATing? might return SCREEN indicating the configured
gating type for the power measurement badge 2.

POWer:POWer<x>:GATing:GLOBal
This command sets or queries the gating settings for the specified power
measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:GATing:GLOBal {ON|OFF|1|0}

POWer:POWer<x>:GATing:GLOBal?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown on a power measurement badge in the UI.
1 selects the gating settings as Global.

ON selects the gating settings as Global.

0 selects the gating settings as Local.

OFF selects the gating settings as Local.

Examples POWer:POWer1:GATing:GLOBal 1 selects the gating settings as Global for the

power measurement badge 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:CLASs
This command sets or queries the class type for the harmonics measurement
in the specified power measurement number. The power measurement number
is specified by x.

2-1036 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:CLASs {CLASSA | CLASSB | CLASSC |

CLASSD}
POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:CLASs?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:STANDard

Examples POWer:POWer1:HARMONICS:CLASs CLASSB sets the class type for harmonics

measurement as CLASSB.

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:CLFile
This command sets or queries the custom limits file path for the harmonics
measurement. The power measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:CLFile <QString>

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:CLFile?

Arguments <QString> specifies the custom limits file path that can be loaded when the
harmonics standard type selected is CUSTom.

Examples POWer:POWer1:HARMONICS:CLFile
"C:/Applications/Power/Harmonics
Limits/userdefineslimits.csv" specifies the custom limits file path.

POWer:POWer1:HARMONICS:CLFile? might
return :POWer:POWer1:HARMONICS:CLFile
"C:/Applications/Power/Harmonics
Limits/userdefineslimits.csv", indicating the custom limits file path.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1037

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:CMEThod
This command sets or queries the fundamental current method for the harmonics
measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:CMEThod {RATed | MEASured}

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:CMEThod?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:STANDard

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown on a power measurement badge in the UI.
RATed: select to use the standard input current values in the measurement.

MEASured: select to use the measured the input current values in the measurement.

Examples POWer:POWer1:HARMONICS:CMEThod RATed sets the current method for

harmonics measurement as rated.

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:FUNDCURRent
This command sets or queries the fundamental current value for the harmonics
measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:FUNDCURRent <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:FUNDCURRent?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:CLASs

2-1038 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown on a power measurement badge in the UI.
<NR1> ranges from 0 to 16.

Examples POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:FUNDCURRent 1.5 sets the fundamental

current for the harmonics measurement as 1.5.

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:HORDer
This command sets or queries the order value for the harmonics measurement of
the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:HORDer <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:HORDer?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown on a power measurement badge in the UI.
<NR1> ranges from 40 to 100.

Examples POWer:POWer1:HARMONICS:HORDer 70 sets the order value for the harmonics

measurement as 70.

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:HSOURce
This command sets or queries the source type for the harmonics measurement
of the specified power measurement number. The power measurement number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:HSOURce {CURRent | VOLTage}

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:HSOURce?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1039

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:STANDard

Examples POWer:POWer1:HARMONICS:HSOURce CURRent sets the source as current for

the harmonics measurement.

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:IPOWer
This command sets or queries the input power value for the harmonics
measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:IPOWer <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:IPOWer?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:CLASs

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown on a power measurement badge in the UI.
<NR1> ranges from 0 to 600.

Examples POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:IPOWer 150 sets the input power for the

harmonics measurement as 150.

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:ISOURce
This command sets or queries the current source for SOA measurement of the
specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:ISOURce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:ISOURce?

2-1040 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:HARMONICS:ISOURce CH2 sets the current source for

harmonics measurement as channel 2.

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:LINEFREQUEncy
This command sets or queries the value for the line frequency for the Harmonics
measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:LINEFREQUEncy {Auto|FIFTyhz|SIXTyhz

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:LINEFREQUEncy

Arguments POWer<x> is the Power measurement identifier number.

Auto automatically detects and sets the line frequency value.

FIFTyhz sets the line frequency value to 50 Hz.

SIXTyhz sets the line frequency value to 60 Hz.

THREESIXTyhz sets the line frequency value to 360 Hz.

FOURHUNDREdhz sets the line frequency value to 400 Hz.

SIXFIFTyhz sets the line frequency value to 650 Hz.

EIGHTHUNDREdhz sets the line frequency value to 800 Hz.

CUSTom sets the line frequency value to Custom. The default value for custom is
100 Hz. Use the POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:LINEFREQUEncy command
to set a custom line frequency value.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1041

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples POWer:POWer3:HARMONICS:LINEFREQUEncy FIFTyhz sets the line

frequency value for the Harmonics power measurement 3 to 50 Hz.
POWer:POWer1:HARMONICS:LINEFREQUEncy? might return
POWer:POWer1:HARMONICS:LINEFREQUEncy CUSTom, indicating that the line
frequency setting for Harmonics power measurement 1 is a custom value.

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:ODDEVen
This command sets or queries the harmonics value analysis format of the specified
power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:ODDEVen {ALL | ODD | EVEN}

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:ODDEVen?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown on a power measurement badge in the UI.
ALL to display all harmonics values

ODD to display only the odd values of harmonics

EVEN to display only the even values of harmonics

Examples POWer:POWer3:HARMONICS:ODDEVen ALL sets the harmonics value analysis

format to display all result values for harmonics measurement 3.

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:PFACtor
This command sets or queries the value of power factor for the harmonics
measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

2-1042 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:PFACtor <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:PFACtor?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:CLASs

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown on a power measurement badge in the UI.
<NR1> ranges from 0 to 1.

Examples POWer:POWer2:HARMONICS:PFACtor 0.7 sets the power factor as 0.7 for

harmonics measurement 2.

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:POWERRating
This command sets or queries the power level for the harmonics measurement
of the specified power measurement number. The power measurement number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:POWERRating {HIGH | LOW}

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:POWERRating?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:STANDard

Examples POWer:POWer1:HARMONICS:POWERRating HIGH sets the power level as high

for harmonics measurement 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:RCURRent
This command sets or queries the rated current for the harmonics measurement of
the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1043

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:RCURRent <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:RCURRent?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:CMEThod

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown on a power measurement badge in the UI.
<NR1> ranges from 0 to 100

Examples POWer:POWer2:HARMONICS:RCURRent 1.5 sets the rated current as 1.5 for

harmonics measurement 2.

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:STANDard
This command sets or queries the test mode for harmonics measurement of the
specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:STANDard {NONe |IEC |MIL |AM14

|DO160 |CUSTOM}
POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:STANDard?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown on a power measurement badge in the UI.
NONe = No standard

IEC = IEC 61000-3-2 standard

MIL = MIL-STD-1399 standard

AM14 = AM14 standard

DO160 = DO160 standard

CUSTOM = CUSTOM standard

2-1044 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples POWer:POWer3:HARMONICS:STANDard AM14 sets the test mode for harmonics

measurement as AM14 for harmonics measurement 3.

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:STARTFREQUEncy
This command sets or queries the value for the start frequency for the Harmonics
measurement. in the range of 1 Hz to 1 GHz.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:STARTFREQUEncy <NR2>

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:STARTFREQUEncy?

Arguments POWer<x> is the Power measurement.

<NR2> sets the starting frequency, in hertz.

Examples POWer:POWer1:HARMONICS:STARTFREQUEncy 1000 sets the Harmonics

measurement start frequency to 1 kHz for power measurement 1.
POWer:POWer4:HARMONICS:STARTFREQUEncy? might return
POWer:POWer4:HARMONICS:STARTFREQUEncy 60. indicating that the start
frequency for Harmonics power measurement 4 is 60 Hz.

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:UNITs
This command sets or queries the harmonics results units of the specified power
measurement number. The power measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:UNITs {LOG | LINear}

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:UNITs?

Examples POWer:POWer1:HARMONICS:UNITs LOG sets the harmonics results units as

logarithmic for harmonics measurement 1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1045

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:VSOURce
This command sets or queries the voltage source for SOA measurement of the
specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:VSOURce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:VSOURce?

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer4:HARMONICS:VSOURce CH1 sets the voltage source for

harmonics measurement 4 as channel 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:AMP<x>Val
Sets or queries the signal generator amplitude setting of the specified profile step,
for the specified Impedance measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-PWR (6 Series MSO
instrument).

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:AMP<x>Val <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:AMP<x>Val?

Arguments POWer<x> is the number of the Impedance power measurement.

AMP<x> specifies the number of the profile step. The valid range is 1 to 10.

2-1046 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

<NR3> sets the generator output amplitude for the specified profile step, in the
range –100 V to 100 V.

Examples POWer:Power2:IMPEDANCE:AMP1Val 35 sets the generator output amplitude

of profile step 1 to 35 volts, for impedance measurement 2.
POWer:Power3:IMPEDANCE:AMP2Val? might return 200.0000E-3, indicating
that the signal generator output amplitude is set to 200 mV for profile step 2,
for impedance measurement 3.

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:AMPMode
Sets or queries the power amplitude mode for the Impedance measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-PWR (6 Series MSO
instrument).

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:AMPMode {CONSTant|PROFile}

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:AMPMode?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:AMP<x>Val

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:FREQ<x>Val

Arguments POWer<x> is the number of the Impedance power measurement.

CONSTant sets the generator to output a constant level signal.

PROFile uses related commands to set the generator output signal profile (Start
frequency, Stop frequency, and Amplitude for each profile step).

Examples POWer:POWer3:Impedance:AMPMode PROFile sets the Impedance

measurement 3 amplitude mode to Profile.
POWer:POWer1:Impedance:AMPMode? might return CONSTANT, indicating
that the Impedance measurement 1 amplitude mode is set to Constant.

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:ANALYSISMethod
This command sets or queries the Analysis Method for Impedance measurements.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1047

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:ANALYSISMethod {SV|FFT}

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:ANALYSISMethod?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
SV sets the Analysis Method as Spectrum View.

FFT sets the Analysis Method as FFT.

Examples POWer:POWer1:IMPEDANCE:ANALYSISMethod SV sets the Analysis Method

as Spectrum View for power measurement 1.
POWer:POWer1:IMPEDANCE:ANALYSISMethod? might return
:POWer:POWer1:IMPEDANCE:ANALYSISMethod SV, indicating that the
Analysis Method is Spectrum View.

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:AUTORbw
This command enables Auto RBW computation.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:AUTORbw {True|False}

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:AUTORbw?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
True enables Auto RBW computation.

False disables Auto RBW computation.

Examples POWer:POWer1:IMPEDANCE:AUTORbw true enables Auto RBW computation.

POWer:POWer1:IMPEDANCE:AUTORbw? might return

:POWer:POWer1:IMPEDANCE:AUTORbw true, indicating that Auto
RBW computation is enabled.

2-1048 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:CONNECTSTATus? (Query Only)

Queries the instrument's connection status to the external generator, for the
specified Impedance measurement. The Impedance measurement generator IP
address (for external generators) is set with POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:
GENIPADDress.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-PWR (6 Series MSO
instrument).

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:CONNECTSTATus?

Arguments POWer<x> is the number of the Impedance power measurement.

Examples POWer:POWer1:IMPEDANCE:CONNECTSTATus? might return FAILURE,

indicating that the instrument could not connect to the external generator at the
specified IP address.

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:CONSTAMPlitude
Sets or queries the constant amplitude value for the specified Impedance
measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-PWR (6 Series MSO
instrument).

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:CONSTAMPlitude <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:CONSTAMPlitude?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1049

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments POWer<x> is the number of the Impedance power measurement.

<NR3> specifies the constant amplitude value, in the range of –100 V to 100 V.

Examples POWer:POWer3:IMPEDANCE:CONSTAMPlitude 20 sets the constant amplitude

value for Impedance power measurement 3 to 20 volts.
POWer:POWer2:IMPEDANCE:CONSTAMPlitude? might return 100.0000,
indicating the constant amplitude setting for Impedance power measurement
2 is 100`Hz.

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:FREQ<x>Val
Sets or queries the signal generator start frequency of the specified profile step, for
the specified Impedance measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-PWR (6 Series MSO
instrument).

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:FREQ<x>Val <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:FREQ<x>Val?

Arguments POWer<x> is the number of the Impedance power measurement.

FREQ<x> specifies the number of the profile step. The valid range is 1 to 10.

<NR3> sets the start frequency, in the range of 10 Hz to 50 MHz, for the specified
profile step. You can only set the starting frequency for each profile step; the stop
frequency is automatically set to same value as the start frequency of the next
profile step. For example, if Step one is set to 1`MHz, and Step two is set to
2`MHz, then the Step one stop frequency is 2`MHz.

Examples POWer:POWer5:IMPEDANCE:FREQ3Val 1e3 sets the start frequency of profile

step 3 to 1 kHz, for impedance measurement 5.
POWer:POWer8:IMPEDANCE:FREQ2Val? might return 2.0000E+6, indicating
that the start frequency of profile step 2 is 2`MHz, for impedance measurement 8.

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:GENerator
Sets or queries the generator source for the Impedance power measurement.

2-1050 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-PWR (6 Series MSO
instrument).

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:GENerator {INTernal|EXTernal}

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:GENerator?

Arguments POWer<x> is the number of the Impedance power measurement.

INTernal sets the internal generator as the source for the Impedance power
measurement.
EXTernal sets the external generator as the source for the Impedance power
measurement. Supported external generators are the Tektronix AFG31000 and
AFG3000 series.

Examples POWer:POWer1:Impedance:GENerator Internal sets the internal generator

as the source for the Impedance measurement.
POWer:POWer7:Impedance:GENerator? might return EXTERNAL, indicating
that the Impedance measurement 7 is set to use an external generator.

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:GENIPADDress
Sets or queries the external generator IP Address associated with the specified
Impedance measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-PWR (6 Series MSO
instrument).

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:GENIPADDress <String>

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:GENIPADDress?

Arguments POWer<x> is the number of the Impedance power measurement.<string> is

the IP address of the generator.

Examples POWer:POWer4:IMPEDANCE:GENIPADDress 164.32.1.5 sets the IP address

of the external generator to 164.32.1.5 for the Impedance power measurement 4.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1051

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer2:IMPEDANCE:GENIPADDress? might return "", indicating

that there is no address set for the external generator associated with Impedance
power measurement 2.

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:IMPEDANCE
Sets or queries the output impedance of the generator for the specified Impedance
power measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-PWR (6 Series MSO
instrument).

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:IMPEDANCE {FIFTy|HIGHZ}

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:IMPEDANCE?

Arguments POWer<x> is the number of the Impedance power measurement.

FIFTy sets the measurement impedance to 50`Ω.

HIGHZ sets the measurement impedance to 1`MΩ.

Examples POWer:POWer1:IMPEDANCE:IMPEDANCE FIFTY sets the impedance value for

Impedance power measurement 1 to 50 Ω.
POWer:POWer2:IMPEDANCE:IMPEDANCE? might return HIGHZ, indicating that
the impedance value for Impedance power measurement 2 is 1`MΩ

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:INPUTSOurce
Sets or queries the source for the Impedance input measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-PWR (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:INPUTSOurce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:INPUTSOurce?

2-1052 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments POWer<x> is the number of the Impedance power measurement.

CH<x> specifies the instrument input channel number.

MATH<x> specifies the instrument math waveform number.

REF<x> specifies the instrument reference waveform number.

Examples POWer:POWer1:IMPEDANCE:INPUTSOurce MATH5 sets the signal source for

the input Impedance power measurement 2 to Math waveform 5.
POWer:POWer2:IMPEDANCE:INPUTSOurce? might return CH3, indicating that
the signal source for the input Impedance power measurement 2 is channel 3.

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:OUTPUTSOurce
Sets or queries the source for the Impedance output measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-PWR (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:OUTPUTSOurce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:OUTPUTSOurce?

Arguments POWer<x> is the number of the Impedance power measurement.

CH<x> specifies the instrument input channel number.

MATH<x> specifies the instrument math waveform number.

REF<x> specifies the instrument reference waveform number.

Examples POWer:POWer1:IMPEDANCE:OUTPUTSOurce REF3 sets the signal source for

the output Impedance power measurement 1 to Reference waveform 3.
POWer:POWer2:IMPEDANCE:OUTPUTSOurce? might return CH3, indicating that
the signal source for the output Impedance power measurement 2 is channel 3.

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:PPD
Sets or queries the value for points per decade for the specified Impedance
measurement.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1053

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-PWR (6 Series MSO
instrument).

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:PPD <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:PPD?

Arguments POWer<x> is the number of the Impedance power measurement.

<NR1> specifies the number of frequency points between the start and stop
frequency in terms of log scale, in the range of 10 to 100 points.

Examples POWer:POWer1:IMPEDANCE:PPD 20 sets the constant amplitude value for

Impedance power measurement 1 to 20 points per decade.
POWer:POWer2:IMPEDANCE:PPD? might return 30, indicating that the points
per decade setting for Impedance power measurement 2 is 30 points per decade.

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:STARTFREQuency
Sets or queries the value for the start frequency of the specified Impedance
measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-PWR (6 Series MSO
instrument).

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:STARTFREQuency <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:STARTFREQuency?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:STOPFREQuency

Arguments POWer<x> is the number of the Impedance power measurement.

<NR3> is a floating point number representing the start frequency, in the range
of 10 Hz to 50 MHz.

Examples POWer:POWer1:IMPEDANCE:STARTFREQuency 1.500e3 sets the start

frequency for Impedance power measurement 1 to 1.5 kHz.

2-1054 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer2:IMPEDANCE:STARTFREQuency? might return 100.0000,

indicating the start frequency for Impedance power measurement 2 is 100 Hz.

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:STOPFREQuency
Sets or queries the value of the specified Impedance measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-PWR (6 Series MSO
instrument).

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:STOPFREQuency <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:STOPFREQuency?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:STARTFREQuency

Arguments POWer<x> is the number of the Impedance power measurement.

<NR3> specifies the start frequency, in the range of 10 Hz to 50 MHz.

Examples POWer:POWer1:IMPEDANCE:STOPFREQuency 180 sets the stop frequency for

Impedance power measurement 1 to 180 Hz.
POWer:POWer2:IMPEDANCE:STARTFREQuency? might return 100.0000,
indicating the stop frequency for Impedance power measurement 2 is 100`Hz.

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:TESTCONNection (No Query Form)

This command tests the connection with the external instrument for the specified
Impedance measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-PWR (6 Series MSO
instrument).

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:TESTCONNection {EXECute}

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1055

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:CONNECTSTATus?

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:GENIPADDress

Arguments POWer<x> is the number of the Impedance power measurement.

EXECute runs the test connection function.

Examples POWer:POWer3:PSRR:TESTCONNection EXECute runs the test connection

function for the Impedance power measurement 3.

POWer:POWer<x>:INDUCTANCE:EDGESource
This command sets or queries the edge source for the power inductance
measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:INDUCTANCE:EDGESource {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:INDUCTANCE:EDGESource?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:INDUCTANCE:ISOUrce

POWer:POWer<x>:INDUCTANCE:VSOURce

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:HARMONICS:INDUCTANCE:EDGESource CH2 sets the signal

edge source for inductance measurement 1 as Channel 2.
POWer:POWer3:HARMONICS:INDUCTANCE:EDGESource? might return CH4,
indicating that the signal edge source for inductance measurement 3 is Channel 4.

2-1056 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:INDUCTANCE:ISOUrce
This command sets or queries the current signal source for the inductance
measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:INDUCTANCE:ISOUrce
POWer:POWer<x>:INDUCTANCE:ISOUrce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:INDUCTANCE:EDGESource

POWer:POWer<x>:INDUCTANCE:VSOURce

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer7:HARMONICS:INDUCTANCE:ISource CH3 sets the current

signal source for inductance measurement 7 as Channel 3.
POWer:POWer3:HARMONICS:INDUCTANCE:ISource? might return CH4,
indicating that the current signal source for inductance measurement 3 is
Channel 4.

POWer:POWer<x>:INDUCTANCE:VSOURce
This command sets or queries the voltage source for inductance measurement of
the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1057

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:INDUCTANCE:VSOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:INDUCTANCE:VSOURce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:INDUCTANCE:EDGESource

POWer:POWer<x>:INDUCTANCE:ISOUrce

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer7:HARMONICS:INDUCTANCE:VSource CH3 sets the voltage

signal source for inductance measurement 7 as Channel 3.
POWer:POWer1:HARMONICS:INDUCTANCE:VSource? might return MATH2,
indicating that the voltage signal source for inductance measurement 1 is Math
waveform 2.

POWer:POWer<x>:INPUTCAP:ISOURce
This command sets or queries the inrush current input source of the specified
Input Capacitance measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:INPUTCAP:ISOURce {CH<x>|REF<x>|MATH<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:INPUTCAP:ISOURce?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown on a power measurement badge in the UI.
CH<x> is the channel specifier in the range of 1 through 8 and is limited by the
number of instrument input channels.
REF<x> is the Reference waveform specifier ≥1. This is the equivalent of the
number shown on a Reference waveform badge in the UI.

2-1058 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MATH<x> is the Math waveform specifier ≥1. This is the equivalent of the number
shown on a Math waveform badge in the UI.

Examples POWer:POWer1:INRUSHcurrent:ISOURce REF3 sets the current source of

Input Capacitance 1 to Reference waveform 3.
POWer:POWer2:INRUSHcurrent:ISOURce? might return
POWer:POWer2:INRUSHcurrent:ISOURce CH6, indicating that the current
source of the Input Capacitance measurement 2 is Channel 6.

POWer:POWer<x>:INPUTCAP:PEAKCURRent
This command sets or queries the peak current value of the specified Input
Capacitance measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:INPUTCAP:PEAKCURRent <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:INPUTCAP:PEAKCURRent?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown on a power measurement badge in the UI.
<NR3> is a floating point number that represents the peak current value, in amps,
in the range -100 A to 100 A.

Examples POWer:POWer4:INPUTCAP:PEAKCURRent 12.5 sets the peak current value

of Input Capacitance measurement 4 to 12.5 amps.
POWer:POWer2:INPUTCAP:PEAKCURRent? might return
POWer:POWer2:INPUTCAP:PEAKCURRent —85, indicating that the
peak current setting of Input Capacitance measurement 2 is –85 amps.

POWer:POWer<x>:INPUTCAP:PEAKVOLTage
This command sets or queries the peak voltage value of the specified Input
Capacitance measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1059

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:INPUTCAP:PEAKVOLTage <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:INPUTCAP:PEAKVOLTage?

Examples POWer:POWer4:INPUTCAP:PEAKVOLTage 122.5 sets the peak voltage value

of Input Capacitance measurement 4 to 122.5 volts.
POWer:POWer2:INPUTCAP:PEAKVOLTage? might return
POWer:POWer2:INPUTCAP:PEAKVOLTage 955, indicating that the
peak voltage setting of Input Capacitance measurement 2 to 955 volts.

POWer:POWer<x>:INPUTCAP:VSOURce
This command sets or queries the input voltage source of the specified Input
Capacitance measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:INPUTCAP:VSOURce {CH<x>|REF<x>|MATH<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:INPUTCAP:VSOURce?

2-1060 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples POWer:POWer1:INPUTCAP:VSOURce CH2 sets the voltage source of the input

capacitance measurement 1 to Reference Channel 2.
POWer:POWer1:INPUTCAP:VSOURce? might return
POWer:POWer2:INPUTCAP:VSOURce MATH6, indicating that the voltage source
of Input Capacitance measurement 2 is Math waveform 6.

POWer:POWer<x>:INRUSHcurrent:INPUTSOurce
This command sets or returns the input source of the specified Inrush Current
measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:INRUSHcurrent:INPUTSOurce
POWer:POWer<x>:INRUSHcurrent:INPUTSOurce?

Examples POWer:POWer3:INRUSHcurrent:INPUTSOurce MATH1 sets the input source

of Inrush Current measurement 3 to Math waveform 1.
POWer:POWer2:INRUSHcurrent:INPUTSOurce? might return
POWer:POWer2:INRUSHcurrent:INPUTSOurce CH7, indicating that the input
source of Inrush Current measurement 2 is Channel 7.

POWer:POWer<x>:INRUSHcurrent:PEAKCURRent
This command sets or returns the peak current value of the specified Inrush
Current measurement.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1061

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:INRUSHcurrent:PEAKCURRent <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:INRUSHcurrent:PEAKCURRent?

Examples POWer:POWer4:INRUSHcurrent:PEAKCURRent 12.5 sets the peak current

value of Inrush Current measurement 4 to 12.5 amps.
POWer:POWer2:INRUSHcurrent:PEAKCURRent? might return
POWer:POWer2:INRUSHcurrent:PEAKCURRent 75, indicating that the peak
current setting of Inrush Current measurement 2 is 75 amps.

POWer:POWer<x>:IVSINTEGRALV:ISOURce
This command sets or queries the current source for I vs Integral V measurement
of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:IVSINTEGRALV:ISOURce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:IVSINTEGRALV:ISOURce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:IVSINTEGRALV:VSOURce

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the power measurement badge on the UI.
CH<x> sets the channel specifier; <x> is 1 through 8 and is limited by the number
of FlexChannels in your instrument.
MATH<x> = A math waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

2-1062 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:IVSINTEGRALV:ISOURce CH7 sets power measurement 1 to

use Channel 7 as the current signal source for the measurement.
POWer:POWer2:IVSINTEGRALV:ISOURce? might return CH1, indicating that
channel 1 is the current signal source for power measurement number 2.

POWer:POWer<x>:IVSINTEGRALV:VSOURce
This command sets or queries the voltage source for I vs Integral V measurement
of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:IVSINTEGRALV:VSOURce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:IVSINTEGRALV:VSOURce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:IVSINTEGRALV:ISOURce

Examples POWer:POWer2:IVSINTEGRALV:VSOURce CH1 sets I vs Integral V power

measurement 2 to use Channel 1 as the voltage signal source for the measurement.
POWer:POWer4:IVSINTEGRALV:VSOURce? might return CH1, indicating that
channel 1 is the voltage source for I vs Integral V power measurement number 4.

POWer:POWer<x>:LABel
This command sets or queries the label for the specified power measurement. As
the label can contain non 7-bit ASCII text, it is stored in Percent Encoding format.
The power measurement badge is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1063

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:LABel <QString>

POWer:POWer<x>:LABel?

Examples POWer:POWer1:LABel "NewMeasurement" sets the custom measurement

name for the measurement in Power 1 badge as New Measurement.

POWer:POWer<x>:LINERIPPLE:INPUTSOurce
This command sets or queries the input source for line ripple measurement of the
specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:LINERIPPLE:INPUTSOurce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:LINERIPPLE:INPUTSOurce?

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:LINERIPPLE:INPUTSOurce CH1 sets channel 1 as the input

source for line ripple measurement of power measurement badge Power 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:LINERIPPLE:LFREQuency
This command sets or queries the frequency present for line ripple measurement
of the specified power measurement number. The power measurement number
is specified by x.

2-1064 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:LINERIPPLE:LFREQuency {FIFty | SIXty |

FOURHundred}
POWer:POWer<x>:LINERIPPLE:LFREQuency?

Examples POWer:POWer2:LINERIPPLE:LFREQuency FIFTY sets the frequency present

for line ripple measurement as 50 Hz for power measurement 2.

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGNETICLOSS:ISOURce
This command sets or queries the current source for the magnetic loss
measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:MAGNETICLOSS:ISOURce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGNETICLOSS:ISOURce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:MAGNETICLOSS:VSOURce

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:MAGNETICLOSS:ISOURce CH7 sets power measurement 1 to

use Channel 7 as the current signal source for the magnetic loss measurement.
POWer:POWer2:MAGNETICLOSS:ISOURce? might return CH1, indicating that
channel 1 is the current signal source for the magnetic loss measurement number 2.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1065

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGNETICLOSS:VSOURce
This command sets or queries the voltage source for magnetic measurement of the
specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:MAGNETICLOSS:VSOURce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGNETICLOSS:VSOURce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:MAGNETICLOSS:ISOURce

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer2:MAGNETICLOSS:VSOURce CH4 sets power measurement 2 to

use Channel 4 as the voltage signal source for the magnetic loss measurement.
POWer:POWer1:MAGNETICLOSS:VSOURce? might return CH1, indicating that
channel 1 is the voltage source for the magnetic loss measurement number 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:AREAofcrosssection
This command sets or queries the coil cross section area for magnetic
measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:AREAofcrosssection <NR2>

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:AREAofcrosssection?

2-1066 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:UNITs

Arguments Power<x> is the magnetic property power measurement number. This is the
equivalent of the number shown in the power measurement badge on the UI.
<NR2> is the cross section area in square meters, in the range of 1 nanometer2
to 1 M2.

Examples POWer:POWer2:MAGPROPERTY:AREAofcrosssection .005 sets the primary

winding cross section area to 5 for power measurement 2.
POWer:POWer4:MAGPROPERTY:AREAofcrosssection? might return
10.54E-3, indicating that the coil cross section area for power measurement 4 is
0.01054.

NOTE. The coil Cross Section Area unit depends on the setting of the Units value
(seePOWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:UNITs). The command returns the
same numeric value regardless of the units setting.

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:EDGESOURce
This command sets or queries the edge source type for the magnetic property
measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:EDGESOURce {Current | VOLTAGE}

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:EDGESOURce?

Arguments Power<x> is the magnetic property power measurement number. This is the
equivalent of the number shown on a power measurement badge in the UI.
Current sets the measurement to use the primary voltage source as the signal
edge for the magnetic property measurement.
VOLTAGE sets the measurement to use the primary current source as the signal
edge for the magnetic property measurement.

Examples POWer:POWer1:MAGPROPERTY:EDGESource VOLTAGE sets the signal edge

source for power measurement 1 to use the primary voltage source.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1067

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer3:MAGPROPERTY:EDGESource? might return CURRENT,

indicating that the signal edge source for power measurement 3 is the primary
current source.

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:ISOURce
This command sets or queries the current source for the magnetic property
measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:ISOURce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:ISOURce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:VSOURce

Arguments Power<x> is the magnetic property power measurement number. This is the
equivalent of the number shown in the power measurement badge on the UI.
CH<x> sets the channel specifier; <x> is 1 through 8 and is limited by the number
of FlexChannels in your instrument.
MATH<x> = A math waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:MAGPROPERTY:ISOURce CH4 sets power measurement 1 to

use channel 4 as the primary winding current source for the magnetic power
measurement.
POWer:POWer2:MAGPROPERTY:ISOURce? might return CH1, indicating
that channel 1 is the primary winding current source for the magnetic power
measurement number 2.

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:LENgth
This command sets or queries the conductor length of the primary winding for
magnetic measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

2-1068 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:LENgth <NR2>

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:LENgth?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:UNITs

Arguments Power<x> is the magnetic property power measurement number. This is the
equivalent of the number shown in the power measurement badge on the UI.
<NR2> is the magnetic length, in the range of 1.00E-09 through 1,000,000.

Examples POWer:POWer2:MAGPROPERTY:LENgth 2.5 sets the primary winding length to

2.5 for power measurement 2.
POWer:POWer5:MAGPROPERTY:LENgth? might return 10.54E-3, indicating
that the primary winding length for power measurement 5 is 0.01054.

NOTE. The Magnetic Length unit depends on the setting of the Units value
(seePOWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:UNITs). The command returns the
same numeric value regardless of the units setting.

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:PRIMARYTURNs
This command sets or queries the number of primary turns for magnetic
measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:PRIMARYTURNs <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:PRIMARYTURNs?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:LENgth

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:AREAofcrosssection

Arguments Power<x> is the magnetic property power measurement number. This is the
equivalent of the number shown in the power measurement badge on the UI.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1069

Commands listed in alphabetical order

<NR1> is the integer number of turns in the primary winding, in the range of 1
to 1 M.

Examples POWer:POWer2:MAGPROPERTY:PRIMARYTURNs 150 sets the primary winding

turn count to 150 for power measurement 2.
POWer:POWer5:MAGPROPERTY:PRIMARYTURNs? might return 50, indicating
that the primary winding has 50 turns for power measurement 5.

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC1SOURce
This command sets or queries the current source channel for secondary winding 1
for magnetic measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC1SOURce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC1SOURce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC2SOURce

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC3SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC4SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC5SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC6SOURce

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer3:MAGPROPERTY:SEC1SOURce CH7 sets power measurement

number 3 to use channel 7 as the current source for measuring secondary winding
1.

2-1070 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer1:MAGPROPERTY:SEC1SOURce? might return CH3, indicating

that channel 3 is the source for measuring secondary winding 1 of magnetic power
measurement number 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC1TURNs
This command sets or queries the number of turns of secondary winding 1 for
magnetic measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC1TURNs <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC1TURNs?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC2TURNs

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC3TURNs
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC4TURNs
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC5TURNs
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC6TURNs

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the power measurement badge on the UI.
<NR1> is the number of turns on the secondary winding, and ranges from 0
to 1,000,000.

Examples POWer:POWer3:MAGPROPERTY:SEC1TURNs 500 sets the number of turns on

secondary winding 1 to 500 for magnetic power measurement number 3.
POWer:POWer3:MAGPROPERTY:SEC1TURNs? might return 2500, indicating that
their are 2,500 turns on secondary winding 4 for magnetic power measurement
number 3.

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC2SOURce
This command sets or queries the current source for secondary winding2 for
magnetic measurement of the specified power measurement number.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1071

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC2SOURce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC2SOURce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC1SOURce

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC3SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC4SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC5SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC6SOURce

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:MAGPROPERTY:SEC2SOURce CH2 sets power measurement

number 1 to use channel 2 as the current source for measuring secondary winding
2.
POWer:POWer3:MAGPROPERTY:SEC2SOURce? might return MATH2, indicating
that math waveform 2 is the source for measuring secondary winding 2 of
magnetic power measurement number 3.

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC2TURNs
This command sets or queries the number of turns of secondary winding 2 for
magnetic measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

2-1072 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC2TURNs <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC2TURNs?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC1TURNs

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC3TURNs
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC4TURNs
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC5TURNs
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC6TURNs

Examples POWer:POWer1:MAGPROPERTY:SEC2TURNs 50 sets the number of turns on

secondary winding 2 to 50 for magnetic power measurement number 3.
POWer:POWer7:MAGPROPERTY:SEC2TURNs? might return 250, indicating that
their are 250 turns on secondary winding 2for magnetic power measurement
number 7.

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC3SOURce
This command sets or queries the current source channel for secondary winding 3
for magnetic measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC3SOURce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC3SOURce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC1SOURce

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC2SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC4SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC5SOURce

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1073

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC6SOURce

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:MAGPROPERTY:SEC3SOURce CH1 sets power measurement

number 1 to use channel 1 as the current source for measuring secondary winding
3.
POWer:POWer1:MAGPROPERTY:SEC3SOURce? might return CH1, indicating
that channel 1 is the source for measuring secondary winding 3 of magnetic power
measurement number 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC3TURNs
This command sets or queries the number of turns of secondary winding 3 for
magnetic measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC3TURNs <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC3TURNs?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC1TURNs

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC2TURNs
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC4TURNs
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC5TURNs
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC6TURNs

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the power measurement badge on the UI.

2-1074 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

<NR1> is the number of turns on the secondary winding, and ranges from 0
to 1,000,000.

Examples POWer:POWer1:MAGPROPERTY:SEC3TURNs 15 sets the number of turns on

secondary winding 3 to 15 for magnetic power measurement number 1.
POWer:POWer3:MAGPROPERTY:SEC3TURNs? might return 2500, indicating that
their are 2,500 turns on secondary winding 3 for magnetic power measurement
number 3.

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC4SOURce
This command sets or queries the current source for secondary winding 4 for
magnetic measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC4SOURce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC4SOURce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC1SOURce

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC2SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC3SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC5SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC6SOURce

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer3:MAGPROPERTY:SEC4SOURce CH7 sets power measurement

number 3 to use channel 7 as the current source for measuring secondary winding
4.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1075

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer12:MAGPROPERTY:SEC4SOURce? might return CH1, indicating

that Channel 1 is the source for measuring secondary winding 4 of magnetic
power measurement number 12.

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC4TURNs
This command sets or queries the number of turns of secondary winding 4 for
magnetic measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC4TURNs <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC4TURNs?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC1TURNs

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC2TURNs
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC3TURNs
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC5TURNs
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC6TURNs

Examples POWer:POWer4:MAGPROPERTY:SEC4TURNs 500 sets the number of turns on

secondary winding 4 to 500 for magnetic power measurement number 4.
POWer:POWer1:MAGPROPERTY:SEC4TURNs? might return 90, indicating that
their are 90 turns on secondary winding 4 for magnetic power measurement
number 3.

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC5SOURce
This command sets or queries the current source for secondary winding 5 for
magnetic measurement of the specified power measurement number.

2-1076 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC5SOURce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC5SOURce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC1SOURce

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC2SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC3SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC4SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC6SOURce

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer3:MAGPROPERTY:SEC5SOURce MATH1 sets power measurement

number 3 to use math waveform 1 as the current source for measuring secondary
winding 5.
POWer:POWer4:MAGPROPERTY:SEC5SOURce? might return CH2, indicating
that channel 2 is the source for measuring secondary winding 5 of magnetic power
measurement number 4.

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC5TURNs
This command sets or queries the number of turns of secondary winding 5 for
magnetic measurement of the specified power measurement badge.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1077

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC5TURNs <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC5TURNs?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC1TURNs

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC2TURNs
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC3TURNs
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC4TURNs
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC6TURNs

Examples POWer:POWer3:MAGPROPERTY:SEC5TURNs 250 sets the number of turns on

secondary winding 5 to 250 for magnetic power measurement number 3.
POWer:POWer1:MAGPROPERTY:SEC5TURNs? might return 150, indicating that
their are 150 turns on secondary winding 5for magnetic power measurement
number 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC6SOURce
This command sets or queries the current source for secondary winding 6 for
magnetic measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC6SOURce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC6SOURce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC1SOURce

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC2SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC3SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC4SOURce

2-1078 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC5SOURce

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer3:MAGPROPERTY:SEC6SOURce CH4 sets power measurement

number 3 to use channel 4 as the current source for measuring secondary winding
6.
POWer:POWer2:MAGPROPERTY:SEC6SOURce? might return CH4, indicating
that channel 4 is the source for measuring secondary winding 3 of magnetic power
measurement number 2.

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC6TURNs
This command sets or queries the number of turns of secondary winding 6 for
magnetic measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC6TURNs <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC6TURNs?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC1TURNs

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC2TURNs
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC3TURNs
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC4TURNs
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC5TURNs

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the power measurement badge on the UI.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1079

Commands listed in alphabetical order

<NR1> is the number of turns on the secondary winding, and ranges from 0
to 1,000,000.

Examples POWer:POWer8:MAGPROPERTY:SEC6TURNs 22 sets the number of turns on

secondary winding 6 to 22 for magnetic power measurement number 8.
POWer:POWer9:MAGPROPERTY:SEC6TURNs? might return 7000, indicating that
their are 7,000 turns on secondary winding 6 for magnetic power measurement
number 9.

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SECPhase
This command sets or returns the value for the phase difference between
secondary and primary voltage.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SECPhase <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SECPhase?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR3> sets the value for the phase difference between secondary and primary
voltage, in the range of -180 to 180 degrees.

Examples POWer:POWer1:MAGPROPERTY:SECPhase 180 sets the value for the phase

difference between secondary and primary voltage to 180 degrees.
POWer:POWer1:MAGPROPERTY:SECPhase? might return
:POWer:POWer1:MAGPROPERTY:SECPhase 180, indicating that the
value for the phase difference between secondary and primary voltage is 180
degrees.

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SECVolt
This command enables or disables secondary voltage input for measurement.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SECVolt {True|False}

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SECVolt?

2-1080 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the power measurement badge on the UI.
True enables secondary voltage source.

False disables secondary voltage source.

Examples POWer:POWer1:MAGPROPERTY:SECVolt true enables secondary voltage

source.
POWer:POWer1:MAGPROPERTY:SECVolt? might return
:POWer:POWer1:MAGPROPERTY:SECVolt true, indicating that the
secondary voltage source is enabled.

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SECWINDings
This command sets or queries the number of secondary windings for the magnetic
property measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SECWINDings
{None|ONE|TWO|THREE|FOUR|FIVE|SIX}
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SECWINDings?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC1SOURce

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC1TURNs
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC2SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC2TURNs
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC3SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC3TURNs
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC4SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC4TURNs
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC5SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC5TURNs
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC6SOURce

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1081

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:SEC6TURNs

Arguments Power<x> is the magnetic property power measurement number. This is the
equivalent of the number shown in the power measurement badge on the UI.
None, ONE, TWO, THREE, FOUR, FIVE, SIX sets the number of secondary windings
to the specified value.

Examples POWer:POWer2:MAGPROPERTY:SECWINDings 4 sets power measurement 2 to

use 4 secondary transformer windings.
POWer:POWer11:MAGPROPERTY:SECWINDings? might return FOUR, indicating
that there are four secondary transformer windings for power measurement 11.

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:UNITs
This command sets or queries the units for magnetic measurements of the
specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:UNITs {SI|CGS}

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:UNITs?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:AREAofcrosssection

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:LENgth

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the power measurement badge on the UI.
SI sets the measurement to International System of Units.

CGS sets the measurement to Gaussian units.

Examples POWer:POWer5:MAGPROPERTY:UNITs SI sets magnetic property measurement

5 to use SI units.
POWer:POWer1:MAGPROPERTY:UNITs? might return CGS, indicating that the
measurement unit for power measurement 1 is set to CGS.

2-1082 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:VSOURce
This command sets or queries the primary winding voltage source for the magnetic
measurement of the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:VSOURce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:VSOURce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:ISOURce

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:MAGPROPERTY:VSOURce CH4 sets power measurement 1 to

use channel 4 as the primary winding voltage source for the magnetic power
measurement.
POWer:POWer2:MAGPROPERTY:VSOURce? might return CH1, indicating
that channel 1 is the primary winding voltage source for the magnetic power
measurement number 2.

POWer:POWer<x>:NDUTYCYCLE:EDGEType
This command sets or queries the clock edge type for negative duty cycle
measurement in the specified power measurement number. The power
measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1083

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:NDUTYCYCLE:EDGEType {RISE | FALL | BOTH}

POWer:POWer<x>:NDUTYCYCLE:EDGEType?

Examples POWer:POWer1:NDUTYCYCLE:EDGEType RISE sets the clock edge type as rise

for the negative duty cycle measurement.

POWer:POWer<x>:NDUTYCYCLE:INPUTSOurce
This command sets or queries the input source for negative duty cycle
measurement in the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:NDUTYCYCLE:INPUTSOurce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:NDUTYCYCLE:INPUTSOurce?

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:NDUTYCYCLE:INPUTSOurce CH3 sets the input source for

negative duty cycle measurement as CH3 for the power measurement badge
Power 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:NPULSEWIDTH:INPUTSOurce
This command sets or queries the input source for negative pulse width
measurement in the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

2-1084 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:NPULSEWIDTH:INPUTSOurce
{CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}
POWer:POWer<x>:NPULSEWIDTH:INPUTSOurce?

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:NPULSEWIDTH:INPUTSOurce CH1 sets the input source for

negative pulse width measurement as channel 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:PDUTYCYCLE:EDGEType
This command sets or queries the clock edge type for positive duty cycle
measurement in the specified power measurement number. The power
measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:PDUTYCYCLE:EDGEType {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:PDUTYCYCLE:EDGEType?

Examples POWer:POWer1:PDUTYCYCLE:EDGEType BOTH sets the clock edge type as

both (rise and fall) for the positive duty cycle measurement.

POWer:POWer<x>:PDUTYCYCLE:INPUTSOurce
This command sets or queries the input source for positive duty cycle
measurement in the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1085

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:PDUTYCYCLE:INPUTSOurce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:PDUTYCYCLE:INPUTSOurce?

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:PDUTYCYCLE:INPUTSOurce CH4 sets the input source for

positive duty cycle measurement as channel 4.

POWer:POWer<x>:PERIOD:EDGe
This command sets or queries the edge type for period measurement in the
specified power measurement number. The power measurement number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:PERIOD:EDGe {RISE | FALL}

POWer:POWer<x>:PERIOD:EDGe?

Examples POWer:POWer1:PERIOD:EDGe RISE sets the edge type as rise for the period
measurement.

POWer:POWer<x>:PERIOD:INPUTSOurce
This command sets or queries the input source for period measurement in the
specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

2-1086 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:PERIOD:INPUTSOurce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:PERIOD:INPUTSOurce?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
CH<x> = A channel specifier; <x> is 1 through 8 and is limited by the number
of FlexChannels in your instrument.
MATH<x> = A math waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:PERIOD:INPUTSOurce CH6 sets the input source for period

measurement as channel 6.

POWer:POWer<x>:POWERQUALITY:CCYCles
This command sets or queries the calculate cycles over full cycles settings for the
specified power quality measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:POWERQUALITY:CCYCles {ON |OFF |1 |0}

POWer:POWer<x>:POWERQUALITY:CCYCles?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
1 selects the calculate cycles over full cycles.

ON selects the calculate cycles over full cycles.

0 deselects the calculate cycles over full cycles.

OFF deselects the calculate cycles over full cycles.

Examples POWer:POWer1:POWERQUALITY:CCYCles 1 selects the calculate cycles over

full cycles for the power measurement badge 1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1087

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:POWERQUALITY:FREFerence
This command sets or queries the frequency reference type for power quality
measurement in the specified power measurement number. The power
measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:POWERQUALITY:FREFerence {VOLTage | CURRent}

POWer:POWer<x>:POWERQUALITY:FREFerence?

Examples POWer:POWer1:POWERQUALITY:FREFerence CURRent sets the frequency

reference type for power quality measurement as current.

POWer:POWer<x>:POWERQUALITY:ISOURce
This command sets or queries the current source for power quality measurement
in the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:POWERQUALITY:ISOURce {CH<x> | MATH<x> |

REF<x>}
POWer:POWer<x>:POWERQUALITY:ISOURce?

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:POWERQUALITY:VSOURce CH2 sets the current source for

power quality measurement as channel 2.

2-1088 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:POWERQUALITY:STYPe
This command sets or queries the source type.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:POWERQUALITY:STYPe {AC|DC}

POWer:POWer<x>:POWERQUALITY:STYPe?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
AC sets the signal type as AC.

DC sets the signal type as DC.

Examples POWer:POWer1:POWERQUALITY:STYPe AC sets the signal type as AC for

power measurement 1.
POWer:POWer1:POWERQUALITY:STYPe? might return
:POWer:POWer1:POWERQUALITY:STYPe AC, indicating that the
signal type is AC.

POWer:POWer<x>:POWERQUALITY:VSOURce
This command sets or queries the voltage source for power quality measurement
in the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:POWERQUALITY:VSOURce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:POWERQUALITY:VSOURce?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1089

Commands listed in alphabetical order

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:POWERQUALITY:VSOURce CH1 sets the voltage source for

power quality measurement as channel 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:PPULSEWIDTH:INPUTSOurce
This command sets or queries the input source for positive pulse width
measurement in the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:PPULSEWIDTH:INPUTSOurce
{CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}
POWer:POWer<x>:PPULSEWIDTH:INPUTSOurce?

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:PPULSEWIDTH:INPUTSOurce CH5 sets channel 5 as the input

source for the positive pulse width measurement 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:PRESET (No Query Form)

This command runs a power preset action for the specified power measurement
number.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR, 6–PWR, or PS2.

Group Power

2-1090 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:PRESET {EXECute}

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
EXECute runs the power preset action.

Examples POWer:POWer5:PRESET Execute runs the power preset action for power
measurement 5.

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:AMP<x>Val
This command sets or queries the generator amplitude value of the specified
configuration step for the Power Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR) power
measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR or 6-PWR

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:AMP<x>Val <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:AMP<x>Val?

Examples POWer:POWer1:PSRR:AMP3Val 20 sets the generator output amplitude for

configuration step 3 to 20 volts, for power measurement 1.
POWer:POWer2:PSRR:AMP8Val? might return 60, indicating that the
generator output amplitude setting of configuration step 8 is 60 volts, for power
measurement 2.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1091

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:AMPMode
This command sets or queries the amplitude mode for the Power Supply Rejection
Ratio (PSRR) power measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR or 6-PWR

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:AMPMode {CONSTant|PROFile}

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:AMPMode?

Examples POWer:POWer1:PSRR:AMPMode CONSTant sets the amplitude mode to

Constant for power measurement 1.
POWer:POWer2:PSRR:AMPMode? might return PROFile, indicating that the
amplitude mode power measurement 2 is set to Profile.

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:ANALYSISMethod
This command sets or queries the Analysis Method for PSRR measurements.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:ANALYSISMethod {SV|FFT}

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:ANALYSISMethod?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
SV sets the Analysis Method as Spectrum View.

FFT sets the Analysis Method as FFT.

2-1092 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples POWer:POWer1:PSRR:ANALYSISMethod SV sets the Analysis Method as

Spectrum View for power measurement 1.
POWer:POWer1:PSRR:ANALYSISMethod? might return
:POWer:POWer1:PSRR:ANALYSISMethod SV, indicating that the
Analysis Method is Spectrum View.

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:AUTORbw
This command enables Auto RBW computation.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:AUTORbw {True|False}

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:AUTORbw?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
True enables Auto RBW computation.

False disables Auto RBW computation.

Examples POWer:POWer1:PSRR:AUTORbw true enables Auto RBW computation.

POWer:POWer1:PSRR:AUTORbw? might return

:POWer:POWer1:PSRR:AUTORbw true, indicating that Auto RBW
computation is enabled.

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:CONNECTSTATus? (Query Only)

Queries the external instrument's connection status for the specified Power Supply
Rejection Ratio (PSRR) measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-PWR (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:CONNECTSTATus?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1093

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments POWer<x> is the number of the PSRR power measurement.

Examples POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:CONNECTSTATus? might return FAILURE, indicating

that the instrument could not connect to the external generator at the specified IP
address.

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:CONSTAMPlitude
This command sets or queries the constant amplitude voltage for the Power
Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR) power measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR or 6-PWR

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:CONSTAMPlitude <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:CONSTAMPlitude?

Examples POWer:POWer3:PSRR:CONSTAMPlitude 120 sets the constant amplitude

voltage for Power measurement 3 to be 120 volts.
POWer:POWer5:PSRR:CONSTAMPlitude? might return -15, indicating that the
constant amplitude voltage for power measurement 5 is –15 volts.

2-1094 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:FREQ<x>Val
This command sets or queries the generator frequency value of the specified
configuration step for the Power Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR) power
measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR or 6-PWR

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:FREQ<x>Val <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:FREQ<x>Val?

Examples POWer:POWer5:PSRR:FREQ1Val 200 sets the generator frequency value for

frequency band 1 to 200 Hz, for power measurement 5.
POWer:POWer2:PSRR:FREQ3Val? might return 2.000E+6, indicating that
the generator frequency output for frequency band 3 is 2.0 MHz, for power
measurement 2.

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:GENerator
This command sets or queries the generator source used to send stimulus signals
to the DUT, for the Power Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR) power measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR or 6-PWR

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:GENerator {INTernal}

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:GENerator?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1095

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples POWer:POWer3:PSRR:GENerator INTernal sets the generator to the

instrument AFG for power measurement 3.
POWer:POWer2:PSRR:GENerator? might return INTERNAL, indicating that the
generator source for power measurement 2 is the instrument AFG.

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:GENerator
Sets or queries the generator source for the Power Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR)
power measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-PWR (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:GENerator {INTernal|EXTernal}

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:GENerator?

Arguments POWer<x> is the number of the PSRR power measurement.

INTernal sets the internal generator as the source for the Power Supply Rejection
Ratio (PSRR) power measurement.
EXTernal sets the external generator as the source for the Power Supply
Rejection Ratio (PSRR) power measurement.

Examples POWer:POWer1:PSRR:GENerator Internal sets the internal generator as the

source for the Power Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR) measurement.
POWer:POWer7:PSRR:GENerator? might return EXTERNAL, indicating that the
Power Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR) measurement 7 is set to use an external
generator.

2-1096 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:GENIPADDress
Sets or queries the instrument's IP Address associated with the specified Power
Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR) measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-PWR (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:GENIPADDress <Qstring>

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:GENIPADDress?

Arguments POWer<x> is the number of the PSRR power measurement.<NR2> is the IP

address of the generator.

Examples POWer:POWer4:PSRR:GENIPADDress 127.1.1.1 sets the IP address of the

external generator to 127.1.1.1 for Power Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR) power
measurement 4.
POWer:POWer2:PSRR:GENIPADDress? might return "", indicating that there is
no address set for the external generator associated with Power Supply Rejection
Ratio (PSRR) power measurement 2.

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:IMPEDance
This command sets or queries the vertical termination impedance for the Power
Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR) power measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR or 6-PWR

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:IMPEDance {FIFTy|HIGHZ}

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:IMPEDance?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
FIFTy sets the impedance to be 50 Ω.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1097

Commands listed in alphabetical order

HIGHZ sets the impedance to be 1 MΩ.

Examples POWer:POWer3:PSRR:IMPEDance FIFTy sets the vertical termination

impedance for power measurement 3 to be 50 Ω.
POWer:POWer2:PSRR:IMPEDance? might return HIGHZ, indicating that the
vertical termination impedance for power measurement 2 is 1 MΩ.

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:INPUTSOurce
This command sets or queries the input source for the Power Supply Rejection
Ratio (PSRR) power measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR or 6-PWR

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:INPUTSOurce CH<x>

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:INPUTSOurce?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
CH<x> sets the channel to use for the input source.

Examples POWer:POWer2:PSRR:INPUTSOurce CH3 sets the input for power

measurement 2 to be the channel 3 waveform.
POWer:POWer2:PSRR:INPUTSOurce? might return CH1, indicating that the
input source for power measurement 1 is channel 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:OUTPUTSOurce
This command sets or queries the output source for the Power Supply Rejection
Ratio (PSRR) power measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR or 6-PWR

Group Power

2-1098 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:OUTPUTSOurce CH<x>

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:OUTPUTSOurce?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
CH<x> sets the channel to use for the output source.

Examples POWer:POWer1:PSRR:OUTPUTSOurce CH3 sets the output source for power

measurement 1 to be the channel 3 waveform.
POWer:POWer3:PSRR:OUTPUTSOurce? might return CH6, indicating that the
output source for power measurement 3 is channel 6.

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:PPD
This command sets or queries the points per decade (PPD) value for the Power
Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR) power measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR or 6-PWR

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:PPD <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:PPD?

Examples POWer:POWer3:PSRR:PPD 30 sets the PPD for Power measurement 3 to be

30 points.
POWer:POWer5:PSRR:PPD? might return 20, indicating that the PPD value
for power measurement 5 is 20 points.

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:STARTFREQuency
This command sets or queries the start frequency value for the Power Supply
Rejection Ratio (PSRR) power measurement.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1099

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR or 6-PWR

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:STARTFREQuency <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:STARTFREQuency?

Examples POWer:POWer8:PSRR:STARTFREQuency 12 sets the starting frequency for

power measurement 8 to be 12 Hz.
POWer:POWer3:PSRR:STARTFREQuency? might return 2400, indicating that
the starting frequency for power measurement 3 is 2400 Hz.

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:STOPFREQuency
This command sets or queries the stop frequency value for the Power Supply
Rejection Ratio (PSRR) power measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR or 6-PWR

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:STOPFREQuency <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:STOPFREQuency?

Examples POWer:POWer3:PSRR:STOPFREQuency 120 sets the stop frequency for Power

measurement 8 to be 120 Hz.
POWer:POWer5:PSRR:STOPFREQuency? might return 2000, indicating that the
stop frequency for power measurement 5 is 2000 Hz.

2-1100 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:TESTCONNection (No Query Form)

This command tests the connection with the external instrument for the specified
Power Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR) measurement.

Conditions Requires option 5-PWR (5 Series MSO instruments) or 6-PWR (6 Series MSO
instrument)

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:TESTCONNection {EXECute}

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:CONNECTSTATus?

POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:GENIPADDress

Arguments POWer<x> is the number of the PSRR power measurement.

EXECute runs the test connection function.

Examples POWer:POWer3:PSRR:TESTCONNection EXECute runs the test connection

function for the Power Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR) power measurement 3.

POWer:POWer<x>:RDSON:DEVICEType
This command sets or queries the device type for the power drain source
on resistance measurement for RDSon measurement of the specified power
measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RDSON:DEVICEType {SWITCHING | PNJUNCTION}

POWer:POWer<x>:RDSON:DEVICEType?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the power measurement badge on the UI.
SWITCHING sets the Device Type to a switching device (v/i).

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1101

Commands listed in alphabetical order

PNJUNCTION sets the Device Type to a PN Junction device (dv/di).

Examples POWer:POWer3:RDSON:DEVICEType PNJUNCTION sets the RDSon power

measurement number 3 to measure a PN junction device.
POWer:POWer1:RDSON:DEVICEType? might return SWITCHING, indicating
that RDSon power measurement number 1 is set to measure a switching device.

POWer:POWer<x>:RDSON:ISOURce
This command sets or queries the current source for RDSon measurement of the
specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RDSON:ISOURce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:RDSON:ISOURce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:RDSON:VSOURce

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:RDSON:ISOURce REF2 sets RDSon power measurement

number 1 to use Reference waveform 2 as the current signal source.
POWer:POWer1:RDSON:ISOURce? might return CH1, indicating that channel 1
is the current signal source for the RDSon power measurement number 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:RDSON:VSOURce
This command sets or queries the voltage source for RDSon measurement of the
specified power measurement number.

2-1102 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RDSON:VSOURce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:RDSON:VSOURce?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:RDSON:ISOURce

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer2:RDSON:VSOURce CH7 sets RDSon power measurement number

2 to use channel 7 as the voltage source.
POWer:POWer1:RDSON:VSOURce? might return CH7, indicating that channel 1
is the voltage signal source for RDSon power measurement number 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh
This command sets or queries the falling edge for high reference level in absolute
units for the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:METHod

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1103

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR1> ranges from –40000 to 40000

Examples POWer:POWer1:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh 1 sets the high reference

level for falling edge as 1 volt.

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow
This command sets or queries the falling edge for low reference level in absolute
units for the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:METHod

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR1> ranges from –40000 to 40000

Examples POWer:POWer1:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow –1 sets the low reference

level for falling edge as –1 volt.

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid
This command sets or queries the falling edge for mid reference level in absolute
units for the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

2-1104 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:METHod

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR1> ranges from -40000 to 40000

Examples POWer:POWer1:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid 0 sets the mid reference

level for falling edge as 0 volt.

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the absolute hysteresis value for the specified
power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:METHod

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR1> ranges from 0.0000005 to 10

Examples POWer:POWer1:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis 10 sets the reference

level hysteresis value in absolute to 10.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1105

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh
This command sets or queries the rising edge for high reference level in absolute
units for the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:METHod

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR1> ranges from –40000 to 40000

Examples POWer:POWer1:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh 1 sets the high reference

level for rising edge as 1 volt.

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow
This command sets or queries the rising edge for low reference level in absolute
units for the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:METHod

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE

2-1106 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR1> ranges from –40000 to 40000.

Examples POWer:POWer1:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow –1 sets the low reference

level for rising edge as –1 volt.

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid
This command sets or queries the rising edge for mid reference level in absolute
units for the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:METHod

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR1> ranges from –40000 to 40000.

Examples POWer:POWer1:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid 0 sets the mid reference

level for rising edge as 0 volt.

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE
This command sets or queries the type of measurement levels when reference
level is set to absolute for the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1107

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE {SAME | UNIQue}

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:METHod

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
SAME: select when the rising edge and falling edge reference levels are same.

UNIQue: select when the rising edge and falling edge reference levels are different.

Examples POWer:POWer1:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE UNIQue sets the type of

measurement levels as unique for the specified power measurement badge.

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:BASETop
This command sets or queries the reference level base top method for the specified
power measurement number. The power measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:BASETop {AUTO | MINMax |

MEANhistogram | MODEhistogram | EYEhistogram}
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:BASETop?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:METHod

Examples POWer:POWer1:REFLevels:BASETop AUTO sets the reference level base top

method as auto for the power measurement badge 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:METHod
This command sets or queries the method to configure reference level values for
the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

2-1108 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:METHod {PERCent | ABSolute}

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:METHod?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
PERCent sets the power measurement to use absolute values to configure
reference level values.
ABSolute sets the power measurement to use percentage to configure reference
level values.

Examples POWer:POWer3:REFLevels:METHod PERCent sets power measurement 3 to

use percentage to configure reference level values.

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh
This command sets or queries the falling edge for high reference level in
percentage for the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:METHod

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR1> ranges from 1 to 99.

Examples POWer:POWer1:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh 1 sets the high reference

level for falling edge as 1 percentage.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1109

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow
This command sets or queries the falling edge for low reference level in
percentage for the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:METHod

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR1> ranges from 1 to 99.

Examples POWer:POWer1:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow 0 sets the low reference level

for falling edge as 0 percentage.

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid
This command sets or queries the falling edge for mid reference level in
percentage for the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:METHod

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE

2-1110 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR1> ranges from 1 to 99.

Examples POWer:POWer1:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid 50 sets the mid reference

level for falling edge as 50 percentage.

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the hysteresis in percentage for the specified power
measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:METHod

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR1> ranges from 1 to 99.

Examples POWer:POWer1:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis 25 sets the hysteresis

as 25 percentage.

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh
This command sets or queries the rising edge for high reference level in percentage
for the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1111

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:METHod

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR1> ranges from 1 to 99.

Examples POWer:POWer1:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh 85 sets the high reference

level for rising edge as 85 percentage.

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow
This command sets or queries the rising edge for low reference level in percentage
for the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:METHod

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR1> ranges from 1 to 99.

Examples POWer:POWer1:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow 10 sets the low reference

level for rising edge as 10 percentage.

2-1112 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid
This command sets or queries the rising edge for mid reference level in percentage
for the specified power measurement number. The power measurement number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:METHod

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR1> ranges from 1 to 99.

Examples POWer:POWer1:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid 55 sets the mid reference

level for rising edge as 55 percentage.

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE
This command sets or queries the reference levels for the specified power
measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE {TENNinety |

TWENtyeighty | CUSTom}
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:METHod

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1113

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
TENNinety to set the low reference levels as 10% and high reference levels as
90%
TWENtyeighty to set the low reference levels as 20% and high reference levels
as 80%
CUSTom to set the custom low, high, and mid reference levels for rising and
falling edges

Examples POWer:POWer1:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE TENNinety sets the low

reference levels as 10% and high reference levels as 90% for the power
measurement badge 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MAXimum? (Query Only)

This command queries the maximum value of all acquisitions for the measurement
parameter in the specified power measurement number. The power measurement
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:
MAXimum? {InputPwr|Output1Pwr|
Output2Pwr|Output3Pwr|Efficiency1|Efficiency2|Efficiency3|
TotalEfficiency|INDUCT|IVSINTV|MAGLOSS|Bpeak|
Br|Hc|Hmax|IRipple|DeltaB|DeltaH|Permeability|
RDS|TRUEPWR|APPPWR|REPWR|PWRFACTOR|PHASE|
PWRFREQ|ICFACTOR|VCFACTOR|IRMS|VRMS|TONENRG|
TONLOSS|TOFFENRG|TOFFLOSS|CONDENRG|CONDLOSS|
TTLLOSS|TTLENRG|DVBYDT|DIBYDT|SOAHITSCNT|
LRIPRMS|LRIPPKPK|SWRIPRMS|SWRIPPKPK|PRIOD|
FREQ|PDUTY|NDUTY|PPULSE|NPULSE|AMPL|

2-1114 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

PKPK|HIGH|LOW|MAX|MIN| INRUSH|CAPACITANCE|OUTPUT1|
OUTPUT2|OUTPUT3|OUTPUT4|OUTPUT5|OUTPUT6|OUTPUT7|
GAINCROSSOVERFREQ|PHASECROSSOVERFREQ|GM|PM|
MAXPSRR|MAXPSRRFREQ|MINPSRR|MINPSRRFREQ}

NOTE. Above entries are <QSTring> entries, and must be entered in enclosing
quotes.

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<QString> = the measurement result that you want to return from the specified
power measurement number. Available results depend on the power measurement
being taken in the specified measurement number. The valid <Qstring> arguments
are:
For the Efficiency measurement, the parameters are "InputPwr", "Output1Pwr",
"Output2Pwr", "Output3Pwr", "Efficiency1", "Efficiency2", "Efficiency3",
"TotalEfficiency”.
For Inductance measurement, the parameter is "INDUCT".
For IVSIntegralV measurement, the parameter is "IVSINTV".
For Magnetic Loss measurement, the parameter is "MAGLOSS".
For Magnetic Property measurement, the parameters are "Bpeak", "Br", "Hc",
"Hmax", "IRipple", "DeltaB", "DeltaH", "Permeability".
For RDSon measurement, the parameter is "RDS”.
For Power Quality measurement, the parameters are "TRUEPWR", "APPPWR",
"REPWR", "PWRFACTOR", "PHASE", "PWRFREQ", "ICFACTOR",
"VCFACTOR", "IRMS", "VRMS".
For Switching Loss measurement, the parameters are "TONENRG", "TONLOSS",
"TOFFENRG", "TOFFLOSS", "CONDENRG", "CONDLOSS", "TTLLOSS",
"TTLENRG".
"DVBYDT" is the parameter for the dV by dt measurement.
"DIBYDT" is the parameter for the dI by dt measurement.
"SOAHITSCNT" is the parameter for the SOA measurement.
"LRIPRMS" and "LRIPPKPK" are the parameters for the Line Ripple
measurement.
"SWRIPRMS" and "SWRIPPKPK" are the parameters for the Switching Ripple
measurement.
"PRIOD" is the parameter for the Cycle Period measurement.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1115

Commands listed in alphabetical order

"FREQ" is the parameter for the Cycle Frequency measurement.

"PDUTY" is the parameter for the Positive Duty Cycle measurement.
"NDUTY" is the parameter for the Negative Duty Cycle measurement.
"PPULSE” is the parameter for the Positive Pulse Width measurement.
"NPULSE" is the parameter for the Negative Pulse Width measurement.
"AMPL" is the parameter for the Cycle Amplitude measurement.
"PKPK" is the parameter for the Cycle Peak–Peak measurement.
"HIGH" is the parameter for the Cycle Top measurement.
"LOW" is the parameter for the Cycle Base measurement.
"Max" is the parameter for the Cycle Max measurement.
"MIN" is the parameter for the Cycle Min measurement.
"INRUSH" is the parameter for the Inrush Current measurement.
"CAPACITANCE" is the parameter for the Input Capacitance measurement.
"OUTPUT1" - "OUTPUT7" are the parameters for the Turn On Time and Turn
Off Time measurements.
"GAINCROSSOVERFREQ", "PHASECROSSOVERFREQ", "GM", "PM" are
the parameters for the Control Loop Response measurement.
"MAXPSRR", "MAXPSRRFREQ", "MINPSRR", "MINPSRRFREQ" are the
parameters for the PSRR measurement

Examples POWer:POWer4:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MAXimum? "PKPK" might return 28.56,

indicating the maximum value of the Peak-to-Peak measurement for power
measurement 4.

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MEAN? (Query Only)

This command queries the mean value of all acquisitions for the measurement
parameter in the specified power measurement number <x>.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MEAN?
{InputPwr|Output1Pwr|Output2Pwr|

2-1116 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Output3Pwr|Efficiency1|Efficiency2|
Efficiency3|TotalEfficiency|
INDUCT|IVSINTV|MAGLOSS|Bpeak|Br|Hc|Hmax|
IRipple|DeltaB|DeltaH|Permeability|RDS|TRUEPWR|
APPPWR|REPWR|PWRFACTOR|PHASE|PWRFREQ|
ICFACTOR|VCFACTOR|IRMS|VRMS|TONENRG|
TONLOSS|TOFFENRG|TOFFLOSS|CONDENRG|CONDLOSS|
TTLLOSS|TTLENRG|DVBYDT|DIBYDT|SOAHITSCNT|
LRIPRMS|LRIPPKPK|SWRIPRMS|SWRIPPKPK|PRIOD|
FREQ|PDUTY|NDUTY|PPULSE|NPULSE|AMPL|
PKPK|HIGH|LOW|MAX|MIN| INRUSH|CAPACITANCE|OUTPUT1|
OUTPUT2|OUTPUT3|OUTPUT4|OUTPUT5|OUTPUT6|OUTPUT7|
GAINCROSSOVERFREQ|PHASECROSSOVERFREQ|GM|PM|
MAXPSRR|MAXPSRRFREQ|MINPSRR|MINPSRRFREQ}

NOTE. Above entries are <QSTring> entries, and must be entered in enclosing
quotes.

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<QString> = the measurement result that you want to return from the specified
power measurement number. Available results depend on the power measurement
being taken in the specified measurement number. The valid <Qstring> arguments
are:
For Efficiency measurement, the parameters are "InputPwr", "Output1Pwr",
"Output2Pwr", "Output3Pwr", "Efficiency1", "Efficiency2", "Efficiency3",
"TotalEfficiency".
For Inductance measurement, the parameter is "INDUCT".
For IVSIntegralV measurement, the parameter is "IVSINTV".
For Magnetic Loss measurement, the parameter is "MAGLOSS".
For Magnetic Property measurement, the parameters are "Bpeak", "Br", "Hc",
"Hmax", "IRipple", "DeltaB", "DeltaH", "Permeability".
For RDSon measurement, the parameter is "RDS".
For Power Quality measurement, the parameters are "TRUEPWR", "APPPWR",
"REPWR", "PWRFACTOR", "PHASE", "PWRFREQ", "ICFACTOR",
"VCFACTOR", "IRMS", "VRMS".
For Switching Loss measurement, the parameters are "TONENRG", "TONLOSS",
"TOFFENRG", "TOFFLOSS", "CONDENRG", "CONDLOSS", "TTLLOSS",
"TTLENRG".
"DVBYDT" is the parameter for the dV by dt measurement.
"DIBYDT is the parameter for the dI by dt measurement.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1117

Commands listed in alphabetical order

"SOAHITSCNT is the parameter for the SOA measurement.

"LRIPRMS" and "LRIPPKPK" are the parameters for the Line Ripple
measurement.
"SWRIPRMS" and "SWRIPPKPK" are the parameters for the Switching Ripple
measurement.
"PRIOD" is the parameter for the Cycle Period measurement.
"FREQ" is the parameter for the Cycle Frequency measurement.
"PDUTY" is the parameter for the Positive Duty Cycle measurement.
"NDUTY" is the parameter for the Negative Duty Cycle measurement.
"PPULSE" is the parameter for the Positive Pulse Width measurement.
"NPULSE" is the parameter for the Negative Pulse Width measurement.
"AMPL" is the parameter for the Cycle Amplitude measurement.
"PKPK" is the parameter for the Cycle Peak–Peak measurement.
"HIGH" is the parameter for the Cycle Top measurement.
"LOW" is the parameter for the Cycle Base measurement.
"Max" is the parameter for the Cycle Max measurement.
"MIN" is the parameter for the Cycle Min measurement.
"INRUSH" is the parameter for the Inrush Current measurement.
"CAPACITANCE" is the parameter for the Input Capacitance measurement.
"OUTPUT1" - "OUTPUT7" are the parameters for the Turn On Time and Turn
Off Time measurements.
"GAINCROSSOVERFREQ", "PHASECROSSOVERFREQ", "GM", "PM" are
the parameters for the Control Loop Response measurement.
"MAXPSRR", "MAXPSRRFREQ", "MINPSRR", "MINPSRRFREQ" are the
parameters for the PSRR measurement

Examples POWer:POWer2:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MEAN? "AMPL" might return 57.45,

indicating the mean value of the Amplitude measurement for all acquisitions of
power measurement 2.

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MINimum? (Query Only)

This command queries the minimum value of all acquisitions for the measurement
parameter of the specified power measurement <x>.

2-1118 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:
MINimum? {InputPwr|Output1Pwr|
Output2Pwr|Output3Pwr|Efficiency1|Efficiency2|Efficiency3|
TotalEfficiency|INDUCT|IVSINTV|MAGLOSS|
Bpeak|Br|Hc|Hmax|IRipple|DeltaB|DeltaH|
Permeability|RDS|TRUEPWR|APPPWR|REPWR|
PWRFACTOR|PHASE|PWRFREQ|ICFACTOR|VCFACTOR|
IRMS|VRMS|TONENRG|TONLOSS|TOFFENRG|
TOFFLOSS|CONDENRG|CONDLOSS|TTLLOSS|TTLENRG|
DVBYDT|DIBYDT|SOAHITSCNT|LRIPRMS|LRIPPKPK|
SWRIPRMS|SWRIPPKPK|PRIOD|FREQ|PDUTY|
NDUTY|PPULSE|NPULSE|AMPL|PKPK|
HIGH|LOW|MAX|MIN|INRUSH|CAPACITANCE|OUTPUT1|
OUTPUT2|OUTPUT3|OUTPUT4|OUTPUT5|OUTPUT6|OUTPUT7|
GAINCROSSOVERFREQ|PHASECROSSOVERFREQ|GM|PM|
MAXPSRR|MAXPSRRFREQ|MINPSRR|MINPSRRFREQ}

NOTE. Above entries are <QSTring> entries, and must be entered in enclosing
quotes.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1119

Commands listed in alphabetical order

For Power Quality measurement, the parameters are "TRUEPWR", "APPPWR",

"REPWR", "PWRFACTOR", "PHASE", "PWRFREQ", "ICFACTOR",
"VCFACTOR", "IRMS", "VRMS".
For Switching Loss measurement, the parameters are "TONENRG", "TONLOSS",
"TOFFENRG", "TOFFLOSS", "CONDENRG", "CONDLOSS", "TTLLOSS",
"TTLENRG".
"DVBYDT" is the parameter for the dV by dt measurement.
"DIBYDT is the parameter for the dI by dt measurement.
"SOAHITSCNT is the parameter for the SOA measurement.
"LRIPRMS" and "LRIPPKPK" are the parameters for the Line Ripple
measurement.
"SWRIPRMS" and "SWRIPPKPK" are the parameters for the Switching Ripple
measurement.
"PRIOD" is the parameter for the Cycle Period measurement.
"FREQ" is the parameter for the Cycle Frequency measurement.
"PDUTY" is the parameter for the Positive Duty Cycle measurement.
"NDUTY" is the parameter for the Negative Duty Cycle measurement.
"PPULSE" is the parameter for the Positive Pulse Width measurement.
"NPULSE" is the parameter for the Negative Pulse Width measurement.
"AMPL" is the parameter for the Cycle Amplitude measurement.
"PKPK" is the parameter for the Cycle Peak–Peak measurement.
"HIGH" is the parameter for the Cycle Top measurement.
"LOW" is the parameter for the Cycle Base measurement.
"Max" is the parameter for the Cycle Max measurement.
"MIN" is the parameter for the Cycle Min measurement.
"INRUSH" is the parameter for the Inrush Current measurement.
"CAPACITANCE" is the parameter for the Input Capacitance measurement.
"OUTPUT1" - "OUTPUT7" are the parameters for the Turn On Time and Turn
Off Time measurements.
"GAINCROSSOVERFREQ", "PHASECROSSOVERFREQ", "GM", "PM" are
the parameters for the Control Loop Response measurement.
"MAXPSRR", "MAXPSRRFREQ", "MINPSRR", "MINPSRRFREQ" are the
parameters for the PSRR measurement

2-1120 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples POWer:POWer5:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MINimum? "FREQ" might return

5.1307829019093E6, indicating the minimum frequency measurement for all
acquisitions of power measurement 5.

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:PK2PK? (Query Only)

This command queries the peak-to-peak value of all acquisitions for the
measurement parameter in the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:PK2PK? {InputPwr|Output1Pwr|

Output2Pwr|Output3Pwr|Efficiency1|Efficiency2|Efficiency3|
TotalEfficiency|INDUCT|IVSINTV|MAGLOSS|Bpeak|
Br|Hc|Hmax|IRipple|DeltaB|DeltaH|
Permeability|RDS|TRUEPWR|APPPWR|REPWR|
PWRFACTOR|PHASE|PWRFREQ|ICFACTOR|VCFACTOR|
IRMS|VRMS|TONENRG|TONLOSS|TOFFENRG|
TOFFLOSS|CONDENRG|CONDLOSS|TTLLOSS|TTLENRG|
DVBYDT|DIBYDT|SOAHITSCNT|LRIPRMS|LRIPPKPK|
SWRIPRMS|SWRIPPKPK|PRIOD|FREQ|PDUTY|
NDUTY|PPULSE|NPULSE|AMPL|PKPK|
HIGH|LOW|MAX|MIN|INRUSH|CAPACITANCE|OUTPUT1|
OUTPUT2|OUTPUT3|OUTPUT4|OUTPUT5|OUTPUT6|OUTPUT7|
GAINCROSSOVERFREQ|PHASECROSSOVERFREQ|GM|PM|
MAXPSRR|MAXPSRRFREQ|MINPSRR|MINPSRRFREQ}

NOTE. Above entries are <QSTring> entries, and must be entered in enclosing
quotes.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1121

Commands listed in alphabetical order

For IVSIntegralV measurement, the parameter is "IVSINTV".

For Magnetic Loss measurement, the parameter is "MAGLOSS".
For Magnetic Property measurement, the parameters are "Bpeak", "Br", "Hc",
"Hmax", "IRipple", "DeltaB", "DeltaH", "Permeability".
For RDSon measurement, the parameter is "RDS".
For Power Quality measurement, the parameters are "TRUEPWR", "APPPWR",
"REPWR", "PWRFACTOR", "PHASE", "PWRFREQ", "ICFACTOR",
"VCFACTOR", "IRMS", "VRMS".
For Switching Loss measurement, the parameters are "TONENRG", "TONLOSS",
"TOFFENRG", "TOFFLOSS", "CONDENRG", "CONDLOSS", "TTLLOSS",
"TTLENRG".
"DVBYDT" is the parameter for the dV by dt measurement.
"DIBYDT" is the parameter for the dI by dt measurement.
"SOAHITSCNT" is the parameter for the SOA measurement.
"LRIPRMS" and "LRIPPKPK" are the parameters for the Line Ripple
measurement.
"SWRIPRMS" and "SWRIPPKPK" are the parameters for the Switching Ripple
measurement.
"PRIOD" is the parameter for the Cycle Period measurement.
"FREQ" is the parameter for the Cycle Frequency measurement.
"PDUTY" is the parameter for the Positive Duty Cycle measurement.
"NDUTY" is the parameter for the Negative Duty Cycle measurement.
"PPULSE" is the parameter for the Positive Pulse Width measurement.
"NPULSE" is the parameter for the Negative Pulse Width measurement.
"AMPL" is the parameter for the Cycle Amplitude measurement.
"PKPK" is the parameter for the Cycle Peak–Peak measurement.
"HIGH" is the parameter for the Cycle Top measurement.
"LOW" is the parameter for the Cycle Base measurement.
"Max" is the parameter for the Cycle Max measurement.
"MIN" is the parameter for the Cycle Min measurement.
"INRUSH" is the parameter for the Inrush Current measurement.
"CAPACITANCE" is the parameter for the Input Capacitance measurement.
"OUTPUT1" - "OUTPUT7" are the parameters for the Turn On Time and Turn
Off Time measurements.

2-1122 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

"GAINCROSSOVERFREQ", "PHASECROSSOVERFREQ", "GM", "PM" are

the parameters for the Control Loop Response measurement.
"MAXPSRR", "MAXPSRRFREQ", "MINPSRR", "MINPSRRFREQ" are the
parameters for the PSRR measurement

Examples POWer:POWer1:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:PK2PK? "TONLoss" might return 9.91,

indicating the peak-to-peak value of T-On Energy for all acquisitions.

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:POPUlation? (Query Only)

This command queries the population (number of complete cycles) of all
acquisitions for the measurement parameter in the specified power measurement
number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:
POPUlation? {InputPwr|Output1Pwr|
Output2Pwr|Output3Pwr|Efficiency1|Efficiency2|Efficiency3|
TotalEfficiency|INDUCT|IVSINTV|MAGLOSS|Bpeak|
Br|Hc|Hmax|IRipple|DeltaB|DeltaH|
Permeability|RDS|TRUEPWR|APPPWR|REPWR|PWRFACTOR|
PHASE|PWRFREQ|ICFACTOR|VCFACTOR|IRMS|VRMS|
TONENRG|TONLOSS|TOFFENRG|TOFFLOSS|CONDENRG|CONDLOSS|
TTLLOSS|TTLENRG|DVBYDT|DIBYDT|SOAHITSCNT|
LRIPRMS|LRIPPKPK|SWRIPRMS|SWRIPPKPK|PRIOD|
FREQ|PDUTY|NDUTY|PPULSE|NPULSE|
AMPL|PKPK|HIGH|LOW|MAX|MIN|INRUSH|CAPACITANCE|OUTPUT1|
OUTPUT2|OUTPUT3|OUTPUT4|OUTPUT5|OUTPUT6|OUTPUT7|
GAINCROSSOVERFREQ|PHASECROSSOVERFREQ|GM|PM|
MAXPSRR|MAXPSRRFREQ|MINPSRR|MINPSRRFREQ}

NOTE. Above entries are <QSTring> entries, and must be entered in enclosing
quotes.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1123

Commands listed in alphabetical order

being taken in the specified measurement number. The valid <Qstring> arguments
are:
For Efficiency measurement, the parameters are "InputPwr", "Output1Pwr",
"Output2Pwr", "Output3Pwr", "Efficiency1", "Efficiency2", "Efficiency3",
"TotalEfficiency".
For Inductance measurement, the parameter is "INDUCT".
For IVSIntegralV measurement, the parameter is "IVSINTV".
For Magnetic Loss measurement, the parameter is "MAGLOSS".
For Magnetic Property measurement, the parameters are "Bpeak", "Br", "Hc",
"Hmax", "IRipple", "DeltaB", "DeltaH", "Permeability".
For RDSon measurement, the parameter is "RDS".
For Power Quality measurement, the parameters are "TRUEPWR", "APPPWR",
"REPWR", "PWRFACTOR", "PHASE", "PWRFREQ", "ICFACTOR",
"VCFACTOR", "IRMS", "VRMS".
For Switching Loss measurement, the parameters are "TONENRG", "TONLOSS",
"TOFFENRG", "TOFFLOSS", "CONDENRG", "CONDLOSS", "TTLLOSS",
"TTLENRG".
"DVBYDT" is the parameter for the dV by dt measurement.
"DIBYDT" is the parameter for the dI by dt measurement.
"SOAHITSCNT" is the parameter for the SOA measurement.
"LRIPRMS" and "LRIPPKPK" are the parameters for the Line Ripple
measurement.
"SWRIPRMS" and "SWRIPPKPK" are the parameters for the Switching Ripple
measurement.
"PRIOD" is the parameter for the Cycle Period measurement.
"FREQ" is the parameter for the Cycle Frequency measurement.
"PDUTY" is the parameter for the Positive Duty Cycle measurement.
"NDUTY" is the parameter for the Negative Duty Cycle measurement.
"PPULSE" is the parameter for the Positive Pulse Width measurement.
"NPULSE" is the parameter for the Negative Pulse Width measurement.
"AMPL" is the parameter for the Cycle Amplitude measurement.
"PKPK" is the parameter for the Cycle Peak–Peak measurement.
"HIGH" is the parameter for the Cycle Top measurement.
"LOW" is the parameter for the Cycle Base measurement.

2-1124 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

"Max" is the parameter for the Cycle Max measurement.

"MIN" is the parameter for the Cycle Min measurement.
"INRUSH" is the parameter for the Inrush Current measurement.
"CAPACITANCE" is the parameter for the Input Capacitance measurement.
"OUTPUT1" - "OUTPUT7" are the parameters for the Turn On Time and Turn
Off Time measurements.
"GAINCROSSOVERFREQ", "PHASECROSSOVERFREQ", "GM", "PM" are
the parameters for the Control Loop Response measurement.
"MAXPSRR", "MAXPSRRFREQ", "MINPSRR", "MINPSRRFREQ" are the
parameters for the PSRR measurement

Examples POWer:POWer1:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:POPUlation? "CondEnrg" might

return 4.91E-3, indicating the population (number of complete cycles) of
conduction energy for all acquisitions.

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:STDDev? (Query Only)

This command queries the standard deviation value of all acquisitions for the
measurement parameter in the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:
STDDev? {InputPwr|Output1Pwr|
Output2Pwr|Output3Pwr|Efficiency1|Efficiency2|Efficiency3|
TotalEfficiency|INDUCT|IVSINTV|MAGLOSS|Bpeak|Br|Hc|
Hmax|IRipple|DeltaB|DeltaH|Permeability|RDS|
TRUEPWR|APPPWR|REPWR|PWRFACTOR|PHASE|PWRFREQ|
ICFACTOR|VCFACTOR|IRMS|VRMS|TONENRG|TONLOSS|
TOFFENRG|TOFFLOSS|CONDENRG|CONDLOSS|TTLLOSS|
TTLENRG|DVBYDT|DIBYDT|SOAHITSCNT|LRIPRMS|
LRIPPKPK|SWRIPRMS|SWRIPPKPK|PRIOD|FREQ|PDUTY|
NDUTY|PPULSE|NPULSE|AMPL|PKPK|HIGH|LOW|MAX|MIN|
INRUSH|CAPACITANCE|OUTPUT1|
OUTPUT2|OUTPUT3|OUTPUT4|OUTPUT5|OUTPUT6|OUTPUT7|
GAINCROSSOVERFREQ|PHASECROSSOVERFREQ|GM|PM|
MAXPSRR|MAXPSRRFREQ|MINPSRR|MINPSRRFREQ}

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1125

Commands listed in alphabetical order

NOTE. Above entries are <QSTring> entries, and must be entered in enclosing
quotes.

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<QString> = the measurement result that you want to return from the specified
power measurement number. Available results depend on the power measurement
being taken in the specified measurement number. The valid <Qstring> arguments
are:
For Efficiency measurement, the parameters are "InputPwr", "Output1Pwr",
"Output2Pwr", "Output3Pwr", "Efficiency1", "Efficiency2", "Efficiency3",
"TotalEfficiency".
For Inductance measurement, the parameter is "INDUCT".
For IVSIntegralV measurement, the parameter is "IVSINTV".
For Magnetic Loss measurement, the parameter is "MAGLOSS".
For Magnetic Property measurement, the parameters are "Bpeak", "Br", "Hc",
"Hmax", "IRipple", "DeltaB", "DeltaH", "Permeability".
For RDSon measurement, the parameter is "RDS".
For Power Quality measurement, the parameters are "TRUEPWR", "APPPWR",
"REPWR", "PWRFACTOR", "PHASE", "PWRFREQ", "ICFACTOR",
"VCFACTOR", "IRMS", "VRMS".
For Switching Loss measurement, the parameters are "TONENRG", "TONLOSS",
"TOFFENRG", "TOFFLOSS", "CONDENRG", "CONDLOSS", "TTLLOSS",
"TTLENRG".
"DVBYDT" is the parameter for the dV by dt measurement.
"DIBYDT" is the parameter for the dI by dt measurement.
"SOAHITSCNT is the parameter for the SOA measurement.
"LRIPRMS" and "LRIPPKPK" are the parameters for the Line Ripple
measurement.
"SWRIPRMS" and "SWRIPPKPK" are the parameters for the Switching Ripple
measurement.
"PRIOD" is the parameter for the Cycle Period measurement.
"FREQ" is the parameter for the Cycle Frequency measurement.
"PDUTY" is the parameter for the Positive Duty Cycle measurement.
"NDUTY" is the parameter for the Negative Duty Cycle measurement.
"PPULSE" is the parameter for the Positive Pulse Width measurement.

2-1126 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

"NPULSE" is the parameter for the Negative Pulse Width measurement.

"AMPL" is the parameter for the Cycle Amplitude measurement.
"PKPK" is the parameter for the Cycle Peak–Peak measurement.
"HIGH" is the parameter for the Cycle Top measurement.
"LOW" is the parameter for the Cycle Base measurement.
"Max" is the parameter for the Cycle Max measurement.
"MIN" is the parameter for the Cycle Min measurement.
"INRUSH" is the parameter for the Inrush Current measurement.
"CAPACITANCE" is the parameter for the Input Capacitance measurement.
"OUTPUT1" - "OUTPUT7" are the parameters for the Turn On Time and Turn
Off Time measurements.
"GAINCROSSOVERFREQ", "PHASECROSSOVERFREQ", "GM", "PM" are
the parameters for the Control Loop Response measurement.
"MAXPSRR", "MAXPSRRFREQ", "MINPSRR", "MINPSRRFREQ" are the
parameters for the PSRR measurement

Examples POWer:POWer1:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:STDDev? "TONLoss" might return

4.25, indicating the standard deviation value of T-On Energy loss for all
acquisitions.

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:F1MAG? (Query Only)

This command queries the first harmonics magnitude value for the specified
power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:F1MAG? "harmonics"

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1127

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples POWer:POWer1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:F1MAG? "harmonics" might return

1.4151834770090, indicating the value of the first harmonics magnitude for the
power measurement badge 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:F3MAG? (Query Only)

This command queries the third harmonics magnitude value for the specified
power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:F3MAG? "harmonics"

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.

Examples POWer:POWer1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:f3MAG? "harmonics" might return

234.0187140104806E-6, indicating the value of third harmonics magnitude for
the power measurement badge 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:FREQUENCY? (Query Only)

This command queries the fundamental frequency for the specified power
measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:FREQUENCY? "harmonics"

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.

2-1128 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples POWer:POWer1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:FREQUENCY? "harmonics" might

return 100.0067656931537E+3, indicating the fundamental frequency for the
power measurement badge 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:IRMS? (Query Only)

This command queries the RMS current value for the specified power
measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:IRMS? "harmonics"

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.

Examples POWer:POWer1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:IRMS? "harmonics" might return

1.4149980733491, indicating the RMS current value for the power measurement
badge 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MAXimum? (Query Only)

This command queries the maximum value of the current acquisition for the
measurement parameter in the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MAXimum? {InputPwr|

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1129

Commands listed in alphabetical order

FREQ|PDUTY|NDUTY|PPULSE|NPULSE|AMPL|PKPK|
HIGH|LOW|MAX|MIN|INRUSH|CAPACITANCE|OUTPUT1|
OUTPUT2|OUTPUT3|OUTPUT4|OUTPUT5|OUTPUT6|OUTPUT7|
GAINCROSSOVERFREQ|PHASECROSSOVERFREQ|GM|PM|
MAXPSRR|MAXPSRRFREQ|MINPSRR|MINPSRRFREQ}

NOTE. Above entries are <QSTring> entries, and must be entered in enclosing
quotes.

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<QString> = the measurement result that you want to return from the specified
power measurement number. Available results depend on the power measurement
being taken in the specified measurement number. The valid <Qstring> arguments
are:
For Efficiency measurement, the parameters are "InputPwr", "Output1Pwr",
"Output2Pwr", "Output3Pwr", "Efficiency1", "Efficiency2", "Efficiency3",
"TotalEfficiency".
For Inductance measurement, the parameter is "INDUCT".
For IVSIntegralV measurement, the parameter is "IVSINTV".
For Magnetic Loss measurement, the parameter is "MAGLOSS".
For Magnetic Property measurement, the parameters are "Bpeak", "Br", "Hc",
"Hmax", "IRipple", "DeltaB", "DeltaH", "Permeability".
For RDSon measurement, the parameter is "RDS".
For Power Quality measurement, the parameters are "TRUEPWR", "APPPWR",
"REPWR", "PWRFACTOR", "PHASE", "PWRFREQ", "ICFACTOR",
"VCFACTOR", "IRMS", "VRMS".
For Switching Loss measurement, the parameters are "TONENRG", "TONLOSS",
"TOFFENRG", "TOFFLOSS", "CONDENRG", "CONDLOSS", "TTLLOSS",
"TTLENRG".
"DVBYDT" is the parameter for the dV by dt measurement.
"DIBYDT" is the parameter for the dI by dt measurement.
"SOAHITSCNT" is the parameter for the SOA measurement.
"LRIPRMS" and "LRIPPKPK" are the parameters for the Line Ripple
measurement.
"SWRIPRMS" and "SWRIPPKPK" are the parameters for the Switching Ripple
measurement.
"PRIOD" is the parameter for the Cycle Period measurement.

2-1130 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

"FREQ" is the parameter for the Cycle Frequency measurement.

"PDUTY" is the parameter for the Positive Duty Cycle measurement.
"NDUTY" is the parameter for the Negative Duty Cycle measurement.
"PPULSE" is the parameter for the Positive Pulse Width measurement.
"NPULSE" is the parameter for the Negative Pulse Width measurement.
"AMPL" is the parameter for the Cycle Amplitude measurement.
"PKPK" is the parameter for the Cycle Peak–Peak measurement.
"HIGH" is the parameter for the Cycle Top measurement.
"LOW" is the parameter for the Cycle Base measurement.
"Max" is the parameter for the Cycle Max measurement.
"MIN" is the parameter for the Cycle Min measurement.
"INRUSH" is the parameter for the Inrush Current measurement.
"CAPACITANCE" is the parameter for the Input Capacitance measurement.
"OUTPUT1" - "OUTPUT7" are the parameters for the Turn On Time and Turn
Off Time measurements.
"GAINCROSSOVERFREQ", "PHASECROSSOVERFREQ", "GM", "PM" are
the parameters for the Control Loop Response measurement.
"MAXPSRR", "MAXPSRRFREQ", "MINPSRR", "MINPSRRFREQ" are the
parameters for the PSRR measurement

Examples POWer:POWer1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MAXimum? "TONEnrg" might return

32.8, indicating the maximum value of Ton Energy for the current acquisition.

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN? (Query Only)

This command queries the mean value of the current acquisition for the
measurement parameter of the specified power measurement <x>.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN? {InputPwr|

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1131

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Br|Hc|Hmax|IRipple|DeltaB|DeltaH|Permeability|RDS|TRUEPWR|
APPPWR|REPWR|PWRFACTOR|PHASE|PWRFREQ|ICFACTOR|VCFACTOR|IRMS|
VRMS|TONENRG|TONLOSS|TOFFENRG|TOFFLOSS|CONDENRG|CONDLOSS|
TTLLOSS|TTLENRG|DVBYDT|DIBYDT|SOAHITSCNT|LRIPRMS|LRIPPKPK|
SWRIPRMS|SWRIPPKPK|PRIOD|FREQ|PDUTY|NDUTY|PPULSE|NPULSE|
AMPL|PKPK|HIGH|LOW|MAX|MIN|INRUSH|CAPACITANCE|OUTPUT1|
OUTPUT2|OUTPUT3|OUTPUT4|OUTPUT5|OUTPUT6|OUTPUT7|
GAINCROSSOVERFREQ|PHASECROSSOVERFREQ|GM|PM|
MAXPSRR|MAXPSRRFREQ|MINPSRR|MINPSRRFREQ}

NOTE. Above entries are <QSTring> entries, and must be entered in enclosing
quotes.

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<QString> = the measurement result that you want to return from the specified
power measurement number. Available results depend on the power measurement
being taken in the specified measurement number. The valid <Qstring> arguments
are:
For Efficiency measurement, the parameters are "InputPwr", "Output1Pwr",
"Output2Pwr", "Output3Pwr", "Efficiency1", "Efficiency2", "Efficiency3",
"TotalEfficiency".
For Inductance measurement, the parameter is "INDUCT".
For IVSIntegralV measurement, the parameter is "IVSINTV".
For Magnetic Loss measurement, the parameter is "MAGLOSS".
For Magnetic Property measurement, the parameters are "Bpeak", "Br", "Hc",
"Hmax", "IRipple", "DeltaB", "DeltaH", "Permeability".
For RDSon measurement, the parameter is "RDS".
For Power Quality measurement, the parameters are "TRUEPWR", "APPPWR",
"REPWR", "PWRFACTOR", "PHASE", "PWRFREQ", "ICFACTOR",
"VCFACTOR", "IRMS", "VRMS".
For Switching Loss measurement, the parameters are "TONENRG", "TONLOSS",
"TOFFENRG", "TOFFLOSS", "CONDENRG", "CONDLOSS", "TTLLOSS",
"TTLENRG".
"DVBYDT" is the parameter for the dV by dt measurement.
"DIBYDT" is the parameter for the dI by dt measurement.
"SOAHITSCNT" is the parameter for the SOA measurement.
"LRIPRMS" and "LRIPPKPK" are the parameters for the Line Ripple
measurement.

2-1132 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

"SWRIPRMS" and "SWRIPPKPK" are the parameters for the Switching Ripple
measurement.
"PRIOD" is the parameter for the Cycle Period measurement.
"FREQ" is the parameter for the Cycle Frequency measurement.
"PDUTY" is the parameter for the Positive Duty Cycle measurement.
"NDUTY" is the parameter for the Negative Duty Cycle measurement.
"PPULSE" is the parameter for the Positive Pulse Width measurement.
"NPULSE" is the parameter for the Negative Pulse Width measurement.
"AMPL" is the parameter for the Cycle Amplitude measurement.
"PKPK" is the parameter for the Cycle Peak–Peak measurement.
"HIGH" is the parameter for the Cycle Top measurement.
"LOW" is the parameter for the Cycle Base measurement.
"Max" is the parameter for the Cycle Max measurement.
"MIN" is the parameter for the Cycle Min measurement.
"INRUSH" is the parameter for the Inrush Current measurement.
"CAPACITANCE" is the parameter for the Input Capacitance measurement.
"OUTPUT1" - "OUTPUT7" are the parameters for the Turn On Time and Turn
Off Time measurements.
"GAINCROSSOVERFREQ", "PHASECROSSOVERFREQ", "GM", "PM" are
the parameters for the Control Loop Response measurement.
"MAXPSRR", "MAXPSRRFREQ", "MINPSRR", "MINPSRRFREQ" are the
parameters for the PSRR measurement

Examples POWer:POWer2:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN? "TruePwr" might return

42.6097255943E–2, indicating the mean value of true power for the current
acquisition of power measurement 2.

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MINimum? (Query Only)

This command queries the minimum value of the current acquisition for the
measurement parameter in the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1133

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MINimum? {InputPwr|

Output1Pwr|Output2Pwr|Output3Pwr|Efficiency1|Efficiency2|
Efficiency3|TotalEfficiency|INDUCT|IVSINTV|MAGLOSS|Bpeak|Br|
Hc|Hmax|IRipple|DeltaB|DeltaH|Permeability|RDS|TRUEPWR|
APPPWR|REPWR|PWRFACTOR|PHASE|PWRFREQ|ICFACTOR|VCFACTOR|IRMS|
VRMS|TONENRG|TONLOSS|TOFFENRG|TOFFLOSS|CONDENRG|CONDLOSS|
TTLLOSS|TTLENRG|DVBYDT|DIBYDT|SOAHITSCNT|LRIPRMS|LRIPPKPK|
SWRIPRMS|SWRIPPKPK|PRIOD|FREQ|PDUTY|NDUTY|PPULSE|NPULSE|AMPL|
PKPK|HIGH|LOW|MAX|MIN|INRUSH|CAPACITANCE|OUTPUT1|
OUTPUT2|OUTPUT3|OUTPUT4|OUTPUT5|OUTPUT6|OUTPUT7|
GAINCROSSOVERFREQ|PHASECROSSOVERFREQ|GM|PM|
MAXPSRR|MAXPSRRFREQ|MINPSRR|MINPSRRFREQ}

NOTE. Above entries are <QSTring> entries, and must be entered in enclosing
quotes.

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<QString> = the measurement result that you want to return from the specified
power measurement number. Available results depend on the power measurement
being taken in the specified measurement number. The valid <Qstring> arguments
are:
For Efficiency measurement, the parameters are "InputPwr", "Output1Pwr",
"Output2Pwr", "Output3Pwr", "Efficiency1", "Efficiency2", "Efficiency3",
"TotalEfficiency".
For Inductance measurement, the parameter is "INDUCT".
For IVSIntegralV measurement, the parameter is "IVSINTV".
For Magnetic Loss measurement, the parameter is "MAGLOSS".
For Magnetic Property measurement, the parameters are "Bpeak", "Br", "Hc",
"Hmax", "IRipple", "DeltaB", "DeltaH", "Permeability".
For RDSon measurement, the parameter is "RDS".
For Power Quality measurement, the parameters are "TRUEPWR", "APPPWR",
"REPWR", "PWRFACTOR", "PHASE", "PWRFREQ", "ICFACTOR",
"VCFACTOR", "IRMS", "VRMS".
For Switching Loss measurement, the parameters are "TONENRG", "TONLOSS",
"TOFFENRG", "TOFFLOSS", "CONDENRG", "CONDLOSS", "TTLLOSS",
"TTLENRG".
"DVBYDT" is the parameter for the dV by dt measurement.
"DIBYDT" is the parameter for the dI by dt measurement.
"SOAHITSCNT" is the parameter for the SOA measurement.

2-1134 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples POWer:POWer1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MINimum? "TruePwr" might return

4.17829019093E–9, indicating the minimum value of true power for the current
acquisition.

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:PK2PK? (Query Only)

This command queries the peak-to-peak value of the current acquisition for the
measurement parameter in the specified power measurement number.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1135

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:PK2PK? {InputPwr|

Output1Pwr|Output2Pwr|Output3Pwr|Efficiency1|Efficiency2|
Efficiency3|TotalEfficiency|INDUCT|IVSINTV|MAGLOSS|Bpeak|Br|
Hc|Hmax|IRipple|DeltaB|DeltaH|Permeability|RDS|TRUEPWR|APPPWR|
REPWR|PWRFACTOR|PHASE|PWRFREQ|ICFACTOR|VCFACTOR|IRMS|VRMS|
TONENRG|TONLOSS|TOFFENRG|TOFFLOSS|CONDENRG|CONDLOSS|TTLLOSS|
TTLENRG|DVBYDT|DIBYDT|SOAHITSCNT|LRIPRMS|LRIPPKPK|SWRIPRMS|
SWRIPPKPK|PRIOD|FREQ|PDUTY|NDUTY|PPULSE|NPULSE|AMPL|PKPK|
HIGH|LOW|MAX|MIN|INRUSH|CAPACITANCE|OUTPUT1|
OUTPUT2|OUTPUT3|OUTPUT4|OUTPUT5|OUTPUT6|OUTPUT7|
GAINCROSSOVERFREQ|PHASECROSSOVERFREQ|GM|PM|
MAXPSRR|MAXPSRRFREQ|MINPSRR|MINPSRRFREQ}

NOTE. Above entries are <QSTring> entries, and must be entered in enclosing
quotes.

2-1136 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

"DIBYDT" is the parameter for the dI by dt measurement.

"SOAHITSCNT" is the parameter for the SOA measurement.
"LRIPRMS" and "LRIPPKPK" are the parameters for the Line Ripple
measurement.
"SWRIPRMS" and "SWRIPPKPK" are the parameters for the Switching Ripple
measurement.
"PRIOD" is the parameter for the Cycle Period measurement.
"FREQ" is the parameter for the Cycle Frequency measurement.
"PDUTY" is the parameter for the Positive Duty Cycle measurement.
"NDUTY" is the parameter for the Negative Duty Cycle measurement.
"PPULSE" is the parameter for the Positive Pulse Width measurement.
"NPULSE" is the parameter for the Negative Pulse Width measurement.
"AMPL" is the parameter for the Cycle Amplitude measurement.
"PKPK" is the parameter for the Cycle Peak–Peak measurement.
"HIGH" is the parameter for the Cycle Top measurement.
"LOW" is the parameter for the Cycle Base measurement.
"Max" is the parameter for the Cycle Max measurement.
"MIN" is the parameter for the Cycle Min measurement.
"INRUSH" is the parameter for the Inrush Current measurement.
"CAPACITANCE" is the parameter for the Input Capacitance measurement.
"OUTPUT1" - "OUTPUT7" are the parameters for the Turn On Time and Turn
Off Time measurements.
"GAINCROSSOVERFREQ", "PHASECROSSOVERFREQ", "GM", "PM" are
the parameters for the Control Loop Response measurement.
"MAXPSRR", "MAXPSRRFREQ", "MINPSRR", "MINPSRRFREQ" are the
parameters for the PSRR measurement

Examples POWer:POWer1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:PK2PK? "TONLoss" might return

9.91, indicating the peak-to-peak value of Ton Energy for the current acquisition.

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:POHCL? (Query Only)

This command queries the limit of partial odd harmonic current for the specified
power measurement number. The power measurement number is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1137

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:POHCL? "harmonics"

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.

Examples POWer:POWer1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:POHCL? "harmonics" might return

251.3529788962128E-3, indicating the limit of partial odd harmonic current
for the power measurement badge 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:POHCM? (Query Only)

This command queries the measured value of partial odd harmonic current for
the specified power measurement number. The power measurement number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:POHCM? "harmonics"

Examples POWer:POWer1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:POHCM? "harmonics" might return

515.422617782020E-6, indicating the measured value of partial odd harmonic
current for the power measurement badge 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:POHCS? (Query Only)

This command queries the status of partial odd harmonic current for the specified
power measurement number. The power measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

2-1138 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:POHCS? "harmonics"

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.

Examples POWer:POWer1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:POHCS? "harmonics" might

return Pass, indicating the status of partial odd harmonic current for power
measurement 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:POPUlation? (Query Only)

This command queries the population (number of complete cycles) of the current
acquisition for the measurement parameter in the specified power measurement
number. The power measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:POPUlation? {InputPwr|

Output1Pwr|Output2Pwr|Output3Pwr|Efficiency1|Efficiency2|
Efficiency3|TotalEfficiency|INDUCT|IVSINTV|MAGLOSS|Bpeak|Br|
Hc|Hmax|IRipple|DeltaB|DeltaH|Permeability|RDS|TRUEPWR|
APPPWR|REPWR|PWRFACTOR|PHASE|PWRFREQ|ICFACTOR|VCFACTOR|IRMS|
VRMS|TONENRG|TONLOSS|TOFFENRG|TOFFLOSS|CONDENRG|CONDLOSS|
TTLLOSS|TTLENRG|DVBYDT|DIBYDT|SOAHITSCNT|LRIPRMS|LRIPPKPK|
SWRIPRMS|SWRIPPKPK|PRIOD|FREQ|PDUTY|NDUTY|PPULSE|NPULSE|
AMPL|PKPK|HIGH|LOW|MAX|MIN|INRUSH|CAPACITANCE|OUTPUT1|
OUTPUT2|OUTPUT3|OUTPUT4|OUTPUT5|OUTPUT6|OUTPUT7|
GAINCROSSOVERFREQ|PHASECROSSOVERFREQ|GM|PM|
MAXPSRR|MAXPSRRFREQ|MINPSRR|MINPSRRFREQ}

NOTE. Above entries are <QSTring> entries, and must be entered in enclosing
quotes.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1139

Commands listed in alphabetical order

For Efficiency measurement, the parameters are "InputPwr", "Output1Pwr",

"Output2Pwr", "Output3Pwr", "Efficiency1", "Efficiency2", "Efficiency3",
"TotalEfficiency".
For Inductance measurement, the parameter is "INDUCT".
For IVSIntegralV measurement, the parameter is "IVSINTV".
For Magnetic Loss measurement, the parameter is "MAGLOSS".
For Magnetic Property measurement, the parameters are "Bpeak", "Br", "Hc",
"Hmax", "IRipple", "DeltaB", "DeltaH", "Permeability".
For RDSon measurement, the parameter is "RDS".
For Power Quality measurement, the parameters are "TRUEPWR", "APPPWR",
"REPWR", "PWRFACTOR", "PHASE", "PWRFREQ", "ICFACTOR",
"VCFACTOR", "IRMS", "VRMS".
For Switching Loss measurement, the parameters are "TONENRG", "TONLOSS",
"TOFFENRG", "TOFFLOSS", "CONDENRG", "CONDLOSS", "TTLLOSS",
"TTLENRG".
"DVBYDT" is the parameter for the dV by dt measurement.
"DIBYDT" is the parameter for the dI by dt measurement.
"SOAHITSCNT" is the parameter for the SOA measurement.
"LRIPRMS" and "LRIPPKPK" are the parameters for the Line Ripple
measurement.
"SWRIPRMS" and "SWRIPPKPK" are the parameters for the Switching Ripple
measurement.
"PRIOD" is the parameter for the Cycle Period measurement.
"FREQ" is the parameter for the Cycle Frequency measurement.
"PDUTY" is the parameter for the Positive Duty Cycle measurement.
"NDUTY" is the parameter for the Negative Duty Cycle measurement.
"PPULSE" is the parameter for the Positive Pulse Width measurement.
"NPULSE" is the parameter for the Negative Pulse Width measurement.
"AMPL" is the parameter for the Cycle Amplitude measurement.
"PKPK" is the parameter for the Cycle Peak–Peak measurement.
"HIGH" is the parameter for the Cycle Top measurement.
"LOW" is the parameter for the Cycle Base measurement.
"Max" is the parameter for the Cycle Max measurement.
"MIN" is the parameter for the Cycle Min measurement.

2-1140 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

"INRUSH" is the parameter for the Inrush Current measurement.

"CAPACITANCE" is the parameter for the Input Capacitance measurement.
"OUTPUT1" - "OUTPUT7" are the parameters for the Turn On Time and Turn
Off Time measurements.
"GAINCROSSOVERFREQ", "PHASECROSSOVERFREQ", "GM", "PM" are
the parameters for the Control Loop Response measurement.
"MAXPSRR", "MAXPSRRFREQ", "MINPSRR", "MINPSRRFREQ" are the
parameters for the PSRR measurement

Examples POWer:POWer1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:POPUlation? "CondEnrg" might

return 9.24E+4, indicating the population (number of complete cycles) of
conduction energy for the current acquisition.

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:RMS? (Query Only)

This command queries the RMS value of the source selected for the specified
power measurement number. The power measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:RMS? "harmonics"

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.

Examples POWer:POWer1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:RMS? "harmonics" might return

1.4143420437461, indicating the RMS value of the source selected for power
measurement 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:STATUS? (Query Only)

This command queries the status of the measurement for the specified power
measurement number. The power measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1141

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:STATUS? "harmonics"

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.

Examples POWer:POWer1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:STATUS? "harmonics" might return

Pass, indicating that the measurement has passed according to the standard for
power measurement 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:STDDev? (Query Only)

This command queries the standard deviation value of the current acquisition for
the measurement parameter in the specified power measurement number. The
power measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:STDDev?
{InputPwr|Output1Pwr|
Output2Pwr|Output3Pwr|Efficiency1|Efficiency2|Efficiency3|
TotalEfficiency|INDUCT|IVSINTV|MAGLOSS|Bpeak|Br|Hc|Hmax|IRipple|
DeltaB|DeltaH|Permeability|RDS|TRUEPWR|APPPWR|REPWR|PWRFACTOR|
PHASE|PWRFREQ|ICFACTOR|VCFACTOR|IRMS|VRMS|TONENRG|TONLOSS|
TOFFENRG|TOFFLOSS|CONDENRG|CONDLOSS|TTLLOSS|TTLENRG|DVBYDT|
DIBYDT|SOAHITSCNT|LRIPRMS|LRIPPKPK|SWRIPRMS|SWRIPPKPK|PRIOD|
FREQ|PDUTY|NDUTY|PPULSE|NPULSE|AMPL|PKPK|HIGH|LOW|MAX|MIN
|INRUSH|CAPACITANCE|OUTPUT1|
OUTPUT2|OUTPUT3|OUTPUT4|OUTPUT5|OUTPUT6|OUTPUT7|
GAINCROSSOVERFREQ|PHASECROSSOVERFREQ|GM|PM|
MAXPSRR|MAXPSRRFREQ|MINPSRR|MINPSRRFREQ}

NOTE. Above entries are <QSTring> entries, and must be entered in enclosing
quotes.

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.

2-1142 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

<QString> = the measurement result that you want to return from the specified
power measurement number. Available results depend on the power measurement
being taken in the specified measurement number. The valid <Qstring> arguments
are:
For Efficiency measurement, the parameters are "InputPwr", "Output1Pwr",
"Output2Pwr", "Output3Pwr", "Efficiency1", "Efficiency2", "Efficiency3",
"TotalEfficiency".
For Inductance measurement, the parameter is "INDUCT".
For IVSIntegralV measurement, the parameter is "IVSINTV".
For Magnetic Loss measurement, the parameter is "MAGLOSS".
For Magnetic Property measurement, the parameters are "Bpeak", "Br", "Hc",
"Hmax", "IRipple", "DeltaB", "DeltaH", "Permeability".
For RDSon measurement, the parameter is "RDS".
For Power Quality measurement, the parameters are "TRUEPWR", "APPPWR",
"REPWR", "PWRFACTOR", "PHASE", "PWRFREQ", "ICFACTOR",
"VCFACTOR", "IRMS", "VRMS".
For Switching Loss measurement, the parameters are "TONENRG", "TONLOSS",
"TOFFENRG", "TOFFLOSS", "CONDENRG", "CONDLOSS", "TTLLOSS",
"TTLENRG".
"DVBYDT" is the parameter for the dV by dt measurement.
"DIBYDT" is the parameter for the dI by dt measurement.
"SOAHITSCNT" is the parameter for the SOA measurement.
"LRIPRMS" and "LRIPPKPK" are the parameters for the Line Ripple
measurement.
"SWRIPRMS" and "SWRIPPKPK" are the parameters for the Switching Ripple
measurement.
"PRIOD" is the parameter for the Cycle Period measurement.
"FREQ" is the parameter for the Cycle Frequency measurement.
"PDUTY" is the parameter for the Positive Duty Cycle measurement.
"NDUTY" is the parameter for the Negative Duty Cycle measurement.
"PPULSE" is the parameter for the Positive Pulse Width measurement.
"NPULSE" is the parameter for the Negative Pulse Width measurement.
"AMPL" is the parameter for the Cycle Amplitude measurement.
"PKPK" is the parameter for the Cycle Peak–Peak measurement.
"HIGH" is the parameter for the Cycle Top measurement.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1143

Commands listed in alphabetical order

"LOW" is the parameter for the Cycle Base measurement.

"Max" is the parameter for the Cycle Max measurement.
"MIN" is the parameter for the Cycle Min measurement.
"INRUSH" is the parameter for the Inrush Current measurement.
"CAPACITANCE" is the parameter for the Input Capacitance measurement.
"OUTPUT1" - "OUTPUT7" are the parameters for the Turn On Time and Turn
Off Time measurements.
"GAINCROSSOVERFREQ", "PHASECROSSOVERFREQ", "GM", "PM" are
the parameters for the Control Loop Response measurement.
"MAXPSRR", "MAXPSRRFREQ", "MINPSRR", "MINPSRRFREQ" are the
parameters for the PSRR measurement

Examples POWer:POWer2:RESUlts:CURRentacq:STDDev? "TONLoss" might return

1.31E+2, indicating the standard deviation value of Ton Energy for current
acquisition of power measurement 2.

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:THDF? (Query Only)

This command queries the total harmonic distortion (fundamental) value for
the specified power measurement number. The power measurement number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:THDF? "harmonics"

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.

Examples POWer:POWer1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:THDF? "harmonics" might return

96.9846996670887E-3, indicating the value of total harmonic distortion
(fundamental) for power measurement 1.

2-1144 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:THDR? (Query Only)

This command queries the total harmonic distortion (RMS) value for the specified
power measurement number. The power measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:THDR? "harmonics"

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.

Examples POWer:POWer1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:THDR? "harmonics" might return

107.1384597967292E-3, indicating the value of total harmonic distortion
(fundamental) for power measurement 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:TRPWR? (Query Only)

This command queries the true power value for the specified power measurement
number. The power measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:TRPWR? "harmonics"

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.

Examples POWer:POWer1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:TRPWR? "harmonics" might return

2.0002612633993, indicating the true power value for power measurement 1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1145

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:VRMS? (Query Only)

This command queries the RMS voltage value for the specified power
measurement number. The power measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:VRMS? "harmonics"

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.

Examples POWer:POWer3:RESUlts:CURRentacq:VRMS? "harmonics" might

return 1.4117680233354, indicating the RMS voltage value for the power
measurement 3.

POWer:POWer<x>:SEQSETup (No Query Form)

This command sets up the instrument's horizontal, vertical, and trigger parameters
to optimize for taking the specified power measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SEQSETup Execute

Arguments POWer<x> is the Power measurement identifier number. The number must be for
a power measurement that requires a single sequence acquisition.
Execute sets the measurement to run an acquisition and acquire data for the
specified single sequence power measurement.

Examples POWer:POWer3:SEQuence Execute runs the power measurement 3 sequence

setup.

2-1146 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:SEQuence
This command sets or queries the run state of a single sequence power
measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SEQuence {RUN|RERUN}

POWer:POWer<x>:SEQuence?

Arguments POWer<x> is the Power measurement identifier number. The number must be for
a power measurement that requires a single sequence acquisition.
RUN sets the measurement to run an acquisition and acquire data for the specified
single sequence power measurement.
RERUN sets the measurement to rerun an acquisition and acquire data for the
specified single sequence power measurement.

Examples POWer:POWer3:SEQuence RUN sets power measurement 3 to run the

measurement.
POWer:POWer1:SEQuence? might return POWer:POWer1:SEQuence RERUN,
indicating that the current state of the power measurement is rerun.

POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:ISOURce
This command sets or queries the current source for SOA measurement in the
specified power measurement number. The power measurement number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:ISOURce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:ISOURce?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1147

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
CH<x> = A channel specifier; <x> is 1 through 8 and is limited by the number
of FlexChannels on your instrument.
MATH<x> = A math waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:SOA:ISOURce CH2 sets the current source for the SOA
measurement 1 as channel 2.

POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:POINT<x>
This command sets or queries the X or Y coordinate value for an SOA mask of a
specified power measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:POINT<x> <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:POINT<x>?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
POINT<x> = 1X | 2X | 3X | 4X | 5X | 6X | 7X | 8X | 9X | 10X | 11X | 12X | 13X |
14X | 15X | 16X | 17X | 18X | 19X | 20X | 21X | 22X | 23X | 24X | 25X | 26X | 27X
| 28X | 29X | 30X | 31X | 32X | 1Y | 2Y | 3Y | 4Y | 5Y | 6Y | 7Y | 8Y | 9Y | 10Y |
11Y | 12Y | 13Y | 14Y | 15Y | 16Y | 17Y | 18Y | 19Y | 20Y | 21Y | 22Y | 23Y |
24Y | 25Y | 26Y | 27Y | 28Y | 29Y | 30Y | 31Y | 32Y
<NR1> sets the specified SOA mask X or Y point value, as a floating number, in
the range from –5000 to 5000.

Examples POWer:POWer1:SOA:POINT6Y 0.125 sets the #6Y coordinate value of the

SOA mask of power measurement 1 to 0.125.
POWer:POWer3:SOA:POINT12X? might return
POWer:POWer3:SOA:POINT12X 1.435, indicating that the #12X coordinate
value of the SOA mask of power measurement 3 is 1.435.

2-1148 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:RECAllmask
This command recalls or queries the recall mask file name in the specified power
measurement number. The power measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:RECAllmask
POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:RECAllmask?

Examples POWer:POWer1:SOA:RECAllmask? might return Tek000.msk, indicating the

file name of the mask that will be recalled.

POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:RECAllmask:FILEName
This command sets or queries the file name for saving SOA mask file name in
the specified power measurement number. The power measurement number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:RECAllmask:FILEName
POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:RECAllmask:FILEName?

Examples POWer:POWer1:SOA:RECAllmask:FILEName

POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:SAVemask
This command saves the mask file as per the name configured and at the
configured path or queries the mask file name, path, and file type for the
SOA measurement in the specified power measurement number. The power
measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1149

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:SAVemask
POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:SAVemask?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:SAVemask:FILEName

Examples POWer:POWer1:SOA:SAVemask saves the mask file of SOA measurement as the

configured file name at the configured path.

POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:SAVemask:AUTOINCrement
This command sets or queries the state of auto-increment for saved SOA mask
file names in the specified power measurement number. The power measurement
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:SAVemask:AUTOINCrement
POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:SAVemask:AUTOINCrement?

POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:SAVemask:FILEName
This command sets or queries the mask file name for SOA measurement in the
specified power measurement number. The power measurement number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:SAVemask:FILEName
POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:SAVemask:FILEName?

Examples POWer:POWer1:SOA:SAVemask:FILEName “Tek001.msk” sets the mask file

name for SOA measurement as Tek001.msk.

2-1150 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:SAVemask:FOLDer
This command sets or queries the mask file folder path for SOA measurement
in the specified power measurement number. The power measurement number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:SAVemask:FOLDer
POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:SAVemask:FOLDer?

Examples POWer:POWer1:SOA:SAVemask:FOLDer “C:” sets the mask file folder path

for SOA measurement as C drive.

POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:VSOURce
This command sets or queries the voltage source for SOA measurement in the
specified power measurement number. The power measurement number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:VSOURce {CH<x> | MATH<x> | REF<x>}

POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:VSOURce?

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:SOA:VSOURce CH1 sets the voltage source for SOA

measurement as channel 1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1151

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:DEVICEType
This command sets or queries the conduction calculation method for switching
loss measurement in the specified power measurement number. The power
measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:DEVICEType {MOSFET | BJT}

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:DEVICEType?

Examples POWer:POWer1:SWITCHINGLOSS:DEVICEType MOSFET sets the conduction

calculation method as mosfet for switching loss measurement of the power
measurement badge Power 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:GATESOurce
This command sets or queries the gate voltage (Vg) for the switching loss
measurement in the specified power measurement number. The power
measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:GATESOurce {CH<x> | MATH<x> |

REF<x>}
POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:GATESOurce?

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

2-1152 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples POWer:POWer1:SWITCHINGLOSS:GATESOurce MATH1 sets the gate voltage

(Vg) source for switching loss measurement of power measurement 1 as MATH1.
POWer:POWer2:SWITCHINGLOSS:VSOURce? might return MATH3 indicating
the gate voltage (Vg) for switching loss measurement of power measurement 2.

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:ILEVELAbs
This command sets or queries the current level (Ton-Start & Stop) in absolute
units for switching loss measurement in the specified power measurement number.
The power measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:ILEVELAbs <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:ILEVELAbs?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:LEVELUNIts

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR1> ranges from –100 to 100

Examples POWer:POWer1:SWITCHINGLOSS:ILEVELAbs 1.2 sets the current level

(Ton-Start & Stop) value as 1.2 for the switching loss measurement in the power
measurement badge 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:ILEVELPct
This command sets or queries the current level (Ton-Start & Stop) in percentage
for switching loss measurement in the specified power measurement number. The
power measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1153

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:ILEVELPct <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:ILEVELPct?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:LEVELUNIts

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR1> ranges from 0.0001 to 90

Examples POWer:POWer1:SWITCHINGLOSS:ILEVELPct 6 sets the current level

(Ton-Start & Stop) value as 6 percentage for the switching loss measurement in
the power measurement badge 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:ISOURce
This command sets or queries the current source for the switching loss
measurement in the specified power measurement number. The power
measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:ISOURce {CH<x> | MATH<x> |

REF<x>}
POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:ISOURce?

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:SWITCHINGLOSS:ISOURce CH2 sets the current source for the

switching loss measurement in the specified power measurement badge as CH2.

2-1154 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer2:SWITCHINGLOSS:ISOURce? might return CH1 indicating the

current source for switching loss measurement of Power 2 power measurement
badge.

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:LEVELUNIts
This command sets or queries the level units for switching loss measurement
in the specified power measurement number. The power measurement number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:LEVELUNIts {PERCent | ABSolute}

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:LEVELUNIts?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
PERCent to set the High, Mid, and Low reference levels in percentage.

ABSolute to set the High, Mid, and Low reference levels to specific signal levels.

Examples POWer:POWer1:SWITCHINGLOSS:LEVELUNIts ABSolute sets the level units

as Absolute for switching loss measurement of the power measurement badge
Power 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:RDSOn
This command sets or queries the RDS(on) value for switching loss measurement
in the specified power measurement number. The power measurement number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:RDSOn <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:RDSOn?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1155

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:DEVICEType

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR1> ranges from 0 to 100

Examples POWer:POWer1:SWITCHINGLOSS:RDSOn 2 sets the switching loss RDSOn

value as 2 for switching loss measurement of the power measurement badge
Power 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:SWLCONFIGType
This command sets or queries the configuration type for the switching loss
measurement in the specified power measurement number. The power
measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:SWLCONFIGType {SMPS | PFC |

FLYBACK}
POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:SWLCONFIGType?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
SMPS: Select this option in case of signals without noise and ringing. The Vg
source is not required. Select Vg souce (Source 3), in case of noisy signal.
PFC: Select this option when input DUT signals are from Power Factor Correction
Circuit. For this case, Vg source is mandatory.
FLYBACK: Select this option when input signals are ringing. This option does
not require a Vg source.

Examples POWer:POWer1:SWITCHINGLOSS:SWLCONFIGType PFC sets the configuration

type as PFC for the switching loss measurement of the power measurement badge
Power 1.

2-1156 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:VCESat
This command sets or queries the value for the VCE(sat) value for switching
loss measurement in the specified power measurement number. The power
measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:VCESat <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:VCESat?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:DEVICEType

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR1> ranges from 0.001 to 100

Examples POWer:POWer1:SWITCHINGLOSS:VCESat 6 sets VCE(sat) value as 6 for

switching loss measurement of the power measurement badge Power 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:VGLevel
This command sets or queries the gate voltage value (Vg Level Ton-Start) for the
switching loss measurement in the specified power measurement number. The
power measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:VGLevel <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:VGLevel?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR1> ranges from –100 to 100

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1157

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples POWer:POWer1:SWITCHINGLOSS:VGLevel 1.2 sets the gate voltage value (Vg

Level Ton-Start) for the switching loss measurement of the power measurement
badge Power 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:VLEVELAbs
This command sets or queries the voltage level (Ton-Start & Stop) in absolute
units for switching loss measurement in the specified power measurement number.
The power measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:VLEVELAbs <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:VLEVELAbs?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR1> ranges from –100 to 100

Examples POWer:POWer1:SWITCHINGLOSS:VLEVELAbs 2 sets the voltage level

(Ton-Start & Stop) value as 2 for the switching loss measurement in the power
measurement badge 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:VLEVELPct
This command sets or queries the voltage level (Ton-Start & Stop) in percentage
for switching loss measurement in the specified power measurement number. The
power measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:VLEVELPct <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:VLEVELPct?

2-1158 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:LEVELUNIts

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR1> ranges from 0.0001 to 90

Examples POWer:POWer1:SWITCHINGLOSS:VLEVELPct 7 sets the voltage level

(Ton-Start & Stop) value as 7 percentage for the switching loss measurement in
the power measurement badge 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:VSOURce
This command sets or queries the voltage source for the switching loss
measurement in the specified power measurement number. The power
measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:VSOURce {CH<x> | MATH<x> |

REF<x>}
POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:VSOURce?

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:SWITCHINGLOSS:VSOURce REF1 sets the voltage source

for the switching loss measurement in the specified power measurement badge
as REF1.
POWer:POWer2:SWITCHINGLOSS:VSOURce? might return REF3 indicating the
voltage source for switching loss measurement of Power 2 power measurement
badge.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1159

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGRIPPLE:INPUTSOurce
This command sets or queries the input source for switching ripple measurement
in the specified power measurement number. The power measurement number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGRIPPLE:INPUTSOurce {CH<x> | MATH<x>

| REF<x>}
POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGRIPPLE:INPUTSOurce?

REF<x> = A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Examples POWer:POWer1:SWITCHINGRIPPLE:INPUTSOurce CH5 sets the input source

for switching ripple measurement as CH5 for the power measurement badge
Power 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGRIPPLE:LFREQuency
This command sets or queries the switching frequency for switching ripple
measurement in the specified power measurement number. The power
measurement number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGRIPPLE:LFREQuency <NR1>

POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGRIPPLE:LFREQuency?

2-1160 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
<NR1> ranges from 50 to 1000000

Examples POWer:POWer1:SWITCHINGRIPPLE:SFREQuency 60000 sets the frequency

present for line ripple measurement as 60000 Hz.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:FREQuency
This command sets or queries the input frequency used by the AC or DC converter
of the specified Turn Off Time measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:FREQuency <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:FREQuency?

Examples POWer:POWer1:TURNOFFtime:FREQuency 50 sets the frequency value of

Turn Off Time measurement 1 to 50 Hz.
POWer:POWer4:TURNOFFtime:FREQuency? might return
POWer:POWer4:TURNOFFtime:FREQuency 350, indicating that the frequency
value of Turn Off Time measurement 4 is set to 350 Hz.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:INPUTLEVel
This command sets or queries the input voltage level of the specified Turn Off
Time measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1161

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:INPUTLEVel <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:INPUTLEVel?

Examples POWer:POWer1:TURNOFFtime:INPUTLEVel –350 sets the input voltage level

of Turn Off Time measurement 1 to –350 V.
POWer:POWer4:TURNOFFtime:INPUTLEVel? might return
POWer:POWer4:TURNOFFtime:INPUTLEVel 200, indicating that the input
voltage level value of Turn Off Time measurement 4 is set to 200 V.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:INPUTSOurce
This command sets or queries the input source of the specified Turn Off Time
measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:INPUTSOurce
{CH<x>|REF<x>|MATH<x>}
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:INPUTSOurce?

Examples POWer:POWer1:TURNOFFtime:INPUTSOurce CH4 sets the input source of

Turn Off Time measurement 1 to Channel 4.

2-1162 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer6:TURNOFFtime:INPUTSOurce? might return

POWer:POWer6:TURNOFFtime:INPUTSOurce MATH2, indicating that the input
source of Turn Off Time measurement 6 is set to Math waveform 2.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:MAXTIMe
This command sets or queries the maximum turn off time of the specified Turn
Off Time measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:MAXTIMe <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:MAXTIMe?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown on a power measurement badge in the UI.
<NR3> is a floating point number that represents the maximum time value, in
seconds, in the range 1 second to 500 seconds.

Examples POWer:POWer1:TURNOFFtime:MAXTIMe 70 sets the maximum time value of

Turn Off Time measurement 1 to 70 seconds.
POWer:POWer5:TURNOFFtime:MAXTIMe? might return
POWer:POWer5:TURNOFFtime:MAXTIMe 120, indicating that the
maximum time value of Turn Off Time measurement 5 is 120 seconds.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:MAXVoltage
This command sets or queries the maximum voltage of the specified Turn
OffTime measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:MAXVoltage <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:MAXVoltage?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1163

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples POWer:POWer1:TURNOFFtime:MAXVoltage 50 sets the maximum voltage

value of Turn Off Time measurement 1 to 50 volts.
POWer:POWer4:TURNOFFtime:MAXVoltage? might return
POWer:POWer4:TURNOFFtime:MAXVoltage 12, indicating that the maximum
voltage value of Turn Off Time measurement 4 is 12 volts.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:NUMOUTputs
This command sets or queries the number of outputs of the specified Turn Off
Time power measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:NUMOUTputs
{ONE|TWO|THREE|FOUR|FIVE| SIX|SEVEN}
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:NUMOUTputs?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT1SOURce

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT1VOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT2SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT2VOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT3SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT3VOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT4SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT4VOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT5SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT5VOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT6SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT6VOLTage

2-1164 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT7SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT7VOLTage

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown on a power measurement badge in the UI.
ONE through SEVEN sets the number of outputs for the Turn Off Time
measurement.

Examples POWer:POWer1:TURNOFFtime:NUMOUTputs TWO sets the number of outputs

of Turn Off Time measurement 1 to two.
POWer:POWer3:TURNOFFtime:NUMOUTputs? might return
POWer:POWer3:TURNOFFtime:NUMOUTputs FOUR, indicating that the number
of outputs of Turn Off Time measurement 3 is set to four inputs.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT1SOURce
This command sets or queries the output 1 source of the specified Turn Off Time
measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT1SOURce
{CH<x>|REF<x>|MATH<x>}
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT1SOURce?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown on a power measurement badge in the UI.
CH<x> A channel specifier in the range of 1 through 8 and is limited by the
number of instrument input channels.
REF<x> A Reference waveform specifier ≥1. This is the equivalent of the number
shown on a Reference waveform badge in the UI.
MATH<x> A Math waveform specifier ≥1. This is the equivalent of the number
shown on a Math waveform badge in the UI.

Examples POWer:POWer2:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT1SOURce CH2 sets the output 1 source

of Turn Off Time measurement 2 to Channel 2.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1165

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer1:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT1SOURce? might return

POWer:POWer1:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT1SOURce CH4, indicating that the
output 1 source of Turn Off Time measurement 1 is Channel 4.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT1VOLTage
This command sets or queries the output 1 voltage level of the of the specified
Turn Off Time power measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT1VOLTage <NR2>

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT1VOLTage?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:NUMOUTputs

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT1SOURce

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown on a power measurement badge in the UI.
<NR2> sets the output voltage value, in the range of –6,000 volts to +6,000 volts.

Examples POWer:POWer7:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT1VOLTage -2550 sets the output 1

voltage value of Turn Off Time power measurement 7 to –2,550 volts.
POWer:POWer3:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT1VOLTage? might return
POWer:POWer3:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT1VOLTage 1000, indicating that the
output 1 voltage value of Turn Off Time power measurement 3 is set to 1,000 volts.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT2SOURce
This command sets or queries the output 2 source of the specified Turn Off Time
measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

2-1166 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT2SOURce
{CH<x>|REF<x>|MATH<x>}
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT2SOURce?

Examples POWer:POWer3:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT2SOURce CH2 sets the output 2 source

of Turn Off Time measurement 3 to Channel 2.
POWer:POWer5:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT2SOURce? might return
POWer:POWer5:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT2SOURce CH8, indicating that the
output 2 source of Turn Off Time measurement 5 is Channel 8.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT2VOLTage
This command sets or queries the output 2 voltage level of the specified Turn
Off Time power measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT2VOLTage <NR2>

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT2VOLTage?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:NUMOUTputs

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT2SOURce

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1167

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples POWer:POWer3:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT2VOLTage -550 sets the output 2

voltage value of Turn Off Time power measurement 3 to –550 volts.
POWer:POWer1:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT2VOLTage? might return
POWer:POWer1:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT2VOLTage 100, indicating that the
output 2 voltage value of Turn Off Time power measurement 1 is set to 100 volts.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT3SOURce
This command sets or queries the output 3 source of the specified Turn Off Time
measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT3SOURce
{CH<x>|REF<x>|MATH<x>}
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT3SOURce?

Examples POWer:POWer3:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT3SOURce CH8 sets the output 3 source

of Turn Off Time measurement 3 to Channel 8.
POWer:POWer1:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT3SOURce? might return
POWer:POWer1:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT3SOURce CH4, indicating that the
output 3 source of Turn Off Time measurement 1 is Channel 4.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT3VOLTage
This command sets or queries the output 3 voltage level of the specified Turn
Off Time power measurement.

2-1168 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT3VOLTage <NR2>

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT3VOLTage?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:NUMOUTputs

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT3SOURce

Examples POWer:POWer4:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT3VOLTage -50 sets the output 3

voltage value of Turn Off Time power measurement 4 to –50 volts.
POWer:POWer8:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT3VOLTage? might return
POWer:POWer8:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT3VOLTage –200, indicating that the
output 3 voltage value of Turn Off Time power measurement 8 is set to –200 volts.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT4SOURce
This command sets or queries the output 4 source of the specified Turn Off Time
measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT4SOURce
{CH<x>|REF<x>|MATH<x>}
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT4SOURce?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1169

Commands listed in alphabetical order

REF<x> A Reference waveform specifier ≥1. This is the equivalent of the number
shown on a Reference waveform badge in the UI.
MATH<x> A Math waveform specifier ≥1. This is the equivalent of the number
shown on a Math waveform badge in the UI.

Examples POWer:POWer3:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT4SOURce CH2 sets the output 4 source

of Turn Off Time measurement 3 is Channel 2.
POWer:POWer10:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT4SOURce? might return
POWer:POWer10:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT4SOURce REF4, indicating that the
output 4 source of Turn Off Time measurement 10 is Reference waveform 4.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT4VOLTage
This command sets or queries the output 4 voltage level of the specified Turn
Off Time power measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT4VOLTage <NR2>

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT4VOLTage?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:NUMOUTputs

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT4SOURce

Examples POWer:POWer8:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT4VOLTage 50 sets the output 4 voltage

value of Turn Off Time power measurement 8 to 50 volts.
POWer:POWer4:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT4VOLTage? might return
POWer:POWer4:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT4VOLTage 1000, indicating that the
output 4 voltage value of Turn Off Time power measurement 4 is set to 1,000 volts.

2-1170 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT5SOURce
This command sets or queries the output 5 source of the specified Turn Off Time
measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT5SOURce
{CH<x>|REF<x>|MATH<x>}
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT5SOURce?

Examples POWer:POWer3:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT5SOURce CH2 sets the output 5 source

of Turn Off Time measurement 3 to Channel 2.
POWer:POWer11:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT5SOURce? might return
POWer:POWer11:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT5SOURce CH4, indicating that the
output 5 source of Turn Off Time measurement 11 is Channel 4.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT5VOLTage
This command sets or queries the output 5 voltage level of the specified Turn
Off Time power measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT5VOLTage <NR2>

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT5VOLTage?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1171

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:NUMOUTputs

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT5SOURce

Examples POWer:POWer2:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT5VOLTage -255 sets the output 5

voltage value of Turn Off Time power measurement 2 to –250 volts.
POWer:POWer3:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT5VOLTage? might return
POWer:POWer3:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT5VOLTage 100, indicating that the
output 5 voltage value of Turn Off Time power measurement 3 is set to 100 volts.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT6SOURce
This command sets or queries the output 6 source of the specified Turn Off Time
measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT6SOURce
{CH<x>|REF<x>|MATH<x>}
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT6SOURce?

Examples POWer:POWer3:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT6SOURce CH2 sets the output 6 source

of Turn Off Time measurement 3 to Channel 2.

2-1172 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer1:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT6SOURce? might return

POWer:POWer1:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT6SOURce CH4, indicating that the
output 6 source of Turn Off Time measurement 1 is Channel 4.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT6VOLTage
This command sets or queries the output 6 voltage level of the specified Turn
Off Time power measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT6VOLTage <NR2>

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT6VOLTage?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:NUMOUTputs

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT6SOURce

Examples POWer:POWer5:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT6VOLTage 1550 sets the output 6

voltage value of Turn Off Time power measurement 5 to 1,550 volts.
POWer:POWer2:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT6VOLTage? might return
POWer:POWer2:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT6VOLTage –100, indicating that the
output 6 voltage value of Turn Off Time power measurement 2 is set to –100 volts.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT7SOURce
This command sets or queries the output 7 source of the specified Turn Off Time
measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1173

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT7SOURce
{CH<x>|REF<x>|MATH<x>}
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT7SOURce?

Examples POWer:POWer3:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT7SOURce CH2 sets the output 7 source

of Turn Off Time measurement 3 is Channel 2.
POWer:POWer1:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT7SOURce? might return
POWer:POWer1:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT7SOURce CH4, indicating that the
output 7 source of Turn Off Time measurement 1 is channel 4.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT7VOLTage
This command sets or queries the output 7 voltage level of the specified Turn
Off Time power measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT7VOLTage <NR2>

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT7VOLTage?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:NUMOUTputs

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT7SOURce

2-1174 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples POWer:POWer2:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT7VOLTage -2100 sets the output 7

voltage value of Turn Off Time power measurement 2 to –2,100 volts.
POWer:POWer3:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT7VOLTage? might return
POWer:POWer3:TURNOFFtime:OUTPUT7VOLTage 450, indicating that the
output 7 voltage value of Turn Off Time power measurement 3 is set to 450 volts.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:TYPE
This command sets or queries the type of AC/DC converter used in the specified
Turn Off Time power measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:TYPE {DCDC|ACDC}

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:TYPE?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown on a power measurement badge in the UI.
DCDC sets the measurement to use a DC to DC converter.

ACDC sets the measurement to use an AC to DC converter.

Examples POWer:POWer1:TURNOFFtime:TYPE ACDC sets Turn Off time measurement 1

to use an AC to DC converter.
POWer:POWer5:TURNOFFtime:TYPE? might return
POWer:POWer5:TURNOFFtime:TYPE DCDC, indicating that the converter type
for Turn Off Time measurement 5 is set to use a DC to DC converter.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:FREQuency
This command sets or queries the input frequency used by the AC or DC converter
of the specified Turn On Time measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1175

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:FREQuency <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:FREQuency?

Examples POWer:POWer1:TURNONtime:FREQuency 50 sets the frequency value of the

AC/DC converter in Turn On Time measurement 1 to 50 Hz.
POWer:POWer4:TURNONtime:FREQuency? might return
POWer:POWer4:TURNONtime:FREQuency 200, indicating that the
frequency value of the AC/DC converter in Turn On Time measurement 4 is
set to 200 Hz.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:INPUTLEVel
This command sets or returns the input voltage level of the specified Turn On
Time measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:INPUTLEVel <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:INPUTLEVel?

Examples POWer:POWer12:TURNONtime:INPUTLEVel –350 sets the input voltage level

of Turn On Time measurement 12 to –350 V.
POWer:POWer4:TURNONtime:INPUTLEVel? might return
POWer:POWer4:TURNONtime:INPUTLEVel 230, indicating that the input
voltage level value of Turn ON Time measurement 4 is set to 230 V.

2-1176 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:INPUTSOurce
This command sets or queries the input source of the specified Turn On Time
measurement.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:INPUTSOurce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:INPUTSOurce?

Examples POWer:POWer1:TURNONtime:INPUTSOurce CH2 sets the input source of Turn

On Time measurement 1 to Channel 2.
POWer:POWer2:TURNONtime:INPUTSOurce? might return
POWer:POWer2:TURNONtime:INPUTSOurce MATH6, indicating that the input
source of Turn On Time measurement 2 is Math waveform 6.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:MAXTIMe
This command sets or returns the maximum turn on time of the specified Turn
On Time measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:MAXTIMe <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:MAXTIMe?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown on a power measurement badge in the UI.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1177

Commands listed in alphabetical order

<NR3> is a floating point number that represents the maximum time value, in
seconds, in the range 1 second to 500 seconds.

Examples POWer:POWer3:TURNONtime:MAXTIMe 30 sets the maximum time value of

Turn On Time measurement 3 to 30 seconds.
POWer:POWer5:TURNONtime:MAXTIMe? might return
POWer:POWer5:TURNONtime:MAXTIMe 120, indicating that the
maximum time value of Turn On Time measurement 5 is set to 120 seconds.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:MAXVoltage
This command sets or returns the maximum voltage setting of the specified Turn
On Time measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:MAXVoltage <NR3>

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:MAXVoltage?

Examples POWer:POWer1:TURNONtime:MAXVoltage 50 sets the maximum voltage

value of Turn On Time measurement 1 to 50 volts.
POWer:POWer4:TURNONtime:MAXVoltage? might return
POWer:POWer4:TURNONtime:MAXVoltage 12, indicating that the maximum
voltage value of Turn On Time measurement 4 is set to 12 volts.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:NUMOUTputs
This command sets or queries the number of outputs for the specified Turn On
Time power measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

2-1178 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:NUMOUTputs
{ONE|TWO|THREE|FOUR|FIVE| SIX|SEVEN}
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:NUMOUTputs?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:INPUTSOurce

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT1SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT1VOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT2SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT2VOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT3SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT3VOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT4SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT4VOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT5SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT5VOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT6SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT6VOLTage
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT7SOURce
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT7VOLTage

Examples POWer:POWer1:TURNONtime:NUMOUTputs TWO sets the number of outputs of

Turn On Time measurement 1 to two.
POWer:POWer3:TURNONtime:NUMOUTputs? might return
POWer:POWer3:TURNONtime:NUMOUTputs FOUR, indicating that the number
of outputs of Turn On Time measurement 3 is set to four inputs.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1179

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT1SOURce
This command sets or queries the output 1 source of the specified Turn On Time
measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT1SOURce
{CH<x>|REF<x>|MATH<x>}
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT1SOURce?

Examples POWer:POWer5:TURNONtime:OUTPUT1SOURce CH2 sets the output 1 source

of Turn On Time measurement 5 to Channel 2.
POWer:POWer1:TURNONTIME:OUTPUT1SOURce? might return
POWer:POWer1:TURNONTIME:OUTPUT1SOURce CH4, indicating that the output
1 source of Turn On Time measurement 1 is Channel 4.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT1VOLTage
This command sets or queries the output 1 voltage level of the specified Turn
On Time power measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT1VOLTage <NR2>

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT1VOLTage?

2-1180 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:NUMOUTputs

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT1SOURce

Examples POWer:POWer1:TURNONtime:OUTPUT1VOLTage -2550 sets the output 1

voltage value of Turn On Time power measurement 1 to –2,550 volts.
POWer:POWer3:TURNONtime:OUTPUT1VOLTage? might return
POWer:POWer3:TURNONtime:OUTPUT1VOLTage 1000, indicating that the
output 1 voltage value of Turn On Time power measurement 3 is set to 1,000 volts.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT2SOURce
This command sets or queries the output 2 source of the specified Turn On Time
measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT2SOURce
{CH<x>|REF<x>|MATH<x>}
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT2SOURce?

Examples POWer:POWer2:TURNONtime:OUTPUT2SOURce CH2 sets the output 2 source

of Turn On Time measurement 2 to Channel 2.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1181

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer1:TURNONTIME:OUTPUT2SOURce? might return

POWer:POWer1:TURNONTIME:OUTPUT2SOURce CH4, indicating that the output
2 source of Turn On Time measurement 1 is Channel 4.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT2VOLTage
This command sets or queries the output 2 voltage level of the specified Turn
On Time power measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT2VOLTage <NR2>

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT2VOLTage?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:NUMOUTputs

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT2SOURce

Examples POWer:POWer7:TURNONtime:OUTPUT2VOLTage -2550 sets the output 2

voltage value of Turn On Time power measurement 7 to –2,550 volts.
POWer:POWer1:TURNONtime:OUTPUT2VOLTage? might return
POWer:POWer1:TURNONtime:OUTPUT2VOLTage 120, indicating that the
output 2 voltage value of Turn On Time power measurement 1 is set to 120 volts.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT3SOURce
This command sets or queries the output 3 source of the specified Turn On Time
measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

2-1182 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT3SOURce
{CH<x>|REF<x>|MATH<x>}
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT3SOURce?

Examples POWer:POWer3:TURNONtime:OUTPUT3SOURce CH2 sets the output 3 source

of Turn On Time measurement 3 to Channel 2.
POWer:POWer13:TURNONTIME:OUTPUT3SOURce? might return
POWer:POWer13:TURNONTIME:OUTPUT3SOURce REF3, indicating that the
output 3 source of Turn On Time measurement 13 is Reference waveform 3.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT3VOLTage
This command sets or queries the output 3 voltage level of the specified Turn
On Time power measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT3VOLTage <NR2>

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT3VOLTage?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:NUMOUTputs

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT3SOURce

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1183

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples POWer:POWer7:TURNONtime:OUTPUT3VOLTage -550 sets the output 3

voltage value of Turn On Time power measurement 7 to –550 volts.
POWer:POWer3:TURNONtime:OUTPUT3VOLTage? might return
POWer:POWer3:TURNONtime:OUTPUT3VOLTage –200, indicating that the
output 3 voltage value of Turn On Time power measurement 3 is set to –200 volts.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT4SOURce
This command sets or queries the output 4 source of the specified Turn On Time
measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT4SOURce
{CH<x>|REF<x>|MATH<x>}
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT4SOURce?

Examples POWer:POWer3:TURNONtime:OUTPUT4SOURce CH2 sets the output 4 source

of Turn On Time measurement 3 to Channel 2.
POWer:POWer1:TURNONTIME:OUTPUT4SOURce? might return
POWer:POWer1:TURNONTIME:OUTPUT4SOURce MATH3, indicating that the
output 4 source of Turn On Time measurement 1 is Math waveform 3.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT4VOLTage
This command sets or queries the output 4 voltage level of the specified Turn
On Time power measurement.

2-1184 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT4VOLTage <NR2>

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT4VOLTage?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:NUMOUTputs

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT4SOURce

Examples POWer:POWer8:TURNONtime:OUTPUT4VOLTage 50 sets the output 4 voltage

value of Turn On Time power measurement 8 to 50 volts.
POWer:POWer2:TURNONtime:OUTPUT4VOLTage? might return
POWer:POWer2:TURNONtime:OUTPUT4VOLTage 1000, indicating that the
output 4 voltage value of Turn On Time power measurement 2is set to 1,000 volts.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT5SOURce
This command sets or queries the output 5 source of the specified Turn On Time
measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT5SOURce
{CH<x>|REF<x>|MATH<x>}
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT5SOURce?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1185

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples POWer:POWer3:TURNONtime:OUTPUT5SOURce CH2 sets the output 5 source

of Turn On Time measurement 3 to Channel 2.
POWer:POWer1:TURNONTIME:OUTPUT5SOURce? might return
POWer:POWer1:TURNONTIME:OUTPUT5SOURce CH4, indicating that the output
5 source of Turn On Time measurement 1 is Channel 4.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT5VOLTage
This command sets or queries the output 5 voltage level of the specified Turn
On Time power measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT5VOLTage <NR2>

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT5VOLTage?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:NUMOUTputs

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT5SOURce

Examples POWer:POWer2:TURNONtime:OUTPUT5VOLTage -255 sets the output 5

voltage value of Turn On Time power measurement 2 to –250 volts.
POWer:POWer3:TURNONtime:OUTPUT5VOLTage? might return
POWer:POWer3:TURNONtime:OUTPUT5VOLTage 100, indicating that the
output 5 voltage value of Turn On Time power measurement 3 is set to 100 volts.

2-1186 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT6SOURce
This command sets or queries the output 6 source of the specified Turn On Time
measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT6SOURce
{CH<x>|REF<x>|MATH<x>}
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT6SOURce?

Examples POWer:POWer3:TURNONtime:OUTPUT6SOURce CH2 sets the output 6 source

of Turn On Time measurement 3 to Channel 2.
POWer:POWer8:TURNONTIME:OUTPUT6SOURce? might return
POWer:POWer8:TURNONTIME:OUTPUT6SOURce CH4, indicating that the output
6 source of Turn On Time measurement 8 is set to Channel 4.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT6VOLTage
This command sets or queries the output 6 voltage level of the specified Turn
On Time power measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT6VOLTage <NR2>

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT6VOLTage?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1187

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:NUMOUTputs

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT6SOURce

Examples POWer:POWer5:TURNONtime:OUTPUT6VOLTage 1550 sets the output 6

voltage value of Turn On Time power measurement 5 to 1,550 volts.
POWer:POWer2:TURNONtime:OUTPUT6VOLTage? might return
POWer:POWer2:TURNONtime:OUTPUT6VOLTage –100, indicating that the
output 6 voltage value of Turn On Time power measurement 2 is set to –100 volts.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT7SOURce
This command sets or queries the output 7 source of the specified Turn On Time
measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT7SOURce
{CH<x>|REF<x>|MATH<x>}
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT7SOURce?

Examples POWer:POWer3:TURNONtime:OUTPUT6SOURce CH1 sets the output 7 source

of Turn On Time measurement 3 to Channel 1.

2-1188 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

POWer:POWer7:TURNONTIME:OUTPUT6SOURce? might return

POWer:POWer7:TURNONTIME:OUTPUT6SOURce REF4, indicating that the
output 7 source of Turn On Time measurement 7 is set to Reference waveform 4.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT7VOLTage
This command sets or queries the output 7 voltage level of the specified Turn
On Time power measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT7VOLTage <NR2>

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT7VOLTage?

Related Commands POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:NUMOUTputs

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:OUTPUT7SOURce

Examples POWer:POWer12:TURNONtime:OUTPUT7VOLTage -2100 sets the output 7

voltage value of Turn On Time power measurement 12 to –2,100 volts.
POWer:POWer3:TURNONtime:OUTPUT7VOLTage? might return
POWer:POWer3:TURNONtime:OUTPUT7VOLTage 450, indicating that the
output 7 voltage value of Turn On Time power measurement 3 is set to 450 volts.

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:TYPE
This command sets or queries the type of AC/DC converter used in the specified
Turn On Time power measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1189

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:TYPE {DCDC|ACDC}

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:TYPE?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown on a power measurement badge in the UI.
DCDC sets the measurement to use a DC to DC converter.

ACDC sets the measurement to use an AC to DC converter.

Examples POWer:POWer3:TURNONtime:TYPE ACDC sets Turn On time measurement 3 to

use an AC to DC converter.
POWer:POWer12:TURNONtime:TYPE? might return
POWer:POWer12:TURNONtime:TYPE DCDC, indicating that the converter type
for Turn On Time power measurement 12 is set to use a DC-DC converter.

POWer:POWer<x>:TYPe
This command sets or queries the measurement type of the specified power
measurement number. If the measurement number does not exist, this command
creates a new power measurement, assigns the specified measurement number
to the new measurement, and then assigns the measurement type to the new
measurement.

Conditions Requires option PWR or PS2.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:TYPe <Measurement Type>

POWer:POWer<x>:TYPe?

2-1190 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples POWer:POWer6:TYPe INDUCTANCE sets power measurement 6 to be an

Inductance measurement.
POWer:POWer1:TYPe? might return INPUTCAP, indicating that power
measurement 1 is an Input Capacitance measurement.

POWer:POWer<x>:WRAP:DEGrees
This command sets or returns the phase wrap value for FRA measurements.

Conditions Requires 5-PWR License.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:WRAP:DEGrees NR3

POWer:POWer<x>:WRAP:DEGrees?

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
NR3 specifies the phase wrap value for FRA measurements.

Examples POWer:POWer1:WRAP:DEGrees 220 sets the phase wrap value for FRA
measurements to 220.
POWer:POWer1:WRAP:DEGrees? might return
:POWer:POWer1:WRAP:DEGrees 220, indicating that the phase wrap value for
FRA measurements is 220 for power measurement 1.

POWer:POWer<x>:WRAP:STATE
This command sets or returns the phase wrap status for FRA measurements.

Conditions Requires 5-PWR License.

Group Power

Syntax POWer:POWer<x>:WRAP:STATE {ON|OFF}

POWer:POWer<x>:WRAP:STATE?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1191

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments Power<x> is the power measurement number. This is the equivalent of the
number shown in the UI for a power measurement badge.
ON specifies that phase wrap has been turned on for FRA measurements.

OFF specifies that phase wrap has been turned off for FRA measurements.

Examples POWer:POWer1:WRAP:STATE ON turns on phase wrap for FRA measurements.

POWer:POWer1:WRAP:STATE? might return :POWer:POWer1:WRAP:STATE

OFF, indicating that phase wrap has been turned off for FRA measurements for
power measurement 1.

*PSC
This command sets and queries the power-on status flag that controls the
automatic power-on handling of the DESER, SRER, and ESER registers. When
*PSC is true, the DESER register is set to 255 and the SRER and ESER registers
are set to 0 at power-on. When *PSC is false, the current values in the DESER,
SRER, and ESER registers are preserved in nonvolatile memory when power is
shut off and are restored at power-on.

Group Status and Error

Syntax *PSC {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

*PSC?

Related Commands DESE

*ESE
FACtory
*RST
*SRE

Arguments <NR1> = 0 sets the power-on status clear flag to false, disables the power-on clear
and allows the instrument to possibly assert SRQ after power-on; any other value
sets the power-on status clear flag to true, enabling the power-on status clear and
prevents any SRQ assertion after power on.
OFF sets the power-on status clear flag to false, disables the power-on clear and
allows the instrument to possibly assert SRQ after power-on.
ON sets the power-on status clear flag to true, enabling the power-on status clear
and prevents any SRQ assertion after power on.

2-1192 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples *PSC 0 sets the power-on status clear flag to false.

*PSC? might return 1 to indicate that the power-on status clear flag is set to true.

*PUD
This command sets or queries a string of Protected User Data. This data is
protected by the PASSWord command. You can modify it only by first entering
the correct password. This password is not necessary to query the data.

Group Status and Error

Syntax *PUD {<Block>|<QString>}

*PUD?

Related Commands PASSWord

Arguments <Block> is a block containing up to 100 characters.

<QString> is a string containing up to 100 characters.

Examples *PUD #229This instrument belongs to me stores the string "This

instrument belongs to me" in the user protected data area.
*PUD? might return #221PROPERTY OF COMPANY X.

RECAll:MASK (No Query Form)

This command recalls a saved mask definition from a Mask File. File suffixes can
be xml or msk. If the specified mask test already exists the mask associated with
that mask test will be replaced, otherwise a new mask test is created.

Conditions Requires option MTM.

Group Mask

Syntax RECAll:MASK <source file>,MASK<x>

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1193

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MASK<x> is the destination mask.

<source file> is the source file. The file is expected to be located in a directory
relative to the current working directory (specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless
a complete path is specified:

Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with a drive

designator (such as C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or "" or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Examples RECALL:MASK "MaskWD17",MASK1 recalls the mask stored in the file named
MASKWD17 and stores it in mask 1. If mask 1 already exists then its mask
will be replaced.

RECAll:SESsion (No Query Form)

Restores the state of the instrument, including reference waveforms, from a
saved session file.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax RECAll:SESsion <file_path>

Arguments <file_path> is the file path that specifies the location of the specified instrument
session file.
If a file name or path is specified, the file is expected to be located in a directory
relative to the current working directory (specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless
a complete path is specified:
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with a drive
designator (such as C), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Returns Recalls the instrument session from the specified session file.

2-1194 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples RECALL:SESSION "TEK00000.TSS" recalls the setup from the file

TEK00000.TSS in the current working directory.

RECAll:SETUp (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) returns stored or factory settings to the instrument
from a copy of the settings stored in memory. This command performs the same
function as selecting Recall from the File menu, and then choosing the Setup
button.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax RECAll:SETUp {FACtory|<file_path>}

Related Commands FACtory

*RST

Arguments FACtory restores the factory setup. Performs the same operation as the :FACtory
command.
<file_path> specifies a location for an instrument setup file. <file path> is a
quoted string that defines the file name and path. If a file name or path is specified,
the file is expected to be located in a directory relative to the current working
directory (specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless a complete path is specified:
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with drive designator
(such as C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Examples RECALL:SETUP FACTORY recalls (and makes current) the instrument setup to its
factory defaults.
RECALL:SETUP "TEK00000.SET" recalls the setup from the file TEK00000.SET
in the default directory for setups.

RECAll:WAVEform (No Query Form)

This command recalls a stored waveform to a reference memory location.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1195

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Save and Recall

Syntax RECAll:WAVEform <source file>,<destination>

Arguments <source file> is the source file. The file is expected to be located in a directory
relative to the current working directory (specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless
a complete path is specified:
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with drive designator
(such as C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.
<destination> is REF<x> which specifies a reference to create from the
recalled waveform data file.

Examples RECALL:WAVEFORM "TEK00000.ISF",REF1 recalls the waveform stored in the

file named TEK00000.ISF from the current directory to reference 1.

REF:ADDNew (No Query Form)

This command adds the specified reference. Argument is of the form "REF<NR1>
", where NR1 ≥ 1.

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:ADDNew <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the specified reference. Argument is of the form "REF<NR1> ",
where NR1 ≥ 1.

Examples REF:ADDNEW "REF2" adds reference 2 to the display.

REF:DELete (No Query Form)

Deletes the specified reference. Argument is of the form "REF<NR1>", where
NR1 ≥ 1.

2-1196 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Vertical

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:DELete <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the specified reference. Argument is of the form "REF<NR1>",

where NR1 ≥ 1.

Examples REF:DELETE “REF2” deletes reference 2 from the display.

REF:LIST? (Query Only)

This command returns a comma separated list of all currently defined references.

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:LIST?

Returns All currently defined references.

Examples REF:LIST? might return :REF:LIST REF1,REF2 indicating references 1 and

2 are defined.

REF:REF<x>:DESKew
This command sets or queries the deskew value used for the specified reference.

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:REF<x>:DESKew <NR3>

Arguments <NR3> is the deskew value used for the specified reference.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1197

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples REF:REF1:DESKew -1.5e-9 sets the deskew value to -1.5 ns.

REF:REF1:DESKew? might return :REF:REF1:DESKEW 1.5200E-9 indicating

the deskew value is 1.52 ns.

REF:REF<x>:LABel:COLor
This command sets or queries the color of the specified ref label.

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:REF<x>:LABel:COLor <QString>

REF:REF<x>:LABel:COLor?

Arguments <QString> is the label. To return the color to the default color, send an empty
string as in this example: :REF:REF1:LABEL:COLOR "".

Examples REF:REF1:LABel:COLor "#FFFF00" sets the font color to yellow.

REF:REF1:LABel:COLor? might return :REF:REF1:LABEL:COLOR

"#FF0000" indicating the font color is red.

REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD
This command sets or queries the bold state of the specified reference label.

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables bold font; any other value turns this feature on.

OFF disables bold font.

ON enables bold font.

Examples REF:REF1:LABel:FONT:BOLD ON turns on the bold font.

REF:REF1:LABel:FONT:BOLD? might return :REF:REF1:LABEL:FONT:BOLD

0 indicating the bold font is off.

2-1198 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic
This command sets or queries the italic state of the specified reference label.

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables italic font; any other value turns this feature on.

OFF disables italic font.

ON enables italic font.

Examples REF:REF1:LABel:FONT:ITALic ON turns on the italic font.

REF:REF1:LABel:FONT:ITALic? might return

:REF:REF1:LABEL:FONT:ITALIC 0 indicating the italic font is off.

REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE
This command sets or queries the font size of the specified reference label.

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE <NR1>

REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE?

Arguments <NR1> is the font size of the label.

Examples REF:REF1:LABel:FONT:SIZE 20 sets the font size to 20 points.

REF:REF1:LABel:FONT:SIZE? might return :REF:REF1:LABEL:FONT:SIZE

14 indicating that the font size is 14 points.

REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE
This command sets or queries the font type of the specified reference label, such
as Arial or Times New Roman.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1199

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE <QString>

REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE?

Arguments <QString> is the font type.

Examples REF:REF1:LABel:FONT:TYPE "Monospace" specifies a mono spaced font.

REF:REF1:LABel:FONT:TYPE? might return :REF:REF1:LABEL:FONT:TYPE

"Frutiger LT Std 55 Roman".

REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline
This command sets or queries the underline state of the specified reference label.

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables underline font; any other value turns this feature on.

OFF disables underline font.

ON enables underline font.

Examples REF:REF1:LABel:FONT:UNDERline ON turns on the underline font.

REF:REF1:LABel:FONT:UNDERline? might return

:REF:REF1:LABEL:FONT:UNDERLINE 0 indicating that underline is off.

REF:REF<x>:LABel:NAMe
This command sets or queries the label of the specified reference. The reference
waveform is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:REF<x>:LABel:NAMe <QString>

REF:REF<x>:LABel:NAMe?

2-1200 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <QString> is the character string that will be used for the reference waveform
label name.

Examples REF:REF4:LABEL:NAME "My Reference" sets the label name of Reference 4

waveform to "My Reference".
REF:REF3:LABEL:NAME? might return :REF:REF3:LABEL:NAME "Signal2",
indicating that the label name for Reference 3 waveform is currently set to
"Signal2".

REF:REF<x>:LABel:XPOS
This command sets or queries the X-position at which the label (attached to the
displayed waveform of the specified reference) is displayed, relative to the left
edge of the waveview. The reference waveform is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:REF<x>:LABel:XPOS <NR1>

REF:REF<x>:LABel:XPOS?

Arguments <NR1> is the location (control in divisions) where the waveform label for the
selected reference is displayed, relative to the left edge of the screen.

Examples REF:REF4:LABEL:XPOS 10 moves the waveform label for the Reference 3

waveform, so that it begins 10 divisions to the right of the left edge of the screen.
REF:REF2:LABEL:XPOS? might return :REF:REF2:LABEL:XPOS 1.5,
indicating that the x-axis for the Reference 2 waveform is currently 1.5 divisions
to the right of the left edge of the screen.

REF:REF<x>:LABel:YPOS
This command sets or queries the Y-position of the label (attached to the displayed
waveform of the specified reference), relative to the baseline of the waveform.
The reference waveform is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:REF<x>:LABel:YPOS <NR1>

REF:REF<x>:LABel:YPOS?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1201

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR1> is the location where the waveform label for the selected reference is
displayed, relative to the baseline of the waveform.

Examples REF:REF3:LABEL:YPOS -10 moves the waveform label for the Reference 3
waveform 10 vertical units below the baseline of the waveform.
REF:REF2:LABEL:YPOS? might return :REF:REF2:LABEL:YPOS 0, indicating
that the waveform label for the Reference 2 waveform is currently located at
the baseline of the waveform.

REF:REF<x>:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the filename used by the given reference.

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:REF<x>:SOUrce <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the reference file name.

Examples REF:REF1:SOUrce
"/home/guest/.local/share/Tektronix/TekScope/
FirstRecalledSession/161012_132000_000.wfm" sets the source of
the reference.
REF:REF1:SOUrce? might return :REF:REF1:SOURCE
"/home/guest/.local/share/Tektronix/TekScope/
LastRecalledSession/161012_132039_000.wfm".

REF<x>_DALL:LABel:COLor
This command sets or queries the color of the specified digital group. The
reference is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax REF<x>_DALL:LABel:COLor <QString>

REF<x>_DALL:LABel:COLor?

2-1202 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <QString> is the color of the digital group label. To return the color to the default
color, send an empty string as in this example: :REF5_DALL:LABEL:COLOR "".

Examples REF1_DALL:LABel:COLor "#FF0000" sets the font color to red.

REF1_DALL:LABel:COLor? might return :REF1_DALL:LABEL:COLOR

"#FFFF00" indicating the font color is yellow.

REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:BOLD
This command sets or queries the bold state of the specified digital group. The
reference is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:BOLD {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:BOLD?

Arguments OFF argument turns off bold font.

ON argument turns on bold font.

<NR1> = 0 turns off bold font; any other value turns on bold font.

Examples REF1_DALL:LABel:FONT:BOLD ON sets the font to bold.

REF1_DALL:LABel:FONT:BOLD? might return

:REF1_DALL:LABEL:FONT:BOLD 0 indicating the font is not bold.

REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:ITALic
This command sets or queries the italic state of the specified digital group. The
reference is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:ITALic {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:ITALic?

Arguments OFF argument turns off italic font.

ON argument turns on italic font.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1203

Commands listed in alphabetical order

<NR1> = 0 turns off italic font; any other value turns on italic font.

Examples REF1_DALL:LABel:FONT:ITALic 1 turns on italic font.

REF1_DALL:LABel:FONT:ITALic? might return

:REF1_DALL:LABEL:FONT:ITALIC 0 indicating the font is not italic.

REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:SIZE
This command sets or queries the font size of the specified digital group. The
reference is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:SIZE <NR1>

REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:SIZE?

Arguments <NR1> is the font size.

Examples REF1_DALL:LABel:FONT:SIZE 16 sets the font size to 16 points.

REF1_DALL:LABel:FONT:SIZE? might return

:REF1_DALL:LABEL:FONT:SIZE 20 indicating the font size is 20 points.

REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:TYPE
This command sets or queries the font type of the specified digital group, such as
Arial or Times New Roman. The reference is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:TYPE <QString>

REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:TYPE?

Arguments <QString> is the font type.

Examples REF1_DALL:LABel:FONT:TYPE "Monosapce" sets the font to a monospace

font.

2-1204 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

REF1_DALL:LABel:FONT:TYPE? might return

:REF1_DALL:LABEL:FONT:TYPE "Frutiger LT Std 55 Roman".

REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:UNDERline
This command sets or queries the underline state of the specified digital group.
The reference is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:UNDERline {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:UNDERline?

Arguments OFF argument turns off underline font.

ON argument turns on underline font.

<NR1> = 0 turns off underline font; any other value turns on underline font.

Examples REF1_DALL:LABel:FONT:UNDERline ON specifies an underlined font.

REF1_DALL:LABel:FONT:UNDERline? might return

:REF1_DALL:LABEL:FONT:UNDERLINE 0 indicating underline is
off.

REF<x>_DALL:LABel:NAMe
This command sets or queries the label of the specified digital group. The
reference is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax REF<x>_DALL:LABel:NAMe <QString>

REF<x>_DALL:LABel:NAMe?

Arguments <QString> is the name of the group.

Examples REF1_DALL:LABel:NAMe “Clock Out” sets the label name to Clock Out.

REF1_DALL:LABel:NAMe? might return :REF1_DALL:LABEL:NAME "This

is the digital name".

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1205

Commands listed in alphabetical order

REF<x>_DALL:LABel:XPOS
This command sets or queries the x-position of the label of the specified digital
group. The reference is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax REF<x>_DALL:LABel:XPOS <NR3>

REF<x>_DALL:LABel:XPOS?

Arguments <NR3> is the x-position, in pixels relative to the left edge of the display, of the
group.

Examples REF1_DALL:LABel:XPOS 90.0e0 sets the x position of the label to 90.

REF1_DALL:LABel:XPOS? might return :REF1_DALL:LABEL:XPOS 45.0000

indicating the x position of the label is at 45 pixels to the right of the left edge
of the display.

REF<x>_DALL:LABel:YPOS
This command sets or queries the y-position of the label of the specified digital
group. The reference is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax REF<x>_DALL:LABel:YPOS <NR3>

REF<x>_DALL:LABel:YPOS?

Arguments <NR3> is the y-position, in pixels relative to the baseline of the waveform, of
the group.

Examples REF1_DALL:LABel:YPOS 50 sets the y position to 50.

REF1_DALL:LABel:YPOS? might return :REF1_DALL:LABEL:YPOS 0.0E+0

indicating the y position of the label is at the baseline of the waveform.

REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:COLor
This command sets or queries the color of the label of the specified digital bit.
The reference is specified by x.

2-1206 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Digital

Syntax REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:COLor <QString>

REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:COLor?

Arguments <QString> is the label color. To return the color to the default color, send an
empty string as in this example: :REF5_D1:LABEL:COLOR "".

Examples REF1_D1:LABel:COLor "#FF0000" sets the color to red.

REF1_D1:LABel:COLor? might return :REF1_D1:LABEL:COLOR "#FFFF00"

indicating the color is yellow.

REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD
This command sets or queries the bold state of the label of the specified digital bit.
The reference is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD?

Arguments OFF argument turns off bold font.

ON argument turns on bold font.

<NR1> = 0 turns off bold font; any other value turns on bold font.

Examples REF1_D1:LABel:FONT:BOLD ON sets the font to bold.

REF1_D1:LABel:FONT:BOLD? might return :REF1_D1:LABEL:FONT:BOLD 0

indicating the font is not bold.

REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic
This command sets or queries the italic state of the label of the specified digital
bit. The reference is specified by x.

Group Digital

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1207

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic?

Arguments OFF argument turns off italic font.

ON argument turns on italic font.

<NR1> = 0 turns off italic font; any other value turns on italic font.

Examples REF1_D1:LABel:FONT:ITALic OFF turns off italic font.

REF1_D1:LABel:FONT:ITALic? might return

:REF1_D1:LABEL:FONT:ITALIC 1 indicating the font is italic.

REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE
This command sets or queries the font size of the label of the specified digital bit.
The reference is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE <NR1>

REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE?

Arguments <NR1> is the font size.

Examples REF1_D1:LABel:FONT:SIZE 16 sets the font size to 16 points.

REF1_D1:LABel:FONT:SIZE? might return :REF1_D1:LABEL:FONT:SIZE

20 indicating the font size is 20 points.

REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE
This command sets or queries the font type of the label of the specified digital bit,
such as Arial or Times New Roman. The reference is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE <QString>

REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE?

2-1208 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <QString> is the font type of the label.

Examples REF1_D1:LABel:FONT:TYPE "Monospace" sets the font to Monospace.

CHREF1_D1:LABel:FONT:TYPE? might return :REF1_D1:LABEL:FONT:TYPE

"Frutiger LT Std 55 Roman".

REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline
This command sets or queries the underline state of the label of the specified
digital bit. The reference is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline?

Arguments OFF argument turns off underline font.

ON argument turns on underline font.

<NR1> = 0 turns off underline font; any other value turns on underline font.

Examples REF1_D1:LABel:FONT:UNDERline ON turns on underline font.

REF1_D1:LABel:FONT:UNDERline? might return

:REF1_D1:LABEL:FONT:UNDERLINE 0 indicating the underline font is off.

REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:NAMe
Sets or queries the label of the specified digital bit. The channel is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:NAMe <QString>

REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:NAMe?

Arguments <QString> is the label.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1209

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples REF1_D1:LABel:NAMe "Clock in" sets the name to Clock in.

REF1_D1:LABel:NAMe? might return :REF1_D1:LABEL:NAME "Digital 1".

REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:XPOS
This command sets or queries the x-position of the label of the specified digital
bit. The reference is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:XPOS <NR3>

REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:XPOS?

Arguments <NR3> is the x-position, in pixels relative to the left edge of the display, of the
label.

Examples REF1_D1:LABel:XPOS 90 sets the x position to 90.

REF1_D1:LABel:XPOS? might return :REF1_D1:LABEL:XPOS 45.0000

indicating the position is 45 pixels to the right of the left edge of the waveform.

REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:YPOS
This command sets or queries the y-position of the label of the specified digital
bit. The channel is specified by x.

Group Digital

Syntax REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:YPOS <NR3>

REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:YPOS?

Arguments <NR3> is the y-position, in pixels relative to the baseline of the waveform, of
the label.

Examples REF1_D1:LABel:YPOS 10 sets the y position to 10.

REF1_D1:LABel:YPOS? might return :REF1_D1:LABEL:YPOS 0.0E+0

indicating the y position of the label is at the baseline of the waveform.

2-1210 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

REM (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) embeds a comment within programs as a means
of internally documenting the programs. This is how to embed comments in a .set
file. The instrument ignores these embedded comment lines.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax REM <QString>

Arguments <QString> is a string that can contain a maximum of 80 characters.

Examples REM "This is a comment" is a comment string that the instrument will ignore.

ROSc:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the selected source for the time base reference
oscillator. The reference oscillator locks to this source. Depending on the
command argument that you specify, you can use an external reference or use the
internal crystal oscillator as the time base reference.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax ROSc:SOUrce {INTERnal|EXTernal|TRACking}

ROSc:SOUrce?

Related Commands ROSc:STATE?

Arguments INTERnal specifies the internal 10 MHz crystal oscillator as the time base
reference.
EXTernal specifies the user-supplied external signal at ±1 ppm as the time base
reference.
TRACking specifies the user-supplied external signal at ±1000 ppm as the time
base reference.

Examples ROSC:SOURCE INTERNAL specifies the internal 10 MHz crystal oscillator as

the time base reference.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1211

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ROSC:SOURCE? might return :ROSC:SOURCE INTERNAL, indicating that the

10 MHz crystal oscillator is being used as the time base reference.

ROSc:STATE? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns whether the time base reference oscillator is
locked. This command will return either LOCKED or UNLOCKED.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax ROSc:STATE?

Returns LOCKED indicates the reference oscillator is locked.

UNLOCKED indicates the reference oscillator is not locked.

Examples ROSC:STATE? might return :ROSC:STATE LOCKED, indicating that the time
base reference is locked.

*RST (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) resets the instrument to the factory default settings.
This command does the following:
Recalls the default instrument setup.
Clears the current *DDT command.
Disables aliases (:ALIAS:STATE 0).
Disables the user password (for the *PUD command).

2-1212 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

The *RST command does not change the following:

The current working directory (:FILESystem:CWD command).
The state of command headers (:HEADer command).
The state of keyword and enumeration verbosity (:VERBose command).
The Power-on Status Clear Flag (*PSC command).
The Event Status Enable Register (*ESE command).
The Service Request Enable Register (*SRE command).
The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESE command).
The user password for protected user data (:PASSWord command).
The content of protected user data (*PUD command).
The enabled state of the socket server (:SOCKETServer:ENAble command).
The socket server port number (:SOCKETServer:PORT command).
The socket server protocol (:SOCKETServer:PROTOCol command).
The USBTMC port configuration (:USBDevice:CONFigure command).
The destination reference waveform or file path for the :CURVe command
(:DATa:DESTination command).
The source waveform for the :CURVe? or :WAVFrm? queries
(:DATa:SOUrce command).
The waveform data encoding for the :CURVe command or query or the
:WAVFrm? query (:DATa:ENCdg command).

The starting point for :CURVe? queries (:DATa:STARt command).

The ending point for :CURVe? queries (:DATa:STOP command).
All settings associated the :WFMInpre commands.
All user settable settings associated with the WFMOutpre commands.
*RST only resets the programmable interface settings, it does not change the
user interface settings.

Group Status and Error

Syntax *RST

Related Commands FACtory

RECAll:SETUp

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1213

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments None

Examples *RST resets the instrument settings to factory defaults.

SAVe:EVENTtable:BUS (No Query Form)

This command saves bus results table to the specified file.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:EVENTtable:BUS <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the specified file. If a file name or path is specified, the file is
expected to be located in a directory relative to the current working directory
(specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless a complete path is specified.
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with drive designator
(such as C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Examples SAVe:EVENTtable:BUS "TEK000.CSV" saves the bus decode event table in

the file named TEK000.CSV.

SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom (No Query Form)

This command saves the results table to the specified file path and name.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom <QString>

2-1214 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with drive designator
(such as C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Examples SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom "C:/TEK000.CSV" sets the instrument to save the

results table in the top level C: directory in a file named TEK000.CSV.

SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom:COMMents
This command sets or queries comments to be included in saved results table files.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom:COMMents <Qstring>

SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom:COMMents?

Arguments <Qstring> sets the instrument to save the quoted string as a comment in the
saved results table file.

Examples SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom:COMMents ”PSRR batch 2 testing.” sets

the instrument to save the quoted string in all following saved results table files.
SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom:COMMents? might return "", indicating that the
there is no comment set to be saved in results table files.

SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom:DATAFormat
This command sets or queries the data format to use for saving results table data.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom:DATAFormat [SCIentific|ENGineering]

SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom:DATAFormat?

Arguments SCIentific sets the instrument to save results tables data in scientific notation
(for example, 5.0100E-12).

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1215

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ENGineering sets the instrument to save results tables data in engineering

notation (for example, 5.0100ps).

Examples SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom:DATAFormat SCIentific sets the instrument to

save results tables data in scientific notation.
SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom:DATAFormat? might return ENGINEERING,
indicating that the instrument is set to save results tables data in engineering
notation.

SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom:INCLUDEREFs
This command sets or queries whether to include displayed reference waveforms
with saved results table files.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom:INCLUDEREFs {1|0}

SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom:INCLUDEREFs?

Arguments 1 sets the instrument to save all displayed reference waveforms as part of a saved
results table file.
0 sets the instrument to not save all displayed reference waveforms as part of a
saved results table file.

Examples SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom:INCLUDEREFs 1 sets the instrument to save all

displayed reference waveforms as part of a saved results table file.
SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom:INCLUDEREFs? might return 0, indicating that
the instrument will not save all displayed reference waveforms as part of a saved
results table file.

SAVe:EVENTtable:MEASUrement (No Query Form)

This command saves data (measurement) results to the specified file.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:EVENTtable:MEASUrement <QString>

2-1216 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <QString> is the specified file. If a file name or path is specified, the file is
expected to be located in a directory relative to the current working directory
(specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless a complete path is specified:
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with drive designator
(such as C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Examples SAVe:EVENTtable:MEASUrement "TEK000.CSV" saves the measurement in

the file named TEK000.CSV.

SAVe:EVENTtable:PEAKS (No Query Form)

This command saves peak markers results table to the specified file.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:EVENTtable:PEAKS <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the specified file. If a file name or path is specified, the file is
expected to be located in a directory relative to the current working directory
(specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless a complete path is specified:
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with drive designator
(such as C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Examples SAVe:EVENTtable:PEAKS "TEK000.CSV" saves the peak markers table in

the file named TEK000.CSV.

SAVe:EVENTtable:SEARCHTable (No Query Form)

This command saves a search results table to the specified file.

Group Save and Recall

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1217

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SAVe:EVENTtable:SEARCHTable <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the specified file. If a file name or path is specified, the file is
expected to be located in a directory relative to the current working directory
(specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless a complete path is specified:
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with drive designator
(such as C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Examples SAVe:EVENTtable:SEARCHTable
"C:\Users\Tek_Local_Admin\Tektronix\TekScope\Results
Tables\Tek002.csv" saves the search results table in the file named
TEK002.CSV.

SAVe:IMAGe (No Query Form)

Saves a capture of the screen contents to the specified image file. Supported
image formats are PNG, Windows Bitmap, and JPEG.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:IMAGe <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the file name and location used to store the image file.

When specifying the file name with this command, use the correct file
extension (".png" for PNG format, ".bmp" for BMP format, or ".jpg" for
JPEG format). If a file name or path is specified, the file is expected to be
located in a directory relative to the current working directory (specified by
:FILESystem:CWDFILESystem:CWD) unless a complete path is specified:
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with drive designator
(such as C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

2-1218 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SAVE:IMAGE “C:/Dut12–tests.png” saves the image at the location specified.

SAVe:IMAGe:COMPosition
Sets or queries the color mode for saved images (normal or inverted).

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:IMAGe:COMPosition {NORMal|INVErted}

SAVe:IMAGe:COMPosition?

Arguments NORMal Sets the saved screen capture to Normal colors.

INVErted sets the saved screen capture to Inverted colors.

Examples SAVE:IMAGE:COMPOSITION NORMal saves the screen image using the current
normal color settings.
SAVE:IMAGE:COMPOSITION? might return INVERTED, indicating that captured
screen images will be saved using the inverted color settings.

SAVe:IMAGe:VIEWTYpe
Sets or queries the view type for saved images. Currently only FULLScreen
is supported.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:IMAGe:VIEWTYpe {FULLScreen}

SAVe:IMAGe:VIEWTYpe?

Arguments FULLScreen sets the screen capture mode to capture the full screen.

Examples SAVE:IMAGE:VIEWTYPE FULLScreen sets the screen capture mode to capture

the full screen.
SAVE:IMAGE:VIEWTYPE? might return FULLScreen, indicating that the screen
capture mode is set to full screen.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1219

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SAVe:MASK (No Query Form)

Saves the given Waveview Mask to the specified file. Use the format
[<path>]"<filename><.ext>" for the argument. Specifying a path is optional.
If no path is entered, the file is saved to the current working directory set by
FILESystem:CWD.
<path> ues the form "<drive>/<dir>.../". You can specify a relative path or a
complete path:
Relative path specification: If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.
Complete path specification: If the file argument begins with a file path
separator (forward slash character) or a drive designator (such as C:), then the
file name is interpreted as a full path from the specified drive.
<filename> sets the file name to use to create the file. A file can have up to 125
characters.
<.ext> sets the file format for saving the mask data. Segment-based masks must
be saved with a .xml extension, while tolerance masks must be saved with a .tol
extension.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:MASK <Qstring>

Related Commands FILESystem:CWD

RECAll:MASK

Arguments <Qstring> is a quoted string that defines the path and file name used to save the
specified file, in the format [<path>]"<filename><.ext>".

Examples SAVE:MASK MASK2,"DataMask.xml" saves the Mask2 segment mask to the

designated file in the current working directory.

SAVe:PLOTData (No Query Form)

Saves the plot data of the currently selected plot to a specified file. Supported
file format is CSV.

2-1220 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

When specifying the file name with this command, use the correct file
extension (.CSV). If a file name or path is specified, the file is expected to be
located in a directory relative to the current working directory (specified by
FILESystem:CWD) unless a complete path is specified.
If the file argument begins with a drive designator (such as C:), then the file name
is interpreted as a full path. If the file argument begins with "." or "", or has a file
path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position, then the
file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working directory.
To export an eye diagram plot data to a .csv file, the prerequisite command is
MEASUrement:ADDMEAS TIE

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:PLOTData <Qstring>

Related Commands DISplay:SELect:VIEW

FILESystem:CWD

Arguments <Qstring> sets the file name and location used to store the plot data.

Examples SAVE:PLOTDATA “plot1.csv” saves the plot to the designated file in the
current working directory.
The following is the example of exporting an XY plot data to a .csv file:
PLOT:PLOT1:TYPe XY
DISplay:SELect:VIEW PLOTVIEW1
SAVe:PLOTData "C:/plot1.csv" (On standard instruments)
SAVe:PLOTData "C:\Temp\plot1.csv" (On instruments with optional
Windows 10)

SAVe:REPOrt (No Query Form)

This command saves a report to the specified file. Supported report formats are
PDF and MHT (web page archive file).

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:REPOrt <QString>

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1221

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands SAVe:REPOrt:COMMents

Arguments <QString> is the complete path specification. When specifying the file name
with this command, use the correct file extension (.pdf for PDF format, or .mht
for MHT format).
If a file name or path is specified, the file is expected to be located in a directory
relative to the current working directory (specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless
a complete path is specified:
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with a file path
separator (forward slash character) or a Windows drive designator such as
C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Examples SAVE:REPORT "report.pdf" creates a report in PDF format, in the location

specified.

SAVe:REPOrt:COMMents
This command sets or queries the comments to be included in saved report files.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:REPOrt:COMMents <QString>

SAVe:REPOrt:COMMents?

Arguments <QString> is the comments to be included in saved report files.

Examples SAVE:REPORT:COMMENTS "Test 3" adds comments to the report.

SAVE:REPORT:COMMENTS? might return :SAVE:REPORT:COMMENTS "High

Temp Test 1".

SAVe:SESsion (No Query Form)

Saves the state of the instrument, including reference waveforms, to a saved
session file.

2-1222 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:SESsion <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the file path that specifies the location to save the specified
instrument session file. If a file name or path is specified, the file is expected to
be located in a directory relative to the current working directory (specified by
FILESystem:CWDFILESystem:CWD) unless a complete path is specified:
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with a file path
separator (forward slash character) or a Windows drive designator such as
C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Examples SAVE:SESSION “c:/rose_was_here.tss” saves the instrument state in the specified

file.

SAVe:SETUp (No Query Form)

Saves the current instrument state to the specified file.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:SETUp <QString>

Related Commands SAVe:SETUp:INCLUDEREFs

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that is the complete path specification. If a file
name or path is specified, the file is expected to be located in a directory relative to
the current working directory (specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless a complete
path is specified:

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1223

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with a file path
separator (forward slash character) or a Windows drive designator such as
C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Examples SAVE:SETUP “c:/rose_was_here.set” saves the instrument setup in the

specified file.

SAVe:SETUp:INCLUDEREFs
This command sets or queries whether displayed reference waveforms are to
be included in saved setups.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:SETUp:INCLUDEREFs {OFF|ON|0|1}

SAVe:SETUp:INCLUDEREFs?

Arguments OFF specifies not including displayed reference waveforms in saved setups.

ON specifies including displayed reference waveforms in saved setups.

0 specifies not including displayed reference waveforms in saved setups.

1 specifies including displayed reference waveforms in saved setups.

Examples SAVE:SETUP:INCLUDEREFS 0 sets reference waveforms not to be included in

saved setups.
SAVE:SETUP:INCLUDEREFS? might return :SAVE:SETUP:INCLUDEREFS 1
indicating that reference waveforms are to be included in saved setups.

SAVe:WAVEform (No Query Form)

This command saves the specified waveform(s) to the specified destination file.
The waveform source or sources must be active (turned on) to save data to a file.

Conditions _MAG_VS_TIME, _FREQ_VS_TIME, _PHASE_VS_TIME, and

_SV_BASEBAND_IQ require option SV-RFVT.

2-1224 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Option SV-RFVT on the 4 Series MSO instruments requires option SV-BAS.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:WAVEform
{CH<x>[_DALL|_SV_NORMal|_SV_AVErage|_SV_MAXHold|
_SV_MINHold|_MAG_VS_TIME|_FREQ_VS_TIME| _PHASE_VS_TIME|
_SV_BASEBAND_IQ]|MATH<x>|REF<x>|ALL| },<QString>

Related Commands FILESystem:CWD

SAVe:WAVEform:SOURCELIst?

Arguments CH<x> is the number of the analog channel waveform source used to save the
waveform data.
MATH<x> is the number of the math waveform source used to save the waveform
data.
REF<x> is the number of the reference waveform source used to save the
waveform data.
_DALL saves the digital channel waveform data of the specified channel. This
argument is required if the channel specified is a digital channel.
_SV_NORMal saves the Normal Spectrum view waveform of the specified channel.
_SV_AVErage saves the Average Spectrum view waveform of the specified
channel.
_SV_MAXHold saves the Maximum Hold Spectrum view waveform of the
specified channel.
_SV_MINHold saves the Minimum Hold Spectrum view waveform of the
specified channel.
_MAG_VS_TIME saves the Magnitude vs. Time waveform of the specified channel.

_FREQ_VS_TIME saves the Freuency vs. Time waveform of the specified channel.
_PHASE_VS_TIME saves the Phase vs. Time waveform of the specified channel.

_SV_BASEBAND_IQ saves the baseband I & Q data of the specified channel. The
data is saved in Tektronix TIQ format using a .TIQ file extension. You can import
.TIQ files into Tektronix SignalVu-PC software (PC based), SignalVu software
(oscilloscope based), RSAVu software (PC based) or into a Tektronix real-time
spectrum analyzer for pulse analysis and demodulation analysis.
ALL saves all displayed analog, math, and reference waveforms to individual files.
Each file name created includes the name of the source (ch1, math3, and so on)
used to create that file. ALL is not supported when FastAcq Mode is enabled.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1225

Commands listed in alphabetical order

<Qstring> is a quoted string that defines the path and file name to use to save
the specified file, in the format ‘[<path>]<filename.ext>’. Specifying a path is
optional. If no path is entered, the file is saved to the current working directory
as set in FILESystem:CWD.
<path> uses the form ‘<drive>/<dir>.../’. You can specify a relative path or
a complete path:
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with a file path
separator (forward slash character) or a drive designator (such as C:), then the
file name is interpreted as a full path from the specified drive.
<filename> sets the file name to use to create the file. A file can have up to 125
characters. When using the ALL agument to save multiple files, each filename
has the filename appended with the source used to create that file. For example, a
filename of QualTest can create QualTest_ch1.xxx, QualTest_ref1.xxx,
and so on.
<.ext> sets the file format to which to save the data. To save Channel FastAcq
data, only .csv format is supported. The saved fastacq pixmap data .csv file
cannot be recalled.
Use the .wfm extension to save waveform data to a Tektronix Internal format.
Use the .csv extension to save waveform data to a comma separated values
spreadsheet format.
Use the .mat extension to save waveform data to a matlab compatible file
format.

Examples SAVE:WAVEFORM MATH1,"TEK0000.WFM" saves the Math1 waveform to the file

TEK00000.WFM in the current working directory.

SAVe:WAVEform:GATing
This command specifies the method to save a specified part of the waveform
data or the entire waveform.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:WAVEform:GATing {NONe|CURSors|SCREEN|RESAMPLE|SELected}

SAVe:WAVEform:GATing?

2-1226 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments NONe saves the full waveform data.

CURSors saves the waveform data located between the vertical cursors.

SCREEN saves the waveform data that is on the screen. Nothing outside the
waveform will be saved.
RESAMPLE saves the waveform data at a sample interval set by the user. The
resulting saved waveform is a resampled version of the original waveform with
fewer data points.
SELected saves the data from the currently selected history or FastFrame
acquisition.

Examples SAVE:WAVEFORM:GATING NONe saves the entire waveform.

SAVE:WAVEFORM:GATING? might return :SAVe:WAVEform:GATing SCREEN,

indicating the save waveform operation is set to save the waveform data on the
screen.

SAVe:WAVEform:GATing:RESAMPLErate
This command saves the waveform data at a sample interval. The resulting saved
waveform is a resampled version of the original waveform with fewer data points.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:WAVEform:GATing:RESAMPLErate <NR1>

SAVe:WAVEform:GATing:RESAMPLErate?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the resample interval.

Examples SAVE:WAVEFORM:GATING:RESAMPLERATE 3 sets to save waveform data every

third data point.
SAVE:WAVEFORM:GATING:RESAMPLERATE? might return
:SAVe:WAVEform:GATing:RESAMPLErate 2, indicating the saved
waveform will have half as many data points. This command saves the first data
point and then every other following data point.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1227

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SAVe:WAVEform:SOURCELIst? (Query Only)

This query returns a list of the available waveforms that can be specified as the
source for the SAVe:WAVEform command. Source waveforms must have their
display mode set to On to appear in this list and to be saved.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:WAVEform:SOURCELIst?

Examples SAVE:WAVEFORM:SOURCELIST? might return

ALL,CH1_DALL,CH2,CH3,CH8,MATH1,MATH2,REF2,REF4.

SAVEON:FILE:DEST
This command sets or queries the location where files are saved when
SAVEON:TRIGGER is ON and SAVEON:WAVEFORM is ON. You can save the
files to a local drive or network path by entering the desired location in <QString>.
You can also select to save the files to a USB drive.

Group Save On

Syntax SAVEON:FILE:DEST <QString>

SAVEON:FILE:DEST?

Related Commands SAVEON:FILE:NAME

Arguments <QString> specifies the location to store files.

Examples SAVEON:FILE:DEST
”C:\users\username\Tektronix\TekScope\SaveOnTrigger” sets this
as the location to save files (named by the SAVEON:FILE:NAME
command), when there is a trigger.
SAVEON:FILE:DEST? might return :SAVEON:FILE:DEST
”C:\users\username\Tektronix\TekScope\SaveOnEvent”,
indicating the drive location where files will be saved when there is a trigger.

2-1228 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SAVEON:FILE:NAME
Sets or queries the file name to use when SAVEON:TRIGer is ON.

Group Save On

Syntax SAVEON:FILE:NAME <QString>

SAVEON:FILE:NAME?

Related Commands SAVEON:FILE:DEST

Arguments <QString> is the file name you want to use.

Examples SAVEON:FILE:NAME "MaskFailure" sets the name of the file to MaskFailure.

SAVEON:FILE:NAME? might return ":SAVEON:FILE:NAME MaskFailure5",

indicating the name you set for the instrument to use, with the autoincrement
number (5) appended.

SAVEON:IMAGe
This command sets or queries whether to save a screen capture when a trigger
occurs and SAVEON:TRIGer is ON and SAVEON:IMAGE is ON.

Group Save On

Syntax SAVEON:IMAGe {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

SAVEON:IMAGe?

Related Commands SAVEON:FILE:DEST

SAVEON:FILE:NAME
SAVEON:TRIGger
SAVEON:IMAGe

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables Save On Image; any other value turns this feature on.

OFF disables Save On Image.

ON enables Save On Image.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1229

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SAVEON:IMAGE ON sets the instrument to save a screen capture on a specified

trigger.
SAVEON:IMAGE? might return :SAVEON:IMAGE 1, indicating that the instrument
will save a screen capture when the specified trigger occurs.

SAVEON:IMAGe:FILEFormat
This command sets or queries the file format to be used for saved image files
when :SAVEON:IMAGe is set to 1.

Group Save On

Syntax SAVEON:IMAGe:FILEFormat {PNG|BMP|JPG}

SAVEON:IMAGe:FILEFormat?

Arguments PNG specifies using PNG format for saved image files.

BMP specifies using BMP format for saved image files.

JPG specifies using JPEG format for saved image files.

When specifying the file name with this command, use the correct file extension
(".png" for PNG format, ".bmp" for BMP format, or ".jpg" for JPEG format). If a
file name or path is specified, the file is expected to be located in a directory
relative to the current working directory (specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless
a complete path is specified:
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with drive designator
(such as C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Examples SAVEON:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT JPG sets the image file format to JPEG.

SAVEON:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT? might return :SAVEON:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT

PNG indicating that the file format is set to PNG.

SAVEON:TRIGger
Sets or queries whether to save a file when a trigger occurs. You can define the
trigger using Trigger commands or the instrument user interface.

2-1230 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

This command is longer necessary. Please see Act On Event commands for future
development.
The trigger will cause the instrument to save an image or a waveform to a file,
depending on what you specified. For example, if you have set SAVEON:IMAGe
to On, and a trigger event occurs, the instrument will save a screen capture.
You can set options for file storage (such as file name, file destination, and auto
increment), using the SAVEON:FILE commands.
Use the instrument interface to select whether to save one or more analog
channels, digital channels, or math waveforms
Analog and math waveforms are saved using one file per waveform. Digital
waveforms are all saved to a single file.

Group Save On

Syntax SAVEON:TRIGger {<NR1>|ON|OFF}

SAVEON:TRIGger?

Related Commands SAVEON:IMAGe

SAVEON:WAVEform
SAVEON:FILE:DEST
SAVEON:FILE:NAME

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables Save On Trigger; any other value turns this feature on.

OFF disables Save On Trigger.

ON enables Save On Trigger.

Examples SAVEON:TRIGGER ON sets the instrument to save an image, measurement, and/or

waveform when a trigger occurs.
SAVEON:TRIGGER? might return :SAVEON:TRIGGER ON, indicating that a file
will be saved on triggering.

SAVEON:WAVEform
Sets or queries whether to save a waveform when a trigger occurs when
SAVEON:TRIGger is ON.
The waveform will be saved to the file you selected with SAVEON:FILE:NAME,
in the location that you selected using SAVEON:FILE:DEST. You can set options

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1231

Commands listed in alphabetical order

for file storage (such as file name, file destination, and autoincrement), using
the SAVEON:FILE commands.

Group Save On

Syntax SAVEON:WAVEform {<NR1>|ON|OFF}

SAVEON:WAVEform?

Related Commands SAVEON:FILE:DEST

SAVEON:FILE:NAME
SAVEON:TRIGger

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables Save On Waveform; any other value turns this feature on.

OFF disables Save On Waveform.

ON enables Save On Waveform.

Examples SAVEON:WAVEFORM ON turns on the Save On Waveform feature, so that a

waveform will be saved when a selected trigger occurs.
SAVEON:WAVEFORM? might return :SAVEON:WAVEFORM ON, indicating that a
waveform will be saved when a selected trigger occurs.

SAVEON:WAVEform:FILEFormat
This command sets or queries the file format for saving waveforms when
:SAVEON:WAVEform is set to 1.

Group Save On

Syntax SAVEON:WAVEform:FILEFormat {INTERNal|SPREADSheet}

SAVEON:WAVEform:FILEFormat?

Arguments INTERNal specifies saving the waveform in the instrument internal format.

SPREADSheet specifies saving the waveform in comma separated values format.

Examples SAVEON:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT SPREADSheet sets the file format to

spreadsheet.

2-1232 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SAVEON:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT? might return

:SAVEON:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT INTERNAL indicating the file format is set
to INTERNAL.

SAVEON:WAVEform:SOURce
This command sets or queries the sources for saving waveforms when
SAVEON:TRIGger is ON.

Group Save On

Syntax SAVEON:WAVEform:SOURce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|ALL}

SAVEON:WAVEform:SOURce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source waveform for saving.

MATH<x> specifies a math waveform as the source waveform for saving.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source waveform for saving.

ALL specifies all analog, math, and reference waveforms as the source waveforms
for saving.

Examples SAVEON:WAVEform:SOURce MATH1 specifies MATH 1 as the save on source.

SAVEON:WAVEform:SOURce? might return :SAVEON:WAVEFORM:SOURCE

REF1 indicating the save on source is REF1.

SAVEONEVent:FILEDest
This command sets or queries the location where files are saved. This command
replaces SAVEON:FILE:DEST (still valid command, but only an alias for this
new command).

Group Act On Event

Syntax SAVEONEVent:FILEDest
SAVEONEVent:FILEDest? <Qstring>

Arguments <QString> specifies the location to store files.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1233

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SAVEONEVENT:FILEDEST
"C:\users\username\Tektronix\TekScope\SaveOnTrigger" sets
this as the location to save files (named by the SAVEONEVent:FILEName
command), when there is a trigger.
SAVEONEVENT:FILEDEST? might return :SAVEONEVent:FILEDest
"C:\users\username\Tektronix\TekScope\SaveOnTrigger", indicating
the drive location where files will be saved when there is a trigger.

SAVEONEVent:FILEName
This command sets or queries the file name without the extension. This command
replaces SAVEON:FILE:NAME (still valid command, but only an alias for this
new command).

Group Act On Event

Syntax SAVEONEVent:FILEName <QString>

SAVEONEVent:FILEName?

Arguments <QString> specifies the name of the file.

Examples SAVEONEVENT:FILENAME "MaskFailure" sets the name of the file to

MaskFailure.
SAVEONEVENT:FILENAME? might return :SAVEONEVent:FILEName
"MaskFailure5", indicating the name you set for the instrument to use. The
autoincrement number of 5 is appended.

SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat
This command sets or returns the image file extension (png, jpg, bmp). This
command replaces SAVEON:IMAGe:FILEFormat (still valid command, but
only an alias for this new command).

Group Act On Event

Syntax SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat {PNG|BMP|JPG}

SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat?

2-1234 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments PNG specifies using PNG format for saved image files.

BMP specifies using BMP format for saved image files.

JPG specifies using JPEG format for saved image files.

When specifying the file name with this command, use the correct file extension
(".png" for PNG format, ".bmp" for BMP format, or ".jpg" for JPEG format). If a
file name or path is specified, the file is expected to be located in a directory
relative to the current working directory (specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless
a complete path is specified:
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with drive designator
(such as C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or "" or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Examples SAVEONEVENT:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT JPG sets the image file format to JPEG.

SAVEONEVENT:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT? might return

:SAVEON:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT PNG indicating that the file format is set to PNG.

SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
This command sets or returns the file extension (csv, wfm, mat). This command
replaces SAVEON:WAVEform:FILEFormat (still valid command, but only an
alias for this new command).

Group Act On Event

Syntax SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
{INTERNal|SPREADSheet|MATlab}
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat?

Arguments INTERNal specifies saving the waveform in the instrument internal format.

SPREADSheet specifies saving the waveform in comma separated values format.

MATlab specifies saving the waveform in matlab compatible file format.

Examples SAVEONEVENT:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT SPREADSheet sets the file format to

spreadsheet (csv).

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1235

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SAVEONEVENT:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT? might return

:SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat INTERNAL, indicating the
file format is set to INTERNAL.

SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the sources for saving waveforms when an event
occurs. This command replaces SAVEON:WAVEform:SOURce (still valid
command, but only an alias for this new command).

Group Act On Event

Syntax SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|ALL}

SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source waveform for saving.

MATH<x> specifies a math waveform as the source waveform for saving.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source waveform for saving.

ALL specifies all analog, math, and reference waveforms as the source waveforms
for saving.

Examples SAVEONEVENT:WAVEFORM:SOURCE MATH1 specifies MATH 1 as the save on

source.
SAVEONEVENT:WAVEFORM:SOURCE? might return
:SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat REF1, indicating the save on source
is REF 1.

SCOPEApp REBOOT (No Query Form)

This command reboots the scope.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax SCOPEApp REBOOT

Examples SCOPEApp REBOOT reboots the scope.

2-1236 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:ADDNew (No Query Form)

This command adds the specified search.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:ADDNew <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the specified search. The argument is of the form "SEARCH<NR1>",
where <NR1> is ≥ 1.

Examples SEARCH:ADDNEW “SEARCH2” adds a new search named SEARCH 2.

SEARCH:DELete (No Query Form)

This command deletes the specified search.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:DELete <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the specified search. The argument is of the form "SEARCH<NR1>",
where <NR1> is ≥ 1).

Examples SEARCH:DELETE “SEARCH3” deletes SEARCH 3.

SEARCH:DELETEALL (No Query Form)

This command deletes all the active instances of search definitions defined in
the scope application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:DELETEALL

Examples SEARCH:DELETEALL deletes all the active instances of search definitions.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1237

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:LIST? (Query Only)

This command returns a comma separated list of all currently defined searches.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:LIST?

Returns All currently defined searches.

Examples SEARCH:LIST? might return :SEARCH:LIST SEARCH1,SEARCH2 indicating

that Search 1 and Search 2 are defined.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:COPy (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) copies the search criteria to or from the trigger.
The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:COPy {SEARCHtotrigger|TRIGgertosearch}

Arguments SEARCHtotrigger copies the search criteria to the trigger.

TRIGgertosearch copies the trigger criteria to the search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:COPY TRIGGERTOSEARCH copies the trigger criteria to the

search 1 criteria.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:COPY SEARCHTOTRIGGER copies the search criteria to the
trigger.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:NAVigate (No Query Form)

This command sets the navigation action for search marks. The NONE action is the
default setting when no action is being taken. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

2-1238 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:NAVigate {NEXT|PREVious|MIN|NONE|MAX}

Arguments NEXT goes to the next search mark.

PREVious goes to the previous search mark.

MIN goes to the search result with the smallest value. Only supported by search
results which have quantitative values (example: pulse width is supported, but
not edge).
NONE is the default setting when no action is being taken.

MAX goes to the search result with the largest value. Only supported by search
results which have quantitative values (example: pulse width is supported, but
not edge).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:NAVigate NEXT goes to the next search mark.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TOTAL? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the total number of found search marks for this
search. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TOTAL?

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TOTAL? might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TOTAL 7,

indicating that there are 7 matches for search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:CONDition
This command specifies a field or condition for an ARINC429 bus to search on.
The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1239

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:CONDition
{SOW|LABel|DATa|LABELANDDATA|EOW|ERRor}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:CONDition?

Arguments SOW specifies a search for the first bit of a word.

LABel specifies a search for a matching label.

DATa specifies a search for matching packet data fields.

LABELANDDATA specifies a search for a matching label and matching packet

data field(s).
EOW specifies a search for the 32nd bit of a word.

ERRor specifies a search for a specified error condition.

NOTE. The type of error searched for is specified by

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:ERRTYPe.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ARINC429A:CONDITION DATA specifies

finding packets that contain matching data field(s).
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ARINC429A:CONDITION? might return
SOW, indicating that the bus is being searched for the first bit of each word in
the packet.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:DATa:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high value when searching on an ARINC429
data field. The search number is specified by x. The search condition must be
set to DATa or LABELANDDATA, and the data qualifier must be INrange or
OUTrange.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:DATa:HIVALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:DATa:HIVALue?

Arguments <QString> is the label value.

2-1240 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ARINC429A:DATA:HIVALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX1000" sets the value to XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX1000.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ARINC429A:DATA:HIVALUE? might
return "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX", indicating that the value is
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:DATa:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on data in
the DATA field for an ARINC429 bus signal. The search number is specified by
x. The search condition must be set to DATa or LABELANDDATA.

NOTE. The search qualifier only applies to the bits defined as the data field via the
bus data field format specifier (using BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATAFORmat).

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:DATa:
QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan
|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:DATa:QUALifier?

Arguments EQual sets the data qualifier to equal.

UNEQual sets the data qualifier to unequal.

LESSthan sets the data qualifier to less than.

MOREthan sets the data qualifier to more than.

LESSEQual sets the data qualifier to less equal.

MOREEQual sets the data qualifier to more equal.

INrange sets the data qualifier to in range.

OUTrange sets the data qualifier to out of range.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ARINC429A:DATA:QUALIFIER
LESSTHAN sets the data qualifier to less than.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1241

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ARINC429A:DATA:QUALIFIER? might
return EQUAL, indicating that the data qualifier is set to equal.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the low value when searching on an ARINC429
data field. The search number is specified by x. The search condition must be set
to DATa or LABELANDDATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:DATa:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the label value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ARINC429A:DATA:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX1000" sets the value to XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX1000.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ARINC429A:DATA:VALUE? might
return "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX", indicating that the value is
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:ERRTYPe
This command sets or queries the error type when searching on an ARINC429
bus signal. The search number is specified by x. The search condition must be
set to ERRor.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:ERRTYPe
{ANY|PARity|WORD|GAP}

2-1242 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:ERRTYPe?

Arguments ANY sets the error type to match any of the other available error types.

PARity sets the error type to match on parity errors (parity value results in even
parity count for a word).
WORD sets the error type to match on word errors (any unframed or unknown
decode data).
GAP sets the error type to match on gap violations (less than 4 bits idle time
between two packets on the bus).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ARINC429A:ERRTYPE PARITY sets the

error type to match on parity errors.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ARINC429A:ERRTYPE? might return
ANY, indicating that any error condition will produce a match.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:LABel:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high value when searching on an ARINC429
label field. The search number is specified by x. The search condition must be set
to LABel, and the label qualifier must be INrange or OUTrange.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:LABel:HIVALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:LABel:HIVALue?

Arguments <QString> is the label value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ARINC429A:LABEL:HIVALUE
"XXXX1010" sets the value to XXXX1010.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ARINC429A:LABEL:HIVALUE? might
return "XXXXXXXX", indicating that the value is XXXXXXXX.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1243

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:LABel:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on label
data for an ARINC429 bus signal. The search number is specified by x. The
search condition must be set to LABel or LABELANDDATA.

NOTE. If the search condition is set to LABELANDDATA, the label qualifier will be
locked to Equal until the search condition is changed again.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:LABel:
QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan
|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:LABel:QUALifier?

Arguments EQual sets the data qualifier to equal.

UNEQual sets the data qualifier to unequal.

LESSthan sets the data qualifier to less than.

MOREthan sets the data qualifier to more than.

LESSEQual sets the data qualifier to less equal.

MOREEQual sets the data qualifier to more equal.

INrange sets the data qualifier to in range.

OUTrange sets the data qualifier to out of range.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ARINC429A:LABEL:QUALIFIER
LESSTHAN sets the label qualifier to less than.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ARINC429A:LABEL:QUALIFIER? might
return EQUAL, indicating that the label qualifier is set to equal.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:LABel:VALue
This command sets or queries the low value when searching on an ARINC429
label field. The search number is specified by x. The search condition must be
set to LABel or LABELANDDATA.

2-1244 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:LABel:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:LABel:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the label value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ARINC429A:LABEL:VALUE
"XXXX1010" sets the value to XXXX1010.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ARINC429A:LABEL:VALUE? might return

"XXXXXXXX", indicating that the value is XXXXXXXX.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:SDI:VALue
This command sets or queries the label when searching on an ARINC429 SDI
field. The search number is specified by x. The search condition must be set to
DATa or LABELANDDATA, and the data format must be set to DATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:SDI:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:SDI:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the label value.

NOTE. The SDI field is only present when the selected data field format is DATA
(using BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATAFORmat). Also, the stored QString is reset
to its default value whenever the data field format is changed.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ARINC429A:SDI:VALUE "X0" sets the

value to X0.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1245

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ARINC429A:SDI:VALUE? might return

"XX", indicating that the value is XX.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:SSM:VALue
This command sets or queries the label when searching on an ARINC429 SSM
field. The search number is specified by x. The search condition must be set
to DATa or LABELANDDATA, and the data format must be set to DATA or
SDIDATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:SSM:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ARINC429A:SSM:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the label value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ARINC429A:SSM:VALUE "X0" sets the

value to X0.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ARINC429A:SSM:VALUE? might return
"XX", indicating that the value is XX.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:CONDition
This command sets or queries the condition (word select / frame sync, or matching
data) to be used when searching on an audio bus signal. The search number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUDIO or SUP5-SRAUDIO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:CONDition {SOF|DATa}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:CONDition?

2-1246 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments SOF specifies to search on a word select or start of frame (depending on Audio
Type).
DATA specifies to search on matching data.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:CONDition SOF sets conditions

to search on start of frame.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:CONDition? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUDIO:CONDITION DATA indicating
settings for a search on DATA.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:HITDMVALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string for the high data word to be
used when searching on an TDM audio bus signal. The search condition must be
set to DATa using SEARCH:SEARCH{x}:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:CONDition.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:HITDMVALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:HITDMVALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary data string for the high data word to be used when
searching on an TDM audio bus signal.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:HITDMVALue
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX1100" sets the high value to 1100.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:HITDMVALue? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUDIO:DATA:HITDMVALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX1010" indicating the high value is set to 1010.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string for the high data word to be
used when searching on an audio bus signal. The search condition must be set
to DATa using :SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:CONDition.
The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1247

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:HIVALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:HIVALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the upper word value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:HIVALue “XXXX” sets

the HIVALUE to XXXX.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:HIVALue? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUDIO:DATA:HIVALUE
"TEST_001101", indicating the HIVALUE is set to TEST_001101.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:OFFSet
This command sets or queries the data offset value (TDM channel) to be used when
searching on a TDM type audio bus signal. The search condition must be set to
DATa using SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:TDM:CONDition.
The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUDIO or SUP5-SRAUDIO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:OFFSet <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:OFFSet?

Arguments <NR1> is the data offset value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:OFFSet 2 sets the data

offset value to 2.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:OFFSet? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUDIO:DATA:OFFSET 1 indicating data
offset value is set to TDM channel 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching
on an audio bus signal. The search condition must be set to DATa using

2-1248 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:{NONTdm|TDM}:CONDition.
The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUDIO or SUP5-SRAUDIO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
AUDio:DATa:QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|
LESSthan|MOREthan|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:QUALifier?

Arguments LESSthan sets the qualifier to less than.

MOREthan sets the qualifier to greater than.

EQual sets the qualifier to equal.

UNEQual sets the qualifier to not equal.

LESSEQual sets the qualifier to less than or equal.

MOREEQual sets the qualifier to greater than or equal.

INrange sets the qualifier to in range.

OUTrange sets the qualifier to out of range.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:QUALifier LESSthan

sets the qualifier to LESSthan.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:QUALifier? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUDIO:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
indicating the qualifier is set to EQUAL.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:TDMVALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string for the single
or low data word to be used when searching on an TDM audio
bus signal. The search condition must be set to DATA using
SEARCH:SEARCH{x}:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:CONDition.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1249

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:TDMVALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:TDMVALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary data string for the single or low data word to be used
when searching on an TDM audio bus signal.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:TDMVALue "1100" sets

the TDMVALUE to 1100.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:TDMVALue? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUDIO:DATA:TDMVALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX1010", indicating the TDM value is 1010.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string for the
single or low data word to be used when searching on an audio
bus signal. The search condition must be set to DATA using
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:{NONTdm|TDM}:CONDition.
The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUDIO or SUP5-SRAUDIO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the lower word value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:VALue “X0X011” sets the

data value to X0X011.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:VALue? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUDIO:DATA:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX", indicating the data value is set to
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX.

2-1250 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:WORD
This command sets or queries the alignment of the data (left, right
or either) to be used when searching on a non-TDM type audio
bus signal. The search condition must be set to DATA using
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:NONTdm:CONDition. The
search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUDIO or SUP5-SRAUDIO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:WORD
{EITher|LEFt|RIGht}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:WORD?

Arguments EITher aligns the data to either left or right.

LEFt aligns the data to the left.

RIGht aligns the data to the right.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:WORD LEFT aligns the data

to the left.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:DATa:WORD? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUDIO:DATA:WORD EITHER indicating
the data is aligned either to the left or right.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:CONDition
This command sets or queries the field or condition for which to search an
AutoEthernet.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

Most of the other SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B:AUTOETHERnet
commands are impacted by the setting of this command.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1251

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:
CONDition {SSD|SFD|MACADDRess|MACLENgth|IPHeader|
TCPHeader|DATa|EOP|FCSError|QTAG}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:CONDition?

Arguments Search<x> is the Search number.

SSD specifies to search for Start of frame.

SFD specifies to search for Start of frame delimiter.

MACADDRess specifies to search for MAC addresses field.

MACLENgth specifies to search for MAC length/type field.

IPHeader specifies to search for IP header field.

TCPHeader specifies to search for TCP header field.

DATa specifies to search for TCP/IPv4 or MAC protocol client data field.

EOP specifies to search for End of Packet field.

FCSError specifies to search for Frame Check Sequence Error (CRC) field.

QTAG specifies to search for IEEE 802.1Q (VLAN) control information field.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:CONDITION
MACADDRESS specifies MACADDRess as the field within an AutoEthernet frame
to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:CONDITION? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:CONDITION
DATA, indicating that DATA is the currently specified field within an AutoEthernet
frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the binary data value to be used when searching on
an AutoEthernet bus signal. The search condition must be set to DATA and the
data qualifier to inside or outside range.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue
<QString>

2-1252 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue?

Arguments Search<x> is the Search number.

QString specifies the binary data value to be used when searching on an

AutoEthernet bus signal.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue
“101011” sets the data HIVALue to 101011.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue? might
returnSEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATA:HIVALUE
"10110".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATa:OFFSet
This command sets or queries the data offset value, in bytes, to use when searching
on the AutoEthernet data field. The search condition needs to be set to DATa.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATa:OFFSet <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATa:OFFSet?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:CONDition

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATa:SIZe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHeader:
SOUrceport:VALue

Arguments Search<x> is the Search number.

NR1 sets the data offset value, in bytes. It is an integer value whose minimum and
default values are -1 (don't care) and maximum is 1,499.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATA:OFFSEt 36 sets

the data offset to 36 bytes.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATA:OFFSET? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATA:OFFSET

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1253

Commands listed in alphabetical order

-1, indicating that the data offset value is the default value (-1), meaning "don’t
care".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the length of the data string, in bytes, to use when
searching on the AutoEthernet bus signal. The search condition needs to be set
to DATa.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

The search condition needs to be set to DATa.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATa:SIZe?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the Search number.

NR1 sets the data length, in bytes. It is an integer value whose minimum and
default values are 1, and the maximum value is 16.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATA:SIZE 4 specifies

4 as the number of contiguous TCP/IPv4/MAC client bytes to use when searching
on the AutoEthernet data field.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATA:SIZE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATA:SIZE 8.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary value to use when searching on the
AutoEthernet bus signal. The search condition needs to be set to DATa.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

The search condition needs to be set to DATa.

2-1254 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATa:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATa:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:CONDition

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATa:OFFSet
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATa:SIZe

Arguments Search<x> is the Search number.

QString is a quoted string where the allowable characters are 0, 1, and X.

The allowable number of characters depends on the setting for size (using
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATa:SIZe). The
bits specified in the quoted string replace the least significant bits (LSB), leaving
any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATA:VALUE
"00001000" specifies 00001000 as the value to use when
triggering on the AutoEthernet binary data field, assuming that
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATA:SIZe is set
to 1 byte.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATA:VALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:DATA:VALUE
"00001000", indicating 0000100 is the currently specified value used when
searching on the AutoEthernet binary data field.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:IPHeader:DESTinationaddr:VALu
This command sets or queries the binary destination address value to use when
searching on an AutoEthernet bus signal. The search condition needs to be set
to IPHeader.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

The search condition needs to be set to IPHeader.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1255

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:IPHeader:
DESTinationaddr:VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:IPHeader:
DESTinationaddr:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the Search number.

QString is a quoted string of up to 32 characters that sets the IP address,

where the allowable characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted
string replace the least significant bits (LSB), leaving any unspecified upper bits
unchanged.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:IPHEADER:
DESTINATIONADDR:VALUE "11000000101010000000000000000001"
specifies 192.168.0.1 as the value to use when searching on the AutoEthernet
IPv4 header address destination field.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:IPHEADER:
DESTINATIONADDR:VALUE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:IPHEADER:
DESTINATIONADDR:VALUE "11000000101010000000000000000001",
indicating that 192.168.0.1 is the currently specified value used when searching
on the AutoEthernet IPv4 header address destination field.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:IPHeader:PROTOcol:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary protocol value to use when searching on
the Ethernet bus signal. The search condition needs to be set to IPHeader.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

The search condition needs to be set to IPHeader.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:IPHeader:
PROTOcol:VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:IPHeader:
PROTOcol:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:CONDition

2-1256 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments Search<x> is the Search number.

QString is a quoted string of up to eight (8) characters where the allowable

characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least
significant bits (LSB), leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:IPHEADER:PROTOCOL:VALUE
"01010010" specifies 01010010 as the value to use when searching on the
AutoEthernet IP header protocol field.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:IPHEADER:PROTOCOL:VALUE?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:IPHEADER:PROTOCOL:VALUE
"XXXXXXXX", indicating that the trigger value has been set to "don’t care".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:IPHeader:SOUrceaddr:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary source address value to use when
searching on an AutoEthernet bus signal. The search condition needs to be set
to IPHeader.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

The search condition needs to be set to IPHeader.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:IPHeader:
SOUrceaddr:VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:IPHeader:
SOUrceaddr:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the Search number.

QString is a quoted string of up to 32 characters, where the allowable characters

are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least significant
bits (LSB), leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:IPHEADER:SOURCEADDR:VALUE
"11000000101010000000000000000001" specifies to use the value of
192.168.0.1 when searching on the AutoEthernet IP header address source field.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1257

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:IPHEADER:SOURCEADDR:VALUE?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:IPHEADER:SOURCEADDR:VALUE
"11000000101010000000000000000001", indicating that the
search value has been set to 192.168.0.1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:DESTination:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary MAC address destination value to use
when searching on an AutoEthernet bus signal. The search condition needs to be
set to MACADDRess.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

The search condition needs to be set to MACADDRess.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:
DESTination:VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:
DESTination:VALue ?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the Search number.

QString is a quoted string of up to 48 characters where the allowable characters

are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least significant
bits (LSB), leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:MAC:ADDRESS:
DESTINATION:VALUE
"XXXXXXXX0011010111111100000001111010101011001000" specifies to
use the value of XX:35:FC:07:AA:C8 hex when searching on the
Ethernet MAC address destination field.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:MAC:ADDRESS:
DESTINATION:VALUE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:MAC:ADDRESS:
DESTINATION:VALUE
”XXXXXXXX0011010111111100000001111010101011001000”, indicating a
MAC address destination field value of XX:35:FC:07:AA:C8 hex.

2-1258 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:SOUrce:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary MAC address source value to use when
searching on an AutoEthernet bus signal. The search condition needs to be set to
MACADDRess.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

The search condition needs to be set to MACADDRess.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:
SOUrce:VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:
SOUrce:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the Search number.

QString is a quoted string of up to 48 characters where the allowable characters

are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least significant
bits (LSB), leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:MAC:ADDRESS:SOURCE:VALUE
”XXXXXXXX0011010111111100000001111010101011001000” specifies to
use the value of XX:35:FC:07:AA:C8 hex when searching on the
Ethernet MAC address source field.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:MAC:ADDRESS:SOURCE:VALUE?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:MAC:ADDRESS:SOURCE:VALUE
”XXXXXXXX0011010111111100000001111010101011001000”, indicating a
MAC address source field value of XX:35:FC:07:AA:C8 hex.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the binary MAC length high value to use when
searching on an AutoEthernet bus signal. The search condition needs to be set to
MACADDRess.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1259

Commands listed in alphabetical order

The search condition needs to be set to MACADDRess.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:
HIVALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:
HIVALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the Search number.

QString is a quoted string of up to 16 characters where the allowable characters

are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least significant
bits (LSB), leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:MAC:LENGTH:HIVALUE
"XXXXXXXX00001000" specifies to use the hexadecimal value XX08 when
searching on the AutoEthernet MAC length.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:MAC:LENGTH:HIVALUE?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:MAC:LENGTH:HIVALUE
"XXXXXXXX00001000", indicating an AutoEthernet MAC length value
of XX08 hex.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:VALue
This command sets or queries the MAC length value to use when searching on an
Ethernet bus signal. The search condition needs to be set to MACADDRess.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

The search condition needs to be set to MACADDRess.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:
VALue?

2-1260 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the Search number.

QString is a quoted string of up to 16 characters where the allowable characters

are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least significant
bits (LSB), leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:QTAG:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary Q-tag information to use when searching
on an AutoEthernet bus signal. The search condition needs to be set to QTAG.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

The search condition needs to be set to QTAG.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:QTAG:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:QTAG:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the Search number.

QString is a quoted string of up to 32 characters where the allowable characters

are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least significant
bits (LSB), leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1261

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:QTAG:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX010010001010" specifies to use the value of
hexadecimal XXXXX48A when searching on the AutoEthernet Q-Tag field.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:QTAG:VALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:QTAG:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX010010001010", indicating that hexadecimal
XXXXX48A has been set as the AutoEthernet Q-Tag field search value.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on an
AutoEthernet bus signal. The search condition must be set to Client Data or MAC
Length/Type.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

The search condition must be set to Client Data or MAC Length/Type.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:QUALifier
{LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual| LESSEQual|MOREEQual|
INrange|OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:QUALifier?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the Search number.

LESSthan sets the qualifier to less than.

MOREthan sets the qualifier to greater than.

EQual sets the qualifier to equal.

UNEQual sets the qualifier to not equal.

LESSEQual sets the qualifier to less than or equal.

MOREEQual sets the qualifier to greater than or equal.

INrange sets the qualifier to in range.

OUTrange sets the qualifier to out of range.

2-1262 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:QUALIFIER LESSTHAN

sets the qualifier to "less than".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:QUALIFIER? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:QUALIFIER
EQUAL, indicating that the qualifier is set to EQUAL.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHeader:ACKnum:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary ack number value to use when searching
on an AutoEthernet bus signal. The default is all X’s (don’t care). The search
condition needs to be set to TCPHeader.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

The search condition needs to be set to TCPHeader.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHeader:
ACKnum:VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHeader:
ACKnum:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the Search number.

QString is a quoted string of up to 32 characters where the allowable characters

are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least significant
bits (LSB), leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHEADER:ACKNUM:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX00001000" specifies hexadecimal
XXXXXX08 as the value to use when searching on the AutoEthernet TCP
header acknowledgement number.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHEADER:ACKNUM:VALUE?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHEADER:ACKNUM:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX00001000", indicating that hexadecimal
XXXXXX08 has been specified as the value to use when searching on the Auto
Ethernet TCP header acknowledgement number.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1263

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHeader:DESTinationport:VALu
This command sets or queries the binary destination port value to use when
searching on the AutoEthernet TCP header destination port number. The search
condition needs to be set to TCPHeader.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

The search condition needs to be set to TCPHeader.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHeader:
DESTinationport:VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHeader:
DESTinationport:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the Search number.

QString is a quoted string of up to 16 characters where the allowable characters

are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least significant
bits (LSB), leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHEADER:
DESTINATIONPORT:VALUE "XXXXXXXX00100010" specifies to use the value of
hexadecimal XX22 when searching on the AutoEthernet TCP header destination
port number.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHEADER:
DESTINATIONPORT:VALUE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHEADER:
DESTINATIONPORT:VALUE "XXXXXXXX00100010", indicating that
hexadecimal XX22 has been set as the value to use when searching on the
AutoEthernet TCP header destination port number.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHeader:SEQnum:VALue
This command sets or queries the TCP header sequence number value to use when
searching on the AutoEthernet TCP header destination port number. The search
condition needs to be set to TCPHeader.

2-1264 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

The search condition needs to be set to TCPHeader.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHeader:
SEQnum:VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHeader:
SEQnum:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the Search number.

QString is a quoted string of up to 32 characters where the allowable characters

are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least significant
bits (LSB), leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHEADER:SEQNUM:VALU
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX000100010001" specifies to
use the value of hexadecimal XXXXX111 when searching on the
AutoEthernet TCP header sequence number.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHEADER:SEQNUM:VALUE?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHEADER:SEQNUM:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX0010010100", indicating that hexadecimal
XXXXX111 has been specified as the value to use when searching on the
AutoEthernet TCP header sequence number.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHeader:SOUrceport:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary source port value to use when searching
on an AutoEthernet bus signal. The search condition needs to be set to TCPHeader.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTOENET

The search condition needs to be set to TCPHeader.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1265

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHeader:
SOUrceport:VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHeader:
SOUrceport:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the Search number.

QString is a quoted string of up to 16 characters where the allowable characters

are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least significant
bits (LSB), leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHEADER:SOURCEPORT:VALUE
"XXXX000010100110" specifies to use the value of hexadecimal X0A6 when
searching on the AutoEthernet TCP header source port number.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHEADER:SOURCEPORT:VALUE?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:AUTOETHERnet:TCPHEADER:SOURCEPORT:VALUE
"XXXXX01001010110", indicating that hexadecimal X0A6 has been specified as
the value to use when searching on the Ethernet TCP header source port number.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:ADS:TYPe
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for a CAN bus on the ADS
bits. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTO.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:ADS:TYPe {ADH| DH1| DH2|

DL1}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:ADS:TYPe?

Arguments ADH specifies the ADS Type for a CAN bus as Arbitration to Data high.

DH1 specifies the ADS Type for a CAN bus as Data High bit 1.

DH2 specifies the ADS Type for a CAN bus as Data High bit 2.

DL1 specifies the ADS Type for a CAN bus as Data Low bit 1.

2-1266 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:ADS:TYPe ADH sets the ADS Type

to Arbitration to Data high.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:ADS:TYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:ADS:TYPe DH2, indicating the
ADS Type is set to Data High bit 2.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:CONDition
This command sets or queries the search condition for a CAN bus. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:CONDition {SOF|

FRAMEtype| IDentifier| DATa| IDANDDATA| EOF| ERRor| FDBITS}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:CONDition?

Arguments SOF specifies the search condition for a CAN bus as start of frame.

FRAMEtype specifies the search condition for a CAN bus as frame type.

IDentifier specifies the search condition for a CAN bus as identifier.

IDANDDATA specifies the search condition for a CAN bus as ID and data.

EOF specifies the search condition for a CAN bus as end of frame.

ERRor specifies the search condition for a CAN bus as error.

FDBITS specifies the search condition for a CAN bus as FD bits.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:CONDition EOF sets the CAN

bus trigger condition to end of frame.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:CONDition? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:CONDITION SOF, indicating the
CAN bus trigger condition is set to start of frame.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1267

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:CRCType
This command specifies the CAN XL trigger type to be valid on PCRC and
FCRC. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTO.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:CRCType {PCRC|FCRC}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:CRCType?

Arguments PCRC specifies error type as CRC13.

FCRC FCRC specifies error type as CRC32.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:CRCType PCRC sets the CRC type to

CRC13.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:CRCType? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:CRCType PCRC, indicating the
CRC type is CRC13.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DAS:TYPe
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for a CAN bus on the DAS
bits. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTO.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DAS:TYPe
{DAH|AH1|AH2|AL1}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DAS:TYPe?

Arguments DAH specifies the DAS Type as Data to Arbitration High bit.
AH1 specifies the DAS Type as Arbitration High bit 1.
AH2 specifies the DAS Type as Arbitration High bit 2.
AL1 specifies the DAS Type as Arbitration Low bit 1.

2-1268 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DAS:TYPe DAH sets the DAS type

as Data to Arbitration High bit.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DAS:TYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DAS:TYPe DAH, indicating the
DAS type is Data to Arbitration High bit.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:DIRection
This command specifies the CAN search type to be valid on a Read, Write, or
Either condition. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:DIRection
{READ|WRITE|NOCARE}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:DIRection?

Arguments READ specifies the read direction.

WRITE specifies the write direction.

NOCARE specifies either data direction.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:DIRection READ sets the

data direction to READ.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:DIRection? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE,
indicating the data direction is set to either data direction.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:OFFSet
This command sets or queries the data offset value, in bytes, to use when searching
on the CAN data field. The search number is specified by x. The search condition
must be set to DATA or IDANDDATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1269

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:OFFSet <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:OFFSet?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:CAN:STANDard

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:SIZe

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:VALue

Arguments <NR1> is an integer whose minimum and default values are -1 (don't care) and
maximum is up to 7 (for CAN 2.0) or up to 63 (for ISO CAN FD and Non-ISO
CAN FD). The maximum is dependent on the number of bytes being matched
and the CAN standard selected. Its value is calculated as [Absolute Maximum] -
[Data Match Size]. For CAN 2.0, the absolute maximum is 8 bytes. For ISO CAN
FD and Non-ISO CAN FD, the absolute maximum is 64 bytes. The minimum
data match size is 1 byte, which produces the ranges listed above. Increasing the
data match size above 1 byte will adjust the range of valid data offset values
accordingly.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:DATA:OFFSET 5sets the CAN data

offset to 5 bytes.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:DATA:OFFSET? might return 7,
indicating the CAN data offset is 7 bytes. If the CAN standard is set for CAN 2.0
and the search data size is set to 3, the maximum value for the data offset will be 5
(8 - 3 = 5). If the CAN standard is set for ISO CAN FD or Non-ISO CAN FD
and the search data size is set to 8, the maximum value for the data offset will be
56 (64 - 8 = 56).

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the CAN bus trigger data qualifier to be used when
searching on a CAN bus signal. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:QUALifier
{EQUal|LESSEQual|MOREEQua|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:QUALifier?

2-1270 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments EQUal sets the data qualifier to equal.

LESSEQual sets the data qualifier to less equal.

MOREEQua sets the data qualifier to more equal.

UNEQual sets the data qualifier to unequal.

LESSthan sets the data qualifier to less than.

MOREthan sets the data qualifier to more than.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:QUALifier UNEQual sets

the data qualifier to unequal.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:QUALifier? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL,
indicating that the data qualifier is set to equal.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the length of the data string, in bytes, to be used
when searching on a CAN bus signal. The search condition must be set to
IDANDDATA or DATA. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the data size.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:SIZe 1 sets the data size to 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:SIZe? might return

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:DATA:SIZE 1, indicating the data
size is set to 1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1271

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data value to be used when searching on
a CAN bus signal. The search condition must be set to IDANDDATA OR DATA.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:VALue <QString>

Arguments <QString>

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:VALue "1111" sets the data

value to 1111.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:DATA:VALUE "1010" indicating
the data value is 1010.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:XLBITType
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for a CAN bus on the XL Data
bits. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTO.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:XLBITType {AF| VCID|

SDT| SEC| SBC| ADS| DAS}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:XLBITType?

Arguments AF specifies the XL bit type to Acceptance Field.

VCID specifies the XL bit type to Virtual CAN Network ID.

SDT specifies the XL bit type to Device Data Unit type.

SEC specifies the XL bit type to Simple extended content.

SBC specifies the XL bit type to Stuff Bit Count.

ADS specifies the XL bit type to Arbitration to Data sequence.

DAS specifies the XL bit type to Data to Arbitration sequence.

2-1272 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:XLBITType AF sets the XL

bit type as Acceptance Fieldt.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:XLBITType? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:XLBITType AF, indicating
the XL bit type is Acceptance Field.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:ERRType
This command sets or queries the type of error condition for a CAN bus to
search on. The search number is specified by x. The search condition must be
set to ERRor.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:ERRType {ACKMISS|

BITSTUFFing| FORMERRor| xlFormError| CRC| ANYERRor}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:ERRType?

Arguments ACKMISS specifies a search based on a missing ACK field.

BITSTUFFing specifies a search based on a bit stuffing error.

FORMERRor specifies a search based on a CAN FD form error. To use this option,
the CAN standard must be set to FDISO or FDNONISO.
xlFormError specifies a search based on a XL form error.

CRC specifies a search based on a CRC error.

ANYERRor specifies a search based on any error type.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:ERRTYPE ACKMISS specifies

searching for any missing ACK fields.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:ERRTYPE? might return
ANYERROR, indicating that the bus is being searched for all error types.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1273

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FD:BRSBit
This command sets or queries the value of the bit rate switch bit (BRS bit) for a
CAN bus to search on. The search number is specified by x. The search condition
must be set to FDBITS, and the CAN standard must be FDISO or FDNONISO.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FD:BRSBit
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FD:BRSBit?

Arguments ONE filters CAN FD packets to only match those where the BRS bit has a value of
1 (fast data enabled).
ZERo filters CAN FD packets to only match those where the BRS bit has a value
of 0 (fast data disabled).
NOCARE disables filtering of CAN FD packets on the BRS bit.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:FD:BRSBit ONE specifies filtering

CAN FD packets for those where the BRS bit has a value of 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:FD:BRSBIT? might return
NOCARE, indicating that CAN FD packets are not being filtered based on the
BRS bit value.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FD:ESIBit
This command sets or queries the value of the error state indicator bit (ESI bit)
for a CAN bus to search on. The search number is specified by x. The search
condition must be set to FDBITS, and the CAN standard must be FDISO or
FDNONISO.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

2-1274 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FD:ESIBit
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FD:ESIBit?

Arguments ONE filters CAN FD packets to only match those where the ESI bit has a value
of 1 (recessive).
ZERo filters CAN FD packets to only match those where the ESI bit has a value
of 0 (dominant).
NOCARE disables filtering of CAN FD packets on the ESI bit.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:FD:ESIBit ONE specifies filtering

CAN FD packets for those where the ESI bit has a value of 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:FD:ESIBIT? might return
NOCARE, indicating that CAN FD packets are not being filtered based on the
ESI bit value.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FRAMEtype
This command sets or queries CAN bus trigger frame type to be used when
searching on a CAN bus signal. The search condition must be set to FRAMEtype.
The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FRAMEtype
{DATa|ERRor|OVERLoad|REMote|xldata}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FRAMEtype?

Arguments DATa sets the frame type to data.

ERRor sets the frame type to error.

OVERLoad sets the frame type to overload.

REMote sets the frame type to remote.

xldata sets the frame type to XL data.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1275

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FRAMEtype ERROR sets the frame

type to error.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FRAMEtype? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:FRAMETYPE DATA, indicates the
frame type is set to data.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:IDentifier:MODe
This command sets or queries the CAN bus trigger identifier (address) mode to be
used when searching on a CAN bus signal. The search number is specified by x.
The search condition must be set to IDANDDATA or DATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:IDentifier:MODe
{EXTENDed|STandard}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:IDentifier:MODe?

Arguments EXTENDed specifies the extended identifier mode.

STandard specifies the standard identifier mode.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:IDentifier:MODe EXTEND sets

the identifier mode to extended.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:IDentifier:MODe? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:IDENTIFIER:MODE STANDARD,
indicating the identifier mode is set to standard.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:IDentifier:VALue
This command sets or queries CAN bus trigger identifier (address) value to be
used when searching on a CAN bus signal. The search number is specified by x.
The search condition must be set to IDANDDATA or DATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

2-1276 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:IDentifier:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:IDentifier:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:IDentifier:VALue "1010" sets

the identifier value to 1010.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:IDentifier:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "101011",
indicating the identifier value is 101011.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:PIDentifier:SIZe
This command sets the length of the data string, in bytes, to be used when
triggering on a CAN bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to Priority
Identifier. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTO.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:PIDentifier:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:PIDentifier:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the data size.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:PIDentifier:SIZe 2 specifies

the data size as 2.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:PIDentifier:SIZe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:PIDentifier:SIZe 1, indicating
the data size is set to 1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1277

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:PIDentifier:VALue
This command sets the binary data value to use when triggering on a CAN bus
signal when standard is XL. The trigger condition must be set to Priority Identifier.
The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTO.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:PIDentifier:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:PIDentifier:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the identifier value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:PIDentifier:VALue "1010"

specifies the identifier value as 1010.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:PIDentifier:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:PIDentifier:VALue
"101011", indicating the identifier value is set to 101011.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:XLDATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the length of the data string, in bytes, to be used
when searching on a CAN bus signal. The search condition must be set to
IDANDDATA or DATA. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTO.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:XLDATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:XLDATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the data size.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:XLDATa:SIZe 2 specifies the data

size as 2.

2-1278 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:XLDATa:SIZe? might return

:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:XLDATa:SIZe 1, indicating the
data size is set to 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:XLDATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data value to be used when searching on
a CAN bus signal. The search condition must be set to IDANDDATA OR DATA.
The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTO.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:XLDATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:XLDATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the data value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:PIDentifier:VALue "1111"

specifies the data value as 1111.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:PIDentifier:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:PIDentifier:VALue
"1010", indicating the data value is set to 1010.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:BLUe:VALue
This command specifies the blue data string used for CPHY triggering if the
trigger condition is on RGB packet.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:BLUe:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:BLUe:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default blue value is XXXXXXXXXX.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1279

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:BLUe:VALue "BE4" specifies BE4

as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:BLUe:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:BLUe:VALue "BE4", indicating
that BE4 is the currently specified field within a CPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:CONDition
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for an CPHY bus. The default
trigger on condition is SOT.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:CONDition {SOT| EOT|

DATa| EOTPDATa| OPTIONALPARam| SCRambling| COMPression|
PACKets| BUSTURNAROUnd| ESCAPEMODe| STop| ERRors| MODe|
WORD| SYMBol}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:CONDition?

Arguments SOT specifies SOT as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.

EOT specifies EOT as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.

DATa specifies DATa as the field within a CPHY frame to search on

EOTPDATa specifies EOTPDATa as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.

OPTIONALPARam specifies OPTIONALPARam as the field within a CPHY frame

to search on.
SCRambling specifies SCRambling as the field within a CPHY frame to search
on.
COMPression specifies COMPression as the field within a CPHY frame to
search on.
PACKets specifies PACKets as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.

BUSTURNAROUnd specifies BUSTURNAROUnd as the field within a CPHY

frame to search on.
ESCAPEMODe specifies ESCAPEMODe as the field within a CPHY frame to
search on.
STop specifies STop as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.

2-1280 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ERRors specifies ERRors as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.

MODe specifies MODe as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.

WORD specifies WORD as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.

SYMBol specifies SYMBol as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:CONDition SOT specifies SOT as

the field within a CPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:CONDition? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:CONDition SOT, indicating that
SOT is the currently specified field within a CPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:DATa:SIZe
This command specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an
CPHY trigger if the trigger condition is DATA.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the data size. The default data size is 1 byte and otherwise ranges
between 1 and 5.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:DATa:SIZe 2 specifies 2 as the

field within a CPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:DATa:SIZe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:DATa:SIZe 1, indicating that 2 is
the currently specified field within a CPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for CPHY triggering if the
trigger condition is DATA.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1281

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default value is XXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:DATa:VALue "11110000"

specifies 11110000 as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:DATa:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:DATa:VALue "11110000",
indicating that 11110000 is the currently specified field within a CPHY frame
to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:ERRor:TYPe
This command sets or queries the error type for CPHY bus. The default error
type condition is ANY.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:ERRor:TYPe {ANY|ECC|CRC}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:ERRor:TYPe?

Arguments ANY specifies ANY as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.

ECC specifies ECC as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.

CRC specifies CRC as the field within a CPHY frame to search on

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:ERRor:TYPe ECC specifies ECC

as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:ERRor:TYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:ERRor:TYPe ECC, indicating that
ECC is the currently specified field within a CPHY frame to search on.

2-1282 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:ESCAPEMODe:COMMand
This command sets or queries the escape mode command type for CPHY bus..

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:ESCAPEMODe:COMMand
{LPDT|ULPS|RESETTRIGger|ANY}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:ESCAPEMODe:COMMand?

Arguments LPDT specifies LPDT as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.

ULPS specifies ULPS as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.

RESETTRIGger specifies RESETTRIGger as the field within a CPHY frame

to search on
ANY specifies ANY as the field within a CPHY frame to search on. ANY is the
default value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:ESCAPEMODe:COMMand ULPS

specifies ULPS as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:ESCAPEMODe:COMMand? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:ESCAPEMODe:COMMand
ULPS, indicating that ULPS is the currently specified field within a CPHY frame
to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:GREen:VALue
This command specifies the green data string used for CPHY triggering if the
trigger condition is on RGB packet.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:GREen:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:GREen:VALue?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1283

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default green value is XXXXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:GREen:VALue "243" specifies

243 as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:GREen:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:GREen:VALue "243", indicating
that 243 is the currently specified field within a CPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:MODe:TYPe
This command sets or queries the mode type for CPHY bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:MODe:TYPe {HS|LP}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:MODe:TYPe?

Arguments HS specifies HS as the mode within a CPHY frame to search on. HS is default
mode type condition.
LP specifies LP as the mode within a CPHY frame to search on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:MODe:TYPe LP specifies LP as the

mode within a CPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:MODe:TYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:MODe:TYPe LP, indicating that
LP is the currently specified mode within a CPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:PACKets:LIST
This command sets or queries the packet list for CPHY bus. The default packet
list condition is VSYNCSTART.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Search and Mark

2-1284 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:PACKets:LIST
{VSYNCSTART| VSYNCEND| HSYNCSTART| HSYNCEND| EOTP| COLOROFF|
COLORON| SHUTDOWN| TURNON| GSW| GR| COMPRESSION| SCRAMBLING|
EXECUTEQUEue| DCSSW| DCSR| GLONGWRITE| DSINULL| DSIBLANk|
MAXRETSIZE| DCSGLONGWRITE| PICPARameter| COMPRESSEDPSTReam|
PPS101010| PPS121212| PPS565| PPS666| LPS666| PPS888|
YCBCR24| LPYCBCR24| YCBCR16| YCBCR12| ACKNowledge|
ERRORREPort| GSRR| GLONGREAD| DCSLONGREAD| DCSSRR|
FRAMESTARt| FRAMEEND| LINESTARt| LINEEND| GSP| CSINULL|
CSIBLANk| EMBEDDED| USEREIGHTB| RGB565| RGB555| RGB444|
RGB666| RAW6| RAW7| RAW8| RAW10| RAW12| RAW14| RAW16| RAW20|
RGB888| YUV420L8| YUV8BIT| YUV422B10| YUV420B10}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:PACKets:LIST?

Arguments VSYNCSTART specifies VSYNCSTART as the packet within CPHY frame to

search on.
VSYNCEND specifies VSYNCEND as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

HSYNCSTART specifies HSYNCSTART as the packet within CPHY frame to

search on.
HSYNCEND specifies HSYNCEND as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

EOTP specifies EOTP as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

COLOROFF specifies COLOROFF as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

COLORON specifies COLORON as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

SHUTDOWN specifies SHUTDOWN as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

TURNON specifies TURNON as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

GSW specifies GSW as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

GR specifies GR as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

COMPRESSION specifies COMPRESSION as the packet within CPHY frame

to search on.
SCRAMBLING specifies SCRAMBLING as the packet within CPHY frame to
search on.
EXECUTEQUEue specifies EXECUTEQUEue as the packet within CPHY frame
to search on.
DCSSW specifies DCSSW as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

DCSR specifies DCSR as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

GLONGWRITE specifies GLONGWRITE as the packet within CPHY frame to

search on.
DSINULL specifies DSINULL as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1285

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DSIBLANk specifies DSIBLANk as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

MAXRETSIZE specifies MAXRETSIZE as the packet within CPHY frame to

search on.
DCSGLONGWRITE specifies DCSGLONGWRITE as the packet within CPHY
frame to search on.
PICPARameter specifies PICPARameter as the packet within CPHY frame to
search on.
COMPRESSEDPSTReam specifies COMPRESSEDPSTReam as the packet within
CPHY frame to search on.
PPS101010 specifies PPS101010 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

PPS121212 specifies PPS121212 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

PPS565 specifies PPS565 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

PPS666 specifies PPS666 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

LPS666 specifies LPS666 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

PPS888 specifies LPS666 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

YCBCR24 specifies YCBCR24 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

LPYCBCR24 specifies LPYCBCR24 as the packet within CPHY frame to search

on.
YCBCR16 specifies YCBCR16 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

YCBCR12 specifies YCBCR12 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

ACKNowledge specifies ACKNowledge as the packet within CPHY frame to

search on.
ERRORREPort specifies ERRORREPort as the packet within CPHY frame to
search on.
GSRR specifies GSRR as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

GLONGREAD specifies GLONGREAD as the packet within CPHY frame to search

on.
DCSLONGREAD specifies DCSLONGREAD as the packet within CPHY frame
to search on.
DCSSRR specifies DCSSRR as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

FRAMESTARt specifies FRAMESTARt as the packet within CPHY frame to

search on.
FRAMEEND specifies FRAMEEND as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

LINESTARt specifies LINESTARt as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

2-1286 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

LINEEND specifies LINEEND as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

GSP specifies GSP as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

CSINULL specifies CSINULL as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

CSIBLANk specifies CSIBLANk as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

EMBEDDED specifies EMBEDDED as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

USEREIGHTB specifies USEREIGHTB as the packet within CPHY frame to

search on.
RGB565 specifies RGB565 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

RGB555 specifies RGB555 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

RGB444 specifies RGB444 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

RGB666 specifies RGB666 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

RAW6 specifies RAW6 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

RAW7 specifies RAW7 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

RAW8 specifies RAW8 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

RAW10 specifies RAW10 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

RAW12 specifies RAW12 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

RAW14 specifies RAW14 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

RAW16 specifies RAW16 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

RAW20 specifies RAW20 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

RGB888 specifies RGB888 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

YUV420L8 specifies YUV420L8 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

YUV8BIT specifies YUV8BIT as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

YUV422B10 specifies YUV422B10 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

YUV420B10 specifies YUV420B10 as the packet within CPHY frame to search on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:PACKets:LIST VSYNCSTART

specifies VSYNCSTART of set command as the packet within CPHY frame to
search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:PACKets:LIST? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:PACKets:LIST VSYNCSTART,
indicating that VSYNCSTART is the currently the packet within CPHY frame
to search on

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1287

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:PACKets:TYPe
This command sets or queries the packet type for CPHY bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:PACKets:TYPe
{SHORt|LONG}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:PACKets:TYPe?

Arguments SHORt specifies SHORt as the field within a CPHY frame to search on. SHORt is
the default packet type condition.
LONG specifies LONG as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:PACKets:TYPe LONG specifies

LONG as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:PACKets:TYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:PACKets:TYPe LONG, indicating
that LONG is the currently specified field within a CPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:PIXel:NUMBer
This command specifies the pixel number to be used for CPHY triggering if the
trigger condition is on pixel number pattern. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:PIXel:NUMBer <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:PIXel:NUMBer?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the pixel number. The default pixel number value is 0

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:PIXel:NUMBer 1234 specifies

1234 as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.

2-1288 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:PIXel:NUMBer? might return

:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:PIXel:NUMBer 1234, indicating
that 1234 is the currently specified field within a CPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:PIXel:SEARCHOPTion
This command sets or queries the search pattern type for CPHY bus. The default
search pattern type value is PIXELVALue.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:PIXel:SEARCHOPTion
{PIXELVALue|PIXELNUMBer}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:PIXel:SEARCHOPTion?

Arguments PIXELVALue specifies PIXELVALue as the field within a CPHY frame to search
on.
PIXELNUMBer specifies PIXELNUMBer as the field within a CPHY frame to
search on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:PIXel:SEARCHOPTion
PIXELNUMBer specifies PIXELNUMBer as the field within a CPHY frame to
search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:PIXel:SEARCHOPTion? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:PIXel:SEARCHOPTion
PIXELNUMBer, indicating that PIXELNUMBer is the currently specified field
within a CPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:RED:VALue
This command specifies the red data string used for CPHY triggering if the trigger
condition is on RGB packet.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1289

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:RED:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:RED:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default red value is XXXXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:RED:VALue "1A1" specifies 1A1

as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:RED:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:RED:VALue "1A1", indicating
that 1A1 is the currently specified field within a CPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:SYMBol:SIZe
This command specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an
CPHY trigger if the trigger condition is SYMBol. The search number is specified
by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:SYMBol:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:SYMBol:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the length of the data string. The default symbol size is 7 symbols
and otherwise ranges between 1 and 14.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:SYMBol:SIZe 2 specifies 2 as the

field within a CPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:SYMBol:SIZe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:SYMBol:SIZe 2, indicating that
2 is the currently specified field within a CPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:SYMBol:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for CPHY triggering if the
trigger condition is SYMBol. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

2-1290 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:SYMBol:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:SYMBol:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the binary data string. The default data value is XXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:SYMBol:VALue "11110000"

specifies 11110000 as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:SYMBol:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:SYMBol:VALue "11110000",
indicating that 11110000 is the currently specified field within a CPHY frame
to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:WORD:SIZe
This command specifies the length of the word string in bytes to be used for an
CPHY trigger if the trigger condition is WORD. The search number is specified
by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:WORD:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:WORD:SIZe ?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the length of the data string. The default word size is 1 byte
and otherwise ranges between 1 and 5.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:WORD:SIZe 2 specifies 2 as the

field within a CPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:WORD:SIZe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:WORD:SIZe 2, indicating that 2 is
the currently specified field within a CPHY frame to search on.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1291

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:WORD:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for CPHY triggering if the
trigger condition is Word. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:WORD:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:WORD:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the binary data string. The default data value is
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:WORD:VALue "11110000"

specifies 11110000 as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:WORD:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:WORD:VALue "11110000",
indicating that 11110000 is the currently specified field within a CPHY frame
to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:WORDCOUNt:VALue
This command specifies the word count data string used for CPHY triggering
if the trigger condition is on any rgb/ycbcr/yuv packet. The search number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:WORDCOUNt:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:WORDCOUNt:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the word count data string. The default data value is
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX.

2-1292 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:WORDCOUNt:VALue "0003"

specifies 0003 as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:WORDCOUNt:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:WORDCOUNt:VALue "0003",
indicating that 0003 is the currently specified field within a CPHY frame to
search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YCBCR:CB
This command specifies the Cb data string used for CPHY triggering if the trigger
condition is on YCbCr packet. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YCBCR:CB <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YCBCR:CB?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default YCBCR packets CB value is
XXXXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YCBCR:CB "1BA" specifies 1BA

as the field within a CPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CPHY:YCBCR:CB? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YCBCR:CB "1BA", indicating that
1BA is the currently specified field within a CPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YCBCR:CR
This command specifies the Cr data string used for CPHY triggering if the trigger
condition is on YCbCr packet. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YCBCR:CR <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YCBCR:CR?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1293

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default YCBCR packets CR value is
XXXXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YCBCR:CR "2EE" specifies 2EE as

the field within a CPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YCBCR:CR? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YCBCR:CR "2EE", indicating that
2EE is the currently specified field within a CPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YCBCR:Y
This command specifies the Y data string used for CPHY triggering if the trigger
condition is on YCbCr packet. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YCBCR:Y <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YCBCR:Y?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default YCBCR packets Y value is
XXXXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YCBCR:Y "1AA" specifies 1AA as

the field within a CPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YCBCR:Y? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YCBCR:Y "1AA", indicating that
1AA is the currently specified field within a CPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YUV:U
This command specifies the U data string used for CPHY triggering if the trigger
condition is on YUV packet. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Search and Mark

2-1294 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YUV:U <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YUV:U?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default YUV packets U value is
XXXXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YUV:U "123" specifies 123 as the

field within a CPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YUV:U? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YUV:U "123", indicating that
123 is the currently specified field within a CPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YUV:V
This command specifies the V data string used for CPHY triggering if the trigger
condition is on YUV packet. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YUV:V <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YUV:V?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default YUV packets V value is
XXXXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YUV:V "12A" specifies 12A as the

field within a CPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YUV:V? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YUV:V "12A", indicating that
12A is the currently specified field within a CPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YUV:Y
This command specifies the Y data string used for CPHY triggering if the trigger
condition is on YUV packet. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CPHY.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1295

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YUV:Y <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YUV:Y?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default YUV packets Y value is
XXXXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YUV:Y "81A" specifies 12A as the

field within a CPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YUV:Y? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:YUV:Y "81A", indicating that
81A is the currently specified field within a CPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:CONDition
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for a CXPI bus. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CXPI .

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:CONDition {STARt|

FRAMes| FRAMEID| PTYPe| DLC| EXTDLC| NETMN| COUNter| DATa|
ERRors}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:CONDition?

Arguments STARt specifies STARt as the event for a CXPI frame to search on. This is the
default value.
FRAMes specifies FRAMes as the frame types for CXPI packets to search on.

FRAMEID specifies FRAMEID as the field within a CXPI frame to search on

PTYPe specifies PTYPe as the field within a CXPI frame to search on.

DLC specifies DLC as the field within a CXPI frame to search on.

EXTDLC specifies EXTDLC as the field within a CXPI frame to search on.

NETMN specifies NETMN as the field within a CXPI frame to search on.

COUNter specifies COUNter as the field within a CXPI frame to search on.

2-1296 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DATa specifies DATa as the field within a CXPI frame to search on.

ERRors specifies ERRors as type of error within a CXPI frame to search on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:CONDition STARt specifies start

as the field within a CXPI frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:CONDition? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:CONDition STARt, indicating
that start is the currently specified field within a CXPI frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:COUNter:VALue
This command specifies the binary counter string used for CXPI triggering if the
trigger condition is COUNTER. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CXPI .

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:COUNter:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:COUNter:VALue?

Arguments <Qstring> specifies the binary counter string. The default size and value
Counter is 2 bits and "XX" respectively

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:COUNter:VALue "01" specifies

the binary counter string used for CXPI triggering if the trigger condition is
COUNTER as "01".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:COUNter:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:COUNter:VALue "01",
indicating the binary counter string used for CXPI triggering if the trigger
condition is COUNTER is "01".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:DATa:SIZe
This command specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for CXPI
triggering if the trigger condition is DATA. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CXPI.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1297

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the data size. The default data size is 1 and the calid range is 1
to 5.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:DATa:SIZe 4 sets the data size

value to 4.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:DATa:SIZe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:DATa:SIZe 4, indicating that
the data size value is 4.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for CXPI triggering if the
trigger condition is DATA. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CXPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default size and value for DATA is 8
bits and "XXXX XXXX" respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:DATa:VALue "0111100111"

sets the data value as "0111100111".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:DATa:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:DATa:VALue "0111100111",
indicating the data value is "0111100111".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:DLC:VALue
This command specifies the binary DLC string used for CXPI triggering if the
trigger condition is DLC. The search number is specified by x.

2-1298 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-CXPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:DLC:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:DLC:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default size and value of DLC is 4 bits and
"XXXX" respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:DLC:VALue "110" specifies the

binary DLC string used for CXPI triggering if the trigger condition is DLC and
sets it to "X110".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:DLC:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:DLC:VALue "110", indicating
the value of the DLC is "X110".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:ERROR:TYPe
This command sets or queries the Error Type in CXPI bus. The search number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CXPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:ERROR:TYPe {CRC| PARity|

FRAMe| IBS| ANY}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:ERROR:TYPe?

Arguments CRC specifies CRC as the field within a CXPI frame to search on.

PARity specifies PARity as the field within a CXPI frame to search on. The
default Error Type is Parity.
FRAMe specifies FRAMe as the field within a CXPI frame to search on.

IBS specifies IBS as the field within a CXPI frame to search on.

ANY specifies ANY as any type of error within a CXPI frame to search on.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1299

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:ERROR:TYPe CRC sets the Error

Type as CRC.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:ERROR:TYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:ERROR:TYPe CRC, indicating
the type of the error is CRC.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:EXTDLC:VALue
This command specifies the binary DLC string used for CXPI triggering if the
trigger condition is Ext DLC. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CXPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:EXTDLC:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:EXTDLC:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default size and value of Ext DLC is 8
bits and "XXXX XXXX" respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:EXTDLC:VALue "11010010"

specifies the binary DLC string used for CXPI triggering if the trigger condition is
Ext DLC as "1010010".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:EXTDLC:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:EXTDLC:VALue "110",
indicating the value of the Ext DLC is "11010010".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:FRAMe:TYPe
This command sets or queries the frame type in CXPI bus. The search number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CXPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:FRAMe:TYPe {NORMal|

SLEep| LONG| POLLINGNORMal| POLLINGLONG}

2-1300 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:FRAMe:TYPe?

Arguments NORMal specifies NORMal as the packet type CXPI frame to search on. The
default frame type is normal.
SLEep specifies SLEep as the packet type CXPI frame to search on.

LONG specifies LONG as the packet type CXPI frame to search on.

POLLINGNORMal specifies POLLINGNORMal as the packet type CXPI frame

to search on.
POLLINGLONG specifies POLLINGLONG as the packet type CXPI frame to
search on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:FRAMe:TYPe SLEep specifies

the frame type as sleep.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:FRAMe:TYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:FRAMe:TYPe SLEep, indicating
the type of the frame to sleep.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:FRAMEID:VALue
This command specifies the binary frameId string used for CXPI triggering if the
trigger condition is FRAMEID. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CXPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:FRAMEID:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:FRAMEID:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default size and value of frame ID is 7
bits and "XXX XXXX" respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:FRAMEID:VALue "1000"

specifies the binary frameId string used for CXPI triggering if the trigger condition
is FRAMEID as "XXX1000".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:FRAMEID:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:FRAMEID:VALue "1000",
indicating the value of the frameId is "XXX1000".

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1301

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:NETMN:SLEEPIND
This command sets or queries the Sleep Status in CXPI bus. The search number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CXPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:NETMN:SLEEPIND
{ON|OFF|EITHer}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:NETMN:SLEEPIND?

Arguments ON specifies the Sleep Status as on. The default status is on.

OFF specifies the Sleep Status as off.

EITHer specifies the Sleep Status as either.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:NETMN:SLEEPIND OFF specifies

the Sleep Status as off.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:NETMN:SLEEPIND? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:NETMN:SLEEPIND OFF,
indicating the status of the Sleep to off.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:NETMN:WAKEUPIND
This command sets or queries the Wakeup Status in CXPI bus. The search number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-CXPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:NETMN:WAKEUPIND
{ON|OFF|EITHer}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:NETMN:WAKEUPIND?

Arguments ON specifies the Wakeup Status as on. The default status is on.

OFF specifies the Wakeup Status as off.

2-1302 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

EITHer specifies the Wakeup Status as either.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:NETMN:WAKEUPIND ON specifies

the Wakeup Status as on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:NETMN:WAKEUPIND? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CXPI:NETMN:WAKEUPIND ON,
indicating the status of the Wakeup to on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:BLUe:VALue
This command specifies the blue data string used for DPHY triggering if the
trigger condition is on RGB packet.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:BLUe:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:BLUe:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default blue value is XXXXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:BLUe:VALue "BE4" specifies BE4

as the field within a DPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:BLUe:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:BLUe:VALue "BE4", indicating
that BE4 is the currently specified field within a DPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:CONDition
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for an DPHY bus. The default
trigger on condition is SOT.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1303

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:CONDition {SOT| EOT|

DATa| EOTPDATa| OPTIONALPARam| SCRambling| COMPression|
PACKets| BUSTURNAROUnd| ESCAPEMODe| STop| ERRors| MODe}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:CONDition?

Arguments SOT specifies SOT as the field within a DPHY frame to search on.

EOT specifies EOT as the field within a DPHY frame to search on.

DATa specifies DATa as the field within a DPHY frame to search on

EOTPDATa specifies EOTPDATa as the field within a DPHY frame to search on.

OPTIONALPARam specifies OPTIONALPARam as the field within a DPHY frame

to search on.
SCRambling specifies SCRambling as the field within a DPHY frame to search
on.
COMPression specifies COMPression as the field within a DPHY frame to
search on.
PACKets specifies PACKets as the field within a DPHY frame to search on.

BUSTURNAROUnd specifies BUSTURNAROUnd as the field within a DPHY

frame to search on.
ESCAPEMODe specifies ESCAPEMODe as the field within a DPHY frame to
search on.
STop specifies STop as the field within a DPHY frame to search on.

ERRors specifies ERRors as the field within a DPHY frame to search on.

MODe specifies MODe as the field within a DPHY frame to search on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:CONDition SOT specifies SOT as

the field within a DPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:CONDition? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:CONDition SOT, indicating that
SOT is the currently specified field within a DPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:DATa:SIZe
This command specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an
DPHY trigger if the trigger condition is DATA. The default data size is 1 byte and
ranges between 1 and 5. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

2-1304 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the data size.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:DATa:SIZe 2 specifies 2 as the

field within a DPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:DATa:SIZe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:DATa:SIZe 2, indicating 2 is the
currently specified field within a DPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for DPHY triggering if the
trigger condition is DATA.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default value is XXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:DATa:VALue "11110000"

specifies 11110000 as the field within a DPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:DATa:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:DATa:VALue "11110000",
indicating that 11110000 is the currently specified field within a DPHY frame
to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:ERRor:TYPe
This command sets or queries the error type for DPHY bus. The default error
type condition is ANY.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1305

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:ERRor:TYPe {ANY|ECC|CRC}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:ERRor:TYPe?

Arguments ANY specifies ANY as the field within a DPHY frame to search on.

ECC specifies ECC as the field within a DPHY frame to search on.

CRC specifies CRC as the field within a DPHY frame to search on

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:ERRor:TYPe ECC specifies ECC

as the field within a DPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:ERRor:TYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:ERRor:TYPe ECC, indicating that
ECC is the currently specified field within a DPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:ESCAPEMODe:COMMand
This command sets or queries the escape mode command type for DPHY bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:ESCAPEMODe:COMMand
{LPDT|ULPS|RESETTRIGger|ANY}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:ESCAPEMODe:COMMand?

Arguments LPDT specifies LPDT as the field within a DPHY frame to search on.

ULPS specifies ULPS as the field within a DPHY frame to search on.

RESETTRIGger specifies RESETTRIGger as the field within a DPHY frame

to search on
ANY specifies ANY as the field within a DPHY frame to search on. ANY is the
default value.

2-1306 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:ESCAPEMODe:COMMand ULPS

specifies ULPS as the field within a DPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:ESCAPEMODe:COMMand? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:ESCAPEMODe:COMMand
ULPS, indicating that ULPS is the currently specified field within a DPHY frame
to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:GREen:VALue
This command specifies the green data string used for DPHY triggering if the
trigger condition is on RGB packet.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:GREen:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:GREen:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default green value is XXXXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:GREen:VALue "243" specifies

243 as the field within a DPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:GREen:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:GREen:VALue "243", indicating
that 243 is the currently specified field within a DPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:MODe:TYPe
This command sets or queries the mode type for DPHY bus. The default mode
type condition is HS.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:MODe:TYPe {HS|LP}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:MODe:TYPe?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1307

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments HS specifies HS as the mode within a DPHY frame to search on. HS is default
mode type condition.
LP specifies LP as the mode within a DPHY frame to search on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:MODe:TYPe LP specifies LP as the

mode within a DPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:MODe:TYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:MODe:TYPe LP, indicating that
LP is the currently specified mode within a DPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:PACKets:LIST
This command sets or queries the packet list for DPHY bus. The default packet
list condition is VSYNCSTART.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:PACKets:LIST
{VSYNCSTART| VSYNCEND| HSYNCSTART| HSYNCEND| EOTP| COLOROFF|
COLORON| SHUTDOWN| TURNON| GSW| GR| COMPRESSION| SCRAMBLING|
EXECUTEQUEue| DCSSW| DCSR| GLONGWRITE| DSINULL| DSIBLANk|
MAXRETSIZE| DCSGLONGWRITE| PICPARameter| COMPRESSEDPSTReam|
PPS101010| PPS121212| PPS565| PPS666| LPS666| PPS888|
YCBCR24| LPYCBCR24| YCBCR16| YCBCR12| ACKNowledge|
ERRORREPort| GSRR| GLONGREAD| DCSLONGREAD| DCSSRR|
FRAMESTARt| FRAMEEND| LINESTARt| LINEEND| GSP| CSINULL|
CSIBLANk| EMBEDDED| USEREIGHTB| RGB565| RGB555| RGB444|
RGB666| RAW6| RAW7| RAW8| RAW10| RAW12| RAW14| RAW16| RAW20|
RGB888| YUV420L8| YUV8BIT| YUV422B10| YUV420B10}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:PACKets:LIST?

Arguments VSYNCSTART specifies VSYNCSTART as the packet within DPHY frame to

search on.
VSYNCEND specifies VSYNCEND as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

HSYNCSTART specifies HSYNCSTART as the packet within DPHY frame to

search on.
HSYNCEND specifies HSYNCEND as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

EOTP specifies EOTP as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

2-1308 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

COLOROFF specifies COLOROFF as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

COLORON specifies COLORON as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

SHUTDOWN specifies SHUTDOWN as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

TURNON specifies TURNON as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

GSW specifies GSW as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

GR specifies GR as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

COMPRESSION specifies COMPRESSION as the packet within DPHY frame

to search on.
SCRAMBLING specifies SCRAMBLING as the packet within DPHY frame to
search on.
EXECUTEQUEue specifies EXECUTEQUEue as the packet within DPHY frame
to search on.
DCSSW specifies DCSSW as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

DCSR specifies DCSR as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

GLONGWRITE specifies GLONGWRITE as the packet within DPHY frame to

search on.
DSINULL specifies DSINULL as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

DSIBLANk specifies DSIBLANk as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

MAXRETSIZE specifies MAXRETSIZE as the packet within DPHY frame to

search on.
DCSGLONGWRITE specifies DCSGLONGWRITE as the packet within DPHY
frame to search on.
PICPARameter specifies PICPARameter as the packet within DPHY frame to
search on.
COMPRESSEDPSTReam specifies COMPRESSEDPSTReam as the packet within
DPHY frame to search on.
PPS101010 specifies PPS101010 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

PPS121212 specifies PPS121212 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

PPS565 specifies PPS565 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

PPS666 specifies PPS666 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

LPS666 specifies LPS666 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

PPS888 specifies LPS666 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

YCBCR24 specifies YCBCR24 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1309

Commands listed in alphabetical order

LPYCBCR24 specifies LPYCBCR24 as the packet within DPHY frame to search

on.
YCBCR16 specifies YCBCR16 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

YCBCR12 specifies YCBCR12 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

ACKNowledge specifies ACKNowledge as the packet within DPHY frame to

search on.
ERRORREPort specifies ERRORREPort as the packet within DPHY frame to
search on.
GSRR specifies GSRR as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

GLONGREAD specifies GLONGREAD as the packet within DPHY frame to search

on.
DCSLONGREAD specifies DCSLONGREAD as the packet within DPHY frame
to search on.
DCSSRR specifies DCSSRR as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

FRAMESTARt specifies FRAMESTARt as the packet within DPHY frame to

search on.
FRAMEEND specifies FRAMEEND as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

LINESTARt specifies LINESTARt as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

LINEEND specifies LINEEND as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

GSP specifies GSP as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

CSINULL specifies CSINULL as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

CSIBLANk specifies CSIBLANk as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

EMBEDDED specifies EMBEDDED as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

USEREIGHTB specifies USEREIGHTB as the packet within DPHY frame to

search on.
RGB565 specifies RGB565 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

RGB555 specifies RGB555 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

RGB444 specifies RGB444 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

RGB666 specifies RGB666 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

RAW6 specifies RAW6 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

RAW7 specifies RAW7 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

RAW8 specifies RAW8 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

RAW10 specifies RAW10 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

2-1310 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

RAW12 specifies RAW12 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

RAW14 specifies RAW14 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

RAW16 specifies RAW16 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

RAW20 specifies RAW20 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

RGB888 specifies RGB888 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

YUV420L8 specifies YUV420L8 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

YUV8BIT specifies YUV8BIT as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

YUV422B10 specifies YUV422B10 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

YUV420B10 specifies YUV420B10 as the packet within DPHY frame to search on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:PACKets:LIST VSYNCSTART

specifies VSYNCSTART of set command as the packet within DPHY frame
to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:PACKets:LIST? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:PACKets:LIST VSYNCSTART,
indicating that VSYNCSTART is the currently the packet within DPHY frame
to search on

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:PACKets:TYPe
This command sets or queries the packet type for DPHY bus. The default packet
type condition is SHORt.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:PACKets:TYPe
{SHORt|LONG}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:PACKets:TYPe?

Arguments SHORt specifies SHORt as the field within a DPHY frame to search on. SHORt is
the default packet type condition.
LONG specifies LONG as the field within a DPHY frame to search on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:PACKets:TYPe LONG specifies

LONG as the field within a DPHY frame to search on.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1311

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:PACKets:TYPe? might return

:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:PACKets:TYPe LONG, indicating
that LONG is the currently specified field within a DPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:PIXel:NUMBer
This command specifies the pixel number to be used for DPHY triggering if the
trigger condition is on pixel number pattern. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:PIXel:NUMBer <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:PIXel:NUMBer?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the pixel number. The default pixel number value is 0

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:PIXel:NUMBer 1234 specifies

1234 as the field within a DPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:PIXel:NUMBer? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:PIXel:NUMBer 1234, indicating
that 1234 is the currently specified field within a DPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:PIXel:SEARCHOPTion
This command sets or queries the search pattern type for DPHY bus. The default
search pattern type value is PIXELVALue.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:PIXel:SEARCHOPTion
{PIXELVALue|PIXELNUMBer}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:PIXel:SEARCHOPTion?

2-1312 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments PIXELVALue specifies PIXELVALue as the field within a DPHY frame to search
on.
PIXELNUMBer specifies PIXELNUMBer as the field within a DPHY frame
to search on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:PIXel:SEARCHOPTion
PIXELNUMBer specifies PIXELNUMBer as the field within a DPHY frame
to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:PIXel:SEARCHOPTion? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:PIXel:SEARCHOPTion
PIXELNUMBer, indicating that PIXELNUMBer is the currently specified field
within a DPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:RED:VALue
This command specifies the red data string used for DPHY triggering if the trigger
condition is on RGB packet.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:RED:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:RED:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default red value is XXXXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:RED:VALue "1A1" specifies 1A1

as the field within a DPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:RED:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:RED:VALue "1A1", indicating
that 1A1 is the currently specified field within a DPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:WORDCOUNt:VALue
This command specifies the word count data string used for DPHY triggering if
the trigger condition is set on any pixel packet.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1313

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:WORDCOUNt:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:WORDCOUNt:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default word count value is
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:WORDCOUNt:VALue "0003"

specifies 1A1 as the field within a DPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:WORDCOUNt:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:WORDCOUNt:VALue "0003",
indicating that 0003 is the currently specified field within a DPHY frame to
search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YCBCR:CB
This command specifies the Cb data string used for DPHY triggering if the trigger
condition is on YCbCr packet.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YCBCR:CB <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YCBCR:CB?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default YCBCR packets CB value is
XXXXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YCBCR:CB "1BA" specifies 1BA

as the field within a DPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:DPHY:YCBCR:CB? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YCBCR:CB "1BA", indicating that
1BA is the currently specified field within a DPHY frame to search on.

2-1314 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YCBCR:CR
This command specifies the Cr data string used for DPHY triggering if the trigger
condition is on YCbCr packet.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YCBCR:CR <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YCBCR:CR?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default YCBCR packets CR value is
XXXXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YCBCR:CR "2EE" specifies 2EE as

the field within a DPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YCBCR:CR? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YCBCR:CR "2EE", indicating that
2EE is the currently specified field within a DPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YCBCR:Y
This command specifies the Y data string used for DPHY triggering if the trigger
condition is on YCbCr packet.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YCBCR:Y <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YCBCR:Y?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default YCBCR packets Y value is
XXXXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YCBCR:Y "1AA" specifies 1AA as

the field within a DPHY frame to search on.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1315

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YCBCR:Y? might return

:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YCBCR:Y "1AA", indicating that
1AA is the currently specified field within a DPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YUV:U
This command specifies the U data string used for DPHY triggering if the trigger
condition is on YUV packet.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YUV:U <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YUV:U?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default YUV packets U value is
XXXXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YUV:U "123" specifies 123 as the

field within a DPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YUV:U? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YUV:U "123", indicating that
123 is the currently specified field within a DPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YUV:V
This command specifies the V data string used for DPHY triggering if the trigger
condition is on YUV packet.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YUV:V <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YUV:V?

2-1316 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default YUV packets V value is
XXXXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YUV:V "12A" specifies 12A as the

field within a DPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YUV:V? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YUV:V "12A", indicating that
12A is the currently specified field within a DPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YUV:Y
This command specifies the Y data string used for DPHY triggering if the trigger
condition is on YUV packet.

Conditions Requires option SR-DPHY.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YUV:Y <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YUV:Y?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default YUV packets Y value is
XXXXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YUV:Y "81A" specifies 12A as the

field within a DPHY frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YUV:Y? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:YUV:Y "81A", indicating that
81A is the currently specified field within a DPHY frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:ADDRess:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for ESPI triggering if the
trigger condition is Address. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1317

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:ADDRess:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:ADDRess:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default value is XXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:ADDRess:VALue
"0111101101011010" specifies 0111101101011010 as the field within a ESPI
frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:ADDRess:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:ADDRess:VALue
"0111101101011010", indicating that 0111101101011010 is the currently
specified field within a ESPI frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:COMMAND:OPCode
This command sets or queries the command opcode in ESPI bus. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:COMMAND:OPCode
{GETSTATus| GETCONFig| SETCONFig| GETNP| GETPC| PUTNP|
PUTPC| PUTIORDSHORt| PUTIOWRSHORt| PUTMEMRD32SHORt|
PUTMEMWR32SHORt| PUTOOB| GETOOB| PUTFLASHC| GETFLASHNP|
PUTVWIRe| GETVWIRe}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:COMMAND:OPCode?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:PHASe

Arguments GETSTATus specifies get status as the command opcode in ESPI bus to search on.

GETCONFig specifies get configuration as the command opcode in ESPI bus to

search on.
SETCONFig specifies set configuration as the command opcode in ESPI bus to
search on..
GETNP specifies GETNP as the command opcode in ESPI bus to search on.

GETPC specifies GETPC as the command opcode in ESPI bus to search on.

PUTNP specifies PUTNP as the command opcode in ESPI bus to search on.

2-1318 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

PUTPC specifies PUTPC as the command opcode in ESPI bus to search on.

PUTIORDSHORt specifies put IO read short as the command opcode in ESPI

bus to search on.
PUTIOWRSHORt specifies put IO write short as the command opcode in ESPI
bus to search on.
PUTMEMRD32SHORt specifies put memory read 32 short as the command opcode
in ESPI bus to search on.
PUTMEMWR32SHORt specifies put memory write 32 short as the command opcode
in ESPI bus to search on.
PUTOOB specifies PUTOOB as the command opcode in ESPI bus to search on.

GETOOB specifies GETOOB as the command opcode in ESPI bus to search on.

PUTFLASHC specifies PUTFLASHC as the command opcode in ESPI bus to

search on.
GETFLASHNP specifies GETFLASHNP as the command opcode in ESPI bus
to search on.
PUTVWIRe specifies put virtual wire as the command opcode in ESPI bus to
search on.
GETVWIRe specifies get virtual wire as the command opcode in ESPI bus to
search on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:COMMAND:OPCode specifies the

search to happen on which command opcode.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:COMMAND:OPCode? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:COMMAND:OPCode GETNP,
indicating that command is the currently selected command opcode where the
search will be performed.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:CONDition
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for a ESPI bus. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1319

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:CONDition {STARt|

CHINDependent| PERICHANnel| OOBCHANnel| VWCHANnel|
FACHANnel| DATa| STATus| ERRors| WAIT| END}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:CONDition?

Arguments STARt specifies STARt as the event for ESPI frame to search on.

CHINDependent specifies CHINDependent channel for ESPI protocol to search

on.
PERICHANnel specifies peripheral channel for ESPI protocol to search on.

OOBCHANnel specifies OOBCHANnel channel for ESPI protocol to search on.

VWCHANnel specifies virtual wire channel for ESPI protocol to search on.

FACHANnel specifies flash channel for ESPI protocol to search on.

DATa specifies DATa as the field within a ESPI frame to search on.

STATus specifies STATus as the field within a ESPI frame to search on.

ERRors specifies ERRors as the type of error ESPI frame to search on.

WAIT specifies WAIT as the field within a ESPI frame to search on.

END specifies END as the event for a ESPI frame to search on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:CONDition STARt specifies

STARt as the field within a ESPI frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:CONDition? might return

:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:CONDition STARt, indicating
that STARt is the currently specified field within a ESPI frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:CYCLETYPe
This command sets or queries the cycle type on command in ESPI bus. The
search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:CYCLETYPe {MEMRD32|

2-1320 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MCTP| FLASHREAD| FLASHWRITe| FLASHERASe| FLSUCCESSNODATa|

FLSUCCESSDATa| FLUNSUCCESSNODATa}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:CYCLETYPe?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:PHASe

Arguments MEMRD32 specifies Memory Read 32 as the cycle type to search on.

MEMRD64 specifies Memory Read 64 as the cycle type to search on.

MEMWR32 specifies Memory Read Write 32 as the cycle type to search on.

MEMWR64 specifies Memory Read Write 64 as the cycle type to search on.

MESSage specifies MESSage as the cycle type to search on.

MSGWITHDATa specifies message with Data as the cycle type to search on.

SUCCESSNODATa specifies success without data as the cycle type to search on.

SUCCESSDATa specifies success with data as the cycle type to search on.

UNSUCCESSNODATa specifies unsuccess without data as the cycle type to search

on.
OOBSMBUS specifies OOB SMBus as the cycle type to search on.

MCTP specifies MCTP as the cycle type to search on.

FLASHREAD specifies FLASHREAD as the cycle type to search on.

FLASHWRITe specifies FLASHWRITe as the cycle type to search on.

FLASHERASe specifies FLASHERASe as the cycle type to search on.

FLSUCCESSNODATa specifies flash success without data as the cycle type to

search on.
FLSUCCESSDATa specifies flash Success with data as the cycle type to search on.

FLUNSUCCESSNODATa specifies flash unsuccess without data as the cycle type

to search on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:CYCLETYPe MCTP specifies MCTP

as the cycle type to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:CYCLETYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:CYCLETYPe MCTP, indicating that
MCTP is the cycle type to search on.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1321

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:DATa:SIZe
This command specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for ESPI
triggering if the trigger condition is DATA. The default data size is 1 byte and
ranges between 1 and 5. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the data size. The default data size is 1 and the valid range is 1
to 5.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:DATa:SIZe 4 sets the data size

value as 4.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:DATa:SIZe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:DATa:SIZe 4, indicating that
the data size value is 4.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for ESPI triggering if the
trigger condition is DATA. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default value is XXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:DATa:VALue "0111100111"

sets the data value as "0111100111".

2-1322 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:DATa:VALue? might return

:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:DATa:VALue "0111100111",
indicating that the data value is "0111100111".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:ERRor:TYPe
This command sets or queries the error type on command or response in ESPI
bus. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:ERRor:TYPe {CRC| DEFer|

FATal| NONFATal| NORESPonse| CMDOPCODe| CYCLETYPe}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:ERRor:TYPe?

Arguments CRC specifies CRC as the error type to search on.

DEFer specifies DEFer as the error type to search on.

FATal specifies FATal as the error type to search on.

NONFATal specifies NONFATal as the error type to search on.

NORESPonse specifies NORESPonse as the error type to search on.

CMDOPCODe specifies CMDOPCODe as the error type to search on.

CYCLETYPe specifies CYCLETYPe as the error type to search on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:ERRor:TYPe CRC specifies CRC

as the error type to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:ERRor:TYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:ERRor:TYPe CRC, indicating
that CRC is the error type to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:LENGth:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for ESPI triggering if the
trigger condition is Length. The search number is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1323

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:LENGth:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:LENGth:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default value is XXXXXXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:LENGth:VALue
"011110110101" sets the tag value as "011110110101".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:LENGth:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:LENGth:VALue
"011110110101", indicating that the tag value is "011110110101".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:PHASe
This command sets or queries the phase in ESPI bus. The search number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:PHASe {COMMand|

RESPONSE| RESPONSEHEADer| RESPONSENOHEADer}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:PHASe?

Arguments COMMand specifies command as the field/packet to search on.

RESPONSE specifies response as the field/packet to search on.

RESPONSEHEADer specifies the response header as the field/packet to search on.

RESPONSENOHEADer specifies the response without header as the field/packet

to search on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:PHASe COMMand specifies

command as the field/packet to search on.

2-1324 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:PHASe? might return

:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:PHASe COMMand, indicating that
command is the field/packet to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:RESPCYCLE:TYPe
This command sets or queries the response cycle type on command in ESPI bus.
The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:RESPCYCLE:TYPe
{MEMRDWR32| MEMRDWR64| MESSage| MSGWITHDATa| SUCCESSNODATa|
SUCCESSDATa| UNSUCCESSNODATa| LTR| FLASHREAD| FLASHWRITe|
FLASHERASe}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:RESPCYCLE:TYPe?

Arguments MEMRDWR32 specifies Memory Read/Write 32 as the cycle type to search on.

MEMRDWR64 specifies Memory Read/Write 64 as the cycle type to search on.

MESSage specifies message as the cycle type to search on.

MSGWITHDATa specifies message with Data as the cycle type to search on.

SUCCESSNODATa specifies success without data as the cycle type to search on.

SUCCESSDATa specifies success with data as the cycle type to search on.

UNSUCCESSNODATa specifies unsuccess without data as the cycle type to search

on.
LTR specifies LTR as the cycle type to search on.

FLASHREAD specifies flash read as the cycle type to search on.

FLASHWRITe specifies flash write as the cycle type to search on.

FLASHERASe specifies flash erase as the cycle type to search on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:RESPCYCLE:TYPe LTR specifies

LTR as the cycle type to search on.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1325

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:RESPCYCLE:TYPe? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:RESPCYCLE:TYPe LTR,
indicating that LTR is the cycle type to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:SMBUS:DESTination:ADDRess
This command specifies the binary data string used for ESPI triggering if the
trigger condition is SMBus Source/Destination Address. The search number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:SMBUS:DESTination:
ADDRess <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:SMBUS:DESTination:
ADDRess?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default value is XXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:SMBUS:DESTination:ADDRess
"01111011" sets the tag value as "01111011".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:SMBUS:DESTination:ADDRess?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:SMBUS:DESTination:ADDRess
"01111011", indicating that the tag value is "01111011".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:SMBUS:SLAVe:ADDRess
This command specifies the binary data string used for ESPI triggering if the
trigger condition is SMBus Slave Address. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:SMBUS:SLAVe:ADDRess
<QString>

2-1326 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:SMBUS:SLAVe:ADDRess?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default value is XXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:SMBUS:SLAVe:ADDRess
"01111011" sets the tag value as "01111011".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:SMBUS:SLAVe:ADDRess? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:SMBUS:SLAVe:ADDRess
"01111011", indicating that the tag value is "01111011".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:TAG:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for ESPI triggering if the
trigger condition is Tag. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:TAG:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:TAG:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default value is XXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:TAG:VALue "0111" sets the tag

value as "0111".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:TAG:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:TAG:VALue "0111", indicating
that the tag value is "0111".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:VIRTUALWIRe:COUNt:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for ESPI triggering if the
trigger condition is Virtual wire count. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1327

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:VIRTUALWIRe:COUNt:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:VIRTUALWIRe:COUNt:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default value is XXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:VIRTUALWIRe:COUNt:VALue
"01111011" sets the tag value as "01111011".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:VIRTUALWIRe:COUNt:VALue?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:VIRTUALWIRe:COUNt:VALue
"01111011", indicating that the tag value is "01111011".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:VIRTUALWIRe:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for ESPI triggering if the
trigger condition is Virtual wire Data. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:VIRTUALWIRe:DATa:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:VIRTUALWIRe:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default value is XXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:VIRTUALWIRe:DATa:VALue
"01111011" sets the tag value as "01111011".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:VIRTUALWIRe:DATa:VALue?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:VIRTUALWIRe:DATa:VALue
"01111011", indicating that the tag value is "01111011".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:VIRTUALWIRe:INDex:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for ESPI triggering if the
trigger condition is Virtual wire Index. The search number is specified by x.

2-1328 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:VIRTUALWIRe:INDex:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:VIRTUALWIRe:INDex:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default value is XXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:VIRTUALWIRe:INDex:VALue
"01111011" sets the tag value as "01111011".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:VIRTUALWIRe:INDex:VALue?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:VIRTUALWIRe:INDex:VALue
"01111011", indicating that the tag value is "01111011".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:VIRTUALWIRe:RESPonse:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for ESPI triggering if the
trigger condition is Virtual wire Response. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:VIRTUALWIRe:RESPonse:
VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:VIRTUALWIRe:RESPonse:
VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default value is XXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:RESPonse:VALue "01111011"

sets the tag value as "01111011".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:RESPonse:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:RESPonse:VALue "01111011",
indicating that the tag value is "01111011".

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1329

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:VIRTUALWIRe:STATus:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for ESPI triggering if the
trigger condition is Virtual wire Status. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ESPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:VIRTUALWIRe:STATus:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:VIRTUALWIRe:STATus:
VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value. The default value is

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:STATus:VALue
"0111101110101010" sets the tag value as "0111101110101010".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:STATus:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ESPI:STATus:VALue
"0111101110101010", indicating that the tag value is "0111101110101010".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:ADDRESSMODe
This command sets or queries the Address Mode in EtherCAT bus. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:ADDRESSMODe
{DEVice|LOGical}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:ADDRESSMODe?

Arguments DEVice sets the Address Mode to Device. This is the default value.

LOGical sets the Address Mode to Logical.

2-1330 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:ADDRESSMODe LOGical sets

the Address Mode to Logical.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:ADDRESSMODe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:ADDRESSMODe LOGical,
indicating the Address Mode is Logical.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:CNTNV:VALue
This command sets the binary Network Variable Count to be used for EtherCAT
bus. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:CNTNV:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:CNTNV:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary Network Variable Count to be used when searching on
an EtherCAT bus signal. The default size and value of Network Variable Count is
16 bits and "XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX" respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:CNTNV:VALue
"1100110011001100" sets the Network Variable Count value as
"1100110011001100".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:CNTNV:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:CNTNV:VALue
"1100110011001100", indicating the Network Variable Count value is
"1100110011001100".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:COMMANDTYPe
This command sets or queries the Command Type in EtherCAT bus. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1331

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:COMMANDTYPe {NOP|

APRD| APWR| APRW| FPRD| FPWR| FPRW| BRD| BWR| BRW| LRD| LWR|
LRW| ARMW| FRMW| REServed}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:COMMANDTYPe?

Arguments NOP specifies the Command Type and sets it to NOP. This is the default value.

APRD specifies the Command Type and sets it to APRD.

APWR specifies the Command Type and sets it to APWR.

APRW specifies the Command Type and sets it to APRW.

FPRD specifies the Command Type and sets it to FPRD.

FPWR specifies the Command Type and sets it to FPWR.

FPRW specifies the Command Type and sets it to FPRW.

BRD specifies the Command Type and sets it to BRD.

BWR specifies the Command Type and sets it to BWR.

BRW specifies the Command Type and sets it to BRW.

LRD specifies the Command Type and sets it to LRD.

LWR specifies the Command Type and sets it to LWR.

LRW specifies the Command Type and sets it to LRW.

ARMW specifies the Command Type and sets it to ARMW.

FRMW specifies the Command Type and sets it to FRMW.

REServed specifies the Command Type and sets it to REServed.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:COMMANDTYPe APRD

specifies the Command Type and sets it to APRD.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:COMMANDTYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:COMMANDTYPe APRD,
indicating the Command Type is APRD.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:CONDition
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for a EtherCAT bus. The
search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

2-1332 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:CONDition
{SOF| PROTocol| IPHEADer| UDPIPHEADer| MACADDRess| TCI|
ECATHEADERLENGth| DATagram| NETWORKVARiable| MAILBOX|
FCSERRor| EOF}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:CONDition?

Arguments SOF specifies the field within a EtherCAT frame to search on as SOF. This is
the default value.
PROTocol specifies the field within a EtherCAT frame to search on as PROTocol.

IPHEADer specifies the field within a EtherCAT frame to search on as IPHEADer.

UDPIPHEADer specifies the field within a EtherCAT frame to search on as

UDPIPHEADer.
MACADDRess specifies the field within a EtherCAT frame to search on as
MACADDRess.
TCI specifies the field within a EtherCAT frame to search on as TCI.

ECATHEADERLENGth specifies the field within a EtherCAT frame to search on

as ECATHEADERLENGth.
DATagram specifies the field within a EtherCAT frame to search on as DATagram.

NETWORKVARiable specifies the field within a EtherCAT frame to search on as

NETWORKVARiable.
MAILBOX specifies the field within a EtherCAT frame to search on as MAILBOX.

FCSERRor specifies the field within a EtherCAT frame to search on as FCSERRor.

EOF specifies the field within a EtherCAT frame to search on as EOF.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:CONDition TCI specifies

TCI as the field within a EtherCAT frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:CONDition? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:CONDition TCI, indicating
TCI is the currently specified field within a EtherCAT frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:CYC:VALue
This command sets the binary Cycle Number to be used for EtherCAT bus. The
search number is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1333

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:CYC:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:CYC:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary Cycle Number to be used when searching on an

EtherCAT bus signal. The default size and value of Network Variable Count is 16
bits and "XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX" respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:CYC:VALue
"1100110011001100" sets the Cycle Number value as "1100110011001100".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:CYC:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:CYC:VALue
"1100110011001100", indicating the Cycle Number value is
"1100110011001100".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATa:SIZe
This command specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for
EtherCAT bus. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> is the binary data value to be used when searching on an Ethernet bus
signal. The default size is 1. The valid range is 1 to 5.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATa:SIZe 4 sets the data

size value as 4.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATa:SIZe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATa:SIZe 4, indicating
the data size value is 4.

2-1334 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for EtherCAT bus. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary Cycle Number to be used when searching on an

EtherCAT bus signal. The default data size and value is 8 bits and "XXXXXXXX"
respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATa:VALue "00001111"

sets the data value to "00001111".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATa:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATa:VALue "00001111",
indicating the data value is "00001111".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATAGRAM
This command sets or queries the Datagram fields in EtherCAT bus. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATAGRAM
{HEADer|DATa|WKC}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATAGRAM?

Arguments HEADer specifies the Datagram field and sets it to Header. This is the default
value.
DATa specifies the Datagram field and sets it to Data.

WKC specifies the Datagram field and sets it to WKC.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1335

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATAGRAM DATa specifies

the Datagram field and sets it to Data.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATAGRAM? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATAGRAM DATa, indicating
the Datagram field is Data.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATAGRAMHEADer
This command sets or queries the Datagram Header fields in EtherCAT bus. The
search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATAGRAMHEADer
{CMD|IDX|ADDRess|LEN|CIRCulating|IRQ}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATAGRAMHEADer?

Arguments CMD specifies the Datagram Header field as CMD. This is the default value.

IDX specifies the Datagram Header field as IDX.

ADDRess specifies the Datagram Header field as ADDRess.

LEN specifies the Datagram Header field as LEN.

CIRCulating specifies the Datagram Header field as CIRCulating.

IRQ specifies the Datagram Header field as IRQ.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATAGRAMHEADer LEN

specifies the Datagram Header field and sets it to LEN.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATAGRAMHEADer? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATAGRAMHEADer
LEN, indicating the Datagram Header field is LEN.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATAGRAMHEADer:LENGth
This command sets the binary Datagram length information to be used for
EtherCAT bus. The search number is specified by x.

2-1336 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATAGRAMHEADer:
LENGth <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATAGRAMHEADer:
LENGth?

Arguments <QString> is the binary Datagram length information to be used when searching
on an EtherCAT bus signal. The default size and value Datagram length
information is 11 bits and "XXXXXXXX XXX" respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATAGRAMHEADer:LENGth
"11001100110" sets the data value to "11001100110".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATAGRAMHEADer:LENGth?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DATAGRAMHEADer:LENGth
"11001100110", indicating the data value is "11001100110".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DESTINATIONADDRess:VALue
This command sets the binary MAC destination address value to be used for
EtherCAT bus. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DESTINATIONADDRess:
VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DESTINATIONADDRess:
VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary MAC destination address value to be used when
searching on an EtherCAT bus signal. The default size and value of MAC
Destination Address is 48 bits and "XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX" respectively.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1337

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DESTINATIONADDRess:VALue
"100000001000000010000000100000001000000010000000"
sets the MAC destination address value to
"100000001000000010000000100000001000000010000000".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DESTINATIONADDRess:VALue?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DESTINATIONADDRess:VALue
"100000001000000010000000100000001000000010000000",
indicating the MAC destination address value is
"100000001000000010000000100000001000000010000000".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DEVICEADDRess
This command sets or queries the Device Address in EtherCAT bus. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DEVICEADDRess
{POSition|OFFSet}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DEVICEADDRess?

Arguments POSition specifies the Device Address to position. This is the default value.

OFFSet specifies the Device Address to offset.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DEVICEADDRess OFFSet

sets the Device Address to offset.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DEVICEADDRess? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:DEVICEADDRess
OFFSet, indicating the Device Address is offset.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:ERRor:REPLy:SERVice:DATa
This command sets or queries the error reply service data fields in EtherCAT bus.
The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

2-1338 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:ERRor:REPLy:SERVice:
DATa {TYPe|DETail}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:ERRor:REPLy:SERVice:
DATa?

Arguments TYPe specifies the Error Reply Service Data to type. This is the default value.

DETail specifies the Error Reply Service Data to detail.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:ERRor:REPLy:SERVice:DATa
DETail sets the Error Reply Service Data to detail.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:ERRor:REPLy:SERVice:DATa?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:ERRor:REPLy:SERVice:DATa
DETail, indicating the Error Reply Service Data is detail.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:FRAMETYPe
This command sets or queries the Frame Type in EtherCAT bus. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:FRAMETYPe
{BASic|UDPIP}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:FRAMETYPe?

Arguments BASic specifies the Frame Type as BASic. This is the default value.

UDPIP specifies the Frame Type as UDPIP.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:FRAMETYPe UDPIP specifies

the Frame Type and sets it to UDPIP.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:FRAMETYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:FRAMETYPe UDPIP,
indicating the Frame Type is UDPIP.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1339

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:HASH:VALue
This command sets the binary HASH to be used for EtherCAT bus. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:HASH:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:HASH:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary Hash value to be used when searching on an EtherCAT
bus signal. The default size and value of Hash is 16 bits and "XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX" respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:HASH:VALue
"1100110011001100" sets the Hash value to "1100110011001100".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:HASH:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:HASH:VALue
"1100110011001100", indicating the Hash value is "1100110011001100".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:HEADer:LENGth
This command sets or queries the binary header length to be used for EtherCAT
bus. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:HEADer:LENGth
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:HEADer:LENGth?

Arguments <QString> is the binary header length to be used when searching on an

EtherCAT bus signal. The default size and value of Length is 11 bits and "XXX
XXXXXXXX" respectively.

2-1340 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:HEADer:LENGth
"00011100" specifies the binary Length to be used for EtherCAT triggering if
the trigger condition is EtherCAT Header Length and sets it to "XXX00011100".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:HEADer:LENGth? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:HEADer:LENGth
"00011100", indicating the value of the Length is "XXX00011100".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IDENtification:VALue
This command sets the IP Identification to be used for EtherCAT bus. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IDENtification:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IDENtification:
VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary IP Identification to be used when searching on an

EtherCAT bus signal. The default size and value of Identification is 16 bits and
"XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX" respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IDENtification:VALue
"0101101001011010" specifies the binary Identification to be used for
EtherCAT triggering if the trigger condition is IP Header and sets it to
"0101101001011010".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IDENtification:VALue?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IDENtification:VALue
"0101101001011010", indicating the Identification value is
"0101101001011010".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IDX:VALue
This command sets the binary Indexing information to be used for EtherCAT bus.
The search number is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1341

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IDX:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IDX:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary Index value to be used when searching on an EtherCAT
bus signal. The default size and value of Index is 8 bits and "XXXXXXXX"
respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IDX:VALue "00010001"

sets the Index value as "00010001".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IDX:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IDX:VALue "00010001",
indicating the Index value is "00010001".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:INDex:VALue
This command sets the binary Index to be used for EtherCAT bus. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:INDex:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:INDex:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary Index to be used when searching on an EtherCAT

bus signal. The default size and value of Index is 16 bits and "XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX" respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:INDex:VALue
"1100110011001100" sets the Index value as "1100110011001100".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:INDex:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:INDex:VALue
"1100110011001100", indicating the Index value is "1100110011001100".

2-1342 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IPDESTination:ADDRess:VALue
This command sets the Destination IP Address to be used for EtherCAT bus.
The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IPDESTination:
ADDRess:VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IPDESTination:
ADDRess:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary Destination IP Address to be used when searching on an

EtherCAT bus signal. The default size and value of Destination Address is 32 bits
and "XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX"

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IPDESTination:ADDRess:VALue
"01011010010110100101101001011010" specifies the binary Destination IP
Address to be used for EtherCAT triggering if the trigger condition is IP Header
and sets it to "01011010010110100101101001011010".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IPDESTination:ADDRess:VALue?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IPDESTination:ADDRess:VALue
"01011010010110100101101001011010", indicating the Destination IP
Address value is "01011010010110100101101001011010".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IPSOURce:ADDRess:VALue
This command sets the Source IP Address to be used for EtherCAT bus. The
search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IPSOURce:ADDRess:
VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IPSOURce:ADDRess:
VALue?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1343

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <QString> is the binary Source IP Address to be used when searching on an

EtherCAT bus signal. The default size and value of Source Address is 32 bits and
"XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX"

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IPSOURce:ADDRess:VALue
"01011010010110100101101001011010" specifies the binary Source IP
Address to be used for EtherCAT triggering if the trigger condition is IP Header
and sets it to "01011010010110100101101001011010".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IPSOURce:ADDRess:VALue?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IPSOURce:ADDRess:VALue
"01011010010110100101101001011010", indicating the Souce IP Address is
"01011010010110100101101001011010".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IRQ:VALue
This command sets the binary interrupt request information to be used for
EtherCAT bus. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IRQ:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IRQ:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary interrupt request information to be used when searching
on an EtherCAT bus signal. The default size and value interrupt request
information is 16 bits and "XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX" respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IRQ:VALue
"1100110011001100" sets the interrupt request information value as
"1100110011001100".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IRQ:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:IRQ:VALue
"1100110011001100", indicating the interrupt request information value is
"1100110011001100".

2-1344 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:LEN:VALue
This command sets the binary Length to be used for EtherCAT bus. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:LEN:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:LEN:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary Length to be used when searching on an EtherCAT

bus signal. The default size and value of Length is 16 bits and "XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX" respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:LEN:VALue
"1100110011001100" sets the Length value as "1100110011001100".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:LEN:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:LEN:VALue
"1100110011001100", indicating the Length value is "1100110011001100".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:LOGICALADDRess:VALue
This command sets the binary logical address information to be used for EtherCAT
bus. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:LOGICALADDRess:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:LOGICALADDRess:
VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary Logical Address to be used when searching on an

EtherCAT bus signal. The default size and value Logical Address is 32 bits and
"XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX" respectively.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1345

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:LOGICALADDRess:VALue
"11001100110011001100110011001100" sets the Logical Address value as
"11001100110011001100110011001100".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:LOGICALADDRess:VALue?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:LOGICALADDRess:VALue
"11001100110011001100110011001100", indicating the Logical Address
value is "11001100110011001100110011001100".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox
This command sets or queries the Mailbox fields in EtherCAT bus. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox
{MAILBOXHEADer|SERVICEDATa|ERRSERVICEDATa}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox?

Arguments MAILBOXHEADer specifies the Mailbox fields as mailbox header. This is the
default value.
SERVICEDATa specifies the Mailbox fields as service data.

ERRSERVICEDATa specifies the Mailbox fields as error reply service data.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox ERRSERVICEDATa

sets the Mailbox field to Error Reply Service Data.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox
ERRSERVICEDATa, indicating the Mailbox field is Error Reply Service Data.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox:ADDRess:VALue
This command sets the binary Mailbox Address to be used for EtherCAT bus.
The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

2-1346 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox:ADDRess:
VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox:ADDRess:
VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary Mailbox Address to be used when searching on an

EtherCAT bus signal. The default size and value of Address is 16 bits and
"XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX" respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox:ADDRess:VALue
"0000111100001111" sets the Mailbox Address value as "0000111100001111".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox:ADDRess:VALue?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox:ADDRess:VALue
"0000111100001111", indicating the Mailbox Address value is
"0000111100001111".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox:CNT:VALue
This command sets the binary counter of the mailbox services to be used for
EtherCAT bus. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox:CNT:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox:CNT:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary Counter value to be used when searching on an

EtherCAT bus signal. The default size and value of Counter is 3 bits and "XXX"
respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox:CNT:VALue
"011" sets the Counter value as "011".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox:CNT:VALue?
might return

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1347

Commands listed in alphabetical order

:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox:CNT:VALue
"011", indicating the Counter value is "011".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox:DETail
This command sets or queries the Error Reply Service Data Details in EtherCAT
bus. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox:DETail {ONE|

TWO| THRee| FOUR| FIVe| SIX| SEVEn| EIGHt| NINe}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox:DETail?

Arguments ONE specifies the Detail field as ONE. This is the default value.

TWO specifies the Detail field as TWO.

THRee specifies the Detail field as THRee.

FOUR specifies the Detail field as FOUR.

FIVe specifies the Detail field as FIVe.

SIX specifies the Detail field as SIX.

SEVEn specifies the Detail field as SEVEn.

EIGHt specifies the Detail field as EIGHt.

NINe specifies the Detail field as NINe.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox:DETail TWO sets

the Detail field to TWO.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox:DETail? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox:DETail
TWO, indicating the Detail field is TWO.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox:HEADer
This command sets or queries the Mailbox Header fields in EtherCAT bus. The
search number is specified by x.

2-1348 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox:HEADer
{LENGth| ADDRess| CHANnel| PRIority| TYPe| CNT}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox:HEADer?

Arguments LENGth specifies the Mailbox Header as Length. This is the default value.

ADDRess specifies the Mailbox Header as Address.

CHANnel specifies the Mailbox Header as Channel.

PRIority specifies the Mailbox Header as Priority.

TYPe specifies the Mailbox Header as Type.

CNT specifies the Mailbox Header as Count.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox:HEADer TYPe sets

the Mailbox Header to Type.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox:HEADer? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILbox:HEADer
TYPe, indicating the Mailbox Header is Type.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILBOXTYPe
This command sets or queries the Mailbox Type fields in EtherCAT bus. The
search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILBOXTYPe {ZERo|

ONE| TWO| THRee| FOUR| FIVe| RESERved| FIFTeen}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILBOXTYPe?

Arguments ZERo specifies the Mailbox Type as ZERo. This is the default value.

ONE specifies the Mailbox Type as ONE.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1349

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TWO specifies the Mailbox Type as TWO.

THRee specifies the Mailbox Type as THRee.

FOUR specifies the Mailbox Type as FOUR.

FIVe specifies the Mailbox Type as FIVe.

RESERved specifies the Mailbox Type as RESERved.

FIFTeen specifies the Mailbox Type as FIFTeen.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILBOXTYPe FIVe sets the

Mailbox Type as FIVe.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILBOXTYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:MAILBOXTYPe FIVe,
indicating the Mailbox Type is FIVe.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:NETWork:VARiable
This command sets or queries the Network Variable fields in EtherCAT bus. The
search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:NETWork:VARiable
{PUBHEADer|NVHEADer|NVDATa}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:NETWork:VARiable?

Arguments PUBHEADer specifies the Network Variable as PUBHEADer. This is the default
value.
NVHEADer specifies the Network Variable as NVHEADer.

NVDATa specifies the Network Variable as NVDATa.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:NETWork:VARiable
NVHEADer sets the Network Variable to NV Header.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:NETWork:VARiable? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:NETWork:VARiable
NVHEADer, indicating the Network Variable is NV Header.

2-1350 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:NETWork:VARiable:HEADer
This command sets or queries the Network Variable Header fields in EtherCAT
bus. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:NETWork:VARiable:
HEADer {INDex|HASH|NVLEN|Q}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:NETWork:VARiable:
HEADer?

Arguments INDex specifies the Network Variable Header field as INDex. This is the default
value.
HASH specifies the Network Variable Header field as HASH.

NVLEN specifies the Network Variable Header field as NVLEN.

Q specifies the Network Variable Header field as Q.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:NETWork:VARiable:HEADer
NVLEN sets the Network Variable Header field as NVLEN.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:NETWork:VARiable:HEADer?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:NETWork:VARiable:HEADer
NVLEN, indicating the Network Variable Header field as NVLEN.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:NETWORKVARiable:DATa:SIZe
This command specifies the length of the network variable data string in bytes to
be used for EtherCAT bus. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:NETWORKVARiable:
DATa:SIZe <NR1>

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1351

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:NETWORKVARiable:
DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> is the Network Variable Data size. The default value is 1. The valid range
is 1 to 5.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:NETWORKVARiable:DATa:SIZe
3 sets the Network Variable Data size as 3.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:NETWORKVARiable:DATa:SIZe?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:NETWORKVARiable:DATa:SIZe
3, indicating the Network Variable Data size is 3.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:NETWORKVARiable:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary network variable data string used for EtherCAT
bus. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:NETWORKVARiable:
DATa:VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:NETWORKVARiable:
DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary network variable data value to be used when searching
on an EtherCAT bus signal. The default Network Variable Data value is
"XXXXXXXX".

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:NETWORKVARiable:DATa:VALue
"00110011" sets the Network Variable Data value to "00110011".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:NETWORKVARiable:DATa:VALue?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:NETWORKVARiable:DATa:VALue
"00110011", indicating the Network Variable Data value is "00110011".

2-1352 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:OFFSet:VALue
This command sets the binary address offset information to be used for EtherCAT
bus. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:OFFSet:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:OFFSet:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary Address Offset data value to be used when searching on
an EtherCAT bus signal. The default size and value Address Offset is 16 bits and
"XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX" respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:OFFSet:VALue
"1100110011001100" sets the Address Offset value to "1100110011001100".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:OFFSet:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:OFFSet:VALue
"1100110011001100", indicating the Address Offset value is
"1100110011001100".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:POSition:VALue
This command sets the binary address position information to be used for
EtherCAT bus. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:POSition:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:POSition:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary Address Position value to be used when searching on an
EtherCAT bus signal. The default size and value Address Position is 16 bits and
"XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX" respectively.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1353

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:POSition:VALue
"1100110011001100" sets the Address Position value to "1100110011001100".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:POSition:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:POSition:VALue
"1100110011001100", indicating the Address Position value is
"1100110011001100".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:PROTOCOLTYPe
This command sets or queries the EtherCAT Protocol Type in EtherCAT bus.
The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:PROTOCOLTYPe
{PDU|NETWORKVARiables|MAILbox}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:PROTOCOLTYPe?

Arguments PDU specifies the Protocol Type as PDU. This is the default value.

NETWORKVARiables specifies the Protocol Type as NETWORKVARiables.

MAILbox specifies the Protocol Type as MAILbox.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:PROTOCOLTYPe MAILbox

sets the Protocol Type as MAILbox.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:PROTOCOLTYPe? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:PROTOCOLTYPe
MAILbox, indicating the Protocol Type as MAILbox.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:PUBID:VALue
This command sets the binary Publisher ID to be used for EtherCAT bus. The
search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

2-1354 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:PUBID:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:PUBID:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary Publisher ID value to be used when searching on an

EtherCAT bus signal. The default size and value of Publisher ID is 48 bits and
"XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX" respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:PUBID:VALue
"110011001100110011001100110011001100110011001100"
sets the Publisher ID value to
"110011001100110011001100110011001100110011001100".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:PUBID:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:PUBID:VALue
"110011001100110011001100110011001100110011001100",
indicating the Publisher ID value is
"110011001100110011001100110011001100110011001100".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:QUALity:VALue
This command sets the binary quality to be used for EtherCAT bus. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:QUALity:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:QUALity:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary Quality value to be used when searching on an EtherCAT
bus signal. The default size and value of Quality is 16 bits and "XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX" respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:QUALity:VALue
"1100110011001100" sets the Quality value to "1100110011001100".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:QUALity:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:QUALity:VALue
"1100110011001100", indicating the Quality value is "1100110011001100".

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1355

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SERVice:DATa:LENGth
This command sets the binary Service Data Length to be used for EtherCAT bus.
The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SERVice:DATa:LENGth
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SERVice:DATa:LENGth?

Arguments <QString> is the binary Service Data Length to be used when searching on an
EtherCAT bus signal. The default size and value of Service Data Length is 16
bits and "XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX" respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SERVice:DATa:LENGth
"0000111100001111" sets the Service Data Length to "0000111100001111".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SERVice:DATa:LENGth?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SERVice:DATa:LENGth
"0000111100001111", indicating the Service Data Length is
"0000111100001111".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SERVice:DATa:SIZe
This command specifies the length of the service data string in bytes to be used
for EtherCAT bus. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SERVice:DATa:SIZe
<NR1>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SERVice:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> is the Service Data size. The default value is 1. The valid range is 1 to 5.

2-1356 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SERVice:DATa:SIZe 2
sets the Service Data size as 2.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SERVice:DATa:SIZe?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SERVice:DATa:SIZe 2,
indicating the Service Data size is 2.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SERVice:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the length of the service data string in bytes to be used
for EtherCAT bus. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SERVice:DATa:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SERVice:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary Service Data value to be used when searching on an
EtherCAT bus signal. The default size and value of Service Data is 8 bits and
"XXXXXXXX" respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SERVice:DATa:VALue
"10100110" sets the Service Data value to "10100110".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SERVice:DATa:VALue?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SERVice:DATa:VALue
"10100110", indicating the Service Data value is "10100110".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SOURCEADDRess:VALue
This command sets the binary MAC source address value to be used for EtherCAT
bus. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1357

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SOURCEADDRess:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SOURCEADDRess:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary MAC source address value to be used when searching
on an EtherCAT bus signal. The default size and value of MAC Source Address
is 48 bits and "XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX" respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SOURCEADDRess:VALue
"100000001000000010000000100000001000000010000000"
specifies the binary MAC source address value used for EtherCAT
triggering if the trigger condition is MACADDRess and sets it to
"100000001000000010000000100000001000000010000000".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SOURCEADDRess:VALue?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SOURCEADDRess:VALue
"100000001000000010000000100000001000000010000000",
indicating the MAC source address value is
"100000001000000010000000100000001000000010000000".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SRC:PORT:VALue
This command sets the UDP Source port to be used for EtherCAT bus. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SRC:PORT:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SRC:PORT:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary Source Port value to be used when searching on an
EtherCAT bus signal. The default size and value of Source Port is 16 bits and
"XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX" respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SRC:PORT:VALue
"0101101001011010" specifies the binary Source Port to be used for

2-1358 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

EtherCAT triggering if the trigger condition is UDP Header and sets it to

"0101101001011010".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SRC:PORT:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:SRC:PORT:VALue
"0101101001011010", indicating the Source Port value is "0101101001011010".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:TCI:VALue
This command sets the binary Tag control Information to be used for EtherCAT
bus. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:TCI:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:TCI:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary TCI value to be used when searching on an EtherCAT
bus signal. The default size and value of TCI is 16 bits and "XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX" respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:TCI:VALue "11010010"

specifies the binary Tag control Information used for EtherCAT triggering if the
trigger condition is TCI and sets it to "XXXXXXXX1010010".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:TCI:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:TCI:VALue "11010010",
indicating the TCI value is "XXXXXXXX1010010".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:WKC:VALue
This command sets the binary Working Counter information to be used for
EtherCAT bus. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ETHERCAT.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1359

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:WKC:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:WKC:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary Working Counter information value to be used when
searching on an EtherCAT bus signal. The default size and value of Working
Counter information is 16 bits and "XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX" respectively.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:WKC:VALue
"1100110011001100" sets the Working Counter information value as
"1100110011001100".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:WKC:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERCAT:WKC:VALue
"1100110011001100", indicating the Working Counter information value is
"1100110011001100".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:CONDition
This command specifies a field or condition for an Ethernet bus to search on.
The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:CONDition
{SFD|MACADDRess|MACLENgth|IPHeader|TCPHeader|DATa|EOP|
IDLe|FCSError|QTAG}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:CONDition?

Related Commands Most of the other TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet commands are impacted

by the setting of this command.

Arguments SFD – Start of frame delimiter.

MACADDRess – MAC addresses field.

MACLENgth – MAC length/type field.

IPHeader – IP header field.

TCPHeader – TCP header field.

2-1360 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DATa – TCP/IPv4 or MAC protocol client data field.

EOP – End of Packet field.

IDLe – Idle field.

FCSError – Frame Check Sequence Error (CRC) field.

QTAG – IEEE 802.1Q (VLAN) control information field.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:CONDITION MACADDRESS

specifies MACADDRess as the field within an Ethernet frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:CONDITION? might return
DATA, indicating that DATA is the currently specified field within an Ethernet
frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the binary data value to be used when searching on
an Ethernet bus signal. The search condition must be set to DATA and the data
qualifier to inside or outside range. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary data value to be used when searching on an Ethernet
bus signal.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue “101011”

sets the data HIVALue to 101011.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:DATA:HIVALUE
"10101".

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1361

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:DATa:OFFSet
This command specifies the data offset value, in bytes, to use when searching on
the Ethernet data field. The search condition needs to be set to DATa. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:DATa:OFFSet <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:DATa:OFFSet?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:CONDition

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:DATa:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:DATa:SIZe

Arguments <NR1> is an integer whose minimum and default values are -1 (don't care) and
maximum is 1,499.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:DATA:OFFSEt 36 sets the

data offset to 36 bytes.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:DATA:OFFSET? might return
-1, indicating that the data offset value is the default value, -1, meaning "don’t
care".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:DATa:QUALifier
This command specifies the qualifier to be used when searching on an Ethernet
bus signal. The search condition must be set to DATa. The search number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

2-1362 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:DATa:QUALifier
{LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|
INrange|OUTrange}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:DATa:QUALifier?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments LESSthan sets the qualifier to less than.

MOREthan sets the qualifier to greater than.

EQual sets the qualifier to equal.

UNEQual sets the qualifier to not equal.

LESSEQual sets the qualifier to less than or equal.

MOREEQual sets the qualifier to greater than or equal.

INrange sets the qualifier to in range.

OUTrange sets the qualifier to out of range.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:DATA:QUALIFIER
LESSTHAN sets the qualifier to "less than".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:DATA:QUALIFIER? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:DATA:QUALIFIER
EQUAL indicating that the qualifier is set to EQUAL.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:DATa:SIZe
This command specifies the length of the data string, in bytes, to use when
searching on the Ethernet bus signal. The search condition needs to be set to
DATa. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:DATa:SIZe?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1363

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments <NR1> specifies the length of the data string, in bytes. The minimum and default
values are 1, and the maximum value is 16.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:DATA:SIZE 4 specifies 4 as

the number of contiguous TCP/IPv4/MAC client bytes to use when searching on
the Ethernet data field.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:DATA:SIZE? might return 6,
indicating that 6 is the currently specified number of contiguous TCP/IPv4/MAC
client bytes to use when searching on the Ethernet data field.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary value to use when searching on the Ethernet
bus signal. The search condition needs to be set to DATa. The search number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:DATa:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:CONDition

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:DATa:OFFSet
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:DATa:SIZe

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string where the allowable characters are 0, 1, and
X. The allowable number of characters depends on the setting for size (using
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:DATa:SIZe). The bits
specified in the quoted string replace the least significant bits, leaving any
unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:DATA:VALUE "00001000"

specifies 00001000 as the value to use when triggering on the Ethernet binary data
field, assuming that TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:DATA:SIZe is set to 1 byte.

2-1364 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:DATA:VALUE? might return

"00001000", indicating 0000100 is the currently specified value used when
searching on the Ethernet binary data field.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:IPHeader:DESTinationaddr:VALue
This command specifies the binary destination address value to use when
searching on an Ethernet bus signal. The search condition needs to be set to
IPHeader. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:IPHeader:
DESTinationaddr:VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:IPHeader:
DESTinationaddr:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 32 characters where the allowable

characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least
significant bits, leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:IPHEADER:
DESTINATIONADDR:VALUE "11000000101010000000000000000001"
specifies 192.168.0.1 as the value to use when searching on the Ethernet IPv4
header address destination field.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:IPHEADER:
DESTINATIONADDR:VALUE? might return
"11000000101010000000000000000001", indicating that 192.168.0.1 is
the currently specified value used when searching on the Ethernet IPv4 header
address destination field.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:IPHeader:PROTOcol:VALue
This command specifies the binary protocol value to use when searching on the
Ethernet bus signal. The search condition needs to be set to IPHeader. The
search number is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1365

Commands listed in alphabetical order

NOTE. Commonly used protocol values are 1 (ICMP), 2 (IGMP), 6 (TCP) and
17 (UDP).

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:IPHeader:PROTOcol:
VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:IPHeader:PROTOcol:
VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 8 characters where the allowable characters

are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least significant
bits, leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:IPHEADER:PROTOCOL:VALUE
"01010010" specifies 01010010 as the value to use when searching on
the Ethernet IP header protocol field.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:IPHEADER:PROTOCOL:VALUE?
might return "XXXXXXXX", indicating that the trigger value has been set to
"don’t care".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:IPHeader:SOUrceaddr:VALue
This command specifies the binary source address value to use when searching
on an Ethernet bus signal. The search condition needs to be set to IPHeader.
The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:IPHeader:SOUrceaddr:
VALue <QString>

2-1366 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:IPHeader:SOUrceaddr:
VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 32 characters where the allowable

characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least
significant bits, leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:IPHEADER:SOURCEADDR:VALUE
"11000000101010000000000000000001" specifies to use the value of
192.168.0.1 when searching on the Ethernet IP header address source field.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:IPHEADER:SOURCEADDR:VALUE
might return "11000000101010000000000000000001", indicating that the
search value has been set to 192.168.0.1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:DESTination:VALue
This command specifies the binary MAC address destination value to use when
searching on an Ethernet bus signal. The search condition needs to be set to
MACADDRess. The search number is specified by x.

NOTE. MAC Addresses are 48-bit values such as 08:00:11:1E:C9:AE hex.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:
DESTination:VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:
DESTination:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 48 characters where the allowable

characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least
significant bits, leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1367

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:MAC:ADDRESS:
DESTINATION:VALUE
"XXXXXXXX0011010111111100000001111010101011001000" specifies to
use the value of XX:35:FC:07:AA:C8 hex when searching on the
Ethernet MAC address destination field.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:MAC:ADDRESS:
DESTINATION:VALUE? might return
”XXXXXXXX0011010111111100000001111010101011001000”, indicating a
MAC address destination field value of XX:35:FC:07:AA:C8 hex.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:SOUrce:VALue
This command specifies the binary MAC address source value to use when
searching on an Ethernet bus signal. The search condition needs to be set to
MACADDRess. The search number is specified by x.

NOTE. MAC Addresses are 48-bit values such as 08:00:11:1E:C9:AE hex.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:SOUrce:
VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:SOUrce:
VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 48 characters where the allowable

characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least
significant bits, leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:MAC:ADDRESS:SOURCE:VALUE
”XXXXXXXX0011010111111100000001111010101011001000” specifies to
use the value of XX:35:FC:07:AA:C8 hex when searching on the
Ethernet MAC address source field.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:MAC:ADDRESS:SOURCE:VALUE?
might return ”XXXXXXXX0011010111111100000001111010101011001000”,
indicating a MAC address source field value of XX:35:FC:07:AA:C8 hex.

2-1368 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:HIVALue
This command specifies the binary MAC length high value to use when searching
on an Ethernet bus signal. The search condition needs to be set to MACADDRess.
The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:HIVALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:HIVALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 16 characters where the allowable

characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least
significant bits, leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:MAC:LENGTH:HIVALUE
"XXXXXXXX00001000" specifies to use the hexadecimal value XX08 when
searching on the Ethernet MAC length.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:MAC:LENGTH:HIVALUE?
might return "XXXXXXXX00001000", indicating an Ethernet MAC length value
of XX08 hex.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:VALue
This command specifies the MAC length value to use when searching on an
Ethernet bus signal. The search condition needs to be set to MACADDRess. The
search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1369

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 16 characters where the allowable

characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least
significant bits, leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:QTAG:VALue
This command specifies the binary Q-tag information to use when searching on
an Ethernet bus signal. The search condition needs to be set to QTAG. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:QTAG:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:QTAG:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 32 characters where the allowable

characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least
significant bits, leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:QTAG:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX010010001010" specifies to use the value of
hexadecimal XXXXX48A when searching on the Ethernet Q-Tag field.

2-1370 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:QTAG:VALUE? might return

"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX010010001010", indicating that hexadecimal
XXXXX48A has been set as the Ethernet Q-Tag field search value.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:ACKnum:VALue
This command specifies the binary ack number value to use when searching on
an Ethernet bus signal. The default is all X’s (don’t care). The search condition
needs to be set to TCPHeader. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:ACKnum:
VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:ACKnum:
VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 32 characters where the allowable

characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least
significant bits, leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:TCPHEADER:ACKNUM:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX00001000" specifies hexadecimal XXXXXX08 as
the value to use when searching on the Ethernet TCP header acknowledgement
number.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:TCPHEADER:ACKNUM:VALUE? might return
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX00001000", indicating that hexadecimal
XXXXXX08 has been specified as the value to use when searching on the
Ethernet TCP header acknowledgement number.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:DESTinationport:VALue
This command specifies the binary destination port value to use when searching
on the Ethernet TCP header destination port number. The search condition needs
to be set to TCPHeader. The search number is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1371

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:
DESTinationport:VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:
DESTinationport:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 16 characters where the allowable

characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least
significant bits, leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:TCPHEADER:
DESTINATIONPORT:VALUE "XXXXXXXX00100010" specifies to use the value
of hexadecimal XX22 when searching on the Ethernet TCP header destination
port number.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:TCPHEADER:
DESTINATIONPORT:VALUE? might return "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX",
indicating that hexadecimal XX22 has been set as the value to use when searching
on the Ethernet TCP header destination port number.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SEQnum:VALue
This command specifies the binary sequence number value to use when searching
on an Ethernet bus signal. The default is all X’s (don’t care). The search condition
needs to be set to TCPHeader. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SEQnum:
VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SEQnum:
VALue?

2-1372 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 32 characters where the allowable characters

are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least significant
bits, leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:TCPHEADER:SEQNUM:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX000100010001" specifies to use the value of
hexadecimal XXXXX111 when searching on the Ethernet TCP header sequence
number.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:TCPHEADER:SEQNUM:VALUE?
might return "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX0010010100", indicating that
hexadecimal XXXXX111 has been specified as the value to use when searching
on the Ethernet TCP header sequence number.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SOUrceport:VALue
This command specifies the binary source port value to use when searching on
an Ethernet bus signal. The search condition needs to be set to TCPHeader. The
search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:
SOUrceport:VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:
SOUrceport:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 16 characters where the allowable

characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least
significant bits, leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:TCPHEADER:
SOURCEPORT:VALUE "XXXX000010100110" specifies to use the value of

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1373

Commands listed in alphabetical order

hexadecimal X0A6 when searching on the Ethernet TCP header source port
number.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ETHERNET:TCPHEADER:
SOURCEPORT:VALUE? might return "XXXXX01001010110", indicating that
hexadecimal X0A6 has been specified as the value to use when searching on the
Ethernet TCP header source port number.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ADDress:HIVALue
This command sets the high binary address value to be used when triggering on a
eUSB bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to TOKEN.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ADDress:HIVALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ADDress:HIVALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the value in the specified valid format. The valid characters
are 0, 1, and X (for binary, for hexadecimal, and symbolic).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ADDress:HIVALue XXXXXXX

specifies high binary address value as XXXXXXX within an eUSB frame to
search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ADDress:HIVALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ADDress:HIVALue XXXXXXX,
indicating the high binary address value as XXXXXXX in the currently specified
field within an eUSB frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ADDress:VALue
This command sets the binary address value to be used when triggering on a
eUSB bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to TOKEN. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

2-1374 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ADDress:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ADDress:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the value in the specified valid format. The valid characters
are 0, 1, and X (for binary, for hexadecimal, and symbolic).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ADDress:VALue XXXXXXX

specifies binary address value as XXXXXXX within an eUSB frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ADDress:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ADDress:VALue XXXXXXX,
indicating the binary address value as XXXXXXX in the currently specified field
within an eUSB frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:CONDition
This command sets or queries the search type for the specified search. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:CONDition {SYNC|

HANDSHAKEPacket| SPECIALPacket| ERRor| TOKENPacket|
DATAPacket| RESET| CONNect| CONTROLMESSage| SUSPEND|
DEVICEChirp| HOSTChirp| PORTReset| PORTConfiguration|
RESUME| RAP| EOP}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:CONDition?

Arguments SYNC specifies the search condition as Sync.

HANDSHAKEPacket specifies the search condition as Handshake Packet.

SPECIALPacket specifies the search condition as Special Packet.

ERRor specifies the search condition as Error.

TOKENPacket specifies the search condition as Token (Address) Packet.

DATAPacket specifies the search condition as Data Packet.

RESET specifies the search condition as Reset.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1375

Commands listed in alphabetical order

CONNect specifies the search condition as connect.

CONTROLMESSage specifies the search condition as Control Message.

SUSPEND specifies the search condition as Suspend.

DEVICEChirp specifies the search condition as Device chirp.

HOSTChirp specifies the search condition as Host Chirp.

PORTReset specifies the search condition as Port Reset.

PORTConfiguration specifies the search condition as Port Configuration.

RESUME specifies the search condition as Resume.

RAP specifies the search condition as Register Access Protocol.

EOP specifies the search condition as End of Packet.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:CONDition SYNC specifies sync as

the field within a eUSB frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:CONDition? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:CONDition STARt, indicating that
STARt is the currently specified field within a eUSB frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:HIVALue
This command sets the high binary data value to be used when triggering on a
eUSB bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to DATA. The search number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:HIVALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:HIVALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the value in the specified valid format. The valid characters
are 0, 1, and X (for binary, for hexadecimal, and symbolic).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:HIVALue XXXXXXX

specifies high binary data value as XXXXXXX within an eUSB frame to search
on.

2-1376 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:HIVALue? might return

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:HIVALue XXXXXXX,
indicating the high binary data value as XXXXXXX in the currently specified
field within an eUSB frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:OFFSet
This command sets the byte offset to look for a data pattern at, in bytes, to be
used when triggering on a eUSB bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to
DATA. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:OFFSet <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:OFFSet?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the byte offset. Default offset value is -1. The argument range
is -1 to 1024

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:OFFSet -1 specifies the

byte offset as -1 within an eUSB frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:OFFSet? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:OFFSet XXXXXXX,
indicating that the offset value is -1 in the currently specified field within an eUSB
frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:QUAlifier
This command sets the qualifier to be used when triggering on a eUSB bus signal.
The trigger condition must be set to IDANDDATA OR DATA. The search number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1377

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:QUAlifier {EQual|

UNEQual| LESSthan| MOREthan| LESSEQual| MOREEQual| Inrange|
OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:QUAlifier?

Arguments EQual specifies the qualifier as Equal.

UNEQual specifies the qualifier as Not Equal to.

LESSthan specifies the qualifier as Less Than.

MOREthan specifies the qualifier as More Than.

LESSEQual specifies the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

MOREEQual specifies the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

Inrange specifies the qualifier as Inside Range.

OUTrange specifies the qualifier as Out of Range.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:QUAlifier EQual

specifies trigger value as Equal.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:QUAlifier? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:QUAlifier EQual,
indicating the trigger value as Equal.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:SIZe
This command sets the length of the data string, in bytes, to be used when
triggering on a eUSB bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to DATA.
The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the length of the data string. Default data size value is 1. The
argument range is 1 to 16 bytes.

2-1378 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:SIZe 1 specifies the data

size as 1 byte within an eUSB frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:SIZe? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:SIZe 1, indicating that data
size value is 1 in the currently specified field within an eUSB frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:TYPe
This command specifies the eUSB trigger type to be valid on any, data0, data1,
data2, or mdata condition. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:TYPe {ANY| DATA0|

DATA1| DATA2| MDATA}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:TYPe?

Arguments ANY specifies either a DATA0 or DATA1 data packet type.

DATA0 specifies a DATA0 data packet type.

DATA1 specifies a DATA1 data packet type.

DATA2 specifies a DATA2 data packet type when on HIGH speed.

MDATA specifies a MDATA data packet type when on HIGH speed.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:TYPe DATA0 sets the data

type as DATA0.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:TYPe? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:TYPe DATA0, indicating
that the data type is DATA0.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:VALue
This command sets the binary data value to be used when triggering on a eUSB
bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to DATA. The search number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1379

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the value in the specified valid format. The valid characters
are 0, 1, and X (for binary, for hexadecimal, and symbolic).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:VALue XXXXXXX specifies

the data value as XXXXXXX within an eUSB frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATa:VALue XXXXXXX, indicating
the data value as XXXXXXX in the currently specified field within an eUSB
frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATABITS:SIZe
This command sets the number of Sync bits, in bytes, to be used when triggering
on a eUSB bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to SYNC. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATABITS:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATABITS:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the number of the Sync bits. The default Sync bits is 12. The
argument range is 12 to 32 bits.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATABITS:SIZe 12 specifies

Sync bits as 12 within an eUSB frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATABITS:SIZe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:DATABITS:SIZe 12, indicating
that Sync bits value is 12 in the currently specified field within an eUSB frame
to search on.

2-1380 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ENDPoint:VALue
This command sets the endpoint binary value to be used when triggering on a
eUSB bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to TOKEN. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ENDPoint:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ENDPoint:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the data value in the specified valid format. The valid
characters are 0, 1, and X for binary format; A-F, 0-9 and X for hexadecimal
format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ENDPoint:VALue XXXX specifies

end point value as XXXX within an eUSB frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ENDPoint:VALue? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ENDPoint:VALue XXXX,
indicating that end point value as XXXX in the currently specified field within
an eUSB frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ERRType
This command specifies the eUSB trigger type to be valid on a PID, Token CRC5,
Data CRC16, or Bit stuffing condition. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ERRType
{BITSTUFFing|CRC5|CRC16|PID}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ERRType?

Arguments BITSTUFFing specifies the error type as Bit Stuffing.

CRC5 specifies the error type as Token CRC5 (Cyclic Redundancy Check 5).

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1381

Commands listed in alphabetical order

CRC16 specifies the error type as Data CRC16 (Cyclic Redundancy Check 16).

PID specifies the error type as PID Check Bits.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ERRType PID specifies PID as the

field within an eUSB frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ERRType? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ERRType PID, indicating that PID
is the currently specified field within a eUSB frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ENDSEARch
This command specifies eUSB Search EOP Bits to be On and Off. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ENDSEARch {OFF|ON}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ENDSEARch?

Arguments OFF specifies the EOP bits as OFF (for Low Speed and Full Speed).

ON specifies the EOP bits as ON (for High Speed).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ENDSEARch OFF specifies the EOP

bits as OFF.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ENDSEARch? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:ENDSEARch OFF, indicating the
EOP bits as off.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:EOP:DATABITS:SIZe
This command sets the number of EOP bits, in bytes, to be used when triggering
on a eUSB bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to EOP. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

2-1382 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:EOP:DATABITS:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:EOP:DATABITS:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the number of EOP bits. The default EOP bits is 8. The argument
range is 8 to 100 bits.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:EOP:DATABITS:SIZe 8 specifies

EOP bits as 8 within an eUSB frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:EOP:DATABITS:SIZe? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:EOP:DATABITS:SIZe 8,
indicating that EOP bits value is 8 in the currently specified field within an eUSB
frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:EOP:QUAlifier
This command sets the qualifier to be used when triggering on a eUSB bus signal.
The trigger condition must be set to EOP Bits. The search number is specified
by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:EOP:QUAlifier {EQual|

UNEQual| LESSthan| MOREthan| LESSEQual| MOREEQual| INrange|
OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:EOP:QUAlifier?

Arguments EQual specifies the qualifier as Equal.

UNEQual specifies the qualifier as Not Equal to.

LESSthan specifies the qualifier as Less Than.

MOREthan specifies the qualifier as More Than.

LESSEQual specifies the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

MOREEQual specifies the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

INrange specifies the qualifier as Inside Range.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1383

Commands listed in alphabetical order

OUTrange specifies the qualifier as Out of Range.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:EOP:QUAlifier EQual specifies

the trigger value as Equal.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:EOP:QUAlifier? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:EOP:QUAlifier EQual,
indicating the trigger value is Equal.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:EOPBITS:MAX:SIZe
This command sets the number of EOP bits to be used when triggering on a
eUSB bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to EOP. The search number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:EOPBITS:MAX:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:EOPBITS:MAX:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the number of EOP bits. The default maximum EOP bits is 100.
The argument range is 9 to 100 bits.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:EOPBITS:MAX:SIZe 100

specifies maximum EOP bits as 100 within an eUSB frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:EOPBITS:MAX:SIZe? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:EOPBITS:MAX:SIZe 100,
indicating that maximum EOP bits value is 100 in the currently specified field
within an eUSB frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:EOPBITS:MIN:SIZe
This command sets the number of EOP bits to be used when triggering on a
eUSB bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to EOP. The search number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

2-1384 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:EOPBITS:MIN:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:EOPBITS:MIN:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the number of EOP bits. The default minimum EOP bits is 8.
The argument range is 8 to 99 bits.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:EOPBITS:MIN:SIZe 8 specifies

minimum EOP bits as 8 within an eUSB frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:EOPBITS:MIN:SIZe? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:EOPBITS:MIN:SIZe 8,
indicating that minimum EOP bits value is 8 in the currently specified field within
an eUSB frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:HANDSHAKEType
This command specifies the eUSB trigger type to be valid on any, ack, nak, stall,
or nyet condition. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:HANDSHAKEType
{ANY|ACK|NAK|STALL|NYET}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:HANDSHAKEType?

Arguments ANY specifies the handshake type as Any (0010).

ACK specifies the handshake type as Acknowledgement (positive) (XX10).

NAK specifies the handshake type as Negative Acknowledgment (1010).

STALL specifies the error type as PID Check Bits.

NYET specifies the handshake type as Stall (endpoint is halted or control pipe
request not supported) (1110).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:HANDSHAKEType ANY specifies

any as the field within an eUSB frame to search on.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1385

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:HANDSHAKEType? might return

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:HANDSHAKEType ANY, indicating
that any is the currently specified field within a eUSB frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:RAP:ADDress:VALue
This command sets the binary Register Access Protocol address value to be used
when triggering on a eUSB bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to
TOKEN. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:RAP:ADDress:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:RAP:ADDress:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the value in the specified valid format. The valid characters
are 0, 1, and X for binary; for hexadecimal; and symbolic.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:RAP:ADDress:VALue XXXXXX

specifies RAP address as XXXXXX within an eUSB frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:RAP:ADDress:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:RAP:ADDress:VALue
XXXXXX, indicating that RAP address value XXXXXX is the currently specified
field within an eUSB frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:RAP:COMMand
This command specifies the eUSB Register Access Protocol search option. The
search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:RAP:COMMand
{ALL|WRITe|READ|CLEar|SET}

2-1386 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:RAP:COMMand?

Arguments ALL specifies the RAP command as All.

WRITe specifies the RAP command as Write.

READ specifies the RAP command as Read.

CLEar specifies the RAP command as Clear.

SET specifies the RAP command as Set.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:RAP:COMMand ALL specifies the

command as the field within an eUSB frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:RAP:COMMand? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:RAP:COMMand ALL, indicating
that command type is ALL.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:RAP:DATa:VALue
This command sets the binary Register Access Protocol data value to be used
when triggering on a eUSB bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to
TOKEN. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:RAP:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:RAP:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the value in the specified valid format. The valid characters
are 0, 1, and X for binary; for hexadecimal; and symbolic.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:RAP:DATa:VALue XXXXXXXX

specifies RAP data value as XXXXXXXX within an eUSB frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:RAP:DATa:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:RAP:DATa:VALue XXXXXXXX,
indicating that RAP data value XXXXXXXX is the currently specified field
within an eUSB frame to search on.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1387

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:RAP:OPTion
This command specifies the eUSB Register Access Protocol search option. The
search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:RAP:OPTion
{COMMand|ADDRess|RAPDATa}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:RAP:OPTion?

Arguments COMMand specifies the RAP option as Command.

ADDRess specifies the RAP option as Address.

RAPDATa specifies the RAP option as RapData.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:RAP:OPTion COMMand specifies

the RAP option as the field within an eUSB frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:RAP:OPTion? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:RAP:OPTion COMMand,
indicating that RAP option is COMMand.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SOFFRAMENUMber
This command sets the binary frame number to be used when triggering on a
eUSB bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to TOKEN. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SOFFRAMENUMber <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SOFFRAMENUMber?

Arguments <QString> specifies the binary frame number within the range 000 0000 0000 to
111 1111 1111 (000 hex to 7FF hex).

2-1388 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SOFFRAMENUMber XXXXXXXXXXX

specifies frame number as XXXXXXXXXXX within an eUSB frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SOFFRAMENUMber? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SOFFRAMENUMber XXXXXXXXXXX,
indicating that XXXXXXXXXXX in the currently specified field within an eUSB
frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPECIALType
This command specifies the eUSB trigger type to be valid on any, err, split, ping,
or reserved condition. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPECIALType {ANY|

PREamble| ERROr| SPLit| PING| RESERVed}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPECIALType?

Arguments ANY specifies the PID value as Any (XX00).

PREamble specifies the PID value as PRE (1100).

ERROr specifies the PID value as ERR (1100).

SPLit specifies the PID value as Split (1000).

PING specifies the PID value as PING (0100).

RESERVed specifies the PID value as Reserved (0000).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPECIALType ANY specifies the

special type as any.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPECIALType? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPECIALType ANY, indicating
the special type is any.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:ET:VALue
This command specifies the eUSB trigger type endpoint condition. The search
number is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1389

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:ET:VALue {NOCARE|

CONTRol| ISOchronous| BULK| INTERRUPT}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:ET:VALue?

Arguments NOCARE specifies the Endpoint Type value as Don’t Care.

CONTRol specifies the Endpoint Type value as Control (00).

ISOchronous specifies the Endpoint Type value as Isochronous (01).

BULK specifies the Endpoint Type value as Bulk (10).

INTERRUPT specifies the Endpoint Type value as Interrupt (11).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:ET:VALue CONTRol sets

the endpoint condition as Control.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:ET:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:ET:VALue CONTRol,
indicating the endpoint condition is Control.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:HUB:VALue
This command sets the binary hub address value to be used when triggering on a
eUSB bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to Special with packet type
SPLIT. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:HUB:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:HUB:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the value in the specified valid format. The valid characters
are 0, 1, and X (for binary, for hexadecimal, and symbolic).

2-1390 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:HUB:VALue XXXXXXX

specifies hub address value as XXXXXXX within an eUSB frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:HUB:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:HUB:VALue XXXXXXX,
indicating that hub address value is XXXXXXX in the currently specified field
within an eUSB frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:PORT:VALue
This command sets the binary port address value to be used when triggering on a
eUSB bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to Special with a packet type
SPLIT. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:PORT:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:PORT:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the value in the specified valid format. The valid characters
are 0, 1, and X (for binary, for hexadecimal, and symbolic).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:PORT:VALue XXXXXXX

specifies port address as XXXXXXX within an eUSB frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:PORT:VALue? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:PORT:VALue
XXXXXXX, indicating that port address value is XXXXXXX in the currently
specified field within an eUSB frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:SC:VALue
This command specifies the eUSB trigger type start/complete condition. The
search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1391

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:SC:VALue {NOCARE|

SSPLIT| CSPLIT}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:SC:VALue?

Arguments NOCARE sets the trigger on either the start or complete phase of the split
transaction.
SSPLIT sets the trigger on the start phase of the split transaction.

CSPLIT sets the trigger on the complete phase of the split transaction.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:SC:VALue NOCARE sets

the start/complete conditon as nocare.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:SC:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:SC:VALue NOCARE,
indicating that the start/complete condition is nocare.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:SE:VALue
This command specifies the eUSB trigger type start/complete condition. The
search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:SE:VALue {NOCARE|

FULLSPEED| LOWSPEED| ISOSTART| ISOMID| ISOEND| ISOALL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:SE:VALue?

Arguments NOCARE sets the trigger on any combination of S and E bits.

FULLSPEED sets the trigger on S bit = 0 and E bit = 0.

LOWSPEED sets the trigger on S bit = 1 and E bit = 0.

ISOSTART sets the trigger on S bit = 1, E bit = 0.

ISOMID specifies Isochronous Data is Middle (00) Start/End bit value.

ISOEND specifies Isochronous Data is End (01) Start/End bit value.

ISOALL specifies Isochronous Data is All (11) Start/End bit value.

2-1392 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:SE:VALue FULLSPEED

sets the start/complete condition as fullspeed.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:SE:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SPLit:SE:VALue FULLSPEED,
indicating that the start/complete condition is fullspeed.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SYNC:QUAlifier
This command sets the qualifier to be used when triggering on a eUSB bus signal.
The trigger condition must be set to Sync Bits. The search number is specified
by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SYNC:QUAlifier {EQual|

UNEQual| LESSthan| MOREthan| LESSEQual| MOREEQual| INrange|
OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SYNC:QUAlifier?

Arguments EQual specifies the qualifier as Equal.

UNEQual specifies the qualifier as Not Equal to.

LESSthan specifies the qualifier as Less Than.

MOREthan specifies the qualifier as More Than.

LESSEQual specifies the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

MOREEQual specifies the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

INrange specifies the qualifier as Inside Range.

OUTrange specifies the qualifier as Out of Range.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SYNC:QUAlifier EQual

specifies the trigger value as Equal.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SYNC:QUAlifier? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SYNC:QUAlifier EQual,
indicating the trigger value is Equal.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1393

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SYNCBITS:MAX:SIZe
This command sets the number of sync bits, to be used when triggering on a
eUSB bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to SYNC. The search number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SYNCBITS:MAX:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SYNCBITS:MAX:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the number of sync bits. The default maximum Sync bits is 32.
The argument range is 13 to 32 bits.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SYNCBITS:MAX:SIZe 32
specifies minimum Sync bits as 32 within an eUSB frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SYNCBITS:MAX:SIZe? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SYNCBITS:MAX:SIZe 32,
indicating that minimum Sync bits value is 32 in the currently specified field
within an eUSB frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SYNCBITS:MIN:SIZe
This command sets the number of sync bits, in bits, to be used when triggering
on a eUSB bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to SYNC. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SYNCBITS:MIN:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SYNCBITS:MIN:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the number of sync bits. The default minimum Sync bits is 12.
The argument range is 12 to 31 bits.

2-1394 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SYNCBITS:MIN:SIZe 12
specifies minimum Sync bits as 12 within an eUSB frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SYNCBITS:MIN:SIZe? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SYNCBITS:MIN:SIZe 12,
indicating that minimum Sync bits value is 12 in the currently specified field
within an eUSB frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SYNCSEARch
This command specifies eUSB Search Sync Bits to be On and Off. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SYNCSEARch {OFF|ON}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SYNCSEARch?

Arguments OFF specifies the Sync bits as OFF (for Low Speed and Full Speed).

ON specifies the Sync bits as ON (for High Speed).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SYNCSEARch OFF specifies the

SYNC bits as off.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SYNCSEARch? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:SYNCSEARch OFF, indicating
the SYNC bits is off.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:TOKENType
This command specifies the eUSB trigger type to be valid on any, sof, out, in, or
setup condition. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-EUSB2

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1395

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:TOKENType
{ANY|SOF|OUT|IN|SETUP}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:TOKENType?

Arguments ANY specifies the token type as Any (XX01).

SOF specifies the token type as Start Of Frame (0101).

OUT specifies the token type as OUT (0001).

IN specifies the token type as IN (1001).

SETUP specifies the token type as SETUP (1101).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:TOKENType SETUP specifies the

token type Setup as the field within an eUSB frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:TOKENType? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:TOKENType SETUP, indicating
that the token type is Setup.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:CONDition
This command sets or queries the FlexRay bus search condition. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:CONDition {SOF|

FRAMEType| IDentifier| CYCLEcount| HEADer| DATA| IDANDDATA|
EOF| ERRor}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:CONDition?

Arguments SOF sets the trigger condition to start of frame.

FRAMEType sets the trigger condition to frame type.

IDentifier sets the trigger condition to identifier.

CYCLEcount sets the trigger condition to cycle count.

HEADer sets the trigger condition to header.

DATA sets the trigger condition to data.

2-1396 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

IDANDDATA sets the trigger condition to ID and data.

EOF sets the trigger condition to end of frame.

ERRor sets the trigger condition to error.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:CONDition SOF sets the

trigger condition to start of frame.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:CONDition? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:CONDITION SOF, indicating
the FlexRay trigger condition is start of frame.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:CYCLEcount:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the heigh value when searching on a FlexRay bus
cycle count field. The search number is specified by x. The search condition
must be set to CYCLEcount.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:CYCLEcount:HIVALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:CYCLEcount:HIVALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the cycle count value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:CYCLEcount:HIVALue
"1010" sets the cycle count value to XX1010.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:CYCLEcount:HIVALue?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:HIVALUE
"XXXXXX", indicating the cycle count value is don’t care, and it will trigger on
any cycle count.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1397

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:CYCLEcount:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on a
FlexRay bus search cycle count field. The search number is specified by x. The
search condition must be set to CYCLEcount.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:CYCLEcount:QUALifier
{EQUal|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan|
INrange|OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:CYCLEcount:QUALifier?

Arguments EQUal specifies the qualifier as equal.

LESSEQual specifies the qualifier as less equal.

MOREEQual specifies the qualifier as more equal.

UNEQual specifies the qualifier as unequal.

LESSthan specifies the qualifier as less than.

MOREthan specifies the qualifier as more than.

INrange specifies the qualifier as in range.

OUTrange specifies the qualifier as out of range.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:CYCLEcount:QUALifier
LESSthan sets the cycle count qualifier to less than.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:CYCLEcount:QUALifier?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:QUALIFIER
EQUAL, indicating the cycle count qualifier is set to equal.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:CYCLEcount:VALue
This command sets or queries the low value when searching on a FlexRay bus
cycle count field. The search number is specified by x. The search condition
must be set to CYCLEcount.

2-1398 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:CYCLEcount:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:CYCLEcount:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the cycle count value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:CYCLEcount:VALue "1010"

sets the cycle count value to XX1010.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:CYCLEcount:VALue? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:VALUE
"XXXXXX", indicating the cycle count value is don’t care, and it will trigger on
any cycle count.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high value when searching on a FlexRay bus
data field. The search number is specified by x. The search condition must be set
to IDANDDATA OR DATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:HIVALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:HIVALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the data value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:HIVALue "1010" sets

the data value to XXXXXX1010.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1399

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:HIVALue? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATA:HIVALUE
"XXXXXXXXXX", indicating the data value is a don’t care.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:OFFSet
This command sets or queries the offset of the data string, in bytes, when
searching on a FlexRay bus data field. The search number is specified by x. The
search condition must be set to IDANDDATA OR DATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:OFFSet <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:OFFSet?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the data offset in bytes. A setting of X/Don’t care is accomplished
by setting the offset to –1.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:OFFSet 2 sets the data

offset to 2 bytes.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:OFFSet? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATA:OFFSET -1, indicating
the data offset is don’t care.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on a
FlexRay bus signal. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

2-1400 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:QUALifier
{EQUal|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan|
INrange|OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:QUALifier?

Arguments EQUal specifies the qualifier as equal.

LESSEQual specifies the qualifier as less equal.

MOREEQual specifies the qualifier as more equal.

UNEQual specifies the qualifier as unequal.

LESSthan specifies the qualifier as less than.

MOREthan specifies the qualifier as more than.

INrange specifies the qualifier as in range.

OUTrange specifies the qualifier as out of range.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:QUALifier LESSTHAN

sets the data qualifier to less than.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:QUALifier? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATA:QUALIFIER
EQUAL, indicating the data qualifier is equal.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the length of the data string, in bytes, to be used
when searching on a FlexRay bus data field. The search number is specified by x.
The search condition must be set to IDANDDATA OR DATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the data size in bytes. A data size of –1 is don’t care.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1401

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:SIZe 2 sets the data

size to 2.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:SIZe? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATA:SIZE 1, indicating the
data size is 1 byte.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the low value to be used when searching on a
FlexRay bus data field. The search number is specified by x. The search condition
must be set to IDANDDATA or DATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the data value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:VALue "1010" sets the

data value to XXXXXX1010.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATa:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXX",
indicating the data value is a don’t care.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:EOFTYPE
This command sets or queries the end of frame type when searching on a FlexRay
bus signal. The search number is specified by x. The search condition must be set
to EOF.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

2-1402 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:EOFTYPE
{ANY|STATIC|DYNAMIC}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:EOFTYPE?

Arguments ANY specifies either end of file type.

STATIC specifies the static end of file type.

DYNAMIC specifies the static end of file type.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:EOFTYPE STATIC sets the

end of file type to static.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:EOFTYPE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:EOFTYPE ANY, indicating
either end of file type will cause a trigger.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:ERRTYPE
This command sets or queries the error type when searching on a FlexRay bus
signal. The search number is specified by x. The search condition must be set to
ERROR.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:ERRTYPE
{CRCHeader|CRCTrailer|NULLFRStatic|NULLFRDynamic|
SYNCFrame|STARTupnosync}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:ERRTYPE?

Arguments CRCHeader sets the error type to CRCHeader.

CRCTrailer sets the error type to CRCTrailer.

NULLFRStatic sets the error type to NULLFRStatic.

NULLFRDynamic sets the error type to NULLFRDynamic.

SYNCFrame sets the error type to SYNCFrame.

STARTupnosync sets the error type to STARTupnosync.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1403

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:ERRTYPE SYNCFRAME sets the

error type to SYNCFRAME.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:ERRTYPE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:ERRTYPE CRCHEADER,
indicating the error type is CRCHEADER.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high value when searching on a FlexRay bus
frame id field. The search condition must be set to IDentifier. The search number
is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:HIVALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:HIVALue?

Arguments <QString> is the frame id high value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXray:FRAMEID:HIVALue
"XXXXXXX1010" sets the HIVALUE to XXXXXXX1010.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXray:FRAMEID:HIVALue? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:HIVALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXX" indicating the HIVALUE is XXXXXXXXXXX.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:QUALifier
This command sets the qualifier to be used when searching on a FlexRay bus
signal. The search condition must be set to Identifier. The search number is
specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:QUALifier
{EQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|
INrange|OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:QUALifier?

2-1404 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments EQual sets the qualifier to equal.

UNEQual sets the qualifier to unequal.

LESSthan sets the qualifier to less than.

MOREthan sets the qualifier to more than.

LESSEQual sets the qualifier to less equal.

MOREEQual sets the qualifier to more equal.

INrange sets the qualifier to in range.

OUTrange sets the qualifier to out of range.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXray:FRAMEID:QUALifier
UNEQUAL sets the qualifier to unequal.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXray:FRAMEID:QUALifier? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:QUALIFIER
EQUAL indicating the qualifier is set to equal.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:VALue
This command sets the low value when searching on a FlexRay bus id field. The
search condition must be set to IDentifier. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the frame id value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXray:FRAMEID:VALue
"XXXXXXX1010" sets the value to XXXXXXX1010.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXray:FRAMEID:VALue? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXX" indicating the value is XXXXXXXXXXX.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1405

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:FRAMEType
This command sets or queries the FlexRay bus search frame type. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:FRAMEType
{NORMal|PAYload|NULL|SYNC|STARTup}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:FRAMEType?

Arguments NORMal sets the frame type to normal.

PAYload sets the frame type to payload.

NULL sets the frame type to null.

SYNC sets the frame type to sync.

STARTup sets the frame type to startup.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:FRAMEType startup sets the

frame type to startup.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:FRAMEType? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:FRAMETYPE NORMAL,
indicating the frame type is normal.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CRC
This command sets or queries the CRC portion of the binary header string
whensearching on a FlexRay bus header. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CRC <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CRC?

2-1406 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <QString> specifies the CRC.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CRC "1010" sets

the header CRC to XXXXXX101.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CRC? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CRC
"XXXXXXXXXXX", indicating the header CRC is a don’t care.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CYCLECount
This command sets or queries the cycle count portion of the binary header string
when searching on a FlexRay bus header. The search number is specified by x.
The search condition must be set to HEADer.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CYCLECount
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CYCLECount?

Arguments <QString> specifies the header cycle count.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CYCLECount
"1010" sets the header cycle count to XX1010.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CYCLECount? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CYCLECOUNT
"XXXXXX" indicating the cycle count has not been set.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:FRAMEID
This command sets or queries the frame id portion of the binary header string
when searching on a FlexRay bus header. The search number is specified by x.
The search condition must be set to HEADer or IDANDDATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1407

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:FRAMEID
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:FRAMEID?

Arguments <QString> specifies the frame ID.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:FRAMEID "1010"

sets the header frame ID to XXXXXXX1010.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:FRAMEID? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:FRAMEID
"XXXXXXXXXXX", indicating the frame ID is a don’t care.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:INDBits
This command sets or queries the Indicator bits portion of the binary header string
when searching on a FlexRay bus header. The search number is specified by x.
The search condition must be set to HEADer.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:INDBits
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:INDBits?

Arguments <QString> specifies the header Indicator Bits.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:INDBits "1010"

sets the header Indicator Bits to X1010.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:INDBits? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:INDBITS
"XXXXX", indicating the Indicator Bits have not been set.

2-1408 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:PAYLENgth
This command sets or queries the payload length portion of the binary header
string when searching on a FlexRay bus search trigger header. The search number
is specified by x. The search condition must be set to HEADer.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:PAYLENgth
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:PAYLENgth?

Arguments <QString> specifies the header Payload Length.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:PAYLENgth "1010"

sets the Payload Length to 1010.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:PAYLENgth? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:FLEXRAY:HEADER:PAYLENGTH
"XXXXXXX", indicating the Payload Length has not been set.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRess:MODe
This command sets or queries the I2C address mode for the specified bus search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRess:MODe
{ADDR10|ADDR7}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRess:MODe?

Arguments ADDR10 specifies the address mode as ADDR10.

ADDR7 specifies the address mode as ADDR7.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1409

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR10 sets the

address mode for I2C bus trigger search 1 to ADDR10.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR7, indicating
that the address mode for I2C bus trigger search 2 is set to ADDR7.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRess:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary address string used for the I2C search
the specified search condition is Address or AddressData. The search number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRess:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRess:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRess:MODe

Arguments <QString> specifies the address value. This is either a 7-bit or 10-bit value
depending on the address mode. The valid characters are 0-9, A-F, and X for
addresses in hexadecimal format; and 0, 1, and X otherwise.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE "01XXXXX" sets

the address value to "01XXXXX" when the mode is ADDR7 and the format
is binary.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE "XX", indicating
that the address value is "XX" when the address mode is set to ADDR7 and the
address format is hexadecimal.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:CONDition
This command sets or queries the search condition for an I2C bus. The search
number is specified by x.

2-1410 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:CONDition
{ADDRess|ADDRANDDATA|DATa|ACKMISS|REPEATstart|STARt|STOP}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:CONDition?

Arguments ADDress specifies the trigger condition as Address.

ADDRANDDATA specifies the trigger condition as Address and Data.

DATa specifies the trigger condition as Data.

ACKMISS specifies the trigger condition as Missing of Acknowledgement.

REPEATstart specifies the trigger condition as Repeat of Start.

STARt specifies the trigger condition as Start.

STOP specifies the trigger condition as Stop.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:CONDITION ADDRESS sets the

trigger condition for I2C bus trigger search 1 to Address.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:CONDITION? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:CONDITION ADDRANDDATA,
indicating that the trigger condition for I2C bus trigger search 1 is set to Address
and Data.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:DATa:DIRection
This command sets or queries the direction of the data for the I2C bus search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x. Read or
write is indicated by the R/W bit in the I2C protocol.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:DATa:DIRection
{NOCARE|READ|WRITE}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:DATa:DIRection?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1411

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments NOCARE specifies the direction of data as Don’t Care.

READ specifies the direction of data as Read.

WRITE specifies the direction of data as Write.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION READ sets the

data direction for I2C bus trigger search 1 to READ.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION DONTCARE,
indicating that the data direction of the I2C bus trigger search 2 is DONTCare.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes used for an I2C
bus search to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by
x. The search condition must be DATA or ADDRANDDATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the data size in bytes.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:DATA:SIZE 1 sets the length of the

data string for I2C bus trigger search 1 to 1 byte.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:DATA:SIZE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:DATA:SIZE 3, indicating that the
length of the data string for I2C bus trigger search 1 is 3 bytes.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string used for I2C bus search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x. The search
condition must be DATA or ADDRANDDATA.

2-1412 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the data value. The valid characters are 0, 1, or X for binary
format; and A-F, 0-9, and X for hexadecimal format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:DATA:VALUE "1001" sets the data

value for I2C bus trigger search 1 to "1001".
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:DATA:VALUE? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:DATA:VALUE "XX", indicating that
the data value for I2C bus trigger search is "XX" in hexadecimal format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:ADDRess:MODe

This command sets or queries the address mode for the specified I3C bus trigger
search to determine where to place a search mark.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:ADDRess:MODe
{ADDR10|ADDR7}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:ADDRess:MODe?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:ADDRess:VALue

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

ADDR10 specifies the address mode as ADDR10.

ADDR7 specifies the address mode as ADDR7.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1413

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR10 sets the

address mode for I3C bus trigger Search 1 to ADDR10.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:ADDRESS:MODE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR7, indicating
that the address mode for I3C bus trigger Search 2 is set to ADDR7.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:ADDRess:VALue
This command sets or queries the I3C address value for which to search, to
determine where to place a search mark.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:ADDRess:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:ADDRess:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:ADDRess:MODe

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

<Qstring> specifies the address value for the specified Search <x>. This is either
a 7-bit or 10-bit value depending on the address mode. The valid characters are
0-9, A-F, and X for Hexadecimal address format; and 0, 1, and X (don’t care) for
Binary address format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:ADDRESS:VALUE "01XXXXX" sets

the address value to "01XXXXX" when the mode is ADDR7 and the format
is binary.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:ADDRESS:VALUE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:ADDRESS:VALUE "XX", indicating
that the address value is "XX" when the address mode is set to ADDR7 and the
address format is hexadecimal.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:BCR:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C search if
the trigger condition is BCR.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

2-1414 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:BCR:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:BCR:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

<Qstring> specifies the value for which to search. The valid characters are 0, 1,
or X for Binary format; and 0-9, A-F, and X for Hexadecimal format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:BCR:VALue "1001" sets the BCR

value for I3C bus Search 1 to 1001.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:BCR:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:BCR:VALue "1001", indicating that
the BCR value for I3C bus Search 2 is 1001 in hexadecimal format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:BCRType:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C bus search
if the trigger condition is BCRTYPE.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:BCRType:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:BCRType:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

<Qstring> specifies the data value for which to search. The valid characters are
0, 1, or X for Binary format; and 0-9, A-F, and X for Hexadecimal format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:BCRType:VALue "1001" sets the

DCR Type value for I3C bus Search 1 to "1001".
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:BCRType:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:BCRType:VALue "1001",
indicating that the BCR Type value for I3C bus Search 2 is "1001" in hexadecimal
format.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1415

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:BPACKets
This command sets or queries the I3C Broadcast Packets search to Broadcast
or Response.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:BPACKets
{RESPonse|BROadcast}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:BPACKets?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

RESPonse specifies the broadcast address mode as Response.

BROadcast specifies the broadcast address mode as Broadcast.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:BPACKets RESPonse sets the

broadcast packets type for I3C bus Search 1 to Response.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:BPACKets? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:BPACKets RESPonse, indicating
that the broadcast packets type for I3C bus Search 2 is set to Response.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:BRGTID:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if the
trigger condition is SETBRGTGT packet ID.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:BRGTID:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:BRGTID:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

<Qstring> specifies the value for which to search. The valid characters are 0, 1,
or X for Binary format; and 0-9, A-F, and X for Hexadecimal format.

2-1416 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:BRGTID:VALue "1001" sets the

Brgtgt search value for I3C bus Search 1 to 1001.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:BRGTID:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:BRGTID:VALue "9A", indicating
that the Brgtgt search value for I3C bus trigger Search 2 is 9A in hexadecimal
format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:CCODe:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if the
trigger condition is SETBRGTGT packet ID.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:CCODe:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:CCODe:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

<Qstring> specifies the value for which to search. The valid characters are 0, 1,
or X for Binary format; and A-F, 0-9, and X for Hexadecimal format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:CCODe:VALue "1001" sets the

command code value for I3C bus Search 1 to Binary 1001.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:CCODe:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:CCODe:VALue "1001", indicating
that the command code value for I3C bus Search 2 is 1001 in hexadecimal format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:CONDition
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for the specified I3C bus
trigger search to determine where to place a mark.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:CONDition
{STARt|REPEATStart|ADDRess|DATa|

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1417

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SDRDirect|SDRBroadcast|DDR|ERRors|HOTJoin|
DMSGEnd|BMSGEnd|HDRRestart|HDRExit}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:CONDition?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

STARt specifies trigger condition as Start.

REPEATStart specifies trigger condition as Repeated Start.

ADDRess specifies trigger condition as Address.
DATa specifies trigger condition as Data.

SDRDirect specifies trigger condition as I3C SDR Direct.

SDRBroadcast specifies trigger condition as I3C SDR Broadcast.

DDR specifies trigger condition as DDR.

ERRors specifies trigger condition as Errors.

HOTJoin specifies trigger condition as Hot-Join.

DMSGEnd specifies trigger condition as Direct Message End.

BMSGEnd specifies trigger condition as Stop.

HDRRestart specifies trigger condition as HDR Restart.

HDRExit specifies trigger condition as HDR Exit.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:CONDITION START sets the trigger

condition for I3C bus trigger Search 3to Start.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:CONDITION? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:CONDITION ADDRESS, indicating
that the trigger condition for I3C bus trigger search 1 is set to Address.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:DATa:DIRection
This command sets or queries the direction of the data for the I3C bus trigger
search to determine where to place a mark.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:DATa:DIRection
{NOCARE|READ|WRITE}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:DATa:DIRection?

2-1418 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

NOCARE specifies the data direction for which to search is Don’t Care.

READ specifies the data direction for which to search is Read.

WRITE specifies the data direction for which to search is Write.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:DATA:DIRECTION READ sets the

data direction for I3C bus Search 1 to READ.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:DATA:DIRECTION? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE,
indicating that the data direction of the I3C bus Search 2 is Don’t Care.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes used for the
specified I3C bus trigger search to determine where to place a mark.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

<NR1> specifies the data size in bytes.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH4:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:DATA:SIZE 1 sets the length of the

data string for I3C bus Search 4 to 1 byte.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:DATA:SIZE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:DATA:SIZE 3, indicating that the
length of the data string for I3C bus Search 1 is 3 bytes.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the data value of the data token for the specified
I3C bus trigger search to determine where to place a mark.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1419

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:DATa:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:DATa:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

<Qstring> specifies the data value. The valid characters are 0, 1, or X for Binary
format; and A-F, 0-9, and X for Hexadecimal format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:DATA:VALUE "1001" sets the data

value for I3C bus trigger Search 1 to 1001.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:DATA:VALUE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:DATA:VALUE "XX", indicating that
the data value for I3C bus Search 2 is "XX" in hexadecimal format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:DCR:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C bus search if
the trigger condition is DCR.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:DCR:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:DCR:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

<Qstring> specifies the value for which to search. The valid characters are 0, 1,
or X for Binary format; and 0-9, A-F, and X for Hexadecimal format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:DCR:VALue "1001" sets the DCR

value for I3C bus Search 1 to 1001.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:DCR:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:DCR:VALue "1001", indicating that
the DCR value for I3C bus Search 2 is 1001 in hexadecimal format.

2-1420 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:DCRType:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C bus search
if the trigger condition is DCRTYPE.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:DCRType:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:DCRType:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

<Qstring> specifies the data value for which to search. The valid characters are
0, 1, or X for Binary format; and 0-9, A-F, and X for Hexadecimal format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:DCRType:VALue "1001" sets the

DCR Type value for I3C bus Search 1 to "1001".
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:DCRType:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:DCRType:VALue "1001",
indicating that the DCR Type value for I3C bus Search 2 is "1001" in hexadecimal
format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:DWORd:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if
the trigger condition is DATAWORDS.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:DWORd:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:DWORd:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

<Qstring> specifies the value for which to search. The valid characters are 0, 1,
or X for Binary format; and 0-9, A-F, and X for Hexadecimal format.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1421

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:DWORd:VALue "1001" sets the data

word value for I3C bus Search 1 to 1001.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:DWORd:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:DWORd:VALue "1001", indicating
that the event byte value for I3C bus Search 2 is 1001 in hexadecimal format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:ERRORTYPe
This command sets or queries the error type condition for the specified I3C bus
search to determine where to place a mark.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:ERRORTYPe
{NACK|TBIT|PARity| BADDr|DADDr|PREamble|CRC}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:ERRORTYPe?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

NACK specifies the error type on which to search as Missing Ack.

TBIT specifies the error type on which to search as T-Bit.

PARity specifies the error type on which to search as Parity.

BADDr specifies the error type on which to search as Broadcast Address.

DADDr specifies the error type on which to search as Dynamic Address.

PREamble specifies the error type on which to search as Preamble.

CRC specifies the error type on which to search as CRC.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:ERRORTYPe NACK sets the error

condition for I3C bus trigger Search 1 to Missing ack.
SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:ERRORTYPe? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:ERRORTYPe PARITY, indicating that
the error condition for I3C bus trigger Search 3 is set to Parity.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:EVENTBYTe:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if
the trigger condition is EVENTBYTE.

2-1422 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:EVENTBYTe:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:EVENTBYTe:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

<Qstring> specifies the value for which to search. The valid characters are 0, 1,
or X for Binary format; and 0-9, A-F, and X for Hexadecimal format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:EVENTBYTe:VALue "1001" sets

the event byte value for I3C bus Search 1 to 1001.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:EVENTBYTe:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:EVENTBYTe:VALue "1001",
indicating that the event byte value for I3C bus trigger Search 2 is 1001 in
hexadecimal format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:FREQBYTe:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if the
trigger condition is FREQUENCYBYTE.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:FREQBYTe:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:FREQBYTe:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

<Qstring> specifies the value for which to search. The valid characters are 0, 1,
or X for Binary format; and 0-9, A-F, and X for Hexadecimal format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:FREQBYTe:VALue "1001" sets the

frequency byte value for I3C bus Search 1 to 1001.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:FREQBYTe:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:FREQBYTe:VALue "1001",

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1423

Commands listed in alphabetical order

indicating that the frequency byte value for I3C bus Search 2 is 1001 in
hexadecimal format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:GSLSb:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if the
trigger condition is GETSTATUSLSB.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:GSLSb:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:GSLSb:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

<Qstring> specifies the value for which to search. The valid characters are 0, 1,
or X for Binary format; and 0-9, A-F, and X for Hexadecimal format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:GSLSb:VALue "1001" sets the

GetStatus MSb value for I3C bus Search 1 to 1001.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:GSLSb:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:GSLSb:VALue "1001", indicating
that the GetStatus MSb value for I3C bus Search 2 is 1001 in hexadecimal format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:GSMSb:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if the
trigger condition is GETSTATUSMSB.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:GSMSb:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:GSMSb:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

<Qstring> specifies the value for which to search. The valid characters are 0, 1,
or X for Binary format; and 0-9, A-F, and X for Hexadecimal format.

2-1424 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:GSMSb:VALue "1001" sets

theGetStatus MSb value for I3C bus Search 1 to 1001.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:GSMSb:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:GSMSb:VALue "1001", indicating
that the GetStatus MSb value for I3C bus Search 2 is 1001 in hexadecimal format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:ID:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C search if the
trigger condition is ENTDAA packet ID.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:ID:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:ID:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

<Qstring> specifies the value for which to search. The valid characters are 0, 1,
or X for Binary format; and 0-9, A-F, and X for Hexadecimal format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:ID:VALue "1001" sets the ID

value for I3C bus trigger Search 1 to 1001.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:ID:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:ID:VALue "1001", indicating that
the ID value for I3C bus Search 2 is 1001 in hexadecimal format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:INACCBYTe:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C search if the
trigger condition is INACCURACYBYTE.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:INACCBYTe:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:INACCBYTe:VALue?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1425

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

<Qstring> specifies the value for which to search. The valid characters are 0, 1,
or X for Binary format; and 0-9, A-F, and X for Hexadecimal format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:INACCBYTe:VALue "1001" sets

the inaccuracy byte value for I3C bus Search 1 to 1001.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:INACCBYTe:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:INACCBYTe:VALue "1001",
indicating that the inaccuracy byte value for I3C bus Search 2 is 1001 in
hexadecimal format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:MAXREAD:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if
the trigger condition is MAXREAD.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:MAXREAD:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:MAXREAD:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

<Qstring> specifies the value for which to search. The valid characters are 0, 1,
or X for Binary format; and 0-9, A-F, and X for Hexadecimal format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:MAXREAD:VALue "1001" sets the

Maximum Read value for I3C bus Search 1 to 1001.
SEARCH:SEARCH4:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:MAXREAD:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH4:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:MAXREAD:VALue "1001",
indicating that the Maximum Read value for I3C bus Search 4 is 1001 in
hexadecimal format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:MAXRTURN:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if the
trigger condition is MAXREADTURN.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

2-1426 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:MAXRTURN:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:MAXRTURN:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

<Qstring> specifies the value for which to search. The valid characters are 0, 1,
or X for Binary format; and 0-9, A-F, and X for Hexadecimal format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:MAXRTURN:VALue "1001" sets the

Maximum Read Turnaround value for I3C bus Search 5 to 1001.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:MAXRTURN:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:MAXRTURN:VALue "1001",
indicating that the Maximum Read Turnaround value for I3C bus Search 2 is
1001 in hexadecimal format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:MAXWRITe:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if
the trigger condition is MAXWRITE.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:MAXWRITe:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:MAXWRITe:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

<Qstring> specifies the value for which to search. The valid characters are 0, 1,
or X for Binary format; and 0-9, A-F, and X for Hexadecimal format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:MAXWRITe:VALue "1001" sets the

Maximum Write value for I3C bus Search 1 to 1001.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:MAXWRITe:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:MAXWRITe:VALue "1001",
indicating that the Maximum Write value for I3C bus Search 2 is 1001 in
hexadecimal format.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1427

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:PACKets
This command sets or queries the I3C Direct Packets to Direct or Response.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:PACKets {RESPonse|DIRect}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:PACKets?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

RESPonse specifies the packet address mode as Response.

DIRect specifies the packet address mode as Direct.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:PACKets DIRect sets the packets

for I3C bus Search 3 to Direct.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:PACKets? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:PACKets RESPonse, indicating that
the packets for I3C bus Search 2 is set to Response.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:SADDress:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C bus searchif
the trigger condition is SLAVEADDRESS.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:SADDress:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:SADDress:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

<Qstring> specifies the address value for which to search. The valid characters
are 0, 1, or X for Binary format; and A-F, 0-9, and X for Hexadecimal format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:SADDress:VALue "1001" sets the

slave address value for I3C bus trigger search 1 to "1001".

2-1428 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:SADDress:VALue? might return

SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:SADDress:VALue "1001",
indicating that the slave address value for I3C bus Search 2 is 1001 in hexadecimal
format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:SDR:BROADCASTPacket
This command sets or queries the SDR broadcast packets for the specified I3C bus
trigger search to determine where to place a mark.

Conditions Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:SDR:BROADCASTPacket
{ENSLave| DISLave| ENTasx| RSTDya| ENTRDya| SETMwrl|
SETMrdl| LSLave| ENTRTSTMode| EXTime| SETaasa| ENDXFER|
SETGRPa| RSTACT| DEFGRPa| RSTGRPa| MLANe| SETBUSCON}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:SDR:BROADCASTPacket?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

ENSLave specifies the I3C broadcast packet type as Enable Slave.

DISLave specifies the I3C broadcast packet type as Disable Slave.

ENTasx specifies the I3C broadcast packet type as Enter Activity State.

RSTDya specifies the I3C broadcast packet type as Reset Dynamic Address.

ENTRDya specifies the I3C broadcast packet type as Enter Dynamic Address.

SETMwrl specifies the I3C broadcast packet type as Set Max Write Length.

SETMrdl specifies the I3C broadcast packet type as Set Max Read Length.

LSLave specifies the I3C broadcast packet type as Define List of Slaves.

ENTRTSTMode specifies the I3C broadcast packet type as Enter Test Mode
Broadcast.
EXTime specifies the I3C broadcast packet type as Set Exchange Time.

SETaasa specifies the I3C broadcast packet type as Set Static As Dynamic
Address.
ENDXFER specifies the I3C broadcast packet type as Data Transfer Ending
Procedure Control.
SETGRPa specifies the I3C broadcast packet type as Set Group Address.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1429

Commands listed in alphabetical order

RSTACT specifies the I3C broadcast packet type as Slave Reset Action.

DEFGRPa specifies the I3C broadcast packet type as Define List of Group
Addresses.
RSTGRPa specifies the I3C broadcast packet type as Reset Group Address.

MLANe specifies the I3C broadcast packet type as Multi-Lane Data Transfer
Control.
SETBUSCON specifies the I3C broadcast packet type as Set Bus Context.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:SDR:BROADCASTPacket ENSLave

sets the trigger condition for I3C bus trigger search 1 to Enable Slave.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:SDR:BROADCASTPacket? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:SDR:BROADCASTPacket
ENTRDYA, indicating that the trigger condition for I3C bus trigger Search 5 is
set to Reset Dynamic Address.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:SDR:DIRECTPacket
This command sets or queries the SDR direct packet types for the specified I3C
bus trigger search to determine where to place a mark.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:SDR:DIRECTPacket
{ENSLave| DISLave| ENTasx| RSTDya| SETMwrl| SETMrdl|
SEText| SETDya| SETNdya| GETMWrl| GETMRdl| GETPrid|
GETBusch| GETDevch| GETSlave| ACCM| SETBrt| MDATASpeed|
HDRCapability|GETXTime| GETCAPS| ENDXFER| SETGRPa| RSTACT|
DEFGRPa| RSTGRPa| MLANe}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:SDR:DIRECTPacket?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

ENSLave specifies the trigger condition as Enable Slave.

DISLave specifies the trigger condition as Disable Slave.

ENTasx specifies the trigger condition as Enter Activity State.

RSTDya specifies the trigger condition as Reset Dynamic Address.

SETMwrl specifies the trigger condition as Set Max Write Length.

2-1430 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SETMrdl specifies the trigger condition as Set Max Read Length.

SEText specifies the trigger condition as Set Exchange Time.

SETDya specifies the trigger condition as Set Dynamic Address.

SETNdya specifies the trigger condition as Set New Dynamic Address.

GETMWrl specifies the trigger condition as Get Max Write Length.

GETMRdl specifies the trigger condition as Get Max Read Length.

GETPrid specifies the trigger condition as Get Provisional ID.

GETBusch specifies the trigger condition as Get Provisional ID.

GETDevch specifies the trigger condition as Get Dev Characteristics.

GETSlave specifies the trigger condition as Get Slave Current Status.

ACCM specifies the trigger condition as Get Accept Mastership.

SETBrt specifies the trigger condition as Set Bridge Direct Target.

MDATASpeed specifies the trigger condition as Get Max Data Speed.

HDRCapability specifies the trigger condition as Get HDR Capability.

GETXTime specifies the trigger condition as Get Exchange Time.

GETCAPS specifies the trigger condition as Get Optional Feature Capabilities.

ENDXFER specifies the trigger condition as Data Transfer Ending Procedure

Control.
SETGRPa specifies the trigger condition as Set Group Address.

RSTACT specifies the trigger condition as Reset Group Address.

DEFGRPa specifies the trigger condition as Define List of Group Addresses.

RSTGRPa specifies the trigger condition as Reset Group Address.

MLANe specifies the trigger condition as Multi-Lane Data Transfer Control.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH4:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:SDR:DIRECTPacket ENSLave sets

the trigger condition for I3C bus trigger Search 4 to Enable Slave.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:SDR:DIRECTPacket? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH8:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:SDR:DIRECTPacket ENTASX,
indicating that the trigger condition for I3C bus Search 8 is set to Enter Activity
State.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1431

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:STATEBYTe:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if
the trigger condition is STATEBYTE.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:STATEBYTe:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:STATEBYTe:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

<Qstring> specifies the value for which to search. The valid characters are 0, 1,
or X for Binary format; and 0-9, A-F, and X for Hexadecimal format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:STATEBYTe:VALue "1001" sets

the state byte value for I3C bus Search 1 to 1001.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:STATEBYTe:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:STATEBYTe:VALue "1001",
indicating that the state byte value for I3C bus Search 2 is 1001 in hexadecimal
format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:STATic:ADDRess
This command sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C search if the
trigger condition is STATICADDRESS.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:STATic:ADDRess <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:STATic:ADDRess?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

<Qstring> specifies the address value for which to search. The valid characters
are 0, 1, or X for Binary format; and 0-9, A-F, and X for Hexadecimal format.

2-1432 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:STATic:ADDRess "1001" sets the

address value for I3C bus trigger Search 1 to 1001.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:STATic:ADDRess? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:STATic:ADDRess "1001",
indicating that the address value for I3C bus trigger Search 2 is "1001" in
hexadecimal format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:SUPPORTBYTe:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if the
trigger condition is SUPPORTEDBYTE.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:SUPPORTBYTe:VALue
<Qstring>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:SUPPORTBYTe:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

<Qstring> specifies the value for which to search. The valid characters are 0, 1,
or X for Binary format; and 0-9, A-F, and X for Hexadecimal format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:SUPPORTBYTe:VALue "1001" sets

the supported byte value for I3C bus Search 1 to 1001.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:SUPPORTBYTe:VALue? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:SUPPORTBYTe:VALue
"1001", indicating that the supported byte value for I3C bus Search 2 is 1001
in hexadecimal format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:TESTMODe:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary field string used for the I3C trigger if
the trigger condition is TESTMODE.
Requires purchase and installation of option SRI3C.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1433

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:TESTMODe:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:TESTMODe:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> specifies the search number.

<Qstring> specifies the value for which to search. The valid characters are 0, 1,
or X for Binary format; and 0-9, A-F, and X for Hexadecimal format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:TESTMODe:VALue "1001" sets the

test mode value for I3C bus Search 1 to 1001.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:TESTMODe:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I3C:TESTMODe:VALue "1001",
indicating that the test mode value for I3C bus Search 2 is 1001 in hexadecimal
format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:CONDition
This command sets or queries the condition for a LIN bus search. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:CONDition
{DATA|IDANDDATA|ERRor|IDentifier|SLEEP|SYNCfield|WAKEup}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:CONDition?

Arguments DATA sets the trigger condition to data.

IDANDDATA sets the trigger condition to ID and data.

ERRor sets the trigger condition to error.

IDentifier sets the trigger condition to identifier.

SLEEP sets the trigger condition to sleep.

SYNCfield sets the trigger condition to sync field.

WAKEup sets the trigger condition to wakeup.

2-1434 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:CONDition DATA sets the trigger

condition to data.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:CONDition? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:LIN:CONDITION SYNCfield, indicating
the trigger condition is sync.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high data value string used in a LIN bus search.
The search number is specified by x. The search condition must be DATA or
IDANDDATA and the data qualifier must be INRANGE or OUTRANGE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:HIVALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:HIVALue?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of 1s, 0s, or Xs representing the binary data string
to be used in a LIN search if the search condition is IDentifier or IDANDDATA
(identifier and data).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE? might

return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXX" indicating the high value is "don't care".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the data qualifier used in a LIN bus search. The
search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:QUALifier {EQual|

LESSEQual| MOREEQual| UNEQual| LESSthan| MOREthan| INrange|
OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:QUALifier?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1435

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments EQual sets the data qualifier to equal.

LESSEQual sets the data qualifier to less equal.

MOREEQual sets the data qualifier to more equal.

UNEQual sets the data qualifier to unequal.

LESSthan sets the data qualifier to less than.

MOREthan sets the data qualifier to more than.

INrange sets the data qualifier to in range.

OUTrange sets the data qualifier out of range.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:QUALifier LESSthan sets

the data qualifier to less than.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:QUALifier? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL,
indicating the data qualifier is equal.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the length of the stat string in bytes used for a LIN
bus search. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the data size.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:SIZe 1.0 sets the data size

to 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:SIZe? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:LIN:DATA:SIZE 1, indicating the data
size is 1.

2-1436 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the data string used for a LIN bus search. The search
number is specified by x. The search condition must be DATA or IDANDDATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the data value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:VALue 1010 sets the data

value to XXXXXX1010.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:LIN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXX",
indicating that the data value is a don’t care.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:ERRTYPE
This command sets or queries the error type for a LIN bus search. The search
number is specified by x. The search condition must be set to ERROR.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:ERRTYPE
{CHecksum|PARity|SYNC}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:ERRTYPE?

Arguments CHecksum specifies the error type is checksum.

PARity specifies the error type is parity.

SYNC specifies the error type is sync.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1437

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:ERRTYPE Parity sets the error

type to parity.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:ERRTYPE? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:LIN:ERRTYPE SYNC, indicating that
the error type is sync.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:IDentifier:VALue
This command sets or queries the string used for a LIN bus identifier value. The
search number is specified by x. The search condition must be IDENTIFIER
or IDANDDATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:IDentifier:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:IDentifier:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the identifier value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:IDentifier:VALue 1010 sets

the identifier value to XX1010.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:IDentifier:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXXXX",
indicates the identifier value is don’t care.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:CONDition
This command specifies a field or condition for an Manchester bus to search on.
The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires the SR-MANCH Triggering and Analysis application.

Group Search and Mark

2-1438 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:CONDition
{SYNCBITS| HEADer| DATa| packetOffData| TRAiler| ERRors}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:CONDition?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:MANChester:DISplaymode

Arguments SYNCBITS specifies Sync Bits symbols as the field within an Manchester frame
to search on.
HEADer specifies header symbols as the field within an Manchester frame to
search on.
DATa specifies data symbols as the field within an Manchester frame to search on.

packetOffData specifies the binary string used for Manchester triggering if

the trigger condition is DATA.
TRAiler specifies trailer symbols as the field within an Manchester frame to
search on.
ERRors specifies error symbols as the field within an Manchester frame to search
on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MANChester:CONDition SYNCBITS

specifies Sync Bit symbols as the field within an Manchester frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MANChester:CONDition? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MANChester:CONDition SYNCBITS,
indicating that Sync Bits is the currently specified field within an Manchester
frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:DATa:SIZe
This command specifies the number of bits per word for the specified Manchester
bus. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires the SR-MANCH Triggering and Analysis application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:DATa:SIZe?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1439

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:MANChester:DISplaymode, SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:

BUS:MANChester:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<NR1> specifies the data string in a valid format. The minimum and default values
are 1. The maximum value is 5.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:DATa:SIZe 2 sets the data

string for Manchester bus trigger search 1 to 2 bits.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:DATa:SIZe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:DATa:SIZe 2, indicating
that the length of the data string for Manchester bus trigger search 1 is 2 bits.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary string used for Manchester triggering if the
trigger condition is data when searching on an Manchester signal. The search
condition needs to be set to data. The search number is specified by <x>.

Conditions Requires the SR-MANCH Triggering and Analysis application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:DATa:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:DATa:VALue?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:MANChester:DISplaymode, SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:

BUS:MANChester:CONDition

Arguments <QString> is the data value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:DATa:VALue
"00001000" specifies binary as the value to be used while searching.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:DATa:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:DATa:VALue
"00001000", indicating that binary is the value to be used while searching.

2-1440 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:ERRor:TYPe
This command sets or queries the error to be used when searching on a Manchester
signal. The search condition must be set to error. Parity error identifies odd and
even parity. The search number is specified by <x>.

Conditions Requires the SR-MANCH Triggering and Analysis application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:ERRor:TYPe
{MANChester|PARity}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:ERRor:TYPe?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:MANChester:DISplaymode, SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:

BUS:MANChester:CONDition

Arguments MANChester sets the error type to Manchester.

PARity sets the error type to parity.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:ERRor:TYPe
MANChester sets the error type to Manchester.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:ERRor:TYPe? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:ERRor:TYPe
PARity, indicating the error type is parity.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:HEADER:VALue
This command specifies the binary string used for Manchester triggering if the
trigger condition is header when searching on an Manchester signal. The search
condition needs to be set to header. The search number is specified by <x>.

Conditions Requires the SR-MANCH Triggering and Analysis application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:HEADER:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:HEADER:VALue?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1441

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:MANChester:DISplaymode, SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:

BUS:MANChester:CONDition

Arguments <QString> is the header value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:DATa:VALue
"00001000" specifies binary as the value to be used while searching.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:DATa:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:DATa:VALue
"00001000", indicating the binary header value to be used while searching.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:packetOffData:VALue
This command specifies the binary string used for Manchester triggering if the
trigger condition is DATA. The search number is specified by <x>.

Conditions Requires the SR-MANCH Triggering and Analysis application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:packetOffData:
VALue <NR1>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:packetOffData:
VALue?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:MANChester:DISplaymode, SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:

BUS:MANChester:CONDition

Arguments <NR1> specifies the data string in a valid format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChesterDATAOFF:VALue 1
specifies binary as the value to be used while searching.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChesterDATAOFF:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChesterDATAOFF:VALue 1,
indicating the binary value to be used while searching.

2-1442 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:SYNC:VALue
This command specifies the binary string used for Manchester triggering if the
trigger condition is Sync when searching on an Manchester signal. The search
condition needs to be set to Sync. The search number is specified by <x>.

Conditions Requires the SR-MANCH Triggering and Analysis application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:SYNC:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:SYNC:VALue?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:MANChester:DISplaymode, SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:

BUS:MANChester:CONDition

Arguments <QSTRING> specifies the data string in a valid format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChesterDATAOFF:VALue
"00001000" specifies binary as the value to be used while searching.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChesterDATAOFF:VALue? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChesterDATAOFF:VALue
"00001000", indicating the binary value to be used while searching.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:TRAILER:VALue
This command specifies the binary string used for Manchester triggering if the
trigger condition is Trailer when searching on an Manchester signal. The search
condition needs to be set to Trailer. The search number is specified by <x>.

Conditions Requires the SR-MANCH Triggering and Analysis application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:TRAILER:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:TRAILER:VALue?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1443

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:MANChester:DISplaymode, SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:

BUS:MANChester:CONDition

Arguments <QString> specifies the data string in a valid format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:TRAILER:VALue
"00001000" specifies binary as the value to be used while searching.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:TRAILER:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:MANChester:TRAILER:VALue
"00001000", indicating the binary value to be used while searching.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:ADDress:VALue
This command specifies the binary address string used for MDIO triggering if the
trigger condition is address. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-MDIO.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:ADDress:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:ADDress:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the address value. Default address value is

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MDIO:ADDress:VALue
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX" specifies address value as the field within a MDIO frame
to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MDIO:ADDress:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MDIO:ADDress:VALue
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX", indicating that data is the currently specified field within
a MDIO frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:CONDition
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for MDIO bus. The search
number is specified by x.

2-1444 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-MDIO.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:CONDition {STARTPACKet|

PHYSICALADDRess| REGISTERADDRess| DEVICETYPe| DATA| ADDRess|
ERRor}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:CONDition?

Arguments STARTPACKet specifies STARTPACKet as the field within a MDIO frame to

search on. This is the default trigger on condition.
PHYSICALADDRess specifies PHYSICALADDRess as the field within a MDIO
frame to search on.
REGISTERADDRess specifies REGISTERADDRess as the field within a MDIO
frame to search on.
DEVICETYPe specifies DEVICETYPe as the field within a MDIO frame to search
on.
DATA specifies DATA as the field within a MDIO frame to search on.

ADDRess specifies ADDRess as the field within a MDIO frame to search on.

ERRor specifies ERRor as the field within a MDIO frame to search on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MDIO:CONDition ERRor specifies

ERRor as the field within a MDIO frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MDIO:CONDition? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MDIO:CONDition ERRor, indicating
that ERRor is the currently specified field within a MDIO frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for MDIO triggering if the
trigger condition is DATA. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-MDIO.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:DATa:VALue?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1445

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <QString> is the data value. Default value is XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MDIO:DATa:VALue
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX" specifies data as the field within a MDIO
frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MDIO:DATa:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MDIO:DATa:VALue
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX", indicating that data is the currently specified field within
a MDIO frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:DEVicetype:VALue
This command specifies the binary device type string used for MDIO triggering if
the trigger condition is Device type. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-MDIO.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:DEVicetype:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:DEVicetype:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the device type. Default value is XXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MDIO:DEVicetype:VALue "XXXXX"

specifies device type as the field within a MDIO frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MDIO:DEVicetype:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MDIO:DEVicetype:VALue
"XXXXX", indicating that device type is the currently specified field within a
MDIO frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:ERRType
This command sets or queries the error type to be used when triggering on MDIO
data. This applies when the MDIO bus trigger condition is set to ERRor. The
search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-MDIO.

2-1446 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:ERRType {OPCODEERRor|

DEVERRor| ANY}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:ERRType?

Arguments OPCODEERRor specifies OPCODEERRor as the field within a MDIO frame to

search on. This is the default trigger on condition.
DEVERRor specifies DEVERRor as the field within a MDIO frame to search on.

ANY specifies ANY as the field within a MDIO frame to search on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MDIO:ERRType ANY specifies error type

as the field within a MDIO frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MDIO:ERRType? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MDIO:ERRType ANY, indicating that
error type is the currently specified field within a MDIO frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:OPCode:VALue
This command specifies the binary op-code string used for MDIO triggering if the
trigger condition is op-code. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-MDIO.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:OPCode:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:OPCode:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the op-code value. Default op-code value is XX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MDIO:OPCode:VALue "XX" specifies

op-code value as the field within a MDIO frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MDIO:OPCode:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MDIO:OPCode:VALue "XX", indicating
that op-code value is the currently specified field within a MDIO frame to search
on.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1447

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:PHYSicaladdress:VALue
This command specifies the binary physical address string used for MDIO
triggering if the trigger condition is physical address. The search number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-MDIO.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:PHYSicaladdress:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:PHYSicaladdress:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the physical address value. Default physical address value is
XXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MDIO:PHYSicaladdress:VALue
"XXXXX" specifies physical address as the field within a MDIO frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MDIO:PHYSicaladdress:VALue?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MDIO:PHYSicaladdress:VALue
"XXXXX", indicating that physical address is the currently specified field
within a MDIO frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:REGisteraddress:VALue
This command specifies the binary register address string used for MDIO
triggering if the trigger condition is register address. The search number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-MDIO.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:REGisteraddress:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:REGisteraddress:VALue?

2-1448 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <QString> is the register address value. Default register address value is
XXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MDIO:REGisteraddress:VALue
"XXXXX" specifies register address as the field within a MDIO frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MDIO:REGisteraddress:VALue?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MDIO:REGisteraddress:VALue
"XXXXX", indicating that register address is the currently specified field
within a MDIO frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high value when searching on command word
addresses for a MIL-STD-1553 bus. The search number is specified by x. The
search condition must be set to COMMAND, and the address qualifier must be
INrange or OUTrange.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:
HIVALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:
HIVALue?

Arguments <QString> is the address value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRESS:HIVALUE
"X1000" sets the value to X1000.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRESS:HIVALUE?
might return "XXXXX", indicating that the value is XXXXX.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on command
word addresses for a MIL-STD-1553 bus. The search number is specified by x.
The search condition must be set to COMMAND.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1449

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:
ADDRess:QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|LESSthan
|MOREthan|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:
QUALifier?

Arguments EQual sets the data qualifier to equal.

LESSEQual sets the data qualifier to less equal.

MOREEQual sets the data qualifier to more equal.

UNEQual sets the data qualifier to unequal.

LESSthan sets the data qualifier to less than.

MOREthan sets the data qualifier to more than.

INrange sets the data qualifier to in range.

OUTrange sets the data qualifier out of range.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRESS:QUALIFIER
LESSTHAN sets the address qualifier to less than.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRESS:QUALIFIER?
might return EQUAL, indicating that the address qualifier is set to equal.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:VALue
This command sets or queries the low value when searching on command word
addresses for a MIL-STD-1553 bus. The search number is specified by x. The
search condition must be set to COMMAND.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

2-1450 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:
VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:
VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the address value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRESS:VALUE
"X1000" sets the value to X1000.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRESS:VALUE?
might return "XXXXX", indicating that the value is XXXXX.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:COUNt
This command sets or queries the value of the command word "word count" field
for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on. The search number is specified by x. The
search condition must be set to COMMAND.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:COUNt
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:COUNt?

Arguments <QString> is the word count value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:COUNT "X1000"

sets the value to X1000.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:COUNT? might
return "XXXXX", indicating that the value is XXXXX.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:PARity
This command sets or queries the value of the command word parity bit for a
MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on. The search number is specified by x. The search
condition must be set to COMMAND.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1451

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:PARity
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:PARity?

Arguments ONE filters command words to only match those where the parity bit has a value
of 1.
ZERo filters command words to only match those where the parity bit has a value
of 0.
NOCARE disables filtering of command words on the parity bit.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:PARITY ONE

specifies filtering command words for those where the parity bit has a value of 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:PARITY? might
return NOCARE, indicating that command words are not being filtered based
on the parity bit value.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:SUBADdress
This command sets or queries the value of the command word subaddress field
for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on. The search number is specified by x. The
search condition must be set to COMMAND.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:SUBADdress
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:SUBADdress?

Arguments <QString> is the word count value.

2-1452 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:SUBADDRESS
"X1000" sets the value to X1000.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:SUBADDRESS?
might return "XXXXX", indicating that the value is XXXXX.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:TRBit
This command sets or queries the value of the command word Transmit / Receive
bit for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on. The search number is specified by x.
The search condition must be set to COMMAND.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:TRBit
{RX|TX|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:TRBit?

Arguments RX filters command words to only match those that are receive packets.

TX filters command words to only match those that are transmit packets.

X disables filtering of command words on the R/T bit.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:TRBIT TX
specifies filtering command words for only transmit messages.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:COMMAND:TRBIT? might
return X, indicating that command words are not being filtered based on the R/T
bit value.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:CONDition
This command sets or queries the field or condition for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to
search on. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1453

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:CONDition
{SYNC|COMMAND|STATus|DATA|ERRor}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:CONDition?

Arguments SYNC specifies a search for the sync pulse of any word.

COMMAND specifies a search for a matching command word.

STATus specifies a search for a matching status word.

DATA specifies a search for a matching data word.

ERRor specifies a search for a specified error condition.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:CONDITION DATA specifies

finding matching data word(s).
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:CONDITION? might return
SYNC, indicating that the bus is being searched for sync pulses found in any word.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:DATa:PARity
This command sets or queries the value of the command word parity bit for a
MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on. The search number is specified by x. The search
condition must be set to DATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:DATa:PARity
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:DATa:PARity?

Arguments ONE filters data words to only match those where the parity bit has a value of 1.

ZERo filters data words to only match those where the parity bit has a value of 0.

NOCARE disables filtering of data words on the parity bit.

2-1454 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:DATA:PARITY ONE specifies

filtering data words for those where the parity bit has a value of 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:DATA:PARITY? might return
NOCARE, indicating that data words are not being filtered based on the parity
bit value.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the value when searching on data words for a
MIL-STD-1553 bus. The search number is specified by x. The search condition
must be set to DATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the data value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:DATA:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXX1000" sets the value to XXXXXXXXXXXX1000.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:DATA:VALUE? might
return "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX", indicating that the value is
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:ERRTYPe
This command sets or queries the type of error condition for a MIL-STD-1553
bus to search on. The search number is specified by x. The search condition
must be set to ERRor.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1455

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:ERRTYPe
{PARity|SYNC|DATA}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:ERRTYPe?

Arguments PARity specifies searching for an incorrectly calculated parity bit in any word.

SYNC specifies searching for any sync pulse that does not transition in the middle
of the pulse as required.
DATA specifies searching for any non-contiguous data words.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:ERRTYPE DATA specifies

searching for non-contiguous data words.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:ERRTYPE? might return
PARITY, indicating that the bus is being searched for parity errors in any word.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high value when searching on status word
addresses for a MIL-STD-1553 bus. The search number is specified by x. The
search condition must be set to STATus and the address qualifier must be INrange
or OUTrange.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:
HIVALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:
HIVALue?

Arguments <QString> is the address value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATUS:ADDRESS:HIVALUE
"X1000" sets the value to X1000.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATUS:ADDRESS:HIVALUE?
might return "XXXXX", indicating that the value is XXXXX.

2-1456 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier used when searching on status word
addresses for a MIL-STD-1553 bus. The search number is specified by x. The
search condition must be set to STATus.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:
QUALifier {EQual| UNEQual| LESSthan| MOREthan| LESSEQual|
MOREEQual| INrange| OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:
QUALifier?

Arguments EQual sets the data qualifier to equal.

LESSEQual sets the data qualifier to less equal.

MOREEQual sets the data qualifier to more equal.

UNEQual sets the data qualifier to unequal.

LESSthan sets the data qualifier to less than.

MOREthan sets the data qualifier to more than.

INrange sets the data qualifier to in range.

OUTrange sets the data qualifier out of range.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATUS:ADDRESS:QUALIFIER
LESSTHAN sets the address qualifier to less than.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATUS:ADDRESS:QUALIFIER?
might return EQUAL, indicating that the address qualifier is set to equal.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:VALue
This command sets or queries the low value when searching on status word
addresses for a MIL-STD-1553 bus. The search number is specified by x. The
search condition must be set to STATus.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1457

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:
VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the address value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATUS:ADDRESS:VALUE
"X1000" sets the value to X1000.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATUS:ADDRESS:VALUE?
might return "XXXXX", indicating that the value is XXXXX.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BCR
This command sets or queries the value of the broadcast command received bit
(BCR bit, bit 15) in a status word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on. The
search number is specified by x. The search condition must be set to STATus.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BCR
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BCR?

Arguments ONE filters status words to only match those where the BCR bit has a value of 1.

ZERo filters status words to only match those where the BCR bit has a value of 0.

NOCARE disables filtering of status words on the BCR bit.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:BCR ONE

specifies filtering status words for those where the BCR bit has a value of 1.

2-1458 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:BCR? might
return NOCARE, indicating that status words are not being filtered based on
the BCR bit value.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BUSY
This command sets or queries the value of the busy bit (BUSY bit, bit 16) in a
status word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on. The search number is specified
by x. The search condition must be set to STATus.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BUSY
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BUSY?

Arguments ONE filters status words to only match those where the BUSY bit has a value of 1.

ZERo filters status words to only match those where the BUSY bit has a value of 0.

NOCARE disables filtering of status words on the BUSY bit.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:BUSY ONE

specifies filtering status words for those where the BUSY bit has a value of 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:BUSY? might
return NOCARE, indicating that status words are not being filtered based on the
BUSY bit value.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:DBCA
This command sets or queries the value of the dynamic bus control acceptance bit
(DBCA bit, bit 18) in a status word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on. The
search number is specified by x. The search condition must be set to STATus.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1459

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:DBCA
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:DBCA?

Arguments ONE filters status words to only match those where the DBCA bit has a value of 1.

ZERo filters status words to only match those where the DBCA bit has a value of 0.

NOCARE disables filtering of status words on the DBCA bit.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:DBCA ONE

specifies filtering status words for those where the DBCA bit has a value of 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:DBCA? might
return NOCARE, indicating that status words are not being filtered based on the
DBCA bit value.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:INSTR
This command sets or queries the value of the instrumentation bit (INSTR bit, bit
10) in a status word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on. The search number is
specified by x. The search condition must be set to STATus.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:INSTR
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:INSTR?

Arguments ONE filters status words to only match those where the INSTR bit has a value of 1.

ZERo filters status words to only match those where the INSTR bit has a value of 0.

NOCARE disables filtering of status words on the INSTR bit.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:INSTR ONE

specifies filtering status words for those where the INSTR bit has a value of 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:INSTR? might
return NOCARE, indicating that status words are not being filtered based on the
INSTR bit value.

2-1460 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:ME
This command sets or queries the value of the message error bit (ME bit, bit 9)
in a status word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on. The search number is
specified by x. The search condition must be set to STATus.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:ME
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:ME?

Arguments ONE filters status words to only match those where the ME bit has a value of 1.

ZERo filters status words to only match those where the ME bit has a value of 0.

NOCARE disables filtering of status words on the ME bit.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:ME ONE

specifies filtering status words for those where the ME bit has a value of 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:ME? might
return NOCARE, indicating that status words are not being filtered based on
the ME bit value.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:SRQ
This command sets or queries the value of the status word service request bit
(SRQ bit, bit 11) in a status word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on. The
search number is specified by x. The search condition must be set to STATus.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:SRQ
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:SRQ?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1461

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments ONE filters status words to only match those where the SRQ bit has a value of 1.

ZERo filters status words to only match those where the SRQ bit has a value of 0.

NOCARE disables filtering of status words on the SRQ bit.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:SRQ ONE

specifies filtering status words to those where the SRQ bit has a value of 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:SRQ? might
return NOCARE, indicating that status words are not being filtered based on
the SRQ bit value.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:SUBSF
This command sets or queries the value of the subsystem flag bit (SUBSF bit, bit
17) in a status word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on. The search number is
specified by x>. The search condition must be set to STATus.

Conditions Requires SR-AERO Triggering and Analysis application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:SUBSF
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:SUBSF?

Arguments ONE filters status words to only match those where the SUBSF bit has a value of 1.

ZERo filters status words to only match those where the SUBSF bit has a value
of 0.
NOCARE disables filtering of status words on the SUBSF bit.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:SUBSF ONE

specifies filtering status words for those where the SUBSF bit has a value of 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:SUBSF? might
return NOCARE, indicating that status words are not being filtered based on
the SUBSF bit value.

2-1462 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:TF
This command sets or queries the value of the terminal flag bit (TF bit, bit 19) in a
status word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on. The search number is specified
by x. The search condition must be set to STATus.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:TF
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:TF?

Arguments ONE filters status words to only match those where the TF bit has a value of 1.

ZERo filters status words to only match those where the TF bit has a value of 0.

NOCARE disables filtering of status words on the TF bit.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:TF ONE

specifies filtering status words for those where the TF bit has a value of 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:TF? might
return NOCARE, indicating that status words are not being filtered based on
the TF bit value.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:PARity
This command sets or queries the value of the status word parity bit for a
MIL-STD-1553 bus to search on. The search number is specified by x. The search
condition must be set to STATus.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:PARity
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATus:PARity?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1463

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments ONE filters status words to only match those where the parity bit has a value of 1.

ZERo filters status words to only match those where the parity bit has a value of 0.

NOCARE disables filtering of status words on the parity bit.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATUS:PARITY ONE

specifies filtering status words for those where the parity bit has a value of 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:MIL1553B:STATUS:PARITY? might
return NOCARE, indicating that status words are not being filtered based on
the parity bit value.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:COMMand:CODe
This command sets or queries the trigger on command code for a NFC bus.

Conditions Requires option RFNFC.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:COMMand:CODe {INVentory|

STAYQUIet| RFU| RDSBLOCk| WRSBLOCk| LOCKBLOCk| RDMBLOCk|
WRMBLOCk| SELECT15693SET| RSTTOREADy| WRITEAFI| LOCKAFI|
WRITEDSFID| LOCKDSFID| GETSYSTEMINFo| GETMBSECSYSTem|
FRDMBLOCk| EXRDSBLOCk| EXWRSBLOCk| EXLOCKBLOCk| EXRDMBLOCk|
AUTHenticate| KEYUPDate| AUTHCRYPto| SECURECRYPto|
CHALlenge| READBUFFer| EXGETSYSTINFo| EXGETMBSSTATus|
FEXRDMBLOCks| custom| REQa| WUPa| PROPrietary| SELECT14443A|
HLTa| REQB| WUPB| SLOTMARKER| ATTRIB| HLTB| ANY| ATRReq|
WUPReq| PSLReq| DEPReq |DSLReq| RLSReq}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:COMMand:CODe?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

INVentory specifies inventory as the 15693 command code to search on. This is
the default command code is for 15693.
STAYQUIet specifies STAYQUIet as the 15693 command code to search on.

RFU specifies RFU as the 15693 command code to search on.

RDSBLOCk specifies RDSBLOCk as the 15693 command code to search on.

WRSBLOCk specifies WRSBLOCk as the 15693 command code to search on.

LOCKBLOCk specifies LOCKBLOCk as the 15693 command code to search on.

2-1464 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

RDMBLOCk specifies RDMBLOCk as the 15693 command code to search on.

WRMBLOCk specifies WRMBLOCk as the 15693 command code to search on.

SELECT15693SET specifies select as the 15693 command code to search on.

RSTTOREADy specifies RSTTOREADy as the 15693 command code to search on.

WRITEAFI specifies WRITEAFI as the 15693 command code to search on.

LOCKAFI specifies LOCKAFI as the 15693 command code to search on.

WRITEDSFID specifies WRITEDSFID as the 15693 command code to search on.

LOCKDSFID specifies LOCKDSFID as the 15693 command code to search on.

GETSYSTEMINFo specifies GETSYSTEMINFo as the 15693 command code

to search on.
GETMBSECSYSTem specifies GETMBSECSYSTem as the 15693 command code
to search on.
FRDMBLOCk specifies FRDMBLOCk as the 15693 command code to search on.

EXRDSBLOCk specifies EXRDSBLOCk as the 15693 command code to search on.

EXWRSBLOCk specifies EXWRSBLOCk as the 15693 command code to search on.

EXLOCKBLOCk specifies EXLOCKBLOCk as the 15693 command code to search

on.
EXRDMBLOCk specifies EXRDMBLOCk as the 15693 command code to search on.

AUTHenticate specifies authenticate as the 15693 command code to search on.

KEYUPDate specifies KEYUPDate as the 15693 command code to search on.

AUTHCRYPto specifies AUTHCRYPto as the 15693 command code to search on.

SECURECRYPto specifies SECURECRYPto as the 15693 command code to

search on.
CHALlenge specifies challenge as the 15693 command code to search on.

READBUFFer specifies READBUFFer as the 15693 command code to search on.

EXGETSYSTINFo specifies EXGETSYSTINFo as the 15693 command code to

search on.
EXGETMBSSTATus specifies EXGETMBSSTATus as the 15693 command code
to search on.
FEXRDMBLOCks specifies FEXRDMBLOCks as the 15693 command code to
search on.
custom specifies custom as the 15693 command code to search on.

ANY specifies ANY as the 15693 command code to search on.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1465

Commands listed in alphabetical order

REQa specifies REQa as the 14443A command code to search on. This is the
default command code is for 14443A.
WUPa specifies WUPa as the 14443A command code to search on.

PROPrietary specifies proprietary as the 14443A command code to search on.

SELECT14443A specifies select as the 14443A command code to search on.

HLTa specifies HLTa as the 14443A command code to search on.

REQB specifies REQB as the 14443B command code to search on. This is the
default command code is for 14443B.
WUPB specifies WUPB as the 14443B command code to search on.

SLOTMARKER specifies SLOTMARKER as the 14443B command code to search

on.
ATTRIB specifies ATTRIB as the 14443B command code to search on.

HLTB specifies HLTB as the 14443B command code to search on.

ATRReq specifies ATRReq as the FeliCa command code to search on. This is the
default command code is for FeliCa.
WUPReq specifies WUPReq as the FeliCa command code to search on.

PSLReq specifies PSLReq as the FeliCa command code to search on.

DEPReq specifies DEPReq as the FeliCa command code to search on.

DSLReq specifies DSLReq as the FeliCa command code to search on.

RLSReq specifies RLSReq as the FeliCa command code to search on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NFC:COMMand:CODe SELECT15693SET

specifies select command code to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NFC:COMMand:CODe? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NFC:COMMand:CODe
SELECT15693SET, indicating that select command code is the currently specified
field to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:CONDition
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for a NFC bus.

Conditions Requires option RFNFC.

Group Search and Mark

2-1466 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:CONDition {SOC| SOS|

SYNC| CMDCODe| EOC| ERRors| SOF| AFI| PUPi| IDEntifier| UID|
EOF| PAYLoad| DATa| RESPCODe| EOS}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:CONDition?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

SOC specifies start in 14443A as the field within a NFC frame to search on. The
default trigger on condition is SOC for 14443A.

SOS specifies start in 14443B and Felica as the field within a NFC frame to search
on. The default trigger on condition is SOS for 14443B and Felica.
SYNC specifies sync as the field within a NFC frame to search on.

CMDCODe specifies command code as the field within a NFC frame to search on.

EOC specifies end in 14443A as the field within a NFC frame to search on.

ERRors specifies error type as the field within a NFC frame to search on.

SOF specifies start in 15693 as the field within a NFC frame to search on. The
default trigger on condition is SOF for 15693.
AFI specifies AFI as the field within a NFC frame to search on.

PUPi specifies PUPi as the field within a NFC frame to search on.

IDEntifier specifies identifier as the field within a NFC frame to search on.

UID specifies UID as the field within a NFC frame to search on.

EOF specifies end in 15693 as the field within a NFC frame to search on.

PAYLoad specifies payload as the field within a NFC frame to search on.

DATa specifies data as the field within a NFC frame to search on.

RESPCODe specifies response code as the field within a NFC frame to search on.

EOS specifies end in 14443B and Felica as the field within a NFC frame to search
on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NFC:CONDition UID specifies UID as

the field within a NFC frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NFC:CONDition? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NFC:CONDition UID, indicating that
UID is the currently specified field within a NFC frame to search on.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1467

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:DATa:SIZe
This command specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an
NFC trigger if the trigger condition is DATA.

Conditions Requires option RFNFC.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<NR1> specifies the data string in a valid format. The minimum and default value
is 1. The maximum value is 5.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NFC:DATa:SIZe 2 specifies data size

to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NFC:DATa:SIZe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NFC:DATa:SIZe 2, indicating that data
to be searched on is specified as 2 bytes.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for NFC triggering if the
trigger condition is DATA.

Conditions Requires option RFNFC.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:DATa:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<QString> specifies the data value in a valid format.

2-1468 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NFC:DATa:VALue "10110000"

specifies data to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NFC:DATa:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NFC:DATa:VALue "10110000",
indicating the data value is 10110000.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:ERRor:TYPe
This command sets or queries the error type for NFC bus.

Conditions Requires option RFNFC.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:ERRor:TYPe {ANY| PARity|

CRC}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:ERRor:TYPe?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

ANY searches any error. Applicable for 14443A.

PARity searches parity error. Applicable only for 14443A.

CRC searches CRC error. Applicable for all standards.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NFC:ERRor:TYPe PARity specifies

parity error to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NFC:ERRor:TYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NFC:ERRor:TYPe PARity, indicating
that error type is the currently parity to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:PAYLOADBITS
This command sets or queries the number of payload bits for the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option RFNFC.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1469

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:PAYLOADBITS
{EIGHTBIT|SIXTYFOURBIT}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:PAYLOADBITS?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

EIGHTBIT sets the trigger condition for NFC bus trigger to Eight Bits.

SIXTYFOURBIT sets the trigger condition for NFC bus trigger to Sixty Four Bits.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NFC:PAYLOADBITS EIGHTBIT sets the

trigger condition for NFC bus trigger search 1 to Eight Bits.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NFC:PAYLOADBITS? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NFC:PAYLOADBITS EIGHTBIT,
indicating that the trigger condition for NFC bus trigger search 1 is set to Eight
Bits.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:RESPonse:CODe
This command sets or queries the trigger on response code for a NFC bus.

Conditions Requires option RFNFC.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:RESPonse:CODe {SAK| ATQA|

ATQBPROP| ATQBCOMP| HLTB| ANY| ATRRes| WUPRes| PSLRes|
DEPRes| DSLRes| RLSRes}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:RESPonse:CODe?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

SAK specifies SAK as the response code for 14443A to search on. The default
response code is SAK for 14443A.

ATQa specifies ATQa as the response code for 14443A to search on.

ATQBPROP specifies ATQBPROP as the response code for 14443B to search on.
The default response code is ATQBPROP for 14443B.
ATQBCOMP specifies ATQBCOMP as the response codefor 14443B to search on.

HLTB specifies HLTB as the response code for 14443B to search on.

ANY specifies ANY as the response code for 14443B to search on.

2-1470 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ATRRes specifies ATRRes as the response code for FeliCa to search on. The
default response code is ATRRes for FeliCa.
WUPRes specifies WUPRes as the response code for FeliCa to search on.

PSLRes specifies PSLRes as the response code for FeliCa to search on.

DEPRes specifies DEPRes as the response code for FeliCa to search on.

DSLRes specifies DSLRes as the response code for FeliCa to search on.

RLSRes specifies RLSRes as the response code for FeliCa to search on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NFC:RESPonse:CODe SAK specifies

the response code to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NFC:RESPonse:CODe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NFC:RESPonse:CODe SAK, indicating
that SAK response code is the currently specified field to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:TYPe
This command sets or queries the trigger command/response type for a NFC bus.

Conditions Requires option RFNFC.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:TYPe {COMMand| RESPonse}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:TYPe?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

COMMand specifies command code as the type to search on. This is the default
trigger.

RESPonse specifies response code as the type to search on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:TYPe RESPonse specifies response

code as the type to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:TYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:TYPe RESPonse, indicating that
response code is the type to search on.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1471

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:UID:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for NFC triggering if the
trigger condition is UID.

Conditions Requires option RFNFC.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:UID:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:UID:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<QString> specifies the data value in a valid format. The value for 15693 the
UID is 64 bits. The value for 14443A the UID is 8 bits.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NFC:UID:VALue "10110000" specifies

data to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NFC:UID:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NFC:UID:VALue "10110000",
indicating the data value is 10110000.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NRZ:CONDition
This command specifies a field or condition for an NRZ bus to search on. The
search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires the SRNRZ Triggering and Analysis application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NRZ:CONDition {DATa}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NRZ:CONDition?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NRZ:DATa:SIZe

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

DATa specifies the search condition as Data Characters.

2-1472 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NRZ:CONDition DATA specifies data as

the field within an NRZ frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NRZ:CONDITION? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NRZ:CONDITION DATA, indicating that
DATA is the currently specified field within an NRZ frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NRZ:DATa:SIZe
This command specifies the length of the data string, in bytes, to use when
searching on the NRZ signal. The search condition needs to be set to DATa.
The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires the SRNRZ Triggering and Analysis application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NRZ:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NRZ:DATa:SIZe?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NRZ:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<NR1> specifies the data string in a valid format. The minimum and default values
are 1. The maximum value is 5.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NRZ:DATA:SIZE 1 sets the data string

for NRZ bus trigger search 1 to 1 byte.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NRZ:DATA:SIZE? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NRZ:DATA:SIZE 3, indicating that the
length of the data string for NRZ bus trigger search 1 is 3 bytes.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NRZ:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data value to be used when searching on
a NRZ signal. The search condition must be set to DATA.

Conditions Requires the SRNRZ Triggering and Analysis application.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1473

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NRZ:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NRZ:DATa:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<QString> specifies the data value in a valid format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:NRZ:DATa:VALue "1111" sets the data

value to 1111.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:NRZ:DATa:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:NRZ:DATA:VALUE "1010", indicating
the data value is 1010.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:COMMand:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for ONEWIRe triggering if
the trigger condition is COMMAND.

Conditions Requires option SR-ONEWIRE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:COMMand:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:COMMand:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<QString> specifies the data value in a valid format. The default size and value
for COMMAND is 8 bits and "XXXXXXXX".

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:COMMand:VALue
"0111100111" sets the command value as "0111100111".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:COMMand:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:COMMand:VALue
"0111100111", indicating that the command value is "0111100111".

2-1474 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:CONDition
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for a ONEWIRe bus. MODe
should be set to Overdrive for OVERDRIVEMATCh and OVERDRIVESKIP.
MODe should be set to Standard for READROM, MATCHROM, SKIPROM,
SEARCHROM, ALARMSEARch. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-ONEWIRE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:CONDition {RESet|

PREsence| COMMand| DATa| READROM| MATCHROM| OVERDRIVEMATCh|
SKIPROM| OVERDRIVESKIP| SEARCHROM| ALARMSEARch| CRCERRor}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:CONDition?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

RESet specifies the search condition as RESet. Reset is the default trigger on
condition.
PREsence specifies the search condition as PREsence.

COMMand specifies the search condition as COMMand.

DATa specifies the search condition as DATa.

READROM specifies the search condition as READROM.

MATCHROM specifies the search condition as MATCHROM.

SKIPROM specifies the search condition as SKIPROM.

SEARCHROM specifies the search condition as SEARCHROM.

ALARMSEARch specifies the search condition as ALARMSEARch.

CRCERRor specifies the search condition as CRCERRor.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:CONDition DATa specifies

data as the field within an ONEWIRe frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:CONDition? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:CONDition DATa, indicating
that DATa is the currently specified field within an ONEWIRe frame to search on.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1475

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:DATa:SIZe
This command specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for
ONEWIRe triggering if the trigger condition is DATA. The search number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires the option SR-ONEWIRE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<NR1> specifies the data string in a valid format. The minimum and default values
are 1. The maximum value is 5.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:DATa:SIZe 4 sets the data

size value as 4.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:DATa:SIZe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:DATa:SIZe 4, indicating
that the data size value is 4.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for ONEWIRe triggering if
the trigger condition is DATA.

Conditions Requires the option SR-ONEWIRE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:DATa:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<QString> specifies the data value in a valid format. The default size and value
for DATA is 8 bits and "XXXXXXXX".

2-1476 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:DATa:VALue "0111100111"

sets the Data value as "0111100111".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:DATa:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:DATa:VALue
"0111100111", indicating that the data value is "0111100111".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:MATCHROM:FAMILYCODe
This command sets or queries the family code for Match ROM in ONEWIRE
bus. MODe should be set to Standard.

Conditions Requires the option SR-ONEWIRE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:MATCHROM:FAMILYCODe
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:MATCHROM:FAMILYCODe?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<QString> specifies the binary string used for Family Code triggering.
The default size and value of family code for Match ROM is 8 bits and
"XXXXXXXX".

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:MATCHROM:FAMILYCODe
"11000000" specifies the binary string used for Family Code triggering if the
trigger condition is MatchROM to "11000000".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:MATCHROM:FAMILYCODe?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:MATCHROM:FAMILYCODe
"0111100111", indicating that the value of the family code set for Match ROM
is "0111100111".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:MATCHROM:SERIALNUMBer
This command sets or queries the serial number for Match ROM in ONEWIRE
bus. MODe should be set to Standard.

Conditions Requires the option SR-ONEWIRE.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1477

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:MATCHROM:SERIALNUMBer
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:MATCHROM:
SERIALNUMBer?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<QString> specifies the binary string used for Serial Number triggering.
The default size and value of serial number for Match ROM is 48 bits and
"XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX".

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:MATCHROM:SERIALNUMBer
"11000010" specifies the binary string used for Serial Number triggering if the
trigger condition is MatchROM and set it to "11000010".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:MATCHROM:SERIALNUMBer?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:MATCHROM:SERIALNUMBer
"0111100111", indicating that the value of the serial number
set for Match ROM is "0111100111".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:OVERDRIVe:FAMILYCODe
This command sets or queries the Family Code for Overdrive Match ROM in
ONEWIRE bus. MODe should be set to Overdrive.

Conditions Requires the option SR-ONEWIRE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:OVERDRIVe:FAMILYCODe
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:OVERDRIVe:FAMILYCODe?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<QString> specifies the binary string used for Family Code triggering. The
default size and value of family code for Overdrive match ROM is 8 bits and
"XXXXXXXX".

2-1478 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:OVERDRIVe:FAMILYCODe
"11000011" specifies the binary string used for Family Code triggering if the
trigger condition is Overdrive match ROM to "11000011".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:OVERDRIVe:FAMILYCODe?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:OVERDRIVe:FAMILYCODe
"0111100111", indicating that the value of the family code set for
Overdrive Match ROM is "0111100111".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:OVERDRIVe:SERIALNUMBer
This command sets or queries the serial number for Overdrive Match ROM in
ONEWIRE bus. MODe should be set to Overdrive.

Conditions Requires the option SR-ONEWIRE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:OVERDRIVe:
SERIALNUMBer <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:OVERDRIVe:
SERIALNUMBer?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<QString> specifies the binary string used for Serial Number triggering. The
default size and value of serial number for Overdrive match ROM is 48 bits
and "XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX".

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:OVERDRIVe:SERIALNUMBer
"11000010" specifies the binary string used for Serial Number triggering if the
trigger condition is Overdrive match ROM and set it to "11000010".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:OVERDRIVe:SERIALNUMBer?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:OVERDRIVe:SERIALNUMBer
"0111100111", indicating that the value of the serial number set for
Overdrive Match ROM is "0111100111".

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1479

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:READROM:FAMILYCODe
This command sets or queries the family code for Read ROM in ONEWIRE
bus. MODe should be set to Standard.

Conditions Requires the option SR-ONEWIRE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:READROM:FAMILYCODe
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:READROM:FAMILYCODe?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<QString> specifies the binary string used for Family Code triggering. The
default size and value of family code for Read ROM is 8 bits and "XXXXXXXX".

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:READROM:FAMILYCODe
"11000000" specifies the binary string used for Family Code triggering if the
trigger condition is READ ROM to "11000000".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:READROM:FAMILYCODe?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:READROM:FAMILYCODe
"0111100111", indicating that the value of the family code set for Read ROM is
"0111100111".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:READROM:SERIALNUMBer
This command sets or queries the serial number for Read ROM in ONEWIRE
bus. MODe should be set to Standard.

Conditions Requires the option SR-ONEWIRE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:READROM:SERIALNUMBer
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:READROM:SERIALNUMBer?

2-1480 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<QString> specifies the binary string used for Serial Number triggering.
The default size and value of serial number for Read ROM is 48 bits and
"XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX".

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:READROM:SERIALNUMBer
"11000010" specifies the binary string used for Serial Number triggering if the
trigger condition is Read ROM and set it to "11000010".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:READROM:SERIALNUMBer?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:READROM:SERIALNUMBer
"0111100111", indicating that the value of the serial number
set for Read ROM is "0111100111".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:SEARCHROM:ROMCODe
This command sets or queries the ROM code for Search ROM in ONEWIRE
bus. MODe should be set to Standard.

Conditions Requires the option SR-ONEWIRE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:SEARCHROM:ROMCODe
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:SEARCHROM:ROMCODe?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<QString> specifies the ROM code for Search ROM. The default size and value
of ROM code for Search ROM is 64 bits and "XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX".

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:SEARCHROM:ROMCODe
"11011101" specifies the ROM code set for Search ROM as "11011101".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:SEARCHROM:ROMCODe? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:ONEWIRe:SEARCHROM:ROMCODe
"0111100111", indicating that the value of the ROM code set for Search ROM
is "0111100111".

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1481

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PARallel:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string used for a parallel bus search
to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PARallel:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PARallel:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the data value in a valid format. Valid characters are 0-9,

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PARALLEL:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"

sets the string data value to "XXXXXXXX" in binary format.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PARALLEL:DATA:VALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PARALLEL:DATA:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX10010", indicating that the data value string is set to
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX10010" in binary format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:BLOCKDATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary block data string used for PSI5 triggering
if the trigger condition is block id.

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:BLOCKDATa:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:BLOCKDATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the binary block data string.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:BLOCKDATa:VALue
"1100001111" sets the block data value as the field within a PSI5 frame to
search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:BLOCKDATa:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:BLOCKDATa:VALue

2-1482 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

”1100001111”, indicating that the binary block data value is the currently
"1100001111".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:CONDition
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for an PSI5 bus. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:CONDition
{STARt| STATus| DATa| BLOCkid| ERRors| STARTBIT|
FUNCTIONCODe| ECUDATa| SENSORADDRess| REGISTERADDRess|
SENSORSTATus|CRCERRor}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:CONDition?

Arguments STARt specifies the search condition as Start. This is the default trigger.

STATus specifies the search condition as Status.

DATa specifies the search condition as Data.

BLOCkid specifies the search condition as Block ID.

ERRors specifies the search condition as Errors.

STARTBIT specifies the search condition as Start Bit.

FUNCTIONCODe specifies the search condition as Function Code.

ECUDATa specifies the search condition as ECU Data.

SENSORADDRess specifies the search condition as Sensor Address.

REGISTERADDRess specifies the search condition as Register Address.

SENSORSTATus specifies the search condition as Sensor Status.

CRCERRor specifies the search condition as CRC Error.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:CONDition STARt specifies

start as the field within a PSI5 frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:CONDition? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:CONDition STARt,
indicating that start is the currently specified field within a PSI5 frame to search on.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1483

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:DATa:ECU:SENSor:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary Data string used for PSI5 triggering if
the trigger condition is Data in ECU to Sensor communication mode. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:DATa:ECU:SENSor:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:DATa:ECU:SENSor:
VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the value of the data string. The valid characters are 0, 1,
and X for values in binary format; and A-F, 0-9, and X for values in hexadecimal
format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:DATa:ECU:SENSor:VALue
"01111001" sets the data value as "01111001".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:DATa:ECU:SENSor:VALue?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:DATa:ECU:SENSor:VALue
"0111100111", indicating that the data value is "0111100111".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:DATa:REGion:A:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string used for PSI5 triggering if the
trigger condition is data region A. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:DATa:REGion:A:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:DATa:REGion:A:VALue?

2-1484 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <QString> specifies the value of the data string. The valid characters are 0, 1,
and X for values in binary format; and A-F, 0-9, and X for values in hexadecimal
format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:DATa:REGion:A:VALue
"0111100111" sets the data value as "0111100111".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:DATa:REGion:A:VALue?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:DATa:REGion:A:VALue
"0111100111", indicating that the data value is "0111100111".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:DATa:REGion:B:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string used for PSI5 triggering if the
trigger condition is data region B. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:DATa:REGion:B:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:DATa:REGion:B:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the value of the data string. The valid characters are 0, 1,
and X for values in binary format; and A-F, 0-9, and X for values in hexadecimal
format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:DATa:REGion:B:VALue
"0111100111" sets the data value as "0111100111".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:DATa:REGion:B:VALue?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:DATa:REGion:A:VALue
"0111100111", indicating that the data value is "0111100111".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:DATABITs
This command sets or queries the binary register address string used for PSI5
triggering if the trigger condition is Data in ECU to Sensor communication mode.
The search number is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1485

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:DATABITs
{FOURBIT|EIGHTBIT|TWENTYBIT}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:DATABITs?

Arguments FOURBIT specifies the data bit value as 4 bit.

EIGHTBIT specifies the data bit value as 8 bit.

TWENTYBIT specifies the data bit value as 20 bit.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:DATABITs FOURBIT specifies

sets data bit as 4 bit.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:DATBITs? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:DATBITs EIGHTBIT,
indicating that the data bit is 8 bit.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:ERRORTYPe
This command sets or queries the error type for an PSI5 bus. The search number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:ERRORTYPe
{ANY|PARity|CRC|RESPONSECODe}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:ERRORTYPe?

Arguments ANY specifies the error type value as any. This is the default value.

PARity specifies the error type value as parity.

CRC specifies the error type value as CRC.

RESPONSECODe specifies the error type value as response code.

2-1486 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:ERRORTYPe PARity specifies

parity as the field within a PSI5 frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:ERRORTYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:ERRORTYPe PARity,
indicating that parity is the current specified field within a PSI5 frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:FUNCTIONCODETYPe
This command sets or queries the binary data string used for PSI5 triggering if the
trigger condition is a Function Code. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:FUNCTIONCODETYPe
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:FUNCTIONCODETYPe?

Arguments <QString> specifies the value of the data string. The valid characters are 0, 1,
and X for values in binary format; and A-F, 0-9, and X for values in hexadecimal
format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:FUNCTIONCODETYPe "011"

specifies function code as "011".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:FUNCTIONCODETYPe? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:FUNCTIONCODETYPe
"011", indicating that Function Code Type is currently "011".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:REGister:ADDRess:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary register address string used for PSI5
triggering if the trigger condition is Register Address. The search number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1487

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:REGister:ADDRess:
VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:REGister:ADDRess:
VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the value of the data string. The valid characters are 0, 1,
and X for values in binary format; and A-F, 0-9, and X for values in hexadecimal
format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:REGister:ADDRess:VALue
"0111100111" sets the register address value as "0111100111".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:REGister:ADDRess:VALue?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:REGister:ADDRess:VALue
"011", indicating that the register address value is "011".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:REGISTERADDRess
This command sets or queries the register address for PSI5 bus. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:REGISTERADDRess
{TWOBIT|SIXBIT|EIGHTBIT}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:REGISTERADDRess?

Arguments TWOBIT specifies the register address value as 2 bit. This is the default value.

SIXBIT specifies the register address value as 6 bit.

EIGHTBIT specifies the register address value as 8 bit.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:REGISTERADDRess SIXBIT

specifies the register address as 6 bit as the field within a PSI5 frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:REGISTERADDRess? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:REGISTERADDRess
SIXBIT, indicating that register address as 6 bit is the currently specified field
within a PSI5 frame to search on.

2-1488 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:SENSor:ADDRess:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary sensor address string used for PSI5
triggering if the trigger condition is Sensor Address. The search number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:SENSor:ADDRess:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:SENSor:ADDRess:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the value of the data string. The valid characters are 0, 1,
and X for values in binary format; and A-F, 0-9, and X for values in hexadecimal
format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:SENSor:ADDRess:VALue
"101" specifies sensor address as "101".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:SENSor:ADDRess:VALue?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:SENSor:ADDRess:VALue
"101", indicating that the sensor address value is currently "101".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:SENSORSTATus:TYPe
This command sets or queries the sensor status for PSI5 bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:SENSORSTATus:TYPe
{READy|BUSY|DEFect|SERVICEMODe|UNLocked}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:SENSORSTATus:TYPe?

Arguments READy specifies the sensor status as ready. This is the default value.

BUSY specifies the sensor status as busy.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1489

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DEFect specifies the sensor status as defect.

SERVICEMODe specifies the sensor status as service mode.

UNLocked specifies the sensor status as unlocked.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:SENSORSTATus:TYPe READy

specifies ready as the field within a PSI5 frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:SENSORSTATus:TYPe? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:SENSORSTATus:TYPe
READy, indicating that ready is the specified field within a PSI5 frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:STATus:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary status string used for PSI5 triggering if
the trigger condition is status.

Conditions Requires option SR-PSI5

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:STATus:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:STATus:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the value of the data string. The valid characters are 0, 1,
and X for values in binary format; and A-F, 0-9, and X for values in hexadecimal
format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:STATus:VALue "10"

specifies the status value as "10".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:STATus:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:STATus:VALue "10",
indicating that the status value is 10.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:RS232C:CONDition
This command sets or queries the condition for an RS232C bus search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

2-1490 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-SRCOMP or SUP5-SRCOMP Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:RS232C:CONDition
{DATa|EOp|PARItyerror|STARt}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:RS232C:CONDition?

Arguments DATa specifies the search condition as Data.

EOp specifies the search condition as End of Packet.

PARItyerror specifies the search condition as Parity Error.

STARt specifies the search condition as Start.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:RS232C:CONDITION DATA sets the

search condition for RS232C bus trigger search 1 to Data.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:RS232C:CONDITION? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:RS232C:CONDITION EOP, indicating
that the search condition for RS232C bus trigger search 2 is set to End of Packet.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:RS232C:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes to be used
for an RS232 bus search to determine where to place a mark when the search
condition is Data. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRCOMP or SUP5-SRCOMP Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:RS232C:DATa:SIZe <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:RS232C:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR3> is the number of bits per word in the data string, from 1 to 8.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:RS232C:DATA:SIZE 1 sets the number

of bits per word in RS232C bus trigger search 1 data string to 1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1491

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:RS232C:DATA:SIZE? might return

:SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:RS232C:DATA:SIZE 8, indicating that
the bits per word for RS232C bus trigger search 2 is set to 8.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:RS232C:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the data string used for the specified RS232C bus
trigger search to determine where to place a mark. The search condition must be
Data. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRCOMP or SUP5-SRCOMP Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:RS232C:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:RS232C:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the value of the data string. The valid characters are 0, 1,
and X for values in binary format; and A-F, 0-9, and X for values in hexadecimal
format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:RS232C:DATA:VALUE "01" sets the

value of the data string for RS232C bus trigger search 1 to "01" when the format
is hexadecimal.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:RS232C:DATA:VALUE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:RS232C:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXX1",
indicating that the data string value for RS232C bus trigger search 1 is set to
"XXXXXXX1" when the format is binary.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:CONDition
This command sets or queries the type of data search for an 8B10B bus. The
search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires the SR8B10b Triggering and Analysis application.

Group Search and Mark

2-1492 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:CONDition
{SYMbols|ERRors}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:CONDition?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:DISParity

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:ERRor
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:CSYMVALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:EBITVALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:MODe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TBITVALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TYPe

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

SYMbols specifies the search condition as data or control.

ERRors specifies the search condition as Symbol error or disparity error.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:S8B10B:CONDition SYMBOL specifies

Symbol as the field within an 8B10b frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:S8B10B:CONDITION? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:S8B10B:CONDITION SYMBOL,
indicating that SYMBOL is the currently specified field within an 8B10b frame
to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:DISParity
This command sets or queries the disparity to be used when searching on a 8B10b
signal. The search condition must be set to Symbols > 8-bit.

Conditions Requires the SR8B10b Triggering and Analysis application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:DISParity
{POSITIVe|NEGAtive|EITHer}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:DISParity?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1493

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the Search identifier number.

POSITIVe specifies searching for positive disparity.

NEGAtive specifies searching for negative disparity.

EITHer specifies searching for neutral or either positive/negative disparity.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:DISParity POSITIVE sets

the disparity to positive.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:DISParity? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:S8B10B:DISParity POSITIVE,
indicating the disparity is positive.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:ERRor
This command sets or queries the error type to be used when searching on a
8B10b signal. The search condition must be set to Errors.

Conditions Requires the SR8B10b Triggering and Analysis application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:ERRor
{SYMBol|DISParity}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:ERRor?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the Search identifier number.

SYMBol specifies searching for Symbol Errors.

DISParity specifies searching for Disparity Errors.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:ERRor DISParity sets the

error type to Disparity.

2-1494 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:ERRor? might return

:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:S8B10B:ERRor DISPARITY, indicating
the Error type to be disparity.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:CSYMVALue
This command sets or queries the control symbol value to be used when searching
on 8b10b signal. The default is all X’s (don’t care). The search condition needs to
be set to Symbols. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires the SR8B10b Triggering and Analysis application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:CSYMVALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:CSYMVALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the Search identifier number.

<Qstring> specifies the 10 bit value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:CSYMVALue "D28.5"

specifies the value to be used while searching.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:CSYMVALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:CSYMVALue
"D28.5", indicating the value to be used while searching.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:EBITVALue
This command specifies the 8 bit value to be used when searching on an 8b10b
signal. The default is all X’s (don’t care). The search condition needs to be set to
Symbols. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires the SR8B10b Triggering and Analysis application.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1495

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:EBITVALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:EBITVALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the Search identifier number.

<Qstring> specifies the 8 bit value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:EBITVALue
"00001000" specifies hexadecimal 08 as the value to be used while searching.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:EBITVALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:EBITVALue
"00001000", indicating the binary value and 08 as the hexadecimal value to be
used while searching.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:MODe
This command sets or queries the mode of data search to be used when searching
on 8b10b signal. The search condition must be set to Symbols.

Conditions Requires the SR8B10b Triggering and Analysis application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:MODe
{EBIT|TBIT|SYMB}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:MODe?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

EBIT specifies searching for Eight Bit data.

TBIT specifies searching for Ten bit data (6 bits and 4 bits combined). Only
valid values are considered.
SYMB specifies searching for symbol data with disparity. Takes only K and D
with possible values..

2-1496 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:MODe TBIT sets the

symbol mode to tbit.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:MODe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:MODe TBIT,
indicating the symbol mode to be tbit.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TBITRDNeg
This command specifies the 10 bit RD negative value to be used when searching
on an 8b10b signal. The default is all X’s (don’t care). The search condition needs
to be set to Symbols. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires the SR8B10b Triggering and Analysis application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TBITRDNeg
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TBITRDNeg?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the Search identifier number.

<Qstring> specifies the 10 bit RD negative value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TBITRDNeg
"0011101010" specifies hexadecimal 0EA as the value to be used while
searching.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TBITRDNeg? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TBITRDNeg
"0011101010", indicating the binary value and 0EA as the hexadecimal value to
be used while searching.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TBITRDPos
This command specifies the 10 bit RD positive value to be used when searching
on an 8b10b signal. The default is all X’s (don’t care). The search condition needs
to be set to Symbols. The search number is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1497

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires the SR8B10b Triggering and Analysis application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TBITRDPos
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TBITRDPos?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the Search identifier number.

<Qstring> specifies the 10 bit RD positive value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TBITRDPos
"0011101010" specifies hexadecimal 0EA as the value to be used while
searching.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TBITRDPos? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TBITRDPos
"0011101010", indicating the binary value and 0EA as the hexadecimal value to
be used while searching.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TBITVALue
This command specifies the 10 bit value to be used when searching on an 8b10b
signal. The default is all X’s (don’t care). The search condition needs to be set to
Symbols. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires the SR8B10b Triggering and Analysis application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TBITVALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TBITVALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:CONDition

2-1498 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments Search<x> is the Search identifier number.

<Qstring> specifies the 10 bit value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TBITVALue
"0011101010" specifies hexadecimal 0EA as the value to be used while
searching.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TBITVALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TBITVALue
"0011101010", indicating the binary value and 0EA as the hexadecimal value to
be used while searching.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TYPe
This command sets or queries the type of symbol when searching on 8b10b signal.
The search condition must be set to Symbols.

Conditions Requires the SR8B10b Triggering and Analysis application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TYPe
{DATa|CONTrol}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TYPe?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

DATa specifies searching for Data Symbols.

CONTrol specifies searching for Control Symbols.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TYPe DATA sets the

symbol type to data.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:S8B10B:SYMbol:TYPe DATA,
indicating the symbol type to be data.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1499

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:ADDRess:TYPe
This commands specifies the Address type in SDLC frame which can be
Broadcast, No-Station and Address value can be specified.

Conditions Requires option SR-SDLC.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:ADDRess:TYPe
{BROadcast|NOSTATion|STATIONADDr}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:ADDRess:TYPe?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

BROadcast specifies the Broadcast as the field within a SDLC frame to search
on. BROadcast is the default value.
NOSTATion specifies the No-Station as the field within a SDLC frame to search
on.
STATIONADDr specifies the Address as the field within a SDLC frame to search
on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:ADDRess:TYPe BROadcast

specifies the Address Type as the field within a SDLC frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:ADDRess:TYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:ADDRess:TYPe BROadcast,
indicating that the Address Type is specified as Broadcast.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:CONDition
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for a SDLC bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-SDLC.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:CONDition {STARt| DATa|

ABORt| ADDRess| UNNumbered| INFormation| SUPervisory|
ERRors| END}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:CONDition?

2-1500 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

STARt specifies start as the field within a SDLC frame to search on. The default
Trigger on Condtion is STARt.

DATa specifies data as the field within a SDLC frame to search on.

ABORt specifies abort as the field within a SDLC frame to search on.

ADDRess specifies address as the field within a SDLC frame to search on.

UNNumbered specifies unnumbered as the field within a SDLC frame to search on.

INFormation specifies information as the field within a SDLC frame to search

on.
SUPervisory specifies supervisory as the field within a SDLC frame to search on.

ERRors specifies errors as the field within a SDLC frame to search on.

END specifies end as the field within a SDLC frame to search on.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:CONDition STARt specifies start

as the field within a SDLC frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:CONDition? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:CONDition STARt, indicating
that start is the currently specified field within a SDLC frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:DATa:SIZe
This command specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for SDLC
triggering if the trigger condition is DATA. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SDLC.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:DATa:SIZe <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR3> is the length of the data string in bytes. The default Data size is 1,
otherwise ranges between 1 to 5.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:DATa:SIZe 4 sets the data size

value as 4.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1501

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:DATa:SIZe? might return

:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:DATa:SIZe 4, indicating that
the data size value is 4.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for SDLC triggering if the
trigger condition is DATA. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SDLC.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the value of the data string. The default value is
XXXXXXXX .

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:DATa:VALue "0111100111"

sets the Data value as "0111100111".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:DATa:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:DATa:VALue "0111100111",
indicating that the data value is "0111100111".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:ERROR:TYPe
This command sets or queries the Error Type in SDLC bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-SDLC.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:ERROR:TYPe
{FCS|NUMERICORDer}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:ERROR:TYPe?

2-1502 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

FCS sets FCS as the Error Type in SDLC bus. The default error type condition is
FCS
NUMERICORDer sets NUMERICORDer as the Error Type in SDLC bus.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:ERROR:TYPe FCS specifies parity

as the field within a FCS frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:ERROR:TYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:ERROR:TYPe FCS, indicating that
FCS is the currently specified field within a FCS frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:FRAMe:TYPe
This command sets or queries the Frame Type in SDLC bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-SDLC.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:FRAMe:TYPe
{COMMand|RESPonse|BOTH}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:FRAMe:TYPe?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

COMMand sets Command as the Frame Type in SDLC bus. The default value of
frame type for SDLC Unnumbered frame is Command.

RESPonse sets Response as the Frame Type in SDLC bus.

BOTH sets both Command and Response as the Frame Type in SDLC bus.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:FRAMe:TYPe RESPonse specifies

the frame type as Response.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:FRAMe:TYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:FRAMe:TYPe RESPonse,
indicating that frame type is Response for Unnumbered frames and accordingly
packet list will change.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1503

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:STADDress:VALue
This command specifies the binary Station Address string used for SDLC
triggering if the trigger condition is Address. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SDLC.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:STADDress:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:STADDress:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:ADDRess:TYPe

Arguments <QString> specifies the value of the data string. The default value is
XXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:STADDress:VALue
"0111100111" sets the Station Address value as "0111100111".

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:STADDress:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:STADDress:VALue
"0111100111", indicating that the station address value is "0111100111".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:SUPervisory:FRAMETYPe
This command sets or queries the Supervisory Frame Type in SDLC bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-SDLC.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:SUPervisory:FRAMETYPe
{RR|RNR|REJ}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:SUPervisory:FRAMETYPe?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

RR sets the frame type as RR.

2-1504 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

RNR sets the frame type as RNR.

REJ sets the frame type as REJ.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:SUPervisory:FRAMETYPe RNR

specifies Receive Not Ready supervisory packet type.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:SUPervisory:FRAMETYPe?
might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:SUPervisory:FRAMETYPe RNR,
indicating that RNR is the currently specified SDLC Supervisory Packet
to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:UNNumbered:FRAMETYPe
This command sets or queries the Unnumbered Frame Type in SDLC bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-SDLC.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:UNNumbered:FRAMETYPe
{UP| UI| SNRM| SNRME| REQDISConnect| UACK| REQSETINIT|
DISCMODe| FRAMEREJ| TEST| XID| CONFigure| BEACon}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:UNNumbered:FRAMETYPe?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC:FRAMe:TYPe

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

UP sets the Unnumbered Frame Type as UP.

UI sets the Unnumbered Frame Type as UI.

SNRM sets the Unnumbered Frame Type as SNRM.

SNRME sets the Unnumbered Frame Type as SNRME.

REQDISConnect sets the Unnumbered Frame Type as REQDISConnect.

UACK sets the Unnumbered Frame Type as UACK.

REQSETINIT sets the Unnumbered Frame Type as REQSETINIT.

DISCMODe sets the Unnumbered Frame Type as DISCMODe.

FRAMEREJ sets the Unnumbered Frame Type as FRAMEREJ.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1505

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TEST sets the Unnumbered Frame Type as TEST.

XID sets the Unnumbered Frame Type as XID.

CONFigure sets the Unnumbered Frame Type as CONFigure.

BEACon sets the Unnumbered Frame Type as BEACon.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:UNNumbered:FRAMETYPe SNRME

specifies the frame type as SNRME.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:UNNumbered:FRAMETYPe? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SDLC:UNNumbered:FRAMETYPe
SNRME, indicating that Unnumbered Frame type is SNRME when related
command Frame Type is set as COMMand.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition
This command sets or queries the search condition for a SENT bus.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition
{START|FAST|SLOW|PAUSE|ERRor}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

START specifies searching for start of packet.

FAST specifies searching for fast channel data.

SLOW specifies searching for slow channel data.

PAUSE specifies searching for pause pulses.

ERRor specifies searching on errors.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:CONDITION SLOW specifies

searching for slow channel packet.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:CONDITION? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:CONDITION PAUSE, indicating
the search is set to find pause pulses.

2-1506 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:ERRType
This command sets or queries the error type to be used when searching on SENT
data.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

SENT bus trigger condition is set to ERRor.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:ERRType
{FRAMELENgth|CRC}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:ERRType?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

FRAMELENgth specifies searching for SENT frame length errors.

CRC specifies searching for CRC errors.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:ERRTYPE FRAMELENGTH sets the

search to find SENT frame length errors.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:ERRTYPE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:ERRTYPE CRC to indicate the
search is set to find CRC errors.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:ERRType:CRC
This command sets or queries the CRC error type to be used when searching
on SENT data.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

SENT bus trigger condition is set to ERRor and ERRType is set to CRC.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1507

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:ERRType:CRC {FAST|SLOW}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:ERRType:CRC?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:ERRType

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

FAST specifies searching for CRC errors only in the fast channel.

SLOW specifies searching for CRC errors only in the slow channel.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:ERRTYPE:CRC SLOW sets the

search to find SENT slow channel CRC errors.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:ERRTYPE:CRC? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:ERRTYPE:CRC FAST, indicating
that the SENT fast channel is being searched for CRC errors.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high binary fast channel 1 value to use when
searching on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus search condition must be set to FAST.

Group Trigger

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the Search identifier number.

<Qstring> sets the Fast Channel 1 binary data high value.

2-1508 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALue
"XXXXXXXXXXXX" sets the Fast Channel 1 high value on which to search to
XXXXXXXXXXXX, or "don't care."
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALue? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALUE
"0101XXXX1111", indicating the Fast Channel 1 high value on which to search is
set to the binary value 0101XXXX1111.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on SENT
fast packet bus data for device channel 1.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:
QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan|
LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:QUALifier?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALue

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

EQUal specifies the qualifier as Equal.

LESSEQual specifies the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

LESSThan specifies the qualifier as Less Than.

MOREEQual specifies the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

MOREThan specifies the qualifier as More Than.

UNEQual specifies the qualifier as Unequal.

INrange sets the qualifier to inside a range.

OUTrange sets the qualifier to outside a range.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1509

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:QUALIFIER
UNEQUAL sets the fast channel 1 data qualifier to not equal for search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:QUALIFIER?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:QUALIFIER
MOREEQUAL to indicate that the fast channel 1 data qualifier is set
to greater than or equal for search 3.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary fast channel 1 value to be used when
searching on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALue
<Qstring>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<Qstring> is the Fast Channel 1 binary value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXX" sets the Fast Channel 1 value to XXXXXXXXXXXX, or
"don't care."
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALUE
"0000XXXX1111" to indicate the binary value 0000XXXX1111.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high binary fast channel 2 value to use when
searching on a SENT bus signal.

2-1510 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus search condition must be set to FAST.

Group Trigger

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the Search identifier number.

<Qstring> sets the Fast Channel 2 high binary data value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALue
"100000000000" sets the Fast Channel 2 high value on which to search to
100000000000.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALue? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALUE
"0101XXXX1111", indicating the Fast Channel 2 high value on which to search is
set to the binary value 0101XXXX1111.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on SENT
fast packet bus data for device channel 2.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:
QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan|
LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:QUALifier?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1511

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALue

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

EQUal specifies the qualifier as Equal.

LESSEQual specifies the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

LESSThan specifies the qualifier as Less Than.

MOREEQual specifies the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

MOREThan specifies the qualifier as More Than.

UNEQual specifies the qualifier as Unequal.

INrange sets the qualifier to inside a range.

OUTrange sets the qualifier to outside a range.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:QUALIFIER
UNEQUAL sets the fast channel 2 data qualifier to not equal for search 5.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:QUALIFIER?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:QUALIFIER
MOREEQUAL to indicate that the fast channel 2 data qualifier is set
to greater than or equal for search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary fast channel 2 value to be used when
searching on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALue
<Qstring>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

2-1512 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<Qstring> is the Fast Channel 2 binary value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALUE
"111111111111" sets the Fast Channel 2 value to 111111111111.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALUE
"000000000000" to indicate the binary value 000000000000.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high binary fast message counter value to use
when searching on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus search condition must be set to FAST.
The number of channels must be set to 1.
The nibble count must be set to 6.

Group Trigger

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:HIVALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:HIVALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

BUS:B<x>:SENT:NUMCHANnel
BUS:B<x>:SENT:NIBBLECount

Arguments Search<x> is the Search identifier number.

<Qstring> sets the Fast Channel 1 counter binary value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:HIVALUE
"XXXXXXXX" sets the Fast Channel secure counter high value on which to search
to "don't care."

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1513

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH4:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:HIVALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH4:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:HIVALUE
"11110000" to indicate a binary value of 11110000 on which to search.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on SENT
fast packet bus data for the secure format counter.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:
QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan|
LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:QUALifier?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:VALue

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

EQUal specifies the qualifier as Equal.

LESSEQual specifies the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

LESSThan specifies the qualifier as Less Than.

MOREEQual specifies the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

MOREThan specifies the qualifier as More Than.

UNEQual specifies the qualifier as Unequal.

INrange sets the qualifier to inside a range.

OUTrange sets the qualifier to outside a range.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:QUALifier
LESSThan sets the fast channel 2 data qualifier on search 5 to less than.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:QUALifier?
might return

2-1514 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:QUALIFIER
EQUAL to indicate that the fast channel 2 data qualifier on search 1 is set to equal.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary fast message counter value to be used
when searching on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The search condition must be set to FAST.
The number of channels must be set to 1.
The nibble count must be set to 6.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:VALue
<Qstring>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

BUS:B<x>:SENT:NIBBLECount
BUS:B<x>:SENT:NUMCHANnel

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<Qstring> is the Fast Channel 1 counter value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:VALUE
"XXXXXXXX" sets the Fast Channel 1 secure counter value to "don't care."

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:VALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:VALUE
"00001111" to search for a binary counter value of 00001111.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:INVERTNIBble:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary fast message inverted nibble value to be
used when searching on a SENT bus signal.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1515

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The search condition must be set to FAST.
The number of channels must be set to 1.
The nibble count must be set to 6.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:INVERTNIBble:VALue
<Qstring>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:INVERTNIBble:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

BUS:B<x>:SENT:NIBBLECount
BUS:B<x>:SENT:NUMCHANnel

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<Qstring> is the fast message inverted nibble binary value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:INVERTNIBBLE:VALUE "XXXX" sets the

Fast Channel 1 secure inverted nibble value to "don't care."
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:INVERTNIBBLE:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:INVERTNIBBLE:VALUE "1111" to search
for a binary inverted nibble value of 1111.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:STATus:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary status value to be used when searching
on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:STATus:VALue
<Qstring>

2-1516 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:STATus:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<Qstring> is the binary status binary value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:STATus:VALue "XXXX"

sets the binary status value to XXXX.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:STATUS:VALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:STATUS:VALUE
"1010" to indicate searching on a binary status value of 1010.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on SENT
pause pulses.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to PAUSE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:
QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan|
LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:QUALifier?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKs:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKs:HIVALue

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

EQUal specifies the qualifier as Equal.

INrange sets the qualifier to be within a range.

LESSEQual sets the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1517

Commands listed in alphabetical order

LESSThan sets the qualifier as Less Than.

MOREEQual sets the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

MOREThan sets the qualifier as More Than.

OUTrange sets the qualifier to be outside a range.

UNEQual specifies the qualifier as Unequal.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:QUALIFIER LESSTHAN

sets the pause pulse qualifier to less than.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:QUALIFIER? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:QUALIFIER INRANGE to
indicate that the pause pulse qualifier is set to search inside the range of ticks
low and ticks high.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKs:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the maximum number of pause clock ticks to be
used when searching on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The trigger condition must be set to PAUSE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKs:HIVALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKs:HIVALue ?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<NR1> is the maximum number of pause clock ticks to be used when searching.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKS:HIVALUE 15 sets

the maximum pause tick count for which to search to 15.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKS:HIVALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKS:HIVALUE
20 to indicate the maximum number of pause ticks to search for is 20.

2-1518 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKs:VALue
This command sets or queries the minimum number of pause clock ticks to be
used when searching on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The trigger condition must be set to PAUSE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKs:VALue <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKs:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<NR1> is the minimum number of pause clock ticks to be used when searching.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKS:VALUE 12 sets the

minimum pause tick count on which to search to 12.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKS:VALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKS:VALUE 15
to indicate the minimum number of pause ticks to search for is 15.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high binary Slow channel data value to use
when searching on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus search condition must be set to SLOW.

Group Trigger

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:HIVALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:HIVALue?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1519

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the Search identifier number.

<Qstring> sets the binary Slow channel data value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:HIVALUE
"XXXXXXXX" sets the Slow data high value on which to search to "don't care"
for Search 2.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:HIVALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:HIVALUE
"11110001", to indicate searching on slow data values that match 11110001.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on SENT
slow packet bus data.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to SLOW.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:
QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan|
LESSEQual|MOREEQualINrange|OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:QUALifier?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALue

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

EQUal specifies the qualifier as Equal.

LESSEQual sets the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

LESSThan sets the qualifier as Less Than.

MOREEQual sets the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

MOREThan sets the qualifier as More Than.

2-1520 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

UNEQual specifies the qualifier as Unequal.

INrange sets the search qualifier to inside a range.

OUTrange sets the search qualifier to outside a range.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:QUALIFIER
LESSEQUAL sets the slow channel data qualifier to less than or equal.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:QUALIFIER? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:QUALIFIER
EQUAL to indicate that the slow channel data qualifier is set to equal.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary slow channel data value to be used when
searching on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The trigger condition must be set to SLOW.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALue
<Qstring>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<Qstring> is the slow channel data binary value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"

sets the slow data search value to "don't care."
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALUE? might return
"XXXX1111", indicating the search is marking slow data values that match
XXXX1111.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1521

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:IDentifier:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary slow identifier value to be used when
searching on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The trigger condition must be set to SLOW.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:IDentifier:VALue
<Qstring>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:IDentifier:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<Qstring> is the slow channel identifier binary value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:IDENTIFIER:VALUE
"XXXX" sets the search identifier value to "don't care."

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:IDENTIFIER:VALUE?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:IDENTIFIER:VALUE
"0001" indicating to search for the slow channel identifier value of 0001.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:ADDRess:VALue
This command specifies the binary physical address string used for SMBUS
triggering if the trigger condition is address.

Conditions Requires option SR-SMBUS

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:ADDRess:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:ADDRess:VALue?

2-1522 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments Search<x> is the search identifier number.

<Qstring> specifies the address value as the field within a SMBUS frame to
search on. The default value is XXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:ADDRess:VALue "1111111"

specifies the address value as the field within a SMBUS frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:ADDRess:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:ADDRess:VALue "1111111",
indicating the address value as "1111111" current specified within a SMBUS
frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:COMMand:VALue
This command specifies the binary command code string used for SMBUS
triggering if the trigger condition is command code.

Conditions Requires option SR-SMBUS

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:COMMand:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:COMMand:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> is the search identifier number.

<Qstring> specifies the command value as the field within a SMBUS frame to
search on. The default value is XXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:COMMand:VALue "11011111"

specifies the address value as the field within a SMBUS frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:COMMand:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:COMMand:VALue "11011111",
indicating the command value as "11011111" current specified within a SMBUS
frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:CONDition
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for a SMBUS bus.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1523

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-SMBUS

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:CONDition {STARt|

REPEATSTARt| ADDRess| HOSTADDR| DEVICEADDR| COMMand| DATa|
UDIDDATa| ERRor| STOP| IDLe}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:CONDition?

Arguments Search<x> is the search number.

STARt sets the search condition to start. This is the default value.

REPEATSTARt sets the search condition to repeat start.

ADDRess sets the search condition to address.

HOSTADDR sets the search condition to host address.

DEVICEADDR sets the search condition to device address.

COMMand sets the search condition to command.

DATa sets the search condition to data.

UDIDDATa sets the search condition to UDID data.

ERRor sets the search condition to error.

STOP sets the search condition to stop.

IDLe sets the search condition to idle.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:CONDition STARt specifies start

as the event within a SMBUS frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:CONDition? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:CONDition STARt, indicating
that start is the currently specified event within a SMBUS frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:DATa:SIZe
This command specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an
SMBus trigger if the trigger condition is DATA.

Conditions Requires option SR-SMBUS

Group Search and Mark

2-1524 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments Search<x> is the search number.

NR1 sets the data size value. The valid range is 1 to 8. The default data size is 1.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:DATa:SIZe 4 sets the data size

value as 4.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:DATa:SIZe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:DATa:SIZe 4, indicating that
the data size value is 4.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for SMBus triggering if the
trigger condition is DATA.

Conditions Requires option SR-SMBUS

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:DATa:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:DATa:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> is the search identifier number.

<Qstring> specifies the data value as the field within a SMBUS frame to search
on. The default value is XXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:DATa:VALue "11001100" sets

the data value as "11001100".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:DATa:VALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:DATa:VALue "11001100",
indicating that the data value is "11001100".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:DEVICEADDR:VALue
This command specifies the binary physical address string is used for SMBUS
triggering if the trigger condition is device address.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1525

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-SMBUS

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:DEVICEADDR:VALue
<Qstring>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:DEVICEADDR:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> is the search identifier number.

<Qstring> specifies the device address value as the field within a SMBUS frame
to search on. The default value is XXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:DEVICEADDR:VALue
"0011111" specifies the device Address value as the field within a SMBUS
frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:DEVICEADDR:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:DEVICEADDR:VALue
"11001100", indicating the device address value is "0011111".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:ERROr:TYPe
This command sets or queries the error type for a SMBus.

Conditions Requires option SR-SMBUS

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:ERROr:TYPe
{ANY|ACK|NACK|PEC}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:ERROr:TYPe?

Arguments Search<x> is the search number.

ANY sets the error search type to ANY. This is the default value

ACK sets the error search type to ACK.

NACK sets the error search type to NACK.

PEC sets the error search type to PEC.

2-1526 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:ERROr:TYPe ACK specifies ACK

error as the field within a SMBus frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:ERROr:TYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:ERROr:TYPe ACK, indicating
that ACK error is the currently specified field within a SMBus frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:FIELDBYTe
This command sets or queries the field byte for a SMBUS bus if trigger condition
is UDID data.

Conditions Requires option SR-SMBUS

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:FIELDBYTe
{ONE|TWO|FOUR}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:FIELDBYTe?

Arguments Search<x> is the search number.

ONE sets the field byte size to 8 bits. This is the default value.

TWO sets the field byte size to 16 bits.

FOUR sets the field byte size to 32 bits.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:FIELDBYTe TWO sets the field

byte size as 16.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:FIELDBYTe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:FIELDBYTe TWO, indicating
that the field byte size is 16.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:UDIDDATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for SMBUS triggering if the
trigger condition is UDID data.

Conditions Requires option SR-SMBUS

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1527

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:UDIDDATa:VALue
<Qstring>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:UDIDDATa:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> is the search identifier number.

<Qstring> specifies the UDID data value as the field within a SMBUS frame to
search on. The default value is XXXXXXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:UDIDDATa:VALue "11001101"

sets the UDID data value as "11001100".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:UDIDDATa:VALue? might
return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SMBUS:UDIDDATa:VALue
"11001101", indicating that the UDID data value is "11001101".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the bus source for the bus search to determine
where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce
{B0|B1|B2|B3|B4|B5|B6|B7|B8|B9|B10| B11|B12|B13|B14|B15|B16}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce?

Arguments B0–B16 specifies the bus source as a bus number from B01 to B16.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SOURCE B1 sets the bus source for bus

trigger search 1 to B1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SOURCE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SOURCE B15, indicating that the bus
source for bus trigger search 1 is B15.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:CONDition
This command sets or queries the field or condition for which to search on a
SpaceWire bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPACEWIRE

2-1528 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

This command affects most of the

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:CONDition
{SYNC|DATa|ERRors|CONTROLCODe|CONTROLCHAR}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:CONDition?

Arguments Search<x> is the search number.

SYNC sets the search condition to Synchronization.

DATa sets the search condition to Data Characters.

ERRors sets the search condition to SpaceWire Bus Decode Errors.

CONTROLCODe sets the search condition to control code.

CONTROLCHAR sets the search condition to control character.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:CONDition SYNC sets

Synchronization as the field within an SpaceWire frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:CONDITION? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:CONDITION DATA,
indicating that the data field is the currently specified field within an SpaceWire
frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:CONTROLCHARTYPe
This command sets or queries the control character type to use when searching on
a SpaceWire bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPACEWIRE

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:CONTROLCHARTYPe
{FCT|ESC|ENDOFPACKet}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:CONTROLCHARTYPe?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:CONDition

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1529

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments Search<x> is the search number.

FCT sets the control character type to Flow Control Token.

ESC sets the control character type to Escape.

ENDOFPACKet sets the control character type to End of Packet.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:CONTROLCHARTYPe FCT

specifies Flow control token as the field on which to search within a SpaceWire
frame.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:CONTROLCHARTYPe? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIReCONTROLCHARTYPe
ESC.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:CONTROLCODETYPe
This command sets or queries the control code type to use when searching on a
SpaceWire bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPACEWIRE

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:CONTROLCODETYPe
{NULL|TIMECODe}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:CONTROLCODETYPe?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the search number.

NULL sets the control code type to Null code.

TIMECODe sets the control code type to Time code (only varying part of Time
code [6 bits] is considered for search).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:CONTROLCODETYPe NULL

specifies Null as the field on which to search within an SpaceWire frame.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:CONTROLCODETYPe? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIReCONTROLCODETYPe
TIMECODe.

2-1530 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the length of the data string, in bytes, to use when
searching on a SpaceWire bus signal. The search condition needs to be set to
Data (see Related Commands).

Conditions Requires option SR-SPACEWIRE

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:DATa:SIZe<NR1>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:DATa:SIZe?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the search number.

NR1 is an integer value that specifies the number of contiguous data bytes to use
when searching on the SpaceWire data field. The valid range is 1 to 10.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:DATa:SIZe 4 specifies 4

as the number of contiguous data bytes to use when searching on the SpaceWire
data field.
SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:DATa:SIZe? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:DATa:SIZE 10, indicating
that Search 5 is set to use 10 contiguous data bytes searching on the SpaceWire
data field.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data value to be used when searching on
an SpaceWire bus signal. The search condition must be set to Data (see Related
Commands).

Conditions Requires option SR-SPACEWIRE

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:DATa:VALue<Qstring>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:DATa:VALue?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1531

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the search number.

QString specifies the binary data value to search for on a SpaceWire bus signal.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:DATa:VALue “101011”

sets the data VALue to 101011.
SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:DATa:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:DATa:VALue "10101",
indicating that Search 5 is set to look for binary data value 10101.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:ERRORTYPe
This command sets or queries the error type for which to search on the SpaceWire
bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPACEWIRE

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:ERRORTYPe
{EEP|ESC|PARity}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:ERRORTYPe?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the search number.

EEP sets the error search type to Error end of packet.

ESC sets the error search type to Escape error.

PARity sets the error search type to Parity error.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:ERRORTYPe EEP specifies

Error end Of Packet as the field on which to search within a SpaceWire frame.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:ERRORTYPe? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:ERRORTYPe ESC, indicating
that Escape Error is the currently specified field on which to search within a
SpaceWire frame.

2-1532 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:TIMECode:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string used for SpaceWire search
if the search condition is Time Code.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPACEWIRE

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:TIMECode:VALue
<Qstring>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:TIMECode:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPACEWIRe:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the search number.

QString sets the binary data value to be used when searching on an SpaceWire
bus signal.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B:SPACEWIRe:TIMECode:VALue
“101011” sets the timecode value to binary 101011.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B:SPACEWIRe:TIMECode:VALue?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B:SPACEWIRe:TIMECode:VALue
"101011".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:CONDition
This command sets or queries the search condition for an SPI bus search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRCOMP or SUP5-SRCOMP Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:CONDition
{DATA|SS|STARTofframe}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:CONDition?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1533

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments DATA specifies the trigger condition as Data.

SS specifies the trigger condition as Slave Selection.

STARTofframe specifies the trigger condition as start of frame.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPI:CONDITION SS sets the trigger

condition for SPI bus trigger search 1 to SS.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPI:CONDITION? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPI:CONDITION DATA, indicating that
the trigger condition for SPI bus trigger search 1 is set to Data.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes used for the
specified SPI bus trigger search to determine where to place a mark. The search
condition must be DATA. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRCOMP or SUP5-SRCOMP Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the number of contiguous data bytes.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPI:DATA:SIZE 1 sets the length of the

data string for SPI bus trigger search 1 to 1 byte.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPI:DATA:SIZE? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPI:DATA:SIZE 4, indicating that the
length of the data string for SPI bus trigger search 2 is 4 bytes.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:DATa:VALue
The command sets or queries the binary data string used for an SPI bus search
to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x. The
search condition must be DATA.

2-1534 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-SRCOMP or SUP5-SRCOMP Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the data value in the specified valid format. The valid
characters are 0, 1, and X for binary format; and A-F, 0-9, and X for hexadecimal
format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPI:DATA:VALUE "00001111" sets the

data value for SPI bus trigger search 1 to "00001111" in binary format.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPI:DATA:VALUE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPI:DATA:VALUE "11", indicating that
the data value for SPI bus trigger search 1 is set to "11" in hexadecimal format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:SOURCETYpe
This command sets or queries trigger Source for SPI bus. The search number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:SOURCETYpe {MISo|MOSi}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:SOURCETYpe?

Arguments MISo specifies the trigger source as MISo. The default search source type is MISo.

MOSi specifies the trigger source as MOSi.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPI:SOURCETYpe MOSi sets the trigger

source for SPI bus trigger search 1 to MOSi.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPI:SOURCETYpe? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPI:SOURCETYpe MOSi, indicating that
the trigger source for SPI bus trigger search 1 is MOSi.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1535

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:CONDition
This command sets or queries the search condition for an SPMI bus.

Conditions Requires option SRPM

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SPMI:CONDition {SSC|RESet|SLEep|
SHUTdown|WAKeup|MASTERREAd|MASTERWRIte|REGREAd|REGWRIte|
DEVICEDESCMASTERREAd|DEVICEDESCSLAVEREAd|EXTREGREAd|
EXTREGWRIte|LONGEXTREGREAd|LONGEXTREGWRIte|REG0WRIte|
AUTHenticate|TRANSferbusownership|PARItyerror}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:CONDition?

Arguments Search<x> is the search identifier number.

SSC specifies searching for the Sequence Start Condition.

RESet specifies searching for the Reset command sequence.

SLEep specifies searching for the Sleep command sequnce.

SHUTdown specifies searching for the Shutdown command sequence.

WAKeup specifies searching for the Wakeup command sequence.

MASTERREAd specifies searching for the Master Read command sequence.

MASTERWRIte specifies searching for the Master Write command sequence.

REGREAd specifies searching for the Register Read command sequence.

REGWRIte specifies searching for the Register Write command sequence.

DEVICEDESCMASTERREAd specifies searching for the Device Descriptor Block

Master Read command sequence
DEVICEDESCSLAVEREAd specifies searching for the Device Descriptor Block
Slave Read command sequence.
EXTREGREAd specifies triggering on the Extended Register Read command
sequence.
EXTREGWRIte specifies searching for the Extended Register Write command
sequence.
LONGEXTREGREAd specifies searching for the Extended Register Read Long
command sequence.

2-1536 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

LONGEXTREGWRIte specifies searching for the Extended Register Write Long

command sequence.
REG0WRIte specifies searching for the Register 0 Write command sequence.

AUTHenticate specifies searching for the Authentication command sequence.

TRANSferbusownership specifies searching for the Transfer Bus Ownership

(TBO) command sequence.
PARItyerror specifies searching for the parity errors.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH4:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:CONDITION SLEEP specifies

searching for a Sleep command sequence in search Search4.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:CONDITION? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:CONDITION MASTERREAD,
indicating that search Search2 is searching for Master Read command sequences.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the length of the data string, in bytes, to be used
when searching on an SPMI bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRPM.

The Search condition must be set to EXTREGREAd, EXTREGWRIte,
LONGEXTREGREAd, or LONGEXTREGWRIte.
Note that this a floating point value. If the condition is set to REG0WRIte, the
query return value will be a fractional value (0.875) because the data size is less
than a byte.

Group Trigger

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:DATa:SIZe <NR2>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:DATa:SIZe?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:CONDition

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:DATa:VALue

Arguments Search<x> is the Search identifier number.

<NR2> is the size of the data string in bytes.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1537

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:DATA:SIZE 1 sets the data size

to 1 byte.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:DATA:SIZE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:DATA:SIZE 4 to indicate the
search data pattern has four bytes of data.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for SPMI when
the search condition is MASTERREAd, MASTERWRIte, REGREAd,
REGWRIte, EXTREGREAd, EXTREGWRIte, LONGEXTREGREAd,
LONGEXTREGWRIte, or REG0WRIte.

Conditions Requires option SRPM

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:DATa:VALue <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:DATa:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the search identifier number.

<Qstring> is the binary data string that identifies the data value for which
to search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX" sets

the binary data value to "don't care" for Search 2.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:DATA:VALUE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:DATA:VALUE "XXXX1111" to
indicate Search 2 is searching for binary data value XXXX1111.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:MASTERADDRess:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string that identifies the
master address used in SPMI when the search condition is MASTERREAd,
MASTERWRIte, or DEVICEDESCMASTERREAd.

Conditions Requires option SRPM

2-1538 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:MASTERADDRess:VALue
<Qstring>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:MASTERADDRess:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the search identifier number.

<Qstring> is the binary data string that identifies the master address for which
to search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:MASTERADDRESS:VALUE "XX"

sets the binary master address on which to search to "don't care."
SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:MASTERADDRESS:VALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:MASTERADDRESS:VALUE
"11" to indicate that Search 3 is searching for binary master address 11.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:NORESPonse
This command sets or queries whether or not to search for No Response frames.

Conditions Requires option SRPM

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:NORESPonse <Qstring>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:NORESPonse?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the search identifier number.

<Qstring> is either "TRUE" or "FALSE" boolean value for searching on SPMI

No Response frames.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH6:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:NORESPONSE TRUE sets Search 6

to look for No Response frames.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1539

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH4:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:NORESPONSE? might return

SEARCH:SEARCH4:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:NORESPONSE FALSE to indicate
that the Search 4 is not looking for No Response frames.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:REGISTERADDRess:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string that identifies the register
address used in SPMI triggering if the trigger condition is MASTERREAd,
MASTERWRIte, REGREAd, REGWRIte, EXTREGREAd, EXTREGWRIte,
LONGEXTREGREAd, or LONGEXTREGWRIte.

Conditions Requires option SRPM

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:REGISTERADDRess:VALue
<Qstring>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:REGISTERADDRess:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the search identifier number.

<Qstring> is the binary data string that identifies the register address for which
to search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:REGISTERADDRESS:VALUE
"XXXXXXXX" sets the binary register address to "don't care."

SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:REGISTERADDRESS:VALUE?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:REGISTERADDRESS:VALUE
"XXXX1111" to indicate Search 5 is searching for binary register address is
XXXX1111.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:SLAVEADDRess:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string that identifies the slave address
used in SPMI when the search condition is RESet, SLEep, SHUTdown, WAKeup,
AUTHenticate, REGREAd, REGWRIte, EXTREGREAd, EXTREGWRIte,
LONGEXTREGREAd, LONGEXTREGWRIte, DEVICEDESCSLAVEREAd,
or REG0WRIte.

2-1540 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SRPM

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:SLAVEADDRess:VALue
<Qstring>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:SLAVEADDRess:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the search identifier number.

<Qstring> is the binary data string that identifies the slave address for which
to search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:SLAVEADDRESS:VALUE "0011"

sets the binary slave address to 0011 on Search 3.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:SLAVEADDRESS:VALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI:SLAVEADDRESS:VALUE
"1010" to indicate the binary slave address is 1010 for Search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:COMMand:RESPonse
This command sets or queries the command response of the respective command
type for SVID bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-SVID

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:COMMand:RESPonse
{GETReg| GETRegvendor| GETRegtestcfg| SETFast| SETSlow|
SETDecay| SETPs| SETRegaddr| SETRegdata| REGAddrvendor|
REGDatavendor| REGAddrtestconfg| REGDatatestconfg| TESTmode|
SETWp| GETRegpktrecent| GETRegpktalert| GETRegpktbad|
GETRegvrevent}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:COMMand:RESPonse?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1541

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments Search<x> is the search identifier number.

GETReg specifies the search condition as GETReg. This is the default command
response condition.

GETRegvendor specifies the search condition as GETRegvendor.

GETRegtestcfg specifies the search condition as GETRegtestcfg.

SETFast specifies the search condition as SETFast.

SETSlow specifies the search condition as SETSlow.

SETDecay specifies the search condition as SETDecay.

SETPs specifies the search condition as SETPs.

SETRegaddr specifies the search condition as SETRegaddr.

SETRegdata specifies the search condition as SETRegdata.

REGAddrvendor specifies the search condition as REGAddrvendor.

REGDatavendor specifies the search condition as REGDatavendor.

REGAddrtestconfg specifies the search condition as REGAddrtestconfg.

REGDatatestconfg specifies the search condition as REGDatatestconfg.

TESTmode specifies the search condition as TESTmode.

SETWp specifies the search condition as SETWp.

GETRegpktrecent specifies the search condition as GETRegpktrecent.

GETRegpktalert specifies the search condition as GETRegpktalert.

GETRegpktbad specifies the search condition as GETRegpktbad.

GETRegvrevent specifies the search condition as GETRegvrevent.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:COMMand:RESPonse SETSlow

specifies setslow of set command as the field within a SVID frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:COMMand:RESPonse? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:COMMand:RESPonse
SETSlow, indicating that SETSlow is the currently specified field within a SVID
frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:COMMand:TYPe
This command sets or queries the command type for SVID bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-SVID

2-1542 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:COMMand:TYPe
{GET|SET|OPTional}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:COMMand:TYPe?

Arguments Search<x> is the search identifier number.

GET specifies the search condition as GET. This is the default command type
condition.
SET specifies the search condition as SET.

OPTional specifies the search condition as OPTional.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:COMMand:TYPe SET specifies SET

as the field within a SVID frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:COMMand:TYPe? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:COMMand:TYPe SET, indicating
that SET is the currently specified field within a SVID frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:CONDition
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for SVID bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-SVID

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:CONDition
{STARTCONDition| SLAVEADDRess| COMMand| PAYLoad|
ERRors}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:CONDition?

Arguments Search<x> is the search identifier number.

STARTCONDition specifies the search condition as STARTCONDition. This is

the default trigger on condition.

SLAVEADDRess specifies the search condition as SLAVEADDRess.

COMMand specifies the search condition as COMMand.

PAYLoad specifies the search condition as PAYLoad.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1543

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ERRors specifies the search condition as ERRors.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:SVID:CONDition ERRors

specifies ERRors as the field within a SVID frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:CONDition? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:CONDition ERRors, indicating
that ERRors is the currently specified field within a SVID frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:ERRor:TYPe
This command sets or queries the error type for SVID bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-SVID

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:ERRor:TYPe {ANY| NACK|

REJect| MIXed| PARity}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:ERRor:TYPe?

Arguments Search<x> is the search identifier number.

ANY specifies the search condition as ANY. This is the default error type condition.

NACK specifies the search condition as NACK.

REJect specifies the search condition as REJect.

MIXed specifies the search condition as MIXed.

PARity specifies the search condition as PARity.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:SVID:ERRor:TYPe PARity

specifies PARity as the field within a SVID frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:ERRor:TYPe? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:ERRor:TYPe PARity, indicating
that PARity is the currently specified field within a SVID frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:PAYLoad:TYPe
This command sets or queries the payload type for SVID bus.

2-1544 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-SVID

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:PAYLoad:TYPe
{MASTer|SLAVe|EITHer}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:PAYLoad:TYPe?

Arguments Search<x> is the search identifier number.

MASTer specifies the search condition as MASTer. This is the default payload
type condition.

SLAVe specifies the search condition as SLAVe.

EITHer specifies the search condition as EITHer.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:SVID:PAYLoad:TYPe SLAVe

specifies SLAVe payload as the field within a SVID frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:PAYLoad:TYPe? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:PAYLoad:TYPe PARity,
indicating that SLAVe is the currently specified field within a SVID frame to
search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:PAYLoad:VALue
This command sets or queries the payload value to be used when search is on
SVID bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-SVID

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:PAYLoad:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:PAYLoad:VALue?

Arguments Search<x> is the search identifier number.

<QString> specifies the data value in the specified valid format. The valid
characters are 0, 1, and X for binary; for hexadecimal; and symbolic).

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1545

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SVID:PAYLOAD:VALue "XXXX"

specifies the payload value as XXXX within a SVID frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SVID:PAYLOAD:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SVID:PAYLOAD:VALue "XXXX",
indicating the payload value is XXXX within a SVID frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:SLAVE:ADDRESS
This command sets or queries the slave address to be used when search is on
SVID bus.

Conditions Requires option SR-SVID

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:SLAVE:ADDRESS <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:SLAVE:ADDRESS?

Arguments Search<x> is the search identifier number.

<QString> specifies the data value in the specified valid format. The valid
characters are 0, 1, and X for binary; for hexadecimal; and symbolic). the default
address is XXXX.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SVID:SLAVE:ADDRESS "XXXX"

specifies the pslave address as XXXX within a SVID frame to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SVID:SLAVE:ADDRESS? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SVID:SLAVE:ADDRESS "XXXX",
indicating the slave address is XXXX within a SVID frame to search on.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ADDress:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high binary address value used when searching
on a USB bus signal to determine where to place a mark. The search number is
specified by x. The search condition must be set to TOKEN.
The VALue and HIVALue set a range that the INrange and OUTrange qualifiers
use to decide when to trigger. For example, if the QUALIFER is set to INrange,
and the address is within the range set by VALue and HIVALue, then a trigger
can be generated.

2-1546 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ADDress:HIVALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ADDress:HIVALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ADDress:VALue

Arguments <QString> specifies the data value in the specified valid format. The valid
characters are 0, 1, and X for binary; for hexadecimal; and symbolic).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:ADDRESS:HIVALUE

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:ADDRESS:HIVALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:ADDRESS:HIVALUE "XX",
indicating that the address value for normal token for USB bus trigger search 1 is
set to "XX," in hexadecimal format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ADDress:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary address value used for a USB bus search
to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x. The
search condition must be set to TOKEN.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ADDress:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ADDress:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ADDress:HIVALue

Arguments <QString> specifies the data value in the specified valid format. Valid characters
are 0, 1, and X for binary; A-F, 0-9 and X for hexadecimal; and for symbolic.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1547

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:ADDRESS:VALUE "1110000" sets

the address value for the normal token for USB bus trigger search 1 to "1110000"
in binary format.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:ADDRESS:VALUE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:ADDRESS:VALUE "11", indicating
that the address value for normal token for USB bus trigger search 1 is set to
"11" hexadecimal format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CHARacter
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for an USB bus on specific
control symbol. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRUSB3.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CHARacter {COM| EDB| END|

EPF| SDP| SHP| SKP| SLC| SUB| Any}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CHARacter?

Arguments COM specifies the control symbol as Comma (K28.5).

EDB specifies the control symbol as End Bad (K28.3).

END specifies the control symbol as End (K29.7).

EPF specifies the control symbol as End Packet Framing (K23.7).

SDP specifies the control symbol as Start Data Packet (K28.2).

SHP specifies the control symbol as Start Header Packet (K27.7).

SKP specifies the control symbol as Skip (K28.1).

SLC specifies the control symbol as Start Link Command (K30.7).

SUB specifies the control symbol as Secode Error Substitution (K28.4).

Any specifies any control symbol.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CHARacter EDB sets the control

symbol for USB bus trigger search 1 to EDB.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CHARacter? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CHARacter EPF, indicating that the
control symbol for USB bus trigger search 1 is set to EPF.

2-1548 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:COMPliance
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for an USB bus on Compliance
Pattern sequences. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRUSB3.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:COMPliance
{CP0|CP1|CP2|CP3|CP4|CP56|CP78}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:COMPliance?

Arguments CP0 specifies the compliance pattern sequence as CP0.

CP1 specifies the compliance pattern sequence as CP1.

CP2 specifies the compliance pattern sequence as CP2.

CP3 specifies the compliance pattern sequence as CP3.

CP4 specifies the compliance pattern sequence as CP4.

CP56 specifies the compliance pattern sequence as CP5 or CP6.

CP78 specifies the compliance pattern sequence as CP7 or CP8.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:COMPliance CP0 sets the

compliance pattern sequence to CP0.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:COMPliance? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:COMPliance CP3, indicating that
the compliance pattern sequence for USB bus trigger search 1 is set to CP3.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CONDition
This command sets or queries the search condition for a USB bus search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2, SUP5-SRUSB2, or SRUSB3 Triggering and

Analysis application.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1549

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CONDition {COMPATTern|

CONTROLCH| CUSTom| DATAPacket| EOP| ERRor| HANDSHAKEPacket|
OSET| PACKet| RESET| RESUME| SPECIALPacket| SUSPEND| SYNC|
TOKENPacket}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CONDition?

Arguments COMPATTern specifies the search condition as Compliance Pattern. Requires

option SRUSB3.
CONTROLCH specifies the search condition as Control Character. Requires option
SRUSB3.
CUSTom specifies the search condition as Custom symbol search. Requires option
SRUSB3.
DATAPacket specifies the search condition as Data Packet.

EOP specifies the search condition as End of Packet.

ERROR specifies the search condition as Error.

HANDSHAKEPacket specifies the search condition as Handshake Packet.

OSET specifies the search condition as Ordered Set. Requires option SRUSB3.

PACKet specifies the search condition as Packets. Requires option SRUSB3.

RESET specifies the search condition as Reset.

RESUME specifies the search condition as Resume.

SPECIALPacket specifies the search condition as Special Packet.

SUSPEND specifies the search condition as Suspend.

SYNC specifies the search condition as Sync.

TOKENPacket specifies the search condition as Token (Address) Packet.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:CONDITION EOP sets the search

condition for USB bus trigger search 1 to End of Packet.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:CONDITION? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:CONDITION SYNC, indicating that
the search condition for USB bus trigger search 1 is set to Sync.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CRCTYPe
This command specifies the USB3 CRC trigger type to be valid on a CRC5,
CRC16 or CRC32. The search number is specified by x.

2-1550 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SRUSB3.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CRCTYPe {CRC5| CRC16|

CRC32}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CRCTYPe?

Arguments CRC5 specifies CRC error type to be CRC5.

CRC16 specifies CRC error type to be CRC16.

CRC32 specifies CRC error type to be CRC32.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CRCTYPe CRC5 sets the CRC error

type as CRC5.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CRCTYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CRCTYPe CRC16, indicating that
the CRC error type for USB bus trigger search 1 is set to CRC16.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CUSTom:CSYMVALue
This command sets or queries the control symbol value for an USB bus. The
search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRUSB3.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CUSTom:CSYMVALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CUSTom:CSYMVALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the control symbol value. The default value is K28.5.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CUSTom:CSYMVALue "K28.5" sets

the control symbol value to K28.5 character.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CUSTom:CSYMVALue? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CUSTom:CSYMVALue "D0.1",
indicating that the control symbol value for USB bus trigger search 1 as D0.1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1551

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CUSTom:RDNeg
This command sets or queries the negative disparity 10 bit value for an USB bus.
The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRUSB3.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CUSTom:RDNeg <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CUSTom:RDNeg?

Arguments <QString> specifies the negative disparity 10 bit value. The default value is
0011111010.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CUSTom:RDNeg "0011111010"

sets the negative disparity 10 bit value for an USB bus as 0011111010.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CUSTom:RDNeg? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CUSTom:RDNeg "0011111010",
indicating the negative disparity 10 bit value for an USB bus trigger search is
set to 0011111010.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CUSTom:RDPos
This command sets or queries the positive disparity 10 bit value for an USB bus.
The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRUSB3.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CUSTom:RDPos <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CUSTom:RDPos?

Arguments <QString> specifies the negative positive 10 bit value. The default value is
1100000101.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CUSTom:RDPos "1100000101"

sets the positive disparity 10 bit value for an USB bus as 1100000101.

2-1552 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CUSTom:RDPos? might return

:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:CUSTom:RDPos "1100000101",
indicating the positive disparity 10 bit value for an USB bus trigger search is
set to 1100000101.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:DATa:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high binary data value used with In Range and
Out of Range qualifiers for a USB bus search to determine where to place a mark.
The search number is specified by x. The search condition must be set to DATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:DATa:HIVALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:DATa:HIVALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the data value in the specified valid format (binary,
hexadecimal, or symbolic). The valid characters for binary are 0, 1, and X;

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXX111" sets

the data value for USB bus trigger search 1 to "XXXXX111" in binary format.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:DATA:HIVALUE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:DATA:HIVALUE "11", indicating
that the data value for USB bus trigger search 1 is set to "11" in hexadecimal
format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:DATa:OFFSet
This command sets the byte offset to look for a data pattern at, in bytes, to be used
when searching on a USB bus signal. The search number is specified by x. The
search condition must be set to DATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1553

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:DATa:OFFSet <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:DATa:OFFSet?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the data offset in bytes.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:DATA:OFFSET 5 sets the data offset

for USB bus trigger search 1 to 5 bytes.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:DATA:OFFSET? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:DATA:OFFSET DONTCARE,
indicating that the data offset for USB bus trigger search 1 is set to DONTCare.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:DATa:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on a USB
bus signal. The search condition must be set to IDANDDATA OR DATA. The
search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
USB:DATa:QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|
LESSthan|MOREthan|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:DATa:QUALifier?

Arguments EQUal specifies the qualifier as Equal.

INrange specifies the qualifier as Inside Range.

LESSEQual specifies the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

MOREEQual specifies the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

OUTrange specifies the qualifier as Out of Range.

UNEQual specifies the qualifier as Unequal.

LESSThan specifies the qualifier as Less Than.

MOREThan specifies the qualifier as More Than.

2-1554 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:DATa:QUALifier INRANGE sets

the qualifier to INRANGE.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:DATa:QUALifier? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
indicating the qualifier is set to equal.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the length of the data string, in bytes, used for
a USB bus search to determine where to place a mark. The search number is
specified by x. The search condition must be set to DATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the data size in bytes.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:DATA:SIZE 1 sets the size of the

data string for USB bus trigger search 1 to 1 byte.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:DATA:SIZE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:DATA:SIZE 3, indicating that the
size of the data string for USB bus trigger search 1 is set to 3 bytes.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:DATa:TYPe
This command sets or queries the USB bus search type. The search number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1555

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:DATa:TYPe
{ANY|DATA0|DATA1|DATA2|MDATA}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:DATa:TYPe?

Arguments ANY specifies the data packet type as Any.

DATA0 specifies the data packet type as DATA0.

DATA1 specifies the data packet type as DATA1.

DATA2 specifies the data packet type as DATA2.

MDATA specifies the data packet type as MDATA.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:DATA:TYPE ANY sets the data packet

type for USB bus trigger search 1 to ANY.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:DATA:TYPE? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:DATA:TYPE MDADA, indicating that
the packet type for USB bus trigger search 2 is set to MDATA.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data value used for a USB bus search
to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x. The
search condition must be set to DATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the data value. The valid characters are 0, 1, and X for
binary format; and A-F, 0-9, and X for hexadecimal format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:DATA:VALUE "AB" sets the data

value for data token for USB bus trigger search 1 to "AB" in hexadecimal format.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:DATA:VALUE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX",

2-1556 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

indicating that the data value for data token for USB bus trigger search 1 is set
to "XXXXXXXX" in binary format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ENDPoint:VALue
This command sets or queries the endpoint binary value used for a USB bus
search to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.
The search condition must be set to TOKEN.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ENDPoint:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ENDPoint:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the data value in the specified valid format. The valid
characters are 0, 1, and X for binary format; A-F, 0-9 and X for hexadecimal
format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:ENDPOINT:VALUE "1111" sets

the endpoint value for normal token for USB bus trigger search 1 to "1111"
in binary format.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:ENDPOINT:VALUE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:ENDPOINT:VALUE "1", indicating
that the endpoint value for normal token for USB bus trigger search 1 is set to "1"
in hexadecimal format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ERR8B10B:TYPe
This command specifies the USB3 8b10b encoding error trigger type to be valid
on a character or disparity. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRUSB3.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1557

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ERR8B10B:TYPe
{CHARacter|DISParity}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ERR8B10B:TYPe?

Arguments CHARacter specifies 8b10b error trigger type as character.

DISParity specifies 8b10b error trigger type as disparity.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ERR8B10B:TYPe CHARacter sets

the 8b10b trigger type as character.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ERR8B10B:TYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ERR8B10B:TYPe DISParity,
indicating that the 8b10b trigger type for USB bus trigger search 1 is set to
disparity.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ERRTYPE
This command sets or queries the error type for a USB bus search to determine
where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2, SUP5-SRUSB2, or SRUSB3 Triggering and

Analysis application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ERRTYPE {BITSTUFFing|

CRC5| CRC16| CRCTYPes| ERR8B10B| PID}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ERRTYPE?

Arguments BITSTUFFing specifies the error type as Bit Stuffing.

CRC5 specifies the error type as Token CRC5 (Cyclic Redundancy Check 5).

CRC16 specifies the error type as Data CRC16 (Cyclic Redundancy Check 16).

CRCTYPes specifies the error type as USB3 CRC errors. Requires option
SRUSB3.
ERR8B10B specifies error type as 8b10b encoding errors. Requires option
SRUSB3.
PID specifies the error type as PID Check Bits.

2-1558 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:ERRTYPE CRC5 sets the error type

for USB bus trigger search 1 to Token CRC5.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:ERRTYPE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:ERRTYPE PID, indicating that the
error type for USB bus trigger search 1 is set to PID Check Bits.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:HANDSHAKEType
This command sets or queries the handshake type for the specified USB bus trigger
search to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:HANDSHAKEType
{ACK|ANY|NAK|NYET|STALL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:HANDSHAKEType?

Arguments ACK specifies the handshake type as Acknowledgement (positive) (XX10).

ANY specifies the handshake type as Any (0010).

NAK specifies the handshake type as Negative Acknowledgment (1010).

NYET specifies the handshake type as No response Yet (0110).

STALL specifies the handshake type as Stall (endpoint is halted or control pipe
request not supported) (1110).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:HANDSHAKETYPE NAK sets the

handshake type for USB bus trigger search 1 to NAK.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:HANDSHAKETYPE? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:HANDSHAKETYPE NYET, indicating
that the handshake type for USB bus trigger search 2 is set to NYET.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ORDered:SET
This command specifies the USB trigger type to be valid on ordered set condition.
The search number is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1559

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SRUSB3.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ORDered:SET {TSEQ| TS1|

TS2| SKP| DPPSTART| DPPEND| DPPABORT| LCSTART| HPSTART}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ORDered:SET?

Arguments TSEQ specifies the ordered set as training sequence TSEQ.

TS1 specifies the ordered set as training sequence TS1.

TS2 specifies the ordered set as training sequence TS2.

SKP specifies the ordered set as SKP.

DPPSTART specifies the ordered set as start of a data packet payload.

DPPEND specifies the ordered set as end of a data packet payload.

DPPABORT specifies the ordered set as abort a data packet payload.

LCSTART specifies the ordered set as start of a link command.

HPSTART specifies the ordered set as start of a header packet.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ORDered:SET DPPSTART sets the

ordered set for USB bus trigger search 1 to DPPSTART.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ORDered:SET? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:ORDered:SET TSEQ, indicating
that the ordered set for USB bus trigger search 1 is set to TSEQ.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:PACKet:TYPEOFLMP
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for an USB bus on specific
packet for LMP. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRUSB3.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:PACKet:TYPEOFLMP
{PORTCAP| PORTCFG| PORTRSP| SETLF| U2IT| VDEVTEST| ANY}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:PACKet:TYPEOFLMP?

2-1560 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments PORTCAP specifies the link management packet type as port capability.

PORTCFG specifies the link management packet type as port configuration.

PORTRSP specifies the link management packet type as port configuration

response.
SETLF specifies the link management packet type as set link function.

U2IT specifies the link management packet type as U2 inactivity time-out.

VDEVTEST specifies the link management packet type as vendor device test.

ANY specifies any link management packet type.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:PACKet:TYPEOFLMP PORTCAP sets

the transaction packet type as port capability.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:PACKet:TYPEOFLMP? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:PACKet:TYPEOFLMP SETLF,
indicating that the transaction packet for USB bus trigger search 1 is set to set
link function.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:PACKet:TYPEOFTP
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for an USB bus on specific
packet for TP. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRUSB3.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:PACKet:TYPEOFTP {ACK|

DEVNOTif| ERDY| NRDY| PING| PINGRSP| STATus| STALl| ANY}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:PACKet:TYPEOFTP?

Arguments ACK specifies the transaction packet type as ACK.

DEVNOTif specifies the transaction packet type as Dev Notification.

ERDY specifies the transaction packet type as ERDY.

NRDY specifies the transaction packet type as NRDY.

PING specifies the transaction packet type as PING.

PINGRSP specifies the transaction packet type as ping response.

STATus specifies the transaction packet type as status.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1561

Commands listed in alphabetical order

STALl specifies the transaction packet type as status.

ANY specifies any transaction packet type.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:PACKet:TYPEOFTP ACK sets the

transaction packet type as ACK.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:PACKet:TYPEOFTP? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:PACKet:TYPEOFTP DEVNOTIF,
indicating that the transaction packet for USB bus trigger search 1 is set to dev
notification.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:PACKETTYPe
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for an USB bus on specific
packet. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRUSB3.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:PACKETTYPe {LMP| TP| DP|

ITP| ANY}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:PACKETTYPe?

Arguments LMP specifies the packet type as link management packet.

TP specifies the packet type as Transaction packet.

DP specifies the packet type as Data Packet.

ITP specifies the packet type as Isochronous timestamp packet.

ANY specifies the packet type as any type of packets.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:PACKETTYPe LMP sets the packet

type to LMP.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:PACKETTYPe? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:PACKETTYPe TP, indicating that
the packet type for USB bus trigger search 1 is set to TP.

2-1562 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:SOFFRAMENUMber
This command sets or queries the frame number string to use for the Start of Frame
for the specified USB bus trigger search to determine where to place a mark. The
search number is specified by x. The search condition must be set to TOKEN.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:SOFFRAMENUMber <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:SOFFRAMENUMber?

Arguments <QString> specifies the frame number string for the Start of Frame in a valid
format (binary, hexadecimal, or symbolic).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:SOFFRAMENUMBER "1001" sets

the frame number string for the SOF for USB bus trigger search 1 to "1001" in
symbolic format.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:SOFFRAMENUMBER? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:SOFFRAMENUMBER
"xxxxxxx1001", indicating that the frame number string for the SOF for USB
bus trigger search 1 is set to "XXXXXXX1001" in binary format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:SPECIALType
This command sets or queries the USB search type for the specified USB bus
trigger search to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified
by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:SPECIALType
{ANY|ERROr|PING|PREamble|RESERVed|SPLit}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:SPECIALType?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1563

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments ANY specifies the PID value as Any (XX00).

ERROr specifies the PID value as ERR (1100).

PING specifies the PID value as PING (0100).

PREamble specifies the PID value as PRE (1100).

RESERVed specifies the PID value as Reserved (0000).

SPLit specifies the PID value as Split (1000).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:SPECIALTYPE ERROR sets the PID

value for USB bus trigger search 1 to ERROR.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:SPECIALTYPE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:SPECIALTYPE SPLIT, indicating
that the PID value for USB bus trigger search 1 is set to SPLIT.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:ET:VALue
This command sets or queries the Endpoint Type value for the specified USB
bus trigger search on split token field to determine where to place a mark. The
search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:ET:VALue
{BULK|CONTROL|NOCARE|INTERRUPT|ISOchronous}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:ET:VALue?

Arguments BULK specifies the Endpoint Type value as Bulk (10).

CONTROL specifies the Endpoint Type value as Control (00).

NOCARE specifies the Endpoint Type value as Don’t Care.

INTERRUPT specifies the Endpoint Type value as Interrupt (11).

ISOchronous specifies the Endpoint Type value as Isochronous (01).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:ET:VALUE BULK sets the

Endpoint Type value for USB bus trigger search 1 to Bulk.

2-1564 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:ET:VALUE? might return

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:ET:VALUE DONTCARE,
indicating that the Endpoint Type value for USB bus trigger search 1 is set to
DONTCare.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:HUB:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary hub address value to be used when
searching on a USB bus signal. The search number is specified by x. The search
condition must be set to Special with packet type SPLIT.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:HUB:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:HUB:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the hub address. The valid characters are .

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:HUB:VALUE "1001" sets

the hub address to "XXX1001".
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:HUB:VALUE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:HUB:VALUE "XX" (for
binary format), indicating that the hub address for the USB bus trigger search
on split token field is "XX".

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:PORT:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary port address used when searching on a
USB bus signal. The search number is specified by x. The search condition must
be set to Special with a packet type SPLIT.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1565

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:PORT:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:PORT:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the port address in the valid format. The valid characters are

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:PORT:VALUE "1111" sets

the port address for USB bus trigger search 1 to "XXX1111" for binary format.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:PORT:VALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:PORT:VALUE "XX",
indicating that the port address for USB hub trigger search 1 is set to "XX"
in hexadecimal format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:SC:VALue
This command sets or queries the Start/Complete value for the specified USB
bus trigger on split token field search to determine where to place a mark. The
search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:SC:VALue
{CSPLIT|NOCARE|SSPLIT}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:SC:VALue?

Arguments CSPLIT specifies Complete (CSPLIT)(1) Start/Complete value.

NOCARE specifies the Start/Complete value as Don’t Care (X).

SSPLIT specifies Start (SSPLIT) (0) Start/Complete value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:SC:VALUE DONTCARE sets

the Start/Complete value for USB bus trigger search 1 to DONTCare.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:SC:VALUE? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:SC:VALUE SSPLIT,
indicating that the Start/Complete value for USB bus trigger search 2 is set to
SSPLIT.

2-1566 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:SE:VALue
This command sets or queries the Start/End value for the specified USB bus
trigger on split token field search to determine where to place a mark. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:SE:VALue
{NOCARE|FULLSPEED|ISOALL|ISOEND|ISOMID|ISOSTART|LOWSPEED}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:SE:VALue?

Arguments NOCARE specifies Don’t Care (X) Start/End bit value.

FULLSPEED specifies Control/Bulk/Interrupt Full Speed device (0X) Start/End

bit value.
ISOALL specifies Isochronous Data is All (11) Start/End bit value.

ISOEND specifies Isochronous Data is End (01) Start/End bit value.

ISOMID specifies Isochronous Data is Middle (00) Start/End bit value.

ISOSTART specifies Isochronous Data is Start (10) Start/End bit value.

LOWSPEED specifies Control/Bulk/Interrupt Low Speed device (1X) Start/End

bit value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:SE:VALUE ISOSTART sets

the Start/End value for USB bus trigger on split token field search 1 to ISOSTART.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:SE:VALUE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:SPLIT:SE:VALUE DONTCARE,
indicating that the Start/End value for USB bus trigger on split token field search
1 is set to DONTCare.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:TOKENType
This command sets or queries the token type used to search a USB bus signal.
The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1567

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:TOKENType
{ANY|IN|OUT|SETUP|SOF}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:TOKENType?

Arguments ANY specifies the token type as Any (XX01).

IN specifies the token type as IN (1001).

OUT specifies the token type as OUT (0001).

SETUP specifies the token type as SETUP (1101).

SOF specifies the token type as Start Of Frame (0101).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:TOKENTYPE IN sets the token type

for USB bus trigger search 1 to IN.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:TOKENTYPE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:USB:TOKENTYPE SOF, indicating that the
token type for USB bus trigger search 1 is set to Start Of Frame.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTDETectmethod
This command sets or queries the DDRRead search burst detection method.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTDETectmethod
{DQDQS|ChipSelect|LogicState}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTDETectmethod?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:STANdard

2-1568 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments DQDQS sets the burst detection method to DQDQS.

ChipSelect sets the burst detection method to ChipSelect.

LogicState sets the burst detection method to LogicState.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTDETectmethod DQDQS sets

the burst detection method as DQ/DQS Phase alignment.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTDETectmethod? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTDETectmethod
DQDQS indicating that the DDR read burst detection method is DQDQS.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTLatency
This command sets or queries the DDR read logic state burst latency value.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Logic State".

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTLatency <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTLatency?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

NR3 sets the logic state burst latency value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTLatency 500E-3 sets the

DDRREAD burst latency value of search 1 to .005.
SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTLatency? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTLatency 500E-3, indicating
that the DDRREAD logic burst latency value is set to 500E-3 for search 3.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1569

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTLENGTH
This command sets or queries the DDR read logic state burst length value.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Logic State".

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTLENGTH <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTLENGTH?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

NR1 sets the logic state burst length value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTLENGTH 10 sets the

DDRREAD logic state burst length value of search 3 to 10 bursts.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTLENGTH? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTLENGTH 8, indicating that the
DDRREAD logic state burst length value is set to 8 bursts for search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSActive
This command sets or queries the DDR Read chip select active state.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Chip Select"

2-1570 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSActive {LOW|HIGH}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSActive?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

LOW sets the DDR read chip select active state to low.

HIGH sets the DDR read chip select active state to high.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSActive LOW sets the DDRREAD

chip select active to LOW for search 2.
SEARCH:SEARCH4:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSActive? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH4:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSActive HIGH, indicating the
DDRREAD chip select active value for search 4 is set to HIGH.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSLevel
This command sets or queries the DDR Read chip select level value.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Chip Select"

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSLevel <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSLevel?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTDETectmethod

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSMode

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1571

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

NR3 sets the DDR read chip select level value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSLevel 2.8E-3 sets the

DDRREAD chip select level value to 2.8E-3
SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSLevel? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSLevel 2.8E-3, indicating
DDRREAD search chip select level value for search 5 is set to 2.8E-3

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSMode
This command sets or queries the DDR Read chip select mode.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Chip Select"

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSMode {Auto|Manual}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSMode?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

Auto sets the DDR read chip select mode to auto.

Manual sets the DDR read chip select mode to manual. Use the Related
Commands to set the Reference levels when in Manual mode.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSMode MANUAL sets the

DDRREAD search chip select mode to Manual for search 2.
SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSMode? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSMode Manual, indicating that the
DDRREAD search 3 chip select mode is set to manual.

2-1572 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSSource
This command sets or queries the DDR Read search chip select source.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Chip Select".

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSSource
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSSource?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

CH<x> specifies channel <x> as the DDR read chip select source for the specified
search <x>.
CH<x>_D<x> specifies digital waveform <x> of channel <x> as the DDR read
strobe source for the specified search <x>.
MATH<x> specifies math waveform <x> as the DDR read chip select source for
the specified search <x>.
REF<x> specifies reference waveform <x> as the DDR read chip select source
for the specified search <x>.
REF<x>_D<x> specifies digital waveform <x> of reference waveform <x> as the
DDR read strobe source for the specified search <x>.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSSource CH2 sets the search 5

chip select source waveform to CH2 for DDR Read search.
SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSSource? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:CSSource CH2, indicating that
Channel 2 waveform is the source for the DDRRead chip select source of search 3.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1573

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:DATARate
This command sets or queries the DDR read search data rate for DDR3 and
LPDRR3 standards of the specified search.
The DDR3 standard supports the following data rates:
800|1066|1333|1600|1866|2133.
The LPDDR3 standard supports the following data rates:
333|800|1066|1200|1333|1466|1600|1866|2133.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:DATARate
{333|800|1066|1200|1333|1466|1600|1866|2133}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:DATARate?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:STANdard

Arguments 333 sets the data rate to 333.

800 sets the data rate to 800.

1066 sets the data rate to 1066.

1200 sets the data rate to 1200.

1333 sets the data rate to 1333.

1466 sets the data rate to 1466.

1600 sets the data rate to 1600.

1866 sets the data rate to 1866.

2133 sets the data rate to 2133.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:DATARate 1333 sets the data rate to

1333 for DDR read Search 2.

2-1574 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:DATARate? might return

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:DATARate 800 indicating that the
data rate for DDR read Search 1 is 800.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:DATASource
This command sets or queries the DDR read data source when the search type is
DDR READ.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3

Requires 6 Series MSO instrument
Load a reference waveform on the instrument before using this command to set
the search data source to a reference waveform.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:DATASource
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:DATASource?

Arguments CH<x> specifies channel <x> as the DDR read data source for the specified search
<x>.
CH<x>_D<x> specifies digital waveform <x> of channel <x> as the DDR read
data source for the specified search <x>.
MATH<x> specifies math waveform <x> as the DDR read data source for the
specified search <x>.
REF<x> specifies reference waveform <x> as the DDR read data source for the
specified search <x>.
REF<x>_D<x> specifies digital waveform <x> of reference waveform <x> as the
DDR read data source for the specified search <x>.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRREAD:DATASource CH2 sets the source

waveform for the A trigger to Channel 2.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRREAD:DATASource? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRREAD:DATASource REF1, indicating that
the Reference waveform 1 DDR read trigger data is the source for search 1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1575

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:HYSteresis
This command sets or queries the DDR read hysteresis reference level value,
when the search type is DDR READ.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR read reference level mode to Manual before using this command.
See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:HYSteresis <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:HYSteresis?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLEVELMode

Arguments NR3 sets the DDR read search hysteresis percent value in the range of 0% to 50%.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:HYSteresis 15 sets the DDR read

search hysteresis value to 15%.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:HYSteresis? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:HYSteresis 10, indicating that the
DDR read search hysteresis value is set to 10%.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:LOGIC1SOUrce:SYMBol
This command sets or queries the DDR read logic source 1 symbol.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Logic State".

Group Search and Mark

2-1576 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:LOGIC1SOUrce:SYMBol
{H|L|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:LOGIC1SOUrce:SYMBol?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

H sets the logic source 1 symbol to H (High).

L sets the logic source 1 symbol to L (Low).

X sets the logic source 1 symbol to X (Don’t care).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:LOGIC1SOUrce:SYMBol X sets the

DDRREAD logic source 1 symbol of search 3 to X (don’t care).
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:LOGIC1SOUrce:SYMBol? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:LOGIC1SOUrce:SYMBol L,
indicating that the DDRREAD logic source 1 symbol is set to Low for search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:LOGIC2SOUrce:SYMBol
This command sets or queries the DDR read logic source 2 symbol.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Logic State".

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:LOGIC2SOUrce:SYMBol
{H|L|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:LOGIC2SOUrce:SYMBol?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTDETectmethod

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1577

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

H sets the logic source 2 symbol to H (High).

L sets the logic source 2 symbol to L (Low).

X sets the logic source 2 symbol to X (Don’t care).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:LOGIC2SOUrce:SYMBol X sets the

DDRREAD logic source 2 symbol of search 3 to X (don’t care)
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:LOGIC2SOUrce:SYMBol? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:LOGIC2SOUrce:SYMBol L,
indicating that the DDRREAD logic source 2 symbol is set to Low for search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:LOGIC3SOUrce:SYMBol
This command sets or queries the DDR read logic source 3 symbol.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Logic State".

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:LOGIC3SOUrce:SYMBol
{H|L|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:LOGIC3SOUrce:SYMBol?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

H sets the logic source 3 symbol to H (High).

L sets the logic source 3 symbol to L (Low).

X sets the logic source 3 symbol to X (Don’t care).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:LOGIC3SOUrce:SYMBol X sets the

DDRREAD logic source 3 symbol of search 3 to X (don’t care)

2-1578 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:LOGIC3SOUrce:SYMBol? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:LOGIC3SOUrce:SYMBol L,
indicating that the DDRREAD logic source 3 symbol is set to Low for search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:LOGIC4SOUrce:SYMBol
This command sets or queries the DDR read logic source 4 symbol.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Logic State".

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:LOGIC4SOUrce:SYMBol
{H|L|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:LOGIC4SOUrce:SYMBol?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

H sets the logic source 4 symbol to H (High).

L sets the logic source 4 symbol to L (Low).

X sets the logic source 4 symbol to X (Don’t care).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:LOGIC4SOUrce:SYMBol X sets the

DDRREAD logic source 4 symbol of search 3 to X (don’t care)
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:LOGIC4SOUrce:SYMBol? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:LOGIC4SOUrce:SYMBol L,
indicating that the DDRREAD logic source 4 symbol is set to Low for search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:MARgin
This command sets or queries the DDR read margin reference level value, when
the search type is DDR READ.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1579

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR read reference level mode to Manual before using this command.
See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:MARgin <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:MARgin?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLEVELMode

Arguments NR3 sets the DDR read search margin percent value in the range of 0% to 100%.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:MARgin 12 sets the DDR read

search margin value to 12%.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:MARgin? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:MARgin 10, indicating that the DDR
read search margin value is set to 10%.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:MAXCAS
This command sets or queries the DDR read chip maximum Column Access
Strobe (CAS) value.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Chip Select"

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:MAXCAS <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:MAXCAS?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTDETectmethod

2-1580 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

NR3 sets the DDR read chip select CAS maximum value.

Examples EARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:MAXCas 3.8E-3 sets the DDR read

chip select CAS maximum value to 3.8 milliseconds for search 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH7:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:MAXCas? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH7:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:MAXCas 3.8E-3, indicating that the
DDR read chip select CAS maximum value is set to 3.8 milliseconds for search 7.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:MINCas
This command sets or queries the DDR read chip minimum Column Access
Strobe (CAS) value.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Chip Select"

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:MINCas <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:MINCas?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

NR3 sets the DDR read chip select CAS minimum value.

Examples EARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:MINCas 3.8E-3 sets the DDR read

chip select CAS minimum value to 3.8 milliseconds for search 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH7:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:MINCas? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH7:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:MINCas 3.8E-3, indicating that the
DDR read chip select CAS minimum value is set to 3.8 milliseconds for search 7.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1581

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:POSTAMBLE:LENGth
This command sets or queries the DDR read postamble length when the search
type is DDR READ.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:POSTAMBLE:LENGth
{500E-3|500E-1.5|500E-1}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:POSTAMBLE:LENGth?

Arguments 500E-1.5 sets the postamble length to 1.5 tCK (number of clock cycles).

500E-1 sets the postamble length to 1 tCK (number of clock cycles).

500E-3 sets the postamble length to 0.5 tCK (number of clock cycles).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:POSTAMBLE:LENGth 500E-3 sets

the DDR read postamble length for Search 2 to 0.5 tCK.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:POSTAMBLE:LENGth? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:POSTAMBLE:LENGth 500E-1,
indicating that the read postamble length for Search 1 is set to 1 tCK.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:PREAMBLE:TYPE
This command sets or queries the DDR read preamble type when the search type
is DDR READ.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:PREAMBLE:TYPE
{STATIC|DYNAMIC}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:PREAMBLE:TYPE?

2-1582 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments STATIC sets the DDR Read preamble type to Static.

DYNAMIC sets the DDR Read preamble type to Dynamic.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:PREAMBLE:TYPE STATIC sets the

DDR read preamble type to Static for Search 2.
SEARCH:SEARCH4:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:PREAMBLE:TYPE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH4:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:PREAMBLE:TYPE DYNAMIC,
indicating that the DDR read preamble type for Search 4 is set to dynamic mode.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:HIGH
This command sets or queries the DDR read data high reference level value,
when the search type is DDR READ.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR read reference level mode to Manual before using this command.
See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:HIGH <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:HIGH?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLEVELMode

Arguments NR3 sets the DDR read search data high reference value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:HIGH 3.8E-3

sets the DDR read search data high reference value.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:HIGH? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:HIGH
50E-3, indicating that the DDR read search data high reference value is set to
50E-3.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1583

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:LOW
This command sets or queries the DDR read data low reference level value, when
the search type is DDR READ.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR read reference level mode to Manual before using this command.
See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:LOW <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:LOW?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLEVELMode

Arguments NR3 sets the DDR read search data low reference value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:LOW 3.8E-3 sets

the DDR read search data low reference value.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:LOW? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:LOW 50E-3,
indicating that the DDR read search data low reference value is set to 50E-3.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:MID
This command sets or queries the DDR read data mid reference level value, when
the search type is DDR READ.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR read reference level mode to Manual before using this command.
See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

2-1584 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:MID <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:MID?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLEVELMode

Arguments NR3 sets the DDR read search data mid reference value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:MID 3.8E-3 sets

the DDR read search data mid reference value.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:MID? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:MID 50E-3,
indicating that the DDR read search data mid reference value is set to 50E-3.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:STROBE:HIGH
This command sets or queries the DDR read reference level strobe high value,
when the search type is DDR READ.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR read reference level mode to Manual before using this command.
See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:STROBE:HIGH
<NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:STROBE:HIGH?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLEVELMode

Arguments NR3 sets the DDR read search strobe high value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:STROBE:HIGH 3.8E-3

sets the DDR read search strobe high value.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:STROBE:HIGH? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:STROBE:HIGH
50E-3, indicating that the DDR read search strobe high value is set to 50E-3.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1585

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:STROBE:LOW
This command sets or queries the DDR read reference level strobe low value,
when the search type is DDR READ.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR read reference level mode to Manual before using this command.
See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:STROBE:LOW <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:STROBE:LOW?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLEVELMode

Arguments NR3 sets the DDR read search strobe low reference value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:STROBE:LOW 3.8E-3

sets the DDR read search strobe low reference value.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:STROBE:LOW? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:STROBE:MID
50E-3, indicating that the DDR read search strobe low reference value is set
to 50E-3.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:STROBE:MID
This command sets or queries the DDR read reference level strobe mid value,
when the search type is DDR READ.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR read reference level mode to Manual before using this command.
See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

2-1586 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:STROBE:MID <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:STROBE:MID?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLEVELMode

Arguments NR3 sets the DDR read search strobe mid reference value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:STROBE:MID 3.8E-3

sets the DDR read search strobe mid reference value.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:STROBE:MID? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:STROBE:MID
50E-3, indicating that the DDR read search strobe mid reference value is set
to 50E-3.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLEVELMode
This command sets or queries the DDR read reference level mode to auto or
manual, when the search type is DDR READ.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLEVELMode
{AUTO|MANUAL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLEVELMode?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:HIGH

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:LOW
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:MID

Arguments AUTO sets the DDR read reference level mode to auto.

MANUAL sets the DDR read reference level mode to manual. Use the Related
Commands to set the Reference levels when in Manual mode.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1587

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLEVELMode MANUAL sets the

DDR read search reference level mode to Manual for Search 3.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLEVELMode? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLEVELMode MANUAL, indicating
that the DDR read search reference level mode set to automatic for Search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:STANdard
This command sets or queries the DDR read search standard as DDR3 or
LPDDR3.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3

Requires 6 Series MSO instrument

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:STANdard {DDR3|LPDDR3}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:STANdard?

Arguments DDR3 sets the DDR read search standard as DDR3.

LPDDR3 sets the DDR read search standard as LPDDR3.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:STANdard DDR3 sets the DDR

standard to DDR3 for DDR read Search 2.
SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:STANdard? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:STANdard LPDDR3, indicating that
the DDR standard is set to LPDDR3 for DDR read Search 5.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:STROBESource
This command sets or queries the DDR read strobe source when the search type is
DDR READ.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3

Requires 6 Series MSO instrument
Load a reference waveform on the instrument before using this command to set
the search data source to a reference waveform.

2-1588 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:STROBESource
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:STROBESource?

Arguments CH<x> specifies channel <x> as the DDR read strobe trigger source for the
specified search <x>.
CH<x>_D<x> specifies digital waveform <x> of channel <x> as the DDR read
strobe trigger source for the specified search <x>.
MATH<x> specifies math waveform <x> as the DDR read strobe trigger source
for the specified search <x>.
REF<x> specifies reference waveform <x> as the DDR read strobe trigger source
for the specified search <x>.
REF<x>_D<x> specifies digital waveform <x> of reference waveform <x> as the
DDR read strobe trigger source for the specified search <x>.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGGER:A:DDRREAD:STROBESource MAT25 sets the

Search 3 source waveform to Math 2 for the DDR read strobe search.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRREAD:STROBESource? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRREAD:STROBESource CH3, indicating that
the Channel 3 waveform is the source for the DDR read strobe of Search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:TOLERance
This command sets or queries the DDR read logic state tolerance value.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Logic State".

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:TOLERance <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:TOLERance?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1589

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

NR3 sets the logic state tolerance value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:TOLERance 400E-3 sets the

DDRREAD logic state tolerance value of search 3 to .004.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:TOLERance? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:TOLERance 500E-3, indicating that
the DDRREAD logic state tolerance value is set to 500E-3 for search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod
This command sets or queries the DDR Read/Write search burst detection method.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod
{DQDQS|ChipSelect|LogicState}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:STANdard

Arguments DQDQS sets the read/write burst detection method to DQDQS.

ChipSelect sets the read/write burst detection method to ChipSelect.

LogicState sets the read/write burst detection method to LogicState.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod
DQDQS sets the burst detection method as Logic state + burst latency

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

2-1590 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

LogicState, indicating that the DDR ReadWrite burst detection

method is Logic state + burst latency.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTLatency
This command sets or queries the DDR read/write logic state burst latency value.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Logic State".

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTLatency <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTLatency?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

NR3 sets the logic state burst latency value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTLatency 500E-3 sets

the DDRREADWRITE burst latency value of search 1 to .005.
SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTLatency? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTLatency
500E-3, indicating that the DDRREADWRITE logic burst latency value is set
to 500E-3 for search 3.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTLENGTH
This command sets or queries the DDR read/write logic state burst length value.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1591

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Logic State".

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTLENGTH <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTLENGTH?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

NR1 sets the logic state burst length value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTLENGTH 10 sets the

DDRREADWRITE logic state burst length value of search 3 to 10 bursts.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTLENGTH? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTLENGTH 8, indicating
that the DDRREADWRITE logic state burst length value is set to 8 bursts for
search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSActive
This command sets or queries the DDR Read/Write chip select active state.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Chip Select"

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSActive {LOW|HIGH}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSActive?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

2-1592 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

LOW sets the DDR read/write chip select active state to low.

HIGH sets the DDR read/write chip select active state to high.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSActive LOW sets the

DDRREADWRITE chip select active to LOW.
SEARCH:SEARCH4:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSActive? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH4:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSActive HIGH, indicating
the DDRREADWRITE search chip select active value for search 4 is set to HIGH.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSLevel
This command sets or queries the DDR Read/Write chip select level value.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Chip Select"

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSLevel <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSLevel?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSMode

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

NR3 sets the DDR read/write chip select level value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSLevel 2.8E-3 sets the

DDR read/write chip select level value to 2.8E-3.
SEARCH:SEARCH4:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSLevel? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH4:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSLevel 2.8E-3, indicating
the DDR read/write search chip select level value for search 4 is set to 2.8E-3.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1593

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSMode
This command sets or queries the DDR read/write chip select mode.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Chip Select"

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSMode {Auto|Manual}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSMode?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

Auto sets the DDR read/write chip select mode to auto.

Manual sets the DDR read/write chip select mode to manual. Use the Related
Commands to set the Reference levels when in Manual mode.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH4:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSMode AUTO sets the DDR

read/write search chip select mode to Auto for search 4.
SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSMode? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSMode Manual, indicating
that the DDR read/write chip select mode is set to manual for search 3.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSSource
This command sets or queries the DDR Read/Write search chip select source.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Chip Select".

2-1594 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSSource
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|Math<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSSource?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

CH<x> specifies channel <x> as the DDR read/write chip select source for the
specified search <x>.
CH<x>_D<x> specifies digital waveform <x> of channel <x> as the DDR
read/write strobe source for the specified search <x>.
MATH<x> specifies math waveform <x> as the DDR read/write chip select source
for the specified search <x>.
REF<x> specifies reference waveform <x> as the DDR read/write chip select
source for the specified search <x>.
REF<x>_D<x> specifies digital waveform <x> of reference waveform <x> as the
DDR read/write strobe source for the specified search <x>.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSSource CH2 sets the

search 3 chip select source waveform to CH2 for the specified DDR read/write
search.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSSource? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:CSSource CH2, indicating
that the Channel 2 waveform is the source for the DDR read/write chip select
source of search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:DATARate
This command sets or queries the DDR read/write data rate for DDR3 and
LPDRR3 standards of the specified search.
The DDR3 standard supports the following data rates:
800|1066|1333|1600|1866|2133.
The LPDDR3 standard supports the following data rates:
333|800|1066|1200|1333|1466|1600|1866|2133.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1595

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.

Set the DDR Read/Write standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this
command. See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:DATARate
{333|800|1066|1200|1333|1466|1600|1866|2133}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:DATARate?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:STANdard

Arguments 333 sets the data rate to 333.

800 sets the data rate to 800.

1066 sets the data rate to 1066.

1200 sets the data rate to 1200.

1333 sets the data rate to 1333.

1466 sets the data rate to 1466.

1600 sets the data rate to 1600.

1866 sets the data rate to 1866.

2133 sets the data rate to 2133.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:DATARate 1333 sets the data

rate to 1333 for DDR read Search 2.
SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:DATARate? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:DATARate 1466 indicating
that the data rate for DDR read Search 5 is 1466.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:DATASource
This command sets or queries the DDR read/write data source when the search
type is DDR READWRITE.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3

Requires 6 Series MSO instrument

2-1596 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Load a reference waveform on the instrument before using this command to set
the search data source to a reference waveform.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:DATASource
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:DATASource?

Arguments CH<x> specifies channel <x> as the DDR read/write data source for the specified
search <x>.
CH<x>_D<x> specifies digital waveform <x> of channel <x> as the DDR
read/write data source for the specified search <x>.
MATH<x> specifies math waveform <x> as the DDR read/write data source for the
specified search <x>.
REF<x> specifies reference waveform <x> as the DDR read/write data source
for the specified search <x>.
REF<x>_D<x> specifies digital waveform <x> of reference waveform <x> as the
DDR read/write data source for the specified search <x>.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGGER:A:DDRREADWRITE:DATASource CH2 sets the

source waveform of Search 3 to Channel 2 for the DDR read/write search.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRREADWRITE:DATASource? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRREADWRITE:DATASource CH2, indicating
that the Channel 2 waveform is the source for the DDR read/write data of Search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:HYSteresis
This command sets or queries the DDR read/write hysteresis reference level
value, when the search type is DDR READWRITE.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR read/write reference level mode to Manual before using this
command. See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1597

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:HYSteresis <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:HYSteresis?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLEVELMode

Arguments NR3 sets the DDR read/write search hysteresis percent value in the range of 0%
to 50%.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:HYSteresis 10 sets the

DDR read/write search hysteresis value to 10%.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAWRITE:HYSteresis? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:HYSteresis 5, indicating
that the DDR read/write search hysteresis value is set to 5%.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC1SOUrce:SYMBol
This command sets or queries the DDR read/write logic source 1 symbol.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Logic State".

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC1SOUrce:SYMBol
{H|L|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC1SOUrce:SYMBol?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

H sets the logic source 1 symbol to H (High).

L sets the logic source 1 symbol to L (Low).

X sets the logic source 1 symbol to X (Don’t care).

2-1598 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC1SOUrce:SYMBol X
sets the DDRREADWRITE logic source 1 symbol of search 3 to X (don’t care)
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC1SOUrce:SYMBol?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC1SOUrce:SYMBol L,
indicating that the DDRREADWRITE logic source 1 symbol is set to Low
for search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC2SOUrce:SYMBol
This command sets or queries the DDR read/write logic source 2 symbol.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Logic State".

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC2SOUrce:SYMBol
{H|L|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC2SOUrce:SYMBol?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

H sets the logic source 2 symbol to H (High).

L sets the logic source 2 symbol to L (Low).

X sets the logic source 2 symbol to X (Don’t care).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC2SOUrce:SYMBol X
sets the DDRREADWRITE logic source 2 symbol of search 3 to X (don’t care)
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC2SOUrce:SYMBol?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC2SOUrce:SYMBol L,
indicating that the DDRREADWRITE logic source 2 symbol is set to Low
for search 1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1599

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC3SOUrce:SYMBol
This command sets or queries the DDR read/write logic source 3 symbol.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Logic State".

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC3SOUrce:SYMBol
{H|L|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC3SOUrce:SYMBol?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

H sets the logic source 3 symbol to H (High).

L sets the logic source 3 symbol to L (Low).

X sets the logic source 3 symbol to X (Don’t care).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC3SOUrce:SYMBol X
sets the DDRREADWRITE logic source 3 symbol of search 3 to X (don’t care)
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC3SOUrce:SYMBol?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC3SOUrce:SYMBol L,
indicating that the DDRREADWRITE logic source 3 symbol is set to Low
for search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC4SOUrce:SYMBol
This command sets or queries the DDR read/write logic source 4 symbol.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.

2-1600 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Logic State".

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC4SOUrce:SYMBol
{H|L|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC4SOUrce:SYMBol?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

H sets the logic source 4 symbol to H (High).

L sets the logic source 4 symbol to L (Low).

X sets the logic source 4 symbol to X (Don’t care).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC4SOUrce:SYMBol X
sets the DDRREADWRITE logic source 4 symbol of search 3 to X (don’t care)
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC4SOUrce:SYMBol?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC4SOUrce:SYMBol L,
indicating that the DDRREADWRITE logic source 4 symbol is set to Low
for search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:MARgin
This command sets or queries the DDR read/write margin reference level value,
when the search type is DDR READWRITE.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR read/write reference level mode to Manual before using this
command. See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1601

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:MARgin <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:MARgin?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLEVELMode

Arguments NR3 sets the DDR read/write search margin percent value in the range of 0%
to 100%.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:MARgin 15 sets the DDR

read/write search margin value to 15%.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAWRITE:MARgin? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:MARgin 10, indicating that
the DDR read/write search margin value is set to 10%.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:MAXCAS
This command sets or queries the DDR read/write chip maximum Column Access
Strobe (CAS) value.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Chip Select"

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:MAXCAS <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:MAXCAS?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

NR3 sets the DDR read chip select CAS maximum value.

Examples EARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:MAXCAS 3.8E-3 sets the DDR

read chip select CAS maximum value to 3.8 milliseconds for search 1.

2-1602 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:MAXCAS? might return

SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:MAXCAS 2.1E-3, indicating
that the DDR read chip select CAS maximum value is set to 2.1 milliseconds
for search 5.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:MINCas
This command sets or queries the DDR read/write chip minimum Column Access
Strobe (CAS) value.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Chip Select"

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:MINCas <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:MINCas?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

NR3 sets the DDR read chip select CAS minimum value.

Examples EARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:MINCas 3.8E-3 sets the DDR

read chip select CAS minimum value to 3.8 milliseconds for search 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:MINCas? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:MINCas 2.1E-3, indicating
that the DDR read chip select CAS minimum value is set to 2.1 milliseconds
for search 5.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:POSTAMBLE:LENGth
This command sets or queries the DDR read/write postamble length when the
search type is DDR READWRITE.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1603

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:POSTAMBLE:LENGth
{500E-3|500E-1.5|500E-1}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:POSTAMBLE:LENGth?

Arguments 500E-1.5 sets the postamble length to 1.5 tCK (number of clock cycles).

500E-1 sets the postamble length to 1 tCK (number of clock cycles).

500E-3 sets the postamble length to 0.5 tCK (number of clock cycles).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:POSTAMBLE:LENGth
500E-1.5 sets the DDR read/write postamble length for Search 3 to 1.5 tCK.

SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:POSTAMBLE:LENGth? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:POSTAMBLE:LENGth
500E-1, indicating that the read/write postamble length for Search 2 is set to 1
tCK.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:PREAMBLE:TYPE
This command sets or queries the DDR read/write preamble type when the search
type is DDR READWRITE.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:PREAMBLE:TYPE
{STATIC|DYNAMIC}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:PREAMBLE:TYPE?

Arguments STATIC sets the DDR Read/Write preamble type to Static.

DYNAMIC sets the DDR Read/Write preamble type to Dynamic.

2-1604 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:PREAMBLE:TYPE STATIC

sets the search 2 DDR read preamble type to Static.
SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:PREAMBLE:TYPE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:PREAMBLE:TYPE
DYNAMIC, indicating that the DDR read/write preamble type for Search 5 is set
to dynamic mode.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:HIGH
This command sets or queries the DDR read/write data high reference level value,
when the search type is DDR READWRITE.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR read/write reference level mode to Manual before using this
command. See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:HIGH
<NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:HIGH?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLEVELMode

Arguments NR3 sets the DDR read/write search data high reference value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:HIGH
3.8E-3 sets the DDR read/write search data high reference value.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:HIGH?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:HIGH
50E-3, indicating that the DDR read/write search data high reference value is
set to 50E-3.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:LOW
This command sets or queries the DDR read/write data low reference level value,
when the search type is DDR READWRITE.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1605

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR read/write reference level mode to Manual before using this
command. See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:LOW
<NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:LOW?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLEVELMode

Arguments NR3 sets the DDR read/write search data low reference value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:LOW
3.8E-3 sets the DDR read/write search data low reference value.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:LOW? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:LOW
50E-3, indicating that the DDR read/write search data low reference value is
set to 50E-3.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:MID
This command sets or queries the DDR read/write data mid reference level value,
when the search type is DDR READWRITE.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR read/write reference level mode to Manual before using this
command. See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:MID
<NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:MID?

2-1606 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLEVELMode

Arguments NR3 sets the DDR read/write search data mid reference value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:MID
3.8E-3 sets the DDR read/write search data mid reference value.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:MID? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:MID
50E-3, indicating that the DDR read/write search data mid reference value is
set to 50E-3.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:HIGH
This command sets or queries the DDR read/write reference level strobe high
value, when the search type is DDR READWRITE.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR read/write reference level mode to Manual before using this
command. See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:HIGH
<NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:
HIGH?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLEVELMode

Arguments NR3 sets the DDR read search strobe high value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:HIGH
3.8E-3 sets the DDR read/write search strobe high value.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:HIGH?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:HIGH
50E-3, indicating that the DDR read/write search strobe high value is set to 50E-3.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1607

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:LOW
This command sets or queries the DDR read/write reference level strobe low
value, when the search type is DDR READWRITE.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR read/write reference level mode to Manual before using this
command. See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:LOW
<NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:LOW?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLEVELMode

Arguments NR3 sets the DDR read/write search strobe low reference value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:LOW
3.8E-3 sets the DDR read/write search strobe low reference value.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:LOW?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:LOW
50E-3, indicating that the DDR read/write search strobe low reference value is
set to 50E-3.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:MID
This command sets or queries the DDR read/write reference level strobe mid
value, when the search type is DDR READWRITE.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR read/write reference level mode to Manual before using this
command. See Related Commands.

2-1608 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:MID
<NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:MID?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLEVELMode

Arguments NR3 sets the DDR read/write search strobe mid reference value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:MID
3.8E-3 sets the DDR read/write search strobe mid reference value.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREAWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:MID?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:MID
50E-3, indicating that the DDR read/write search strobe mid reference value is
set to 50E-3.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLEVELMode
This command sets or queries the DDR read/write reference level mode to auto or
manual, when the search type is DDR READWRITE.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLEVELMode
{AUTO|MANUAL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLEVELMode?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:HIGH

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:LOW
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:MID

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1609

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments AUTO sets the DDR read/write reference level mode to auto.

MANUAL sets the DDR read/write reference level mode to manual. Use the Related
Commands to set the Reference levels when in Manual mode.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLEVELMode MANUAL sets

the DDR read/write search reference level mode to Manual for Search 3.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLEVELMode? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:REFLEVELMode
MANUAL, indicating that the DDR read/write search reference level mode set to
automatic for Search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:STANdard
This command sets or queries the DDR read/write search standard as DDR3
or LPDDR3.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:STANdard
{DDR3|LPDDR3}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:STANdard?

Arguments DDR3 sets the DDR read/write search standard as DDR3.

LPDDR3 sets the DDR read/write search standard as LPDDR3.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:STANdard DDR3 sets the

DDR standard to DDR3 for DDR read/write Search 2.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:STANdard? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:STANdard LPDDR3
indicating that the DDR standard is set to LPDDR3 for DDR read/write Search 2.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:STROBESource
This command sets or queries the DDR readwrite strobe source when the search
type is DDR READWRITE.

2-1610 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Load a reference waveform on the instrument before using this command to set
the search data source to a reference waveform.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:STROBESource
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:STROBESource?

Arguments CH<x> specifies channel <x> as the DDR read/write strobe source for the specified
search <x>.
CH<x>_D<x> specifies digital waveform <x> of channel <x> as the DDR
read/write strobe source for the specified search <x>.
MATH<x> specifies math waveform <x> as the DDR read/write strobe source
for the specified search <x>.
REF<x> specifies reference waveform <x> as the DDR read/write strobe source
for the specified search <x>.
REF<x>_D<x> specifies digital waveform <x> of reference waveform <x> as the
DDR read/write strobe source for the specified search <x>.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGGER:A:DDRREADWRITE:STROBESource CH8 sets the

Search 5 source waveform to Channel 8 for the DDR read/write strobe search.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRREADWRITE:STROBESource? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRREADWRITE:STROBESource CH3,
indicating that the Channel 3 waveform is the source for the DDR read/write
strobe of Search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:TOLERance
This command sets or queries the DDR read/write logic state tolerance value.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1611

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Set burst detection method as "Logic State".

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:TOLERance <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:TOLERance?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

NR3 sets the logic state tolerance value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:TOLERance 400E-3 sets the

DDRREADWRITE logic state tolerance value of search 1 to .004.
SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:TOLERance? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:TOLERance 500E-3,
indicating that the DDRREADWRITE logic state tolerance value is set to 500E-3
for search 3.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod
This command sets or queries the DDRWRITE search burst detection method.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod
{DQDQS|ChipSelect|LogicState}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREADWRITE:STANdard

2-1612 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments DQDQS sets the write burst detection method to DQDQS.

ChipSelect sets the write burst detection method to ChipSelect.

LogicState sets the write burst detection method to LogicState.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod
ChipSelect sets the burst detection method as ChipSelect, Latency + DQ/DQS
Phase alignment.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod
ChipSelect, indicating that the DDR Write burst detection method is ChipSelect.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTLatency
This command sets or queries the DDR write logic state burst latency value.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Logic State".

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTLatency <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTLatency?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

NR3 sets the logic state burst latency value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTLatency 500E-3 sets the

burst latency value of search 1 to .005.
SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTLatency? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTLatency 500E-3,
indicating that the DDRWRITE logic burst latency value is set to 500E-3 for
search 3.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1613

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTLENGTH
This command sets or queries the DDR write logic state burst length value.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Logic State".

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTLENGTH <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTLENGTH?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

NR1 sets the logic state burst length value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTLENGTH 10 sets the

DDRWRITE logic state burst length value of search 3 to 10 bursts.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTLENGTH? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTLENGTH 8, indicating that
the DDRWRITE logic state burst length value is set to 8 bursts for search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSActive
This command sets or queries the DDR write chip select active state.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Chip Select"

2-1614 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSActive {LOW|HIGH}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSActive?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

LOW sets the DDR write chip select active state to low.

HIGH sets the DDR write chip select active state to high.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSActive LOW sets the

DDRWRITE chip select active state to LOW for search 2.
SEARCH:SEARCH4:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSActive? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH4:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSActive HIGH, indicating the
DDRWRITE chip select active state for search 4 is set to HIGH.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSLevel
This command sets or queries the DDR Write chip select level value.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Chip Select"

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSLevel <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSLevel?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSMode

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1615

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

NR3 sets the DDR write chip select level value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSLevel 2.8E-3 sets the DDR

write chip select level value to 2.8E-3
SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSLevel? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSLevel 2.8E-3, indicating the
DDR write search chip select level value for search 5 is set to 2.8E-3

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSMode
This command sets or queries the DDR Write chip select mode.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Chip Select"

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSMode {Auto|Manual}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSMode?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

Auto sets the DDR write chip select mode to auto.

Manual sets the DDR write chip select mode to manual. Use the Related
Commands to set the Reference levels when in Manual mode.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSMode MANUAL sets the DDR

write search chip select mode to Manual for search 2.
SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSMode? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSMode Manual, indicating that
the DDR write search 3 chip select mode is set to manual.

2-1616 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSSource
This command sets or queries the DDR Write search chip select source.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSSource
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSSource?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

CH<x> specifies channel <x> as the DDR write chip select source for the specified
search <x>.
CH<x>_D<x> specifies digital waveform <x> of channel <x> as the DDR write
strobe source for the specified search <x>.
MATH<x> specifies math waveform <x> as the DDR write chip select source
for the specified search <x>.
REF<x> specifies reference waveform <x> as the DDR write chip select source
for the specified search <x>.
REF<x>_D<x> specifies digital waveform <x> of reference waveform <x> as the
DDR write strobe source for the specified search <x>.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSSource CH2 sets the search 5

chip select source waveform to CH2 for DDR write search.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSSource? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:CSSource CH2, indicating that the
Channel 2 waveform is the source for the DDR write chip select source of search 1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1617

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:DATARate
This command sets or queries the DDR write search data rate for DDR3 and
LPDRR3 standards of the specified search.
The DDR3 standard supports the following data rates:
800|1066|1333|1600|1866|2133.
The LPDDR3 standard supports the following data rates:
333|800|1066|1200|1333|1466|1600|1866|2133.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Write standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:DATARate
{333|800|1066|1200|1333|1466|1600|1866|2133}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:DATARate?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:STANdard

Arguments 333 sets the data rate to 333.

800 sets the data rate to 800.

1066 sets the data rate to 1066.

1200 sets the data rate to 1200.

1333 sets the data rate to 1333.

1466 sets the data rate to 1466.

1600 sets the data rate to 1600.

1866 sets the data rate to 1866.

2133 sets the data rate to 2133.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:DATARate 1333 sets the data rate

to 1333 for DDR read Search 2.

2-1618 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH7:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:DATARate? might return

SEARCH:SEARCH7:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:DATARate 1466 indicating that
the data rate for DDR read Search 7 is 1466.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:DATASource
This command sets or queries the DDR write data source when the search type is
DDR Write.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3

Requires 6 Series MSO instrument
Load a reference waveform on the instrument before using this command to set
the search data source to a reference waveform.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:DATASource
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:DATASource?

Arguments CH<x> specifies channel <x> as the DDR write data source for the specified
search <x>.
CH<x>_D<x> specifies digital waveform <x> of channel <x> as the DDR write
data source for the specified search <x>.
MATH<x> specifies math waveform <x> as the DDR write data source for the
specified search <x>.
REF<x> specifies reference waveform <x> as the DDR write data source for the
specified search <x>.
REF<x>_D<x> specifies digital waveform <x> of reference waveform <x> as the
DDR write data source for the specified search <x>.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WRITE:DATASource CH2 sets the search

1 source waveform to Channel 2 for the DDR write search.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRWRITE:DATASource? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRWRITE:DATASource RMATH3, indicating
that the Math 1 waveform DDR write trigger data is the source for search 1.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1619

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:HYSteresis
This command sets or queries the DDR write hysteresis reference level value,
when the search type is DDR WRITE.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR write reference level mode to Manual before using this command.
See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:HYSteresis <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:HYSteresis?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLEVELMode

Arguments NR3 sets the DDR write search hysteresis percent value in the range of 0% to 50%.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:HYSteresis 7 sets the DDR write

search hysteresis value to 7%.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:HYSteresis? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:HYSteresis 10, indicating that
the DDR write search hysteresis value is set to 10%.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:LOGIC1SOUrce:SYMBol
This command sets or queries the DDR write logic source 1 symbol.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Logic State".

Group Search and Mark

2-1620 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:LOGIC1SOUrce:SYMBol
{H|L|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:LOGIC1SOUrce:SYMBol?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

H sets the logic source 1 symbol to H (High).

L sets the logic source 1 symbol to L (Low).

X sets the logic source 1 symbol to X (Don’t care).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:LOGIC1SOUrce:SYMBol X sets

the DDRWRITE logic source 1 symbol of search 3 to X (don’t care)
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:LOGIC1SOUrce:SYMBol? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:LOGIC1SOUrce:SYMBol L,
indicating that the DDRWRITE logic source 1 symbol is set to Low for search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:LOGIC2SOUrce:SYMBol
This command sets or queries the DDR write logic source 2 symbol.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Logic State".

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:LOGIC2SOUrce:SYMBol
{H|L|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:LOGIC2SOUrce:SYMBol?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1621

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

H sets the logic source 2 symbol to H (High).

L sets the logic source 2 symbol to L (Low).

X sets the logic source 2 symbol to X (Don’t care).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:LOGIC2SOUrce:SYMBol X sets

the DDRWRITE logic source 2 symbol of search 3 to X (don’t care)
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:LOGIC2SOUrce:SYMBol? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:LOGIC2SOUrce:SYMBol L,
indicating that the DDRWRITE logic source 2 symbol is set to Low for search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:LOGIC3SOUrce:SYMBol
This command sets or queries the DDR write logic source 3 symbol.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Logic State".

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:LOGIC3SOUrce:SYMBol
{H|L|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:LOGIC3SOUrce:SYMBol?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

H sets the logic source 3 symbol to H (High).

L sets the logic source 3 symbol to L (Low).

X sets the logic source 3 symbol to X (Don’t care).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:LOGIC3SOUrce:SYMBol X sets

the DDRWRITE logic source 3 symbol of search 3 to X (don’t care)

2-1622 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:LOGIC3SOUrce:SYMBol? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:LOGIC3SOUrce:SYMBol L,
indicating that the DDRWRITE logic source 3 symbol is set to Low for search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:LOGIC4SOUrce:SYMBol
This command sets or queries the DDR write logic source 4 symbol.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Logic State".

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:LOGIC4SOUrce:SYMBol
{H|L|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:LOGIC4SOUrce:SYMBol?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

H sets the logic source 4 symbol to H (High).

L sets the logic source 4 symbol to L (Low).

X sets the logic source 4 symbol to X (Don’t care).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:LOGIC4SOUrce:SYMBol X sets

the DDRWRITE logic source 4 symbol of search 3 to X (don’t care)
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:LOGIC4SOUrce:SYMBol? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:LOGIC4SOUrce:SYMBol L,
indicating that the DDRWRITE logic source 4 symbol is set to Low for search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:MARgin
This command sets or queries the DDR write margin reference level value, when
the search type is DDR WRITE.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1623

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR write reference level mode to Manual before using this command.
See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:MARgin <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:MARgin?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLEVELMode

Arguments NR3 sets the DDR write search margin percent value in the range of 0% to 100%.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:MARgin 11 sets the DDR write

search margin value to 11%.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:MARgin? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:MARgin 5, indicating that the DDR
write search margin value is set to 5%.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:MAXCAS
This command sets or queries the DDR write chip select maximum Column
Access Strobe (CAS) value.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Chip Select".

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:MAXCAS <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:MAXCAS?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

2-1624 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

NR3 sets the DDR write chip select CAS maximum value.

Examples EARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:MAXCAS 3.8E-3 sets the DDR write

chip select CAS maximum value to 3.8 milliseconds for search 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:MAXCAS? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:MAXCAS 3.8E-3, indicating that
the DDR write chip select CAS maximum value is set to 3.8 milliseconds for
search 2.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:MINCas
This command sets or queries the DDR write chip select minimum Column
Access Strobe (CAS) value.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Chip Select".

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:MINCas <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:MINCas?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

NR3 sets the DDR write chip select CAS minimum value.

Examples EARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:MINCas 3.8E-3 sets the DDR write

chip select CAS minimum value to 3.8 milliseconds for search 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:MINCas? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:MINCas 3.8E-3, indicating that
the DDR write chip select CAS minimum value is set to 3.8 milliseconds for
search 2.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1625

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:POSTAMBLE:LENGth
This command sets or queries the DDR write postamble length when the search
type is DDR WRITE.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:POSTAMBLE:LENGth
{500E-3|500E-1.5|500E-1}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:POSTAMBLE:LENGth?

Arguments 500E-1.5 sets the postamble length to 1.5 tCK (number of clock cycles).

500E-1 sets the postamble length to 1 tCK (number of clock cycles).

500E-3 sets the postamble length to 0.5 tCK (number of clock cycles).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH6:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:POSTAMBLE:LENGth 500E-3 sets

the DDR write postamble length for Search 6 to 0.5 tCK.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:POSTAMBLE:LENGth? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:POSTAMBLE:LENGth
500E-1, indicating that the write postamble length for Search 2 is set to 1 tCK.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:PREAMBLE:TYPE
This command sets or queries the DDR write preamble type when the search
type is DDR WRITE.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:PREAMBLE:TYPE
{STATIC|DYNAMIC}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:PREAMBLE:TYPE?

2-1626 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments STATIC sets the DDR Write preamble type to Static.

DYNAMIC sets the DDR Write preamble type to Dynamic.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:PREAMBLE:TYPE STATIC sets the

DDR write preamble type to Static for Search 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH4:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:PREAMBLE:TYPE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH4:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:PREAMBLE:TYPE DYNAMIC,
indicating that the DDR write preamble type for Search 4 is set to dynamic mode.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:HIGH
This command sets or queries the DDR write data high reference level value,
when the search type is DDR WRITE.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR write reference level mode to Manual before using this command.
See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:HIGH <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:HIGH?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLEVELMode

Arguments NR3 sets the DDR read search data high reference value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:HIGH 3.8E-3

sets the DDR write search data high reference value.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:HIGH? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:HIGH
50E-3, indicating that the DDR write search data high reference value is set
to 50E-3.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1627

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:LOW
This command sets or queries the DDR write data low reference level value,
when the search type is DDR WRITE.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR write reference level mode to Manual before using this command.
See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:LOW <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:LOW?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLEVELMode

Arguments NR3 sets the DDR read search data low reference value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:LOW 3.8E-3

sets the DDR write search data low reference value.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:LOW? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:LOW
50E-3, indicating that the DDR write search data low reference value is set to
50E-3.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:MID
This command sets or queries the DDR write data mid reference level value,
when the search type is DDR WRITE.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR write reference level mode to Manual before using this command.
See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

2-1628 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:MID <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:MID?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLEVELMode

Arguments NR3 sets the DDR read search data mid reference value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:MID 3.8E-3

sets the DDR write search data mid reference value.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:MID? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:DATA:MID
50E-3, indicating that the DDR write search data mid reference value is set to
50E-3.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:HIGH
This command sets or queries the DDR write reference level strobe high value,
when the search type is DDR WRITE.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR write reference level mode to Manual before using this command.
See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:HIGH
<NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:HIGH?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLEVELMode

Arguments NR3 sets the DDR write search strobe high value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:HIGH
3.8E-3 sets the DDR write search strobe high value.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1629

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:HIGH? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:HIGH
50E-3, indicating that the DDR write search strobe high value is set to 50E-3.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:LOW
This command sets or queries the DDR write reference level strobe low value,
when the search type is DDR WRITE.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR write reference level mode to Manual before using this command.
See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:LOW
<NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:LOW?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLEVELMode

Arguments NR3 sets the DDR read search strobe low reference value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:LOW 3.8E-3

sets the DDR write search strobe low reference value.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:LOW? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:LOW
50E-3, indicating that the DDR write search strobe low reference value is set
to 50E-3.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:MID
This command sets or queries the DDR write reference level strobe mid value,
when the search type is DDR WRITE.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.

2-1630 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Set the DDR write reference level mode to Manual before using this command.
See Related Commands.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:MID
<NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:MID?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLEVELMode

Arguments NR3 sets the DDR read search strobe mid reference value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:MID 3.8E-3

sets the DDR write search strobe mid reference value.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:MID? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:MID
50E-3, indicating that the DDR write search strobe mid reference value is set
to 50E-3.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLEVELMode
This command sets or queries the DDR write reference level mode to auto or
manual, when the search type is DDR WRITE.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLEVELMode
{AUTO|MANUAL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLEVELMode?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:HIGH

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:LOW
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:REFLevel:DATA:MID

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1631

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments AUTO sets the DDR write reference level mode to auto.

MANUAL sets the DDR write reference level mode to manual. Use the Related
Commands to set the Reference levels when in Manual mode.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLEVELMode MANUAL sets the

DDR write search reference level mode to Manual for Search 3.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLEVELMode? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:REFLEVELMode MANUAL,
indicating that the DDR write search reference level mode set to automatic for
Search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:STANdard
This command sets or queries the DDR write search standard as DDR3 or
LPDDR3.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3

Requires 6 Series MSO instrument

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:STANdard {DDR3|LPDDR3}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:STANdard?

Arguments DDR3 sets the DDR write search standard as DDR3.

LPDDR3 sets the DDR write search standard as LPDDR3.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:STANdard DDR3 sets the DDR

standard to DDR3 for DDR write Search 2.
SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:STANdard? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:STANdard LPDDR3 indicating that
the DDR standard is set to LPDDR3 for DDR write Search 5.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:STROBESource
This command sets or queries the DDR write strobe source when the search type
is DDR Write.

2-1632 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3

Requires 6 Series MSO instrument
Load a reference waveform on the instrument before using this command to set
the search data source to a reference waveform.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:STROBESource
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:STROBESource?

Arguments CH<x> specifies channel <x> as the DDR write strobe source for the specified
search <x>.
CH<x>_D<x> specifies digital waveform <x> of channel <x> as the DDR write
strobe source for the specified search <x>.
MATH<x> specifies math waveform <x> as the DDR write strobe source for the
specified search <x>.
REF<x> specifies reference waveform <x> as the DDR write strobe source for the
specified search <x>.
REF<x>_D<x> specifies digital waveform <x> of reference waveform <x> as the
DDR write strobe source for the specified search <x>.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:DDRWRITE:STROBESource MATH4 sets the

Search 2 source waveform to Math 4 for the DDR write strobe search.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRWRITE:STROBESource? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRWRITE:STROBESource CH3, indicating
that the Channel 3 waveform is the source for the DDR write strobe of Search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:TOLERance
This command sets or queries the DDR write logic state tolerance value.

Conditions Requires option 6-DBDDR3.

Requires a 6 Series MSO instrument.
Set the DDR Read standard (DDR3 or LPDDR3) before using this command.
See Related Commands.
Set burst detection method as "Logic State".

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1633

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:TOLERance <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:TOLERance?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:BURSTDETectmethod

Arguments SEARCH<x> specifies the search number.

NR3 sets the logic state tolerance value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:TOLERance 400E-3 sets the

DDRWRITE logic state tolerance value of search 3 to .004.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:TOLERance? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:TOLERance 500E-3, indicating
that the DDRWRITE logic state tolerance value is set to 500E-3 for search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe
This command sets or queries the slope for an edge trigger search to determine
where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe {RISe|FALL|EITher}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe?

Arguments RISe specifies a rising edge.

FALL specifies a falling edge.

EITher specifies either rising or falling edge.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE RISE sets the slope for search

1 to rise.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE RISE, indicating that the slope
for the trigger for search 1 is rise.

2-1634 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the source waveform for an edge trigger search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies one input channel as the edge source, where the channel number
is specified by x.
CH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the source waveform
for the specified search.
MATH<x> specifies the math waveform as the search source, where the math
number is specified by x.
REF<x> specifies the reference waveform as the search source, where the
reference number is specified by x.
REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the source waveform
for the specified search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH2 sets the source waveform

for the A trigger to Channel 2.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH2, indicating that the
Channel 2 edge trigger is the source for search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:THReshold
This command sets or queries the source threshold level for an edge trigger search
to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:THReshold <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:THReshold?

Arguments <NR3> is the source threshold level for an edge trigger search.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1635

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:EDGE:THReshold 50.0e-3 sets the threshold

to 50 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:EDGE:THReshold? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0 indicating the
threshold is 0.0 V.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLOCk:THReshold
This command sets or queries the logic clock threshold for a logic trigger search
to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLOCk:THReshold <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLOCk:THReshold?

Arguments <NR3> is the logic clock threshold.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLOCk:THReshold 50.0e-3 sets

the threshold to 50 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLOCk:THReshold? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLOCK:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0
indicating the threshold is set to 0.0 V.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:DELTatime
This command specifies the Logic search delta time value. The time value is used
as part of the Logic search condition to determine if the duration of a logic pattern
meets the specified time constraints. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:DELTatime <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:DELTatime?

Arguments <NR3> is delta time value.

2-1636 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:DELTatime 1.5e-9 sets the delta

time to 1.5 ns.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:DELTatime? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:DELTATIME 1.0000E-9 indicating
the delta time is 1.0 ns.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion
This command sets or queries the logic operator for a pattern or state trigger
search to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion {AND|NANd|NOR|OR}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion?

Arguments AND places a mark if all conditions are true.

NANd places a mark if any of the conditions are false.

NOR places a mark if all conditions are false.

OR places a mark if any of the conditions are true.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION AND sets the trigger a logic

function for search 1 to AND.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION NOR, indicating that the
logic function for search 1 is set to NOR.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPUT:CLOCK:SOUrce
This command specifies or queries the channel to use as the clock source for logic
trigger. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPUT:CLOCK:SOUrce
{CH<x>|Ch<x>_D<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPUT:CLOCK:SOUrce?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1637

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPUT:CLOCK:SOUrce CH2 sets the

clock source to channel 2.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPUT:CLOCK:SOUrce? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CLOCK:SOURCE UNDEFINED
indicating the clock source is not defined.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:CH<x>
This command sets or queries the voltage level to use for logic trigger search.
The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:CH<x> <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:CH<x>?

Arguments <NR3> is the voltage level to use for logic trigger search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:CH2 50.0e-3 sets the level

to 50 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:CH2? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:LEVEL:CH2 0.0E+0 indicating the
level is set to 0.0 V.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:MATH<x>
This command sets the voltage level to use for logic trigger search. The search
number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

2-1638 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:MATH<x> <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:MATH<x>?

Arguments <NR3> is the voltage level to use for logic trigger search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:MATH1 50.0e-3 sets the level

to 50.0 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:MATH1? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:LEVEL:MATH1 0.0E+0 indicating
the level is set to 0.0 V.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:REF<x>
This command sets the voltage level to use for logic trigger search. The search
number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:REF<x> <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:REF<x>?

Arguments <NR3> is the voltage level to use for logic trigger search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:REF1 50.0e-3 sets the level

to 50.0 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:REF1? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:LEVEL:REF1 0.0E+0 indicating the
level is set to 0.0 V.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:CH<x>
This command sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic
pattern, with respect to the defined input pattern, and identifies the time that the
selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger. The search number
is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1639

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:CH<x> {H|L|X}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:CH<x>?

Arguments H specifies triggering when the pattern is high.

L specifies triggering when the pattern is low.

X specifies triggering when the pattern is high or low.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:CH2 H sets the

channel 2 pattern to a high.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:CH2? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:LOGICPATTERN:CH2 X indicating
channel 2 is a don’t care.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:CH<x>_D<x>
This command sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic
pattern, with respect to the defined input pattern, and identifies the time that the
selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger. The search number
is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:CH<x>_D<x>
{H|L|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:CH<x>_D<x>?

Arguments H specifies triggering when the pattern is high.

L specifies triggering when the pattern is low.

X specifies triggering when the pattern is high or low.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:CH1_D1 H sets the

channel patter to a high.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:CH1_D1? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:LOGICPATTERN:CH1_D1 X
indicating the channel patter is a don’t care.

2-1640 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:MATH<x>
This command sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic
pattern, with respect to the defined input pattern, and identifies the time that the
selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger. The search number
is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:MATH<x>
{H|L|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:MATH<x>?

Arguments H specifies triggering when the pattern is high.

L specifies triggering when the pattern is low.

X specifies triggering when the pattern is high or low.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:MATH1 H sets the

pattern to a high.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:MATH1? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:LOGICPATTERN:MATH1 X indicating
the pattern is a don’t care.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:REF<x>
This command sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic
pattern, with respect to the defined input pattern, and identifies the time that the
selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger. The search number
is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:REF<x> {H|L|X}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:REF<x>?

Arguments H specifies triggering when the pattern is high.

L specifies triggering when the pattern is low.

X specifies triggering when the pattern is high or low.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1641

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:REF1 H sets the

pattern to a high.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:REF1? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:LOGICPATTERN:REF1 X indicating the
pattern is a don’t care.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:POLarity
This command sets or queries the polarity for the clock channel when Use Clock
Edge is set to Yes for Logic search type. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:POLarity
{POSitive|NEGative|EITher}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:POLarity?

Arguments POSitive specifies using the positive clock edge.

NEGative specifies using negative clock edge.

EITher specifies using either the positive or negative clock edge.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:POLarity NEGATIVE sets the polarity

to negative.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:POLarity? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:POLARITY POSITIVE indicating the
polarity is set to positive.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:USEClockedge
This command specifies whether or not Logic search uses a clock source. The
search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:USEClockedge {OFF|ON|0|1}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:USEClockedge?

2-1642 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments OFF specifies not to use the clock source.

ON specifies to use the clock source.

0 specifies not to use the clock source.

1 specifies to use the clock source.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:USEClockedge ON specifies to use

the clock source.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:USEClockedge? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:USECLOCKEDGE 0 indicating not to use
the clock source.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:WHEn
This command sets or queries the condition for generating an A or B logic search
with respect to the defined input pattern.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:WHEn
{TRUe|FALSe|MOREThan|LESSThan|EQual|UNEQual}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:WHEn?

Arguments TRUe searches on an input value that is true.

FALSe searches on an input value that is false.

MOREthan searches on an input value that is greater than a set value.

LESSthan searches on an input value that is less than a set value.

EQual searches on an input value that is equal to a set value.

UNEQual searches on an input value that is not equal to a set value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:WHEn FALSE specifies a search on an

input value that is false.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:WHEn? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:WHEN TRUEindicating a search on an
input value that is true.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1643

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit
This command specifies the upper limit to use, in seconds, when searching for
a pulse whose duration is inside or outside a range of two values. The search
number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit?

Arguments <NR3> is the upper limit to use, in seconds, when searching for a pulse.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit 2.5e-9 sets the

high limit to 2.5 ns.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:HIGHLIMIT 2.0000E-9
indicating the pulse width high limit is 2.0 ns.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOGICQUALification
This command specifies whether or not to use logic qualification for a pulse width
search. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOGICQUALification
{ON|OFF}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOGICQUALification?

Arguments ON specifies to use logic qualification.

OFF specifies not to use logic qualification.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOGICQUALification ON
turns on logic qualification.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOGICQUALification? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:LOGICQUALIFICATION
OFF indicating logic qualification is off.

2-1644 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit
This command specifies the lower limit to use, in seconds, when searching for
a pulse whose duration is inside or outside a range of two values. The search
number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit?

Arguments <NR3> is the lower limit to use, in seconds, when searching for a pulse.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit 0.5e-9 sets the

low limit to 0.5 ns.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:LOWLIMIT 1.0000E-9
indicating the low limit is 2.0 ns.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity
This command specifies the polarity for a pulse width search. The search number
is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity
{POSitive|NEGative}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity?

Arguments POSitive specifies positive polarity for a pulse width search.

NEGative specifies negative polarity for a pulse width search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity NEGATIVE sets the

polarity to negative.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:POLARITY POSITIVE
indicating the polarity is positive.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1645

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce
This command sets and queries the source for the pulse width search input. The
search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the search source, where the channel
number is specified by x.
CH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the source waveform
for the specified search.
REF<x> specifies the reference waveform as the search source, where the
reference number is specified by x.
REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the source waveform
for the specified search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce CH1 sets the source

to channel 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:SOURCE CH2 indicating channel
2 is the source.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:THReshold
Sets or queries the source threshold level for a pulse width trigger search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:THReshold <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:THReshold?

Arguments <NR3> is the source threshold level for a pulse width trigger search.

2-1646 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:THReshold 1.0e-9 sets to

1.0 V.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:THReshold? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0 indicating
the threshold is 0.0 V.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn
This command specifies to search for a pulse with a width
(duration) that is less than, greater than, equal to, or unequal to
a specified value (set using SEARch:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth),
OR whose SEARch:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit and
SEARch:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit). The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn
{LESSthan|MOREthan| EQual|UNEQual|WIThin|OUTside}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn?

Arguments LESSthan causes a search when a pulse is detected with a width less than the time
set by the SEARch:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth command.
MOREthan causes a search when a pulse is detected with a width greater than the
time set by the SEARch:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth command.
EQual causes a search when a pulse is detected with a width equal to the time
period specified in SEARch:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth within a ±5% tolerance.
UNEQual causes a search when a pulse is detected with a width greater than or less
than (but not equal) the time period specified in SEARch:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth
within a ±5% tolerance.
WIThin causes a search when a pulse is detected that is within a range set by
two values.
OUTside causes a search when a pulse is detected that is outside of a range set
by two values.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn Outside causes a search

when a pulse is detected that is outside the set range.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:WHEN WITHIN indicating that a
search will occur when a pulse is detected that is within a set range.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1647

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:LOGICQUALification
This command specifies whether or not to use logic qualification for a runt search.
The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:LOGICQUALification {ON|OFF}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:LOGICQUALification?

Arguments ON specifies to use logic qualification for a runt search.

OFF specifies not to use logic qualification for a runt search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:LOGICQUALification ON turns on

logic qualification.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:LOGICQUALification? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:LOGICQUALIFICATION OFF
indicating logic qualification is off.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity
This command specifies the polarity for the runt search. The search number is
specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity
{POSitive|NEGative|EITher}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity?

Arguments POSitive specifies using positive polarity for the runt search.

NEGative specifies using negative polarity for the runt search.

EITher specifies using either positive or negative polarity for the runt search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity NEGATIVE specifies using

negative polarity for the runt search.

2-1648 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity? might return

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE indicating the
polarity is set to positive.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce
This command sets and queries the source for the Runt search input. The search
number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce {CH<x>|REF<x>}

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the search source, where the channel
number is specified by x.
REF<x> specifies the reference waveform as the search source, where the
reference number is specified by x.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce CH1 sets the source to channel

1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:SOURCE CH2 indicating the source is
set to channel 2.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH
This command sets or queries the source threshold HIGH level for a runt trigger
search to determine where to place a mark.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH?

Arguments <NR3> is the source threshold HIGH level for a runt trigger search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH 50.0E-3 sets the

high threshold to 50 mV.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1649

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH? might return

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:THRESHOLD:HIGH 0.0E+0 indicating
the high threshold is 0.0 V.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:LOW
Sets or queries the source threshold LOW level for a runt trigger search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:LOW <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:LOW?

Arguments <NR3> is the source threshold LOW level for a runt trigger search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:LOW 50.0e-3 sets the

thresholdo to 50 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:LOW? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:THRESHOLD:LOW 0.0E+0 indicating
the threshold is 0.0 V.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn
This command sets or queries the condition setting for a runt trigger search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn
{OCCURS|LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual}NOTEQual}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn?

Arguments LESSthan argument sets the instrument to search if the a

runt pulse is detected with width less than the time set by the
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth command.

MOREthan argument sets the instrument to search if the a runt

pulse is detected with width more than the time set by the
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth command.

2-1650 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

EQual argument sets the instrument to search when the pattern

is true for a time period equal to the time period specified in
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth within a ±5% tolerance.

NOTEQual argument sets the instrument to search when the pattern is true for
atime period greater than or less than (but not equal) the time period specified in
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth within a ±5% tolerance.

OCCURS argument specifies a search event if a runt of any detectable width occurs.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WHEN MORETHAN sets the instrument to

trigger when a runt pulse is detected with width wider than the time set by the
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth command.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WHEN? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS, indicating that
a mark is placed if a runt trigger event occurs.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth
This command sets or queries the width setting for a runt trigger search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the minimum width in seconds.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WIDTH 400E–12 sets the runt trigger

minimum width for search 1 to 0.4 nanoseconds.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WIDTH? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WIDTH 500.00O0E-12, indicating that
the runt trigger minimum width for search 1 is set to 0.5 nanoseconds.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
This command sets or queries the clock slope setting for a setup/hold trigger
search to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1651

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE {FALL|RISe}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE?

Arguments FALL specifies the polarity as the clock falling edge.

RISe specifies the polarity as the clock rising edge.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE FALL sets the

setup/hold trigger clock slope polarity for search 1 to falling edge.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE RISE, indicating that
the setup/hold trigger clock slope polarity for search 1 is set to rising edge.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the clock source setting for a setup/hold trigger
search to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies an input channel as the edge source, where <x> = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
7, or 8, depending on the number of channels in your instrument.
CH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital waveform as the setup and hold clock source
waveform for the specified search.
MATH<x> specifies the math waveform as the search source, where <x> = ≥1.

REF<x> specifies the reference waveform as the search source, where <x> = ≥1.

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the setup and hold clock
source waveform for the specified search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE MATH1 sets the

setup/hold trigger clock source setting for search 1 to MATH1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1, indicating that
the setup/hold trigger clock source setting for search 1 is set to CH1.

2-1652 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold
This command sets or queries the clock threshold setting for a setup/hold trigger
search to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold?

Arguments <NR3> the clock threshold setting for a setup/hold trigger search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD -1.3 sets

the setup/hold trigger clock threshold setting for search 1 to -1.3 volts.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD –1.3000,
indicating that the setup/hold trigger clock threshold setting for search 1 is set
to -1.3 volts.
** CANNOT USE LocalCmd HERE BECAUSE OF VARIABLES **

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime
This command sets or queries the hold time setting for a setup/hold trigger search
to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the hold time setting in seconds. Positive values for hold time
occur after the clock edge. Negative values occur before the clock edge.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 400E-12 sets the

setup/hold trigger hold time setting for search 1 to 400 ps.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 500.0000E–12,
indicating that the setup/hold trigger hold time setting for search 1 is set to 0.5 ns.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1653

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:CH<x>
This command sets or queries the voltage level to use for setup & hold trigger
search. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:CH<x> <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:CH<x>?

Arguments <NR3> the voltage level to use for setup & hold trigger search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:CH1 50.0e-3 sets the level

to 50.0 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:CH1? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:LEVEL:CH1 0.0E+0 indicating
the level is 0.0 V.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:MATH<x>
This command sets or queries the voltage level to use for setup & hold trigger
search. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:MATH<x> <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:MATH<x>?

Arguments <NR3> isi the voltage level to use for setup & hold trigger search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:MATH1 50.0e-3 sets the

level to 50.0 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:MATH1? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:LEVEL:MATH1 0.0E+0 indicating
the level is 0.0 V.

2-1654 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:REF<x>
This command sets or queries the voltage level to use for setup & hold trigger
search. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:REF<x> <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:REF<x>?

Arguments <NR3> is the voltage level to use for setup & hold trigger search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:REF1 50.0e-3 sets the

level to 50.0 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:REF1? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:LEVEL:REF1 0.0E+0 indicating
the level is 0.0 V.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:CH<x>
This command sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic
pattern, with respect to the defined input pattern, and identifies the time that the
selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger. The search number
is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:CH<x>
{INCLude|DONTInclude}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:CH<x>?

Arguments INCLude specifies including the specified channel SETHOLD inputs in the
specified search.
DONTInclude specifies not including the specified channel SETHOLD inputs
in the specified search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:CH1 INCLUDE

specifies including the specified channel SETHOLD inputs in the specified search.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1655

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:CH1? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:LOGICPATTERN:CH1
DONTINCLUDE indicating the specified channel SETHOLD inputs will not be
included in the specified search.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:CH<x>_D<x>
This command sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic
pattern, with respect to the defined input pattern, and identifies the time that the
selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger. The search number
is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:CH<x>_D<x>
{INCLude|DONTInclude}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:CH<x>_D<x>?

Arguments INCLude specifies including the specified digital channel SETHOLD inputs in the
specified search.
DONTInclude specifies not including the specified digital channel SETHOLD
inputs in the specified search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:CH1_D0 INCLUDE

specifies including the specified digital channel SETHOLD inputs in the specified
search.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:CH1_D0? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:LOGICPATTERN:CH1_D0
DONTINCLUDE indicating the specified digital channel SETHOLD inputs will
not be included in the specified search.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:MATH<x>
This command sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic
pattern, with respect to the defined input pattern, and identifies the time that the
selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger. The search number
is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

2-1656 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:MATH<x>
{INCLude|DONTInclude}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:MATH<x>?

Arguments INCLude specifies including the specified math SETHOLD inputs in the specified
search.
DONTInclude specifies not including the specified math SETHOLD inputs in the
specified search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:MATH1 INCLUDE

specifies including the specified math SETHOLD inputs in the specified search.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:MATH1? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:LOGICPATTERN:MATH1
DONTINCLUDE indicating the specified math SETHOLD inputs will not be
included in the specified search.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:REF<x>
This command sets and returns the conditions used for generating an A logic
pattern, with respect to the defined input pattern, and identifies the time that the
selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger. The search number
is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:REF<x>
{INCLude|DONTInclude}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:REF<x>?

Arguments INCLude specifies including the specified reference SETHOLD inputs in the
specified search.
DONTInclude specifies not including the specified reference SETHOLD inputs
in the specified search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:REF1 INCLUDE

specifies including the specified reference SETHOLD inputs in the specified
search.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:REF1? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:LOGICPATTERN:REF1

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1657

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DONTINCLUDE indicating the specified reference SETHOLD inputs will not be

included in the specified search.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime
This command sets or queries the setup time setting for a setup/hold trigger search
to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:SETTIME 2E–9 sets the setup/hold

trigger setup time setting for search 1 to 2 ns.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:SETTIME? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:SETTIME 1.0000E–9, indicating
that the setup/hold trigger setup time setting for search 1 is set to 1.0 ns.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:STATE
This command sets or queries the enabled state of the search. The search number
is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

Arguments <NR1> = 1 enables the search. Any other character disables the search.

ON enables the search.

OFF disables the search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:STATE OFF disables the search.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:STATE? might return

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:STATE 1 indicating search 1 is enabled.

2-1658 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:STOPAcq
This command sets or queries whether acquisitions are stopped when a search hit
is found. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:STOPAcq {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:STOPAcq?

Arguments <x> is the number of the search on which to enable or disable the stop acquisition
function.
<NR1> = 1 enables stopping when a search hit is found. Any other character
disables the feature.
ON enables stopping when a search hit is found.

OFF disables stopping on a search hit.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:STOPAcq ON enables stopping when a search

hit is found.
SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:STOPAcq? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGGER:A:STOPACQ 1 indicating acquisitions
are stopped when a search hit is found on search number 3.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:LOGICQUALification
This command specifies whether or not to use logic qualification for a timeout
search. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:LOGICQUALification
{ON|OFF}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:LOGICQUALification?

Arguments ON specifies to use logic qualification.

OFF specifies not to use logic qualification.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1659

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:LOGICQUALification ON
specifies to use logic qualification.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:LOGICQUALification? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:LOGICQUALIFICATION OFF
indicating logic qualification is off.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity
The polarity to be used for a Timeout search. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity
{STAYSHigh|STAYSLow|EITher}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity?

Arguments STAYSHigh specifies the polarity stays HIGH.

STAYSLow specifies the polarity stays LOW.

EITher specifies the polarity stays HIGH or stays LOW.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity STAYSLOW specifies

the polarity stays LOW.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:POLARITY STAYSHIGH indicating
the polarity stays HIGH.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce
This command sets and queries the source for timeout search input. The search
number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|REF<x>_D<x>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce?

2-1660 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the search source, where the channel
number is specified by x.
CH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the source waveform
for the specified search.
MATH<x> specifies the math waveform as the search source, where the math
number is specified by x.
REF<x> specifies the reference waveform as the search source, where the
reference number is specified by x.
REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the source waveform
for the specified search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce? might return

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:SOURCE CH1_D0 indicating
CH1_D0 is the source.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:THReshold
Sets or queries the source threshold level for a timeout trigger search to determine
where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:THReshold <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:THReshold?

Arguments <NR3> is the source threshold level for a timeout trigger search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:THReshold 50.0e-3 sets the

threshold to 50.0 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:THReshold? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0 indicating
the threshold is 0.0 V.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe
This command sets or queries the time setting for a timeout trigger search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1661

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe?

Arguments <NR3> is the time in seconds.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:TIME 400E-9 sets the timeout

trigger time setting for search 1 to 400 ns.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:TIME? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:TIME 500.0000E-12, indicating
that the timeout trigger time setting for search 1 is set to 500 ns.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:DELTATime
This command sets or queries the transition time setting for a transition trigger
search to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:DELTATime <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:DELTATime?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the transition time in seconds.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:TIME 400E-9 sets the transition

trigger time setting for search 1 to 400 ns.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:DELTATIME? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:DELTATIME 500.0000E-12,
indicating that the transition trigger time setting for search 1 is set to 500 ps.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:LOGICQUALification
This command specifies whether or not to use logic qualification for a transition
search. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

2-1662 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:LOGICQUALification
{ON|OFF}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:LOGICQUALification?

Arguments ON specifies to use logic qualification for a transition search.

OFF specifies not to use logic qualification for a transition search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:LOGICQUALification ON
specifies to use logic qualification for a transition search.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:LOGICQUALification? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:LOGICQUALIFICATION
OFF indicating logic qualification is off.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:POLarity
This command specifies the polarity for the transition search. The search number
is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:POLarity
{POSitive|NEGative|EITher}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:POLarity?

Arguments EITher places a mark on a transition of either polarity.

NEGative places a mark on a transition of negative polarity.

POSitive places a mark on a transition of positive polarity.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:POLarity NEGATIVE places a

mark on a transition of negative polarity.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:POLarity? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:POLARITY POSITIVE
indicating the polaity is positive.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:SOUrce
This command sets and queries the source for the transition search input. The
search number is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1663

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:SOUrce
{CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:SOUrce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the search source, where the channel
number is specified by x.
MATH<x> specifies the math waveform as the search source, where the math
number is specified by x.
REF<x> specifies the reference waveform as the search source, where the
reference number is specified by x.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:SOUrce CH1 sets the source

to channel 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:SOUrce? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:SOURCE CH2 indicating channel
2 is the source.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH
Sets or queries the source threshold HIGH level for a transition trigger search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH?

Arguments <NR3> the source threshold HIGH level for a transition trigger search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH 50.0e-3

sets the high threshold to 50.0 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:HIGH 0.0E+0
indicating the high threshold is 0.0 V.

2-1664 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW
Sets or queries the source threshold LOW level for a transition trigger search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW?

Arguments <NR3> is the source threshold LOW level for a transition trigger searchk.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW -50.0e-3

sets the LOW threshold to -50.0 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:LOW 0.0E+0
indicating the LOW threshold is 0.0 V.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:WHEn
This command sets or queries the condition setting for a transition trigger search
to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:WHEn
{FASTERthan|SLOWERthan|EQual|UNEQual}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:WHEn?

Arguments FASTERthan sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is faster than
the set volts/second rate.
SLOWERthan sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is slower
than the set volts/second rate.
EQual sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is equal to the set
volts/second rate.
UNEQual sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is not equal to
the set volts/second rate.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1665

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:WHEN SLOWERTHAN sets the

transition trigger condition setting for search 1 to SLOWERTHAN.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:WHEN? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:WHEN FASTERTHAN, indicating
that the transition trigger condition setting for search 1 is set to FASTERTHAN.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe
This command sets or queries the trigger type setting for a search to determine
where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe
{EDGE|RUNT|TRANsition|PULSEWidth|TIMEOut|LOGIc|
SETHold|WINdow|Bus|DDRRead|DDRREADWrite|DDRWrite}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe?

Arguments EDGE triggers when the source input signal amplitude crosses the specified level
in the direction given by the slope.

NOTE. Some trigger types are optional.

RUNT triggers when a pulse crosses the first preset voltage threshold but
does not cross the second preset threshold before recrossing the first. The
thresholds are set with the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNt:HIGH and
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNt:LOW THRESHOLD commands.
TRANsition triggers when a pulse crosses both thresholds in the same direction
as the specified polarity and the transition time between the two threshold
crossings is greater or less than the specified time delta.
PULSEWidth triggers on input signal source pulses that are
inside or outside of the given time range specified by
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit and
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit.
The polarity is selected using the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
POLarity command.
TIMEOut triggers on an input signal source that stays above, stays below, or stays
either above or beow the trigger level for a given time.
LOGIc specifies that a search occurs when specified conditions are met, and is
controlled by the SEARCH:A:LOGIc commands.

2-1666 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SETHold triggers on a functional pattern combination of one to three data sources

at the time of the clock transition.
WINdow triggers on an input signal source that enters or exits the horizontal band
defined by the two trigger levels.
Bus specifies that a search occurs when a communications signal is found.

DDRRead triggers on a DDR Read event.

DDRREADWrite triggers on a DDR Read or Write event.

DDRWrite triggers on a DDR Write event.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TYPE RUNT sets the trigger type setting for

search 1 to RUNT.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TYPE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TYPE EDGE, indicating that the trigger type
setting for search 1 is set to EDGE.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:CROSSIng
This command sets or queries the window trigger threshold crossing of the
selected trigger Source. The threshold crossing selection is only effective when
:TRIGger:A:WINdow:WHEn is INSIDEGreater or OUTSIDEGreater. The search
number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:CROSSIng
{UPPer|LOWer|EITher|NONe}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:CROSSIng?

Arguments UPPer if :TRIGger:A:WINdow:WHEn is INSIDEGreater, the instrument

triggers when the signal remains between the upper and lower thresholds for
longer than the time limit (:TRIGger:A:WINdow:WIDTH) and then exits through
the upper threshold. If :TRIGger:A:WINdow:WHEn is OUTSIDEGreater, the
instrument triggers when the signal remains above the upper threshold for longer
than the time limit (:TRIGger:A:WINdow:WIDTH) and then crosses downward
through the upper threshold.
LOWer if :TRIGger:A:WINdow:WHEn is INSIDEGreater, the instrument
triggers when the signal remains between the upper and lower thresholds for
longer than the time limit (:TRIGger:A:WINdow:WIDTH) and then exits through
the lower threshold. If :TRIGger:A:WINdow:WHEn is OUTSIDEGreater, the
instrument triggers when the signal remains below the lower threshold for longer

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1667

Commands listed in alphabetical order

than the time limit (:TRIGger:A:WINdow:WIDTH) and then crosses upwards

through the lower threshold.
EITher if :TRIGger:A:WINdow:WHEn is INSIDEGreater, the instrument
triggers when the signal remains between the upper and lower thresholds for
longer than the time limit (:TRIGger:A:WINdow:WIDTH) and then exits
through either the upper or lower threshold. If :TRIGger:A:WINdow:WHEn is
OUTSIDEGreater, the instrument triggers when the signal remains either above
the upper threshold or below the lower threshold for longer than the time limit
(:TRIGger:A:WINdow:WIDTH) and then crosses a threshold.
NONe if :TRIGger:A:WINdow:WHEn is INSIDEGreater, the instrument triggers
when the signal remains between the upper and lower thresholds for longer than
the time limit (:TRIGger:A:WINdow:WIDTH) without crossing through either the
upper or lower threshold. If :TRIGger:A:WINdow:WHEn is OUTSIDEGreater,
the instrument triggers when the signal remains outside the upper and lower
thresholds for longer than the time limit (:TRIGger:A:WINdow:WIDTH) without
crossing through either the upper or lower threshold.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:WINdow:CROSSIng LOWER sets the

CROSSING to LOWER.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:WINdow:CROSSIng? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WINDOW:CROSSING UPPER indicating that
CROSSING is set to UPPER.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:LOGICQUALification
This command specifies or queries whether or not to use logic qualification for a
window search. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:LOGICQUALification
{ON|OFF}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:LOGICQUALification?

Arguments ON specifies to use logic qualification for a window search.

OFF specifies not to us logic qualification for a window search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:WINdow:LOGICQUALification ON turns ON

logic qualification for a window search.

2-1668 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:WINdow:LOGICQUALification? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WINDOW:LOGICQUALIFICATION OFF
indicating logic qualification is off.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:POLarity
This command sets or queries the window trigger threshold crossing of the
selected trigger Source. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:POLarity
{UPPer|LOWer|EITher|NONe}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:POLarity?

Arguments UPPer specifies that the instrument triggers when the signal remains above the
upper threshold for longer than the time limit and then crosses downward through
the upper threshold.
LOWer specifies that the instrument triggers when the signal remains below the
lower threshold for longer than the time limit and then crosses upwards through
the lower threshold.
EITher specifies that the instrument triggers when the signal remains either above
the upper threshold or below the lower threshold for longer than the time limit
and then crosses a threshold.
NONe specifies that the instrument triggers when the signal remains outside the
upper and lower thresholds for longer than the time limit without crossing through
either the upper or lower threshold.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:WINdow:POLarity LOWER sets the polarity

to lower.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:WINdow:POLarity? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WINDOW:POLARITY UPPER indicating the
polarity is set to upper.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:SOUrce
This command sets and queries the source for the window search input. The
search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1669

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:SOUrce
{CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:SOUrce?

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:WINdow:SOUrce CH2 sets the source to

channel 2.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:WINdow:SOUrce? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WINDOW:SOURCE CH3 indicating the source
is channel 3.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH
This command sets or queries the source threshold HIGH level for a transition
trigger search to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified
by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH?

Arguments <NR3> is the source threshold HIGH level for a transition trigger search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH 50.0e-3 sets

the high threshold to 50.0 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:HIGH 0.0E+0
indicating the high threshold is 0.0 V.

2-1670 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:THReshold:LOW
This command sets or queries the source threshold LOW level for a transition
trigger search to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified
by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:THReshold:LOW <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:THReshold:LOW?

Arguments <NR3> the source threshold LOW level for a transition trigger search

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:WINdow:THReshold:LOW -50.0e-3 sets

the low threshold to -50.0 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:WINdow:THReshold:LOW? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:LOW 0.0E+0 indicating
the low threshold is 0.0 V.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:WHEn
This command sets or queries the window search event. The search number is
specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:WHEn
{ENTERSWindow|EXITSWindow| INSIDEGreater|OUTSIDEGreater}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:WHEn?

Arguments ENTERSWindow specifies a window search when the signal enters the window.

EXITSWindow specifies a window search when the signal exits the window.

OUTSIDEGreater specifies a search when the signal leaves the window defined
by the threshold levels for the time specified by Width.
INSIDEGreater specifies a search when the signal enters the window defined by
the threshold levels for the time specified by Width.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:WINdow:WHEn EXITSWINDOW specifies a

window search when the signal exits the window.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1671

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:WINdow:WHEn? might return

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WINDOW:WHEN ENTERSWINDOW indicating a
window search when the signal enters the window.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:WIDth
This command sets or queries the width setting for a window trigger search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:WIDth <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:WIDth?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the minimum width in seconds.

ECL specifies a preset high level of -1.3 V and TTL specifies a preset high level
of +1.4V.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WINDOW:WIDTH 400E–12 sets the window

trigger width setting for search 1 to 0.4 ns.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WINDOW:WIDTH? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WINDOW:WIDTH 500.0000E–12, indicating
that the window trigger width setting for search 1 is set to 0.5 ns.

SEARCH:SELected
This command sets or queries the selected search, for example SEARCH1. The
search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SELected SEARCH1

Arguments SEARCH1 is the specified search.

Examples SEARCH:SELected SEARCH1 specifies a search 1 search.

SEARCH:SELected? might return :SEARCH:SELECTED SEARCH1 indicating

search 1 is selected.

2-1672 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCHTABle:ADDNew (No Query Form)

This command adds a new search event table in an Option 5-WIN (Microsoft
Windows 10 OS) TekExpress compliance testing application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCHTABle:ADDNew <qstring>

Arguments <qstring> contains the name of the search table. “TABLE” should be the
argument prefix followed by a non-zero integer.

Examples SEARCHTABle:ADDNew "TABLE1" adds the TABLE1 in the display area.

SEARCHTABle:DELete (No Query Form)

This command deletes a search event table in an Option 5-WIN (Microsoft
Windows 10 OS) TekExpress compliance testing application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCHTABle:DELete <qstring>

Arguments <qstring> contains the name of the search table. “TABLE” should be the
argument prefix followed by a non-zero integer.

Examples SEARCHTABle:DELete "TABLE1" removes the TABLE1 from the display area.

SEARCHTABle:list? (Query Only)

This command queries all search event table in an Option 5-WIN (Microsoft
Windows 10 OS) TekExpress compliance testing application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCHTABle:list?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1673

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Returns Returns a list of all the search event tables in the display area.

Examples SEARCHTABLE:LIST? might return TABLE1, TABLE2, TABLE3, indicating the

names of the three search event tables in the display area.

SELect:CH<x>
Turns the display of the channel <x> waveform on or off, where <x > is the
channel number. This command also resets the acquisition. The query returns
whether the channel is on or off but does not indicate whether it is the specified
waveform.

Group Vertical

Syntax SELect:CH<x> {ON|OFF|1|0}

SELect:CH<x>?

Arguments ON turns on the display of the specified waveform. This waveform also becomes
the selected waveform.
OFF turns off the display of the specified waveform.

1 turns on the display of the specified waveform. This waveform also becomes
the selected waveform.
0 turns off the display of the specified waveform.

Examples SELECT:CH2 ON turns the channel 2 waveform display on, and selects channel 2.

SELECT:CH1? might return :SELECT:CH1 1 indicating that channel 1 is being

displayed.

SET? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the commands that list the instrument settings,
except for configuration information for the calibration values. You can use these
commands to return the instrument to the state it was in when you made the SET?
query. The SET? query always returns command headers, regardless of the setting
of the HEADer command. This is because the returned commands are intended
to be sent back to the instrument as a command string. The VERBose command
can still be used to specify whether the returned headers should be abbreviated
or full-length.
This command is identical to the *LRN? command.

2-1674 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax SET?

Related Commands HEADer

*LRN?
VERBose

Examples SET? might return the following response: :ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER

RUNSTOP;STATE 1;MODE SAMPLE;NUMENV 10;NUMAVG 16;REPET
1;:FASTACQ:STATE 0;:APPLICATION:GPKNOB1:ACTIVE
0;:APPLICATION:GPKNOB2:ACTIVE 0;:APPLICATION:WINDOW:HEIGHT
236;WIDTH 640;:APPLICATION:SCOPEAPP:STATE
RUNNING;WINDOW FULLSCREEN;:APPLICATION:EXTAPP:STATE
NOTRUNNING;:AUXOUT:SOURCE ATRIGGER;EDGE FALLING;:CMDBATCH
1;:HEADER 1;:LOCK NONE;:ROSC:SOURCE INTERNAL;:VERBOSE
1;:ALIAS:STATE 0;:DISPLAY:CLOCK 1;COLOR:PALETTE
NORMAL;MATHCOLOR DEFAULT;REFCOLOR DEFAULT;:DISPLAY:FILTER
SINX;FORMAT YT;GRATICULE FULL;INTENSITY:WAVEFORM
75.0000;AUTOBRIGHT 1;:DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE
OFF;STYLE VECTORS;TRIGBAR SHORT;TRIGT 1;VARPERSIST
500.0000E-3;PORT FILE;:DIAG:LEVEL SUBSYS;:TRIGGER:A:MODE
AUTO;TYPE EDGE;LEVEL 0.0000;HOLDOFF:BY DEFAULT;TIME
1.5000E-6;:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE RISE;.

SOCKETServer:ENAble
This command enables or disables the socket server which supports a telnet or
other TCPIP socket connection to send commands and queries to the instrument.
The default state is enabled.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax SOCKETServer:ENAble {0|1|OFF|ON}

SOCKETServer:ENAble?

Arguments 1 enables the socket server. If the state is 0 (disabled) and this command is sent
to enable the socket server when the port is in use by another service, then the
error event code 221 (Settings conflict) is posted to the event queue and the socket
server remains disabled. In this case, select a different port number and attempt to
enable the socket server again.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1675

Commands listed in alphabetical order

0 disables the socket server.

ON enables the socket server.

OFF disables the socket server.

Examples SOCKETSERVER:ENABLE On enables the socket server.

SOCKETSERVER:ENABLE? might return :SOCKETSERVER:ENABLE 1 indicating

the socket server is enabled.

SOCKETServer:PORT
This command sets the TCPIP port for the socket server connection.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax SOCKETServer:PORT <NR1>

SOCKETServer:PORT?

Arguments <NR1> is the TCPIP port for the socket server connection.

If the socket server is enabled and the port specified is in use by another service,
then the error event code 221 (Settings conflict) is posted to the event queue
and the socket server remains in its current state (i.e. enabled/disabled and port
address remain unchanged).
Similarly, if any sessions are active when the port is changed, this same error event
may be posted to the event queue and the port will remain unchanged. In this case,
exit all current sessions and send the :SOCKETServer:PORT command again.

Examples SOCKETSERVER:PORT 4000 sets the socket server port number to 4000.

SOCKETSERVER:PORT? might return :SOCKETSERVER:PORT 4000 indicating

that the port number is 4000.

SOCKETServer:PROTOCol
This command sets or queries the protocol for the socket server.

Group Miscellaneous

2-1676 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SOCKETServer:PROTOCol {TERMinal|NONe}

SOCKETServer:PROTOCol?

Arguments TERMinal specifies terminal protocol for the socket server. When set to
TERMinal, a session startup message is sent to the socket and a command prompt
is provided.
NONe disables the terminal features, allowing the server to be used for raw socket
transactions, such as with a VISA socket server. The default setting is NONe.

Examples SOCKETSERVER:PROTOCOL NONE sets the protocol to none.

SOCKETSERVER:PROTOCOL? might return :SOCKETSERVER:PROTOCOL

TERMINAL indicating the protocol is set to terminal.

*SRE
The *SRE (Service Request Enable) command sets and queries the bits in the
Service Request Enable Register. For more information, refer to Registers.

Group Status and Error

Syntax *SRE <NR1>

*SRE?

Related Commands *CLS

DESE
*ESE
*ESR?
EVENT?
EVMsg?
FACtory
*STB?

Arguments <NR1> is a value in the range from 0 through 255. The binary bits of the SRER
are set according to this value. Using an out-of-range value causes an execution
error. The power-on default for SRER is 0 if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the SRER
maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1677

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples *SRE 48 sets the bits in the SRER to binary 00110000.

*SRE? might return 32, showing that the bits in the SRER have the binary value
of 00100000.

*STB? (Query Only)

The *STB? (Read Status Byte) query returns the contents of the Status Byte
Register (SBR) using the Master Summary Status (MSS) bit. For more
information, refer to Registers.

Group Status and Error

Syntax *STB?

Related Commands *CLS

DESE
*ESE
*ESR?
EVENT?
EVMsg?
FACtory
*SRE

Returns <NR1>

Examples *STB? might return 96, showing that the SBR contains the binary value 01100000.

SV:CH<x>:RF_AVErage:NUMAVg
This command sets or queries the number of acquisitions to be used when creating
the Average trace for the specified spectrum trace channel in the Spectrum
View. The Average spectrum trace shows the average of values from multiple
acquisitions at each trace point.

Group Spectrum View

2-1678 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SV:CH<x>:RF_AVErage:NUMAVg <NR1>

SV:CH<x>:RF_AVErage:NUMAVg?

Arguments CH<x> specifies the spectrum trace channel source.

<NR1> specifies the number of acquisitions to average. The range is 2 - 512, in

exponential increments.

Examples SV:CH1:RF_AVErage:NUMAVg 100 sets the number of acquisitions to use for

the Average spectrum trace of channel 1 to 128 (the closest power of 2 increment).
SV:CH2:RF_AVErage:NUMAVg? might return 16, indicating that the number of
averages for the channel 2 Average spectrum trace is set to 16.

SV:CH<x>:RF_MAGnitude:FORMat
This command sets or queries the format of the Magnitude vs. Time trace for
the specified channel.

Conditions Requires option SV-RFVT

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:CH<x>:RF_MAGnitude:FORMat {AMPLINear|POWLINear|POWLOG}

SV:CH<x>:RF_MAGnitude:FORMat?

Related Commands DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_PHASe<x>:VERTical:POSition

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number of the Magnitude vs. Time trace.

AMPLINear (Amplitude (linear)) sets the magnitude in Volts with square root
conversion of linear power values.
POWLINear (Power (linear) sets the magnitude in Watts with direct use of linear
power values.
POWLOG (Power (log) sets the magnitude in dB using log conversion of linear
power values.

Examples SV:CH2:RF_MAGnitude:FORMat AMPLINear sets the Channel 2 Magnitude

vs. Time trace to be shown with linear power values.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1679

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SV:CH1:RF_MAGnitude:FORMat? might return

SV:CH1:RF_MAGnitude:FORMat POWLOG, indicating that the Channel 1
Magnitude vs. Time trace is displayed with log power values.

SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:REFerence:DEGrees
This command sets or queries the channel Phase Reference value in degrees.

Conditions Requires option SV-RFVT

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:REFerence:DEGrees <NR3>

SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:REFerence:DEGrees?

Related Commands SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:REFerence:TIMe, SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:REFerence:

POSition, SV:RF_PHASe:REFerence:MASTer

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number of the Phase vs. Time trace.

NR3 is the Phase Reference value, in degrees. This indicates a fixed phase value
at the phase time set by SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:REFerence:TIMe. If CH<x> is
the master phase reference, then the value is used to calculate the phase values
of all other channels.

Examples SV:CH1:RF_PHASe:REFerence:DEGrees 25 sets the Phase Reference value

to 25 degrees.
SV:CH2:RF_PHASe:REFerence:DEGrees? might return
SV:CH2:RF_PHASe:REFerence:DEGrees 0, indicating that the
Phase Reference value is 0 degrees.

SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:REFerence:POSition
This command sets or queries whether the channel Phase Reference is located at
the Trigger position or at the Cursor A position.

Conditions Requires option SV-RFVT

Group Spectrum View

2-1680 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:REFerence:POSition {TRIGger|CURSor}

SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:REFerence:POSition?

Related Commands SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:REFerence:TIMe, SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:REFerence:

DEGrees, SV:RF_PHASe:REFerence:MASTer

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number of the Phase vs. Time trace.

TRIGger sets the Phase Reference location to the Trigger position.

CURSor sets the channel Phase Reference location to the phase time set by
SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:REFerence:TIMe, which defaults to the Cursor A
position.

Examples SV:CH1:RF_PHASe:REFerence:POSition TRIGger sets the Phase Reference

location to the Trigger position.
SV:CH2:RF_PHASe:REFerence:POSition? might return
SV:CH2:RF_PHASe:REFerence:POSition CURSor, indicating that the Phase
Reference location is at the Cursor A position.

SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:REFerence:TIMe
This command sets or queries the channel Phase Reference time in seconds.

Conditions Requires option SV-RFVT

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:REFerence:TIMe <NR3>

SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:REFerence:TIMe?

Related Commands SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:REFerence:DEGrees, SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:

REFerence:POSition, SV:RF_PHASe:REFerence:MASTer

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number of the Phase vs. Time trace.

NR3 is the Phase Reference time, in seconds. This indicates the time at which the
phase value set by SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:REFerence:DEGrees is applied. If the
phase position set by SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:REFerence:POSition is TRIGger,
then the phase time is fixed at 0 seconds and cannot be changed. If the phase
position is CURSor, then the phase time may be set to any value, and is initialized

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1681

Commands listed in alphabetical order

to the position of Cursor A. If CH<x> is the master phase reference, then the time
is used to calculate the phase values of all other channels.

Examples SV:CH1:RF_PHASe:REFerence:TIMe 25e-9 sets the Phase Reference time

to 25 ns.
SV:CH2:RF_PHASe:REFerence:TIMe? might return
SV:CH2:RF_PHASe:REFerence:TIMe 0, indicating that the Phase
Reference time is 0 seconds.

SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:WRAP:DEGrees
This command sets or queries the Phase Wrap limit for the Phase vs. Time trace
for the specified channel.

Conditions Requires option SV-RFVT

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:WRAP:DEGrees <NR3>

SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:WRAP:DEGrees?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number of the Phase vs. Time trace.

NR3 sets the number of wrap degrees, from 180 degrees to infinity. When Phase
Wrap is enabled, the phase values in the Phase vs Time waveform are constrained
to be within ± the specified limit. Phase values below or above the limit are
wrapped by repeatedly adding or subtracting 360 degrees until they are within
range.

Examples SV:CH2:RF_PHASe:WRAP:DEGrees 200 sets the Phase Wrap limit for the
Channel 2 Phase vs. Time trace to 200 degrees.
SV:CH1:RF_PHASe:WRAP:DEGrees? might return
SV:CH1:RF_PHASe:WRAP:DEGrees 210, indicating that the Phase Wrap limit
for the Channel 1 Phase vs. Time trace is 210 degrees.

SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:WRAP:STATE
This command sets or queries whether Phase Wrap is applied to the Phase vs.
Time trace for the specified channel.

2-1682 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SV-RFVT

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:WRAP:STATE {ON|OFF}

SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:WRAP:STATE?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number of the Phase vs. Time trace.

ON enables applying phase wrap on the specified Phase vs. Time channel trace.

OFF disables applying phase wrap on the specified Phase vs. Time channel trace.

Examples SV:CH5:RF_PHASe:WRAP:STATE ON turns on (enables)Phase Wrap for the

Channel 5 Phase vs. Time trace.
SV:CH1:RF_PHASe:WRAP:STATE? might return
SV:CH1:RF_PHASe:WRAP:STATE OFF, indicating that Phase Wrap is turned off
(disabled) for the Channel 1 Phase vs. Time trace.

SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_AVErage
This command sets or queries whether the Average trace is displayed for the
specified spectrum trace channel in the Spectrum View.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_AVErage {ON|1|OFF|0}

SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_AVErage?

Arguments CH<x> specifies the spectrum trace channel source.

ON enables the display of the Average trace for the specified spectrum trace
channel.
OFF disables the display of the Average trace for the specified spectrum trace
channel.
1 enables the display of the Average trace for the specified spectrum trace channel.

0 disables the display of the Average trace for the specified spectrum trace channel.

Examples SV:CH3:SELect:RF_AVErage ON turns on the display of the Average trace for

the channel 3 spectrum trace.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1683

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SV:CH1:SELect:RF_AVErage? might return 0, indicating that the Average

trace for the channel 1 spectrum trace is turned off.

SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_FREQuency
This command sets or queries whether the Frequency vs. Time trace for the
specified channel is displayed in the Waveform View.

Conditions Requires option SV-RFVT

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_FREQuency {ON|OFF}

SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_FREQuency?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number of the Frequency vs. Time trace.

ON enables display of the Frequency vs. Time trace.

OFF disables display of the Frequency vs. Time trace.

Examples SV:CH4:SELect:RF_FREQuency ON turns on display of the Channel 4

Frequency vs. Time trace.
SV:CH1:SELect:RF_FREQuency? might return
SV:CH1:SELect:RF_FREQuency OFF, indicating that the Channel 1 Frequency
vs. Time trace is not displayed.

SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_MAGnitude
This command sets or queries whether the Magnitude vs. Time trace for the
specified channel is displayed in the Waveform View.

Conditions Requires option SV-RFVT

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_MAGnitude {ON|OFF}

SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_MAGnitude?

2-1684 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number of the Magnitude vs. Time trace.

ON enables display of the Magnitude vs. Time trace.

OFF disables display of the Magnitude vs. Time trace.

Examples SV:CH4:SELect:RF_MAGnitude ON turns on (enables) display of the Channel

4 Magnitude vs. Time trace.
SV:CH1:SELect:RF_MAGnitude? might return
SV:CH1:SELect:RF_MAGnitude OFF, indicating that the Channel 1 Magnitude
vs. Time trace is not displayed.

SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_MAXHold
This command sets or queries whether the Max Hold trace is displayed for the
specified spectrum trace channel in the Spectrum View.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_MAXHold {ON|1|OFF|0}

SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_MAXHold?

Arguments CH<x> specifies the spectrum trace channel source.

ON enables the display of the Max Hold trace for the specified spectrum trace
channel.
OFF disables the display of the Max Hold trace for the specified spectrum trace
channel.
1 enables the display of the Max Hold trace for the specified spectrum trace
channel.
0 disables the display of the Max Hold trace for the specified spectrum trace
channel.

Examples SV:CH3:SELect:RF_MAXHold ON turns on the display of the Max Hold trace

for the channel 3 spectrum trace.
SV:CH5:SELect:RF_MAXHold? might return 1, indicating that the Max Hold
trace for the channel 5 spectrum trace is displayed.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1685

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_MINHold
This command sets or queries whether the Min Hold trace is displayed for the
specified spectrum trace channel in the Spectrum View.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_MINHold {ON|1|OFF|0}

SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_MINHold?

Arguments CH<x> specifies the spectrum trace channel source.

ON enables the display of the Min Hold trace for the specified spectrum trace
channel.
OFF disables the display of the Min Hold trace for the specified spectrum trace
channel.
1 enables the display of the Min Hold trace for the specified spectrum trace
channel.
0 disables the display of the Min Hold trace for the specified spectrum trace
channel.

Examples SV:CH2:SELect:RF_MINHold ON turns on the display of the Min Hold trace

for the channel 2 spectrum trace.
SV:CH1:SELect:RF_MINHold? might return 0, indicating that the Min Hold
trace for the channel 1 spectrum trace is turned off.

SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_NORMal
This command sets or queries whether the Normal trace is displayed for the
specified spectrum trace channel in the Spectrum View.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_NORMal {ON|1|OFF|0}

SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_NORMal?

Arguments CH<x> specifies the spectrum trace channel source.

ON enables the display of the Normal trace for the specified spectrum trace channel.

2-1686 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

OFF disables the display of the Normal trace for the specified spectrum trace
channel.
1 enables the display of the Normal trace for the specified spectrum trace channel.

0 disables the display of the Normal trace for the specified spectrum trace channel.

Examples SV:CH3:SELect:RF_NORMal ON turns on the display of the Average trace for

the channel 3 spectrum trace.
SV:CH1:SELect:RF_NORMal? might return 0, indicating that the Average trace
for the channel 1 spectrum trace is turned off.

SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_PHASe
This command sets or queries whether the Phase vs. Time trace for the specified
channel is displayed in the Waveform View.

Conditions Requires option SV-RFVT

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_PHASe {ON|OFF}

SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_PHASe?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number of the Phase vs. Time trace.

ON enables display of the Phase vs. Time trace.

OFF disables display of the Phase vs. Time trace.

Examples SV:CH4:SELect:RF_PHASe ON turns on (enables) display of the Channel 4

Phase vs. Time trace.
SV:CH1:SELect:RF_PHASe? might return SV:CH1:SELect:RF_PHASe OFF,
indicating that the Channel 1 Phase vs. Time trace is not displayed.

SV:CH<x>:SELect:SPECtrogram
This command sets or queries whether the spectrogram plot for the specified
channel is displayed in the Spectrum View. The channel number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SV-RFVT

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1687

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:CH<x>:SELect:SPECtrogram {ON|OFF}

SV:CH<x>:SELect:SPECtrogram?

Arguments ON turns on spectrogram

OFF turns of spectrogram.

Examples SV:CH4:SELect:SPECtrogram ON turns on spectrogram.

SV:CH4:SELect:SPECtrogram? might return ON, indicating that spectrogram

is on.

SV:CH<x>:SELTrace
This command sets or queries the spectrum trace type to show for the specified
channel in the Spectrum View. Each channel’s spectrum trace can display up to
four traces; a Normal trace (default), a Max Hold trace, a Min Hold trace and
an Average trace.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:CH<x>:SELTrace {NORMal|MAXHold|MINHold|AVErage}

SV:CH<x>:SELTrace?

Arguments CH<x> specifies the analog channel to use as the Spectrum View source.

NORMal selects the Normal trace for the specified spectrum trace channel. If the
specified spectrum trace channel does not have a Normal trace, this command is
ignored.
MAXHold selects the Max Hold trace for the specified spectrum trace channel.
If the specified spectrum trace channel does not have a Max Hold trace, this
command is ignored.
MINHold selects the Min Hold trace for the specified spectrum trace channel.
If the specified spectrum trace channel does not have a Min Hold trace, this
command is ignored.
AVErage selects the Average trace for the specified spectrum trace channel. If the
specified spectrum trace channel does not have an Average trace, this command is
ignored.

2-1688 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SV:CH1:SELTrace MAXhold selects the Max Hold trace of the channel 1
spectrum trace in the Spectrum View.
SV:CH1:SELTrace? might return AVE, indicating that the Average trace of the
channel 1 spectrum trace is currently selected in the Spectrum View.

SV:CH<x>:SQUELCH:STATE
This command sets or queries whether Squelch is enabled for the RF vs Time
traces for the specified channel. The frequency vs. time and phase vs. time traces
aren’t meaningful when the transmitting signal is turned off, as they just show
broadband noise that clutters up the display. With squelch, a threshold may be
defined for the magnitude vs. time trace to indicate when the transmitter is on/off.
Then the frequency and phase vs. time traces are shown only when the magnitude
vs. time trace is above the threshold and they are blanked out when it’s below
the threshold.

Conditions Requires option SV-RFVT

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:CH<x>:SQUELCH:STATE {ON|OFF}

SV:CH<x>:SQUELCH:STATE?

Related Commands SV:CH<x>:SQUELCH:THReshold

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number of the Frequency or Phase vs. Time trace.

ON enables (turns on) Squelch calculations.

OFF disables (turns off) Squelch calculations.

Examples SV:CH6:SQUELCH:STATE ON turns on Squelch calculations for the RF vs. Time

traces of Channel 6.
SV:CH1:SQUELCH:STATE? might return SV:CH1:SQUELCH:STATE OFF,
indicating that Squelch calculations are turned off for the RF vs. Time traces
of Channel 1

SV:CH<x>:SQUELCH:THReshold
This command sets or queries the Squelch threshold value for the RF vs Time
traces for the specified channel.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1689

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SV-RFVT

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:CH<x>:SQUELCH:THReshold <NR3>

SV:CH<x>:SQUELCH:THReshold?

Related Commands SV:CH<x>:SQUELCH:STATE

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number of the Magnitude vs. Time trace.

NR3 sets the threshold value, in volts, applied to the Magnitude vs. Time trace
that determines whether or not to show the Frequency and Phase vs. Time traces
for the same channel.

Examples SV:CH5:SQUELCH:THReshold 0.5 sets the Squelch Threshold value to 0.5

volts for the RF vs Time traces of Channel 5.
SV:CH1:SQUELCH:THReshold? might return SV:CH1:SQUELCH:THReshold
1.25, indicating a Squelch Threshold value of 1.25 Volts for the RF vs. Time
traces of Channel 1.

SV:CH<x>:UNIts
This command sets or queries the absolute logarithmic amplitude vertical scale
units to show in the specified spectrum trace channel of the Spectrum View.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:CH<x>:UNIts {DBM|DBUW|DBMV|DBUV|DBMA|DBUA}

SV:CH<x>:UNIts?

Arguments CH<x> specifies the analog channel to use as the Spectrum View source.

DBM specifies Decibel milliwatts (dBm).

DBUW specifies Decibel microwatts (dBµW).

DBMV specifies Decibel millivolts (dBmV).

DBUV specifies Decibel microvolts (dBµV).

DBMA specifies Decibel milliamperes (dBmA).

2-1690 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DBUA specifies Decibel microamperes (dBµA).

Examples SV:CH5:UNIts DBUV sets the units to be used for the channel 5spectrum trace
to decibel microvolts.
SV:CH1:UNIts? might return DBM, indicating that the vertical units for the
channel 1 spectrum trace are decibel milliwatts.

SV:LOCKCenter
This command sets or queries whether the Center Frequency setting is locked
across all channels in the Spectrum View.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:LOCKCenter {ON|1|OFF|0}

SV:LOCKCenter?

Related Commands CH<x>:SV:CENTERFrequency

Arguments ON sets all spectrum traces channels in the Spectrum View window to use the
same center frequency value. When the center frequency of any channel is
changed, the center frequency of all other channels is automatically changed to
match that value.
1 sets all spectrum traces channels in the Spectrum View window to use the same
center frequency value. When the center frequency of any channel is changed,
the center frequency of all other channels is automatically changed to match
that value.
0 enables use of different center frequency values for each spectrum trace channel.
The center frequencies of all channels are independent.
OFF enables use of different center frequency values for each spectrum trace
channel. The center frequencies of all channels are independent.

Examples SV:LOCKCenter ON locks all spectrum trace channels to the same center
frequency.
SV:LOCKCenter? might return 0, which indicates that each spectrum trace
channel may have an independent center frequency setting.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1691

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SV:LOCKSpectrum
This command sets or queries whether the Spectrum Time value is locked across
all spectrum trace channels in the Spectrum View.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:LOCKSpectrum {ON|1|OFF|0}

SV:LOCKSpectrum?

Related Commands CH<x>:SV:POSition

Arguments ON sets all spectrum traces channels in the Spectrum View window to use the same
Spectrum Time value. When the Spectrum Time of any channel is changed, the
Spectrum Time of all other channels is automatically changed to match that value.
1 sets all spectrum traces channels in the Spectrum View window to use the same
Spectrum Time value. When the Spectrum Time of any channel is changed, the
Spectrum Time of all other channels is automatically changed to match that value.
0 enables use of different Spectrum Time values for each spectrum trace channel.
The Spectrum Time of all channels are independent.
OFF enables use of different Spectrum Time values for each spectrum trace
channel. The Spectrum Time of all channels are independent.

Examples SV:LOCKSpectrum ON sets all spectrum trace channels to use the same spectrum
time.
SV:LOCKSpectrum? might return 0, which indicates each channel may have an
independent Spectrum Time setting.

SV:MARKER:PEAK:EXCURsion
This command sets or queries the minimum peak excursion value, in dB, for
the Spectrum View trace peak markers.
Peak excursion refers to the minimum amount a spectrum signal needs to fall in
amplitude between marked peaks to be considered another valid peak. If the
peak excursion value is low, more peaks will tend to qualify as valid peaks and
have associated markers. If the peak excursion value is high, fewer peaks will
have associated markers.

Group Spectrum View

2-1692 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SV:MARKER:PEAK:EXCURsion <NR3>

SV:MARKER:PEAK:EXCURsion?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the peak marker excursion value in dB. The range of values
is 0.0 dB to 200.0 dB.

Examples SV:MARKER:PEAK:EXCURsion 12 sets the peak excursion value to 12 dB.

SV:MARKER:PEAK:EXCURsion? might return 30.00, indicating that a peak

must exceed 30 dB change from other marked peaks to be marked with a peak
indicator icon.

SV:MARKER:PEAK:MAXimum
This command sets or queries the maximum number of Spectrum View peak
markers that can be placed on spectrum traces.
the Spectrum View window can show between 1 and 11 peak markers on all
spectrum traces. The default is 5. To turn on the peak markers, use the command
SV:MARKER:PEAK:STATE. The actual number of peak markers may be less
than the maximum, depending on the threshold and excursion values and the
spectral content of the RF signal. If more peaks than the maximum are detected
that meet the threshold and excursion criteria, only the highest amplitude peaks
will have markers placed on them.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:MARKER:PEAK:MAXimum <NR1>

SV:MARKER:PEAK:MAXimum?

Related Commands SV:MARKER:PEAK:STATE

Arguments <NR1> is an integer value that specifies the maximum number of peak markers to
display on spectrum traces. he range of values is 1 to 11.

Examples SV:MARKER:PEAK:MAXimum 3 sets the maximum number of peaks that can

have markers to three.
SV:MARKER:PEAK:MAXimum? might return 7, indicating that the maximum
number of peaks that can have markers is set to seven.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1693

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SV:MARKER:PEAK:STATE
This command sets or queries showing peak markers on spectrum traces in the
Spectrum View window.
There are up to 11 markers. The maximum number of markers can be set
using the command SV:MARKER:PEAK:MAXimum. The peak markers
find amplitude peaks based upon threshold and excursion settings (set with
the SV:MARKER:PEAK:EXCURsion and SV:MARKER:PEAK:THReshold
commands.) Each peak marker has a readout associated with it. These can be
absolute or delta readouts (set with the SV:MARKER:TYPe command.)

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:MARKER:PEAK:STATE {ON|1|OFF|0}

SV:MARKER:PEAK:STATE?

Related Commands SV:MARKER:PEAK:MAXimum

SV:MARKER:PEAK:EXCURsion
SV:MARKER:PEAK:THReshold
SV:MARKER:TYPe

Arguments 1 enables showing peak marker icons on spectrum trace waveforms.

ON enables showing peak marker icons on spectrum trace waveforms.

0 disables showing peak marker icons on spectrum trace waveforms.

OFF disables showing peak marker icons on spectrum trace waveforms.

Examples SV:MARKER:PEAK:STATE 1 turns the peak markers on.

SV:MARKER:PEAK:STATE? might return 0, indicating that peak markers are

turned off.

SV:MARKER:PEAK:THReshold
This command sets or queries the minimum peak threshold value required to
mark a peak. Only peaks with an amplitude greater than the threshold value will
qualify for peak marker placement. Applies to all spectrum traces, and to each
trace in its own vertical units.

Group Spectrum View

2-1694 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SV:MARKER:PEAK:THReshold <NR3>

SV:MARKER:PEAK:THReshold?

Related Commands SV:CH<x>:UNIts

Arguments <NR3> specifies the peak marker threshold value. The range of values is –200.0
to 200.0.

Examples SV:MARKER:PEAK:THReshold -40 sets the peak marker threshold to -40 dBm.

SV:MARKER:PEAK:THReshold? might return -50.00, indicating that only

peaks with an amplitude greater than -50 dBm qualify for peak marker placement.

SV:MARKER:PEAKS:AMPLITUDE? (Query Only)

This command queries the peak amplitudes for the Spectrum View trace peak
markers.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:MARKER:PEAKS:AMPLITUDE?

Returns Returns the peak amplitudes in a comma separated list.

Examples SV:MARKER:PEAKS:AMPLITUDE? might return

"-59.9311294555664,-67.5772018432617,-66.0407104492188,-69.4306945800
indicating that a peak amplitudes are -59.9311294555664, -67.5772018432617,
-66.0407104492188, -69.4306945800781, and -62.5529403686523.

SV:MARKER:PEAKS:FREQuency? (Query Only)

This command queries the peak frequencies for the Spectrum View trace peak
markers.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:MARKER:PEAKS:FREQuency?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1695

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Returns Returns the peak frequencies in a comma separated list.

Examples SV:MARKER:PEAKS:FREQuency? might return

"781.2605289757411E+6,906.0288915094338E+6,946.8286725067385E+6,1.02605
indicating that a peak frequencies are 781.2605289757411E+6,
906.0288915094338E+6, 946.8286725067385E+6, and
1.026059214960E+9,1.1718855289757E+9.

SV:MARKER:REFERence (No Query Form)

This command sets the Center Frequency of the currently selected Spectrum View
channel to the frequency indicated by the Reference Marker, in effect moving the
Reference Marker to the center of the screen.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:MARKER:REFERence

Related Commands SV:CH<x>:UNIts

Examples SV:MARKER:REFERence moves the Reference Marker location to the center

of the screen.

SV:MARKER:REFERence:AMPLITUDE? (Query Only)

This command queries the amplitude (vertical) value of the Reference Marker
in user-set units. This value indicates the absolute amplitude of the Reference
Marker, regardless of whether the other markers are manual or automatic.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:MARKER:REFERence:AMPLITUDE?

Related Commands SV:CH<x>:UNIts

Returns <NR3> specifies the amplitude of the Reference Marker.

2-1696 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SV:MARKER:REFERence:AMPLITUDE? might return -65.6218, indicating an

amplitude value of -65.6218 dBm.

SV:MARKER:REFERence:FREQuency? (Query Only)

This command queries the frequency of the Reference Marker, in Hz, when the
Spectrum View trace markers are on.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:MARKER:REFERence:FREQuency?

Returns <NR3> specifies the frequency of the Reference Marker.

Examples SV:MARKER:REFERence:FREQuency? might return 1.6830E+9, indicating

that the Reference Marker frequency is 1.683 GHz.

SV:MARKER:TYPe
This command sets or queries the peak marker type (either DELTa or ABSolute).
An Absolute marker shows the frequency and amplitude at the location of the
marker. A Delta marker shows the frequency and amplitude of the marker relative
to the Reference Marker. The Reference Marker shows the absolute frequency
and amplitude, regardless of this command. The marker amplitude measurements
are in dBm for Absolute, or in dBc (dB below carrier amplitude) for Delta.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:MARKER:TYPe {DELta|ABSolute}

SV:MARKER:TYPe?

Arguments DELTa specifies to display the frequency and amplitude of the peak markers
relative to the Reference Marker. The relative amplitude is in dBc (dB below
carrier amplitude); the relative frequency is in Hz.
ABSolute specifies to display the actual frequency and amplitude of each peak
marker. The absolute amplitude is in user-set units; the absolute frequency is
in Hz.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1697

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SV:MARKER:TYPe DELta changes the marker type to Delta.

SV:MARKER:TYPe? might return ABSOLUTE, indicating that the peak markers are
measuring the absolute values of the spectrum trace at those positions.

SV:RBW
This command sets or queries the resolution bandwidth (RBW) when the RBW
mode has been set to MANUAL (using the command SV:RBWMode).
The resolution bandwidth is the width of the narrowest measurable band of
frequencies in a Spectrum View trace. By default, the RBW tracks the span
value in a 1000:1 ratio. The RBW determines the level to which the instrument
can resolve individual frequencies in the frequency domain. For example, if the
input signal contains two carriers separated by 1 kHz, you will not be able to
discriminate between them unless the RBW is less than 1 kHz.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:RBW <NR3>

SV:RBW?

Related Commands SV:RBWMode

Arguments <NR3> specifies the width of the narrowest measurable band of frequencies in a
Spectrum View trace, in Hz.

Examples SV:RBW 2.0E+04 sets the RBW to 20 kHz.

SV:RBW? might return 3.0E+6, indicating that the RBW has been set to 3 MHz.

SV:RBWMode
This command sets or queries the resolution bandwidth (RBW) mode, either
Automatic or Manual.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:RBWMode {AUTOmatic|MANual}

SV:RBWMode?

2-1698 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands SV:RBW

SV:SPANRBWRatio

Arguments AUTOmatic specifies the resolution bandwidth automatically as the span is

changed. The default behavior is 1000:1, but you can set it to other values in a
1-2-5 sequence (e.g. 10000, 20000, 50000). To specify the RBW ratio that will be
used when the mode is set to automatic, use the command SV:SPANRBWRatio.
MANual specifies to set the resolution bandwidth, independently from the span,
using the command SV:RBW.

Examples SV:RBWMode MANual sets the RBW mode to Manual.

SV:RBWMode? might return AUTO, indicating that the RBW mode is set to
Automatic mode (default).

SV:RF_PHASe:REFerence:MASTer
This command sets or queries the channel used as the Master Phase Reference.

Conditions Requires option SV-RFVT

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:RF_PHASe:REFerence:MASTer {CH<x>|NONE}

SV:RF_PHASe:REFerence:MASTer?

Arguments CH<x> sets the specified channel as the Master Phase Reference source.

NONE indicates that there is no Master Phase Reference.

Examples SV:RF_PHASe:REFerence:MASTer CH3 sets the Master Phase Reference

source to Channel 3.
SV:RF_PHASe:REFerence:MASTer? might return
SV:RF_PHASe:REFerence:MASTer NONE, indicating that there is no Master
Phase Reference.

SV:SPAN
This command sets or queries the span setting for all channels in the Spectrum
View. The span is the range of frequencies that can be observed centered on the

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1699

Commands listed in alphabetical order

center frequency. This is the width of the frequency domain trace, which is from
the center frequency – ½span to the center frequency + ½ span.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:SPAN <NR3>

SV:SPAN?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the span value in Hz.

Examples SV:SPAN 2E+9 sets the span to 2 GHz.

SV:SPAN? might return 10.0E+6, indicating that the span is 10 MHz.

SV:SPANRBWRatio
This command sets or queries the ratio of the span to the resolution bandwidth
(RBW) that will be used when the RBW Mode is set to AUTO.
The span is the width of the frequency domain trace in Hz, which is equal to the
stop frequency minus the start frequency. The RBW is the width of the narrowest
measurable band of frequencies in a frequency domain trace. The default RBW
ratio is 1000 : 1.
Use the command SV:RBWMode to set the RBW Mode to Automatic.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:SPANRBWRatio <NR3>

SV:SPANRBWRatio?

Related Commands SV:RBWMode

Arguments <NR3> specifies the span-to-RBW ratio.

Examples SV:SPANRBWRatio 1000 sets the RBW to one one-thousandth of the span.

SV:SPANRBWRatio? might return 1.00E+3, which means the RBW has been
set to one one-thousandth of the span.

2-1700 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SV:SPECtrogram:CSCale:MAX
This command sets or queries the maximum color scale value. Maximum must be
> Minimum. Thus, if the user is adjusting Maximum down to the point where it
would be the same as Minimum, then Minimum begins decrementing as needed
to stay 1 dB below Maximum.

Conditions Requires option SV-RFVT

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:SPECtrogram:CSCale:MAX <NR3>

SV:SPECtrogram:CSCale:MAX?

Arguments <NR3> sets the maximum color scale value. The default value is 0.0 and the
valid range is -169.0 to 100.0

Examples SV:SPECtrogram:CSCale:MAX 0 sets the color scale max value to 0.

SV:SPECtrogram:CSCale:MAX? might return

SV:SPECtrogram:CSCale:MAX 0, indicating that the color scale max value
is 0.

SV:SPECtrogram:CSCale:MIN
This command sets or queries the minimum color scale value. Minimum must
be < Maximum. Thus, if the user is adjusting Minimum up to the point where it
would be the same as Minimum, then Maximum begins incrementing as needed
to stay 1 dB above minimum.

Conditions Requires option SV-RFVT

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:SPECtrogram:CSCale:MIN <NR3>

SV:SPECtrogram:CSCale:MIN?

Related Commands SV:CH<x>:SELect:SPECtrogram

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1701

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR3> sets the minimum color scale value. The default value is -100.0 and the
valid range is -170.0 to 99.0

Examples SV:SPECtrogram:CSCale:MAX -100.0 sets the color scale min value to

-100.0.
SV:SPECtrogram:CSCale:MAX? might return
SV:SPECtrogram:CSCale:MAX -100.0, indicating that the color scale min
value is -100.0.

SV:SPECtrogram:CURSor:A
This command sets or Queries whether the spectrum trace at cursor A position
is selected or not.

Conditions Requires option SV-RFVT

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:SPECtrogram:CURSor:A {1|0|ON|OFF}

SV:SPECtrogram:CURSor:A?

Related Commands SV:CH<x>:SELect:SPECtrogram

Arguments 1 turns on the spectrum trace for cursor A position.

0 turns off the spectrum trace for cursor A position. Off is the default.

ON turns on the spectrum trace for cursor A position.

OFF turns off the spectrum trace for cursor A position. Off is the default.

Examples SV:SPECtrogram:CURSor:A ON turns on the spectrum trace for cursor A

position.
SV:SPECtrogram:CURSor:A? might return SV:SPECtrogram:CURSor:A
OFF, indicating that the spectrum trace for cursor A position is turned off.

SV:SPECtrogram:CURSor:B
This command sets or queries whether the spectrum trace at cursor B position
is selected or not.

2-1702 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SV-RFVT

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:SPECtrogram:CURSor:B {1|0|ON|OFF}

SV:SPECtrogram:CURSor:B?

Related Commands SV:CH<x>:SELect:SPECtrogram

Arguments 1 on the spectrum trace for cursor B position.

0 turns off the spectrum trace for cursor B position. Off is the default.

ON turns on the spectrum trace for cursor B position

OFF turns off the spectrum trace for cursor B position. Off is the default.

Examples SV:SPECtrogram:CURSor:B ON turns on the spectrum trace for cursor B

position .
SV:SPECtrogram:CURSor:B? might return SV:SPECtrogram:CURSor:B
OFF, indicating that the spectrum trace for cursor B position is turned off.

SV:WINDOW
This command sets or queries the window type used by the windowing function
of the Spectrum View. The windowing function is a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)
technique used to minimize the discontinuities between successive frames of an
RF time domain signal. The default window type is Blackman-Harris.

Group Spectrum View

Syntax SV:WINDOW {KAISerbessel|RECTangular|HAMMing|

HANNing|BLACkmanharris|FLATtop2}
SV:WINDOW?

Arguments KAISerbessel specifies the Kaiser-Bessel window type (a high or moderate

resolution window).
RECTangular specifies the Rectangular window type (a window function is
equivalent to multiplying all gate data by one).

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1703

Commands listed in alphabetical order

HAMMing specifies the Hamming window type (a high or moderate resolution

window based on a cosine series).
HANNing specifies the Hanning window type (a high or moderate resolution
window based on a cosine series).
BLACkmanharris specifies the Blackman-Harris window type (a low-resolution
(high dynamic range) window based on a cosine series).
FLATtop2 specifies the Flattop2 window type (a low-resolution (high dynamic
range) window).

Examples SV:WINDOW BLACkmanharris sets the window to Blackman-Harris.

SV:WINDOW? might return KAISER, indicating that the window function is set
to Kaiser-Bessel.

TEKSecure (No Query Form)

This command initializes, for the current user, both waveform and setup
memories, overwriting any previously stored data.
Equivalent to invoking Teksecure from the Utility menu. This is a time-consuming
operation (3 to 5 minutes) and the instrument is inoperable until the TekSecure
operation is complete.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax TEKSecure

Examples TEKSECURE initializes both waveform and setup memories.

TIMe
This command sets the time in the form hh:mm:ss where hh refers to a two-digit
hour number, mm refers to a two-digit minute number from 01 to 60, and ss refers
to a two-digit second number from 01 to 60.

Conditions Time can only be changed in increments of 1 hour maximum.

There is a 24-hour total time change limit. Time changes cannot cross the
00:00:00 boundary.
On Linux, if an internet connection is present, any time changes are automatically
overridden by the NTP server. This also resets the 24-hour time change limit.

2-1704 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

On Windows, this command only succeeds if the scope application was started
with administrator privileges.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax TIMe <QString>

TIMe?

Related Commands DATE?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string representing the desired time.

Examples TIME "13:02:10" sets the time to 1:02 p.m. and 10 seconds.

TIME? might return :TIME "14:05:17", indicating the current time is set to
2:05 p.m. and 17 seconds.

TIMe:ZONe
This command sets the time zone to the one specified.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax TIMe:ZONe <QString>

TIMe:ZONe?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string representing the desired time zone.

Examples TIME:ZONE "America/Yellowknife" sets the time zone to UTC delta -7.

TIME:ZONE? might return :TIME:ZONE "America/Los_Angeles".

TIMe:ZONe:UTCDELTa
This command sets or queries the time zone using the difference between the
desired time zone and UTC.

Group Miscellaneous

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1705

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TIMe:ZONe:UTCDELTa <NR3>

TIMe:ZONe:UTCDELTa?

Arguments <NR3> is the specified number of hours difference between the desired time zone
and UTC which is equivalent to GMT. The deltas supported are: -12.00, -11.00,
-10.00, -9.30, -9.00, -8.30, -8.00, -7.00, -6.00, -5.00, -4.00, -3.30, -3.00, -2.00,
-1.00, 0.0, 1.00, 2.00, 3.00, 3.30, 4.00, 4.30, 5.00, 5.30, 6.00, 6.30, 7.00, 8.00,
9.00, 9.30, 10.00, 10.30, 11.00, 11.30, 12.00

Examples TIME:ZONE:UTCDELTA -7.0e0 sets the time zone to America/Yellowknife.

TIME:ZONE:UTCDELTA? might return :TIME:ZONE:UTCDELTA -8.0000.

TOTaluptime? (Query Only)

Total number of hours the instrument has been turned on since the NV memory
was last programmed, usually during the initial manufacturing process.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax TOTaluptime?

Returns The total number of hours the instrument has been turned on since the NV
memory was last programmed.

Examples TOTALUPTIME? might return :TOTALUPTIME 756 indicating the up time is

756 minutes.

TOUCHSCReen:CALibrate (No Query Form)

This command launches the touch screen calibration procedure. This command
is equivalent to tapping the Calibrate touch screen control in the Utility->Self
Test menu.

Group Self Test

Syntax TOUCHSCReen:CALibrate STARt

Arguments STARt launches the touch screen calibration procedure.

2-1706 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples TOUCHSCREEN:CALIBRATE START launches the touch screen calibration

procedure.

TOUCHSCReen:STATe
This sets or queries the enabled state of the touch screen only. This command is
equivalent to pushing the Touch Off button on the front panel.
To completely disable front panel operation, use the command LOCK ALL. To
re-enable the front panel, send the command LOCK NONE.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax TOUCHSCReen:STATe {0|1|OFF|ON}

TOUCHSCReen:STATe?

Related Commands LOCk

Arguments 0 disables the touch screen.

ON enables the touch screen.

OFF disables the touch screen.

Examples TOUCHSCReen:STATe OFF disables the touch screen.

TOUCHSCReen:STATe? might return :TOUCHSCREEN:STATE 1 indicating the

touch screen is enabled.

*TRG (No Query Form)

Performs a group execute trigger on commands defined by *DDT.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax *TRG

Related Commands *DDT

Examples *TRG immediately executes all commands that have been defined by *DDT.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1707

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger
This command forces a trigger event to occur. The query returns the current
trigger parameters for the instrument.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger FORCe

TRIGger?

Arguments FORCe creates a trigger event. If TRIGger:STATE is set to READy, the acquisition
will complete. Otherwise, this command will be ignored. This is equivalent to
pressing the Force button on the front panel.

Examples TRIGGER FORCE forces a trigger event to occur.

TRIGGER? returns the current trigger parameters for the instrument.

TRIGger:{A|B|B:RESET}
This command sets the A, B, or B Reset trigger level automatically to 50% of
the range of the minimum and maximum values of the trigger input signal. The
query returns current trigger parameters. The trigger level is the voltage threshold
through which the trigger source signal must pass to generate a trigger event. This
command is equivalent to pushing the LEVEL knob on the front panel.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B|B:RESET} SETLevel

TRIGger:{A|B|B:RESET}?

Arguments SETLevel sets the trigger level to 50% of the range of the minimum and
maximum values of the trigger input signal.

Examples TRIGger:A SETLEVEL sets the trigger level to 50% of the range of the minimum
and maximum values of the trigger input signal.
TRIGger:A? returns current trigger parameters.

2-1708 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:CONDition
This command specifies a field or condition for an ARINC429 bus to trigger
on. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:CONDition
{SOW|LABel|DATa|LABELANDDATA |EOW|ERRor}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:CONDition?

Arguments SOW specifies triggering on the first bit of a word.

LABel specifies triggering on a matching label.

DATa specifies triggering on matching packet data field(s).

LABELANDDATA specifies triggering on a matching label and matching packet

data field(s).
EOW specifies triggering on the 32nd bit of a word.

ERRor specifies triggering on a specified error condition.

NOTE. The type of error triggered on is specified by

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:ERRTYPe.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:CONDITION DATA specifies triggering on

packets that contain matching data field(s).
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:CONDITION? might return SOW, indicating
that the bus is triggering on the first bit of each word in the pacekt.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATa:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high value when trigger on an ARINC429 data
field. The bus number is specified by x. The trigger condition must be set to DATa
or LABELANDDATA, and the data qualifier must be INrange or OUTrange.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1709

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATa:HIVALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATa:HIVALue?

Arguments <QString> is the label value.

NOTE. The size of the QString is dependent on the data field format selected
using BUS:Bx:ARINC429A:DATAFORmat. Also, the stored QString is reset to its
default value whenever the data field format is changed.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:DATA:HIVALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX1000" sets the value to XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX1000.

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:DATA:HIVALUE? might return

"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX", indicating that the value is
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATa:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on data in
the DATA field for an ARINC429 bus signal. The bus number is specified by x.
The trigger condition must be set to DATa or LABELANDDATA.

NOTE. The trigger qualifier only applies to the bits defined as the data field via
the bus data field format specifier (using BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATAFORmat)

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATa:
QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan
|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATa:QUALifier?

Arguments EQual sets the data qualifier to equal.

UNEQual sets the data qualifier to unequal.

2-1710 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

LESSthan sets the data qualifier to less than.

MOREthan sets the data qualifier to more than.

LESSEQual sets the data qualifier to less equal.

MOREEQual sets the data qualifier to more equal.

INrange sets the data qualifier to in range.

OUTrange sets the data qualifier to out of range.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:DATA:QUALIFIER LESSTHAN sets the data

qualifier to less than.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:DATA:QUALIFIER? might return EQUAL,
indicating that the data qualifier is set to equal.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the low value when triggering on an ARINC429
data field. The bus number is specified by x. The trigger condition must be set to
DATa or LABELANDDATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATa:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the label value.

NOTE. The size of the QString is dependent on the data field format selected using
BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATAFORmat. Also, the stored QString is reset to its
default value whenever the data field format is changed.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX1000"

sets the value to XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX1000.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:DATA:VALUE? might return
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX", indicating that the value is
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1711

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:ERRTYPe
This command sets or queries the error type when triggering on an ARINC429
bus signal. The bus number is specified by x. The trigger condition must be
set to ERRor.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:ERRTYPe
{ANY|PARity|WORD|GAP}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:ERRTYPe?

Arguments ANY sets the error type to match any of the other available error types.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:ERRTYPE PARITY sets the error type to

match on parity errors.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:ERRTYPE? might return ANY, indicating that
any error condition will produce a match.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high value when triggering on an ARINC429
label field. The bus number is specified by x. The trigger condition must be set to
LABel, and the label qualifier must be INrange or OUTrange.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

2-1712 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel:HIVALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel:HIVALue?

Arguments <QString> is the label value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:LABEL:HIVALUE "XXXX1010" sets the

value to XXXX1010.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:LABEL:HIVALUE? might return
"XXXXXXXX", indicating that the value is XXXXXXXX.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on label
data for an ARINC429 bus signal. The bus number is specified by x. The trigger
condition must be set to LABel or LABELANDDATA.

NOTE. If the trigger condition is set to LABELANDDATA, the label qualifier will
be locked to Equal until the trigger condition is changed again.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel:
QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan
|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel:QUALifier?

Arguments EQual sets the data qualifier to equal.

UNEQual sets the data qualifier to unequal.

LESSthan sets the data qualifier to less than.

MOREthan sets the data qualifier to more than.

LESSEQual sets the data qualifier to less equal.

MOREEQual sets the data qualifier to more equal.

INrange sets the data qualifier to in range.

OUTrange sets the data qualifier to out of range.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1713

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:LABEL:QUALIFIER LESSTHAN sets the

label qualifier to less than.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:LABEL:QUALIFIER? might return EQUAL,
indicating that the label qualifier is set to equal.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel:VALue
This command sets or queries the low value when triggering on an ARINC429
label field. The bus number is specified by x. The trigger condition must be set to
LABel or LABELANDDATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the label value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:LABEL:VALUE "XXXX1010" sets the value

to XXXX1010.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:LABEL:VALUE? might return
"XXXXXXXX", indicating that the value is XXXXXXXX.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SDI:VALue
This command sets or queries the label when triggering on an ARINC429 SDI
field. The bus number is specified by x. The trigger condition must be set to DATa
or LABELANDDATA, and the data format must be set to DATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

2-1714 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SDI:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SDI:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the label value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:SDI:VALUE "X0" sets the value to X0.

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:SDI:VALUE? might return "XX", indicating

that the value is XX.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SSM:VALue
This command sets or queries the label value when triggering on an ARINC429
SSM field. The bus number is specified by x. The trigger condition must be
set to DATa or LABELANDDATA, and the data format must be set to DATA
or SDIDATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SSM:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SSM:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the label value.

NOTE. The SSM field is only present when the selected data field format is DATA
or SDIDATA (using BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATAFORmat). Also, the stored
QString is reset to its default value whenever the data field format is changed.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:SSM:VALUE "X0" sets the value to X0.

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:SSM:VALUE? might return "XX", indicating

that the value is XX.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CONDition
This command sets the condition (word select, start of frame, or matching data) to
be used when triggering on an audio bus signal. The bus number is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1715

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUDIO or SUP5-SRAUDIO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CONDition {SOF|DATa}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CONDition?

Arguments SOF enables triggering on a word select or start of frame (depending on Audio
Type).
DATa enables triggering on matching data.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:AUDio:CONDition SOF sets the condition to start of

frame.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:AUDio:CONDition? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:CONDITION DATA indicating the
condition is data.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:HITDMVALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string for the high data word to be
used when triggering on an TDM audio bus signal. The trigger condition must be
set to DATa using TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CONDition.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:HITDMVALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:HITDMVALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary data string for the high data word to be used when
triggering on an TDM audio bus signal.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:AUDio:DATa:HITDMVALue "1100" sets the high value

to 1100.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:AUDio:DATa:HITDMVALue? might
return :TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:HITDMVALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX1010" indicating the high value is 1010.

2-1716 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:HIVALue
This command sets the upper word value to be used when triggering on
an audio bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to DATA using
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CONDition.
The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUDIO or SUP5-SRAUDIO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:HIVALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:HIVALue?

Arguments <QString> is the upper word value to be used when triggering on an audio bus
signal.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:AUDio:DATa:HIVALue "11001101" sets the hi value to

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX11001101.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:AUDio:DATa:HIVALue? might
return :TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:HIVALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX" indicating the hi value is set to
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:OFFSet
This command sets the data offset value to be used when triggering on
an audio bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to DATa using
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CONDition.
The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUDIO or SUP5-SRAUDIO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:OFFSet <NR1>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:OFFSet?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1717

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR1> is the data offset value.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:AUDio:DATa:OFFSet 2 sets the data offset to 2.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:AUDio:DATa:OFFSet? might return

:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:OFFSET 1 indicating the data offset value
is 1.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:QUALifier
This command sets the qualifier to be used when triggering on an
audio bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to DATa using
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CONDition.
The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUDIO or SUP5-SRAUDIO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:QUALifier {LESSthan|

MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:QUALifier?

Arguments LESSthan sets the qualifier to less than.

MOREthan sets the qualifier to greater than.

EQual sets the qualifier to equal.

UNEQual sets the qualifier to not equal.

LESSEQual sets the qualifier to less than or equal.

MOREEQual sets the qualifier to greater than or equal.

INrange sets the qualifier to in range.

OUTrange sets the qualifier to out of range.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:AUDio:DATa:QUALifier LESSTHAN sets the qualifier

to less than.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:AUDio:DATa:QUALifier? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the
qualifies is set to equal.

2-1718 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:TDMVALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string for the single or low data word
to be used when triggering on an TDM audio bus signal. The trigger condition
must be set to DATa using TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B{x}:AUDio:CONDition.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:TDMVALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:TDMVALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary data string for the single or low data word to be used
when triggering on an TDM audio bus signal.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:AUDio:DATa:TDMVALue "1100" sets the TDMVALUE

to 1100.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:AUDio:DATa:TDMVALue? might
return :TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:TDMVALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX1010" indicating the TDM value is
1010.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:VALue
This command sets the lower word value to be used when triggering on
an audio bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to DATa using
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CONDition.
The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUDIO or SUP5-SRAUDIO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the trigger data lower word.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1719

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:AUDio:DATa:VALue "11001100101" sets the data

value to XXXXXXXXXXXXX11001100101.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:AUDio:DATa:VALue? might
return :TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX" indicating the data value is
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:WORD
This command sets the alignment of the data (left, right or either) to be used to
trigger on an audio bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to DATa using
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CONDition.
The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUDIO or SUP5-SRAUDIO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:WORD {EITher|LEFt|RIGht}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:WORD?

Arguments EITher aligns the trigger data to either left or right.

LEFt aligns the trigger data to the left.

RIGht aligns the trigger data to the right.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:AUDio:DATa:WORD LEFt sets the word alignment to

the left.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:AUDio:DATa:WORD? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:WORD EITHER indicating the
trigger data is aligned to either left or right.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition
This command sets the condition (start of frame, frame type, identifier, matching
data, EOF, missing ACK field, bit-stuffing error) to be used when triggering on a
CAN bus signal. The bus number is specified by x.

2-1720 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition
{SOF|FRAMEtype|IDentifier|DATa|IDANDDATA|EOF|ERRor|FDBITS}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition?

Arguments SOF enables triggering on the start of frame.

FDBITS enables triggering on the values of the BRS and ESI bits in an FD packet.

FRAMEtype enables triggering on the type of frame.

IDentifier enables triggering on a matching identifier.

DATa enables triggering on matching data.

IDANDDATA enables triggering on a matching identifier and matching data.

EOF enables triggering on the end of frame.

ERRor enables triggering on a specified error condition.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:CONDITION? might return

:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:CONDITION EOF indicating an end of file
condition.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:CONDITION DATA enables triggering on matching
CAN data.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection
This command sets the data direction (read, write or “nocare”) to be used to
search on a CAN bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to IDentifier (using
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition). The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection
{READ|WRITE|NOCARE}

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1721

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection?

Arguments READ sets the CAN data direction to READ.

WRITE sets the CAN data direction to WRITE.

NOCARE sets the CAN data direction to either.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION WRITE sets the CAN data

direction to Write.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE indicating the data
direction can be either read or write.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:OFFSet
This command sets or queries the data offset value, in bytes, to use when
triggering on the CAN data field. The bus number is specified by x. The trigger
condition must be set to DATA or IDANDDATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:OFFSet <NR1>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:OFFSet?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:CAN:STANDard

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue

Arguments <NR1> is an integer whose minimum and default values are -1 (don't care), and the
maximum is up to 7 (for CAN 2.0) or up to 63 (for ISO CAN FD and Non-ISO
CAN FD).
The maximum is dependent on the number of bytes being matched and the CAN
standard selected. Its value is calculated as [Absolute Maximum] - [Data Match
Size]. For CAN 2.0, the absolute maximum is 8 bytes. For ISO CAN FD and
Non-ISO CAN FD, the absolute maximum is 64 bytes. The minimum data match

2-1722 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

size is 1 byte, which produces the ranges listed above. Increasing the data match
size above 1 byte will adjust the range of valid data offset values accordingly.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:OFFSET 5 sets the CAN data offset to 5 bytes.

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:OFFSET? might return 7, indicating the CAN

data offset is 7 bytes.
If the CAN standard is set for CAN 2.0, and the trigger data size is set to 3, the
maximum value for the data offset will be 5 (8 - 3 = 5).
If the CAN standard is set for ISO CAN FD or Non-ISO CAN FD, and the trigger
data size is set to 8, the maximum value for the data offset will be 56 (64 - 8 = 56).

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier
This command sets the qualifier (<, >, =, ≠, ≤, ≥) to be used when triggering
on a CAN bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to IDANDDATA or
DATa (using TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition). The bus number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier
{LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual|LESSEQual|MOREEQual}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier?

Arguments LESSthan sets the instrument to trigger when the data is less than the qualifier
value.
MOREthan sets the instrument to trigger when the data is greater than the qualifier
value.
EQual sets the instrument to trigger when the data is equal to the qualifier value.

UNEQual sets the instrument to trigger when the data is not equal to the qualifier
value.
LESSEQual sets the instrument to trigger when the data is less than or equal
to the qualifier value.
MOREEQual sets the instrument to trigger when the data is greater than or equal
to the qualifier value.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1723

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:QUALIFIER LESSTHAN sets the instrument to

trigger when the data is less than the qualifier value.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:QUALIFIER? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:QUALIFIER LESSTHAN, indicating that the
instrument is set to trigger when the data is less than the qualifier value.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe
This command sets the length of the data string, in bytes, to be used when
triggering on a CAN bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to
IDANDDATA or DATa (using TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition).
The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> is the length of the data string in bytes.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATa:SIZe 2 sets the data size to 2 bytes.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATa:SIZe? might return

:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:SIZE 1 indicating the data size is
set to 1 byte.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue
This command sets the binary data value to be used when triggering on a CAN
bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to IDANDDATA or DATa (using
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition). The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

2-1724 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the data value in binary format. The only allowed characters in
the QString are 0, 1, and X.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:VALUE "1011" sets the CAN data value to

1011.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX" indicating
the data valule is set to XXXXXXXX.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:ERRType
This command sets or queries the type of error condition for a CAN bus to
triggering on. The bus number is specified by x. The trigger condition must be
set to ERRor.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:ERRType
{ACKMISS|BITSTUFFing|FORMERRor|ANYERRor}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:ERRType?

Arguments ACKMISS specifies triggering on a missing ACK field.

BITSTUFFing specifies triggering on a bit stuffing error.

FORMERRor specifies triggering on a CAN FD form error. To use this option, the
CAN standard must be set to FDISO or FDNONISO.
ANYERRor specifies triggering on any error type.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:ERRTYPE ACKMISS specifies triggering on any

missing ACK fields.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:ERRTYPE? might return ANYERROR, indicating that
the bus is triggering on all error types.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1725

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BRSBit
This command sets or queries the value of the bit rate switch bit (BRS bit) for a
CAN bus to triggering on. The bus number is specified by x. The trigger condition
must be set to FDBITS, and the CAN standard must be FDISO or FDNONISO.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BRSBit {ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BRSBit?

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FD:BRSBit ONE specifies filtering CAN FD packets

for those where the BRS bit has a value of 1.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FD:BRSBIT? might return NOCARE, indicating that
CAN FD packets are not being filtered based on the BRS bit value.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:ESIBit
This command sets or queries the value of the error state indicator bit (ESI bit)
for a CAN bus to triggering on. The bus number is specified by x. The trigger
condition must be set to FDBITS, and the CAN standard must be FDISO or
FDNONISO.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:ESIBit {ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:ESIBit?

2-1726 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FD:ESIBit ONE specifies filtering CAN FD packets

for those where the ESI bit has a value of 1.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FD:ESIBIT? might return NOCARE, indicating that
CAN FD packets are not being filtered based on the ESI bit value.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype
This command sets the frame type (data, remote, error or overload) to be used
when triggering on a CAN bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to
FRAMEtype (using TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition). B<x> is the
bus number.The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype
{DATa|REMote|ERRor|OVERLoad}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype?

Arguments DATa specifies a data frame type.

REMote specifies a remote frame type.

ERRor specifies an error frame type.

OVERLoad specifies an overload frame type.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FRAMETYPE DATA sets the CAN trigger frame type

to DATA.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FRAMETYPE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FRAMETYPE DATA indicating the frame type is data.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1727

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:IDentifier:MODe
This command sets the addressing mode (standard or extended format) to be
used when triggering on a CAN bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to
IDANDDATA or DATa (using TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition).
The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:IDentifier:MODe
{STandard|EXTended}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:IDentifier:MODe?

Arguments STandard specifies the standard addressing mode.

EXTended specifies the extended addressing mode.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDentifier:MODe EXTENDED sets the addressing

mode to extended.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDentifier:MODe? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDENTIFIER:MODE STANDARD indicating the
address mode is standard.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:IDentifier:VALue
This command sets the binary address value to be used when triggering on a CAN
bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to IDANDDATA or DATa (using
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition). The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:IDentifier:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:IDentifier:VALue?

2-1728 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <QString> is up to 29 bits specifying the binary identifier value. The only
allowed characters in the QString are 0, 1, and X.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "1011" sets the identifier

value to 1011.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXX" indicating
the identifier values is XXXXXXXXXXX.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition
This command specifies a field or condition within an Ethernet frame to trigger
on. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition
{SFD|MACADDRess|MACLENgth|IPHeader|TCPHeader|DATa|EOP|
IDLe|FCSError|QTAG}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition?

Related Commands Most of the other TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet commands are impacted

by the setting of this command.

Arguments SFD — Start of frame delimiter.

MACADDRess — MAC addresses field.

MACLENgth — MAC length/type field.

IPHeader — IP header field. This argument is only available when PROTOCOL

is set to IPv4.
TCPHeader — TCP header field. This argument is only available when
PROTOCOL is set to IPv4.

DATa — TCP/IPv4 or MAC protocol client data field. If the protocol is set to
OTHER, then DATa refers to the MAC client data.

EOP — End of Packet field.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1729

Commands listed in alphabetical order

IDLe — Idle field.

FCSError — Frame Check Sequence Error (CRC) field.

QTAG — IEEE 802.1Q (VLAN) control information field. In order to use QTAG as
a trigger condition, the frame type must be set to QTAG ).

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:CONDition MACADDRess sets the trigger

field to MACADDRess.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:CONDition? might return DATA.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue
When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to DATa, and the qualifier is set to
either INrange or OUTrange, this command specifies the upper data value of the
range. (Use the command TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:VALue
to specify the lower limit of the range.) The default is all X’s (don’t care). The
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:VALue

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:SIZe
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string whose length varies depending on the size setting, up
to 32 bits. (Use the command TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:SIZe
to specify the size.) The allowable characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified
in the quoted string replace the least significant bits, leaving any unspecified
upper bits unchanged.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX00001000" sets the upper limit of the range to
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX00001000(when the trigger condition is set to
DATa, and the qualifier is set to INrange or OUTrange).

2-1730 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue? might return

"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:OFFSet
When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to DATa, this command specifies where
in the data field to look for the data trigger value. It specifies the offset into the
data field, in bytes, where the value will be matched. The default is -1 (don’t
care). The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:OFFSet <NR1>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:OFFSet?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:VALue

Arguments <NR1> is an integer whose minimum and default values are -1 (don't care) and
maximum is 1,499.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:DATa:OFFSet 36 sets the data offset to 36

bytes.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:DATa:OFFSet? might return –1, indicating
that the data offset value is the default value, -1, meaning "don’t care".

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on an
Ethernet bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to DATa. The bus number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1731

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:QUALifier {EQual|

UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:QUALifier?

Arguments LESSthan sets the qualifier to less than.

MOREthan sets the qualifier to greater than.

EQual sets the qualifier to equal.

UNEQual sets the qualifier to not equal.

LESSEQual sets the qualifier to less than or equal.

MOREEQual sets the qualifier to greater than or equal.

INrange sets the qualifier to in range.

OUTrange sets the qualifier to out of range.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:DATa:QUALifier LESSTHAN sets the

qualifier to less than.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:DATa:QUALifier? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ETHERNET:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the
qualifier is set to equal.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:SIZe
When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to DATa, this command specifies the
number of contiguous TCP/IPv4/MAC client data bytes to trigger on. The bus
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:SIZe?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition

2-1732 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR1> specifies the number of contiguous TCP/IPv4/MAC client data bytes. The
minimum and default values are 1 and maximum is 16, except when the qualifier
is set to Inside Range or Outside Range. In these cases, the maximum size is 4.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:DATa:SIZe 4 sets the instrument to trigger

on 4 contiguous data bytes.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:DATa:SIZe? might return 6, indicating that
the instrument is set to trigger on 6 contiguous data bytes.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:VALue
When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to DATa, and the qualifier is set to
LESSthan, MOREthan, EQual, UNEQual, LESSEQual or MOREEQual,
this command specifies the value to trigger on. When the Ethernet trigger
condition is set to DATa, and the qualifier is set to INrange or OUTrange,
this command specifies the lower limit of the range. (Use the command
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue to set the upper limit of
the range.) The default is all X’s (don’t care). The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:OFFSet
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:SIZe
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string where the allowable characters are 0, 1, and
X. The allowable number of characters depends on the setting for size (using
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:SIZe). The bits specified in the
quoted string replace the least significant bits, leaving any unspecified upper
bits unchanged.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1733

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:DATa:VALue "00001000" sets the binary

data to trigger on to 00001000, assuming the qualifier is set to LESSthan,
MOREthan, EQual, UNEQual, LESSEQual or MOREEQual, and DATa:SIZe
is set to 1 byte.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:DATa:VALue "00001000" sets the lower
limit of the range to 00001000, assuming the qualifier is set to INrange or
OUTrange, andDATa:SIZe is set to 1 byte.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader:DESTinationaddr:VALue
When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to IPHeader, this command specifies
the value of the 32–bit destination address that is to be used in the trigger (along
with the source address and protocol value). The IP destination address is a
standard IP address such as 192.168.0.1. The default is all X’s (don’t care). The
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader:DESTinationaddr:
VALue <QString>
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader:DESTinationaddr:
VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader:SOUrceaddr:VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader:PROTOcol:VALue

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 32 characters where the allowable

characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least
significant bits, leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:IPHeader:DESTinationaddr:VALue
"00011001001000010110100000000001" sets the IP destination address
to trigger on to 192.168.0.1.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:IPHeader:DESTinationaddr:VALue
might return "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX01".

2-1734 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader:PROTOcol:VALue
When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to IPHeader, this command specifies
the value of the 8–bit protocol field that is to be used in the trigger (along with
the source and destination addresses). The default is all X’s (don’t care). The
bus number is specified by x.

NOTE. Commonly used protocol values are 1 (ICMP), 2 (IGMP), 6 (TCP) and
17 (UDP).

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader:PROTOcol:VALue
<QString>
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader:PROTOcol:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader:SOUrceaddr:VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader:DESTinationaddr:VALue

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 8 characters where the allowable characters

are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least significant
bits, leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ETHERNET:IPHEADER:PROTOCOL:VALUE "01010010"

would set the value to be used in the trigger to 01010010.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:IPHeader:PROTOcol:VALue? might return
"XXXXXXXX".

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader:SOUrceaddr:VALue
When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to IPHeader, this command specifies
the value of the 32-bit source address that is to be used in the trigger (along with
the destination address and protocol value). The IP source address is a standard IP
address such as 192.168.0.1. The default is all X’s (don’t care). The bus number
is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1735

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader:SOUrceaddr:VALue
<QString>
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader:SOUrceaddr:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader:DESTinationaddr:VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader:PROTOcol:VALue

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 32 characters where the allowable

characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least
significant bits, leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:IPHeader:SOUrceaddr:VALue
"00011001001000010110100000000001" sets the IP source address to trigger
on to 192.168.0.1.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:IPHeader:SOUrceaddr:VALue might return
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX01".

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:DESTination:VALue
When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to MACADDress, this command
specifies the 48–bit MAC destination address that is to be used in the trigger
(along with the source address value). The default is all X’s (don’t care). The
bus number is specified by x.

NOTE. MAC Addresses are 48–bit values such as 08:00:11:1E:C9:AE hex.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

2-1736 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:DESTination:
VALue <QString>
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:DESTination:
VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:SOUrce:VALue

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 48 characters where the allowable

characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least
significant bits, leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:DESTination:VALue
”XXXXXXXXXX01010111111100000001111010101010101000” would set the
MAC destination address to trigger on to XX:35:FC:07:AA:C8 hex.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:DESTination:VALue?
might return ”XXXXXXXXXX01010111111100000001111010101010101000”.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:SOUrce:VALue
When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to MACADDress, this command
specifies the 48–bit MAC source address value that is to be used in the trigger
(along with the destination address value). The default is all X’s (don’t care). The
bus number is specified by x.

NOTE. MAC Addresses are 48–bit values such as 08:00:11:1E:C9:AE hex.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:SOUrce:VALue
<QString>
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:SOUrce:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:DESTination:VALue

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1737

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 48 characters where the allowable

characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least
significant bits, leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:SOUrce:VALue
”XXXXXXXXXX01010111111100000001111010101010101000” would set the
MAC destination address to trigger on to XX:35:FC:07:AA:C8 hex.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:SOUrce:VALue? might
return ”XXXXXXXXXX01010111111100000001111010101010101000”.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:HIVALue
When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to MACLENgth, and the qualifier is set to
INrange or OUTrange, this command specifies the upper data value of the range.
(Use the command TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:VALue
to specify the lower limit of the range.) The default is all X’s (don’t care). The
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:HIVALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:HIVALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:VALue

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up toe 16 characters where the allowable

characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least
significant bits, leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:HIVALue
"XXXXXXXX00001000" sets the upper limit of the range to the
hexadecimal value XX08 (when the trigger condition is set to MACLENgth, and
the qualifier is set to INrange or OUTrange).
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ETHERNET:MAC:LENGTH:HIVALUE? might return
"XXXXXXXX00001000".

2-1738 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:VALue
When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to MACLENgth, and the qualifier is set
to LESSthan, MOREthan, EQual, UNEQual, LESSEQual or MOREEQual,
this command specifies the 16–bit value to trigger on. When the qualifier is set to
INrange or OUTrange, this command specifies the lower limit of the range. (Use
the command TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:HIVALue
to set the upper limit of the range.) The default is all X’s (don’t care). The bus
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:HIVALue

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 16 characters where the allowable

characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least
significant bits, leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:VALue
"XXXXXXXX00001000" sets the MAC length/type value to trigger on
the hexadecimal value XX08, assuming the qualifier is set to LESSthan,
MOREthan, EQual, UNEQual, LESSEQual or MOREEQual.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:VALue
"XXXXXXXX00001000" sets the lower limit of the range to the
hexadecimal value XX08, assuming the qualifier is set to INrange or OUTrange.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:QTAG:VALue
When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to QTAG, this command specifies the
32-bit Q-Tag value to trigger on. The default is all X’s (don’t care). The bus
number is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1739

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:QTAG:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:QTAG:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 32 characters where the allowable

characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least
significant bits, leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ETHERNET:QTAG:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX010010001010" would specify to trigger on the
Q-Tag value of hexadecimal XXXXX48A.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ETHERNET:QTAG:VALUE? might return
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX010010001010".

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:ACKnum:VALue
When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to TCPHeader, this command specifies
the 32-bit acknowledgement number that is to be used in the trigger (along with
the destination and source port addresses and the sequence number). The default
is all X’s (don’t care). The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:ACKnum:VALue
<QString>
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:ACKnum:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:DESTinationport:VALue

2-1740 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SOUrceport:VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SEQnum:VALue

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 32 characters where the allowable

characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least
significant bits, leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:ACKnum:VALue
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX00001000" sets the acknowledgement number to be
used in the trigger to hexadecimal XXXXXX08.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:ACKnum:VALue? might
return :TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ETHERNET:TCPHEADER:ACKNUM:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX" indicating the value is set to
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:DESTinationport:VALue
When the Ethernet trigger condition is set TCPHeader, this command specifies
the 16–bit destination port address value that is to be used in the trigger (along
with the acknowledgement value, source port address and the sequence number).
The default is all X’s (don’t care). The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:DESTinationport:
VALue <QString>
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:DESTinationport:
VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:ACKnum:VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SOUrceport:VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SEQnum:VALue

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1741

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 16 characters where the allowable

characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least
significant bits, leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:DESTinationport:VALue
"XXXXXXXX00100010" would set the destination port address value that is to be
used in the trigger to hexadecimal XX22.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:DESTinationport:VALue?
might return "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX".

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SEQnum:VALue
When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to TCPHeader, this command specifies
the 32–bit sequence number that is to be used in the trigger (along with the
destination and source port addresses and the acknowledgement value). The
default is all X’s (don’t care). The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SEQnum:VALue
<QString>
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SEQnum:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:ACKnum:VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SOUrceport:VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:DESTinationport:VALue

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 32 characters where the allowable

characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least
significant bits, leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SEQnum:VALue
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX000100010001" would set the sequence number
that is to be used in the trigger to hexadecimal XXXXX111.

2-1742 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SEQnum:VALue? might return

"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX0010010100".

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SOUrceport:VALue
When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to TCPHeader, this command specifies
the 16–bit source port address that is to be used in the trigger (along with the
destination port address, the sequence number and the acknowledgement number).
The default is all X’s (don’t care). The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRENET or SUP5-SRENET Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SOUrceport:VALue
<QString>
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SOUrceport:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:ACKnum:VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SEQnum:VALue
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:DESTinationport:VALue

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 16 characters where the allowable

characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits specified in the quoted string replace the least
significant bits, leaving any unspecified upper bits unchanged.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SOUrceport:VALue
"XXXX000010100110" would set the source port address that is to be used in the
trigger to hexadecimal X0A6.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SOUrceport:VALue? might
return "XXXXX01001010110".

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition
This command specifies the condition to use when triggering on a FlexRay bus
signal (start of frame, frame type, ID, cycle count, header, data, ID and data, EOF,
error). The bus number is specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1743

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition
{SOF|FRAMEType|IDentifier|CYCLEcount|HEADer|DATa
|IDANDDATA|EOF|ERRor}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition?

Arguments SOF sets the trigger condition to start of frame.

FRAMEType sets the trigger condition to frame type.

IDentifier sets the trigger condition to identifier.

CYCLEcount sets the trigger condition to cycle count.

HEADer sets the trigger condition to header.

DATa sets the trigger condition to data.

IDANDDATA sets the trigger condition to id and data.

EOF sets the trigger condition to end of frame.

ERRor sets the trigger condition to error.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CONDITION FRAMETYPE sets the FlexRay

condition to frame type.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CONDITION? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CONDITION SOF indicating the
FlexRay condition is start of frame.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CYCLEcount:HIVALue
This command specifies the high value when triggering on a FlexRay bus cycle
count field. (Use TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CYCLEcount:VALue to
set the low value.) The trigger condition must be set to CYCLEcount (using
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition). The bus number is specified
by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

2-1744 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CYCLEcount:HIVALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CYCLEcount:HIVALue?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that is the cycle count high value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:HIVALUE "110010" sets the

cycle count high value to 110010.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:HIVALUE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:HIVALUE "XXXXXX" indicating
the cycle count high value is don't care.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CYCLEcount:QUALifier
This command specifies the qualifier (<, >, =, <=, >=, not =, in
range, out of range) to use when triggering on the FlexRay bus cycle
count field. The trigger condition must be set to CYCLEcount (using
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition).The bus number is specified
by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CYCLEcount:QUALifier
{LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|
INrange|OUTrange}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CYCLEcount:QUALifier?

Arguments LESSthan sets the cycle count qualifier to less than.

MOREthan sets the cycle count qualifier to more than.

EQual sets the cycle count qualifier to equal.

UNEQual sets the cycle count qualifier to not equal.

LESSEQual sets the cycle count qualifier to less than or equal.

MOREEQual sets the cycle count qualifier to greater than or equal.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1745

Commands listed in alphabetical order

INrange sets the cycle count qualifier to in range.

OUTrange sets the cycle count qualifier to out of range.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:QUALIFIER LESSTHAN sets the

cycle count qualifier to LESSTHAN.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:QUALIFIER? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating
that the cycle count qualifier is set to EQUAL.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CYCLEcount:VALue
This command specifies the low value when triggering on the FlexRay bus cycle
count field. (Use TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CYCLEcount:HIVALue
to set the upper value.) The trigger condition must be set to CYCLEcount (using
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition).The bus number is specified
by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CYCLEcount:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CYCLEcount:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted binary data string that represents the cycle count low
value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:VALUE "11001101" sets the

cycle count value to 11001101.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:VALUE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:VALUE "XXXXXX" indicating the
cycle count value is don't care.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:HIVALue
This command specifies the high value when triggering on the FlexRay bus
data field. (Use TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:VALue to set the
lower value.) The trigger condition needs to be set to ID or IDANDDATA (using

2-1746 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition).The bus number is specified

by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:HIVALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:HIVALue?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that is the binary data high value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:HIVALUE
"11001101XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXX1" sets the binary data string high value to
"11001101XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXX1".

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:HIVALUE? might
return TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:HIVALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX" indicating the binary data string high value is don't care.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:OFFSet
This command specifies the offset of the data string, in bytes, when triggering
on the FlexRay bus data field. The trigger condition needs to be set to ID or
IDANDDATA (using TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition). The
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:OFFSet <NR1>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:OFFSet?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1747

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR1> is the offset of the data string in bytes. A byte offset of -1 signifies “don't
care”, and no byte offset is used. The instrument will trigger on or match any
byte value that fits.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:OFFSET 1 sets the offset to 1.

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:OFFSET? might return

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:OFFSET 0 indicating that a data offset
of 0.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:QUALifier
This command specifies the qualifier (<, >, =, <=, >=, not =, in range,
out of range) to use when triggering on the FlexRay bus data field.
The trigger condition needs to be set to ID or IDANDDATA (using
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition). The bus number is specified
by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:QUALifier
{LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|
INrange|OUTrange}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:QUALifier?

Arguments LESSthan sets the data qualifier to less than.

MOREthan sets the data qualifier to greater than.

EQual sets the data qualifier to eqaual.

UNEQual sets the data qualifier to not equal.

LESSEQual sets the data qualifier to less than or equal.

MOREEQual sets the data qualifier to greater than or equal.

INrange sets the data qualifier to in range.

OUTrange sets the data qualifier to out of range.

2-1748 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:QUALIFIER LESSTHAN sets the data

qualifier to LESSTHAN.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:QUALIFIER? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the data
qualifier is EQUAL.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:SIZe
This command specifies the length of the data string, in bytes, when triggering
on the FlexRay bus data field. The trigger condition needs to be set to ID or
IDANDDATA (using TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition). The
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> is the FlexRay data string length, in bytes.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:SIZE 8 sets the data string size to 8

bytes.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:SIZE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:SIZE 1 indicating the data
size is 1 byte.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the low value when triggering on the FlexRay bus
data field. (Use TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:HIVALue to set
the upper value.) The trigger condition needs to be set to ID or IDANDDATA
(using TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition). The bus number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1749

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:VALUE "11001101" sets the FlexRay

data value for triggering to 11001101.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:VALUE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX" indicating the
FlexRay data value is don't care.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:EOFTYPE
This command specifies the end of file type (static, dynamic or any) when
triggering on the FlexRay bus EOF field. The trigger condition needs to be set to
EOF (using TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition). The bus number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:EOFTYPE {STATic|DYNAMic|ANY}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:EOFTYPE?

Arguments STATic specifies triggering on the STATIC end of file type.

DYNAMic specifies triggering on the DYNAMIC end of file type.

ANY specifies triggering on a STATIC or DYNAMIC end of file type.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:EOFTYPE ANY sets the FlexRay end of file

type to ANY.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:EOFTYPE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:EOFTYPE STATIC indicating the
FlexRay end of file type is STATIC

2-1750 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:ERRTYPE
This command specifies the error type when triggering on the FlexRay
bus signal. The trigger condition needs to be set to ERROR (using
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition). The bus number is specified
by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:ERRTYPE
{CRCHeader|CRCTrailer|SYNCFrame|STARTupnosync|NULLFRStatic|
NULLFRDynamic}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:ERRTYPE?

Arguments CRCHeader sets the error type to CRCHeader.

CRCTrailer sets the error type to CRCTrailer.

SYNCFrame sets the error type to SYNCFrame.

STARTupnosync sets the error type to STARTupnosync.

NULLFRStatic sets the error type to NULLFRStatic.

NULLFRDynamic sets the error type to NULLFRDynamic.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:ERRTYPE SYNCFRAME sets the trigger type

is SYNCFRAME.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:ERRTYPE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:ERRTYPE CRCHEADER indicating the
FlexRay trigger type is CRCHeader.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:FRAMEID:HIVALue
This command specifies the high value when triggering on the FlexRay bus
frame ID field. (Use TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:FRAMEID:VALue
to set the low value.) The trigger condition needs to be set to IDentifier (using
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition). The bus number is specified
by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1751

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:FRAMEID:HIVALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:FRAMEID:HIVALue?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that is the binary frame ID high value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:HIVALUE "11001100101" sets the

frame ID high value to 11001100101.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:HIVALUE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXXXXX"
indicating the frame ID high value is "don't care".

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:FRAMEID:QUALifier
This command specifies the qualifier to use when triggering on the FlexRay
bus frame ID field. The trigger condition needs to be set to IDentifier (using
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition). The bus number is specified
by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:FRAMEID:QUALifier {LESSthan|

MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:FRAMEID:QUALifier?

Arguments LESSthan sets the frame ID qualifier to less than.

MOREthan sets the frame ID qualifier to greater than.

EQual sets the frame ID qualifier to equal.

UNEQual sets the frame ID qualifier to not equal.

LESSEQual sets the frame ID qualifier to less than or equal.

2-1752 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MOREEQual sets the frame ID qualifier to greater than or equal.

INrange sets the frame ID qualifier to in range.

OUTrange sets the frame ID qualifier to out of range.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:QUALIFIER LESSTHAN sets the

frame ID qualifier to less than.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:QUALIFIER? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the
frame ID qualifier is set to equal.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:FRAMEID:VALue
This command specifies the low value when triggering on the FlexRay bus frame
ID field. (Use TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:FRAMEID:HIVALue to
set the high value.) The trigger condition needs to be set to IDentifier (using
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition). The bus number is specified
by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:FRAMEID:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:FRAMEID:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that is the FlexRay frame ID low value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:VALUE "11001100101" sets the

frame ID value to 11001100101.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:VALUE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXX" indicating
the frame ID value is don't care.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:FRAMEType
This command specifies the frame type (normal, payload, null, sync or startup)
when triggering on the FlexRay bus signal. The trigger condition needs to be set

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1753

Commands listed in alphabetical order

to FRAMEType (using TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition). The

bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:FRAMEType
{NORMal|PAYLoad|NULL|SYNC|STARTup}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:FRAMEType?

Arguments NORMal specifies the normal frame type.

PAYLoad specifies the payload frame type.

NULL specifies the null frame type.

SYNC specifies the sync frame type.

STARTup specifies the startup frame type.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMETYPE PAYLOAD sets the frame type to

payload.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMETYPE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMETYPE NORMAL indicating the
frame type is set to normal.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:CRC
This command specifies the CRC portion of the binary header string when
triggering on the FlexRay bus signal. The trigger condition needs to be set to
HEADer (using TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition). The bus
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

2-1754 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:CRC <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:CRC?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that is the CRC portion of the binary header string.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CRC "11001100101" sets the CRC

portion of the binary header string to 11001100101.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CRC? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CRC "XXXXXXXXXXX" indicating the
CRC portion of the binary header string is don't care.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:CYCLEcount
This command specifies the cycle count portion of the binary header string when
triggering on the FlexRay bus header. The trigger condition needs to be set to
HEADer (using TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition). The bus
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:CYCLEcount <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:CYCLEcount?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that is the cycle count portion of the binary header
string.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CYCLECOUNT "110010" sets the

cycle count to 110010.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CYCLECOUNT? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CYCLECOUNT "XXXXXX" indicating
the cycle count is don't care.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:FRAMEID
This command specifies the frame ID portion of the binary header string when
triggering on the FlexRay bus header. The trigger condition needs to be set to

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1755

Commands listed in alphabetical order

HEADer (using TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition). The bus

number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:FRAMEID <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:FRAMEID?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that represents the frame ID portion of the binary
header string.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:FRAMEID "11001100101" sets the

frame ID portion of the binary header string to 11001100101.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:FRAMEID? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:FRAMEID "XXXXXXXXXXX"
indicating the frame ID portion of the binary header string is "don't care".

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:INDBits
This command specifies the indicator bits portion of the binary header string
when triggering on the FlexRay bus header. The trigger condition needs to be
set to HEADer (using TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition). The
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:INDBits <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:INDBits?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that is the indicator bits portion of the binary
header string.

2-1756 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:INDBITS "11001" sets the indicator

bits portion of the header string to 11001.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:INDBITS? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:INDBITS "XXXXX" indicating that
the indicator bits portion of the header string are "don't cares".

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:PAYLength
This command specifies the payload length portion of the binary header string
when triggering on the FlexRay bus header. The trigger condition needs to be set
to HEADer (using TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition).The bus
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:PAYLength <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:PAYLength?

Arguments <QString> is the length of the payload portion of the Binary header string.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:PAYLENGTH "1100101" sets the

FlexRay header paylength to 1100101.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:PAYLENGTH? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:PAYLENGTH "XXXXXXX" indicating
the FlexRay header paylength is don't care.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe
This command specifies the I2C address mode to 7 or 10-bit. The bus number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1757

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe {ADDR7|ADDR10}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe?

Arguments ADDR7 specifies the 7-bit I2C address mode.

ADDR10 specifies the 10-bit I2C address mode.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR10 sets the I2C address mode

to 10-bit.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR7 indicating the
address mode is set to the 7-bit mode.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue
This command specifies the binary address string used for the I2C trigger if
the trigger condition is ADDRESS or ADDRANDDATA. The bus number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is up to 7 or 10-bits depending on the address mode that specifies the
address. The only allowed characters in the QString are 0, 1, and X.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE "1011" sets the I2C address value

to XXX1011.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE "XXXXXXX" indicating
the address value is set to XXXXXXX.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition
This command specifies the trigger condition for an I2C trigger. The bus number
is specified by x.

2-1758 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition
{STARt|STOP|REPEATstart|ACKMISS|ADDRess|DATa|ADDRANDDATA}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition?

Arguments STARt specifies a search based on start condition.

STOP specifies a search based on stop condition.

REPEATstart specifies a search based on repeat of start condition.

ACKMISS specifies a search based on missing acknowledgement condition.

ADDRess specifies a search based on address.

DATa specifies a search based on data.

ADDRANDDATA specifies a search based on address and data.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:CONDITION START specifies start as the I2C trigger

condition.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:CONDITION? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:CONDITION START indicating the condition is set
to the start condition.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection
This command specifies the I2C trigger type to be valid on a Read, Write, or
Either condition. Read or write is indicated by the R/W bit in the I2C protocol.
The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection
{READ|WRITE|NOCARE}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1759

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments READ specifies read as the data direction.

WRITE specifies write as the data direction.

NOCARE specifies either as the data direction.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION WRITE specifies write as the

I2C data direction.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE indicating the data
direction is either read or write.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe
This command specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an
I2C trigger if the trigger condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA. Applies to bus
<x>, where the bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> is the length of the data string in bytes.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATa:SIZe 1 sets the data size to 1 byte.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATa:SIZe? might return

:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:SIZE 1 indicating the size is set
to 1 byte.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for I2C triggering if the trigger
condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SREMBD or SUP5-SREMBD Triggering and Analysis

application.

2-1760 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary data string, where the number of bits is 8 times the
number of bytes specified. The only allowed characters in the string are 0, 1,
and X.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATa:VALue "11001101" sets the data value to

1100101.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATa:VALue? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX" indicating the
data value is XXXXXXXX.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:ADDRess:MODe
This command specifies the I3C address mode to either 7bit or 10bit when
triggering on address field. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRI3C.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:ADDRess:MODe {ADDR7|ADDR10}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:ADDRess:MODe?

Arguments ADDR7 sets the trigger condition to 7-bit Address. This is the default value.

ADDR10 sets the trigger condition to 10-bit Address.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:ADDRess:MODe ADDR10 specifies the trigger to

happen on 10-bit Address.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:ADDRess:MODe? might return
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:ADDRess:MODe ADDR10, indicating that
10-bit Address is the currently specified field within a I3C frame to trigger on.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1761

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:ADDRess:VALue
This command specifies the binary address string used for the I3C trigger if the
trigger condition is ADDRESS. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRI3C.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:ADDRess:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:ADDRess:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that is the I3C trigger data value. XXXXXXX in
case of 7-bit addressing mode XXXXXXXXXX in case of 10-bit addressing
mode.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:ADDRess:VALue "0101101" sets the address value

as 0101101.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:ADDRess:VALue? might return
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:ADDRess:VALue "0101101110", indicating that
the address value is 0101101110.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:CONDition
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for a I3C bus to trigger on.
The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRI3C.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:CONDition {STARt| REPEATStart|

ADDRess| DATa| SDRDirect| SDRBroadcast| ERRors| HOTJoin|
HDRRestart| HDRExit| STOP}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:CONDition?

Arguments STARt sets the trigger condition to STARt. This is the default value.

REPEATStart sets the trigger condition to REPEATStart.

ADDRess sets the trigger condition to ADDRess.

2-1762 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DATa sets the trigger condition to DATa.

SDRDirect sets the trigger condition to SDRDirect.

SDRBroadcast sets the trigger condition to SDRBroadcast.

ERRors sets the trigger condition to ERRors.

HOTJoin sets the trigger condition to HOTJoin.

HDRRestart sets the trigger condition to HDRRestart.

HDRExit sets the trigger condition to HDRExit.

STOP sets the trigger condition to STOP.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:CONDition STARt specifies start as the field within

a I3C frame to trigger on.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:CONDition? might return
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:CONDition STARt, indicating that start
is the currently specified field within a I3C frame to trigger on.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:DIRection
This command specifies the I3C bus data direction when triggering on data field.
The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRI3C.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:DIRection
{READ|WRITE|NOCARE}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:DIRection?

Arguments READ sets the trigger condition to Read Packet. This is the default value.

WRITE sets the trigger condition to Write Packet.

NOCARE sets the trigger condition to Either Read or Write Packet.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:DATa:DIRection READ specifies the trigger to

happen on 7-bit Address in Read Packets.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:DATa:DIRection? might return
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:DATa:DIRection READ, indicating that 7-bit

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1763

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Address in Read packet is the currently specified field within a I3C frame to
trigger on.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:SIZe
This command specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an I3C
trigger if the trigger condition is DATA. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRI3C.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> is the size of the data string in bytes. Data bytes can vary from 1 to 5.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:DATa:SIZe 2 sets the data size value as 2.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:DATa:SIZe? might return

:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:DATa:SIZe 2, indicating that the data
size value is 2.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for I3C triggering if the trigger
condition is DATA. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRI3C.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that is the I3C trigger data value. Default
Data is XXXXXXXX and user can enter up to XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX.

2-1764 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:DATa:VALue "0101101" sets the data value as

0101101.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:DATa:VALue? might return
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:DATa:VALue "0101101", indicating
that the data value is 0101101.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:ERRORTYPe
This command specifies the error type when triggering on I3C errors. The bus
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRI3C.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:ERRORTYPe {NACK|TBIT|BADDr}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:ERRORTYPe?

Arguments NACK sets the trigger condition to Missing ACK error . This is the default value.

TBIT sets the trigger condition to Slave/Parity Error shown by Transition bit.

BADDr sets the trigger condition to BroadCast Error.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:ERRORTYPe NACK specifies the trigger to happen

on NACK error.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:ERRORTYPe? might return
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:ERRORTYPe NACK, indicating that
NACK is the currently specified field within a I3C frame to trigger on.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:SDR:BROADCASTPacket
This command sets or queries the I3C trigger for SDR broadcast packets. The
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRI3C.

Group Trigger

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1765

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:SDR:BROADCASTPacket {ENSLave|

DISLave| ENTasx| RSTDya| ENTRDya| SETMwrl| SETMrdl| DLSLave|
ENTRTSTMode| EXTime| SETaasa| ENDXFER| SETGRPa| RSTACT|
DEFGRPa| RSTGRPa| MLANe| SETBUSCON}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:SDR:BROADCASTPacket?

Arguments ENSLave sets the trigger condition to Enable Slave. This is the default value.

DISLave sets the trigger condition to Disable Slave.

ENTasx sets the trigger condition to Enter Activity State.

RSTDya sets the trigger condition to Reset Dynamic Address.

ENTRDya sets the trigger condition to Enter Dynamic Address.

SETMwrl sets the trigger condition to Set Max Write Length.

SETMrdl sets the trigger condition to Set Max Read Length.

DLSLave sets the trigger condition to Define List of Slaves.

ENTRTSTMode sets the trigger condition to Enter Test Mode.

EXTime sets the trigger condition to Set Exchange Time.

SETaasa sets the trigger condition to Set Static As Dynamic Address.

ENDXFER sets the trigger condition to Data Transfer Ending Procedure Control.

SETGRPa sets the trigger condition to Set Group Address.

RSTACT sets the trigger condition to Slave Reset Action.

DEFGRPa sets the trigger condition to Define List of Group Addresses.

RSTGRPa sets the trigger condition to Reset Group Address.

MLANe sets the trigger condition to Multi-Lane Data Transfer Control.

SETBUSCON sets the trigger condition to Set Bus Context.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:SDR:BROADCASTPacket SETMwrl specifies Set

Max Write Length as the field within a I3C frame to trigger on.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:SDR:BROADCASTPacket? might return
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:SDR:BROADCASTPacket SETMwrl, indicating
that Set Max Write Length is the currently specified field within a I3C frame
to trigger on.

2-1766 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:SDR:DIRECTPacket
This command sets or queries the I3C trigger for SDR Direct Packets. The bus
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRI3C.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:SDR:DIRECTPacket {ENSLave|

DISLave| ENTasx| RSTDya| SETMwrl| SETMrdl| SEText| SETDya|
SETNdya| GETMWrl| GETMRdl| GETPrid| GETBusch| GETDevch|
GETSlave| ACCM| SETBrt| MDATASpeed| HDRCapability| GETXTime|
GETCAPS| ENDXFER| SETGRPa| RSTACT| DEFGRPa| RSTGRPa| MLANe}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:SDR:DIRECTPacket?

Arguments ENSLave sets the trigger condition to Enable Slave. This is the default value.

DISLave sets the trigger condition to Disable Slave.

ENTasx sets the trigger condition to Enter Activity State.

RSTDya sets the trigger condition to Reset Dynamic Address.

SETMwrl sets the trigger condition to Set Max Write Length.

SETMrdl sets the trigger condition to Set Max Read Length.

SEText sets the trigger condition to Set Exchange Time.

SETDya sets the trigger condition to Set Dynamic Address.

SETNdya sets the trigger condition to Set New Dynamic Address.

GETMWrl sets the trigger condition to Get Max Write Length.

GETMRdl sets the trigger condition to Get Max Read Length.

GETPrid sets the trigger condition to Get Provisional ID.

GETBusch sets the trigger condition to Get Bus Characteristics.

GETDevch sets the trigger condition to Get Dev Characteristics.

GETSlave sets the trigger condition to Get Slave Current Status.

ACCM sets the trigger condition to Get Accept Mastership.

SETBrt sets the trigger condition to Set Bridge Direct Target.

MDATASpeed sets the trigger condition to Get Max Data Speed.

HDRCapability sets the trigger condition to Get HDR Capability.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1767

Commands listed in alphabetical order

GETXTime sets the trigger condition to Get Exchange Time.

GETCAPS sets the trigger condition to Get Optional Feature Capabilities.

ENDXFER sets the trigger condition to Data Transfer Ending Procedure Control.

SETGRPa sets the trigger condition to Set Group Address.

RSTACT sets the trigger condition to Slave Reset Action.

DEFGRPa sets the trigger condition to Define List of Group Addresses.

RSTGRPa sets the trigger condition to Reset Group Address.

MLANe sets the trigger condition to Multi-Lane Data Transfer Control.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:SDR:DIRECTPacket RSTDya specifies Reset

Dynamic Address as the field within a I3C frame to trigger on.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:SDR:DIRECTPacket? might return
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:SDR:DIRECTPacket RSTDya, indicating that
Reset Dynamic Address is the currently specified field within a I3C frame to
trigger on.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:TBIT:DIREction
This command specifies the I3C trigger for T-Bit error direction when triggering
on error type field. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SRI3C.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:TBIT:DIREction {READ|WRITe}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:TBIT:DIREction?

Arguments READ sets the trigger condition to T-bit Parity Error. This is the default value.

WRITe sets the trigger condition to T-bit Slave Error.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:TBIT:DIREction READ specifies the trigger to

happen on T-bit Parity Error.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:TBIT:DIREction? might return
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I3C:TBIT:DIREction READ, indicating that T-bit
Parity error is the currently selected error type within a I3C frame to trigger on.

2-1768 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:CONDition
This command specifies the trigger condition for LIN. The bus number is specified
by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:CONDition
{SYNCfield|IDentifier|DATa|IDANDDATA|WAKEup|SLEEP|ERRor}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:CONDition?

Arguments SYNCfield sets the LIN trigger condition to sync field.

IDentifier sets the LIN trigger condition to identifier.

DATa sets the LIN trigger condition to data.

IDANDDATA sets the LIN trigger condition to id and data.

WAKEup sets the LIN trigger condition to wake up.

SLEEP sets the LIN trigger condition to sleep.

ERRor sets the LIN trigger condition to error.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:CONDITION ERROR sets the LIN trigger condition

to error.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:CONDITION? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:CONDITION SYNCFIELD indicating the LIN trigger
condition is sync field.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:HIVALue
This command specifies the high data value string used for a LIN bus trigger
when the trigger condition is DATA or IDANDDATA and the data qualifier is
INRANGE or OUTRANGE. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1769

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:HIVALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:HIVALue?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that is the binary data string used for LIN trigger if
the trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE "11001010" sets the high value

to 11001010.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX"indicating
the high value is don't care.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:QUALifier
This command specifies the LIN data qualifier. This only applies if the trigger
condition is IDANDDATA or DATA. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:QUALifier
{LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|
INrange|OUTrange}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:QUALifier?

Arguments LESSthan sets the LIN data qualifier to less than.

MOREthan sets the LIN data qualifier to greater than.

EQual sets the LIN data qualifier to equal.

UNEQual sets the LIN data qualifier to not equal.

LESSEQual sets the LIN data qualifier to less than or equal.

MOREEQual sets the LIN data qualifier to greater than or equal.

INrange sets the LIN data qualifier to in range.

2-1770 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

OUTrange sets the LIN data qualifier to out of range.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER OUTRANGE sets the data qualifier

to out of range.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the data
qualifier is set to equal.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:SIZe
This command specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for LIN
trigger. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> is the size of the data string in bytes.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:SIZE 8 sets the data size to 8 bytes.

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:SIZE? might return

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:SIZE 1 indicating the data size is 1 byte.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string to be used for LIN trigger condition
if trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1771

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that is the LIN trigger data value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:VALUE "11001101"sets the data value to

11001101.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:VALUE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX" indicating the
data value is don't care.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:ERRTYPE
This command specifies the error type be used for LIN trigger. The bus number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:ERRTYPE {SYNC|PARity|CHecksum}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:ERRTYPE?

Arguments SYNC sets the LIN error type to SYNC.

PARity sets the LIN error type to parity.

CHecksum sets the LIN error type to checksum.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:ERRTYPE CHECKSUM sets the LIN error type to

checksum.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:ERRTYPE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:ERRTYPE SYNC indicating the LIN error type
is SYNC.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDentifier:VALue
This command specifies the binary address string used for LIN bus trigger if the
trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA. The bus number is specified by x.

2-1772 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAUTO or SUP5-SRAUTO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDentifier:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDentifier:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary address string used for LIN trigger if the trigger
condition is ID or IDANDDATA.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "110010" sets the identifier

value to 110010.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXXXX" indicating the
identifier value is XXXXXX.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high value when triggering on command word
addresses for a MIL-STD-1553 bus. The bus number is specified by x. The
trigger condition must be set to COMMAND, and the address qualifier must be
INrange or OUTrange.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:HIVALue
<QString>
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:HIVALue?

Arguments <QString> is the address value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRESS:HIVALUE "X1000"

sets the value to X1000.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRESS:HIVALUE? might return
"XXXXX", indicating that the value is XXXXX.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1773

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on
command word addresses for a MIL-STD-1553 bus. The bus number is specified
by x. The trigger condition must be set to COMMAND.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:
QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan
|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:QUALifier?

Arguments EQual sets the data qualifier to equal.

UNEQual sets the data qualifier to unequal.

LESSthan sets the data qualifier to less than.

MOREthan sets the data qualifier to more than.

LESSEQual sets the data qualifier to less equal.

MOREEQual sets the data qualifier to more equal.

INrange sets the data qualifier to in range.

OUTrange sets the data qualifier to out of range.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRESS:QUALIFIER LESSTHAN

sets the address qualifier to less than.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRESS:QUALIFIER? might
return EQUAL, indicating that the address qualifier is set to equal.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:VALue
This command sets or queries the low value when triggering on command word
addresses for a MIL-STD-1553 bus. The bus number is specified by x. The trigger
condition must be set to COMMAND

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

2-1774 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:VALue
<QString>
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the address value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRESS:VALUE "X1000" sets

the value to X1000.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRESS:VALUE? might return
"XXXXX", indicating that the value is XXXXX.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:COUNt
This command sets or queries the value of the command word "word count" field
for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to triggering on. The bus number is specified by x. The
trigger condition must be set to COMMAND.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:COUNt <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:COUNt?

Arguments <QString> is the word count value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:COUNT "X1000" sets the value

to X1000.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:COUNT? might return "XXXXX",
indicating that the value is XXXXX.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1775

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:PARity
This command sets or queries the value of the command word parity bit for a
MIL-STD-1553 bus to triggering on. The bus number is specified by x. The
trigger condition must be set to COMMAND.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:PARity
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:PARity?

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:PARITY ONE specifies filtering

command words for those where the parity bit has a value of 1.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:PARITY? might return NOCARE,
indicating that command words are not being filtered based on the parity bit value.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:SUBADdress
This command sets or queries the value of the command word subaddress field for
a MIL-STD-1553 bus to triggering on. The bus number is specified by x. The
trigger condition must be set to COMMAND.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:SUBADdress <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:SUBADdress?

2-1776 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <QString> is the subaddress value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:SUBADDRESS "X1000" sets the

value to X1000.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:SUBADDRESS? might return
"XXXXX", indicating that the value is XXXXX.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:TRBit
This command sets or queries the value of the command word Transmit / Receive
bit for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to trigger on. The bus number is specified by x. The
trigger condition must be set to COMMAND.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:TRBit {RX|TX|X}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:TRBit?

Arguments RX filters command words to only match those that are receive packets.

TX filters command words to only match those that are transmit packets.

X disables filtering of command words on the R/T bit.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:TRBIT TX specifies filtering

command words for only transmit messages.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:TRBIT? might return X, indicating
that command words are not being filtered based on the R/T bit value.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition
This command sets or queries the field or condition for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to
trigger on. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1777

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition
{SYNC|COMMAND|STATus|DATA |TIMe|ERRor}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition?

Arguments SYNC specifies triggering on the sync pulse of any word.

COMMAND specifies triggering on a matching command word.

STATus specifies triggering on a matching status word.

DATA specifies triggering on a matching data word.

TIMe specifies triggering on the response time or intermessage gap between words.

ERRor specifies triggering on a specified error condition.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:CONDITION DATA specifies finding matching

data word(s).
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:CONDITION? might return SYNC, indicating
that the bus is triggering on sync pulses found in any word.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:DATa:PARity
This command sets or queries the value of the command word parity bit for a
MIL-STD-1553 bus to triggering on. The bus number is specified by x. The
trigger condition must be set to DATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:DATa:PARity
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:DATa:PARity?

Arguments ONE filters data words to only match those where the parity bit has a value of 1.

ZERo filters data words to only match those where the parity bit has a value of 0.

NOCARE disables filtering of data words on the parity bit.

2-1778 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:DATA:PARITY ONE specifies filtering data

words for those where the parity bit has the value 1.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:DATA:PARITY? might return NOCARE,
indicating that data words are not being filtered based on the parity bit value.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the value when triggering on data words for a
MIL-STD-1553 bus. The bus number is specified by x. The trigger condition
must be set to DATA.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:DATa:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the data value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXX1000" sets

the value to XXXXXXXXXXXX1000.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:DATA:VALUE? might return
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX", indicating that the value is
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:ERRTYPe
This command sets or queries the type of error condition for a MIL-STD-1553
bus to trigger on. The bus number is specified by x. The trigger condition must
be set to ERRor.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1779

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:ERRTYPe {PARity|SYNC|DATA}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:ERRTYPe?

Arguments PARity specifies triggering on an incorrectly calculated parity bit in any word.

SYNC specifies triggering on any sync pulse that does not transition in the middle
of the pulse as required.
DATA specifies triggering on any non-contiguous data words.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:ERRTYPE DATA specifies triggering on

non-contiguous data words.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:ERRTYPE? might return PARITY, indicating
that the bus is triggering on parity errors in any word.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high value when triggering on status word
addresses for a MIL-STD-1553 bus. The bus number is specified by x. The
trigger condition must be set to STATus and the address qualifier must be INrange
or OUTrange.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:HIVALue
<QString>
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:HIVALue?

Arguments <QString> is the address value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:ADDRESS:HIVALUE "X1000" sets

the value to X1000.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:ADDRESS:HIVALUE? might return
"XXXXX", indicating that the value is XXXXX.

2-1780 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on status
word addresses for a MIL-STD-1553 bus. The bus number is specified by x. The
trigger condition must be set to STATus.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:
ADDRess:QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|LESSthan
|MOREthan|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:QUALifier?

Arguments EQual sets the data qualifier to equal.

UNEQual sets the data qualifier to unequal.

LESSthan sets the data qualifier to less than.

MOREthan sets the data qualifier to more than.

LESSEQual sets the data qualifier to less equal.

MOREEQual sets the data qualifier to more equal.

INrange sets the data qualifier to in range.

OUTrange sets the data qualifier to out of range.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:ADDRESS:QUALIFIER LESSTHAN

sets the address qualifier to less than.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:ADDRESS:QUALIFIER? might return
EQUAL, indicating that the address qualifier is set to equal.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:VALue
This command sets or queries the low value when triggering on status word
addresses for a MIL-STD-1553 bus. The bus number is specified by x. The trigger
condition must be set to STATus.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1781

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:VALue
<QString>
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the address value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:ADDRESS:VALUE "X1000" sets the

value to X1000.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:ADDRESS:VALUE? might return
"XXXXX", indicating that the value is XXXXX.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BCR
This command sets or queries the value of the broadcast command received bit
(BCR bit, bit 15) in a status word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to triggering on. The
bus number is specified by x. The trigger condition must be set to STATus.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BCR
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BCR?

Arguments ONE filters status words to only match those where the BCR bit has a value of 1.

ZERo filters status words to only match those where the BCR bit has a value of 0.

NOCARE disables filtering of status words on the BCR bit.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:BCR ONE specifies filtering

status words for those where the BCR bit has a value of 1.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:BCR? might return NOCARE,
indicating that status words are not being filtered based on the BCR bit value.

2-1782 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BUSY
This command sets or queries the value of the busy bit (BUSY bit, bit 16) in
a status word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to triggering on. The bus number is
specified by x. The trigger condition must be set to STATus.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BUSY
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BUSY?

Arguments ONE filters status words to only match those where the BUSY bit has a value of 1.

ZERo filters status words to only match those where the BUSY bit has a value of 0.

NOCARE disables filtering of status words on the BUSY bit.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:BUSY ONE specifies filtering

status words for those where the BUSY bit has a value of 1.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:BUSY? might return NOCARE,
indicating that status words are not being filtered based on the BUSY bit value.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:DBCA
This command sets or queries the value of the dynamic bus control acceptance bit
(DBCA bit, bit 18) in a status word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to triggering on.
The bus number is specified by x. The trigger condition must be set to STATus.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:DBCA
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:DBCA?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1783

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments ONE filters status words to only match those where the DBCA bit has a value of 1.

ZERo filters status words to only match those where the DBCA bit has a value of 0.

NOCARE disables filtering of status words on the DBCA bit.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:DBCA ONE specifies filtering

status words for those where the DBCA bit has a value of 1.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:DBCA? might return NOCARE,
indicating that status words are not being filtered based on the DBCA bit value.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:INSTR
This command sets or queries the value of the instrumentation bit (INSTR bit, bit
10) in a status word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to triggering on. The bus number is
specified by x. The trigger condition must be set to STATus.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:INSTR
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:INSTR?

Arguments ONE filters status words to only match those where the INSTR bit has a value of 1.

ZERo filters status words to only match those where the INSTR bit has a value of 0.

NOCARE disables filtering of status words on the INSTR bit.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:INSTR ONE specifies filtering

status words for those where the INSTR bit has a value of 1.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:INSTR? might return
NOCARE, indicating that status words are not being filtered based on the INSTR
bit value.

2-1784 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:ME
This command sets or queries the value of the message error bit (ME bit, bit 9)
in a status word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to triggering on. The bus number is
specified by x. The trigger condition must be set to STATus.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:ME
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:ME?

Arguments ONE filters status words to only match those where the ME bit has a value of 1.

ZERo filters status words to only match those where the ME bit has a value of 0.

NOCARE disables filtering of status words on the ME bit.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:ME ONE specifies filtering

status words for those where the ME bit has a value of 1.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:ME? might return NOCARE,
indicating that status words are not being filtered based on the ME bit value.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:SRQ
This command sets or queries the value of the status word service request bit
(SRQ bit, bit 11) in a status word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to triggering on. The
bus number is specified by x. The trigger condition must be set to STATus.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:SRQ
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:SRQ?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1785

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments ONE filters status words to only match those where the SRQ bit has a value of 1.

ZERo filters status words to only match those where the SRQ bit has a value of 0.

NOCARE disables filtering of status words on the SRQ bit.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:SRQ ONE specifies filtering

status words for those where the SRQ bit has a value of 1.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:SRQ? might return NOCARE,
indicating that status words are not being filtered based on the SRQ bit value.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:SUBSF
This command sets or queries the value of the subsystem flag bit (SUBSF bit, bit
17) in a status word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to triggering on. The bus number is
specified by x. The trigger condition must be set to STATus.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:SUBSF
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:SUBSF?

Arguments ONE filters status words to only match those where the SUBSF bit has a value of 1.

ZERo filters status words to only match those where the SUBSF bit has a value
of 0.
NOCARE disables filtering of status words on the SUBSF bit.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:SUBSF ONE specifies filtering

status words for those where the SUBSF bit has a value of 1.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:SUBSF? might return
NOCARE, indicating that status words are not being filtered based on the SUBSF
bit value.

2-1786 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:TF
This command sets or queries the value of the terminal flag bit (TF bit, bit 19)
in a status word for a MIL-STD-1553 bus to triggering on. The bus number is
specified by x. The trigger condition must be set to STATus.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:TF
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:TF?

Arguments ONE filters status words to only match those where the TF bit has a value of 1.

ZERo filters status words to only match those where the TF bit has a value of 0.

NOCARE disables filtering of status words on the TF bit.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:TF ONE specifies filtering

status words for those where the TF bit has a value of 1.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:TF? might return NOCARE,
indicating that status words are not being filtered based on the TF bit value.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:PARity
This command sets or queries the value of the status word parity bit for a
MIL-STD-1553 bus to triggering on. The bus number is specified by x. The
trigger condition must be set to STATus.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:PARity
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:PARity?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1787

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments ONE filters status words to only match those where the parity bit has a value of 1.

ZERo filters status words to only match those where the parity bit has a value of 0.

NOCARE disables filtering of status words on the parity bit.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:PARITY ONE specifies filtering

status words for those where the parity bit has a value of 1.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:PARITY? might return NOCARE,
indicating that status words are not being filtered based on the parity bit value.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe:LESSLimit
This command sets or queries the lower limit to be used when triggering on
response time / inter message gap time for a MIL-STD-1553 bus. The bus number
is specified by x. The trigger condition must be set to TIMe.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe:LESSLimit <NR3>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe:LESSLimit?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe:QUALifier

Arguments <NR3> is a floating point number that specifies the lower bound for measuring
remote terminal response time (RT) or the inter-message gap (IMG) in seconds.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:TIME:LESSLIMIT 2.0000e-6 sets the lower

bound for comparison to 2 microseconds.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:TIME:LESSLIMIT? might return 4.0000E-6,
indicating that the lower bound for comparison is set to 4 microseconds.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe:MORELimit
This command sets or queries the upper limit to be used when triggering on
response time / inter message gap time for a MIL-STD-1553 bus. The bus number
is specified by x. The trigger condition must be set to TIMe.

2-1788 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe:MORELimit <NR3>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe:MORELimit?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe:QUALifier

Arguments <NR3> is a floating point number that specifies the upper bound for measuring
remote terminal response time (RT) or the inter-message gap (IMG) in seconds.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:TIME:MORELIMIT 15.0000e-6 sets the

upper bound for comparison to 15 microseconds.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:TIME:MORELIMIT? might return 12.0000E-6,
indicating that the upper bound for comparison is set to 12 microseconds.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on response
time / inter message gap time for a MIL-STD-1553 bus. The bus number is
specified by x. The trigger condition must be set to TIMe.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRAERO or SUP5-SRAERO Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe:QUALifier
{LESSthan|MOREthan|INrange|OUTrange}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe:QUALifier?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe:LESSLimit

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe:MORELimit

Arguments LESSthan sets the data qualifier to less than.

MOREthan sets the data qualifier to more than.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1789

Commands listed in alphabetical order

INrange sets the data qualifier to in range.

OUTrange sets the data qualifier to out of range.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:TIME:QUALIFIER LESSTHAN sets the time

comparison qualifier to less than.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:TIME:QUALIFIER? might return
OUTRANGE, indicating that the qualifier is set to out-of-range comparison.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:PARallel:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for a Parallel Bus trigger. The
bus number is specified by x.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:PARallel:DATa:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:PARallel:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary data string used for a Parallel Bus trigger.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:PARallel:DATa:VALue "11001101" sets the data

value to 11001101.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:PARallel:DATa:VALue? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:PARALLEL:DATA:VALUE "X" indicating the data value
is X.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:CONDition
This command specifies the condition for an RS-232C trigger, where the bus
number is specified by< >x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRCOMP or SUP5-SRCOMP Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:CONDition
{STARt|EOp|DATa|PARItyerror}

2-1790 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:CONDition?

Arguments STARt sets the Trigger on condition to Start.

EOp sets the Trigger on condition to End of Packet.

DATa sets the Trigger on condition to Data.

PARItyerror sets the Trigger on condition to Parity Error.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:CONDition DATA sets the trigger on condition

to data.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:CONDition? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:CONDITION START indicating start
is the trigger condition.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes to be used
for an RS-232C trigger when the trigger condition is Data. The bus number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRCOMP or SUP5-SRCOMP Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATa:SIZe <NR3>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the data size in bytes.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:DATA:SIZE 3 sets three bytes data size for the

RS-232C bus B1 trigger.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:DATA:SIZE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:DATA:SIZE 2, indicating that the
data size for the RS-232C bus B1 trigger is set to two bytes.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1791

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the data address string used for the RS-232 bus
trigger when the trigger condition is set to Data. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRCOMP or SUP5-SRCOMP Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATa:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the address value. The argument is a string of 0, 1, or X

representing a binary number.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:DATA:VALUE "011XX11" sets the data address

string used for the RS-232 bus trigger to 011XX11.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:DATA:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:RS232C:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXX01", indicating
that the data address string used for the RS-232 bus trigger is set to "XXXXXX01"

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for a SENT bus.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition
{START|FAST|SLOW|ERRor}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

START sets triggering on start of packet.

FAST sets triggering on fast channel packets.

SLOW sets triggering on slow channel packets.

2-1792 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ERRor sets triggering on errors.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:CONDITION START specifies triggering on start

of packet.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:CONDITION? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:CONDITION ERROR, indicating the bus
is triggering on errors.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:ERRType
This command sets or queries the error type to be used when triggering on SENT
data.

Conditions Requires option 5SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus trigger condition is set to ERRor.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:ERRType CRC

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:ERRType?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

CRC specifies triggering on CRC errors.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:ERRTYPE CRC sets the bus to trigger on CRC errors.

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:ERRTYPE? might return

:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:ERRTYPE CRC to indicate the bus is triggering
on CRC errors.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:ERRType:CRC
This command sets or queries the CRC error type to be used when triggering
on SENT data.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1793

Commands listed in alphabetical order

The SENT bus trigger condition is set to ERRor.

The ERRType is set to CRC.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:ERRType:CRC {FAST|SLOW}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:ERRType:CRC?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:ERRType

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

FAST specifies triggering on CRC errors in only the Fast Channel.

SLOW specifies triggering on CRC errors in only the slow channel.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:ERRTYPE:CRC FAST sets the bus to trigger on Fast

Channel CRC errors.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:ERRTYPE:CRC? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:ERRTYPE:CRC FAST to indicate that the
bus is triggering on Fast Channel CRC errors.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high binary fast channel 1 value to use when
triggering on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

2-1794 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

<Qstring> sets the Fast Channel 1 binary data high value.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B12:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALue "XXXXXXXXXXXX"

sets the SENT bus B12 Fast Channel 1 high value to XXXXXXXXXXXX, or
"don't care."
TRIGger:A:BUS:B3:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALue? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B3:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALUE "0101XXXX1111",
indicating the SENT bus B3 Fast Channel 1 high is set to the binary value
0101XXXX1111.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on SENT
fast packet bus data for device channel 1.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:
QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan|
LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:QUALifier?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALue

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

EQUal sets the qualifier as Equal.

LESSEQual sets the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

LESSThan sets the qualifier as Less Than.

MOREEQual sets the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

MOREThan sets the qualifier as More Than.

UNEQual sets the qualifier as Unequal.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1795

Commands listed in alphabetical order

INrange sets the qualifier to inside a range.

OUTrange sets the qualifier to outside a range.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:QUALIFIER UNEQUAL sets the fast

channel 1 data qualifier trigger to not equal for bus 2.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B5:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:QUALIFIER? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:QUALIFIER MOREEQUAL to
indicate that the fast channel 1 data qualifier trigger is set to greater than or equal
for bus 5.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary fast channel 1 value to be used when
triggering on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The search trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALue <Qstring>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:QUALifier

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<Qstring> is the Fast Channel 1 value on which to trigger.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXX" sets the

Fast Channel 1 value to trigger on XXXXXXXXXXXX, or "don't care."
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALUE "0000XXXX1111" to
indicate the Fast Channel 1 binary trigger value is 0000XXXX1111.

2-1796 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high binary fast channel 2 value to use when
triggering on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

<Qstring> sets the Fast Channel 2 high binary data value.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B2:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALue "100000000000" sets

the SENT bus B2 Fast Channel 2 high value to 100000000000.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B4:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALue? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B4:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALUE "0101XXXX1111",
indicating the SENT bus B4 Fast Channel 2 high is set to the binary value
0101XXXX1111.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on SENT
fast packet bus data for device channel 2.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:
QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan|
LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1797

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:QUALifier?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALue

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

EQUal sets the qualifier as Equal.

LESSEQual sets the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

LESSThan sets the qualifier as Less Than.

MOREEQual sets the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

MOREThan sets the qualifier as More Than.

UNEQual sets the qualifier as Unequal.

INrange sets the qualifier to inside a range.

OUTrange sets the qualifier to outside a range.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:QUALIFIER UNEQUAL sets the fast

channel 2 data qualifier trigger to not equal for bus 2.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B5:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:QUALIFIER? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:QUALIFIER MOREEQUAL to
indicate that the fast channel 2 data qualifier trigger is set to greater than or equal
for bus 5.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary fast channel 2 value to be used when
triggering on a SENT bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The search condition must be set to FAST.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALue <Qstring>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALue?

2-1798 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:PAUSE:QUALifier

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<Qstring> is the Fast Channel 2 binary value on which to trigger.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALUE "111111111111" sets the

Fast Channel 2 value on which to trigger to 111111111111.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALUE "000000000000" to
indicate the Fast Channel 2 binary value on which to trigger is 000000000000.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high binary fast message counter value to be
used when triggering on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to FAST.
The number of channels must be set to 1.
The nibble count must be set to 6.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:HIVALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:HIVALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

BUS:B<x>:SENT:NUMCHANnel
BUS:B<x>:SENT:NIBBLECount

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

<Qstring> sets the Fast Channel 1 counter binary value.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1799

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX" sets the

Fast Channel 1 secure counter high value to "don't care."
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B3:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:HIVALUE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B3:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:HIVALUE "11110000" to
indicate a binary value of 11110000.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on SENT
fast packet bus data for the secure format counter.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:
QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan|
LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:QUALifier?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:VALue

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

EQUal sets the qualifier as Equal.

LESSEQual sets the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

LESSThan sets the qualifier as Less Than.

MOREEQual sets the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

MOREThan sets the qualifier as More Than.

UNEQual sets the qualifier as Unequal.

INrange sets the qualifier to inside a range.

OUTrange sets the qualifier to outside a range.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:QUALIFIER UNEQUAL sets the

fast channel 2 counter qualifier trigger to not equal for bus 2.

2-1800 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B5:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:QUALIFIER? might return

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:QUALIFIER MOREEQUAL to
indicate that the fast channel 2 counter qualifier trigger is set to greater than or
equal for bus 5.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary fast message counter value to be used
when triggering on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The search condition must be set to FAST.
The number of channels must be set to 1.
The nibble count must be set to 6.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:VALue <Qstring>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

BUS:B<x>:SENT:NIBBLECount
BUS:B<x>:SENT:NUMCHANnel

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<Qstring> is the Fast Channel 1 fast message counter binary value on which
to trigger.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:VALUE "XXXXXXXX" sets the Fast

Channel 1 fast message counter value to "don't care."
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:VALUE "00001111" to indicate
the Fast Channel 1 fast message counter binary value on which to trigger is
00001111.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1801

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:INVERTNIBble:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary fast message inverted nibble value to be
used when triggering on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The search condition must be set to FAST.
The number of channels must be set to 1.
The nibble count must be set to 6.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:INVERTNIBble:VALue
<Qstring>
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:INVERTNIBble:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

BUS:B<x>:SENT:NIBBLECount
BUS:B<x>:SENT:NUMCHANnel

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<Qstring> is the Fast Channel 1 inverted nibble binary value on which to trigger.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:INVERTNIBBLE:VALUE "XXXX" sets the

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:STATus:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary status value to be used when triggering
on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The search trigger condition must be set to FAST.

2-1802 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:STATus:VALue <Qstring>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:STATus:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<Qstring> is the binary status value on which to trigger.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:STATus:VALue "XXXX" sets the binary

status trigger value to XXXX.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:STATUS:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:STATUS:VALUE "1010" to indicate a
binary trigger value is 1010.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:PAUSE:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on SENT
pause pulses.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to PAUSE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:PAUSE:QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|

LESSthan|MOREthan|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|Inrange|OUTrange}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:PAUSE:QUALifier?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKs:HIVALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKs:VALue

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

EQUal sets the qualifier as Equal.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1803

Commands listed in alphabetical order

INrange sets the qualifier to in range.

LESSEQual sets the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

LESSThan sets the qualifier as Less Than.

MOREEQual sets the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

MOREThan sets the qualifier as More Than.

OUTrange sets the qualifier to out of range.

UNEQual sets the qualifier as Unequal.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SENT:PAUSE:QUALifier UNEQUAL sets the pause pulse

qualifier trigger to not equal for bus 2.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:PAUSE:QUALIFIER? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:PAUSE:QUALIFIER INRANGE to indicate that
the pause pulse qualifier is set to trigger inside the range of ticks low and ticks
high on bus 1.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high binary Slow channel data value to use
when triggering on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to SLOW.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA:HIVALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA:HIVALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

<Qstring> sets the binary Slow channel data value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:SLOW:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX" sets the Slow

data high value to "don't care."

2-1804 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:SLOW:DATA:HIVALUE? might return

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:SLOW:DATA:HIVALUE "11110001", to indicate
triggering on Slow data values that match 11110001.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the binary identifier value to use when triggering
on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to SLOW.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA:QUALifier {EQual|

UNEQual| LESSthan| MOREthan| LESSEQual| MOREEQual|
INrange|OUTrange}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA:QUALifier?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

EQUal specifies the qualifier as Equal.

UNEQual specifies the qualifier as Not Equal to.

LESSthan specifies the qualifier as Less Than.

MOREthan specifies the qualifier as More Than.

LESSEQual specifies the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

MOREEQual specifies the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

INrange sets the qualifier to inside a range.

OUTrange sets the qualifier to outside a range.

Examples TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B2:SENT:SLOW:DATA:QUALIFIER LESSEQUAL sets

the slow channel data qualifier to less than or equal for bus 2.
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B5:SENT:SLOW:DATA:QUALIFIER? might return
:TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B5:SENT:SLOW:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL to indicate
that the slow channel data qualifier is set to equal on bus 5.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1805

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary slow channel value to use when
triggering on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to SLOW.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALue <Qstring>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

<Qstring> is the binary slow channel data value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX" sets the slow

data value to "don't care" for bus 2.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B4:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B4:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALUE "XXXX1111", to indicate
triggering on slow data values that match XXXX1111 on bus 4.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:IDentifier:VALue
This command sets or queries the qualifier to use when triggering on SENT slow
packet bus data.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to SLOW.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:IDentifier:VALue <Qstring>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:IDentifier:VALue?

2-1806 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALue

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

<Qstring> is the binary identifier value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B3:SENT:SLOW:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXX" sets the

identifier value to "don't care" for bus 3.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:SLOW:IDENTIFIER:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:SLOW:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "0001" to indicate
the slow channel identifier is set to 0001 on bus 1.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition
This command specifies the trigger condition for a SPI trigger. The bus number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRCOMP or SUP5-SRCOMP Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition {SS|STARTofframe|DATa}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:SPI:IDLETime

BUS:B<x>:SPI:FRAMING

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

SS specifies the Slave Selection condition.

STARTofframe is applicable when BUS:B<x>:SPI:FRAMING is set to

IDLEtime. When the trigger condition is set to STARTofframe, the instrument
triggers on the first SPI clock after an idle time when there are no clocks.
DATa sets the trigger condition to Master-In Slave-Out and Master-Out Slave-In.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1807

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe
This command specifies the length of the data string to be used for a SPI trigger if
the trigger condition is DATa. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRCOMP or SUP5-SRCOMP Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

<NR1> is the length of the data string in bytes.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATa:SIZe 1 sets the data size to 1 byte.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATa:SIZe? might return

:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:SIZE 1 indicating the data size is
1 byte.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for SPI triggering if the trigger
condition is DATA. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRCOMP or SUP5-SRCOMP Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:VALue?

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

<QString> specifies the data value in the specified valid format. The valid
characters are 0, 1, and X for binary format.

2-1808 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATa:VALue "11011010" sets the data value to

11011010.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATa:VALue? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX" indicating
the data value is XXXXXXXX.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:CONDition
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for the specified SPMI bus.

Conditions Requires option SRPM

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:CONDition {SSC|RESet|SLEep|

SHUTdown|WAKeup|MASTERREAd|MASTERWRIte|REGREAd|REGWRIte|
DEVICEDESCMASTERREAd|DEVICEDESCSLAVEREAd|EXTREGREAd|
EXTREGWRIte|LONGEXTREGREAd|LONGEXTREGWRIte|REG0WRIte|
AUTHenticate|TRANSferbusownership|PARItyerror}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:CONDition?

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

SSC specifies triggering on the Sequence Start Condition.

RESet specifies triggering on the Reset command sequence.

SLEep specifies triggering on the Sleep command sequnce.

SHUTdown specifies triggering on the Shutdown command sequence.

WAKeup specifies triggering on the Wakeup command sequence.

MASTERREAd specifies triggering on the Master Read command sequence.

MASTERWRIte specifies triggering on the Master Write command sequence.

REGREAd specifies triggering on the Register Read command sequence.

REGWRIte specifies triggering on the Register Write command sequence.

DEVICEDESCMASTERREAd specifies triggering on the Device Descriptor Block

Master Read command sequence
DEVICEDESCSLAVEREAd specifies triggering on the Device Descriptor Block
Slave Read command sequence.
EXTREGREAd specifies triggering on the Extended Register Read command
sequence.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1809

Commands listed in alphabetical order

EXTREGWRIte specifies triggering on the Extended Register Write command

sequence.
LONGEXTREGREAd specifies triggering on the Extended Register Read Long
command sequence.
LONGEXTREGWRIte specifies triggering on the Extended Register Write Long
command sequence.
REG0WRIte specifies triggering on the Register 0 Write command sequence.

AUTHenticate specifies triggering on the Authentication command sequence.

TRANSferbusownership specifies triggering on the Transfer Bus Ownership

(TBO) command sequence.
PARItyerror specifies triggering on the parity errors.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B5:SPMI:CONDITION SLEEP specifies triggering on a Sleep

command sequence for bus B5.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPMI:CONDITION? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPMI:CONDITION MASTERREAD, indicating
that bus B2 is triggering on Master Read command sequences.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the length of the data string, in bytes, to be used
when triggering on an SPMI bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRPM.

The trigger condition must be set to EXTREGREAd, EXTREGWRIte,
LONGEXTREGREAd, or LONGEXTREGWRIte.
Note that this a floating point value. If the condition is set to REG0WRIte, the
query return value will be a fractional value (0.875) because the data size is less
than a byte.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:DATa:SIZe <NR2>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:DATa:SIZe?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:CONDition

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:DATa:VALue

2-1810 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

<NR2> is the size of the data string in bytes.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPMI:DATA:SIZE 1 sets the data value to 1 byte.

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPMI:DATA:SIZE? might return

:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPMI:DATA:SIZE 4 to indicate the data
pattern has four bytes of data.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string used for SPMI triggering
if the trigger condition is MASTERREAd, MASTERWRIte, REGREAd,
REGWRIte, EXTREGREAd, EXTREGWRIte, LONGEXTREGREAd,
LONGEXTREGWRIte, or REG0WRIte.

Conditions Requires option SRPM

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:DATa:VALue <Qstring>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:DATa:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:CONDition

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

<Qstring> is the binary data string that identifies the data value on which to
trigger.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPMI:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX" sets the binary data

value on which to trigger for bus B1 to "don't care."
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B5:SPMI:DATA:VALUE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B5:SPMI:DATA:VALUE "XXXX1111" to indicate
the binary data value on which to trigger for bus B5 is set to XXXX1111.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1811

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:MASTERADDRess:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string that identifies the master
address used in SPMI triggering if the trigger condition is MASTERREAd,
MASTERWRIte, or DEVICEDESCMASTERREAd.

Conditions Requires option SRPM

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:MASTERADDRess:VALue <Qstring>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:MASTERADDRess:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:CONDition

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

<Qstring> is the binary data string that identifies the master address on which
to trigger.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B3:SPMI:MASTERADDRESS:VALUE "XX" sets the binary

master address trigger of bus B3 to "don't care."
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPMI:MASTERADDRESS:VALUE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPMI:MASTERADDRESS:VALUE "11" to indicate the
binary master address on which to trigger for bus B1 is set to binary 11.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:NORESPonse
This command sets or queries whether or not to trigger on No Response frames.

Conditions Requires option SRPM

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:NORESPonse <Qstring>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:NORESPonse?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:CONDition

2-1812 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

<Qstring> is either TRUE or FALSE boolean value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B4:SPMI:NORESPONSE TRUE set the bus B4 to look for No

Response frames.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPMI:NORESPONSE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPMI:NORESPONSE FALSE to indicate that
bus B4 is not looking for No Response frames.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:REGISTERADDRess:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string that identifies the register
address used in SPMI triggering if the trigger condition is MASTERREAd,
MASTERWRIte, REGREAd, REGWRIte, EXTREGREAd, EXTREGWRIte,
LONGEXTREGREAd, or LONGEXTREGWRIte.

Conditions Requires option SRPM

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:REGISTERADDRess:VALue <Qstring>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:REGISTERADDRess:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:CONDition

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

<Qstring> is the binary data string that identifies the register address.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPMI:REGISTERADDRESS:VALUE "XXXXXXXX" sets the

binary register address of bus B2 to "don't care."
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPMI:REGISTERADDRESS:VALUE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPMI:REGISTERADDRESS:VALUE "XXXX1111" to
indicate the binary register address on which to trigger for bus B1 is XXXX1111.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SLAVEADDRess:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string that identifies the slave
address used in SPMI triggering if the trigger condition is RESet, SLEep,

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1813

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SHUTdown, WAKeup, AUTHenticate, REGREAd, REGWRIte, EXTREGREAd,

EXTREGWRIte, LONGEXTREGREAd, LONGEXTREGWRIte,
DEVICEDESCSLAVEREAd, or REG0WRIte.

Conditions Requires option SRPM

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SLAVEADDRess:VALue <Qstring>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SLAVEADDRess:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:CONDition

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

<Qstring> is the binary data string that identifies the slave address on which
to trigger.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPMI:SLAVEADDRESS:VALUE "0011" sets the binary

slave address of bus B1 to 0011.
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B4:SPMI:SLAVEADDRESS:VALUE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B4:SPMI:SLAVEADDRESS:VALUE "1010" to indicate that
bus B4 is triggering on binary slave address1010.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:COMMand:RESPonse
This command sets or queries the command response for SVID bus. The bus
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SVID.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:COMMand:RESPonse
{GETREG| GETREGVENDor| GETREGTESTCFG| SETVIDFAST|
SETVIDSLOW| SETVIDDECay| SETPS| SETREGADDR| SETREGDATa|
SETREGADDRVENDor| SETREGDATAVENDor| SETREGADDRTESTCONFg|
SETREGDATATESTCONFg| TESTMODe| SETWP| GETREGPKTRECent|
GETREGPKTALERt| GETREGPKTBAD| GETREGVREVENt}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:COMMand:RESPonse?

2-1814 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments GETREG sets the command response to GetReg. This is the default value.

GETREGVENDor sets the command response to GetRegVendor.

GETREGTESTCFG sets the command response to GetRegTestCfg.

SETVIDFAST sets the command response to SetVID Fast.

SETVIDSLOW sets the command response to SetVID Slow.

SETVIDDECay sets the command response to SetVID Decay.

SETPS sets the command response to SetPS.

SETREGADDR sets the command response to SetRegAddr.

SETREGDATa sets the command response to SetRegData.

SETREGADDRVENDor sets the command response to SetRegAddrVendor.

SETREGDATAVENDor sets the command response to SetRegDataVendor.

SETREGADDRTESTCONFg sets the command response to SetRegAddrTestCfg.

SETREGDATATESTCONFg sets the command response to SetRegDataTestCfg.

TESTMODe sets the command response to Test Mode.

SETWP sets the command response to SetWP.

GETREGPKTRECent sets the command response to GetRegPktRecent.

GETREGPKTALERt sets the command response to GetRegPktAlert.

GETREGPKTBAD sets the command response to GetRegPktBad.

GETREGVREVENt sets the command response to GetRegVrEvent.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SVID:COMMand:RESPonse GETREGVENDor specifies

GetRegVendor as the command response within a SVID frame to trigger on.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SVID:COMMand:RESPonse? might return
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SVID:COMMand:RESPonse GETREGVENDor, indicating
that GETREGVENDor is the currently specified command response within a
SVID.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:COMMand:TYPe
This command sets or queries the command type for SVID bus. The bus number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SVID.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1815

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:COMMand:TYPe {GET|SET|OPTional}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:COMMand:TYPe?

Arguments GET sets the command type to get. This is the default value.

SET sets the command type to set.

OPTional sets the command type to optional.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SVID:COMMand:TYPe GET specifies GET as the

command type within a SVID frame to trigger on.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SVID:COMMand:TYPe? might return
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SVID:COMMand:TYPe GET, indicating that GET is the
currently specified command type within a SVID frame to trigger on.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:CONDition
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for a SVID bus to trigger
on. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SVID.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:CONDition {STARTCONDition|

SLAVEADDRess| COMMand| PAYLoad| ERRors}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:CONDition?

Arguments STARTCONDition sets the trigger condition to start condition. This is the default
value.
SLAVEADDRess sets the trigger condition to slave address.

COMMand sets the trigger condition to command.

PAYLoad sets the trigger condition to payload.

ERRors sets the trigger condition to errors.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SVID:CONDition SLAVEADDRess specifies slave

address as the field within a SVID frame to trigger on.

2-1816 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SVID:CONDition? might return

:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SVID:CONDition SLAVEADDRess, indicating that
slave address is the currently specified field within a SVID frame to trigger on.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:ERRor:TYPe
This command sets or queries the error type for SVID bus. The bus number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SVID.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:ERRor:TYPe {NACK| REJect| MIXed|

PARity}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:ERRor:TYPe?

Arguments NACK sets the error type to nack.

REJect sets the error type to reject.

MIXed sets the error type to mixed.

PARity sets the error type to parity.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SVID:ERRor:TYPe NACK specifies NACK as the error

type within a SVID frame to trigger on.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SVID:ERRor:TYPe? might return
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SVID:ERRor:TYPe NACK, indicating that
NACK is the currently specified error type within a SVID frame to trigger on.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:PARity:TYPe
This command sets or queries the parity type for SVID bus. The bus number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SVID.

Group Trigger

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1817

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:PARity:TYPe {MASTer|SLAVe}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:PARity:TYPe?

Arguments MASTer sets the parity type to master. This is the default value.

SLAVe sets the parity type to slave.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SVID:PARity:TYPe MASTer specifies MASTer as the

parity type within a SVID frame to trigger on.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SVID:PARity:TYPe? might return
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SVID:PARity:TYPe MASTer, indicating that
MASTer is the currently specified parity type within a SVID frame to trigger on.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:PAYLoad:TYPe
This command sets or queries the payload type for SVID bus. The bus number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SVID.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:PAYLoad:TYPe {MASTer|SLAVe}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:PAYLoad:TYPe?

Arguments MASTer sets the payload type to master. This is the default value.

SLAVe sets the payload type to slave.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SVID:PAYLoad:TYPe SLAVe specifies SLAVe as the

payload type within a SVID frame to trigger on.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SVID:PAYLoad:TYPe? might return
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SVID:PAYLoad:TYPe SLAVe, indicating that SLAVe is
the currently specified payload type within a SVID frame to trigger on.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:PAYLoad:VALue
This command sets the binary payload value for a SVID bus to trigger on. The
bus number is specified by x.

2-1818 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-SVID.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:PAYLoad:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:PAYLoad:VALue?

Arguments <QString> sets the binary payload value. Default size and value is 8 bits and
"XXXXXXXX" respectively

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SVID:PAYLoad:VALue "10100010" specifies the binary

Payload value used for SVID triggering if the trigger.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SVID:PAYLoad:VALue? might return
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SVID:PAYLoad:VALue "10100010", indicating the
Payload value within a SVID frame to trigger on.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:SLAVe:ADDRess
This command sets the binary address of the slave for a SVID bus to trigger
on. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SVID.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:SLAVe:ADDRess <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:SLAVe:ADDRess?

Arguments <QString> sets the binary payload value. Default size and value is 4 bits and
"XXXX" respectively

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SVID:SLAVe:ADDRess "1010" specifies the binary

Slave Address value used for SVID triggering if the trigger condition is
SLAVEADDRess and sets it to "1010".
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SVID:SLAVe:ADDRess? might return
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SVID:SLAVe:ADDRess "1010", indicating the Slave
Address value within a SVID frame to trigger on.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1819

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:ADDRess:HIVALue
This command specifies the binary address string for the upper limit for
inside-of-range and outside-of-range qualifiers for the USB trigger. Use the
command TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:ADDRess:VALue to set the lower
limit. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:ADDRess:HIVALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:ADDRess:HIVALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:ADDRess:VALue

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

<QString> within the range 0000000 to 1111111 (00 hex to 7F hex).

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ADDRESS:HIVALUE "0001000" sets the upper limit

to binary 0001000 (08 hex).
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ADDRESS:HIVALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ADDRESS:HIVALUE "1111111", which indicates
that the upper limit is 1111111 (7F hex).

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:ADDRess:VALue
This command specifies the binary address string to be used for USB trigger.
The trigger condition must be set to TOKEN. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

2-1820 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:ADDRess:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:ADDRess:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

<QString> within the range 0000000 to 1111111 (00 hex to 7F hex).

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ADDRESS:VALUE "0001000" sets the binary

address to 0001000 (08 hex).
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ADDRESS:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ADDRESS:VALUE "1000000", which
indicates that the binary address is 100000 (40 hex).

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition
This command specifies the trigger condition for the USB trigger. The bus
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition
{SYNC|RESET|SUSPEND|RESUME|EOP|TOKENPacket|DATAPacket|
HANDSHAKEPacket|SPECIALPacket|ERRor}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition?

Arguments SYNC indicates triggering on a Sync field of a packet.

RESET sets triggering on a reset condition.

SUSPEND sets triggering on a suspend condition.

RESUME sets triggering on a resume condition.

EOP indicates triggering on an end-of-packet signal.

TOKENPacket indicates triggering on a token packet.

DATAPacket indicates triggering on a data packet

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1821

Commands listed in alphabetical order

HANDSHAKEPacket indicates triggering on a handshake packet.

SPECIALPacket indicates triggering on a special status packet.

ERRor indicates triggering on an error condition.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:CONDITION TOKENPACKET sets the trigger condition

to be a token packet.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:CONDITION? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:CONDITION SYNC, which indicates that the trigger
condition is a sync field.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:HIVALue
This command specifies the binary data string for the upper limit for inside-of-range
and outside-of-range qualifiers for the USB trigger when the trigger condition is
DATA. Use the command TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:VALue to set
the lower limit. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:HIVALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:HIVALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:VALue

Arguments <QString> within the range 00000000 to 11111111 (00 hex to FF hex).

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:HIVALUE "00001000" sets the upper limit

to binary 00001000 (08 hex).
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:HIVALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:HIVALUE "01111111", which
indicates that the upper limit is 01111111 (7F hex).

2-1822 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:OFFSet
This command specifies the data offset in bytes to trigger on. The bus number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:OFFSet <NR1>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:OFFSet?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition

Arguments <NR1> is number in the range 0 to 1024.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:OFFSET 36 sets the data offset to 36.

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:OFFSET? might return

:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:OFFSET 0, indicating that the
data offset is the default value, 0.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:QUALifier
This command sets the qualifier to be used when triggering on a USB bus signal.
The trigger condition must be set to DATAPACKET. The bus number is specified
by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|

LESSthan|MOREthan|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:QUALifier?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1823

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments EQUal specifies the qualifier as Equal.

INrange specifies the qualifier as Inside Range.

LESSEQual specifies the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

MOREEQual specifies the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

OUTrange specifies the qualifier as Out of Range.

UNEQual specifies the qualifier as Not Equal to.

LESSthan specifies the qualifier as Less Than.

MOREthan specifies the qualifier as More Than.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATa:QUALifier LESSTHAN sets the qualifier to

less than.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATa:QUALifier? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the qualifier
is set to equal.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:SIZe
This command specifies the number of contiguous data bytes to trigger on. The
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> is number in the range 1 to 16.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:SIZE 4 sets the instrument to trigger on four

contiguous data bytes.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:SIZE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:SIZE 6 indicating that the instrument will
trigger on 6 contiguous data bytes.

2-1824 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:TYPe
This command specifies the data type for a USB trigger. The bus number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:TYPe
{ANY|DATA0|DATA1|DATA2|MDATA}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:TYPe?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition

Arguments ANY indicates either a DATA0 or DATA1 data packet type.

DATA0 indicates a DATA0 data packet type.

DATA1 indicates a DATA1 data packet type.

DATA2 indicates a DATA2 data packet type when on HIGH speed.

MDATA indicates a MDATA data packet type when on HIGH speed.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:TYPE DATA0 sets the instrument to trigger

on a DATA0 data packet type.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:TYPE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:TYPE DATA1, indicating that the data packet
type is set to DATA1.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string to be used when triggering on a
USB trigger.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1825

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition

Arguments <QString> within the range 00000000 to 11111111 (00 hex to FF hex).

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:VALUE "00001000" sets the binary address

to 00001000 (08 hex).
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:VALUE "01000000", which
indicates that the binary address is 0100000 (40 hex).

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:ENDPoint:VALue
This command specifies the binary endpoint string to be used for the USB trigger.
The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:ENDPoint:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:ENDPoint:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition

Arguments <QString> within the range 0000 to 1111 (00 hex to 0F hex).

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ENDPOINT:VALUE "1000" sets the binary address

to 1000 (08 hex).
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ENDPOINT:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ENDPOINT:VALUE "1001", which indicates that
the binary address is 1001 (09 hex).

2-1826 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:ERRType
This command specifies the error type to be used when the trigger condition is set
to ERRor. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:ERRType
{PID|CRC5|CRC16|BITSTUFFing}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:ERRType?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition

Arguments PID indicates the error type is set to packet ID.

CRC5 indicates the error type is set to 5-bit CRC.

CRC16 indicates the error type is set to 16-bit CRC.

BITSTUFFing indicates the error type is set to bit stuffing.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ERRTYPE PID sets the error trigger condition to

packet ID.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ERRTYPE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:TYPE PID, indicating the error trigger condition is
packet ID.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:HANDSHAKEType
This command specifies the handshake type for the USB trigger. The bus number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1827

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:HANDSHAKEType
{ANY|NAK|ACK|STALL|NYET}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:HANDSHAKEType?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition

Arguments ANY indicates the instrument will trigger on any handshake type.

NAK indicates the instrument will trigger when a device cannot send or receive
data.
ACK indicates the instrument will trigger when a packet is successfully received.

STALL indicates the instrument will trigger when a device requires intervention
from the host.
NYET specifies the handshake type as No response Yet (0110).

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:HANDSHAKETYPE ACK sets the handshake type to

acknowledgement.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:HANDSHAKETYPE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:HANDSHAKETYPE STALL, indicating that
the handshake type is set to stall.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SOFFRAMENUMber
This command specifies the binary data string to be used for start of frame
number, when the trigger condition is Token Packet and the token type is Start of
Frame. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SOFFRAMENUMber <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SOFFRAMENUMber?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition

Arguments <QString> within the range 000 0000 0000 to 111 1111 1111 (000 hex to 7FF
hex).

2-1828 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:SOFFRAMENUMBER "00000001000" sets the start of

frame number to 00000001000 (008 hex).
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:SOFFRAMENUMBER? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:SOFFRAMENUMBER "00000001001", which
indicates that the start of frame number is 00000001001 (009 hex).

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPECIALType
This command specifies the packet ID (PID) for the special packet. The bus
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPECIALType
{ANY|ERROr|PING|PREamble|RESERVed|SPLit}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPECIALType?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition

Arguments ANY specifies the PID value as Any (XX00).

ERROr specifies the PID value as ERR (1100).

PING specifies the PID value as PING (0100).

PREamble specifies the PID value as PRE (1100).

RESERVed specifies the PID value as Reserved (0000).

SPLit specifies the PID value as Split (1000).

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS1:USB:SPECIALTYPE PREAMBLE sets the special packet type

to preamble.
TRIGGER:A:BUS1:USB:SPECIALTYPE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS1:USB:SPECIALTYPE PREAMBLE, indicating that the special
type is set to preamble.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1829

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:ET:VALue
When triggering on a high-speed USB split transaction, this command specifies
the split transaction endpoint type value to trigger on. The bus number is specified
by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:ET:VALue
{NOCARE|CONTRol|ISOchronous|BULK|INTERRUPT}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:ET:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPECIALType

Arguments NOCARE — any endpoint type.

CONTRol — control endpoint type.

ISOchronous — isochronous endpoint type.

BULK — bulk endpoint type (BULK-IN or BULK-OUT).

INTERRUPT — interrupt endpoint type (Interrupt-IN).

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:USB:SPLit:ET:VALue iso sets the endpoint type to

trigger on to isochronous.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:USB:SPLit:ET:VALue? might return BULK, indicating
that the bulk endpoint type has been specified to trigger on.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:HUB:VALue
When triggering on a high-speed USB split transaction, this command specifies
the split transaction hub address value to trigger on. The trigger condition must be
set to Special with packet type SPLIT. The value can be up to 7 characters long.
The default is all X’s (don’t care). The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

2-1830 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:HUB:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:HUB:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPECIALType

Arguments QString is a quoted string of up to 7 characters. The valid characters are 0 and 1.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:USB:SPLit:HUB:VALue "001010" sets the split

transaction hub address to trigger on to 001010.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:USB:SPLit:HUB:VALue? might return XXXXXXX,
indicating that the hub address value to trigger on doesn’t matter.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:PORT:VALue
When triggering on a high-speed USB split transaction, this command specifies
the split transaction port address value to trigger on. The trigger condition must be
set to Special with a packet type SPLIT. The value can be up to 7 characters long.
The default is all X’s (don’t care). The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:PORT:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:PORT:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPECIALType

Arguments QString is a quoted string of up to 7 characters. The valid characters are 0 and 1.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:USB:SPLit:PORT:VALue "001010" sets the split

transaction hub address to trigger on to 001010.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:USB:SPLit:PORT:VALue? might return XXXXXXX,
indicating that the hub address value to trigger on doesn’t matter.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1831

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:SC:VALue
When triggering on a high-speed USB split transaction, this command specifies
whether to trigger on the start or complete phase of the split transaction, based
on the Start/Complete bit field value. (0 = Start, 1 = Complete). The default is
NOCARE. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:SC:VALue
{NOCARE|SSPLIT|CSPLIT}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:SC:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPECIALType

Arguments NOCARE — trigger on either the start or complete phase of the split transaction.

SSPLIT — trigger on the start phase of the split transaction.

CSPLIT — trigger on the complete phase of the split transaction.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:USB:SPLit:SC:VALue SSPLIT specifies to trigger on

the start phase of the split transaction.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:USB:SPLit:SC:VALue? might indicate NOCARE,
specifying that it doesn’t matter whether to trigger on the start or complete phase
of the split transaction.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:SE:VALue
When triggering on a high-speed USB split transaction, this command specifies the
split transaction start/end bit value to trigger on. The bus number is specified by x.

2-1832 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

NOTE. The start and end bits are interpreted based on the type of split transaction:
For Interrupt and control transactions, the S bit means Speed: 0 = Full Speed, 1
= Low Speed.
For bulk IN/OUT and isochronous IN start-split transactions, the S field must be 0.
For bulk/control IN/OUT, interrupt IN/OUT, and isochronous IN start-split
transactions, the E field must be 0.
For full-speed isochronous OUT start-split transactions, the S (Start) and E
(End) fields specify how the high-speed data payload corresponds to data for a
full-speed data packet as shown below:
S E High-speed to Full-speed Data Relation
0 0 High-speed data is the middle of the full-speed data payload.
0 1 High-speed data is the end of the full-speed data payload.
1 0 High-speed data is the beginning of the full-speed data payload.
1 1 High-speed data is all of the full speed data payload.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:SE:VALue
{NOCARE|FULLSPEED|LOWSPEED|ISOSTART|ISOMID|ISOEND|ISOALL}
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:SE:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPECIALType

Arguments NOCARE — any combination of S and E bits.

FULLSPEED — S bit = 0, E bit = 0.

LOWSPEED — S bit = 1, E bit = 0.

ISOSTART — S bit = 1, E bit = 0.

ISOMID — see note above.

ISOEND — see note above.

ISOALL — see note above.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1833

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:USB:SPLit:SE:VALue ISOEND specifies to trigger on

the ISOEND split transaction value.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:USB:SPLit:SE:VALue? might return FULLSPEED.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:TOKENType
This command specifies the token type for the USB trigger. The bus number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 5-SRUSB2 or SUP5-SRUSB2 Triggering and Analysis

application.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:TOKENType {ANY|SOF|OUT|IN|SETUP}

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:TOKENType?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition

Arguments ANY indicates any of the token types.

SOF indicates a SOF (start-of-frame) token type

OUT indicates an OUT token type.

IN indicates an IN token type.

SETUP indicates a SETUP token type.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:TOKENTYPE SETUP sets the token type to SETUP.

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:TOKENTYPE? might return

:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:TOKENTYPE SOF if the token type is SOF.

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the source bus for a bus trigger.

Group Trigger

2-1834 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:SOUrce B<x>

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> sets the selected source to the bus.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:SOURCE B2 sets the selected source for the bus trigger to Bus 2.

TRIGGER:A:BUS:SOURCE? might return TRIGGER:A:BUS:SOURCE B1,

indicating that the selected source for the bus trigger is set to Bus 1.

TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:COUPling
This command sets or queries the type of coupling for the edge trigger. This
command is equivalent to selecting Edge from the Trigger Type drop-down in the
Trigger setup context menu, and choosing from the Coupling drop-down list.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:COUPling {DC|HFRej|LFRej|NOISErej}

TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:COUPling?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:SOUrce

TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:SLOpe

Arguments DC selects DC trigger coupling, which passes all input signals to the trigger
circuitry.
HFRej coupling attenuates signals above 50 kHz before passing the signals to the
trigger circuitry.
LFRej coupling attenuates signals below 80 kHz before passing the signals to the
trigger circuitry.
NOISErej coupling provides stable triggering by increasing the trigger hysteresis.
Increased hysteresis reduces the trigger sensitivity to noise but can require greater
trigger signal amplitude.

Examples TRIGGER:A:EDGE:COUPLING DC sets the A edge trigger coupling to DC.

TRIGGER:A:EDGE:COUPLING? might return :TRIGGER:A:EDGE:COUPLING

DC, indicating that the A edge trigger coupling is set to DC.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1835

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:SLOpe
This command sets or queries the slope for the edge trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting Edge from the Trigger Type drop-down in the Trigger
setup context menu, and then choosing the desired Slope. This command is also
equivalent to pressing the front-panel Slope button.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:SLOpe {RISe|FALL|EITher}

TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:SLOpe?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:SOUrce

TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:COUPling
TRIGger:B:STATE

Arguments RISe specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal.

FALL specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal.

EITHER specifies to trigger on either the rising or falling edge of a signal.

Examples TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE RISE sets the A edge trigger slope to positive, which
triggers on the rising edge of the signal.
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE? might return :TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE FALL,
indicating that the A edge trigger slope is negative.

TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the source for the edge trigger. For instruments that
have an Auxiliary Input (such as the MSO58LP), AUXiliary can be selected
as trigger source.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:SOUrce {CH<x>|CH<x>_D<y>|LINE|AUXiliary}

TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:SOUrce?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:SLOpe

2-1836 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:COUPling
TRIGger:B:STATE

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the edge trigger source.

CH<x>_D<y> specifies a digital channel as the edge trigger source.

LINE specifies AC line voltage, and is a valid source when B trigger is inactive.

AUXiliary specifies the Auxiliary Input.

Examples TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH2 sets the A edge trigger source to input

channel 2.
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE? might return :TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1,
indicating that the A edge trigger source is set to input channel 1.

TRIGger:{A|B}:LEVel:CH<x>
This command sets or queries the CH<x> trigger level for an Edge, Pulse Width,
Runt or Rise/Fall (Transition and Slew Rate) trigger when triggering on an analog
channel waveform. Each channel can have an independent trigger level. The <x>
is the channel number.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:LEVel:CH<x> <NR3>

TRIGger:{A|B}:LEVel:CH<x>?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the trigger level in user units (usually volts).

Examples TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH1 1.5 sets the A trigger level for Channel 1 to 1.5 V.

TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH2? might return :TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH2

1.3000E+00, indicating that the A trigger level for Channel 2 is set to 1.3 V.

TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:DELTatime
This command specifies or queries the Logic trigger delta time value. The time
value is used as part of the Logic trigger condition to determine if the duration of
a logic pattern meets the specified time constraints.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1837

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:DELTatime <NR3>

TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:DELTatime?

Arguments <NR3> the Logic trigger delta time value.

Examples TRIGger:A:LOGIc:DELTatime 4.5e-9 sets the delta time to 4.5 ns.

TRIGger:A:LOGIc:DELTatime? might return

:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:DELTATIME 4.0E-9 indicating the delta time is set to
4 ns.

TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:FUNCtion
This command sets or queries the logical combination of the input channels for
logic triggers. This command is equivalent to selecting Logic for the Trigger
Type, and setting or viewing the Define Logic.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:FUNCtion {AND|NANd|NOR|OR}

TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:FUNCtion?

Arguments AND specifies to trigger if all conditions are true.

NANd specifies to trigger if any of the conditions are false.

NOR specifies to trigger if all conditions are false.

OR specifies to trigger if any of the conditions are true.

Examples TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION AND sets the logical combination of channels to

be true when all conditions are true.
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION? might return :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION
NAND, indicating that the instrument will trigger if the AND logic conditions
are false.

TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce
This command specifies the channel to use as the clock source for logic trigger.

2-1838 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce {CH<x>|CH<x>_D<y>}

TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the clock source. Number of channels
depends on instrument configuration.
CH<x>_D<y> specifies a digital channel as the clock source. Number of channels
depends on instrument configuration.

Examples TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce CH3 sets the clock source to

channel 3.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce? might return
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CLOCK:SOURCE CH3 indicating the clock source is
set to channel 3.

TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:POLarity
This command sets or queries the polarity for the clock channel when Use Clock
Edge is set to Yes for Logic trigger type.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:POLarity {POSitive|NEGative|EITher}

TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:POLarity?

Arguments NEGative specifies negative polarity.

POSITIVe specifies positive polarity.

EITher specifies either polarity.

Examples TRIGger:A:LOGIc:POLarity EITHER sets the polarity to either positive or

negative.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:POLarity? might return :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:POLARITY
POSITIVE indicating the polarity is set to positive.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1839

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:USECLockedge
This command specifies whether or not Logic trigger type uses clock source.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:USECLockedge {OFF|ON|0|1}

TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:USECLockedge?

Arguments ON specifies that logic trigger type uses clock source.

OFF specifies that logic trigger type does not use clock source.

0 specifies that logic trigger type does not use clock source; any other number
value uses clock source.
1 specifies that logic trigger type uses clock source.

Examples TRIGger:A:LOGIc:USECLockedge OFF specifies that the clock edge will

not be used.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:USECLockedge? might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:USECLOCKEDGE 1 indicating that the clock edge will be
used.

TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:WHEn
This command sets or queries the condition for generating an A or B logic trigger
with respect to the defined input pattern. This command is equivalent to selecting
Logic for Trigger Type, Use Clock Edge to No, and choosing a trigger condition
from the Logic Pattern drop-down list.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:WHEn
{TRUe|FALSe|MOREThan|LESSThan|EQual| UNEQual}
TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:WHEn?

Arguments TRUe triggers on an input pattern that is true.

FALSe triggers on an input pattern that is false.

MOREthan triggers on an input pattern that is true for a time period greater than a
user defined Time Limit (DELTatime) value.

2-1840 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

LESSthan triggers on an input pattern that is true for a time period less than a
user defined Time Limit (DELTatime) value.
EQual triggers on an input pattern that is true for a time period equal to a user
defined Time Limit (DELTatime) value.
UNEQual triggers on an input pattern that is true for a time period not equal to a
user defined Time Limit (DELTatime) value.

Examples TRIGger:A:LOGIc:WHEn EQual specifies triggering when the input pattern is

true for a time period equal to a user defined Time Limit value.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:WHEn? might return :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:WHEN TRUE
indicating a trigger when the logic is true.

TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGICPattern:{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>}
This command sets or queries the Logic Pattern that is used along with the Define
Logic choice (LOGIc:FUNCtion) to determine when the logic trigger occurs.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGICPattern:{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>} {HIGH|LOW|X}

TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGICPattern:{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>}?

Arguments HIGH specifies the logic high.

LOW specifies the logic low.

X specifies a don't care state.

Examples TRIGger:A:LOGICPattern:CH1 HIGH specifies triggering on a logic high.

TRIGger:A:LOGICPattern:CH1? might return

:TRIGGER:A:LOGICPATTERN:CH1 X indicating a don’t care state for channel 1.

TRIGger:A:LOGICPattern:CH1_D0 HIGH specifies a logic high.

TRIGger:A:LOGICPattern:CH1_D0? might return

:TRIGGER:A:LOGICPATTERN:CH1_D0 X indicating a don’t care.

TRIGger:{A|B}:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>
This command sets or queries the A or B lower trigger level threshold for the
channel, specified by x.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1841

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:LOWerthreshold:CH<x> <NR3>

TRIGger:{A|B}:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>

Arguments <NR3> specifies the threshold voltage in user units.

Examples TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH2 1.3 sets the A trigger threshold voltage

for Channel 2 to 1.3 V.
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH3? might return
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH3 1.2000E+00, indicating that the A trigger
threshold voltage for Channel 3 is 1.2 V.

TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit
This command specifies the upper limit to use, in seconds, when triggering on
detection of a pulse whose duration is inside or outside a range of two values.
(Use TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit to specify the lower value of
the range.)

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit <NR3>

TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:WHEn

TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit

Arguments <NR3> is a floating point number that represents the higher value of the range.

Examples TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit 110.0E-9 sets the high limit to

110.0 ns.
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit? might return
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:HIGHLIMIT 178.88000E-9 indicates
the high limit is set to 178.88 ns.

2-1842 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:LOGICQUALification
This command specifies whether or not to use logic qualification for a pulse
width trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:LOGICQUALification {ON|OFF}

TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:LOGICQUALification?

Arguments ON specifies that the pulse width trigger type uses logic qualification.

OFF specifies that the pulse width trigger type does not use logic qualification.

Examples TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOGICQUALification ON turns on logic

qualification.
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOGICQUALification? might return
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:LOGICQUALIFICATION OFF indicating logic
qualification is off.

TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit
This command specifies the lower limit to use, in seconds, when triggering on
detection of a pulse whose duration is inside or outside a range of two values. (Use
TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit to specify the upper limit of the range.)
This command also specifies the single limit to use, in seconds, when triggering
on detection of a pulse whose duration is less than, greater than, equal to, or not
equal to this time limit.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit <NR3>

TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:WHEn

TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit

Arguments <NR3> is a floating point number that represents the lower value of the range.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1843

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit 100.0E-9 sets the low limit to 100.0 ns.

TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit? might return

TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:LOWLIMIT 77.7600E-9 indicating the
low limit is set to 77.76 ns.

TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:POLarity
This command specifies the polarity for a pulse width trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:POLarity {NEGative|POSitive}

TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:POLarity?

Arguments NEGative specifies a negative pulse.

POSitive specifies a positive pulse.

Examples TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity NEGATIVE sets the pulse polarity to

negative.
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity? might return
TRIGGER:A:WIDTH:POLARITY POSITIVE indicating a positive pulse.

TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:SOUrce
This command specifies the source waveform for a pulse width trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:SOUrce {CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>}

TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:SOUrce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog input channel as the pulse-width trigger source.

CH<x>_D<x> specifies an digital input channel as the pulse-width trigger source.

Examples TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:SOURCE CH1 sets channel 1 as the pulse width

source.

2-1844 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:SOURCE? might return

:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:SOURCE CH1 indicating that channel 1 is the
pulse width trigger source.

TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:WHEn
This command specifies to trigger when a pulse is detected with a width (duration)
that is less than, greater than, equal to, or unequal to a specified value (set using
TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit), OR whose width falls outside of or
within a specified range of two values (set using TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:
LOWLimit and TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit).

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:WHEn
{LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual|WIThin|OUTside}
TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:WHEn?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit

TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit
TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:SOUrce

Arguments LESSthan causes a trigger when a pulse is detected with a width less than the
time set by the TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit command.
MOREthan causes a trigger when a pulse is detected with a width greater than the
time set by the TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit command.
EQual causes a trigger when a pulse is detected with a width equal to the time
period specified in TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit within a ±5%
tolerance.
UNEQual causes a trigger when a pulse is detected with a width
greater than or less than (but not equal) the time period specified in
TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit within a ±5% tolerance.
WIThin causes a trigger when a pulse is detected that is within a range set by
two values.
OUTside causes a trigger when a pulse is detected that is outside of a range set
by two values.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1845

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples :TRIGger:B:PULSEWidth:WHEn LESSthan causes the instrument to

trigger when a pulse is detected that is shorter than the time specified by
TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit.
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn ? might return
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:WHEN GREATER THAN 2.0000E-9, indicating that
a trigger is generated when a pulse is detected greater than 2 ns.
TRIGger:B:PULSEWidth:WHEn? might return
TRIGger:B:PULSEWidth:WHEn MOREthan indicating that a trigger is
generated when a pulse is detected that is greater than the time specified by
TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit.

TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:LOGICQUALification
This command specifies whether or not to use logic qualification for a runt trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:LOGICQUALification {ON|OFF}

TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:LOGICQUALification?

Arguments ON specifies that the runt trigger type uses logic qualification.

OFF specifies that the runt trigger type does not use logic qualification.

Examples TRIGger:A:RUNT:LOGICQUALification ON turns on logic qualification.

TRIGger:A:RUNT:LOGICQUALification? might return

:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:LOGICQUALIFICATION OFF indicating logic
qualification is off.

TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:POLarity
This command specifies the polarity for the runt trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:POLarity {EITher|NEGative|POSitive}

TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:POLarity?

2-1846 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments POSitive indicates that the rising edge crosses the low threshold and the falling
edge recrosses the low threshold without either edge ever crossing the high
threshold.
NEGative indicates that the falling edge crosses the high threshold and the
rising edge recrosses the high threshold without either edge ever crossing the
low threshold.
EITher triggers on a runt of either polarity.

Examples TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity NEGATIVE specifies that the polarity of the A

pulse runt trigger is negative.
TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity? might return :TRIGGER:A:RUNT:POLARITY
POSITIVE indicating that the polarity of the A pulse runt trigger is positive.

TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:SOUrce
This command specifies the source waveform for the runt trigger.

NOTE. Digital channels are not supported as runt trigger sources.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:SOUrce {CH<x>}

TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:SOUrce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies the analog channel number to use as the source
waveform for the runt trigger. To specify the threshold levels when using
CH<x> as the source, use TRIGger:{A|B}:LOWerthreshold:CH<x> and
TRIGger:{A|B}:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>.

Examples TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce CH4 sets channel 4 as the trigger source.

TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce? might return :TRIGGER:A:RUNT:SOURCE CH2

indicating that channel 2 is the trigger source.

TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:WHEn
This command specifies the type of pulse width the trigger checks for when
it detects a runt.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1847

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:WHEn
{LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual|OCCURS}
TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:WHEn?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:WIDth

Arguments OCCURS sets the instrument to trigger if a runt signal of any detectable width
occurs.
LESSthan sets the instrument to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected with width
less than the time set by the TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:WIDth command.
MOREthan sets the instrument to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected with width
greater than the time set by the TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:WIDth command.
EQual sets the instrument to trigger if a runt pulse is detected with width equal
to the time period specified in TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:WIDth within a ±5%
tolerance.
UNEQual sets the instrument to trigger if a runt pulse is detected with width
greater than or less than (but not equal to) the time period specified in
TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:WIDth within a ±5% tolerance.

Examples TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn MORETHAN sets the runt trigger to occur when the
instrument detects a runt in a pulse wider than the specified width.
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn? might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN
OCCURS indicating that a runt trigger will occur if the instrument detects a runt of
any detectable width.

TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:WIDth
This command specifies the width, in seconds, for a runt trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:WIDth <NR3>

TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:WIDth?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:WHEn

2-1848 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR3> is a floating point number that specifies the minimum width, in seconds.

Examples TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth 15E-6 sets the minimum width of the pulse runt
trigger to 15 µs.
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth? might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WIDTH
2.0000E-09 indicating that the minimum width of a pulse runt trigger is 2 ns.

TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
This command specifies the clock edge polarity for setup and hold triggering.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE {FALL|RISe}

TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE?

Arguments FALL specifies polarity as the clock falling edge.

RISe specifies polarity as the clock rising edge.

Examples TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE RISE specifies the polarity as the clock

rising edge.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE RISE indicating that polarity is specified
as the clock rising edge.

TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
This command specifies the clock source for the setup and hold triggering. You
cannot specify the same source for both clock and data.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce {CH<x>|CH<x>_D<y>}

TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1849

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments CH<x> specifies the analog channel to use as the clock source waveform.

CH<x>_D<y> specifies the digital channel to use as the clock source waveform.

Examples TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce CH1 specifies channel 1 as the clock

source for a setup and hold trigger operation.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce? might return
:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE CH4 indicating that channel
4 is the clock source for a setup and hold trigger operation.

TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHold:HOLDTime
This command specifies the hold time for setup and hold violation triggering.
This command is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu
and then setting the desired Hold Time.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHold:HOLDTime <NR3>

TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHold:HOLDTime?

Arguments <NR3> is a floating point number that specifies the hold time setting, in seconds.
Positive values for hold time occur after the clock edge. Negative values occur
before the clock edge.

Examples TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime 3.0E-3 sets the hold time for the setup and
hold trigger to 3 ms.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime? might return
:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 2.0000E-09 indicating that the current
hold time for the setup and hold trigger is 2 ns.

TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHold:SETTime
This command specifies the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering.
This command is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu
and then setting the desired Setup Time.

Group Trigger

2-1850 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHold:SETTime <NR3>

TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHold:SETTime?

Arguments <NR3> is a floating point number that specifies the setup time for setup and hold
violation triggering.

Examples TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime 3.0E-6 specifies that the current setup time

for setup and hold trigger is 3 µs.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime? might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:SETTIME 2.0000E-09 indicating that the
current setup time for setup and hold trigger is 2 ns.

TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHOLDLogicval:{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>}
This command sets or queries whether the specified channel is included
(INCLude) or not included (DONTInclude) in the Setup & Hold trigger input
configuration. The channel number is specified by x.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHOLDLogicval:{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>}
{INCLude|DONTInclude}
TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHOLDLogicval:{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>}?

Arguments INCLude specifies including the specified channel in the Setup & Hold trigger
input configuration.
DONTInclude specifies not including the specified channel in the Setup & Hold
trigger input configuration.

Examples TRIGger:A:SETHOLDLogicval:CH1 INCLUDE specifies including the

specified channel in the Setup & Hold trigger input configuration.
TRIGger:A:SETHOLDLogicval:CH1? might include
:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLDLOGICVAL:CH1 DONTINCLUDE indicating not
to include the channel in the configuration.
TRIGger:A:SETHOLDLogicval:CH1_D0 include specifies including the
specified channel in the setup and hold trigger input configuration.
TRIGger:A:SETHOLDLogicval:CH1_D0? might return
:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLDLOGICVAL:CH1_D0 DONTINCLUDE indicating
the channel will not be included in the configuration.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1851

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:LOGICQUALification
This command specifies whether or not to use logic qualification for a timeout
trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:LOGICQUALification {ON|OFF}

TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:LOGICQUALification?

Arguments ON specifies that the timeout trigger type uses logic qualification.

OFF specifies that the timeout trigger type does not use logic qualification.

Examples TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:LOGICQUALification ON specifies using logic

qualification.
TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:LOGICQUALification? might include
:TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:LOGICQUALIFICATION OFF indicating that logic
qualification is off.

TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:POLarity
When triggering using the TIMEOut trigger type, this commands specifies the
polarity to be used.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:POLarity {STAYSHigh|STAYSLow|EITher}

TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:POLarity?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:SOUrce

TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:TIMe

Arguments STAYSHigh triggers when the signal stays high during the timeout time specified
by the command TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:TIMe.
STAYSLow triggers when the signal stays low during the timeout time specified
by the command TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:TIMe.
EITher triggers when the signal is either high or low during the timeout time
specified by the command TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:TIMe.

2-1852 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity STAYSHigh specifies to trigger when the

signal stays high during the timeout time when triggering using the TIMEOut
trigger type.
TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity? might return EITHER, indicating that the
signal stays either high or low during the timeout time.

TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:SOUrce
When triggering using the TIMEOut trigger type, this command specifies the
source. The available sources are live channels and digital channels. The default
is channel 1. The timeout trigger type is selected using TRIGger:{A|B}:TYPe
TIMEOut.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:SOUrce {CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>}

TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:SOUrce?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce

TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:TIMe
TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:POLarity

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the timeout trigger source.

CH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel as the timeout trigger source.

Examples TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce CH4 specifies to use channel 4 as the source

for the timeout trigger.
TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce? might return CH1, indicating that channel 1 has
been set as the source for the timeout trigger.

TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:TIMe
When triggering using the TIMEOut trigger type, this command specifies the
timeout time, in seconds. This command is equivalent to selecting Timeout from
the Trig menu and setting a value for Time Limit. The timeout trigger type is
selected using TRIGger:{A|B}:TYPe TIMEOut

Group Trigger

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1853

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:TIMe <NR3>

TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:TIMe?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:POLarity

TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:SOUrce

Arguments <NR3> is a floating point number that specifies the timeout time, in seconds.

Examples :TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe 4.0E-9 specifies the timeout time of 4.0 nsec.

:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe? might return 8.0000E-9.

TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition:DELTatime
This command specifies the delta time (that is Time Limit) used in calculating the
transition value for the transition (that is Rise or Fall Time) trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition:DELTatime <NR3>

TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition:DELTatime?

Arguments <NR3> is a floating point number that specifies the delta time, in seconds.

Examples TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:DELTATIME 15E-6 sets the delta time of the

transition trigger to 15 µs.
TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:DELTATIME? might return
:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:DELTATIME 2.0000E-09 indicating that the delta
time of the transition trigger is set to 2 ns.

TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition:LOGICQUALification
This command specifies whether or not to use logic qualification for a transition
trigger.

Group Trigger

2-1854 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition:LOGICQUALification {ON|OFF}

TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition:LOGICQUALification?

Arguments ON specifies that the transition trigger type uses logic qualification.

OFF specifies that the transition trigger type does not use logic qualification.

Examples TRIGger:A:TRANsition:LOGICQUALification ON specifies using logic

qualification.
TRIGger:A:TRANsition:LOGICQUALification? might return
:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:LOGICQUALIFICATION OFF indicating logic
qualification is off.

TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition:POLarity
This command specifies the polarity for the transition trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition:POLarity {EITher|NEGative|POSitive}

TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition:POLarity?

Arguments POSitive indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the lower (most
negative) to higher (most positive) level for transition triggering to occur.
NEGative indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the upper (most positive)
to lower (most negative) level for transition triggering to occur.
EITher indicates either positive or negative polarity.

Examples TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:POLARITY NEGATIVE sets the transition polarity to

negative.
TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:POLARITY? might return
:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:POLARITY EITHER indicating that the polarity
can be either positive or negative.

TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition:SOUrce
This command specifies the source waveform for a transition trigger.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1855

Commands listed in alphabetical order

NOTE. Digital channels are not supported as transition trigger sources.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition:SOUrce {CH<x>}

TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition:SOUrce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies one of the analog channels to be used as the source for a
transition trigger.

Examples TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:SOURCE CH4 sets channel 4 as the source for the

transition trigger.
TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:SOURCE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:SOURCE CH2 indicating that channel 2 is the
source for the transition trigger.

TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition:WHEn
This command specifies whether to check for a transitioning signal that is faster or
slower than the specified delta time.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition:WHEn {SLOWer|FASTer|EQual|UNEQual}

TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition:WHEn?

Arguments FASTer sets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is faster than the
time set by TRIGger:A:TRANsition:DELTatime.
SLOWer sets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is slower than the
time set by.TRIGger:A:TRANsition:DELTatime.
EQual sets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is equal to the time
set by TRIGger:A:TRANsition:DELTatime.
UNEQual sets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is not equal to
the time set by TRIGger:A:TRANsition:DELTatime.

2-1856 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:WHEN SLOWER sets the trigger to occur

when the signal transition time is slower than the time set by the
TRIGger:A:TRANsition:DELTatime command.

TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:WHEN? might return

:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:WHEN FASTER

TRIGger:{A|B}:TYPe
This command sets or queries the type of A or B trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:TYPe {EDGE|WIDth|TIMEOut|RUNt|WINdow|LOGIc|

SETHold|TRANsition|BUS}
TRIGger:{A|B}:TYPe?

Arguments EDGE is a normal trigger. A trigger event occurs when a signal passes through
a specified voltage level in a specified direction and is controlled by the
TRIGger:A:EDGE commands.
WIDth specifies that the trigger occurs when a pulse with a specified with is found.

TIMEOut specifies that a trigger occurs when a pulse with the specified timeout
is found.
RUNt specifies that a trigger occurs when a pulse with the specified parameters
is found.
WINdow specifies that a trigger occurs when a signal with the specified window
parameters is found.
LOGIc specifies that a trigger occurs when specified conditions are met and is
controlled by the TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc commands.
SETHold specifies that a trigger occurs when a signal is found that meets the
setup and hold parameters.
Transition specifies that a trigger occurs when a specified pulse is found that
meets the transition trigger parameters.
BUS specifies that a trigger occurs when a signal is found that meets the specified
bus setup parameters.

Examples TRIGGER:A:TYPE EDGE sets the A trigger type to EDGE.

TRIGGER:A:TYPE? might return :TRIGGER:A:TYPE RUNT indicating that the A

trigger type is a runt trigger.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1857

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>
This command sets or queries the specified channel upper trigger level. The
CH<x> range is 1 to 8 and depends on the number of analog channels on your
instrument.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:UPPerthreshold:CH<x> <NR3>

TRIGger:{A|B}:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>?

Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>

Arguments <NR3> specifies the trigger level in user units (usually volts).

Examples TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH1 1.3 This command sets the A trigger level

for Channel 1 to 1.3 V level.
TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH2? might return
TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH2 1.3000E+00, indicating that the A trigger
level for Channel 2 is set to 1.3 V.

TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:FIELD
This command specifies the trigger condition for a video trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:FIELD {ALLLines| NUMERic| ODD| EVEN|

ALLFields}
TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:FIELD?

Arguments ALLLines specifies to trigger on all lines.

NUMERic specifies to trigger on a particular line, which can be set via the
TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:LINE command.
ODD specifies to trigger on odd lines.

EVEN specifies to trigger on even lines.

ALLFields specifies to trigger on any video field.

2-1858 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD ALLLines sets the video trigger to trigger on all

lines.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD? might return TRIGGER:A:VIDeo:FIELD ODD,
indicating that the video trigger will trigger on odd lines.

TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:LINE
This command specifies the line number value for a video line number trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:LINE <NR1>

TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:LINE?

Arguments <NR1> is the line number to trigger on, which can range from 1 to 625.

Examples TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE 262 sets the video trigger to trigger on line 262.

TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE? might return TRIGGER:A:VIDeo:LINE 525,

indicating that the video trigger will trigger on line 525.

TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:POLarity
This command specifies the polarity for a video trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:POLarity {POSitive|NEGative}

TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:POLarity?

Arguments POSitive specifies a positive polarity for the video trigger.

NEGative specifies a negative polarity for the video trigger.

Examples TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity POSitive specifies to use a positive polarity

for the video trigger.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity? might return TRIGGER:A:VIDeo:POLarity
NEGative, indicating that the video trigger has a negative polarity.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1859

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:SOUrce
This command specifies the source waveform for a video trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:SOUrce {CH<x>}

TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:SOUrce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies the analog channel to use as the video trigger source waveform.

Examples TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce CH2 sets channel 2 as the source waveform for

the video trigger.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce? might return TRIGGER:A:VIDeo:SOUrce CH1,
indicating that CH1 is the source waveform for the video trigger.

TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:STANdard
This command specifies the standard/format for a video trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:STANdard {NTSc|PAL|SECAM}

TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:STANdard?

Arguments NTSc specifies 525i/NTSC as the video standard.

PAL specifies 625i/PAL as the video standard.

SECAM specifies SECAM as the video standard.

Examples TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard PAL sets 625i/PAL as the video standard to

use for the video trigger.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard? might return TRIGGER:A:VIDeo:STANdard
NTSc, indicating that 525i/NTSC is the video standard being used for the video
trigger.

2-1860 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:CROSSIng
This command sets or queries the window trigger threshold crossing of the
selected trigger source. The threshold crossing selection is only effective when
:TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WHEn is INSIDEGreater or OUTSIDEGreater.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:CROSSIng {UPPer|LOWer|EITher|NONe}

TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:CROSSIng?

Arguments UPPer if :TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WHEn is INSIDEGreater, the instrument

triggers when the signal remains between the upper and lower thresholds for longer
than the time limit (:TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WIDTH) and then exits through
the upper threshold. If :TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WHEn is OUTSIDEGreater,
the instrument triggers when the signal remains above the upper threshold for
longer than the time limit (:TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WIDTH) and then crosses
downward through the upper threshold.
LOWer if :TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WHEn is INSIDEGreater, the instrument
triggers when the signal remains between the upper and lower thresholds for longer
than the time limit (:TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WIDTH) and then exits through
the lower threshold. If :TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WHEn is OUTSIDEGreater,
the instrument triggers when the signal remains below the lower threshold for
longer than the time limit (:TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WIDTH) and then crosses
upwards through the lower threshold.
EITher if :TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WHEn is INSIDEGreater, the instrument
triggers when the signal remains between the upper and lower thresholds for
longer than the time limit (:TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WIDTH) and then exits
through either the upper or lower threshold. If :TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WHEn
is OUTSIDEGreater, the instrument triggers when the signal remains either
above the upper threshold or below the lower threshold for longer than the time
limit (:TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WIDTH) and then crosses a threshold.
NONe if :TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WHEn is INSIDEGreater, the instrument
triggers when the signal remains between the upper and lower thresholds for
longer than the time limit (:TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WIDTH) without crossing
through either the upper or lower threshold. If :TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WHEn
is OUTSIDEGreater, the instrument triggers when the signal remains
outside the upper and lower thresholds for longer than the time limit
(:TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WIDTH) without crossing through either the upper
or lower threshold.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1861

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples TRIGger:A:WINdow:CROSSIng LOWER sets crossing to lower.

TRIGger:A:WINdow:CROSSIng? might return

TRIGGER:A:WINDOW:CROSSING UPPER indicating the crossing is set to upper.

TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:LOGICQUALification
This command specifies whether or not to use logic qualification for a window
trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:LOGICQUALification {ON|OFF}

TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:LOGICQUALification?

Arguments ON specifies that the window trigger type uses logic qualification.

OFF specifies that the window trigger type does not use logic qualification.

Examples TRIGger:A:WINdow:LOGICQUALification ON turns on logic qualification.

TRIGger:A:WINdow:LOGICQUALification? might return

TRIGGER:A:WINDOW:LOGICQUALIFICATION OFF indicating logic qualification
is off.

TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the source for a window trigger.

NOTE. Digital channels are not supported as window trigger sources.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:SOUrce {CH<x>}

TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:SOUrce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the trigger source.

2-1862 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples TRIGger:A:WINdow:SOUrce CH2 sets the source to channel 2.

TRIGger:A:WINdow:SOUrce? might return :TRIGGER:A:WINDOW:SOURCE

CH3 indicating the source is channel 3.

TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WHEn
This command sets or queries the window trigger event. This command is
equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the Trig menu and selecting from the
Window Trigger When box.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WHEn {ENTERSWindow|EXITSWindow|

INSIDEGreater|OUTSIDEGreater}
TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WHEn?

Arguments OUTSIDEGreater specifies a trigger event when the signal leaves the window
defined by the threshold levels for the time specified by Width.
INSIDEGreater specifies a trigger event when the signal enters the window
defined by the threshold levels for the time specified by Width.
ENTERSWindow specifies a trigger event when the signal enters the window
defined by the threshold levels.
EXITSWindow specifies a trigger event when the signal leaves the window defined
by the threshold levels.

Examples TRIGger:A:WINdow:WHEn EXITSWINDOW specifies a trigger event when the

signal leaves the window defined by the threshold levels.
TRIGger:A:WINdow:WHEn? might return :TRIGGER:A:WINDOW:WHEN
ENTERSWINDOW indicating a trigger when the signal enters the window.

TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WIDth
This command sets or queries the minimum width for a window violation. This
command is equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the Trig menu, selecting
Inside > Limit or Outside > Limit in the Trigger When box, and setting the Time
Limit.

Group Trigger

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1863

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WIDth <NR3>

TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WIDth?

Arguments <NR3> is the minimum width for a window violation.

Examples TRIGger:A:WINdow:WIDTH 4.5e-9 sets the minimum width for a window

violation to 4.5 ns.
TRIGger:A:WINdow:WIDTH? might return :TRIGGER:A:WINDOW:WIDTH
4.0E-9 indicating that 4.0 ns is the minimum width for a window violation.

TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY
This command sets or queries the type of holdoff for the A trigger. Holdoff types
are expressed as either user-specified time (TIMe) or by an internally calculated
random time value (RANDom). This command is equivalent to selecting Mode &
Holdoff from the Trig menu and then setting the Holdoff type.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY {TIMe|RANDom}

TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe

Arguments TIMe enables you to set the holdoff time via the TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe
command.
RANDom specifies a random time value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:BY TIME sets the holdoff to the "by time" setting. This
enables you to set the holdoff time.
TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:BY? might return :TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:BY TIME,
indicating that you will set the holdoff time.

TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe
This command sets or queries the A trigger holdoff time. This command is
equivalent to selecting Mode & Holdoff from the Trig menu, selecting Time, and
then setting the desired Holdoff Time.

2-1864 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe <NR3>

TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY

Arguments <NR3> specifies the holdoff time in seconds. The range is from 0 seconds through
10 seconds.

Examples TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:TIME 10 sets the A trigger holdoff time to 10 s.

TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:TIME? might return :TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFFTIME

1.2000E-06, indicating that the A trigger holdoff time is set to 1.2 µs.

TRIGger:A:LOGICQUALification
This command sets or queries the type of logic qualification to perform.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:LOGICQUALification {AND|OR|NAND|NOR}

TRIGger:A:LOGICQUALification?

Arguments AND specifies to trigger if all conditions are true.

NANd specifies to trigger if any of the conditions are false.

NOR specifies to trigger if all conditions are false.

OR specifies to trigger if any of the conditions are true.

Examples TRIGGER:A:LOGICQUALIFICATION OR specifies to trigger if any of the

conditions are true.
TRIGGER:A:LOGICQUALIFICATION? might return
TRIGGER:A:LOGICQUALIFICATION AND indicating the instrument will trigger
if all conditions are true.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1865

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:A:MODe
This command sets or queries the A trigger mode. This command is equivalent to
pushing the Mode button on the front panel.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:MODe {AUTO|NORMal}

TRIGger:A:MODe?

Arguments AUTO generates a trigger if one is not detected within a specified time period.

NORMal waits for a valid trigger event.

Examples TRIGGER:A:MODE NORMAL sets the trigger mode to normal.

TRIGGER:A:MODE? might return TRIGGER:A:MODE AUTO, indicating that the

trigger mode is auto.

TRIGger:AUXLevel
For those instruments that have an Auxiliary Input (such as an MSO58LP), this
command sets or queries the Auxiliary Input voltage level to use for an edge
trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:AUXLevel {<NR3>|ECL|TTL}

TRIGger:AUXLevel?

Arguments <NR3> is trigger level in Volts.

ECL sets trigger level to -1.3 Volts.

TTL sets trigger level to 1.4 Volts.

Returns <NR3> is trigger level in Volts.

Examples TRIGger:AUXLevel 1.2 sets trigger level for the Auxiliary Input to 1.2 Volts.

2-1866 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:B:BY
This command selects or returns whether the B trigger occurs after a specified
number of events or a specified period of time after the A trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:B:BY {EVENTS|TIMe}

TRIGger:B:BY?

Related Commands TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt

TRIGger:B:TIMe
TRIGger:B:STATE

Arguments EVENTS sets the B trigger to take place following a set number of trigger
events after the A trigger occurs. The number of events is specified by
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt.

TIMe sets the B trigger to occur a set time after the A trigger event. The time
period is specified by TRIGger:B:TIMe.

Examples TRIGGER:B:BY TIME sets the B trigger to occur at a set time after the A trigger
event.
TRIGGER:B:BY? might return TRIGGER:B:BY EVENTS, indicating that the B
trigger takes place following a set number of trigger events after the A trigger
occurs.

TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt
This command sets or queries the number of events that must occur before the
B trigger. The B trigger event count applies only if TRIGger:B:BY is set to
EVENTS.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt <NR1>

TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt?

Related Commands TRIGger:B:STATE

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1867

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR1> is the number of B trigger events, which can range from 1 to 65,471.

Examples TRIGGER:B:EVENTS:COUNT 4 sets the number of B trigger events to four.

TRIGGER:B:EVENTS:COUNT? might return TRIGGER:B:EVENTS:COUNT 2,

indicating that two events must occur after the A trigger before the B trigger
can occur.

TRIGger:B:RESET (No Query Form)

This command sets the B reset trigger level to 50%.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:B:RESET SETLevel

Arguments SETLevel sets the B reset trigger level to 50%.

Examples TRIGger:B:RESET SETLevel sets the B reset trigger level to 50%.

TRIGger:B:RESET:EDGE:COUPling
Sets or queries the trigger coupling for a sequential edge trigger reset when the
Source is set to an analog channel.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:B:RESET:EDGE:COUPling {DC|HFRej|LFRej|NOISErej}

TRIGger:B:RESET:EDGE:COUPling?

Related Commands
Arguments DC selects DC trigger coupling.

HFRej selects high frequency low sensitivity.

LFRej selects low frequency low sensitivity.

NOISErej selects DC low sensitivity.

2-1868 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples TRIGGER:B:RESET:EDGE:COUPLING HFREJ sets high frequency low

sensitivity.
TRIGGER:B:RESET:EDGE:COUPLING? might return
TRIGGER:B:RESET:EDGE:COUPLING DC indicating DC trigger coupling
is selected.

TRIGger:B:RESET:EDGE:LEVel
This command sets the voltage level to use for an Edge Reset trigger when
triggering on an analog channel waveform.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:B:RESET:EDGE:LEVel <NR3>

Arguments <NR3> is the voltage level to use for an Edge Reset trigger when triggering on
an analog channel waveform.

Examples TRIGGER:B:RESET:EDGE:LEVEL 50.0e-3 sets the level to 50.0 mV.

TRIGGER:B:RESET:EDGE:LEVEL? might return

TRIGGER:B:RESET:EDGE:LEVEL 0.0E+0 indicating the level is set to 0.0 V.

TRIGger:B:RESET:EDGE:SLOpe
This command sets or queries the trigger slope for a sequential edge trigger reset.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:B:RESET:EDGE:SLOpe {RISe|FALL|EITher}

TRIGger:B:RESET:EDGE:SLOpe?

Arguments RISe specifies to reset the trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal.

FALL specifies to reset the trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal.

EITHER specified to reset the trigger on either the rising or falling edge of a signal.

Examples TRIGGER:B:RESET:EDGE:SLOPE FALL specifies to reset the trigger on the

falling or negative edge of a signal.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1869

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGGER:B:RESET:EDGE:SLOPE? might return

TRIGGER:B:RESET:EDGE:SLOPE RISE indicating the instrument is set to reset
the trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal.

TRIGger:B:RESET:EDGE:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the trigger source for the A→B sequential edge
trigger reset feature.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:B:RESET:EDGE:SOUrce {CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>}

TRIGger:B:RESET:EDGE:SOUrce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the trigger source.

CH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel as the trigger source.

Examples TRIGGER:B:RESET:EDGE:SOURCE CH4 sets Channel 4 as the input source for

the trigger reset.
TRIGGER:B:RESET:EDGE:SOURCE? might return
TRIGGER:B:RESET:EDGE:SOURCE CH1, indicating that the current input
source for the trigger reset is Channel 1.

TRIGger:B:RESET:TIMEOut:TIMe
This command sets or queries the reset timer for a sequential timeout trigger reset.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:B:RESET:TIMEOut:TIMe <NR3>

TRIGger:B:RESET:TIMEOut:TIMe?

Arguments <NR3> is the reset timer for a sequential timeout trigger reset.

Examples TRIGGER:B:RESET:TIMEOUT:TIME 100e-9 sets the time to 100 ns.

TRIGGER:B:RESET:TIMEOUT:TIME? might return

TRIGGER:B:RESET:TIMEOUT:TIME 20.0E-9 indicating the timeout time
is set to 20 ns.

2-1870 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:B:RESET:TYPe
This command sets or queries the type of A→B sequential trigger reset. If the B
trigger reset is active, the reset criteria are part of the B triggering sequence. If
the reset conditions defined by the reset type are met, the instrument must start
over searching for a new occurrence of the A event.
You must identify a trigger Source and Threshold for each reset type, except
for the Timeout trigger type.

NOTE. If a reset condition occurs, the reset criteria itself is reset and must start
over.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:B:RESET:TYPe {NONe|TIMEOut|EDGE}

TRIGger:B:RESET:TYPe?

Arguments NONe defeats the trigger reset feature.

TIMEOut initiates a reset if the timeout conditions specified by

TRIGger:B:RESET:TIMEOut are met.
EDGE initiates a reset if the edge trigger conditions are met.

Examples TRIGGER:B:RESET:TYPE NONE deactivates the sequential trigger reset.

TRIGGER:B:RESET:TYPE? This query might return TRIGGER:B:RESET:TYPe

TIMEOUT, indicating that the sequential trigger reset is active following a timeout.

TRIGger:B:STATE
This command sets or queries the state of B trigger activity. If the B trigger state
is on, the B trigger is part of the triggering sequence. If the B trigger state is off,
then only the A trigger causes the trigger event.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:B:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

TRIGger:B:STATE?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:MODe

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1871

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments ON indicates that the B trigger is active and causes trigger events with the A trigger.

OFF indicates that only the A trigger causes trigger events.

<NR1> is an integer number. 0 turns off the B trigger; any other value activates
the B trigger.

Examples TRIGGER:B:STATE ON sets the B trigger to active, making it capable of causing

trigger events.
TRIGGER:B:STATE? might return TRIGGER:B:STATE 0, indicating that the B
trigger is inactive and that only the A trigger causes trigger events.

TRIGger:B:TIMe
This command sets or queries B trigger delay time, in seconds. The B Trigger
time applies only if TRIGger:B:BY is set to TIMe.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:B:TIMe <NR3>

TRIGger:B:TIMe?

Related Commands TRIGger:B:BY

TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt
TRIGger:B:STATE

Arguments <NR3> is the B trigger delay time in seconds.

Examples TRIGGER:B:TIME 4E-6 sets the B trigger delay time to 4 µs.

TRIGGER:B:TIME? might return TRIGGER:B:TIME 16.0000E-9, indicating

that the B trigger time is set to 16 ns.

TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:STATe
This command enables or disables user-defined trigger hysteresis.

Group Trigger

2-1872 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:STATe {ON|OFF|1|0}

TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:STATe?

Related Commands TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:VALue

Arguments ON enables user-defined trigger hysteresis.

OFF disables user-defined trigger hysteresis.

1 enables user-defined trigger hysteresis.

0 disables user-defined trigger hysteresis.

Examples TRIGGER:HYSTERESIS:USER:STATE ON enables user-defined trigger hysteresis.

TRIGGER:HYSTERESIS:USER:STATE? might return

TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:STATe 0, indicating that the user-defined trigger
hysteresis is disabled.

TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:VALue
This command sets or returns the height of the user-defined trigger hysteresis
zone in volts.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:VALue <NR1>

TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:STATe

Arguments <NR1> sets the height of the hysteresis zone in volts.

Examples TRIGGER:HYSTERESIS:USER:VALUE 27.0e-3 sets the height of the hysteresis

zone to 27 mV.
TRIGGER:HYSTERESIS:USER:VALUE? might return
TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:VALue 27.0e-3, indicating that the height of
the hysteresis zone is 27 mV.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1873

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:STATE? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the current state of the triggering system.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:STATE?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:MODe

Returns ARMED indicates that the instrument is acquiring pretrigger information.

AUTO indicates that the instrument is in the automatic mode and acquires data
even in the absence of a trigger.
READY indicates that all pretrigger information is acquired and that the instrument
is ready to accept a trigger.
SAVE indicates that the instrument is in save mode and is not acquiring data.

TRIGGER indicates that the instrument triggered and is acquiring the post trigger
information.

Examples TRIGGER:STATE? might return TRIGGER:STATE ARMED, indicating that the

pretrigger data is being acquired.

TRIGger:STATUs? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the current status of the triggering system.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:STATUs?

Returns ARM indicates that the instrument is acquiring pretrigger information.

AUTO indicates that the instrument is in the automatic mode and acquires data even
in the absence of a trigger.
REA indicates that all pretrigger information is acquired and that the instrument is
ready to accept a trigger.
SAV indicates that the instrument is in save mode and is not acquiring data.

2-1874 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIG indicates that the instrument triggered and is acquiring the post
trigger information.

Examples TRIGGER:STATUS? might return :TRIGGER:STATUS ARM, indicating that the

pretrigger data is being acquired.

*TST? (Query Only)

Tests (self-test) the interface and returns a 0.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax *TST?

Examples *TST? always returns 0.

TSTamptable:ADDNew (No Query Form)

This command adds a new History time stamp results table to the scope
application.

Group History

Syntax TSTamptable:ADDNew <Qstring>

Arguments <Qstring> specifies the History time stamp results table name.

Examples TSTAMPTABLE:ADDNEW "TABLE1" adds a new table view by the name

TABLE1.

TSTamptable:DELETE (No Query Form)

This command deletes the requested History time stamp results table.

Group History

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1875

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TSTamptable:DELETE <Qstring>

Arguments <Qstring> specifies the History time stamp results table name.

Examples TSTAMPTABLE:DELETE "TABLE1" deletes History time stamp results table

TABLE1 from the view.

TSTamptable:LIST? (Query Only)

This command queries the list of History time stamp results tables has been added.

Group History

Syntax TSTamptable:LIST?

Returns Returns a list of all currently defined History time stamp results tables.

Examples TSTAMPTABLE:LIST? might return :TSTamptable:LIST TABLE1, TABLE2,

indicating there are two History time stamp result tables.

UNDO (No Query Form)

Reverts the instrument settings to a state before the previous command or user
interface action.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax UNDO

Examples UNDO reverts the instrument settings to a state before the previous command or
user interface action.

UNLock (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) unlocks the front panel controls only. To unlock
the front panel controls and the touch screen use the LOCk NONe command. The
command TOUCHSCReen:STATE ON enables the touch screen only.

2-1876 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

NOTE. If the instrument is in the Remote With Lockout State (RWLS), the UNLock
command has no effect. For more information, see the ANSI-IEEE Std 488.1-1987
Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation, section 2.8.3 on
RL State Descriptions.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax UNLock ALL

Related Commands LOCk

Arguments ALL specifies that all front panel buttons and knobs are unlocked.

Examples UNLOCK ALL unlocks all front panel buttons and knobs.

USBDevice:CONFigure
This command may be used to configure the rear USB port to be off or enabled
as a USBTMC device. Users should be cautious using this command via the
USBTMC interface as a change to the configuration of this interface from a
USBTMC device will cause USBTMC communication to cease. It is intended to
be used via the Ethernet interface to control the USB device interface.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax USBDevice:CONFigure {DISabled|USBTmc}

USBDevice:CONFigure?

Arguments DISabled will disable the rear USB port.

USBTmc enables the rear USB port.

Examples USBDEVICE:CONFIGURE DISABLED will disable the rear USB port.

USBDEVICE:CONFIGURE? might return :USBDEVICE:CONFIGURE USBTMC

indicating the USB port is enabled.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1877

Commands listed in alphabetical order

VERBose
This command sets or queries the Verbose state that controls the length of
keywords on query responses. Keywords can be both headers and arguments.

NOTE. This command does not affect IEEE Std 488.2-1987 Common Commands
(those starting with an asterisk).

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax VERBose {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

Related Commands HEADer

*LRN?
SET?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables Verbose, any other value enables Verbose.

OFF sets the Verbose state to false, which returns minimum-length keywords
for applicable setting queries.
ON sets the Verbose state to true, which returns full-length keywords for applicable
setting queries.
A 0 returns minimum-length keywords for applicable setting queries; any other
value returns full-length keywords.

Examples VERBOSE ON sets the Verbose state to true and return the full length keyword for
the applicable setting queries.
VERBOSE? might return :VERBOSE OFF, indicating that the Verbose state is set to
false and return the minimum-length keywords for the applicable setting queries.
With :HEADer ON and :VERBose ON, the :ACQuire:MODe? query might
return: :ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
With :HEADer ON and :VERBose OFF, the :ACQuire:MODe? query might
return: :ACQ:MOD SAM
With :HEADer OFF and :VERBose ON, the :ACQuire:MODe? query might
return: SAMPLE
With :HEADer OFF and :VERBose OFF, the :ACQuire:MODe? query might
return: SAM

2-1878 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

VERTical:DESKew:FROM:CUSTOMPROPAgation
This command sets or queries a target (FROM) delay that you can specify when
the propagation delay of the target (FROM) probe used for deskew cannot be
detected automatically.

Group Vertical

Syntax VERTical:DESKew:FROM:CUSTOMPROPAgation <NR3>

VERTical:DESKew:FROM:CUSTOMPROPAgation?

Arguments <NR3> is a target (FROM) delay that you can specify when the propagation delay
of the target (FROM) probe used for deskew cannot be detected automatically.

Examples VERTICAL:DESKEW:FROM:CUSTOMPROPAGATION 0.25e-9 sets the custom

delay to 250 ps.
VERTICAL:DESKEW:FROM:CUSTOMPROPAGATION? might return
:VERTICAL:DESKEW:FROM:CUSTOMPROPAGATION 0.0E+0 indicating the
custom delay is 0.0 s.

VERTical:DESKew:FROM:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the source channel for performing
channel-to-channel deskew adjustment. Sources can be any of the analog
channels.

Group Vertical

Syntax VERTical:DESKew:FROM:SOUrce CH<x>

VERTical:DESKew:FROM:SOUrce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source.

Examples VERTICAL:DESKEW:FROM:SOURCE CH1 sets channel 1 as the from source.

VERTICAL:DESKEW:FROM:SOURCE? might return

:VERTICAL:DESKEW:FROM:SOURCE CH2 indicating channel 2 is the from
source.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1879

Commands listed in alphabetical order

VERTical:DESKew:STATIC (No Query Form)

This command executes static deskew using the deskew settings.

Group Vertical

Syntax VERTical:DESKew:STATIC EXECute

Arguments EXECute will execute static deskew using the deskew settings.

Examples VERTICAL:DESKEW:STATIC EXECUTE will execute static deskew using the

deskew settings.

VERTical:DESKew:TO:CUSTOMPROPAgation
This command sets or queries a target (TO) delay that can be specified by the user
when the propagation delay of the target (TO) probe used for deskew cannot be
detected automatically.

Group Vertical

Syntax VERTical:DESKew:TO:CUSTOMPROPAgation <NR3>

Arguments <NR3> is a target (TO) delay that can be specified by the user when the propagation
delay of the target (TO) probe used for deskew cannot be detected automatically.

Examples VERTICAL:DESKEW:TO:CUSTOMPROPAGATION 0.25e-9 sets the custom

propagation to 250 ps.
VERTICAL:DESKEW:TO:CUSTOMPROPAGATION? might return
:VERTICAL:DESKEW:TO:CUSTOMPROPAGATION 0.0E+0 indicating the custom
propagation is set to 0.0 ns.

VERTical:DESKew:TO:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the target channel for performing channel-to-channel
deskew adjustment. Target sources can be any of the live analog channels.

Group Vertical

2-1880 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax VERTical:DESKew:TO:SOUrce CH<x>

VERTical:DESKew:TO:SOUrce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source.

Examples VERTICAL:DESKEW:TO:SOURCE CH4 sets the deskew to source is channel 4.

VERTICAL:DESKEW:TO:SOURCE? might return

:VERTICAL:DESKEW:TO:SOURCE CH2 indicating the deskew to source is
channel 2.

VISual:AREA<x>:ASPEctratio
Sets or queries whether the aspect ratio of the specified Visual Trigger area is
locked.

Group Trigger

Syntax VISual:AREA<x>:ASPEctratio {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

VISual:AREA<x>:ASPEctratio?

Arguments Area<x> specifies the integer number of a Visual Trigger area.

ON locks the aspect ratio of the specified Visual Trigger area. The aspect ratio is
kept constant when the height or width of the area changes.
OFF unlocks the aspect ratio of the specified Visual Trigger area.

<NR1> is an integer number. 1 locks the aspect ratio of the specified Visual Trigger
area; any other value unlocks the aspect ratio of the specified Visual Trigger area

Examples VISual:AREA6:ASPEctratio ON locks the aspect ratio of area 6.

VISual:AREA2:ASPEctratio? might return VISual:AREA2:ASPEctratio

OFF,. indicating that the aspect ratio of area 2 is not locked.

VISual:AREA<x>:FLIP:HORizontal (No Query Form)

Flips the specified Visual Trigger area horizontally around its center point.

Group Trigger

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1881

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax VISual:AREA<x>:FLIP:HORizontal

Related Commands VISual:AREA<x>:FLIP:VERTical

Arguments Area<x> specifies the integer number of a Visual Trigger area.

Examples VISual:AREA1:FLIP:HORizontal horizontally flips area 1.

VISual:AREA<x>:FLIP:VERTical (No Query Form)

Flips the specified Visual Trigger area vertically around its center point.

Group Trigger

Syntax VISual:AREA<x>:FLIP:VERTical

Related Commands VISual:AREA<x>:FLIP:HORizontal

Arguments Area<x> specifies the integer number of a Visual Trigger area.

Examples VISual:AREA8:FLIP:VERTical vertically flips area 8.

VISual:AREA<x>:HEIGht
Sets or queries the height of the specified Visual Trigger area.

Group Trigger

Syntax VISual:AREA<x>:HEIGht <NR3>

VISual:AREA<x>:HEIGht?

Arguments Area<x> specifies the integer number of a Visual Trigger area.

<NR3> specifies the height of the Visual Trigger area in amplitude.

2-1882 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples VISual:AREA51:HEIGht 3.5 sets the height of area 51 to 3.5 (volts or Amps).

VISual:AREA4:HEIGht? might return VISual:AREA4:HEIGht 15, indicating

that the height of area 4 is 15.

VISual:AREA<x>:HITType
Sets or queries the area hit logic true condition for the specified Visual Trigger
area.

Group Trigger

Syntax VISual:AREA<x>:HITType {IN|OUT|DONTcare}

VISual:AREA<x>:HITType?

Arguments Area<x> specifies the integer number of a Visual Trigger area.

IN specifies that the waveform must intrude anywhere into the specified area to
be true.
OUT specifies that the waveform must not intrude anywhere into the specified
area to be true.
DONTcare sets the area to a don’t care state, causing the area to be ignored. This
is useful when you are developing a Visual Trigger condition and need to change
the hit logic type of an area while keeping the area.

Examples VISual:AREA2:HITType OUT sets the area 2 hit type to OUT.

VISual:AREA5:HITType? might return VISual:AREA5:HITType IN,

indicating that the waveform must intrude into area 5 to be true.

VISual:AREA<x>:RESET (No Query Form)

Sets the specified Visual Trigger area shape to a default-sized triangle.

Group Trigger

Syntax VISual:AREA<x>:RESET

Arguments Area<x> specifies the integer number of a Visual Trigger area.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1883

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples VISual:AREA2:RESET changes area 2 to a default triangle shape.

VISual:AREA<x>:ROTAtion
Sets or queries the rotation angle of the specified Visual Trigger area.

Group Trigger

Syntax VISual:AREA<x>:ROTAtion <NR3>

VISual:AREA<x>:ROTAtion?

Arguments Area<x> specifies the integer number of a Visual Trigger area.

<NR3> specifies the rotation angle of the Visual Trigger area, in positive degrees
from 0 to 360. Zero degrees is referenced from when the area was created.

Examples VISual:AREA2:ROTAtion 45 rotates Visual Trigger area 2 by 45 degrees.

VISual:AREA1:ROTAtion? might return VISual:AREA1:ROTAtion -60.

indicating that area 4 rotation position is minus 60 degrees.

VISual:AREA<x>:SHAPE
Sets or queries the current shape of the area.

Group Trigger

Syntax VISual:AREA<x>:SHAPE {TRIAngle|RECTangle|TRAPezoid|HEXAgon}

VISual:AREA<x>:SHAPE?

Arguments Area<x> specifies the integer number of a Visual Trigger area.

TRIAngle sets the specified area to a triangular shape (three vertices). If the area
does not exist, the instrument creates a new triangular area with the specified
area number.
RECTangle sets the specified area to a rectangular shape (four vertices, right
angles at each corner). If the area does not exist, the instrument creates a new
triangular area with the specified area number.
TRAPezoid sets the specified area to a trapezoidal shape (four vertices, two
parallel sides). If the area does not exist, the instrument creates a new triangular
area with the specified area number.

2-1884 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

HEXAgon sets the specified area to a hexagonal shape (six vertices). If the area
does not exist, the instrument creates a new hexagonal area with the specified
area number.

Returns CUSTom indicates that the shape is a custom-created shape, or the positions of one
or more vertices of a standard shape have been changed.

Examples VISual:AREA1:SHAPE Hexagon sets area 1 to be a hexagonal shape, or creates

a new area 1 hexagonal shape if the specified area does not exist.
VISual:AREA2:SHAPE? might return VISual:AREA2:SHAPE CUSTOM,
indicating that area 2 is a custom shape.

VISual:AREA<x>:SOUrce
Sets or queries the signal source for the specified Visual Trigger area. The source
can only be an analog channel.

Group Trigger

Syntax VISual:AREA<x>:SOUrce {CH<x>}

VISual:AREA<x>:SOUrce?

Arguments Area<x> specifies the integer number of a Visual Trigger area.

CH<x> sets the source channel number for the specified area. The channel number
is specified by <x>.

Examples VISual:AREA1:SOUrce CH3 sets the source channel number for area 1 to
Channel 3.
VISual:AREA6:SOUrce? might return VISual:AREA6:SOUrce CH8,
indicating that the source for area 6 is Channel 8.

VISual:AREA<x>:VERTICES
Sets or queries the X and Y vertex coordinate values for all vertices of the
specified Visual Trigger area. Vertex values must be set in pairs.

Group Trigger

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1885

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax VISual:AREA<x>:VERTICES “<NR3>, <NR3>, <NR3>, <NR3>, <NR3>,

<NR3> [,<NR3>, <NR3>, ...]”
VISual:AREA<x>:VERTICES?

Arguments Area<x> specifies the integer number of a Visual Trigger area.

<NR3>, <NR3> specifies the X, Y coordinate pair of each vertex in an area. The
first value is X (time) and the second value is Y (amplitude). There must be a
minimum of three vertex pairs to create an area. If the specified area exists, the
area is changed to the shape specified in the arguments. If the specified area does
not exist, a new area is created and assigned the specified vertices.

Examples VISual:AREA3:VERTICES
"400E-9,1,400E-9,0.5,600E-9,0.5,600E-9,1" sets or creates area 3 as a
rectangle that is 200 ns wide by 500 mV high.
VISual:AREA3:VERTICES? might return VISual:AREA3:VERTICES
"171.1E-9,-141.7E-3,321.1E-9,-141.7E-3,283.6E-9,1.708,
208.6E-9,1.708", indicating that area 3 is defined as a trapezoid that is 150 ns
wide by 1.85 V high.

VISual:AREA<x>:WIDTH
Sets or queries the width of the specified Visual Trigger area.

Group Trigger

Syntax VISual:AREA<x>:WIDTH <NR3>

VISual:AREA<x>:WIDTH?

Arguments Area<x> specifies the integer number of a Visual Trigger area.

<NR3> specifies the width of the Visual Trigger area in seconds.

Examples VISual:AREA5:WIDTH 0.0000045 sets the width of area 5 to 4.5 μs.

VISual:AREA3:WIDTH? might return VISual:AREA3:WIDTH 0.000016,

indicating that the width of area 3 is 16 μs.

VISual:AREA<x>:XPOSition
Sets or queries the horizontal (X-axis) center position of the specified Visual
Trigger area.

2-1886 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax VISual:AREA<x>:XPOSition <NR3>

VISual:AREA<x>:XPOSition?

Arguments Area<x> specifies the integer number of a Visual Trigger area.

<NR3> specifies the horizontal position of the center of the Visual Trigger area, in
seconds.

Examples VISual:AREA1:XPOSition –6.9e-6 sets the horizontal center of area 1 to be

–6.9 μs from the trigger point.
VISual:AREA3:XPOSition? might return VISual:AREA3:XPOSition
8.0e-6, indicating that the center of area 3 is 8 μs from the trigger point.

VISual:AREA<x>:YPOSition
Sets or queries the vertical (Y-axis) center position of the specified Visual Trigger
area.

Group Trigger

Syntax VISual:AREA<x>:YPOSition <NR3>

VISual:AREA<x>:YPOSition?

Arguments Area<x> specifies the integer number of a Visual Trigger area.

<NR3> specifies the vertical position of the center of the Visual Trigger area, in
amplitude (volts, amps).

Examples VISual:AREA1:YPOSition 0.5 sets the vertical center of area 1 to be 500 mV.

VISual:AREA3:YPOSition? might return VISual:AREA3:YPOSition 2,

indicating that the vertical center of area 3 is 2 volts.

VISual:DELETEALL (No Query Form)

Deletes all Visual Trigger areas.

Group Trigger

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1887

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax VISual:DELETEALL

Examples VISUAL:DELETEALL deletes all Visual Trigger areas.

VISual:ENAble
Sets or queries the status (on or off) of the Visual Trigger mode.

Group Trigger

Syntax VISual:ENAble {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

VISual:ENAble?

Arguments ON enables the Visual Trigger mode.

OFF disables the Visual Trigger mode.

<NR1> is an integer number. 0 turns off the Visual Trigger mode; any other value
enables Visual Trigger mode.

Examples VISual:ENAble ON enables the Visual Trigger function.

VISual:ENAble? might return VISual:ENAble OFF, indicating that Visual

Trigger mode is not enabled.

VISual:EQUation
Sets or queries the Visual Trigger area combination logic equation.

Group Trigger

Syntax VISual:EQUation <Qstring>

VISual:EQUation?

Arguments <Qstring> defines the Visual Trigger area combination logic equation. The
equation is made up of area names (A<x>) combined with logic operators AND,
OR, or XOR (&, |, ^). It may also contain parentheses for grouping. The equation
must be true to have a valid Visual Trigger event and display a waveform. Each
area’s true state depends on the area’s condition setting (In, Out or Don’t Care).

2-1888 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples VISual:EQUation "(A1 & A2) | A3" sets the combined area logic such that
both areas 1 and 2 must be true, or area 3 must be true, to have a valid Visual
Trigger event and display a waveform.
VISual:EQUation? might return VISual:EQUation "A1 & A2 & A3 &
A4", indicating that the area combination logic equation requires that areas 1
through 4 must be true to have a valid Visual Trigger event.

VISual:SHOWAReas
Shows or hides all Visual Trigger areas.

Group Trigger

Syntax VISual:SHOWAReas {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

VISual:SHOWAReas?

Arguments ON shows all Visual Trigger areas.

OFF hides all Visual Trigger areas.

<NR1> is an integer number. 0 hides all Visual Trigger areas; any other value
shows all Visual Trigger areas.

Examples VISual:SHOWAReas OFF hides all Visual Trigger areas.

VISual:SHOWAReas? might return VISual:SHOWAReas ON, indicating that

Visual Trigger areas are displayed on the screen.

VISual:SHOWCRiteria
Sets or queries display of the area names and hit criteria for all visual trigger areas.

Group Trigger

Syntax VISual:SHOWCRiteria {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

VISual:SHOWCRiteria?

Arguments ON enables display of the area name and hit criteria labels (In, Out, Don’t care
icons) of all Visual Trigger areas.
OFF hides the area name and hit criteria labels (In, Out, Don’t care icons) of
all Visual Trigger areas.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1889

Commands listed in alphabetical order

<NR1> is an integer number. 0 hides the area name and hit criteria of all Visual
Trigger areas; any other value enables displaying the area name and hit criteria of
all Visual Trigger areas.

Examples VISual:SHOWCRiteria OFF hides the name and hit criteria labels of all Visual
Trigger areas.
VISual:SHOWCRiteria? might return VISual:SHOWCRiteria ON, indicating
that the name and hit criteria labels of all Visual Trigger areas are displayed.

VISual:SHOWEQuation
Shows or hides the Visual Trigger area combination logic equation.

Group Trigger

Syntax VISual:SHOWEQuation {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

VISual:SHOWEQuation?

Arguments ON shows the Visual Trigger area combination logic equation.

OFF hides the Visual Trigger area combination logic equation.

<NR1> is an integer number. 0 hides the area combination logic equation; any
other value displays the area combination logic equation.

Examples VISual:SHOWEQuation ON shows the Visual Trigger area combination logic

equation.
VISual:SHOWEQuation? might return VISual:SHOWEQuation OFF,
indicating that the Visual Trigger area combination logic equation is not displayed
on the screen.

*WAI (No Query Form)

The *WAI (Wait) command (no query form) prevents the instrument from
executing further commands or queries until all pending commands that generate
an OPC message are complete. This command allows you to synchronize the
operation of the instrument with your application program. For more information,
refer to Synchronization Methods.

Group Status and Error

2-1890 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax *WAI

Related Commands BUSY?

*OPC

Examples *WAI prevents the instrument from executing any further commands or queries
until all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete.

WAVFrm? (Query Only)

This query-only command provides the Tektronix standard waveform query
which returns the waveform preamble followed by the waveform data for the
source specified by :DATa:SOUrce using the :DATa settings for encoding, width,
and so forth.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WAVFrm?

Related Commands CURVe?

DATa:SOUrce
WFMOutpre?

Examples WAVFRM? might return the waveform data as: WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR

8;BN_FMT RI;BYT_NR 1; BYT_OR MSB;ENCDG ASC;NR_PT 500;PT_FMT
Y; PT_ORDER LINEAR;PT_OFF 0;XINCR 400.0000E-12; XZERO
0.0000;XUNIT "s";YMULT 4.0000E-3; YOFF 0.0000;YZERO
0.0000;YUNIT "V"; WFID "Ch1,DC coupling, 100.0mV/div,
200.0ns/div, 5000 points,Sampl mode".

WFMOutpre? (Query Only)

This query-only command queries the waveform formatting data for the
waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. The preamble components
are considered to be of two types; formatting and interpretation. The
formatting components are: ENCdg, BN_Fmt, BYT_Or, BYT_Nr, BIT_Nr.
The interpretation components are derived from the DATa:SOUrce specified
waveform.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1891

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre?

Examples WFMOUTPRE? might return the waveform formatting data as: WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR
2;BIT_NR 16;ENCDG BINARY;BN_FMT RI;BYT_OR MSB;WFID "Ch1,
DC coupling, 200.0mV/div, 10.00us/div, 1250 points, Sample
mode";NR_PT 1000;PT_FMT Y;XUNIT "s";XINCR 80.0000E-9;XZERO
0.0000;PT_OFF 625;YUNIT "V";YMULT 31.2500E-6;YOFF
0.0000;YZERO 0.0000;NR_FR 3.

WFMOutpre:ASC_Fmt? (Query Only)

This query returns the format for ASCII data transferred from the instrument.
No command form is provided as the format is determined by the data source
type. Some waveforms are normalized vector data where the data points are
8-byte doubles in floating point format whereas other formats are 1-byte or 2-byte
integers.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:ASC_Fmt?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt

WFMOutpre:ENCdg

Returns FP represents floating point ASCII data. The waveforms are normalized vector
data where the data points are 8-byte doubles in floating point format.
INTEGER represents signed integer ASCII data. The waveform data are 1-byte
or 2-byte integers.

Examples WFMOutpre:ASC_Fmt? might return WFMOUTPRE:ASC_FMT INTEGER

indicating the ASCII format is integer.

2-1892 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr
This command sets and queries the number of bits per waveform point that
outgoing waveforms contain, as specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. Note
that values will be constrained according to the underlying waveform data. This
specification is only meaningful when WFMOutpre:ENCdg is set to BIN and
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt is set to either RI or RP.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr <NR1>

WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt

WFMOutpre:ENCdg

Arguments <NR1> number of bits per data point can be 8 or 16.

Examples WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR 16 sets the number of bits per waveform point to 16 for
incoming RI and RP binary format data.
WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR? might return WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR 8, indicating that
outgoing RI or RP binary format data uses 8 bits per waveform point.

WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
This command sets or queries the format of binary data for outgoing waveforms
specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt {RI|RP|FP}

WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

Arguments RI specifies signed integer data point representation.

RP specifies positive integer data point representation.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1893

Commands listed in alphabetical order

FP specifies floating point representation.

Examples WFMOUTPRE:BN_FMT FP specifies that outgoing waveform data will be in

single-precision binary floating point format.
WFMOUTPRE:BN_FMT? might return WFMOUTPRE:BN_FMT RI, indicating that the
outgoing waveform data is currently in signed integer format.

WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr
This command sets or queries the binary field data width (bytes per point) for the
waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. Note that values will be
constrained according to the underlying waveform data. This specification is only
meaningful when WFMOutpre:ENCdg is set to BIN, and WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
is set to either RI or RP.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr <NR1>

WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt

WFMOutpre:ENCdg

Arguments <NR1> is the number of bytes per data point and can be 1, 2 or 8. A value of 1 or
2 bytes per waveform point indicates channel data; 8 bytes per waveform point
indicate pixel map (fast acquisition) data.

Examples WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 1 sets the number of bytes per outgoing waveform data
point to 1, which is the default setting.
WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR? might return WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 2, indicating that
there are 2 bytes per outgoing waveform data point.

WFMOutpre:BYT_Or
This command sets or queries which byte of binary waveform data is transmitted
first, during a waveform data transfer, when data points require more than one byte.
This specification only has meaning when WFMOutpre:ENCdg is set to BIN.

2-1894 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:BYT_Or {LSB|MSB}

WFMOutpre:BYT_Or?

Related Commands WFMOutpre:ENCdg

Arguments LSB specifies that the least significant byte will be transmitted first.

MSB specifies that the most significant byte will be transmitted first.

Examples WFMOUTPRE:BYT_OR MSB sets the most significant outgoing byte of waveform
data to be transmitted first.
WFMOUTPRE:BYT_OR? might return WFMOUTPRE:BYT_OR LSB, indicating that
the least significant data byte will be transmitted first.

WFMOutpre:CENTERFREQuency? (Query Only)

This query returns the center frequency of the outgoing waveform. The center
frequency is a precise frequency at the center of the display of the frequency
domain graticule. In many applications, it is a carrier frequency.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:CENTERFREQuency?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

Returns Returns the center frequency of the outgoing waveform, in Hertz.

Examples WFMOutpre:CENTERFREQuency? might return

WFMOutpre:CENTERFREQuency 1.0E+9, indicating a center frequency of 1
GHz.

WFMOutpre:DOMain? (Query Only)

This query returns the domain of the outgoing waveform, either TIMe or
FREQuency. If the domain is TIMe, it indicates that the data is to be treated as

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1895

Commands listed in alphabetical order

integer information. If the domain is FREQuency, it indicates that the data is to be

treated as floating point information.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:DOMain?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt

WFMOutpre:ENCdg

Returns Returns the domain of the outgoing waveform.

Examples WFMOUTPRE:DOMAIN? might return WFMOUTPRE:DOMAIN TIME, indicating that

the outgoing waveform is a time domain trace.
WFMOutpre:DOMain? might return WFMOutpre:DOMain FREQuency,
indicating that the outgoing waveform is one of the four Spectrum View
frequency domain traces (CH<x>_SV_NORMal, CH<x>_SV_AVErage,
CH<x>_SV_MINHOLD, or CH<x>_SV_MAXHOLD).

WFMOutpre:ENCdg
This command sets or queries the type of encoding for outgoing waveforms.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:ENCdg {ASCii|BINary}

WFMOutpre:ENCdg?

Related Commands DATa:ENCdg

WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt

2-1896 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments ASCii specifies that the outgoing data is to be in ASCII format. Waveforms
internally stored as integers will be sent as <NR1> numbers, while those stored as
floating point will be sent as <NR3> numbers.
BINary specifies that outgoing data is to be in a binary format whose further
specification is determined by WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr,
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt and WFMOutpre:BYT_Or.

Examples WFMOUTPRE:ENCDG ASCii specifies that the outgoing waveform data will be
sent in ASCII format.
WFMOUTPRE:ENCDG? might return WFMOUTPRE:ENCDG BINary, indicating that
outgoing waveform data will be sent in binary format.

WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the number of points for the DATa:SOUrce
waveform that will be transmitted in response to a CURVe?? query.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?

Related Commands CURVe?

DATa
DATa:STARt
DATa:STOP
SAVe:WAVEform
SAVEON:WAVEform:FILEFormat

Examples WFMOUTPRE:NR_PT? might return WFMOUTPRE:NR_PT 5000, indicating that

there are 5000 data points to be sent.

WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the point format for the waveform specified by
the DATa:SOUrce command. The format specifies a set of equations describing
how the scale factors in the preamble are used to give meaning to the CURVe?
data points.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1897

Commands listed in alphabetical order

An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt?

Related Commands CURVe?

DATa:SOUrce

Examples WFMOUTPRE:PT_FMT? might return WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt ENV, indicating that

the waveform data is a series of min-max pairs.

WFMOutpre:PT_Off? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the trigger point relative to DATa:STARt for
the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.

NOTE. This returned value is the point immediately following the actual trigger.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:PT_Off?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

DATa:STARt
WFMOutpre:XZEro?

Examples WFMOUTPRE:PT_OFF? might return WFMOUTPRE:PT_OFF 251 specifying that

the trigger actually occurred between points 250 and 251.

WFMOutpre:PT_ORder? (Query Only)

This query-only command specifies whether the source waveform is Fast
Acquisition. A Fast Acquisition waveform is stored as a 500 (vertical) by
1000 (horizontal) point bitmap. Each point represents display intensity for that
screen location. Only CURVe? query functions are allowed on Fast Acquisition
waveforms. When the WFMOutpre:PT_ORder? query returns Row, this indicates

2-1898 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

that the source is a Fast Acquisition waveform (and that each of 1000 possible
horizontal columns being transmitted contains 500 vertical points. Note: 500
might vary based on how many channels enabled from same FastAcq group.) and
waveform points are transmitted in the following order: left to right; then top to
bottom.
When the WFMOutpre:PT_ORder? query returns Linear, this indicates that the
source is not a Fast Acquisition waveform (and that each horizontal column being
sent contains only one vertical point). Note that waveform points are transmitted
in the following order: top to bottom, then left to right.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:PT_ORder?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

Examples WFMOUTPRE:PT_ORDER? might return WFMOUTPRE:PT_ORder ROW,

specifying that the waveform designated by the DATa:SOUrce waveform is a
Fast Acquisition waveform and CURve? is returning the PIXmap data for that
source.
WFMOUTPRE:PT_ORDER? might return WFMOUTPRE:PT_ORder LINEAR,
specifying that the source waveform is a non-Fast Acquisition waveform and
CURve? is returning the Vector data for that source.

WFMOutpre:RESample
This command sets or queries the resampling of outgoing waveform data.
This command is equivalent to setting DATa:RESample. Setting the
WFMOutpre:RESample value causes the corresponding DATa value to be
updated and vice versa.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:RESample <NR1>

WFMOutpre:RESample?

Related Commands DATa:RESample

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1899

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples WFMOUTPRE:RESAMPLE 1 sets the resampling to return all waveform data

samples.
WFMOUTPRE:RESAMPLE? might return WFMOUTPRE:RESAMPLE 4, indicating that
every forth sample of the waveform data is returned.

WFMOutpre:SPAN? (Query Only)

This query returns the frequency span of the outgoing waveform. The span is the
range of frequencies you can observe around the center frequency.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:SPAN?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

Returns Returns the frequency span of the outgoing waveform, in Hertz.

Examples RF:SPAN? might return RF:SPAN 10.0000E+6, indicating the span is 10 MHz.

WFMOutpre:WFId? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns a string describing several aspects of the
acquisition parameters for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:WFId?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

2-1900 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Returns <QString> contains the following comma-separated fields documented in the

following tables:

Table 2-53: Waveform Suffixes

Field Description Examples
Source The source identification string as it appears in "CH1–8"
the front panel scale factor readouts. "MATH<x>
"REF<x>"
Coupling A string describing the vertical coupling of the "AC coupling"
waveform (the Source1 waveform in the case of "DC coupling"
Dual Waveform Math). "GND coupling"
Vert Scale A string containing the vertical scale factor of "100.0 mV/div"
the unzoomed waveform. The numeric portion "20.00 dB/div"
will always be four digits. The examples cover "45.00 deg/div"
all known internal units. "785.4 mrad/div"
"500.0 μVs/div"
"10.00 kV/s/div"
"200.0 mV/div"
"50.00 unk/div"
Horiz Scale A string containing the horizontal scale factor of "100 ms/div"
the unzoomed waveform. The numeric portion "10.00 kHz/div"
will always be four digits. The examples cover "50.00 c/div"
all known internal units.
Record Length A string containing the number of waveform "500 points"
points available in the entire record. The "500000 points"
numeric portion is given as an integer.
Acquisition Mode A string describing the mode used to acquire "Sample mode"
the waveform. "Pk Detect mode"
"Hi Res mode"
"Envelope mode"
"Average mode"
Center Frequency A string containing the center frequency value “2.400GHz”
of the waveform.
Span A string containing the frequency span value of “20.00MHz”
the waveform.
Reference Level A string containing the reference level value of “1.000mW”
the waveform.

Examples WFMOUTPRE:WFID? might return WFMOUTPRE:WFID "Ch1, DC

coupling,100.0mVolts/div,500.0µs/div,500 points, Hi Res
mode".

WFMOutpre:WFMTYPe? (Query Only)

This query returns the type of the outgoing waveform.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1901

Commands listed in alphabetical order

The type of waveform that is being transferred in turn determines in which

window it will display on the instrument screen: (the Waveform View window or
Spectrum View window). Both the Analog and RF_TD arguments specify the time
domain window; the RF_RD argument specifies the frequency domain window.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:WFMTYPe?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

Returns Returns the type of the outgoing waveform:

ANALOG indicates a Channel or Math waveform.

SV_FD indicates a Spectrum View RF frequency domain waveform.

RF_TD indicates an RF time domain waveform.

Examples WFMOutpre:WFMTYPe? might return WFMOutpre:WFMTYPe CH<x>_SV_FD,

which indicates that the outgoing waveform is an RF frequency domain waveform
(CH<x>_SV_AVErage, CH<x>_SV_MAXHold, CH<x>_SV_MINHold, or
CH<x>_SV_NORMal).

WFMOutpre:XINcr? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the horizontal point spacing in units of
WFMOutpre:XUNit for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.
This value corresponds to the sampling interval.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:XINcr?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

WFMOutpre:XUNit?

2-1902 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples WFMOUTPRE:XINCR? might return WFMOUTPRE:XINCR 10.0000E-6, indicating

that the horizontal sampling interval is 10 µs/point (500 µs/div).

WFMOutpre:XUNit? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the horizontal units for the waveform specified
by the DATa:SOUrce command.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:XUNit?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

Examples WFMOUTPRE:XUNIT? might return WFMOUTPRE:XUNIT "HZ", indicating that the

horizontal units for the waveform are in Hertz.

WFMOutpre:XZEro? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the sub-sample time between the trigger
sample (designated by PT_OFF) and the occurrence of the actual trigger for
the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. This value is in units
of WFMOutpre:XUNit.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.

NOTE. During steady state operation, when all control changes have settled and
triggers are arriving on a regular basis, this is the only part of the preamble that
changes on each acquisition.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:XZEro?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

WFMOutpre:XUNit?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1903

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples WFMOUTPRE:XZERO? might return WFMOUTPRE:XZERO 5.6300E-9, indicating

that the trigger actually occurred 5.63 ns before the trigger sample.

WFMOutpre:YMUlt? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the vertical scale factor per digitizing level
in units specified by WFMOutpre:YUNit for the waveform specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command. For those formats in which WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr is
important (all non-floating point formats), WFMOutpre:YMUlt? must take the
location of the binary point implied by BYT_NR into consideration.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:YMUlt?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

Examples WFMOUTPRE:YMULT? might return WFMOUTPRE:YMULT 4.0000E-3, indicating

that the vertical scale for the corresponding waveform is 100 mV/div.

WFMOutpre:YOFf? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the vertical offset of the source specified by
DATa:SOUrce. For this instrument family, the value returned is always 0.0 as the
offset is combined with the :YZEro value.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:YOFf?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr

2-1904 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples WFMOUTPRE:YOFF? might return WFMOUTPRE:YOFF -50.0000E+0, indicating

that the position indicator for the waveform was 50 digitizing levels (2 divisions)
below center screen.

WFMOutpre:YUNit? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the vertical units for the waveform specified by
the DATa:SOUrce command.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:YUNit?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

Examples WFMOUTPRE:YUNIT? might return WFMOUTPRE:YUNIT "dB", indicating that the

vertical units for the waveform are measured in decibels.

WFMOutpre:YZEro? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the combined vertical position and offset for the
source waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce. This represents a departure from
previous instruments where the :YZEro value represented the vertical position
in vertical units and the :YOFf value represented the vertical offset in digitizing
levels. For this instrument family, the value of :YOFf is always 0.0.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:YZEro?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

WFMOutpre:YUNit?

Examples WFMOUTPRE:YZERO? might return WFMOUTPRE:YZERO -100.0000E-3,

indicating that vertical offset is set to -100 mV.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1905

Commands listed in alphabetical order

2-1906 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Status and Events
The instrument provides a status and event reporting system for the Ethernet
and USB interfaces. This system informs you of certain significant events that
occur within the instrument.
The instrument status handling system consists of five 8-bit registers and two
queues for each interface. The remaining Status subtopics describe these registers
and components. They also explain how the event handling system operates.

Registers
Overview The registers in the event handling system fall into two functional groups:
Status Registers contain information about the status of the instrument. They
include the Standard Event Status Register (SESR).
Enable Registers determine whether selected types of events are reported to
the Status Registers and the Event Queue. They include the Device Event
Status Enable Register (DESER), the Event Status Enable Register (ESER),
and the Service Request Enable Register (SRER).

Status Registers The Standard Event Status Register (SESR) and the Status Byte Register (SBR)
record certain types of events that may occur while the instrument is in use. IEEE
Std 488.2-1987 defines these registers.
Each bit in a Status Register records a particular type of event, such as an
execution error or message available. When an event of a given type occurs, the
instrument sets the bit that represents that type of event to a value of one. (You can
disable bits so that they ignore events and remain at zero. See Enable Registers).
Reading the status registers tells you what types of events have occurred.

The Standard Event Status Register (SESR). The SESR records eight types of
events that can occur within the instrument. Use the *ESR? query to read the
SESR register. Reading the register clears the bits of the register so that the
register can accumulate information about new events.

NOTE. TekVISA applications use SESR bit 6 to respond to any of several events,
including some front panel actions.

Figure 3-1: The Standard Event Status Register (SESR)

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 3-1

Status and Events

Table 3-1: SESR Bit Functions

Bit Function
7 (MSB) PON Power On. Shows that the instrument was powered on.
On completion, the diagnostic self tests also set this bit.
6 URQ User Request. Indicates that an application event has
occurred. *See note.
5 CME Command Error. Shows that an error occurred while
the instrument was parsing a command or query.
4 EXE Execution Error. Shows that an error executing a
command or query.
3 DDE Device Error. Shows that a device error occurred.
2 QYE Query Error. Either an attempt was made to read the
Output Queue when no data was present or pending, or that
data in the Output Queue was lost.
1 RQC Request Control. This is not used.
0 (LSB) OPC Operation Complete. Shows that the operation
is complete. This bit is set when all pending operations
complete following an *OPC command.

The Status Byte Register (SBR). Records whether output is available in the
Output Queue, whether the instrument requests service, and whether the SESR
has recorded any events.
Use a Serial Poll or the *STB? query to read the contents of the SBR. The bits in
the SBR are set and cleared depending on the contents of the SESR, the Event
Status Enable Register (ESER), and the Output Queue. When you use a Serial
Poll to obtain the SBR, bit 6 is the RQS bit. When you use the *STB? query to
obtain the SBR, bit 6 is the MSS bit. Reading the SBR does not clear the bits.

Figure 3-2: The Status Byte Register (SBR)

Table 3-2: SBR Bit Functions

Bit Function
7 (MSB) ———— Not used.
6 RQS Request Service. Obtained from a serial poll. Shows
that the instrument requests service from the controller.
6 MSS Master Status Summary. Obtained from *STB?
query. Summarizes the ESB and MAV bits in the SBR.
5 ESB Event Status Bit. Shows that status is enabled and
present in the SESR.

3-2 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Status and Events

Table 3-2: SBR Bit Functions (cont.)

Bit Function
4 MAV Message Available. Shows that output is available
in the Output Queue.
3 ———— Not used.
2 ———— Not used.
1–0 ———— Not used.

Enable Registers DESER, ESER, and SRER allow you to select which events are reported to the
Status Registers and the Event Queue. Each Enable Register acts as a filter to a
Status Register (the DESER also acts as a filter to the Event Queue) and can
prevent information from being recorded in the register or queue.
Each bit in an Enable Register corresponds to a bit in the Status Register it
controls. In order for an event to be reported to a bit in the Status Register, the
corresponding bit in the Enable Register must be set to one. If the bit in the Enable
Register is set to zero, the event is not recorded.
Various commands set the bits in the Enable Registers. The Enable Registers and
the commands used to set them are described below.

The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER). This register controls which
types of events are reported to the SESR and the Event Queue. The bits in the
DESER correspond to those in the SESR.
Use the DESE command to enable and disable the bits in the DESER. Use the
DESE? query to read the DESER.

Figure 3-3: The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER)

The Event Status Enable Register (ESER). This register controls which types of
events are summarized by the Event Status Bit (ESB) in the SBR. Use the *ESE
command to set the bits in the ESER. Use the *ESE? query to read it.

Figure 3-4: The Event Status Enable Register (ESER)

The Service Request Enable Register (SRER). This register controls which bits
in the SBR generate a Service Request and are summarized by the Master Status
Summary (MSS) bit.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 3-3

Status and Events

Use the *SRE command to set the SRER. Use the *SRE? query to read the
register. The RQS bit remains set to one until either the Status Byte Register is
read with a Serial Poll or the MSS bit changes back to a zero.

Figure 3-5: The Service Request Enable Register (SRER)

*PSC Command The *PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power-on. Sending
*PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows:
DESER 255 (equivalent to a DESe 255 command)
ESER 0 (equivalent to an *ESE 0 command)
SRER 0 (equivalent to an *SRE 0 command)
Sending *PSC 0 lets the Enable Registers maintain their values in nonvolatile
memory through a power cycle.

NOTE. To enable the PON (Power On) event to generate a Service Request, send
*PSC 0, use the DESe and *ESE commands to enable PON in the DESER and
ESER, and use the *SRE command to enable bit 5 in the SRER. Subsequent
power-on cycles will generate a Service Request.

Queues
The *PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power-on. Sending
*PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows:

Output Queue The instrument stores query responses in the Output Queue and empties this
queue each time it receives a new command or query message after an <EOM>.
The controller must read a query response before it sends the next command (or
query) or it will lose responses to earlier queries.

CAUTION. When a controller sends a query, an <EOM>, and a second query,

the instrument normally clears the first response and outputs the second while
reporting a Query Error (QYE bit in the ESER) to indicate the lost response. A
fast controller, however, may receive a part or all of the first response as well. To
avoid this situation, the controller should always read the response immediately
after sending any terminated query message or send a DCL (Device Clear) before
sending the second query.

3-4 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Status and Events

Event Queue The Event Queue stores detailed information on up to 33 events. If than 32
events stack up in the Event Queue, the 32nd event is replaced by event code
350, "Queue Overflow."
Read the Event Queue with the EVENT? query (which returns only the event
number), with the EVMSG? query (which returns the event number and a text
description of the event), or with the ALLEV? query (which returns all the event
numbers along with a description of the event). Reading an event removes it
from the queue.
Before reading an event from the Event Queue, you must use the *ESR? query to
read the summary of the event from the SESR. This makes the events summarized
by the *ESR? read available to the EVENT? and EVMSG? queries, and empties
the SESR.
Reading the SESR erases any events that were summarized by previous *ESR?
reads but not read from the Event Queue. Events that follow an *ESR? read are
put in the Event Queue but are not available until *ESR? is used again.

Event Handling Sequence

The following figure shows how to use the status and event handling system. In
the explanation that follows, numbers in parentheses refer to numbers in the figure.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 3-5

Status and Events

Figure 3-6: Status and Event Handling Process

When an event occurs, a signal is sent to the DESER (1). If that type of event
is enabled in the DESER (that is, if the bit for that event type is set to 1), the
appropriate bit in the SESR is set to one, and the event is recorded in the Event
Queue (2). If the corresponding bit in the ESER is also enabled (3), then the
ESB bit in the SBR is set to one (4).
When output is sent to the Output Queue, the MAV bit in the SBR is set to one (5).
When a bit in the SBR is set to one and the corresponding bit in the SRER
is enabled (6), the MSS bit in the SBR is set to one and a service request is
generated (7).

3-6 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Status and Events

Synchronization Methods
Overview Although most commands are completed almost immediately after being received
by the instrument, some commands start a process that requires time. For example,
once a single sequence acquisition command is executed, depending upon the
applied signals and trigger settings, it may take an extended period of time before
the acquisition is complete. Rather than remain idle while the operation is in
process, the instrument will continue processing other commands. This means
that some operations will not be completed in the order that they were sent.
Furthermore, sometimes the result of an operation depends upon the result of an
earlier operation. A first operation must complete before the next one is processed.
In order to handle these situations, the instrument status and event reporting
system allows you to synchronize the operation of the instrument with your
application program, using the Operation Complete function. Note, however,
that only some operations are able to take advantage of this function; a table is
provided below of commands that support this.
The following commands are used to synchronize the instrument functions using
Operation Complete. See examples of how to use these commands later on in
this section:
*OPC — sending the *OPC command will set bit 0 of the SESR (Standard
Events Status Register). The bit will only be set high when all pending operations
that generate an OPC message have finished execution. (The SESR is queried
using *ESR?) The *OPC? query form returns 1 only when all operations have
completed, or a device clear is received.
*WAI — prevents the instrument from executing further commands or queries
until all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete.
BUSY? — returns the status of operations: 1 means there are pending operations,
0 means that all pending operations are complete.

NOTE. Some OPC operations may require an extended period of time to complete
or may never complete. For example, a single sequence acquisition may never
complete when no trigger event occurs. You should be aware of these conditions
and tailor your program accordingly by:
— setting the timeout sufficiently for the anticipated maximum time for the
operation and
— handle a timeout appropriately by querying the SESR (*ESR?) and event queue
(EVMsg? or ALLEv?).

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 3-7

Status and Events

NOTE. The *OPC command form can also be used to cause an SRQ to be
generated upon completion of all pending operations. This requires that the
ESB (Event Status Bit, bit 5) of the SRER (Service Request Enable Regiser) is set,
and the OPC bit (bit 0) of the DESR (Device Event Status Enable Register) and
the ESER (Event Status Enable Register) are set. (The SRER is set/queried using
*SRE. The DESR is set/queried using DESE. The ESER is set/queried using *ESE.)

Only a subset of instrument operations support the Operation Complete function

(OPC):

Table 3-3: instrument operations that can generate OPC

Command Conditions
ACQuire:STATE <non-zero NR1>| ON|RUN Only when in single sequence acquisition
mode
:AUTOset < EXECute >
CALibrate:INTERNal
CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt
CALibrate:FACtory STARt
CALibrate:FACtory CONTinue
CALibrate:FACtory PREVious
CH<x>:PRObe:AUTOZero EXECute
CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUss EXECute
DIAg:STATE EXECute
FACtory
MEASUrement:MEAS<x> :RESUlts When used in single sequence acquisition
mode or during waveform recall.
RECAll:SETUp (<file as quoted
string>|FACtory)
RECAll:WAVEform <.ISF or .CSV file >,<
REF<x> >
:RF:REFLevel AUTO
*RST
SAVe:IMAGe <file as quoted string>
SAVe:SETUp <file as quoted string>
SAVe:WAVEform < source wfm >, (< REF<x>
>|< file >)
TEKSecure
TRIGger:A SETLevel

3-8 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Status and Events

Example of Acquiring For example, a typical application might involve acquiring a single-sequence
and Measuring a waveform and then taking a measurement on the acquired waveform. You could
Single-Sequence use the following command sequence to do this:
Waveform /** Set up conditional acquisition **/
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH1:STATE 1
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 1000
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/** Acquire waveform data **/
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/** Set up the measurement parameters **/
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE CH1
/** Take amplitude measurement **/
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN?

The acquisition of the waveform requires extended processing time. It may not
finish before the instrument takes an amplitude measurement (see the following
figure). This can result in an incorrect amplitude value.

Figure 3-7: Command Processing Without Using Synchronization

To ensure the instrument completes waveform acquisition before taking the
measurement on the acquired data, you can synchronize the program using *WAI,
BUSY, *OPC, and *OPC?.

Figure 3-8: Processing Sequence With Synchronization

Example of Using the *OPC If the corresponding status registers are enabled, the *OPC command sets the
Command OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register (SESR) when an operation is
complete. You achieve synchronization by using this command with either a
serial poll or service request handler.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 3-9

Status and Events

Serial Poll Method: Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable
Register (DESER) and the Event Status Enable Register (ESER) using the DESE
and *ESE commands.
When the operation is complete, the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register
(SESR) will be enabled and the Event Status Bit (ESB) in the Status Byte Register
will be enabled.
The same command sequence using the *OPC command for synchronization with
serial polling looks like this:
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH1:STATE 1
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 1000
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Enable the status registers */
DESE 1
*ESE 1
*SRE 0
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters on the channel we’re
about to sequence */
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the
measurement. */
*OPC
While serial poll = 0, keep looping
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN?

This technique requires less bus traffic than did looping on BUSY.
Service Request Method: Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable
Register (DESER) and the Event Status Enable Register (ESER) using the DESE
and *ESE commands.
You can also enable service requests by setting the ESB bit in the Service Request
Enable Register (SRER) using the *SRE command. When the operation is
complete, the instrument will generate a Service Request.
The same command sequence using the *OPC command for synchronization
looks like this
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH1:STATE 1
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 1000

3-10 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Status and Events

ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Enable the status registers */
DESE 1
*ESE 1
*SRE 32

/* Set up the measurement parameters on the channel we’re

about to sequence */ :MEASUrement:MEAS1:TYPE AMPLITUDE
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:SOURCE CH1
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the
measurement*/
*OPC

The program can now do different tasks such as talk to other devices. The SRQ,
when it comes, interrupts those tasks and returns control to this task.
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN?

Example of Using the The *OPC? query places a 1 in the Output Queue once an operation that generates
*OPC? Query an OPC message is complete. The *OPC? query does not return until all pending
OPC operations have completed. Therefore, your time-out must be set to a time at
least as long as the longest expected time for the operations to complete.
The same command sequence using the *OPC? query for synchronization looks
like this:
/* Set up single sequence acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH1:STATE 1
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 1000
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Set up the measurement parameters on the channel we’re
about to sequence */
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE CH1
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the
measurement*/
*OPC?

Wait for read from Output Queue.

/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN?

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 3-11

Status and Events

This is the simplest approach. It requires no status handling or loops. However,

you must set the controller time-out for longer than the acquisition operation.

Example of Using the *WAI The *WAI command forces completion of previous commands that generate
Command an OPC message. No commands after the *WAI are processed before the OPC
message(s) are generated
The same command sequence using the *WAI command for synchronization
looks like this:
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH1:STATE 1
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 1000
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Set up the measurement parameters on the channel we’re
about to sequence */
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE CH1
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking
the measurement*/
*/
*WAI
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN?

The controller can continue to write commands to the input buffer of the
instrument, but the commands will not be processed by the instrument until all
in-process OPC operations are complete. If the input buffer becomes full, the
controller will be unable to write commands to the buffer. This can cause a
time-out.

Example of Using the The BUSY? query allows you to find out whether the instrument is busy
BUSY Query processing a command that has an extended processing time such as
single-sequence acquisition.
The same command sequence, using the BUSY? query for synchronization, looks
like this:
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH1:STATE 1
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 1000
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE

3-12 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Status and Events

/* Acquire waveform data */

ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking
the measurement */
While BUSY? keep looping
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?

This sequence lets you create your own wait loop rather than using the *WAI
command. The BUSY? query helps you avoid time-outs caused by writing too
many commands to the input buffer. The controller is still tied up though, and
the repeated BUSY? query will result in bus traffic.

Reference waveforms Measurements on references also support OPC when used in conjunction with a
:RECALL:WAVEFORM command.
/* Load the waveform file */
:RECALL:WAVEFORM "C:/Digital8.wfm”,REF1
*OPC?
/* Set up the measurement parameters on the reference */
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:TYPE PERIOD
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:SOURCE REF1
*OPC?
/* Wait for read from Output Queue. */
/* Take amplitude measurement */
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN?

Messages The information contained in the topics above covers all the programming
interface messages the instrument generates in response to commands and queries.
For most messages, a secondary message from the instrument gives detail about
the cause of the error or the meaning of the message. This message is part of the
message string and is separated from the main message by a semicolon.
Each message is the result of an event. Each type of event sets a specific bit in the
SESR and is controlled by the equivalent bit in the DESER. Thus, each message
is associated with a specific SESR bit. In the message tables, the associated SESR
bit is specified in the table title, with exceptions noted with the error message text.

No Event The following table shows the messages when the system has no events or status
to report. These have no associated SESR bit.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 3-13

Status and Events

Table 3-4: No Event Messages

Code Message
0 No events to report; queue empty
1 No events to report; new events pending *ESR?

Command Error The following table shows the command error messages generated by improper
syntax. Check that the command is properly formed and that it follows the rules
in the section on command Syntax.

Table 3-5: Command Error Messages (CME Bit 5)

Code Message
100 Command error
101 Invalid character
102 Syntax error
103 Invalid separator
104 Data type error
105 GET not allowed
108 Parameter not allowed
109 Missing parameter
110 Command header error
112 Program mnemonic too long
113 Undefined header
120 Numeric data error
121 Invalid character in numeric
123 Exponent too large
124 Too many digits
130 Suffix error
131 Invalid suffix
134 Suffix too long
140 Character data error
141 Invalid character data
144 Character data too long
150 String data error
151 Invalid string data
152 String data too long
160 Block data error
161 Invalid block data
170 Command expression error
171 Invalid expression

3-14 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Status and Events

Execution Error The following table lists the execution errors that are detected during execution of
a command.

Table 3-6: Execution Error Messages (EXE Bit 4)

Code Message
200 Execution error
221 Settings conflict
222 Data out of range
224 Illegal parameter value
241 Hardware missing
250 Mass storage error
251 Missing mass storage
252 Missing media
253 Corrupt media
254 Media full
255 Directory full
256 File name not found
257 File name error
258 Media protected
259 File name too long
280 Program error
282 Insufficient network printer information
283 Network printer not responding
284 Network printer server not responding
286 Program runtime error
287 Future use
2200 Measurement error, Measurement system error
2201 Measurement error, Zero period
2202 Measurement error, No period, second waveform
2203 Measurement error, No period, second waveform
2204 Measurement error, Low amplitude, second waveform
2205 Measurement error, Low amplitude, second waveform
2206 Measurement error, Invalid gate
2207 Measurement error, Measurement overflow
2208 Measurement error, No backwards Mid Ref crossing
2209 Measurement error, No second Mid Ref crossing
2210 Measurement error, No Mid Ref crossing, second waveform
2211 Measurement error, No backwards Mid Ref crossing
2212 Measurement error, No negative crossing

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 3-15

Status and Events

Table 3-6: Execution Error Messages (EXE Bit 4) (cont.)

Code Message
2213 Measurement error, No positive crossing
2214 Measurement error, No crossing, target waveform
2215 Measurement error, No crossing, second waveform
2216 Measurement error, No crossing, target waveform
2217 Measurement error, Constant waveform
2219 Measurement error, No valid edge - No arm sample
2220 Measurement error, No valid edge - No arm cross
2221 Measurement error, No valid edge - No trigger cross
2222 Measurement error, No valid edge - No second cross
2223 Measurement error, Waveform mismatch
2224 Measurement error, WAIT calculating
2225 Measurement error, No waveform to measure
2226 Measurement error, Null Waveform
2227 Measurement error, Positive and Negative Clipping
2228 Measurement error, Positive Clipping
2229 Measurement error, Negative Clipping
2230 Measurement error, High Ref < Low Ref
2231 Measurement error, No statistics available
2233 Requested waveform is temporarily unavailable
2235 Math error, invalid math description
2240 Invalid password
2241 Waveform requested is invalid
2244 Source waveform is not active
2245 Saveref error, selected channel is turned off
2250 Reference error, the reference waveform file is invalid
2253 Reference error, too many points received
2254 Reference error, too few points received
2259 File too big
2270 Alias error
2271 Alias syntax error
2273 Illegal alias label
2276 Alias expansion error
2277 Alias redefinition not allowed
2278 Alias header not found
2285 TekSecure(R) Pass
2286 TekSecure(R) Fail
2500 Setup error, file does not look like a setup file

3-16 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Status and Events

Table 3-6: Execution Error Messages (EXE Bit 4) (cont.)

Code Message
2501 Setup warning, could not recall all values from external setup
2620 Mask error, too few points received
2760 Mark limit reached
2761 No mark present
2762 Search copy failed

Device Error The following table lists the device errors that can occur during instrument
operation. These errors may indicate that the instrument needs repair.

Table 3-7: Device Error Messages (DDE Bit 3)

Code Message
310 System error
311 Memory error
312 PUD memory lost
314 Save/recall memory lost

System Event The following table lists the system event messages. These messages are
generated whenever certain system conditions occur.

Table 3-8: System Event Messages

Code Message
400 Query event
401 Power on (PON bit 7 set)
402 Operation complete (OPC bit 0 set)
403 User request (URQ bit 6 set)
404 Power fail (DDE bit 3 set)
405 Request control
410 Query INTERRUPTED (QYE bit 2 set)
420 Query UNTERMINATED (QYE bit 2 set)
430 Query DEADLOCKED (QYE bit 2 set)
440 Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response (QYE bit 2 set)
468 Knob/Keypad value changed
472 Application variable changed

Execution Warning The following table lists warning messages that do not interrupt the flow of
command execution. They also notify you of possible unexpected results.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 3-17

Status and Events

Table 3-9: Execution Warning Messages (EXE Bit 4)

Code Message
528 Parameter out of range
532 Curve data too long, Curve truncated
533 Curve error, Preamble values are inconsistent
540 Measurement warning, Uncertain edge
541 Measurement warning, Low signal amplitude
542 Measurement warning, Unstable histogram
543 Measurement warning, Low resolution
544 Measurement warning, Uncertain edge
545 Measurement warning, Invalid in minmax
546 Measurement warning, Need 3 edges
547 Measurement warning, Clipping positive/negative
548 Measurement warning, Clipping positive
549 Measurement warning, Clipping negative

Table 3-10: Execution Warning Messages (EXE Bit 4)

Code Message
540 Measurement warning
541 Measurement warning, Low signal amplitude
542 Measurement warning, Unstable histogram
543 Measurement warning, Low resolution
544 Measurement warning, Uncertain edge
545 Measurement warning, Invalid min max
546 Measurement warning, Need 3 edges
547 Measurement warning, Clipping positive/negative
548 Measurement warning, Clipping positive
549 Measurement warning, Clipping negative

Internal Warning The following table shows internal errors that indicate an internal fault in the
instrument.

Table 3-11: Internal Warning Messages

Code Message
630 Internal warning, 50Ω overload

3-18 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix A: Character Set

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual A-1

Appendix A: Character Set

A-2 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix B: Reserved Words
This is a list of reserved words for your instrument. Capital letters identify the
required minimum spelling.

*CAL ACCM AN AUTOmatic

*CLS ACCOMMONMODE ANALOG AUTOset
*DDT ACDC ANALOg AUTOset
*ESE ACDCRMS ANALYSISMethod DPMAutoset
*ESR ACK ANALYZemode AUTOset DPMPReset
*IDN ACKMISS AND AUXLevel
*LRN ACKNowledge ANNOTate AUXiliary
*OPC ACKnum ANOISEDensity AUXout
*OPT ACQ ANY AVAILable
*PSC ACQDURATION ANYERRor AVErage
*PUD ACQuire AOFFSet AVG
*RST ACQuisition APOSition AVPOSition
*SRE ACRMS APPID AXPOSition
*STB ACTION APPPWR AYPOSition
*TRG ACTONEVent APPPWRSUM Auto
*TST ACTive APPly B
*WAI ADD ARBitrary B0
0 ADDMEAS AREA B1
1 ADDNew AREAlt;x> B10
1066 ADDR10 AREAofcrosssection B11
1200 ADDR7 ARINC429 B12
128 ADDRANDDATA ARINC429A B13
1333 ADDRESS ARROW B14
1466 ADDRess ASCII B15
15 ADDress ASCIi B16
1600 ADVanced ASC_Fmt B2
1866 AFG ASCii B3
2133 AGND ASIC B4
333 AHPOSition ASOUrce B5
500E1 ALARMSEARch ASPEctratio B6
500E15 ALERT ATRIGger B7
500E3 ALIas AUDio B8
7 ALL AUNIts B9
8 ALLAcqs AUTHenticate BACA
800 ALLBits AUTO BACKLight
9 ALLEv AUTODim BACKWard
A ALLTHResholds AUTOETHERnet BADDr
AB ALWAYS AUTOINCrement BADGE
ABC AM14 AUTORange BADGe
ABCB AMPL AUTORbw BANDWidth
ABORt AMPLINear AUTOSAVEPITIMEOUT BANdwidth
ABOrt AMPLITUDE AUTOSAVEUITIMEOUT BASE
ABSOLUTE AMPLitude AUTOScale BASETop
ABSolute AMPMode AUTOSet BASic
AC AMP[1-10]Val AUTOZero BATHTUB
ACBC AMPlITUDE AUTOfit BATHtub

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual B-1

Appendix B: Reserved Words

BC BRSBit CH2 COMPRESSION

BCR BSOUrce CH3 COMPensate
BCRType BULK CH4 COMPlete
BDIFFBP BUNIts CH5 COMPosition
BEACon BURSTDETectmethod CH6 COMPression
BER BURSTEDGTYPe CH7 CONDENRG
BHPOSition BURSTLENGTH CH8 CONDLOSS
BIAS BURSTLatency CHAN1A CONDition
BIN BURSTWIDTH CHAN2B CONFIGuration
BINARY BURSt CHANWidth CONFIGure
BINary BUS CHX CONFigure
BIT BUSANDWAVEFORM CHannel CONNECTSTATus
BITAMPLITUDE BUSTABle CHecksum CONNect
BITCfgmode BUSTURNAROUnd CHlt;x> CONNected
BITDelay BUSY CHlt;x>_DALL CONSTAMPlitude
BITEnd BUSx CHlt;x>_Dlt;x> CONSTANTCLOCK
BITHIGH BVPOSition CHx CONSTCLOCKMODe
BITLOW BXPOSition CHx_DALL CONSTant
BITORDer BY CHx_Dx CONTROL
BITOrder BYPOSition CHx_Dy CONTROLCHARTYPe
BITPERiod BYT_Nr CLASSA CONTROLCODETYPe
BITPcnt BYT_Or CLASSB CONTROLMESSage
BITRate BYTe CLASSC CONTRol
BITS Block CLASSD CONTinuous
BITSTUFFing Blt;x> CLASs CONTrol
BITSTart Blt;x>PSIFIVe CLEAR COPy
BITType Bpeak CLEar COUNT
BIT_Nr Br CLIPping COUNTer
BITlt;n>SOUrce Bus CLOCK COUNt
BJT Bx CLOCKBITSPERCHANNEL COUPling
BLACKMANHarris C CLOCKFrequency COUnt
BLACkmanharris CA CLOCKMultiplier CPHY
BLANKingtime CALLOUTS CLOCKRecovery CR
BLOCKDATa CALLOUTlt;x> CLOCKSOUrce CRC
BLOCkid CALibrate CLOCk CRC16
BLUe CAN CLOCkSOUrce CRC5
BM CAN2X CLRESPONSE CRCERRor
BMP CANH CMEThod CRCHeader
BMSGEnd CANL CN CRCTrailer
BN CAPACITANCE COFFSet CREATor
BNOISE CARDIac COLOR CROSSIng
BN_Fmt CATalog COLOROFF CSActive
BOFFSet CB COLORON CSI
BOLD CCODe COLORy CSIBLANk
BOOKMARK CCOUnt COLor CSINULL
BOOKMark CCRESUlts COLors CSLevel
BOTH CCYCles COMM CSMode
BPACKets CENTERFREQuency COMMAND CSPLIT
BPOSition CENTERFrequency COMMONMODE CSSource
BRGTID CGND COMMONMode CSYMVALue
BRINgtoview CGS COMMand CURRENT
BROADCASTPacket CH COMMents CURRent
BROadcast CH1 COMPRESSEDPSTReam CURRentacq

B-2 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix B: Reserved Words

CURSOR DATATHRESHold DDRWRITE DISPLAYUnits

CURSOR1 DATE DDRWrite DISParity
CURSORlt;x> DATa DDT DISPlaystat
CURSor DBCA DECIMAL DISabled
CURSors DBM DECode DISplay
CURVe DBMA DEFect DISplaymode
CURrent DBMV DEFine DIVide
CUSTOM DBUA DEFinedby DIVisions
CUSTOMLIMITSFile DBUV DEGAUSS DJ
CUSTOMPROPAgation DBUW DEGrees DJDD
CUSTOMTABle DC DELAY DJDIRAC
CUSTom DCD DELETE DMINus
CWD DCDC DELETEALL DMSGEnd
CYCLE DCP1W2 DELEte DNS
CYCLEAmp DCPWR DELIMiter DOFFSet
CYCLEBase DCR DELTA DOMAINname
CYCLECount DCREJ DELTATime DOMain
CYCLEMAX DCRType DELTa DONTInclude
CYCLEMin DCSGLONGWRITE DELTatime DONTcare
CYCLEMode DCSLONGREAD DELay DOTsonly
CYCLEPKPK DCSR DELete DOUBLE
CYCLETop DCSSRR DELeteqstring DPHY
CYCLEcount DCSSW DELta DPLUs
CYCLemode DDJ DESE DPMOVERSHOOT
ChipSelect DDR DESKEW DPMRIPPLE
Chx_Dx DDR3 DESKew DPMTURNOFFTIME
ClockEdge DDRAOS DEST DPMTURNONTIME
Current DDRAOSPERTCK DESTination DPMUNDERSHOOT
D DDRAOSPERUI DESTinationaddr DPlus
DADDr DDRAUS DESTinationport DQ0
DAMPing DDRAUSPERTCK DEVERRor DQDQS
DATA DDRAUSPERUI DEVICEChirp DRIVE
DATA0 DDRHOLDDIFF DEVICEDESCMASTERREAd DRIve
DATA1 DDRREAD DEVICEDESCSLAVEREAd DSI
DATA2 DDRREADWRITE DEVICETYPe DSIBLANk
DATAA DDRREADWrite DEVICEType DSINULL
DATAB DDRRead DEVicetype DUty
DATABITS DDRSETUPDIFF DHCPbootp DVBYDT
DATABITs DDRTCHABS DIAg DVDT
DATABits DDRTCHAVERAGE DIBYDT DVM
DATAFORMat DDRTCKAVERAGE DIDT DWORd
DATAFORmat DDRTCLABS DIFF DYNAMIC
DATAFormat DDRTCLAVERAGE DIFFerential DYNAMic
DATAMINUS DDRTDQSCK DIGGRPlt;x> DYNRange
DATAMINUSTHRESHOLD DDRTERRMN DIR DeltaB
DATAMINUSTHRESHold DDRTERRN DIRECTPacket DeltaH
DATAPLUS DDRTJITCC DIRacmodel Dlt;x>
DATAPLUSTHRESHold DDRTJITDUTY DIRect EACHCLOCKCYCLE
DATAPacket DDRTJITPER DIRection EBIT
DATAPath DDRTPST DISCMODe EBITVALue
DATARATE DDRTRPRE DISCrete ECC
DATARate DDRTWPRE DISLave ECL
DATASource DDRVIXAC DISPLAY ECU

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual B-3

Appendix B: Reserved Words

ECUDATa EOp EYERender FIFTy

ECUSENSor EQUal EYEWIDTHBER FIFTyhz
ECUSOURce EQUation EYEhistogram FIFty
EDECAy EQual Efficiency1 FILE
EDGE EQualNOTEQual Efficiency2 FILEDest
EDGEIncre ERISe Efficiency3 FILEFormat
EDGEQUALONE ERROR Equals FILEName
EDGEQUALTWO ERRORREPort Execute FILESYSTEM
EDGEQUALifier ERRORTYPe F1MAG FILESystem
EDGES ERROr F2 FILTERRANGEFROM
EDGESOURce ERRTYPE F3MAG FILTERRANGETO
EDGESource ERRTYPe F4 FILTer
EDGEType ERRType F8 FILTers
EDGElt;x> ERRor FACtory FILepath
EDGe ERRors FAIL FIRST
EFFICIENCY ESCAPEMODe FAILCount FIVE
EFFiciency ESIBit FALL FIVEHundred
EIGHTBIT ET FALLHigh FIXED
EIGHTHUNDREdhz ETHERNET FALLING FIXed
EITHER ETHERnet FALLLow FLATNESS
EITHer ETHernet FALLMid FLATTOP2
EITher EUSB FALLSLEWRATE FLATtop2
EMBEDDED EVEN FALLTIME FLAg
ENABle EVENT FALLing FLEXRAY
ENAble EVENTBYTe FALSe FLEXray
ENAbled EVENTS FALling FLIP
ENCdg EVENTtable FAMILYCODe FLYBACK
ENCoding EVERY FAST FOLDer
END EVMsg FASTAcq FONT
ENDPoint EVQty FASTERthan FONTSize
ENDSEARch EXCURsion FASTer FORCEDRange
ENDtime EXECUTEQUEue FASTframe FORCe
ENET EXECute FAst FORMERRor
ENET100 EXITSWindow FBD1 FORMat
ENET1000 EXPLICITCLOCK FBD2 FORWard
ENGineering EXPLICITCLOCKMODe FBD3 FOUR
ENHANCED4 EXPORTRaw FC1063 FOURBIT
ENHANCED8 EXTAtten FC133 FOURHUNDREDHZ
ENSLave EXTDBatten FC2125 FOURHUNDREdhz
ENTERSWindow EXTENDED FC266 FOURHundred
ENTRDya EXTENDed FC4250 FOURTEENten
ENTRTSTMode EXTENDuis FC531 FP
ENTasx EXTREGREAd FC8500 FPAnel
ENVelope EXTREGWRIte FCS FPBinary
ENable EXTUnits FCSError FRAME
EOF EXTended FD FRAMECONTrol
EOFTYPE EXTernal FDBITS FRAMEEND
EOP EXTime FDISO FRAMEID
EOPBITS EYEDIAGRAM FDNONISO FRAMELENgth
EOT EYEHIGH FFT FRAMEREJ
EOTP EYELOW FIBREchannel FRAMESTARt
EOTPDATa EYEMASK FIFTY FRAMETYPe
EOW EYERENDER FIFTYHZ FRAMEType

B-4 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix B: Reserved Words

FRAMEtype GETSlave HIGHLimit IMAGinary

FRAMING GLOBal HIGHPass IMDA
FRAMe GLOBalref HIGHREFVoltage IMDAACQTREND
FRAme GLONGREAD HIGHTIME IMDADQ0
FREFerence GLONGWRITE HIGHZ IMDAEFFICIENCY
FREQ GLObal HIRes IMDAHARMONICS
FREQBYTe GM HISTOGRAM IMDAINPUTCURRENT
FREQUENCY GMT HIStory IMDAINPUTPOWER
FREQ[1-10]Val GPKNOB1 HITDMVALue IMDAINPUTVOLTAGE
FREQ[1-11]Val GPKNOB2 HITS IMDALINERIPPLE
FREQuency GR HITType IMDAPHASORDIAGRAM
FROM GRATICULE HIVALue IMDAPLOTDisplay
FROMEDGESEARCHDIRect GRATicule HOLD IMDAPOWERQUALITY
FROMLevel GRAticule HOLDTime IMDASWITCHRIPPLE
FROMSearch GREATERthan HOLDoff IMDATIMETREND
FROMSymbol GREen HOMEDir IMPEDANCE
FROMedge GRIDTYPE HORDer IMPEDance
FRame GRIDlines HORIZontalscale IN
FULL GRId HORZ INACCBYTe
FULLSPEED GROUPDelay HORZPOS INCLUDEREFs
FULLScreen GSLSb HORZScale INCLUde
FULl GSMSb HORizontal INCLude
FUNCTIONCODETYPe GSP HOSTChirp INDBits
FUNCTIONCODe GSRR HOTJoin INDEPENDENT
FUNCtion GSW HS INDUCT
FUNDCURRent H HSOURce INDUCTANCE
FW1394BS1600B HAMMing HSYNCEND INDex
FW1394BS400B HANDSHAKEPacket HSYNCSTART INFILTers
FW1394BS800B HANDSHAKEType HUB INFInite
False HANNing HUNDREDBASETX INFMAXimum
GAIN HARMONICS HUNdred INFMINimum
GAINCROSSOVERFREQ HARMONICSCLass HYSTeresis INFPersist
GAP HARMONICSSOURce HYSteresis INFormation
GATESOurce HARMONICSStd Hc INIT
GATEWay HARMONICSUNits Hmax INPUT
GATing HAVERSINe I2C INPUTCAP
GAUSSian HBArs I2S INPUTLEVel
GAUSsian HDRCapability I3C INPUTMode
GENIPADDress HDRExit IBA2500 INPUTPOwer
GENerator HDRRestart IBA_GEN2 INPUTSOurce
GET HEADER ICFACTOR INPUTType
GETBusch HEADer ID INPWR
GETDevch HEIGHT IDANDDATA INPWRSUM
GETMRdl HEIGHTBER IDFORmat INPut
GETMWrl HEIGht IDLE INRUSH
GETPrid HEX IDLETime INRUSHcurrent
GETReg HEXAgon IDLe INSIDEGreater
GETRegpktalert HFRej IDentifier INSIDErange
GETRegpktbad HI IEC INSTR
GETRegpktrecent HID IEEE519 INSTall
GETRegtestcfg HIGH ILEVELAbs INTENSITy
GETRegvendor HIGHLEVel ILEVELPct INTERNal
GETRegvrevent HIGHLevel IMAGe INTERPRatio

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual B-5

Appendix B: Reserved Words

INTERRUPT LAYout LONGEXTREGWRIte MASTERREAd

INTERnal LDIR LOOP MASTERWRIte
INTERp LEFt LOOPBandwidth MASTer
INTernal LENGth LORENtz MATCHROM
INVERTColor LENgth LOW MATH
INVERTNIBble LESSEQual LOWDATAMINus MATHArbfltlt;x>
INVERTed LESSLimit LOWDATAPLUS MATHFFTViewlt;n>
INVErted LESSThan LOWERFREQuency MATHFFTViewlt;x>
INVert LESSthan LOWLevel MATHFFTx
INVerted LEVELUNIts LOWLimit MATHlt;x>
INputs LEVel LOWPass MATHx
INrange LF LOWREFVoltage MATlab
IO LFREQuency LOWSPEED MAX
IOUT1SOUrce LFRej LOWTHRESHold MAXCAS
IOUT2SOUrce LIC LOWTIME MAXCycle
IOUT3SOUrce LICENSE LOWer MAXFRames
IPADDress LICense LOWerthreshold MAXHold
IPHeader LIMIT LP MAXIMUM
IPOWer LIMITCount LPDDR3 MAXPSRR
IPVFOUR LIMit LPDT MAXPSRRFREQ
IRMS LIN LPS666 MAXREAD
IRipple LINE LPTHRESHold MAXRETSIZE
ISCLOCKED LINEAR LPYCBCR24 MAXRTURN
ISOALL LINEAr LRIPPKPK MAXSamplerate
ISOEND LINEEND LRIPRMS MAXTIMe
ISOMID LINEFREQUEncy LSB MAXVoltage
ISOSTART LINERIPPLE LSLave MAXWRITe
ISOURce LINESTARt LXI MAXimum
ISOUrce LINESelected LogicState MDATA
ISOchronous LINear MAC MDATASpeed
ITALIC LIST MACADDRess MDIO
ITALic LJ MACLENgth ME
ITEM LOAd MAG MEAN
IVSINTEGRALV LOCKCenter MAGLOSS MEANAUTOCalculate
IVSINTV LOCKRJ MAGNETICLOSS MEANhistogram
InputPwr LOCKRJValue MAGNITUDE MEAS
Inrange LOCKSpectrum MAGNitude MEAS1
J2 LOCk MAGPROPERTY MEASRange
J9 LOG MAINWindow MEASTABle
JITTERMODE LOGARITHM MAIn MEASU
JITTERSUMMARY LOGIC MANChester MEASUREAT
JITTERSummary LOGIC1SOUrce MANUAL MEASUrement
JITTermodel LOGIC2SOUrce MANual MEASlt;x>
JPG LOGIC3SOUrce MARKER MEASured
JTFBandwidth LOGIC4SOUrce MARgin MEASurement
KAISERBessel LOGIC5SOUrce MASK MEASx
KAISerbessel LOGICPattern MASKFail MEDian
L LOGICQUALification MASKHit MEDium
L2LTOL2N LOGICSource MASKOffset MEMORY
LABELANDDATA LOGIc MASKPass MESSaging
LABel LOGic MASKfile METHod
LAN LONG MASKlt;x> MID
LATCh LONGEXTREGREAd MASTERADDRess MIDRef

B-6 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix B: Reserved Words

MIL NEGAtive NUMOUTputs OUTPUT4

MIL1553B NEGative NUMSEQuence OUTPUT4SOURce
MIN NETWORKCONFig NWIDTH OUTPUT4VOLTage
MINCas NEWpass NWIDTTH OUTPUT5
MINCycle NEXT NYET OUTPUT5SOURce
MINHold NIBBLECount None OUTPUT5VOLTage
MINIMUM NIBBLe OC1 OUTPUT6
MINImum NO OC12 OUTPUT6SOURce
MINMax NOCARE OC3 OUTPUT6VOLTage
MINPSRR NOISEAdd OC48 OUTPUT7
MINPSRRFREQ NOISErej OCCURS OUTPUT7SOURce
MINUI NOISe ODD OUTPUT7VOLTage
MINimum NOMINALOFFset ODDEVen OUTPUTSOurce
MISo NOMinal OFF OUTPUTType
MIXED NOMinalfreq OFF1 OUTPUTlt;n>VOLTage
MIXEDASCII NONE OFFSet OUTPWR
MIXEDHEX NONTRANsition ON OUTPWRSUM
MIXed NONe ONCE OUTPut
MKDir NOPARity ONE OUTSIDEGreater
MODE NOR ONEOVERDELTATVALUE OUTSIDErange
MODEhistogram NORESPonse ONEPAIRI OUTSOURCE
MODe NORMALColor ONEPAIRV OUTWIRing
MODel NORMal ONEPAIRVI OUTrange
MODulo NORmal ONEWIRe OUTside
MOREEQua NOSTATion ONFAIL OVERDRIVEMATCh
MOREEQual NOTE OPCODEERRor OVERDRIVESKIP
MOREEQualINrange NOTEQuals OPCode OVERDRIVe
MORELimit NOVERSHOOT OPERating OVERLoad
MOREThan NOne OPPositeas OVERRide
MOREthan NPERIOD OPTIMIZation OVERlay
MOSFET NPJ OPTIMize OVErdrive
MOSi NPULSE OPTIONALPARam OVErlay
MOUNT NPULSEWIDTH OPTion Output1Pwr
MOVEABLE NR1 OPTional Output2Pwr
MSB NR2 OR Output3Pwr
MULTiply NR3 OUT P1W2V1I1
MULtipleframes NRZ OUTEDGEQUALifier P1W3V2I2
Manual NR_Pt OUTFILTers P3W3
Mathlt;x> NTIMES OUTL2LTOL2N P3W3V2I2
Mathx NTIMes OUTLINESelected P3W3V3I3
N NULL OUTPUT P3W4
NACK NULLFRDynamic OUTPUT1 PACKET
NAK NULLFRStatic OUTPUT1SOURce PACKets
NAME NULl OUTPUT1Type PALEtte
NAMe NUMACQs OUTPUT1VOLTage PANKNOB
NAND NUMACq OUTPUT2 PARItyerror
NANd NUMAVg OUTPUT2SOURce PARallel
NATive NUMBer OUTPUT2Type PARity
NAVigate NUMBins OUTPUT2VOLTage PASSFAILENabled
NDUTY NUMCHANnel OUTPUT3 PASSFAILHIGHlimit
NDUTYCYCLE NUMERICORDer OUTPUT3SOURce PASSFAILLIMit
NDUtY NUMFRAMESACQuired OUTPUT3Type PASSFAILLOWlimit
NDUty NUMOFOutputs OUTPUT3VOLTage PASSFAILMARgin

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual B-7

Appendix B: Reserved Words

PASSFAILWHEN PLL PRIOD RATE19K

PASSWord PLOT PROBECOntrol RATE1K
PATTERNDETECTION PLOTData PROBECal RATE1M
PATTERNLENgth PLOTVIEWlt;x> PROBEFunc RATE20K
PATTERNTYPe PLOTVIEWx PROFile RATE250K
PATTern PLOTViewlt;n> PROTOCol RATE25K
PAUSE PLOTViewlt;x> PROTOcol RATE2K
PAUSEPULSe PLOTlt;x> PROTocol RATE2M
PAUSe PLOTx PRObe RATE300
PAYLENgth PM PSIFIVe RATE31K
PAYLOAD PNG PSRR RATE33K
PAYLength PNJUNCTION PTYPe RATE38K
PAYLoad POHCL PT_Fmt RATE3M
PAYload POHCM PT_Off RATE400K
PCIE_GEN1 POHCS PULSEWIDTh RATE4K
PCIE_GEN2 POINT PULSEWidth RATE4M
PCIE_GEN3 POINTS PULSe RATE500K
PCIExpress POLARITY PULse RATE50K
PDUTTY POLarity PWIDTH RATE5M
PDUTY POPUlation PWRFACTOR RATE62K
PDUTYCYCLE PORT PWRFREQ RATE68K
PEAK PORTConfiguration PWRUpstatus RATE6M
PEAKCURRent PORTReset ParaltBlockgt RATE7M
PEAKVOLTage POSITIVe Permeability RATE800K
PEAKdetect POST QFACTOR RATE83K
PERCent POSTAMBLE QString RATE8M
PERFREQ POSition QStringNR1 RATE921K
PERIOD POSitive QStringQString RATE92K
PERIod POVERSHOOT QTAG RATE9K
PERSistence POWERFACtor QTAGGING RATE9M
PERSource POWERQUALITY QUALifier RATed
PFACtor POWERRating QUAlifier RAW10
PFC POWERx Qstring RAW12
PHASE POWLINear RADians RAW14
PHASECROSSOVERFREQ POWLOG RAIL17 RAW16
PHASENOISE POWer RAILNUM RAW20
PHASEONE POWerlt;x> RAMP RAW6
PHASETHREE PPD RAMPtime RAW7
PHASETWO PPS101010 RANDom RAW8
PHASOR PPS121212 RAP RBW
PHASe PPS565 RAPDATa RBWMode
PHYSICALADDRess PPS666 RATE100K RCURRent
PHYSicaladdress PPS888 RATE10K RDS
PICPARameter PPULSE RATE10M RDSON
PID PPULSEWIDTH RATE115K RDSOn
PING PREAMBLE RATE11M READ
PIXELNUMBer PRESET RATE125K READFile
PIXELVALue PRESS RATE12M READROM
PIXel PREViewstate RATE13M READout
PJ PREVious RATE14M READy
PK2PK PREamble RATE153K REAL
PK2Pk PREsence RATE15M RECAll
PKPK PRIMARYTURNs RATE16M RECAllmask

B-8 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix B: Reserved Words

RECORD REQUested RMS SCRambling

RECORDLength RERUN RNR SDATa
RECOrdlength RESAMPLE ROLL SDI
RECTANGLE RESAMPLErate ROLOCATION SDIDATA
RECTANGular RESERVed ROMCODe SDIDATASSM
RECTangle RESET ROSc SDLC
RECTangular RESETTRIGger ROTAtion SDR
RED RESOlution RP SDRBroadcast
REF RESPONSECODe RPBinary SDRDirect
REFERence RESPonse RR SE
REFFFTViewlt;n> RESPonsetime RRBDisplaystate SEARCH
REFFFTViewlt;x> RESUME RS232C SEARCH1
REFFFTx RESUlt RSTDya SEARCHOPTion
REFLEVELMode RESUlts RUN SEARCHROM
REFLevel RESample RUNSTop SEARCHSource
REFLevels RESet RUNT SEARCHTABle
REFLevelslt;x> RESistance RUNt SEARCHTable
REFMode RF_AVErage RWINADDR SEARCHlt;x>
REFOUT RF_FREQuency RX SEARCHtotrigger
REFVOLTAGElt;n>Val RF_FREQuencylt;x> S8B10B SEARCHx>
REFVoltage RF_MAGnitude SADDress SEARch
REFerence RF_MAGnitudelt;x> SAME SEC1SOURce
REFlt;x> RF_MAXHold SAMEas SEC1TURNs
REFlt;x>_DALL RF_MINHold SAMPLERate SEC2SOURce
REFlt;x>_Dlt;x> RF_NORMal SAMPLEpoint SEC2TURNs
REFx RF_PHASe SAMple SEC3SOURce
REFx_Dx RF_PHASelt;x> SAS12_NOSSC SEC3TURNs
REG0WRIte RFvsTime SAS12_SSC SEC4SOURce
REGAddrtestconfg RGB444 SAS15_NOSSC SEC4TURNs
REGAddrvendor RGB555 SAS15_SSC SEC5SOURce
REGDatatestconfg RGB565 SAS3_NOSSC SEC5TURNs
REGDatavendor RGB666 SAS3_SSC SEC6SOURce
REGISTERADDRess RGB888 SAS6_NOSSC SEC6TURNs
REGREAd RI SAS6_SSC SECOND
REGWRIte RIBinary SATA_GEN1 SECOnds
REGion RIGht SATA_GEN2 SECPhase
REGister RIO125 SATA_GEN3 SECVolt
REGisteraddress RIO250 SAVEIMAGe SECWINDings
REJ RIO3125 SAVEON SEConds
REJect RIPPLEFREQlt;n>Val SAVEONEVent SEGlt;x>
REM RISE SAVEWAVEform SEGlt;x>COUNT
REMote RISEHigh SAVe SEGlt;y>
REName RISELow SAVemask SELECTED
REPEATERHOSt RISEMid SC SELECTIONtype
REPEATERPERIPHERAL RISESLEWRATE SCALE SELTrace
REPEATStart RISETIME SCALERATio SELect
REPEATstart RISING SCALe SELected
REPOrt RISe SCAle SENSORADDRess
REPWR RISing SCIentific SENSORECU
REPWRSUM RJ SCLk SENSORSTATus
REPeating RJDD SCOPEApp REBOOT SENSor
REQDISConnect RJDIRAC SCRAMBLING SENT
REQSETINIT RMDir SCREEN SEQSETup

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual B-9

Appendix B: Reserved Words

SEQnum SIXTEENeight SPECtrum STOPACQ

SEQuence SIXTYHZ SPI STOPAcq
SERIALNUMBer SIXTyhz SPLIT STOPAfter
SERVICE SIXty SPLITMODE STOPFREQuency
SERVICEMODe SIZE SPLit STOPFrequency
SERVICENAMe SIZe SPMI STROBE
SERnumber SKEW SPREADSheet STROBESource
SESsion SKIPROM SPace STRObe
SET SLAVE SQUELCH STRobe
SETBrt SLAVEADDRess SQUare STYPe
SETDecay SLAVe SRIbinary STYle
SETDya SLEEP SRJ STandard
SETFast SLEWRATEMethod SRPbinary STop
SETHOLDLogicval SLEep SRQ SUBADdress
SETHold SLOW SS SUBGROUP
SETLevel SLOWERthan SSC SUBNETMask
SETMrdl SLOWer SSCFREQDEV SUBSF
SETMwrl SLOpe SSCMODRATE SUBTYPe
SETNdya SMPS SSCPROFILE SUBtract
SETPs SNAp SSM SUMFrame
SETRegaddr SNRM SSPLIT SUPPORTBYTe
SETRegdata SNRME STADDress SUPPress
SETSlow SOA STALL SUPervisory
SETTime SOAHITSCNT STANDard SUSPEND
SETUP SOCKETServer STANdard SV
SETUp SOF START SVID
SETWp SOFFRAMENUMber STARTBIT SWITCHING
SEText SOT STARTCONDition SWITCHINGLOSS
SEVEN SOURCE STARTFREQUEncy SWITCHINGRIPPLE
SFD SOURCEEDGEType STARTFREQuency SWL
SFPbinary SOURCELIst STARTFrequency SWLCONFIGType
SHAPE SOURCETYpe STARTPACKet SWRIPPKPK
SHORt SOURCEs STARTofframe SWRIPRMS
SHOWAReas SOURce STARTtime SYMB
SHOWCRiteria SOUrce STARTup SYMBol
SHOWEQuation SOUrceaddr STARTupnosync SYMbol
SHOrt SOUrcelt;x> STARt SYMbols
SHUTDOWN SOUrceport STATE SYMmetry
SHUTdown SOW STATEBYTe SYNC
SI SPACEWIRe STATIC SYNCBITS
SIGNAL SPAN STATIONADDr SYNCFrame
SIGNALFREQUEncy SPANABovebw STATIstics SYNCMODe
SIGNALTYpe SPANBELowdc STATUS SYNCSEARch
SIGNALType SPANRBWRatio STATe SYNCTHRESHold
SIGNal SPEC STATic SYNCfield
SIGnal SPECIALPacket STATus SYSTEM
SINC SPECIALType STAYSHigh Start
SINE SPECTRAL STAYSLow Stop
SINGLE SPECTRALBUJ STAcked String
SINX SPECTRUM STAndard Symbol
SIX SPECTral STDDev TARGETBER
SIXBIT SPECViewlt;x> STEPRESPONSE TBIT
SIXFIFTyhz SPECtral STOP TBITRDNeg

B-10 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix B: Reserved Words

TBITRDPos TOLERance TYPe VERTSCALE

TBITVALue TOLerance TotalEfficiency VERTical
TCKAVG TOLevel True VERsion
TCPHeader TONENRG U VGLevel
TDM TONLOSS UACK VIEW
TDMVALue TOOTHGAP UI VIEWStyle
TEKEXPonential TOP ULPS VIEWTYpe
TEKSecure TOSYmbol UNDERLine VISIBility
TEMPerature TOTAL UNDERline VISual
TENBASET TOTALEFFiciency UNDO VLEVELAbs
TENNinety TOTaluptime UNEQual VLEVELPct
TERMinal TOUCHSCReen UNINSTALL VOLTAGE
TERmination TRACK UNIQue VOLTage
TEST TRAILER UNITINTERVAL VOUT1SOUrce
TESTCONNection TRANSferbusownership UNITINtervals VOUT2SOUrce
TESTMODe TRANSition UNITIntervals VOUT3SOUrce
TESTmode TRANsition UNITs VRMS
TESt TRANstion UNIts VSOURce
TEXT TRAPezoid UNLock VSOUrce
TF TRAiler UNLocked VSYNCEND
THDF TRBit UNMOUNT VSYNCSTART
THDR TRIAngle UNNumbered VTERm
THIRD TRIGLevel UNWRap VUNIT
THREE TRIGger UP WAITTime
THREEPHASEAUTOset TRIGgertosearch<! UPDatenow WAKEup
THREESIXTyhz TRPWR UPPERFREQuency WAKeup
THRESHold TRPWRSUM UPPer WAVEFORM
THReshold TRUEPWR UPPerthreshold WAVEVIEW1
TICKTIME TRUe USAGe WAVEView
TICKTOLerance TRack USB WAVEViewlt;x>
TICKs TTL USB3 WAVEViewlt;y>
TIE TTLENRG USBDevice WAVEform
TIEHISTOGRAM TTLLOSS USBTmc WAVEforms
TIESPECTRUM TURN USECLockedge WAVFrm
TIETIMETREND TURNOFFtime USEClockedge WEIGht
TIMECode TURNON USEGLOBAL WFId
TIMEOUTSIDELEVEL TURNONTIME USEREIGHTB WFMOutpre
TIMEOut TURNONtime UTCDELTa WFMTYPe
TIMEStamp TWELVEtwelve V WHEn
TIMETOMAX TWENTYBIT V1X WIDTH
TIMETOMIN TWENtyeighty V2X WIDTHBER
TIMETREND TWENtyfive VALUe WIDth
TIMINGMode TWO VALidate WINDOW
TIMe TWOBIT VALue WINDOWLENgth
TJBER TWOCLOCKCYCLES VARpersist WINSCALe
TNTRATIO TWOFifty VBArs WINdow
TO TWOThousand VCESat WIRing
TOEDGESEARCHDIRect TX VCFACTOR WIThin
TOEdge TXRX VDIFFXOVR WORD
TOFFENRG TXRXTHRESHold VECtors WORDCOUNt
TOFFLOSS TYPE VERBose WORDSIZe
TOKENPacket TYPE1 VERTICES WORDSel
TOKENType TYPE2 VERTPOS WORDSize

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual B-11

Appendix B: Reserved Words

WRAP XZEro YXZX file_pathdata

WRITE XZYZ YZEro forward
WRITEFile Y ZERo harmonics
WRITe YAXIS ZN ltasccurvegtPara
Word YCBCR ZONe name
X YCBCR12 ZOOM new_working_directory_path
XAUI YCBCR16 ZOOMNR1 old_file_pathnew_file_path
XAUI_GEN2 YCBCR24 ZOOMOVERride packetOffData
XAXIS YES ZOOMlt;x> parity
XAXISUnits YMUlt Zoom reverse
XFF YN _FREQ_VS_TIME source_file_pathdestination_
XID YOFf _MAG_VS_TIME sourcefileMASKx
XINcr YPOS _PHASE_VS_TIME sourcefiledestination
XN YPOSition _SV_AVErage v1
XPOS YUNIT _SV_MAXHold v2
XPOSition YUNit _SV_MINHold wfmwfm
XUNIT YUV _SV_NORMal x
XUNit YUV420B10 block_data x201cMASKxx201d
XY YUV420L8 boolean x201cNR3NR3NR3NR3NR3NR3NR3N
XYZ YUV422B10 directory_path x201cPOWERxx201d
XYZY YUV8BIT file_path

B-12 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Default Setup
The following table lists the default values for each command.

NOTE. Find the most up-to-date default values for your instrument and software
by performing a TekSecure command, saving the instrument setup and looking
at the instrument or setup file.

Table C-1: Default Values

Item Description
ACQUIRE:FASTACQ:PALETTE TEMPERATURE
ACQUIRE:FASTACQ:STATE 0
ACQUIRE:MAGNIVU 0
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 16
ACQUIRE:NUMENV INFINITE
ACQUIRE:STATE 1
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP
ACTONEVENT:ACTION:AUXOUT:STATE 0
ACTONEVENT:ACTION:EMAIL:SETUP:TOADDRESS "TestString"
ACTONEVENT:ACTION:EMAIL:STATE 0
ACTONEVENT:ACTION:PRINT:STATE 0
ACTONEVENT:ACTION:SAVEIMAGE:STATE 0
ACTONEVENT:ACTION:SAVEWFM:STATE 0
ACTONEVENT:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 0
ACTONEVENT:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE 1
ACTONEVENT:ACTION:VISUAL:STATE 0
ACTONEVENT:EVENTTYPE NONE
ACTONEVENT:NUMACQS 1
ACTONEVENT:REPEATCOUNT 1.0000
AFG:AMPLITUDE 500.0000E-3
AFG:ARBITRARY:EMEM:POINTS:ENCDG ASCII
AFG:FREQUENCY 100.0E+3
AFG:FUNCTION SINE
AFG:HIGHLEVEL 250.0000E-3
AFG:LEVELPRESET USER
AFG:LOWLEVEL -250.0000E-3

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-1

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
AFG:NOISEADD:PERCENT 0.0E+0
AFG:NOISEADD:STATE 0
AFG:OFFSET 0.0E+0
AFG:OUTPUT:LOAD:IMPEDANCE HIGHZ
AFG:PERIOD 9.9999999999916E-6
AFG:PHASE 0.0E+0
AFG:PULSE:WIDTH 1.0E-6
AFG:RAMP:SYMMETRY 50.0000
AFG:SQUARE:DUTY 50.0000
ALIAS:STATE 0
APPLICATION:TYPE POWER
AUXOUT:EDGE RISING
AUXOUT:SOURCE ATRIGGER
BUS:B1:AUDIO:BITDELAY 1
BUS:B1:AUDIO:BITORDER MSB
BUS:B1:AUDIO:CHANNEL:SIZE 24
BUS:B1:AUDIO:CLOCK:POLARITY RISE
BUS:B1:AUDIO:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:POLARITY NORMAL
BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:SIZE 24
BUS:B1:AUDIO:DISPLAY:FORMAT SIGNEDDECIMAL
BUS:B1:AUDIO:FRAME:SIZE 8
BUS:B1:AUDIO:FRAMESYNC:POLARITY RISE
BUS:B1:AUDIO:FRAMESYNC:SOURCE CH2
BUS:B1:AUDIO:TYPE I2S
BUS:B1:AUDIO:WORDSEL:POLARITY NORMAL
BUS:B1:AUDIO:WORDSEL:SOURCE CH2
BUS:B1:CAN:BITRATE 500000
BUS:B1:CAN:FD:BITRATE 4000000
BUS:B1:CAN:FD:STANDARD ISO
BUS:B1:CAN:PROBE CANH
BUS:B1:CAN:SAMPLEPOINT 50
BUS:B1:CAN:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B1:CAN:STANDARD CAN2X
BUS:B1:DISPLAY:FORMAT HEXADECIMAL
BUS:B1:DISPLAY:TYPE BUS
BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:BITRATE 10000000

C-2 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CHANNEL A
BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:SIGNAL BDIFFBP
BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:RWINCLUDE 0
BUS:B1:I2C:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:SOURCE CH2
BUS:B1:LABEL "Parallel"
BUS:B1:LIN:BITRATE 19200
BUS:B1:LIN:IDFORMAT NOPARITY
BUS:B1:LIN:POLARITY NORMAL
BUS:B1:LIN:SAMPLEPOINT 50
BUS:B1:LIN:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B1:LIN:STANDARD V2X
BUS:B1:MIL1553B:POLARITY NORMAL
BUS:B1:MIL1553B:RESPONSETIME:MAXIMUM 12.0000E-6
BUS:B1:MIL1553B:RESPONSETIME:MINIMUM 4.0000E-6
BUS:B1:MIL1553B:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT0:SOURCE D0
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT10:SOURCE D10
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT11:SOURCE D11
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT12:SOURCE D12
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT13:SOURCE D13
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT14:SOURCE D14
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT15:SOURCE D15
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT16:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT17:SOURCE CH2
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT18:SOURCE CH3
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT19:SOURCE CH4
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT1:SOURCE D1
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT2:SOURCE D2
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT3:SOURCE D3
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT4:SOURCE D4
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT5:SOURCE D5
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT6:SOURCE D6
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT7:SOURCE D7
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT8:SOURCE D8
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT9:SOURCE D9

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-3

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:CLOCK:EDGE RISING
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:CLOCK:ISCLOCKED NO
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:WIDTH 16
BUS:B1:POSITION 0.0E+0
BUS:B1:RS232C:BITRATE 9600
BUS:B1:RS232C:DATABITS 8
BUS:B1:RS232C:DELIMITER LF
BUS:B1:RS232C:DISPLAYMODE FRAME
BUS:B1:RS232C:PARITY NONE
BUS:B1:RS232C:POLARITY NORMAL
BUS:B1:RS232C:RX:SOURCE OFF
BUS:B1:RS232C:TX:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B1:SPI:BITORDER MSB
BUS:B1:SPI:CLOCK:POLARITY RISE
BUS:B1:SPI:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:IN:POLARITY HIGH
BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:IN:SOURCE OFF
BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:OUT:POLARITY HIGH
BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:OUT:SOURCE CH3
BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:SIZE 8
BUS:B1:SPI:FRAMING SS
BUS:B1:SPI:IDLETIME 5.0000E-6
BUS:B1:SPI:SELECT:POLARITY LOW
BUS:B1:SPI:SELECT:SOURCE CH2
BUS:B1:STATE 0
BUS:B1:TYPE PARALLEL
BUS:B1:USB:BITRATE FULL
BUS:B1:USB:PROBE DIFFERENTIAL
BUS:B1:USB:SOURCE:DIFFERENTIAL CH1
BUS:B1:USB:SOURCE:DMINUS CH2
BUS:B1:USB:SOURCE:DPLUS CH1
BUS:B2:AUDIO:BITDELAY 1
BUS:B2:AUDIO:BITORDER MSB
BUS:B2:AUDIO:CHANNEL:SIZE 24
BUS:B2:AUDIO:CLOCK:POLARITY RISE
BUS:B2:AUDIO:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1

C-4 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
BUS:B2:AUDIO:DATA:POLARITY NORMAL
BUS:B2:AUDIO:DATA:SIZE 24
BUS:B2:AUDIO:DISPLAY:FORMAT SIGNEDDECIMAL
BUS:B2:AUDIO:FRAME:SIZE 8
BUS:B2:AUDIO:FRAMESYNC:POLARITY RISE
BUS:B2:AUDIO:FRAMESYNC:SOURCE CH2
BUS:B2:AUDIO:TYPE I2S
BUS:B2:AUDIO:WORDSEL:POLARITY NORMAL
BUS:B2:AUDIO:WORDSEL:SOURCE CH2
BUS:B2:CAN:BITRATE 500000
BUS:B2:CAN:FD:BITRATE 4000000
BUS:B2:CAN:FD:STANDARD ISO
BUS:B2:CAN:PROBE CANH
BUS:B2:CAN:SAMPLEPOINT 50
BUS:B2:CAN:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B2:CAN:STANDARD CAN2X
BUS:B2:DISPLAY:FORMAT HEXADECIMAL
BUS:B2:DISPLAY:TYPE BUS
BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:BITRATE 10000000
BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:CHANNEL A
BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:SIGNAL BDIFFBP
BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B2:I2C:ADDRESS:RWINCLUDE 0
BUS:B2:I2C:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B2:I2C:DATA:SOURCE CH2
BUS:B2:LABEL "Parallel"
BUS:B2:LIN:BITRATE 19200
BUS:B2:LIN:IDFORMAT NOPARITY
BUS:B2:LIN:POLARITY NORMAL
BUS:B2:LIN:SAMPLEPOINT 50
BUS:B2:LIN:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B2:LIN:STANDARD V2X
BUS:B2:MIL1553B:POLARITY NORMAL
BUS:B2:MIL1553B:RESPONSETIME:MAXIMUM 12.0000E-6
BUS:B2:MIL1553B:RESPONSETIME:MINIMUM 4.0000E-6
BUS:B2:MIL1553B:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT0:SOURCE D0

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-5

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT10:SOURCE D10
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT11:SOURCE D11
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT12:SOURCE D12
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT13:SOURCE D13
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT14:SOURCE D14
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT15:SOURCE D15
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT16:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT17:SOURCE CH2
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT18:SOURCE CH3
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT19:SOURCE CH4
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT1:SOURCE D1
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT2:SOURCE D2
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT3:SOURCE D3
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT4:SOURCE D4
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT5:SOURCE D5
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT6:SOURCE D6
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT7:SOURCE D7
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT8:SOURCE D8
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT9:SOURCE D9
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:CLOCK:EDGE RISING
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:CLOCK:ISCLOCKED NO
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:WIDTH 16
BUS:B2:POSITION 0.0E+0
BUS:B2:RS232C:BITRATE 9600
BUS:B2:RS232C:DATABITS 8
BUS:B2:RS232C:DELIMITER LF
BUS:B2:RS232C:DISPLAYMODE FRAME
BUS:B2:RS232C:PARITY NONE
BUS:B2:RS232C:POLARITY NORMAL
BUS:B2:RS232C:RX:SOURCE OFF
BUS:B2:RS232C:TX:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B2:SPI:BITORDER MSB
BUS:B2:SPI:CLOCK:POLARITY RISE
BUS:B2:SPI:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:IN:POLARITY HIGH
BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:IN:SOURCE OFF

C-6 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:OUT:POLARITY HIGH
BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:OUT:SOURCE CH3
BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:SIZE 8
BUS:B2:SPI:FRAMING SS
BUS:B2:SPI:IDLETIME 5.0000E-6
BUS:B2:SPI:SELECT:POLARITY LOW
BUS:B2:SPI:SELECT:SOURCE CH2
BUS:B2:STATE 0
BUS:B2:TYPE PARALLEL
BUS:B2:USB:BITRATE FULL
BUS:B2:USB:PROBE DIFFERENTIAL
BUS:B2:USB:SOURCE:DIFFERENTIAL CH1
BUS:B2:USB:SOURCE:DMINUS CH2
BUS:B2:USB:SOURCE:DPLUS CH1
BUS:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH1 0.0E+0
BUS:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH2 0.0E+0
BUS:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH3 0.0E+0
BUS:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH4 0.0E+0
BUS:LOWERTHRESHOLD:MATH 0.0E+0
BUS:LOWERTHRESHOLD:REF1 0.0E+0
BUS:LOWERTHRESHOLD:REF2 0.0E+0
BUS:LOWERTHRESHOLD:REF3 0.0E+0
BUS:LOWERTHRESHOLD:REF4 0.0E+0
BUS:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH1 800.0000E-3
BUS:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH2 800.0000E-3
BUS:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH3 800.0000E-3
BUS:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH4 800.0000E-3
BUS:UPPERTHRESHOLD:MATH 0.0E+0
BUS:UPPERTHRESHOLD:REF1 0.0E+0
BUS:UPPERTHRESHOLD:REF2 0.0E+0
BUS:UPPERTHRESHOLD:REF3 0.0E+0
BUS:UPPERTHRESHOLD:REF4 0.0E+0
CH1:AMPSVIAVOLTS:ENABLE 0
CH1:AMPSVIAVOLTS:FACTOR 10.0000
CH1:BANDWIDTH 1.0000E+9
CH1:COUPLING DC
CH1:DESKEW 0.0E+0

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-7

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
CH1:INVERT 0
CH1:LABEL ""
CH1:OFFSET 0.0E+0
CH1:POSITION 0.0E+0
CH1:PROBE:FORCEDRANGE 0.0E+0
CH1:PROBE:GAIN 1.0000
CH1:PROBE:PROPDELAY 0.0E+0
CH1:SCALE 100.0000E-3
CH1:TERMINATION 1.0000E+6
CH1:YUNITS "V"
CH2:AMPSVIAVOLTS:ENABLE 0
CH2:AMPSVIAVOLTS:FACTOR 10.0000
CH2:BANDWIDTH 1.0000E+9
CH2:COUPLING DC
CH2:DESKEW 0.0E+0
CH2:INVERT 0
CH2:LABEL ""
CH2:OFFSET 0.0E+0
CH2:POSITION 0.0E+0
CH2:PROBE:FORCEDRANGE 0.0E+0
CH2:PROBE:GAIN 1.0000
CH2:PROBE:PROPDELAY 0.0E+0
CH2:SCALE 100.0000E-3
CH2:TERMINATION 1.0000E+6
CH2:YUNITS "V"
CH3:AMPSVIAVOLTS:ENABLE 0
CH3:AMPSVIAVOLTS:FACTOR 10.0000
CH3:BANDWIDTH 1.0000E+9
CH3:COUPLING DC
CH3:DESKEW 0.0E+0
CH3:INVERT 0
CH3:LABEL ""
CH3:OFFSET 0.0E+0
CH3:POSITION 0.0E+0
CH3:PROBE:FORCEDRANGE 0.0E+0
CH3:PROBE:GAIN 1.0000
CH3:PROBE:PROPDELAY 0.0E+0

C-8 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
CH3:SCALE 100.0000E-3
CH3:TERMINATION 1.0000E+6
CH3:YUNITS "V"
CH4:AMPSVIAVOLTS:ENABLE 0
CH4:AMPSVIAVOLTS:FACTOR 10.0000
CH4:BANDWIDTH 1.0000E+9
CH4:COUPLING DC
CH4:DESKEW 0.0E+0
CH4:INVERT 0
CH4:LABEL ""
CH4:OFFSET 0.0E+0
CH4:POSITION 0.0E+0
CH4:PROBE:FORCEDRANGE 0.0E+0
CH4:PROBE:GAIN 1.0000
CH4:PROBE:PROPDELAY 0.0E+0
CH4:SCALE 100.0000E-3
CH4:TERMINATION 1.0000E+6
CH4:YUNITS "V"
CURSOR:FUNCTION OFF
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 0.0E+0
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION2 0.0E+0
CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS BASE
CURSOR:MODE INDEPENDENT
CURSOR:SOURCE AUTO
CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION1 -12.00E-6
CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION2 12.00E-6
CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS
CURSOR:XY:READOUT RECTANGULAR
CURSOR:XY:RECTANGULAR:X:POSITION1 0.0E+0
CURSOR:XY:RECTANGULAR:X:POSITION2 0.0E+0
CURSOR:XY:RECTANGULAR:Y:POSITION1 0.0E+0
CURSOR:XY:RECTANGULAR:Y:POSITION2 0.0E+0
D0:LABEL ""
D0:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D0:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D10:LABEL ""
D10:POSITION 80.0000E-3

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-9

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
D10:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D11:LABEL ""
D11:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D11:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D12:LABEL ""
D12:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D12:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D13:LABEL ""
D13:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D13:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D14:LABEL ""
D14:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D14:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D15:LABEL ""
D15:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D15:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D1:LABEL ""
D1:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D1:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D2:LABEL ""
D2:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D2:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D3:LABEL ""
D3:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D3:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D4:LABEL ""
D4:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D4:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D5:LABEL ""
D5:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D5:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D6:LABEL ""
D6:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D6:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D7:LABEL ""
D7:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D7:THRESHOLD 1.4000

C-10 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
D8:LABEL ""
D8:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D8:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D9:LABEL ""
D9:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D9:THRESHOLD 1.4000
DATA:DESTINATION REF1
DATA:ENCDG RIBINARY
DATA:SOURCE CH1
DATA:START 1
DATA:STOP 10000
DESKEW:DISPLAY 1
DISPLAY:CLOCK 1
DISPLAY:DIGITAL:ACTIVITY 0
DISPLAY:DIGITAL:HEIGHT MEDIUM
DISPLAY:GRATICULE FULL
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT HIGH
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT:AUTODIM:ENABLE 1
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT:AUTODIM:TIME 60
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:GRATICULE 75
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM 35
DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE 0.0E+0
DISPLAY:STYLE:DOTSONLY 0
DISPLAY:TRIGFREQUENCY 0
DISPLAY:XY OFF
DISPLAY:XY:WITHYT 0
DVM:AUTORANGE 0
DVM:DISPLAYSTYLE FULL
DVM:MODE OFF
DVM:SOURCE CH1
EMAIL:SETUP:FROMADDRESS "TestString"
EMAIL:SETUP:HOSTALIASNAME "TestString"
EMAIL:SETUP:SMTPLOGIN "TestString"
EMAIL:SETUP:SMTPPORT 25
EMAIL:SETUP:SMTPSERVER "TestString"
FASTACQ:STATE 0
HEADER 0

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-11

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
HISTOGRAM:BOXPCNT 20.0000,20.0000,80.0000,80.0000
HISTOGRAM:DISPLAY LINEAR
HISTOGRAM:MODE OFF
HISTOGRAM:SOURCE CH1
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE 1
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME 0.0E+0
HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 10000
4.0000E-6
LOCK NONE
MARKER:M1:FREQUENCY:ABSOLUTE 0.0E+0
MARKER:M2:FREQUENCY:ABSOLUTE 0.0E+0
MARKER:MANUAL 0
MARKER:PEAK:EXCURSION 30.0000
MARKER:PEAK:MAXIMUM 5
MARKER:PEAK:STATE 1
MARKER:PEAK:THRESHOLD -50.0000
MARKER:TYPE ABSOLUTE
MATH:AUTOSCALE 1
MATH:DEFINE "CH1+CH2"
MATH:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000
MATH: 4.0000E-6
MATH:HORIZONTAL:UNITS "s"
MATH:LABEL ""
MATH:SPECTRAL:MAG DB
MATH:SPECTRAL:WINDOW HANNING
MATH:TYPE DUAL
MATH:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E+0
MATH:VERTICAL:SCALE 100.0000E-3
MATH:VERTICAL:UNITS "V"
MATHVAR:VAR1 0.0E+0
MATHVAR:VAR2 0.0E+0
MEASUREMENT:GATING SCREEN
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION FORWARDS
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE2 RISE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE1 CH1

C-12 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2 CH2
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PERIOD
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:STATE OFF
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:DIRECTION FORWARDS
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE2 RISE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE1 CH1
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE2 CH2
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STATE 0
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE PERIOD
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:DELAY:DIRECTION FORWARDS
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:DELAY:EDGE2 RISE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE1 CH1
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE2 CH2
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:STATE 0
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:TYPE PERIOD
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:DIRECTION FORWARDS
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:EDGE2 RISE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:SOURCE1 CH1
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:SOURCE2 CH2
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:STATE 0
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:TYPE PERIOD
MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:DELAY:DIRECTION FORWARDS
MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:DELAY:EDGE2 RISE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:SOURCE1 CH1
MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:SOURCE2 CH2
MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:STATE 0
MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:TYPE PERIOD
MEASUREMENT:METHOD AUTO
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0E+0
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW 0.0E+0
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID1 0.0E+0
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2 0.0E+0
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD PERCENT

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-13

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90.0000
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW 10.0000
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID1 50.0000
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2 50.0000
MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:MODE ALL
MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:WEIGHTING 32
MESSAGE:BOX 167,67,167,83
MESSAGE:SHOW ""
MESSAGE:STATE 0
PICTBRIDGE:DATEPRINT DEFLT
PICTBRIDGE:IDPRINT OFF
PICTBRIDGE:IMAGESIZE DEFLT
PICTBRIDGE:PAPERSIZE DEFLT
PICTBRIDGE:PAPERTYPE DEFLT
PICTBRIDGE:PRINTQUAL DEFLT
REF1:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME 16.0000E-6
REF1: 4.0000E-6
REF1:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E+0
REF1:VERTICAL:SCALE 100.0000E-3
REF2:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME 16.0000E-6
REF2: 4.0000E-6
REF2:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E+0
REF2:VERTICAL:SCALE 100.0000E-3
REF3:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME 16.0000E-6
REF3: 4.0000E-6
REF3:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E+0
REF3:VERTICAL:SCALE 100.0000E-3
REF4:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME 16.0000E-6
REF4: 4.0000E-6
REF4:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E+0
REF4:VERTICAL:SCALE 100.0000E-3
ROSC:SOURCE INTERNAL
SAVE:ASSIGN:TYPE WAVEFORM
SAVE:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT PNG
SAVE:IMAGE:INKSAVER 1
SAVE:IMAGE:LAYOUT PORTRAIT
SAVE:WAVEFORM WFM

C-14 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
SAVE:WAVEFORM:GATING NONE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:STATE 0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:CONDITION SOF
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:OFFSET 0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:WORD EITHER
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:CONDITION SOF
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:OFFSET 0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FD:BRSBIT X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FD:ESIBIT X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FRAMETYPE DATA
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDENTIFIER:MODE STANDARD
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CONDITION SOF
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:HIVALUE "XXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:QUALIFIER EQUAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:VALUE "XXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:OFFSET -1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:EOFTYPE STATIC
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:ERRTYPE CRCHEADER
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:QUALIFIER EQUAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMETYPE NORMAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CRC "XXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CYCLECOUNT "XXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:FRAMEID "XXXXXXXXXXX"

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-15

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:INDBITS "XXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:PAYLENGTH "XXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR7
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:TYPE USER
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE "XXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:CONDITION START
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:CONDITION SYNCFIELD
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:ERRTYPE SYNC
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXXXX"
"XXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRESS:HIVALUE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRESS:QUALIFIER
EQUAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRESS:VALUE"XXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:COUNT "XXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:PARITY X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:SUBADDRESS "XXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:TRBIT X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:CONDITION SYNC
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:DATA:PARITY X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:ERRTYPE PARITY
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:ADDRESS:HIVALUE"XXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:ADDRESS:QUALIFIER
EQUAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:ADDRESS:VALUE "XXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:BCR X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:BUSY X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:DBCA X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:INSTR X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:ME X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:SRQ X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:SUBSF X

C-16 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:TF X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:PARITY X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:TIME:LESSLIMIT 4.0000E-6
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:TIME:MORELIMIT 12.0000E-6
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:TIME:QUALIFIER MORETHAN
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:PARALLEL:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:CONDITION TXSTART
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:RX:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:RX:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:TX:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:TX:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:CONDITION SS
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:MISO:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:MOSI:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ADDRESS:HIVALUE "XXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ADDRESS:VALUE "XXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:CONDITION SYNC
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:OFFSET -1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:TYPE ANY
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ENDPOINT:VALUE "XXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ERRTYPE PID
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:HANDSHAKETYPE ANY
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:QUALIFIER EQUAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:SOFFRAMENUMBER "XXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:SPECIALTYPE ANY
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:TOKENTYPE ANY
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:AUDIO:CONDITION SOF
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:AUDIO:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:AUDIO:DATA:OFFSET 0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:AUDIO:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:AUDIO:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:AUDIO:DATA:WORD EITHER
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:CONDITION SOF

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-17

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:OFFSET 0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:FD:BRSBIT X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:FD:ESIBIT X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:FRAMETYPE DATA
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:IDENTIFIER:MODE STANDARD
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:CONDITION SOF
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:HIVALUE "XXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:QUALIFIER EQUAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:VALUE "XXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:DATA:OFFSET -1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:EOFTYPE STATIC
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:ERRTYPE CRCHEADER
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:QUALIFIER EQUAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:FRAMETYPE NORMAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CRC "XXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CYCLECOUNT "XXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:HEADER:FRAMEID "XXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:HEADER:INDBITS "XXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:HEADER:PAYLENGTH "XXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR7
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:ADDRESS:TYPE USER
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE "XXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:CONDITION START
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"

C-18 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:CONDITION SYNCFIELD
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:ERRTYPE SYNC
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXXXX"
"XXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRESS:HIVALUE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRESS:QUALIFIER
EQUAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRESS:VALUE"XXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:COMMAND:COUNT "XXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:COMMAND:PARITY X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:COMMAND:SUBADDRESS "XXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:COMMAND:TRBIT X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:CONDITION SYNC
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:DATA:PARITY X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:ERRTYPE PARITY
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:STATUS:ADDRESS:HIVALUE"XXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:STATUS:ADDRESS:QUALIFIER
EQUAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:STATUS:ADDRESS:VALUE "XXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:BCR X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:BUSY X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:DBCA X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:INSTR X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:ME X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:SRQ X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:SUBSF X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:TF X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:STATUS:PARITY X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:TIME:LESSLIMIT 4.0000E-6
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:TIME:MORELIMIT 12.0000E-6
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:MIL1553B:TIME:QUALIFIER MORETHAN
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:PARALLEL:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:CONDITION TXSTART
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:RX:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:RX:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-19

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:TX:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:TX:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:CONDITION SS
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:MISO:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:MOSI:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:ADDRESS:HIVALUE "XXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:ADDRESS:VALUE "XXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:CONDITION SYNC
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:DATA:OFFSET -1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:DATA:TYPE ANY
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:ENDPOINT:VALUE "XXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:ERRTYPE PID
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:HANDSHAKETYPE ANY
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:QUALIFIER EQUAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:SOFFRAMENUMBER "XXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:SPECIALTYPE ANY
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:TOKENTYPE ANY
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SOURCE B1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE RISE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LEVEL 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH1 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH2 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH3 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH4 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:MATH 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:REF1 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:REF2 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:REF3 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:REF4 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION AND
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH2 X

C-20 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH3 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH4 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CLOCK:EDGE RISE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CLOCK:SOURCE NONE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D0 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D1 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D10 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D11 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D12 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D13 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D14 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D15 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D2 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D3 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D4 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D5 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D6 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D7 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D8 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D9 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:MATH X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:REF1 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:REF2 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:REF3 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:REF4 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D0 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D1 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D10 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D11 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D12 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D13 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D14 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D15 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D2 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D3 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D4 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D5 X

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-21

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D6 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D7 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D8 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D9 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN TRUE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:LESSLIMIT 8.0000E-9
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:MORELIMIT 8.0000E-9
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH2 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH3 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH4 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:MATH 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:REF1 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:REF2 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:REF3 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:REF4 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH1 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH2 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH3 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH4 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:MATH 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:REF1 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:REF2 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:REF3 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:REF4 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:HIGHLIMIT 12.0000E-9
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:LOWLIMIT 8.0000E-9
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:POLARITY POSITIVE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:WHEN LESSTHAN
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:WIDTH 8.0000E-9
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WIDTH 8.0000E-9
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE RISE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE NONE

C-22 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD 9.91E+37
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 8.0000E-9
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:SETTIME 8.0000E-9
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:CH1 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:CH2 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:CH3 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:CH4 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:MATH 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:REF1 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:REF2 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:REF3 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:REF4 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:POLARITY STAYSHIGH
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:TIME 8.0000E-9
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:DELTATIME 8.0000E-9
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:POLARITY POSITIVE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:WHEN SLOWER
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TYPE EDGE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH1 800.0000E-3
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH2 800.0000E-3
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH3 800.0000E-3
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH4 800.0000E-3
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:MATH 800.0000E-3
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:REF1 800.0000E-3
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:REF2 800.0000E-3
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:REF3 800.0000E-3
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:REF4 800.0000E-3
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:OFFSet 0
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BRSBIT X
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:ESIBIT X
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:CONDITION SOF
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:OFFSET 0
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:WORD EITHER
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:CONDITION SOF

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-23

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:OFFSET 0
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:START 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FD:BRSBIT X
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FD:ESIBIT X
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FRAMETYPE DATA
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDENTIFIER:MODE STANDARD
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CONDITION SOF
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:HIVALUE "XXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:QUALIFIER EQUAL
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:VALUE "XXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:OFFSET -1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:EOFTYPE STATIC
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:ERRTYPE CRCHEADER
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:QUALIFIER EQUAL
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMETYPE NORMAL
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CRC "XXXXXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CYCLECOUNT "XXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:FRAMEID "XXXXXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:INDBITS "XXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:PAYLENGTH "XXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR7
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:TYPE USER
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE "XXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:CONDITION START
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:SIZE 1

C-24 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:START 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:CONDITION SYNCFIELD
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:ERRTYPE SYNC
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:PARALLEL:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:CONDITION TXSTART
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:RX:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:RX:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:TX:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:TX:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:CONDITION SS
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:IN:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:OUT:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:START 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ADDRESS:HIVALUE "XXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ADDRESS:VALUE "XXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:CONDITION SYNC
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:OFFSET -1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:TYPE ANY
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ENDPOINT:VALUE "XXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ERRTYPE PID
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:HANDSHAKETYPE ANY
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:QUALIFIER EQUAL
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:SOFFRAMENUMBER "XXXXXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:SPECIALTYPE ANY
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:TOKENTYPE ANY
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:AUDIO:CONDITION SOF
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:AUDIO:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-25

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:AUDIO:DATA:OFFSET 0
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:AUDIO:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:AUDIO:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:AUDIO:DATA:WORD EITHER
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:CONDITION SOF
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:OFFSET 0
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:START 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:FD:BRSBUT X
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:FD:ESIBIT X
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:FRAMETYPE DATA
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:IDENTIFIER:MODE STANDARD
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:CONDITION SOF
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:HIVALUE "XXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:QUALIFIER EQUAL
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:VALUE "XXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:DATA:OFFSET -1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:EOFTYPE STATIC
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:ERRTYPE CRCHEADER
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:QUALIFIER EQUAL
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:FRAMETYPE NORMAL
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CRC "XXXXXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CYCLECOUNT "XXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:HEADER:FRAMEID "XXXXXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:HEADER:INDBITS "XXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:FLEXRAY:HEADER:PAYLENGTH "XXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR7

C-26 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:ADDRESS:TYPE USER
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE "XXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:CONDITION START
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:DATA:START 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:CONDITION SYNCFIELD
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:ERRTYPE SYNC
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:PARALLEL:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:CONDITION TXSTART
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:RX:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:RX:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:TX:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:TX:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:CONDITION SS
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:IN:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:OUT:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:START 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:ADDRESS:HIVALUE "XXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:ADDRESS:VALUE "XXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:CONDITION SYNC
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:DATA:OFFSET -1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:DATA:TYPE ANY
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:ENDPOINT:VALUE "XXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:ERRTYPE PID
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:HANDSHAKETYPE ANY
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:QUALIFIER EQUAL

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-27

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:SOFFRAMENUMBER "XXXXXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:SPECIALTYPE ANY
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:USB:TOKENTYPE ANY
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:OFFSet 0
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BRSBIT X
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:ESIBIT X
TRIGGER:A:BUS:SOURCE B1
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:COUPLING DC
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE RISE
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1
TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:TIME 20.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH1 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH2 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH3 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH4 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D0 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D1 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D10 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D11 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D12 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D13 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D14 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D15 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D2 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D3 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D4 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D5 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D6 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D7 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D8 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D9 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS LOGIC
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION AND
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH2 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH3 X

C-28 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH4 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CLOCK:EDGE RISE
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CLOCK:SOURCE NONE
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D0 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D1 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D10 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D11 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D12 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D13 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D14 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D15 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D2 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D3 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D4 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D5 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D6 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D7 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D8 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D9 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:DELTATIME 8.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN TRUE
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:LESSLIMIT 8.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:MORELIMIT 8.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH2 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH3 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH4 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D0 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D1 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D10 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D11 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D12 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D13 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D14 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D15 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D2 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D3 1.4000

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-29

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D4 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D5 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D6 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D7 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D8 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D9 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH1 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH2 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH3 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH4 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D0 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D1 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D10 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D11 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D12 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D13 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D14 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D15 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D2 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D3 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D4 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D5 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D6 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D7 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D8 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D9 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:MODE AUTO
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS WIDTH
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:HIGHLIMIT 12.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:LOWLIMIT 8.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:POLARITY POSITIVE
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:WHEN LESSTHAN
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:WIDTH 8.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE
TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS
TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WIDTH 8.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE RISE

C-30 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE NONE
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD 9.91E+37
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 8.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:SETTIME 8.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:CH1 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:CH2 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:CH3 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:CH4 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D0 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D1 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D10 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D11 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D12 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D13 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D14 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D15 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D2 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D3 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D4 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D5 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D6 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D7 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D8 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D9 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:POLARITY STAYSHIGH
TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:TIME 8.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:DELTATIME 8.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:POLARITY POSITIVE
TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:WHEN SLOWER
TRIGGER:A:TYPE EDGE
TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH1 800.0000E-3
TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH2 800.0000E-3
TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH3 800.0000E-3
TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH4 800.0000E-3
TRIGGER:B:BY TIME

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-31

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
TRIGGER:B:EDGE:COUPLING DC
TRIGGER:B:EDGE:SLOPE RISE
TRIGGER:B:EDGE:SOURCE CH1
TRIGGER:B:EVENTS:COUNT 1
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL:CH1 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL:CH2 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL:CH3 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL:CH4 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL:D0 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL:D1 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL:D10 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL:D11 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL:D12 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL:D13 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL:D14 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL:D15 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL:D2 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL:D3 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL:D4 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL:D5 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL:D6 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL:D7 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL:D8 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL:D9 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH1 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:B:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH2 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:B:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH3 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:B:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH4 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:B:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D0 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D1 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D10 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D11 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D12 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D13 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D14 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D15 1.4000

C-32 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
TRIGGER:B:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D2 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D3 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D4 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D5 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D6 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D7 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D8 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D9 1.4000
TRIGGER:B:STATE 0
TRIGGER:B:TIME 8.0000E-9
TRIGGER:B:TYPE EDGE
VERBOSE 1
VIDPIC:AUTOCONTRAST 1
VIDPIC:AUTOCONTRAST:UPDATERATE 20
ZOOM:MODE 0
ZOOM:ZOOM1:POSITION 50.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM1:SCALE 4.0000E-6
ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATE 0

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-33

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

C-34 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe
Query) Examples
Here are several examples of command sequences using the WFMOutpre? and
CURVe? queries to transfer data from the instrument to a PC, with different
data sources, including Analog, Digital waveforms. Each command sequence
example is followed by an explanation of the returned WFMOutpre? results.
The WFMOutpre? values act as settings that apply to the CURVe query data
being transferred.

NOTE. In order to guarantee that the waveform data returned from CURVE?
queries of multiple waveforms are correlated to the same acquisition, you should
use single sequence acquisition mode to acquire the waveform data from a single
acquisition. Single sequence acquisition mode is enabled using SEQuence.

Example 1: Analog Waveform (Channels 1–4)

Goal: Transfer 10,000 points of analog channel waveform data from the
instrument to a PC.

Command Comment
:DATa:SOUrce CH1
:DATa:START 1
:DATa:STOP 10000
:WFMOutpre:ENCdg BINARY
:WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr 1
:HEADer 1
:WFMOutpre? Returns the following values. Each value represents the current settings that a
CURVe? query will use to format the data that will be transferred from the instrument
to a PC or other device (see next table for explanations):
:WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 1;BIT_NR 8;ENCDG BINARY;BN_FMT
RI;BYT_OR MSB;WFID "Ch1, DC coupling, 100.0mV/div,
4.000us/div, 10000 points, Sample mode";NR_PT
10000;PT_FMT Y;PT_ORDER LINEAR;XUNIT "s";XINCR
4.0000E-9;XZERO 139.9999E-12;PT_OFF 5000;YUNIT "V";YMULT
4.0000E-3;YOFF 0.0E+0;YZERO 0.0E+0
:CURVE? Returns 10,000 data points:
:CURVe #510000<10,000 binary bytes of waveform data.>

NOTE. You can also use the WAVFrm? query, which concatenates the WFMOutpre?
and CURVe? queries.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual D-1

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

WFMOutpre? Query results Explanation

BYT_NR 1 This value specifies the number of bytes per data point in the waveform data. To change
this value automatically, use the WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr command. Note that changing this
value automatically changes the BIT_NR value accordingly. (This value can also be set
using the command.)
BIT_NR 8 This value specifies the number of bits per data point in the waveform data. To change this
value, use the WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr command. Note that changing this value automatically
changes the BYT_NR value accordingly.
ENCDG BINARY This value specifies the encoding of the waveform data. To change this value (the other
possibility is ASCii), use the WFMOutpre:ENCdg command. (This value can also be set using
the DATa:ENCdg command, which provides the ability to set the WFMOutpre:ENCdg,
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt,: and WFMOutpre:BYT_Or values using a single command.)
BN_FMT RI This value specifies the binary format, which in this case is RI (signed integer). To change
this value (the other possibility is RP or positive integer), use the WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
command. Note: this field is not applicable for ASCii encoding.
BYT_OR MSB This value specifies the byte order for the BINARY encoding, which in this case is MSB
(most significant byte first). To change this value to LSB, use the WFMOutpre:BYT_Or
command. Note: this field is not applicable for ASCii encoding.
WFID "Ch1, DC This quoted string represents information about the source waveform that would be returned
coupling, 100.0mV/div, by a. WFMOutpre:WFId? query.
4.000us/div, 10000
points, Sample mode"
NR_PT 10000 This value indicates the number of data points in the waveform record to be transferred
using the CURVE? query. (If you would like to determine only this value, use the
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? query.) Note: this value is typically equal to the full record length,
but you also have the option to transfer only a portion of the record length by using the
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands.
PT_FMT Y This value indicates the format of the data points in the waveform record. In this case,
the value represents YT format. This is query only – the returned values can be Y for YT
format or ENV for envelope format (min/max pairs). (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt? query.)
PT_ORDER LINEAR This value is LINEAR or ROW.
XUNIT "s" This value indicates the units of the x-axis of the waveform record. This is determined by the
horizontal settings for the waveform source. Typically, this value is “s”, representing seconds.
When using the math waveform as a source, the value can be “s” or “Hz”. This is query only.
(If you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:XUNit? query.)
XINCR 4.0000E-9 This value indicates the time, in seconds, or frequency, in hertz, between data points in the
waveform record. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:XINcr? query.)
XZER0 139.9999E-12 This value indicates the sub-sample time between the trigger sample (designated by
PT_OFF) and the occurrence of the actual trigger in the waveform record. The value is in
units of WFMOutpre:XUNit. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:XZEro? query.)
PT_OFF 5000 This value indicates the data point immediately following the trigger point relative to
DATa:STARt in the waveform record. This is a query only. (If you would like to determine
only this value, use the WFMOutpre:PT_Off? query.)

D-2 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

WFMOutpre? Query results Explanation

YUNIT "V" This value indicates the vertical units of data points in the waveform record. This can be
any of several string values, depending upon the vertical units of the source waveform –
in this case, volts. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:YUNit? query.)
YMULT 4.0000E-3 This value indicates the multiplying factor to convert the data point values from digitizing
levels to the units specified by the WFMOUTpre:YUNit command. This is query only. (If
you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:YMUlt? query.)
YOFF 0.0E+0 This value indicates the vertical position of the source waveform in digitizing levels. There
are 25 digitizing levels per vertical division. This is query only. (If you would like to determine
only this value, use the WFMOutpre:YOFf? query.)
YZERO 0.0E+0 This value indicates the vertical offset of the source waveform in units specified by the
WFMOUTpre:YUNit command. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:YZEro? query.)

Example 2: Digital Waveform

Goal: Transfer 25 points of digital channel waveform data from the instrument
to a PC.

Command Comment
:DATa:SOUrce CH1_D5
:DATa:START 1
:DATa:STOP 25
:WFMOutpre:ENCdg ASCii
:WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr 1
:HEADer 1
:VERBose 1
:WFMOutpre? Returns the following values. Each value represents the current settings that
a CURVe? query will use to format the data that will be transferred from the
instrument to a PC or other device (see next table for explanations):
:WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 1;BIT_NR 8;ENCDG ASCII;BN_FMT
RI;BYT_OR MSB;WFID "D5, unknown coupling,
100.0us/div, 10000 points, Digitalmode";NR_PT 25;PT_FMT
Y;PT_ORDER LINEAR;XUNIT "s";XINCR 100.0000E-9;XZERO
155.000E-12;PT_OFF 5000;YUNIT "State";YMULT 1.0000;YOFF
0.0E+0;YZERO 0.0E+0

:CURVe? Returns the following values. Each value represents a data point:
:CURVe 0,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0

NOTE. You can also use the WAVFrm? query, which concatenates the WFMOutpre?
and CURVe? queries.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual D-3

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

WFMOutpre? Query results Explanation

WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 1 This value specifies the number of bytes per data point in the waveform data. To change
this value automatically, use the WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr command. Note that changing this
value automatically changes the BIT_NR value accordingly. (This value can also be set
using the DATa:WIDth command.)
BIT_NR 8 This value specifies the number of bits per data point in the waveform data. To change this
value, use the WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr command. Note that changing this value automatically
changes the BYT_NR value accordingly.
ENCDG ASCII This value specifies the encoding of the waveform data. To change this value (the
other possibility is BINARY), use the WFMOutpre:ENCdg command. (This value can
also be set using the DATa:ENCdg command, which provides the ability to set the
WFMOutpre:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt,: and WFMOutpre:BYT_Or values
using a single command.)
BN_FMT RI This value specifies the binary format, which in this case is RI (signed integer). To change
this value (the other possibility is RP or positive integer), use the WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
command. Note: this field is not applicable for ASCii encoding.
BYT_OR MSB This value specifies the byte order for the BINARY encoding, which in this case is MSB
(most significant byte first, also known as IBM format). To change this value to LSB, use the
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or command. Note: this field is not applicable for ASCii encoding.
WFID "D5, unknown This quoted string represents information about the source waveform that would be returned
coupling, 100.0us/div, by a. WFMOutpre:WFId? query. It cannot be changed.
10000 points, Digital
mode"
NR_PT 25 This value indicates the number of data points in the waveform record to be transferred
using the CURVE? query. (If you would like to determine only this value, use the
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? query.) Note: this value is typically equal to the full record length,
but you also have the option to transfer only a portion of the record length by using the
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands.
PT_FMT Y This value indicates the format of the data points in the waveform record. In this case, the
value represents YT format. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt? query.)
PT_ORDER LINEAR This value is always LINear.
XUNIT "s" This value indicates the units of the x-axis of the waveform record. This is determined by
the horizontal settings for the waveform source. Typically, this value is “s”, representing
seconds. When using the math waveform as a source, the value can be “s” or “Hz”. This
is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:XUNit?
query.)
XINCR 100.0000E-9 This value indicates the time, in seconds, or frequency, in hertz, between data points in the
waveform record. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:XINcr? query.)
XZER0 155.000E-12 This value indicates the sub-sample time between the trigger sample (designated by
PT_OFF) and the occurrence of the actual trigger in the waveform record. The value is in
units of WFMOutpre:XUNit. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:XZEro? query.)
PT_OFF 5000 This value indicates the data point immediately following the trigger point relative to
DATa:STARt in the waveform record.(If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:PT_Off? query.)

D-4 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

WFMOutpre? Query results Explanation

YUNIT "State" This value indicates the vertical units of data points in the waveform record. This can be
any of several string values, depending upon the vertical units of the source waveform –
in this case, State. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:YUNit? query.)
YMULT 1.0000 This value indicates the multiplying factor to convert the data point values from digitizing
levels to the units specified by the WFMOUTpre:YUNit command. This is query only. (If
you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:YMUlt? query.)
YOFF 0.0E+0 This value indicates the vertical position of the source waveform in digitizing levels. There
are 25 digitizing levels per vertical division. This is query only. (If you would like to determine
only this value, use the WFMOutpre:YOFf? query.)
YZERO 0.0E+0 This value indicates the vertical offset of the source waveform in units specified by the
WFMOUTpre:YUNit command. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only
this value, use the WFMOutpre:YZEro? query.)

Example 3: Digital with 4 Bytes Per Point and Zoom Off

Goal: Transfer 25 points of Digital data from the instrument to a PC using 4
bytes per point and Zoom off.

Command Comment
:DATa:SOUrce CH1_D1
:ACQuire:MAGnivu 0
:DATa:START 1
:DATa:STOP 25
:WFMOutpre:ENCdg ASCii
:WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr 4
:HEADer 1
:VERBose 1
:WFMOutpre? Returns the following values. Each value represents the current settings that a
CURVe? query will use to format the data that will be transferred from the instrument
to a PC or other device (see next table for explanations):
:WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 4;BIT_NR 32;ENCDG ASCII;BN_FMT
RI;BYT_OR MSB;WFID "Digital, unknown coupling,
100.0us/div, 10000 points, Digital mode";NR_PT 25;PT_FMT
Y;PT_ORDER LINEAR;XUNIT "s";XINCR 100.0000E-9;XZERO
155.000E-12;PT_OFF 5000;YUNIT "State";YMULT 1.0000;YOFF
0.0E+0;YZERO 0.0E+0

:CURVe? Returns the following values. Each value represents a data point:
:CURVe
FB386,FB366,FB3E6,FB366,FB3E6,FB32E,FB3A2,FB32E,FB3AA,FB366,
FB3EA,FB366,FB3E2,FB36,FB3E6,FB366,FB3E6,FB346,FB3C6,FB346,FB3C6,
FB34E,FB3C2,FB34E,FB3CA

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual D-5

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

NOTE. The returned hexadecimal data values are formatted without leading
zeroes. For example, a 4-byte digital value of FB386 should be interpreted
as 000FB386.

NOTE. You can also use the WAVFrm? query, which concatenates the WFMOutpre?
and CURVe? queries.

WFMOutpre? Query results Explanation

WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 4 This value specifies the number of bytes per data point in the waveform data. To change
this value automatically, use the WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr command. Note that changing this
value automatically changes the BIT_NR value accordingly. (This value can also be set
using the DATa:WIDth command.)
BIT_NR 32 This value specifies the number of bits per data point in the waveform data. To change this
value, use the WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr command. Note that changing this value automatically
changes the BYT_NR value accordingly.
ENCDG ASCII This value specifies the encoding of the waveform data. To change this value (the
other possibility is BINARY), use the WFMOutpre:ENCdg command. (This value can
also be set using the DATa:ENCdg command, which provides the ability to set the
WFMOutpre:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt,: and WFMOutpre:BYT_Or values
using a single command.)
BN_FMT RI This value specifies the binary format, which in this case is RI (signed integer). To change
this value (the other possibility is RP or positive integer), use the WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
command. Note: this field is not applicable for ASCii encoding.
BYT_OR MSB This value specifies the byte order for the BINARY encoding, which in this case is MSB
(most significant byte first, also known as IBM format). To change this value to LSB, use the
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or command. Note: this field is not applicable for ASCii encoding.
WFID "Digital, unknown This quoted string represents information about the source waveform that would be returned
coupling, 100.0us/div, by a. WFMOutpre:WFId? query. It cannot be changed.
10000 points, Digital
mode"
NR_PT 25 This value indicates the number of data points in the waveform record to be transferred
using the CURVE? query. (If you would like to determine only this value, use the
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? query.) Note: this value is typically equal to the full record length,
but you also have the option to transfer only a portion of the record length by using the
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands.
PT_FMT Y This value indicates the format of the data points in the waveform record. In this case,
the value represents YT format. This is query only – the returned values can be Y for YT
format or ENV for envelope format (min/max pairs). (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt? query.)
PT_ORDER LINEAR This value is always LINear.
XUNIT "s" This value indicates the units of the x-axis of the waveform record. This is determined by the
horizontal settings for the waveform source. For live channels, this value is “s”, representing
seconds. When using the math waveform as a source, the value can be “s” or “Hz”. This
is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:XUNit?
query.)

D-6 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

WFMOutpre? Query results Explanation

XINCR 100.0000E-9 This value indicates the time, in seconds, or frequency, in hertz, between data points in the
waveform record. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:XINcr? query.)
XZER0 155.000E-12 This value indicates the sub-sample time between the trigger sample (designated by
PT_OFF) and the occurrence of the actual trigger in the waveform record. The value is in
units of WFMOutpre:XUNit. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:XZEro? query.)
PT_OFF 5000 This value indicates the data point immediately following the trigger point relative to
DATa:STARt in the waveform record. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:PT_Off? query.)
YUNIT "State" This value indicates the vertical units of data points in the waveform record. This can be
any of several string values, depending upon the vertical units of the source waveform –
in this case, State. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:YUNit? query.)
YMULT 1.0000 This value indicates the multiplying factor to convert the data point values from digitizing
levels to the units specified by the WFMOUTpre:YUNit command. This is query only. (If
you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:YMUlt? query.)
YOFF 0.0E+0 This value indicates the vertical position of the source waveform in digitizing levels. There
are 25 digitizing levels per vertical division. This is query only. (If you would like to determine
only this value, use the WFMOutpre:YOFf? query.)
YZERO 0.0E+0 This value indicates the vertical offset of the source waveform in units specified by the
WFMOUTpre:YUNit command. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:YZEro? query.)

Example 4: Digital with 8 Bytes Per Point and Zoom Off

Goal: Transfer 25 points of Digital data from the instrument to a PC using 8
bytes per point and Zoom off.

Command Comment
:DATa:SOUrce CH1_D1
:ACQuire:MAGnivu 0
:DATa:START 1
:DATa:STOP 25
:WFMOutpre:ENCdg ASCii
:WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr 8
:HEADer 1
:VERBose 1

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual D-7

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

Command Comment
:WFMOutpre? Returns the following values. Each value represents the current settings that a
CURVe? query will use to format the data that will be transferred from the instrument
to a PC or other device (see next table for explanations):
:WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 8;BIT_NR 64;ENCDG ASCII;BN_FMT
RI;BYT_OR MSB;WFID "Digital, unknown coupling,
100.0us/div, 10000 points, Digital mode";NR_PT 25;PT_FMT
Y;PT_ORDER LINEAR;XUNIT "s";XINCR 100.0000E-9;XZERO
155.000E-12;PT_OFF 5000;YUNIT "State";YMULT 1.0000;YOFF
0.0E+0;YZERO 0.0E+0
:CURVe? Returns the following values. Each value represents a data point:
:CURVe
80000FB386,E0000FB386,80000FB3E6,80000FB3E6,80000FB3E6,
C8000FB3A6,8C000FB3A6, 8C000FB3A6,84000FB3AE,CC000FB3A6,
8C000FB3E6,8C000FB3E6,84000FB3E6,80000FB3E6,80000FB3E6,
80000FB3E6,80000FB3E6,A0000FB3C6,80000FB3C6,80000FB3C6,
80000FB3C6,88000FB3C6,8C000FB3C6, 8C000FB3C6,84000FB3CE

NOTE. The returned hexadecimal data values are formatted without leading
zeroes.

NOTE. You can also use the WAVFrm? query, which concatenates the WFMOutpre?
and CURVe? queries.

WFMOutpre? Query results Explanation

WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 8 This value specifies the number of bytes per data point in the waveform data. To change
this value automatically, use the WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr command. Note that changing this
value automatically changes the BIT_NR value accordingly. (This value can also be set
using the DATa:WIDth command.)
BIT_NR 64 This value specifies the number of bits per data point in the waveform data. To change this
value, use the WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr command. Note that changing this value automatically
changes the BYT_NR value accordingly.
ENCDG ASCII This value specifies the encoding of the waveform data. To change this value (the
other possibility is BINARY), use the WFMOutpre:ENCdg command. (This value can
also be set using the DATa:ENCdg command, which provides the ability to set the
WFMOutpre:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt,: and WFMOutpre:BYT_Or values
using a single command.)
BN_FMT RI This value specifies the binary format, which in this case is RI (signed integer). To change
this value (the other possibility is RP or positive integer), use the WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
command. Note: this field is not applicable for ASCii encoding.
BYT_OR MSB This value specifies the byte order for the BINARY encoding, which in this case is MSB
(most significant byte first, also known as IBM format). To change this value to LSB, use the
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or command. Note: this field is not applicable for ASCii encoding.

D-8 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

WFMOutpre? Query results Explanation

WFID "Digital, unknown This quoted string represents information about the source waveform that would be returned
coupling, 100.0us/div, by a. WFMOutpre:WFId? query. It cannot be changed.
10000 points, Digital
mode"
NR_PT 25 This value indicates the number of data points in the waveform record to be transferred
using the CURVE? query. (If you would like to determine only this value, use the
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? query.) Note: this value is typically equal to the full record length,
but you also have the option to transfer only a portion of the record length by using the
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands.
PT_FMT Y This value indicates the format of the data points in the waveform record. In this case,
the value represents YT format. This is query only – the returned values can be Y for YT
format or ENV for envelope format (min/max pairs). (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt? query.)
PT_ORDER LINEAR This value is always LINear.
XUNIT "s" This value indicates the units of the x-axis of the waveform record. This is determined by the
horizontal settings for the waveform source. Typically, this value is “s”, representing seconds.
When using the math waveform as a source, the value can be “s” or “Hz”. This is query only.
(If you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:XUNit? query.)
XINCR 100.0000E-9 This value indicates the time, in seconds, or frequency, in hertz, between data points in the
waveform record. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:XINcr? query.)
XZER0 155.000E-12 This value indicates the sub-sample time between the trigger sample (designated by
PT_OFF) and the occurrence of the actual trigger in the waveform record. The value is in
units of WFMOutpre:XUNit. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:XZEro? query.)
PT_OFF 5000 This value indicates the data point immediately following the trigger point relative to
DATa:STARt in the waveform record. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:PT_Off? query.)
YUNIT "State" This value indicates the vertical units of data points in the waveform record. This can be
any of several string values, depending upon the vertical units of the source waveform –
in this case, State. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:YUNit? query.)
YMULT 1.0000 This value indicates the multiplying factor to convert the data point values from digitizing
levels to the units specified by the WFMOUTpre:YUNit command. This is query only. (If
you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:YMUlt? query.)
YOFF 0.0E+0 This value indicates the vertical position of the source waveform in digitizing levels. There
are 25 digitizing levels per vertical division. This is query only. (If you would like to determine
only this value, use the WFMOutpre:YOFf? query.)
YZERO 0.0E+0 This value indicates the vertical offset of the source waveform in units specified by the
WFMOUTpre:YUNit command. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:YZEro? query.)

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual D-9

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

Example 5: Digital with 4 Bytes Per Point and Zoom On

Goal: Transfer 25 points of Digital data from the instrument to a PC using 4
bytes per point and Zoom on.

Command Comment
:DATa:SOUrce CH1_D1
:ACQuire:MAGnivu 1
:DATa:START 1
:DATa:STOP 25
:WFMOutpre:ENCdg ASCii
:WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr 4
:HEADer 1
:VERBose 1
:WFMOutpre? Returns the following values. Each value represents the current settings that a
CURVe? query will use to format the data that will be transferred from the instrument
to a PC or other device (see next table for explanations):
:WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 4;BIT_NR 32;ENCDG ASCII;BN_FMT
RI;BYT_OR MSB;WFID "Digital, unknown coupling,
100.0us/div, 10000 points, Digital mode";NR_PT 25;PT_FMT
Y;PT_ORDER LINEAR;XUNIT "s";XINCR 1.2121E-9;XZERO
155.000E-12;PT_OFF 5000;YUNIT "State";YMULT 1.0000;YOFF
0.0E+0;YZERO 0.0E+0

:CURVe? Returns the following values. Each value represents a data point:
:CURVe
FB6E6,FB666,FB6E6,FB666,FB666,FB6E6,FB666,FB6E6,FB666,
FB666, FB6E6,FB666,FB6E6,FB6E6,FB666,FB6E6,FB666,FB666,
FB6E6,FB666,FB6E6,FB6E6,FB666,FB6E6,FB666

NOTE. The returned hexadecimal data values are formatted without leading
zeroes.

NOTE. You can also use the WAVFrm? query, which concatenates the WFMOutpre?
and CURVe? queries.

WFMOutpre? Query results Explanation

D-10 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

WFMOutpre? Query results Explanation

ENCDG ASCII This value specifies the encoding of the waveform data. To change this value (the
other possibility is BINARY), use the WFMOutpre:ENCdg command. (This value can
also be set using the DATa:ENCdg command, which provides the ability to set the
WFMOutpre:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt,: and WFMOutpre:BYT_Or values
using a single command.)
BN_FMT RI This value specifies the binary format, which in this case is RI (signed integer). To change
this value (the other possibility is RP or positive integer), use the WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
command. Note: this field is not applicable for ASCii encoding.
BYT_OR MSB This value specifies the byte order for the BINARY encoding, which in this case is MSB
(most significant byte first, also known as IBM format). To change this value to LSB, use the
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or command. Note: this field is not applicable for ASCii encoding.
WFID "Digital, unknown This quoted string represents information about the source waveform that would be returned
coupling, 100.0us/div, by a. WFMOutpre:WFId? query. It cannot be changed.
10000 points, Digital
mode"
NR_PT 25 This value indicates the number of data points in the waveform record to be transferred
using the CURVE? query. (If you would like to determine only this value, use the
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? query.) Note: this value is typically equal to the full record length,
but you also have the option to transfer only a portion of the record length by using the
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands.
PT_FMT Y This value indicates the format of the data points in the waveform record. In this case,
the value represents YT format. This is query only – the returned values can be Y for YT
format or ENV for envelope format (min/max pairs). (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt? query.)
PT_ORDER LINEAR This value is always LINear.
XUNIT "s" This value indicates the units of the x-axis of the waveform record. This is determined by the
horizontal settings for the waveform source. Typically, this value is “s”, representing seconds.
When using the math waveform as a source, the value can be “s” or “Hz”. This is query only.
(If you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:XUNit? query.)
XINCR 1.2121E-9 This value indicates the time, in seconds, or frequency, in hertz, between data points in the
waveform record. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:XINcr? query.)
XZER0 155.000E-12 This value indicates the sub-sample time between the trigger sample (designated by
PT_OFF) and the occurrence of the actual trigger in the waveform record. The value is in
units of WFMOutpre:XUNit. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:XZEro? query.)
PT_OFF 5000 This value indicates the data point immediately following the trigger point relative to
DATa:STARt in the waveform record. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:PT_Off? query.)
YUNIT "State" This value indicates the vertical units of data points in the waveform record. This can be
any of several string values, depending upon the vertical units of the source waveform –
in this case, State. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:YUNit? query.)
YMULT 1.0000 This value indicates the multiplying factor to convert the data point values from digitizing
levels to the units specified by the WFMOUTpre:YUNit command. This is query only. (If
you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:YMUlt? query.)

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual D-11

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

WFMOutpre? Query results Explanation

YOFF 0.0E+0 This value indicates the vertical position of the source waveform in digitizing levels. There
are 25 digitizing levels per vertical division. This is query only. (If you would like to determine
only this value, use the WFMOutpre:YOFf? query.)
YZERO 0.0E+0 This value indicates the vertical offset of the source waveform in units specified by the
WFMOUTpre:YUNit command. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:YZEro? query.)

Example 6: RF Frequency Domain Waveform

Goal: Transfer 5 points of RF frequency domain data from the instrument to
a PC using 8 bytes per point.

NOTE. A frequency domain waveform used in data transfer from the instrument
to a PC or other device may be one of the four RF frequency domain traces or
the Spectrum Math waveform.

Command Comment
:DATa:SOUrce CH1_SV_NORMal
:DATa:STARt 495
:DATa:STOP 505
:WFMOutpre:ENCdg ASCii
:WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr 8
:HEADer 1
:VERBose 1
:WFMOutpre? Returns the following values. Each value represents the current settings that a
CURVe? query will use to format the data that will be transferred from the instrument
to a PC or other device (see next table for explanations):
:WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 8;BIT_NR 64;ENCDG ASCII;BN_FMT
FP;BYT_OR MSB;WFID "RF_NORMAL, unknown coupling,
10.00W/div, 200.0MHz/div, 1001 points, Sample mode,
Center Freq: 2.400GHz, Span: 2.000GHz, Reference
Level: 1.000mW";NR_PT 21;PT_FMT Y;PT_ORDER LINEAR;XUNIT
"Hz";XINCR 2.0000E+6;XZERO 1.4000E+9;PT_OFF 0;YUNIT
"W";YMULT 1.5625E-3;YOFF 0.0E+0;YZERO 0.0E+0;DOMAIN
FREQUENCY;WFMTYPE RF_FD;CENTERFREQUENCY 2.4000E+9;SPAN
2.0000E+9;REFLEVEL 1.0000E-3
:CURVe? Returns the following values. Each value represents a data point:
:CURVE
2.43108E-10,1.62648E-10,2.78478E-10,4.15163E-10,7.66223E-10,
7.63905E-10,3.68375E-10,3.42668E-10,3.06422E-10,1.81561E-10,
2.0223E-10,4.24327E-10,1.95298E-10,2.1304E-10,9.41791E-11,
4.56513E-10,4.33067E-10,6.57215E-11,1.65388E-10,9.09116E-10,
5.39507E-10

D-12 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

WFMOutpre? Query results Explanation

BYT_NR 8 This value specifies the number of bytes per data point in the waveform data. This value
is fixed for RF frequency domain traces.
BIT_NR 64 This value specifies the number of bits per data point in the waveform data. This value
is fixed for RF frequency domain traces.
ENCDG ASCII This value specifies the encoding of the waveform data. To change this value (the other
possibility for RF frequency domain traces is FPBINARY), use the WFMOutpre:ENCdg
command. This value can also be set using the DATa:ENCdg command.
BN_FMT FP This value specifies the binary format, which in this case is FP (floating point). This value is
fixed for RF frequency domain traces. Note: This field is not applicable for ASCii encoding.
BYT_OR MSB This value specifies the byte order for the BINARY encoding, which in this case is MSB
(most significant byte first, also known as IBM format). To change this value to LSB, use the
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or command. Note: This field is not applicable for ASCii encoding.
WFID "CH1_SV_NORMal, unknown This quoted string represents information about the source waveform that would be returned
coupling, 10.00W/div, 200.0MHz/div, by a WFMOutpre:WFId? Query. It cannot be changed.
1001 points, Sample mode, Center
Freq: 2.400GHz, Span: 2.000GHz,
Reference Level: 1.000mW"
NR_PT 21 This value indicates the number of data points in the waveform record. (If you would like to
determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? query.) Note: This value is typically
equal to the full record length of the RF frequency domain trace, but you also have the option
to transfer only a portion of the record using the DATs:STARt and DATa:STOP commands.
PT_FMT Y This value indicates the format of the data points in the waveform record. In this case, the
value represents YF (Amplitude vs. Frequency) format. This is query only. (If you would like
to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt? query.
PT_ORDER LINEAR . This value is always LINear
XUNIT "Hz" This value indicates the units of the x-axis of the waveform record. This value is always “Hz”
for RF frequency domain traces. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:XUNit? query.)
XINCR 2.0000E+6 This value indicates the frequency, in hertz, between data points in the waveform record.
This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:XINcr?
query.)
XZERO 1.4000E+9 This value indicates the frequency, in hertz, of the first data point in the waveform record.
This frequency is relative to the time of the trigger, which is always 0. This XZEro frequency
can be negative. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:XZEro? query.)
PT_OFF 0 This is a query provided only for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments. The
returned value is always 0. (If you would like to determine only this value, use the
WFMOutpre:PT_Off? query.)
YUNIT "W" This value indicates the units of data points in the waveform record. This value depends on
the vertical units of the source waveform – in this case, watts. This is query only. (If you
would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:YUNit? query.)
YMULT 1.5625E-3 This value indicates the multiplying factor to convert the data point values to the units
specified by the:WFMOutpre:YUNit command. This is query only. (If you would like to
determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:YMUlt? query.)

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual D-13

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

YOFF 0.0E+0 This value indicates the vertical position of the source waveform. This value is unused for
RF frequency domain traces and is always 0.
YZERO 0.0E+0 This value indicates the vertical offset of the source waveform. This value is unused for RF
frequency domain traces and is always 0.
DOMAIN FREQUENCY This value indicates the domain in which the source waveform is displayed and stored. For
RF time domain traces, the domain is Time and waveform transfer information is treated
as integer information. For RF frequency domain traces, the domain is Frequency and
waveform transfer information is treated as floating point information. This is query only. (If
you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:DOMain? query.)
WFMTYPE RF_FD This value indicates the type of the source waveform. RF_FD indicates an RF frequency
domain trace (frequency domain waveform). This is query only. (If you would like to
determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:WFMTYPe? query.)
CENTERFREQUENCY 2.4000E+9 This value indicates the center frequency, in hertz, of the source waveform. This is query only.
(If you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:CENTERFREQuency?
query.)
SPAN 2.0000E+9 This value indicates the frequency span, in hertz, of the source waveform. This is query
only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:SPAN? query.)
REFLEVEL 1.0000E-3 This value indicates the reference level, in watts, of the source waveform. This is query only.
(If you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:REFLEvel? query.)

Example 7: Baseband IQ Waveform

Goal: Transfer Baseband I and Q data from the instrument to a PC.

NOTE. Requires SV-RFVT option.

Command Comment
:DATa:SOUrce CH1_BASEBAND_IQ
:DATa:WIDth 2 Set data width for every I,Q pair to 2.
:WFMOutpre:ENCdg SRIbinary Request data LSB first.
:WFMOutpre:YMUlt? Apply 2*YMUlt scaling to I and Q samples returned by CURVe?

D-14 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

Command Comment
:WFMOutpre? Returns the following values. Each value represents the current settings that
aCURVe? query will use to format the data that will be transferred from the instrument
to a PC or other device:
:WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 1;BIT_NR 8;:WFMOUTPRE:ENCDG
BINARY;BN_FMT RI;:WFMOUTPRE:ASC_FMT INTEGER;BYT_OR
MSB;:WFMOUTPRE:WFID "CH1_SV_BASEBAND_IQ, 5062
points, Center Freq: 1GHz, Span: 312.5MHz";NR_PT
9;:WFMOUTPRE:PT_FMT ENV;PT_ORDER LINEAR;:WFMOUTPRE:XUNIT
"s";XINCR 1.280E-9;:WFMOUTPRE:XZERO 815.000E-12;PT_OFF
0;:WFMOUTPRE:YUNIT "V";YMULT 8.0000E-3;:WFMOUTPRE:YOFF
0.0E+0;YZERO0.0E+0;:WFMOUTPRE:DOMAIN TIME;WFMTYPE
F_TD;:WFMOUTPRE:CENTERFREQUENCY 1.0000E+9;SPAN
312.5000E+6

:CURVe? CURVe? will transmit NR_Pt points which are interleaved I and Q pairs. The result
can be read from the binary buffer as uint16 to get I and Q pair values in “digitizing
levels”. Multiply the digitizing level value by 2*YMUlt to get absolute I and Q point
values.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual D-15

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

D-16 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix E: Search and Trigger Command Sequence
Examples
The following are some example command sequences that show a variety of
different searches and triggers. The commands in these sequences are not
order-dependent.
To use these examples, connect channel 1, channel 2, channel 3 and channel 4 to
the probe compensation signal located on the right hand side of the front panel.
The search and trigger command group sections contain more information on
general search and trigger concepts. ,

Example 1: Single Threshold Edge Search

Goal: Search the channel 2 waveform and place a mark at each instance where it
crosses below a threshold of 1.4 volts.

Command Comment
*RST;:*OPC? Resets the instrument and waits for that operation to complete
(approximately 1 to 5 seconds depending on the complexity of
the previous setup).
display:waveview1:ch2:state 1 Turns the CH2 waveform on.
:AUTOset EXECute>;*OPC? Autosets the displayed waveform CH2 and waits for the auto
setup to complete.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TYPe EDGE Specifies that this will be an edge search (a mark will be placed
when the source waveform passes through a specified threshold
level in the specified direction).
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce CH2 Specifies the CH2 waveform as the source waveform.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH2 1.4 Specifies 1.4 volts as the threshold level.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe FALL Specifies the falling edge as the direction.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:STATE 1 Turns the search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TOTal? Returns 4, indicating that CH2 fell below the 1.4 volt threshold 4
times.

Example 2: Single Threshold Edge Trigger

Goal: Trigger on the channel 2 waveform when the waveform crosses below a
threshold of 1.4 volts.

Command Comment
*RST Resets the instrument. Wait for the reset to complete (approximately
3 seconds).
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH2:STATE 1 Turns the CH2 waveform on.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual E-1

Appendix E: Search and Trigger Command Sequence Examples

Command Comment
:TRIGger:A:TYPe EDGE Specifies that this will be an edge trigger (trigger will occur when the
source waveform passes through a specified threshold level in the
specified direction).
:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce CH2 Specifies the CH2 waveform as the source waveform.
:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH2 1.4 Specifies 1.4 volts as the threshold level.
:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe FALL Specifies as falling edge as the direction.
:TRIGger:STATE? Should return TRIGGER, not AUTO.

Example 3: Dual Threshold Runt Search

Goal: Search the channel 3 waveform for negative runt pulses and place a mark at
each instance when the waveform drops below an upper threshold of 1.4 volts, but
does not cross a lower threshold of -2 volts before re-crossing the upper threshold.
The pulse width must be less than 600 microseconds.

Command Comment
*RST Resets the instrument. Wait for the reset to complete (approximately
3 seconds).
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH3:STATE 1 Turns the CH3 waveform on.
:AUTOset EXECute Autosets the displayed waveform CH3. Wait for the autoset to
complete (approximately 3 seconds).
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TYPe RUNT Specifies that this will be a runt search (a mark will be placed on
a pulse amplitude that crosses one threshold but fails to cross a
second threshold before re-crossing the first).
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce CH3 Specifies to use channel 3 as the source waveform.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH3 -2 Specifies to use -2 volts as the lower threshold.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold: CH3 1.4 Specifies to use 1.4 volts as the upper threshold.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity NEGative Specifies to search for when the runt polarity is negative.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth 600E-6 Specifies a pulse width of 600E-6 seconds.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn LESSthan Specifies to search for when the pulse width is less than
600E-6 seconds.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:STATE 1 Turns the search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TOTal? Returns 3, indicating that 3 total negative runt pulses were less than
600E-6 seconds wide

NOTE. You could use a similar command sequence with a transition type search.

E-2 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix E: Search and Trigger Command Sequence Examples

Example 4: Single Threshold Logic Search on Three Waveforms

Goal: Search the channel 1, 2 and 3 waveforms and place a mark at each instance
when either channel 1 is above 1.4 volts, channel 2 is above 1.5 volts, or channel
3 is above 1.3 volts.

Command Comment
*RST Resets the instrument. Wait for the reset to complete
(approximately 3 seconds).
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH1:STATE 1 Turns the CH1 waveform on.
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH2:STATE 1 Turns the CH2 waveform on.
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH3:STATE 1 Turns the CH3 waveform on.
:AUTOset EXECute Autosets the displayed waveforms CH1, CH2 and CH3. Wait
for the autoset to complete (approximately 3 seconds).
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TYPe LOGIc Specifies that this will be a logic search (a mark will be placed
when all channels transition to the specified state).
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH1 HIGH Specifies the Boolean logic criteria for channel 1; in this case,
high.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH2 HIGH Specifies the Boolean logic criteria for channel 2; in this case,
high.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH3 HIGH Specifies the Boolean logic criteria for channel 3; in this case,
high.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH1 1.4 Specifies to use 1.4 volts as the threshold for CH1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH2 1.5 Specifies to use 1.5 volts as the threshold for CH2.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH3 1.3 Specifies to use 1.3 volts as the threshold for CH3.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn TRUE Specifies the condition for generating a logic pattern search;
in this case, true.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion OR Specifies the logic operator for the logic search; in this case,
OR.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:STATE 1 Turns the search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TOTal? Returns 3 or 4, indicating 3 or 4 times when one of channels
1, 2 or 3 became high.
Note: Depending upon the number of transitions displayed,
you may get 3 or 4 search marks for this example. If you get
3 search marks, try adjusting the horizontal position until you
see 4 search marks.

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual E-3

Appendix E: Search and Trigger Command Sequence Examples

E-4 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Glossary
ASCII
Acronym for the American Standard Code for Information Interchange.
Controllers transmit commands to the instrument using ASCII character encoding.
Address
A 7-bit code that identifies an instrument on the communication bus. The
digitizing instrument must have a unique address for the controller to recognize
and transmit commands to it.
Backus-Naur Form (BNF)
A standard notation system for command syntax diagrams. The syntax diagrams
in this manual use BNF notation.
Controller
A computer or other device that sends commands to and accepts responses from
the digitizing instrument.
EOI
A mnemonic referring to the control line End or Identify. One of the two possible
end-of-message terminators.
EOM
A generic acronym referring to the end-of-message terminator. The
end-of-message terminator can be either an EOI or the ASCII code for line feed
(LF).
Equivalent-Time sampling (ET)
A sampling mode in which the instrument acquires signals over many repetitions
of the event. This instrument uses a type of equivalent time sampling called
random equivalent time sampling. It utilizes an internal clock that runs
asynchronously with respect to the input signal and the signal trigger. The
instrument takes samples continuously, independent of the trigger position, and
displays them based on the time difference between the sample and the trigger.
Although the samples are taken sequentially in time, they are random with respect
to the trigger.
Real-Time sampling
A sampling mode where the instrument samples fast enough to completely fill a
waveform record from a single trigger event. Use real-time sampling to capture
single-shot or transient events.
IEEE
An acronym for the Institute for Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
Serial poll
A device on the bus can request service from the Controller by asserting the SRQ
line. When a controller acknowledges the SRQ, it serial polls each device on
the bus to determine which device on the bus requested service. Any device
requesting service returns a status byte indicating it needs to be serviced and then

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Glossary-1

Glossary

unasserts the SRQ line. Devices not requiring service return a status byte that
indicates they do not need servicing.
TEKSecure
A Tektronix custom command that initializes both waveform and setup memories.
This overwrites any previously stored data.

Glossary-2 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

A ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:
ACQuire?, 2-157 SAVEIMAGe:STATE, 2-174
ACQuire:FASTAcq:PALEtte, 2-157 ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:
ACQuire:FASTAcq:STATE, 2-158 SAVEWAVEform:STATE, 2-175
ACQuire:FASTAVerage:LIMit, 2-158 ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:
ACQuire:FASTAVerage:STATE, 2-159 STATE, 2-176
ACQuire:FASTAVerage:STOPafter, 2-159 ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:
ACQuire:MAXSamplerate?, 2-160 STATE, 2-177
ACQuire:MODe, 2-160 ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:
ACQuire:NUMACq?, 2-161 STATE, 2-177
ACQuire:NUMAVg, 2-162 ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:
ACQuire:NUMFRAMESACQuired?, 2-162 SAVEWAVEform:STATE, 2-178
ACQuire:SEQuence:CURrent?, 2-162 ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SRQ:
ACQuire:SEQuence:MODe, 2-163 STATE, 2-179
ACQuire:SEQuence:NUMSEQuence, 2-163 ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:STOPACQ:
ACQuire:STATE, 2-164 STATE, 2-179
ACQuire:STOPAfter, 2-164 ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:
ACTONEVent:ENable, 2-165 STATE, 2-180
ACTONEVent:LIMit, 2-165 ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:
ACTONEVent:LIMITCount, 2-166 STATE, 2-180
ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe: ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SRQ:
STATE, 2-166 STATE, 2-181
ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION: ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:STOPACQ:
SAVEWAVEform:STATE, 2-167 STATE, 2-182
ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SRQ: AFG:AMPLitude, 2-182
STATE, 2-168 AFG:ARBitrary:SOUrce, 2-183
ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:STOPACQ: AFG:BURSt:CCOUnt, 2-183
STATE, 2-168 AFG:BURSt:TRIGger, 2-184
ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe: AFG:FREQuency, 2-184
STATE, 2-169 AFG:FUNCtion, 2-185
ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION: AFG:HIGHLevel, 2-186
SAVEWAVEform:STATE, 2-170 AFG:LOWLevel, 2-186
ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SRQ: AFG:NOISEAdd:PERCent, 2-187
STATE, 2-170 AFG:NOISEAdd:STATE, 2-187
ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:STOPACQ: AFG:OFFSet, 2-188
STATE, 2-171 AFG:OUTPut:LOAd:IMPEDance, 2-188
ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe: AFG:OUTPut:MODe, 2-189
STATE, 2-172 AFG:OUTPut:STATE, 2-189
ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION: AFG:PERIod, 2-190
SAVEWAVEform:STATE, 2-172 AFG:PULse:WIDth, 2-190
ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SRQ: AFG:RAMP:SYMmetry, 2-191
STATE, 2-173 AFG:SQUare:DUty, 2-191
ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:STOPACQ: ALIas, 2-192
STATE, 2-174 ALIas:CATalog?, 2-192

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-1

Index

ALIas:DEFine, 2-193 BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:

ALIas:DELEte, 2-193 DATAPLUSTHRESHold, 2-217
ALIas:DELEte:ALL, 2-194 BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:
ALIas:DELEte:NAMe, 2-194 LOWDATAMINus, 2-217
ALIas:STATE, 2-195 BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:
ALLEv?, 2-195 LOWDATAPLUS, 2-218
APPLication:ACTivate , 2-196 BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:
AUTOSAVEPITIMEOUT, 2-196 LOWTHRESHold, 2-219
AUTOSAVEUITIMEOUT, 2-196 BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SIGNALTYpe, 2-219
AUTOSet, 2-197 BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SOUrce, 2-220
AUTOSet:ACQuisition:ENAble, 2-197 BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SOUrce:
AUTOSet:ENAble, 2-198 DMINus, 2-221
AUTOSet:HORizontal:ENAble, 2-198 BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:SOUrce:DPLUs, 2-221
AUTOSet:TRIGger:ENAble, 2-199 BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:THRESHold, 2-222
AUTOSet:VERTical:ENAble, 2-200 BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:TYPe, 2-223
AUTOSet:VERTical:OPTIMize, 2-200 BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate, 2-223
AUXout:EDGE, 2-201 BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate:VALue, 2-224
AUXout:SOUrce, 2-201 BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate, 2-225
BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate:CUSTom, 2-225
B BUS:B<x>:CAN:SAMPLEpoint, 2-226
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SIGNal, 2-226
BUS:ADDNew, 2-202 BUS:B<x>:CAN:SOUrce, 2-227
BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:BITRate, 2-202
BUS:B<x>:CAN:STANDard, 2-227
BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:BITRate:CUSTom, 2-203
BUS:B<x>:CAN:THReshold, 2-228
BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATAFORmat, 2-204
BUS:B<x>:CAN:XL:BITRate, 2-229
BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:POLARITY, 2-204 BUS:B<x>:CAN:XL:BITRate:CUSTom, 2-229
BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SOUrce, 2-205 BUS:B<x>:CPHY:A:DATA:THRESHold, 2-230
BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:THRESHold, 2-206 BUS:B<x>:CPHY:A:LP:THRESHold, 2-230
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:BITDelay, 2-206
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:A:SOUrce, 2-231
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:BITOrder, 2-207
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:AB:SOUrce, 2-231
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CLOCk:POLarity, 2-207
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:AB:THReshold, 2-232
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-208 BUS:B<x>:CPHY:AGND:SOUrce, 2-233
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CLOCk:THReshold, 2-209 BUS:B<x>:CPHY:AGND:THReshold, 2-233
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:POLarity, 2-209
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:B:DATA:THRESHold, 2-234
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:SIZe, 2-210
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:B:SOUrce, 2-234
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:SOUrce, 2-210
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:BC:SOUrce, 2-235
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:THReshold, 2-211 BUS:B<x>:CPHY:BC:THReshold, 2-235
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:WORDSize, 2-212 BUS:B<x>:CPHY:BITRate, 2-236
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:FRAME: BUS:B<x>:CPHY:C:DATA:THRESHold, 2-237
CLOCKBITSPERCHANNEL, 2-212
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:C:LP:THRESHold, 2-237
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:FRAME:SIZe, 2-213
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:C:SOUrce, 2-238
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:TYPe, 2-213
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:CA:SOUrce, 2-238
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:WORDSel:POLarity, 2-214 BUS:B<x>:CPHY:CA:THReshold, 2-239
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:WORDSel:SOUrce, 2-215 BUS:B<x>:CPHY:CGND:SOUrce, 2-239
BUS:B<x>:AUDio:WORDSel:THReshold, 2-215 BUS:B<x>:CPHY:CGND:THReshold, 2-240
BUS:B<x>:AUTOETHERnet:
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:LP:DIRection, 2-241
DATAMINUSTHRESHOLD, 2-216
BUS:B<x>:CPHY:SIGNALTYpe, 2-241

Index-2 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

BUS:B<x>:CPHY:SUBTYPe, 2-242 BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:

BUS:B<x>:CXPI:BITRate, 2-242 DATAPLUSTHRESHold, 2-267
BUS:B<x>:CXPI:REC:THReshold, 2-243 BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPVFOUR, 2-267
BUS:B<x>:CXPI:SOUrce, 2-243 BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:LOWTHRESHold, 2-268
BUS:B<x>:DISplay:FORMat, 2-244 BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:QTAGGING, 2-269
BUS:B<x>:DISplay:LAYout, 2-245 BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SIGNALTYpe, 2-269
BUS:B<x>:DPHY:CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-245 BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce, 2-270
BUS:B<x>:DPHY:CLOCk:THRESHold, 2-246 BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DMINus, 2-271
BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DMINus: BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DPLUs, 2-271
DATATHRESHold, 2-247 BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:THRESHold, 2-272
BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DMINus:LPTHRESHold, 2-247 BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TYPe, 2-272
BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DMINus:SOUrce, 2-248 BUS:B<x>:EUSB:BITRate, 2-273
BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DPlus:DATATHRESHold, 2-248 BUS:B<x>:EUSB:DATAMINUS:DATA:
BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DPlus:LPTHRESHold, 2-249 THRESHold, 2-273
BUS:B<x>:DPHY:DPlus:SOUrce, 2-250 BUS:B<x>:EUSB:DATAMINUSTHRESHold, 2-274
BUS:B<x>:DPHY:LP:DIRection, 2-250 BUS:B<x>:EUSB:DATAPLUS:DATA:
BUS:B<x>:DPHY:PROTocol:TYPe, 2-251 THRESHold, 2-275
BUS:B<x>:DPHY:SIGNal:ENCoding, 2-251 BUS:B<x>:EUSB:DATAPLUSTHRESHold, 2-275
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:ALERt:POLarity, 2-252 BUS:B<x>:EUSB:LOWTHRESHold, 2-276
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:ALERt:SOUrce, 2-253 BUS:B<x>:EUSB:OPERating:MODe, 2-276
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:ALERt:THReshold, 2-253 BUS:B<x>:EUSB:SIGNALTYpe, 2-277
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:ALERTVIEW, 2-254 BUS:B<x>:EUSB:SOUrce:DIFF, 2-277
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CHIPSELect:POLarity, 2-254 BUS:B<x>:EUSB:SOUrce:DMINus, 2-278
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CHIPSELect:SOUrce, 2-255 BUS:B<x>:EUSB:SOUrce:DPLUs, 2-278
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CHIPSELect:THReshold, 2-255 BUS:B<x>:EUSB:THRESHold , 2-279
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CLOCk:POLarity, 2-256 BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:BITRate, 2-280
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-257 BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:BITRate:CUSTom, 2-280
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:CLOCk:THReshold, 2-257 BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CHannel, 2-281
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATAONE:POLarity, 2-258 BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:LOWTHRESHold, 2-281
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATAONE:SOUrce, 2-258 BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:SIGnal, 2-282
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATAONE:THReshold, 2-259 BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:SOUrce, 2-282
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATATWO:POLarity, 2-260 BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:SOUrce:TXRX, 2-283
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATATWO:SOUrce, 2-260 BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:THRESHold, 2-283
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:DATATWO:THReshold, 2-261 BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:TXRXTHRESHold, 2-284
BUS:B<x>:ESPI:IOMODe, 2-261 BUS:B<x>:I2C:CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-285
BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT: BUS:B<x>:I2C:CLOCk:THReshold, 2-285
DATAMINUSTHRESHold, 2-262 BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SOUrce, 2-286
BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT: BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:THReshold, 2-287
DATAPLUSTHRESHold, 2-262 BUS:B<x>:I2C:RWINADDR, 2-287
BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:SIGNALTYpe, 2-263 BUS:B<x>:I3C:CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-288
BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:SOUrce:DIFF, 2-264 BUS:B<x>:I3C:CLOCk:THReshold, 2-289
BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:SOUrce:DMINus, 2-264 BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:SOUrce, 2-289
BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:SOUrce:DPLUs, 2-265 BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:THReshold, 2-290
BUS:B<x>:ETHERCAT:THRESHold, 2-265 BUS:B<x>:I3C:VERSion, 2-291
BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet: BUS:B<x>:LABel:COLor, 2-291
DATAMINUSTHRESHold, 2-266 BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD, 2-292
BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic, 2-292

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-3

Index

BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE, 2-293 BUS:B<x>:NFC:RESPonse:POLarity, 2-319

BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE, 2-293 BUS:B<x>:NFC:RSP:THReshold, 2-320
BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline, 2-294 BUS:B<x>:NFC:SOUrce, 2-321
BUS:B<x>:LABel:name, 2-294 BUS:B<x>:NFC:START:INDex, 2-321
BUS:B<x>:LABel:XPOS, 2-295 BUS:B<x>:NFC:STD, 2-322
BUS:B<x>:LABel:YPOS, 2-295 BUS:B<x>:NFC:TOLerance, 2-322
BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate, 2-296 BUS:B<x>:NFC:TRANsition:ZERo, 2-323
BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate:CUSTom, 2-297 BUS:B<x>:NRZ:BITOrder, 2-324
BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDFORmat, 2-297 BUS:B<x>:NRZ:BITRate, 2-324
BUS:B<x>:LIN:POLarity, 2-298 BUS:B<x>:NRZ:POLarity, 2-325
BUS:B<x>:LIN:SAMPLEpoint, 2-298 BUS:B<x>:NRZ:SOUrce, 2-325
BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce, 2-299 BUS:B<x>:NRZ:SPMI:VERsion, 2-326
BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce:THReshold, 2-299 BUS:B<x>:NRZ:THReshold, 2-326
BUS:B<x>:LIN:STANDard, 2-300 BUS:B<x>:ONEWIRe:DATA:SOUrce, 2-327
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:BITORDer, 2-300 BUS:B<x>:ONEWIRe:DATA:THReshold, 2-328
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:BITRate, 2-301 BUS:B<x>:ONEWIRe:MODe, 2-328
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:DISplaymode, 2-302 BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds, 2-329
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:HEADer:LENGth, 2-302 BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds:APPly, 2-330
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:IDLE:BITS, 2-303 BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<x>SOUrce, 2-330
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:parity, 2-303 BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<x>SOUrce:
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:SOUrce, 2-304 THReshold, 2-331
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:START:INDex, 2-305 BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:EDGE, 2-331
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:SYNC:SIZe, 2-305 BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:ISCLOCKED, 2-332
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:THReshold, 2-306 BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCKSOUrce, 2-333
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:TOLerance, 2-306 BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCKSOUrce:
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:TRAiler:LENGth, 2-307 THReshold, 2-333
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:TRANstion:ZERo, 2-308 BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:BITPERiod, 2-334
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:WORD:COUNt, 2-308 BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:BITRate, 2-334
BUS:B<x>:MANChester:WORDSIZe, 2-309 BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:COMM:DIRection, 2-335
BUS:B<x>:MDIO:CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-309 BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:DATAA, 2-336
BUS:B<x>:MDIO:CLOCk:THReshold, 2-310 BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:DATAB, 2-336
BUS:B<x>:MDIO:DATA:SOUrce, 2-311 BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:DATAFORMat, 2-337
BUS:B<x>:MDIO:DATA:THReshold, 2-311 BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:ECUSOURce, 2-337
BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:LOWTHRESHold, 2-312 BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:FRAMECONTrol, 2-338
BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:POLarity, 2-312 BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:MESSaging, 2-338
BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:RESPonsetime: BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:SOUrce, 2-339
MAXimum, 2-313 BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:STATus, 2-339
BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:RESPonsetime: BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:SYNCMODe, 2-340
MINimum, 2-314 BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:SYNCTHRESHold, 2-341
BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:SOUrce, 2-314 BUS:B<x>:PSIFIVe:THRESHold, 2-341
BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:THRESHold, 2-315 BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITORDer, 2-342
BUS:B<x>:NFC:APPLYDEMod, 2-316 BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate, 2-342
BUS:B<x>:NFC:BITRate, 2-316 BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate:CUSTom, 2-343
BUS:B<x>:NFC:CMD:STARTINDex, 2-317 BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATABits, 2-343
BUS:B<x>:NFC:CMD:THReshold, 2-317 BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DELIMiter, 2-344
BUS:B<x>:NFC:CMD:TRANsition:ZERo, 2-318 BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DISplaymode, 2-345
BUS:B<x>:NFC:COMMand:POLarity, 2-319 BUS:B<x>:RS232C:PARity, 2-345

Index-4 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:POLarity, 2-346 BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:INPut, 2-374

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:SOUrce, 2-347 BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:THReshold, 2-375
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:SOUrce:THReshold, 2-347 BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:DATa:POLarity, 2-375
BUS:B<x>:S8B10B:BITRate, 2-348 BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:INPut, 2-376
BUS:B<x>:S8B10B:SOUrce, 2-348 BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:THReshold, 2-377
BUS:B<x>:S8B10B:THReshold, 2-349 BUS:B<x>:SPI:NUMBer:INputs, 2-377
BUS:B<x>:SDLC:BITRate, 2-350 BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:POLarity, 2-378
BUS:B<x>:SDLC:DATA:SOUrce, 2-350 BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:SOUrce, 2-378
BUS:B<x>:SDLC:DATA:THReshold, 2-351 BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:THReshold, 2-379
BUS:B<x>:SDLC:ENCoding, 2-351 BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SCLk:SOUrce, 2-380
BUS:B<x>:SDLC:MODulo, 2-352 BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SCLk:THReshold, 2-381
BUS:B<x>:SENT:CHANWidth, 2-352 BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SDATa:SOUrce, 2-381
BUS:B<x>:SENT:NIBBLECount, 2-353 BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SDATa:THReshold, 2-382
BUS:B<x>:SENT:NUMCHANnel, 2-354 BUS:B<x>:SVID:ALERT:SOUrce, 2-383
BUS:B<x>:SENT:PAUSEPULSe, 2-354 BUS:B<x>:SVID:ALERT:THReshold, 2-383
BUS:B<x>:SENT:POLARITY, 2-355 BUS:B<x>:SVID:CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-384
BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW, 2-355 BUS:B<x>:SVID:CLOCk:THReshold, 2-384
BUS:B<x>:SENT:SOUrce, 2-356 BUS:B<x>:SVID:DATA:SOUrce, 2-385
BUS:B<x>:SENT:THRESHold, 2-357 BUS:B<x>:SVID:DATA:THReshold, 2-386
BUS:B<x>:SENT:TICKTIME, 2-357 BUS:B<x>:TYPe, 2-386
BUS:B<x>:SENT:TICKTOLerance, 2-358 BUS:B<x>:USB:BITRate, 2-387
BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-358 BUS:B<x>:USB:DATAMINUSTHRESHold, 2-388
BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:CLOCk:THReshold, 2-359 BUS:B<x>:USB:DATAPLUSTHRESHold, 2-388
BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:DATA:SOUrce, 2-360 BUS:B<x>:USB:DISplaymode, 2-389
BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:DATA:THReshold, 2-360 BUS:B<x>:USB:LOWTHRESHold, 2-389
BUS:B<x>:SMBUS:PEC:VALUe, 2-361 BUS:B<x>:USB:SIGNALTYpe, 2-390
BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:BITRate, 2-361 BUS:B<x>:USB:SOUrce, 2-391
BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:DATa:SOUrce, 2-362 BUS:B<x>:USB:SOUrce:DMINus, 2-391
BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:DATa:THReshold, 2-363 BUS:B<x>:USB:SOUrce:DPLUs, 2-392
BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:DECode:TYPe, 2-363 BUS:B<x>:USB:THRESHold, 2-393
BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:STRobe:SOUrce, 2-364 BUS:DELete, 2-393
BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:STRobe:THReshold, 2-365 BUS:LIST?, 2-394
BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:SYNC, 2-365 BUSTABle:ADDNew, 2-394
BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:SYNC:COUnt, 2-366 BUSTABle:DELete, 2-395
BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:SYNC:PATTern, 2-366 BUSTABle:LIST?, 2-395
BUS:B<x>:SPACEWIRe:SYNC:VALUe, 2-367 BUSY?, 2-395
BUS:B<x>:SPI:BITOrder, 2-367
BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:POLarity, 2-368 C
BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-369
*CAL?, 2-396
BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:THReshold, 2-370
CALibrate?, 2-396
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:POLarity, 2-370
CALibrate:INTERNal, 2-397
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe, 2-371
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SOUrce, 2-371 CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt, 2-397
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:THReshold, 2-372 CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus?, 2-398
BUS:B<x>:SPI:FRAMING, 2-372 CALibrate:PWRUpstatus?, 2-399
CALLOUTS:ADDNew , 2-399
BUS:B<x>:SPI:IDLETime, 2-373
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:BOOKMark:
BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:DATa:POLarity, 2-374
SOURCE, 2-399

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-5

Index

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:BOOKMark: CH<x>:OFFSet, 2-414

XPOS, 2-400 CH<x>:POSition, 2-415
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:COLOR, 2-400 CH<x>:PRObe?, 2-415
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:DISPLAYPOSition: CH<x>:PRObe:AUTOZero, 2-415
X, 2-401 CH<x>:PRObe:COMPensate, 2-416
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:DISPLAYPOSition: CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUSS, 2-416
Y, 2-401 CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUSS:STATE?, 2-417
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:BOLD, 2-402 CH<x>:PRObe:FORCEDRange, 2-417
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:ITALIC, 2-402 CH<x>:PRObe:GAIN?, 2-418
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:SIZE, 2-403 CH<x>:PRObe:ID?, 2-418
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:TYPE, 2-403 CH<x>:PRObe:ID:SERnumber?, 2-418
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT: CH<x>:PRObe:ID:TYPe?, 2-419
UNDERLine, 2-403 CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode, 2-419
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:TEXT, 2-404 CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode:AOFFSet, 2-420
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:TYPE, 2-404 CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode:BOFFSet, 2-420
CALLOUTS:DELete, 2-405 CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode:COFFSet, 2-421
CH<x>?, 2-405 CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode:DOFFSet, 2-421
CH<x>:BANdwidth, 2-406 CH<x>:PRObe:RESistance?, 2-422
CH<x>:BANdwidth:FILTer:OPTIMIZation, 2-406 CH<x>:PRObe:SELFCal, 2-422
CH<x>:CLIPping?, 2-407 CH<x>:PRObe:SELFCal:State?, 2-423
CH<x>:COUPling, 2-407 CH<x>:PRObe:SET, 2-423
CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:COLor, 2-438 CH<x>:PRObe:STATus?, 2-424
CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD, 2-438 CH<x>:PRObe:UNIts?, 2-424
CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic, 2-439 CH<x>:PROBECal?, 2-425
CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE, 2-439 CH<x>:PROBECOntrol, 2-425
CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE, 2-440 CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten, 2-426
CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline, 2-440 CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten, 2-427
CH<x>_D<x>:LABel:NAMe, 2-441 CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits, 2-427
CH<x>_DALL:LABel:COLor, 2-434 CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits:STATE, 2-428
CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:BOLD, 2-435 CH<x>:PROBETYPE?, 2-428
CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:ITALic, 2-435 CH<x>:SCAle, 2-429
CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:SIZE, 2-436 CH<x>:SCALERATio, 2-429
CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:TYPE, 2-436 CH<x>:SV:CENTERFrequency, 2-430
CH<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:UNDERline, 2-437 CH<x>:SV:POSition, 2-430
CH<x>_DALL:LABel:NAMe, 2-437 CH<x>:SV:SPANABovebw?, 2-431
CH<x>:DESKew, 2-408 CH<x>:SV:SPANBELowdc?, 2-431
CH<x>:DITHERrange, 2-409 CH<x>:SV:STARTFrequency?, 2-432
CH<x>:INVert, 2-409 CH<x>:SV:STATE, 2-432
CH<x>:LABel:COLor, 2-410 CH<x>:SV:STOPFrequency?, 2-433
CH<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD, 2-410 CH<x>:TERmination, 2-433
CH<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic, 2-411 CH<x>:VTERm:BIAS, 2-434
CH<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE, 2-411 CLEAR, 2-441
CH<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE, 2-412 *CLS, 2-441
CH<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline, 2-412 Command Groups, 2-11
CH<x>:LABel:NAMe, 2-413 CONFIGuration:ANALOg:BANDWidth?, 2-442
CH<x>:LABel:XPOS, 2-413 CONNected:REQUested:STATus , 2-443
CH<x>:LABel:YPOS, 2-414 CONNected:STATus?, 2-443

Index-6 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

CONNected:USAGe:TRack:REQUested: DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight:AUTODim:
STATus, 2-443 ENAble, 2-472
CONNected:USAGe:TRack:STATus?, 2-444 DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight:AUTODim:
CURVe?, 2-444 TIMe, 2-472
CURVEStream?, 2-447 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:AUTOScale, 2-473
CUSTOMTABle:ADDNew, 2-449 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:
CUSTOMTABle:DELete, 2-449 ASOUrce?, 2-474
CUSTOMTABle:LIST?, 2-450 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:
BSOUrce?, 2-474
D DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:DDT?, 2-475
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:
DATa, 2-450
FUNCtion, 2-475
DATa:ENCdg, 2-451
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:
DATa:FRAMESTARt, 2-453 APOSition, 2-476
DATa:FRAMESTOP, 2-453 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:
DATa:MODe , 2-454 AUNIts?, 2-477
DATa:RESample, 2-454
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:
DATa:SOUrce, 2-455
BPOSition, 2-477
DATa:SOUrce:AVAILable?, 2-456
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:
DATa:STARt, 2-456 BUNIts?, 2-477
DATa:STOP, 2-457 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:
DATa:WIDth, 2-458 DELTa?, 2-478
DATE?, 2-459
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:MODe, 2-478
*DDT, 2-459
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:
DESE, 2-460
ONEOVERDELTATVALUE?, 2-479
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion, 2-461 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion:NTIMes, 2-461 ROLOCATION, 2-473
DIAg:LOOP:STOP, 2-462 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:
DIAg:MODe, 2-462
AXPOSition, 2-479
DIAg:RESUlt?, 2-463
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?, 2-463
AYPOSition, 2-480
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?, 2-463 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:
DIAg:SELect, 2-464 BXPOSition, 2-480
DIAg:STATE, 2-464
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:
DIGGRP<x>:D<x>:THReshold, 2-465
BYPOSition, 2-481
DISplay?, 2-465
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:STATE, 2-481
DISplay:{CH<x>|Math<x>|REF<x>}: DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:
INVERTColor, 2-466 APOSition, 2-482
DISplay:{CH<x>|Math<x>|REF<x>}: DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:
NORMALColor, 2-467
AUNIts?, 2-482
DISplay:COLors, 2-467
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:
DISplay:GLObal:B<x>:STATE, 2-468
BPOSition, 2-483
DISplay:GLObal:CH<x>:STATE, 2-468 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:
DISplay:GLObal:MATH<x>:STATE, 2-469 BUNIts?, 2-483
DISplay:GLObal:PLOT<x>:STATE, 2-470 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:
DISplay:GLObal:REF<x>:STATE, 2-470
DELTa?, 2-484
DISplay:INTENSITy?, 2-471
DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight, 2-471

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-7

Index

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform: DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:
APOSition, 2-484 BYPOSition, 2-499
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform: DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:
BPOSition, 2-485 SPLITMODE, 2-499
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:GRIDlines, 2-485 DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:STATE, 2-500
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>: DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:
STATE, 2-486 APOSition, 2-500
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE, 2-486 DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:YAXIS:SCALE, 2-487 BPOSition, 2-501
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS: DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:
FROM, 2-487 DELTa?, 2-501
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS: DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:
TO, 2-488 UNIts?, 2-502
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS: DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:
FROM, 2-488 APOSition, 2-502
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS: DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:
TO, 2-489 BPOSition, 2-503
DISplay:MEAS<x>:NAVIgate:TYPE, 2-489 DISplay:PLOTView<x>:GRIDlines, 2-503
DISplay:PERSistence, 2-490 DISplay:PLOTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE, 2-504
DISplay:PERSistence:RESET, 2-491 DISplay:PLOTView<x>:YAXIS:SCALE, 2-505
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:AUTOScale, 2-492 DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:ASOUrce?, 2-492 FROM, 2-505
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:BSOUrce?, 2-492 DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO, 2-506
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:DDT?, 2-493 DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:FUNCtion, 2-493 FROM, 2-506
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO, 2-507
APOSition, 2-494 DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:AUTOScale, 2-508
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:
AUNIts?, 2-494 ASOUrce?, 2-508
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:
BPOSition, 2-495 BSOUrce?, 2-509
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:DDT?, 2-509
BUNIts?, 2-495 DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: FUNCtion, 2-510
DELTa?, 2-496 DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:MODe, 2-496 APOSition, 2-510
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor: DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:
ONEOVERDELTATVALUE?, 2-497 AUNIts?, 2-511
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor: DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:
ROLOCATION, 2-491 BPOSition, 2-511
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:
AXPOSition, 2-497 BUNIts?, 2-512
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:
AYPOSition, 2-498 DELTa?, 2-512
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:MODe, 2-513
BXPOSition, 2-498 DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:
ONEOVERDELTATVALUE?, 2-513

Index-8 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor: DISplay:SELect:SPECView<x>:SOUrce, 2-527

ROLOCATION, 2-507 DISplay:SELect:VIEW, 2-528
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: DISplay:SELect:WAVEView<x>:SOUrce, 2-528
AXPOSition, 2-514 DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: ANOISEDensity?, 2-529
AYPOSition, 2-514 DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: ASOUrce, 2-529
BXPOSition, 2-515 DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: BNOISE?, 2-530
BYPOSition, 2-515 DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor: BSOUrce, 2-530
SPLITMODE, 2-516 DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:STATE, 2-516 APOSition, 2-531
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:
APOSition, 2-517 AUNIts?, 2-531
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:
BPOSition, 2-517 BPOSition, 2-532
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:
DELTa?, 2-518 BUNIts?, 2-532
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:
UNIts?, 2-518 READout, 2-533
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform: DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:
AHPOSition?, 2-519 SPLITMODE, 2-534
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform: DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:
APOSition, 2-519 STATE, 2-534
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform: DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:
AVPOSition?, 2-520 APOSition, 2-535
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform: DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:
BHPOSition?, 2-520 BPOSition, 2-535
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform: DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:
BPOSition, 2-521 UNIts?, 2-536
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform: DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:
BVPOSition?, 2-521 WAVEform:APOSition, 2-536
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:GRIDlines, 2-522 DISplay:SPECView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:REF:REF<x>: WAVEform:BPOSition, 2-537
STATE, 2-522 DISplay:SPECView<x>:GRAticule, 2-538
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE, 2-523 DISplay:SPECView<x>:HORZ, 2-537
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS: DISplay:SPECView<x>:INTENSITy:
FROM, 2-523 GRATicule, 2-538
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO, 2-524 DISplay:SPECView<x>:INTENSITy:
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS: WAVEform, 2-539
FROM, 2-524 DISplay:SPECView<x>:VIEWStyle, 2-540
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO, 2-525 DISplay:VARpersist, 2-540
DISplay:SELect:BUS, 2-525 DISplay:WAVEform, 2-541
DISplay:SELect:MATH, 2-526 DISplay:WAVEView:CURSor:CURSOR1:
DISplay:SELect:REFerence, 2-526 ROLOCATION, 2-541
DISplay:SELect:SOUrce, 2-526 DISplay:WAVEView:GRIDTYPE, 2-542

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-9

Index

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:STATE, 2-542 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:VERTical: SCREEN:AYPOSition, 2-555
POSition, 2-543 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>_D<x>: SCREEN:BXPOSition, 2-556
STATE, 2-546 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>_DALL: SCREEN:BYPOSition, 2-556
STATE, 2-545 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>_DALL:VERTical: SPLITMODE, 2-557
POSition, 2-546 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:STATE, 2-543 STATE, 2-557
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:VERTical: DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
POSition, 2-544 VBArs:APOSition, 2-558
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:VERTical: DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
SCAle, 2-544 VBArs:BPOSition, 2-559
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor?, 2-547 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: VBArs:DELTa?, 2-559
WAVEform:ALL:Values?, 2-562 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: VBArs:UNIts?, 2-560
WAVEform:AVPOSition?, 2-561 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: WAVEform:APOSition, 2-560
WAVEform:BVPOSition?, 2-562 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: WAVEform:BPOSition, 2-561
CURSOR<x>?, 2-547 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:FILTer, 2-563
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>: DISplay:WAVEView<x>:GRAticule, 2-563
ASOUrce, 2-548 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:INTENSITy:
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>: GRATicule, 2-564
BSOUrce, 2-549 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:INTENSITy:
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>: WAVEform, 2-565
DDT?, 2-549 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>: AUTOScale, 2-565
FUNCtion, 2-550 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>: STATE, 2-566
HBArs:APOSition, 2-551 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>: VERTical:POSition, 2-566
HBArs:AUNIts?, 2-551 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>: VERTical:SCAle, 2-567
HBArs:BPOSition, 2-552 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:PLOT:PLOT<x>:
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>: AUTOScale, 2-567
HBArs:BUNIts?, 2-552 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:PLOT:PLOT<x>:
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>: STATE, 2-568
HBArs:DELTa?, 2-553 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:PLOT:PLOT<x>:VERTical:
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>: POSition, 2-568
MODe, 2-553 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:PLOT:PLOT<x>:VERTical:
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>: SCAle, 2-569
ONEOVERDELTATVALUE?, 2-554 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>: STATE, 2-569
SCREEN:AXPOSition, 2-554

Index-10 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:VERTical: DVM:TRIGger:FREQuency:COUNTer, 2-586

POSition, 2-570
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:VERTical: E
SCAle, 2-570
*ESE, 2-587
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_FREQuency<x>:
*ESR?, 2-588
VERTical:POSition, 2-571
ETHERnet:DHCPbootp, 2-589
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_FREQuency<x>:
ETHERnet:DNS:IPADDress, 2-589
VERTical:SCAle, 2-572
ETHERnet:DOMAINname, 2-590
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_MAGnitude<x>:
ETHERnet:ENET:ADDress?, 2-590
VERTical:POSition, 2-572
ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress, 2-590
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_MAGnitude<x>:
ETHERnet:IPADDress, 2-591
VERTical:SCAle, 2-573
ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:RESET, 2-591
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_PHASe<x>:VERTical:
ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:SERVICENAMe, 2-592
POSition, 2-574
ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:STATus?, 2-592
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:RF_PHASe<x>:VERTical:
ETHERnet:NAME, 2-593
SCAle, 2-574
ETHERnet:NETWORKCONFig, 2-593
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:STYle, 2-575
ETHERnet:PING, 2-594
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:VIEWStyle, 2-575
ETHERnet:PING:STATus?, 2-594
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM?, 2-576
ETHERnet:SUBNETMask, 2-594
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>?, 2-576
EVENT?, 2-595
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:
EVMsg?, 2-596
HORizontal:POSition, 2-577
EVQty?, 2-596
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:
EYEMASK:MASK<x>:COUNt:HITS?, 2-597
HORizontal:SCALe, 2-578
EYEMASK:MASK<x>:COUNt:SEG<y>:
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:
HITS?, 2-597
HORizontal:WINSCALe, 2-578
EYEMASK:MASK<x>:CREATor?, 2-598
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:
EYEMASK:MASK<x>:ENAbled, 2-598
STATe, 2-579
EYEMASK:MASK<x>:MASKfile, 2-599
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:
EYEMASK:MASK<x>:MASKOffset:HORizontal:
VERTical:POSition, 2-579
AUTOfit?, 2-600
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:
EYEMASK:MASK<x>:TESt:SAMple:
VERTical:SCALe, 2-580
THReshold, 2-600
DISplay:WAVEView<y>:REF:REF<x>:
EYEMASK:MASK<x>:TESt:STATUS?, 2-601
FRAMe, 2-581
DISplay:WAVEView<y>:REF<x>_DALL:
FRAMe, 2-581 F
DVM, 2-582 FACtory, 2-602
DVM:AUTORange, 2-582 FILESystem?, 2-602
DVM:MEASUrement:FREQuency?, 2-583 FILESystem:COPy, 2-603
DVM:MEASUrement:HIStory:AVErage?, 2-583 FILESystem:CWD, 2-604
DVM:MEASUrement:HIStory:MAXimum?, 2-583 FILESystem:DELEte, 2-604
DVM:MEASUrement:HIStory:MINImum?, 2-584 FILESystem:DIR?, 2-605
DVM:MEASUrement:INFMAXimum?, 2-584 FILESystem:HOMEDir?, 2-606
DVM:MEASUrement:INFMINimum?, 2-585 FILESystem:LDIR?, 2-606
DVM:MEASUrement:VALue?, 2-585 FILESystem:MKDir, 2-606
DVM:MODe, 2-585 FILESystem:MOUNT:DRIVE, 2-607
DVM:SOUrce, 2-586 FILESystem:MOUNT:TEKDrive, 2-608

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-11

Index

FILESystem:READFile, 2-609 HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:

FILESystem:REName, 2-609 THRSigma, 2-627
FILESystem:RMDir, 2-610 HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:
FILESystem:TEKDrive:CODE?, 2-610 TWOSigma, 2-627
FILESystem:TEKDrive:CODE:EXPirytime?, 2-611 HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:SAVe, 2-628
FILESystem:TEKDrive:CODE:STATus?, 2-611 HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:SIZe, 2-628
FILESystem:UNMOUNT:DRIve, 2-612 HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:SOUrce, 2-629
FILESystem:UNMOUNT:TEKDrive, 2-612 HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:STATE, 2-629
FILESystem:WRITEFile, 2-612 HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:TRANsparency, 2-630
FPAnel:PRESS, 2-613 HISTogram:LIST?, 2-630
FPAnel:TURN, 2-614 HORizontal?, 2-631
HORizontal:ACQDURATION?, 2-631
H HORizontal:DELay:MODe, 2-631
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe, 2-632
HEADer, 2-615 HORizontal:DIVisions?, 2-633
HISTogram:ADDNew, 2-616 HORizontal:FASTframe?, 2-633
HISTogram:DELete, 2-616
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt, 2-633
HISTogram:DELETEALL, 2-617
HORizontal:FASTframe:MAXFRames?, 2-634
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:BOX, 2-617
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:BSTate, 2-617 MODe, 2-634
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:DATa?, 2-618 HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAme, 2-634
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:DISPlay, 2-618 HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:INCLUde, 2-635
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:FUNCtion, 2-619
HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED, 2-635
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:
HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE, 2-636
COUNt, 2-619
HORizontal:FASTframe:SUMFrame, 2-636
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement: HORizontal:FASTframe:SUMFrame:STATE, 2-637
HITS, 2-620 HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:ALL?, 2-637
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement: HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:DELTa?, 2-638
MAX, 2-621
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:
REFerence?, 2-638
MEAN, 2-621
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement: SELECTED?, 2-638
MEDian, 2-622 HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:ALL?, 2-639
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:
HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:REF?, 2-639
MIN, 2-622
HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:SELECTED?, 2-640
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:
HORizontal:HISTory:CSTAts, 2-640
MODE, 2-623 HORizontal:HISTory:OVERlay, 2-641
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement: HORizontal:HISTory:REF:ACQ, 2-641
ONESigma, 2-623 HORizontal:HISTory:REF:INClude, 2-642
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:
HORizontal:HISTory:SELected, 2-642
PHITs, 2-624
HORizontal:HISTory:STATe, 2-643
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:
HORizontal:HISTory:TIMEStamp:DELTa?, 2-643
PK2PK, 2-624 HORizontal:HISTory:TIMEStamp:REFerence?, 2-644
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement: HORizontal:HISTory:TIMEStamp:
RESUlts?, 2-625 SELECTED?, 2-644
HISTogram:HISTogram<x>:MEASurement:
HORizontal:MAIn:INTERPRatio?, 2-644
STDDev, 2-626
HORizontal:MODe, 2-645

Index-12 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

HORizontal:MODe:AUTOmatic:FASTAcq: MASK:MASK<x>:DEFinedby, 2-662

RECOrdlength:MAXimum:VALue, 2-645 MASK:MASK<x>:DISplay, 2-662
HORizontal:MODe:AUTOmatic: MASK:MASK<x>:LIST?, 2-663
FASTAcq:RECOrdlength:MAXimum: MASK:MASK<x>:SEG<x>:POINTS, 2-664
ZOOMOVERride, 2-646 MASK:MASK<x>:SEG<x>COUNT:HITS?, 2-664
HORizontal:MODe:MANual:CONFIGure, 2-646 MASK:MASK<x>:SOUrce, 2-665
HORizontal:MODe:RECOrdlength, 2-647 MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:CTHReshold, 2-665
HORizontal:MODe:SAMPLERate, 2-647 MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:STATE, 2-666
HORizontal:MODe:SCAle, 2-648 MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:STATUS?, 2-666
HORizontal:POSition, 2-648 MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:THReshold, 2-667
HORizontal:PREViewstate?, 2-649 MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:HABSolute, 2-668
HORizontal:RECOrdlength, 2-649 MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:HORizontal, 2-668
HORizontal:ROLL?, 2-649 MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:UPDatenow, 2-669
HORizontal:SAMPLERate, 2-650 MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:VABSolute, 2-669
HORizontal:SAMPLERate:ANALYZemode: MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:VERTical, 2-670
MINimum:OVERRide, 2-650 MASK:MASK<x>:TTYPe, 2-671
HORizontal:SAMPLERate:ANALYZemode: MASK:TESt:WAVEforms, 2-672
MINimum:VALue, 2-651 MATH:ADDNew, 2-672
HORizontal:SCAle, 2-651 MATH:DELete, 2-673
MATH:LIST?, 2-673
I MATH:MATH<x>:ARINC429A:
SUPPortedfields, 2-674
ID?, 2-652
MATH:MATH<x>:AUDIO:SUPPortedfields, 2-674
*IDN?, 2-652
MATH:MATH<x>:AUTOETHERnet:
SUPPortedfields, 2-675
L MATH:MATH<x>:AVG:MODE, 2-675
LICense?, 2-653 MATH:MATH<x>:AVG:WEIGht, 2-676
LICense:APPID?, 2-653 MATH:MATH<x>:CAN:SUPPortedfields, 2-676
LICense:COUNt?, 2-653 MATH:MATH<x>:CXPI:SUPPortedfields, 2-677
LICense:ERRor?, 2-654 MATH:MATH<x>:DEFine, 2-677
LICense:GMT?, 2-654 MATH:MATH<x>:ESPI:SUPPortedfields, 2-678
LICense:HID?, 2-655 MATH:MATH<x>:ETHERCAT:
LICense:INSTall, 2-655 SUPPortedfields, 2-678
LICense:ITEM?, 2-655 MATH:MATH<x>:ETHERnet:
LICense:LIST?, 2-656 SUPPortedfields, 2-679
LICense:UNINSTALL?, 2-656 MATH:MATH<x>:EUSB:SUPPortedfields, 2-679
LICense:VALidate?, 2-657 MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:CFReq, 2-680
LOCk, 2-657 MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:DELay, 2-680
*LRN?, 2-658 MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:DESIgn, 2-681
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:HCFReq, 2-681
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:INFo?, 2-682
M MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:LCFReq, 2-682
MAINWindow:BADGe:BRINgtoview, 2-659 MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:LOAD, 2-683
MAINWindow:FONTSize, 2-660 MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:LOAD:RESPonse, 2-683
MAINWindow:RRBDisplaystate, 2-660 MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:ORDer, 2-684
MASK:DELete, 2-660 MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:PRIPple, 2-684
MASK:MASK<x>:COUNT?, 2-661 MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:RESPonse, 2-685
MASK:MASK<x>:COUNT:HITS?, 2-661

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-13

Index

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:ROFactor, 2-686 MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress:

MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SATTenuation, 2-686 VALue, 2-708
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SAVe, 2-687 MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:TYPE, 2-709
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SAVe:RESPonse, 2-687 MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:UNWRap, 2-709
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SDEViation, 2-688 MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:UNWRap:
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SDURation, 2-688 DEGrees, 2-710
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SOURce, 2-689 MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:WINdow, 2-710
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:SYMBols, 2-689 MATH:MATH<x>:SPI:SUPPortedfields, 2-711
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:TWIDth, 2-690 MATH:MATH<x>:SPMI:SUPPortedfields, 2-712
MATH:MATH<x>:FILTer:TYPe, 2-690 MATH:MATH<x>:SVID:SUPPortedfields, 2-712
MATH:MATH<x>:FLEXray:SUPPortedfields, 2-691 MATH:MATH<x>:TYPe, 2-713
MATH:MATH<x>:FUNCtion, 2-692 MATH:MATH<x>:USB:SUPPortedfields, 2-713
MATH:MATH<x>:GATing, 2-694 MATH:MATH<x>:VUNIT, 2-714
MATH:MATH<x>:I2C:SUPPortedfields, 2-692 MATHArbflt<x>:FILepath, 2-714
MATH:MATH<x>:I3C:SUPPortedfields, 2-693 MEASTABle:ADDNew, 2-715
MATH:MATH<x>:INTERpolation, 2-693 MEASTABle:DELETE, 2-715
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:COLor, 2-694 MEASUrement?, 2-716
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD, 2-695 MEASUrement:ADDMEAS , 2-716
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic, 2-695 MEASUrement:ADDNew, 2-727
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE, 2-696 MEASUrement:ANNOTate, 2-727
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE, 2-696 MEASUrement:AUTOset, 2-728
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline, 2-696 MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:NAMe, 2-697 FALLHigh, 2-729
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:XPOS, 2-697 MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:YPOS, 2-698 FALLLow, 2-729
MATH:MATH<x>:LIN:SUPPortedfields, 2-699 MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MATH:MATH<x>:MDIO:SUPPortedfields, 2-699 FALLMid, 2-730
MATH:MATH<x>:MIL1553B: MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
SUPPortedfields, 2-699 HYSTeresis, 2-730
MATH:MATH<x>:ONEWIRe: MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
SUPPortedfields, 2-700 RISEHigh, 2-731
MATH:MATH<x>:PARallel:SUPPortedfields, 2-700 MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MATH:MATH<x>:PSIFIVe:SUPPortedfields, 2-701 RISELow, 2-731
MATH:MATH<x>:RS232C:SUPPortedfields, 2-701 MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MATH:MATH<x>:SDLC:SUPPortedfields, 2-702 RISEMid, 2-732
MATH:MATH<x>:SENT:SUPPortedfields, 2-702 MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MATH:MATH<x>:SIGNeddata, 2-703 TYPE, 2-732
MATH:MATH<x>:SMBUS:SUPPortedfields, 2-704 MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:BASETop, 2-733
MATH:MATH<x>:SOUrce<x>, 2-704 MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:METHod, 2-733
MATH:MATH<x>:SPACEWIRe: MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
SUPPortedfields, 2-705 FALLHigh, 2-734
MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:HORZ, 2-705 MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:MAG, 2-706 FALLLow, 2-734
MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:PHASE, 2-706 MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:SOUrce, 2-707 FALLMid, 2-735
MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress, 2-707 MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
HYSTeresis, 2-735

Index-14 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: MEASUrement:FILTers:RAMPtime, 2-754

RISEHigh, 2-736 MEASUrement:GATing, 2-754
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: MEASUrement:GATing:ACTive, 2-755
RISELow, 2-737 MEASUrement:GATing:ENDtime, 2-755
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: MEASUrement:GATing:HYSTeresis, 2-756
RISEMid, 2-737 MEASUrement:GATing:LOGICSource, 2-756
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: MEASUrement:GATing:MIDRef, 2-757
TYPE, 2-738 MEASUrement:GATing:SEARCHSource, 2-757
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:ADVanced: MEASUrement:GATing:STARTtime, 2-758
METHod, 2-738 MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:CONFIGuration, 2-758
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery: MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:EDGEQUALifier, 2-759
CLOCKFrequency, 2-739 MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:INLOWPass:
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery: FREQ, 2-759
CLOCKMultiplier, 2-739 MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:INLOWPass:
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery: SPEC, 2-760
CONSTCLOCKMODe, 2-740 MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:L2LTOL2N, 2-760
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:DAMPing, 2-740 MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:LINESelected, 2-761
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:DATAPath, 2-741 MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:DATARate, 2-741 OUTEDGEQUALifier, 2-761
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery: MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTL2LTOL2N, 2-763
EXPLICITCLOCKMODe, 2-742 MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery: OUTLINESelected, 2-763
JTFBandwidth, 2-742 MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTLOWPass:
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery: FREQ, 2-762
LOOPBandwidth, 2-743 MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTLOWPass:
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery: SPEC, 2-762
MEANAUTOCalculate, 2-743 MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTSOURCE, 2-764
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:METHod, 2-744 MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:OUTWIRing, 2-764
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:MODel, 2-745 MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:SOURCE, 2-765
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery: MEASUrement:HIGHLEVel:WIRing, 2-766
NOMINALOFFset, 2-745 MEASUrement:INTERp, 2-766
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery: MEASUrement:JITTermodel, 2-767
NOMINALOFFset:SELECTIONtype, 2-746 MEASUrement:LIST?, 2-767
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery:STAndard, 2-746 MEASUrement:LOCKRJ, 2-768
MEASUrement:CLOCKRecovery: MEASUrement:LOCKRJValue, 2-768
TDCOMPensation, 2-748 MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MEASUrement:DELete , 2-749 FALLHigh, 2-769
MEASUrement:DELETEALL , 2-749 MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MEASUrement:DIRacmodel, 2-749 FALLLow, 2-769
MEASUrement:DISPLAYUnits, 2-750 MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MEASUrement:EDGE<x>, 2-750 FALLMid, 2-770
MEASUrement:EYERENDER, 2-751 MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MEASUrement:FILTers:BLANKingtime, 2-751 HYSTeresis, 2-770
MEASUrement:FILTers:HIGHPass:FREQ, 2-752 MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MEASUrement:FILTers:HIGHPass:SPEC, 2-752 RISEHigh, 2-771
MEASUrement:FILTers:LOWPass:FREQ, 2-753 MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MEASUrement:FILTers:LOWPass:SPEC, 2-753 RISELow, 2-771

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-15

Index

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:
RISEMid, 2-772 POPUlation?, 2-789
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:
TYPE, 2-773 STDDev?, 2-790
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:
BASETop, 2-773 CURRentacq:MAXimum?, 2-790
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:
METHod, 2-774 CURRentacq:MEAN?, 2-790
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:
FALLHigh, 2-774 CURRentacq:MINimum?, 2-791
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:
FALLLow, 2-775 CURRentacq:PK2PK?, 2-791
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:
FALLMid, 2-776 CURRentacq:POPUlation?, 2-792
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:
HYSTeresis, 2-776 CURRentacq:STDDev?, 2-792
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:
RISEHigh, 2-777 ADVanced:METHod, 2-792
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:
RISELow, 2-777 CLOCKFrequency, 2-793
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:
RISEMid, 2-778 CLOCKMultiplier, 2-793
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:
TYPE, 2-778 CONSTCLOCKMODe, 2-794
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:ABANdwidth, 2-780 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:ACHANnels, 2-781 DAMPing, 2-795
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:AMEThod, 2-781 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BER, 2-782 DATAPath, 2-795
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BER: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:
TARGETBER, 2-782 DATARate, 2-796
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BIN, 2-783 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITAbsolute, 2-783 EXPLICITCLOCKMODe, 2-796
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITCfgmode, 2-784 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITEnd, 2-784 GLOBal, 2-797
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITPcnt, 2-785 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITSTart, 2-785 JTFBandwidth, 2-797
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BITType, 2-786 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BURSTEDGTYPe, 2-786 LOOPBandwidth, 2-798
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BVOLTage, 2-787 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs: MEANAUTOCalculate, 2-798
MAXimum?, 2-788 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs: METHod, 2-799
MEAN?, 2-788 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs: MODel, 2-800
MINimum?, 2-788 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs: NOMINALOFFset, 2-800
PK2PK?, 2-789

Index-16 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:
NOMINALOFFset:SELECTIONtype, 2-801 BLANKingtime, 2-818
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:GLOBal, 2-819
STAndard, 2-801 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:HIGHPass:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CLOCKRecovery: FREQ, 2-820
TDCOMPensation, 2-802 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:HIGHPass:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COMMONMode: SPEC, 2-820
FILTers:STATE, 2-802 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:LOWPass:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COMMONMode: FREQ, 2-821
SOURCEs, 2-803 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:LOWPass:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COVer, 2-804 SPEC, 2-821
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CPWIDTh, 2-804 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FILTers:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CSPACing, 2-805 RAMPtime, 2-822
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FORDer, 2-822
CUSTOMLIMITSFile, 2-805 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FPARAmeter, 2-823
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CYCLemode, 2-806 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FREQ, 2-823
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DBDown, 2-806 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMedge, 2-824
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x>, 2-807 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DISPlaystat: FROMEDGESEARCHDIRect, 2-824
ENABle, 2-807 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGE<x>, 2-814 LOGIC2SOUrce, 2-825
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEIncre, 2-808 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEQUALifier, 2-808 LOGIC3SOUrce, 2-826
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEQUALONE, 2-809 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEQUALTWO, 2-810 LOGIC4SOUrce, 2-826
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol:
FROMLevel, 2-810 LOGIC5SOUrce, 2-827
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:LEVel, 2-811 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMSymbol:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES: MEASUREAT, 2-828
LOWERFREQuency, 2-811 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FTYPe, 2-829
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:N, 2-812 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FUNDCURRent, 2-829
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing, 2-830
SLEWRATEMethod, 2-812 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:ACTive, 2-831
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:TOLevel, 2-813 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:ENDtime, 2-831
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:GLOBal, 2-832
UPPERFREQuency, 2-813 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EEQUal, 2-814 HYSTeresis, 2-832
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EINDuctance, 2-815 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EINTerpolation, 2-815 LOGICSource, 2-833
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EXTENDuis, 2-816 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:MIDRef, 2-833
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EYERender, 2-816 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FAILCount?, 2-817 SEARCHSource, 2-834
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:
FILTERRANGEFROM, 2-817 STARTtime, 2-834
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GLOBalref, 2-835
FILTERRANGETO, 2-818 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:
HARMONICSCLass, 2-836

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-17

Index

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LABel, 2-851

HARMONICSSOURce, 2-836 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LINESelected, 2-851
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HARMONICSStd, 2-837 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LOWREFVoltage, 2-852
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LTORque, 2-852
HARMONICSUNits, 2-837 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LTYPe, 2-853
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LUNITs, 2-854
CONFIGuration, 2-838 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LVOLtage, 2-854
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXCUrrent, 2-855
L2LTOL2N, 2-838 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXCycle, 2-855
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXG<x>Voltage, 2-856
LINESelected , 2-839 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXGVoltage, 2-856
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXVoltage, 2-857
OUTL2LTOL2N, 2-840 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEASRange:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel: GLOBal, 2-857
OUTLINESelected, 2-840 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEASRange:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel: MAX, 2-858
OUTWIRing, 2-841 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEASRange:MIN, 2-859
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEASRange:
USEGLOBAL, 2-841 STATE, 2-859
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHLEVel: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:EINDexz, 2-860
WIRing, 2-842 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:GRATio, 2-860
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHREFVoltage, 2-842 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:MUNits, 2-861
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HLEVel:OUTPut: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:PPAirs, 2-862
UGLobal, 2-843 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:PPRotation, 2-862
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HTORque, 2-844 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MECH:STYPe, 2-863
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HVOLtage, 2-844 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINCycle, 2-863
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:IDLETime, 2-845 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OBWMethod, 2-864
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:INPUTLEVel, 2-845 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:ODDEVen, 2-864
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:INPUTPOwer, 2-846 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OFILters:LOWPass:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary: FREQ, 2-865
DCD, 2-846 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OFILters:LOWPass:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary: SPEC, 2-865
DDJ, 2-847 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OSANgle, 2-866
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:
DJDD, 2-847 OUTEDGEQUALifier, 2-867
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OUTFILTers:LOWPass:
EYEWIDTHBER, 2-848 FREQ, 2-867
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:OUTFILTers:LOWPass:
NPJ, 2-848 SPEC, 2-868
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:
PJ, 2-849 OUTPUT<x>VOLTage, 2-868
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:
RJDD, 2-849 PASSFAILENabled, 2-869
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:
TIE, 2-850 PASSFAILHIGHlimit, 2-870
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:JITTERSummary: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILLIMit, 2-870
TJBER, 2-850

Index-18 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:
PASSFAILLOWlimit, 2-871 FALLHigh, 2-888
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:
PASSFAILMARgin, 2-872 FALLLow, 2-889
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILWHEN, 2-872 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: FALLMid, 2-889
PATTERNDETECTION, 2-873 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PATTERNLENgth, 2-874 HYSTeresis, 2-890
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PATTERNTYPe, 2-874 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PCOUNt, 2-875 RISEHigh, 2-891
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PERFREQ:EDGE, 2-875 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PFREquency, 2-876 RISELow, 2-891
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POLarity, 2-877 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POPower, 2-877 RISEMid, 2-892
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POPUlation: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:
GLOBal, 2-878 TYPE, 2-892
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POPUlation:LIMIT: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFMode, 2-893
STATE, 2-878 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFVoltage, 2-893
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POPUlation:LIMIT: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:
VALue, 2-879 REFVOLTAGE<x>Val, 2-894
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POWERFACtor, 2-879 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PREGion, 2-880 MAXimum?, 2-895
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PRESistance, 2-880 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PTHReshold, 2-881 MEAN?, 2-895
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PWIDth, 2-881 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REDGe, 2-882 MINimum?, 2-895
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:
FALLHigh, 2-882 PK2PK?, 2-896
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:
ABSolute:FALLLow, 2-883 POPUlation?, 2-896
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:
ABSolute:FALLMid, 2-884 STDDev?, 2-897
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:
ABSolute:HYSTeresis, 2-884 MAXimum?, 2-897
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:
ABSolute:RISEHigh, 2-885 MEAN?, 2-898
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:
ABSolute:RISELow, 2-885 MINimum?, 2-898
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:
ABSolute:RISEMid, 2-886 PK2PK?, 2-899
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:
ABSolute:TYPE, 2-886 POPUlation?, 2-899
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:
BASETop, 2-887 STDDev?, 2-899
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory:
METHod, 2-888 MAXimum?, 2-900

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-19

Index

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:
MEAN?, 2-900 ALLAcqs:STDDev?, 2-918
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:
MINimum?, 2-901 CURRentacq:MAXimum?, 2-919
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:
PK2PK?, 2-901 CURRentacq:MEAN?, 2-920
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:
POPUlation?, 2-902 CURRentacq:MINimum?, 2-921
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:HISTory: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:
STDDev?, 2-902 CURRentacq:PK2PK?, 2-922
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RFREquency, 2-903 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: CURRentacq:POPUlation?, 2-923
RIPPLEFREQ<x>Val, 2-903 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RRANGE, 2-904 CURRentacq:STDDev?, 2-924
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SEQuence, 2-904 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUNits, 2-924
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TCKAVG, 2-925
SIGNALFREQUEncy, 2-905 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TCONstant, 2-925
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SIGNALType, 2-906 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TIMINGMode, 2-926
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SLABs, 2-906 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TLEVel, 2-927
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SLPCt, 2-907 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TMEThod, 2-926
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SLTYpe, 2-907 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOEdge, 2-928
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:
SMOOTHINGFILTER, 2-908 TOEDGESEARCHDIRect, 2-928
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE, 2-908 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x>, 2-909 LOGIC2SOUrce, 2-929
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SRATe, 2-909 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SSC:NOMinalfreq, 2-910 LOGIC3SOUrce, 2-930
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SSC:NOMinalfreq: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol:
SELECTIONtype, 2-910 LOGIC4SOUrce, 2-930
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SSDirection, 2-911 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATUS?, 2-911 LOGIC5SOUrce, 2-931
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STLABs, 2-912 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOSYmbol:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STLPct, 2-912 MEASUREAT, 2-932
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STLTYpe, 2-913 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TRANSition, 2-933
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STSDirection, 2-914 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe, 2-933
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STYPe, 2-914 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VLEVel, 2-944
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WAITTime, 2-945
ALLAcqs:MAXimum?, 2-915 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:AFGaddress, 2-945
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:AFGSetup, 2-946
ALLAcqs:MEAN?, 2-915 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:CSTatus?, 2-947
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:GTYPe, 2-947
ALLAcqs:MINimum?, 2-916 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:HIGH, 2-948
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:LOAD, 2-948
ALLAcqs:PK2PK?, 2-917 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:LOW, 2-949
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SUBGROUP:RESUlts: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:NPULs, 2-949
ALLAcqs:POPUlation?, 2-917 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:PG<x>Val, 2-950
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:PW<x>Val, 2-951

Index-20 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WBG:TIMer, 2-951 MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WIDTh, 2-952 RISELow, 2-977
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:WINDOWLENgth, 2-952 MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:XUNIT?, 2-953 RISEMid, 2-978
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:YUNIT?, 2-953 MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
MEASUrement:MEASRange:MAX, 2-779 TYPE, 2-978
MEASUrement:MEASRange:MIN, 2-779 MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MEASUrement:MEASRange:STATE, 2-780 FALLHigh, 2-959
MEASUrement:MECH:EINDexz, 2-953 MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MEASUrement:MECH:GRATio, 2-954 FALLLow, 2-959
MEASUrement:MECH:MUNits, 2-954 MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MEASUrement:MECH:PPAirs, 2-955 FALLMid, 2-960
MEASUrement:MECH:PPRotation, 2-956 MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MEASUrement:MECH:SOUrce<x>, 2-956 HYSTeresis, 2-960
MEASUrement:MECH:STYPe, 2-957 MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MEASUrement:MINUI, 2-957 RISEHigh, 2-961
MEASUrement:POPUlation:LIMIT:STATE, 2-958 MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MEASUrement:POPUlation:LIMIT:VALue, 2-958 RISELow, 2-961
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:
FALLHigh, 2-969 RISEMid, 2-962
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE, 2-962
FALLLow, 2-970 MEASUrement:REFLevels:BASETop, 2-963
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: MEASUrement:REFLevels:JITTERMODE, 2-963
FALLMid, 2-970 MEASUrement:REFLevels:METHod, 2-964
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: MEASUrement:REFLevels:MODE, 2-964
HYSTeresis, 2-971 MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: FALLHigh, 2-965
RISEHigh, 2-971 MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: FALLLow, 2-965
RISELow, 2-972 MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: FALLMid, 2-966
RISEMid, 2-972 MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: HYSTeresis, 2-966
TYPE, 2-973 MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels: RISEHigh, 2-967
BASETop, 2-973 MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:METHod, 2-974 RISELow, 2-967
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:
FALLHigh, 2-975 RISEMid, 2-968
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE, 2-968
FALLLow, 2-975 MEASUrement:REFLevels:TYPE, 2-969
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: MEASUrement:RESUlts:HISTory:STARt, 2-979
FALLMid, 2-976 MEASUrement:RESUlts:HISTory:STOP, 2-980
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: MEASUrement:STATIstics:CYCLEMode, 2-980
HYSTeresis, 2-976 MEASUrement:WBG:PDEVice, 2-981
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
RISEHigh, 2-977

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-21

Index

N PLOT:PLOT<x>:PREGion, 2-1001
NEWpass, 2-981 PLOT:PLOT<x>:PTYPe, 2-1002
PLOT:PLOT<x>:RAILNUM, 2-1002
PLOT:PLOT<x>:SOUrce<x>, 2-1003
O PLOT:PLOT<x>:SPECtrum:BASE, 2-1003
*OPC, 2-982 PLOT:PLOT<x>:SPECtrum:DYNRange, 2-1004
*OPT?, 2-983 PLOT:PLOT<x>:TRESponse:RTYPe, 2-1004
PLOT:PLOT<x>:TYPe, 2-1005
P POWer:ADDNew, 2-1006
PASSWord, 2-983 POWer:DELete, 2-1007
PAUSe, 2-984 POWer:POWer<x>:AUTOSet, 2-1007
PEAKSTABle:ADDNew, 2-984 POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:
PEAKSTABle:DELete, 2-984 AMP<x>Val, 2-1007
PEAKSTABle:LIST?, 2-985 POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:
PEAKSTABle:TABle<x>:FRESolution, 2-985 AMPMode, 2-1008
PILOGger:FILEName, 2-986 POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:
PILOGger:STATE, 2-986 ANALYSISMethod, 2-1009
PLOT:ADDNew, 2-987 POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:
PLOT:DELete, 2-987 AUTORbw, 2-1009
PLOT:LIST?, 2-988 POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:
PLOT:PLOT<x>:BATHtub:BER, 2-988 CONNECTSTATus?, 2-1010
PLOT:PLOT<x>:BATHtub:XAXISUnits, 2-988 POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:
PLOT:PLOT<x>:BITType, 2-989 CONSTAMPlitude, 2-1011
PLOT:PLOT<x>:EINTerpolation, 2-989 POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:
PLOT:PLOT<x>:EXPORTRaw?, 2-990 FREQ<x>Val, 2-1011
PLOT:PLOT<x>:EXTENDuis, 2-991 POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:
PLOT:PLOT<x>:EYERender, 2-991 GENerator, 2-1012
PLOT:PLOT<x>:IMDA:MEAS, 2-992 POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:
PLOT:PLOT<x>:IMDAPLOTDisplay, 2-993 GENIPADDress, 2-1013
PLOT:PLOT<x>:INTerpolate, 2-992 POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:
PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:COLor, 2-994 IMPEDance, 2-1014
PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD, 2-995 POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:
PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic, 2-995 INPUTSOurce, 2-1014
PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE, 2-996 POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:MON, 2-1015
PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE, 2-996 POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:
PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline, 2-997 OUTPUTSOurce, 2-1015
PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:NAMe, 2-997 POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:PPD, 2-1016
PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:XPOS, 2-998 POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:
PLOT:PLOT<x>:LABel:YPOS, 2-998 STARTFREQuency, 2-1017
PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASK?, 2-999 POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:
PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASKOffset:HORizontal: STOPFREQuency, 2-1017
AUTOfit, 2-999 POWer:POWer<x>:CLRESPONSE:
PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASKOffset:PERCENTui: TESTCONNection, 2-1018
FROM, 2-1000 POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEAmp:
PLOT:PLOT<x>:MASKOffset:PERCENTui: INPUTSOurce, 2-1018
TO, 2-1001 POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEBase:
PLOT:PLOT<x>:NUMBins, 2-1000 INPUTSOurce, 2-1019

Index-22 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEMAX: POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:
INPUTSOurce, 2-1020 CMEThod, 2-1038
POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEMin: POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:
INPUTSOurce, 2-1020 FUNDCURRent, 2-1038
POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLEPKPK: POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:HORDer, 2-1039
INPUTSOurce, 2-1021 POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:
POWer:POWer<x>:CYCLETop: HSOURce, 2-1039
INPUTSOurce, 2-1021 POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:IPOWer, 2-1040
POWer:POWer<x>:DIDT:INPUTSOurce, 2-1022 POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:ISOURce, 2-1040
POWer:POWer<x>:DIDT: POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:
SOURCEEDGEType, 2-1023 LINEFREQUEncy, 2-1041
POWer:POWer<x>:DVDT:INPUTSOurce, 2-1023 POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:
POWer:POWer<x>:DVDT: ODDEVen, 2-1042
SOURCEEDGEType, 2-1024 POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:PFACtor, 2-1042
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:
INPUTType, 2-1024 POWERRating, 2-1043
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:
IOUT1SOUrce, 2-1025 RCURRent, 2-1043
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:
IOUT2SOUrce, 2-1025 STANDard, 2-1044
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:
IOUT3SOUrce, 2-1026 STARTFREQUEncy, 2-1045
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:ISOUrce, 2-1027 POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:UNITs, 2-1045
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:
NUMOFOutputs, 2-1028 VSOURce, 2-1046
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:
OUTPUT1Type, 2-1028 AMP<x>Val, 2-1046
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:
OUTPUT2Type, 2-1029 AMPMode, 2-1047
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:
OUTPUT3Type, 2-1030 ANALYSISMethod, 2-1047
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:
OUTPUTType, 2-1030 AUTORbw, 2-1048
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:
VOUT1SOUrce, 2-1031 CONNECTSTATus?, 2-1049
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:
VOUT2SOUrce, 2-1032 CONSTAMPlitude, 2-1049
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY: POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:
VOUT3SOUrce, 2-1032 FREQ<x>Val, 2-1050
POWer:POWer<x>:EFFICIENCY:VSOUrce, 2-1033 POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:GENerator, 2-1050
POWer:POWer<x>:FREQUENCY:EDGe, 2-1034 POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:
POWer:POWer<x>:FREQUENCY: GENIPADDress, 2-1051
INPUTSOurce, 2-1034 POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:
POWer:POWer<x>:GATing, 2-1035 IMPEDANCE, 2-1052
POWer:POWer<x>:GATing:GLOBal, 2-1036 POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:
POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:CLASs, 2-1036 INPUTSOurce, 2-1052
POWer:POWer<x>:HARMONICS:CLFile, 2-1037

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-23

Index

POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE: POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:
OUTPUTSOurce, 2-1053 SEC1SOURce, 2-1070
POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE:PPD, 2-1053 POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:
POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE: SEC1TURNs, 2-1071
STARTFREQuency, 2-1054 POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:
POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE: SEC2SOURce, 2-1071
STOPFREQuency, 2-1055 POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:
POWer:POWer<x>:IMPEDANCE: SEC2TURNs, 2-1072
TESTCONNection, 2-1055 POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:
POWer:POWer<x>:INDUCTANCE: SEC3SOURce, 2-1073
EDGESource, 2-1056 POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:
POWer:POWer<x>:INDUCTANCE:ISOUrce, 2-1057 SEC3TURNs, 2-1074
POWer:POWer<x>:INDUCTANCE: POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:
VSOURce, 2-1057 SEC4SOURce, 2-1075
POWer:POWer<x>:INPUTCAP:ISOURce, 2-1058 POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:
POWer:POWer<x>:INPUTCAP: SEC4TURNs, 2-1076
PEAKCURRent, 2-1059 POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:
POWer:POWer<x>:INPUTCAP: SEC5SOURce, 2-1076
PEAKVOLTage, 2-1059 POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:
POWer:POWer<x>:INPUTCAP:VSOURce, 2-1060 SEC5TURNs, 2-1077
POWer:POWer<x>:INRUSHcurrent: POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:
INPUTSOurce, 2-1061 SEC6SOURce, 2-1078
POWer:POWer<x>:INRUSHcurrent: POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:
PEAKCURRent, 2-1061 SEC6TURNs, 2-1079
POWer:POWer<x>:IVSINTEGRALV: POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:
ISOURce, 2-1062 SECPhase, 2-1080
POWer:POWer<x>:IVSINTEGRALV: POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:
VSOURce, 2-1063 SECVolt, 2-1080
POWer:POWer<x>:LABel, 2-1063 POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:
POWer:POWer<x>:LINERIPPLE: SECWINDings, 2-1081
INPUTSOurce, 2-1064 POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:UNITs, 2-1082
POWer:POWer<x>:LINERIPPLE: POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY:
LFREQuency, 2-1064 VSOURce, 2-1083
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGNETICLOSS: POWer:POWer<x>:NDUTYCYCLE:
ISOURce, 2-1065 EDGEType, 2-1083
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGNETICLOSS: POWer:POWer<x>:NDUTYCYCLE:
VSOURce, 2-1066 INPUTSOurce, 2-1084
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY: POWer:POWer<x>:NPULSEWIDTH:
AREAofcrosssection, 2-1066 INPUTSOurce, 2-1084
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY: POWer:POWer<x>:PDUTYCYCLE:
EDGESOURce, 2-1067 EDGEType, 2-1085
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY: POWer:POWer<x>:PDUTYCYCLE:
ISOURce, 2-1068 INPUTSOurce, 2-1085
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY: POWer:POWer<x>:PERIOD:EDGe, 2-1086
LENgth, 2-1068 POWer:POWer<x>:PERIOD:INPUTSOurce, 2-1086
POWer:POWer<x>:MAGPROPERTY: POWer:POWer<x>:POWERQUALITY:
PRIMARYTURNs, 2-1069 CCYCles, 2-1087

Index-24 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

POWer:POWer<x>:POWERQUALITY: POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
FREFerence, 2-1088 TYPE, 2-1107
POWer:POWer<x>:POWERQUALITY: POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:BASETop, 2-1108
ISOURce, 2-1088 POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:METHod, 2-1108
POWer:POWer<x>:POWERQUALITY: POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
STYPe, 2-1089 FALLHigh, 2-1109
POWer:POWer<x>:POWERQUALITY: POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
VSOURce, 2-1089 FALLLow, 2-1110
POWer:POWer<x>:PPULSEWIDTH: POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
INPUTSOurce, 2-1090 FALLMid, 2-1110
POWer:POWer<x>:PRESET, 2-1090 POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:AMP<x>Val, 2-1091 HYSTeresis, 2-1111
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:AMPMode, 2-1092 POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR: RISEHigh, 2-1111
ANALYSISMethod, 2-1092 POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:AUTORbw, 2-1093 RISELow, 2-1112
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR: POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
CONNECTSTATus?, 2-1093 RISEMid, 2-1113
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:CONSTAMPlitude, 2-1094 POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:FREQ<x>Val, 2-1095 TYPE, 2-1113
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:GENerator, 2-1095 POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:GENIPADDress, 2-1097 MAXimum?, 2-1114
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:IMPEDance, 2-1097 POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:INPUTSOurce, 2-1098 MEAN?, 2-1116
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:OUTPUTSOurce, 2-1098 POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:PPD, 2-1099 MINimum?, 2-1118
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR: POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:
STARTFREQuency, 2-1099 PK2PK?, 2-1121
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:STOPFREQuency, 2-1100 POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:
POWer:POWer<x>:PSRR:TESTCONNection, 2-1101 POPUlation?, 2-1123
POWer:POWer<x>:RDSON:DEVICEType, 2-1101 POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:
POWer:POWer<x>:RDSON:ISOURce, 2-1102 STDDev?, 2-1125
POWer:POWer<x>:RDSON:VSOURce, 2-1102 POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: F1MAG?, 2-1127
FALLHigh, 2-1103 POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: F3MAG?, 2-1128
FALLLow, 2-1104 POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: FREQUENCY?, 2-1128
FALLMid, 2-1104 POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: IRMS?, 2-1129
HYSTeresis, 2-1105 POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: MAXimum?, 2-1129
RISEHigh, 2-1106 POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: MEAN?, 2-1131
RISELow, 2-1106 POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:
POWer:POWer<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: MINimum?, 2-1133
RISEMid, 2-1107

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-25

Index

POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq: POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:
PK2PK?, 2-1135 ISOURce, 2-1154
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq: POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:
POHCL?, 2-1137 LEVELUNIts, 2-1155
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq: POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:
POHCM?, 2-1138 RDSOn, 2-1155
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq: POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:
POHCS?, 2-1138 SWLCONFIGType, 2-1156
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq: POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:
POPUlation?, 2-1139 VCESat, 2-1157
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq: POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:
RMS?, 2-1141 VGLevel, 2-1157
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq: POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:
STATUS?, 2-1141 VLEVELAbs, 2-1158
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq: POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:
STDDev?, 2-1142 VLEVELPct, 2-1158
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq: POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS:
THDF?, 2-1144 VSOURce, 2-1159
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq: POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGRIPPLE:
THDR?, 2-1145 INPUTSOurce, 2-1160
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq: POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGRIPPLE:
TRPWR?, 2-1145 LFREQuency, 2-1160
POWer:POWer<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq: POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:
VRMS?, 2-1146 FREQuency, 2-1161
POWer:POWer<x>:SEQSETup, 2-1146 POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:
POWer:POWer<x>:SEQuence, 2-1147 INPUTLEVel, 2-1161
POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:ISOURce, 2-1147 POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:
POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:POINT<x>, 2-1148 INPUTSOurce, 2-1162
POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:RECAllmask, 2-1149 POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:
POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:RECAllmask: MAXTIMe, 2-1163
FILEName, 2-1149 POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:
POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:SAVemask, 2-1149 MAXVoltage, 2-1163
POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:SAVemask: POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:
AUTOINCrement, 2-1150 NUMOUTputs, 2-1164
POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:SAVemask: POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:
FILEName, 2-1150 OUTPUT1SOURce, 2-1165
POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:SAVemask:FOLDer, 2-1151 POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:
POWer:POWer<x>:SOA:VSOURce, 2-1151 OUTPUT1VOLTage, 2-1166
POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS: POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:
DEVICEType, 2-1152 OUTPUT2SOURce, 2-1166
POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS: POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:
GATESOurce, 2-1152 OUTPUT2VOLTage, 2-1167
POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS: POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:
ILEVELAbs, 2-1153 OUTPUT3SOURce, 2-1168
POWer:POWer<x>:SWITCHINGLOSS: POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:
ILEVELPct, 2-1153 OUTPUT3VOLTage, 2-1168

Index-26 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:
OUTPUT4SOURce, 2-1169 OUTPUT5VOLTage, 2-1186
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:
OUTPUT4VOLTage, 2-1170 OUTPUT6SOURce, 2-1187
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:
OUTPUT5SOURce, 2-1171 OUTPUT6VOLTage, 2-1187
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:
OUTPUT5VOLTage, 2-1171 OUTPUT7SOURce, 2-1188
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:
OUTPUT6SOURce, 2-1172 OUTPUT7VOLTage, 2-1189
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:TYPE, 2-1189
OUTPUT6VOLTage, 2-1173 POWer:POWer<x>:TYPe, 2-1190
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: POWer:POWer<x>:WRAP:DEGrees, 2-1191
OUTPUT7SOURce, 2-1173 POWer:POWer<x>:WRAP:STATE, 2-1191
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime: *PSC, 2-1192
OUTPUT7VOLTage, 2-1174 *PUD, 2-1193
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNOFFtime:TYPE, 2-1175
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime: R
FREQuency, 2-1175
RECAll:MASK, 2-1193
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:
RECAll:SESsion, 2-1194
INPUTLEVel, 2-1176
RECAll:SETUp, 2-1195
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:
RECAll:WAVEform, 2-1195
INPUTSOurce, 2-1177
REF:ADDNew, 2-1196
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:
REF:DELete, 2-1196
MAXTIMe, 2-1177
REF:LIST?, 2-1197
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:
REF:REF<x>:DESKew, 2-1197
MAXVoltage, 2-1178
REF:REF<x>:LABel:COLor, 2-1198
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:
REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD, 2-1198
NUMOUTputs, 2-1178
REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic, 2-1199
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:
REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE, 2-1199
OUTPUT1SOURce, 2-1180
REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE, 2-1199
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:
REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline, 2-1200
OUTPUT1VOLTage, 2-1180
REF:REF<x>:LABel:NAMe, 2-1200
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:
REF:REF<x>:LABel:XPOS, 2-1201
OUTPUT2SOURce, 2-1181
REF:REF<x>:LABel:YPOS, 2-1201
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:
REF:REF<x>:SOUrce, 2-1202
OUTPUT2VOLTage, 2-1182
REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:COLor, 2-1206
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:
REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD, 2-1207
OUTPUT3SOURce, 2-1182
REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic, 2-1207
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:
REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE, 2-1208
OUTPUT3VOLTage, 2-1183
REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE, 2-1208
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:
REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline, 2-1209
OUTPUT4SOURce, 2-1184
REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:NAMe, 2-1209
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:
REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:XPOS, 2-1210
OUTPUT4VOLTage, 2-1184
REF<x>_D<x>:LABel:YPOS, 2-1210
POWer:POWer<x>:TURNONtime:
REF<x>_DALL:LABel:COLor, 2-1202
OUTPUT5SOURce, 2-1185
REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:BOLD, 2-1203

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-27

Index

REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:ITALic, 2-1203 SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat, 2-1235

REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:SIZE, 2-1204 SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce, 2-1236
REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:TYPE, 2-1204 SCOPEApp REBOOT, 2-1236
REF<x>_DALL:LABel:FONT:UNDERline, 2-1205 SEARCH:ADDNew, 2-1237
REF<x>_DALL:LABel:NAMe, 2-1205 SEARCH:DELete, 2-1237
REF<x>_DALL:LABel:XPOS, 2-1206 SEARCH:DELETEALL, 2-1237
REF<x>_DALL:LABel:YPOS, 2-1206 SEARCH:LIST?, 2-1238
REM, 2-1211 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:COPy, 2-1238
ROSc:SOUrce, 2-1211 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:NAVigate, 2-1238
ROSc:STATE?, 2-1212 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TOTAL?, 2-1239
*RST, 2-1212 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
ARINC429A:CONDition, 2-1239
S SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
ARINC429A:DATa:HIVALue, 2-1240
SAVe:EVENTtable:BUS, 2-1214 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom, 2-1214 ARINC429A:DATa:QUALifier, 2-1241
SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom:COMMents, 2-1215
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom:DATAFormat, 2-1215
ARINC429A:DATa:VALue, 2-1242
SAVe:EVENTtable:CUSTom:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
INCLUDEREFs, 2-1216 ARINC429A:ERRTYPe, 2-1242
SAVe:EVENTtable:MEASUrement, 2-1216 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SAVe:EVENTtable:PEAKS, 2-1217 ARINC429A:LABel:HIVALue, 2-1243
SAVe:EVENTtable:SEARCHTable, 2-1217
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SAVe:IMAGe, 2-1218
ARINC429A:LABel:QUALifier, 2-1244
SAVe:IMAGe:COMPosition, 2-1219
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SAVe:IMAGe:VIEWTYpe, 2-1219 ARINC429A:LABel:VALue, 2-1244
SAVe:MASK , 2-1220 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SAVe:PLOTData, 2-1220 ARINC429A:SDI:VALue, 2-1245
SAVe:REPOrt, 2-1221
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SAVe:REPOrt:COMMents, 2-1222
ARINC429A:SSM:VALue, 2-1246
SAVe:SESsion, 2-1222
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:
SAVe:SETUp, 2-1223 CONDition, 2-1246
SAVe:SETUp:INCLUDEREFs, 2-1224 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:
SAVe:WAVEform, 2-1224
DATa:HITDMVALue, 2-1247
SAVe:WAVEform:GATing, 2-1226
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:
SAVe:WAVEform:GATing:RESAMPLErate, 2-1227
DATa:HIVALue, 2-1247
SAVe:WAVEform:SOURCELIst?, 2-1228 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:
SAVEON:FILE:DEST, 2-1228 DATa:OFFSet, 2-1248
SAVEON:FILE:NAME, 2-1229 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:
SAVEON:IMAGe, 2-1229
DATa:QUALifier, 2-1248
SAVEON:IMAGe:FILEFormat, 2-1230
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:
SAVEON:TRIGger, 2-1230
DATa:TDMVALue, 2-1249
SAVEON:WAVEform, 2-1231 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:
SAVEON:WAVEform:FILEFormat, 2-1232 DATa:VALue, 2-1250
SAVEON:WAVEform:SOURce, 2-1233 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:AUDio:
SAVEONEVent:FILEDest, 2-1233
DATa:WORD, 2-1251
SAVEONEVent:FILEName, 2-1234
SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat, 2-1234

Index-28 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:
AUTOETHERnet:CONDition, 2-1251 ADS:TYPe, 2-1266
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:
AUTOETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue, 2-1252 CONDition, 2-1267
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:
AUTOETHERnet:DATa:OFFSet, 2-1253 CRCType, 2-1268
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:
AUTOETHERnet:DATa:SIZe, 2-1254 DAS:TYPe, 2-1268
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:
AUTOETHERnet:DATa:VALue, 2-1254 DATa:DIRection, 2-1269
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:
AUTOETHERnet:IPHeader:DESTinationaddr: DATa:OFFSet, 2-1269
VALue, 2-1255 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: DATa:QUALifier, 2-1270
AUTOETHERnet:IPHeader:PROTOcol: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:
VALue, 2-1256 DATa:SIZe, 2-1271
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:
AUTOETHERnet:IPHeader:SOUrceaddr: DATa:VALue, 2-1272
VALue, 2-1257 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: DATa:XLBITType, 2-1272
AUTOETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:DESTination: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:
VALue , 2-1258 ERRType, 2-1273
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FD:
AUTOETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:SOUrce: BRSBit, 2-1274
VALue, 2-1259 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FD:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: ESIBit, 2-1274
AUTOETHERnet:MAC:LENgth: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:
HIVALue, 2-1259 FRAMEtype, 2-1275
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:
AUTOETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:VALue, 2-1260 IDentifier:MODe, 2-1276
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:
AUTOETHERnet:QTAG:VALue, 2-1261 IDentifier:VALue, 2-1276
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:
AUTOETHERnet:QUALifier, 2-1262 PIDentifier:SIZe, 2-1277
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:
AUTOETHERnet:TCPHeader:ACKnum: PIDentifier:VALue, 2-1278
VALue, 2-1263 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: XLDATa:SIZe, 2-1278
AUTOETHERnet:TCPHeader:DESTinationport: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:
VALue, 2-1264 XLDATa:VALue, 2-1279
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:
AUTOETHERnet:TCPHeader:SEQnum: BLUe:VALue, 2-1279
VALue, 2-1264 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: CONDition, 2-1280
AUTOETHERnet:TCPHeader:SOUrceport: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY:
VALue, 2-1265 DATa:SIZe, 2-1281

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-29

Index

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:
DATa:VALue, 2-1281 DATa:SIZe, 2-1297
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:
ERRor:TYPe, 2-1282 DATa:VALue, 2-1298
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:
ESCAPEMODe:COMMand, 2-1283 DLC:VALue, 2-1298
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:
GREen:VALue, 2-1283 ERROR:TYPe, 2-1299
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:
MODe:TYPe, 2-1284 EXTDLC:VALue, 2-1300
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:
PACKets:LIST, 2-1284 FRAMe:TYPe, 2-1300
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:
PACKets:TYPe, 2-1288 FRAMEID:VALue, 2-1301
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:
PIXel:NUMBer, 2-1288 NETMN:SLEEPIND, 2-1302
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI:
PIXel:SEARCHOPTion, 2-1289 NETMN:WAKEUPIND, 2-1302
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:
RED:VALue, 2-1289 BLUe:VALue, 2-1303
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:
SYMBol:SIZe, 2-1290 CONDition, 2-1303
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:
SYMBol:VALue, 2-1290 DATa:SIZe, 2-1304
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:
WORD:SIZe , 2-1291 DATa:VALue, 2-1305
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:
WORD:VALue, 2-1292 ERRor:TYPe, 2-1305
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:
WORDCOUNt:VALue, 2-1292 ESCAPEMODe:COMMand, 2-1306
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:
YCBCR:CB, 2-1293 GREen:VALue, 2-1307
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:
YCBCR:CR, 2-1293 MODe:TYPe, 2-1307
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:
YCBCR:Y, 2-1294 PACKets:LIST, 2-1308
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:
YUV:U, 2-1294 PACKets:TYPe, 2-1311
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:
YUV:V, 2-1295 PIXel:NUMBer, 2-1312
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:
YUV:Y, 2-1295 PIXel:SEARCHOPTion, 2-1312
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:
CONDition, 2-1296 RED:VALue, 2-1313
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CXPI: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY:
COUNter:VALue, 2-1297 WORDCOUNt:VALue, 2-1313

Index-30 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:
YCBCR:CB, 2-1314 VIRTUALWIRe:STATus:VALue, 2-1330
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
YCBCR:CR, 2-1315 ETHERCAT:ADDRESSMODe, 2-1330
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
YCBCR:Y, 2-1315 ETHERCAT:CNTNV:VALue, 2-1331
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
YUV:U, 2-1316 ETHERCAT:COMMANDTYPe, 2-1331
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
YUV:V, 2-1316 ETHERCAT:CONDition, 2-1332
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:DPHY: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
YUV:Y, 2-1317 ETHERCAT:CYC:VALue, 2-1333
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
ADDRess:VALue, 2-1317 ETHERCAT:DATa:SIZe, 2-1334
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
COMMAND:OPCode, 2-1318 ETHERCAT:DATa:VALue, 2-1335
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
CONDition, 2-1319 ETHERCAT:DATAGRAM, 2-1335
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
CYCLETYPe, 2-1320 ETHERCAT:DATAGRAMHEADer, 2-1336
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
DATa:SIZe, 2-1322 ETHERCAT:DATAGRAMHEADer:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: LENGth, 2-1336
DATa:VALue, 2-1322 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: ETHERCAT:DESTINATIONADDRess:
ERRor:TYPe, 2-1323 VALue, 2-1337
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
LENGth:VALue, 2-1323 ETHERCAT:DEVICEADDRess, 2-1338
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
PHASe, 2-1324 ETHERCAT:ERRor:REPLy:SERVice:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: DATa, 2-1338
RESPCYCLE:TYPe, 2-1325 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: ETHERCAT:FRAMETYPe, 2-1339
SMBUS:DESTination:ADDRess, 2-1326 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: ETHERCAT:HASH:VALue, 2-1340
SMBUS:SLAVe:ADDRess, 2-1326 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI:TAG: ETHERCAT:HEADer:LENGth, 2-1340
VALue, 2-1327 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: ETHERCAT:IDENtification:VALue, 2-1341
VIRTUALWIRe:COUNt:VALue, 2-1327 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: ETHERCAT:IDX:VALue, 2-1341
VIRTUALWIRe:DATa:VALue, 2-1328 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: ETHERCAT:INDex:VALue, 2-1342
VIRTUALWIRe:INDex:VALue, 2-1328 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:ESPI: ETHERCAT:IPDESTination:ADDRess:
VIRTUALWIRe:RESPonse:VALue, 2-1329 VALue, 2-1343

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-31

Index

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
ETHERCAT:IPSOURce:ADDRess: ETHERCAT:SERVice:DATa:VALue, 2-1357
VALue, 2-1343 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: ETHERCAT:SOURCEADDRess:VALue, 2-1357
ETHERCAT:IRQ:VALue, 2-1344 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: ETHERCAT:SRC:PORT:VALue, 2-1358
ETHERCAT:LEN:VALue, 2-1345 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: ETHERCAT:TCI:VALue, 2-1359
ETHERCAT:LOGICALADDRess: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
VALue, 2-1345 ETHERCAT:WKC:VALue, 2-1359
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
ETHERCAT:MAILbox, 2-1346 ETHERnet:CONDition, 2-1360
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
ETHERCAT:MAILbox:ADDRess:VALue, 2-1346 ETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue, 2-1361
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
ETHERCAT:MAILbox:CNT:VALue, 2-1347 ETHERnet:DATa:OFFSet, 2-1362
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
ETHERCAT:MAILbox:DETail, 2-1348 ETHERnet:DATa:QUALifier, 2-1362
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
ETHERCAT:MAILbox:HEADer, 2-1348 ETHERnet:DATa:SIZe, 2-1363
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
ETHERCAT:MAILBOXTYPe, 2-1349 ETHERnet:DATa:VALue, 2-1364
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
ETHERCAT:NETWork:VARiable, 2-1350 ETHERnet:IPHeader:DESTinationaddr:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: VALue, 2-1365
ETHERCAT:NETWork:VARiable: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
HEADer, 2-1351 ETHERnet:IPHeader:PROTOcol:VALue, 2-1365
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
ETHERCAT:NETWORKVARiable:DATa: ETHERnet:IPHeader:SOUrceaddr:
SIZe, 2-1351 VALue, 2-1366
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
ETHERCAT:NETWORKVARiable:DATa: ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:DESTination:
VALue, 2-1352 VALue, 2-1367
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
ETHERCAT:OFFSet:VALue, 2-1353 ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:SOUrce:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: VALue, 2-1368
ETHERCAT:POSition:VALue, 2-1353 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: ETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:HIVALue, 2-1369
ETHERCAT:PROTOCOLTYPe, 2-1354 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: ETHERnet:MAC:LENgth:VALue, 2-1369
ETHERCAT:PUBID:VALue, 2-1354 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: ETHERnet:QTAG:VALue, 2-1370
ETHERCAT:QUALity:VALue, 2-1355 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: ETHERnet:TCPHeader:ACKnum:VALue, 2-1371
ETHERCAT:SERVice:DATa:LENGth, 2-1356 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: ETHERnet:TCPHeader:DESTinationport:
ETHERCAT:SERVice:DATa:SIZe, 2-1356 VALue, 2-1371

Index-32 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:
ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SEQnum:VALue, 2-1372 RAP:OPTion, 2-1388
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:
ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SOUrceport: SOFFRAMENUMber, 2-1388
VALue, 2-1373 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: SPECIALType, 2-1389
ADDress:HIVALue, 2-1374 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: SPLit:ET:VALue, 2-1389
ADDress:VALue, 2-1374 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: SPLit:HUB:VALue, 2-1390
CONDition, 2-1375 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: SPLit:PORT:VALue, 2-1391
DATa:HIVALue, 2-1376 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: SPLit:SC:VALue, 2-1391
DATa:OFFSet, 2-1377 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: SPLit:SE:VALue, 2-1392
DATa:QUAlifier, 2-1377 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: SYNC:QUAlifier, 2-1393
DATa:SIZe, 2-1378 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: SYNCBITS:MAX:SIZe, 2-1394
DATa:TYPe, 2-1379 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: SYNCBITS:MIN:SIZe, 2-1394
DATa:VALue, 2-1379 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: SYNCSEARch, 2-1395
DATABITS:SIZe, 2-1380 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: TOKENType, 2-1395
ENDPoint:VALue, 2-1381 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: FLEXRAY:CONDition, 2-1396
ENDSEARch, 2-1382 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: FLEXRAY:CYCLEcount:HIVALue, 2-1397
EOP:DATABITS:SIZe, 2-1382 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: FLEXRAY:CYCLEcount:QUALifier, 2-1398
EOP:QUAlifier, 2-1383 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: FLEXRAY:CYCLEcount:VALue, 2-1398
EOPBITS:MAX:SIZe, 2-1384 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: FLEXRAY:DATa:HIVALue, 2-1399
EOPBITS:MIN:SIZe, 2-1384 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: FLEXRAY:DATa:OFFSet, 2-1400
ERRType, 2-1381 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: FLEXRAY:DATa:QUALifier, 2-1400
HANDSHAKEType, 2-1385 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: FLEXRAY:DATa:SIZe, 2-1401
RAP:ADDress:VALue, 2-1386 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: FLEXRAY:DATa:VALue, 2-1402
RAP:COMMand, 2-1386 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:EUSB: FLEXRAY:EOFTYPE, 2-1402
RAP:DATa:VALue, 2-1387

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-33

Index

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:
FLEXRAY:ERRTYPE, 2-1403 CONDition, 2-1417
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:DATa:
FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:HIVALue, 2-1404 DIRection, 2-1418
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:DATa:
FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:QUALifier, 2-1404 SIZe, 2-1419
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:DATa:
FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:VALue, 2-1405 VALue, 2-1419
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:DCR:
FLEXRAY:FRAMEType, 2-1406 VALue, 2-1420
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:
FLEXRAY:HEADER:CRC, 2-1406 DCRType:VALue, 2-1421
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:
FLEXRAY:HEADER:CYCLECount, 2-1407 DWORd:VALue, 2-1421
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:
FLEXRAY:HEADER:FRAMEID, 2-1407 ERRORTYPe, 2-1422
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:
FLEXRAY:HEADER:INDBits, 2-1408 EVENTBYTe:VALue, 2-1422
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:
FLEXRAY:HEADER:PAYLENgth, 2-1409 FREQBYTe:VALue, 2-1423
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:
ADDRess:MODe, 2-1409 GSLSb:VALue, 2-1424
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:
ADDRess:VALue, 2-1410 GSMSb:VALue, 2-1424
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:ID:
CONDition, 2-1410 VALue, 2-1425
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:DATa: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:
DIRection, 2-1411 INACCBYTe:VALue, 2-1425
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:DATa: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:
SIZe, 2-1412 MAXREAD:VALue, 2-1426
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:DATa: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:
VALue, 2-1412 MAXRTURN:VALue, 2-1426
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:
ADDRess:MODe, 2-1413 MAXWRITe:VALue, 2-1427
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:
ADDRess:VALue, 2-1414 PACKets, 2-1428
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:BCR: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:
VALue, 2-1414 SADDress:VALue, 2-1428
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:SDR:
BCRType:VALue, 2-1415 BROADCASTPacket, 2-1429
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:SDR:
BPACKets, 2-1416 DIRECTPacket, 2-1430
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:
BRGTID:VALue, 2-1416 STATEBYTe:VALue, 2-1432
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C:
CCODe:VALue, 2-1417 STATic:ADDRess, 2-1432

Index-34 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:
SUPPORTBYTe:VALue, 2-1433 PHYSicaladdress:VALue, 2-1448
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I3C: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO:
TESTMODe:VALue, 2-1433 REGisteraddress:VALue, 2-1448
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
CONDition, 2-1434 MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa: HIVALue, 2-1449
HIVALue, 2-1435 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa: MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:
QUALifier, 2-1435 QUALifier, 2-1449
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SIZe, 2-1436 MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa: VALue, 2-1450
VALue, 2-1437 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN: MIL1553B:COMMAND:COUNt, 2-1451
ERRTYPE, 2-1437 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN: MIL1553B:COMMAND:PARity, 2-1451
IDentifier:VALue, 2-1438 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: MIL1553B:COMMAND:SUBADdress, 2-1452
MANChester:CONDition, 2-1438 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: MIL1553B:COMMAND:TRBit, 2-1453
MANChester:DATa:SIZe, 2-1439 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: MIL1553B:CONDition, 2-1453
MANChester:DATa:VALue, 2-1440 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: MIL1553B:DATa:PARity, 2-1454
MANChester:ERRor:TYPe, 2-1441 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: MIL1553B:DATa:VALue, 2-1455
MANChester:HEADER:VALue, 2-1441 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: MIL1553B:ERRTYPe, 2-1455
MANChester:packetOffData:VALue, 2-1442 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:HIVALue, 2-1456
MANChester:SYNC:VALue, 2-1443 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:QUALifier, 2-1457
MANChester:TRAILER:VALue, 2-1443 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO: MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:VALue, 2-1457
ADDress:VALue, 2-1444 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO: MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BCR, 2-1458
CONDition, 2-1444 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO: MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BUSY, 2-1459
DATa:VALue, 2-1445 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO: MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:DBCA, 2-1459
DEVicetype:VALue, 2-1446 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO: MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:INSTR, 2-1460
ERRType, 2-1446 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:MDIO: MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:ME, 2-1461
OPCode:VALue, 2-1447 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:SRQ, 2-1461

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-35

Index

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:SUBSF, 2-1462 BUS:ONEWIRe:OVERDRIVe:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SERIALNUMBer, 2-1479
MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:TF, 2-1463 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: ONEWIRe:READROM:FAMILYCODe, 2-1480
MIL1553B:STATus:PARity, 2-1463 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC: A:BUS:ONEWIRe:READROM:
COMMand:CODe, 2-1464 SERIALNUMBer, 2-1480
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
CONDition, 2-1466 ONEWIRe:SEARCHROM:ROMCODe, 2-1481
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PARallel:
DATa:SIZe, 2-1468 DATa:VALue, 2-1482
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:
DATa:VALue, 2-1468 BLOCKDATa:VALue, 2-1482
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:
ERRor:TYPe, 2-1469 CONDition, 2-1483
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:
PAYLOADBITS, 2-1469 DATa:ECU:SENSor:VALue, 2-1484
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:
RESPonse:CODe, 2-1470 DATa:REGion:A:VALue, 2-1484
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:
TYPe, 2-1471 DATa:REGion:B:VALue, 2-1485
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NFC:UID: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:
VALue, 2-1472 DATABITs, 2-1485
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NRZ: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:
CONDition, 2-1472 ERRORTYPe, 2-1486
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NRZ: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:
DATa:SIZe, 2-1473 FUNCTIONCODETYPe, 2-1487
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:NRZ: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:
DATa:VALue, 2-1473 REGister:ADDRess:VALue, 2-1487
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:
ONEWIRe:COMMand:VALue, 2-1474 REGISTERADDRess, 2-1488
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:
ONEWIRe:CONDition, 2-1475 SENSor:ADDRess:VALue, 2-1489
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:
ONEWIRe:DATa:SIZe, 2-1476 SENSORSTATus:TYPe, 2-1489
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PSIFIVe:
ONEWIRe:DATa:VALue, 2-1476 STATus:VALue, 2-1490
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:RS232C:
BUS:ONEWIRe:MATCHROM: CONDition, 2-1490
FAMILYCODe, 2-1477 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:RS232C:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: DATa:SIZe, 2-1491
BUS:ONEWIRe:MATCHROM: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:RS232C:
SERIALNUMBer, 2-1477 DATa:VALue, 2-1492
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B:
ONEWIRe:OVERDRIVe:FAMILYCODe, 2-1478 CONDition, 2-1492

Index-36 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:
DISParity, 2-1493 FAST:CHAN1A:VALue, 2-1510
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:
ERRor, 2-1494 FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALue, 2-1510
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:
SYMbol:CSYMVALue, 2-1495 FAST:CHAN2B:QUALifier, 2-1511
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:
SYMbol:EBITVALue, 2-1495 FAST:CHAN2B:VALue, 2-1512
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:
SYMbol:MODe, 2-1496 FAST:COUNTer:HIVALue, 2-1513
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:
SYMbol:TBITRDNeg, 2-1497 FAST:COUNTer:QUALifier, 2-1514
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:
SYMbol:TBITRDPos, 2-1497 FAST:COUNTer:VALue, 2-1515
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:
SYMbol:TBITVALue, 2-1498 FAST:INVERTNIBble:VALue, 2-1515
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:S8B10B: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:
SYMbol:TYPe, 2-1499 FAST:STATus:VALue, 2-1516
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:
ADDRess:TYPe, 2-1500 PAUSE:QUALifier, 2-1517
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:
CONDition, 2-1500 PAUSE:TICKs:HIVALue , 2-1518
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:
DATa:SIZe, 2-1501 PAUSE:TICKs:VALue, 2-1519
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:
DATa:VALue, 2-1502 SLOW:DATA:HIVALue, 2-1519
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:
ERROR:TYPe, 2-1502 SLOW:DATA:QUALifier, 2-1520
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:
FRAMe:TYPe, 2-1503 SLOW:DATA:VALue, 2-1521
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:
STADDress:VALue, 2-1504 SLOW:IDentifier:VALue, 2-1522
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:
SUPervisory:FRAMETYPe, 2-1504 ADDRess:VALue, 2-1522
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SDLC: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:
UNNumbered:FRAMETYPe, 2-1505 COMMand:VALue, 2-1523
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:
CONDition, 2-1506 CONDition, 2-1523
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:
ERRType, 2-1507 DATa:SIZe, 2-1524
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:
ERRType:CRC, 2-1507 DATa:VALue, 2-1525
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:
FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALue, 2-1508 DEVICEADDR:VALue, 2-1525
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS:
FAST:CHAN1A:QUALifier, 2-1509 ERROr:TYPe, 2-1526

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-37

Index

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:
FIELDBYTe, 2-1527 CONDition, 2-1543
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SMBUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:
UDIDDATa:VALue, 2-1527 ERRor:TYPe, 2-1544
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:
SOUrce, 2-1528 PAYLoad:TYPe, 2-1544
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:
SPACEWIRe:CONDition, 2-1528 PAYLoad:VALue, 2-1545
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID:
SPACEWIRe:CONTROLCHARTYPe, 2-1529 SLAVE:ADDRESS, 2-1546
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:
SPACEWIRe:CONTROLCODETYPe, 2-1530 ADDress:HIVALue, 2-1546
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:
SPACEWIRe:DATa:SIZe, 2-1531 ADDress:VALue, 2-1547
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:
SPACEWIRe:DATa:VALue, 2-1531 CHARacter, 2-1548
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:
SPACEWIRe:ERRORTYPe, 2-1532 COMPliance, 2-1549
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:
SPACEWIRe:TIMECode:VALue, 2-1533 CONDition, 2-1549
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:
CONDition, 2-1533 CRCTYPe, 2-1550
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:DATa: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:
SIZe, 2-1534 CUSTom:CSYMVALue, 2-1551
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:DATa: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:
VALue, 2-1534 CUSTom:RDNeg, 2-1552
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:
SOURCETYpe, 2-1535 CUSTom:RDPos, 2-1552
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:
CONDition, 2-1536 DATa:HIVALue, 2-1553
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:
DATa:SIZe, 2-1537 DATa:OFFSet, 2-1553
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:
DATa:VALue, 2-1538 DATa:QUALifier, 2-1554
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:
MASTERADDRess:VALue, 2-1538 DATa:SIZe, 2-1555
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:
NORESPonse, 2-1539 DATa:TYPe, 2-1555
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:
REGISTERADDRess:VALue, 2-1540 DATa:VALue, 2-1556
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPMI: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:
SLAVEADDRess:VALue, 2-1540 ENDPoint:VALue, 2-1557
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:
COMMand:RESPonse, 2-1541 ERR8B10B:TYPe, 2-1557
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SVID: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB:
COMMand:TYPe, 2-1542 ERRTYPE, 2-1558

Index-38 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:
HANDSHAKEType, 2-1559 LOGIC1SOUrce:SYMBol, 2-1576
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:
ORDered:SET, 2-1559 LOGIC2SOUrce:SYMBol, 2-1577
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:
PACKet:TYPEOFLMP, 2-1560 LOGIC3SOUrce:SYMBol, 2-1578
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:
PACKet:TYPEOFTP, 2-1561 LOGIC4SOUrce:SYMBol, 2-1579
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:
PACKETTYPe, 2-1562 MARgin, 2-1579
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:
SOFFRAMENUMber, 2-1563 MAXCAS, 2-1580
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:
SPECIALType, 2-1563 MINCas, 2-1581
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:
SPLIT:ET:VALue, 2-1564 POSTAMBLE:LENGth, 2-1582
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:
SPLIT:HUB:VALue, 2-1565 PREAMBLE:TYPE, 2-1582
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:
SPLIT:PORT:VALue, 2-1565 REFLevel:DATA:HIGH, 2-1583
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:
SPLIT:SC:VALue, 2-1566 REFLevel:DATA:LOW, 2-1584
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:
SPLIT:SE:VALue, 2-1567 REFLevel:DATA:MID, 2-1584
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:USB: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:
TOKENType, 2-1567 REFLevel:STROBE:HIGH, 2-1585
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:
BURSTDETectmethod, 2-1568 REFLevel:STROBE:LOW, 2-1586
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:
BURSTLatency, 2-1569 REFLevel:STROBE:MID, 2-1586
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:
BURSTLENGTH, 2-1570 REFLEVELMode, 2-1587
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:
CSActive, 2-1570 STANdard, 2-1588
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:
CSLevel, 2-1571 STROBESource, 2-1588
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD:
CSMode, 2-1572 TOLERance, 2-1589
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:
CSSource, 2-1573 A:DDRREADWRITE:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: BURSTDETectmethod, 2-1590
DATARate, 2-1574 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: DDRREADWRITE:BURSTLatency, 2-1591
DATASource, 2-1575 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRREAD: DDRREADWRITE:BURSTLENGTH, 2-1591
HYSteresis, 2-1576 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
DDRREADWRITE:CSActive, 2-1592

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-39

Index

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
DDRREADWRITE:CSLevel, 2-1593 DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: LOW, 2-1608
DDRREADWRITE:CSMode, 2-1594 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE:
DDRREADWRITE:CSSource, 2-1594 MID, 2-1608
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
DDRREADWRITE:DATARate, 2-1595 DDRREADWRITE:REFLEVELMode, 2-1609
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
DDRREADWRITE:DATASource, 2-1596 DDRREADWRITE:STANdard, 2-1610
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
DDRREADWRITE:HYSteresis, 2-1597 DDRREADWRITE:STROBESource, 2-1610
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC1SOUrce: DDRREADWRITE:TOLERance, 2-1611
SYMBol, 2-1598 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: BURSTDETectmethod, 2-1612
DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC2SOUrce: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:
SYMBol, 2-1599 BURSTLatency, 2-1613
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:
DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC3SOUrce: BURSTLENGTH, 2-1614
SYMBol, 2-1600 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: CSActive, 2-1614
DDRREADWRITE:LOGIC4SOUrce: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:
SYMBol, 2-1600 CSLevel, 2-1615
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:
DDRREADWRITE:MARgin, 2-1601 CSMode, 2-1616
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:
DDRREADWRITE:MAXCAS, 2-1602 CSSource, 2-1617
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:
DDRREADWRITE:MINCas, 2-1603 DATARate, 2-1618
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:
DDRREADWRITE:POSTAMBLE: DATASource, 2-1619
LENGth, 2-1603 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: HYSteresis, 2-1620
DDRREADWRITE:PREAMBLE:TYPE, 2-1604 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: LOGIC1SOUrce:SYMBol, 2-1620
DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:DATA: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:
HIGH, 2-1605 LOGIC2SOUrce:SYMBol, 2-1621
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:
DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:DATA: LOGIC3SOUrce:SYMBol, 2-1622
LOW, 2-1605 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: LOGIC4SOUrce:SYMBol, 2-1623
DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:DATA: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:
MID, 2-1606 MARgin, 2-1623
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE:
DDRREADWRITE:REFLevel:STROBE: MAXCAS, 2-1624
HIGH, 2-1607

Index-40 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
MINCas, 2-1625 LOGICPattern:CH<x>, 2-1639
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
POSTAMBLE:LENGth, 2-1626 LOGICPattern:CH<x>_D<x>, 2-1640
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PREAMBLE:TYPE, 2-1626 LOGICPattern:MATH<x>, 2-1641
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
REFLevel:DATA:HIGH, 2-1627 LOGICPattern:REF<x>, 2-1641
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
REFLevel:DATA:LOW, 2-1628 POLarity, 2-1642
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
REFLevel:DATA:MID, 2-1628 USEClockedge, 2-1642
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
REFLevel:STROBE:HIGH, 2-1629 WHEn, 2-1643
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:
REFLevel:STROBE:LOW, 2-1630 HIGHLimit, 2-1644
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:
REFLevel:STROBE:MID, 2-1630 LOGICQUALification, 2-1644
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:
REFLEVELMode, 2-1631 LOWLimit, 2-1645
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:
STANdard, 2-1632 POLarity, 2-1645
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:
STROBESource, 2-1632 SOUrce, 2-1646
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRWRITE: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:
TOLERance, 2-1633 THReshold, 2-1646
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:
SLOpe, 2-1634 WHEn, 2-1647
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
SOUrce, 2-1635 LOGICQUALification, 2-1648
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
THReshold, 2-1635 POLarity, 2-1648
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLOCk: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
THReshold, 2-1636 SOUrce, 2-1649
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
DELTatime, 2-1636 THReshold:HIGH, 2-1649
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
FUNCtion, 2-1637 THReshold:LOW, 2-1650
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPUT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
CLOCK:SOUrce, 2-1637 WHEn, 2-1650
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
CH<x>, 2-1638 WIDth, 2-1651
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
MATH<x>, 2-1638 CLOCk:EDGE, 2-1651
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
REF<x>, 2-1639 CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-1652

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-41

Index

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe, 2-1666

CLOCk:THReshold, 2-1653 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: CROSSIng, 2-1667
HOLDTime, 2-1653 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: LOGICQUALification, 2-1668
LEVel:CH<x>, 2-1654 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: POLarity, 2-1669
LEVel:MATH<x>, 2-1654 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: SOUrce, 2-1669
LEVel:REF<x>, 2-1655 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: THReshold:HIGH, 2-1670
LOGICPattern:CH<x>, 2-1655 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: THReshold:LOW, 2-1671
LOGICPattern:CH<x>_D<x>, 2-1656 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: WHEn, 2-1671
LOGICPattern:MATH<x>, 2-1656 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: WIDth, 2-1672
LOGICPattern:REF<x>, 2-1657 SEARCH:SELected, 2-1672
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: SEARCHTABle:ADDNew, 2-1673
SETTime, 2-1658 SEARCHTABle:DELete, 2-1673
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:STATE, 2-1658 SEARCHTABle:list?, 2-1673
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: SELect:CH<x>, 2-1674
STOPAcq, 2-1659 SET?, 2-1674
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut: SOCKETServer:ENAble, 2-1675
LOGICQUALification, 2-1659 SOCKETServer:PORT, 2-1676
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut: SOCKETServer:PROTOCol, 2-1676
POLarity, 2-1660 *SRE, 2-1677
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut: *STB?, 2-1678
SOUrce, 2-1660 SV:CH<x>:RF_AVErage:NUMAVg, 2-1678
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut: SV:CH<x>:RF_MAGnitude:FORMat, 2-1679
THReshold, 2-1661 SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:REFerence:DEGrees, 2-1680
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut: SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:REFerence:POSition, 2-1680
TIMe, 2-1661 SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:REFerence:TIMe, 2-1681
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition: SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:WRAP:DEGrees, 2-1682
DELTATime, 2-1662 SV:CH<x>:RF_PHASe:WRAP:STATE, 2-1682
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition: SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_AVErage, 2-1683
LOGICQUALification, 2-1662 SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_FREQuency, 2-1684
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition: SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_MAGnitude, 2-1684
POLarity, 2-1663 SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_MAXHold, 2-1685
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition: SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_MINHold, 2-1686
SOUrce, 2-1663 SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_NORMal, 2-1686
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition: SV:CH<x>:SELect:RF_PHASe, 2-1687
THReshold:HIGH, 2-1664 SV:CH<x>:SELect:SPECtrogram, 2-1687
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition: SV:CH<x>:SELTrace, 2-1688
THReshold:LOW, 2-1665 SV:CH<x>:SQUELCH:STATE, 2-1689
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition: SV:CH<x>:SQUELCH:THReshold, 2-1689
WHEn, 2-1665 SV:CH<x>:UNIts, 2-1690

Index-42 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

SV:LOCKCenter, 2-1691 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel:

SV:LOCKSpectrum, 2-1692 VALue, 2-1714
SV:MARKER:PEAK:EXCURsion, 2-1692 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SDI:
SV:MARKER:PEAK:MAXimum, 2-1693 VALue, 2-1714
SV:MARKER:PEAK:STATE, 2-1694 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SSM:
SV:MARKER:PEAK:THReshold, 2-1694 VALue, 2-1715
SV:MARKER:PEAKS:AMPLITUDE?, 2-1695 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:
SV:MARKER:PEAKS:FREQuency?, 2-1695 CONDition, 2-1715
SV:MARKER:REFERence, 2-1696 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:
SV:MARKER:REFERence:AMPLITUDE?, 2-1696 HITDMVALue, 2-1716
SV:MARKER:REFERence:FREQuency?, 2-1697 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:
SV:MARKER:TYPe, 2-1697 HIVALue, 2-1717
SV:RBW, 2-1698 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:
SV:RBWMode, 2-1698 OFFSet, 2-1717
SV:RF_PHASe:REFerence:MASTer, 2-1699 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:
SV:SPAN, 2-1699 QUALifier, 2-1718
SV:SPANRBWRatio, 2-1700 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:
SV:SPECtrogram:CSCale:MAX, 2-1701 TDMVALue, 2-1719
SV:SPECtrogram:CSCale:MIN, 2-1701 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:
SV:SPECtrogram:CURSor:A, 2-1702 VALue, 2-1719
SV:SPECtrogram:CURSor:B, 2-1702 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:
SV:WINDOW, 2-1703 WORD, 2-1720
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:
T CONDition, 2-1720
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:
TEKSecure, 2-1704 DIRection, 2-1721
TIMe, 2-1704 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:
TIMe:ZONe, 2-1705 OFFSet, 2-1722
TIMe:ZONe:UTCDELTa, 2-1705
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:
TOTaluptime?, 2-1706
QUALifier, 2-1723
TOUCHSCReen:CALibrate, 2-1706
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe, 2-1724
TOUCHSCReen:STATe, 2-1707 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:
*TRG, 2-1707 VALue, 2-1724
TRIGger, 2-1708
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:ERRType, 2-1725
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:
CONDition, 2-1709
BRSBit, 2-1726
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATa: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:ESIBit, 2-1726
HIVALue, 2-1709 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATa: FRAMEtype, 2-1727
QUALifier, 2-1710
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:IDentifier:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATa:
MODe, 2-1728
VALue, 2-1711
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:CAN:IDentifier:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A: VALue, 2-1728
ERRTYPe, 2-1712 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel: CONDition, 2-1729
HIVALue, 2-1712
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel:
HIVALue, 2-1730
QUALifier, 2-1713

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-43

Index

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:
OFFSet, 2-1731 SIZe, 2-1749
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:
QUALifier, 2-1731 VALue, 2-1749
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:
SIZe, 2-1732 EOFTYPE, 2-1750
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:
VALue, 2-1733 ERRTYPE, 2-1751
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:FRAMEID:
DESTinationaddr:VALue, 2-1734 HIVALue, 2-1751
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:FRAMEID:
PROTOcol:VALue, 2-1735 QUALifier, 2-1752
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:FRAMEID:
SOUrceaddr:VALue, 2-1735 VALue, 2-1753
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:
ADDRess:DESTination:VALue, 2-1736 FRAMEType, 2-1753
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:
ADDRess:SOUrce:VALue, 2-1737 CRC, 2-1754
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:
LENgth:HIVALue, 2-1738 CYCLEcount, 2-1755
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:
LENgth:VALue, 2-1739 FRAMEID, 2-1755
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:QTAG: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:
VALue, 2-1739 INDBits, 2-1756
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:
ACKnum:VALue, 2-1740 PAYLength, 2-1757
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:
DESTinationport:VALue, 2-1741 MODe, 2-1757
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:
SEQnum:VALue, 2-1742 VALue, 2-1758
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition, 2-1758
SOUrceport:VALue, 2-1743 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray: DIRection, 2-1759
CONDition, 2-1743 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe, 2-1760
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CYCLEcount: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:
HIVALue, 2-1744 VALue, 2-1760
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CYCLEcount: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:ADDRess:
QUALifier, 2-1745 MODe, 2-1761
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CYCLEcount: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:ADDRess:
VALue, 2-1746 VALue, 2-1762
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:CONDition, 2-1762
HIVALue, 2-1746 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa: DIRection, 2-1763
OFFSet, 2-1747 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:SIZe, 2-1764
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:DATa:
QUALifier, 2-1748 VALue, 2-1764

Index-44 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:
ERRORTYPe, 2-1765 BCR, 2-1782
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:SDR: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:
BROADCASTPacket, 2-1765 BUSY, 2-1783
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:SDR: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:
DIRECTPacket, 2-1767 DBCA, 2-1783
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:I3C:TBIT: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:
DIREction, 2-1768 INSTR, 2-1784
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:CONDition, 2-1769 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa: ME, 2-1785
HIVALue, 2-1769 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa: SRQ, 2-1785
QUALifier, 2-1770 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:SIZe, 2-1771 SUBSF, 2-1786
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:
VALue, 2-1771 TF, 2-1787
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:ERRTYPE, 2-1772 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDentifier: PARity, 2-1787
VALue, 2-1772 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: LESSLimit, 2-1788
COMMAND:ADDRess:HIVALue, 2-1773 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: MORELimit, 2-1788
COMMAND:ADDRess:QUALifier, 2-1774 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: QUALifier, 2-1789
COMMAND:ADDRess:VALue, 2-1774 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:PARallel:DATa:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: VALue, 2-1790
COMMAND:COUNt, 2-1775 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: CONDition, 2-1790
COMMAND:PARity, 2-1776 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATa:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: SIZe, 2-1791
COMMAND:SUBADdress, 2-1776 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATa:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: VALue, 2-1792
COMMAND:TRBit, 2-1777 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: CONDition, 2-1792
CONDition, 2-1777 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:ERRType, 2-1793
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:DATa: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:ERRType:
PARity, 2-1778 CRC, 2-1793
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:DATa: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:
VALue, 2-1779 HIVALue, 2-1794
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:
ERRTYPe, 2-1779 QUALifier, 2-1795
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:
ADDRess:HIVALue, 2-1780 VALue, 2-1796
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:
ADDRess:QUALifier, 2-1781 HIVALue, 2-1797
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:
ADDRess:VALue, 2-1781 QUALifier, 2-1797

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-45

Index

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:ERRor:
VALue, 2-1798 TYPe, 2-1817
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:PARity:
HIVALue, 2-1799 TYPe, 2-1817
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:PAYLoad:
QUALifier, 2-1800 TYPe, 2-1818
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:PAYLoad:
VALue, 2-1801 VALue, 2-1818
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:SLAVe:
INVERTNIBble:VALue, 2-1802 ADDRess, 2-1819
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:STATus: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:ADDRess:
VALue, 2-1802 HIVALue, 2-1820
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:PAUSE: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:ADDRess:
QUALifier, 2-1803 VALue, 2-1820
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition, 2-1821
HIVALue, 2-1804 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA: HIVALue, 2-1822
QUALifier, 2-1805 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA: OFFSet, 2-1823
VALue, 2-1806 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:IDentifier: QUALifier, 2-1823
VALue, 2-1806 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:SIZe, 2-1824
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition, 2-1807 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe, 2-1808 TYPe, 2-1825
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:
VALue, 2-1808 VALue, 2-1825
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:ENDPoint:
CONDition, 2-1809 VALue, 2-1826
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:DATa: TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:ERRType, 2-1827
SIZe, 2-1810 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:DATa: HANDSHAKEType, 2-1827
VALue, 2-1811 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI: SOFFRAMENUMber, 2-1828
MASTERADDRess:VALue, 2-1812 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI: SPECIALType, 2-1829
NORESPonse, 2-1812 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:ET:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI: VALue, 2-1830
REGISTERADDRess:VALue, 2-1813 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:HUB:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SPMI:SLAVEADDRess: VALue, 2-1830
VALue, 2-1813 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:PORT:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:COMMand: VALue, 2-1831
RESPonse, 2-1814 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:SC:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID:COMMand: VALue, 2-1832
TYPe, 2-1815 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:SE:
TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:SVID: VALue, 2-1832
CONDition, 2-1816 TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:B<x>:USB:
TOKENType, 2-1834

Index-46 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

TRIGger:{A|B}:BUS:SOUrce, 2-1834 TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:FIELD, 2-1858

TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:COUPling, 2-1835 TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:LINE, 2-1859
TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:SLOpe, 2-1836 TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:POLarity, 2-1859
TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:SOUrce, 2-1836 TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:SOUrce, 2-1860
TRIGger:{A|B}:LEVel:CH<x>, 2-1837 TRIGger:{A|B}:VIDeo:STANdard, 2-1860
TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:DELTatime, 2-1837 TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:CROSSIng, 2-1861
TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:FUNCtion, 2-1838 TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:
TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk: LOGICQUALification, 2-1862
SOUrce, 2-1838 TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:SOUrce, 2-1862
TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:POLarity, 2-1839 TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WHEn, 2-1863
TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:USECLockedge, 2-1840 TRIGger:{A|B}:WINdow:WIDth, 2-1863
TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:WHEn, 2-1840 TRIGger:{A|B|B:RESET}, 2-1708
TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGICPattern: TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY, 2-1864
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>}, 2-1841 TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe, 2-1864
TRIGger:{A|B}:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>, 2-1841 TRIGger:A:LOGICQUALification, 2-1865
TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit, 2-1842 TRIGger:A:MODe, 2-1866
TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth: TRIGger:AUXLevel, 2-1866
LOGICQUALification, 2-1843 TRIGger:B:BY, 2-1867
TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit, 2-1843 TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt, 2-1867
TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:POLarity, 2-1844 TRIGger:B:RESET, 2-1868
TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:SOUrce, 2-1844 TRIGger:B:RESET:EDGE:COUPling, 2-1868
TRIGger:{A|B}:PULSEWidth:WHEn, 2-1845 TRIGger:B:RESET:EDGE:LEVel, 2-1869
TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT: TRIGger:B:RESET:EDGE:SLOpe, 2-1869
LOGICQUALification, 2-1846 TRIGger:B:RESET:EDGE:SOUrce, 2-1870
TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:POLarity, 2-1846 TRIGger:B:RESET:TIMEOut:TIMe, 2-1870
TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:SOUrce, 2-1847 TRIGger:B:RESET:TYPe, 2-1871
TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:WHEn, 2-1847 TRIGger:B:STATE, 2-1871
TRIGger:{A|B}:RUNT:WIDth, 2-1848 TRIGger:B:TIMe, 2-1872
TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE, 2-1849 TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:STATe, 2-1872
TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-1849 TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:VALue, 2-1873
TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHold:HOLDTime, 2-1850 TRIGger:STATE?, 2-1874
TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHold:SETTime, 2-1850 TRIGger:STATUs?, 2-1874
TRIGger:{A|B}:SETHOLDLogicval: *TST?, 2-1875
{CH<x>|CH<x>_D<x>}, 2-1851 TSTamptable:ADDNew , 2-1875
TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut: TSTamptable:DELETE , 2-1875
LOGICQUALification, 2-1852 TSTamptable:LIST?, 2-1876
TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:POLarity, 2-1852
TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:SOUrce, 2-1853 U
TRIGger:{A|B}:TIMEOut:TIMe, 2-1853
UNDO, 2-1876
TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition:DELTatime, 2-1854
UNLock, 2-1876
TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition:
USBDevice:CONFigure, 2-1877
LOGICQUALification, 2-1854
TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition:POLarity, 2-1855
TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition:SOUrce, 2-1855 V
TRIGger:{A|B}:TRANsition:WHEn, 2-1856 VERBose, 2-1878
TRIGger:{A|B}:TYPe, 2-1857 VERTical:DESKew:FROM:
TRIGger:{A|B}:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>, 2-1858 CUSTOMPROPAgation, 2-1879

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-47

Index

VERTical:DESKew:FROM:SOUrce, 2-1879 WAVFrm?, 2-1891

VERTical:DESKew:STATIC, 2-1880 WFMOutpre?, 2-1891
VERTical:DESKew:TO: WFMOutpre:ASC_Fmt?, 2-1892
CUSTOMPROPAgation, 2-1880 WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr, 2-1893
VERTical:DESKew:TO:SOUrce, 2-1880 WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt, 2-1893
VISual:AREA<x>:ASPEctratio, 2-1881 WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr, 2-1894
VISual:AREA<x>:FLIP:HORizontal, 2-1881 WFMOutpre:BYT_Or, 2-1894
VISual:AREA<x>:FLIP:VERTical, 2-1882 WFMOutpre:CENTERFREQuency?, 2-1895
VISual:AREA<x>:HEIGht, 2-1882 WFMOutpre:DOMain?, 2-1895
VISual:AREA<x>:HITType, 2-1883 WFMOutpre:ENCdg, 2-1896
VISual:AREA<x>:RESET, 2-1883 WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?, 2-1897
VISual:AREA<x>:ROTAtion, 2-1884 WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt?, 2-1897
VISual:AREA<x>:SHAPE, 2-1884 WFMOutpre:PT_Off?, 2-1898
VISual:AREA<x>:SOUrce, 2-1885 WFMOutpre:PT_ORder?, 2-1898
VISual:AREA<x>:VERTICES, 2-1885 WFMOutpre:RESample, 2-1899
VISual:AREA<x>:WIDTH, 2-1886 WFMOutpre:SPAN?, 2-1900
VISual:AREA<x>:XPOSition, 2-1886 WFMOutpre:WFId?, 2-1900
VISual:AREA<x>:YPOSition, 2-1887 WFMOutpre:WFMTYPe?, 2-1901
VISual:DELETEALL, 2-1887 WFMOutpre:XINcr?, 2-1902
VISual:ENAble, 2-1888 WFMOutpre:XUNit?, 2-1903
VISual:EQUation, 2-1888 WFMOutpre:XZEro?, 2-1903
VISual:SHOWAReas, 2-1889 WFMOutpre:YMUlt?, 2-1904
VISual:SHOWCRiteria, 2-1889 WFMOutpre:YOFf?, 2-1904
VISual:SHOWEQuation, 2-1890 WFMOutpre:YUNit?, 2-1905
WFMOutpre:YZEro?, 2-1905
W
*WAI, 2-1890

Index-48 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

TXI2.Open Modbus Mbus XWP 6.1
No ratings yet
TXI2.Open Modbus Mbus XWP 6.1
67 pages
Security+SY0 601 410Q
100% (1)
Security+SY0 601 410Q
420 pages
Audio, Video, and Media in the Ministry
From Everand
Audio, Video, and Media in the Ministry
Clarence Floyd Richmond
No ratings yet
Programming Guide For FT245RL
No ratings yet
Programming Guide For FT245RL
100 pages
Modicon M221: Logic Controller Programming Guide
No ratings yet
Modicon M221: Logic Controller Programming Guide
292 pages
Integration Models - Templates For Business Transformation
100% (2)
Integration Models - Templates For Business Transformation
361 pages
9720107-006 Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor v2.4.0 Users Guide
100% (1)
9720107-006 Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor v2.4.0 Users Guide
210 pages
4 5 6 Series MSO Programmer 077130524
No ratings yet
4 5 6 Series MSO Programmer 077130524
2,091 pages
Gray Hat Hacking the Ethical Hacker's
From Everand
Gray Hat Hacking the Ethical Hacker's
Çağatay Şanlı
5/5 (1)
Software Patterns Made Easy
From Everand
Software Patterns Made Easy
Justice Nanhou
No ratings yet
ChatGPT for Business: Strategies for Success
From Everand
ChatGPT for Business: Strategies for Success
Matthew C. Smith
No ratings yet
Securing ChatGPT: Best Practices for Protecting Sensitive Data in AI Language Models
From Everand
Securing ChatGPT: Best Practices for Protecting Sensitive Data in AI Language Models
Matthew C. Smith
No ratings yet
TBS2000 Programmer 077114902
No ratings yet
TBS2000 Programmer 077114902
342 pages
Mvi69E-Mbtcp: User Manual
No ratings yet
Mvi69E-Mbtcp: User Manual
150 pages
Tek TVS600Series UM 070991600
No ratings yet
Tek TVS600Series UM 070991600
398 pages
MSO3000 and DPO3000 Programmer Manual
No ratings yet
MSO3000 and DPO3000 Programmer Manual
686 pages
K01 000 12
No ratings yet
K01 000 12
174 pages
4 5 6 Series MSO Help 077130322
No ratings yet
4 5 6 Series MSO Help 077130322
746 pages
MSO3000 and DPO3000 Series-Programmer Manual
No ratings yet
MSO3000 and DPO3000 Series-Programmer Manual
518 pages
RSA6100A RSA5100A Signal Analyzers Programmer Manual
No ratings yet
RSA6100A RSA5100A Signal Analyzers Programmer Manual
1,509 pages
DSA70000 Programmer Manual 0770010
No ratings yet
DSA70000 Programmer Manual 0770010
733 pages
Mvi46 Mnetc User Manual
No ratings yet
Mvi46 Mnetc User Manual
84 pages
077024801web PDF
No ratings yet
077024801web PDF
623 pages
Tektronix TDS210 Programmer Manual
No ratings yet
Tektronix TDS210 Programmer Manual
256 pages
Mvi56e Mnet Mnetxt Um
No ratings yet
Mvi56e Mnet Mnetxt Um
152 pages
TekScope Help EN US 077 1699 05 - 077169905
No ratings yet
TekScope Help EN US 077 1699 05 - 077169905
536 pages
Web Video Business
From Everand
Web Video Business
MUHAMMAD NUR WAHID ANUAR
No ratings yet
D2XX Programmer's Guide (FT 000071) 3
No ratings yet
D2XX Programmer's Guide (FT 000071) 3
112 pages
Manual PanelSPS E
No ratings yet
Manual PanelSPS E
218 pages
Mvi56e MCMMCMXT Setup Guide
No ratings yet
Mvi56e MCMMCMXT Setup Guide
78 pages
Manual KompaktSPS E
No ratings yet
Manual KompaktSPS E
138 pages
Content Creation Revolution with chatGPT
From Everand
Content Creation Revolution with chatGPT
Maria Cowen
No ratings yet
10K Blueprint
From Everand
10K Blueprint
Cian O Farrell
5/5 (2)
Mvi56e Mnetcr Um
No ratings yet
Mvi56e Mnetcr Um
143 pages
Advanced Multiplayer Game Development with Ureal Engine 5: A Comprehensive Guide to C++ Scripting
From Everand
Advanced Multiplayer Game Development with Ureal Engine 5: A Comprehensive Guide to C++ Scripting
Vladimir Kiselev
No ratings yet
Cybersecurity for Executives: A Guide to Protecting Your Business
From Everand
Cybersecurity for Executives: A Guide to Protecting Your Business
Matthew C. Smith
No ratings yet
D2XX Programmers Guide
No ratings yet
D2XX Programmers Guide
109 pages
The Linux Terminal for Advanced Users - The Command Line Made Easy: First Edition
From Everand
The Linux Terminal for Advanced Users - The Command Line Made Easy: First Edition
Michael Basler
No ratings yet
Mvi56 Mnetc User Manual
No ratings yet
Mvi56 Mnetc User Manual
153 pages
Mvi56 Mnet User Manual PDF
No ratings yet
Mvi56 Mnet User Manual PDF
143 pages
Can Software - TMP
No ratings yet
Can Software - TMP
83 pages
TwinLine CANopen Man V101
No ratings yet
TwinLine CANopen Man V101
274 pages
Commissioning 8200 Vector Frequency Inverter PROFIBUS EN
No ratings yet
Commissioning 8200 Vector Frequency Inverter PROFIBUS EN
69 pages
D2XX Programmer's Guide (FT 000071)
No ratings yet
D2XX Programmer's Guide (FT 000071)
103 pages
InCoSol S7A Cifx Profibus DP Connection V2
No ratings yet
InCoSol S7A Cifx Profibus DP Connection V2
28 pages
Serial Communication Command Reference: Smart Sensor
No ratings yet
Serial Communication Command Reference: Smart Sensor
43 pages
TEK 3000 Series Programming Manual
No ratings yet
TEK 3000 Series Programming Manual
418 pages
ISYS Serial Interface Protocol Rev11
No ratings yet
ISYS Serial Interface Protocol Rev11
72 pages
PX 777 Programming Software Instructions
No ratings yet
PX 777 Programming Software Instructions
7 pages
DNX-1553-553-Interface Board
No ratings yet
DNX-1553-553-Interface Board
45 pages
Mvi56e MCMMCMXT User Manual
No ratings yet
Mvi56e MCMMCMXT User Manual
215 pages
1794-FlexLogix Controller System User Manual
No ratings yet
1794-FlexLogix Controller System User Manual
130 pages
BlockChain for Beginners
From Everand
BlockChain for Beginners
Matthew Smith
No ratings yet
2SeriesMSO PI Manual 077177601
No ratings yet
2SeriesMSO PI Manual 077177601
791 pages
DMM4050
No ratings yet
DMM4050
131 pages
Blog Smarter, Not Harder: SEO, Blogging, and AI Strategies to Skyrocket Your Traffic
From Everand
Blog Smarter, Not Harder: SEO, Blogging, and AI Strategies to Skyrocket Your Traffic
Jay Nans
No ratings yet
Shneider Manuela M221 Persona
No ratings yet
Shneider Manuela M221 Persona
296 pages
MCB Properties Manual
No ratings yet
MCB Properties Manual
232 pages
Ra Um003 - en P PDF
No ratings yet
Ra Um003 - en P PDF
209 pages
ATV610 Programming Manual EN EAV64387 05
No ratings yet
ATV610 Programming Manual EN EAV64387 05
348 pages
KRC2 LPDN Scanner - en
No ratings yet
KRC2 LPDN Scanner - en
28 pages
A04643 - Operating Manual
No ratings yet
A04643 - Operating Manual
530 pages
Operation Manuel ClipX BM40
No ratings yet
Operation Manuel ClipX BM40
498 pages
5 PWR Datasheet EN US 61W 61271 12
No ratings yet
5 PWR Datasheet EN US 61W 61271 12
29 pages
IR Testing SOP
No ratings yet
IR Testing SOP
2 pages
Hindustan 26.06.2024
No ratings yet
Hindustan 26.06.2024
1 page
4 Sanap Tushar BEE Testing Spartan Electrical 4 Mumbai MH Juy 24
No ratings yet
4 Sanap Tushar BEE Testing Spartan Electrical 4 Mumbai MH Juy 24
3 pages
Bharat 08.06.2024
No ratings yet
Bharat 08.06.2024
1 page
Bharat - 2 08.06.2024
No ratings yet
Bharat - 2 08.06.2024
1 page
Routing and Switching Certification DS
No ratings yet
Routing and Switching Certification DS
3 pages
IT in Retail - Shoppers Stop
No ratings yet
IT in Retail - Shoppers Stop
21 pages
The Influence of BBC News Channel in Improving Students' Speaking Skills
No ratings yet
The Influence of BBC News Channel in Improving Students' Speaking Skills
36 pages
CCNA Network Traffic TCP and UDP
No ratings yet
CCNA Network Traffic TCP and UDP
4 pages
Network Time Protocol Best Practices White Paper
No ratings yet
Network Time Protocol Best Practices White Paper
26 pages
Delta Ia-Mds CH2000 C en 20221019
No ratings yet
Delta Ia-Mds CH2000 C en 20221019
48 pages
Chapter 2 Quiz - CET501f13 Applied Networking I
100% (1)
Chapter 2 Quiz - CET501f13 Applied Networking I
7 pages
Get CC Certified in Cybersecurity All-in-One Exam Guide 1st Edition - Ebook PDF PDF Ebook With Full Chapters Now
100% (8)
Get CC Certified in Cybersecurity All-in-One Exam Guide 1st Edition - Ebook PDF PDF Ebook With Full Chapters Now
21 pages
cn2 Unit 11
No ratings yet
cn2 Unit 11
4 pages
MQ Controller
No ratings yet
MQ Controller
5 pages
Photo Enc Report
No ratings yet
Photo Enc Report
38 pages
UPSC APFC EPFC Answer Key 2016 PDF Free PDF
No ratings yet
UPSC APFC EPFC Answer Key 2016 PDF Free PDF
36 pages
SQL Server 2016: Always On
No ratings yet
SQL Server 2016: Always On
44 pages
Gigabit Ethernet Passive Optical Networks
No ratings yet
Gigabit Ethernet Passive Optical Networks
12 pages
HPE - c00757471 - HP ProLiant ML350 G5 Storage Server Installation Guide (5697-5855, September 2006)
No ratings yet
HPE - c00757471 - HP ProLiant ML350 G5 Storage Server Installation Guide (5697-5855, September 2006)
46 pages
HMS Anybus Gateway EtherNetIP To EtherCAT
No ratings yet
HMS Anybus Gateway EtherNetIP To EtherCAT
8 pages
Complete Guide To Prefs
No ratings yet
Complete Guide To Prefs
7 pages
Marvel - Encyclopedia II - Hardware
No ratings yet
Marvel - Encyclopedia II - Hardware
36 pages
Communication Skills - Dr. Sanjay Kehar
No ratings yet
Communication Skills - Dr. Sanjay Kehar
134 pages
CCIE Service Provider v5 Learning Matrix
No ratings yet
CCIE Service Provider v5 Learning Matrix
37 pages
Textbook: Principles of Information Systems, Sixth Edition
No ratings yet
Textbook: Principles of Information Systems, Sixth Edition
77 pages
Best Practices of FusionStorage 8.0.1 Block Storage With VBS Role Separated Deployment in VMware VSphere Application 02
No ratings yet
Best Practices of FusionStorage 8.0.1 Block Storage With VBS Role Separated Deployment in VMware VSphere Application 02
106 pages
ENetwork Chapter 7 - CCNA Exploration Network Fundamentals (Version 4.0)
No ratings yet
ENetwork Chapter 7 - CCNA Exploration Network Fundamentals (Version 4.0)
6 pages
IngramMicro 10K 20130227
No ratings yet
IngramMicro 10K 20130227
108 pages
Palo Alto Networks Cybersecurity Academy: Perimeter-Based Security Models
No ratings yet
Palo Alto Networks Cybersecurity Academy: Perimeter-Based Security Models
7 pages
Learn by Domain - Advanced Level
No ratings yet
Learn by Domain - Advanced Level
1 page
1.ugs Microwave PDF
No ratings yet
1.ugs Microwave PDF
5 pages

4 5 6 Series MSO Programmer - 077130522

Uploaded by

4 5 6 Series MSO Programmer - 077130522

Uploaded by

xx

4 Series MSO (MSO44, MSO46, MSO44B, MSO46B)

Supports FW version 2.8.x and above

For product information, sales, service, and technical support:

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual i

Mask command group..................................................................................... 2-52

ii 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual iii

iv 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual v

vi 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Setting Up Remote Communications Hardware

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 1-1

To change the Ethernet settings on your instrument, do the following:

1-2 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Table 1-1: USB Device Parameters

Setting Up Remote Communications Software

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 1-3

To set up e*Scope communications between your instrument and a web browser

1-4 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

1. Connect the instrument to your computer network with an appropriate

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 1-5

Socket Server Terminal Protocol Mode Commands. Following are Tektronix

1-6 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Documentation Documentation for your instrument is available for download at www.tek.com.

Dynamic programmatic interface

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 1-7

Example 2 *RST followed by :MEASUrement:MEAS3:TYPE? creates a measurement

Creating, deleting, and listing dynamic instances

Legacy oscilloscope command 4/5/6 Series MSO command alias

1-8 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 1-9

1-10 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 1-11

1-12 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 1-13

1-14 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Table 2-1: Symbols for Backus-Naur Form

Command and Query Structure

Messages A command message is a command or query name followed by any information

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1

Table 2-2: Command Message Elements

A command header consists of one or more mnemonics arranged in a hierarchical

2-2 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Table 2-3: Comparison of Header Off and Header On Responses

Clearing the instrument output queue

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-3

The longer version works equally well:

3. Never precede a star (*) command with a colon:

2-4 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

If the header is off:

DISPlay:GRAticule FULL;:STYle DOTSONLY OFF (extra colon before

DISPlay:GRAticule FULL;:*TRG (colon before a star (*) command)

ACQUIRE:FASTACQ:PALETTE TEMPerature;FASTAcq:STATE ON (levels

Terminating This documentation uses <EOM> (End of Message) to represent a message

Table 2-4: End of Message Terminator

The end-of-message terminator must be the END message (EOI asserted

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-5

Table 2-5: Bus Mnemonics

Table 2-6: Channel Mnemonics

Table 2-7: Cursor Mnemonics

Table 2-8: Math Specifier Mnemonics

Table 2-9: Measurement Specifier Mnemonics

2-6 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Table 2-10: Reference Waveform Mnemonics

Table 2-11: Waveview Mnemonics

Table 2-12: Search Mnemonics

Table 2-13: Zoom Mnemonics

4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-7

Table 2-14: Numeric Arguments

Most numeric arguments will be automatically forced to a valid setting, by either

Table 2-15: Quoted String Argument

2-8 4/5/6 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Here are some invalid strings:

"test<EOI>" (termination character is embedded in the string)

Table 2-16: Block Argument

DISPlay:GRAticule FULL;:TRG (colon before a star () command)